Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
DDW-2024-007262
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR THE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT For Information Regarding this Project Contact: Wyatt Andersen, P.E. 154 E. 147075 S. Draper, Utah 84020 801-495-2224 April 2024 Timber Lakes Water Special Service District Technical Specifications THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK PREPARED BY:PREPARED FOR: CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR THE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT Technical Specifications April 2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PROJECT TITLE PAGE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 01 01-1 Water System Capital Project CONSULTANT PROJECT NO.: 757-23-02 April 2024 OWNER Timber Lakes Water Special Service District 450 West 910 South Suite 100 Heber City, Utah 84032 ENGINEER 154 East 14075 South Draper, Utah 84020 BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PROJECT TITLE PAGE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 01 01-2 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT TABLE OF CONTENTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 01 10-1 SECTION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS VOLUME 1 OF 3 PART I – INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION Section 00 01 01 Project Title Page 00 01 07 Seals Page 00 01 10 Table of Contents PART II - BIDDING DOCUMENTS 00 11 13 Advertisement to Bids 00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders 00 41 00 Bid Form 00 43 13 Bid Bond (Penal Sum) 00 45 13 Bidder’s Qualifications 00 45 30 E-Verify Agreement and Affidavit 00 45 38 Certification Regarding Debarment 00 51 00 Notice of Award 00 52 13 Agreement 00 55 00 Notice to Proceed 00 61 14 Performance Bond 00 61 15 Payment Bond 00 62 76 Contractor’s Application for Payment 00 63 36 Field Order 00 63 49 Work Change Directive 00 63 63 Change Order 00 65 16 Certificate of Substantial Completion 00 65 18 Notice of Acceptability of Work PART III - CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 00 70 00 General Conditions 00 73 00 Supplemental General Conditions 00 91 13 01 Addenda BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT TABLE OF CONTENTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 01 10-2 TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) PART IV - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Section DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 11 00 Summary of Work 01 14 40 Construction and Schedule Constraints 01 20 00 Measurement and Payment 01 25 10 Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions 01 26 13 Requests for Interpretation (RFI) 01 29 73 Schedule of Values 01 31 30 Safety 01 32 16 Construction Progress Schedule 01 33 20 Submittal Procedures 01 35 53 Security 01 41 26 Permits 01 42 13 Abbreviations of Institutions 01 42 19 Reference Standards 01 45 00 Quality Control 01 46 00 Project Partnering 01 50 10 Site Access and Storage 01 52 13 Field Office, Equipment, and Services 01 55 26 Traffic Control 01 57 19 Temporary Environmental Controls 01 58 13 Temporary Project Signage 01 71 00 Mobilization 01 71 30 Site Conditions Surveys 01 71 50 Protection and Restoration of Existing Facilities 01 74 19 Disposal of Water 01 77 00 Project Closeout 01 78 39 Project Record Documents 01 81 10 Seismic Design Criteria 01 81 11 Wind Design Criteria 01 91 14 Equipment Testing and Startup DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 00 Demolition, Salvage, and Reconstruction DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE 03 11 00 Concrete Forming 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 60 00 Grouting BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT TABLE OF CONTENTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 01 10-3 TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) PART IV - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Section DIVISION 04 – MASONRY 04 01 20 Masonry Cleaning 04 05 12 Mortar and Grout 04 22 19 Insulated Concrete Unit Masonry DIVISION 05 – METALS 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 06 16 00 Sheathing 06 17 53 Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 14 00 Fluid-Applied Waterproofing 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation 07 41 13 Metal Roof Panels 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 72 00 Roof Accessories 07 92 00 Joint Sealants DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 71 00 Door Hardware 08 80 00 Glazing DIVISION 09 – FINISHES 09 23 00 Gypsum Board 09 90 00 Painting and Coating 09 97 01 Pipeline Coatings and Linings DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 10 14 00 Signage 10 44 13 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets 10 44 16 Fire Extinguishers DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT 11 00 00 Equipment General Provisions BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT TABLE OF CONTENTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 01 10-4 TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) PART IV - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Section DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 22 00 00 Plumbing 22 07 00 HVAC and Plumbing Insulation 22 45 16 Eyewash Equipment DIVISION 23 – HVAC 23 00 00 Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 23 24 00 Fans, Blowers, and Ventilators 23 31 13 Metal Ducts 23 58 00 Electric Heating Systems 23 81 26 Split-System Air Conditioners DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 Electrical General Provisions 26 05 19 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding 26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 34 Conduits 26 05 53 Electrical Identification 26 05 83 Wiring Connections 26 21 00 Utility Coordination 26 24 16 Panelboards 26 27 25 Toggle Switches 26 27 26 Receptacles 26 27 27 Plates 26 28 15 Safety Switches 26 28 16 Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers 26 50 00 Lighting DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK 31 10 00 Site Preparation 31 23 00 Earthwork 31 23 19 Dewatering 31 32 19 Geotextiles 31 37 00 Riprap DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 90 00 Landscape Restoration BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT TABLE OF CONTENTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 01 10-5 TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) PART IV - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Section DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES 33 05 01 HDPE Pipe and Fittings 33 05 16 Precast Concrete Manholes and Vaults 33 08 00 Gravity Piping Testing and Inspection 33 13 00 Water Pipeline Testing and Disinfection 33 13 01 Hydraulic Structures Testing and Disinfection 33 41 01 Drainage Pipeline System Testing 33 41 03 PVC Non-Pressure Pipe, Rubber Joints 33 41 05 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings DIVISION 40 – PROCESS INTEGRATION 40 05 00 Piping, General 40 05 05 Exposed Piping Installation 40 05 07 Pipe Supports 40 05 10 Mill Piping 40 05 50 Miscellaneous Valves 40 05 51 Valves, General 40 05 61 Gate Valves 40 05 62 Plug Valves 40 05 63 Ball Valves 40 05 64 Butterfly Valves 40 05 65 Valves for Pump Control and Check Service 40 61 00 Process Control and Instrumentation Systems General 40 63 43 PLC-Based Control Systems 40 71 13 Flow Magnetic 40 72 76 Level Switches 40 78 00 Control Panel Instruments DIVISION 43 – GAS, LIQUID, AND STORAGE 43 20 10 Pumps, General DIVISION 46 – WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT 46 33 00 Chemical Feeding Equipment, General APPENDICES APPENDIX A – Geotechnical Investigation, Proposed Water System Improvements, Timber Lakes, Prepared by AGEC Applied Geotechnical, December 22, 2023 BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT TABLE OF CONTENTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 01 10-6 TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) VOLUME 2 OF 3 - DRAWINGS Drawings for Water System Capital Project by Bowen Collins & Associates (Bound Separately) VOLUME 3 OF 3 - DRAWINGS Drawings for Water System Capital Project by Franson Civil Engineers (Bound Separately) END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 11 13 - 1 SECTION 00 11 13 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC® C-111, Copyright © 2018 by the National Society of Professional Engineers, American Society of Civil Engineers, and American Council of Engineering Companies, or is based in part on excerpts from EJCDC documents. Those portions of the text that originated in published EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Timber Lakes Water Special Service District Heber City, Utah Water System Capital Project GENERAL NOTICE Timber Lakes Water Special Service District (Owner) is requesting Bids for the construction of the following Project: Water System Capital Project 757-23-02 Bids for the construction of the Project will be received at the Timber Lakes Water Special Service District located at 450 West 910 South, Suite 100, Heber City, Utah 84032, until Wednesday, May 29, 2024 at 10:00 AM local time, which is an hour before the Bid opening. Any bids submitted within the hour before the Bid opening start time shall be received at the Wasatch County Library where the Bid opening will happen. At the time that Bids are due at the Wasatch County Library, the Bids received will be publicly opened and read at 11:00 AM. The Project includes the following Work: The Work of this Project consists of approximately 2,470 feet of 12-inch, 1,590 feet of 10-inch, and 260 feet of 6-inch HDPE water pipes, eight new flow meter vaults, development of one new spring, rehabilitation of one existing spring, and two new chlorination buildings. Bids will be received for the following Contract: Water System Capital Project. Owner anticipates that Project’s total bid price will be approximately $ 1,500,000 to $2,500,000 depending on which bid schedules are awarded. Project has an expected duration of 140 work days. The Contractor has the flexibility to schedule work in 2024, 2025, or both (see Section 00 52 13 for details). OBTAINING BIDDING DOCUMENTS Information and Bidding Documents for the Project can be found at the following designated website: http://purchasing.utah.gov/currentbids Bidding Documents may be downloaded from the designated website. Prospective Bidders are urged to register with the designated website as a plan holder, even if Bidding Documents are obtained from a plan room or source other than the designated website in either electronic or paper format. The designated website will be updated periodically with addenda, lists of registered plan holders, reports, and other information relevant to submitting a Bid for the Project. All official notifications, addenda, and other Bidding Documents will be offered only through the designated website. Neither Owner nor Engineer will be responsible for Bidding Documents, including addenda, if any, obtained from sources other than the designated website. PRE-BID CONFERENCE BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 11 13 - 2 A mandatory pre-bid conference for the Project will be held on Thursday, May 09, 2024 at 11:00 AM at the Wasatch County Library at 465 East 1200 South in Heber City. Bids will not be accepted from Bidders that do not attend the mandatory pre-bid conference. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS For all further requirements regarding bid submittal, qualifications, procedures, and contract award, refer to the Instructions to Bidders that are included in the Bidding Documents. THIS ADVERTISEMENT IS ISSUED BY: Owner: Timber Lakes Water Special Service District By: Jody Defa Title: Manager Date: Tuesday, April 30, 2024 + + END OF ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS + + BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 21 13 - 1 SECTION 00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC® C-200, Copyright © 2018 by the National Society of Professional Engineers, American Society of Civil Engineers, and American Council of Engineering Companies, or is based in part on excerpts from EJCDC documents. Those portions of the text that originated in published EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 1 – Defined Terms ................................................................................................................................................ 2 ARTICLE 2 – Bidding Documents ...................................................................................................................................... 2 ARTICLE 3 – Qualifications Of Bidders ........................................................................................................................... 3 ARTICLE 4 – Pre-Bid Conference ...................................................................................................................................... 3 ARTICLE 5 – Site And Other Areas; Existing Site Conditions; Examination Of Site; Owner’s Safety Program; Other Work At The Site ..................................................................................................................................... 4 ARTICLE 6 – Bidder’s Representations And Certifications .................................................................................... 6 ARTICLE 7 – Interpretations And Addenda .................................................................................................................. 6 ARTICLE 8 – Bid Security ..................................................................................................................................................... 7 ARTICLE 9 – Contract Times ............................................................................................................................................... 7 ARTICLE 10 – Substitute And “Or Equal” Items .......................................................................................................... 7 ARTICLE 11 – Subcontractors, Suppliers, And Others ............................................................................................. 7 ARTICLE 12 – Preparation Of Bid ..................................................................................................................................... 8 ARTICLE 13 – Basis Of Bid ................................................................................................................................................... 9 ARTICLE 14 – Submittal Of Bid ........................................................................................................................................ 10 ARTICLE 15 – MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWL OF BID ................................................................................. 10 ARTICLE 16 – Opening Of Bids ........................................................................................................................................ 10 ARTICLE 17 – Bids To Remain Subject To Acceptance .......................................................................................... 10 ARTICLE 18 – Evaluation Of Bids And Award Of Contract ................................................................................... 10 ARTICLE 19 – Bonds And Insurance.............................................................................................................................. 11 ARTICLE 20 – Signing Of Agreement ............................................................................................................................. 11 ARTICLE 21 – Sales And Use Taxes ................................................................................................................................ 12 ARTICLE 22 – Contracts To Be Assigned ..................................................................................................................... 12 BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 21 13 - 2 ARTICLE 1 – DEFINED TERMS 1.01 Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. Additional terms used in these Instructions to Bidders have the meanings indicated below: A. Issuing Office—The office from which the Bidding Documents are to be issued, and which registers plan holders. ARTICLE 2 – BIDDING DOCUMENTS 2.01 Bidder shall obtain a complete set of Bidding Requirements and proposed Contract Documents (together, the Bidding Documents). See the Agreement for a list of the Contract Documents. It is Bidder’s responsibility to determine that it is using a complete set of documents in the preparation of a Bid. Bidder assumes sole responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete documents, by Bidder itself or by its prospective Subcontractors and Suppliers. 2.02 Bidding Documents are made available for the sole purpose of obtaining Bids for completion of the Project and permission to download or distribution of the Bidding Documents does not confer a license or grant permission or authorization for any other use. Authorization to download documents, or other distribution, includes the right for plan holders to print documents solely for their use, and the use of their prospective Subcontractors and Suppliers, provided the plan holder pays all costs associated with printing or reproduction. Printed documents may not be re-sold under any circumstances. 2.03 Owner has established a Bidding Documents Website as indicated in the Advertisement or invitation to bid. Owner recommends that Bidder register as a plan holder with the Issuing Office at such website and obtain a complete set of the Bidding Documents from such website. Bidders may rely on that sets of Bidding Documents obtained from the Bidding Documents Website are complete, unless an omission is blatant. Registered plan holders will receive Addenda issued by Owner. 2.04 Electronic Documents A. When the Bidding Requirements indicate that electronic (digital) copies of the Bidding Documents are available, such documents will be made available to the Bidders as Electronic Documents in the manner specified. 1. Bidding Documents will be provided in Adobe PDF (Portable Document Format) (.pdf) that is readable by Adobe Acrobat Reader Version DC Feb 2024 (23.008.20555) or later. It is the intent of the Engineer and Owner that such Electronic Documents are to be exactly representative of the paper copies of the documents. However, because the Owner and Engineer cannot totally control the transmission and receipt of Electronic Documents nor the Contractor’s means of reproduction of such documents, the Owner and Engineer cannot and do not guarantee that Electronic Documents and reproductions prepared from those versions are identical in every manner to the paper copies. B. Unless otherwise stated in the Bidding Documents, the Bidder may use and rely upon complete sets of Electronic Documents of the Bidding Documents, described in Paragraph 2.04.A above. However, Bidder assumes all risks associated with differences arising from transmission/receipt of Electronic Documents versions of Bidding Documents and reproductions prepared from those versions and, further, assumes all risks, costs, and responsibility associated with use of the Electronic Documents versions BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 21 13 - 3 to derive information that is not explicitly contained in printed paper versions of the documents, and for Bidder’s reliance upon such derived information. C. After the Contract is awarded, the Owner will provide or direct the Engineer to provide for the use of the Contractor documents that were developed by Engineer as part of the Project design process, as Electronic Documents in native file formats. 1. Electronic Documents that are available in native file format include: a. AutoCAD DWG file of the design. 2. Release of such documents will be solely for the convenience of the Contractor. No such document is a Contract Document. 3. Unless the Contract Documents explicitly identify that such information will be available to the Successful Bidder (Contractor), nothing herein will create an obligation on the part of the Owner or Engineer to provide or create such information, and the Contractor is not entitled to rely on the availability of such information in the preparation of its Bid or pricing of the Work. In all cases, the Contractor shall take appropriate measures to verify that any electronic/digital information provided in Electronic Documents is appropriate and adequate for the Contractor’s specific purposes. 4. In no case will the Contractor be entitled to additional compensation or time for completion due to any differences between the actual Contract Documents and any related document in native file format. ARTICLE 3 – QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS 3.01 Bidder is to submit the following information with its Bid to demonstrate Bidder’s qualifications to perform the Work: A. Written evidence establishing its qualifications such as financial data, previous experience, and present commitments. B. A written statement that Bidder is authorized to do business in the state where the Project is located, or a written certification that Bidder will obtain such authority prior to the Effective Date of the Contract. C. Bidder’s state or other contractor license number, if applicable. D. Subcontractor and Supplier qualification information. E. Other required information regarding qualifications. 3.02 A Bidder’s failure to submit required qualification information within the times indicated may disqualify Bidder from receiving an award of the Contract. 3.03 No requirement in this Article 3 to submit information will prejudice the right of Owner to seek additional pertinent information regarding Bidder’s qualifications. ARTICLE 4 – PRE-BID CONFERENCE 4.01 A mandatory pre-bid conference will be held at the time and location indicated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid. Representatives of Owner and Engineer will be present to discuss the Project. Bids will not be accepted from Bidders who do not attend the conference. It is each Bidder’s responsibility to sign in at the pre-bid conference to verify its participation. Bidders must sign in using the name of the organization that will be submitting a Bid. A list of BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 21 13 - 4 qualified Bidders that attended the pre-bid conference and are eligible to submit a Bid for this Project will be issued in an Addendum. 4.02 Information presented at the pre-Bid conference does not alter the Contract Documents. Owner will issue Addenda to make any changes to the Contract Documents that result from discussions at the pre-Bid conference. Information presented, and statements made at the pre-bid conference will not be binding or legally effective unless incorporated in an Addendum. ARTICLE 5 – SITE AND OTHER AREAS; EXISTING SITE CONDITIONS; EXAMINATION OF SITE; OWNER’S SAFETY PROGRAM; OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 5.01 Site and Other Areas A. The Site is identified in the Bidding Documents. By definition, the Site includes rights- of-way, easements, and other lands furnished by Owner for the use of the Contractor. Any additional lands required for temporary construction facilities, construction equipment, or storage of materials and equipment, and any access needed for such additional lands, are to be obtained and paid for by Contractor. 5.02 Existing Site Conditions A. Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions 1. The Supplementary Conditions identify the following regarding existing conditions at or adjacent to the Site: a. Those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site that contain Technical Data. b. Those drawings known to Owner of existing physical conditions at or adjacent to the Site, including those drawings depicting existing surface or subsurface structures at or adjacent to the Site (except Underground Facilities), that contain Technical Data. c. Reports and drawings known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site. d. Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings. 2. Owner will make copies of reports and drawings referenced above available to any Bidder on request. These reports and drawings are not part of the Contract Documents, but the Technical Data contained therein upon whose accuracy Bidder is entitled to rely, as provided in the General Conditions, has been identified and established in the Supplementary Conditions. Bidder is responsible for any interpretation or conclusion Bidder draws from any Technical Data or any other data, interpretations, opinions, or information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings. 3. If the Supplementary Conditions do not identify Technical Data, the default definition of Technical Data set forth in Article 1 of the General Conditions will apply. 4. Geotechnical Baseline Report/Geotechnical Data Report: The Bidding Documents contain a Geotechnical Baseline Report (GBR) and Geotechnical Data Report (GDR). a. As set forth in the Supplementary Conditions, the GBR describes certain select subsurface conditions that are anticipated to be encountered by Contractor BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 21 13 - 5 during construction in specified locations (“Baseline Conditions”). The GBR is a Contract Document. b. The Baseline Conditions in the GBR are intended to reduce uncertainty and the degree of contingency in submitted Bids. However, Bidders cannot rely solely on the Baseline Conditions. Bids should be based on a comprehensive approach that includes an independent review and analysis of the GBR, all other Contract Documents, Technical Data, other available information, and observable surface conditions. Not all potential subsurface conditions are baselined. c. Nothing in the GBR is intended to relieve Bidders of the responsibility to make their own determinations regarding construction costs, bidding strategies, and Bid prices, nor of the responsibility to select and be responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and for safety precautions and programs incident thereto. d. As set forth in the Supplementary Conditions, the GDR is a Contract Document containing data prepared by or for the Owner in support of the GBR. B. Underground Facilities: Underground Facilities are shown or indicated on the Drawings, pursuant to Paragraph 5.05 of the General Conditions, and not in the drawings referred to in Paragraph 5.02.A of these Instructions to Bidders. Information and data regarding the presence or location of Underground Facilities are not intended to be categorized, identified, or defined as Technical Data. 5.03 Other Site-related Documents A. No other Site-related documents are available. 5.04 Site Visit and Testing by Bidders A. Bidder is required to visit the Site and conduct a thorough visual examination of the Site and adjacent areas. During the visit the Bidder must not disturb any ongoing operations at the Site. B. A Site visit is scheduled following the pre-bid conference. Maps to the Site will be available at the pre-Bid conference. C. Bidders visiting the Site are required to arrange their own transportation to the Site. D. All access to the Site other than during a regularly scheduled Site visit must be coordinated through the following Owner or Engineer contact for visiting the Site: Jody Defa at 385-450-0750. Bidder must conduct the required Site visit during normal working hours. E. Bidder is not required to conduct any subsurface testing, or exhaustive investigations of Site conditions. F. On request, and to the extent Owner has control over the Site, and schedule permitting, the Owner will provide Bidder general access to the Site to conduct such additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, and studies as Bidder deems necessary for preparing and submitting a successful Bid. Owner will not have any obligation to grant such access if doing so is not practical because of existing operations, security or safety concerns, or restraints on Owner’s authority regarding the Site. Bidder is responsible for establishing access needed to reach specific selected test sites. G. Bidder must comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations regarding excavation and location of utilities, obtain all permits, and comply with all terms and conditions BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 21 13 - 6 established by Owner or by property owners or other entities controlling the Site with respect to schedule, access, existing operations, security, liability insurance, and applicable safety programs. H. Bidder must fill all holes and clean up and restore the Site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations, investigations, tests, and studies. 5.05 Owner’s Safety Program A. Site visits and work at the Site may be governed by an Owner safety program . If an Owner safety program exists, it will be noted in the Supplementary Conditions. 5.06 Other Work at the Site A. Reference is made to Article 8 of the Supplementary Conditions for the identification of the general nature of other work of which Owner is aware (if any) that is to be performed at the Site by Owner or others (such as utilities and other prime contractors) and relates to the Work contemplated by these Bidding Documents. If Owner is party to a written contract for such other work, then on request, Owner will provide to each Bidder access to examine such contracts (other than portions thereof related to price and other confidential matters), if any. ARTICLE 6 – BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS AND CERTIFICATIONS 6.01 Express Representations and Certifications in Bid Form, Agreement A. The Bid Form that each Bidder will submit contains express representations regarding the Bidder’s examination of Project documentation, Site visit, and preparation of the Bid, and certifications regarding lack of collusion or fraud in connection with the Bid. Bidder should review these representations and certifications and assure that Bidder can make the representations and certifications in good faith, before executing and submitting its Bid. B. If Bidder is awarded the Contract, Bidder (as Contractor) will make similar express representations and certifications when it executes the Agreement. ARTICLE 7 – INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 7.01 Owner on its own initiative may issue Addenda to clarify, correct, supplement, or change the Bidding Documents. 7.02 Bidder shall submit all questions about the meaning or intent of the Bidding Documents to Engineer in writing. Contact information and submittal procedures for such questions are as follows: A. Bidder shall submit questions via U3P at the following URL: http://purchasing.utah.gov/currentbids 7.03 Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda delivered to all registered plan holders. Questions received less than seven days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be answered. 7.04 Only responses set forth in an Addendum will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. Responses to questions are not part of the Contract Documents unless set forth in an Addendum that expressly modifies or supplements the Contract Documents. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 21 13 - 7 ARTICLE 8 – BID SECURITY 8.01 A Bid must be accompanied by Bid security made payable to Owner in an amount of 5 percent of Bidder’s maximum Bid price (determined by adding the base bid and all alternates) and in the form of a Bid bond issued by a surety meeting the requirements of Paragraph 6.01 of the General Conditions. Such Bid bond will be issued in the form included in the Bidding Documents. 8.02 The Bid security of the apparent Successful Bidder will be retained until Owner awards the contract to such Bidder, and such Bidder has executed the Contract, furnished the required Contract security, and met the other conditions of the Notice of Award, whereupon the Bid security will be released. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Contract and furnish the required Contract security within 15 days after the Notice of Award, Owner may consider Bidder to be in default, annul the Notice of Award, and the Bid security of that Bidder will be forfeited, in whole in the case of a penal sum bid bond, and to the extent of Owner’s damages in the case of a damages-form bond. Such forfeiture will be Owner’s exclusive remedy if Bidder defaults. 8.03 The Bid security of other Bidders that Owner believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by Owner until the earlier of 7 days after the Effective Date of the Contract or 61 days after the Bid opening, whereupon Bid security furnished by such Bidders will be released. 8.04 Bid security of other Bidders that Owner believes do not have a reasonable chance of receiving the award will be released within 7 days after the Bid opening. ARTICLE 9 – CONTRACT TIMES 9.01 The number of days within which, or the dates by which, the Work is to be (a) substantially completed and (b) ready for final payment, and (c) Milestones (if any) are to be achieved, are set forth in the Agreement. 9.02 Provisions for liquidated damages, if any, for failure to timely attain a Milestone, Substantial Completion, or completion of the Work in readiness for final payment, are set forth in the Agreement. ARTICLE 10 – SUBSTITUTE AND “OR EQUAL” ITEMS 10.01 The Contract for the Work, as awarded, will be based on materials and equipment specified or described in the Bidding Documents without consideration during the bidding and Contract award process of possible substitute or “or-equal” items. In cases in which the Contract allows the Contractor to request that Engineer authorize the use of a substitute or “or -equal” item of material or equipment, application for such acceptance may not be made to and will not be considered by Engineer until after the Effective Date of the Contract. ARTICLE 11 – SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS, AND OTHERS 11.01 A Bidder must be prepared to retain specific Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of the Work if required to do so by the Bidding Documents or in the Specifications. If a prospective Bidder objects to retaining any such Subcontractor or Supplier and the concern is not relieved by an Addendum, then the prospective Bidder should refrain from submitting a Bid. 11.02 The apparent Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, must submit to Owner a list of the Subcontractors or Suppliers proposed for the following portions of the Work within five days after Bid opening: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 21 13 - 8 A. Earthwork B. Electrical C. Pipe D. Testing E. Concrete F. Masonry G. Equipment 11.03 If requested by Owner, such list must be accompanied by an experience statement with pertinent information regarding similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each such Subcontractor or Supplier. If Owner or Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor or Supplier, Owner may, before the Notice of Award is given, request apparent Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute, in which case apparent Successful Bidder will submit a substitute, Bidder’s Bid price will be increased (or decreased) by the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution, and Owner may consider such price adjustment in evaluating Bids and making the Contract award. 11.04 If apparent Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, Owner may award the Contract to the next lowest Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors and Suppliers. Declining to make requested substitutions will constitute grounds for forfeiture of the Bid security of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor or Supplier, so listed and against which Owner or Engineer makes no written objection prior to the giving of the Notice of Award will be deemed acceptable to Owner and Engineer subject to subsequent revocation of such acceptance as provided in Paragraph 7.07 of the General Conditions. ARTICLE 12 – PREPARATION OF BID 12.01 The Bid Form is included with the Bidding Documents. A. All blanks on the Bid Form must be completed in ink and the Bid Form signed in ink . Erasures or alterations must be initialed in ink by the person signing the Bid Form. A Bid price must be indicated for each section, Bid item, alternate, adjustment unit price item, and unit price item listed therein. B. If the Bid Form expressly indicates that submitting pricing on a specific alternate item is optional, and Bidder elects to not furnish pricing for such optional alternate item, then Bidder may enter the words “No Bid” or “Not Applicable”. 12.02 If Bidder has obtained the Bidding Documents as Electronic Documents, then Bidder shall prepare its Bid on a paper copy of the Bid Form printed from the Electronic Documents version of the Bidding Documents. The printed copy of the Bid Form must be clearly legible, printed on 8½ inch by 11-inch paper and as closely identical in appearance to the Electronic Document version of the Bid Form as may be practical. The Owner reserves the right to accept Bid Forms which nominally vary in appearance from the original paper version of the Bid Form, providing that all required information and submittals are included with the Bid. 12.03 A Bid by a corporation must be executed in the corporate name by a corporate officer (whose title must appear under the signature), accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The corporate address and state of incorporation must be shown. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 21 13 - 9 12.04 A Bid by a partnership must be executed in the partnership name and signed by a partner (whose title must appear under the signature), accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The official address of the partnership must be shown. 12.05 A Bid by a limited liability company must be executed in the name of the firm by a member or other authorized person and accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The state of formation of the firm and the official address of the firm must be shown. 12.06 A Bid by an individual must show the Bidder’s name and official address. 12.07 A Bid by a joint venture must be executed by an authorized representative of each joint venturer in the manner indicated on the Bid Form. The joint venture must have been formally established prior to submittal of a Bid, and the official address of the joint venture must be shown. 12.08 All names must be printed in ink below the signatures. 12.09 The Bid must contain an acknowledgment of receipt of all Addenda, the numbers of which must be filled in on the Bid Form. 12.10 Postal and e mail addresses and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid must be shown. 12.11 The Bid must contain evidence of Bidder’s authority to do business in the state where the Project is located, or Bidder must certify in writing that it will obtain such authority within the time for acceptance of Bids and attach such certification to the Bid. 12.12 If Bidder is required to be licensed to submit a Bid or perform the Work in the state where the Project is located, the Bid must contain evidence of Bidder’s licensure, or Bidder must certify in writing that it will obtain such licensure within the time for acceptance of Bids and attach such certification to the Bid. Bidder’s state contractor license number, if any, must also be shown on the Bid Form. ARTICLE 13 – BASIS OF BID 13.01 Unit Price A. Bidders must submit a Bid on a unit price basis for each item of Work listed in the unit price section of the Bid Form. B. The “Bid Price” (sometimes referred to as the extended price) for each unit price Bid item will be the product of the “Estimated Quantity”, which Owner or its representative has set forth in the Bid Form, for the item and the corresponding “Bid Unit Price” offered by the Bidder. The total of all unit price Bid items will be the sum of these “Bid Prices”; such total will be used by Owner for Bid comparison purposes. The final quantities and Contract Price will be determined in accordance with Paragraph 13.03 of the General Conditions. C. Discrepancies between the multiplication of units of Work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. 13.02 Allowances A. For cash allowances the Bid price must include such amounts as the Bidder deems proper for Contractor's overhead, costs, profit, and other expenses on account of cash allowances, if any, named in the Contract Documents, in accordance with Paragraph 13.02.B of the General Conditions. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 21 13 - 10 ARTICLE 14 – SUBMITTAL OF BID 14.01 The Bidding Documents include one separate unbound copy of the Bid Form, and, if required, the Bid Bond Form. The unbound copy of the Bid Form is to be completed and submitted with the Bid security and the other documents required to be submitted under the terms of Article 2 of the Bid Form. 14.02 A Bid must be received no later than the date and time prescribed and at the place indicated in the Advertisement or invitation to bid and must be enclosed in a plainly marked package with the Project title, and, if applicable, the designated portion of the Project for which the Bid is submitted, the name and address of Bidder, and must be accompanied by the Bid security and other required documents. If a Bid is sent by mail or other delivery system, the sealed envelope containing the Bid must be enclosed in a separate package plainly marked on the outside with the notation “BID ENCLOSED”. A mailed Bid must be addressed to the location designated in the Advertisement. 14.03 Bids received after the date and time prescribed for the opening of bids, or not submitted at the correct location or in the designated manner, will not be accepted and will be returned to the Bidder unopened. ARTICLE 15 – MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWL OF BID 15.01 An unopened Bid may be withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed in the same manner as a Bid must be executed and delivered to the place where Bids are to be submitted prior to the date and time for the opening of Bids. Upon receipt of such notice, the unopened Bid will be returned to the Bidder. 15.02 If a Bidder wishes to modify its Bid prior to Bid opening, Bidder must withdraw its initial Bid in the manner specified in Paragraph 15.01 and submit a new Bid prior to the date and time for the opening of Bids. 15.03 If within 24 hours after Bids are opened any Bidder files a duly signed written notice with Owner and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of Owner that there was a material and substantial mistake in the preparation of its Bid, Bidder may withdraw its Bid, and the Bid security will be returned. Thereafter, if the Work is rebid, Bidder will be disqualified from further bidding on the Work. ARTICLE 16 – OPENING OF BIDS 16.01 Bids will be opened at the time and place indicated in the advertisement or invitation to bid and, unless obviously non-responsive, read aloud publicly. An abstract of the amounts of the base Bids and major alternates, if any, will be made available to Bidders after the opening of Bids. ARTICLE 17 – BIDS TO REMAIN SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE 17.01 All Bids will remain subject to acceptance for the period of time stated in the Bid Form, but Owner may, in its sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid security prior to the end of this period. ARTICLE 18 – EVALUATION OF BIDS AND AWARD OF CONTRACT 18.01 Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bids, including without limitation, nonconforming, nonresponsive, unbalanced, or conditional Bids. Owner also reserves the right to waive all minor Bid informalities not involving price, time, or changes in the Work. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 21 13 - 11 18.02 Owner will reject the Bid of any Bidder that Owner finds, after reasonable inquiry and evaluation, to not be responsible. 18.03 If Bidder purports to add terms or conditions to its Bid, takes exception to any provision of the Bidding Documents, or attempts to alter the contents of the Contract Documents for purposes of the Bid, whether in the Bid itself or in a separate communication to Owner or Engineer, then Owner will reject the Bid as nonresponsive. 18.04 If Owner awards the contract for the Work, such award will be to the responsible Bidder submitting the lowest responsive Bid. 18.05 Evaluation of Bids A. In evaluating Bids, Owner will consider whether the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit prices, and other data, as may be requested in the Bid Form or prior to the Notice of Award. B. In the comparison of Bids, alternates will be applied in the same order of priority as listed in the Bid Form. To determine the Bid prices for purposes of comparison, Owner will announce to all bidders a “Base Bid plus alternates” budget after receiving all Bids, but prior to opening them. For comparison purposes alternates will be accepted, following the order of priority established in the Bid Form, until doing so would cause the budget to be exceeded. After determination of the Successful Bidder based on this comparative process and on the responsiveness, responsibility, and other factors set forth in these Instructions, the award may be made to said Successful Bidder on its base Bid and any combination of its additive alternate Bids for which Owner determines funds will be available at the time of award. C. For the determination of the apparent low Bidder when unit price bids are submitted, Bids will be compared based on the total of the products of the estimated quantity of each item and unit price Bid for that item, together with any lump sum items. 18.06 In evaluating whether a Bidder is responsible, Owner will consider the qualifications of the Bidder and may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors and Suppliers proposed for those portions of the Work for which the identity of Subcontractors and Suppliers must be submitted as provided in the Bidding Documents. 18.07 Owner may conduct such investigations as Owner deems necessary to establish the responsibility, qualifications, and financial ability of Bidders and any proposed Subcontractors or Suppliers. ARTICLE 19 – BONDS AND INSURANCE 19.01 Article 6 of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, sets forth Owner’s requirements as to performance and payment bonds, other required bonds (if any), and insurance. When the Successful Bidder delivers the executed Agreement to Owner, it must be accompanied by required bonds and insurance documentation. 19.02 Article 8, Bid Security, of these Instructions, addresses any requirements for providing bid bonds as part of the bidding process. ARTICLE 20 – SIGNING OF AGREEMENT 20.01 When Owner issues a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it will be accompanied by the unexecuted counterparts of the Agreement along with the other Contract Documents as identified in the Agreement. Within 15 days thereafter, Successful Bidder must execute and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Agreement and any bonds and insurance documentation required to be delivered by the Contract Documents to Owner. Within 10 days thereafter, Owner will deliver one fully executed counterpart of the Agreement to Successful BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 21 13 - 12 Bidder, together with printed and electronic copies of the Contract Documents as stated in Paragraph 2.02 of the General Conditions. ARTICLE 21 – SALES AND USE TAXES 21.01 Owner is exempt from Utah state sales and use taxes on materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work. 11711867-002-STC. Said taxes must not be included in the Bid. Refer to Paragraph SC 7.10 of the Supplementary Conditions for additional information. ARTICLE 22 – CONTRACTS TO BE ASSIGNED 22.01 Not used. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT BID FORM WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 41 00 - 1 SECTION 00 41 00 BID FORM This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC® C-410, Copyright © 2018 by the National Society of Professional Engineers, American Society of Civil Engineers, and American Council of Engineering Companies, or is based in part on excerpts from EJCDC documents. Those portions of the text that originated in published EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. The terms used in this Bid with initial capital letters have the meanings stated in the Instructions to Bidders, the General Conditions, and the Supplementary Conditions. TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 1 – Owner And Bidder ........................................................................................................................................ 2 ARTICLE 2 – Attachments to This Bid ............................................................................................................................. 2 ARTICLE 3 – Basis of Bid – Lump Sum Bid And Unit Prices ................................................................................... 2 ARTICLE 4 – Basis of Bid – Cost-Plus Fee ...................................................................................................................... 5 ARTICLE 5 – Basis of Bid – Price Plus Time .................................................................................................................. 5 ARTICLE 6 – Time of Completion ...................................................................................................................................... 5 ARTICLE 7 – Bidder’s Acknowledgements: Acceptance Period, Instructions, And Receipt of Addenda ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5 ARTICLE 8 – Bidder’s Representations And Certifications .................................................................................... 5 ARTICLE 9 – Potential Economic Price Adjustments................................................................................................ 7 BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT BID FORM WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 41 00 - 2 ARTICLE 1 – OWNER AND BIDDER 1.01 This Bid is submitted to: Timber Lakes Water Special Service District 450 West 910 South; Suite 100 Heber City, UT 84032 1.02 The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an Agreement with Owner in the form included in the Bidding Documents to perform all Work as specified or indicated in the Bidding Documents for the prices and within the times indicated in this Bid and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents. ARTICLE 2 – ATTACHMENTS TO THIS BID 2.01 The following documents are submitted with and made a condition of this Bid: A. Required Bid security. B. List of Proposed Subcontractors. C. List of Proposed Suppliers. D. Evidence of authority to do business in the state of the Project; or a written covenant to obtain such authority within the time for acceptance of Bids. E. Contractor’s license number as evidence of Bidder’s State Contractor’s License or a covenant by Bidder to obtain said license within the time for acceptance of Bids; F. Required Bidder Qualification Statement with supporting data; and G. Signed Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion – Lower Tier Covered Transactions, ARTICLE 3 – BASIS OF BID – LUMP SUM BID AND UNIT PRICES 3.01 Unit Price Bids A. Bidder will perform the following Work at the indicated unit prices: 1. Base Bid Schedule A Item No. Description Unit Est’d Quantity Bid Unit Price Bid Amount A1 Mobilization and Demobilization LS 1 $ $ A2 Flow Meter Vault - Overflow Meter EA 2 $ $ A3 Flow Meter Vault - System Meter EA 5 $ $ A4 Flow Meter Vault - Lower Lone Pine EA 1 $ $ BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT BID FORM WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 41 00 - 3 A5 12-inch HDPE Water Pipe Open Cut, Complete LF 1,870 $ $ A6 12-inch HDPE Water Pipe Horizontal Directional Drill, Complete LF 600 $ $ A7 10-inch HDPE Water Pipe Open Cut, Complete LF 1,590 $ $ A8 6-inch HDPE Water Pipe Open Cut, Complete LF 260 $ $ A9 Lone Pine Spring #7 Development LS 1 $ $ A10 Lone Pine Spring #2 Rehabilitation LS 1 $ $ A11 New Gravel Road SY 240 $ $ A12 Gravel Road Restoration SY 2,000 $ $ A13 Landscape Restoration SY 1,030 $ $ A14 Valve Replacement EA 2 $ $ A15 Electrical LS 1 $ $ A16 SKM Integration LS 1 $ $ A17 Fire Hydrant EA 1 $ $ A18 Reconnect Existing Chlorination Pipes LS 1 $ $ A19 General Allowance LS 1 $ $ Total Bid Schedule A Price $ 2. Bid Schedule B – Lookout Mountain Chlorination Building Item No. Description Unit Est’d Quantity Bid Unit Price Bid Amount B1 Mobilization and Demobilization LS 1 $ $ B2 Chlorination Building LS 1 $ $ BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT BID FORM WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 41 00 - 4 B3 Electrical LS 1 $ $ B4 SKM Integration LS 1 $ $ Total Bid Schedule B Price $ 3. Bid Schedule C – Upper Lone Pine Chlorination Building Item No. Description Unit Est’d Quantity Bid Unit Price Bid Amount C1 Mobilization and Demobilization LS 1 $ $ C2 Chlorination Building LS 1 $ $ C3 Electrical LS 1 $ $ C4 SKM Integration LS 1 $ $ Total Bid Schedule C Price $ B. Bidder acknowledges that: 1. each Bid Unit Price includes an amount considered by Bidder to be adequate to cover Contractor’s overhead and profit for each separately identified item, and 2. estimated quantities are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids, and final payment for all Unit Price Work will be based on actual quantities, determined as provided in the Contract Documents. C. Owner reserves the right to select the Bid based on the total Base Bid Price (Bid Schedule A) or based on the Base Bid plus Bid Schedule B (Bid Schedules A + B) or based on all three bid schedules including Bid Schedule C (Bid Schedules A + B + C). 3.02 Bid Summary Total Base Bid Schedule A $ Total Bid Schedule B – Lookout Mountain Chlorination Building $ Total Bid Schedule C – Upper Lone Pine Chlorination Building $ BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT BID FORM WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 41 00 - 5 ARTICLE 4 – TIME OF COMPLETION ARTICLE 4 – 4.01 Bidder agrees that the Work will be substantially complete and will be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions on or before the dates or within the number of calendar days indicated in the Agreement. 4.02 Bidder accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damages. ARTICLE 5 – BIDDER’S ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS: ACCEPTANCE PERIOD, INSTRUCTIONS, AND RECEIPT OF ADDENDA 5.01 Bid Acceptance Period A. This Bid will remain subject to acceptance for 60 days after the Bid opening, or for such longer period that Bidder may agree to in writing upon request of Owner. 5.02 Instructions to Bidders A. Bidder accepts all the terms and conditions of the Instructions to Bidders, including without limitation those dealing with the disposition of Bid security. 5.03 Receipt of Addenda A. Bidder hereby acknowledges receipt of the following Addenda: Addendum Number Addendum Date ARTICLE 6 – BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS AND CERTIFICATIONS 6.01 Bidder’s Representations A. In submitting this Bid, Bidder represents the following: 1. Bidder has examined and carefully studied the Bidding Documents, including Addenda. 2. Bidder has visited the Site, conducted a thorough visual examination of the Site and adjacent areas, and become familiar with the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. 3. Bidder is familiar with all Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. 4. Bidder has carefully studied the reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site and the drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site that have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions, with respect to the Technical Data in such reports and drawings. 5. Bidder has carefully studied the reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site that have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions, with respect to Technical Data in such reports and drawings. 6. Bidder has considered the information known to Bidder itself; information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT BID FORM WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 41 00 - 6 information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; the Bidding Documents; and the Technical Data identified in the Supplementary Conditions or by definition, with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and Technical Data on (a) the cost, progress, and performance of the Work; (b) the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Bidder, if selected as Contractor; and (c) Bidder’s (Contractor’s) safety precautions and programs. 7. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraph, Bidder agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract. 8. Bidder is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Bidding Documents. 9. Bidder has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Bidder has discovered in the Bidding Documents, and of discrepancies between Site conditions and the Contract Documents, and the written resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Contractor. 10. The Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. 11. The submission of this Bid constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that without exception the Bid and all prices in the Bid are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Bidding Documents. 6.02 Bidder’s Certifications A. The Bidder certifies the following: 1. This Bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed individual or entity and is not submitted in conformity with any collusive agreement or rules of any group, association, organization, or corporation. 2. Bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other Bidder to submit a false or sham Bid. 3. Bidder has not solicited or induced any individual or entity to refrain from bidding. 4. Bidder has not engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive practices in competing for the Contract. For the purposes of this Paragraph: a. Corrupt practice means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of anything of value likely to influence the action of a public official in the bidding process. b. Fraudulent practice means an intentional misrepresentation of facts made (a) to influence the bidding process to the detriment of Owner, (b) to establish bid prices at artificial non-competitive levels, or (c) to deprive Owner of the benefits of free and open competition. c. Collusive practice means a scheme or arrangement between two or more Bidders, with or without the knowledge of Owner, a purpose of which is to establish bid prices at artificial, non-competitive levels. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT BID FORM WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 41 00 - 7 d. Coercive practice means harming or threatening to harm, directly or indirectly, persons or their property to influence their participation in the bidding process or affect the execution of the Contract. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT BID FORM WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 41 00 - 8 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT BID BOND (PENAL SUM FORM) WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 43 13 - 1 SECTION 00 43 13 BID BOND (PENAL SUM FORM) Copyright © 2018 (EJCDC® C-430) National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Bidder Surety Name: [Full formal name bidder] Name: [Full formal name of Surety] Address (principal place of business): Address (principal place of business): [Full address of Bidder] [Full address of Surety] Owner Bid Name: Timber Lakes Water Special Service District Project (name and location): Mailing address (principal place of business): Water System Capital Project Timber Lakes, UT 450 West 910 South Suite 100 Heber City, UT 84032 Bid Due Date [Bid Date] Bond Penal Sum: [Bond Amount] Date of Bond: [Bid Date] Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth herein, do each cause this Bid Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative. Bidder Surety (Full formal name of Bidder) (Full formal name of Surety) (corporate seal) By: By: (Signature) (Signature) (Attach Power of Attorney) Name: Name: (Printed or typed) (Printed or typed) Title: Title: Attest: Attest: (Signature) (Signature) Name: Name: (Printed or typed) (Printed or typed) Title: Title: Notes: (1) Provide supplemental execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers. (2) Any singular reference to C ontractor, Surety, Owner, or other party is considered plural where applicable. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT BID BOND (PENAL SUM FORM) WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 43 13 - 2 1. Bidder and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns to pay to Owner upon default of Bidder the penal sum set forth on the face of this Bond. Payment of the penal sum is the extent of Bidd er’s and Surety’s liability. Recovery of such penal sum under the terms of this Bond will be Owner’s sole and exclusive remedy upon default of Bidder. 2. Default of Bidder occurs upon the failure of Bidder to deliver within the time required by the Bidding Documents (or any exte nsion thereof agreed to in writing by Owner) the executed Agreement required by the Bidding Documents and any performance and payment bonds required by the Bidding Documents. 3. This obligation will be null and void if: 3.1 Owner accepts Bidder’s Bid and Bidder delivers within the time required by the Bidding Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Owner) the executed Agreement required by the Bidding Documents and any performance and payment bonds required by the Bidding Documents, or 3.2 All Bids are rejected by Owner, or 3.3 Owner fails to issue a Notice of Award to Bidder within the time specified in the Bidding Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Bidder and, if applicable, consented to by Surety when required by Paragraph 5 hereof). 4. Payment under this Bond will be due and payable upon default of Bidder and within 30 calendar days after receipt by Bidder an d Surety of written notice of default from Owner, which notice will be given with reasonable promptness, identifying this Bond and the Project and including a statement of the amount due. 5. Surety waives notice of any and all defenses based on or arising out of any time extension to issue Notice of Award agreed to in writing by Owner and Bidder, provided that the total time for issuing Notice of Award including extensions does not in the aggregate exceed 120 days from the Bid due date without Surety’s written consent. 6. No suit or action will be commenced under this Bond prior to 30 calendar days after the notice of default required in Paragraph 4 above is received by Bidder and Surety, and in no case later than one year after the Bid due date. 7. Any suit or action under this Bond will be commenced only in a court of competent jurisdiction located in the state in which the Project is located. 8. Notices required hereunder must be in writing and sent to Bidder and Surety at their respective addresses shown on the face o f this Bond. Such notices may be sent by personal delivery, commercial courier, or by United States Postal Service registered or certified mail, return receipt requested, postage pre-paid, and will be deemed to be effective upon receipt by the party concerned. 9. Surety shall cause to be attached to this Bond a current and effective Power of Attorney evidencing the authority of the offi cer, agent, or representative who executed this Bond on behalf of Surety to execute, seal, and deliver such Bond and bind the Surety thereby. 10. This Bond is intended to conform to all applicable statutory requirements. Any applicable requirement of any applicable statu te that has been omitted from this Bond will be deemed to be included herein as if set forth at length. If any provision of this Bo nd conflicts with any applicable statute, then the provision of said statute governs and the remainder of this Bond that is not in conflic t therewith continues in full force and effect. 11. The term “Bid” as used herein includes a Bid, offer, or proposal as applicable. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 45 13 - 1 SECTION 00 45 13 BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC® C-451, Copyright © 2018 by the National Society of Professional Engineers, American Society of Civil Engineers, and American Council of Engineering Companies, or is based in part on excerpts from EJCDC documents. Those portions of the text that originated in published EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 1 – General Information .................................................................................................................................... 2 ARTICLE 2 – Licensing ........................................................................................................................................................... 3 ARTICLE 3 – Diverse Business Certifications .............................................................................................................. 3 ARTICLE 4 – Safety.................................................................................................................................................................. 3 ARTICLE 5 – Financial ........................................................................................................................................................... 4 ARTICLE 6 – Surety Information ....................................................................................................................................... 4 ARTICLE 7 – Insurance .......................................................................................................................................................... 5 ARTICLE 8 – Construction Experience ........................................................................................................................... 5 ARTICLE 9 – Required Attachments ................................................................................................................................ 6 BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 45 13 - 2 ARTICLE 1 – GENERAL INFORMATION 1.01 Provide contact information for the Business: Legal Name of Business: Corporate Office Name: Phone number: Title: Email address: Business address of corporate office: Local Office Name: Phone number: Title: Email address: Business address of local office: 1.02 Provide information on the Business’ organizational structure: Form of Business: ☐ Sole Proprietorship ☐ Partnership ☐ Corporation ☐ Limited Liability Company ☐ Joint Venture comprised of the following companies: 1. 2. 3. Provide a separate Qualification Statement for each Joint Venture r. Date Business was formed: State in which Business was formed: Is this Business authorized to operate in the Project location? ☐ Yes ☐ No ☐ Pending 1.03 Identify all businesses that own Business in whole or in part (25% or greater), or that are wholly or partly (25% or greater) owned by Business: Name of business: Affiliation: Address: Name of business: Affiliation: Address: Name of business: Affiliation: Address: 1.04 Provide information regarding the Business’ officers, partners, and limits of authority. Name: Title: Authorized to sign contracts: ☐ Yes ☐ No Limit of Authority: $ Name: Title: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 45 13 - 3 Authorized to sign contracts: ☐ Yes ☐ No Limit of Authority: $ Name: Title: Authorized to sign contracts: ☐ Yes ☐ No Limit of Authority: $ Name: Title: ARTICLE 2 – LICENSING 2.01 Provide information regarding licensure for Business: Name of License: Licensing Agency: License No: Expiration Date: Name of License: Licensing Agency: License No: Expiration Date: ARTICLE 3 – DIVERSE BUSINESS CERTIFICATIONS 3.01 Provide information regarding Business’ diverse Business Certification, if any. Provide evidence of current certification. Certification Certifying Agency Certification Date ☐ Disadvantaged Business Enterprise ☐ Minority Business Enterprise ☐ Woman-Owned Business Enterprise ☐ Small Business Enterprise ☐ Disabled Business Enterprise ☐ Veteran-Owned Business Enterprise ☐ Service-Disabled Veteran-Owned Business ☐ HUBZone Business (Historically Underutilized) Business ☐ Other ☐ None ARTICLE 4 – SAFETY 4.01 Provide information regarding Business’ safety organization and safety performance Name of Business’s Safety Officer: Safety Certifications Certification Name Issuing Agency Expiration BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 45 13 - 4 4.02 Provide Worker’s Compensation Insurance Experience Modification Rate (EMR), Total Recordable Frequency Rate (TRFR) for incidents, and Total Number of Recorded Manhours (MH) for the last 3 years and the EMR, TRFR, and MH history for the last 3 years of any proposed Subcontractor(s) that will provide Work valued at 10% or more of the Contract Price. Provide documentation of the EMR history for Business and Subcontractor(s). Year Company EMR TRFR MH EMR TRFR MH EMR TRFR MH ARTICLE 5 – FINANCIAL 5.01 Provide information regarding the Business’s financial stability. Provide the most recent audited financial statement, and if such audited financial statement is not current, also provide the most current financial statement. Financial Institution: Business address: Date of Business’s most recent financial statement: ☐ Attached Date of Business’s most recent audited financial statement: ☐ Attached Financial indicators from the most recent financial statement Contractor’s Current Ratio (Current Assets ÷ Current Liabilities) Contractor’s Quick Ratio ((Cash and Cash Equivalents + Accounts Receivable + Short Term Investments) ÷ Current Liabilities) ARTICLE 6 – SURETY INFORMATION 6.01 Provide information regarding the surety company that will issue required bonds on behalf of the business, including but not limited to performance and payment bonds. Surety Name: Surety is a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the state of: Is surety authorized to provide surety bonds in the Project location? ☐ Yes ☐ No Is surety listed in “Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies” published in Department Circular 570 (as amended) by the Bureau of the Fiscal Service, U.S. Department of the Treasury? ☐ Yes ☐ No Mailing Address (Principal place of business): Physical Address BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 45 13 - 5 (Principal place of business): Phone (main): Phone (claims): ARTICLE 7 – INSURANCE 7.01 Provide information regarding Business' insurance company(s), including but not limited to its Commercial General Liability carrier. Provide information for each provider. Name of insurance provider, and type of policy (CLE, auto, etc.): Insurance Provider Type of Policy (Coverage Provided) Are providers licensed or authorized to issue policies in the Project location? ☐ Yes ☐ No Does provider have an A.M. Best Rating of A-VII or better? ☐ Yes ☐ No Mailing Address (Principal place of business): Physical Address (Principal place of business): Phone (main): Phone (claims): ARTICLE 8 – CONSTRUCTION EXPERIENCE 8.01 Provide information that will identify the overall size and capacity of the Business. Average number of current full-time employees: Estimate of revenue for the current year: Estimate of revenue for the previous year: 8.02 Provide information regarding the Business’s previous contracting experience. Years of experience with projects like the proposed project: As a general contractor: As a joint venturer: Has Business, or a predecessor in interest, or an affiliate identified in Paragraph 1.03 : Been disqualified as a bidder by any local, state, or federal agency within the last 5 years? ☐ Yes ☐ No Been barred from contracting by any local, state, or federal agency within the last 5 years? ☐ Yes ☐ No Been released from a bid in the past 5 years? ☐ Yes ☐ No Defaulted on a project or failed to complete any contract awarded to it? ☐ Yes ☐ No BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 45 13 - 6 Refused to construct or refused to provide materials defined in the contract documents or in a change order? ☐ Yes ☐ No Been a party to any currently pending litigation or arbitration? ☐ Yes ☐ No Provide full details in a separate attachment if the response to any of these questions is Yes. 8.03 List all projects currently under contract in Schedule A and provide indicated information. 8.04 List a minimum of three and a maximum of six projects completed in the last 5 years in Schedule B and provide indicated information to demonstrate the Business’s experience with projects similar in type and cost of construction. 8.05 In Schedule C, provide information on key individuals whom Business intends to assign to the Project. Provide resumes for those individuals included in Schedule C. Key individuals include the Project Manager, Project Superintendent, Quality Manager, and Safety Manager. Resumes may be provided for Business’s key leaders as well. ARTICLE 9 – REQUIRED ATTACHMENTS 9.01 Provide the following information with the Statement of Qualifications: A. If Business is a Joint Venture, separate Qualifications Statements for each Joint Venturer, as required in Paragraph 1.02. B. Diverse Business Certifications if required by Paragraph 3.01. C. Certification of Business’s safety performance if required by Paragraph 4.02. D. Financial statements as required by Paragraph 5.01. E. Attachments providing additional information as required by Paragraph 8.02. F. Schedule A (Current Projects) as required by Paragraph 8.03. G. Schedule B (Previous Experience with Similar Projects) as required by Paragraph 8.04. H. Schedule C (Key Individuals) and resumes for the key individuals listed, as required by Paragraph 8.05. I. Additional items as pertinent. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 45 13 - 7 This Statement of Qualifications is offered by: Business: (typed or printed name of organization) By: (individual’s signature) Name: (typed or printed) Title: (typed or printed) Date: (date signed) (If Business is a corporation, a partnership, or a joint venture, attach evidence of authority to sign.) Attest: (individual’s signature) Name: (typed or printed) Title: (typed or printed) Address for giving notices: Designated Representative: Name: (typed or printed) Title: (typed or printed) Address: Phone: Email: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 45 13 - 8 Schedule A—Current Projects Name of Organization Project Owner Project Name General Description of Project Project Cost Date Project Completed Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Manager Quality Control Manager Name Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference) Name Title/Position Organization Telephone Email Owner Designer Construction Manager Project Owner Project Name General Description of Project Project Cost Date Project Completed Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Manager Quality Control Manager Name Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference) Name Title/Position Organization Telephone Email Owner Designer Construction Manager Project Owner Project Name General Description of Project Project Cost Date Project Completed Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Manager Quality Control Manager Name Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference) Name Title/Position Organization Telephone Email Owner Designer Construction Manager BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 45 13 - 9 Schedule B—Previous Experience with Similar Projects Name of Organization Project Owner Project Name General Description of Project Project Cost Date Project Completed Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Manager Quality Control Manager Name Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference) Name Title/Position Organization Telephone Email Owner Designer Construction Manager Project Owner Project Name General Description of Project Project Cost Date Project Completed Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Manager Quality Control Manager Name Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference) Name Title/Position Organization Telephone Email Owner Designer Construction Manager Project Owner Project Name General Description of Project Project Cost Date Project Completed Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Manager Quality Control Manager Name Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference) Name Title/Position Organization Telephone Email Owner Designer Construction Manager BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 45 13 - 10 Schedule B—Previous Experience with Similar Projects Name of Organization Project Owner Project Name General Description of Project Project Cost Date Project Completed Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Manager Quality Control Manager Name Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference) Name Title/Position Organization Telephone Email Owner Designer Construction Manager Project Owner Project Name General Description of Project Project Cost Date Project Completed Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Manager Quality Control Manager Name Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference) Name Title/Position Organization Telephone Email Owner Designer Construction Manager Project Owner Project Name General Description of Project Project Cost Date Project Completed Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Manager Quality Control Manager Name Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference) Name Title/Position Organization Telephone Email Owner Designer Construction Manager BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 45 13 - 11 Schedule C—Key Individuals Project Manager Name of individual Years of experience as project manager Years of experience with this organization Number of similar projects as project manager Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of assignment Percent of time used for this project Estimated project completion date Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contact named individuals as a reference) Name Name Title/Position Title/Position Organization Organization Telephone Telephone Email Email Project Project Candidate’s role on project Candidate’s role on project Project Superintendent Name of individual Years of experience as project superintendent Years of experience with this organization Number of similar projects as project superintendent Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of assignment Percent of time used for this project Estimated project completion date Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contact named individuals as a reference) Name Name Title/Position Title/Position Organization Organization Telephone Telephone Email Email Project Project Candidate’s role on project Candidate’s role on project BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 45 13 - 12 Safety Manager Name of individual Years of experience as project manager Years of experience with this organization Number of similar projects as project manager Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of assignment Percent of time used for this project Estimated project completion date Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contact named individuals as a reference) Name Name Title/Position Title/Position Organization Organization Telephone Telephone Email Email Project Project Candidate’s role on project Candidate’s role on project Quality Control Manager Name of individual Years of experience as project superintendent Years of experience with this organization Number of similar projects as project superintendent Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of assignment Percent of time used for this project Estimated project completion date Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contact named individuals as a reference) Name Name Title/Position Title/Position Organization Organization Telephone Telephone Email Email Project Project Candidate’s role on project Candidate’s role on project BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT E-VERIFY AGREEMENT AND AFFIDAVIT WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 45 30 - 1 SECTION 00 45 30 E-VERIFY AGREEMENT AND AFFIDAVIT By executing this affidavit, the undersigned Contractor verifies its compliance with Utah Code Ann. § 63G-12-302 and 13-47-201, stating affirmatively that the individual, firm, or corporation which is engaged in the physical performance of services on behalf of Owner has registered with, and uses the federal work authorization program commonly known as E-Verify, or any subsequent replacement program, in accordance with the applicable provisions and deadlines established in Utah Code Ann. § 63G-12-302 and 13-47-201. Contractor agrees that it will continue to use the federal work authorization program throughout the Contract period, and should it employ or contract with any Subcontractor(s) in connection with the physical performance of services pursuant to this Agreement with Owner, Contractor will secure from each such Subcontractor(s) similar verification of compliance with Utah Code Ann. § 63G-12- 302 and 13-47-201 using a similar affidavit. Contractor agrees to maintain records of such compliance and provide a copy of each verification to Owner within five days of the time that Subcontractor is retained to perform such services. Contractor hereby attests that its federal work authorization user identification number and date of authorization are as follows: Bidder/Contractor Owner/Public Entity Name: Full formal name of Bidder/Contractor Name: Timber Lakes Water Special Service District Federal User ID Number: [Federal ID Number] Address (principal place of business): Date of Authorization: [Date of authorization] 450 West 910 South Suite 100 Heber City, UT 84032 Address (principal place of business): Full address of Contractor I hereby declare under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct. Executed on the _______ day of ________________, 20____. Bidder/Contractor as Principal Notary Public Subscribed and sworn before me on this ______ day of _______, 20____. (Full formal name of Contractor) (Signature) Name: (Printed or typed) (Notary Signature & Seal) Title: My Commission Expires (date) END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT E-VERIFY AGREEMENT AND AFFIDAVIT WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 45 30 - 2 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CERTIFICATION REGARDING DEBARMENT WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 45 38 - 1 SECTION 00 45 38 CERTIFICATION REGARDING DEBARMENT This document is a MODIFIED version of State Revolving Fund (SRF) requirements. The form’s complete title is Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion, Lower Tier Covered Transactions. The following statement is made in accordance with the Privacy Act of 1974 (5 USC § 552a, as amended). This certification is required by the regulations implementing Executive Order 12549, Debarment and Suspension, and 2 CFR § 180.300, 180.335, Participants’ responsibilities. The regulations were amended and published on August 31, 2005, in 70 Federal Register 51865-51880. Copies of the regulations may be obtained by contacting the Agency offering the proposed covered transaction. (Read instructions on page two before completing certification) A. The prospective lower tier participant certifies, by submission of this proposal, that neither it nor its principals is presently debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this transaction by any Federal department or agency. B. Where the prospective lower tier participant is unable to certify to any of the statements in this certification, such prospective participant shall attach an explanation to this proposal. ORGANIZATION NAME PR/AWARD NUMBER OR PROJECT NAME Timber Lakes Water Special Service District Water System Capital Project NAME(S) AND TITLE(S) OF AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE(S) SIGNATURE(S) DATE In accordance with Federal civil rights law and U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) civil rights regulations and policies, the EPA, its office and employees, and institutions participating in or administering EPA programs are prohibited from discriminating based on race, color, national origin, religion, sex, gender identity (including gender expression), sexual orientation, disability, age, marital status, family/parental status, income derived from a public assistance program, political beliefs, or reprisal or retaliation for prior civil rights activity, in any program or activity conducted or funded by EPA (not all bases apply to all programs). Remedies and complaint filing deadlines vary by program or incident. Persons with disabilities who require alternative means of communication for program information (e.g., Braille, large print, audiotape, American Sign Language, etc.) should contact the responsible agency or contact EPA through the Federal Relay Service at (800) 877-8339 or 7-1-1. Additionally, program information may be made available in languages other than English. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CERTIFICATION REGARDING DEBARMENT WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 45 38 - 2 Instructions for Certification (1) By signing and submitting this form, the prospective lower tier participant is providing the certification set out on page 1 in accordance with these instructions. (2) The certification in this clause is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when this transaction was entered into. If it is later determined that the prospective lower tier participant knowingly rendered an erroneous certification, in addition to other remedies available to the Federal Government, the department or agency with which this transaction originated may pursue available remedies, including suspension and/or debarment. (3) The prospective lower tier participant shall provide immediate written notice to the person to which this proposal is submitted if at any time the prospective lower tier participant learns that its certification was erroneous when submitted or has become erroneous by reason of changed circumstances. (4) The terms "covered transaction," "debarred," "suspended," "ineligible," "lower tier covered transaction," "participant," "person," "primary covered transaction," "principal," "proposal," and "voluntarily excluded," as used in this clause, have the meanings set out in the Definitions and Coverage sections of the rules implementing Executive Order 12549. You may contact the person to which this proposal is being submitted for assistance in obtaining a copy of those regulations. (5) The prospective lower tier participant agrees by submitting this form that, should the proposed covered transaction be entered into, it shall not knowingly enter into any lower tier covered transaction with a person who is proposed for debarred under 48 CFR Part 9, Subpart 9.4, debarred, suspended, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this covered transaction, unless authorized by the department or agency with which this transaction originated. (6) The prospective lower tier participant further agrees by submitting this proposal that it will include this clause titled "Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion -Lower Tier Covered Transactions," without modification, in all lower tier covered transactions and in all solicitations for lower tier covered transactions. (7) A participant in a covered transaction may rely upon a certification of a prospective participant in a lower tier covered transaction that is not proposed for debarment under 48 CRF Part 9, Subpart 9.4, debarred, suspended, ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from the covered transaction, unless it knows that the certification is erroneous. A participant may decide the method and frequency by which it determines the eligibility of its principals. Each participant may, but is not required to, check the System for Award Management (SAM) database. (8) Nothing contained in the foregoing shall be construed to require establishment of a system of records to render in good faith the certification required by this clause. The knowledge and information of a participant is not required to exceed that which is normally possessed by a prudent person in the ordinary course of business dealings. (9) Except for transactions authorized under Paragraph (5) of these instructions, if a participant in a covered transaction knowingly enters into a lower tier covered transaction with a person who is proposed for debarment under 48 CFR Part 9, Subpart 9.4, suspended, debarred, ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this transaction, in addition to other remedies available to the Federal Government, the department or agency with which this transaction originated may pursue available remedies, including suspension and/or debarment. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT NOTICE OF AWARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 51 00 - 1 SECTION 00 51 00 NOTICE OF AWARD Copyright © 2018 (EJCDC® C-510) National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Date of Issuance: [Pick Date] Owner: Timber Lakes Water Special Service District Owner's Contract No: Engineer: Bowen Collins & Associates Engineer's Project No: 757-23-02 Project: Water System Capital Project Contract Name: Water System Capital Project Bidder: Bidder’s Address: You are notified that Owner has accepted your Bid dated [__________________] for the above Contract, and that you are the Successful Bidder and are awarded a Contract for: [__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________]. [Describe Work, alternates, or sections of Work awarded] The Contract Price of the awarded Contract is: $ [___________] [note if subject to unit prices, or cost-plus] [______] unexecuted counterparts of the Agreement accompany this Notice of Award, and one copy of the Contract Documents accompanies this Notice of Award or has been transmitted or made available to Bidder electronically. ☐ Drawings will be delivered separately from the other Contract Documents. You must comply with the following conditions precedent within 15 days of the date of receipt of this Notice of Award: 1. Deliver to Owner [______] counterparts of the Agreement, fully executed by Bidder. 2. Deliver with the executed Agreement(s) the Contract security (e.g., performance and payment bonds) and insurance documentation as specified in the Instructions to Bidders and General Conditions, Articles 2 and 6. 3. Other conditions precedent (if any): Describe other conditions that require Successful Bidder’s complaince. Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified will entitle Owner to consider you in default, annul this Notice of Award, and declare your Bid security forfeited. Within ten days after you comply with the above conditions, Owner will return to you one fully executed counterpart of the Agreement, together with any additional copies of the Contract Documents as indicated in Paragraph 2.02 of the General Conditions. Owner: By: Authorized Signature Name (printed): Title: Copy: Engineer END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT NOTICE OF AWARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 51 00 - 2 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT AGREEMENT WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 52 13 - 1 SECTION 00 52 13 AGREEMENT This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC® C-520, Copyright © 2018 by the National Society of Professional Engineers, American Society of Civil Engineers, and American Council of Engineering Companies, or is based in part on excerpts from EJCDC documents. Those portions of the text that originated in published EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 1 – Work ................................................................................................................................................................... 2 ARTICLE 2 – The Project....................................................................................................................................................... 2 ARTICLE 3 – Engineer ............................................................................................................................................................ 2 ARTICLE 4 – Contract Times ............................................................................................................................................... 2 ARTICLE 5 – Contract Price ................................................................................................................................................. 3 ARTICLE 6 – Payment Procedures ................................................................................................................................... 4 ARTICLE 7 – Contract Documents .................................................................................................................................... 4 ARTICLE 8 – Representations, Certifications, And Stipulations........................................................................... 5 ARTICLE 9 – Miscellaneous ................................................................................................................................................. 7 BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT AGREEMENT WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 52 13 - 2 This agreement is by and between Timiber Lakes Water Special Service District (“Owner”) and [Specify formal name of Contractor] (“Contractor”). Terms used in this Agreement have the meanings stated in the General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions. Owner and Contractor hereby agree as follows: ARTICLE 1 – WORK 1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as follows: The Work of this Project consists of approximately 2,470 feet of 12-inch, 1,590 feet of 10-inch, and 260 feet of 6-inch HDPE water pipes, eight new flow meter vaults, development of one new spring, rehabilitation of one existing spring, and two new chlorination buildings. ARTICLE 2 – THE PROJECT 2.01 The Project, of which the Work under the Contract Documents is a part, is generally described as follows: The Work described in Article 1 is the Project. ARTICLE 3 – ENGINEER 3.01 Owner has retained Bowen Collins & Associates (“Engineer”) to act as Owner’s representative, assume all duties and responsibilities of Engineer, and have the rights and authority assigned to Engineer in the Contract. 3.02 The part of the Project that pertains to the Work has been designed by Bowen Collins & Associates. ARTICLE 4 – CONTRACT TIMES 4.01 Time of the Essence A. All time limits for Milestones, if any, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for final payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. 4.02 Contract Times: Dates B. The Work will be substantially completed on or before August 1, 2025, and completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions on or before August 29, 2025. 4.03 Milestones C. Not used. 4.04 Liquidated Damages D. Contractor and Owner recognize that time is of the essence as stated in Paragraph 4.01 above and that Owner will suffer financial and other losses if the Work is not completed and Milestones not achieved within the Contract Times, as duly modified. The parties also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving, in a legal or BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT AGREEMENT WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 52 13 - 3 arbitration proceeding, the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty): 1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner $ 1,000 for each day that expires after the time (as duly adjusted pursuant to the Contract) specified above for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. 2. Completion of Remaining Work: After Substantial Completion, if Contractor shall neglect, refuse, or fail to complete the remaining Work within the Contract Time (as duly adjusted pursuant to the Contract) for completion and readiness for final payment, Contractor shall pay Owner $ 1,000 for each day that expires after such time until the Work is completed and ready for final payment. 3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and final completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently. E. If Owner recovers liquidated damages for a delay in completion by Contractor, then such liquidated damages are Owner’s sole and exclusive remedy for such delay, and Owner is precluded from recovering any other damages, whether actual, direct, excess, or consequential, for such delay, except for special damages (if any) specified in this Agreement. 4.05 Special Damages A. Contractor shall reimburse Owner (1) for any fines or penalties imposed on Owner as a direct result of the Contractor’s failure to attain Substantial Completion according to the Contract Times, and (2) for the actual costs reasonably incurred by Owner for engineering, construction observation, inspection, and administrative services needed after the time specified in Paragraph 4.02 for Substantial Completion (as duly adjusted pursuant to the Contract), until the Work is substantially complete. B. After Contractor achieves Substantial Completion, if Contractor shall neglect, refuse, or fail to complete the remaining Work within the Contract Times, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for the actual costs reasonably incurred by Owner for engineering, construction observation, inspection, and administrative services needed after the time specified in Paragraph 4.02 for Work to be completed and ready for final payment (as duly adjusted pursuant to the Contract), until the Work is completed and ready for final payment. C. The special damages imposed in this paragraph are supplemental to any liquidated damages for delayed completion established in this Agreement. ARTICLE 5 – CONTRACT PRICE 5.01 Owner shall pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents the amounts that follow, subject to adjustment under the Contract: A. Total of Lump Sum Amount and Unit Price Work (subject to final Unit Price adjustment) $ [Enter $ value]. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT AGREEMENT WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 52 13 - 4 ARTICLE 6 – PAYMENT PROCEDURES ARTICLE 6 – 6.01 Submittal and Processing of Payments A. Contractor shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 15 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by Engineer as provided in the General Conditions. 6.02 Progress Payments; Retainage A. Owner shall make progress payments on the basis of Contractor’s Applications for Payment on or about the last day of each month during performance of the Work as provided in Paragraph 6.02.A.1 below, provided that such Applications for Payment have been submitted in a timely manner and otherwise meet the requirements of the Contract. All such payments will be measured by the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions (and in the case of Unit Price Work based on the number of units completed) or, in the event there is no Schedule of Values, as provided elsewhere in the Contract. 1. Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an amount equal to the percentage indicated below but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts as Owner may withhold, including but not limited to liquidated damages, in accordance with the Contract a. 95 percent of Work completed (with the balance being retainage). b. 95 percent of cost of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work (with the balance being retainage). B. Upon Substantial Completion, Owner shall pay an amount sufficient to increase total payments to Contractor to 100 percent of the Work completed, less such amounts set off by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 15.01.E of the General Conditions, and less 200 percent of Engineer’s estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected as shown on the punch list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. 6.03 Final Payment A. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work, Owner shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions. 6.04 Consent of Surety A. Owner will not make final payment or return or release retainage at Substantial completion or any other time, unless contractor submits written consent of the surety to such payment, return, or release. 6.05 Interest A. All amounts not paid when due will bear interest at the rate of 5 percent per annum. ARTICLE 7 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 7.01 Contents A. The Contract Documents consist of all the following: 1. This Agreement. 2. Bonds. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT AGREEMENT WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 52 13 - 5 a. Performance bond (together with power of attorney). b. Payment bond (together with power of attorney). 3. General Conditions. 4. Supplementary Conditions. 5. Specifications as listed in the table of contents of the project manual. 6. Drawings listed in the Index of Drawings in Volume 2 and 3. 7. Addenda (numbers 1 to [Enter last addendum number] , inclusive). 8. Exhibits to this Agreement (enumerated as follows): a. [List attached exhibits]. 9. The following which may be delivered or issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract and are not attached hereto: a. Notice to Proceed. b. Work Change Directives. c. Change Orders. d. Field Orders. e. Warranty Bond, if any. B. The Contract Documents listed in Paragraph 7.01.A are attached to this Agreement (except as expressly noted otherwise above). C. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 7. D. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in the Contract. ARTICLE 8 – REPRESENTATIONS, CERTIFICATIONS, AND STIPULATIONS 8.01 Contractor’s Representations A. In order to induce Owner to enter into this Contract, Contractor makes the following representations: 1. Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents, including Addenda. 2. Contractor has visited the Site, conducted a thorough visual examination of the Site and adjacent areas, and become familiar with the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. 3. Contractor is familiar with all Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. 4. Contractor has carefully studied the reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site and the drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site that have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions, with respect to the Technical Data in such reports and drawings. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT AGREEMENT WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 52 13 - 6 5. Contractor has carefully studied the reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site that have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions, with respect to Technical Data in such reports and drawings. 6. Contractor has considered the information known to Contractor itself; information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; the Contract Documents; and the Technical Data identified in the Supplementary Conditions or by definition, with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and Technical Data on (a) the cost, progress, and performance of the Work; (b) the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and (c) Contractor’s safety precautions and programs. 7. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraph, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract. 8. Contractor is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. 9. Contractor has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents, and of discrepancies between Site conditions and the Contract Documents, and the written resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Contractor. 10. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. 11. Contractor’s entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractor that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. 8.02 Contractor’s Certifications A. Contractor certifies that it has not engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive practices in competing for or in executing the Contract. For the purposes of this Paragraph: 1. “corrupt practice” means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of anything of value likely to influence the action of a public official in the bidding process or in the Contract execution; 2. “fraudulent practice” means an intentional misrepresentation of facts made (a) to influence the bidding process or the execution of the Contract to the detriment of Owner, (b) to establish Bid or Contract prices at artificial non-competitive levels, or (c) to deprive Owner of the benefits of free and open competition; 3. “collusive practice” means a scheme or arrangement between two or more Bidders, with or without the knowledge of Owner, a purpose of which is to establish Bid prices at artificial, non-competitive levels; and BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT AGREEMENT WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 52 13 - 7 4. “coercive practice” means harming or threatening to harm, directly or indirectly, persons or their property to influence their participation in the bidding process or affect the execution of the Contract. 8.03 Standard General Conditions A. Owner stipulates that if the General Conditions that are made a part of this Contract are EJCDC® C 700, Standard General Conditions for the Construction Contract (2018), published by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee, and if Owner is the party that has furnished said General Conditions, then Owner has plainly shown all modifications to the standard wording of such published document to the Contractor, through a process such as highlighting or “track changes” (redline/strikeout), or in the Supplementary Conditions. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT AGREEMENT WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 52 13 - 8 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Owner and Contractor have signed this Agreement. This Agreement will be effective on [Pick date of agreement] (which is the Effective Date of the Contract). Owner: Contractor: (typed or printed name of organization) (typed or printed name of organization) By: By: (individual’s signature) (individual’s signature) Date: Date: (date signed) (date signed) Name: Name: (typed or printed) (typed or printed) Title: Title: (typed or printed) (typed or printed) (If [Type of Entity] is a corporation, a partnership, or a joint venture, attach evidence of authority to sign.) Attest: Attest: (individual’s signature) (individual’s signature) Title: Title: (typed or printed) (typed or printed) Address for giving notices: Address for giving notices: Designated Representative: Designated Representative: Name: Name: (typed or printed) (typed or printed) Title: Title: (typed or printed) (typed or printed) Address: Address: Phone: Phone: Email: Email: (If Owner is a corporation, attach evidence of authority to sign. If Owner is a public body, attach evidence of authority to sign and resolution or other documents authorizing execution of this Agreement.) License No.: (where applicable) State: END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT AGREEMENT WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 52 13 - 1 BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT AGREEMENT WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 52 13 - 2 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT NOTICE TO PROCEED WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 55 00 - 1 SECTION 00 55 00 NOTICE TO PROCEED This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC® C-550, Copyright © 2018 by the National Society of Professional Engineers, American Society of Civil Engineers, and American Council of Engineering Companies, or is based in part on excerpts from EJCDC documents. Those portions of the text that originated in published EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Owner: Timber Lakes Water Special Service District Owner's Contract No.: Engineer: Bowen Collins & Associates Engineer’s Project No.: 757-23-02 Contractor: Contractor's Project No.: Project: Water System Capital Project Contract Name: Water System Capital Project Effective Date of Contract: [Pick Date] TO CONTRACTOR: Owner hereby notifies Contractor that the Contract Times under the above Contract will commence to run on [Pick Date] pursuant to Paragraph 4.01 of the General Conditions. On that date, Contractor shall start performing its obligations under the Contract Documents. No Work shall be done at the Site prior to such date. In accordance with the Agreement, the date of Substantial Completion is [Pick Date] and the date of readiness for final payment is [Pick Date]. The number of days to achieve Substantial Completion is [Specify number of days] from the date stated above for the commencement of the Contract Times, resulting in a date for Substantial Completion of [Pick Date] and the number of days to achieve readiness for final payment is [Specify number of days] from the commencement date of the Contract Times, resulting in a date for readiness for final payment of [Pick Date]. Before starting any work at the Site, Contractor must comply with the following: [Specify any access limitations, security procedures, or other restrictions] Owner: Authorized Signature By: Title: Date Issued: [Pick Date] Copy: Engineer BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT NOTICE TO PROCEED WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 55 00 - 2 END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PERFORMANCE BOND WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 61 14 - 1 SECTION 00 61 14 PERFORMANCE BOND Copyright © 2018 (EJCDC® C-610) National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Contractor Surety Name: Full formal name of Contractor Name: Full formal name of Surety Address (principal place of business): Address (principal place of business): Full address of Contractor Full address of Surety Owner Contract Name: Timber Lakes Water Special Service District Description (name and location): Mailing address (principal place of business): Water System Capital Project Timber Lakes, UT Full address of Owner Contract Price: Amount from Contract Effective Date of Contract: Date from Contract Bond Bond Amount: Bond Amount Date of Bond: Bond Date (Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Effective Date of Contract) Modifications to this Bond form: ☐ None ☐ See Paragraph 16 Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth herein, do each cause this Performance Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative. Contractor as Principal Surety (Full formal name of Contractor) (Full formal name of Surety) (corporate seal) By: By: (Signature) (Signature)(Attach Power of Attorney) Name: Name: (Printed or typed) (Printed or typed) Title: Title: Attest: Attest: (Signature) (Signature) Name: Name: (Printed or typed) (Printed or typed) Title: Title: Notes: (1) Provide supplemental execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers . (2) Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner, or other party is considered plural where applicable. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PERFORMANCE BOND WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 61 14 - 2 1. Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assign s to Owner for the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference. 2. If Contractor performs the Construction Contract, Surety and Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond, except when applicable to participate in a conference as provided in Paragraph 3. 3. If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract, Surety’s obligation under this Bond will arise after: 3.1 Owner first provides notice to Contractor and Surety that Owner is considering declaring a Contractor Default. Such notice may indicate whether Owner is requesting a conference among owner, Contractor, and Surety to discuss contractor’s performance. If owner does not request a conference, surety may, within five (5) business days after receipt of owner’s notice, request such a conference. If surety timely requests a conference, owner shall attend. Unless owner agrees otherwise, any conference requested under this Paragraph 3.1 will be held within ten (10) business days of surety’s receipt of owner’s notice. If owner, contractor, and surety agree, contractor shall be allowed a reasonable time to perform the Construction Contract, but such an agreement does not waive owner’s right, if any, subsequently to declare a Contractor Default; 3.2 Owner declares a Contractor Default, terminates the Construction Contract and notifies surety; and 3.3 Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price in accordance with the terms of the Construction Contract to surety or to a contractor selected to perform the Construction Contract. 4. Failure on the part of owner to comply with the notice requirement in Paragraph 3.1 does not constitute a failure to comply with a condition precedent to surety’s obligations, or release surety from its obligations, except to the extent surety demonstrates actual prejudice. 5. When owner has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 3, surety shall promptly and at surety’s expense take one of the following actions: 5.1 Arrange for contractor, with the consent of owner, to perform and complete the Construction Contract; 5.2 Undertake to perform and complete the Construction Contract itself, through its agents or independent contractors; 5.3 Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to owner for a contract for performance and completion of the Construction Contract, arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by owner and a contractor selected with owners concurrence, to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Construction Contract, and pay to owner the amount of damages as described in Paragraph 7 in excess of the Balance of the Contract Price incurred by owner as a result of contractor Default; or 5.4 Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new contractor, and with reasonable promptness under the circumstances: 5.4.1 After investigation, determine the amount for which it may be liable to owner and, as soon as practicable after the amount is determined, make payment to owner; or 5.4.2 Deny liability in whole or in part and notify owner, citing the reasons for denial. 6. If surety does not proceed as provided in Paragraph 5 with reasonable promptness, surety shall be deemed to be in default on this Bond seven days after receipt of an additional written notice from owner to surety demanding that surety perform its obligations under this Bond, and owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to owner. If surety proceeds as provided in Paragraph 5.4, and owner refuses the payment, or surety has denied liability, in whole or in part, without further notice, owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to owner. 7. If surety elects to act under Paragraph 5.1, 5.2, or 5.3, then the responsibilities of surety to owner will not be greater than those of contractor under the Construction Contract, and the responsibilities of owner to surety will not be greater than those of owner under the Construction Contract. Subject to the commitment by owner to pay the Balance of the Contract Price, surety is obligated, without duplication for: 7.1 the responsibilities of contractor for correction of defective work and completion of the Construction Contract; BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PERFORMANCE BOND WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 61 14 - 3 7.2 additional legal, design professional, and delay costs resulting from contractor’s Default, and resulting from the actions or failure to act of surety under Paragraph 5; and 7.3 liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Construction Contract, actual damages caused by delayed performance or non-performance of contractor. 8. If surety elects to act under Paragraph 5.1, 5.3, or 5.4, surety’s liability is limited to the amount of this Bond. 9. Surety shall not be liable to owner or others for obligations of contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price will not be reduced or set off on account of any such unrelated obligations. No right of ac tion will accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than owner or its heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns. 10. Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders, and other obligations. 11. Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond must be instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the work or part of the work is located and must be instituted within two years after a declaration of Contractor Defau lt or within two years after contractor ceased working or within two years after surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this Bond, whichever occurs first. If the provisions of this paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum perio ds of limitations available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit will be applicable. 12. Notice to surety, owner, or contractor must be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the page on which their signature appears. 13. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement will be deemed deleted therefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement will be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond will be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. 14. Definitions 14.1 Balance of the Contract Price—The total amount payable by owner to contractor under the Construction Contract after all proper adjustments have been made including allowance for contractor for any amounts received or to be received by owner in settlement of insurance or other claims for damages to which contractor is entitled, reduced by all valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of contractor under the Construction Contract. 14.2 Construction Contract—The agreement between owner and Contractor identified on the cover page, including all Contract Documents and changes made to the agreement and the Contract Documents. 14.3 Contractor Default—Failure of contractor, which has not been remedied or waived, to perform or otherwise to comply with a material term of the Construction Contract. 14.4 Owner Default—Failure of owner, which has not been remedied or waived, to pay contractor as required under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other material terms of the Construction Contract. 14.5 Contract Documents—All the documents that comprise the agreement between owner and Contractor. 15. If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a contractor and subcontractor, the term Contractor in this Bond will be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner will be deemed to be Contractor. 16. Modifications to this Bond are as follows: 16.1 Describe modifications or select “None” END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PERFORMANCE BOND WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 61 14 - 4 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PAYMENT BOND WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 61 15 - 1 SECTION 00 61 15 PAYMENT BOND Copyright © 2018 (EJCDC® C-615) National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Contractor Surety Name: Full formal name of Contractor Name: Full formal name of Surety Address (principal place of business): Address (principal place of business): Full address of Contractor Full address of Surety Owner Construction Contract Name: Timber Lakes Special Service District Description (name and location): Mailing address (principal place of business): Water System Capital Project Timber Lakes, UT 450 West 910 South Suite 100 Heber City, UT 84032 Contract Price: Amount from Contract Effective Date of Contract: Date from Contract Bond Bond Amount: Bond Amount Date of Bond: Bond Date (Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Effective Date of Contract) Modifications to this Bond form: ☐ None ☐ See Paragraph 18 Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth herein, do each cause this Performance Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative. Contractor as Principal Surety (Full formal name of Contractor) (Full formal name of Surety) (corporate seal) By: By: (Signature) (Signature)(Attach Power of Attorney) Name: Name: (Printed or typed) (Printed or typed) Title: Title: Attest: Attest: (Signature) (Signature) Name: Name: (Printed or typed) (Printed or typed) Title: Title: Notes: (1) Provide supplemental execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers. (2) Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner, or other party is considered plural where applicable. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PAYMENT BOND WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 61 15 - 2 1. Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assign s to owner to pay for labor, materials, and equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference, subject to the following terms. 2. If contractor promptly makes payment of all sums due to Claimants, and defends, indemnifies, and holds harmless owner from claims, demands, liens, or suits by any person or entity seeking payment for labor, materials, or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, then surety and contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond. 3. If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract, surety’s obligation to owner under this Bond will arise after owner has promptly notified contractor and surety (at the address described in Paragraph 13) of claims, demands, liens, or suits against owner or owner’s property by any person or entity seeking payment for labor, materials, or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, and tendered defense of such claims, demands, liens, or suits to contractor and surety. 4. When owner has satisfied the conditions in Paragraph 3, surety shall promptly and at surety’s expense defend, indemnify, and hold harmless owner against a duly tendered claim, demand, lien, or suit. 5. Surety’s obligations to a Claimant under this Bond will arise after the following: 5.1 Claimants who do not have a direct contract with contractor 5.1.1 have furnished a written notice of non-payment to contractor, stating with substantial accuracy the amount claimed and the name of the party to whom the materials were, or equipment was, furnished or supplied or for whom the labor was done or performed, within ninety (90) days after having last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment included in the Claim; and 5.1.2 have sent a Claim to surety (at the address described in Paragraph 13). 5.2 Claimants who are employed by or have a direct contract with contractor have sent a Claim to surety (at the address described in Paragraph 13). 6. If a notice of non-payment required by Paragraph 5.1.1 is given by owner to contractor, that is sufficient to satisfy a Claimant’s obligation to furnish a written notice of non-payment under Paragraph 5.1.1. 7. When a Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 5.1 or 5.2, whichever is applicable, surety shall promptly and at surety’s expense take the following actions: 7.1 Send an answer to the Claimant, with a copy to owner, within sixty (60) days after receipt of the Claim, stating the amounts that are undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that are disputed; and 7.2 Pay or arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts. 7.3 Surety’s failure to discharge its obligations under Paragraph 7.1 or 7.2 will not be deemed to constitute a waiver of defenses surety or Contractor may have or acquire as to a Claim, except as to undisputed amounts for which surety and Claimant have reached agreement. If, however, surety fails to discharge its obligations under Paragraph 7.1 or 7.2, surety shall indemnify the Claimant for the reasonable attorney’s fees the Claimant incurs thereafter to recover any sums found to be due and owing to the Claimant. 8. Surety’s total obligation will not exceed the amount of this Bond, plus the amount of reasonable attorney’s fees provided under Paragraph 7.3, and the amount of this Bond will be credited for any payments made in good faith by surety. 9. Amounts owed by owner to contractor under the Construction Contract will be used for the performance of the Construction Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any construction performance bond. By contractor furnishing and owner accepting this Bond, they agree that all funds earned by contractor in the performance of the Construction Contract are dedicated to satisfying obligations of contractor and Surety under this Bond, subject to owner’s priority to use the funds for the completion of the work. 10. Surety shall not be liable to owner, Claimants, or others for obligations of contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract. Owner shall not be liable for the payment of any costs or expenses of any Claimant under this Bond and shall have BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PAYMENT BOND WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 61 15 - 3 under this Bond no obligation to make payments to or give notice on behalf of Claimants, or otherwise have any obligations to Claimants under this Bond. 11. Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders, and other obligations. 12. No suit or action will be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of competent jurisdiction in the stat e in which the project that is the subject of the Construction Contract is located or after the expiration of one year from the date (1) on which the Claimant sent a Claim to surety pursuant to Paragraph 5.1.2 or 5.2, or (2) on which the last labor or service was performed by anyone or the last materials or equipment were furnished by anyone under the Construction Contract, whichever of (1) or (2) first occurs. If the provisions of this paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitati on available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit will be applicable. 13. Notice and Claims to surety, owner, or contractor must be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the page on which their signature appears. Actual receipt of notice or Claims, however accomplished, will be sufficient compliance as of the date received. 14. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement will be deemed deleted h ere from and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement will be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond will be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. 15. Upon requests by any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond, contractor and Owner shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be made. 16. Definitions 16.1 Claim—A written statement by the Claimant including at a minimum: 16.1.1 The name of the Claimant; 16.1.2 The name of the person for whom the labor was done, or materials or equipment furnished; 16.1.3 A copy of the agreement or purchase order pursuant to which labor, materials, or equipment was furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract; 16.1.4 A brief description of the labor, materials, or equipment furnished; 16.1.5 The date on which the Claimant last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract; 16.1.6 The total amount earned by the Claimant for labor, materials, or equipment furnished as of the date of the Claim; 16.1.7 The total amount of previous payments received by the Claimant; and 16.1.8 The total amount due and unpaid to the Claimant for labor, materials, or equipment furnished as of the date of the Claim. 16.2 Claimant—An individual or entity having a direct contract with contractor or with a subcontractor of contractor to furnish labor, materials, or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract. The term Claimant also includes any individual or entity that has rightfully asserted a claim under an applicable mechanic’s lien or similar statute against the real property upon which the Project is located. The intent of this Bond is to include without limitation in the terms of “labor, materials, or equipment” that part of the water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service, or rental equipment used in the Construction Contract, architectural and engineering services required for performance of the work of contractor and contractor’s subcontractors, and all other items for which a mechanic’s lien may be asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor, materials, or equipment were furnished. 16.3 Construction Contract—The agreement between owner and Contractor identified on the cover page, including all Contract Documents and all changes made to the agreement and the Contract Documents. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PAYMENT BOND WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 61 15 - 4 16.4 Owner Default—Failure of owner, which has not been remedied or waived, to pay contractor as required under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other material terms of the Construction Contract. 16.5 Contract Documents—All the documents that comprise the agreement between owner and Contractor. 17. If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a contractor and subcontractor, the term Contractor in this Bond will be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner will be deemed to be Contractor. 18. Modifications to this Bond are as follows: 18.1 Describe modifications or select “None” END OF SECTION From To 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. a.X b.X c. 6. 7. 8. 9. Payment of: is recommended by: Payment of: is approved by: By Date Approved By: Project: Water System Capital Project Application Date: Via (Engineer): SECTION 00 62 76 CONTRACTOR'S APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT Copyright© 2018 (EJCDC C-620) National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Deductions Contractor's Application for Payment No. Application For Payment Change Order Summary Approved Change Orders 757-23-02 Engineer's Project No: Bowen Collins and Associates Application Period: From (Contractor): Contract: Water System Capital Project Contractor's Project No:Owner's Contract No: Timber Lakes Water Special Service District To (Owner): Number Additions -$ -$ NET CHANGE BY CHANGE ORDERS -$ TOTALS -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ -$ (Date) (Line 8 or or other - attach explaination of othe other amount) -$ (Line 8 or other - attach explaination of othe other amount) CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION -$ RETAINAGE AMOUNT ELIGIBLE TO DATE (Line 4 - Line 5c) ……………………………………………………. LESS PREVIOUS PAYMENTS (Line 6 of prior Application) …………………………. AMOUNT DUE THIS APPLICATION ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… BALANCE TO FINISH, PLUS RETAINAGE ORIGINAL CONTRACT PRICE ……………………………………………………………………………….. Net change by Change Orders ……………………………………………………………………………………….. Current Contract Price (Line 1 ± Line 2) …………………………………………………………………………….. TOTAL COMPLETED AND STORED TO DATE (Column F total on Progress Estimates) ………………………………………………………………………………….. Total retainage (Line 5a + Line 5b …………………………………………………………………………………………………… BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT CONTRACTOR'S APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PAGE 00 62 76 - 1 (Column G total on Progress Estimates + Line 5c above) ………………………………………………. 5.00%-$ 5.00%-$ Work Completed ……………………………………………… Stored Material ………………………………………………………. The undersigned Contractor certifies, to the best of its knowledge, the following: (1) All previous progress payments received from Owner on account of Work done under the Contract have been applied on account to discharge Contractor's legitimate obligations incurred in connection with the Work covered by prior Applications for Payment; (2) Title to all Work, materials and equipment incorporated in said Work, or otherwise listed in or covered by this Application for Payment, will pass to Owner at time of payment free and clear of all Liens, security interests, and encumbrances (except such as are covered by a bond acceptable to Owner indemnifying Owner against any such Liens, security interest, or encumbrances); and (3) All the Work covered by this Application for Payment is in accordance with the Contract Documents and is not defective. Contractor Signature (Engineer)(Date) (Funding or Financing Entity (if applicable)(Date) (Engineer) THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT FIELD ORDER FORM WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 63 36 - 1 SECTION 00 63 36 FIELD ORDER FORM Copyright © 2018 (EJCDC® C-942) National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Field Order No. Owner: Timber Lakes Water Special Service District Owner’s Project No.: Engineer: Bowen Collins and Associates Engineer’s Project No.: 757-23-02 Contractor: Contractor's Project No.: Project: Water System Capital Project Contract Name: Water System Capital Project Date Issued: [Pick a date] Effective Date of Field Order: [Pick a date] Contractor is hereby directed to promptly execute this Field Order, issued in accordance with Paragraph 11.04 of the General Conditions, for minor changes in the Work without changes in Contract Price or Contract Times. If Contractor considers that a change in Contract Price or Contract Times is required, submit a Change Proposal before proceeding with this Work. Reference: Description: Attachments: ISSUED: RECEIVED: By: By: Engineer (Authorized Signature) Contractor (Authorized Signature) Title: Title: Date: Date: Copy to: Owner END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT FIELD ORDER FORM WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 63 36 - 2 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 63 49 - 1 SECTION 00 63 49 WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC® C-940, Copyright © 2018 by the National Society of Professional Engineers, American Society of Civil Engineers, and American Council of Engineering Companies, or is based in part on excerpts from EJCD C documents. Those portions of the text that originated in published EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. Work Change Directive No. Owner: Timber Lakes Water Special Service District Owner’s Project No.: Engineer: Bowen Collins and Associates Engineer’s Project No.: 757-23-02 Contractor: Contractor's Project No.: Project: Water System Capital Project Contract Name: Water System Capital Project Date Issued: [Pick a date] Effective Date of Work Change Directive: [Pick a date] Contractor is directed to proceed promptly with the following change(s): Description: Attachments: Purpose for Work Change Directive: Directive to proceed promptly with the Work described herein, prior to agreeing to changes on Contract Price and Contract Time, is issued due to: ☐ Non-agreement on pricing of proposed change. ☐ Necessity to proceed for schedule or other Project reasons. Estimated Change in Contract Price and Contract Times (non-binding, preliminary): Contract Price $ [increase] [decrease] [not yet estimated] Contract Time days [increase] [decrease] [not yet estimated] BASIS OF ESTIMATED CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE: ☐ Lump Sum ☐ Unit Price ☐ Cost of the Work ☐ Other RECOMMENDED BY ENGINEER: AUTHORIZED BY OWNER: By: By: Engineer (Authorized Signature) Owner (Authorized Signature) Title: Title: Date: Date: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 63 49 - 2 END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CHANGE ORDER WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 63 63 - 1 SECTION 00 63 63 CHANGE ORDER Copyright © 2018 (EJCDC® C-941) National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Change Order No. Owner: Timber Lakes Special Service District Owner's Contract No.: Contractor: Contractor’s Project No.: Engineer: Bowen Collins and Associates Engineer's Project No.: 757-23-02 Project: Water System Capital Project Contract Name: Water System Capital Project Date Issued: Pick a date Effective Date of Change Order: Pick a date The Contract is modified as follows upon execution of this Change Order: Description: Attachments: CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE CHANGE IN CONTRACT TIMES note changes in Milestones if applicable Original Contract Price: Original Contract Times: $ Substantial Completion: Ready for Final Payment: days or dates [increase] [decrease] from previously approved Change Orders No. ____ to No. ____: [increase] [decrease] from previously approved Change Orders No. ____ to No. ____: $ Substantial Completion: Ready for Final Payment: days Contract Price prior to this Change Order: Contract Times prior to this Change Order: $ Substantial Completion: Ready for Final Payment: days or dates BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CHANGE ORDER WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 63 63 - 2 [increase] [decrease] of this Change Order: [increase] [decrease] of this Change Order: $ Substantial Completion: Ready for Final Payment: days or dates Contract Price incorporating this Change Order: Contract Times with all approved Change Orders: $ Substantial Completion: Ready for Final Payment: days or dates RECOMMENDED BY ENGINEER: ACCEPTED BY OWNER: ACCEPTED BY CONTRACTOR: By: By: By: Engineer (if required) Owner (Authorized) Signature) Contractor (Authorized) Signature) Title: Title: Title : Date: Pick a date Date: Pick a date Date : Pick a date Approved by Funding Agency (if applicable) By: Date: Pick a date Title: END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 65 16 - 1 SECTION 00 65 16 CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Copyright © 2018 (EJCDC® C-625) National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Owner: Timber Lakes Water Special Service District Owner's Contract No.: Engineer: Bowen Collins and Associates Engineer’s Project No.: 757-23-02 Contractor: Contractor’s Project No.: Project: Water System Capital Project Contract Name: Water System Capital Project This [Select preliminary or final] Certificate of Substantial Completion applies to: ☐ All Work ☐ The following specified portions of the Work: Date of Substantial completion: [Select date, as determined by Engineer] The Work to which this Certificate applies has been inspected by authorized representatives of Owner, Contractor, and Engineer, and found to be substantially complete. The Date of Substantial Completion of the Work or portion thereof designated above is hereby established, subject to the provisions of the Contract pertaining to Substantial Completion. The date of Substantial Completion in the final Certificate of Substantial Completion marks the commencement of the contractual correction period and applicable warranties required by the Contract. A punch list of items to be completed or corrected is attached to this Certificate. This list may not be all-inclusive, and the failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Amendments of contractual responsibilities recorded in this Certificate should be the product of mutual agreement of Owner and Contractor; see Paragraph 15.03.D of the General Conditions. The responsibilities between Owner and Contractor for security, operation, safety, maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance, and warranties upon Owner's use or occupancy of the Work must be as provided in the Contract, except as amended as follows: Amendments to Owner's responsibilities: ☐ None ☐ As follows Amendments to Contractor's responsibilities: ☐ None ☐ As follows The following documents are attached to and made a part of this Certificate: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 65 16 - 2 [List attachments such as punch list; other documents] This Certificate does not constitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents, nor is it a release of Contractor's obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract. ENGINEER: By: (signature): (Authorized signature) Name (printed): Title: Date: Pick a date. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT NOTICE OF ACCEPTABILITY OF WORK WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 65 18 - 1 SECTION 00 65 18 NOTICE OF ACCEPTABILITY OF WORK Copyright © 2018 (EJCDC® C-626) National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Owner: Timber Lakes Water Special Service District Owner's Project No.: Engineer: Bowen Collins and Associates Engineer’s Project No.: 757-23-02 Contractor: Contractor’s Project No.: Project: Water System Capital Project Contract Name: Water System Capital Project Notice Date: [Pick a date] Effective Date of Construction Contract: [Pick a date] Engineer hereby gives notice to Owner and Contractor that Engineer recommends final payment to Contractor, and that the Work furnished and performed by Contractor under the Construction Contract is acceptable, expressly subject to the provisions of the Construction Contract’s Contract Documents (“Contract Documents”) and of the Agreement between Owner and Engineer for Professional Services dated [Pick a date] (“Owner Engineer Agreement”). This Notice of Acceptability of Work (Notice) is made expressly subject to the following terms and conditions to which all who receive and rely on said Notice agree: 1. This Notice has been prepared with the skill and care ordinarily used by members of the engineering profession practicing under similar conditions at the same time and in the same locality. 2. This Notice reflects and is an expression of the Engineer’s professional opinion. 3. This Notice has been prepared to the best of Engineer’s knowledge, information, and belief as of the Notice Date. 4. This Notice is based entirely on and expressly limited by the scope of services Engineer has been employed by Owner to perform or furnish during construction of the Project (including observation of the Contractor’s Work) under the Owner Engineer Agreement and applies only to facts that are within Engineer’s knowledge or could reasonably have been ascertained by Engineer as a result of carrying out the responsibilities specifically assigned to Engineer under such Owner Engineer Agreement. 5. This Notice is not a guarantee or warranty of Contractor’s performance under the Construction Contract, an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, including but not limited to defective Work discovered after final inspection, nor an assumption of responsibility for any failure of Contractor to furnish and perform the Work thereunder in accordance with the Contract Documents, or to otherwise comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein. 6. This Notice does not relieve Contractor of any surviving obligations under the Construction Contract and is subject to Owner’s reservations of rights with respect to completion and final payment. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT NOTICE OF ACCEPTABILITY OF WORK WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 65 18 - 2 This Certificate does not constitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents, nor is it a release of Contractor's obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract. ENGINEER: By: (signature): (Authorized signature) Name (printed): Title: Date: [Pick a date] END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 1 SECTION 00 70 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Copyright © 2018 (EJCDC® C-700) National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 1 – Definitions and Terminology ................................................................................................................... 6 1.01 Defined Terms ................................................................................................................................................... 6 1.02 Terminology ..................................................................................................................................................... 10 ARTICLE 2 – Preliminary Matters................................................................................................................................... 12 2.01 Delivery of Performance and Payment Bonds; Evidence of Insurance ................................... 12 2.02 Copies of Documents .................................................................................................................................... 12 2.03 Before Starting Construction .................................................................................................................... 12 2.04 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives ........................... 12 2.05 Acceptance of Schedules ............................................................................................................................. 13 2.06 Electronic Transmittals ............................................................................................................................... 13 ARTICLE 3 – Contract Documents: Intent, Requirements, Reuse...................................................................... 13 3.01 Intent ................................................................................................................................................................... 13 3.02 Reference Standards ..................................................................................................................................... 14 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies ............................................................................................... 14 3.04 Requirements of the Contract Documents .......................................................................................... 15 3.05 Reuse of Documents ..................................................................................................................................... 16 ARTICLE 4 – Commencement and Progress of the Work ..................................................................................... 16 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed ................................................................. 16 4.02 Starting the Work........................................................................................................................................... 16 4.03 Reference Points ............................................................................................................................................ 16 4.04 Progress Schedule ......................................................................................................................................... 16 4.05 Delays in Contractor’s Progress ............................................................................................................... 17 ARTICLE 5 – Site; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions ......... 18 5.01 Availability of Lands ..................................................................................................................................... 18 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas ....................................................................................................................... 18 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions ...................................................................................................... 19 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions ...................................................................................... 20 5.05 Underground Facilities ................................................................................................................................ 22 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site .................................................................................... 24 ARTICLE 6 – Bonds and Insurance ................................................................................................................................. 26 BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 2 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds ............................................................................................ 26 6.02 Insurance—General Provisions ............................................................................................................... 27 6.03 Contractor’s Insurance ................................................................................................................................ 28 6.04 Builder’s Risk and Other Property Insurance .................................................................................... 29 6.05 Property Losses; Subrogation................................................................................................................... 30 6.06 Receipt and Application of Property Insurance Proceeds ............................................................ 31 ARTICLE 7 – Contractor’s Responsibilities ................................................................................................................. 31 7.01 Contractor’s Means and Methods of Construction ........................................................................... 31 7.02 Supervision and Superintendence .......................................................................................................... 32 7.03 Labor; Working Hours ................................................................................................................................. 32 7.04 7.04 Services, Materials, and Equipment ............................................................................................. 32 7.05 “Or Equals” ........................................................................................................................................................ 32 7.06 Substitutes ........................................................................................................................................................ 33 7.07 Concerning Subcontractors and Suppliers .......................................................................................... 35 7.08 Patent Fees and Royalties........................................................................................................................... 36 7.09 Permits ............................................................................................................................................................... 37 7.10 Taxes ................................................................................................................................................................... 37 7.11 Laws and Regulations .................................................................................................................................. 37 7.12 Record Documents ........................................................................................................................................ 38 7.13 Safety and Protection ................................................................................................................................... 38 7.14 Hazard Communication Programs ......................................................................................................... 39 7.15 Emergencies ..................................................................................................................................................... 39 7.16 Submittals ......................................................................................................................................................... 39 7.17 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee ................................................................................. 42 7.18 Indemnification .............................................................................................................................................. 43 7.19 Delegation of Professional Design Services ........................................................................................ 43 ARTICLE 8 – Other Work at the Site .............................................................................................................................. 44 8.01 Other Work ....................................................................................................................................................... 44 8.02 Coordination .................................................................................................................................................... 45 8.03 Legal Relationships ....................................................................................................................................... 45 ARTICLE 9 – Owner’s Responsibilities ......................................................................................................................... 46 9.01 Communications to Contractor ................................................................................................................ 46 9.02 Replacement of Engineer ............................................................................................................................ 46 9.03 Furnish Data ..................................................................................................................................................... 46 9.04 Pay When Due ................................................................................................................................................. 47 BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 3 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports, Tests, and Drawings .................................................................... 47 9.06 Insurance ........................................................................................................................................................... 47 9.07 Change Orders ................................................................................................................................................. 47 9.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals .......................................................................................................... 47 9.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities ............................................................................................. 47 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition .......................................................................... 47 9.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements ..................................................................................................... 47 9.12 Safety Programs ............................................................................................................................................. 47 ARTICLE 10 – Engineer’s Status During Construction ........................................................................................... 48 10.01 Owner’s Representative .............................................................................................................................. 48 10.02 Visits to Site ...................................................................................................................................................... 48 10.03 Resident Project Representative ............................................................................................................. 48 10.04 Engineer’s Authority..................................................................................................................................... 48 10.05 Determinations for Unit Price Work ...................................................................................................... 49 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work ................ 49 10.07 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities ........................................................... 49 10.08 Compliance with Safety Program ............................................................................................................ 49 ARTICLE 11 – Changes to the Contract......................................................................................................................... 50 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract ....................................................................................... 50 11.02 Change Orders ................................................................................................................................................. 50 11.03 Work Change Directives .............................................................................................................................. 50 11.04 Field Orders ...................................................................................................................................................... 51 11.05 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work ............................................................................................. 51 11.06 Unauthorized Changes in the Work ....................................................................................................... 51 11.07 Change of Contract Price ............................................................................................................................. 51 11.08 Change of Contract Times........................................................................................................................... 53 11.09 Change Proposals ........................................................................................................................................... 53 11.10 Notification to Surety ................................................................................................................................... 54 ARTICLE 12 – Claims ............................................................................................................................................................ 54 12.01 Claims ................................................................................................................................................................. 54 ARTICLE 13 – Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work .......................................................................... 55 13.01 Cost of the Work ............................................................................................................................................. 55 13.02 Allowances ........................................................................................................................................................ 59 13.03 Unit Price Work .............................................................................................................................................. 59 ARTICLE 14 – Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal, or Acceptance of Defective Work ........... 60 BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 4 14.01 Access to Work ................................................................................................................................................ 60 14.02 Tests, Inspections, and Approvals .......................................................................................................... 60 14.03 Defective Work ............................................................................................................................................... 61 14.04 Acceptance of Defective Work .................................................................................................................. 62 14.05 Uncovering Work ........................................................................................................................................... 62 14.06 Owner May Stop the Work ......................................................................................................................... 62 14.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work ...................................................................................................... 63 ARTICLE 15 – Payments to Contractor; Set-Offs; Completion; Correction Period ..................................... 63 15.01 Progress Payments ........................................................................................................................................ 63 15.02 Contractor’s Warranty of Title ................................................................................................................. 66 15.03 Substantial Completion ............................................................................................................................... 66 15.04 Partial Use or Occupancy ............................................................................................................................ 67 15.05 Final Inspection .............................................................................................................................................. 68 15.06 Final Payment .................................................................................................................................................. 68 15.07 Waiver of Claims ............................................................................................................................................ 69 15.08 Correction Period ........................................................................................................................................... 69 ARTICLE 16 – Suspension of Work and Termination ............................................................................................. 70 16.01 Owner May Suspend Work ........................................................................................................................ 70 16.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause ............................................................................................................. 70 16.03 Owner May Terminate for Convenience .............................................................................................. 72 16.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate ............................................................................................ 72 ARTICLE 17 – Final Resolution of Disputes ................................................................................................................ 72 17.01 Methods and Procedures ............................................................................................................................ 72 ARTICLE 18 – Miscellaneous ............................................................................................................................................ 73 18.01 Giving Notice .................................................................................................................................................... 73 18.02 Computation of Times .................................................................................................................................. 73 18.03 Cumulative Remedies ................................................................................................................................... 73 18.04 Limitation of Damages ................................................................................................................................. 73 18.05 No Waiver ......................................................................................................................................................... 73 18.06 Survival of Obligations ................................................................................................................................. 73 18.07 Controlling Law .............................................................................................................................................. 74 18.08 Assignment of Contract ............................................................................................................................... 74 18.09 Successors and Assigns ............................................................................................................................... 74 18.10 Headings ............................................................................................................................................................ 74 BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 5 BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 6 ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 Defined Terms A. Wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, a term printed with initial capital letters, including the term’s singular and plural forms, will have the meaning indicated in the definitions below. In addition to terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms. 1. Addenda—Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents. 2. Agreement—The written instrument, executed by Owner and Contractor, that sets forth the Contract Price and Contract Times, identifies the parties and the Engineer, and designates the specific items that are Contract Documents. 3. Application for Payment—The document prepared by Contractor, in a form acceptable to Engineer, to request progress or final payments, and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. 4. Bid—The offer of a Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Work to be performed. 5. Bidder—An individual or entity that submits a Bid to Owner. 6. Bidding Documents—The Bidding Requirements, the proposed Contract Documents, and all Addenda. 7. Bidding Requirements—The Advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, Bid Bond or other Bid security, if any, the Bid Form, and the Bid with any attachments. 8. Change Order—A document which is signed by Contractor and Owner and authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, or other revision to the Contract, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract. 9. Change Proposal—A written request by Contractor, duly submitted in compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein, seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times; contesting an initial decision by Engineer concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; challenging a set-off against payments due; or seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. 10. Claim a. A demand or assertion by Owner directly to Contractor, duly submitted in compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein, seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times; contesting an initial decision by Engineer concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; contesting Engineer’s decision regarding a Change Proposal; seeking resolution of a contractual issue that Engineer has declined to address; or seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 7 b. A demand or assertion by Contractor directly to Owner, duly submitted in compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein, contesting Engineer’s decision regarding a Change Proposal, or seeking resolution of a contractual issue that Engineer has declined to address. c. A demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor, duly submitted in compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein, made pursuant to Paragraph 12.01.A.4, concerning disputes arising after Engineer has issued a recommendation of final payment. d. A demand for money or services by a third party is not a Claim. 11. Constituent of Concern—Asbestos, petroleum, radioactive materials, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), lead-based paint (as defined by the HUD/EPA standard), hazardous waste, and any substance, product, waste, or other material of any nature whatsoever that is or becomes listed, regulated, or addressed pursuant to Laws and Regulations regulating, relating to, or imposing liability or standards of conduct concerning, any hazardous, toxic, or dangerous waste, substance, or material. 12. Contract—The entire and integrated written contract between Owner and Contractor concerning the Work. 13. Contract Documents—Those items so designated in the Agreement, and which together comprise the Contract. 14. Contract Price—The money that Owner has agreed to pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 15. Contract Times—The number of days or the dates by which Contractor shall: (a) achieve Milestones, if any; (b) achieve Substantial Completion; and (c) complete the Work. 16. Contractor—The individual or entity with which Owner has contracted for performance of the Work. 17. Cost of the Work—See Paragraph 13.01 for definition. 18. Drawings—The part of the Contract that graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work to be performed by Contractor. 19. Effective Date of the Contract—The date, indicated in the Agreement, on which the Contract becomes effective. 20. Electronic Document—Any Project-related correspondence, attachments to correspondence, data, documents, drawings, information, or graphics, including but not limited to Shop Drawings and other Submittals, that are in an electronic or digital format. 21. Electronic Means—Electronic mail (email), upload/download from a secure Project website, or other communications methods that allow: (a) the transmission or communication of Electronic Documents; (b) the documentation of transmissions, including sending and receipt; (c) printing of the transmitted Electronic Document by the recipient; (d) the storage and archiving of the Electronic Document by sender and recipient; and (e) the use by recipient of the Electronic Document for purposes permitted by this Contract. Electronic Means does not include the use of text messaging, or of Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, or similar social media services for transmission of Electronic Documents. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 8 22. Engineer—The individual or entity named as such in the Agreement. 23. Field Order—A written order issued by Engineer which requires minor changes in the Work but does not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times. 24. Hazardous Environmental Condition—The presence at the Site of Constituents of Concern in such quantities or circumstances that may present a danger to persons or property exposed thereto. a. The presence at the Site of materials that are necessary for the execution of the Work, or that are to be incorporated into the Work, and that are controlled and contained pursuant to industry practices, Laws and Regulations, and the requirements of the Contract, is not a Hazardous Environmental Condition. b. The presence of Constituents of Concern that are to be removed or remediated as part of the Work is not a Hazardous Environmental Condition. c. The presence of Constituents of Concern as part of the routine, anticipated, and obvious working conditions at the Site, is not a Hazardous Environmental Condition. 25. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations—Any and all applicable laws, statutes, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes, and binding decrees, resolutions, and orders of any and all governmental bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction. 26. Liens—Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Contract-related funds, real property, or personal property. 27. Milestone—A principal event in the performance of the Work that the Contract requires Contractor to achieve by an intermediate completion date, or by a time prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 28. Notice of Award—The written notice by Owner to a Bidder of Owner’s acceptance of the Bid. 29. Notice to Proceed—A written notice by Owner to Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Times will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform the Work. 30. Owner—The individual or entity with which Contractor has contracted regarding the Work, and which has agreed to pay Contractor for the performance of the Work, pursuant to the terms of the Contract. 31. Progress Schedule—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising Contractor’s plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times. 32. Project—The total undertaking to be accomplished for Owner by engineers, contractors, and others, including planning, study, design, construction, testing, commissioning, and start-up, and of which the Work to be performed under the Contract Documents is a part. 33. Resident Project Representative—The authorized representative of Engineer assigned to assist Engineer at the Site. As used herein, the term Resident Project Representative (RPR) includes any assistants or field staff of Resident Project Representative. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 9 34. Samples—Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are representative of some portion of the Work and that establish the standards by which such portion of the Work will be judged. 35. Schedule of Submittals—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, of required submittals and the time requirements for Engineer’s review of the submittals. 36. Schedule of Values—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor’s Applications for Payment. 37. Shop Drawings—All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information that are specifically prepared or assembled by or for Contractor and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Shop Drawings, whether approved or not, are not Drawings and are not Contract Documents. 38. Site—Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the Work is to be performed, including rights -of-way and easements, and such other lands or areas furnished by Owner which are designated for the use of Contractor. 39. Specifications—The part of the Contract that consists of written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable to the Work. 40. Subcontractor—An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work. 41. Submittal—A written or graphic document, prepared by or for Contractor, which the Contract Documents require Contractor to submit to Engineer, or that is indicated as a Submittal in the Schedule of Submittals accepted by Engineer. Submittals may include Shop Drawings and Samples; schedules; product data; Owner-delegated designs; sustainable design information; information on special procedures; testing plans; results of tests and evaluations, source quality-control testing and inspections, and field or Site quality-control testing and inspections; warranties and certifications; Suppliers’ instructions and reports; records of delivery of spare parts and tools; operations and maintenance data; Project photographic documentation; record documents; and other such documents required by the Contract Documents. Submittals, whether or not approved or accepted by Engineer, are not Contract Documents. Change Proposals, Change Orders, Claims, notices, Applications for Payment, and requests for interpretation or clarification are not Submittals. 42. Substantial Completion—The time at which the Work (or a specified part thereof) has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, the Work (or a specified part thereof) is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended. The terms “substantially complete” and “substantially completed” as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion of such Work. 43. Successful Bidder—The Bidder to which the Owner makes an award of contract. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 10 44. Supplementary Conditions—The part of the Contract that amends or supplements these General Conditions. 45. Supplier—A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by Contractor or a Subcontractor. 46. Technical Data a. Those items expressly identified as Technical Data in the Supplementary Conditions, with respect to either (1) existing subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site, or existing physical conditions at or adjacent to the Site including existing surface or subsurface structures (except Underground Facilities) or (2) Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site. b. If no such express identifications of Technical Data have been made with respect to conditions at the Site, then Technical Data is defined, with respect to conditions at the Site under Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.06, as the data contained in boring logs, recorded measurements of subsurface water levels, assessments of the condition of subsurface facilities, laboratory test results, and other factual, objective information regarding conditions at the Site that are set forth in any geotechnical, environmental, or other Site or facilities conditions report prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor. c. Information and data regarding the presence or location of Underground Facilities are not intended to be categorized, identified, or defined as Technical Data, and instead Underground Facilities are shown or indicated on the Drawings. 47. Underground Facilities—All active or not-in-service underground lines, pipelines, conduits, ducts, encasements, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or systems at the Site, including but not limited to those facilities or systems that produce, transmit, distribute, or convey telephone or other communications, cable television, fiber optic transmissions, power, electricity, light, heat, gases, oil, crude oil products, liquid petroleum products, water, steam, waste, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. An abandoned facility or system is not an Underground Facility. 48. Unit Price Work—Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. 49. Work—The entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce such construction; furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and equipment into such construction; and may include related services such as testing, start-up, and commissioning, all as required by the Contract Documents. 50. Work Change Directive—A written directive to Contractor issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract, signed by Owner and recommended by Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work. 1.02 Terminology A. The words and terms discussed in Paragraphs 1.02.B, C, D, and E are not defined terms that require initial capital letters, but, when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 11 B. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives: The Contract Documents include the terms “as allowed,” “as approved,” “as ordered,” “as directed” or terms of like effect or import to authorize an exercise of professional judgment by Engineer. In addition, the adjectives “reasonable,” “suitable,” “acceptable,” “proper,” “satisfactory,” or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe an action or determination of Engineer as to the Work. It is intended that such exercise of professional judgment, action, or determination will be solely to evaluate, in general, the Work for compliance with the information in the Contract Documents and with the design concept of the Project as a functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective is not intended to and shall not be effective to assign to Engineer any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of Article 10 or any other provision of the Contract Documents. C. Day: The word “day” means a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. D. Defective: The word “defective,” when modifying the word “Work,” refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it: 1. does not conform to the Contract Documents; 2. does not meet the requirements of any applicable inspection, reference standard, test, or approval referred to in the Contract Documents; or 3. has been damaged prior to Engineer’s recommendation of final payment (unless responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 or Paragraph 15.04). E. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide 1. The word “furnish,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, means to supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment to the Site (or some other specified location) ready for use or installation and in usable or operable condition. 2. The word “install,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, means to put into use or place in final position said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. 3. The words “perform” or “provide,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, means to furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. 4. If the Contract Documents establish an obligation of Contractor with respect to specific services, materials, or equipment, but do not expressly use any of the four words “furnish,” “install,” “perform,” or “provide,” then Contractor shall furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. F. Contract Price or Contract Times: References to a change in “Contract Price or Contract Times” or “Contract Times or Contract Price” or similar, indicate that such change applies to (1) Contract Price, (2) Contract Times, or (3) both Contract Price and Contract Times, as warranted, even if the term “or both” is not expressed. G. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, words or phrases that have a well- known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meaning. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 12 ARTICLE 2 – PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Performance and Payment Bonds; Evidence of Insurance A. Performance and Payment Bonds: When Contractor delivers the signed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner the performance bond and payment bond (if the Contract requires Contractor to furnish such bonds). B. Evidence of Contractor’s Insurance: When Contractor delivers the signed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner, with copies to each additional insured (as identified in the Contract), the certificates, endorsements, and other evidence of insurance required to be provided by Contractor in accordance with Article 6, except to the extent the Supplementary Conditions expressly establish other dates for delivery of specific insurance policies. C. Evidence of Owner’s Insurance: After receipt of the signed counterparts of the Agreement and all required bonds and insurance documentation, Owner shall promptly deliver to Contractor, with copies to each additional insured (as identified in the Contract), the certificates and other evidence of insurance required to be provided by Owner under Article 6. 2.02 Copies of Documents A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor four printed copies of the Contract (including one fully signed counterpart of the Agreement), and one copy in electronic portable document format (PDF). Additional printed copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction. B. Owner shall maintain and safeguard at least one original printed record version of the Contract, including Drawings and Specifications signed and sealed by Engineer and other design professionals. Owner shall make such original printed record version of the Contract available to Contractor for review. Owner may delegate the responsibilities under this provision to Engineer. 2.03 Before Starting Construction A. Preliminary Schedules: Within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Contract (or as otherwise required by the Contract Documents), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for timely review: 1. a preliminary Progress Schedule indicating the times (numbers of days or dates) for starting and completing the various stages of the Work, including any Milestones specified in the Contract; 2. a preliminary Schedule of Submittals; and 3. a preliminary Schedule of Values for all of the Work which includes quantities and prices of items which when added together equal the Contract Price and subdivides the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during performance of the Work. Such prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work. 2.04 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives A. Before any Work at the Site is started, a conference attended by Owner, Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work, and to discuss the schedules referred to in Paragraph 2.03.A, procedures for handling Shop Drawings, Samples, and other BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 13 Submittals, processing Applications for Payment, electronic or digital transmittals, and maintaining required records. B. At this conference Owner and Contractor each shall designate, in writing, a specific individual to act as its authorized representative with respect to the services and responsibilities under the Contract. Such individuals shall have the authority to transmit and receive information, render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of each respective party. 2.05 Acceptance of Schedules A. At least 10 days before submission of the first Application for Payment a conference, attended by Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate, will be held to review the schedules submitted in accordance with Paragraph 2.03.A. No progress payment will be made to Contractor until acceptable schedules are submitted to Engineer. 1. The Progress Schedule will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides an orderly progression of the Work to completion within the Contract Times. Such acceptance will not impose on Engineer responsibility for the Progress Schedule, for sequencing, scheduling, or progress of the Work, nor interfere with or relieve Contractor from Contractor’s full responsibility therefor. 2. Contractor’s Schedule of Submittals will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides a workable arrangement for reviewing and processing the required submittals. 3. Contractor’s Schedule of Values will be acceptable to Engineer as to form and substance if it provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to the component parts of the Work. 4. If a schedule is not acceptable, Contractor will have an additional 10 days to revise and resubmit the schedule. 2.06 Electronic Transmittals A. Except as otherwise stated elsewhere in the Contract, the Owner, Engineer, and Contractor may send, and shall accept, Electronic Documents transmitted by Electronic Means. B. If the Contract does not establish protocols for Electronic Means, then Owner, Engineer, and Contractor shall jointly develop such protocols. C. Subject to any governing protocols for Electronic Means, when transmitting Electronic Documents by Electronic Means, the transmitting party makes no representations as to long-term compatibility, usability, or readability of the Electronic Documents resulting from the recipient’s use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used in the drafting or transmittal of the Electronic Documents. ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE 3.01 Intent A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is required by one Contract Document is as binding as if required by all. B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 14 C. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, if there is a discrepancy between the electronic versions of the Contract Documents (including any printed copies derived from such electronic versions) and the printed record version, the printed record version will govern. D. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations, representations, and agreements, whether written or oral. E. Engineer will issue clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents as provided herein. F. Any provision or part of the Contract Documents held to be void or unenforceable under any Law or Regulation will be deemed stricken, and all remaining provisions will continue to be valid and binding upon Owner and Contractor, which agree that the Contract Documents will be reformed to replace such stricken provision or part thereof with a valid and enforceable provision that comes as close as possible to expressing the intention of the stricken provision. G. Nothing in the Contract Documents creates: 1. any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity performing or furnishing any of the Work, for the benefit of such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity; or 2. any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any money due any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, except as may otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations. 3.02 Reference Standards A. Standards Specifications, Codes, Laws and Regulations 1. Reference in the Contract Documents to standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such reference be specific or by implication, means the standard specification, manual, reference standard, code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Contract if there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. 2. No provision of any such standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code, and no instruction of a Supplier, will be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, or Engineer from those set forth in the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer. No such provision or instruction shall be effective to assign to Owner or Engineer any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility inconsistent with the provisions of the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer. 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A. Reporting Discrepancies 1. Contractor’s Verification of Figures and Field Measurements: Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study the Contract Documents, and check and verify pertinent figures and dimensions therein, particularly with respect to applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy that Contractor discovers, or BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 15 has actual knowledge of, and shall not proceed with any Work affected thereby until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation by Engineer, or by an amendment or supplement to the Contract issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01. 2. Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents: If, before or during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy within the Contract Documents, or between the Contract Documents and (a) any applicable Law or Regulation, (b) actual field conditions, (c) any standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code, or (d) any instruction of any Supplier, then Contractor shall promptly report it to Engineer in writing. Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15) until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved, by a clarification or interpretation by Engineer, or by an amendment or supplement to the Contract issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01. 3. Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof. B. Resolving Discrepancies 1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the provisions of the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer take precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy between such provisions of the Contract Documents and: a. the provisions of any standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code, or the instruction of any Supplier (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference as a Contract Document); or b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work (unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract Documents would result in violation of such Law or Regulation). 3.04 Requirements of the Contract Documents A. During the performance of the Work and until final payment, Contractor and Owner shall submit to the Engineer in writing all matters in question concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents (sometimes referred to as requests for information or interpretation—RFIs), or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents, as soon as possible after such matters arise. Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents, and judge of the acceptability of the Work. B. Engineer will, with reasonable promptness, render a written clarification, interpretation, or decision on the issue submitted, or initiate an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents. Engineer’s written clarification, interpretation, or decision will be final and binding on Contractor, unless it appeals by submitting a Change Proposal, and on Owner, unless it appeals by filing a Claim. C. If a submitted matter in question concerns terms and conditions of the Contract Documents that do not involve (1) the performance or acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents, (2) the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or (3) other engineering or technical matters, then Engineer will promptly notify Owner and Contractor in writing that Engineer is unable to provide a decision or BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 16 interpretation. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on resolution of such a matter in question, either party may pursue resolution as provided in Article 12. 3.05 Reuse of Documents A. Contractor and its Subcontractors and Suppliers shall not: 1. have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications, or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of Engineer or its consultants, including electronic media versions, or reuse any such Drawings, Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of Owner and Engineer and specific written verification or adaptation by Engineer; or 2. have or acquire any title or ownership rights in any other Contract Documents, reuse any such Contract Documents for any purpose without Owner’s express written consent, or violate any copyrights pertaining to such Contract Documents. B. The prohibitions of this Paragraph 3.05 will survive final payment, or termination of the Contract. Nothing herein precludes Contractor from retaining copies of the Contract Documents for record purposes. ARTICLE 4 – COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed A. The Contract Times will commence to run on the 30th day after the Effective Date of the Contract or, if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within 30 days after the Effective Date of the Contract. In no event will the Contract Times commence to run later than the 60th day after the day of Bid opening or the 30th day after the Effective Date of the Contract, whichever date is earlier. 4.02 Starting the Work A. Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times commence to run. No Work may be done at the Site prior to such date. 4.03 Reference Points A. Owner shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction which in Engineer’s judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and property monuments, and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of Owner. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point or property monument is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points or property monuments by professionally qualified personnel. 4.04 Progress Schedule A. Contractor shall adhere to the Progress Schedule established in accordance with Paragraph 2.05 as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below. 1. Contractor shall submit to Engineer for acceptance (to the extent indicated in Paragraph 2.05) proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will not result in changing the Contract Times. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 17 2. Proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will change the Contract Times must be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 11. B. Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during all disputes or disagreements with Owner. No Work will be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, or during any appeal process, except as permitted by Paragraph 16.04, or as Owner and Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. 4.05 Delays in Contractor’s Progress A. If Owner, Engineer, or anyone for whom Owner is responsible, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the performance or progress of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times. B. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor. Delay, disruption, and interference attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be within the control of Contractor. C. If Contractor’s performance or progress is delayed, disrupted, or interfered with by unanticipated causes not the fault of and beyond the control of Owner, Contractor, and those for which they are responsible, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Times. Such an adjustment will be Contractor’s sole and exclusive remedy for the delays, disruption, and interference described in this paragraph. Causes of delay, disruption, or interference that may give rise to an adjustment in Contract Times under this paragraph include but are not limited to the following: 1. Severe and unavoidable natural catastrophes such as fires, floods, epidemics, and earthquakes; 2. Abnormal weather conditions; 3. Acts or failures to act of third-party utility owners or other third-party entities (other than those third-party utility owners or other third-party entities performing other work at or adjacent to the Site as arranged by or under contract with Owner, as contemplated in Article 8); and 4. Acts of war or terrorism. D. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of Contract Times or Contract Price is limited as follows: 1. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on the delay, disruption, or interference adversely affecting an activity on the critical path to completion of the Work, as of the time of the delay, disruption, or interference. 2. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price for any delay, disruption, or interference if such delay is concurrent with a delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor. Such a concurrent delay by Contractor shall not preclude an adjustment of Contract Times to which Contractor is otherwise entitled. 3. Adjustments of Contract Times or Contract Price are subject to the provisions of Article 11. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 18 E. Each Contractor request or Change Proposal seeking an increase in Contract Times or Contract Price must be supplemented by supporting data that sets forth in detail the following: 1. The circumstances that form the basis for the requested adjustment; 2. The date upon which each cause of delay, disruption, or interference began to affect the progress of the Work; 3. The date upon which each cause of delay, disruption, or interference ceased to affect the progress of the Work; 4. The number of days’ increase in Contract Times claimed as a consequence of each such cause of delay, disruption, or interference; and 5. The impact on Contract Price, in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 11.07. Contractor shall also furnish such additional supporting documentation as Owner or Engineer may require including, where appropriate, a revised progress schedule indicating all the activities affected by the delay, disruption, or interference, and an explanation of the effect of the delay, disruption, or interference on the critical path to completion of the Work. F. Delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition, an Underground Facility that was not shown or indicated by the Contract Documents, or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy, and those resulting from Hazardous Environmental Conditions, are governed by Article 5, together with the provisions of Paragraphs 4.05.D and 4.05.E. G. Paragraph 8.03 addresses delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the performance of certain other work at or adjacent to the Site. ARTICLE 5 – SITE; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 5.01 Availability of Lands A. Owner shall furnish the Site. Owner shall notify Contractor in writing of any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the Work. B. Upon reasonable written request, Owner shall furnish Contractor with a current statement of record legal title and legal description of the lands upon which permanent improvements are to be made and Owner’s interest therein as necessary for giving notice of or filing a mechanic’s or construction lien against such lands in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Contractor shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment. 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas 1. Contractor shall confine construction equipment, temporary construction facilities, the storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site, adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 19 or otherwise, and other adjacent areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and shall not unreasonably encumber the Site and such other adjacent areas with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for (a) damage to the Site; (b) damage to any such other adjacent areas used for Contractor’s operations; (c) damage to any other adjacent land or areas, or to improvements, structures, utilities, or similar facilities located at such adjacent lands or areas; and (d) for injuries and losses sustained by the owners or occupants of any such land or areas; provided that such damage or injuries result from the performance of the Work or from other actions or conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible. 2. If a damage or injury claim is made by the owner or occupant of any such land or area because of the performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible, Contractor shall (a) take immediate corrective or remedial action as required by Paragraph 7.13, or otherwise; (b) promptly attempt to settle the claim as to all parties through negotiations with such owner or occupant, or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding, or in a court of competent jurisdiction; and (c) to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, from and against any such claim, and against all costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer, or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused directly or indirectly, in whole or in part by, or based upon, Contractor’s performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible. B. Removal of Debris During Performance of the Work: During the progress of the Work the Contractor shall keep the Site and other adjacent areas free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal of such waste materials, rubbish, and other debris will conform to applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work Contractor shall clean the Site and the Work and make it ready for utilization by Owner. At the completion of the Work Contractor shall remove from the Site and adjacent areas all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery, and surplus materials and shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. D. Loading of Structures: Contractor shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall Contractor subject any part of the Work or adjacent structures or land to stresses or pressures that will endanger them. 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. Those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site that contain Technical Data; BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 20 2. Those drawings of existing physical conditions at or adjacent to the Site, including those drawings depicting existing surface or subsurface structures at or adjacent to the Site (except Underground Facilities), that contain Technical Data; and 3. Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings. B. Underground Facilities: Underground Facilities are shown or indicated on the Drawings, pursuant to Paragraph 5.05, and not in the drawings referred to in Paragraph 5.03.A. Information and data regarding the presence or location of Underground Facilities are not intended to be categorized, identified, or defined as Technical Data. C. Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data: Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data expressly identified in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. If no such express identification has been made, then Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data as defined in Paragraph 1.01.A.46.b. D. Limitations of Other Data and Documents: Except for such reliance on Technical Data, Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, with respect to: 1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; 2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; 3. the contents of other Site-related documents made available to Contractor, such as record drawings from other projects at or adjacent to the Site, or Owner’s archival documents concerning the Site; or 4. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any Technical Data or any such other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A. Notice by Contractor: If Contractor believes that any subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or revealed at the Site: 1. is of such a nature as to establish that any Technical Data on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 5.03 is materially inaccurate; 2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the Drawings or Specifications; 3. differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or 4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents; then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15), notify Owner and Engineer in writing about such condition. Contractor shall not further disturb such condition or perform any Work in connection therewith (except BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 21 with respect to an emergency) until receipt of a written statement permitting Contractor to do so. B. Engineer’s Review: After receipt of written notice as required by the preceding paragraph, Engineer will promptly review the subsurface or physical condition in question; determine whether it is necessary for Owner to obtain additional exploration or tests with respect to the condition; conclude whether the condition falls within any one or more of the differing site condition categories in Paragraph 5.04.A; obtain any pertinent cost or schedule information from Contractor; prepare recommendations to Owner regarding the Contractor’s resumption of Work in connection with the subsurface or physical condition in question and the need for any change in the Drawings or Specifications; and advise Owner in writing of Engineer’s findings, conclusions, and recommendations. C. Owner’s Statement to Contractor Regarding Site Condition: After receipt of Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, Owner shall issue a written statement to Contractor (with a copy to Engineer) regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question, addressing the resumption of Work in connection with such condition, indicating whether any change in the Drawings or Specifications will be made, and adopting or rejecting Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, in whole or in part. D. Early Resumption of Work: If at any time Engineer determines that Work in connection with the subsurface or physical condition in question may resume prior to completion of Engineer’s review or Owner’s issuance of its statement to Contractor, because the condition in question has been adequately documented, and analyzed on a preliminary basis, then the Engineer may at its discretion instruct Contractor to resume such Work. E. Possible Price and Times Adjustments 1. Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, to the extent that the existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition, or any related delay, disruption, or interference, causes an increase or decrease in Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work; subject, however, to the following: a. Such condition must fall within any one or more of the categories described in Paragraph 5.04.A; b. With respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03; and, c. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is subject to the provisions of Paragraphs 4.05.D and 4.05.E. 2. Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a subsurface or physical condition if: a. Contractor knew of the existence of such condition at the time Contractor made a commitment to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times by the submission of a Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract, or otherwise; b. The existence of such condition reasonably could have been discovered or revealed as a result of any examination, investigation, exploration, test, or study of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 22 Requirements or Contract Documents to be conducted by or for Contractor prior to Contractor’s making such commitment; or c. Contractor failed to give the written notice required by Paragraph 5.04.A. 3. If Owner and Contractor agree regarding Contractor’s entitlement to and the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, then any such adjustment will be set forth in a Change Order. 4. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, no later than 30 days after Owner’s issuance of the Owner’s written statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question. F. Underground Facilities; Hazardous Environmental Conditions: Paragraph 5.05 governs rights and responsibilities regarding the presence or location of Underground Facilities. Paragraph 5.06 governs rights and responsibilities regarding Hazardous Environmental Conditions. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03 and 5.04 are not applicable to the presence or location of Underground Facilities, or to Hazardous Environmental Conditions. 5.05 Underground Facilities A. Contractor’s Responsibilities: Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the Supplementary Conditions, the cost of all of the following are included in the Contract Price, and Contractor shall have full responsibility for: 1. reviewing and checking all information and data regarding existing Underground Facilities at the Site; 2. complying with applicable state and local utility damage prevention Laws and Regulations; 3. verifying the actual location of those Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents as being within the area affected by the Work, by exposing such Underground Facilities during the course of construction; 4. coordination of the Work with the owners (including Owner) of such Underground Facilities, during construction; and 5. the safety and protection of all existing Underground Facilities at the Site, and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. B. Notice by Contractor: If Contractor believes that an Underground Facility that is uncovered or revealed at the Site was not shown or indicated on the Drawings, or was not shown or indicated on the Drawings with reasonable accuracy, then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15), notify Owner and Engineer in writing regarding such Underground Facility. C. Engineer’s Review: Engineer will: 1. promptly review the Underground Facility and conclude whether such Underground Facility was not shown or indicated on the Drawings, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy; 2. identify and communicate with the owner of the Underground Facility; prepare recommendations to Owner (and if necessary issue any preliminary instructions to BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 23 Contractor) regarding the Contractor’s resumption of Work in connection with the Underground Facility in question; 3. obtain any pertinent cost or schedule information from Contractor; determine the extent, if any, to which a change is required in the Drawings or Specifications to reflect and document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility; and 4. advise Owner in writing of Engineer’s findings, conclusions, and recommendations. During such time, Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such Underground Facility. D. Owner’s Statement to Contractor Regarding Underground Facility: After receipt of Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, Owner shall issue a written statement to Contractor (with a copy to Engineer) regarding the Underground Facility in question addressing the resumption of Work in connection with such Underground Facility, indicating whether any change in the Drawings or Specifications will be made, and adopting or rejecting Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations in whole or in part. E. Early Resumption of Work: If at any time Engineer determines that Work in connection with the Underground Facility may resume prior to completion of Engineer’s review or Owner’s issuance of its statement to Contractor, because the Underground Facility in question and conditions affected by its presence have been adequately documented, and analyzed on a preliminary basis, then the Engineer may at its discretion instruct Contractor to resume such Work. F. Possible Price and Times Adjustments 1. Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, to the extent that any existing Underground Facility at the Site that was not shown or indicated on the Drawings, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy, or any related delay, disruption, or interference, causes an increase or decrease in Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work; subject, however, to the following: a. With respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03; b. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is subject to the provisions of Paragraphs 4.05.D and 4.05.E; and c. Contractor gave the notice required in Paragraph 5.05.B. 2. If Owner and Contractor agree regarding Contractor’s entitlement to and the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, then any such adjustment will be set forth in a Change Order. 3. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, no later than 30 days after Owner’s issuance of the Owner’s written statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility in question. 4. The information and data shown or indicated on the Drawings with respect to existing Underground Facilities at the Site is based on information and data (a) furnished by the owners of such Underground Facilities, or by others, (b) obtained from available records, or (c) gathered in an investigation conducted in accordance BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 24 with the current edition of ASCE 38, Standard Guideline for the Collection and Depiction of Existing Subsurface Utility Data, by the American Society of Civil Engineers. If such information or data is incorrect or incomplete, Contractor’s remedies are limited to those set forth in this Paragraph 5.05.F. 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. those reports known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site; 2. drawings known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site; and 3. Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings. B. Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data expressly identified in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. If no such express identification has been made, then Contractor may rely on the accuracy of the Technical Data as defined in Paragraph 1.01.A.46.b. Except for such reliance on Technical Data, Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, with respect to: 1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; 2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or 3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any Technical Data or any such other data, interpretations, opinions or information. C. Contractor shall not be responsible for removing or remediating any Hazardous Environmental Condition encountered, uncovered, or revealed at the Site unless such removal or remediation is expressly identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. D. Contractor shall be responsible for controlling, containing, and duly removing all Constituents of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or anyone else for whom Contractor is responsible, and for any associated costs; and for the costs of removing and remediating any Hazardous Environmental Condition created by the presence of any such Constituents of Concern. E. If Contractor encounters, uncovers, or reveals a Hazardous Environmental Condition whose removal or remediation is not expressly identified in the Contract Documents as being within the scope of the Work, or if Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, then Contractor shall immediately: (1) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (2) stop all Work in connection with such condition and in any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15); and (3) notify Owner and Engineer (and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing). Owner shall promptly consult with Engineer concerning the necessity for Owner to retain a qualified expert to evaluate such BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 25 condition or take corrective action, if any. Promptly after consulting with Engineer, Owner shall take such actions as are necessary to permit Owner to timely obtain required permits and provide Contractor the written notice required by Paragraph 5.06.F. If Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible created the Hazardous Environmental Condition in question, then Owner may remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition, and impose a set-off against payments to account for the associated costs. F. Contractor shall not resume Work in connection with such Hazardous Environmental Condition or in any affected area until after Owner has obtained any required permits related thereto, and delivered written notice to Contractor either (1) specifying that such condition and any affected area is or has been rendered safe for the resumption of Work, or (2) specifying any special conditions under which such Work may be resumed safely. G. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, as a result of such Work stoppage, such special conditions under which Work is agreed to be resumed by Contractor, or any costs or expenses incurred in response to the Hazardous Environmental Condition, then within 30 days of Owner’s written notice regarding the resumption of Work, Contractor may submit a Change Proposal, or Owner may impose a set-off. Entitlement to any such adjustment is subject to the provisions of Paragraphs 4.05.D, 4.05.E, 11.07, and 11.08. H. If, after receipt of such written notice, Contractor does not agree to resume such Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe or does not agree to resume such Work under such special conditions, then Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by such condition to be deleted from the Work, following the contractual change procedures in Article 11. Owner may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner’s own forces or others in accordance with Article 8. I. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals, and all court, arbitration, or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition, provided that such Hazardous Environmental Condition (1) was not shown or indicated in the Drawings, Specifications, or other Contract Documents, identified as Technical Data entitled to limited reliance pursuant to Paragraph 5.06.B, or identified in the Contract Documents to be included within the scope of the Work, and (2) was not created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 5.06.I obligates Owner to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence. J. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the failure to control, contain, or remove a Constituent of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible, or to a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 26 Nothing in this Paragraph 5.06.J obligates Contractor to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence. K. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 do not apply to the presence of Constituents of Concern or to a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. ARTICLE 6 – BONDS AND INSURANCE 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds A. Contractor shall furnish a performance bond and a payment bond, each in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price, as security for the faithful performance and payment of Contractor’s obligations under the Contract. These bonds must remain in effect until one year after the date when final payment becomes due or until completion of the correction period specified in Paragraph 15.08, whichever is later, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations, the terms of a prescribed bond form, the Supplementary Conditions, or other provisions of the Contract. B. Contractor shall also furnish such other bonds (if any) as are required by the Supplementary Conditions or other provisions of the Contract. C. All bonds must be in the form included in the Bidding Documents or otherwise specified by Owner prior to execution of the Contract, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations, and must be issued and signed by a surety named in “Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies” as published in Department Circular 570 (as amended and supplemented) by the Bureau of the Fiscal Service, U.S. Department of the Treasury. A bond signed by an agent or attorney-in-fact must be accompanied by a certified copy of that individual’s authority to bind the surety. The evidence of authority must show that it is effective on the date the agent or attorney-in-fact signed the accompanying bond. D. Contractor shall obtain the required bonds from surety companies that are duly licensed or authorized, in the state or jurisdiction in which the Project is located, to issue bonds in the required amounts. E. If the surety on a bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent, or the surety ceases to meet the requirements above, then Contractor shall promptly notify Owner and Engineer in writing and shall, within 20 days after the event giving rise to such notification, provide another bond and surety, both of which must comply with the bond and surety requirements above. F. If Contractor has failed to obtain a required bond, Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner’s termination rights under Article 16. G. Upon request to Owner from any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other person or entity claiming to have furnished labor, services, materials, or equipment used in the performance of the Work, Owner shall provide a copy of the payment bond to such person or entity. H. Upon request to Contractor from any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other person or entity claiming to have furnished labor, services, materials, or equipment used in the performance of the Work, Contractor shall provide a copy of the payment bond to such person or entity. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 27 6.02 Insurance—General Provisions A. Owner and Contractor shall obtain and maintain insurance as required in this article and in the Supplementary Conditions. B. All insurance required by the Contract to be purchased and maintained by Owner or Contractor shall be obtained from insurance companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the state or jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue insurance policies for the required limits and coverages. Unless a different standard is indicated in the Supplementary Conditions, all companies that provide insurance policies required under this Contract shall have an A.M. Best rating of A-VII or better. C. Alternative forms of insurance coverage, including but not limited to self-insurance and “Occupational Accident and Excess Employer’s Indemnity Policies,” are not sufficient to meet the insurance requirements of this Contract, unless expressly allowed in the Supplementary Conditions. D. Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Contract, certificates of insurance and endorsements establishing that Contractor has obtained and is maintaining the policies and coverages required by the Contract. Upon request by Owner or any other insured, Contractor shall also furnish other evidence of such required insurance, including but not limited to copies of policies, documentation of applicable self-insured retentions (if allowed) and deductibles, full disclosure of all relevant exclusions, and evidence of insurance required to be purchased and maintained by Subcontractors or Suppliers. In any documentation furnished under this provision, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Suppliers may block out (redact) (1) any confidential premium or pricing information and (2) any wording specific to a project or jurisdiction other than those applicable to this Contract. E. Owner shall deliver to Contractor, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Contract, certificates of insurance and endorsements establishing that Owner has obtained and is maintaining the policies and coverages required of Owner by the Contract (if any). Upon request by Contractor or any other insured, Owner shall also provide other evidence of such required insurance (if any), including but not limited to copies of policies, documentation of applicable self-insured retentions (if allowed) and deductibles, and full disclosure of all relevant exclusions . In any documentation furnished under this provision, Owner may block out (redact) (1) any confidential premium or pricing information and (2) any wording specific to a project or jurisdiction other than those relevant to this Contract. F. Failure of Owner or Contractor to demand such certificates or other evidence of the other party’s full compliance with these insurance requirements, or failure of Owner or Contractor to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided, will not be construed as a waiver of the other party’s obligation to obtain and maintain such insurance. G. In addition to the liability insurance required to be provided by Contractor, the Owner, at Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain Owner’s own liability insurance. Owner’s liability policies, if any, operate separately and independently from policies required to be provided by Contractor, and Contractor cannot rely upon Owner’s liability policies for any of Contractor’s obligations to the Owner, Engineer, or third parties. H. Contractor shall require: 1. Subcontractors to purchase and maintain worker’s compensation, commercial general liability, and other insurance that is appropriate for their participation in BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 28 the Project, and to name as additional insureds Owner and Engineer (and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds on Contractor’s liability policies) on each Subcontractor’s commercial general liability insurance policy; and 2. Suppliers to purchase and maintain insurance that is appropriate for their participation in the Project. I. If either party does not purchase or maintain the insurance required of such party by the Contract, such party shall notify the other party in writing of such failure to purchase prior to the start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain prior to any change in the required coverage. J. If Contractor has failed to obtain and maintain required insurance, Contractor’s entitlement to enter or remain at the Site will end immediately, and Owner may impose an appropriate set-off against payment for any associated costs (including but not limited to the cost of purchasing necessary insurance coverage), and exercise Owner’s termination rights under Article 16. K. Without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if a party has failed to obtain required insurance, the other party may elect (but is in no way obligated) to obtain equivalent insurance to protect such other party’s interests at the expense of the party wh o was required to provide such coverage, and the Contract Price will be adjusted accordingly. L. Owner does not represent that insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract necessarily will be adequate to protect Contractor or Contractor’s interests . Contractor is responsible for determining whether such coverage and limits are adequate to protect its interests, and for obtaining and maintaining any additional insurance that Contractor deems necessary. M. The insurance and insurance limits required herein will not be deemed as a limitation on Contractor’s liability, or that of its Subcontractors or Suppliers, under the indemnities granted to Owner and other individuals and entities in the Contract or otherwise. N. All the policies of insurance required to be purchased and maintained under this Contract will contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, or renewal refused, until at least 10 days prior written notice has been given to the purchasing policyholder. Within three days of receipt of any such written notice, the purchasing policyholder shall provide a copy of the notice to each other insured and Engineer. 6.03 Contractor’s Insurance A. Required Insurance: Contractor shall purchase and maintain Worker’s Compensation, Commercial General Liability, and other insurance pursuant to the specific requirements of the Supplementary Conditions. B. General Provisions: The policies of insurance required by this Paragraph 6.03 as supplemented must: 1. include at least the specific coverages required; 2. be written for not less than the limits provided, or those required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater; 3. remain in effect at least until the Work is complete (as set forth in Paragraph 15.06.D), and longer if expressly required elsewhere in this Contract, and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing, or replacing BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 29 defective Work as a warranty or correction obligation, or otherwise, or returning to the Site to conduct other tasks arising from the Contract; 4. apply with respect to the performance of the Work, whether such performance is by Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable; and 5. include all necessary endorsements to support the stated requirements. C. Additional Insureds: The Contractor’s commercial general liability, automobile liability, employer’s liability, umbrella or excess, pollution liability, and unmanned aerial vehicle liability policies, if required by this Contract, must: 1. include and list as additional insureds Owner and Engineer, and any individuals or entities identified as additional insureds in the Supplementary Conditions; 2. include coverage for the respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees, and consultants of all such additional insureds; 3. afford primary coverage to these additional insureds for all claims covered thereby (including as applicable those arising from both ongoing and completed operations); 4. not seek contribution from insurance maintained by the additional insured; and 5. as to commercial general liability insurance, apply to additional insureds with respect to liability caused in whole or in part by Contractor’s acts or omissions, or the acts and omissions of those working on Contractor’s behalf, in the performance of Contractor’s operations. 6.04 Builder’s Risk and Other Property Insurance A. Builder’s Risk: Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall purchase and maintain builder’s risk insurance upon the Work on a completed value basis, in the amount of the Work’s full insurable replacement cost (subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations). The specific requirements applicable to the builder’s risk insurance are set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. B. Property Insurance for Facilities of Owner Where Work Will Occur: Owner is responsible for obtaining and maintaining property insurance covering each existing structure, building, or facility in which any part of the Work will occur, or to which any part of the Work will attach or be adjoined. Such property insurance will be written on a special perils (all-risk) form, on a replacement cost basis, providing coverage consistent with that required for the builder’s risk insurance, and will be maintained unti l the Work is complete, as set forth in Paragraph 15.06.D. C. Property Insurance for Substantially Complete Facilities: Promptly after Substantial Completion, and before actual occupancy or use of the substantially completed Work, Owner will obtain property insurance for such substantially completed Work, and maintain such property insurance at least until the Work is complete, as set forth in Paragraph 15.06.D. Such property insurance will be written on a special perils (all-risk) form, on a replacement cost basis, and provide coverage consistent with that required for the builder’s risk insurance. The builder’s risk insurance may terminate upon written confirmation of Owner’s procurement of such property insurance. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 30 D. Partial Occupancy or Use by Owner: If Owner will occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, as provided in Paragraph 15.04, then Owner (directly, if it is the purchaser of the builder’s risk policy, or through Contractor) will provide advance notice of such occupancy or use to the builder’s risk insurer, and obtain an endorsement consenting to the continuation of coverage prior to commencing such partial occupancy or use. E. Insurance of Other Property; Additional Insurance: If the express insurance provisions of the Contract do not require or address the insurance of a property item or interest, then the entity or individual owning such property item will be responsible for insuring it. If Contractor elects to obtain other special insurance to be included in or supplement the builder’s risk or property insurance policies provided under this Paragraph 6.04, it may do so at Contractor’s expense. 6.05 Property Losses; Subrogation A. The builder’s risk insurance policy purchased and maintained in accordance with Paragraph 6.04 (or an installation floater policy if authorized by the Supplementary Conditions), will contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurer will have no rights of recovery against any insureds thereunder, or against Engineer or its consultants, or their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors. 1. Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and the respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, or resulting from any of the perils, risks, or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Engineer, its consultants, all individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as builder’s risk or installation floater insureds, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, under such policies for losses and damages so caused. 2. None of the above waivers extends to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance held by Owner or Contractor as trustee or fiduciary, or otherwise payable under any policy so issued. B. Any property insurance policy maintained by Owner covering any loss, damage, or consequential loss to Owner’s existing structures, buildings, or facilities in which any part of the Work will occur, or to which any part of the Work will attach or adjoin; to adjacent structures, buildings, or facilities of Owner; or to part or all of the completed or substantially completed Work, during partial occupancy or use pursuant to Paragraph 15.04, after Substantial Completion pursuant to Paragraph 15.03, or after final payment pursuant to Paragraph 15.06, will contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurer will have no rights of recovery against any insureds thereunder, or against Contractor, Subcontractors, or Engineer, or the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors of each and any of them, and that the insured is allowed to waive the insurer’s rights of subrogation in a written contract executed prior to the loss, damage, or consequential loss. 1. Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, for all losses and damages caused by, BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 31 arising out of, or resulting from fire or any of the perils, risks, or causes of loss covered by such policies. C. The waivers in this Paragraph 6.05 include the waiver of rights due to business interruption, loss of use, or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to Owner’s property or the Work caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other insured peril, risk, or cause of loss. D. Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that each Subcontract contains provisions whereby the Subcontractor waives all rights against Owner, Contractor, all individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as insureds, the Engineer and its consultants, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, relating to, or resulting from fire or other peril, risk, or cause of loss covered by builder’s risk insurance, installation floater, and any other property insurance applicable to the Work. 6.06 Receipt and Application of Property Insurance Proceeds A. Any insured loss under the builder’s risk and other policies of property insurance required by Paragraph 6.04 will be adjusted and settled with the named insured that purchased the policy. Such named insured shall act as fiduciary for the other insureds, and give notice to such other insureds that adjustment and settlement of a claim is in progress. Any other insured may state its position regarding a claim for insured loss in writing within 15 days after notice of such claim. B. Proceeds for such insured losses may be made payable by the insurer either jointly to multiple insureds, or to the named insured that purchased the policy in its own right and as fiduciary for other insureds, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause. A named insured receiving insurance proceeds under the builder’s risk and other policies of insurance required by Paragraph 6.04 shall maintain such proceeds in a segregated account, and distribute such proceeds in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or as otherwise required under the dispute resolution provisions of this Contract or applicable Laws and Regulations. C. If no other special agreement is reached, Contractor shall repair or replace the damaged Work, using allocated insurance proceeds. ARTICLE 7 – CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES 7.01 Contractor’s Means and Methods of Construction A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. B. If the Contract Documents note, or Contractor determines, that professional engineering or other design services are needed to carry out Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures, or for Site safety, then Contractor shall cause such services to be provided by a properly licensed design professional, at Contractor’s expense. Such services are not Owner-delegated professional design services under this Contract, and neither Owner nor Engineer has any responsibility with respect to (1) Contractor’s determination of the need for such services, (2) the qualifications or licensing of the design professionals retained or employed by Contractor, (3) the performance of such services, or (4) any errors, omissions, or defects in such services. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 32 7.02 Supervision and Superintendence A. Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. At all times during the progress of the Work, Contractor shall assign a competent resident superintendent who will not be replaced without written notice to Owner and Engineer except under extraordinary circumstances. 7.03 Labor; Working Hours A. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall maintain good discipline and order at the Site. B. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of Contractor’s employees; of Suppliers and Subcontractors, and their employees; and of any other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work, just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor’s own acts and omissions. C. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Work at the Site will be performed during regular working hours, Monday through Friday. Contractor will not perform Work on a Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday. Contractor may perform Work outside regular working hours or on Saturdays, Sundays, or legal holidays only with Owner’s written consent, which will not be unreasonably withheld. 7.04 7.04 Services, Materials, and Equipment A. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and assume full responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start up, and completion of the Work, whether or not such items are specifically called for in the Contract Documents. B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work must be new and of good quality, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. All special warranties and guarantees required by the Specifications will expressly run to the benefit of Owner. If required by Engineer, Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment. C. All materials and equipment must be stored, applied, installed, connected, erected, protected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, except as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Documents. 7.05 “Or Equals” A. Contractor’s Request; Governing Criteria: Whenever an item of equipment or material is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the names of one or more proprietary items or specific Suppliers, the Contract Price has been based upon Contractor furnishing such item as specified. The specification or description of such an item is intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent, or “or equal” item is permitted, Contractor may request that Engineer BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 33 authorize the use of other items of equipment or material, or items from other proposed Suppliers, under the circumstances described below. 1. If Engineer in its sole discretion determines that an item of equipment or material proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, Engineer will deem it an “or equal” item. For the purposes of this paragraph, a proposed item of equipment or material will be considered functionally equal to an item so named if: a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment Engineer determines that the proposed item: 1) is at least equal in materials of construction, quality, durability, appearance, strength, and design characteristics; 2) will reliably perform at least equally well the function and achieve the results imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole; 3) has a proven record of performance and availability of responsive service; and 4) is not objectionable to Owner. b. Contractor certifies that, if the proposed item is approved and incorporated into the Work: 1) there will be no increase in cost to the Owner or increase in Contract Times; and 2) the item will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the item named in the Contract Documents. B. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed “or equal” item at Contractor’s expense. C. Engineer’s Evaluation and Determination: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each “or-equal” request. Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed “or-equal” item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No “or-equal” item will be ordered, furnished, installed, or utilized until Engineer’s review is complete and Engineer determines that the proposed item is an “or -equal,” which will be evidenced by an approved Shop Drawing or other written communication. Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination. D. Effect of Engineer’s Determination: Neither approval nor denial of an “or-equal” request will result in any change in Contract Price. The Engineer’s denial of an “or-equal” request will be final and binding, and may not be reversed through an appeal under any provision of the Contract. E. Treatment as a Substitution Request: If Engineer determines that an item of equipment or material proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an “or-equal” item, Contractor may request that Engineer consider the item a proposed substitute pursuant to Paragraph 7.06. 7.06 Substitutes A. Contractor’s Request; Governing Criteria: Unless the specification or description of an item of equipment or material required to be furnished under the Contract Documents contains or is followed by words reading that no substitution is permitted, Contractor BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 34 may request that Engineer authorize the use of other items of equipment or material under the circumstances described below. To the extent possible such requests must be made before commencement of related construction at the Site. 1. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow Engineer to determine if the item of material or equipment proposed is functionally equivalent to that named and an acceptable substitute therefor. Engineer will not accept requests for review of proposed substitute items of equipment or material from anyone other than Contractor. 2. The requirements for review by Engineer will be as set forth in Paragraph 7.06.B, as supplemented by the Specifications, and as Engineer may decide is appropriate under the circumstances. 3. Contractor shall make written application to Engineer for review of a proposed substitute item of equipment or material that Contractor seeks to furnish or use. The application: a. will certify that the proposed substitute item will: 1) perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design; 2) be similar in substance to the item specified; and 3) be suited to the same use as the item specified. b. will state: 1) the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed substitute item will necessitate a change in Contract Times; 2) whether use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a change in any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner for other work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed substitute item; and 3) whether incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in connection with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty. c. will identify: 1) all variations of the proposed substitute item from the item specified; and 2) available engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services. d. will contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or indirectly from use of such substitute item, including but not limited to changes in Contract Price, shared savings, costs of redesign, and claims of other contractors affected by any resulting change. B. Engineer’s Evaluation and Determination: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each substitute request, and to obtain comments and direction from Owner. Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No substitute will be ordered, furnished, installed, or utilized until Engineer’s review is complete and Engineer determines that the proposed item is an acceptable substitute. Engineer’s determination will be evidenced by a Field Order or a proposed Change Order accounting BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 35 for the substitution itself and all related impacts, including changes in Contract Price or Contract Times. Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination. C. Special Guarantee: Owner may require Contractor to furnish at Contractor’s expense a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute. D. Reimbursement of Engineer’s Cost: Engineer will record Engineer’s costs in evaluating a substitute proposed or submitted by Contractor. Whether or not Engineer approves a substitute so proposed or submitted by Contractor, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for evaluating each such proposed substitute. Contractor shall also reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for making changes in the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner) resulting from the acceptance of each proposed substitute. E. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed substitute at Contractor’s expense. F. Effect of Engineer’s Determination: If Engineer approves the substitution request, Contractor shall execute the proposed Change Order and proceed with the substitution. The Engineer’s denial of a substitution request will be final and binding, and may not be reversed through an appeal under any provision of the Contract. Contractor may challenge the scope of reimbursement costs imposed under Paragraph 7.06.D, by timely submittal of a Change Proposal. 7.07 Concerning Subcontractors and Suppliers A. Contractor may retain Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of parts of the Work. Such Subcontractors and Suppliers must be acceptable to Owner. The Contractor’s retention of a Subcontractor or Supplier for the performance of parts of the Work will not relieve Contractor’s obligation to Owner to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Contractor shall retain specific Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of designated parts of the Work if required by the Contract to do so. C. Subsequent to the submittal of Contractor’s Bid or final negotiation of the terms of the Contract, Owner may not require Contractor to retain any Subcontractor or Supplier to furnish or perform any of the Work against which Contractor has reasonable objection. D. Prior to entry into any binding subcontract or purchase order, Contractor shall submit to Owner the identity of the proposed Subcontractor or Supplier (unless Owner has already deemed such proposed Subcontractor or Supplier acceptable during the bidding process or otherwise). Such proposed Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed acceptable to Owner unless Owner raises a substantive, reasonable objection within 5 days. E. Owner may require the replacement of any Subcontractor or Supplier. Owner also may require Contractor to retain specific replacements; provided, however, that Owner may not require a replacement to which Contractor has a reasonable objection. If Contractor has submitted the identity of certain Subcontractors or Suppliers for acceptance by Owner, and Owner has accepted it (either in writing or by failing to make written objection thereto), then Owner may subsequently revoke the acceptance of any such Subcontractor or Supplier so identified solely on the basis of substantive, reasonable objection after due investigation. Contractor shall submit an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor or Supplier. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 36 F. If Owner requires the replacement of any Subcontractor or Supplier retained by Contractor to perform any part of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, with respect to the replacement; and Contractor shall initiate a Change Proposal for such adjustment within 30 days of Owner’s requirement of replacement. G. No acceptance by Owner of any such Subcontractor or Supplier, whether initially or as a replacement, will constitute a waiver of the right of Owner to the completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. H. On a monthly basis, Contractor shall submit to Engineer a complete list of all Subcontractors and Suppliers having a direct contract with Contractor, and of all other Subcontractors and Suppliers known to Contractor at the time of submittal. I. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors and Suppliers. J. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings do not control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers, or in delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade. K. All Work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier must be pursuant to an appropriate contractual agreement that specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. L. Owner may furnish to any Subcontractor or Supplier, to the extent practicable, information about amounts paid to Contractor for Work performed for Contractor by the Subcontractor or Supplier. M. Contractor shall restrict all Subcontractors and Suppliers from communicating with Engineer or Owner, except through Contractor or in case of an emergency, or as otherwise expressly allowed in this Contract. 7.08 Patent Fees and Royalties A. Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If an invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the Work and if, to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer, its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights will be disclosed in the Contract Documents. B. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor, and its officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors, from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals, and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device specified in the Contract Documents, but not identified as being subject to payment of any license fee or royalty to others required by patent rights or copyrights. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 37 C. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device not specified in the Contract Documents. 7.09 Permits A. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits, licenses, and certificates of occupancy. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time of the submission of Contractor’s Bid (or when Contractor became bound under a negotiated contract). Owner shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections for providing permanent service to the Work. 7.10 Taxes A. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which are applicable during the performance of the Work. 7.11 Laws and Regulations A. Contractor shall give all notices required by and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor’s compliance with any Laws or Regulations. B. If Contractor performs any Work or takes any other action knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all resulting costs and losses, and shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work or other action. It is not Contractor’s responsibility to make certain that the Work described in the Contract Documents is in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this does not relieve Contractor of its obligations under Paragraph 3.03. C. Owner or Contractor may give written notice to the other party of any changes after the submission of Contractor’s Bid (or after the date when Contractor became bound under a negotiated contract) in Laws or Regulations having an effect on the cost or time of performance of the Work, including but not limited to changes in Laws or Regulations having an effect on procuring permits and on sales, use, value -added, consumption, and other similar taxes. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times resulting from such changes, then within 30 days of such written notice Contractor may submit a Change Proposal, or Owner may initiate a Claim. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 38 7.12 Record Documents A. Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the Site one printed record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, written interpretations and clarifications, and approved Shop Drawings. Contractor shall keep such record documents in good order and annotate them to show changes made during construction. These record documents, together with all approved Samples, will be available to Engineer for reference. Upon completion of the Work, Contractor shall deliver these record documents to Engineer. 7.13 Safety and Protection A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Such responsibility does not relieve Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. B. Contractor shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative whose duties and responsibilities are the prevention of Work-related accidents and the maintenance and supervision of safety precautions and programs. C. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to: 1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work; 2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the Site; and 3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, other work in progress, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. D. All damage, injury, or loss to any property referred to in Paragraph 7.13.C.2 or 7.13.C.3 caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier, or any other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor at its expense (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of Owner or Engineer or anyone employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of Contractor or any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them). E. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of persons or property, or to the protection of persons or property from damage, injury, or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. F. Contractor shall notify Owner; the owners of adjacent property; the owners of Underground Facilities and other utilities (if the identity of such owners is known to Contractor); and other contractors and utility owners performing work at or adjacent to the Site, in writing, when Contractor knows that prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property or work in progress. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 39 G. Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Owner’s safety programs, if any. Any Owner’s safety programs that are applicable to the Work are identified or included in the Supplementary Conditions or Specifications. H. Contractor shall inform Owner and Engineer of the specific requirements of Contractor’s safety program with which Owner’s and Engineer’s employees and representatives must comply while at the Site. I. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and protection will continue until all the Work is completed, Engineer has issued a written notice to Owner and Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 15.06.C that the Work is acceptable, and Contractor has left the Site (except as otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion). J. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and protection will resume whenever Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier returns to the Site to fulfill warranty or correction obligations, or to conduct other tasks arising from the Contract Documents. 7.14 Hazard Communication Programs A. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of safety data sheets (formerly known as material safety data sheets) or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. 7.15 Emergencies A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, Contractor is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury, or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused by an emergency, or are required as a result of Contractor’s response to an emergency. If Engineer determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of an emergency or Contractor’s response, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued. 7.16 Submittals A. Shop Drawing and Sample Requirements 1. Before submitting a Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall: a. review and coordinate the Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; b. determine and verify: 1) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information with respect to the Submittal; 2) the suitability of all materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 3) all information relative to Contractor’s responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 40 c. confirm that the Submittal is complete with respect to all related data included in the Submittal. 2. Each Shop Drawing or Sample must bear a stamp or specific written certification that Contractor has satisfied Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor’s review of that Submittal, and that Contractor approves the Submittal. 3. With each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of any variations that the Submittal may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents. This notice must be set forth in a written communication separate from the Submittal; and, in addition, in the case of a Shop Drawing by a specific notation made on the Shop Drawing itself. B. Submittal Procedures for Shop Drawings and Samples: Contractor shall label and submit Shop Drawings and Samples to Engineer for review and approval in accordance with the accepted Schedule of Submittals. 1. Shop Drawings a. Contractor shall submit the number of copies required in the Specifications. b. Data shown on the Shop Drawings must be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to show Engineer the services, materials, and equipment Contractor proposes to provide, and to enable Engineer to review the information for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 7.16.C. 2. Samples a. Contractor shall submit the number of Samples required in the Specifications. b. Contractor shall clearly identify each Sample as to material, Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers, the use for which intended and other data as Engineer may require to enable Engineer to review the Submittal for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 7.16.C. 3. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents or the Schedule of Submittals, any related Work performed prior to Engineer’s review and approval of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of Contractor. C. Engineer’s Review of Shop Drawings and Samples 1. Engineer will provide timely review of Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with the accepted Schedule of Submittals. Engineer’s review and approval will be only to determine if the items covered by the Submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. 2. Engineer’s review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. 3. Engineer’s review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 41 4. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample will not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has complied with the requirements of Paragraph 7.16.A.3 and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample. Engineer will document any such approved variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents in a Field Order or other appropriate Contract modification. 5. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample will not relieve Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of Paragraphs 7.16.A and B. 6. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample, or of a variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents, will not, under any circumstances, change the Contract Times or Contract Price, unless such changes are included in a Change Order. 7. Neither Engineer’s receipt, review, acceptance, or approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample will result in such item becoming a Contract Document. 8. Contractor shall perform the Work in compliance with the requirements and commitments set forth in approved Shop Drawings and Samples, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 7.16.C.4. D. Resubmittal Procedures for Shop Drawings and Samples 1. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit, as required, new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous Submittals. 2. Contractor shall furnish required Shop Drawing and Sample submittals with sufficient information and accuracy to obtain required approval of an item with no more than two resubmittals. Engineer will record Engineer’s time for reviewing a third or subsequent resubmittal of a Shop Drawing or Sample, and Contractor shall be responsible for Engineer’s charges to Owner for such time. Owner may impose a set-off against payments due Contractor to secure reimbursement for such charges. 3. If Contractor requests a change of a previously approved Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall be responsible for Engineer’s charges to Owner for its review time, and Owner may impose a set-off against payments due Contractor to secure reimbursement for such charges, unless the need for such change is beyond the control of Contractor. E. Submittals Other than Shop Drawings, Samples, and Owner-Delegated Designs 1. The following provisions apply to all Submittals other than Shop Drawings, Samples, and Owner-delegated designs: a. Contractor shall submit all such Submittals to the Engineer in accordance with the Schedule of Submittals and pursuant to the applicable terms of the Contract Documents. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 42 b. Engineer will provide timely review of all such Submittals in accordance with the Schedule of Submittals and return such Submittals with a notation of either Accepted or Not Accepted. Any such Submittal that is not returned within the time established in the Schedule of Submittals will be deemed accepted. c. Engineer’s review will be only to determine if the Submittal is acceptable under the requirements of the Contract Documents as to general form and content of the Submittal. d. If any such Submittal is not accepted, Contractor shall confer with Engineer regarding the reason for the non-acceptance, and resubmit an acceptable document. 2. Procedures for the submittal and acceptance of the Progress Schedule, the Schedule of Submittals, and the Schedule of Values are set forth in Paragraphs 2.03. 2.04, and 2.05. F. Owner-delegated Designs: Submittals pursuant to Owner-delegated designs are governed by the provisions of Paragraph 7.19. 7.17 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Engineer is entitled to rely on Contractor’s warranty and guarantee. B. Owner’s rights under this warranty and guarantee are in addition to, and are not limited by, Owner’s rights under the correction period provisions of Paragraph 15.08. The time in which Owner may enforce its warranty and guarantee rights under this Paragraph 7.17 is limited only by applicable Laws and Regulations restricting actions to enforce such rights; provided, however, that after the end of the correction period under Paragraph 15.08: 1. Owner shall give Contractor written notice of any defective Work within 60 days of the discovery that such Work is defective; and 2. Such notice will be deemed the start of an event giving rise to a Claim under Paragraph 12.01.B, such that any related Claim must be brought within 30 days of the notice. C. Contractor’s warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by: 1. abuse, or improper modification, maintenance, or operation, by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom Contractor is responsible; or 2. normal wear and tear under normal usage. D. Contractor’s obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents is absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, a release of Contractor’s obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or a release of Owner’s warranty and guarantee rights under this Paragraph 7.17: 1. Observations by Engineer; 2. Recommendation by Engineer or payment by Owner of any progress or final payment; BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 43 3. The issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion by Engineer or any payment related thereto by Owner; 4. Use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner; 5. Any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal; 6. The issuance of a notice of acceptability by Engineer; 7. The end of the correction period established in Paragraph 15.08; 8. Any inspection, test, or approval by others; or 9. Any correction of defective Work by Owner. E. If the Contract requires the Contractor to accept the assignment of a contract entered into by Owner, then the specific warranties, guarantees, and correction obligations contained in the assigned contract will govern with respect to Contractor’s performance obligations to Owner for the Work described in the assigned contract. 7.18 Indemnification A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, and in addition to any other obligations of Contractor under the Contract or otherwise, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners , employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, from losses, damages, costs, and judgments (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals, and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising from third-party claims or actions relating to or resulting from the performance or furnishing of the Work, provided that any such claim, action, loss, cost, judgment or damage is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to damage to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom, but only to the extent caused by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable. B. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Paragraph 7.18.A will not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity under workers’ compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts. 7.19 Delegation of Professional Design Services A. Owner may require Contractor to provide professional design services for a portion of the Work by express delegation in the Contract Documents. Such delegation will specify the performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy, and the Submittals that Contractor must furnish to Engineer with respect to the Owner-delegated design. B. Contractor shall cause such Owner-delegated professional design services to be provided pursuant to the professional standard of care by a properly licensed design professional, whose signature and seal must appear on all drawings, calculations, BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 44 specifications, certifications, and Submittals prepared by such design professional. Such design professional must issue all certifications of design required by Laws and Regulations. C. If a Shop Drawing or other Submittal related to the Owner-delegated design is prepared by Contractor, a Subcontractor, or others for submittal to Engineer, then such Shop Drawing or other Submittal must bear the written approval of Contractor’s design professional when submitted by Contractor to Engineer. D. Owner and Engineer shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of the services, certifications, and approvals performed or provided by the design professionals retained or employed by Contractor under an Owner-delegated design, subject to the professional standard of care and the performance and design criteria stated in the Contract Documents. E. Pursuant to this Paragraph 7.19, Engineer’s review, approval, and other determinations regarding design drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, and other Submittals furnished by Contractor pursuant to an Owner-delegated design will be only for the following limited purposes: 1. Checking for conformance with the requirements of this Paragraph 7.19; 2. Confirming that Contractor (through its design professionals) has used the performance and design criteria specified in the Contract Documents; and 3. Establishing that the design furnished by Contractor is consistent with the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. F. Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of performance or design criteria specified by Owner or Engineer. G. Contractor is not required to provide professional services in violation of applicable Laws and Regulations. ARTICLE 8 – OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 8.01 Other Work A. In addition to and apart from the Work under the Contract Documents, the Owner may perform other work at or adjacent to the Site. Such other work may be performed by Owner’s employees, or through contracts between the Owner and third parties. Owner may also arrange to have third-party utility owners perform work on their utilities and facilities at or adjacent to the Site. B. If Owner performs other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, or through contracts for such other work, then Owner shall give Contractor written notice thereof prior to starting any such other work. If Owner has advance information regarding the start of any third-party utility work that Owner has arranged to take place at or adjacent to the Site, Owner shall provide such information to Contractor. C. Contractor shall afford proper and safe access to the Site to each contractor that performs such other work, each utility owner performing other work, and Owner, if Owner is performing other work with Owner’s employees, and provide a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other work. D. Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required to properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come together and properly BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 45 integrate with such other work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering such work; provided, however, that Contractor may cut or alter others' work with the written consent of Engineer and the others whose work will be affected. E. If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor’s Work depends upon work performed by others, Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to Engineer in writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of Contractor’s Work. Contractor’s failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with Contractor’s Work except for latent defects and deficiencies in such other work. F. The provisions of this article are not applicable to work that is performed by third-party utilities or other third-party entities without a contract with Owner, or that is performed without having been arranged by Owner. If such work occurs, then any related delay, disruption, or interference incurred by Contractor is governed by the provisions of Paragraph 4.05.C.3. 8.02 Coordination A. If Owner intends to contract with others for the performance of other work at or adjacent to the Site, to perform other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, or to arrange to have utility owners perform work at or adjacent to the Site, the following will be set forth in the Supplementary Conditions or provided to Contractor prior to the start of any such other work: 1. The identity of the individual or entity that will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various contractors; 2. An itemization of the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility; and 3. The extent of such authority and responsibilities. B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility for such coordination. 8.03 Legal Relationships A. If, in the course of performing other work for Owner at or adjacent to the Site, the Owner’s employees, any other contractor working for Owner, or any utility owner that Owner has arranged to perform work, causes damage to the Work or to the property of Contractor or its Subcontractors, or delays, disrupts, interferes with, or increases the scope or cost of the performance of the Work, through actions or inaction, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times. Contractor must submit any Change Proposal seeking an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times under this paragraph within 30 days of the damaging, delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. The entitlement to, and extent of, any such equitable adjustment will take into account information (if any) regarding such other work that was provided to Contractor in the Contract Documents prior to the submittal of the Bid or the final negotiation of the terms of the Contract, and any remedies available to Contractor under Laws or Regulations concerning utility action or inaction. When applicable, any such equitable adjustment in Contract Price will be conditioned on Contractor assigning to Owner all Contractor’s rights against such other contractor or utility owner with respect to the damage, delay, disruption, or BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 46 interference that is the subject of the adjustment. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times or Contract Price is subject to the provisions of Paragraphs 4.05.D and 4.05.E. B. Contractor shall take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damaging, delaying, disrupting, or interfering with the work of Owner, any other contractor, or any utility owner performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. 1. If Contractor fails to take such measures and as a result damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of any such other contractor or utility owner, then Owner may impose a set-off against payments due Contractor, and assign to such other contractor or utility owner the Owner’s contractual rights against Contractor with respect to the breach of the obligations set forth in this Paragraph 8.03.B. 2. When Owner is performing other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, Contractor shall be liable to Owner for damage to such other work, and for the reasonable direct delay, disruption, and interference costs incurred by Owner as a result of Contractor’s failure to take reasonable and customary measures with respect to Owner’s other work. In response to such damage, delay, disruption, or interference, Owner may impose a set-off against payments due Contractor. C. If Contractor damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of any other contractor, or any utility owner performing other work at or adjacent to the Site, through Contractor’s failure to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid such impacts, or if any claim arising out of Contractor’s actions, inactions, or negligence in performance of the Work at or adjacent to the Site is made by any such other contractor or utility owner against Contractor, Owner, or Engineer, then Contractor shall (1) promptly attempt to settle the claim as to all parties through negotiations with such other contractor or utility owner, or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law, and (2) indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against any such claims, and against all costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such damage, delay, disruption, or interference. ARTICLE 9 – OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES 9.01 Communications to Contractor A. Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, Owner shall issue all communications to Contractor through Engineer. 9.02 Replacement of Engineer A. Owner may at its discretion appoint an engineer to replace Engineer, provided Contractor makes no reasonable objection to the replacement engineer. The replacement engineer’s status under the Contract Documents will be that of the former Engineer. 9.03 Furnish Data A. Owner shall promptly furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 47 9.04 Pay When Due A. Owner shall make payments to Contractor when they are due as provided in the Agreement. 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports, Tests, and Drawings A. Owner’s duties with respect to providing lands and easements are set forth in Paragraph 5.01. B. Owner’s duties with respect to providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set forth in Paragraph 4.03. C. Article 5 refers to Owner’s identifying and making available to Contractor copies of reports of explorations and tests of conditions at the Site, and drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site. 9.06 Insurance A. Owner’s responsibilities, if any, with respect to purchasing and maintaining liability and property insurance are set forth in Article 6. 9.07 Change Orders A. Owner’s responsibilities with respect to Change Orders are set forth in Article 11. 9.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals A. Owner’s responsibility with respect to certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in Paragraph 14.02.B. 9.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities A. The Owner shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Owner will not be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition A. Owner’s responsibility in respect to an undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition is set forth in Paragraph 5.06. 9.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements A. Upon request of Contractor, Owner shall furnish Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to satisfy Owner’s obligations under the Contract (including obligations under proposed changes in the Work). 9.12 Safety Programs A. While at the Site, Owner’s employees and representatives shall comply with the specific applicable requirements of Contractor’s safety programs of which Owner has been informed. B. Owner shall furnish copies of any applicable Owner safety programs to Contractor. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 48 ARTICLE 10 – ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 10.01 Owner’s Representative A. Engineer will be Owner’s representative during the construction period. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owner’s representative during construction are set forth in the Contract. 10.02 Visits to Site A. Engineer will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction as Engineer deems necessary in order to observe, as an experienced and qualified design professional, the progress that has been made and the quality of th e various aspects of Contractor’s executed Work. Based on information obtained during such visits and observations, Engineer, for the benefit of Owner, will determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. Engineer will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections on the Site to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Engineer’s efforts will be directed toward providing for Owner a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform generally to the Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and observations, Engineer will keep Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard Owner against defective Work. B. Engineer’s visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on Engineer’s authority and responsibility set forth in Paragraph 10.07. Particularly, but without limitation, during or as a result of Engineer’s visits or observations of Contractor’s Work, Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. 10.03 Resident Project Representative A. If Owner and Engineer have agreed that Engineer will furnish a Resident Project Representative to represent Engineer at the Site and assist Engineer in observing the progress and quality of the Work, then the authority and responsibilities of any such Resident Project Representative will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions, and limitations on the responsibilities thereof will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions and in Paragraph 10.07. B. If Owner designates an individual or entity who is not Engineer’s consultant, agent, or employee to represent Owner at the Site, then the responsibilities and authority of such individual or entity will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions. 10.04 Engineer’s Authority A. Engineer has the authority to reject Work in accordance with Article 14. B. Engineer’s authority as to Submittals is set forth in Paragraph 7.16. C. Engineer’s authority as to design drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications and other Submittals from Contractor in response to Owner’s delegation (if any) to Contractor of professional design services, is set forth in Paragraph 7.19. D. Engineer’s authority as to changes in the Work is set forth in Article 11. E. Engineer’s authority as to Applications for Payment is set forth in Article 15. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 49 10.05 Determinations for Unit Price Work A. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor as set forth in Paragraph 13.03. 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work A. Engineer will render decisions regarding the requirements of the Contract Documents, and judge the acceptability of the Work, pursuant to the specific procedures set forth herein for initial interpretations, Change Proposals, and acceptance of the Work. In rendering such decisions and judgments, Engineer will not show partiality to Owner or Contractor, and will not be liable to Owner, Contractor, or others in connection with any proceedings, interpretations, decisions, or judgments conducted or rendered in good faith. 10.07 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities A. Neither Engineer’s authority or responsibility under this Article 10 or under any other provision of the Contract, nor any decision made by Engineer in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise, or performance of any authority or responsibility by Engineer, will create, impose, or give rise to any duty in contract, tort, or otherwise owed by Engineer to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. B. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Engineer will not be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing any of the Work. D. Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates of inspection, tests and approvals, and other documentation required to be delivered by Contractor under Paragraph 15.06.A, will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of, and in the case of certificates of inspections, tests, and approvals, that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. E. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this Paragraph 10.07 also apply to the Resident Project Representative, if any. 10.08 Compliance with Safety Program A. While at the Site, Engineer’s employees and representatives will comply with the specific applicable requirements of Owner’s and Contractor’s safety programs of which Engineer has been informed. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 50 ARTICLE 11 – CHANGES TO THE CONTRACT 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract A. The Contract may be amended or supplemented by a Change Order, a Work Change Directive, or a Field Order. B. If an amendment or supplement to the Contract includes a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, such amendment or supplement must be set forth in a Change Order. C. All changes to the Contract that involve (1) the performance or acceptability of the Work, (2) the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or (3) other engineering or technical matters, must be supported by Engineer’s recommendation. Owner and Contractor may amend other terms and conditions of the Contract without the recommendation of the Engineer. 11.02 Change Orders A. Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders covering: 1. Changes in Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by the parties, including any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; 2. Changes in Contract Price resulting from an Owner set-off, unless Contractor has duly contested such set-off; 3. Changes in the Work which are: (a) ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 11.05, (b) required because of Owner’s acceptance of defective Work under Paragraph 14.04 or Owner’s correction of defective Work under Paragraph 14.07, or (c) agreed to by the parties, subject to the need for Engineer’s recommendation if the change in the Work involves the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise) or other engineering or technical matters; and 4. Changes that embody the substance of any final and binding results under: Paragraph 11.03.B, resolving the impact of a Work Change Directive; Paragraph 11.09, concerning Change Proposals; Article 12, Claims; Paragraph 13.02.D, final adjustments resulting from allowances; Paragraph 13.03.D, final adjustments relating to determination of quantities for Unit Price Work; and similar provisions. B. If Owner or Contractor refuses to execute a Change Order that is required to be executed under the terms of Paragraph 11.02.A, it will be deemed to be of full force and effect, as if fully executed. 11.03 Work Change Directives A. A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times but is evidence that the parties expect that the modification ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order, following negotiations by the parties as to the Work Change Directive’s effect, if any, on the Contract Price and Contract Times; or, if negotiations are unsuccessful, by a determination under the terms of the Contract Documents governing adjustments, expressly including Paragraph 11.07 regarding change of Contract Price. B. If Owner has issued a Work Change Directive and: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 51 1. Contractor believes that an adjustment in Contract Times or Contract Price is necessary, then Contractor shall submit any Change Proposal seeking such an adjustment no later than 30 days after the completion of the Work set out in the Work Change Directive. 2. Owner believes that an adjustment in Contract Times or Contract Price is necessary, then Owner shall submit any Claim seeking such an adjustment no later than 60 days after issuance of the Work Change Directive. 11.04 Field Orders A. Engineer may authorize minor changes in the Work if the changes do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and are compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. Such changes will be accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on Owner and also on Contractor, which shall perform the Work involved promptly. B. If Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, then before proceeding with the Work at issue, Contractor shall submit a Change Proposal as provided herein. 11.05 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work A. Without invalidating the Contract and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work. Changes involving the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise) or other engineering or technical matters will be supported by Engineer’s recommendation. B. Such changes in the Work may be accomplished by a Change Order, if Owner and Contractor have agreed as to the effect, if any, of the changes on Contract Times or Contract Price; or by a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved; or, in the case of a deletion in the Work, promptly cease construction activities with respect to such deleted Work. Added or revised Work must be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents. C. Nothing in this Paragraph 11.05 obligates Contractor to undertake work that Contractor reasonably concludes cannot be performed in a manner consistent with Contractor’s safety obligations under the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations. 11.06 Unauthorized Changes in the Work A. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to any work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents, as amended, modified, or supplemented, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 7.15 or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 14.05.C.2. 11.07 Change of Contract Price A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.09. Any Claim for an adjustment of Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Article 12. B. An adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 52 1. Where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, then by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03); 2. Where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, then by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with Paragraph 11.07.C.2); or 3. Where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and the parties do not reach mutual agreement to a lump sum, then on the basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided in Paragraph 13.01) plus a Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit (determined as provided in Paragraph 11.07.C). C. Contractor’s Fee: When applicable, the Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit will be determined as follows: 1. A mutually acceptable fixed fee; or 2. If a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: a. For costs incurred under Paragraphs 13.01.B.1 and 13.01.B.2, the Contractor’s fee will be 15 percent; b. For costs incurred under Paragraph 13.01.B.3, the Contractor’s fee will be 5 percent; c. Where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee and no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of Paragraphs 11.07.C.2.a and 11.07.C.2.b is that the Contractor’s fee will be based on: (1) a fee of 15 percent of the costs incurred under Paragraphs 13.01.B.1 and 13.01.B.2 by the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, and (2) with respect to Contractor itself and to any Subcontractors of a tier higher than that of the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work, a fee of 5 percent of the amount (fee plus underlying costs incurred) attributable to the next lower tier Subcontractor; provided, however, that for any such subcontracted Work the maximum total fee to be paid by Owner will be no greater than 27 percent of the costs incurred by the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work; d. No fee will be payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraphs 13.01.B.4, 13.01.B.5, and 13.01.C; e. The amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to Owner for any change which results in a net decrease in Cost of the Work will be the amount of the actual net decrease in Cost of the Work and a deduction of an additional amount equal to 5 percent of such actual net decrease in Cost of the Work; and f. When both additions and credits are involved in any one change or Change Proposal, the adjustment in Contractor’s fee will be computed by determining the sum of the costs in each of the cost categories in Paragraph 13.01.B (specifically, payroll costs, Paragraph 13.01.B.1; incorporated materials and equipment costs, Paragraph 13.01.B.2; Subcontract costs, Paragraph 13.01.B.3; special consultants costs, Paragraph 13.01.B.4; and other costs, Paragraph 13.01.B.5) and applying to each such cost category sum the appropriate fee from Paragraphs 11.07.C.2.a through 11.07.C.2.e, inclusive. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 53 11.08 Change of Contract Times A. The Contract Times may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.09. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Article 12. B. Delay, disruption, and interference in the Work, and any related changes in Contract Times, are addressed in and governed by Paragraph 4.05. 11.09 Change Proposals A. Purpose and Content: Contractor shall submit a Change Proposal to Engineer to request an adjustment in the Contract Times or Contract Price; contest an initial decision by Engineer concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents; challenge a set-off against payment due; or seek other relief under the Contract. The Change Proposal will specify any proposed change in Contract Times or Contract Price, or other proposed relief, and explain the reason for the proposed change, with citations to any governing or applicable provisions of the Contract Documents. Each Change Proposal will address only one issue, or a set of closely related issues. B. Change Proposal Procedures 1. Submittal: Contractor shall submit each Change Proposal to Engineer within 30 days after the start of the event giving rise thereto, or after such initial decision. 2. Supporting Data: The Contractor shall submit supporting data, including the proposed change in Contract Price or Contract Time (if any), to the Engineer and Owner within 15 days after the submittal of the Change Proposal. a. Change Proposals based on or related to delay, interruption, or interference must comply with the provisions of Paragraphs 4.05.D and 4.05.E. b. Change proposals related to a change of Contract Price must include full and detailed accounts of materials incorporated into the Work and labor and equipment used for the subject Work. The supporting data must be accompanied by a written statement that the supporting data are accurate and complete, and that any requested time or price adjustment is the entire adjustment to which Contractor believes it is entitled as a result of said event. 3. Engineer’s Initial Review: Engineer will advise Owner regarding the Change Proposal, and consider any comments or response from Owner regarding the Change Proposal. If in its discretion Engineer concludes that additional supporting data is needed before conducting a full review and making a decision regarding the Change Proposal, then Engineer may request that Contractor submit such additional supporting data by a date specified by Engineer, prior to Engineer beginning its full review of the Change Proposal. 4. Engineer’s Full Review and Action on the Change Proposal: Upon receipt of Contractor’s supporting data (including any additional data requested by Engineer), Engineer will conduct a full review of each Change Proposal and, within 30 days after such receipt of the Contractor’s supporting data, either approve the Change Proposal in whole, deny it in whole, or approve it in part and deny it in part. Such actions must be in writing, with a copy provided to Owner and Contractor. If BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 54 Engineer does not take action on the Change Proposal within 30 days, then either Owner or Contractor may at any time thereafter submit a letter to the other party indicating that as a result of Engineer’s inaction the Change Proposal is deemed denied, thereby commencing the time for appeal of the denial under Article 12. 5. Binding Decision: Engineer’s decision is final and binding upon Owner and Contractor, unless Owner or Contractor appeals the decision by filing a Claim under Article 12. C. Resolution of Certain Change Proposals: If the Change Proposal does not involve the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), the acceptability of the Work, or other engineering or technical matters, then Engineer will notify the parties in writing that the Engineer is unable to resolve the Change Proposal. For purposes of further resolution of such a Change Proposal, such notice will be deemed a denial, and Contractor may choose to seek resolution under the terms of Article 12. D. Post-Completion: Contractor shall not submit any Change Proposals after Engineer issues a written recommendation of final payment pursuant to Paragraph 15.06.B. 11.10 Notification to Surety A. If the provisions of any bond require notice to be given to a surety of any change affecting the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Times), the giving of any such notice will be Contractor’s responsibility. The amount of each applicable bond will be adjusted to reflect the effect of any such change. ARTICLE 12 – CLAIMS 12.01 Claims A. Claims Process: The following disputes between Owner and Contractor are subject to the Claims process set forth in this article: 1. Appeals by Owner or Contractor of Engineer’s decisions regarding Change Proposals; 2. Owner demands for adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other relief under the Contract Documents; 3. Disputes that Engineer has been unable to address because they do not involve the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), the acceptability of the Work, or other engineering or technical matters; and 4. Subject to the waiver provisions of Paragraph 15.07, any dispute arising after Engineer has issued a written recommendation of final payment pursuant to Paragraph 15.06.B. B. Submittal of Claim: The party submitting a Claim shall deliver it directly to the other party to the Contract promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event giving rise thereto; in the case of appeals regarding Change Proposals within 30 days of the decision under appeal. The party submitting the Claim shall also furnish a copy to the Engineer, for its information only. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim rests with the party making the Claim. In the case of a Claim by Contractor seeking an increase in the Contract Times or Contract Price, Contractor shall certify that the Claim is made in good faith, that the supporting data are accurate and complete, and that to the BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 55 best of Contractor’s knowledge and belief the amount of time or money requested accurately reflects the full amount to which Contractor is entitled. C. Review and Resolution: The party receiving a Claim shall review it thoroughly, giving full consideration to its merits. The two parties shall seek to resolve the Claim through the exchange of information and direct negotiations. The parties may extend the time for resolving the Claim by mutual agreement. All actions taken on a Claim will be stated in writing and submitted to the other party, with a copy to Engineer. D. Mediation 1. At any time after initiation of a Claim, Owner and Contractor may mutually agree to mediation of the underlying dispute. The agreement to mediate will stay the Claim submittal and response process. 2. If Owner and Contractor agree to mediation, then after 60 days from such agreement, either Owner or Contractor may unilaterally terminate the mediation process, and the Claim submittal and decision process will resume as of the date of the termination. If the mediation proceeds but is unsuccessful in resolving the dispute, the Claim submittal and decision process will resume as of the date of the conclusion of the mediation, as determined by the mediator. 3. Owner and Contractor shall each pay one-half of the mediator’s fees and costs. E. Partial Approval: If the party receiving a Claim approves the Claim in part and denies it in part, such action will be final and binding unless within 30 days of such action the other party invokes the procedure set forth in Article 17 for final resolution of disputes. F. Denial of Claim: If efforts to resolve a Claim are not successful, the party receiving the Claim may deny it by giving written notice of denial to the other party. If the receiving party does not act on the Claim within 90 days, then either Owner or Contractor may at any time thereafter submit a letter to the other party indicating that as a result of the inaction, the Claim is deemed denied, thereby commencing the time for appeal of the denial. A denial of the Claim will be final and binding unless within 30 days of the denial the other party invokes the procedure set forth in Article 17 for the final resolution of disputes. G. Final and Binding Results: If the parties reach a mutual agreement regarding a Claim, whether through approval of the Claim, direct negotiations, mediation, or otherwise; or if a Claim is approved in part and denied in part, or denied in full, and such actions become final and binding; then the results of the agreement or action on the Claim will be incorporated in a Change Order or other written document to the extent they affect the Contract, including the Work, the Contract Times, or the Contract Price. ARTICLE 13 – COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK 13.01 Cost of the Work A. Purposes for Determination of Cost of the Work: The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all costs necessary for the proper performance of the Work at issue, as further defined below. The provisions of this Paragraph 13.01 are used for two distinct purposes: 1. To determine Cost of the Work when Cost of the Work is a component of the Contract Price, under cost-plus-fee, time-and-materials, or other cost-based terms; or BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 56 2. When needed to determine the value of a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price. When the value of any such adjustment is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor is entitled only to those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the adjustment. B. Costs Included: Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by Owner, costs included in the Cost of the Work will be in amounts no higher than those commonly incurred in the locality of the Project, will not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 13.01.C, and will include only the following items: 1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of Contractor in the performance of the Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by Owner and Contractor in advance of the subject Work. Such employees include, without limitation, superintendents, foremen, safety managers, safety representatives, and other personnel employed full time on the Work. Payroll costs for employees not employed full time on the Work will be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs include, but are not limited to, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, which include social security contributions, unemployment, excise, and payroll taxes, workers’ compensation, health and retirement benefits, sick leave, and vacation and holiday pay applicable thereto. The expenses of performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, will be included in the above to the extent authorized by Owner. 2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers’ field services required in connection therewith. All cash discounts accrue to Contractor unless Owner deposits funds with Contractor with which to make payments, in which case the cash discounts will accrue to Owner. All trade discounts, rebates, and refunds and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment will accrue to Owner, and Contractor shall make provisions so that they may be obtained. 3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. If required by Owner, Contractor shall obtain competitive bids from subcontractors acceptable to Owner and Contractor and shall deliver such bids to Owner, which will then determine, with the advice of Engineer, which bids, if any, will be acceptable. If any subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, the Subcontractor’s Cost of the Work and fee will be determined in the same manner as Contractor’s Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 13.01. 4. Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to engineers, architects, testing laboratories, surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed or retained for services specifically related to the Work. 5. Other costs consisting of the following: a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor’s employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work. b. Cost, including transportation and maintenance, of all materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site, which are consumed in the performance of the Work, and cost, less market BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 57 value, of such items used but not consumed which remain the property of Contractor. 1) In establishing included costs for materials such as scaffolding, plating, or sheeting, consideration will be given to the actual or the estimated life of the material for use on other projects; or rental rates may be established on the basis of purchase or salvage value of such items, whichever is less. Contractor will not be eligible for compensation for such items in an amount that exceeds the purchase cost of such item. c. Construction Equipment Rental 1) Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery, and the parts thereof, in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner as to price (including any surcharge or special rates applicable to overtime use of the construction equipment or machinery), and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs will be in accordance with the terms of said rental agreements. The rental of any such equipment, machinery, or parts must cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work. 2) Costs for equipment and machinery owned by Contractor or a Contractor- related entity will be paid at a rate shown for such equipment in the equipment rental rate book specified in the Supplementary Conditions. An hourly rate will be computed by dividing the monthly rates by 176. These computed rates will include all operating costs. 3) With respect to Work that is the result of a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price (“changed Work”), included costs will be based on the time the equipment or machinery is in use on the changed Work and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal when directly attributable to the changed Work. The cost of any such equipment or machinery, or parts thereof, must cease to accrue when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the changed Work. d. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work, and for which Contractor is liable, as imposed by Laws and Regulations. e. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses. f. Losses and damages (and related expenses) caused by damage to the Work, not compensated by insurance or otherwise, sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work (except losses and damages within the deductible amounts of builder’s risk or other property insurance established in accordance with Paragraph 6.04), provided such losses and damages have resulted from causes other than the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such losses include settlements made with the written consent and approval of Owner. No such losses, damages, and expenses will be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining Contractor’s fee. g. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 58 h. Minor expenses such as communication service at the Site, express and courier services, and similar petty cash items in connection with the Work. i. The costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance that Contractor is required by the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain. C. Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work does not include any of the following items: 1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor’s officers, executives, principals, general managers, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel employed by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor’s principal or branch office for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 13.01.B.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 13.01.B.4. The payroll costs and other compensation excluded here are to be considered administrative costs covered by the Contractor’s fee. 2. The cost of purchasing, renting, or furnishing small tools and hand tools. 3. Expenses of Contractor’s principal and branch offices other than Contractor’s office at the Site. 4. Any part of Contractor’s capital expenses, including interest on Contractor’s capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments. 5. Costs due to the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including but not limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment wrongly supplied, and making good any damage to property. 6. Expenses incurred in preparing and advancing Claims. 7. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not specifically and expressly included in Paragraph 13.01.B. D. Contractor’s Fee 1. When the Work as a whole is performed on the basis of cost-plus-a-fee, then: a. Contractor’s fee for the Work set forth in the Contract Documents as of the Effective Date of the Contract will be determined as set forth in the Agreement. b. for any Work covered by a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor’s fee will be determined as follows: 1) When the fee for the Work as a whole is a percentage of the Cost of the Work, the fee will automatically adjust as the Cost of the Work changes. 2) When the fee for the Work as a whole is a fixed fee, the fee for any additions or deletions will be determined in accordance with Paragraph 11.07.C.2. 2. When the Work as a whole is performed on the basis of a stipulated sum, or any other basis other than cost-plus-a-fee, then Contractor’s fee for any Work covered by a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price on the basis of Cost of the Work will be determined in accordance with Paragraph 11.07.C.2. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 59 E. Documentation and Audit: Whenever the Cost of the Work for any purpose is to be determined pursuant to this Article 13, Contractor and pertinent Subcontractors will establish and maintain records of the costs in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices. Subject to prior written notice, Owner will be afforded reasonable access, during normal business hours, to all Contractor’s accounts, records, books, correspondence, instructions, drawings, receipts, vouchers, memoranda, and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work and Contractor’s fee. Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of three years after the final payment by Owner. Pertinent Subcontractors will afford such access to Owner, and preserve such documents, to the same extent required of Contractor. 13.02 Allowances A. It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be performed for such sums and by such persons or entities as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. B. Cash Allowances: Contractor agrees that: 1. the cash allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and 2. Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances, and no demand for additional payment for any of the foregoing will be valid. C. Owner’s Contingency Allowance: Contractor agrees that an Owner’s contingency allowance, if any, is for the sole use of Owner to cover unanticipated costs. D. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Engineer to reflect actual amounts due Contractor for Work covered by allowances, and the Contract Price will be correspondingly adjusted. 13.03 Unit Price Work A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the unit price for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Payments to Contractor for Unit Price Work will be based on actual quantities. C. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor’s overhead and profit for each separately identified item. D. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor. Engineer will review with Contractor the Engineer’s preliminary determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). Engineer’s written decision thereon will be final and binding (except as modified by Engineer to reflect changed factual conditions or more accurate data) upon Owner and Contractor, BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 60 and the final adjustment of Contract Price will be set forth in a Change Order, subject to the provisions of the following paragraph. E. Adjustments in Unit Price 1. Contractor or Owner shall be entitled to an adjustment in the unit price with respect to an item of Unit Price Work if: a. the quantity of the item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; and b. Contractor’s unit costs to perform the item of Unit Price Work have changed materially and significantly as a result of the quantity change. 2. The adjustment in unit price will account for and be coordinated with any related changes in quantities of other items of Work, and in Contractor’s costs to perform such other Work, such that the resulting overall change in Contract Price is equitable to Owner and Contractor. 3. Adjusted unit prices will apply to all units of that item. ARTICLE 14 – TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL, OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 14.01 Access to Work A. Owner, Engineer, their consultants and other representatives and personnel of Owner, independent testing laboratories, and authorities having jurisdiction have access to the Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspection, and testi ng. Contractor shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them of Contractor’s safety procedures and programs so that they may comply with such procedures and programs as applicable. 14.02 Tests, Inspections, and Approvals A. Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work (or specific parts thereof) for all required inspections and tests, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections and tests. B. Owner shall retain and pay for the services of an independent inspector, testing laboratory, or other qualified individual or entity to perform all inspections and tests expressly required by the Contract Documents to be furnished and paid for by Owner, except that costs incurred in connection with tests or inspections of covered Work will be governed by the provisions of Paragraph 14.05. C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Engineer the required certificates of inspection or approval. D. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging, obtaining, and paying for all inspections and tests required: 1. by the Contract Documents, unless the Contract Documents expressly allocate responsibility for a specific inspection or test to Owner; BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 61 2. to attain Owner’s and Engineer’s acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; 3. by manufacturers of equipment furnished under the Contract Documents; 4. for testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical, electrical, and other equipment to be incorporated into the Work; and 5. for acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor’s purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work. Such inspections and tests will be performed by independent inspectors, testing laboratories, or other qualified individuals or entities acceptable to Owner and Engineer. E. If the Contract Documents require the Work (or part thereof) to be approved by Owner, Engineer, or another designated individual or entity, then Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such approvals. F. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Engineer, Contractor shall, if requested by Engineer, uncover such Work for observation. Such uncovering will be at Contractor’s expense unless Contractor had given Engineer timely notice of Contractor’s intention to cover the same and Engineer had not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. 14.03 Defective Work A. Contractor’s Obligation: It is Contractor’s obligation to assure that the Work is not defective. B. Engineer’s Authority: Engineer has the authority to determine whether Work is defective, and to reject defective Work. C. Notice of Defects: Prompt written notice of all defective Work of which Owner or Engineer has actual knowledge will be given to Contractor. D. Correction, or Removal and Replacement: Promptly after receipt of written notice of defective Work, Contractor shall correct all such defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if Engineer has rejected the defective Work, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective. E. Preservation of Warranties: When correcting defective Work, Contractor shall take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner’s special warranty and guarantee, if any, on said Work. F. Costs and Damages: In addition to its correction, removal, and replacement obligations with respect to defective Work, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to defective Work, including but not limited to the cost of the inspection, testing, correction, removal, replacement, or reconstruction of such defective Work, fines levied against Owner by governmental authorities because the Work is defective, and the costs of repair or replacement of work of others resulting from defective Work. Prior to final payment, if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the measure of such claims, costs, losses, and damages resulting from defective Work, then Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 62 14.04 Acceptance of Defective Work A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, Owner prefers to accept it, Owner may do so (subject, if such acceptance occurs prior to final payment, to Engineer’s confirmation that such acceptance is in general accord with the design intent and applicable engineering principles, and will not endanger public safety). Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages attributable to Owner’s evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by Engineer as to reasonableness), and for the diminished value of the Work to the extent not otherwise paid by Contractor. If any such acceptance occurs prior to final payment, the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work will be incorporated in a Change Order. If the parties are unable to agree as to the decrease in the Contract Price, reflecting the diminished value of Work so accepted, then Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15. If the acceptance of defective Work occurs after final payment, Contractor shall pay an appropriate amount to Owner. 14.05 Uncovering Work A. Engineer has the authority to require additional inspection or testing of the Work, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed, or completed. B. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, then Contractor shall, if requested by Engineer, uncover such Work for Engineer’s observation, and then replace the covering, all at Contractor’s expense. C. If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer or inspected or tested by others, then Contractor, at Engineer’s request, shall uncover, expose, or otherwise make available for observation, inspection, or testing as Engineer may require, that portion of the Work in question, and provide all necessary labor, material, and equipment. 1. If it is found that the uncovered Work is defective, Contractor shall be responsible for all claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and testing, and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and pending Contractor’s full discharge of this responsibility the Owner shall be entitled to impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15. 2. If the uncovered Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement, and reconstruction. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, then Contractor may submit a Change Proposal within 30 days of the determination that the Work is not defective. 14.06 Owner May Stop the Work A. If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, then Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner to stop the Work will not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 63 Supplier, any other individual or entity, or any surety for, or employee or agent of any of them. 14.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work A. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct defective Work, or to remove and replace defective Work as required by Engineer, then Owner may, after 7 days’ written notice to Contractor, correct or remedy any such deficiency. B. In exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07, Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective or remedial action, Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and suspend Contractor’s services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner’s representatives, agents and employees, Owner’s other contractors, and Engineer and Engineer’s consultants access to the Site to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. C. All claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07 will be charged against Contractor as set-offs against payments due under Article 15. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair, or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor’s defective Work. D. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owner’s rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07. ARTICLE 15 – PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR; SET-OFFS; COMPLETION; CORRECTION PERIOD 15.01 Progress Payments A. Basis for Progress Payments: The Schedule of Values established as provided in Article 2 will serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application for Payment acceptable to Engineer. Progress payments for Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed during the pay period, as determined under the provisions of Paragraph 13.03. Progress payments for cost-based Work will be based on Cost of the Work completed by Contractor during the pay period. B. Applications for Payments 1. At least 20 days before the date established in the Agreement for each progress payment (but not more often than once a month), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. 2. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment must also be accompanied by: (a) a bill of sale, invoice, copies of subcontract or purchase order payments, or other documentation establishing full payment by Contractor for the materials and equipment; (b) at Owner’s request, documentation warranting that Owner has BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 64 received the materials and equipment free and clear of all Liens; and (c) evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance, a warehouse bond, or other arrangements to protect Owner’s interest therein, all of which must be satisfactory to Owner. 3. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application must include an affidavit of Contractor stating that all previous progress payments received by Contractor have been applied to discharge Contractor’s legitimate obligations associated with prior Applications for Payment. 4. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the Agreement. C. Review of Applications 1. Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of each Application for Payment, including each resubmittal, either indicate in writing a recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner, or return the Application to Contractor indicating in writing Engineer’s reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. 2. Engineer’s recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a representation by Engineer to Owner, based on Engineer’s observations of the executed Work as an experienced and qualified design professional, and on Engineer’s review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules, that to the best of Engineer’s knowledge, information and belief: a. the Work has progressed to the point indicated; b. the quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon Substantial Completion, the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents, a final determination of quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work under Paragraph 13.03, and any other qualifications stated in the recommendation); and c. the conditions precedent to Contractor’s being entitled to such payment appear to have been fulfilled in so far as it is Engineer’s responsibility to observe the Work. 3. By recommending any such payment Engineer will not thereby be deemed to have represented that: a. inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work beyond the responsibilities specifically assigned to Engineer in the Contract; or b. there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to be paid additionally by Owner or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor. 4. Neither Engineer’s review of Contractor’s Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor Engineer’s recommendation of any payment, including final payment, will impose responsibility on Engineer: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 65 a. to supervise, direct, or control the Work; b. for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto; c. for Contractor’s failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor’s performance of the Work; d. to make any examination to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the money paid by Owner; or e. to determine that title to any of the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of any Liens. 5. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if, in Engineer’s opinion, it would be incorrect to make the representations to Owner stated in Paragraph 15.01.C.2. 6. Engineer will recommend reductions in payment (set-offs) necessary in Engineer’s opinion to protect Owner from loss because: a. the Work is defective, requiring correction or replacement; b. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; c. Owner has been required to correct defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 14.07, or has accepted defective Work pursuant to Paragraph 14.04; d. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible; or e. Engineer has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify termination for cause under the Contract Documents. D. Payment Becomes Due 1. Ten days after presentation of the Application for Payment to Owner with Engineer’s recommendation, the amount recommended (subject to any Owner set- offs) will become due, and when due will be paid by Owner to Contractor. E. Reductions in Payment by Owner 1. In addition to any reductions in payment (set-offs) recommended by Engineer, Owner is entitled to impose a set-off against payment based on any of the following: a. Claims have been made against Owner based on Contractor’s conduct in the performance or furnishing of the Work, or Owner has incurred costs, losses, or damages resulting from Contractor’s conduct in the performance or furnishing of the Work, including but not limited to claims, costs, losses, or damages from workplace injuries, adjacent property damage, non-compliance with Laws and Regulations, and patent infringement; b. Contractor has failed to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damage, delay, disruption, and interference with other work at or adjacent to the Site; c. Contractor has failed to provide and maintain required bonds or insurance; d. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible; BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 66 e. Owner has incurred extra charges or engineering costs related to submittal reviews, evaluations of proposed substitutes, tests and inspections, or return visits to manufacturing or assembly facilities; f. The Work is defective, requiring correction or replacement; g. Owner has been required to correct defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 14.07, or has accepted defective Work pursuant to Paragraph 14.04; h. The Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; i. An event has occurred that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify a termination for cause; j. Liquidated or other damages have accrued as a result of Contractor’s failure to achieve Milestones, Substantial Completion, or final completion of the Work; k. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens; or l. Other items entitle Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended. 2. If Owner imposes any set-off against payment, whether based on its own knowledge or on the written recommendations of Engineer, Owner will give Contractor immediate written notice (with a copy to Engineer) stating the reasons for such action and the specific amount of the reduction, and promptly pay Contractor any amount remaining after deduction of the amount so withheld. Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor, if Contractor remedies the reasons for such action. The reduction imposed will be binding on Contractor unless it duly submits a Change Proposal contesting the reduction. 3. Upon a subsequent determination that Owner’s refusal of payment was not justified, the amount wrongfully withheld will be treated as an amount due as determined by Paragraph 15.01.D.1 and subject to interest as provided in the Agreement. 15.02 Contractor’s Warranty of Title A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment furnished under the Contract will pass to Owner free and clear of (1) all Liens and other title defects, and (2) all patent, licensing, copyright, or royalty obligations, no later than 7 days after the time of payment by Owner. 15.03 Substantial Completion A. When Contractor considers the entire Work ready for its intended use Contractor shall notify Owner and Engineer in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete and request that Engineer issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. Contractor shall at the same time submit to Owner and Engineer an initial draft of punch list items to be completed or corrected before final payment. B. Promptly after Contractor’s notification, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If Engineer does not consider the Work substantially complete, Engineer will notify Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. C. If Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will deliver to Owner a preliminary certificate of Substantial Completion which will fix the date of Substantial BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 67 Completion. Engineer shall attach to the certificate a punch list of items to be completed or corrected before final payment. Owner shall have 7 days after receipt of the preliminary certificate during which to make written objection to Engineer as to any provisions of the certificate or attached punch list. If, after considering the objections to the provisions of the preliminary certificate, Engineer concludes that the Work is not substantially complete, Engineer will, within 14 days after submission of the preliminary certificate to Owner, notify Contractor in writing that the Work is not substantially complete, stating the reasons therefor. If Owner does not object to the provisions of the certificate, or if despite consideration of Owner’s objections Engineer concludes that the Work is substantially complete, then Engineer will, within said 14 days, execute and deliver to Owner and Contractor a final certificate of Substantial Completion (with a revised punch list of items to be completed or corrected) reflecting such changes from the preliminary certificate as Engineer believes justified after consideration of any objections from Owner. D. At the time of receipt of the preliminary certificate of Substantial Completion, Owner and Contractor will confer regarding Owner’s use or occupancy of the Work following Substantial Completion, review the builder’s risk insurance policy with respect to the end of the builder’s risk coverage, and confirm the transition to coverage of the Work under a permanent property insurance policy held by Owner. Unless Owner and Contractor agree otherwise in writing, Owner shall bear responsibility for security, operation, protection of the Work, property insurance, maintenance, heat, and utilities upon Owner’s use or occupancy of the Work. E. After Substantial Completion the Contractor shall promptly begin work on the punch list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. In appropriate cases Contractor may submit monthly Applications for Payment for completed punch list items, following the progress payment procedures set forth above. F. Owner shall have the right to exclude Contractor from the Site after the date of Substantial Completion subject to allowing Contractor reasonable access to remove its property and complete or correct items on the punch list. 15.04 Partial Use or Occupancy A. Prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, Owner may use or occupy any substantially completed part of the Work which has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or which Owner, Engineer, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor’s performance of the remainder of the Work, subject to the following conditions: 1. At any time, Owner may request in writing that Contractor permit Owner to use or occupy any such part of the Work that Owner believes to be substantially complete. If and when Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor, Owner, and Engineer will follow the procedures of Paragraph 15.03.A through 15.03.E for that part of the Work. 2. At any time, Contractor may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. 3. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 68 complete, Engineer will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of Paragraph 15.03 will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. 4. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 6.04 regarding builder’s risk or other property insurance. 15.05 Final Inspection A. Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Engineer will promptly make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection re veals that the Work, or agreed portion thereof, is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 15.06 Final Payment A. Application for Payment 1. After Contractor has, in the opinion of Engineer, satisfactorily completed all corrections identified during the final inspection and has delivered, in accordance with the Contract Documents, all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance, certificates of inspection, annotated record documents (as provided in Paragraph 7.12), and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment. 2. The final Application for Payment must be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: a. all documentation called for in the Contract Documents; b. consent of the surety, if any, to final payment; c. satisfactory evidence that all title issues have been resolved such that title to all Work, materials, and equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of any Liens or other title defects, or will so pass upon final payment. d. a list of all duly pending Change Proposals and Claims; and e. complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to Owner) of all Lien rights arising out of the Work, and of Liens filed in connection with the Work. 3. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens specified in Paragraph 15.06.A.2 and as approved by Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (a) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material, and equipment for which a Lien could be filed; and (b) all payrolls, material and equipment bills, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner might in any way be responsible, or which might in any way result in liens or other burdens on Owner's property, have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a bond or other collateral satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 69 against any Lien, or Owner at its option may issue joint checks payable to Contractor and specified Subcontractors and Suppliers. B. Engineer’s Review of Final Application and Recommendation of Payment: If, on the basis of Engineer’s observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation as required by the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract have been fulfilled, Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of the final Application for Payment, indicate in writing Engineer’s recommendation of final payment and present the final Application for Payment to Owner for payment. Such recommendation will account for any set-offs against payment that are necessary in Engineer’s opinion to protect Owner from loss for the reasons stated above with respect to progress payments. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application for Payment to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment. C. Notice of Acceptability: In support of its recommendation of payment of the final Application for Payment, Engineer will also give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable, subject to stated limitations in the notice and to the provisions of Paragraph 15.07. D. Completion of Work: The Work is complete (subject to surviving obligations) when it is ready for final payment as established by the Engineer’s written recommendation of final payment and issuance of notice of the acceptability of the Work. E. Final Payment Becomes Due: Upon receipt from Engineer of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, Owner shall set off against the amount recommended by Engineer for final payment any further sum to which Owner is entitled, including but not limited to set-offs for liquidated damages and set-offs allowed under the provisions of this Contract with respect to progress payments. Owner shall pay the resulting balance due to Contractor within 30 days of Owner’s receipt of the final Application for Payment from Engineer. 15.07 Waiver of Claims A. By making final payment, Owner waives its claim or right to liquidated damages or other damages for late completion by Contractor, except as set forth in an outstanding Claim, appeal under the provisions of Article 17, set-off, or express reservation of rights by Owner. Owner reserves all other claims or rights after final payment. B. The acceptance of final payment by Contractor will constitute a waiver by Contractor of all claims and rights against Owner other than those pending matters that have been duly submitted as a Claim, or appealed under the provisions of Article 17. 15.08 Correction Period A. If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion (or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by the Supplementary Conditions or the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents), Owner gives Contractor written notice that any Work has been found to be defective, or that Contractor’s repair of any damages to the Site or adjacent areas has been found to be defective, then after receipt of such notice of defect Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in accordance with Owner’s written instructions: 1. correct the defective repairs to the Site or such adjacent areas; BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 70 2. correct such defective Work; 3. remove the defective Work from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective, if the defective Work has been rejected by Owner, and 4. satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to the work of others, or to other land or areas resulting from the corrective measures. B. Owner shall give any such notice of defect within 60 days of the discovery that such Work or repairs is defective. If such notice is given within such 60 days but after the end of the correction period, the notice will be deemed a notice of defective Work under Paragraph 7.17.B. C. If, after receipt of a notice of defect within 60 days and within the correction period, Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of Owner’s written instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, Owner ma y have the defective Work corrected or repaired or may have the rejected Work removed and replaced. Contractor shall pay all costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or repair or such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). Contractor’s failure to pay such costs, losses, and damages within 10 days of invoice from Owner will be deemed the start of an event giving rise to a Claim under Paragraph 12.01.B, such that any related Claim must be brought within 30 days of the failure to pay. D. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications. E. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected or removed and replaced under this paragraph, the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. F. Contractor’s obligations under this paragraph are in addition to all other obligations and warranties. The provisions of this paragraph are not to be construed as a substitute for, or a waiver of, the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose. ARTICLE 16 – SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 16.01 Owner May Suspend Work A. At any time and without cause, Owner may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days by written notice to Contractor and Engineer. Such notice will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times directly attributable to any such suspension. Any Change Proposal seeking such adjustments must be submitted no later than 30 days after the date fixed for resumption of Work. 16.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause A. The occurrence of any one or more of the following events will constitute a default by Contractor and justify termination for cause: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 71 1. Contractor’s persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule); 2. Failure of Contractor to perform or otherwise to comply with a material term of the Contract Documents; 3. Contractor’s disregard of Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; or 4. Contractor’s repeated disregard of the authority of Owner or Engineer. B. If one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 16.02.A occurs, then after giving Contractor (and any surety) 10 days’ written notice that Owner is considering a declaration that Contractor is in default and termination of the Contract, Owner may proceed to: 1. declare Contractor to be in default, and give Contractor (and any surety) written notice that the Contract is terminated; and 2. enforce the rights available to Owner under any applicable performance bond. C. Subject to the terms and operation of any applicable performance bond, if Owner has terminated the Contract for cause, Owner may exclude Contractor from the Site, take possession of the Work, incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient. D. Owner may not proceed with termination of the Contract under Paragraph 16.02.B if Contractor within 7 days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate begins to correct its failure to perform and proceeds diligently to cure such failure. E. If Owner proceeds as provided in Paragraph 16.02.B, Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is completed. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds the cost to complete the Work, including all related claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals) sustained by Owner, such excess will be paid to Contractor. If the cost to complete the Work including such related claims, costs, losses, and damages exceeds such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. Such claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred by Owner will be reviewed by Engineer as to their reasonableness and, when so approved by Engineer, incorporated in a Change Order. When exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph, Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. F. Where Contractor’s services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue, or any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor or any sure ty under any payment bond or performance bond. Any retention or payment of money due Contractor by Owner will not release Contractor from liability. G. If and to the extent that Contractor has provided a performance bond under the provisions of Paragraph 6.01.A, the provisions of that bond will govern over any inconsistent provisions of Paragraphs 16.02.B and 16.02.D. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 72 16.03 Owner May Terminate for Convenience A. Upon 7 days’ written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, terminate the Contract. In such case, Contractor shall be paid for (without duplication of any items): 1. completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; 2. expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; and 3. other reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination, including costs incurred to prepare a termination for convenience cost proposal. B. Contractor shall not be paid for any loss of anticipated profits or revenue, post- termination overhead costs, or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. 16.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate A. If, through no act or fault of Contractor, (1) the Work is suspended for more than 90 consecutive days by Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or (2) Engineer fails to act on any Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or (3) Owner fails for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon 7 days’ written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided Owner or Engineer do not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the contract and recover from Owner payment on the same terms as provided in Paragraph 16.03. B. In lieu of terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Engineer has failed to act on an Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or Owner has failed for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may, 7 days after written notice to Owner and Engineer, stop the Work until payment is made of all such amounts due Contractor, including interest thereon. The provisions of this paragraph are not intended to preclude Contractor from submitting a Change Proposal for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor’s stopping the Work as permitted by this paragraph. ARTICLE 17 – FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES 17.01 Methods and Procedures A. Disputes Subject to Final Resolution: The following disputed matters are subject to final resolution under the provisions of this article: 1. A timely appeal of an approval in part and denial in part of a Claim, or of a denial in full, pursuant to Article 12; and 2. Disputes between Owner and Contractor concerning the Work, or obligations under the Contract Documents, that arise after final payment has been made. B. Final Resolution of Disputes: For any dispute subject to resolution under this article, Owner or Contractor may: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 73 1. elect in writing to invoke the dispute resolution process provided for in the Supplementary Conditions; 2. agree with the other party to submit the dispute to another dispute resolution process; or 3. if no dispute resolution process is provided for in the Supplementary Conditions or mutually agreed to, give written notice to the other party of the intent to submit the dispute to a court of competent jurisdiction. ARTICLE 18 – MISCELLANEOUS 18.01 Giving Notice A. Whenever any provision of the Contract requires the giving of written notice to Owner, Engineer, or Contractor, it will be deemed to have been validly given only if delivered: 1. in person, by a commercial courier service or otherwise, to the recipient’s place of business; 2. by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the recipient’s place of business; or 3. by e-mail to the recipient, with the words “Formal Notice” or similar in the e-mail’s subject line. 18.02 Computation of Times A. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract by days, it will be computed to exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the computation. 18.03 Cumulative Remedies A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regulations, by special warranty or guarantee, or by other provisions of the Contract. The provisions of this paragraph will be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply. 18.04 Limitation of Damages A. With respect to any and all Change Proposals, Claims, disputes subject to final resolution, and other matters at issue, neither Owner nor Engineer, nor any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, shall be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages sustained by Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project. 18.05 No Waiver A. A party’s non-enforcement of any provision will not constitute a waiver of that provision, nor will it affect the enforceability of that provision or of the remainder of this Contract. 18.06 Survival of Obligations A. All representations, indemnifications, warranties, and guarantees made in, required by, or given in accordance with the Contract, as well as all continuing obligations indicated BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 70 00 - 74 in the Contract, will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work or termination of the Contract or of the services of Contractor. 18.07 Controlling Law A. This Contract is to be governed by the law of the state in which the Project is located. 18.08 Assignment of Contract A. Unless expressly agreed to elsewhere in the Contract, no assignment by a party to this Contract of any rights under or interests in the Contract will be binding on the other party without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and, specifically but without limitation, money that may become due and money that is due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment, no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract. 18.09 Successors and Assigns A. Owner and Contractor each binds itself, its successors, assigns, and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its successors, assigns, and legal representatives in respect to all covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. 18.10 Headings A. Article and paragraph headings are inserted for convenience only and do not constitute parts of these General Conditions. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 73 00 - 1 SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC® C-800, Copyright © 2018 by the National Society of Professional Engineers, American Society of Civil Engineers, and American Council of Engineering Companies, or is based in part on excerpts from EJCDC documents. Those portions of the text that originated in published EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright. These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement EJCDC® C 700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract (2018). The General Conditions remain in full force and effect except as amended. The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated in the General Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated below, which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. The address system used in these Supplementary Conditions is the same as the address system used in the General Conditions, with the prefix "SC" added—for example, “Paragraph SC 4.05.” TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 1 – Definitions And Terminology .................................................................................................................. 3 1.01 Defined Terms ............................................................................................................................................... 3 ARTICLE 2 – Preliminary Matters..................................................................................................................................... 3 2.01 Delivery of Performance and Payment Bonds; Evidence of Insurance ................................. 3 2.02 Copies of Documents .................................................................................................................................. 3 2.06 Electronic Transmittals ............................................................................................................................. 3 ARTICLE 3 – Contract Documents: Intent, Requirements, Reuse........................................................................ 9 3.01 Intent ................................................................................................................................................................. 9 ARTICLE 4 – Commencement and Progress of The Work ...................................................................................... 9 4.05 Delays in Contractor’s Progress ............................................................................................................. 9 ARTICLE 5 – Site, Subsurface And Physical Conditions, Hazardous Environmental Conditions ......... 10 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions .................................................................................................. 10 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions .................................................................................. 10 5.05 Underground Facilities ............................................................................................................................ 10 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site ................................................................................ 10 ARTICLE 6 – Bonds And Insurance ................................................................................................................................ 11 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds ........................................................................................ 11 6.02 Insurance—General Provisions ........................................................................................................... 11 6.03 Contractor’s Insurance ............................................................................................................................ 12 6.04 Builder’s Risk and Other Property Insurance ................................................................................ 15 ARTICLE 7 – Contractor’s Responsibilities ................................................................................................................. 17 7.03 Labor; Working Hours ............................................................................................................................. 17 BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 73 00 - 2 7.07 Concerning Subcontractors and Suppliers ...................................................................................... 18 7.10 Taxes ............................................................................................................................................................... 18 7.13 Safety and Protection ............................................................................................................................... 18 ARTICLE 8 – Other Work At The Site ............................................................................................................................ 18 8.02 Coordination ................................................................................................................................................ 18 ARTICLE 9 – Owner’s Responsibilities ......................................................................................................................... 18 9.13 Owner’s Site Representative ................................................................................................................. 18 ARTICLE 10 – Engineer’s Status During Construction ........................................................................................... 19 10.03 Resident Project Representative ......................................................................................................... 19 ARTICLE 11 – Changes to The Contract ....................................................................................................................... 20 ARTICLE 12 – Claims ............................................................................................................................................................ 20 12.01 Claims.............................................................................................................................................................. 20 ARTICLE 13 – Cost of Work; Allowances, Unit Price Work .................................................................................. 21 13.01 Cost of the Work ......................................................................................................................................... 21 13.03 Unit Price Work .......................................................................................................................................... 21 ARTICLE 14 – Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal, or Acceptance of Defective Work ........... 21 ARTICLE 15 – Payments to Contractor, Set Offs; Completions; Correction Period .................................... 22 15.01 Progress Payments .................................................................................................................................... 22 15.03 Substantial Completion ........................................................................................................................... 22 15.08 Correction Period ....................................................................................................................................... 22 ARTICLE 16 – Suspension of Work And Termination ............................................................................................ 22 16.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate ........................................................................................ 22 ARTICLE 17 – Final Resolutions of Disputes .............................................................................................................. 22 17.02 Arbitration .................................................................................................................................................... 22 17.03 Attorneys’ Fees ........................................................................................................................................... 24 ARTICLE 18 – Miscellaneous ............................................................................................................................................ 24 18.08 Assignment of Contract ........................................................................................................................... 24 18.11 Title to Materials Found on the Site ................................................................................................... 24 BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 73 00 - 3 ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 Defined Terms SC-1.01 Add the following to the end of Paragraph 1.01.A.42 of the General Conditions. Substantial Completion is further defined as (i) that degree of completion of the Project’s operating facilities or systems sufficient to provide Owner with the full-time, uninterrupted, and continuous beneficial operation of the Work; and (ii) all required functional, performance, and acceptance or startup testing has been successfully demonstrated for all components, devices, equipment, and instrumentation and control to the satisfaction of Engineer in accordance with the requirements of the Specifications; and (iii) all inspections required have been completed and identified defective Work replaced or corrected. ARTICLE 2 – PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Performance and Payment Bonds; Evidence of Insurance SC-2.01 Delete Paragraphs 2.01.B. and C. in their entirety and insert the following in their place: B. Evidence of Contractor’s Insurance: When Contractor delivers the signed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner copies of the policies (including all endorsements, and identification of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles) of insurance required to be provided by Contractor in this Contract. Contractor may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this provision. C. Evidence of Owner’s Insurance: After receipt from Contractor of the signed counterparts of the Agreement and all required bonds and insurance documentation, Owner shall promptly deliver to Contractor copies of the policies of insurance to be provided by Owner in this Contract (if any). Owner may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this provision. 2.02 Copies of Documents SC-2.02 Amend the first sentence of Paragraph 2.02.A. to read as follows: Owner shall furnish to Contractor 4 printed copies of the Contract Documents (including one fully signed counterpart of the Agreement), and one copy in electronic portable document format (PDF). SC-2.02 Delete Paragraph 2.02.A in its entirety and insert the following new paragraph in its place: A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor 4 printed copies of conformed Contract Documents incorporating and integrating all Addenda and any amendments negotiated prior to the Effective Date of the Contract (including one fully signed counterpart of the Agreement), and one copy in electronic portable document format (PDF). Additional printed copies of the conformed Contract Documents will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction. 2.06 Electronic Transmittals SC-2.06 Delete Paragraphs 2.06.B and 2.06.C in their entirety and insert the following in their place. B. Electronic documents protocol: 1. Basic Requirements BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 73 00 - 4 a. The parties agree to and will transmit and accept electronic documents in an electronic or digital format using the procedures described in this protocol. Use of the electronic documents and any information contained therein is subject to the requirements of this Protocol and other provisions of the Contract. b. The contents of the information in any electronic document uploaded into the system will be the responsibility of the transmitting party. Data entered in a collaborative mode (entered with the intent to share as determined by permissions and workflows of this Protocol) by all parties will be owned by Engineer but maintained and operated collaboratively by members of the Project team. c. Electronic documents as exchanged by this protocol may be used in the same manner as the printed versions of the same documents that are exchanged using non-electronic format and methods, subject to the same governing requirements, limitations, and restrictions, set forth in the Contract Documents. d. Except as otherwise explicitly stated herein, the terms of this protocol will be incorporated into any other agreement or subcontract between a party and any third party for any portion of the Work on the Project, or any Project-related services, where that third party is, either directly or indirectly, required to exchange electronic documents with a party or with Engineer. Nothing herein will modify the requirements of the Contract regarding communications between and among the parties and their subcontractors and consultants. e. When transmitting electronic documents, the transmitting party makes no representations as to long term compatibility, usability, or readability of the items resulting from the receiving party’s use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those established in this protocol. f. Nothing herein negates any obligation 1) in the Contract to create, provide, or maintain an original printed record version of Drawings and Specifications, signed and sealed according to applicable Laws and Regulations; 2) to comply with any applicable Law or Regulation governing the signing and sealing of design documents or the signing and electronic transmission of any other documents; or 3) to comply with the notice requirements of Paragraph 18.01 of the General Conditions. 2. Automated system notification and audit log tracking: a. Review comments made (or lack thereof) by Engineer or Owner on Contractor submitted documentation does not relieve Contractor from compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents. b. Contractor is responsible for managing, tracking, and documenting Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents. c. Engineer’s or Owner’s acceptance via automated system notifications or audit logs extends only to the face value of the submitted documentation and does not constitute validation of Contractor’s submitted information. 3. System infrastructure for electronic document Exchange a. Owner or Engineer will operate an electronic Project Management System (also referred to in this EDP as “Project Website”) for use of Owner, Engineer and Contractor during the Project for exchange and storage of Project-related BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 73 00 - 5 communications and information. Except as otherwise provided in this EDP or the General Conditions, use of the Project Website by the parties as described in this Paragraph will be mandatory for exchange of Project documents, communications, submittals, and other Project-related information. The following conditions and standards will govern use of the Project Website: 1) The Project website will utilize the following software: VPO, by The Simplex Group, Inc.. 2) Project Website will be available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, except during maintenance times identified by the software authors. 3) Ensure that connectivity to the Project Website is accomplished through DSL, T-1, fiber optic, or wireless communications systems. Minimum bandwidth requirements are 128 kb/s. It is recommended that a faster connection be used for uploading pictures, videos, and data files into the system. 4) Before upgrading any computer software or hardware, verify that such upgrades are compatible with the latest version of the Project Website software at no additional cost to the Engineer or Owner. 5) Utilize the full version of Adobe Acrobat (or equal) so that Portable Document Format (PDF) submittals can be assembled into single files and organized appropriately. Obtaining and utilizing this software will be at no additional cost to Engineer or Owner. 6) Project Website will be the “Official Records” for the project and will provide document archives of the information uploaded thereto. 7) User connectivity i) Provide a list of Contractor’s key personnel requiring access to the Project Website for the Engineer’s acceptance. ii) At the preconstruction meeting, provide a list of Contractor’s key personnel requiring access to the Project Website utilizing the form in Exhibit B to this EDP. Engineer will use this information for no other purpose than to establish the necessary accounts for use by each individual. iii) Specifically identify Contractor’s administrator on the list. iv) Personnel shall have sufficient computer skills required to access the internet, log on to the Project Website, and utilize the system. 8) User access limitations: i) Engineer will control access to the Project Website by allowing access and assigning user profiles to accepted personnel. i) Engineer reserves the right to perform a security check on all potential users. ii) User profiles will define levels of access into the website, determine assigned function-based authorizations, and user privileges. iii) Subcontractors and suppliers will be given access to the website by and through Engineer. Entry of information exchanged and BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 73 00 - 6 transferred between Contractor and subcontractors and suppliers will be the responsibility of Contractor. iv) Contractor will be allowed to add additional personnel and subcontractors to the Project Website. 9) Training: i) Engineer will provide a single training session to assist Contractor in the use of the Project Website. Time cost of the training session will be borne by the attendees. ii) Make applicable staff available for an initial 2-hour training session to be scheduled at a mutually agreeable time and place within 21 days of Notice to Proceed. iii) Training may consist of web-based seminar(s) in conjunction with a conference call. iv) Contractor may request Engineer to provide additional training and technical support for use of the Project Website. Time cost of the training session will again be borne by the attendees. b. Each party will provide hardware, operating system(s) software, internet, e- mail, and large file transfer functions (“System Infrastructure”) at its own cost and sufficient for complying with the EDP and Project Website requirements. As recommendations are modified by authors of the Project Website software, upgrade hardware and software system(s) to meet or exceed their recommendations. Except for minimum standards set forth in this EDP, and any explicit system requirements specified by attachment to thi s EDP, it is the obligation of each party to determine, for itself, its own System Infrastructure. 1) The maximum size of an email attachment for exchange of electronic documents under this EDP is 10 MB. Attachments larger than that may be exchanged using large file transfer functions or physical media. 2) Each Party assumes full and complete responsibility for all its own costs, delays, deficiencies, and errors associated with converting, translating, updating, verifying, licensing, or otherwise enabling its System Infrastructure, including operating systems and software, for use with respect to this EDP. c. Each party is responsible for its own system operations, security, back-up, archiving, audits, printing resources, and other Information Technology (“IT”) for maintaining operations of its System Infrastructure during the Project, including coordination with the party’s individual(s) or entity responsible for managing its System Infrastructure and capable of addressing routine communications and other IT issues affecting the exchange of electronic documents. d. Each party will operate and maintain industry-standard, industry-accepted, ISO standard, commercial-grade security software and systems that are intended to protect the other party from: software viruses and other malicious software like worms, trojans, adware; data breaches; loss of confidentiality; and other threats in the transmission to or storage of information from the other parties, including transmission of electronic documents by physical media such as CD/DVD/flash drive/hard drive. To the extent that a party BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 73 00 - 7 maintains and operates such security software and systems, it shall not be liable to the other party for any breach of system security. e. In the case of disputes, conflicts, or modifications to the EDP required to address issues affecting System Infrastructure, the parties shall cooperatively resolve the issues; but, failing resolution, the Owner is authorized to make and require reasonable and necessary changes to the EDP to effectuate its original intent. If the changes cause additional cost or time to Contractor, not reasonably anticipated under the original EDP, Contractor may seek an adjustment in price or time under the appropriate process in the Contract. f. Each party is responsible for its own back-up and archive of documents sent and received during the term of the contract under this EDP, unless this EDP establishes a Project document archive, either as part of a mandatory Project website or other communications protocol, upon which the parties may rely for document archiving during the specified term of operation of such Project document archive. Further, each party remains solely responsible for its own post-Project back-up and archive of Project documents after the term of the Contract, or after termination of the Project document archive, if one is established, for as long as required by the Contract and as each party deems necessary for its own purposes. g. If a receiving party receives an obviously corrupted, damaged, or unreadable electronic document, the receiving party will advise the sending party of the incomplete transmission. h. The parties will bring any non-conforming electronic documents into compliance with the EDP. The parties will attempt to complete a successful transmission of the electronic document or use an alternative delivery method to complete the communication. C. Software Requirements for Electronic Document Exchange; Limitations 1. Each party will acquire the software and software licenses necessary to create and transmit electronic documents and to read and to use any electronic documents received from the other party (and if relevant from third parties), using the software formats required in this section of the EDP. a. Prior to using any updated version of the software required in this section for sending electronic documents to the other party, the originating party will first notify and receive concurrence from the other party for use of the updated version or adjust its transmission to comply with this EDP. 2. The parties agree not to intentionally edit, reverse engineer, decrypt, remove security or encryption features, or convert to another format for modification purposes any electronic document or information contained therein that was transmitted in a software data format, including Portable Document Format (PDF), intended by sender not to be modified, unless the receiving party obtains the permission of the sending party or is citing or quoting excerpts of the electronic document for Project purposes. 3. Software and data formats for exchange of electronic documents will conform to the requirements set forth in Exhibit A to this EDP, including software versions, if listed. SC-2.06 Supplement Paragraph 2.06 of the General Conditions by adding the following paragraph: D. Requests by Contractor for Electronic Documents in Other Formats BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 73 00 - 8 1. Release of any electronic document versions of the Project Documents in formats other than those identified in the electronic documents Protocol (if any) or elsewhere in the Contract will be at the sole discretion of Owner. 2. To the extent determined by Owner, in its sole discretion, to be prudent and necessary, release of electronic documents versions of Project documents and other Project information requested by Contractor (“Request”) in formats other than those identified in the electronic documents Protocol (if any) or elsewhere in the Contract will be subject to the provisions of the Owner’s response to the Request, and to the following conditions to which Contractor agrees: a. The content included in the electronic documents created by Engineer and covered by the Request was prepared by Engineer as an internal working document for Engineer’s purposes solely and is being provided to Contractor on an “AS IS” basis without any warranties of any kind, including, but not limited to any implied warranties of fitness for any purpose. As such, Contractor is advised and acknowledges that the content may not be suitable for Contractor’s application or may require substantial modification and independent verification by Contractor. The content may include limited resolution of models, not-to-scale schematic representations and symbols, use of notes to convey design concepts in lieu of accurate graphics, approximations, graphical simplifications, undocumented intermediate revisions, and other devices that may affect subsequent reuse. b. Electronic documents containing text, graphics, metadata, or other types of data that are provided by Engineer to Contractor under the request are only for convenience of Contractor. Any conclusion or information obtained or derived from such data will be at the Contractor’s sole risk and the Contractor waives any claims against Engineer or Owner arising from use of data in electronic documents covered by the Request. c. Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer and their subconsultants from all claims, damages, losses, and expenses, including attorneys' fees and defense costs arising out of or resulting from Contractor’s use, adaptation, or distribution of any electronic documents provided under the Request. d. Contractor agrees not to sell, copy, transfer, forward, give away or otherwise distribute this information (in source or modified file format) to any third party without the direct written authorization of Engineer, unless such distribution is specifically identified in the Request and is limited to Contractor’s subcontractors. Contractor warrants that subsequent use by Contractor’s subcontractors complies with all terms of the Contract Documents and Owner’s response to Request. 3. In the event that Owner elects to provide or directs Engineer to provide to Contractor any Contractor-requested electronic document versions of Project information that is not explicitly identified in the Contract Documents as being available to Contractor, the Owner shall be reimbursed by Contractor on an hourly basis (at $ 160 per hour) for any engineering costs necessary to create or otherwise prepare the data in a manner deemed appropriate by Engineer. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 73 00 - 9 ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE 3.01 Intent No Supplementary Conditions in this Article. SC-3.01 Delete Paragraph 3.01.C in its entirety. ARTICLE 4 – COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK 4.05 Delays in Contractor’s Progress SC-4.05 Amend Paragraph 4.05.C by adding the following subparagraphs: 5. Weather-Related Delays a. If “abnormal weather conditions” as set forth in Paragraph 4.05.C.2 of the General Conditions are the basis for a request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Times, such request must be documented by data substantiating each of the following: 1) that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time in which the delay occurred, 2) that such weather conditions could not have been reasonably anticipated, and 3) that such weather conditions had an adverse effect on the Work as scheduled. b. The existence of abnormal weather conditions will be determined on a month- by-month basis in accordance with the following: 1) Every workday on which one or more of the following conditions exist will be considered a “bad weather day”: i) Total precipitation (as rain equivalent) occurring between 7:00 p.m. on the preceding day (regardless of whether such preceding day is a workday) through 7:00 p.m. on the workday in question equals or exceeds 2 inches of precipitation (as rain equivalent, based on the snow/rain conversion indicated in the table entitled Foreseeable Bad Weather Days; such table is hereby incorporated in this SC 4.05.C by reference. ii) Ambient outdoor air temperature at 11:00 a.m. is equal to or less than the following low temperature threshold: 10 degrees Fahrenheit; or, at 3:00 p.m. the ambient outdoor temperature is equal to or greater than the following high temperature threshold: 110 degrees Fahrenheit. 2) Determination of actual bad weather days during performance of the Work will be based on the weather records measured and recorded by National Weather Service weather monitoring station at Deer Creek Dam. 3) Contractor shall anticipate the number of foreseeable bad weather days per month indicated in the table in Exhibit B—Foreseeable Bad Weather Days. 4) In each month, every bad weather day exceeding the number of foreseeable bad weather days established in the table in Exhibit B— Foreseeable Bad Weather Days will be considered as “abnormal weather conditions”. The existence of abnormal weather conditions will not relieve Contractor of the obligation to demonstrate and document that delays caused by abnormal weather are specific to the planned work activities or BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 73 00 - 10 that such activities thus delayed were on Contractor’s then-current Progress Schedule’s critical path for the Project. ARTICLE 5 – SITE, SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions SC-5.03 Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 5.03.D: E. The following table lists the reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site that contain Technical Data, and specifically identifies the Technical Data in the report upon which Contractor may rely: Report Title Date of Report Technical Data F. The following table lists the drawings of existing physical conditions at or adjacent to the Site, including those drawings depicting existing surface or subsurface structures at or adjacent to the Site (except Underground Facilities), that contain Technical Data, and specifically identifies the Technical Data upon which Contractor may rely: Drawing Title Date of Drawing Technical Data G. Contractor may examine copies of reports and drawings identified in SC 5.03.E and SC 5.03.F that were not included with the Bidding Documents at offices of Owner during regular business hours or may request copies from Engineer. 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions SC-5.04 Delete Paragraph 5.04.E.2.c in its entirety and replace with the following: c. Contractor failed to give written notice of differing site conditions required by Paragraph 5.04.A within 14 days of discovery and before conditions are disturbed. Failure to provide such written notice constitutes a waiver of all claims in connection therewith, whether direct or consequential in nature. 5.05 Underground Facilities SC-5.05 Add the following paragraph 5.05.A.6: 6. providing work and assistance (including labor, equipment, and materials) to representatives of underground utility companies associated with relocating or looping underground service lines impacted by the Project. 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site SC-5.06 Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 5.06.A.3: 4. The following table lists the reports known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions at or adjacent to the Site, and the Technical Data (if any) upon which Contractor may rely: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 73 00 - 11 Report Title Date of Report Technical Data 5. The following table lists the drawings known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions at or adjacent to the Site, and Technical Data (if any) contained in such Drawings upon which Contractor may rely: Drawing Title Date of Drawing Technical Data ARTICLE 6 – BONDS AND INSURANCE 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds SC-6.01 Add the following paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 6.01.A: 1. Required Performance Bond Form: The performance bond that Contractor furnishes will be in the form given in Section 00 61 14 of these Specifications. 2. Required Payment Bond Form: The payment bond that Contractor furnishes will be in the form given in Section 00 61 15 of these Specifications. SC-6.01 Add the following paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 6.01.B: 1. The correction period specified as one year after the date of Substantial Completion in Paragraph 15.08.A of the General Conditions is hereby revised to be 2 years after Substantial Completion. 2. After Substantial Completion, Contractor shall furnish a warranty bond issued in the form of EJCDC® C 612, Warranty Bond (2018). The warranty bond must be in a bond amount of [number—either 10, 15, or other] 10 percent of the final Contract Price. The warranty bond period will extend to a date 2 years after Substantial Completion of the Work. Contractor shall deliver the fully executed warranty bond to Owner prior to or with the final application for payment, and in any event no later than 11 months after Substantial Completion. 3. The warranty bond must be issued by the same surety that issues the performance bond required under Paragraph 6.01.A of the General Conditions. 6.02 Insurance—General Provisions SC-6.02 Add the following paragraph immediately after Paragraph 6.02.B: 1. Contractor may obtain worker’s compensation insurance from an insurance company that has not been rated by A.M. Best, provided that such company (a) is domiciled in the state in which the Project is located, (b) is certified or authorized as a worker’s compensation insurance provider by the appropriate state agency, and (c) has been accepted to provide worker’s compensation insurance for similar projects by the state within the last 12 months. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 73 00 - 12 6.03 Contractor’s Insurance SC-6.03 Supplement Paragraph 6.03 with the following provisions after Paragraph 6.03.C: D. Workers’ Compensation and Employer’s Liability: Contractor shall purchase and maintain workers’ compensation and employer’s liability insurance, including, as applicable, United States Longshoreman and Harbor Workers’ Compensation Act, Jones Act, stop- gap employer’s liability coverage for monopolistic states, and foreign voluntary workers’ compensation (from available sources, notwithstanding the jurisdictional requirement of Paragraph 6.02.B of the General Conditions). Workers’ Compensation and Related Policies Policy limits of not less than: Workers’ Compensation State Statutory Applicable Federal (e.g., Longshoreman’s) Statutory Foreign voluntary workers’ compensation (employer’s responsibility coverage), if applicable Statutory Jones Act (if applicable) Bodily injury by accident—each accident $ Bodily injury by disease—aggregate $ Employer’s Liability Each accident $ Each employee $ Policy limit $ Stop-gap Liability Coverage For work performed in monopolistic states, stop-gap liability coverage must be endorsed to either the worker’s compensation or commercial general liability policy with a minimum limit of: $ E. Commercial General Liability – Claims Covered: Contractor shall purchase and maintain commercial general liability insurance, covering all operations by or on behalf of Contractor, on an occurrence basis, against claims for: 1. damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor’s employees, 2. damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage, and 3. damages because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom. F. Commercial General Liability – Form and content: Contractor’s commercial liability policy must be written on a 1996 (or later) Insurance Services Organization, Inc. (ISO) commercial general liability form (occurrence form) and include the following coverages and endorsements: 1. Products and completed operations coverage. a. Such insurance must be maintained for three years after final payment. b. Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other additional insured (as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or elsewhere in the Contract) evidence of continuation of such insurance at final payment and three years thereafter. 2. Blanket contractual liability coverage, including but not limited to coverage of Contractor’s contractual indemnity obligations in Paragraph 7.18. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 73 00 - 13 3. Severability of interests and no insured-versus-insured or cross-liability exclusions. 4. Underground, explosion, and collapse coverage. 5. Personal injury coverage. 6. Additional insured endorsements that include both ongoing operations and products and completed operations coverage through ISO Endorsements CG 20 10 10 01 and CG 20 37 10 01 (together). If Contractor demonstrates to Owner that the specified ISO endorsements are not commercially available, then Contractor may satisfy this requirement by providing equivalent endorsements. 7. For design professional additional insureds, ISO Endorsement CG 20 32 07 04 “Additional Insured—Engineers, Architects or Surveyors Not Engaged by the Named Insured” or its equivalent. H. Commercial General Liability – Excluded Content: The commercial general liability insurance policy, including its coverages, endorsements, and incorporated provisions, must not include any of the following: 1. Any modification of the standard definition of “insured contract” (except to delete the railroad protective liability exclusion if Contractor is required to indemnify a railroad or others with respect to Work within 50 feet of railroad property). 2. Any exclusion for water intrusion or water damage. 3. Any provisions resulting in the erosion of insurance limits by defense costs other than those already incorporated in ISO form CG 00 01. 4. Any exclusion of coverage relating to earth subsidence or movement. 5. Any exclusion for the insured’s vicarious liability, strict liability, or statutory liability (other than worker’s compensation). 6. Any limitation or exclusion based on the nature of Contractor’s work. 7. Any professional liability exclusion broader in effect than the most recent edition of ISO form CG 22 79. I. Commercial General Liability—Minimum Policy Limits Commercial General Liability Policy limits of not less than: General Aggregate $ Products—Completed Operations Aggregate $ Personal and Advertising Injury $ Bodily Injury and Property Damage—Each Occurrence $ J. Automobile Liability: Contractor shall purchase and maintain automobile liability insurance for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance, or use of any motor vehicle. The automobile liability policy must be written on an occurrence basis. Automobile Liability Policy limits of not less than: Bodily Injury Each Person $ Each Accident $ Property Damage Each Accident $ BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 73 00 - 14 Automobile Liability Policy limits of not less than: [or] Combined Single Limit Combined Single Limit (Bodily Injury and Property Damage) $ K. Umbrella or Excess Liability: Contractor shall purchase and maintain umbrella or excess liability insurance written over the underlying employer’s liability, commercial general liability, and automobile liability insurance described in the Paragraphs above. The coverage afforded must be at least as broad as that of each and every one of the underlying policies. Excess or Umbrella Liability Policy limits of not less than: Each Occurrence $ General Aggregate $ L. Using Umbrella or Excess Liability Insurance to Meet CGL and Other Policy Limit Requirements: Contractor may meet the policy limits specified for employer’s liability, commercial general liability, and automobile liability through the primary policies alone, or through combinations of the primary insurance policy’s policy limits and partial attribution of the policy limits of an umbrella or excess liability policy that is at least as broad in coverage as that of the underlying policy, as specified herein. If such umbrella or excess liability policy was required under this Contract, at a specified minimum policy limit, such umbrella or excess policy must retain a minimum limit of $1,000,000 after accounting for partial attribution of its limits to underlying policies, as allowed above. M. Contractor’s Pollution Liability Insurance: Contractor shall purchase and maintain a policy covering third-party injury and property damage, including cleanup costs, as a result of pollution conditions arising from Contractor’s operations and completed operations. This insurance must be maintained for no less than three years after final completion. Contractor’s Pollution Liability Policy limits of not less than: Each Occurrence/Claim $ General Aggregate $ N. Contractor’s Professional Liability Insurance: If Contractor will provide or furnish professional services under this Contract, through a delegation of professional design services or otherwise, then Contractor shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining applicable professional liability insurance. This insurance must cover negligent acts, errors, or omissions in the performance of professional design or related services by the insured or others for whom the insured is legally liable. The insurance must be maintained throughout the duration of the Contract and for a minimum of two years after Substantial Completion. The retroactive date on the policy must pre-date the commencement of furnishing services on the Project. Contractor’s Professional Liability Policy limits of not less than: Each Claim $ Annual Aggregate $ O. Railroad Protective Liability Insurance: Prior to commencing any Work within 50 feet of railroad-owned and controlled property, Contractor shall (1) endorse its commercial BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 73 00 - 15 general liability policy with ISO CG 24 17, removing the contractual liability exclusion for work within 50 feet of a railroad, (2) purchase and maintain railroad protective liability insurance meeting the following requirements, (3) furnish a copy of the endorsement to Owner, and (4) submit a copy of the railroad protective policy and other railroad- required documentation to the railroad, and notify Owner of such submittal. Railroad Protective Liability Insurance Policy limits of not less than: Each Claim $ Aggregate $ P. Unmanned Aerial Vehicle Liability Insurance: If Contractor uses unmanned aerial vehicles (UAV—commonly referred to as drones) at the Site or in support of any aspect of the Work, Contractor shall obtain UAV liability insurance in the amounts stated; name Owner, Engineer, and all individuals and entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds; and provide a certificate to Owner confirming Contractor’s compliance with this requirement. Such insurance will provide coverage for property damage, bodily injury or death, and invasion of privacy. Unmanned Aerial Vehicle Liability Insurance Policy limits of not less than: Each Claim $ General Aggregate $ 6.04 Builder’s Risk and Other Property Insurance SC-6.04 Delete Paragraph 6.04.A and insert the following in its place: A. Owner shall purchase and maintain builder’s risk insurance upon the Work on a completed value basis, in the amount of the Work’s full insurable replacement cost (subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations). The specific requirements applicable to the builder’s risk insurance are set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. SC-6.04 Supplement Paragraph 6.04 of the General Conditions with the following provisions: F. Builder’s Risk Requirements: The builder’s risk insurance must: 1. be written on a builder’s risk “all risk” policy form that at a minimum includes insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and equipment stored and in transit, and must not exclude the coverage of the following risks: fire; windstorm; hail; flood; earthquake, volcanic activity, and other earth movement; lightning; riot; civil commotion; terrorism; vehicle impact; aircraft; smoke; theft; vandalism and malicious mischief; mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; collapse; explosion; debris removal; demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations; and water damage (other than that caused by flood). a. Such policy will include an exception that results in coverage for ensuing losses from physical damage or loss with respect to any defective workmanship, methods, design, or materials exclusions. b. If insurance against mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake, volcanic activity, and other earth movement; or flood, are not commercially available under builder’s risk policies, by endorsement or otherwise, such insurance will be provided through other insurance policies acceptable to Owner and Contractor. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 73 00 - 16 2. cover, as insured property, at least the following: (a) the Work and all materials, supplies, machinery, apparatus, equipment, fixtures, and other property of a similar nature that are to be incorporated into or used in the preparation, fabrication, construction, erection, or completion of the Work, including Owner-furnished or assigned property; (b) spare parts inventory required within the scope of the Contract; and (c) temporary works which are not intended to form part of the permanent constructed Work but which are intended to provide working access to the Site, or to the Work under construction, or which are intended to provide temporary support for the Work under construction, including scaffolding, form work, fences, shoring, falsework, and temporary structures. 3. cover expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property (including but not limited to fees and charges of contractors, engineers, and architects). 4. extend to cover damage or loss to insured property while in temporary storage at the Site or in a storage location outside the Site (but not including property stored at the premises of a manufacturer or Supplier). If this coverage is subject to a sublimit, such sublimit will be a minimum of $ 100,000. 5. extend to cover damage or loss to insured property while in transit. If this coverage is subject to a sublimit, such sublimit will be a minimum of $ 100,000. 6. allow for the waiver of the insurer’s subrogation rights, as set forth in this Contract. 7. allow for partial occupancy or use by Owner by endorsement, and without cancellation or lapse of coverage. 8. include performance/hot testing and start-up, if applicable. 9. be maintained in effect until the Work is complete, as set forth in Paragraph 15.06.D of the General Conditions, or until written confirmation of Owner’s procurement of property insurance following Substantial Completion, whichever occurs first. 10. include as named insureds the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors (of every tier), and any other individuals or entities required by this Contract to be insured under such builder’s risk policy. For purposes of Paragraphs 6.04, 6.05, and 6.06 of the General Conditions, and this and all other corresponding Supplementary Conditions, the parties required to be insured will be referred to collectively as “insureds”. In addition to Owner, Contractor, and Subcontractors of every tier, include as insureds the following: 11. if debris removal in connection with repair or replacement of insured property is subject to a coverage sublimit, such sublimit will be a minimum of $ 100,000. 12. In addition to the coverage sublimits stated above, the following coverages are also subject to sublimits, as follows: a. . If this coverage is subject to a sublimit, such sublimit will be a minimum of $ 100,000. SC-6.04 Supplement Paragraph 6.04 of the General Conditions with the following provision: G. Coverage for Completion Delays: The builder’s risk policy will include, for the benefit of Owner, loss of revenue and soft cost coverage for losses arising from delays in completion that result from covered physical losses or damage. Such coverage will include, without limitation, fixed expenses and debt service for a minimum of 12 months with a maximum deductible of 30 days, compensation for loss of net revenues, rental BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 73 00 - 17 costs, and attorneys’ fees and engineering or other consultants’ fees, if not otherwise covered. SC-6.04 Supplement Paragraph 6.04 of the General conditions with the following provisions: H. Builder’s Risk and Other Property Insurance Deductibles: The purchaser of any required builder’s risk, installation floater, or other property insurance will be responsible for costs not covered because of the application of a policy deductible. 1. The builder’s risk policy (or if applicable the installation floater) will be subject to a deductible amount of no more than $ 100,000 for direct physical loss in any one occurrence. SC-6.04 Delete Paragraph 6.04.A of the General Conditions and substitute the following in its place: A. Installation Floater 1. Contractor shall provide and maintain installation floater insurance on a broad form or “all risk” policy providing coverage for materials, supplies, machinery, fixtures, and equipment that will be incorporated into the Work (“Covered Property”). Coverage under the Contractor’s installation floater will include loss from covered “all risk” causes (perils) to Covered Property: a. of the Contractor, and Covered Property of others that is in Contractor’s care, custody, and control; b. while in transit to the Site, including while at temporary storage sites; c. while at the Site awaiting and during installation, erection, and testing; d. continuing at least until the installation or erection of the Covered Property is completed, and the Work into which it is incorporated is accepted by Owner. 2. The installation floater coverage cannot be contingent on an external cause or risk or limited to property for which the Contractor is legally liable. 3. The installation floater coverage will be in an amount sufficient to protect Contractor’s interest in the Covered Property. Contractor will be solely responsible for any deductible carried under this coverage. 4. This policy will include a waiver of subrogation applicable to Owner, Contractor, Engineer, all Subcontractors, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents and other consultants and subcontractors of any of them. ARTICLE 7 – CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES 7.03 Labor; Working Hours SC-7.03 Add the following new subparagraphs immediately after Paragraph 7.03.C: 1. Regular working hours will be 7:00 AM to 7:00 PM. 2. Owner’s legal holidays are MLK Day, Presidents Day, Fourth of July, Pioneer Day, Labor Day, Veterans Day, Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day, and New Years day. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 73 00 - 18 SC-7.03 Amend the first and second sentences of Paragraph 7.03.C to state “…all Work at the Site must be performed during regular working hours, Monday through Friday. Contractor will not perform Work on a Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday”. SC-7.03 Delete Paragraph 7.03.C in its entirety and insert the following: C. In the absence of any Laws or Regulations to the contrary, Contractor may perform the Work on holidays, during any or all hours of the day, and on any or all days of the week, at Contractor's sole discretion. 7.07 Concerning Subcontractors and Suppliers SC-7.07 Supplement Paragraph 7.07.A by adding the following sentence after the first sentence of the paragraph: Contractor shall perform not less than 55 percent of the Work with its own forces (i.e., without subcontracting) without Owner’s prior written approval. This requirement is understood to refer to installing, performing, and constructing Work, exclusive of the supply of materials and equipment for the Project. 7.10 Taxes SC-7.10 Add a new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 7.10.A: A. Owner is exempt from payment of sales and compensating use taxes of the State of Utah and of cities and counties thereof on all materials to be incorporated into the Work. 1. Owner will furnish the required certificates of tax exemption to Contractor for use in the purchase of supplies and materials to be incorporated into the Work. 2. Owner’s exemption does not apply to construction tools, machinery, equipment, or other property purchased by or leased by Contractor, or to supplies or materials not incorporated into the Work. ARTICLE 8 – OTHER WORK AT THE SITE No changes ARTICLE 9 – OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES 9.13 Owner’s Site Representative SC-9.13 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 9.12 of the General Conditions: 9.13 Owner’s Site Representative A. Owner will furnish an “Owner’s Site Representative” to represent Owner at the Site and assist Owner in observing the progress and quality of the Work. Owner’s Site Representative is not Engineer’s consultant, agent, or employee. Owner’s Site Representative will be Bowen Collins & Associates. The authority and responsibilities of Owner’s Site Representative follow: . BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 73 00 - 19 ARTICLE 10 – ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 10.03 Resident Project Representative SC-10.03 Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 10.03.B: C. The Resident Project Representative (RPR) will be Engineer's representative at the Site. RPR's dealings in matters pertaining to the Work in general will be with Engineer and Contractor. RPR's dealings with Subcontractors will only be through or with the full knowledge or approval of Contractor. The RPR will: 1. Conferences and Meetings: Attend meetings with Contractor, such as preconstruction conferences, progress meetings, job conferences, and other Project-related meetings (but not including Contractor’s safety meetings), and as appropriate prepare and circulate copies of minutes thereof. 2. Safety Compliance: Comply with Site safety programs, as they apply to RPR, and if required to do so by such safety programs, receive safety training specifically related to RPR’s own personal safety while at the Site. 3. Liaison a. Serve as Engineer’s liaison with Contractor. Working principally through Contractor’s authorized representative or designee, assist in providing information regarding the provisions and intent of the Contract Documents. b. Assist Engineer in serving as Owner’s liaison with Contractor when Contractor’s operations affect Owner’s on-Site operations. c. Assist in obtaining from Owner additional details or information, when required for Contractor’s proper execution of the Work. 4. Review of Work; Defective Work a. Conduct on-Site observations of the Work to assist Engineer in determining, to the extent set forth in Paragraph 10.02 if the Work is in general proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. b. Observe whether any Work in place appears to be defective. c. Observe whether any Work in place should be uncovered for observation, or requires special testing, inspection or approval. 5. Inspections and Tests a. Observe Contractor-arranged inspections required by Laws and Regulations, including but not limited to those performed by public or other agencies having jurisdiction over the Work. b. Accompany visiting inspectors representing public or other agencies having jurisdiction over the Work. 6. Payment Requests: Review Applications for Payment with Contractor. 7. Completion a. Participate in Engineer’s visits regarding Substantial Completion. b. Assist in the preparation of a punch list of items to be completed or corrected. c. Participate in Engineer’s visit to the Site in the company of Owner and Contractor regarding completion of the Work and prepare a final punch list of items to be completed or corrected by Contractor. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 73 00 - 20 d. Observe whether items on the final punch list have been completed or corrected. D. The RPR will not: 1. Authorize any deviation from the Contract Documents or substitution of materials or equipment (including “or-equal” items). 2. Exceed limitations of Engineer’s authority as set forth in the Contract Documents. 3. Undertake any of the responsibilities of Contractor, Subcontractors, or Suppliers. 4. Advise on, issue directions relative to, or assume control over any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction. 5. Advise on, issue directions regarding, or assume control over security or safety practices, precautions, and programs in connection with the activities or operations of Owner or Contractor. 6. Participate in specialized field or laboratory tests or inspections conducted off-site by others except as specifically authorized by Engineer. 7. Authorize Owner to occupy the Project in whole or in part. ARTICLE 11 – CHANGES TO THE CONTRACT No Supplementary Conditions in this Article. ARTICLE 12 – CLAIMS 12.01 Claims SC-12.01 Delete Paragraph 12.01.B in its entirety and insert the following in its place: B. Submittal of Claim: 1. The party submitting a Claim shall deliver it directly to the other party to the Contract promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event giving rise thereto; in the case of appeals regarding Change Proposals within 30 days of the decision under appeal. The party submitting the Claim shall also furnish a copy to the Engineer, for its information only. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim rests with the party making the Claim. In the case of a Claim by Contractor seeking an increase in the Contract Times or Contract Price, Contractor shall certify that the Claim is made in good faith, that the supporting data are accurate and complete, and that to the best of Contractor’s knowledge and belief the amount of time or money requested accurately reflects the full amount to which Contractor is entitled. 2. If Contractor submits a claim to Owner for additional compensation, Owner shall have the right, as a condition to considering the claim, and as a basis for evaluation of the claim, and until the claim has been settled, to audit Contractor's books. This right shall include the right to examine books, records, documents, and other evidence and accounting procedures and practices, sufficient to discover and verify all direct and indirect costs of whatever nature claimed to have been incurred or anticipated to be incurred and for which the claim has been submitted. The right to audit shall include the right to inspect Contractor's plants, or such parts thereof, as may be or have been engaged in the performance of the Work. Contractor further agrees that the right to audit encompasses all subcontracts and is binding upon subcontractors. The right to examine and inspect herein provided for shall be BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 73 00 - 21 exercisable through such representatives as Owner deems desirable during Contractor's normal business hours at the office of Contractor. Contractor shall make available to Owner for auditing, all relevant accounting records and documents, and other financial data, and upon request, shall submit true copies of requested records to Owner. ARTICLE 13 – COST OF WORK; ALLOWANCES, UNIT PRICE WORK 13.01 Cost of the Work SC-13.01 Supplement Paragraph 13.01.B.5.c.(2) by adding the following sentence: The equipment rental rate book that governs the included costs for the rental of machinery and equipment owned by Contractor (or a related entity) under the Cost of the Work provisions of this Contract is the most current edition of Rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment. SC-13.01 Supplement Paragraph 13.01.C.2 by adding the following definition of small tools and hand tools: a. For purposes of this paragraph, “small tools and hand tools” means any tool or equipment whose current price if it were purchased new at retail would be less than $500. 13.03 Unit Price Work SC-13.03 Delete Paragraph 13.03.E in its entirety and insert the following in its place: E. Adjustments in Unit Price 1. Contractor or Owner shall be entitled to an adjustment in the unit price with respect to an item of Unit Price Work if: a. the extended price of a particular item of Unit Price Work amounts to 10 percent or more of the Contract Price (based on estimated quantities at the time of Contract formation) and the variation in the quantity of that particular item of Unit Price Work actually furnished or performed by Contractor differs by more than 25 percent from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; and b. Contractor’s unit costs to perform the item of Unit Price Work have changed materially and significantly because of the quantity change. 2. The adjustment in unit price will account for and be coordinated with any related changes in quantities of other items of Work, and in Contractor’s costs to perform such other Work, such that the resulting overall change in Contract Price is equitable to Owner and Contractor. 3. Adjusted unit prices will apply to all units of that item. ARTICLE 14 – TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL, OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK No Supplementary Conditions in this Article. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 73 00 - 22 ARTICLE 15 – PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR, SET OFFS; COMPLETIONS; CORRECTION PERIOD 15.01 Progress Payments SC-15.01 Delete Paragraph 15.01.D.1 in its entirety and insert the following in its place: 1. Thirty (30) days after presentation of the Application for Payment to Owner with Engineer’s recommendation, the amount recommended will (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 14.02.E) become due, and when due will be paid by Owner to Contractor. SC-15.01 Add the following new Paragraph 15.01.F: F. For contracts in which the Contract Price is based on the Cost of Work, if Owner determines that progress payments made to date substantially exceed the actual progress of the Work (as measured by reference to the Schedule of Values), or present a potential conflict with the Guaranteed Maximum Price, then Owner may require that Contractor prepare and submit a plan for the remaining anticipated Applications for Payment that will bring payments and progress into closer alignment and take into account the Guaranteed Maximum Price (if any), through reductions in billings, increases in retainage, or other equitable measures. Owner will review the plan, discuss any necessary modifications, and implement the plan as modified for all remaining Applications for Payment. 15.03 Substantial Completion SC-15.03 Add the following new subparagraph to Paragraph 15.03.B: 1. If some or all the Work has been determined not to be at a point of Substantial Completion and will require re-inspection or re-testing by Engineer, the cost of such re-inspection or re-testing, including the cost of time, travel and living expenses, will be paid by Contractor to Owner. If Contractor does not pay, or the parties are unable to agree as to the amount owed, then Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under this Article 15. 15.08 Correction Period SC-15.08 Add the following new Paragraph 15.08.G: G. The correction period specified as one year after the date of Substantial Completion in Paragraph 15.08.A of the General Conditions is hereby revised to be the number of years set forth in SC 6.01.B.1; or if no such revision has been made in SC 6.01.B, the n the correction period is hereby specified to be 1 years after Substantial Completion. ARTICLE 16 – SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 16.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate SC-16.04 In Paragraph B, delete the two “30 days” callouts and replace both with “45 days”. ARTICLE 17 – FINAL RESOLUTIONS OF DISPUTES 17.02 Arbitration SC-17.02 Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 17.01. 17.02 Arbitration A. All matters subject to final resolution under this Article will be settled by arbitration administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 73 00 - 23 Construction Industry Arbitration Rules (subject to the conditions and limitations of this Paragraph SC 17.02). Any controversy or claim in the amount of $100,000 or less will be settled in accordance with the American Arbitration Association’s supplemental rules for Fixed Time and Cost Construction Arbitration. This agreement to arbitrate will be specifically enforceable under the prevailing law of any court having jurisdiction. B. The demand for arbitration will be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and with the selected arbitration administrator, and a copy will be sent to Engineer for information. The demand for arbitration will be made within the specific time required in Article 17, or if no specified time is applicable within a reasonable time after the matter in question has arisen, and in no event will any such demand be made after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such matter in question would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. C. The arbitrator(s) must be licensed engineers, contractors, attorneys, or construction managers. Hearings will take place pursuant to the standard procedures of the Construction Arbitration Rules that contemplate in-person hearings. The arbitrators will have no authority to award punitive or other damages not measured by the prevailing party's actual damages, except as may be required by statute or the Contract. Any award in an arbitration initiated under this clause will be limited to monetary damages and include no injunction or direction to any party other than the direction to pay a monetary amount. D. The Arbitrators will have the authority to allocate the costs of the arbitration process among the parties but will only have the authority to allocate attorneys' fees if a specific Law or Regulation or this Contract permits them to do so. E. The award of the arbitrators must be accompanied by a reasoned written opinion and a concise breakdown of the award. The written opinion will cite the Contract provisions deemed applicable and relied on in making the award. F. The parties agree that failure or refusal of a party to pay its required share of the deposits for arbitrator compensation or administrative charges will constitute a waiver by that party to present evidence or cross-examine witness. In such event, the other party shall be required to present evidence and legal argument as the arbitrator(s) may require for the making of an award. Such waiver will not allow for a default judgment against the non-paying party in the absence of evidence presented as provided for above. G. No arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract will include by consolidation, joinder, or in any other manner any other individual or entity (including Engineer, and Engineer’s consultants and the officers, directors, partners, agents, employees or consultants of any of them) who is not a party to this Contract unless: 1. the inclusion of such other individual or entity will allow complete relief to be afforded among those who are already parties to the arbitration; 2. such other individual or entity is substantially involved in a question of law or fact which is common to those who are already parties to the arbitration, and which will arise in such proceedings; 3. such other individual or entity is subject to arbitration under a contract with either Owner or Contractor, or consents to being joined in the arbitration; and 4. the consolidation or joinder is in compliance with the arbitration administrator’s procedural rules. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 73 00 - 24 H. The award will be final. Judgment may be entered upon it in any court having jurisdiction thereof, and it will not be subject to modification or appeal, subject to provisions of the Laws and Regulations relating to vacating or modifying an arbitral award. I. Except as may be required by Laws or Regulations, neither party nor an arbitrator may disclose the existence, content, or results of any arbitration hereunder without the prior written consent of both parties, with the exception of any disclosure required by Laws and Regulations or the Contract. To the extent any disclosure is allowed pursuant to the exception, the disclosure must be strictly and narrowly limited to maintain confidentiality to the extent possible. 17.03 Attorneys’ Fees SC-17.03 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 17.02. 17.03 Attorneys’ Fees A. For any matter subject to final resolution under this Article, the prevailing party shall be entitled to an award of its attorneys’ fees incurred in the final resolution proceedings, in an equitable amount to be determined in the discretion of the court, arbitrator, arbitration panel, or other arbiter of the matter subject to final resolution, considering the parties’ initial demand or defense positions in comparison with the final result. ARTICLE 18 – MISCELLANEOUS 18.08 Assignment of Contract 18.11 March 24, 2022Title to Materials Found on the Site SC-18.11 Add the following new Paragraph 18.11. 18.11 Title to Materials Found on the Site A. Owner reserves the right to retain title to all soils, stone, sand, gravel, and other materials developed and obtained from excavations and other operations connected with the Work. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, neither Contractor nor any Subcontractor have any right, title, or interest in or to any such materials. Contractor will be permitted to use these materials in the Work, without charge, subject to any such materials meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 19 – GOVERNMENT REQUIREMENTS SC-19 Add new Article 19 immediately after Article 18 of the General Conditions ARTICLE 19 – GOVERNMENT REQUIREMENTS 19.01 Agency Not a Party A. This Contract is expected to be funded either fully or in part with funds provided by the Utah Division of Drinking Water (Agency), through its Drinking Water Revolving Loan Fund. Neither Agency, nor any of its departments, entities, or employees, is a party to this Contract. B. Agency concurrence is required on both the Bid and Contract before the Contract is effective. 19.02 Prohibition Against Listed Violating Facilities A. Definitions BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 73 00 - 25 1. Air Act means the Clean Air Act, as amended (42 U.S.C. 1857 et seq.). 2. Water Act means the Clean Water Act, as amended (33 U.S.C. 1251 et seq.). 3. Clean Air Standards means any enforceable rules, regulations, guidelines, standards, limitations, orders, controls, prohibitions, or other requirements which are contained in, issued under, or otherwise adopted under the Air Act or Executive Order 11738, an applicable implementation plan as described in section 110 (d) of the Air Act (42 U.S.C. 1857c-5(d)), an approved implementation procedure or plan under section 111 (c) or section 111(d), or an approved implementation procedure under section 112(d) of the Air Act (42 U.S.C. 1857c-7(d)). 4. Clean Water Standards means any enforceable limitation, control, condition, prohibition, standard, or other requirement which is promulgated under the Water Act or contained in a permit issued to a discharger by the Environmental Protection Agency or by a State under an approved program, as authorized by section 402 of the Water Act (33 U.S.C. 1342), or by a local government to ensure compliance with pretreatment regulations as required by section 307 of Water Act (33 U.S.C. 1317). 5. Compliance means compliance with clean air or water standards. Compliance shall also mean compliance with a schedule or plan ordered or approved by a court of competent jurisdiction, the Environmental Protection Agency in accordance with the requirements of the Air Act or Water Act and regulations. 6. Facility means any building, plant, installation, structure, mine, vessel, or other floating craft, location, or site of operations, owned, leased, or supervised by Contractor or subcontractor, to be used in the performance of Contract or subcontract. Where a location or site of operations contains or includes more than one building, plant, installation, or structure, the entire location or site shall be deemed to be a facility except where the Director, Office of Federal Activities, Environmental Protection Agency, determines that independent facilities are located in one geographical area. B. Federal Requirements 1. Comply with all requirements of Section 114 of the Clean Air Act, as amended (42 U.S.C. 1857, et seq., as amended by Pub. L. 92-604) and Section 308 of the Clean Water Act (33 U.S.C. 1251, as amended), respectively, which relate to inspection, monitoring, entry, reports, and information, as well as other requirements specified in Section 114 and Section 308 of the Air Act and the Water Act, respectively, and all regulations and guidelines issued thereunder before the award of this Contract. 2. No portion of the work required by this Contract shall be performed in a facility listed on the Environmental Protection Agency list of violating facilities on the date when this Contract was awarded unless and until the EPA eliminates the name of such facility or facilities from the listing. 3. Contractor to use its best efforts to comply with clean air and clean water standards at the facilities in which the Contract is being performed. 4. Insert the substance of the provisions of this clause, including this paragraph, in any nonexempt subcontract. C. Utah State Requirements 1. Contractor shall adhere to effective dust control procedures as required under the Utah Air Quality Standards and Regulations (UAC R307). If asbestos is encountered BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 73 00 - 26 during this Project, Contractor shall follow standards for handling according to UAC R307-801. D. Contractor shall adhere to proper trade waste and materials disposal 19.03 Occupational Safety and Health A. Authority 1. Contractor is subject to the provisions of the Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970. 2. These Contract Documents and the joint and several phases of construction hereby contemplated are to be governed at all times by applicable provisions of the Federal law(s) including but not limited to the latest amendment(s) of the following: a. Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Acto of 1970, Public Law 94- 596; b. Part 1910 – Occupational Safety and Health Standards, Chapter XVII of Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations. c. Part 1926 – Safety and Health Regulations for Construction, Chapter XVII of Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations. B. Safety and Health Program Requirements 1. This Project, Contractor, and subcontractors, shall be governed by Chapter XVII of Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 1926 - Safety and Health Regulations for Construction (29 CFR 22801), as amended to date. 2. To implement the program and to provide safe and healthful working conditions for all persons, general project safety meetings will be conducted at the site at least once each month during construction, by the construction superintendent or his/her designated safety officer. Notice of such meeting shall be issued not less than 3 days prior, stating the exact time, location, and agenda to be included. Attendance by the Owner, Engineer, general foreman, shop steward(s), and trades, or their designated representatives, witnessed in writing as such, shall be mandatory. 3. To further implement the program, each trade shall conduct a short gang meeting, not less than once a week, to review project safety requirements mandatory for all persons during the coming week. The gang foreman shall report the agenda and specific items covered to the project superintendent, who shall incorporate these items in his/her daily log or report. 4. Contractor and all subcontractors shall immediately report all accidents, injuries, or health hazards to Owner and Engineer, or their designated representatives, in writing. This shall not obviate any mandatory reporting under the provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970. C. This program shall become a part of the Contract Documents and the Contract between Owner and Contractor, and all subcontractors, as though fully written therein. 19.04 Anti-Kickback A. Contractor shall comply with the Copeland Anti-Kickback Act (18 USC 874 and 40 USC 3145) as supplemented by Department of Labor regulations (29 CFR Part 3, “Contractors and Subcontractors on Public Buildings or Public Works Financed in Whole or in Part by Loans or Grants of the United States”). The Act provides that Contractor or subcontractor shall be prohibited from inducing, by any means, any person employed in BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 73 00 - 27 the construction, completion, or repair of public facilities, to give up any part of the compensation to which they are otherwise entitled. B. Contractor certifies and warrants that no gratuities, kickbacks, and contingency fees were paid in connection with this Contract, nor were any fees, commissions, gifts, or other considerations made contingent upon the award of this Contract. C. Contactor certifies that, to Contractor’s knowledge, no state employee has any personal or beneficial interest whatsoever in the services described in this Contract. D. No staff member of Contractor, compensated either partially or wholly with funds disbursed pursuant to this Contract, shall engage in any contract or activity which would constitute a conflict of interest as related to this Contract. 19.05 Site Access A. Contractor and Owner shall insure that authorized representatives of the US EPA, Comptroller General, Inspector General, Utah DEQ, State Historic Preservation Office, and other applicable federal and state agencies and officials will have access to the Project work whenever it is in preparation or progress and shall provide proper facilities for such access and inspection. Contractor shall allow these representatives to have access to any books, documents, plans, reports, papers, and other records of Contractor which are pertinent to the Project for the purpose of making audit, examination, excerpts, copies, and transcriptions thereof and to interview any officer or employee. Contractor shall ensure that all subagreements will also afford access to such Project Work, Sites, documents, records, and persons. 19.06 Environmental Requirements A. When constructing a Project involving trenching and/or other related earth excavations, Contractor shall comply with the following environmental conditions: 1. Wetlands – When disposing of excess, spoil, or other Construction Materials on public or private property, Contractor shall not fill in or otherwise convert wetlands. 2. Floodplains – When disposing of excess, spoil, or other Construction Materials on public or private property, Contractor shall not fill in or otherwise convert 100-year floodplain areas (Standard Flood Hazard Area) delineated on the latest Federal Emergency Management Agency Floodplain Maps, or other appropriate maps, e.g., alluvial soils on NRCS Soil Survey Maps. 3. Historic Preservation - Applicants shall ensure that Contractors maintain a copy of the following inadvertent discovery plan onsite for review: a. If during the course of any ground disturbance related to any Project, any post review discovery, including but not limited to, any artifacts, foundations, or other indications of past human occupation of the area are uncovered, shall be protected by complying with the following: 1) Construction shall be halted, with as little disruption to the archaeological site as possible. 2) Contractor shall notify Owner who shall contact the State Historic Preservation Officer. 3) The State Historic Preservation Officer may decide to have an archaeologist inspect the site and make recommendations concerning the steps needed to protect the site before construction is resumed. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 73 00 - 28 4) The entire event shall be handled as expediently as possible to hold the loss in construction time to a minimum while still protecting archaeological finds. b. A similar procedure should be followed with regard to more recent historical resources. Should any artifacts, housing sites, etc., be uncovered, the same procedure shall be followed as for an archaeological find. c. In the event archaeological/historical data are evaluated to meet National Register criteria, the Advisory Council on Historic Preservation may be notified and asked to comment by the Utah State Revolving Fund Program. 4. Endangered Species – Contractor shall comply with the Endangered Species Act, which provides for the protection of endangered and/or threatened species and critical habitat. Should any evidence of the presence of endangered and/or threatened species or their critical habitat be brought to the attention of Contractor, Contractor will immediately report this evidence to Owner and a representative of Agency. Construction shall be temporarily halted pending the notification process and further directions issued by Agency after consultation with the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service. 5. Site Erosion and Sediment Control Measures a. Every effort shall be made by Contractor and subcontractors to prevent and correct problems associated with erosion and runoff processes which could occur during and after project construction. The efforts should be consistent with applicable local ordinances and the Nonpoint Source Pollution Control Guidance. Whenever appropriate, Contractor's efforts shall reflect the following engineering principles: 1) When appropriate, land grading and excavating should be kept at a minimum to reduce the possibility of creating runoff and erosion problems which require extensive control measures. 2) Whenever possible, topsoil should be removed and stockpiled before grading begins. 3) Land exposure should be minimized in terms of area and time. 4) Exposed areas subject to erosion should be covered as quickly as possible by means of mulching or vegetation. 5) Natural vegetation should be retained whenever feasible. 6) Early completion of stabilized drainage systems (temporary and permanent systems) will substantially reduce erosion potential. 7) Roadways and parking lots should be paved or otherwise stabilized as soon as feasible. 8) Clearing and grading should not be started until a firm construction schedule is known and can be effectively coordinated with grading and clearing activity. 19.07 Debarment and Suspension A. Contractors must file the required certification included in Section 00 45 38 - Certification Regarding Debarment. A contract award (see 2 CFR 180.220) must not be made to parties listed on the governmentwide exclusions in the System for Award Management (SAM), in accordance with the OMB guidelines at 2 CFR 180 that implement BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 73 00 - 29 Executive Orders 12549 and 12689 “Debarment and Suspension”. SAM Exclusions contains the names of parties debarred, suspended, or otherwise excluded by agencies, as well as parties declared ineligible under statutory or regulatory authority other than Executive Order 12549. 19.08 Preservation of Open competition and Government Neutrality A. Owner has agreed to comply with Executive Order 13202 (Feb. 22, 2001, 66 Federal Register 11225) of February 17, 1001, entitled “Preservation of Open Competition and Government Neutrality Towards Government Contractors’ Labor Relations on Federal and Federally Funded Construction Projects,” as amended by Executive Order 13208 (April 11, 2001, 66 Federal Register 18717) of April 6, 2001, entitled “Amendment to Executive Order 13202, Preservation of Open Competition and Government Neutrality Towards Government Contractors’ Labor Relations on Federal and Federally Funded Construction Projects.” B. Amend 48 CFR Part 36.202 by adding paragraph (d) to read as follows: (d) In accordance with Executive Order 13202, of February 17, 2001, Preservation of Open Competition and Government Neutrality Towards Government Contractors' Labor Relations on Federal and Federally Funded Construction Projects, as amended on April 6, 2001 – (1) The Government, or any construction manager acting on behalf of the Government, must not – (i) Require or prohibit offerors, contractors, or subcontractors to enter into or adhere to agreements with one or more labor organizations (as defined in 42 U.S.C. 2000e(d)) on the same or other related construction projects: or (ii) Otherwise discriminate against offerors, contractors, or subcontractors for becoming, refusing to become, or remaining signatories or otherwise adhering to agreements with one or more labor organizations, on the same or other related on construction projects. (2) Nothing in this paragraph prohibits offerors, contractors, or subcontractors from voluntarily entering into project labor agreements. (3) The head of the agency may exempt a construction project from this policy if the agency head finds that, as of February 17, 2001 – (i) The agency or a construction manager acting on behalf of the Government had issued or was a party to bid specifications, project agreements, agreements with one or more labor organizations, or other controlling documents with respect to that particular project, which contained any of the requirements or prohibitions in paragraph (d)(1) of this section; and (ii) One or more construction contract(s) subject to such requirements or prohibitions had been awarded. (4) The head of the agency may exempt a particular project, contract, or subcontract from this policy upon a finding that special circumstances require an exemption in order to avert an imminent threat to public health or safety, or to serve the national security. A finding of "special circumstances" may not be based on the possibility or presence of a labor BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 73 00 - 30 dispute concerning the use of contractors or subcontractors who are nonsignatories to, or otherwise do not adhere to, agreements with one or more labor organizations, or concerning employees on the project who are not members of or affiliated with a labor organization. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 73 00 - 31 EXHIBIT A—SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRONIC DOCUMENT EXCHANGE Item Electronic Documents Transmittal Means Data Format Note (1) a.1 General communications, meeting notices and responses to general information requests for which there is no specific prescribed form. Email Email a.2 Meeting agendas, meeting minutes, Inspection requests and reports, RFI’s and responses to RFI’s, and Contract forms. Project Website PDF (2) a.3 Record and Closeout Submittals (Shop Drawings, “or equal” requests, substitution requests, documentation accompanying Sample submittals and other submittals) to Owner and Engineer, and Owner’s and Engineer’s responses to Contractor’s Submittals, Shop Drawings, correspondence, and Applications for Payment. Project Website PDF and EXC for Payment App a.4 Correspondence; milestone and final version Submittals of reports, layouts, Drawings, maps, calculations and spreadsheets, Specifications, Drawings and other Submittals from Contractor to Owner or Engineer and for responses from Engineer and Owner to Contractor regarding Submittals. Project Website PDF a.5 Photographs with dates Project Website JPEG or JPEG2000 a.6 Videos with dates Project Website WMV a.7 Layouts and drawings to be submitted to Owner for future use and modification. Email w/ Attachment or LFE DWG a.8 Correspondence, reports, and Specifications to be submitted to Owner for future word processing use and modification. Email w/ Attachment or LFE DOCX a.9 Spreadsheets and data to be submitted to Owner for future data processing use and modification. Email w/ Attachment or LFE EXC a.10 Database files and data to be submitted to Owner for future data processing use and modification. Email w/ Attachment or LFE DB Notes (1) All exchanges and uses of transmitted data are subject to the appropriate provisions of Contract Documents. (2) Transmittal of written notices is governed by Paragraph 18.01 of the General Conditions. Key Email Standard Email formats (.htm, .rtf, or .txt). Do not use stationery formatting or other features that impair legibility of content on screen or in printed copies LFE Agreed upon Large File Exchange method (FTP, CD, DVD, hard drive) PDF Portable Document Format readable by Adobe® Acrobat Reader Version 11 or later DWG Autodesk® AutoCAD .dwg format Version 2018 or later DOC Microsoft® Word .docx format Version 2019 or later EXC Microsoft® Excel .xlsx or .xml format Version 2019 or later DB Microsoft® Access .accdb format Version 2016 or later BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 73 00 - 32 EX H I B I T B —PR O J E C T W E B S I T E U S E R L I S T EP M S y s t e m U s e r L i s t Zi p Co d e At t a c h a d d i t i o n a l p a g e s a s n e e d e d St a t e Ci t y Ad d r e s s Pr i m a r y P h o n e Co m p a n y E-ma i l A d d r e s s Pr o j e c t Ro l e Na m e BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ADDENDUM NUMBER 1 WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 91 13.01 - 1 SECTION 00 91 13.01 ADDENDA ADDENDUM NUMBER 1 1.1 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Name: Water System Capital Project B. Project Number: 757-23-02 C. Owner: Timber Lakes Water Special Service District D. Engineer: Bowen Collins & Associates E. Date of Addendum: [Select date of Addendum] 1.2 NOTICE TO PLANHOLDERS AND/OR BIDDERS A. This Addendum is issued to all registered plan holders pursuant to Section 00 21 13 - Instructions to Bidders and Section 00 70 00 – General Conditions. This Addendum serves to clarify, correct, and/or supersede information in the Specifications, Drawings, and previously issued Addenda (Contract Documents). Portions of the Addendum affecting the Contract Documents will be incorporated into the Contract by enumeration of the Addendum in the Owner/Contractor Agreement. B. Bidder must acknowledge receipt of this Addendum in the appropriate space on the Bid Form. 1.3 PRIOR ADDENDA 1.4 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS, AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT A. Bid Date: 1. The date and time for receipt of Bids is [Select "unchanged" or "changed"] by this Addendum: Select new Bid Date; same time and location. 1.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 1.6 DRAWINGS 1.7 APPENDICIES 1.8 CLARIFICATIONS 1.9 ATTACHMENTS 1. [List items to be included as Attachments below] END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ADDENDUM NUMBER 1 WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 00 91 13.01 - 2 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUMMARY OF WORK WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 11 00 - 1 SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The Work to be performed under this Contract consists of furnishing all plant, tools, equipment, materials, supplies, and manufactured articles and furnishing all labor, transportation, and services, including fuel, power, water, and essential communications, and performing all Work, or other operations required for the fulfillment of the Contract in strict accordance with the Contract Documents. The Work shall be complete, and all Work, materials, and services not expressly indicated or called for in the Contract Documents, which may be necessary for the complete, safe, and proper construction of the Work in good faith shall be provided by Contractor as though originally so indicated, at no increase in cost to Owner. 1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work of this Contract comprises the construction of approximately 2,470 feet of 12-inch, 1,590 feet of 10-inch, and 260 feet of 6-inch HDPE water pipes, eight new flow meter vaults, development of one new spring, rehabilitation of one existing spring, and two new chlorination buildings. B. The Work is located in Timber Lakes, Utah as indicated on the Drawings. 1.3 CONTRACT METHOD A. The Work hereunder will be constructed under a single unit price contract. 1.4 STREAMLINED SPECIFICATIONS A. These specifications are written in streamlined or declarative style, often using incomplete sentences. This imperative language is directed to Contractor unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Omissions of such words and phrases as “Contractor shall,” “in conformity therewith,” “shall be,” “as shown on the Drawings,” “a,” “an,” “the,” and “all” are intentional in streamlined sections. 1. Omitted words shall be supplied by inference in the same manner as when a note appears on the Drawings. 2. Omission of such words shall not relieve Contractor from providing the items and work described herein or indicated on the Drawings. 3. Words “shall be” are included by inference where a colon (:) is used within sentences or phrases. 1.5 WORK BY OTHERS A. Owner reserves the right to perform or award other work concurrent with the Work included in this Contract BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUMMARY OF WORK WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 11 00 - 2 1. Work may be conducted at or adjacent to the Site by other contractors during the performance of the Work under this Contract. Conduct operations to cause a minimum of interference with the Work of such other contractors and cooperate fully with such contractors to provide continued safe access to their respective portions of the Site, as required to perform Work under their respective contracts. B. Interference With Work On Utilities: 1. Cooperate and coordinate fully with all utility forces of Owner or forces of other public or private agencies engaged in the relocation, altering, or otherwise rearranging of any facilities which interfere with the progress of the Work. 2. Schedule the Work to minimize interference with said relocation, altering, or other rearranging of facilities. 1.6 WORK SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING CONSTRAINTS A. Schedule and perform the Work in such a manner as to result in the least possible disruption to the public's use of roadways, driveways, and utilities. Utilities shall include but not be limited to water, sewerage, drainage structures, ditches and canals, gas, electric, cable television, and telephone. Refer to Utility Adjustment and other plan and profile sheets for approximate location of utilities. However, there is no guarantee as to accuracy or completeness. Contractor shall incorporate as-built locations on the reproducible record plans, in red ink, showing proper location on each sheet where these utilities are located. B. Access to the site is limited to the hours of 7:00 AM to 7:00 PM, Monday through Friday. 1.7 CONTRACTOR USE OF PROJECT SITE A. Use of the Project Site shall be limited to construction operations, including on -Site storage of materials, on-Site fabrication facilities, and field offices. B. Do not use the indicated portion of the site until Notice to Proceed for any of its construction operations. 1.8 OWNER USE OF THE PROJECT SITE A. Owner may utilize any and all portions of the site to perform typical operations and activities. Cooperate and coordinate with Owner to facilitate Owner's operations and projects and to minimize interference with Contractor's operations at the same time. In any event, Owner shall be allowed safe access to the Project Site during the period of construction. 1.9 PARTIAL UTILIZATION OF THE WORK BY OWNER A. Not used. 1.10 CONTRACTOR’S WORKING HOURS A. Perform work within Owner’s regular working hours from 7:00 AM to 7:00 PM, Monday through Friday. If Contractor desires to work overtime or work on a Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday, obtain prior approval from Owner and Engineer. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUMMARY OF WORK WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 11 00 - 3 1.11 STORAGE A. Storage conditions shall be acceptable to Owner for all materials and equipment not incorporated into the Work but included in Applications for Payment. Such storage arrangements and conditions shall be presented in writing for Owner’s review and approval and shall afford adequate and satisfactory security and protection. Off-site storage facilities shall be accessible to Engineer. The stored materials shall be insured for full value. Certificates of liability insurance coverage must be submitted to Engineer with the request for payment by Contractor. All arrangements and costs for storage facilities shall be paid by Contractor, unless specifically designated in the Contract Documents to be furnished by Owner. 1.12 NOTICES TO OWNERS OF ADJACENT PROPERTIES AND UTILITIES A. Notify Owners of adjacent property and utilities when prosecution of the Work may affect them. B. When it is necessary to temporarily deny access by owners or tenants to their property, or when any utility service connection must be interrupted, Give notices sufficiently in advance to enable the affected person(s) to provide for their needs. Notices shall conform to any applicable local ordinance and, whether delivered orally or in writing, shall include appropriate information concerning the interruption and instructions on how to limit any resulting inconvenience. C. Utilities and other concerned agencies shall be contacted at least seven days prior to cutting or closing streets or other traffic areas or excavating near underground utilities or pole lines. D. Review with the various utility companies the construction methods, safety procedures, and Work to be done in the vicinity of utilities. When temporary relocation of utilities is necessary, provide sufficient advance notice to the utility involved. 1.13 LINES AND GRADES A. Perform all Work to the lines, grades, and elevations shown on the Drawings. B. Basic horizontal and vertical control points will be established or designated as provided in General Conditions paragraphs. Use these points as datum for the Work. Perform any additional survey, layout, or measurement work needed for proper construction of the Work as a part of the Work at no additional cost to Owner. C. Employ experienced instrument personnel, competent assistants, and such instruments, tools, stakes, and other materials required to complete the survey, layout, and measurement work. In addition, furnish, without additional charge, competent personnel and such tools, stakes, and other materials as Engineer may require in establishing or designating control points or in checking survey, layout, and measurement of Work performed. D. Keep Engineer informed, a reasonable time in advance, of the times and places at which Work is to be done, so that horizontal and vertical control points may be established, and any checking deemed necessary by Engineer may be done with minimum delay to the Project. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUMMARY OF WORK WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 11 00 - 4 E. Remove and reconstruct Work, which is improperly located. 1.14 PROJECT MEETINGS A. Preconstruction Conference 1. Prior to the commencement of Work at the Site, a preconstruction conference will be held at a mutually agreed time and place which shall be attended by Contractor's Project Manager, its Superintendent, its Safety Representative, and its Subcontractors as Contractor deems appropriate. Other attendees will be: a. Engineer b. Representatives of Owner c. Governmental representatives as appropriate d. Others as requested by Contractor, Owner, or Engineer e. Engineer’s Representative 2. Bring to the conference, any submittals so indicated in Section 01 33 20 - Contractor Submittals. 3. The purpose of the conference is to designate responsible personnel, discuss contract requirements and establish a working relationship. Matters requiring coordination will be discussed and procedures for handling such matters established. The complete agenda will be furnished by Engineer prior to the meeting date. However, be prepared to discuss all the items listed below. a. Contractor's assignments for safety and first aid, including Designated Competent person(s) and Contractor's safety Representative. b. Status of Contractor's insurance and bonds. c. Contractor's tentative schedules. d. Transmittal, review, and distribution of Contractor's submittals. e. Processing applications for payment. f. Maintaining record documents. g. Critical Work sequencing. h. Field decisions and Change Orders. i. Use of project site, office and storage areas, security, housekeeping, and Owner's needs. j. Major equipment deliveries and priorities. k. Permits required for construction. l. Utilities required for construction. m. Contract Owner and channels of communication. n. Coordination with others. 4. Engineer will preside at the preconstruction conference and will arrange for keeping and distributing the minutes to all persons in attendance. B. Progress Meetings 1. Engineer will schedule and hold regular on-Site progress meetings at least weekly and at other times as deemed necessary by Engineer or as required by progress of the Work. Contractor, Engineer, and all Subcontractors active on the Site must attend each meeting. Contractor may at its discretion request attendance by representatives of its Suppliers, manufacturers, and other Subcontractors. 2. Engineer will preside at the meetings and will arrange for keeping and distributing the minutes. The purpose of the meetings will be to review the progress of the Work, discuss safety, maintain coordination of efforts, discuss commercial issues, discuss changes in scheduling, and resolve other problems, which may develop. During each BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUMMARY OF WORK WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 11 00 - 5 meeting, all parties are required to present any issues, which may impact its Work, with a view toward resolving these issues expeditiously. 1.15 AVAILABLE SUPPLEMENTAL REPORTS A. Geotechnical Report: Geotechnical data referenced in these Contract Documents are based upon the report titled “Geotechnical Investigation Proposed Water System Improvements“, prepared by Applied Geotechnical Engineering Consultants, Inc, dated December 22, 2023. Report is available from Owner upon request. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUMMARY OF WORK WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 11 00 - 6 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CONSTRUCTION AND SCHEDULE RESTRAINTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 14 40 - 1 SECTION 01 14 40 CONSTRUCTION AND SCHEDULE RESTRAINTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Schedule, sequence, and perform the Work in a manner, which minimizes disruption to the public and to the operation and maintenance of existing facilities. B. Allow for construction and schedule constraints in preparing the construction schedules required under Section 01 32 16 – Construction Progress Schedule. Include all the activities necessary to satisfy all constraints included and referenced in the Contract Documents. 1.2 PERMITS A. Abide by the conditions of all permits, easements, and private agreements made and obtain written acceptance of the constructed conditions from each issuer of the permit, easement, or private agreement prior to acceptance of Work by Owner, at no additional expense to Owner. 1.3 COORDINATION WITH OTHER CONSTRUCTION A. Be responsible for coordinating the Work depicted in the Contract Documents with Owner, Engineer, and all other contractors or suppliers working at, or near the Project Site in accordance with the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions. 1.4 SCHEDULE CONSTRAINTS A. Be responsibility to coordinate and plan the construction activities to integrate each schedule constraint into performance of the overall Work. B. The listing of schedule constraints below does not mean that all constraints or special conditions have been identified. The list is not a substitute for the duty to coordinate and plan for completion, all Work by the Substantial/Contract Completion Dates specified in the Contract Documents. C. Special Listing: The following constraints affect the construction schedule. 1. This project is located at a high elevation that receives a significant amount of snow throughout the winter. The Contractor will need to stop work when there is too much snow on the ground to be effective and start work up again once snow melts off in the spring. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CONSTRUCTION AND SCHEDULE RESTRAINTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 14 40 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 20 00 - 1 SECTION 01 20 00 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Unit Price Bid Items B. Measurement and calculation of quantities for payment to be as indicated in this section. C. Unit prices or lump sum amounts shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, products, tools, equipment, transportation, services, and incidentals; demolition, erection, application, or installation of an item of the Work; overhead and profit and doing all work shown on the Drawings, defined in the Specifications and/or stipulated therein. D. Payment covers the cost of incidental work which includes: progress schedule; night work related to County or City permitting and traffic control requirements; submittal processing; project identification sign(s); construction surveying; safety procedure plan; dust control; locating existing utilities and other underground facilities; providing any needed coordination, assistance, and work with other utility companies in locating and relocating service laterals and mains, as needed; irrigation, surface water and drainage management; pot hole excavations; tree root trimming; tree pruning; removal and disposal of tree trimmings; fees from the County Surveyor for monument restoration; hauling and stockpiling of materials and equipment; protection and support of existing surface and subsurface features; coordination with property owners, businesses, contractors, and government agencies; preparing and distributing construction notice flyers, all provisions required to provide and maintain full and continuous access to all properties affected by construction operations; replacement and restoration of existing utilities (mains and services) and other items damaged by the CONTRACTOR’s operations; replacement of irrigation culverts damaged by CONTRACTOR’s operations; surface restoration not identified as separate pay items in bid schedule; and all other necessary work, to complete the work in place. E. Bid Schedule Items: Measurement and payment to be as follows: Bid Item A1 – Mobilization and Demobilization Bid Item B1 – Mobilization and Demobilization Bid Item C1 – Mobilization and Demobilization a. Measurement: Measurement for Mobilization will be based on lump sum. b. Payment Covers: Payment shall be complete compensation for all labor, tools, materials, and equipment required to complete this item, including, but not limited to: 1) Cost of mobilization and demobilization 2) Bonds and insurance 3) Cost of all permits, photographing and videotaping site conditions prior to construction BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 20 00 - 2 4) All BMPs, SWPPP board, temporary utilities and facilities, portable toilet 5) Temporary safety and fencing 6) Temporary livestock fencing 7) Silt fencing, stabilized construction entrances, all traffic control (including signs, flaggers, barriers, etc), 8) Construction staking c. For purposes of payment, Mobilization shall be paid for on a percent complete basis. The lump sum bid price for this bid item shall not exceed 8 percent of the total bid price. Any bid proposal for mobilization that is greater than 8 percent will be adjusted to the maximum amount of 8 percent of the total bid. The bid item so adjusted will be the CONTRACTOR’s bid for that item, and the CONTRACTOR’s bid for the project will be recalculated and the revised total used to compare with other bidders to determine the low bid. The OWNER will pay the adjusted lump sum price for Mobilization. Mobilization will be paid on a percent complete basis as summarized below. Partial Payment Amount When Paid 1st 30 percent of mobilization lump sum. With 1st pay request 2nd 50 percent (up to 80 percent total) of mobilization lump sum. When contract is at least 50 percent complete 3rd 20 percent (up to 100 percent) of mobilization lump sum. When contract is at least 75 percent complete. Bid Item A2 – Flow Meter Vault – Overflow Meter Bid Item A3 – Flow Meter Vault – System Meter Bid Item A4 – Flow Meter Vault – Lower Lone Pine d. Measurement: Measured and paid for based on the actual number of vaults installed. e. Payment Covers: Payment shall be complete compensation for all labor, tools, materials, and equipment required to complete this item, including, but not limited to: 1) Excavation 2) Dewatering 3) Removal and disposal of existing pipe 4) Disposal of native material not suitable for backfill 5) Furnish and install precast concrete vault, frame, and cover 6) Furnish and install flow meter 7) Furnish and install valves 8) Furnish and install valve boxes 9) Furnish and install electrical pad and all associated equipment per drawings and specifications 10) Install new power conduit and connect to existing power box 11) Connect exterior piping including couplings, etc. 12) Furnish, place, and compact trench backfill per specifications BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 20 00 - 3 13) Furnish and install chlorine residual analyzer, floor drain, rip rap, and insulation per drawings (Bid Item A4) 14) Inspect and test vault 15) Restore existing utilities impacted by construction including, but not limited to: water lines, gas lines, irrigation pipe, storm drains, storm drain manholes and catch basins, power poles, power lines, secondary water lines, fiber optic lines, telephone lines, cable TV, etc. 16) And all other appurtenances and work required to install meter vault. Bid Item A5 – 12-inch HDPE Water Pipe Open Cut, Complete Bid Item A6 – 12-inch HDPE Water Pipe Horizontal Directional Drill, Complete Bid Item A7 – 10-inch HDPE Water Pipe Open Cut, Complete Bid Item A8 – 6-inch HDPE Water Pipe Open Cut, Complete a. Measurement: Measured and paid for based on the actual length of pipe installed. Measurement will be made along the centerline of the pipe, in place, prior to covering or backfilling. b. Payment Covers: Payment shall be complete compensation for all labor, tools, materials, and equipment required to complete this item, including, but not limited to: 1) Pavement cutting, removal, and disposal 2) Excavation 3) Shoring 4) Dewatering 5) Disposal of native material not suitable for trench backfill 6) Removal and disposal of existing pipe and existing vaults (if required) 7) Furnish and install filter fabric 8) Furnish, install, and test pipe 9) Excavation of pits and equipment setup for horizontal directional drilling (Bid Item A6) 10) Furnish, place, and compact imported pipe bedding material 11) Furnish and install utility warning tape 12) Furnish, place, and compact trench backfill conforming to specifications 13) Provide bypass of existing irrigation ditches or storm drain during construction 14) Restore existing utilities impacted by sewer construction including, but not limited to water lines, gas lines, irrigation pipe, storm drains, French drains, storm drain manholes and catch basins, power lines, secondary water lines, fiber optic lines, telephone lines, cable TV, etc. 15) And all other appurtenances and work required to install new pipe. Bid Item A9 – Lone Pine Spring #7 Development a. Measurement: Measured and paid for based on lump sum. Progress payments shall be made equal to the percentage of completion of the spring development. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 20 00 - 4 b. Payment Covers: Payment shall be complete compensation for all labor, tools, materials, and equipment required to complete this item, including, but not limited to: 1) Excavation 2) Dewatering 3) Disposal of native material not suitable for backfill 4) Furnish and install washed gravel, membrane liner, filter fabric, spring collection box, air vent, collection pipe, overflow pipe, valves, drain pipe, access hatch, weir, screens, cut off ditch, slope stabilization blankets, waterbars, and re-vegetation 5) Connect exterior piping including couplings, etc. 6) Furnish, place, and compact trench backfill per specifications 7) Inspect and test vault 8) Restore existing utilities impacted by construction including, but not limited to: water lines, gas lines, irrigation pipe, storm drains, storm drain manholes and catch basins, power poles, power lines, secondary water lines, fiber optic lines, telephone lines, cable TV, etc. 9) And all other appurtenances and work required to install new spring. Bid Item A10 – Lone Pine Spring #2 Rehabilitation a. Measurement: Measured and paid for based on lump sum. Progress payments shall be made equal to the percentage of completion of the spring rehabilitation. b. Payment Covers: Payment shall be complete compensation for all labor, tools, materials, and equipment required to complete this item, including, but not limited to: 1) Excavation 2) Dewatering 3) Disposal of native material not suitable for backfill 4) Furnish and install washed gravel, membrane liner, filter fabric, spring collection box, air vent, collection pipe, overflow pipe, valves, drain pipe, access hatch, weir, screens, cut off ditch, slope stabilization blankets, waterbars, and re-vegetation 5) Connect exterior piping including couplings, etc. 6) Furnish, place, and compact trench backfill per specifications 7) Inspect and test vault 8) Restore existing utilities impacted by construction including, but not limited to: water lines, gas lines, irrigation pipe, storm drains, storm drain manholes and catch basins, power poles, power lines, secondary water lines, fiber optic lines, telephone lines, cable TV, etc. 9) And all other appurtenances and work required to rehabilitate existing spring. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 20 00 - 5 Bid Item A11 – New Gravel Road a. Measurement: Measured and paid for based on the actual square yardage of new gravel road installed. b. Payment Covers: Payment shall be complete compensation for all labor, tools, materials, and equipment required to complete this item, including, but not limited to: 1) Excavation 2) Furnish and install new gravel road per drawings 3) Restore existing utilities impacted by construction including, but not limited to: water lines, gas lines, irrigation pipe, storm drains, storm drain manholes and catch basins, power poles, power lines, secondary water lines, fiber optic lines, telephone lines, cable TV, etc. 4) And all other appurtenances and work required to install new gravel road. Bid Item A12 – Gravel Road Restoration c. Measurement: Measured and paid for based on the actual square yardage of gravel road restored. d. Payment Covers: Payment shall be complete compensation for all labor, tools, materials, and equipment required to complete this item, including, but not limited to: 1) Excavation 2) Restoration of existing gravel road to match existing 3) Restore existing utilities impacted by construction including, but not limited to: water lines, gas lines, irrigation pipe, storm drains, storm drain manholes and catch basins, power poles, power lines, secondary water lines, fiber optic lines, telephone lines, cable TV, etc. 4) And all other appurtenances and work required to restore existing gravel road. Bid Item A13 – Landscape Restoration a. Measurement: Measured and paid for based on the actual square yardage of landscape restored. b. Payment Covers: Payment shall be complete compensation for all labor, tools, materials, and equipment required to complete this item, including, but not limited to: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 20 00 - 6 1) Excavation 2) Restoration of landscaping to match existing 3) Replanting of any trees that are removed 4) Restore existing utilities impacted by construction including, but not limited to: water lines, gas lines, irrigation pipe, storm drains, storm drain manholes and catch basins, power poles, power lines, secondary water lines, fiber optic lines, telephone lines, cable TV, etc. 5) And all other appurtenances and work required to restore existing landscaping. Bid Item A14 – Valve Replacement a. Measurement: Measured and paid for based on the actual number of valves replaced. b. Payment Covers: Payment shall be complete compensation for all labor, tools, materials, and equipment required to complete this item, including, but not limited to: 1) Excavation 2) Replacement of existing valves 3) Restore existing utilities impacted by construction including, but not limited to: water lines, gas lines, irrigation pipe, storm drains, storm drain manholes and catch basins, power poles, power lines, secondary water lines, fiber optic lines, telephone lines, cable TV, etc. 4) And all other appurtenances and work required to replace valves. Bid Item A15 – Electrical Bid Item B3 – Electrical Bid Item C3 – Electrical a. Measurement: Measured and paid for based on lump sum. Progress payments shall be made equal to the percentage of completion of the electrical work. b. Payment Covers: Payment shall be complete compensation for all labor, tools, materials, and equipment required to complete this item, including, but not limited to: 1) Trenching, backfill, and compaction for underground electrical conduits 2) Cabling and conductors 3) Conduit 4) Grounding 5) Electrical equipment and devices (i.e. panelboards, breakers, disconnects, transformers, receptacles, etc.) BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 20 00 - 7 6) Lighting 7) All wiring terminations 8) Instrumentation (flow meters and transmitters, flood switches, intrusion switches, analyzers, etc.) 9) Electrical demo work Bid Item A16 – SKM Integration Bid Item B4 – SKM Integration Bid Item C4 – SKM Integration c. Measurement: Measured and paid for based on lump sum. Progress payments shall be made equal to the percentage of completion of SKM’s work. d. Payment Covers: This set price bid item includes the services and materials provided by the Owner’s selected Integrator – SKM Engineering. These include the following (see Section 40 61 00): 1) RTU panel designs and engineering submittals and as-built drawings 2) RTU panel hardware, including PLC or datalogger, I/O, HMI, and networking hardware, and software as indicated in the Drawings and Specifications 3) RTU PLC or datalogger and HMI programming 4) SCADA integration 5) Start-up and commissioning services Bid Item A17 – Fire Hydrant e. Measurement: Measured and paid for based on the actual number of fire hydrants installed. f. Payment Covers: Payment shall be complete compensation for all labor, tools, materials, and equipment required to complete this item, including, but not limited to: 1) Excavation 2) Furnish and install fire hydrant 3) Connect new fire hydrant to new water pipeline 4) Restore existing utilities impacted by construction including, but not limited to: water lines, gas lines, irrigation pipe, storm drains, storm drain manholes and catch basins, power poles, power lines, secondary water lines, fiber optic lines, telephone lines, cable TV, etc. 5) And all other appurtenances and work required to install the fire hydrant. Bid Item A18 – Reconnect Existing Chlorination Pipes BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 20 00 - 8 g. Measurement: Measured and paid for based on lump sum. Progress payments shall be made equal to the percentage of completion of the reconnection of existing chlorination pipes. h. Payment Covers: Payment shall be complete compensation for all labor, tools, materials, and equipment required to complete this item, including, but not limited to: 1) Excavation 2) Location of existing chlorination pipes 3) Connect existing chlorination pipes to new water pipelines 4) Restore existing utilities impacted by construction including, but not limited to: water lines, gas lines, irrigation pipe, storm drains, storm drain manholes and catch basins, power poles, power lines, secondary water lines, fiber optic lines, telephone lines, cable TV, etc. 5) And all other appurtenances and work required to reconnect the existing chlorination pipes. Bid Item A19 – General Allowance a. Measurement: General allowance payment to CONTRACTOR during implementation of the WORK corresponding to any unforeseen conditions that require additional work beyond that described in these documents. The general allowance shall be authorized in writing by the OWNER prior to completing the work and measured based on the actual cost incurred by the CONTRACTOR for WORK required to address the unforeseen condition as evidence by the submittal of receipts or other documentation of costs and fees paid by the CONTRACTOR or according to the unit price amount submitted in this bid schedule for similar work. b. Payment Covers: Payment shall be made for unforeseen conditions based upon advance written approval from the OWNER to complete the unforeseen work, submittal of receipts, or other documentation of actual costs and/or completion of the WORK and acceptance the ENGINEER and OWNER. Bid Item B2 – Chlorination Building Bid Item C2 – Chlorination Building c. Measurement: Measured and paid for based on lump sum. Progress payments shall be made equal to the percentage of completion of the installation of the chlorination building. d. Payment Covers: Payment shall be complete compensation for all labor, tools, materials, and equipment required to complete this item, including, but not limited to: 1) Excavation 2) Installation of chlorination building footing, walls, and roofing 3) Installation of all chlorination equipment identified in the drawings 4) Installation of all HVAC equipment identified in the drawings 5) Installation of floor drain and draining pipe identified in the drawings BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 20 00 - 9 6) Installation of pipelines connecting to the existing tank vaults 7) Installation of pumps in existing tank vaults 8) Location of existing chlorination pipes 9) Connect existing chlorination pipes to new water pipelines 10) Restore existing utilities impacted by construction including, but not limited to: water lines, gas lines, irrigation pipe, storm drains, storm drain manholes and catch basins, power poles, power lines, secondary water lines, fiber optic lines, telephone lines, cable TV, etc. 11) And all other appurtenances and work required to install the chlorination building. 1.2 GENERAL PROGRESS PAYMENT REQUIREMENTS A. A Payment for Work performed shall be in accordance with installed quantities as assessed in comparison to the Schedule of Values and the Construction Schedule. Engineer will verify measurements and quantities. Each activity necessary to manage and complete the Work is identified on the Contract schedules. Each activity will be assigned its respective value, a portion of the Contract Price, as shown on the Schedule of Values (Roll-up), and detailed cost loaded activity schedule. B. Payment for all lump sum costs and services incurred on this Agreement shall be based on the earned value of Work accomplished during the reporting period. Earned value is determined by the completion percentage of each activity as determined by the Schedule of Values and the Construction Schedule applied to the total value of the activity. No construction activity shall be deemed 100 percent complete until Contractor has completed the physical check out and inspection of the completed Work and has submitted the signed inspection form to Engineer. C. Earned value is derived from the current status of Contractor Construction Schedule as determined by the monthly schedule status submittals. Each schedule status submittal is reviewed and approved by Engineer prior to Contractor obtaining approval for the Summary of Earned Values or quantities installed and the Application for Payment. 1.3 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT A. Submit application for payment on Owner’s form and be certified by signature of an Authorized Officer of Contractor. B. The Application for Payment shall contain all necessary references and attachments that substantiate the invoice for progress payment (e.g., certified payrolls, labor reports, progress schedule data, and Summary of Earned Values). It shall substantiate the invoice for progress payment and shall be preceded or accompanied by the schedule and status data as a condition of payment, in accordance with the Construction Schedule and the Schedule of Values. 1.4 REVIEWS/APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT A. Review meetings between Contractor and Engineer will be held weekly and within 7 Days prior to the payment application date designated by Engineer. Three Days prior to the last review meeting of the month, submit an updated schedule and a signed application for payment showing a Summary of Earned Values for the reporting and payment period so that BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 20 00 - 10 Engineer can compare earned values to available status data. Make any adjustments to the Master Record Documents, updated schedule, and payment applications required by Engineer. Upon completion of the adjustments, Engineer will sign the payment request and forward it to Owner. Engineer will determine payment amounts if agreement with Contractor is not reached. 1.5 PAYMENT FOR SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS A. Payment based on the actual cost of supplies, materials and equipment on hand shall be made by Owner with or without a paid invoice. "Actual cost" of materials shall be the invoice amount, whether paid or not, and shall not include any costs associated with installation, testing, etc. Contractor shall be entitled to payment of the actual cost of supplies, materials, and equipment only if it (1) presents an invoice to Owner with the application for payment and (2) states in the application for payment that the materials have been delivered and stored in the time and manner specified in the contract between Contractor and his Supplier or Subcontractor. If Contractor fails to comply with those conditions, Owner may withhold payment in accordance with the provisions. Owner expressly reserves the right to withhold retention until Contractor presents to Owner a paid invoice, or some other proof of payment satisfactory to Owner, for Owner’s use in verifying the accuracy of the actual cost of the supplies, materials or equipment. If the amount paid does not match the actual cost, Owner will adjust the amount of retention accordingly. Payment for supplies, materials or equipment on hand does not alter the responsibility of Contractor for all supplies, materials and equipment until Final Acceptance of the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION BC&A PRODUCTS, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, AND TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUBTITUTIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 25 10 - 1 SECTION 01 25 10 PRODUCTS, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, AND SUBSTITUTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for delivery and storage of products and materials specified for use in the Project. It also includes requirements for handling requests for equals and substitutions made after award of the Contract. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions in this Article are not intended to negate the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents, including "specialties," "systems," "structure," "finishes," "accessories," "furnishings," “special construction," and similar terms, which are self-explanatory and have recognized meanings in the construction industry. B. The word "Products," as used herein, is defined to include purchased items for incorporation into the Work, regardless of whether specifically purchased for the Project or taken from stock of previously purchased products. C. The word "Materials," is defined as products which must be substantially cut, shaped, worked, mixed, finished, refined, or otherwise fabricated, processed, installed, or applied to form units of work. D. The word "Equipment" is defined as products with operational parts, regardless of whether motorized or manually operated, and particularly including products with service connections (wiring, piping, and other like items). E. Neither "Products" nor "Materials" nor "Equipment" includes machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: To the greatest extent possible for each unit of work, provide products, materials, and equipment of a singular generic kind from a single source. B. Compatibility of Options: Where more than one choice is available as options for selection of a product, material, or equipment, select an option, which is compatible with other products, materials, or equipment. Compatibility is a basic general requirement of product, material, and equipment selections. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Acceptance 1. Deliver and store products, materials, and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations and by methods and means which will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss including theft. BC&A PRODUCTS, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, AND TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUBTITUTIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 25 10 - 2 2. Manage delivery schedules to minimize long-term storage of products at Site and overcrowding of construction spaces. Ensure coordination to minimize holding or storage times for flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive materials to deterioration, theft, and other sources of loss. B. Transportation and Handling 1. Transport products by methods to avoid damage. Deliver in undamaged condition in manufacturer's unopened containers and packaging. 2. Furnish equipment and personnel to handle products, materials, and equipment, including those provided by Owner, by methods to prevent soiling and damage. 3. Provide additional protection during handling to prevent marring and otherwise damaging products, packaging, and surrounding surfaces. C. Storage and Protection 1. Products shall be stored in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with seals and labels intact and legible. Sensitive products shall be stored in weather- tight climate-controlled enclosures and temperature and humidity ranges shall be maintained within tolerances required by manufacturer's recommendations. 2. For exterior storage of fabricated products, products shall be placed on sloped supports above ground. Products subject to deterioration shall be covered with impervious sheet covering and ventilation shall be provided to avoid condensation. 3. Loose granular materials shall be stored on solid flat surfaces in a well -drained area and shall be prevented from mixing with foreign matter. 4. Storage shall be arranged to provide access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged and are maintained under required conditions. 5. Storage shall be arranged in a manner to provide access for maintenance of stored items and for inspection. D. Maintenance of Storage 1. Periodically inspect stored products on a scheduled basis. Maintain a log of inspections and make the log available on request. 2. Comply with manufacturer's product storage requirements and recommendations. 3. Maintain manufacturer-required environmental conditions continually. 4. Ensure that surfaces of products exposed to the elements are not adversely affected and that weathering of finishes does not occur. 5. For mechanical and electrical equipment, provide a copy of the manufacturer's service instructions with each item and the exterior of the package shall contain notice that instructions are included. 6. Service products on a regularly scheduled basis. Maintain a log of services and submit as a record document prior to acceptance by Owner in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.5 PROPOSED SUBSTITUTIONS AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS A. Substitution and “or equal” determination shall be submitted and evaluated per the General Conditions included in the Contract Documents. B. When proposing a substitution, transmit all documents to Engineer in electronic format (single PDF), via web-based construction management software. BC&A PRODUCTS, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, AND TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUBTITUTIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 25 10 - 3 C. Unless otherwise provided by law or authorized in writing by Engineer, submit the "Substitution Request Form(s)" within 35 days after award of the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION BC&A PRODUCTS, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, AND TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUBTITUTIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 25 10 - 4 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK CE1006 PAGE 1 REV 10/00 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM To: Project: Date: Owner: Specified Item: Section Page Paragraph Description The undersigned requests consideration of the following: Proposed Substitution: Attached data includes product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, performance and test data adequate for evaluation of the request. Applicable portions of the data are clearly identified. The undersigned states that the following paragraphs, unless modified on attachments, are correct: 1. The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on Drawings and will not require a change in any of the Contract Documents. 2. The undersigned will pay for changes to the design, including engineering design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the request substitution which is estimated to be $ . 3. The proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other contractors, the construction schedule (specifically the date of substantial completion), or specified warranty requirements. 4. Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for the proposed substitution. 5. The incorporation or use of the substitute in connection with the work is not subject to payment of any license fee or royalty. The undersigned further states that the function, appearance, and quality of the proposed substitution are equivalent or superior to the specified item. Submitted by Contractor: Reviewed by Engineer: Firm: ☐ Accepted as Submitted ☐ Accepted as Noted By: ☐ Not Accepted ☐ Received too Late Signature: By: Telephone: Title: Attachments: Date: Comments: Comments: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFI) WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 26 13 - 1 SECTION 01 26 13 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFI) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes procedures for submitting Requests for Interpretation (RFI) and limitations on use of RFI to obtain interpretation and clarification. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 25 10 – Products, Materials, Equipment, and Substitutions. B. Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Request for Interpretation: A document submitted to Engineer by Contractor, requesting clarification of a portion of the Contract Documents, hereinafter referred to as an RFI. 1.4 CONTRACTOR’S REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFI) A. Contractor's Requests for Interpretation (RFI): Should Contractor be unable to determine from the Contract Documents, the exact material, process, or system to be installed; or when the elements of construction are required to occupy the same space (interference); or when an item of Work is described differently at more than one place in the Contract Documents; request that Engineer make an interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents to resolve such matters. Comply with procedures specified herein to make Requests for Interpretation (RFI). B. Submission of RFI: Prepare RFI and submit electronically utilizing the Electronic Project Management System. Refer to Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures. 1. Fill in transmittal form completely, and if supplemental drawings or other information is prepared by hand, it shall be fully legible and attached with the transmittal form. 2. The Project Management System will automatically assign each RFI a discrete, consecutive number. Include this number in the title of the RFI. For instance, Revision #1 to RFI 029 should be noted in the title as “original title name, Rev 1”. 3. Each page of the RFI and each attachment to the RFI shall bear Owner’s project name, project number, date, RFI number and a descriptive title. Merge all into a single PDF document for attachment in the system. 4. Clearly and concisely set forth the issue for which clarification or interpretation is sought and why a response is needed. In the RFI, indicate presumed interpretation or understanding of the requirement along with reasons for such understanding. Include proposed solutions that may be set forth to complete the Work with associated cost and schedule impact, if any. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFI) WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 26 13 - 2 5. Engineer will review all RFI to determine whether they are RFI within the meaning of the term. If Engineer determines that the transmittal is not an RFI, it will be returned, unreviewed as to content, for resubmittal in the proper manner. 6. Frivolous RFI or simply passing on the RFI without first vetting the RFI will be subject to reimbursement from Contractor to Owner for fees charged by Engineer and other design professionals engaged by Owner. C. Subcontractor-Initiated and Supplier-Initiated RFI: RFI from subcontractors and material suppliers shall be submitted through, be reviewed by, and be attached to an RFI prepared, signed, and submitted by Contractor. RFI submitted directly by subcontractors or material suppliers will be returned unanswered to Contractor. 1. Review all subcontractor- and supplier-initiated RFI and take actions to resolve issues of coordination, sequencing, and layout of the Work. Coordination of the work, sequence, and layout are not the responsibility of Owner or Engineer. 2. RFI submitted to request clarification of issues related to means, methods, techniques, and sequences of construction or for establishing trade jurisdictions and scopes of subcontracts will be returned without interpretation. Such issues are solely Contractor's responsibility. D. Requested Interpretation: Carefully study the Contract Documents to ensure that information sufficient for interpretation of requirements of the Contract Documents is not included therein. RFI that request interpretation of requirements clearly indicated in the Contract Documents will be returned without interpretation. 1. In all cases in which RFI are issued to request clarification of issues related to means, methods, techniques and sequences of construction; for example, pipe and duct routing, clearances, specific locations of Work shown diagrammatically, apparent interferences and similar items, furnish all information required for Engineer or Owner to analyze and/or understand the circumstances causing the RFI and prepare a clarification or direction as to how to proceed. 2. If information included with this type of RFI is insufficient, the RFI will be returned unanswered. E. Unacceptable Uses for RFI: RFI shall not be used to request the following: 1. Approval of submittals (use procedure specified in Section 01 33 20 - Submittal Procedures). 2. Approval of substitutions (refer to Section 01 25 10 – Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions). 3. Changes that entail change in Contract Time and Contract Sum (comply with provisions of the Contract General Conditions). 4. Different methods of performing Work than those indicated in the Contract Drawings and Specifications (comply with provisions of the Contract General Conditions). F. Disputed Requirements: If Engineer’s response to an RFI is believed to cause a change to the requirements of the Contract Documents, immediately give written notice to Engineer stating why this is believed to be true. Failure to give such written notice immediately shall waive any right to seek additional time or compensation under the Contract. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFI) WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 26 13 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFI) WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 26 13 - 4 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SCHEDULE OF VALUES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 29 73 - 1 SECTION 01 29 73 SCHEDULE OF VALUES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. This Section defines the process whereby the Schedule of Values shall be developed and incorporated into the Construction Progress Schedule as specified in Section 01 32 16 – Construction Progress Schedule. Monthly progress payment amounts shall be determined from the weekly progress updates of the scheduled activities. The schedule of values shall, as a minimum, list the value of every activity on the schedule, and shall include such additional breakdowns as required herein. The values in the Schedule of Values do not establish a commitment by either Contractor or Owner when negotiating changes to the Contract Documents. 1.2 DETAILED SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Prepare and submit a detailed Schedule of Values to Engineer as part of the Construction Progress Schedule submittal. Because the ultimate requirement is to develop a detailed Schedule of Values sufficient to determine appropriate monthly progress payment amounts, sufficient detailed breakdown shall be provided to meet this requirement. The Schedule of Values shall have a one-to-one relationship to the work activities of the Construction Progress Schedule even though additional detailed breakdowns for the Schedule of Values may be required. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptable breakdowns, details, and descriptions of the values established. If, in the opinion of Engineer, a greater number of Schedule of Values items than proposed is necessary, add the additional items so identified. B. The minimum details of a breakdown of the major Work components are indicated below. Provide greater detail when directed by Engineer. 1. Mobilization: Six percent of Contract Price.. 2. Construction Progress Schedule shall be broken down by initial submittal and monthly updates. 3. Break down Civil site Work into roadways, individual drainage systems, individual flood control structures, site concrete, soil cement, paving, excavation cut and fill, clearing and grubbing and any other items determined to be necessary for the establishment of pay and activity items. 4. Break down concrete structures into excavation, subgrade preparation, and appurtenant pre-foundation Work, concrete foundation construction, slabs on grade, walls, columns, suspended slabs, etc. (provide sufficient breakdown to accommodate necessary schedule detail. 5. Break down mechanical Work within each structure to identify individual piping systems, equipment installation by equipment name and number, and equipment testing and checkout. 6. Break down electrical and Instrumentation Work within each structure to identify individual systems, equipment installation by equipment name and number, and equipment testing and checkout. a. Break down fiber optic conduit Work into conduit installation and pullboxes. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SCHEDULE OF VALUES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 29 73 - 2 b. Break down cathodic protection Work by ribbon anode and appurtenances, test station types, rectifiers, and insulating flanges. 7. Break down protective coating Work by system. Where specific coating Work may be critical to performing the Work to meet milestone and schedule dates, such Work shall be included as individual pay and activity items. 8. Break down utility relocation Work into individual pipelines running from and to termination points. Each pipeline shall be an individual pay item unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer. 9. Break down aqueduct Work into individual items including pipe, specials, and other pipe materials, excavation, pipe installation, joint welding (including testing), joint protection, CLSM, pipe zone, backfill, surface restoration, and hydrostatic testing; aqueduct crossings; aqueduct interconnections; and any other items determined necessary for the establishment and pay and schedule activities. 10. Break down in-field pipeline lining by stations between access manholes. 11. Provide breakdown for disinfection, testing, and commissioning of pipelines and reservoirs. 12. Operations and Maintenance (O & M) Manuals shall be broken down into one O & M Manual per piece of equipment or one O & M Manual per group of like-kind pieces of equipment for establishment of pay and schedule activity items. 13. Break down all other Work not specifically included in the above items as necessary for establishment of pay and schedule activity items. C. After submittal of the Schedule of Values, as part of the Construction Progress Schedule submittal, meet with Engineer and jointly review the schedules. Review the value allocations and extent of detail to determine any necessary adjustments to the values and to determine if sufficient detail has been proposed. Make adjustments deemed necessary to the value allocation or level of detail and submit a revised detailed Schedule of Values within 5 work days from receipt of comments from Engineer. 1.3 CHANGES TO SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Assign values, approved by Engineer, for changes to the Construction Schedule which add activities not included in the original Construction Schedule but are included in the original Work (schedule omissions). Reduce other activity values to provide equal value adjustment increases for added activities as approved by Engineer. B. If Contractor and Engineer agree to adjust the original Schedule of Values because of inequities discovered in the original accepted detailed Schedule of Values, increases, and equal decreases to values for activities may be made. Engineer may direct changes to the schedule when inequities are discovered and agreement on the reallocation cannot be achieved. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SAFETY WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 31 30 - 1 SECTION 01 31 30 SAFETY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Contractor’s safety program shall conform to the requirements specified in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. For the purposes of this Section, an “active construction area” is any area where construction activities are occurring, or construction activities could be considered a potential hazard to people. B. A “Designated Safety Officer” or “Safety Representative” for the purposes of this Contract, means anyone who can identify the existing and predictable hazards in the areas surrounding a construction project or those working conditions at a construction project that are unsanitary or dangerous to employees. A “Designated Safety Officer” has the authority to make prompt corrective measures to eliminate those hazards. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Demonstrate compliance action with the stipulations of Utah Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA), and other applicable local, state, and federal safety requirements by submitting to Engineer a copy of all safety plans, programs, and permits. Such plans and programs shall include, but are not limited to: 1. Hazard Analysis Prior to Major Activities (job safety analysis, JSA). 2. Emergency Plan. 3. Rigging and Hoisting Plans. 4. Excavation and Trenching Plans. 5. Respiratory Protection Program. 6. Fire Protection Plan. 7. Confined Space Entry Program. 8. Explosives Handling and Storage. 9. Confined Space Entry Program. 10. Electrical Safety (drop cords, temporary power, GFCI’s, etc.) 11. Lock Out/Tag Out. 12. Fall Protection. 13. Heavy Equipment Operations. 14. Burning and Welding Operations. 15. Training Plan. 16. Tunneling/Underground/Jacking/Boring Operations. 17. Project Site Rules and Regulations (hazard protection plan). 18. Material Handling (storage-disposal). 19. Fuel Storage and Refueling. 20. Hazard Communication/Right to Know. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SAFETY WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 31 30 - 2 21. Subcontractor Requirements. 22. Ventilation. 23. Personal Protective Equipment (hearing, eye, face). 24. Power Transmission/Distribution (temporary and/or permanent). 25. Traffic Control. 26. Environmental Controls. 27. Safety Meetings. 28. Spill Control Plan. 29. First Aid Facilities. B. Engineer’s receipt of safety plans or programs will not relieve Contractor in any way from the full and complete responsibility for safety and training of its personnel, and the onsite personnel of Owner, Engineer, and other visitors to areas of active construction areas. Daily, inform Engineer of changes to the boundaries of the active construction areas. C. Be responsible for safety training all personnel who will have access to the active construction areas to meet state, federal, local and Contractor requirements. Maintain reasonable, regularly scheduled training sessions in mutually accessible facilities through entire Contract. Training costs for all personnel and visitors, except those costs associated with training personnel of Contractor, subcontractors, suppliers, and visitors will be considered incidental to other lump-sum portions of the Work and no additional compensation for such training will be provided. D. Safety Program Requirements: 1. Safety Representative Requirements: a. Assign a full-time Safety Representative as defined in the General Conditions of the Contract. b. The Safety Representative’s duties and responsibilities will be hazard recognition, accidents prevention, new employee orientation (including subcontractors), and the maintaining and supervising of safety precautions and program. This person shall have no other duties. The Safety Representative or a qualified and approved deputy shall be onsite at all times while Work is ongoing. c. Qualifications of the Safety Representative and assigned deputies shall be submitted to Engineer for review. Acceptance of their qualifications by Engineer is required prior to the start of any activity on the Project. The Safety Representative will, as a minimum, meet the requirements of regulations for the Utah Occupational Safety & Health Enforcement Program. 2. Hazardous Substances: a. Provide Engineer with a list of all hazardous substances anticipated to be brought on-site. b. Maintain on site Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) prior to arrival of any hazardous substances on the Project. c. Use storage area(s) as outlined in the spill control plan. 3. Job Safety Analysis (JSA): a. Outline the sequence of the Work, equipment to be used, identify hazards that may exist or may be created and what procedures and/or safety equipment will be used to eliminate or reduce these hazards. A Scope of Work JSA shall be prepared and provided to the Engineer prior to the start of unusual, BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SAFETY WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 31 30 - 3 hazardous, or have risk potential activities on the Project. The name of the competent person assigned to this activity will be included on the JSA. b. Complete a JSA for any activity, which may be of an unusual nature or involves unique hazards. 4. Reports a. Provide to Engineer copies of Contractor’s and subcontractor’s: 1) First aid, recordable, lost time and near miss, monthly logs. 2) OSHA 200 injury log (annually). 3) Safety meeting reports and topics (weekly). 4) List of competent persons as required by OSHA and the Project Health and Safety Manual for each required task and their qualification as such. 5) Injury and accident reports will be submitted to Engineer within 24 hours of any incident. Immediate notification to Engineer of an accident is required. Full cooperation with Engineer in accident investigation is required. b. Conduct weekly safety inspections. Corrective actions shall be taken within 24 hours to address all deficiencies identified during inspections. Deficiency reports shall be prepared and submitted to Engineer within 48 hours indicating corrective actions taken. Failure to comply with required corrective measures identified in the safety inspection will result in the delayed signing of the monthly application for progress payment by Engineer. c. Provide Engineer with a report of any periodic audit of Contractor’s safety performance and/or records. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SAFETY WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 31 30 - 4 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 32 16 - 1 SECTION 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Employ a bar chart schedule for the planning and scheduling of all Work required under the Contract Documents. B. In addition to the scheduling aspect, the same chart shall show an “S” curve for scheduled dollar expenditures versus time. C. In the process of preparing baseline schedule and monthly updates, consult with all key subcontractors and suppliers to assure concurrence with the feasibility and achievability of planned start dates, sequencing, durations, and completion dates. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 20 00 – Measurement and Payment 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS A. Demonstrate competence through the submission of a fully compliant Construction Progress Schedule with the initial schedule submission. Upon failure to so demonstrate competence in scheduling, Engineer may direct Contractor to employ the services of a scheduler that can demonstrate competence. Comply with such directives. 1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Submittal Requirements 1. Submit Construction Progress Schedule on a standard drawing sheet, size 24 inches by 36 inches. 2. The time scale (horizontal) shall be in weeks. The activities shall be listed on the left- hand side (vertical). 3. Break down activities into sufficient detail to show all work activities. The listing from top to bottom shall be in a logical manner of which the Work will be accomplished. Provide space between activities or within bars to allow for marking of actual progress. 4. Provide a written narrative of the planning logic along with a description of Work and quantities included in each activity of the bar chart schedule. 5. Duration: The duration indicated for each activity shall be in units of whole working days and shall represent the single best time considering the scope of the Work and resources planned for the activity, including time for holidays and inclement weather. The calendar for the network shall be in calendar days. Except for certain non-labor activities, such as curing concrete or delivering materials, activity durations shall not exceed 14 days, be less than one day, nor exceed $ 50,000 in value unless otherwise accepted by Engineer. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 32 16 - 2 B. Time of Submittals 1. Submit the bar chart schedule with “S” curves and narrative within fifteen (15) working days after Notice to Proceed for review by Engineer. The schedule submitted shall indicate a project completion date the same as the contract completion date. 2. Submit a copy of the schedule, clearly showing progress made and actual “S” curves, on a two or four week basis depending on the duration of the project and reporting time agreed to in the preconstruction meeting. C. Acceptance 1. The bar chart schedule and “S” curves, when accepted by Engineer, constitute the Construction Progress Schedule unless a revised schedule is required due to one or more of the following: a. Substantial changes in the Work scope. b. A change in Contract time. c. Delinquency by Contractor that requires a recovery schedule. 2. Owner’s review and acceptance of the Construction Progress Schedule is for conformance to the requirements of the Contract Documents only. Review and acceptance by Owner of Contractor’s Construction Progress Schedule does not relieve Contractor of any of its responsibility whatsoever for the accuracy or feasibility of the Construction Progress Schedule, or of Contractor’s ability to meet interim milestone dates and the Contract completion date, nor does such review and acceptance expressly or impliedly warrant, acknowledge, or admit the reasonableness of the logic and durations of the Construction Progress Schedule. 1.5 SCHEDULE UPDATES A. The Construction Progress Schedule shall be updated to reflect the as-built conditions of the Work and to accurately forecast the status of incomplete activities. Provide progress reports at each weekly progress meeting, stating actual percent earned versus percent planned. Submit Construction Progress Schedule updates to Engineer with each payment request, including approved changes in the Work and accurately depicting the current status and sequence of all activities. B. Submit the updated Construction Progress Schedule in the form, sequence, and number of copies requested for the initial schedule. C. Engineer will review each submitted Construction Progress Schedule update and provide comments within seven days of the submittal. Revise and resubmit the schedule within five days of receipt of comments from Engineer. Engineer will review the re-submittal within five days and provide comments if the schedule update is still unacceptable. Revise and resubmit the schedule within five days of receipt of comments from Engineer. 1.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS AND LOOK-AHEAD SCHEDULES A. For the weekly progress meetings, submit a look-ahead schedule. This schedule will cover four weeks: the immediate past week, the current week, and the forthcoming two weeks. List all activities from the accepted Construction Progress Schedule, which are complete, are scheduled for Work during the period, are currently planned to be worked, even if out of sequence, and Work which is unfinished but scheduled to be finished. Provide actual start BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 32 16 - 3 and completion dates for the Work that has been completed the prior week. Forecast early start and early finish dates for the Work that is in process or upcoming. B. Identify each activity noted above by activity number corresponding to the accepted Construction Progress Schedule and detailed description of the activity. C. Deliver the look-ahead schedule to Engineer 24 hours prior to the weekly progress meeting in a format approved by Engineer. 1.7 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE REVISIONS A. Engineer may direct and, if so directed, Contractor shall propose, revisions to the Construction Progress Schedule upon occurrence of any of the following instances: 1. The actual physical progress of the Work falls more than five percent (5%) behind the accepted Construction Progress Schedule, as demonstrated by comparison to the accepted monthly Construction Progress Schedule updates or as determined by Engineer if a current accepted Construction Progress Schedule does not exist. 2. Engineer considers milestone or completion dates to be in jeopardy because of “activities behind schedule”. “Activities behind schedule” are all activities that have not or cannot be started or completed by the dates shown in the Construction Progress Schedule. 3. A Change Order has been issued that changes, ads, or deletes scheduled activities , or affects the time for completion of scheduled activities. B. When instances requiring revision to the Construction Progress Schedule occur, submit the proposed revised Construction Progress Schedule within ten (10) working days after receiving direction from Engineer to provide such schedule. No additional payment will be made for preparation and submittal of proposed revised Construction Progress Schedules. However, if Engineer accepts the proposed revised Construction Progress Schedule, it shall replace and supersede all previous Construction Progress Schedules and substitute for the next monthly Construction Progress Schedule update that would otherwise be required. C. Revisions to the Construction Progress Schedule shall comply with all the same requirements applicable to the original schedule. 1.8 SCHEDULE RECOVERY A. If a revised Construction Progress Schedule accepted by Engineer requires additional manpower, equipment, hours of work or work shifts, or to accelerate procurement of materials or equipment, or any combination thereof, as schedule recovery measures to meet Contract milestones, implement such schedule recovery measures without additional charge to Owner. 1.9 EARLY COMPLETION SCHEDULES A. Early completion schedules are generally not acceptable to Owner but may be accepted as a convenience to Contractor and under the following conditions. 1. Submit a specific written request outlining the specific reasons for using the early completion schedule. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 32 16 - 4 2. Acknowledge and agree in writing that the proposed reduction in time represents Project time already paid for by Owner as part of the Bid Price, and available to both Contractor and Owner for the mitigation of impacts to the Project from any source. Contractor is not entitled to any increase in Contract price for failure to achieve the early completion and waives all claim to same. 3. Early completion schedules shall not be based upon or rely on expedited approvals by Owner or Engineer. 4. Early completion schedules must meet all other requirements of the Contract. B. Revise early completion schedules, which have activities behind schedule, when and as requested by Engineer. 1.10 BASIS OF SCHEDULE NARRATIVES A. Furnish a basis of schedule narrative to Engineer with each Application for Payment. If the Work falls behind schedule, submit additional narrative at such intervals as Engineer may request. B. In each narrative, include a summary of progress for the month, description of any current and anticipated delaying factors, a variance analysis for varying activities, impacts on the construction schedule, and proposed corrective actions. Any Work reported complete, but which is not readily apparent to Engineer, must be substantiated with satisfactory evidence. C. In each narrative, include a list of the activities completed during the preceding month and a list of the activities started during the month but not yet completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 33 20 - 1 SECTION 01 33 20 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required in performance of the Work, including shop drawings, schedules, surveys, reports, samples, plans, lists, drawings, documents, warranties, certifications, findings, programs, manuals, data sheets, or any other item of information required by the Contract Documents to be submitted in accomplishing the Work. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittal: Written and graphic information submitted by Contractor that requires Engineer’s approval for inclusion in the Work. B. Deferred Submittal: Information in accordance with the applicable Building Code, submitted by Contractor for portions of the design that are to be submitted to permitting agency after the time of permit application and prior to installation of that portion of Work. Deferred Submittals must include Engineer’s review documentation stating that submittal has been found to be in general conformance with overall Project design. C. Informational Submittal: Information submitted by Contractor to represent compliance with Contract Requirements included in the Work, but which are not part of the Work itself. Informational Submittals must be submitted to Engineer for information and for determination that submitted information is in accordance with Contract requirements. D. Shop Drawing: The term “Shop Drawing” as used herein shall be understood to include detail design calculations, shop drawings, fabrication and installation drawings, erection drawings, lists, graphs, and similar items. E. PDF: Abbreviation for “Portable Document Format”, used for transmittal of electronic documents. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Whenever submittals are required hereunder, transmit all documents to Engineer in electronic format, via web-based construction management software as specified in Section 00 73 00 – Supplementary Conditions. Contact information for the web-based project management software is as follows: Brian Mecham 801-495-2224 B. Be responsible for the accuracy, completeness, and coordination of all submittals. Do not delegate this responsibility in whole or in part to any subcontractor. Submittals may be prepared by Contractor, subcontractor, or supplier, but Contractor shall ascertain that each BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 33 20 - 2 submittal meets the requirements of the Contract and the Project. Ensure that there is no conflict with other submittals and notify Engineer in each case where a submittal may affect the work of another contractor or Owner. C. Coordination 1. Ensure coordination of submittals of related crafts and subcontractors. 2. Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently ahead of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. 3. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. Engineer reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. 4. Carefully review all submittals prior to submission. Sign and date each transmittal with a direct statement acknowledging that the equipment or material in the submittal meets all the requirements specified or shown in the Contract Documents without exception. No consideration or review of any submittals will be made for any items, which have not been so certified. All non-certified submittals will be returned without action taken, and any delays caused thereby shall be the total responsibility of Contractor. Submittals which cannot bear this certification because they contain an exception or deviation to the Contract Documents shall be so noted in the electronic transmittal and shall only be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 10 – Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions. D. Processing: Allow sufficient review time so that installation will not be delayed because of the time required to process submittals, including time for resubmittals. 1. Except as may otherwise be indicated herein, Engineer will return each submittal, with comments noted thereon, within 21 calendar days following receipt by Engineer. 2. For resubmittal, Engineer will be allowed the same review period as for the original submittal. 3. It is considered reasonable that Contractor will make a complete and acceptable submittal to Engineer by the second submission of an item. Owner reserves the right to withhold monies due Contractor to cover additional costs of any review beyond the second submittal. 4. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed for coordination with subsequent submittals. Engineer will promptly advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 5. If an intermediate submittal is necessary, process the same as the initial submittal. 6. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized resulting from non-compliant submittals or failure to transmit submittals to Engineer sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing. 7. If an incomplete submittal is made, the submittal may be returned without review. A complete submittal will contain sufficient data to demonstrate that the items contained therein comply with the Contract Documents, meet the minimum requirements for submittals as described in the Contract Documents, and include all corrections as required from previous submittals. E. Submittal Schedule 1. Within 30 days of the Notice to Proceed, submit a complete list of anticipated submittals, which includes Specification and Drawing references. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 33 20 - 3 a. Coordinate submittal schedule with any subcontracts, schedule of values, the list of products, and Contractor’s construction schedule. b. Prepare schedule in chronological order. c. Update the list with “early start” submittal dates within 15 days of submittal of the Construction Progress Schedule. d. Update submittal dates whenever the schedule is updated and include any additional submittals identified after the initial submittal in the updates. F. Unsolicited Submittals: Unsolicited submittals may be returned without being reviewed. G. Changes in Work: Changes in the Work will not be authorized by submittal review actions. No review action, implicit or explicit, will be interpreted to authorize changes in the Work. Changes will only be authorized by separate written direction from Owner, in accordance with the General Conditions. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS / INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Product Data includes printed information such as manufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing-in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams and performance curves. Where Product Data must be specially prepared because standard published data is not suitable for use, submit as "Shop Drawings." 2. Mark each data sheet to show applicable choices and options pertinent to the Project. Where printed Product Data includes information on several products, some of which are not required for the Project, mark the data sheets to indicate the applicable information. Include the following information: a. Manufacturer's printed recommendations. b. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. c. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. d. Application of testing agency labels and seals. e. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement. f. Notation of coordination requirements. 3. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents has been confirmed. B. Samples 1. Whenever in the Specifications, samples are required, submit not less than 4 samples of each item or material to Engineer for acceptance at no additional cost to Owner. 2. Submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with the material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture, and pattern. 3. Submit samples for acceptance, a minimum of 21 days prior to ordering such material for delivery to the jobsite. Submit in an orderly sequence so that dependent materials or equipment can be assembled and reviewed without causing delays in the Work. 4. Transmit a submittal as a single PDF document with list of samples via the web-based project management software. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 33 20 - 4 5. Individually and indelibly label and tag all samples to indicate all specified physical characteristics and Manufacturer's name for identification. Upon receiving acceptance by Engineer, one set of the samples will be stamped, dated, and returned. One set of samples will be retained by Engineer, and one set of samples will remain at the Project site until completion of the Work. 6. Unless indicated otherwise, all colors and textures of specified items presented in sample submittals shall be from the manufacturer's standard colors and standard materials, products, or equipment lines. If the samples represent non-standard colors, materials, products, or equipment lines and their selection will require an increase in Contract time or Price, clearly indicate this information in the submittal. C. Shop Drawings 1. Wherever called for in the Contract Documents, or where required by Engineer, transmit an electronic Shop Drawing Submittal to Engineer for review, using the web- based project management software. Whenever required to submit design calculations as part of a Submittal, such calculations shall bear the signature and seal of a professional engineer registered in the appropriate discipline in the state of Utah unless otherwise directed. 2. Organization a. Prepare a single shop drawing submittal for each item or class of material or equipment for which submittal is required. At a minimum, separate submittals are required for different Specification Sections except as follows. A single submittal covering multiple sections will not be accepted unless the primary specification references other sections for components. Example: If a pump section references other sections for the motor, protective coating, anchor bolts, local control panel, and variable frequency drive, a single submittal would be accepted; a single submittal covering vertical turbine pumps and horizontal split case pumps would not be acceptable. b. Index the components for the submittal and reference the specification sections and paragraph numbers for all components in the description field of the electronic submittal. Relate the submittal components to drawing number, detail number, schedule title, or room number and building name, as applicable. c. Unless indicated otherwise, terminology and equipment names and numbers used in submittals shall match the Contract Documents. d. Engineer will assign a single review action to each submittal, which action shall pertain to every part of the submittal as a whole. e. Disorganized submittals, which do not meet the requirements specified herein will be returned without review. 3. Format a. Assemble submittals into a single PDF file for each transmittal. Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size Drawings, submit Shop Drawings on PDF sheets at least 8-1/2” x 11” and no larger than 36” X 48” b. Where product data from a manufacturer is submitted, clearly mark which model is proposed, with all pertinent data, capacities, dimensions, clearances, diagrams, controls, connections, anchorage, and supports. Present sufficient level of detail for assessment of compliance with the Contract Documents. c. Assign each Submittal a unique number, including the specification section under which it is submitted. Number all submittals sequentially within the applicable specification section. Original submittals will be assigned a BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 33 20 - 5 numeric submittal number. Resubmittals shall be numbered with a revision number in addition to the original submittal number. D. Engineer’s Action 1. If submittal is returned to Contractor marked “NO ACTION TAKEN”, indicating that the submittal has been received and is being retained for record-keeping purposes. Formal revision and resubmission of said submittal will not be required. 2. If submittal is returned to Contractor marked “NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN”, formal revision and resubmission of said Submittal will not be required and construction may proceed. 3. If submittal is returned to the Contractor marked “MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED”, formal revision and resubmission of said submittal will not be required but construction must proceed according to the review comments included with the submittal. 4. If submittal is returned marked “REVISE AND RESUBMIT”, revise said submittal and resubmit. Construction may not proceed. 5. If submittal is returned marked “REJECTED-RESUBMIT”, revise said submittal and resubmit. Construction may not proceed. 6. Resubmittal of portions of multi-page or multi-drawing submittals will not be allowed. For example, if a Shop Drawing Submittal that consists of ten drawings contains only one drawing that needs to be amended and resubmitted, the submittal as a whole is deemed as “REVISE AND RESUBMIT”, and all ten drawings included in the submittal are required to be resubmitted. 7. On resubmittals, flag any changes made, other than those made or requested by Owner or Engineer. E. Commence fabrication of an item only after Engineer has reviewed the pertinent submittals and Engineer has assigned action as either “NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN” or “MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED”. Corrections indicated on submittals are considered as changes necessary to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents and shall not be taken as the basis for changes to the Contract requirements. F. Owner’s and/or Engineer’s review of shop drawing submittals does not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for correctness of details and dimensions and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Assume responsibility and risk for misfits due to errors in submittals. Be responsible for dimensions and design of adequate connections and details. G. Deferred Design Submittals: Items noted on the Contract Documents as “Deferred Submittals” must be submitted to Engineer, who will review them and forward them to the building official with a notation indicating that the deferred submittal documents have been reviewed and found to be in general conformance with the design of the Project. Do not install Deferred Submittal items until the deferred submittal documents have been approved by the permitting agency. H. Test and Evaluation Reports: Submit technical data, test reports, calculations, surveys, and certifications based on field tests and inspections by independent inspection and testing agency and by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Reports of results of inspections and tests will not be considered Contract Documents. 2. Refer to Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control for additional requirements. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 33 20 - 6 1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE SUBMITTALS A. At the preconstruction conference referred to in Section 01 11 00 - Summary of Work, submit the following items to Engineer for review: 1. A preliminary schedule of Shop Drawings, Samples, and proposed Substitute ("Or-Equal") submittals listed in the Bid. 2. A list of all permits and licenses to be obtained, indicating the agency required to grant the permit, the expected date of submittal for the permit, and required date for receipt of the permit. 3. A preliminary Schedule of Values in accordance with Section 01 29 73 – Schedule of Values. 4. A preliminary Construction Project Schedule in accordance with requirements of Section 01 32 16 – Construction Progress Schedule. 5. The name and qualifications of the Designated Safety Representative in accordance with requirements of Section 01 31 30 - Safety. 1.6 NEIGHBORHOOD CONSTRUCTION PLAN A. Provide for Engineer’s review, a Neighborhood Construction Plan detailing the plan of operation for construction of the segments between Blue Spruce Drive and Buck Way. In preparing the plan, consider the public awareness factors listed in Section 01 71 40 – Public Information Program, and include, at minimum, the following: 1. Pertinent elements of permits granted by governmental agencies. 2. The planned work schedule, hours of operation, and plans for temporary and permanent pavement replacement. 3. Material hauling routes for trench excavation material, pipe, and backfill material such that materials are not stored in the street right-of-way. Also, construction routes that avoid school zones or other areas of safety consideration. 4. Plans for detours, access to each occupied property during the period of construction, and emergency vehicle access. 5. Plans for barricades and neighborhood signage during construction. 6. Safety measures to be taken to protect persons and private property in the vicinity of construction and including contingency or emergency plans for unplanned events such as excavation cave in or storm runoff. 7. Identify neighborhood specific dust and noise control measures. 8. Plans for public notices to adjacent property owners. 9. Plans for maintaining access to private residences and businesses, including restoration procedures for temporary asphalt patching and the length of time restoration will be maintained. B. Submit to Engineer upon receiving accepted permits per Section 01 41 26 - Permits, and at least 14 days prior to work beginning in the Project segments. C. Engineer will use the Neighborhood Construction Plan to monitor the construction activities. 1.7 SITE CONDITION SURVEYS A. Submit the site conditions survey data as required in Section 01 71 30 – Site Conditions Surveys. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 33 20 - 7 1.8 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS REPORTS A. Transmit a progress report to Engineer with each Application for Payment. If the Work falls behind schedule, submit additional progress reports at such intervals as Engineer may request. B. In each progress report, include sufficient narrative to describe any current and anticipated delaying factors, effect on the construction schedule, and proposed corrective actions. Any Work reported complete, but which is not readily apparent to Engineer, must be substantiated with satisfactory evidence. C. In each progress report, include a list of the activities completed with their actual start and completion dates, a list of the activities currently in progress, and the number of working days required to complete each. 1.9 SURVEY DATA A. Make available for examination throughout the construction period, all field books, notes, and other data developed while performing the surveys required by the Work and submit all such data to Engineer with documentation required for final acceptance of the Work. 1.10 UTILITY INVESTIGTION A. Transmit the findings of the utility investigation in accordance with Section 01 71 50 – Protection and Restoration of Existing Facilities. 1.11 QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL PLAN A. Prepare and submit a Quality Assurance/Quality Control Plan for the Work contained in the Contract in accordance with Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control. 1.12 CONTRACTOR DAILY REPORT A. Submit to Engineer, or designee, a daily report. Upload report not later than 9:00 A.M. of the workday following the report date and include the following: 1. Day of week, date, Contractor name and Report number. 2. Summary of work in process (segregated by Contractor and Subcontractor). 3. Details of work accomplished including quantities of Work installed. 4. Summary of equipment working and where working. 5. Summary of manpower by work element and Subcontractor. 6. Receipt of major equipment or materials. 7. All required testing performed and, if available, documented results. 8. Notification of percent of Work delayed by abnormal weather conditions. 9. Notification of percent of Work delayed by other utility conflicts or conditions. 1.13 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Manual 1. Submit technical operation and maintenance information for each item of mechanical, electrical and instrumentation equipment in an organized manner in the Operations BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 33 20 - 8 and Maintenance Manual, written so that it can be used and understood by the Owner’s operation and maintenance staff. 2. Furnish initial submittal of the Operations and Maintenance Manual to Engineer upon delivery of the respective equipment. 3. Subdivide the Operations and Maintenance Manual first by Specification Section number; second, by equipment item; and last, by "Part." Conform "Parts" to the following (as applicable): a. Part 1 – Equipment Summary: 1) Summary: In a summary table, indicate the equipment name, equipment number, and process area in which the equipment is installed. 2) Form: Furnish an Equipment Summary Form for each item of mechanical, electrical and instrumentation equipment in the Work. Fill in the relevant information on the form and include it in Part 1. b. Part 2 – Operational Procedures: 1) Procedures: Include manufacturer-recommended procedures on the following in Part 2: a) Installation b) Adjustment c) Startup d) Location of controls, special tools, equipment required, or related instrumentation needed for operation e) Operation procedures f) Load changes g) Calibration h) Shutdown i) Troubleshooting j) Disassembly k) Reassembly l) Realignment m) Testing to determine performance efficiency n) Tabulation of proper settings for all pressure relief valves, low and high- pressure switches, and other protection devices o) List of all electrical relay settings including alarm and contact settings p) Lubrication. c. Part 3 – Preventive Maintenance Procedures: 1) Procedures: Preventive maintenance procedures shall include all manufacturer-recommended procedures to be performed on a periodic basis, both by removing and replacing the equipment or component, and by leaving the equipment in place. 2) Schedules: Include recommended frequency of preventive maintenance procedures. Cover lubrication schedules, including lubricant SAE grade, type, and temperature ranges. d. Part 4 – Parts List: 1) Parts List: Furnish a complete parts list, including a generic description and manufacturer's identification number for each part. Include addresses and telephone numbers of the nearest supplier and parts warehouse. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 33 20 - 9 2) Drawings: Include cross-sectional or exploded view drawings with the parts list. e. Part 5 – Wiring Diagrams: 1) Diagrams: In this part, include complete internal and connection wiring diagrams for electrical equipment items. f. Part 6 – Shop Drawings: 1) Drawings: In this part, include approved shop or fabrication drawings, complete with dimensions. g. Part 7 – Safety: 1) Procedures: This part describes the safety precautions to be taken when operating and maintaining the equipment or working near it. h. Part 8 – Documentation: 1) Place all equipment warranties, affidavits, and certifications required by the Technical Specifications in this part. 4. Transmit to Engineer, one copy of the Operations and Maintenance Manual in digital format. In addition to the digital copy, furnish Engineer with four identical hard copies of the Operations and Maintenance Manual. Each set shall consist of one or more volumes, each of which shall be bound in a standard size, 3-ring, loose-leaf, vinyl plastic hard cover binder suitable for bookshelf storage. Binder ring size shall not exceed 2.5 inches. Prepare a table of contents indicating all equipment in the manuals. Display the title of each volume on the cover and spine. 5. Submit Operations and Maintenance Manuals in final form, not later than the 75 percent of construction completion date. Correct all discrepancies found by Owner or Engineer in the Operations and Maintenance Manual within 30 days from the date of written notification. 6. Incomplete or unacceptable Operations and Maintenance Manuals at the 75 percent construction completion point constitute sufficient justification to withhold the amount stipulated in paragraph "Operations and Maintenance Manual Submittals" of Section 01 77 00 – Project Closeout, from any monies due. B. Certificates 1. When specified in individual specification sections, submit manufacturers' certificates to Engineer for review as specified. 2. Submit in form of letter or company standard forms, signed by officer of manufacturer. 3. Include the following with each certification a. Project name and location. b. Contractor's name and address. c. Quantity and date or dates of shipment or delivery to which certificate applies. d. Manufacturer's name. e. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. f. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product but must be acceptable to Engineer. C. Record Documents BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 33 20 - 10 1. Prepare and maintain one set of record documents at the Project Site per the requirements of Section 01 78 39 – Project Record Documents. Submit to Engineer at close of Project. 1.14 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Spare Parts: Submit list of spare parts information for all mechanical, electrical, and instrumentation equipment. Include the current list price of each spare part. Limit the spare parts list to those spare parts which each manufacturer recommends be maintained by Owner in inventory at the plant site. Each manufacturer or supplier shall indicate the name, address, and telephone number of its nearest outlet of spare parts to facilitate Owner in ordering. Cross-reference all spare parts lists to the equipment numbers designated in the Contract Documents. In addition to electronic submittal, bind the spare parts lists in standard size, 3-ring, loose-leaf, vinyl plastic hard cover binders suitable for bookshelf storage. Binder ring size not to exceed 2.5 inches. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SECURITY WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 35 53 - 1 SECTION 01 35 53 SECURITY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Protect the active construction areas of the Work, including all material, equipment, field office trailers, and their contents from theft, vandalism, and unauthorized entry. B. Not used. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. For the purposes of this Section, an “active construction area” is any area where construction activities are occurring, or construction activities could be considered a potential hazard to people. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 57 19 – Temporary Environmental Controls 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to performance of any work at the Project Site, submit to Engineer for record only, two copies of the security plan commensurate with the needs of the Project, signed by officer of Contractor. Be solely responsible for adequacy of the security plan. B. Provide Engineer with drawing and data showing temporary fencing and gate locations, along with materials to be used. C. Provide Engineer with a list of 24-hour emergency phone numbers for Contractor personnel. D. Submit to Engineer an updated progressive inventory of materials and equipment received on-site. E. Submit log of workmen and visitors to Project Site. 1.5 SECURITY PROGRAM A. Protect Work and existing premises, including the field office trailers and their contents, from theft, vandalism, and unauthorized entry during working and non-working hours. B. Accept sole responsibility for Project Site security and protection of the Work. C. Initiate the security program at job mobilization and maintain the security program throughout construction period. D. Limit lighting to basic safety and security requirements, and shield when possible. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SECURITY WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 35 53 - 2 E. Be responsible for the security of storage compound and lay down area, and for all plant material, equipment, and tools always. F. Prohibit firearms for the Project Site. G. Prohibit dogs from the Project Site, except for those clearly used for security purposes within fenced areas. H. Erect and maintain temporary security fencing as required to protect the Work, the Project Site, and existing facilities on the Project Site. The location of all temporary security fencing shall be approved in advance by Engineer. 1. Fence Height: 8 feet. 2. Fence Material: Chain link. I. Erect and maintain temporary tortoise-proof fencing as described in Section 01 57 19 – Temporary Environmental Controls. 1.6 ENTRY CONTROL A. Entry control shall not unreasonably limit the personnel of Owner, Engineer, and their operations and maintenance groups from performing assigned duties. Temporary access limitations will be identified to Engineer and the operations and maintenance groups at least 24 hours prior to such limitation. B. Restrict entry of unauthorized persons and vehicles into Project Site. C. Allow entry only to authorized persons with proper identification. D. When requested by Owner, implement a security badge system for the Project Site, approved by Owner. E. Maintain a log of workmen and visitors and make log available to Owner on request. This log shall be submitted to Engineer biweekly or as necessary. F. Require all visitors to sign the visitor log acknowledgment of the project rules included in this Section. A copy of the project rules shall be given to each visitor. Submit copies of these forms to Engineer biweekly. G. Contractor has the right to refuse access to the Project Site or require that a person or vehicle be removed from the Project Site if found violating any of the project rules. H. Give jobsite security orientation training to all affected employees, including subcontractor employees. Employee participation in the security orientation shall be acknowledged by their respective individual signatures affixed to an orientation roster. 1.7 PROJECT SITE SECURITY SERVICES A. Not used. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SECURITY WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 35 53 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SECURITY WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 35 53 - 4 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PERMITS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 41 26 - 1 SECTION 01 41 26 PERMITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Obtain permits required for the execution of Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Provide copies of these permits to Owner. B. The intent of this Section is to furnish the known list of required permits for the Work under the Contract Documents. Owner does not guarantee that this list is complete. Be responsible for determining and verifying the extent of all permits required and for obtaining such permits. C. In the Bid Price, include costs for obtaining all necessary permits, including application fees and other costs, and the costs of complying with the conditions of all permits. Any fees listed in this section are estimates and are for information only. Verify and pay all actual fees. D. Within 30 Days of the Limited Notice to Proceed, submit a list of all permits and licenses to be obtained, indicating the agency required to grant the permit, the expected date of submittal for the permit, and required date for receipt of the permit. 1.2 SUMMARY OF PERMITS TO BE OBTAINED BY CONTRACTOR A. Obtain the following permits. Submit copies of these permits to Engineer and maintain copies on-site. Comply with all conditions of the permits. 1. Salt Lake Valley Health Department Bureau of Air Pollution Control Dust Control: a. Dust Permit: The dust permit application requires a description of proposed dust control measures. The permit will include several conditions, including agreement to suspend all or part of the permitted activities if satisfactory control of airborne particulates cannot be obtained, attendance at a dust control class, and possibly posting of a bond to assure performance of permit conditions. Under all circumstances, comply with all mitigation requirements for dust control indemnify Owner against all liability arising out of this responsibility and for any and all Salt Lake Valley Health Department Bureau of Air Pollution imposed fines which may be assessed to the Project for violating the Dust Control Permit. 1) Agency: Bureau of Air Pollution Control, Salt Lake Valley Health Department 2) Contact Person: Joshua Greer - Environmental Health Specialist 3) Telephone No.: (801) 313-6724 4) Fax No.: (801) 313-6676 2. Utah Occupational Safety and Health Administration: a. Construction Permit: Covers worker safety and health for all project features. 3. Utah Department of Transportation, [Select applicable UDOT Region]: a. Right-of-Way Encroachment Permit: This permit covers construction of the pipeline across Utah Department of Transportation right-of-way [Specify area of UDOT ROW affected]. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PERMITS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 41 26 - 2 1) Agency: Utah Department of Transportation (UDOT). 2) Contact Person: Mark Velasquez 3) Address: 2010 South 2760 West Salt Lake City, Utah 84101-4592 4) Telephone No. (801) 975-4809 5) E-mail: mvelasquez@utah.gov 4. Utah Department of Environmental Quality, Division of Water Quality: a. UPDES General Permit Temporary Discharges: Covers discharge waters associated with dewatering and flushing operations and hydrostatic testing of pipelines. 1) Agency: Utah Department of Environmental Quality, Division of Drinking Water 2) Contact Person: Harry Campbell 3) Telephone No.: (801) 538-6923 4) Email: hcampbell@utah.gov b. Notification of Chlorinated Water Discharge: This notification provides 30 days’ notice prior to disinfection of pipeline and discharge of pipeline and discharge of chlorinated water. 5. Utah Division of Environmental Protection, Bureau of Water Pollution Control a. Temporary Groundwater Discharge Permit is necessary if groundwater is present. 6. Utah Division of Environmental Protection, General Permit for Storm Water Discharges Associated with Large Construction Activities: a. As a condition of contract award, sign a certification of agreement to comply with the terms and conditions of the permit. b. Permit not required if area of disturbance is less than one acre. c. Agency and Contact Person: 1) Agency: Utah Department of Environmental Quality, Division of Drinking Water 2) Contact Person: Tom Rushing 3) Address: 288 North 1460 West (Cannon Building) 3rd Floor, PO Box 144870, Salt Lake City, Utah 84114-4870 4) Telephone No.: (801) 538-6951 5) Email: trushing@utah.gov 7. Utah State Division of Health: a. Letter of Approval to Construct: Letter and Certificate are required for construction and operations of a water supply system. 8. Salt Lake County a. Building and Excavation Permit: Permit is for construction in unincorporated Salt Lake County. A Traffic Control Plan will be required with this permit. 1) Agency: Salt Lake County 2) Contact: Planning and Development 3) Address: 2001 South State Street #N3600 4) Telephone No. (801) 468-2000 9. City of South Jordan a. Excavation / Construction Permit: This permit is for the construction or excavation of all projects within the public right-of-way in South Jordan, Utah. A Traffic Control Plan will be required with this permit. 1) Agency: South Jordan City 2) Contact Person: Andrea Markham 3) Address: 10996 South Redwood Rd., South Jordan, Utah, 84095 BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PERMITS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 41 26 - 3 4) Telephone No.: (801) 253-5230 5) Email: amarkham@sjc.utah.gov 10. Riverton City a. Right-of-Way Encroachment Permit is required for work within City right-of- way. A Traffic Control Plan will be required with this permit. 1) Agency: Riverton City 2) Contact Person: Rose Kenworthy 3) Address: 12830 South Redwood Rd., Riverton, Utah, 84065 4) Telephone No.: (801) 208-3136 5) Email: rkenworthy@rivertoncity.com b. A Traffic Control Plan will be required with this permit. 11. Herriman City a. Excavation Permit is required for excavations within City right-of-way. A Traffic Control Plan will be required with this permit. 1) Agency: Herriman City 2) Contact Person: Destiny Skinner 3) Address: 13011 South Pioneer St., Herriman, Utah, 84096 4) Telephone No.: (801) 446-5323 5) Email: dskinner@herriman.org 12. Kern River Gas Transmission Company a. Encroachment Permit 1) Agency: Kern River Gas Transmission Company 2) Contact Person: Russ Harmon (801-937-6251) 3) Contact Person: Christian Johnson (801-937-6348) 4) Address: 2755 East Cottonwood Parkway, Suite 300 5) Salt Lake City, Utah 84121 6) Headquarters: (801) 937-6000 or (800) 420-7500 1.3 SUMMARY OF PERMITS OBTAINED BY OWNER A. The following permits have been or will be obtained by Owner for this Project. Verify and comply with conditions of said permits. 1. Utah Department of Natural Resources, Division of Water Rights: a. Joint Permit Application Form 1) Agency: U.S. Army Corps of Engineers and Utah State Engineers Office 2) Contact Person: Chuck Williamson 3) Telephone No.: (801) 538-7404 4) Email: charleswilliamson@utah.gov 2. Utah Department of Environmental Quality, Division of Drinking Water a. Project Notification Form and Plan Review/Construction Approval 1) Agency: Utah Department of Environmental Quality, Division of Drinking Water 2) Contact Person: Robert Hart 3) Telephone No.: (801) 536-0054 4) Email: bhart@utah.gov 3. Welby Jacob Canal a. Excavation of Canal 1) Agency: Welby Jacob Canal 2) Contact Person: Brian Andrew (Franson-Noble & Associates) 3) Address: 1276 S 820 E, Suite 100, American Fork, Utah, 84003 BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PERMITS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 41 26 - 4 4) Telephone No.: (801) 756-0309 4. Utah Lake Distributing Company a. Application for Modification to Canal 1) Agency: Utah Lake Distributing Company 2) Contact Person: Brian Andrew (Franson-Noble & Associates) 3) Address: 1276 S 820 E, Suite 100, American Fork, Utah, 84003 4) Telephone No: (801) 756-0309 5. Salt Lake County a. Flood Control Permit: For the use of Right-of-Way, Right-of-Entry, or Installation of Structures. 1) Agency: Salt Lake County 2) Contact Person: Chris Springer 3) Address: 2001 South State Street, Salt Lake City, Utah 84190 4) Telephone No.: (801) 468-2711 PART 2 - MATERIALS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ABBREVIATIONS OF INSTITUTIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 42 13 - 1 SECTION 01 42 13 ABBREVIATIONS OF INSTITUTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Wherever in the Contract Documents, references are made to the standards, specifications, or other published data of the various international, national, regional, or local organizations, such organizations may be referred to by their acronym or abbreviation only. As a guide to the reader, the following acronyms or abbreviations which may appear in the Contract Documents shall have the meanings indicated herein. 1.2 ABBREVIATIONS AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer's Association AAR Association of American Railroads AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ACI American Concrete Institute AFBMA Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturer's Association, Inc. AGA American Gas Association AGMA American Gear Manufacturers Association AI The Asphalt Institute AIA American Institute of Architects AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AITC American Institute of Timber Construction AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association ANSI American National Standards Institute, Inc. APA American Plywood Association API American Petroleum Institute APWA American Public Works Association BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ABBREVIATIONS OF INSTITUTIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 42 13 - 2 ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers ASLE American Society of Lubricating Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASQC American Society for Quality Control ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineers ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturer's Association CGA Compressed Gas Association CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturer's Institute CLSI Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute EIA Electronic Industries Association ETL Electrical Test Laboratories EPA Environmental Protection Agency FM Factory Mutual System FPL Forest Products Laboratory HI Hydronics Institute IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials IBC International Building Code ICC International Code Council ICEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ABBREVIATIONS OF INSTITUTIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 42 13 - 3 IES Illuminating Engineering Society IP Institute of Petroleum (London) IPC Institute of Printed Circuits ISA Instrument Society of America ISO International Organization for Standardization ITE Institute of Traffic Engineers MBMA Metal Building Manufacturer's Association MPTA Mechanical Power Transmission Association MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society MTI Marine Testing Institute NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturer's NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers NBS National Bureau of Standards NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association NEC National Electrical Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NFPA National Forest Products Association NLGI National Lubricating Grease Institute NSF NSF International NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers Association OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration PCA Portland Cement Association PPI Plastics Pipe Institute RWMA Resistance Welder Manufacturer's Association SAE Society of Automotive Engineers BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ABBREVIATIONS OF INSTITUTIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 42 13 - 4 SAMA Scientific Apparatus Makers Association SMACCNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association SPI Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc. SPR Simplified Practice Recommendation SSPC Society for Protective Coatings SSPWC Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction TIA Telecommunications Industry Association UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. WEF Water Environment Federation WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute, Inc. WWPA Western Wood Products Association WWPA Western Wood Products Association (WWPA) PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT REFERENCE STANDARDS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 42 19 - 1 SECTION 01 42 19 REFERENCE STANDARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Titles of Sections and Paragraphs: Captions accompanying Specification Sections and Paragraphs are for convenience of reference only, and do not form a part of the Specifications. B. Applicable Publications: Whenever in these Specifications, references are made to published specifications, codes, standards, or other requirements, it shall be understood that wherever no date is specified, only the latest specifications, standards, or requirements of the respective issuing agencies, which have been published as of the date that the Work is advertised for bids, shall apply; except to the extent that said standards or requirements may be in conflict with applicable laws, ordinances, or governing codes. No requirements set forth herein or shown on the Drawings shall be waived because of any provision of, or omission from, said standards or requirements. C. Specialists, Assignments: In certain instances, Specification text requires (or implies) that specific Work is to be assigned to specialists or expert entities, who must be engaged for the performance of that Work. Such assignments shall be recognized as special requirements with no choice or option. These requirements shall not be interpreted so as to conflict with the enforcement of building codes and similar regulations governing the Work; also they are not intended to interfere with local union jurisdiction settlements and similar conventions. Such assignments are intended to establish which party or entity involved in a specific unit of Work is recognized as "expert" for the indicated construction processes or operations. Nevertheless, accept the final responsibility for fulfillment of the entire set of contract requirements. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of other requirements of the Specifications, all Work specified herein shall conform to or exceed the requirements of applicable codes and the applicable requirements of the following documents. B. References herein to "Building Code", “Plumbing Code”, “Mechanical Code”, “Fuel Gas Code”, or “Fire Code” shall mean the latest adopted version of the International Building Code (IBC), the International Plumbing Code (IPC), the International Mechanical Code (IMC), the International Fuel Gas Code (IFGC), and the International Fire Code (IFC) as published by the International Code Council (ICC). Similarly, references to the "Uniform Mechanical Code" or the "Uniform Plumbing Code" shall mean the Uniform Mechanical Code or the Uniform Plumbing Code as published by the International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO) References to the "Electric Code" or "National Electric Code (NEC)" shall mean the National Electric Code of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). The latest edition of any “building” code as approved by the Municipal Code and adopted by the authority having jurisdiction, shall apply to the Work herein, including all addenda, modifications, amendments, or other lawful changes thereto. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT REFERENCE STANDARDS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 42 19 - 2 C. In case of conflict between codes, reference standards, Drawings and the other Contract Documents, the most stringent requirements shall govern. Bring all conflicts to the attention of Engineer for clarification and directions prior to ordering or providing any materials or furnishing labor. Bid the most stringent requirements. D. Construct the Work indicated herein in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and the referenced portions of those referenced codes, standards, and specifications listed herein. E. Applicable Standard Specifications: References in the Contract Documents to the "Standard Specifications" shall mean the Manual of Standard Specifications (APWA), latest version. F. References herein to "OSHA Regulations for Construction" shall mean Title 29, Part 1926, Construction Safety and Health Regulations, Code of Federal Regulations (OSHA), including all changes and amendments thereto. G. References herein to "OSHA Standards" shall mean Title 29, Part 1910, Occupational Safety and Health Standards, Code of Federal Regulations (OSHA), including all changes and amendments thereto. H. References herein to “UDOT Standards” shall mean Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. I. References herein to “MSHA Standards” shall mean Mine Safety and Health Administration Standards, latest version. 1.3 REGULATIONS RELATED TO HAZARDOUS MATERIALS A. Be responsible that all Work included in the Contract Documents, whether shown or not, complies with all EPA, OSHA, RCRA, NFPA, and any other Federal, State, and Local Regulations governing the storage and conveyance of hazardous materials, including petroleum products. B. Where no specific regulations exist, all chemical, hazardous, and petroleum product piping and storage in underground locations must be installed with double containment piping and tanks, or in separate concrete trenches and vaults, or with an approved lining which cannot be penetrated by the chemicals, unless waived in writing by Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT QUALITY CONTROL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 45 00 - 1 SECTION 01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The requirements of this Section apply to, and are a component part of, each Section of the Specifications. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM) standards, most recent editions: ASTM C1077 Standard Practice for Agencies Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Testing Agency Evaluation ASTM D3740 Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction ASTM D3666 Standard Specification for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Testing and Inspecting Road and Paving Materials 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures. B. Submit Quality Control Plan. C. Submit credentials for field Quality Control Representative showing experience acceptable to Engineer. D. Submit credentials for testing laboratory showing compliance with Specifications and acceptable to Engineer. E. Submit results of testing as specified below. 1.4 SITE INVESTIGATION AND CONTROL A. Check and verify all dimensions and conditions in the field continuously during construction. Be solely responsible for any inaccuracies built into the Work due to Contractor’s (including Subcontractor's) failure to comply with this requirement. B. Inspect related and appurtenant Work and report in writing to Engineer, any conditions which will prevent proper completion of the Work. Failure to report any such conditions constitutes acceptance of all Site conditions. Required removal, repair, or replacement caused by unsuitable conditions shall be performed at no additional cost to Owner. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT QUALITY CONTROL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 45 00 - 2 1.5 INSPECTION OF THE WORK A. Inspect all Work performed by both Contractor and Subcontractors. Nonconforming Work and any safety hazards in the work area shall be noted and promptly corrected. Be responsible for the Work to be performed safely and in conformance with the Contract Documents. B. The Work shall be conducted under the general observation of Engineer and is subject to inspection by representatives of Owner acting on behalf of Owner to ensure strict compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Such inspection may inclu de mill, plant, shop, or field inspection, as required. Owner, Engineer, or any inspector(s) shall be permitted access to all parts of the Work, including plants where materials or equipment are manufactured or fabricated. C. The presence of Engineer, or any inspector(s), shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for the proper execution of the Work in accordance with all requirements of the Contract Documents. Compliance is the responsibility of Contractor. No act or omission on the part of Engineer, or any inspector(s) shall be construed as relieving Contractor of this responsibility. Inspection of Work later determined to be nonconforming shall not be cause or excuse for acceptance of the nonconforming Work. Owner may accept nonconforming Work when adequate compensation is offered, and it is in Owner’s best interest as determined solely by Owner. D. All materials and articles furnished shall be subject to rigid documented inspection by qualified personnel. No materials or articles shall be used in the Work until they have been inspected and accepted by Contractor’s Quality Control Representative and Engineer or other designated representative. No Work shall be backfilled, buried, cast in concrete, covered, or otherwise hidden until it has been inspected. Any Work covered in the absence of inspection shall be subject to uncovering. Where uninspected Work cannot be easily uncovered, such as in concrete cast over reinforcing steel, all such Work shall be subject to demolition, removal, and reconstruction under proper inspection. E. All Owner furnished materials and articles shall be subject to rigid inspection by Contractor’s Quality Control Representative before being used or placed in the Work. Inform Engineer, in writing, of the results of said inspections within one working day after completion of inspection. If any material or articles provided by Owner are considered to be of insufficient quality for use in the Work, immediately notify Engineer. 1.6 TIME OF INSPECTION AND TESTS A. Furnish and prepare samples and test specimens required under these Specifications and for testing in ample time for the completion of the necessary tests and analyses before said articles or materials are to be used. Furnish and prepare all required test specimens without additional expense to Owner. As provided in the Contract Documents, performance of certain tests will be by Owner, and all costs therefore will be borne by Owner, except that the costs of any test, which shows unsatisfactory results shall be back charged to Contractor. B. Notify Engineer at least three Workdays before being ready to backfill, bury, cast in concrete, hide, or otherwise cover any Work under this Contract and request inspection before beginning any such Work of covering. Failure to notify Engineer at least three Workdays in BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT QUALITY CONTROL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 45 00 - 3 advance of any such inspections shall be reasonable cause for Engineer to order a sufficient delay in scheduled operations to allow time for such inspection. Be responsible for costs of any remedial or corrective work required, and all costs of such delays, including its impac t on other portions of the Work. 1.7 SAMPLING AND TESTING A. Unless otherwise specified, all sampling and testing shall be in accordance with the methods prescribed in the current standards of the ASTM, as applicable to the class and nature of the article or materials considered. However, Engineer reserves the right to use any generally- accepted system of inspection which, in the opinion of Engineer, will ensure Engineer that the quality of the workmanship is in full accord with the Contract Documents. B. Owner reserves the right to waive tests or quality control measures. However, waiver of any specific testing or other quality control measure, whether or not such waiver is accompanied by a guarantee of substantial performance as a relief from the specified testing or other quality control requirements as originally specified, and whether or not such guarantee is accompanied by a performance bond to assure execution of any necessary corrective or remedial work, shall not be construed as a waiver of any technical or qualitative requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Notwithstanding the existence of such waiver, Owner reserves the right to make independent investigations and tests as specified in the following paragraph and failure of any portion of the Work to meet qualitative requirements of the Contract Documents shall be reasonable cause for Owner to require the removal or correction and reconstruction of any such Work. D. In addition to any other inspection or quality control provisions that may be specified, Owner reserves the right to independently select, test, and analyze, at the expense of Owner, additional test specimens of any or all the materials to be used. Results of such additional tests and analyses shall be considered along with the tests or analyses made by the Contractor to determine compliance with the applicable specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed provided that wherever any portion of the Work is discovered, as a result of such independent testing or investigation by Engineer, which fails to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, all costs of such independent inspection and investigation and all costs of removal, correction, reconstruction, or repair of any such Work shall be borne by Contractor. 1.8 RIGHT OF REJECTION A. Engineer or designated representative, acting for Owner, always reserves the right to reject any articles or materials furnished hereunder which, in any respect, fail to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether the defects in such articles or materials are detected at the point of manufacture or after completion of the Work at the Site. If Engineer or designated representative, through an oversight or otherwise, has accepted materials or Work which are defective or in any way contrary to the Contract Documents, such materials, no matter in what stage or condition of manufacture, delivery, or erection, may be rejected. B. Promptly remove or replace rejected articles or materials from the Site of the Work after notification of rejection. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT QUALITY CONTROL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 45 00 - 4 C. Bear all costs of removal and replacement of rejected articles or materials. D. Failure to promptly remove and replace rejected Work shall be considered a breach of this Contract and Owner may, after 7 days’ notice, terminate Contractor's right to proceed with the affected Work and remove and replace the Work and issue a back charge to cover the cost of the Work. 1.9 QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS A. Establish and execute a Quality Control program for the services, which are being provided. The program shall provide adequate measures for verification and conformance to defined requirements of all personnel, including lower-tier subcontractors (including fabricators, suppliers, and sub-subcontractors). Prepare and submit a plan responsive to this Section for review by Engineer. B. Furnish Engineer with a project specific Quality Control Plan. The plan shall contain a comprehensive account of quality control procedures applicable to this Project. The detailed requirements for this Plan are delineated in the following paragraphs. No progress payments will be made until the Quality Control Plan is fully accepted by Engineer. C. Using the Quality Control Plan, describe and define the personnel requirements described herein. Provide personnel with assigned quality control functions reporting to a field Quality Control Representative. The field Quality Control Representative shall report to a senior manager of Contractor and shall not have supervisory or managerial responsibility over the work force. Persons performing quality control functions shall have sufficient qualifications, authority, and organizational freedom to identify quality problems and to initiate and recommend solutions. Contractor’s Quality Control representative(s) shall be on-site as often as necessary (but not less than the daily hours specified in the Contract Documents) to remedy and demonstrate that Work is being performed properly and to make multiple observations of all Work in progress. The Quality Control Plan shall include a statement by the senior manager designating the Quality Control Representative and specifying authorities delegated to the Quality Control Representative to direct cessation or removal and replacement of defective Work. D. The Quality Control Plan shall ensure the achievement of adequate quality throughout all applicable areas of the contract. In the Quality Control Plan, describe the program and include procedures, work instructions and records. In addition, describe methods relating to areas that require special testing and procedures as noted in the Specifications. E. Identification and Control of Items and Materials: Describe procedures in the Quality Control Plan to ensure that items or materials that have been accepted at the site are properly used and installed. Provide procedures for proper identification and storage, and to prevent the use of incorrect or defective materials. F. Inspection and Tests: Provide written procedures defining a program for control of inspections performed. These procedures shall be described in the Quality Control Plan. 1. Inspections and tests shall be performed and documented by qualified individuals. At a minimum, "qualified" shall mean having performed similar quality control functions on similar type projects. Records of personnel experience, training and qualifications shall be maintained and made available for review by Engineer upon request. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT QUALITY CONTROL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 45 00 - 5 2. Maintain and provide to Engineer, within two working days of completion of each inspection and test, adequate records of all such inspections and tests. Inspection and test results shall be documented and evaluated to ensure that requirements have been satisfied. 3. Procedures shall include: a. Specific instructions defining procedures for observing all Work in process and comparing this Work with the Contract requirements (organized by specification section). b. Maintaining and providing Daily Inspection Reports. Such reports shall, at a minimum, include the following: 1) Item(s) inspected 2) Quality characteristics in compliance 3) Quality characteristics not in compliance 4) Corrective/remedial actions taken 5) Statement of certification 6) QC Manager’s signature c. Specific instructions for recording all observations and requirements for demonstrating through the reports that the Work observed complied, or a deficiency was noted and action to be taken. d. Procedures to preclude the covering of deficient or rejected Work. e. Procedures for halting or rejecting Work. f. Procedures for resolution of differences between the Quality Control Representative(s) and the production representative(s). 4. The Quality Control Plan shall identify all contractual hold/inspection points as well as any Contractor imposed hold/inspections points. 5. The Quality Control Plan shall include procedures to provide verification and control of all testing provided, including: a. Maintaining and providing to Engineer Daily Testing Records. Such records shall, at a minimum, contain the following: 1) Item(s) tested 2) Quality characteristics in compliance 3) Statement of correctness & certification 4) Quality characteristics not in compliance 5) Corrective/remedial actions taken 6) QC Manager’s signature b. Individual test records will contain the following information: 1) Item tested –item number and description 2) Test results 3) Test designation 4) Test work sheet including location sample was obtained 5) Acceptance or rejection 6) Date sample was obtained 7) Retest information, if applicable 8) Control requirements 9) Tester signature 10) Testing QC staff initials c. Providing for location maps for all tests performed or location of Work covered by the tests. d. Maintaining copies of all test results. e. Ensuring Engineer receives independent copy of all tests. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT QUALITY CONTROL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 45 00 - 6 f. Ensuring testing lab(s) are functioning independently and in accordance with the specifications. g. Ensuring re-tests are properly taken and documented. G. Control of Measuring and Test Equipment: Measuring and/or testing instruments shall be adequately maintained, calibrated, and adjusted to maintain accuracy within prescribed limits. Perform calibration at specified periods against valid standards traceable to nationally recognized standards and documented. H. Supplier Quality Assurance: The Quality Control Plan shall include procedures to ensure that procured products and services conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Requirements of these procedures shall be applied, as appropriate, to lower-tier suppliers and/or Subcontractors. I. Deficient and Nonconforming Work and Corrective Action: The Quality Control Plan shall include procedures for handling of deficiencies and non-conformances. Deficiencies and non- conformances are defined as documentation, drawings, material, equipment, and Work not conforming to the specified requirements or procedures. The procedure shall prevent non- conformances by identification, documentation, evaluation, separation, disposition, and corrective action to prevent recurrence. Conditions having adverse effects on quality shall be promptly identified and reported to the senior level management. The cause of conditions adverse to quality shall be determined and documented and measures implemented to prevent recurrence. In addition, at a minimum, this procedure shall address: 1. Personnel responsible for identifying deficient and non-complying items within the work. 2. How and by whom deficient and non-compliant items are documented “in the field”. 3. The personnel and process utilized for logging deficient and non-compliant work at the end of each day onto a Deficiency Log. 4. Tracking processes and tracking documentation for deficient and non-compliant items. 5. Personnel responsible for achieving resolution of outstanding deficiencies. 6. Once resolved, how are the resolutions documented and by whom. J. Special Processes and Personnel Qualifications 1. The Quality Control Plan shall include detailed procedures for the performance and control of special process (e.g., welding, soldering, heat treating, cleaning, plating, nondestructive examination, etc.). 2. Personnel performing special process tasks shall have the experience, training, and certifications commensurate with the scope, complexity, or nature of the activity. They shall be approved by Engineer before the start of Work on the Project. K. Audits: The Quality Control Plan shall provide for documented audits to verify that quality control procedures are being fully implemented by Contractor as well as its sub contractors. Audit records shall be made available to Engineer upon request. L. Documented Control/Quality Records 1. Establish methods for control of Contract Documents, which describe how Drawings and Specifications are received and distributed to assure the correct issue of the document being used. The methods shall also describe how as -built data are documented and furnished to Engineer. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT QUALITY CONTROL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 45 00 - 7 2. Maintain evidence of activities affecting quality, including operating logs, records of inspections and tests, audit reports, material analyses, personnel qualification and certification records, procedures, and document review records. 3. Quality records shall be maintained in a manner that provides for timely retrieval, and traceability. Quality records shall be protected from deterioration, damage, and destruction. 4. Provide a list with specific records as specified in the Contract Documents, which will be furnished to Engineer at the completion of activities. M. Acceptance of Quality Control Plan: Engineer's review and acceptance of the Quality Control Plan shall not relieve Contractor from any of its obligations for the performance of the Work. Contractor's quality control staffing is subject to Engineer's review and continued acceptance. Owner, at its sole option, without cause, may direct Contractor to remove and replace the Quality Control Representative. No Work covered by the Quality Control Plan shall start until Engineer’s acceptance of the Quality Control Plan has been obtained. N. Engineer may perform independent quality assurance audits to verify that actions specified in the Quality Control Plan have been implemented. No Engineer audit finding or report shall in any way remove any requirements of this Contract. 1.10 TESTING SERVICES A. All tests which require the services of a laboratory to determine compliance with the Contract Documents shall be performed by an independent commercial testing firm acceptable to Engineer. The testing firm’s laboratory shall be staffed with experienced t echnicians, properly equipped and fully qualified to perform the tests in accordance with the specified standards. B. Independent testing laboratory shall be accredited by the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) for the tests they will perform and as appropriate for the Work being performed. The laboratory shall also be accredited under ASTM C1077, ASTM D3740, and ASTM D3666. C. Engineer shall have the right to inspect work performed by the independent testing laboratory both at the project and at the laboratory. This shall include inspection of the independent testing laboratory’s internal quality assurance records (quality assurance manual, equipment calibrations, proficiency sample performance, etc.). D. Obtain Engineer’s acceptance of the testing firm before having services performed. Pay all costs for these testing services. E. Testing services provided by Owner, if any, are for the sole benefit of Owner. However, test results shall be available to Contractor. Testing necessary to satisfy Contractor’s internal quality control procedures shall be the sole responsibility of Contractor. F. Testing Services furnished by Contractor: Unless otherwise specified, and in addition to all other specified testing requirements, provide all testing services in connection with the following materials as required for Engineer’s review: 1. Concrete materials and mix designs. 2. Concrete strength tests. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT QUALITY CONTROL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 45 00 - 8 3. Embankment, fill, and backfill materials. 4. Moisture-density and relative density tests on embankment, fill, and backfill materials. 5. In-place field density test on embankments, fills, and backfill. 6. Quality control testing of all precast concrete. 7. All other tests and engineering data required for Engineer’s review of materials and equipment proposed to be used in the Work. 8. In addition, the following quality control tests shall be performed by Contractor: a. Holiday testing of pipeline coatings. b. Air testing of field-welded joints for steel pipe or pipe cylinders and fabricated specials. c. All testing and inspection of welding work including, but not limited to, welding procedure qualifications, welder operator qualifications, all work performed by the certified welding inspector, all appropriate nondestructive testing of welds and all repair and retest of weld defects. 9. Other materials and equipment as specified herein. 10. Testing, including sampling, shall be performed by Engineer or testing firm's laboratory personnel, in general manner and frequency indicated in the Specifications. 11. Furnish all sample materials and cooperate in the testing activities, including sampling. Interrupt the Work when necessary to allow testing, including sampling to be performed. There shall be no claim for an increase in Contract Price or Contract Times due to such interruption. When testing activities, including sampling, are performed in the field by the testing firm's laboratory personnel, furnish personnel and facilities to assist in the activities. 12. The testing firm’s laboratory shall perform all laboratory tests within a reasonable time consistent with the specified standards and will furnish a written report of each test. Distribution of the reports shall be as directed by Engineer. G. Testing Services furnished by Owner: Unless otherwise specified, Owner will provide quality control testing services in connection with the following materials and equipment incorporated in the Work. 1. Not used. H. Transmittal of Test Reports: Written reports of tests and engineering data furnished for Engineer's review of materials and equipment proposed to be used in the Work shall be submitted per Section 01 33 20 - Submittal Procedures. I. The testing firm retained for material field testing shall furnish a minimum of five copies of written report of each test. Three copies of each test report will be transmitted to Engineer within three Workdays after each test is completed. Consecutively number each report for each type of test. J. Testing firm shall furnish one copy of each field and laboratory quality control test to Contractor. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT QUALITY CONTROL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 45 00 - 9 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT QUALITY CONTROL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 45 00 - 10 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PROJECT PARTNERING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 46 00 - 1 SECTION 01 46 00 PROJECT PARTNERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Project Partnering can be a useful and effective tool in promoting project quality, work productivity, performance within budget, and completion on schedule. Partnering is effective only if all parties willingly and enthusiastically enter this cooperative arrangement and support partnering at the highest level in their organizations. Engineer and Owner consider partnering to be important to the overall success of this Project and desire that Contractor join them in a partnering relationship. B. It must be recognized that Owner, Contractor, and Engineer all hold in common the goal of successful completion of this Project. Success necessarily must include the following requirements. 1. Construction of a facility that meets the Project performance standards as defined in the Drawings and Specifications. 2. Completion of the Project on schedule. 3. Conformance to budgetary requirements and limitations. C. In addition, it is recognized that safety, profit, liability limitation, avoidance of litigation, reputation, good will, and other factors are significant to all parties involved in the Project. These goals can be achieved most readily if all parties join together in a mutually beneficial alliance which recognizes the issues that each considers of greatest importance and work to accomplish them. D. Through partnering, the parties will agree among themselves regarding the primary goals for the Project and the methods that will be used to accomplish them. This will require development of a trust relationship, not an adversarial relationship, among these parties who will be working closely and cooperatively for the duration of the Project. Commitment, communication, and conflict resolution must be of highest importance for this relationship to succeed. The parties mutually will develop a communication framework and a conflict resolution system to be used throughout the Project. E. Include major subcontractors and suppliers in partnering so these participants may “buy-in” to the concept and work cooperatively with other parties on the Project. F. Partnering will include an initial workshop of maximum 2 days duration for up to 20 participants in which the basic goals and strategies for the partnering relationship will be established. The workshop will be held within 30 days of issuance of the Notice to Proceed at a time and date agreed upon by all parties at a neutral location away from each entity's home office and field facilities. As a minimum, attendees at the workshop will include representatives from the following: 1. Contractor a. Principal-in-Charge b. Project Manager c. Superintendent BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PROJECT PARTNERING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 46 00 - 2 d. Foreman e. Scheduler f. Project Engineers g. Estimators h. Safety Representative i. Major Subcontractors and Suppliers j. QA/QC Representative 2. Owner a. Program Manager b. Engineering Manager 3. Engineer a. Principal-in-Charge b. Design Engineers c. Inspectors G. Quarterly or semi-annual half-day partnering workshops also will be held throughout the Project for up to the same participants to confirm the relationship and assure the partnering effort continues to be successful. In this manner, it can best be assured that Contractor, Owner, and Engineer all will enjoy a successful relationship throughout the Project. H. Partnering will become a part of every meeting and will be advertised and endorsed through appropriate and creative means. The Contractor, Owner, and Engineer will share equally in the promotion of successful partnering. It is an important goal that everyone on the job, including tradesmen, laborers, suppliers, and staff become enthusiastic supporters of, and participants in partnering. I. Responsibility for coordination and costs of partnering activities shall be apportioned as follows: 1. Engineer will select a partnering facilitator approved by the Owner and Contractor. 2. Contractor shall engage the services of the facilitator. 3. Engineer will coordinate and advertise the dates for each partnering workshop at least 30 days in advance. 4. Contractor will secure a location for each partnering workshop that is acceptable to Engineer and Owner, make all arrangements for space, facilities, and food services, and notify all participants of the arrangements at least 14 days in advance. 5. Engineer will distribute all documents (such as evaluations, action item lists, and progress reports) associated with partnering activities in coordination with the partnering facilitator. 6. Contractor will pay all invoices approved by the Engineer for partnering activities. 7. Owner will reimburse Contractor one-half the amount of the paid invoices approved by Engineer for partnering activities. This reimbursement will be paid from the Partnering Bid Allowance and shall not include Contractor mark ups for overhead and profit. 8. Contractor, Subcontractors, Owner, and Engineer will each pay their own costs for participation of their respective personnel in partnering activities. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PROJECT PARTNERING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 46 00 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PROJECT PARTNERING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 46 00 - 4 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SITE ACCESS AND STORAGE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 50 10 - 1 SECTION 01 50 10 SITE ACCESS AND STORAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES A. U.S. Dept. of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration (FHWA) standards. MUTCD Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices B. U.S. Dept. of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) standards. Subpart G, Part 1926 Safety and Health Standards for Construction 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Provide design and engineering calculations for custom temporary bridges or steel plates to be employed. B. Submit hazardous materials storage plan. C. Submit the EPA issued number for wastes generated at the site. 1.3 ROADWAY AND TRAFFIC LIMITATIONS A. Investigate the condition of available public and private roads and of clearances, restrictions, bridge load limits, and other limitations affecting transportation and ingress and egress to the site of the Work. Comply with the provisions specified in the Traffic Management Plan. Accept responsibility to construct and maintain any haul roads required for construction operations. B. Maintain a maximum speed limit of 25 mph while on the Project Site. C. Confine all vehicles to the designated construction area. Cross-country travel is prohibited. 1.4 TEMPORARY CROSSINGS A. General: Provide continuous, unobstructed, safe, and adequate pedestrian and vehicular access to fire hydrants, commercial and industrial establishments, churches, schools, parking lots, service stations, motels, fire and police stations, and hospitals. Provide safe and adequate public transportation stops and pedestrian crossings at intervals not exceeding 300 feet. Cooperate with parties involved in the delivery of mail and removal of trash and garbage to maintain existing schedules for such services. Maintain vehicular access to residential driveways to the property line except when required construction precludes such access for reasonable periods of time. B. Temporary Bridges: Wherever necessary, provide suitable temporary bridges or steel plates over unfilled excavations, except where written consent of the individuals or authorities concerned to omit such temporary bridges or steel plates has been secured. Any such BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SITE ACCESS AND STORAGE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 50 10 - 2 obtained written consent shall be delivered to Engineer prior to excavation. Maintain all such bridges or steel plates in service until access is provided across the backfilled excavation. Temporary bridges or steel plates for street and highway crossing shall conform to the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction in each case. Adopt designs furnished by said authority for such bridges or steel plates, or submit designs to said authority for approval, as may be required. New designs shall be stamped and signed by a professional engineer, licensed to practice in Utah. C. Street Use: Nothing herein shall be construed to entitle Contractor to the exclusive use of any public street, alleyway, or parking area during the performance of the Work hereunder. Conduct operations so as not to interfere unnecessarily with the authorized work of utility companies or other agencies in such streets, alleyways, or parking areas. No street shall be closed to the public without first obtaining permission of Engineer and proper governmental authority. Where excavation is being performed in primary streets or highways, always maintain one lane in each direction open to traffic unless otherwise indicated. Provide toe boards to retain excavated material if required by Engineer or the agency having jurisdiction over the street or highway. Fire hydrants on or adjacent to the Work shall always BE kept accessible to fire-fighting equipment. Temporary provisions shall be made to assure the use of sidewalks and the proper functioning of all gutters, storm drain inlets, and other drainage facilities. D. Traffic Control: For the protection of traffic in public or private streets and ways, provide, place, and maintain all necessary barricades, traffic cones, warning signs, lights, and other safety devices in accordance with the requirements of the MUTCD, Part VI - Traffic Controls for Street and Highway Construction and Maintenance Operations." E. Take all necessary precautions for the protection of the Work and the safety of the public. All barricades and obstructions shall be illuminated at night, and all lights shall be kept burning from sunset until sunrise. Station such guards or flaggers and conform to such special safety regulations relating to traffic control as may be required by the public authorities within their respective jurisdictions. All signs, signals, and barricades shall conform to OSHA Safety and Health Standards for Construction. F. Temporary Street Closure: If closure of any street is required during construction, apply in writing to the authority having jurisdiction at least 30 days in advance of the required closure for signage and detour requirements. G. Temporary Driveway Closure: Notify property owner or occupant (if not owner-occupied) of the closure of the driveways to be closed more than one eight-hour workday at least three working days prior to the closure. Minimize the inconvenience and minimize the time that the driveways will be closed. Fully explain to the owner/occupant how long the work will take and when closure is to start. 1.5 WORK AND STORAGE AREA A. Owner will designate as indicated in the Contract Documents, and arrange for the Contractor's use, a portion of the property owned by The Corporation of the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints parcel number 00-0009-9940 for use during the term of the Contract as a storage and shop area for construction operations on the Work. Provide a plot plan of intended storage/work area use to Engineer. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SITE ACCESS AND STORAGE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 50 10 - 3 B. Make independent arrangements for any necessary off-site storage or shop areas necessary for the proper execution of the Work. C. Lands to be furnished by Owner for construction operation and other purposes are indicated. Should it be necessary to use any additional land for staging or for other purposes during the construction of the Work, independently arrange for the use of such lands and pay any required rental or use fees. Unless otherwise shown, specified, or agreed, all sites shall be returned to their original condition or better upon completion of the Work. D. Nothing herein shall imply granting an exclusive use of roadways or public and/or private land employed to perform the Work. E. Temporary Storage Buildings and Enclosures 1. Provide environmental control systems that meet recommendations of manufacturers of equipment and materials to be stored therein. 2. Arrange and partition to provide security of contents and ready access for inspection and inventory. F. Construct and use a separate storage area with adequate spill containment for hazardous materials used in constructing the Work. 1. For the purpose of this paragraph, hazardous materials to be stored in the separate area are all products labeled with any of the following terms: Warning, Caution, Poisonous, Toxic, flammable, Corrosive, Reactive, or Explosive. In addition, whether or not so labeled, the following materials shall be stored in the separate area: diesel fuel, gasoline, new and used motor oil, hydraulic fluid, cement, paints and paint thinners, two-part epoxy coatings, sealants, asphaltic products, glues, solvents, wood preservatives, sand blast materials, and spill absorbent. 2. Hazardous materials shall be stored in groupings according to the Material Safety Data Sheets. 3. Develop and submit to Engineer a plan for storing and disposing of the materials above. 4. The separate storage area shall meet the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction over the storage of hazardous materials. 5. Hazardous materials which are delivered in containers, shall be stored in the original containers until use. Hazardous materials which are delivered in bulk, shall be stored in containers which meet the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 6. Obtain and submit to Engineer a single EPA number for wastes generated at the site. 7. The separate storage area shall be inspected by the proper authorities prior to construction of the area, upon completion of construction of the area, and upon cleanup and removal of the area. G. In the event machinery and equipment need servicing on site, be responsible to clean environmentally hazardous materials from the site immediately. 1.6 PARKING/CONSTRUCTION TRAILER A. Provide a level pad sufficient for setting a 10-foot x 40-foot office trailer by others. The pad shall include a gravel area for parking of minimum 7 vehicles. This work will be done within three days of mobilization at the jobsite. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SITE ACCESS AND STORAGE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 50 10 - 4 B. Provide a 25 KVA diesel electrical generator to power Owner’s jobsite trailer within three days of mobilization to the jobsite. Provide power feed conductor, terminate at the trailer main panel, and assure activation of power. Service, lubricate, fuel, and otherwise care for the generator throughout the life of the Contract to assure continuous power availability. C. Provide temporary parking areas immediately in front of pad for Engineer’s trailer as follows: 1. Two spaces for Engineer. 2. Two spaces designated for the handicapped. D. When space on-site is not available, make independent arrangements for two additional spaces available for Owner's use. E. Employees shall park in areas indicated or as directed by Engineer. F. Traffic and parking areas shall be maintained in a sound condition, free of excavated material, construction equipment, mud, and construction materials. Repair breaks, potholes, low areas, which collect standing water, and other deficiencies. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT FIELD OFFICE EQUIPMENT AND SERVICES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 52 13 - 1 SECTION 01 52 13 FIELD OFFICE EQUIPMENT AND SERVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide a field office, equipment, and services in a trailer separate from the Contractor’s site trailer as specified herein for Engineer or Owner at the Project Site during the entire time of construction beginning at the commencement date stated in the Notice to Proceed until Notice of Completion of the project and the acceptance of the Work by Owner. 1.2 FIELD OFFICE REQUIREMENTS A. The required field office, equipped as specified herein, shall be provided at the site indicated, ready for use by Engineer within 14 days after the commencement date stated in the Notice to Proceed. No initial payments for mobilization will be approved for payment for any such work done under the Contract until the field office facilities specified herein, have been provided. B. Unless released earlier by Engineer in writing, said field office shall be maintained in full operation at the site with all utilities connected and operable until the Notice of Completion has been executed or recorded. Upon execution or recordation of the Notice of Completion, or upon early release of the field office by Engineer, remove the field office within 14 days from said date, and restore the site occupied by said field office to the condition indicated. C. At project completion, the computer, printer, and copy machine shall become property of Owner, to be used on subsequent work phases. 1.3 FIELD TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Within 14 days after the commencement date stated in the Notice to Proceed provide one telephone and two (2) telephone lines in the field office as specified herein, for the use of Owner’s or Engineer’s employees in connection with performance of the Work. 1.4 OFFICE FACILITIES A. General: Provide all necessary electrical wiring, air conditioning and heating equipment, shelving, and furnish all necessary light, heat, and water at the field office specified herei n, for the duration of the Work. Remove the office and appurtenant facilities within 14 days after the execution of the Notice of Completion. B. Field Office for Engineer or Owner: Provide and maintain for the exclusive use of Engineer and Owner’s representative and personnel, one separate, well lighted, air conditioned, electrically heated, 240 sq. ft. field trailer office space located in a trailer separate from the Contractor’s site trailer. Provide all furnishings, services and equipment specified herein. C. The office shall have an outside door lock. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT FIELD OFFICE EQUIPMENT AND SERVICES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 52 13 - 2 1.5 FIELD OFFICE FURNISHINGS A. Provide the following listed items in new condition for both the Engineer’s/Owner’s representative’s field office, and the Contractor’s field office: 1 Each Plan table, 36 inches by 72 inches top, 36 inches tall. 1 Each Standard desk, 30 inches by 60 inches top, with not less than 3 lockable drawers. 1 Each File cabinet, legal size, 4 or 5 drawers with lock and 3 keys, double suspension, complete with suspension racks for each drawer. 1 Each Bookshelves, five shelves each. 1 Each Office chair, standard armrest type, adjustable, swivel, tilt-back with casters. 2 Each 6-foot-long folding table. 1 Each Dry erase board, 48 inches by 36 inches, magnetic with set of four-color compatible markers and eraser. 1 Each Waste basket. 1 Each Bottled water dispenser unit, supplying both hot and cold water, complete with bottled water service and continuous supply of paper cups. 1 Each Small refrigerator. 6 Each Field office side chairs. 1.6 FIELD OFFICE SERVICES A. The field office required shall be provided with sufficient lighting at each desk location. Exterior lighting shall be provided over the entrance door. B. A minimum of four 110-Volt AC duplex electric convenience outlets shall be provided in each office and in the conference room and common area. At least one such outlet shall be located on each wall. The electric distribution panel shall service not less than 2 110-Volt, 60-Hz circuits. C. Where inside toilet facilities are not connected to outside plumbing, a flush-type chemical toilet with a holding tank shall be provided. All such sanitary waste material shall be regularly pumped out and the chemicals recharged. A continuous supply of toilet paper and paper towels shall be furnished for each toilet facility. D. Regular weekly janitorial services shall be furnished during working hours each week. Offices shall be swept, dusted, and waste receptacles emptied. 1.7 COMPUTER AND PRINTER A. Provide Engineer with one site trailer computer and printer. B. Computer: 1. CPU: Intel Core i5 Processor, 2.5 GHz 2. Monitor: 19-inch LCD Monitor, 1440 by 900 minimum resolution. 3. Memory: 8 GB DDR3 RAM 4. Disk Drives: 500GB Hard Drive (8MB Cache), DVD -/+ RW Drive 5. Network Interface: 10/100 Ethernet. 6. Modem: 56K Internal Card. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT FIELD OFFICE EQUIPMENT AND SERVICES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 52 13 - 3 7. Wireless Interface: Dual-band 802.11 a/g/n. C. Software: 1. Microsoft Windows 7 Professional or later, 64 bit. 2. Microsoft Office Professional. 3. Adobe Acrobat Professional. D. Printer: HP OfficeJet 8600 All-In-One (Printer, Copier, Fax, and Scanner). E. Obtain and pay for a service contract with a local representative of the computer/printer vendor or manufacturer for daily on-site availability of a service representative for on-site service and repair. 1.8 COPY MACHINE A. Provide Engineer with one site trailer copy machine. B. The copy machine shall be a dry, electrostatic process, capable of reproducing original 8-1/2 by 11, 8-1/2 by 14, and 11 by 17 on plain bond paper. The machine must have a stack-feed capability. C. Obtain and pay for a service contract with a local representative of the copy machine vendor or manufacturer for daily, on-site availability of a service representative for on-site service and repair. D. Furnish all necessary powders, chemicals, or other materials required for proper operation of the copy machine. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT FIELD OFFICE EQUIPMENT AND SERVICES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 52 13 - 4 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT TRAFFIC CONTROL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 55 26 - 1 SECTION 01 55 26 TRAFFIC CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Traffic Control Plan requirements and materials and labor necessary for implementation. B. Traffic Control Maintainer and Flagging. C. Work zone traffic control devices, arrow boards, and pilot cars. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) standards, latest edition: Roadside Design Guide B. American Traffic Safety Services Association (ATSSA) standards, latest edition: Quality Guidelines for Temporary Traffic Control Devices & Features C. National Cooperative Highway Research Program (NCHRP) standards, latest edition: Report 350 Recommended Procedures for the Safety Performance Evaluation of Highway Features D. U.S. Dept. of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration (FHWA) standards: MUTCD Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices Standard Highway Signs E. Utah Department of Transportation (UDOT) standards and specifications, latest edition: Flagger Training Handbook Guidelines for Crash Cushions and Barrier End Treatments Standard Section 2891 Traffic Signs Operations Policy 06C-23 Use of Variable Message Signs (VMS) 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Administrative Submittals: Copies of permits, licenses, and approvals for construction as required by Laws and Regulations and governing agencies. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT TRAFFIC CONTROL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 55 26 - 2 B. Shop Drawings: 1. Approved Traffic Control and Routing Plans: As specified herein. 2. Message Boards: Proposed locations for placement at each detour or road closure. C. Traffic Control Supervisor(s) qualifications: Qualifications of proposed traffic control supervisor(s) and traffic control plan signatory. 1.4 TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR A. The traffic control supervisor shall be responsible for initiating, installing, and maintaining all traffic control devices as shown on the Traffic Control and Routing Plans, and as specified in the MUTCD and these specifications, or as directed. The traffic control supervisor shall be an employee of the Contractor and shall be assigned full time to the Project while work is underway on public roadways. The traffic control supervisor shall work exclusively with traffic control services. The designated traffic control supervisor shall also be available to be contact by the Engineer 24 hours a day for the life of this contract. The persons so designated shall have at least one year of experience directly related to work site traffic control in a supervisory capacity and shall be certified as a work sit traffic control supervisor by ATSSA. Submit the name and qualifications of this person for review 7 days in advance of the date set for the preconstruction conference. B. The traffic control supervisor shall be capable of being onsite within 45 minutes of notification. The traffic control supervisor shall make at least four inspections of all traffic controls devices each day as follows: 1. Before beginning work. 2. At mid-shift. 3. Half an hour after the end of the shift. 4. Once during the period of nonworking hours. C. The traffic control supervisor shall make a daily record of traffic control activities using a form provided to and approved by the Engineer. Submit completed forms within 24 hours. D. The traffic control supervisor shall oversee the security of the message boards to be implemented by the Contractor’s field staff. Security measures shall be implemented daily and shall include locking the tires to the message boards, chaining the message boards to a fixed item, and other measures to prevent theft. E. Each day the traffic control supervisor shall develop the messages for the message boards, determine the locations of the message boards, coordinate with field labor to locate the message boards, and program the message boards. F. The traffic control supervisor shall oversee the flagging operations. For road closures, the traffic control supervisor shall prepare information handouts showing schedules and maps of the crew locations. The traffic control supervisor shall keep the handouts updated and furnish copies of the flaggers for distribution to drivers approaching closure barricades and drivers waiting to drive through single-lane zones. The traffic control supervisor shall manage the distribution of radios to flaggers and oversee the proper functioning of radios. G. Each evening and morning, signs shall be covered and uncovered as needed to inform the public of roadway closures, detours, work zones, and other traffic information. Each evening BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT TRAFFIC CONTROL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 55 26 - 3 just before crews leave, all signs not required shall be covered and all signs required shall be uncovered. Each morning before start of construction, all signs not required shall be covered and all signs required shall be uncovered. The traffic control supervisor shall oversee the covering and uncovering of signs each evening and morning. H. Traffic control supervisor shall oversee storage of materials and construction equipment along right-of-way, as needed to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents. I. Traffic control supervisor shall be responsible for verifying that property owner notifications are made in accordance with Contract requirements. 1.5 FLAGGER A. Flaggers must have a current Utah flagging certificate and must present proof of certification upon request by the Engineer. 1. Acceptable Certifications a. Refer to http://www.udot.utah.gov/main/f?p=100:pg:0:::1:T,V:1385 for a list of certified instructors. 1.6 TRAFFIC CONTROL AND ROUTING PLANS A. The Traffic Control and Routing Plans shall be prepared and/or certified as to conformance with these Specifications by a Professional Traffic Operation Engineer (PTOE) or an ATSSA certified Work Site Traffic Control Supervisor and shall include the PTOE registration number or ATSSA certification number of the certifying person. B. Submit the initial phase Traffic Control and Routing Plans at the preconstruction conference. Submit plans for future phases of construction a minimum of 28 days before start of that construction phase to allow review and resubmittal, if necessary, and public notification. Meet with the Engineer and affected agency having jurisdiction to review each of the Traffic Control and Routing Plans for each phase of construction. Do not begin construction on any given phase before receiving written acceptance by Timber Lakes Water Special Service District Traffic Division of the Traffic Control and Routing Plans for that phase. C. Failure to submit the Traffic Control and Routing Plans within the specified time frames will not be justification for additional working days. Failure to adequately address comments in any required resubmittal also will not justify additional working days. D. Changes to this plan shall be made only by written approval of Engineer. Secure approvals for necessary changes so as not to delay progress of the Work. E. If multiple road closures are desired simultaneously, detours must be coordinated and approved in advance by the Engineer and the agency or agencies having jurisdiction. Allow a minimum of 14 working days for the Engineer and the agency or agencies having jurisdiction review followed by 14 working days of prior notification of residents. Multiple simultaneous road closures will require additional message boards (at each end of the closure) which shall be provided by Contractor at no additional cost for the duration of simultaneous closures. F. Traffic Routing Plan: Show sequences of construction affecting the use of roadways, time required for each phase of the Work, provisions for decking over excavations and phasing of BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT TRAFFIC CONTROL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 55 26 - 4 operations to provide necessary access, and plans for signing, barricading, and striping to provide passages for pedestrians, bicycles, and vehicles. Include schedule for covering traffic control signs (including detour signs) when not in use and uncovering just prior to use. G. The Traffic Control Plans in the Contract Documents are guidelines only and shall not be used in lieu of detailed Contractor-prepared plans. Detailed Traffic Control Plans shall show the location of traffic cones, barrier rail, construction zones, flaggers, stored pipe and materials, construction truck access, barricades, detours, signs, message boards, and other traffic control facilities. H. On a time and day agreed upon between the Contractor and Engineer to describe the following week’s construction operations and the traffic control provisions. At each meeting, submit a detailed update of traffic control provisions and construction crew locations. This shall be submitted in hardcopy and electronic form using a Word file. The update shall contain a list of signs and the time and location for covering and uncovering signs. The update shall include the location and wording of message control boards. I. Any days lost due to improper traffic control will be charged against the allowable working days. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Use devices and systems, which meet NCHRP-350 Report crash test requirements as defined in the four categories by the Federal Highway Administration. Some exceptions will be acceptable as stated below. 1. Category 1: Cones, tubular marker, delineators, and drums without lights must be certified by the manufacturer as meeting NCHRP-350 Report requirements. 2. Category 2: Portable sign stands with signs, Type I, II and II barricades, vertical panels, Category 1 devices with light attachments and devices not expected to cause signification vehicle velocity change. These devices and systems must be certified by FHWA as meeting NCHRP-350. Report test requirements. 3. Category 3: Portable/Temporary pre-cast concrete barrier manufactured after October 1, 2002, must be certified as meeting NCHRP-350 Report test requirements. a. Manufactured date to be stamped into top of each barrier section using a numeric format (ex: 10/2006) with 2-inch x 2-inch numerals, ¼ inch deep. See Standard Drawing BA 1A and BA 2. b. Portable/Temporary pre-cast concrete barrier manufactured prior to October 1, 2002 and meeting NCHRP 230 may be used until they are no longer serviceable. 4. Category 3: Crash cushions and truck mounted attenuators must be certified by FHWA as meeting NCHRP-350 test requirements. 5. Category 4: Advanced warning arrow boards and portable variable message signs do not have to meet NCHRP-350 test requirements. 2.2 PILOT CAR A. Equip with a reflectorized sign: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT TRAFFIC CONTROL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 55 26 - 5 1. Comply with UDOT Standard Specifications, Section 02891 – Traffic Signs. 2. MUTCD Sign G20-4. 2.3 FLAGGER EQUIPMENT AND CLOTHING A. Comply with UDOT’s “Flagger Training Handbook”. B. Comply with Contract Drawings traffic control sheets. C. Paddle: 1. Use a combination “STOP” and “SLOW” sign paddle. The paddles shall be a minimum of 18 inches wide with 6-inch series “C” letters and have a rigid fixed handle approximately 5 feet in length, from the bottom of the paddle to ground level. 2. Fabricate the combination sign paddle from sheet metal or other light semi-rigid material. 3. The background of the “STOP” face shall be red with white letters and border. The background of the “SLOW” shall be orange with black letters and border. 4. Use Type II reflective sheeting for the background, letters, and border on the faces of the STOP/SLOW paddles. D. Clothing: 1. Flagger vest and hard hat: a. Color: Orange, red-orange, or fluorescent version of these colors. b. Safety vest with a minimum of 775 inches of background material. Night work requires a minimum of 20 inches of reflective material (100 inches on the front and 100 inches on the back). Reflective material will be white and/or strong yellow-green. c. Hard hat with 10 inches of white or strong yellow-green reflective tape places around the base of the hard hat and visible to traffic from all directions. 2.4 TRAFFIC CONTROL SIGNING AND DEVICES A. Signs: 1. Comply with this section, Article 2.1. 2. Comply with UDOT Standard Specifications, Section 02891 – Traffic Signs. 3. Comply with Contract Drawings traffic control sheets. B. Channelizing Devices: 1. Comply with Article 2.1. 2. Comply with Contract Drawings traffic control sheets. 3. Comply with UDOT Standard Specifications, Section 02891 – Traffic Signs, for reflective sheeting. 4. Use construction orange tubular markers and cones during daylight hours only. C. Barricades: 1. Comply with Article 2.1. 2. Comply with Contract Drawings traffic control and routing sheets. 3. Do not use rocks, asphalt, or concrete pieces, construction materials, and other debris as weighting devices for barricades. Sand bags will be permitted as long as a low center of gravity is maintained as approved. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT TRAFFIC CONTROL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 55 26 - 6 D. Precast Concrete Barrier: 1. Comply with Article 2.1. 2. Comply with Contract Drawings traffic control and routing sheets. 3. Use an approved construction zone attenuator or permanent style end sections, as listed in UDOT Guidelines for Crash Cushions and Barrier End Treatments. a. Use a construction zone attenuator when approach ends of temporary precast barrier are within AASHTO clear zone. 1) Use AASHTO Roadside Design Guide to determine proper clear zone distance requirements. 2) Install crash cushions as per contract traffic control sheets and manufacturer’s recommendations. 4. Do not use a truck mounted attenuator (TMA) to protect temporary precast barrier end for more than 24 hours. Use properly rated TMA as directed in this Section, Article 2.4, Paragraph E. E. Impact Attenuator: Use properly rated truck mounted attenuator for the posted speed limit prior to construction. 1. NCHRP-350 Test Level 2 for speeds 45 mph or less. 2. NCHRP-350 Test Level 3 for speeds greater than 45 mph. 2.5 ADVANCE WARNING ARROW BOARD A. Meet all standards as specified in the MUTCD, Section 6F.61 Arrow Boards. B. Perform all functions as specified in Contract Drawings traffic control sheets and the MUTCD. 2.6 VARIABLE MESSAGE SIGNS (VMS) A. Design, placement, operation, maintenance, and message content of portable variable message signs will conform to the current edition of the MUTCD and UDOT Operations Policy 06C-23 were applicable. B. Portable variable message boards shall be a transportable truck or trailer mounted programmable message sign. The message sign board shall be capable of displaying three lines of message text with characters of twelve-inch minimum height formed by a bulb type, LCD, LED, or electromagnetic disk matrix, and shall have a display area of 96 -inches x 48- inches. At nighttime the sign display shall be self-illuminated. C. Portable variable message boards shall be placed at least 14 calendar days before construction begins on the affected roadways and maintained by the Contractor at locations designated and provided by the Owner. D. Provide at least two portable variable message boards throughout construction at each location impacting City streets. Additional signs may be required by Cities based upon review of Contractor’s Traffic Control Plans. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT TRAFFIC CONTROL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 55 26 - 7 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LIMITATIONS OF OPERATIONS A. See Section 01 11 00 – Summary of Work for Contract information to coordinate construction and traffic control involving signalized intersections. Give maintaining agency a minimum of 72-hours’ notice for the adjustment of signal phasing to accommodate the approved Traffic Control Plan. B. During nonworking hours, Saturdays, Sundays, and holidays, the full width of the traveled way in both directions shall be open for use by the public. C. Allow emergency vehicles immediate passage. D. When construction operations are not actively in progress, one through lane of traffic in each direction shall be open to public traffic. A maximum of 15 percent vertical profile grade shall be constructed and always maintained to accommodate public traffic. E. Minimum lane width shall be 10 feet, unless noted otherwise. Where cones are used to separate traffic lane from construction zone, do not use traffic lane for accessing construction zone, and do not store materials or equipment on or near shoulder of traffic lane side of roadway. F. Whenever it is necessary to cross, close, or obstruct driveways and walks, whether public or private, provide and maintain suitable and safe bridges, detours, or other temporary expedients for accommodation of public and private travel. G. Driveway and Private Road Closures: Maintain satisfactory means of exit for persons residing or having occasion to transact business along the route of the Work. When access to private driveways must be temporarily denied due to construction operations, notify the property owner or responsible part of such closure not less than 24 hours in advance of closure. Give notification in writing and include the estimated duration of the closure. H. In making street crossings, do not block more than one-half the street at a time. Maintain one lane of traffic at all times. Ensure access for traffic both directions. I. Notify the fire department, police/sheriff department, highway patrol, ambulance service, local school district, and transit 14 days before closing roadway or portion thereof. Notify said departments or agencies when streets are again passable for vehicles. Conduct operations with the least interference to fire equipment access, and at no time prevent such access. Furnish Contractor’s night emergency telephone numbers to the police or sheriff’s department. J. If Work will interfere with mail delivery, move mailboxes to temporary locations accessible to postal service, and on completion of Work in each area, replace them in their original location and in a condition equal to or better than original. When access to private driveways must be temporarily denied due to construction operations, notify the property owner or responsible part of such closure not less than 24 hours in advance of closure. Give notification in writing and include the estimated duration of the closure. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT TRAFFIC CONTROL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 55 26 - 8 K. If Work will interfere with garbage pickup, move property owner’s (resident’s) garbage cans to areas accessible for garbage pickup. Garbage cans shall be returned to owner’s driveway after pickup. L. Pedestrian and cycle access along sidewalks and streets will be kept open and safe from construction activities. M. Coordinate traffic routing with that of others working in the same or adjacent areas. Coordinate access for garbage pickup, mail delivery, and school buses. N. Each evening prior to crew departure, sweep all Work areas to ensure all construction debris (including, but not limited to, AC waste, gravel, and dirt) has been removed from the surface of the road. Dispose of debris offsite and do not sweep into ditches or otherwise outside of Work area. O. Barricades and Lights: 1. Provide as shown on the Traffic Control Details and in sufficient quantity to safeguard public and Work. 2. Provide as necessary to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas and affected roads, streets, and alleyways, inside and outside of fenced area, and as required to ensure public safety and the safety of Contractor’s employees, other employer’s employees, and others who may be affected by the Work. 3. Provide to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from potential damage. 4. Locate to enable access by facility operators and property owners. 5. Protect streets, roads, highways, and other public thoroughfares that are closed to traffic by effective barricades with acceptable warning signs. 6. Locate barricades at the nearest intersecting public thoroughfare on each side of the blocked section. P. Signs and Equipment: 1. Traffic control signs and equipment shall be as described herein, the MUTCD, and the Standard Highway Signs, shown on Traffic Control Details, and as directed by Engineer. 2. Maintain existing traffic control signs during construction. 3. Variable Message Signs: Provide two variable message signs conforming to the provisions of Section 2.6 of these Specifications for use as directed by Engineer. Be responsible for moving and programming message boards as required throughout the Project. 4. Portable TOW-AWAY-NO STOPPING Signs; Place wherever approved by police department or the agency having jurisdiction and Owner. 5. Business Access Signs: Place at accesses to businesses in the vicinity of construction activities. 6. Traffic Cones: Provide to delineate traffic lanes to guide and separate traffic movements. Provide at obstructions such as material piles and equipment, as directed by Engineer. 7. Illuminate barricades and obstructions with warning lights from sunset to sunrise, or as directed by Engineer. 8. Use to alert public of construction hazards, which would include surface irregularities, unramped walkways, grade changes, and trenches or excavations in roadways and in other public access areas. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT TRAFFIC CONTROL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 55 26 - 9 9. Post-mount informational signs both sides of detour a minimum of 14 days before detouring any traffic as to the date, time, and duration of the detour. Sign shall be stenciled with 6-inch black letters on an orange background. Signs shall meet these specifications. 10. Place solar powered barricade-type lights on Road Work Ahead signs and construction speed limit signs. 11. All portable and night use signs shall use high intensity reflective sheeting. 12. Cover Detour signs when not in use and uncover just prior to use. Detour signs shall be covered with wood or metal. The use of easily displaced material such as plastic bags, burlap sacks, duct tape, etc. is not acceptable. 13. Each sign or piece of equipment shall be certified by the manufacturer to meet the requirements of these Specifications. Any sign or equipment, which is damaged, or appears to be in poor condition, must be recertified by the manufacturer. Engineer shall be the sole judge as to whether used signs or equipment supplied under this contract need recertification. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT TRAFFIC CONTROL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 55 26 - 10 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 57 19 - 1 SECTION 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 EXPLOSIVES AND BLASTING A. The use of explosives on the Work will be permitted. 1.2 DUST ABATEMENT A. Furnish all labor, equipment, and methods required to prevent, control, and mitigate fugitive dust from the construction activities. In complying with this requirement, conform to all local requirements in all circumstances. Be responsible for damage resulting from dust generated by its activities. Dust abatement measures shall be continued until Engineer directs otherwise. 1. Unpaved Roads: Apply liquid dust palliative as appropriate for traffic areas as approved by Engineer. 2. All other Non-Paved Work Areas: Apply a liquid dust palliative (soil stabilizer type) derived from natural organic plant sources and containing no growth – or germination – inhibiting materials as approved by Engineer. Application shall be effective for dust suppression according to applicable County Health District Air Pollution Control Division dust regulations. Do not allow movement of vehicles or storage of materials on treated areas. 1.3 RUBBISH CONTROL A. Prepare a trash abatement program and submit to Engineer for review. The program shall include placing all litter, trash, garbage, construction debris, and refuse in scavenger-proof, resealable containers. Trash includes, but is not limited to, cigarettes, cigars, gum wrappers, tissue, cans, paper, and bags. During the progress of the Work, keep the Project Site and other areas used by it in a neat and clean condition, and free from any accumulation of rubbish. Dispose of all rubbish and waste materials of any nature occurring at the Project Site, establish regular intervals of collection and disposal of such materials and waste. Keep haul roads free from dirt, rubbish, and unnecessary obstructions resulting from construction operations. Disposal of all rubbish and surplus materials shall be off the Site in accordance with local codes and ordinances governing locations and methods of disposal, and in conformance with all applicable safety laws, and to the requirements of Part 1926 of the OSHA Safety and Health Standards for Construction. B. Clean up and properly dispose of any oil, fuel, and other equipment leaks at the time of occurrence. Service and maintenance vehicles shall carry a bucket and pads to absorb leaks and spills. Notify Engineer of any spills or leaks at the time of occurrence. 1.4 SANITATION A. Toilet Facilities: Provide fixed or portable chemical toilets wherever needed for the use of employees. Toilets at construction job sites shall conform to the requirements of Part 1926 of the OSHA Standards for Construction. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 57 19 - 2 B. Sanitary and Other Organic Wastes: Establish a regular collection of all sanitary and organic wastes. All wastes and refuse from sanitary facilities or organic material wastes from any other source related to the construction operations shall be disposed of away from the Site in a manner satisfactory to Engineer and in accordance with all laws and regulations pertaining thereto. 1.5 CHEMICALS A. All chemicals used during project construction or furnished for project operation, whether soil sterilant, pesticide, disinfectant, polymer, reactant or of other classification, shall show approval of either the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the U.S. Department of Agriculture. Use of all such chemicals and disposal of residues shall be in strict accordance with the printed instructions of the manufacturer. 1.6 CULTURAL RESOURCES A. Direct attention to the National Historic Preservation Act of 1966 (16 U.S.C. 470) and 36 CFR 800, which provide for the preservation of potential historical architectural, archaeological, or cultural resources (hereinafter called "cultural resources"). B. Conform to the applicable requirements of the National Historic Preservation Act of 1966 as it relates to the preservation of cultural resources. C. In the event potential cultural resources are discovered during subsurface excavations at the Site of construction, institute the following procedures: 1. Engineer will issue a Field Order directing the cessation all construction operations at the location of such potential cultural resources find. Mark the area in an appropriate manner to ensure that all construction equipment, activities, and personnel remain clear of the area until further notice. 2. Field Order shall be effective until such time as a qualified archaeologist can be called to assess the value of these potential cultural resources and make recommendations to the State Historic Preservation Office. D. If the archaeologist determines that the potential find is a bona fide cultural resource, at the direction of the State Historic Preservation Office, suspend work at the location of the find under the provisions for changes contained in Articles 10, 11, and 12 of the General Conditions. 1.7 AIR QUALITY A. Maintain all vehicles and equipment in proper tune. B. Use Best Available Control Technology on construction equipment, including a timing retardation. C. Use natural-gas powered construction equipment where possible. D. Encourage employee car-pooling. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 57 19 - 3 1.8 NOISE A. Comply with the hours of work as allowed by the local jurisdiction or land management agency. B. Noise limits on construction equipment will comply with the noise limits of the local jurisdiction or land management agency. All construction equipment shall be equipped with manufacturer’s standard noise control devices (i.e., mufflers, acoustical lagging, and/or engineer enclosures). Take special care not to throttle the engine excessively and keep engine speed as low as possible. Do not leave the equipment running or idling needlessly, especially when near noise-sensitive land uses. Noise-sensitive land uses include, but are not limited to, residences, schools, hospitals, libraries, retirement and elderly care centers, religious and worship facilities, courts of law, certain noise-sensitive professional offices, and quiet recreational areas such as campgrounds and hiking trails. C. Use newer equipment whenever possible. Inspect all construction equipment at periodic intervals to ensure proper maintenance and the presence of noise control devices (i.e., mufflers and shrouding, etc.) D. Keep heavy, noisier equipment a minimum of 100 feet away from the property line of any noise-sensitive land use for any length of time. Avoid coming closer than 200 feet if multiple pieces of equipment are operating simultaneously. If such cases are unavoidable, avoid throttling the engine excessively or leaving the equipment running needlessly. Heavy equipment shall be operated in a manner to comply with the jurisdiction’s noise ordinance and vibration performance standard. To comply with these requirements, it may be necessary to operate heavy equipment only 30 minutes out of each one-hour period at distances closer than 200 feet from an occupied property. During the remaining 30 minutes, the equipment should move further away or be shut down, but may resume 30 minutes later. E. Locate stationary noisy equipment away from construction boundaries that are near noise- sensitive uses. F. Concrete trucks shall perform initial mixing and other activities that require high revving of the truck engine a minimum of 600 feet from noise-sensitive land uses. Keep engine revolutions per minute as low as possible at closer distances. G. Whenever possible, use electric hand tools rather than gas-powered tools. H. If operation of dewatering pumps and generators is required between the hours of 6 p.m. and 7 a.m. and within 600 feet of a noise-sensitive land use, they shall be treated with acoustical noise control measures (e.g., mufflers, shrouding, and/or enclosures) so as not to exceed 56 dba at 50 feet or other appropriate requirements of the local jurisdiction. I. If requested by the Engineer, install temporary noise barriers for construction acti vities, including staging areas that occur closer than 100 feet from noise-sensitive land uses. Noise barriers can be made of plywood, heavy vinyl curtain material, natural or temporary earth berms, or stockpiles of construction material. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 57 19 - 4 1.9 BIOLOGICAL RESOURCES A. Comply with the instructions provided in Owner's Desert Tortoise Education Program and the stipulations of the Biological Opinion issued by the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service, which are summarized below. 1. Provide access to all construction areas for biological monitors as requested to inspect for desert tortoises. 2. Report immediately to the biological monitor if a live, injured, sick, or dead desert tortoise is found on the construction site. 3. Briefly halt construction in the location of the desert tortoise to allow the biological monitor to remove the desert tortoise. Desert tortoises shall only be moved by a qualified biologist, and only for the purpose of moving them out of harm’s way. 4. Before moving vehicles or equipment, inspect for the presence of tortoises. If a tortoise is found, notify the biological monitor who will remove the tortoise. 5. If a tortoise is noted in trenches or excavations, notify the biological monitor who will remove the tortoise. Provide escape ramps of 2:1 or less slope, placed at least every 1/4 mile, in each open excavation outside of tortoise – proof areas. 6. To prevent tortoise entry, in areas not enclosed by tortoise-proof fencing, open sections of pipe shall be temporarily capped or blocked at the end of the work day, and at any time that the work will be stopped and pipes will be left unattended for a period of time in excess of one hour. 7. If blasting is required, coordinate inspection of detonation sites with the biological monitor. 8. Survey crew vehicles must remain on existing roads. 9. If the desert tortoise is encountered after dark or when there is no biological monitor present on the work site, or after normal working hours, cease all construction activities at the location of the tortoise and notify the biological monitor at 222-8707 (pager). A qualified biologist will arrive to remove the tortoise. 10. Be fully responsible for ensuring that no harm comes to any tortoises found on the Project site. Tortoises will not be intentionally killed, harmed, or taken for private use. Comply with all measures identified by the tortoise monitor during the tortoise education program. B. Install and maintain approved temporary tortoise-proof fencing around necessary areas. The fencing may be installed with the Site security fencing or separately. The fencing may be installed all at one time, or in phases along portions of the entire construction Site to match construction activity, but must encompass the active construction area, including staging areas and access roads. All fencing must be within the boundaries of the designated and approved rights-of-way. Fencing shall be installed such that there is no ground disturbance outside the fence line. C. Approved temporary tortoise-proof fence consists of 1 inch by 2-inch mesh, 14-gauge galvanized wire fence (not poultry netting or hogwire), 36 inches wide. The top 24 inches of fence, with the 2-inch positioned vertically, must extend above ground, and be firmly attached to the Site security chain link fence or 12 gauge galvanized smooth wire. Use Hog rings at intervals of one foot to attach the mesh to the fence or wire. The bottom 12-inches of fence shall either be buried vertically or bent at a right angle towards the outside of the Work area, and covered with three to six inches of dirt, rocks, or gravel from the surrounding area. Place fence posts at appropriate intervals (no more than eight to ten feet) and visible so they do not BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 57 19 - 5 pose a safety hazard to humans. Provide adequate fence grounding to prevent electric shock to workers and other project personnel. Design and implement temporary fence grounding systems. 1. Drawings of approved temporary tortoise-proof fencing follow this Section. If any portion of this approved design is to be modified, submit a description and drawing of the proposed modification to Engineer. Owner will forward the description to the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service for approval. U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service may require up to 30 days for review of any proposed modification. D. Install gates at appropriate access points with minimum ground clearance (no more than one inch) to deter ingress by desert tortoises. If necessary, install a concrete foundation under the gate to prevent erosion. In place of, or in addition to gates, optionally install temporary tortoise-proof guards. If the electing to install temporary tortoise-proof guards, submit the proposed design to Engineer for review and approval prior to installation. Acceptable design consists of two parallel steel I-beams, spaced 8 inches apart. A minimum 8-inch gap will prevent tortoise entry. A trench between the I-beams at a depth of 8 to 12 inches with bedding material will catch any tortoises that fall through the gap. Bedding material must be of suitable size and be placed to prevent tortoise injury. The trench shall be ramped at either end with slopes not steeper than 3:1 (H:V) to direct the tortoises out of the trench and to the outside of the tortoise-proof enclosure. Post signs to warn pedestrians and drivers of the gap. E. Maintain the integrity of the tortoise-proof fence during construction. If the fence is damaged at any time during Work, notify Engineer immediately. Stop work in the area of damaged fence until the fence is repaired to the satisfaction of Engineer. If the fencing cannot be immediately repaired, secure the services of a biological monitor(s) that meet the required qualifications of the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service and has Engineer's approval. The monitor shall remain at the damaged fence area and prevent tortoises from entering the site during all daylight hours until the fence is repaired to the satisfaction of Engineer. Regular site maintenance includes removal of trash and sediment accumulation, repair of any damage, and restoration of zero clearance between the ground and the bottom of the fence. Open and close gates after each vehicle enters and exits the Site and ensure that the gate remains closed to prevent tortoise entry. Alternatively, leave the gate open during Work and provide an individual posted at the gate to watch for tortoise entry; if a tortoise approaches the gate, the individual must temporarily stop traffic and immediately contact Owner’s biological monitor for removal of the tortoise. 1. Prior to conducting any Work or moving any equipment or vehicles onto the Site, submit to Engineer a temporary tortoise-proof fencing plan for review and approval. The plan shall detail fence design, location, installation procedures, installation schedule, maintenance plan, and locations of temporary tortoise guards or gates. 2. Prior to installation of the fencing, stake and flag on foot the proposed fence route. Provide a minimum of five working days’ notice (not including weekends or holidays) after the route has been flagged to Engineer of intent to install the fence, which will allow Owner’s biological monitor to conduct a desert tortoise clearance survey of the fence route. 3. Owner's Environmental Coordinator will inspect and approve completion of the tortoise – proof fencing. 4. Allow a minimum of three working days (not including weekends or holidays) after the temporary tortoise-proof fencing has been installed, and before any equipment is moved onto the Site, for Owner’s biological monitor to conduct desert tortoise clearance surveys within the fenced area. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 57 19 - 6 F. Desert Tortoise Clearance Surveys. For areas not enclosed by tortoise exclusion fencing, after the boundaries of the site have been staked and flagged but prior to conducting any Work or moving any equipment or vehicles onto the site, provide a minimum of five working days’ notice (not including weekends or holidays) to Engineer of intent to begin Work. This notice will allow Owner’s biological monitors to conduct desert tortoise clearance surveys. Before conducting any initial ground disturbing activities, including but not limited to clearing and grubbing, blading, grading, or placement of equipment, of any area within the site, provide the working days’ notice (not including weekends or holidays) for Owner’s biological monitors to conduct desert tortoise clearance surveys of the area to be disturbed. If the work is not conducted as notified, an additional two days’ notice of a new start date is required, since the tortoise clearance surveys will have expired. 1.10 BIOLOGICAL RESOURCES A. Attention is directed to Timber Lakes Water Special Service District Conservation Plan and the Endangered Species Act of 1973, which provide for the protection of federally listed wildlife species. Be responsible for ensuring that no harm comes to any desert tortoises found on the Work site. Desert tortoises shall not be intentionally killed, harmed, or taken for private use. Comply with all measures identified by the biological monitor during the tortoise education program. B. In the event a desert tortoise is encountered on the Work site and is in imminent danger, temporarily cease all construction operations at the location of the tortoise, and carefully collect and immediately place the tortoise in a clean, unused cardboard box in the shade and out of harm’s way. Immediately notify Owner's Environmental Coordinator at 801-495-2224 of all such occurrences, and a qualified biologist will arrive to remove the tortoise. 1.11 CONTROL OF SURFACE WATER A. Be advised that portions of the Work site are subject to flooding from surface waters. Many portions of the site are located directly in washes or drainage ways. Other portions of the Work are located outside major drainage ways but are still subject to minor channelized flows and overland sheet flow during some rainfall events. B. Be responsible for protecting the Work and temporary facilities from damage due to flooding, runoff, surface water flows, and related subsurface flows until final Project closeout. Provide protection for all aspects of the Work whether temporary or permanent. Provide all materials and equipment required to protect the Work. No additional payment will be made by Owner for providing protective measures or for any damage resulting from said flows. All damage from said flows shall be completely replaced in accordance with the Contract Documents at no additional cost to Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGNAGE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 58 13 - 1 SECTION 01 58 13 TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide two project identification signs, complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Provide a publicly accessible bulletin board with required safety and labor law posters. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BULLETIN BOARD A. Prior to the commencement of work activities, provide a clear weatherproof covered bulletin board not less than 36 inches by 48 inches in size for displaying the following minimum workplace posters. 1. Equal Employment Opportunity posters: www.dol.gov/agencies/ofccp/posters 2. :Minimum wage rate poster: www.dol.gov/agencies/whd/posters/flsa 3. Safety and health poster: www.osha.gov/publications/poster B. Coordinate minimum requirements stated herein with any additional posters and notifications required by applicable safety and labor laws. C. Locate the bulletin board at the Project Site in a conspicuous place easily accessible by all employees, and as approved by Engineer. 2.2 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS A. Construct each sign of 3/4-inch painted, exterior grade plywood with 4 inch by 4 inch supports and 2 inch by 4 inch cross bracing capable of withstanding 15 psf wind loads. B. Each sign face shall be 4 feet vertical by 8 feet horizontal. C. Design sign for professional appearance in accordance with facsimile included at end of this Section. D. Colors and text fonts 1. Face a. White: RGB 255,255,255. 2. Border a. Dark blue: RGB 0,128,183 3. Lettering a. Black, block letter style (Swis721 font face) for general lettering: RGB 0,0,0. b. Dark blue, Arial Rounded MT Bold for text in Utah DEQ Logo: RGB 0,128,183. 4. Logos a. Dark blue text and dark graphics in Utah DEQ Logo: RGB 0,128,183. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGNAGE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 58 13 - 2 b. Medium blue for graphics in Utah DEQ Logo: RGB 0,175,216. c. Light blue/green for graphics in Utah DEQ Logo: RGB 0,211,216. d. Dark blue for Timber Lakes Logo: RGB 13,128,172. e. Dark blue for Bowen Collins and Associates Logo: RGB 2,65,96. f. Light blue for Bowen Collins and Associates Logo: RGB 41,171,226. E. Sign Content: The content and appearance of the project sign shall be as shown on facsimile at the end of this Section. Submit a dimensioned drawing to illustrate proposed sign content to Engineer for approval prior to construction. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN LOCATIONS A. Locate signs on the Project Site as directed by Engineer. B. Set the sign 4 feet above the ground, measured from grade to the lower edge of the plywood sheet. C. If the sign is located outside of an Owner-acquired right-of-way or easement, secure written permission from the property owner where the sign will be located and submit to Engineer. 3.2 REMOVAL A. Remove the project identification signs upon Substantial Completion of the Work. END OF SECTION Attachment 1: Sign facsimile. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT MOBILIZATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 71 00 - 1 SECTION 01 71 00 MOBILIZATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Organization and mobilization of the forces. B. Transporting construction plant and equipment to the jobsite and setting up of same. C. Transporting various tools, materials, and equipment to the jobsite. D. Erection of temporary buildings and facilities as required for field offices, staging, storage, and construction operations. 1.2 PAYMENT FOR MOBILIZATION A. Payment for mobilization shall be as described in Section 01 20 00 – Measurement and Payment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Mobilization shall include the following principal items: 1. Provide all required insurance certificates and bonds. 2. Move onto the site, or portion of site as available, of all plant and equipment required for first month’s operations including office and storage trailers. 3. Install temporary construction power, wiring, and lighting facilities. 4. Develop construction water supply. 5. Provide all on-site communication facilities, including telephones, cordless phone antenna, and radio pagers. 6. Provide on-site sanitary facilities and potable water facilities. 7. Arrange for and erection of work and storage yard. 8. Construct and implement security features and requirements complying with Section 01 31 30 – Safety. 9. Obtain all required permits. 10. Post all OSHA required notices and establish safety programs. 11. Provide Superintendent at the job site full time. 3.2 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. The following submittals are due by the day indicated and must be approved by Owner as a condition precedent to completion of mobilization. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT MOBILIZATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 71 00 - 2 No. Submittal Specification Section 1. Quality Assurance / Control Plan 01 45 00 2. Mobilization Plan 01 71 00 3. Safety Program 01 31 30 4. Concrete Mix Designs 03 30 00 5. List of Permits and Licenses 01 41 26 6. Schedule of Submittals 01 33 20 3.3 MOBILIZATION PLAN A. Within 15 Days after receipt of the Notice to Proceed, submit a mobilization plan to Engineer for approval, which shall include a breakdown showing the estimated value of each component of mobilization as described in paragraphs 3.1 and 3.2 herein. B. Include a bar chart schedule showing each item of mobilization listed in paragraphs 3.1 and 3.2 herein and include scheduled start date, finish dates, and total duration. The plan shall also list each activity to be initiated in the first 90 Days following Notice to Proceed, complete, with scheduled start date, finish date, and total duration. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SITE CONDITIONS SURVEYS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 71 30 - 1 SECTION 01 71 30 SITE CONDITIONS SURVEYS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements to document conditions of the Project Site and adjacent properties before construction begins and after completion of the Work. Methods include still photographs, digital video recordings, and topographic surveys. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all photographs, digital videos, and topographic survey data of the preconstruction conditions to Engineer for record purposes prior to, but not more than three weeks before, commencement of any construction activities. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Complete and submit all digital videos, still photographs, mapping, and survey data of the postconstruction conditions to Engineer prior to final inspection by Owner and Engineer. B. Provide postconstruction survey data to Engineer as follows: 1. Submit topographic mapping for each site hereinbefore identified for topographic mapping and surveys as a separate electronic map (drawing) in AutoCAD Release 2018, or later. 2. Also submit each AutoCAD site map in hard copy plot format (six copies). 3. Engineer will review hardcopy plots for accuracy relative to the specified requirements. 4. Amend mapping files, as required, based on review of the hardcopy plots by Engineer. 5. The electronic mapping files shall be produced using field survey techniques with sufficient accuracy for reproduction and use as base maps at a scale of 1"=20' horizontal and 2-foot contour intervals as specified for National Map Accuracy Standards. 6. All electronic mapping files shall be three-dimensional. 7. Submit lists of survey points for all topographic surveys in ASCII text file format. 8. Provide mapping and points files on one or more compact discs in a format acceptable to Engineer. C. Submit six copies of the disk media. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SITE CONDITIONS SURVEYS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 71 30 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Conduct thorough preconstruction and postconstruction Site conditions surveys of the entire Project. Site conditions surveys shall consist of photographs, digital video recordings, and topographic mapping. Provide and submit sufficient photographs, supplemented by digital video, to Engineer to resolve any damage claims, which may arise due to the construction of this Project. Develop topographic mapping using the Project coordinates and referenced to the Project base lines and benchmarks. Mapping shall be adequate to ascertain preconstruction and postconstruction conditions (including elevations) of all public and private property within and adjacent to the construction limits. B. Digital video or photographic surveys shall include, but not be limited to, all access roads used to transport material or equipment to and from the Site and elevation of roadways, drives, walks, and buildings. Use spot elevation surveys to document the elevation on abutting roadways, drives, and walks, taken at approximately 20-foot intervals and at the point of juncture with any structure to which they are attached or otherwise influenced by the Work. In addition, take elevations of all building slabs along the Project route. Provide topographic mapping as specified herein. C. Digital video recordings required as part of this Section and by Section 31 10 00 – Site Preparation and Restoration and Section 31 23 00 - Earthwork may be combined into a single set of media provided the requirements for videos specified in both Sections are met. D. As a minimum, note preconstruction and postconstruction conditions and perform digital video surveys of the following: 1. Areas used to access the Site or haul materials and equipment to the Site. 2. The access road, both original and relocated locations and ultimately to the Site. 3. All Work areas, including, but not limited to, access corridors, disposal areas, and staging areas. 4. Any work completed by other contractors at the Site that will be impacted or otherwise affected by Work of this Project. E. Supplement digital video surveys with still photographs and spot elevation surveys as required to document the original condition and location of existing features and facilities. F. Provide digital video records in DVD-R format. G. Conduct topographic mapping to document the post-construction topography of the following Sites. 1. New spring development location END OF SECTION BC&A PROTECTION AND TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT RESTORATION OF EXISTING FACILITIES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 71 50 - 1 SECTION 01 71 50 PROTECTION AND RESTORATION OF EXISTING FACILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL A. Protect all existing utilities and improvements not designated for removal and restore damaged or temporarily relocated utilities and improvements to a condition equal to or better than they were prior to such damage or temporary relocation, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Call Blue Stakes before commencing any digging for location of underground utility lines and cable locations. The number is 811 or (801) 208-2100. C. Provide temporary 6-foot chain link fencing panels for protection of all open excavations and trenches within public streets, residential areas, and all other locations except for unimproved open areas where excavations and/or pipeline trenches that can be safely sloped in accordance with current OSHA standards to provide safe access without the use of shoring devices. Temporary fencing panels shall fully enclose open excavations and trenches and shall remain in place during all non-working hours. D. Provide temporary caps over all large diameter pipe during non-working hours to prevent unauthorized access. 1.2 RIGHTS-OF-WAY A. Do not perform any work that would affect any oil, gas, sewer, or water pipeline; any telephone, telegraph, or electric transmission line; any fence; or any other structure. Do not enter upon the rights-of-way involved until notified by Engineer that Owner has secured authority therefore from the proper party. B. After authority has been obtained, give said party due notice of intention to begin work, if required by said party, and remove, shore, support or otherwise protect such pipeline, transmission line, ditch, fence, or structure or replace same. C. When two or more contracts are being executed at one time on the same or adjacent land in such manner that work on one contract may interfere with that on another, Owner will determine the sequence and order of the Work. When the territory of one contract is the necessary or convenient means of access for the execution of another contract, such privilege of access or any other reasonable privilege may be granted by Owner to Contractor so desiring, to the extent, amount, in the manner, and at the times permitted and in full conformance with the conditions of the Contract Documents. D. No such decision as to the method or time of conducting the Work or the use of territory shall be made the basis of any claim for delay or damage, except as provided for temporary suspension of the Work in the General Conditions of the Contract. BC&A PROTECTION AND TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT RESTORATION OF EXISTING FACILITIES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 71 50 - 2 1.3 PROTECTION OF STREET OR ROADWAY MARKERS A. Do not destroy, remove, or otherwise disturb any existing survey markers or other existing street or roadway markers without proper authorization. Do not begin pavement breaking or excavation until all survey or other permanent marker points that will be disturbed by the construction operations have been properly referenced. Accurately replace survey markers or points disturbed after all street or roadway resurfacing has been completed. 1.4 RESTORATION OF PAVEMENT A. General: Replace all paved areas cut or damaged during construction with similar materials of equal thickness to match the existing adjacent undisturbed areas, except where specific resurfacing requirements have been called for in the Contract Documents or in the requirements of the agency issuing a permit. The pavement restoration requirement to match existing sections applies to all components of existing sections, including sub-base, base and pavement. Conform temporary and permanent pavement to the requirements of the affected jurisdictional agency. Neatly saw cut pavements, which are subject to partial removal, in straight lines. Refer to Division 32 for specific pavement restoration requirements. B. Temporary Resurfacing: Wherever required by the public authorities having jurisdiction , place temporary surfacing promptly after backfilling and maintain such surfacing for the period of time fixed by said authorities before proceeding with the final restoration of improvements. C. Permanent Resurfacing: In order to obtain a satisfactory junction with adjacent surfaces, saw cut back and trim the edge to provide a clean, sound, vertical joint before permanent replacement of an excavated or damaged portion of pavement. Damaged edges of pavement along excavations and elsewhere shall be trimmed back by saw cutting in straight lines. All pavement restoration and other facilities restoration shall be constructed to finish grades compatible with adjacent undisturbed pavement. Refer to plans for minimum dimension of T-patch replacement width over disturbed pipeline trenches in paved areas. D. Pavement Crown: In areas where pipeline trenching impacts an existing crown of asphalt, survey, and submit to Engineer documentation showing the pre-construction location of the crown prior to trenching. Replace the crown of asphalt to its pre-construction location to the satisfaction of the governing agency and Engineer. E. Restoration of Sidewalks or Private Driveways: Wherever sidewalks or private roads have been removed for purposes of construction, place suitable temporary sidewalks or roadways promptly after backfilling and maintain them in satisfactory condition for the period fixed by the authorities having jurisdiction over the affected portions before proceeding with the final restoration. If no such period of time is so fixed, maintain said temporary sidewalks or roadways until the final restoration thereof has been made. F. Restoration of Curb and Gutter: Wherever curb and gutter, including driveway and sidewalk approaches, have been removed for purposes of construction, replace these improvements following construction to the specific dimension and requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. Replace improvements, including required ADA access details to the latest version of the authoritative standard regardless of their preconstruction condition. BC&A PROTECTION AND TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT RESTORATION OF EXISTING FACILITIES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 71 50 - 3 1.5 EXISTING UTILITIES AND IMPROVEMENTS A. General. Protect underground utilities and other improvements, which may be impaired during construction operations, regardless of whether the utilities are indicated on the Drawings. Take all possible precautions for the protection of unforeseen utility lines to provide for uninterrupted service and to provide such special protection as may be necessary. B. Except for utilities specifically located on the Drawings, be responsible for exploratory excavations (potholing) as deemed necessary to determine the exact locations and depths of utilities, which may interfere with the Work. Perform all such exploratory excavations as soon as practicable after Notice to Proceed and, in any event, a sufficient time in advance of construction to avoid possible delays to the Work’s progress. When such exploratory excavations show the utility locations as shown on the Drawings to be in error, so notify Engineer. Refer to plans for minimum advance distance that potholing must be performed prior to pipeline trenching work. C. The number of exploratory excavations required shall be that number which is sufficient to determine the alignment and grade of the utility. D. Utilities to be Moved: In case it becomes necessary to move the property of any public utility or franchise holder, such utility company or franchise holder will, upon request of Contractor, be notified by Owner to move such property within a specified reasonable time. When utility lines that are to be removed are encountered within the area of operations, notify Engineer a sufficient time in advance for the necessary measures to be taken to prevent interruption of service. E. Utilities to be Removed: Where the proper completion of the Work requires temporary or permanent removal and/or relocation of an existing utility or other improvement which is indicated, remove and, without unnecessary delay, temporarily replace or relocate such utility or improvement in a manner satisfactory to Engineer and the owner of the facility. In all cases of such temporary removal or relocation, restoration to the former location shall be accomplished in a manner that will restore or replace the utility or improvement as nearly as possible to its former locations and to as good or better condition as found prior to removal. F. Owner’s Right of Access: Owner and owners of public utilities and franchises reserve right to enter at any time upon any public street, alley, right-of-way, or easement for the purpose of making changes in their property made necessary by the Work of this Contract. G. Underground Utilities Indicated: Existing utility lines that are indicated or the locations of which are made known prior to excavation and that are to be retained, and all utility lines that are constructed during excavation operations shall be protected from damage during excavation and backfilling and, if damaged, shall be immediately repaired or replaced unless otherwise repaired by the owner of the damaged utility. If the owner of the damaged facility performs its own repairs, reimburse said owner for the costs of repair. H. Underground Utilities Not Indicated: In the event of damage to existing utility lines that are not indicated or the locations of which are not made known prior to excavation, make a verbal report of such damage immediately to Engineer and a written report thereof promptly thereafter. Notify the utility owner of the damage. If directed by Engineer, repairs shall be made under the provisions for changes and extra work contained in the General Conditions. BC&A PROTECTION AND TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT RESTORATION OF EXISTING FACILITIES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 71 50 - 4 I. Damages. Costs of locating and/or repairing damage not due to failure to exercise reasonable care, and removing or relocating such utility facilities not indicated in the Contract Documents with reasonable accuracy, and for equipment on the project which was actually working on that portion of the Work which was interrupted or idled by removal or relocation of such utility facilities, and which was necessarily idled during such Work will be paid for as extra Work in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions. J. Approval of Repairs: All repairs to a damaged utility or improvement are subject to inspection and approval by an authorized representative of the utility or improvement owner before being concealed by backfill or other work. K. Fire Hydrants: Keep all fire hydrants and water control valves free from obstruction and available for use at all times. L. Maintaining in Service: Unless indicated otherwise, all oil and gasoline pipelines, power, and telephone or the communication cable ducts, gas and water mains, irrigation lines, sewer lines, storm drain lines, poles, and overhead power and communication wires and cables encountered along the line of the Work shall remain continuously in service during all the operations under the Contract, unless other arrangements satisfactory to the Engineer are made with the owner of said pipelines, duct, main, irrigation line, sewer, storm drain, pole, or wire or cable. Be responsible for and repair all damage due to construction operations. The provisions of this Section shall not be abated even in the event such damage occurs after backfilling or is not discovered until after completion of the backfilling. M. Utility Service Laterals: Utility service laterals are not shown on the plans. Anticipate that there are no less service laterals than there are homes where project trenches are located in the vicinity of a street between a home and the utility main. Protect in place, or remove and replace to the satisfaction of the utility owner, all utility service laterals encountered during construction. Duration of utility service outages and public notification procedures shall conform to the standards of the controlling agency and these Contract documents. 1.6 TREES OR SHRUBS WITHIN STREET RIGHTS-OF-WAY AND PROJECT LIMITS A. General: Except where trees or shrubs are indicated to be removed, exercise all necessary precautions so as not to damage or destroy any trees or shrubs, including those lying within street rights-of-way and project limits. Do not trim or remove any trees unless such trees have been approved for trimming or removal by the jurisdictional agency or Owner. Trim or replace existing trees and shrubs which are damaged during construction using the services of a certified tree company under permit from the jurisdictional agency and/or Owner. B. Trimming; symmetry of the tree shall be preserved; no stubs or splits or torn branches left; clean cuts shall be made close to the trunk or large branch. Do not use spikes for climbing live trees. Cuts over 1-1/2 inches in diameter shall be coated with a tree paint product that is waterproof, adhesive, and elastic, and free from kerosene, coal tar, creosote, or other material injurious to the life of the tree. C. Replacement: Immediately notify the jurisdictional agency and/or Owner if any tree or shrub is damaged by construction operations. If, in the opinion of said agency or Owner, the damage is such that replacement is necessary, replace the tree or shrub at no additional expense to Owner. The tree or shrub shall be of a like size and variety as the one damaged, or, if of a BC&A PROTECTION AND TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT RESTORATION OF EXISTING FACILITIES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 71 50 - 5 small size, the pay to the owner of said tree a compensatory payment acceptable to the tree or shrub owner, subject to the approval of the jurisdictional agency or Owner. The size of the tree or shrub shall not be less than 1-inch diameter nor less than 6 feet in height. Planting of replacement trees and shrubs shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the nursery furnishing the plants. Unless otherwise indicated, water and maintain the replacement trees and shrubs for 6 months after planting. 1.7 LAWN AREAS A. Repair lawn or landscaped areas damaged during construction to match the pre-construction condition to the satisfaction of the landowner and Owner. Use high quality sod to restore all lawn areas. Location and quality of irrigation system equipment shall be confirmed prior to construction. Where lawn irrigation systems have been removed or damaged during construction, be responsible for replacement of systems in kind to the satisfaction of the landowner. Anticipate that pressurized irrigation systems are present in all maintained lawn areas that will be impacted by construction. Verify proper operation of the irrigation system with landowner as required for maintenance of newly installed sod prior to transferring of watering responsibilities. 1.8 UNIMPROVED AREAS A. Remove and stockpile topsoil prior to construction in accordance with Division 31 specifications. Replace topsoil prior to restoration of unimproved areas. B. Unimproved areas, including unclassified open spaces, fields, and unimproved rights-of-way, damaged during construction shall be repaired to match pre-construction conditions to the satisfaction of the land owner and Owner. At a minimum, unimproved areas shall be smoothed and finished graded with topsoil to match preconstruction topography, and reseeded using a native seed mix acceptable to the land owner and Owner. C. All slopes greater than 2H : 1V shall be protected with erosion control matting prior to reseeding. 1.9 OTHER SURFACE IMPROVEMENTS A. Conduct a pre-construction survey of all properties that will be impacted by construction operations. All improvements that have the potential to be impacted by construction, including but not limited to fencing, landscaping, boulders, retaining walls, irrigatio n systems, and other public and/or private improvements, shall be protected in place, or if necessary, removed and replaced with like kind or better quality following construction. B. Work that will impact residential properties shall be subject to the notification and coordination requirements of Section 01 71 40 – Public Information Program. 1.10 NOTIFICATION BY CONTRACTOR A. Prior to any excavation in the vicinity of any existing underground facilities, including all water, sewer, storm drain, gas, petroleum products, or other pipelines; all buried electric power, communications, or television cables; all traffic signal and street lighting facilities; and all roadway and state highway rights-of-way, notify the owners or agencies responsible for BC&A PROTECTION AND TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT RESTORATION OF EXISTING FACILITIES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 71 50 - 6 such facilities not less than three days nor more than seven days prior to excavation so that a representative of said owner or agencies can be present during such Work if they so desire. B. When it is necessary to temporarily deny access to property, or when any utility service connection must be interrupted, give notices sufficiently in advance to enable the affected persons to provide for their needs. Notices shall conform to any applicable local ordinance and, whether delivered orally or in writing, shall include appropriate information concerning the interruption and instructions on how to limit inconvenience caused thereby. C. Contact, cooperate with, and provide written notice (including Contractor’s phone number) at least seven days prior to beginning Work on each street. The written notice shall include the approximate schedule and explanation of Work and shall be given to each homeowner, business, all emergency agencies, schools, and residents, which will be affected by the project; particularly in reference to temporary interruptions to vehicular access. At least twenty-four hours prior to initiation of Work, provide a second notice to confirm the scope of scheduled Work. Submit a copy of the notifications to Engineer, for approval, prior to the start of construction. Make verbal door-to-door communication prior to construction to remind all affected parties of the construction to take place. In addition, be responsible to answer and resolve any conflicts that may arise between a homeowner or business owner and the construction personnel. D. Refer to Section 01 71 40 – Public Information Program for detailed notification requirements and general responsibilities regarding public information. PRODUCTS (NOT USED) EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DISPOSAL OF WATER WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 74 19 - 1 SECTION 01 74 19 DISPOSAL OF WATER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Prepare a detailed listing of all discharges and overflows that will occur during the disinfection procedure. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Water Works Association (AWWA) standards, latest edition. AWWA C651 Disinfection Water Mains AWWA C652 Disinfection of Water Storage Facilities 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit a listing of every significant discharge from a drain valve, pump well, overflow, drain piping, and from all related appurtenances. “Significant discharge” is defined as a volume that is greater than that required to exercise or fill piping with chlorinated water and briefly flush. The listing shall be utilized as input for the Construction Progress Schedule to identify the volume and duration for every discharge that must be accounted for. Very minor discharges for air-release piping or drains that are exercised briefly to ensure disinfection do not need to be identified on the Construction Progress Schedule for dechlorination or discharge. B. Include the proposed method and equipment for dechlorination, including type of agent, temporary feed pumps, and appurtenant feed equipment. C. Final Report: Submit to Engineer a final report of each significant discharge, its locations, dates sampled for effectiveness of dechlorination, and the test results. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS FOR DECHLORINATION A. Where dechlorination of water released back to the environment is required, use a sodium bisulfate or equivalent dechlorinator. Sodium bisulfite, if used, shall be applied at a ratio of at least 1.47 parts per every part of chlorine to be removed. This is to remove all the free active chlorine. Since the reaction produces a byproduct of hydrochloric acid, it will also tend to lower the pH of the water and remove calcium carbonate from the water. If the pH drops below 6.0, add calcium carbonate back into the water during the dechlorination process to restore the pH to an acceptable level of at least 6.0. B. The process of dechlorination consists of utilizing a chemical metering pump to inject a 44 percent (or less) solution of sodium bisulfite into a temporary discharge pipe with a static BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DISPOSAL OF WATER WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 74 19 - 2 mixer and after a few seconds (plus or minus three) withdrawing sample for a chlorine residual analyzer. Based on the results, the analyzer shall send a signal to adjust the chemical feed rate. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MAJOR DISCHARGES, PUMP WELLS, OVERFLOWS A. General: List each drain valve, pump well, and overflow, along with proposed volume and duration of discharge during the disinfection procedure. Locations requiring dechlorination shall be indicated. Refer to Drawings to obtain detailed information on size, location, and layout of facilities and access conditions. Review the site of each proposed discharge for the conditions at the proposed discharge. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PROJECT CLOSEOUT WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 77 00 - 1 SECTION 01 77 00 PROJECT CLOSEOUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Contract closeout, including final cleaning, preparation, and submittal of closeout documents, warranties and bonds, and final completion certification. B. Closeout submittals and submittal forms in both hard copy and electronic format. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Closeout Documents: Submit the following closeout documents prior to making a written request for Final Completion. 1. Project record drawings and documents per Section 01 78 39 – Project Record Documents. 2. Shop drawings. 3. Keys and keying schedule. 4. Post construction survey record documents, where required. 5. Quality Control reports per Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control. 6. Final Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 7. Maintenance stock items; spare parts and special tools. 8. Written warranties and bonds where required. 9. Bonds for roofing or maintenance, if indicated. 10. Access Badges and Parking Permits. 11. Release of liens or release of claims forms submitted by all subcontractors and suppliers, if requested by Owner B. Evidence of Compliance With Inspections and Other Requirements of Governing Authorities: Submit the following: 1. Special Inspection Reports. 2. Certificate of Occupancy, if applicable. 3. Release from each affected property owner or agency indicating final acceptance. C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals 1. One percent of the contract price will be withheld from any monies due as progress payments, if at the 75 percent construction completion point, the approved Operations and Maintenance Manual complying with Section 01 33 20 - Submittal Procedures has not been submitted. The aforementioned amount will be withheld by Owner as the agreed, estimated value of the approved Operations and Maintenance Manuals. Any such retention of money for failure to submit the approved Operations and Maintenance Manuals on or before the 75 percent construction completion point shall be in addition to the retention of any payments due under General Conditions of the Contract. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PROJECT CLOSEOUT WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 77 00 - 2 D. Final Change Order: A final Change Order shall be submitted and processed if required. Final payment and close-out procedures shall comply with requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.3 CLOSEOUT TIMETABLE A. Establish dates for equipment testing, acceptance periods, and on-site instructional periods as required under the Contract Documents. Such dates shall be established not less than one week prior to beginning any of the required activities, to allow Owner, Engineer, and their authorized representatives sufficient time to schedule attendance at such activities. 1.4 COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. When Contractor considers the entire Work ready for its intended use Contractor shall notify Owner and Engineer in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete and request that Engineer issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. Prior to making such request, the following must be complete: 1. Work necessary for the safe, proper, and complete use or operation of the facility as intended. 2. Punch list of items remaining to be completed, for submission with the request for issuance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion. 3. Submit and receive acceptance of accurate record drawings for all work completed to date. 4. Submit and receive acceptance of all specified warranties, bonds, guarantees and operation and Operations and Maintenance Manuals. 5. Complete all required vendor training, testing, and where required, start-up. 6. Deliver all required spare parts, maintenance stock items, and special tools. 7. Complete equipment and communications system testing successfully. B. Upon receipt of the request, Engineer and designated representatives will review the request, the Work, and the above requirements to determine whether Substantial Completion has been achieved. If this review fails to support Substantial Completion, Engineer will notify Contractor in writing citing the reasons for rejection. If Engineer determines that Substantial Completion has been achieved, the following procedures will be followed: 1. Engineer, his/her representative, and user representatives will review the Work and the punch list to assure all deficiencies are noted on a final punch list. 2. Engineer will schedule and conduct a pre-final walk-through of the facility with representatives of Owner, Engineer, Contractor, and others, for the purpose of formally reviewing the Work, the final punch list, and the readiness of the Work for use. A copy of the final punch list will be furnished to all participants and any additional items noted during the walk-through will be added to the list. 3. Upon completion of the pre-final walk-through, Engineer will deliver to Owner a preliminary certificate of Substantial Completion which will fix the date of Substantial Completion as the date of the walk-through, provided the walk-through has verified that the Work is in fact ready for use and occupancy by Owner for its intended purpose. Engineer will attach to the certificate a punch list of items to be completed or corrected before final payment. In accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract, upon approval of this request by Owner, the facility will be considered Substantially Complete. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PROJECT CLOSEOUT WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 77 00 - 3 C. When Contractor deems that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Contractor shall notify Engineer and Owner in writing that the entire Work is complete. Final Completion will be deemed to have occurred when Work is completed including the following: 1. All final punch list items have been corrected, signed off by Contractor and Engineer, and demonstrated to Owner during a final walk-through. 2. All updates to record drawings, and Operations and Maintenance Manuals have been made. 3. Demobilization and site cleanup are complete. 4. Facilities and/or equipment have been properly demonstrated to be functioning as required. 5. Owner has received releases from all parties who are entitled to claims against the subject project, property, or improvement pursuant to the provisions of law. 6. New permanent cylinders and key blanks for all locks have been provided to Owner. D. Final Inspection and Payment 1. When all items have been completed or corrected, Engineer, Contractor, and Owner will promptly make a final inspection to verify completion. Final payment and Engineer’s Notice of Acceptability will then be processed in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract. E. Partial Utilization may be desired at Owner's option, as described in the General Conditions. If Partial Utilization is requested, the same procedure for completion of that portion of the Work as indicated in paragraphs A and B above, will be used. 1.5 CLOSE-OUT PROCEDURE A. Engineer and Contractor shall meet and resolve all outstanding issues including, but not limited to: 1. Claims and adjustments for time or costs 2. Outstanding, unused allowances 3. Procedures for handling warranty issues. B. A Final Change Order shall be processed if required. Final payment and close out procedures shall comply with all requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.6 MAINTENANCE AND GUARANTEE A. Comply with the maintenance and guarantee requirements contained in General Conditions of the Contract. B. Replacement of earth fill or backfill, where it has settled below the required finish elevations, shall be considered as a part of such required repair work, and any repair or resurfacing which becomes necessary by reason of such settlement shall likewise be considered as a part of such required repair work unless Contractor has obtained a statement in writing from the affected private authority or public agency releasing Owner from further responsibility in connection with such repair or resurfacing. Submit such release(s) to Engineer. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PROJECT CLOSEOUT WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 77 00 - 4 C. Make all repairs and replacements promptly upon receipt of written order from Owner. If Contractor fails to make such repairs or replacements promptly, Owner reserves the right to do the Work and Contractor, and his surety shall be liable to Owner for the cost thereof. 1.7 BOND A. Furnish a Performance Bond as required by General Conditions of the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. Certificate of Final Completion of the Work by Owner will be withheld until requirements for final cleanup of the Project Site are complete as follows: 1. Perform final cleaning prior to inspections for final acceptance. 2. Employ skilled workers who are experienced in cleaning operations. 3. Use cleaning materials that are recommended by manufacturers of surfaces to be cleaned. 4. Avoid scratching, discoloring, and otherwise damaging surfaces being cleaned. 5. Clean roofs. 6. Broom clean and power wash exterior paved surfaces and rake clean other surfaces of sitework. Police yards and grounds to keep clean. 7. Remove dust, cobwebs, and traces of insects and dirt. 8. Clean grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, paint, blemishes, sealants, plaster, concrete, and other foreign materials from sight-exposed surfaces, fixtures, and Equipment. 9. Remove nonpermanent protection and labels. 10. Polish finish hardware. 11. Wash and shine mirrors. 12. Polish glossy surfaces to clear shine. 13. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils when units were operated without filters during construction. 14. Clean light fixtures and replace burned-out or dim lamps. 3.2 WASTE DISPOSAL A. Remove temporary structures and facilities and arrange for and dispose of surplus materials, waste products, and debris as follows: 1. Prior to making disposal on private property, obtain written permission from owner of such private property. 2. Do not fill ditches, washes, or drainage ways which may create drainage problems. 3. Do not create unsightly or unsanitary nuisances during disposal operations. 4. Maintain disposal site in safe condition and good appearance. 5. Complete leveling and clean-up prior to final acceptance of the Work. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PROJECT CLOSEOUT WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 77 00 - 5 3.3 TOUCH-UP AND REPAIR A. Touch up or repair finished surfaces on structures, equipment, fixtures, and installations that have been damaged prior to inspection for final acceptance. B. Refinish or replace entire surfaces that cannot be touched-up or repaired satisfactorily. 3.4 DEMOBILIZATION A. Demobilization shall include moving plant and equipment, field trailers, construction materials, debris, and so forth from the Site as well as performing final cleanup. 1. Disturbed areas shall be restored to their original state or better. 2. Permanent improvements damaged during construction operations shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to Owner. 3. Remove all equipment, materials, waste, and debris from the site and restore site to original condition upon completion of construction. 4. The work area shall be restored to its original or better condition and shall be inspected and approved by Engineer. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PROJECT CLOSEOUT WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 77 00 - 6 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 78 39 - 1 SECTION 01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Maintain at the Site for Owner, one record copy of the Drawings, Specifications, Operation and Maintenance manuals, coordination drawings, and Shop Drawings that are clearly marked with a red pen to indicate all changes and or revisions resulting from, but not limited to, the following: 1. Actual Project as constructed. 2. Addenda. 3. Change Orders and other modifications. 4. Engineer's instructions. 5. Field revisions. 6. Requests for Information (RFI). 7. All other changes. B. Give special attention to recording the horizontal and vertical location of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated, or which were not indicated on the Contract Drawings. C. Record drawings shall be supplemented by any detailed sketches as necessary or directed to fully indicate the Work, as actually constructed. D. Section Includes: 1. Maintenance of Documents and Samples 2. Marking Devices. 3. Recording. 4. Close-out Submittal Delivery. 1.2 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES B. Store documents and samples in field office apart from documents used for construction. C. Provide files and racks for storage of documents. D. Provide locked cabinet or secure storage space for storage of samples. E. Maintain documents in clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Keep record documents separate from those used for construction. F. Always make documents and samples available for reference by Engineer and Owner. G. In the case of those drawings which depict the detail requirement for equipment to be assembled and wired in the factory, such as motor control centers and the like, the record drawings shall be updated by indicating those portions which are superseded by change order drawings or final shop drawings, and by including appropriate reference information BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 78 39 - 2 describing the change orders by number and the shop drawings by manufacturer, drawing, and revision numbers. H. During progress meetings, record documents may be reviewed to ascertain that changes have been recorded. I. Updated Drawings, when provided by Engineer, will be substituted for the hand markups provided Contractor prints the applicable Drawings and inserts them into the record set each month. J. Copies of the record drawings will be audited regularly by Engineer after the month in which the Notice to Proceed is given as well as on completion of the Work. Failure to properly maintain record drawings in a up-to-date condition may result in the withholding of payments due at the sole discretion of Owner. 1.3 MARKING DEVICES A. Use a red color pen for recording all information to all documents defined herein. 1.4 RECORDING A. Label each document "CONFORMING TO CONSTRUCTION RECORD" in neat large red printed letters. B. Record information concurrently with construction progress, at the time the material or equipment is installed. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. C. Drawings shall be legibly marked to record actual construction per the following: 1. Record actual depths of various elements of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum. 2. Record actual as-built depths, horizontal and vertical location, (at every direction change and a maximum of 100 feet intervals on straight runs), of underground pipes, duct banks, and other buried utilities. Reference horizontal location to Project coordinate system and vertical elevations to Project datum. 3. Identify and record specific details of pipe connections, location of existing buried features and utilities located during excavation, and the final locations of piping, equipment electrical conduits, manholes, and pull boxes (horizontal coordinates and vertical elevation). 4. Identify and record location of spare conduits including beginning, ending, and routing through pull boxes, and manholes. Record spare conductors, including number and size, within spare conduits, and filled conduits. 5. Record actual schedules, lists, layout drawings, and wiring diagrams. 6. Record field changes of dimension and detail. 7. Record changes made by instruction from Engineer or by Change Order. 8. Record details not on original Contract Drawings. D. Specifications and Addenda shall be legibly marked to record: 1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and supplier for each product and item of equipment installed. 2. Changes made by instruction from Engineer or by Change Order. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 78 39 - 3 E. Record potholing data and installation of marker balls. F. All surveying for record documents shall be performed by a licensed surveyor. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. At Contract closeout, deliver complete record documents to Engineer as required in Section 01 77 00 - Project Closeout. Final payment will not be acted upon until the record drawings have been prepared and delivered to Engineer. B. The information submitted will be incorporated by Engineer into final drawings to be provided to Owner. Be responsible for the accuracy of submitted construction information. Engineer will assume that the information provided by Contractor is correct and faithfully represents actual construction. C. This submittal shall include the record paper set along with 2 CDs. Each CD shall contain .pdf files and .dwg files of each drawing. D. Prepare submittal with transmittal letter containing: 1. Date. 2. Project title and number. 3. Contractor's name and address. 4. Title and number of each record as-built document. 5. Signature of Contractor's authorized representative and a statement that certifies that the record documents are accurate and reflect what was installed during construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 78 39 - 4 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SEISMIC DESIGN CRITERIA WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 81 10 - 1 SECTION 01 81 10 SEISMIC DESIGN CRITERIA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section Includes seismic design criteria for the following: 1. Anchorage of mechanical and electrical equipment and piping. 2. Seismic design of tanks and anchorage of tanks. 3. Other structures or items as specified or indicated on the Drawings. 1.2 REFERENCES A. International Code Council (ICC) documents as follows: IBC International Building Code, 2018 Edition with Utah state amendments B. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) documents as follows: ASCE 7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, 2016 Edition 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Calculations: Submit shop drawings and structural calculations in accordance with Section 01 33 20 - Submittal Procedures. All drawings and calculations shall be signed and sealed by a licensed Civil or Structural engineer as required below under “Qualifications”. B. ICC-ES reports for concrete anchors. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Licensed Professionals: Design of items required by this Section and other items not specifically shown in the Contract Documents shall be performed by a Civil or Structural Engineer licensed to practice in the state of Utah. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Criteria: Design in accordance with the requirements of the International Building Code and ASCE 7. 1. Seismic acceleration variables to be used in design are as follows: a. The design 5 percent damped spectral response acceleration at short periods, SDS = 0.463g. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SEISMIC DESIGN CRITERIA WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 81 10 - 2 b. The design 5 percent damped spectral response acceleration at a period of 1 second, SD1 = 0.259g. c. The mapped maximum considered earthquake, 5 percent damped, spectral response acceleration at short periods, SS = 0.494g. d. The mapped maximum considered earthquake, 5 percent damped, spectral response acceleration at a period of 1 second, S1 = 0.172g. e. Site coefficients: 1) Fa = 1.405 2) Fv = 2.256 f. Soil Site Class = D. g. Seismic Design Category = D. 2. Seismic Importance Factor for Anchorage of Mechanical and Electrical Equipment: 1.50. 3. Seismic Importance Factor for the Design of Tanks and the Anchorage of Tanks: 1.50. 4. Do not use friction to resist sliding due to seismic forces. 5. Use only headed anchor bolts, adhesive anchors, or welded studs for anchors resisting seismic forces. Embedded anchor bolts used to resist seismic forces shall have a standard hex bolt head. a. Adhesive anchors must have current ICC-ES reports showing that the anchors meet IBC requirements when installed in cracked substrates. b. Do not use other types of anchors unless indicated on the Drawings or approved in writing by Engineer. c. Seismic forces must be resisted by direct bearing on the fasteners used to resist seismic forces. Do not use connections which use friction to resist seismic forces. PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT WIND DESIGN CRITERIA WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 82 11 - 1 SECTION 01 82 11 WIND DESIGN CRITERIA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section Includes design criteria for the following when exposed to wind forces: 1. Anchorage of mechanical and electrical equipment and piping. 2. Design of tanks and anchorage of tanks. 3. Other structures or items as specified or indicated on the Drawings. 1.2 REFERENCES A. International Code Council (ICC) documents as follows: IBC International Building Code, 2018 Edition with Utah state amendments B. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) documents as follows: ASCE 7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, 2016 Edition 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Calculations: Submit shop drawings and structural calculations in accordance with Section 01 33 20 - Submittal Procedures. All drawings and calculations shall be signed and sealed by a licensed Civil or Structural engineer as required below under “Qualifications”. B. ICC-ES reports for concrete anchors. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Licensed Professionals: Design of items not specifically shown in the Contract Documents shall be performed by a professional Civil or Structural Engineer licensed to practice in the state of Utah. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Criteria: Design in accordance with the requirements of the International Building Code and ASCE 7. 1. Basic Wind Speed: 115 miles per hour 2. Risk Category: IV 3. Exposure: C BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT WIND DESIGN CRITERIA WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 82 11 - 2 4. Topographic Factor: 1.0 5. Use only headed anchor bolts, adhesive anchors, or welded studs for anchors resisting wind forces. Embedded anchor bolts used to resist seismic forces shall have a standard hex bolt head. a. Adhesive anchors must have current ICC-ES reports showing that the anchors meet IBC requirements. b. Do not use other types of anchors unless indicated on the Drawings or approved in writing by the Engineer. c. Wind forces must be resisted by direct bearing on the fasteners used to resist wind forces. PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EQUIPMENT TESTING AND STARTUP WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 91 14 - 1 SECTION 01 91 14 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND STARTUP PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Equipment testing and startup are required for satisfactory completion of the Contract and, therefore, shall be completed within the Contract Time. B. Section Includes: 1. Startup Plan 2. Certificates of Installation and Startup Services 3. Record Keeping 4. Factory Performance Testing 5. Field Performance Testing 6. Special Tools and Lubricating Equipment 7. Startup 8. Lubrication 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Component Test and Check Out is the verification that each component of the Work complies with the Contract Documents and is ready to perform its intended function. B. Subsystem Test and Startup is the verification that a discrete group of related components is functioning as intended within itself and is ready to perform its intended function in the overall system. C. System End-To-End Test and Startup is the operation and verification that all related components and subsystems are functioning as intended and are ready for final commissioning and operation. D. Commissioning is placing a complete system or project into service. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit startup plan a minimum of 90 days prior to beginning startup procedures. 1. Submit and have an approved detailed and coordinated startup plan for each piece of equipment, subsystem, and the entire system. 2. The Plan and Progress Schedule shall include the following activities: a. Manufacturer's services and startup dates. b. Submittal dates for certificates of installation and startup services. c. Operator training dates for each phase. d. Submittal of operation and Maintenance manuals. e. Functional test dates. f. Operational performance test dates. g. Post operational performance test dates. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EQUIPMENT TESTING AND STARTUP WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 91 14 - 2 3. The plan shall include test logs for each item of equipment and each system. Include testing of alarms, control circuits, capacities, speeds, flows, pressures, vibrations, sound levels, and other parameters. 4. Provide summary of shutdown requirements for existing systems which are necessary to complete startup of new equipment and systems. 5. Revise and update startup plan based upon review comments, actual progress, and to accommodate changes in the sequence of activities. 6. System startup plan shall be coordinated with Owner’s operations staff and Engineer to ensure operational intent is achieved. B. Submit certified copies of factory test reports. C. Startup Records: 1. Maintain and submit the following records generated during each phase of startup defined above in article titled Definitions: a. Daily logs of equipment testing identifying all tests conducted and outcome. b. Logs of time spent by manufacturer's representatives performing services on the Site. c. Equipment lubrication records. d. Electrical phase, voltage, and amperage measurements. e. Insulation resistance measurements. f. Data sheets of control loop testing, including testing and calibration of instrumentation devices and setpoints. g. Detailed, point-by-point, sensor/controlled device/field device to PLC to HMI screen witnessed validation checklist for all telemetry and SCADA tags utilizing a fully functional network or other telemetry system available at the Owner’s plant or other Owner-designated facility. D. Certificates of Installation and Startup Services 1. At completion of installation and functional testing, furnish Certificate of Installation and Startup Services, signed by manufacturer, Contractor, and Owner’s authorized representatives. Each form shall be completed for individual pieces of equipment in a timely manner as construction proceeds. 2. Submit 3 original copies of each completed form to Engineer. 3. Certify that: a. Equipment has been properly installed, adjusted, aligned, and lubricated. b. Equipment is free of any stresses imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts. c. Equipment is suitable for satisfactory full-time operation under full load conditions. d. Equipment operates within the allowable limits for vibration. e. Controls, protective devices, instrumentation, and control panels furnished as part of the equipment package are properly installed, calibrated, and functioning. f. Control logic for startup, shutdown, sequencing, interlocks, and emergency shutdown has been tested and is properly functioning. g. For remotely monitored and controlled devices, functionality shall not be certified until indication and controls are tested using local and remote SCADA based indications. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EQUIPMENT TESTING AND STARTUP WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 91 14 - 3 4. Sign and submit for acceptance the forms and field manufacturer reports along with the manufacturer's representative prior to proceeding with System End-To-End Test and Startup. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FACTORY PERFORMANCE TESTING A. Test equipment for proper performance at the point of manufacture or assembly. B. Demonstrate equipment meets specified performance requirements. C. Submit certified copies of factory test results to Engineer for review and approval. D. Do not ship equipment until certified copies of factory test reports have been approved by Engineer. Written acceptance of factory test results does not constitute final acceptance. 2.2 FIELD PERFORMANCE TESTING A. Furnish the services of an experienced and authorized representative of the manufacturer of each item of equipment indicated in the equipment schedules (excluding manually-operated valves smaller than 24 inches in size, injectors, tanks, batch-type disc meters, and rotameters, and any other minor items of equipment specifically exempted by Engineer in writing), who shall visit the site of the Work and inspect, check, adjust if necessary, and approve the equipment installation. In each case, arrange to have the manufacturer's representative revisit the job site as often as necessary until all trouble is corrected, and the equipment installation and operation are satisfactory to Engineer. B. Require that each manufacturer's representative furnish to Engineer a written report addressed to Owner certifying that the equipment has been properly installed and lubricated, is in accurate alignment, is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts and has been operated satisfactorily under full-load conditions. C. Be responsible for scheduling all operations testing, including the End-To-End Testing performed with other contractors associated with the RTU controls and communications. Be advised that Engineer and Owner's operating personnel will witness operations testing and that the manufacturer's representative shall be required to instruct Owner's operating personnel in correct operation and maintenance procedures. Such instruction shall be scheduled at a time arranged with Owner at least two weeks in advance and shall be performed while the respective manufacturer's equipment is fully operational. On-site instruction shall be given by qualified persons who have been made familiar in advance with the equipment and systems. Prior to scheduling any operations test ing, furnish Operations and Maintenance Manuals required by the Contract Documents. D. Notify the Engineer at least three Workdays in advance of each equipment test. E. Furnish all personnel, power, water, chemicals, fuel, oil, grease, and all other necessary equipment, facilities, and services required for conducting the tests. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EQUIPMENT TESTING AND STARTUP WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 91 14 - 4 2.3 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICATING EQUIPMENT A. Furnish, according to manufacturer's recommendations, special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance. Special tools are those which have been specially designed or adapted for use on parts of the equipment, and which are not customarily and routinely carried by maintenance mechanics, including valve keys and stems. B. Time of Delivery: Submit special tools and lubricating equipment to Engineer when unit is placed into operation and after operating personnel have been properly instructed in operation, repair, and maintenance of equipment. C. Quality: Provide tools and lubricating equipment of a quality comparable to what the equipment manufacturer uses. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 STARTUP A. Startup is a highly complex operation requiring the combined technical expertise of Contractor, manufacturers, subcontractors, Engineer, and Owner. Coordinate all parties necessary for the successful plant startup. B. Be responsible for the complete test, check out, startup, and commissioning of all elements of the Project. Verify these activities through daily inspection reports, test records, on-site vendor certifications, and by other appropriate means. The test and startup requirements specified in this Section are complementary to those indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. C. Conduct all test, check out, and startup requirements indicated in the Contract Documents and provide documentation of same to Engineer prior to commissioning. Where vendor on- site inspections are required prior to or during startup, require vendor to provide a written statement that the installation and check out is complete and proper and that the item(s) are ready for startup and/or commissioning. D. It is not the intent of Engineer to instruct Contractor in the startup; however, Engineer will be available prior to and during startup to provide technical support to the Contractor. E. Perform a 7-day functional test of the facility. The intent of the 7-day functional test is to demonstrate that all the components and systems that have been constructed and installed function individually and collectively in accordance with the Contract Documents. The 7-day functional test shall demonstrate the ability of the entire facility to operate continuously f or 7-days without failure. In the event of a failure of any of the facility components, the cause of the failure shall be determined and repaired, and the 7-day functional test shall be restarted from time zero. 1. Prepare a plan that details the procedures of the 7-day functional test. The plan shall indicate start and stop times of each of the pumping units, capacity to be pumped during each period, the number of pumps to be operated during each period, auxiliary systems that will be needed during each period, and starting and stopping sequences BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EQUIPMENT TESTING AND STARTUP WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 91 14 - 5 of each facility subsystem to be operated during each period. Provide adequate detail in the plan to determine personnel needed to operate and monitor all components to be evaluated during each period but the increments of the schedule shall not be greater than 2 hours. In the plan, identify by name all personnel needed to complete the 7-day functional test and identify the shift that each person will work during the test. 2. As part of the plan for the 7-day test, define, subject to Engineer’s approval, what will constitute a failing test. At a minimum, a test shall be considered to have failed if any of the following events occur at any time during the 7-day functional test. a. Failure of a pumping unit or motor. b. Performance of a pumping unit (including pump and motor) outside of its specified acceptable ranges for vibration, noise, temperature, cavitation, efficiency, and capacity. c. A failure of any ancillary component or system that cannot be returned to service within 30 minutes of failure. d. Three failures of an ancillary component or system regardless of the amount of time it takes to return it to service and regardless of whether or not the failures are due to the same cause. e. Three failures of equipment of the same model, regardless of the amount of time it takes to return each to service and regardless of whether or not the failures are due to the same cause. 3. During the performance of the 7-day functional test, it shall not be acceptable to bypass, deactivate, or in any way disable a protective device, alarm, or control to facilitate completion of the test. 4. If variable speed pumps are provided as part of the construction, each pump shall be run under automatic control during the 7-day functional test to verify the ability to operate as required by the Contract Documents provided the communications system is available. If the communication is not available, Engineer will prescribe the method and flow rates at which the 7-day functional test will be performed. 5. Provide adequate staff on Site to operate the facility and make factory personnel available to assist in resolving problems as needed at no additional cost to Owner. 6. Take readings every hour of the 7-day functional test to record equipment operation, operating speeds, flow rates, temperature of equipment components, system pressures, operating voltage, current, power draw of each operating unit, and any problems encountered during the previous hour. Provide readings to Engineer each morning for the previous day’s run for evaluation and acceptance of the preceding day as being satisfactorily completed for the 7-day functional test. F. Furnish operating personnel for the duration of the startup. Additionally, furnish all water, power, chemicals, and other consumables required for the test. G. Facility startup shall not be commenced until Component Test and Check Out, Subsystem Tests, and System End-To-End Tests, with associated control systems in place and functioning, all have been completed to the satisfaction of Engineer. H. All defects in materials or workmanship, which appear during this test period, shall be immediately corrected. Time lost for equipment repairs, wiring corrections, control point settings, or other reasons, which interrupt the startup may, at the discretion of Engineer, be justifiable cause for extending startup test duration. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EQUIPMENT TESTING AND STARTUP WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 01 91 14 - 6 I. During startup, furnish the services of authorized representatives of the manufacturers, in addition to those services required under operations testing, as necessary, to correct faulty equipment operation. J. During startup, keep records of the operations in accordance with the instructions of Engineer. 3.2 LUBRICATION A. Where lubrication is required for proper operation of equipment, incorporate the necessary provisions in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. Where possible, make lubrication automated and positive. B. Upon completion System End-To-End Tests and Startup, a qualified manufacturer's representative shall perform preventive maintenance, such as change break-in lubrication, complying with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Oil Reservoirs: Where oil is used, provide a reservoir of sufficient capacity to lubricate the unit for a 7-day period. END OF SECTION DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DEMOLITION, SALVAGE, AND RECONSTRUCTION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 02 41 00 - 1 SECTION 02 41 00 DEMOLITION, SALVAGE, AND RECONSTRUCTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall demolish, salvage and reconstruct existing civil, landscaping, structural, architectural, mechanical, HVAC, electrical, and instrumentation facilities as indicated, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 COORDINATION A. The Contractor shall carefully coordinate the Work in areas where existing facilities are interconnected with new facilities and where existing facilities remain operational. The Work as indicated is not all inclusive, and the Contractor shall be responsi ble to perform the reconstruction indicated plus that which can be reasonably inferred from the Contract Documents as necessary to complete the Project. The Specifications and Drawings identify the major facilities that shall be demolished and reconstructed, but auxiliary utilities such as water, air, chemicals, drainage, lubrication, fluid power, electrical wiring, controls, and instrumentation are not necessarily shown. The Contractor shall comply with sequencing requirements in Section 01 14 40 - Construction and Schedule Constraints. B. The Contractor shall note that the Drawings used to indicate demolition and reconstruction are based on record drawings of the existing facilities. These record drawings have been reproduced to show existing conditions and to clarify the scope of Work as much as possible. Prior to bidding, the Contractor shall conduct a comprehensive survey at the Site to verify the correctness and exactness of the Drawings, the scope of Work, and the extent of auxiliary utilities. A complete set of record drawings is available for review at the Project site. C. While demolition and reconstruction are being performed, the Contractor shall provide adequate access for the continued operation and maintenance of equipment and treatment processes. The Contractor shall erect and maintain fences, warning signs, barricad es, and other devices around the reconstruction as required for the protection of the Contractor's employees and the Owner's personnel at the plant. The Contractor shall remove such protection when reconstruction activities are complete, or as work progresses, or when directed by the Engineer. 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Demolition and reconstruction activities and procedures, including operational sequence, shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. The procedures shall provide for safe conduct of the Work, careful removal and disposition of materials and equipment, protection of existing facilities which are to remain undisturbed, coordination with existing facilities to remain in service, and timely disconnection and reconnection of utility services. The procedures shall include a detailed description and time schedule of the methods and equipment to be used for each operation and the sequence of operation. A storage plan for salvaged items shall be included. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DEMOLITION, SALVAGE, AND RECONSTRUCTION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 02 41 00 - 2 1.4 DEMOLITION AND ABANDONMENT A. Existing pavement, concrete, retaining walls, curb and gutter, sidewalks, buildings, yard structures, equipment, piping, valves, ductwork, duct banks, electrical gear, instrumentation, utilities, and related appurtenances such as anchors, supports, and hardware indicated or required to be demolished as part of the Work shall be removed and disposed of unless otherwise indicated. Removal of buried structures, utilities, and appurtenances includes the related excavation and backfill as required. Removed items shall be disposed of offsite by the Contractor. 1.5 SALVAGE A. Items of existing equipment, piping, valves, electrical gear, instrumentation, utilities, and appurtenances indicated to be salvaged shall be removed without any degradation in condition from that prior to removal. Salvaged items shall be stockpiled and protected on the Site at a location directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible to properly safeguard the salvaged items against damage and loss during removal and handling. B. Items to be salvaged include: Item Description Flow Meters Existing flow meters in vaults Valves Existing valves in vaults All electrical equipment (MCCs, variable frequency drive, panels, switch gears, conductors, PLCs, hardware, and HMI panels) Site Wide 1.6 RELOCATION A. Items of existing equipment, piping, valves, electrical gear, instrumentation, utilities, and appurtenances required to be relocated shall be removed without any degradation in condition from that prior to removal. The Contractor shall be responsible to properly safeguard the relocated items against damage and loss during removal, handling, storage, and installation in the new location. B. Items to be relocated include: Item Description N/A 1.7 REHABILITATION A. Existing civil, landscaping, structural, architectural, mechanical, HVAC, electrical, and instrumentation Work disturbed or damaged by reconstruction activities shall be repaired and rehabilitated as indicated. B. Damaged items shall be repaired or replaced with new items to restore items or surfaces to a condition equal to and matching that existing prior to damage. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DEMOLITION, SALVAGE, AND RECONSTRUCTION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 02 41 00 - 3 C. In buildings with reconstruction work, the Contractor shall not use any Owner equipment (e.g., bridge cranes and monorails) unless authorized in advance in writing by the Engineer. Such authorization shall be subject to documentation by the Contractor of the load proposed to place on the equipment and be subject to Owner requirements for crane use for operating and maintenance needs. Any damage to a crane shall be repaired or replaced to the Engineer's satisfaction. 1.8 DISPOSAL A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the offsite disposal of debris resulting from reconstruction in compliance with local, state, and federal codes and requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION A. GENERAL B. The Contractor shall coordinate demolition and reconstruction Work with the Owner and Engineer. Unless otherwise indicated, the Contractor shall be responsible for the sequence of activities. Work shall be performed in accordance with applicable safety rules and regulations. C. The Contractor shall verify that any utilities connected to structures, equipment, and facilities to be removed, relocated, salvaged, replaced, or abandoned are rendered inoperable, replaced with new utilities, or adequately bypassed with temporary utilities before proceeding with demolition and reconstruction. D. The Contractor shall take precautions to avoid damage to adjacent facilities and to limit the Work activities to the extent indicated. If reconstruction beyond the scope indicated is required, the Contractor shall obtain approval from the Engineer prior to commencing. 3.2 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES A. Before beginning any reconstruction, the Contractor shall carefully survey the existing facilities and examine the Specifications and Drawings to determine the extent of reconstruction and coordination with the Work. Existing facilities not subject to reconstruction shall be protected and maintained in accordance with Section 01 71 50 – Protection and Restoration of Existing Facilities. Damaged existing facilities shall be repaired to the previous condition or replaced. B. Persons shall be afforded safe passages around areas of demolition. C. Structural elements shall not be overloaded. The Contractor shall be responsible for shoring, bracing, or adding new supports as may be required for adequate structural support as a result of Work performed under this Section. The Contractor shall remove temporary protection when the Work is complete or when so authorized by the Engineer. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DEMOLITION, SALVAGE, AND RECONSTRUCTION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 02 41 00 - 4 D. The Contractor shall carefully consider bearing loads and capacities before placement of equipment and material on Site. In the event of any questions as to whether an area to be loaded has adequate bearing capacity, the Contractor shall consult with the Engineer prior to the placement of such equipment or material. 3.3 DEMOLITION, SALVAGE, AND RELOCATION A. The Contract Documents indicate existing facilities to be demolished, salvaged, and/or relocated. Auxiliary utilities including such services as water, air, chemicals, drainage, lubrication, fluid power, electrical wiring, controls, and instrumentation are not necessarily indicated. The Contractor shall verify the scope of the Work to remove the equipment indicated; coordinate its shutdown, removal, replacement, or relocation; and submit an outage plan in accordance with Section 01 14 40 - Construction and Schedule Constraints. The removal of existing facilities for demolition, salvage, and relocation shall include the following requirements: 1. Equipment supports, including concrete pads, baseplates, mounting bolts, and support hangers, shall be removed. Damage to the existing structure shall be repaired as indicated. 2. Exposed piping including vents, drains, and valves shall be removed. Where exposed piping penetrates existing floors and walls, the piping, including wall thimbles, shall be removed to a minimum depth of 2-inches. Resultant openings in the structure shall be repaired as indicated. 3. Electrical control panels, junction boxes, motor control centers, and local switches and pushbuttons shall be removed. 4. Exposed electrical conduits and associated wiring shall be removed. Resultant openings in structures shall be repaired as indicated. 5. Connections to embedded electrical conduits shall be removed a minimum of 2-inches inside the finished surface of the existing structure. Wiring shall be removed and the resulting openings shall be repaired as indicated. 6. Associated instrumentation devices shall be removed. 7. Auxiliary utility support systems shall be removed. 8. The area shall be thoroughly cleaned such that little or no evidence of the previous equipment installation will remain. 9. Asphalt and concrete pavement, curbs, and gutters shall be removed as necessary to perform reconstruction. The limits of removal shall be sawcut. When the required improvements have been constructed, new asphalt and concrete pavement, curbs, and gutters shall be placed to match the original unless otherwise indicated. 10. Footings, foundation walls, below-grade construction and concrete slabs on grade shall be demolished and removed to a depth, which will not interfere with new construction, but not less than 36-inches below existing ground surface or future ground surface, whichever is lower. 11. Below-grade areas and voids resulting from demolition of structures shall be completely filled. Fill and compaction shall be in accordance with Section 31 23 00 - Earthwork. After fill and compaction, surfaces shall be graded to meet adjacent contours and to provide flow to surface drainage structures, or as indicated. 12. When existing pipe is removed, the Contractor shall plug the resulting open ends whether or not so indicated. Where removed piping is exposed, the remaining piping shall be blind-flanged or fitted with a removable cap or plug. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DEMOLITION, SALVAGE, AND RECONSTRUCTION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 02 41 00 - 5 13. When existing piping is removed from existing structures, the Contractor shall fill resulting openings in the structures and repair any damage such that the finished rehabilitated structure shall appear as a new homogeneous unit with little or no indication of where the new and old materials join. The openings in water-bearing structures shall be filled with non-shrink grout to be watertight and reinforced as required or indicated. In locations where the surface of the grout will be exposed to view, the grout shall be recessed approximately 1/2-inch and the recessed area filled with cement mortar grout. 14. Electrical reconstruction shall be conducted by the Contractor in a safe and proper manner to avoid injury from electrical shock to the Owner's and Contractor's personnel. Electrical equipment to be shut off for a period of time shall be tagged, locked out, and sealed with a crimped wire and lead seal and made inoperable. At no time shall electrical wiring or connections, which are energized or could become energized be accessible to Contractor, Owner, or other personnel without suitable protection or warning signs. B. The Contractor shall perform a functional test of existing equipment that is relocated and reinstalled to ensure the equipment functions in the manner documented during the initial inspection. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer in writing a minimum of 5 Days prior to the functional testing in order for the Owner and Engineer to witness the test. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the relocated equipment does not function in a satisfactory manner, the Contractor shall make repairs and modifications necessary to restore the equipment to its original operating condition at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.4 ABANDONMENT A. Existing facilities to be abandoned shall be prepared as indicated. Where existing buried piping is to be abandoned, the Contractor shall remove the abandoned pipe for a distance of 5-feet from any connecting structures. Openings at the existing structures shall be repaired. The remaining pipe shall be capped at both ends prior to backfill. Buried piping, 12-inches diameter or greater shall be completely sand-filled prior to closure of the piping ends. 3.5 REHABILITATION A. Certain areas of existing structures, piping, conduits, and the like will be affected by Work necessary to complete modifications under this Contract. The Contractor shall be responsible to rehabilitate those areas affected by its construction activities. B. Where new rectangular openings are to be installed in concrete or concrete masonry walls or floors, the Contractor shall score the edges of each opening (both sides of wall or floor slab) by saw-cutting clean straight lines to a minimum depth of 1-inch and then chipping out the concrete. Alternately, the sides of the opening (not the corners) may be formed by saw cutting completely through the slab or wall. Saw cuts deeper than 1-inch (or the depth of cover over existing reinforcing steel, whichever is less) shall not be allowed to extend beyond the limits of the opening. Corners shall be made square and true by a combination of core drilling and chipping or grinding. Necessary precautions shall be taken during removal of concrete to prevent debris from falling into or entering adjacent tanks in service or from damaging adjacent equipment or piping. Saw cuts allowed to extend beyond the opening shall be repaired by filling with non-shrink grout. The concrete around any exposed BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DEMOLITION, SALVAGE, AND RECONSTRUCTION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 02 41 00 - 6 reinforcement steel shall be chipped back and exposed reinforcement steel cut a minimum of 2-inches from the finished face of the new opening and be painted with epoxy paint. The inside face of the new opening shall be grouted with an epoxy cement grout t o fill any voids and cover the exposed aggregate and shall be trowel-finished to provide a plumb and square opening. C. Where new piping is installed in existing structures, the Contractor shall accurately position core-drilled openings in the concrete as indicated or otherwise required. Openings shall be of sufficient size to permit a final alignment of pipelines and fittings without deflection of any part and to allow adequate space for satisfactory packing where pipe passes through the wall to provide watertightness around openings so formed. The boxes or cores shall be provided with continuous keyways to hold the filling material in place, and they shall have a slight flare to facilitate grouting and the escape of entrained air during grouting. Before placing the non- shrink grout, concrete surfaces shall be sandblasted, thoroughly cleaned of sand and any other foreign matter, and coated with epoxy bonding compound. D. Pipes, castings, or conduits shall be grouted in place by pouring in grout under a head of at least 4-inches. The grout shall be poured or rammed or vibrated into place to fill completely the space between the pipes, castings, or conduits, and the sides of the openings so as to obtain the same watertightness as through the wall itself. The grouted casings shall then be water cured. E. In locations where the surface of the grout will be exposed to view, the non-shrink grout shall be recessed approximately 1/2-inch and the recessed area filled with cement mortar grout. F. When new piping is to be connected to existing piping, the existing piping shall be cut square and ends properly prepared for the connection. Any damage to the lining and coating of the existing piping shall be repaired. Dielectric insulating joints shall be installed at interconnections between new and existing piping. G. Where existing equipment, piping, and supports, electrical panels and devices, conduits, and associated appurtenances are removed, the Contractor shall rehabilitate the affected area such that little or no evidence of the previous installation remains. Openings in concrete floors, walls, and ceilings from piping, conduit, and fastener penetrations shall be filled with non-shrink grout and finished to match the adjacent area. Concrete pads, bases associated with equipment, supports, and appurtenances shall be removed by chipping away concrete and cutting any exposed reinforced steel and anchor bolts a minimum of 2 -inches below finished grade and be painted with epoxy paint. The area of concrete to be rehabilitated shall be scored by saw cutting clean, straight lines to a minimum depth of 1-1/2 inches, and concrete within the scored lines removed to a depth of 1-1/2 inches (or the depth of cover over reinforcing steel, whichever is less). The area within the scored lines shall be patched with non-shrink grout to match the adjacent grade and finish. Abandoned connections to piping and conduits shall be terminated with blind flanges, caps, and plugs suited for the material, type, and service of the pipe or conduit. H. Existing reinforcement to remain in place shall be protected, cleaned, and extended into new concrete. Existing reinforcement not to be retained shall be cut-off as follows: 1. Where new concrete joins existing concrete at the removal line, reinforcement shall be cut-off flush with the concrete surface at the removal line. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DEMOLITION, SALVAGE, AND RECONSTRUCTION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 02 41 00 - 7 2. Where the concrete surface at the removal line is the finished surface, the reinforcement shall be cut back 2-inches below the finished concrete surface, the ends painted with epoxy paint and the remaining holes patched with a cement mortar grout. I. Where existing handrailing is removed, post embedments and anchors shall be removed and post holes shall be filled with non-shrink grout flush to the floor surface. At the point of continuation of existing handrailing, a new post with rail connections matching the existing handrailing system shall be installed. New posts in existing concrete floors shall be installed in core-drilled socket holes and the annular space between the post and hole filled with non- shrink grout. J. Where reconstruction activities damage the painting and coating of adjacent or nearby facilities, the damaged areas shall be surface prepared and coated in accordance with Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating to match the original painting and coating with a compatible system. Surfaces of equipment items that are to be relocated shall be prepared and be coated in accordance with Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating. 3.6 DISPOSAL A. Demolition and removal of debris shall minimize interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities, which shall not be closed or obstructed without permission from the Owner. Alternate routes shall be provided around closed or obstructed traffic ways. B. Site debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from reconstruction operations shall be legally removed and disposed of. Structures and equipment to be demolished shall be cleaned prior to demolition and the wash water properly disposed of. No trace of these structures shall remain prior to placing of backfill in the areas from which structures were removed. C. Refuse, debris, and waste materials resulting from demolition and clearing operations shall not be burned. 3.7 OCCUPANCY AND POLLUTION CONTROL A. Water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, chutes, and other suitable methods shall be used to limit dust and dirt rising and scattering in the area. The Contractor shall comply with government regulations pertaining to environmental protection. B. Water shall not be used if it creates hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice, flooding, or pollution. 3.8 CLEANING A. During and upon completion of Work, the Contractor shall promptly remove tools and equipment, surplus materials, rubbish, debris, and dust and shall leave areas affected by Work in a clean, approved condition. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DEMOLITION, SALVAGE, AND RECONSTRUCTION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 02 41 00 - 8 B. Adjacent structures shall be cleaned of dust, dirt, and debris caused by reconstruction, as directed by the Engineer or governing authorities, and adjacent areas shall be returned to condition existing prior to start of Work. END OF SECTION DIVISION 03 CONCRETE THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CONCRETE FORMING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 11 00 - 1 SECTION 03 11 00 CONCRETE FORMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Furnish, fabricate, and install concrete formwork, bracing, shoring, supports, and falsework in accordance with Contract Documents. B. Work includes installation of form ties, clips, supports and other appurtenances necessary to meet Specifications and produce finished concrete structures. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) standards, most recent editions: ACI 117 Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete ACI 347 Formwork for Concrete B. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF), most recent edition: NSF 61 Drinking Water System Components, Health Effects C. U.S. Department of Commerce, National Institute of Standards and Technology, (NIST) standards, latest editions: PS 1 Structural Plywood PS 20 American Softwood Lumber Standard (ASLS) 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Be responsible for the design, engineering, construction, maintenance, and safety of all falsework, including staging, walkways, forms, ladders, and similar appurtenances, which shall equal or exceed the applicable requirements of the provisions of the OSHA Safety and Health Standards for Construction, and the requirements specified herein. B. Design and construct falsework to provide the necessary rigidity and to support the loads imposed. Design falsework for the support of a superstructure to support the loads that would be imposed if the entire superstructure were placed at one time. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CONCRETE FORMING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 11 00 - 2 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings of the falsework proposed to be used. Include drawings with sufficient detail to indicate the general layout, sizes of members, anticipated stresses, grade of materials to be used in the falsework, means of protecting existing construction which supports falsework, and typical soil conditions. Submittals shall include the following: 1. Form ties and all related accessories, including taper tie plugs, if taper ties are used. 2. Form gaskets. 3. Form releasing agent, including NSF certification when applicable. 4. List of form materials and locations for use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Except as otherwise expressly accepted by Engineer, utilize new material for all lumber brought on the job site for use as forms, shoring, or bracing. Unless otherwise indicated, form surfaces are to be smooth and fabricated from the following materials: 1. Walls: Steel or plywood panel. 2. All Other Work: Steel panels, plywood or tongue and groove lumber B. Form materials which may remain or leave residues on or in the concrete that is in contact with potable water must be classified as acceptable for potable water under NSF 61 within 30 days of application or use. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Form ties (general): a. Burke Penta-Tie, Burke Company. b. Richmond Snap-Tys, Richmond Screw Anchor Company. c. Gates Ties, Gates and Sons, Inc. d. Engineer approved equal. 2.3 FORM AND FALSEWORK MATERIALS A. Provide materials for concrete forms, formwork, and falsework that conform to the following requirements: 1. Lumber: Douglas Fir or Southern Yellow Pine, construction grade or better, in conformance with U.S. Product Standard PS 20. 2. Plywood: New, waterproof, synthetic resin-bonded, exterior type Douglas Fir or Southern Yellow Pine plywood manufactured especially for concrete formwork, conforming to the requirements of PS 1 for Concrete Forms, Class I, edge sealed. 3. Form materials: Metal, wood, plywood, or other approved material that will not adversely affect the concrete and will facilitate placement of concrete to the shape, BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CONCRETE FORMING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 11 00 - 3 form, line, and grade shown. Metal forms shall be an approved type that will accomplish such results. Wood forms for surfaces to be painted shall be Medium Density Overlaid plywood, MDO Ext. Grade. B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide exterior corners in concrete members with 3/4-inch chamfers. Re-entrant corners in concrete members do not require fillets unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 FORM TIES A. Provide form ties with integral waterstops with a plastic cone on both sides of walls, or other suitable means for forming a conical hole to ensure that the form tie may be broken off back of the face of the concrete. The maximum diameter of removable cones for rod ties, or of other removable form-tie fasteners having a circular cross-section, may not exceed 1- 1/2 inches; and all such fasteners must leave holes of regular shape for reaming. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Form tolerances: Provide forms in accordance with ACI 347, ACI 318, or 350 and the following tolerances. 1. Wall tolerances: a. Straight wall surface: 1) Exposed wall surface: Flat planes within tolerance specified. 2) Plumb within 1/4 inch in 10 feet or within 1 inch from top to bottom for walls over 40 feet tall. 3) Plumb within 1/8 inch in 10 feet or within 1/2 inch from top to bottom for walls over 40 feet high. 4) Depressions in wall surface: Maximum 5/16 inch when 10-foot straightedge is placed on high points in all directions. 5) Thickness: Maximum +1/4 inch or -1/2 inch from dimensions shown. 2. Slab tolerances: a. Exposed slab surfaces: Comprise of flat planes as required within tolerances specified. b. Slab finish tolerances and slope tolerances: Crowns on floor surface not too high as to prevent 10-foot straightedge from resting on end blocks, no low spots that allow a block of twice the tolerance in thickness to pass under the supported 10-ft straightedge: 1) Steel gage block: 5/16 inch thick. c. Finish slab elevation: Slope slabs to floor sumps, drains, and gutter, to drain regardless of tolerances. d. Thickness: -1/4 inch or +1/2 inch from thickness shown, except when thickness tolerance will affect slope, drainage, or slab elevation. 3. For all other tolerances, refer to ACI 117. 4. Make transitions from plus to minus tolerances gradual, even, and smooth. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CONCRETE FORMING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 11 00 - 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Use forms to confine the concrete and shape it to the required lines wherever necessary. Assume full responsibility for the adequate design of all forms . Promptly remove any forms which are unsafe or inadequate in any respect from the Work and replaced at no increased cost to Owner. Provide worker protection from protruding reinforcement bars in accordance with applicable safety codes. Provide a sufficient number of forms of each kind to permit the required rate of progress to be maintained. The design and inspection of concrete forms, falsework, and shoring shall comply with applicable local, state, and federal regulations. B. Install plumb and string lines before concrete placement and maintain during placement. These lines will be used by both Contractor and Engineer for control and verification of the form lines. Provide sufficient number, properly installed for that purpose. During concrete placement, continually monitor plumb and string line form positions and immediately correct deficiencies. C. Conform to the shape, lines, and dimensions of members as called for on the Drawings, substantial and free from surface defects, and sufficiently tight to prevent leakage. Brace forms or tie them together to maintain their position and shape under a load of freshly placed concrete. If adequate foundation for shores cannot be secured, provide trussed supports. 3.2 FORM CONSTRUCTION A. Construct forms in conformance with ACI 347. B. Set forms true to the required shape and size and conform to the established alignment and grade. Provide sufficient strength and rigidity to maintain form position and shape under the loads and operations incident to placing and vibrating the concrete. Provide suitable and effective means on all forms for holding adjacent edges and ends of panels and sections tightly together and in accurate alignment to prevent the formation of ridges, fins, offsets, or similar surface defects in the finished concrete. Plywood, 5/8-inch and greater in thickness, may be fastened directly to studding if the studs are spaced close enough to prevent visible deflection marks in the concrete. Assemble the forms tight to prevent the loss of water, cement, and fines during placing and vibrating of the concrete. Specifically, provide the bottom of wall forms that rest on concrete footings or slabs with a gasket to prevent loss of fines and paste during placement and vibration of concrete. Such gasket may be a 1 to 1-1/2-inch diameter polyethylene rod held in position to the underside of the wall form. Provide adequate clean- out holes at the bottom of each lift of forms. The size, number, and location of such clean-outs must be as acceptable to Engineer. Whenever concrete cannot be placed from the top of a wall form in a manner that meets the requirements of the Contract Documents, provide pour windows of the size and spacing needed to allow placement of concrete to the requirements of Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. Provide size, number, and location of such form windows acceptable to Engineer. C. Vertical surfaces: Form all vertical surfaces of concrete members except where placement of the concrete against the ground is shown. Add no less than 1 inch of concrete to the thickness of the concrete member as shown where concrete is permitted to be placed against trimmed ground in lieu of forms. Such permission will be granted only for members of comparatively BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CONCRETE FORMING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 11 00 - 5 limited height and where the character of the ground is such that it can be trimmed to the required lines and will stand securely without caving or sloughing until the concrete has been placed and has set. D. Construction joints: Concrete construction joints will not be permitted at locations other than those shown or specified, except as may be acceptable to Engineer. When a second lift is placed on hardened concrete, take special precautions to include the number, location, and tightening of ties at the top of the old lift and bottom of the new to prevent any unsatisfactory affect on the concrete. Set pipe stubs and anchor bolts in the forms where required. E. Form ties 1. Embedded Ties: Ream holes left by the removal of form tie cones with suitable toothed reamers to leave the surface of the holes clean and rough before being filled with mortar as specified for finish of concrete surfaces in Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in- Place Concrete. Wire ties for holding forms will not be permitted. Leave no form- tying device or part thereof, other than metal, embedded in the concrete. Do not remove ties in such manner to leave a hole extending through the interior of the concrete members. The use of snap-ties which cause spalling of the concrete upon form stripping or tie removal will not be permitted. If steel panel forms are used, provide rubber grommets where the ties pass through the form in order to prevent loss of cement paste. Where metal rods extending through the concrete are used to support or to strengthen forms, the rods must remain embedded and must terminate not less than 2 inches back from the formed face or faces of the concrete. 2. Removable Ties: Where taper ties are approved for use, place the larger end of the taper tie on the wet side of walls. After the taper tie is removed, thoroughly clean the remaining hole and roughen for bond. Place a precast neoprene or polyurethane tapered plug at the wall centerline. Fill the hole completely with nonshrink grout for water bearing and below-grade walls. For above-grade walls which are dry on both sides, fill the remaining hole with nonshrink or regular cement grout. On exposed faces of walls fill the outer 2 inches of the exposed face a cement grout matching the color and texture of the surrounding wall surface. 3.3 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Employ careful procedures for the removal of forms to avoid injury to the concrete. No heavy loading on green concrete will be permitted. Forms for all vertical walls and columns must remain in place at least 2 days after the concrete has been placed. Forms for all parts of the Work not specifically mentioned herein must remain in place for periods of time as determined by Engineer and ACI 347. 3.4 REUSE OF FORMS A. Forms may be reused only if in good condition and only if acceptable to Engineer. Light sanding between uses will be required wherever necessary to obtain uniform surface texture on all exposed concrete surfaces. Exposed concrete surfaces are defined as surfaces which are permanently exposed to view. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CONCRETE FORMING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 11 00 - 6 3.5 MAINTENANCE OF FORMS A. Maintain forms at all times in good condition, particularly as to size, shape, strength, rigidity, tightness, and smoothness of surface. Forms, when in place, must conform to the established alignment and grades. Before concrete is placed, thoroughly clean the forms to remove dirt and debris. Treat form surfaces with a non-staining mineral oil or other lubricant acceptable to Engineer. Remove excess lubricant before placing the concrete. Where field oiling of forms is required, perform the oiling at least 2 weeks in advance of their use. Take care to keep oil off the surfaces of steel reinforcement and other metal items embedded in concrete. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CONCRETE REINFORCING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 20 00 - 1 SECTION 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Furnish, fabricate and install reinforcing steel as shown on Contract Documents. B. Work includes installation of tie wires, clips, supports, and other appurtenances necessary to meet Specifications and produce finished concrete structures. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) standards, most recent editions: ACI 315 Details of Concrete Reinforcement ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete ACI 350 Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures B. American Welding Society (AWS): D1.4 Structural Welding Code – Reinforcing Steel C. ASTM International (ASTM) standards, most recent editions: ASTM A615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement ASTM A1064 Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete D. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) standards, most recent editions: Placing Reinforcing Bars Manual of Standard Practice 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CONCRETE REINFORCING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 20 00 - 2 B. Submit details of the concrete reinforcement steel and concrete inserts at the earliest possible date after receipt of the Notice to Proceed. C. Include, but not limit to, the following: 1. Complete bar schedule, bar details and erection drawings to conform to ACI 315. 2. Each type of bar marked with identification corresponding to identification tag on bar. 3. Length, type, and location of all splices. 4. Erection drawings shall be clear, easily legible and to a minimum scale of: a. 1/4 inch = 1 foot. b. 1/8 inch = 1 foot if bars in each face are shown in separate views. 5. Size and location of openings. D. Furnish a certified Affidavit of Compliance issued by steel manufacturer that reinforcing steel furnished for project meets requirements of ASTM standards referenced herein, as applicable. E. Do not use Contract Documents as erection drawings. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Welding operators, processes, and procedures to be qualified in accordance with AWS D1.4. 2. Welding operators to have been qualified during the previous 12 months prior to commencement of welding. B. Certifications 1. Submit manufacturer’s certification that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Comply with Section 01 25 10 - Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions. B. Store reinforcing steel on wood supports in a manner that prevents it from coming in contact with the ground. C. Store only bars with same identifying label in same stack. D. Cover epoxy coated reinforcement for protection against both moisture and ultraviolet light and so that condensation does not form on the bars. E. When handling coated bars, use systems with padded contact areas. F. Thoroughly inspect coated steel after delivery to the job site and again after installation to ensure that it is not damaged. 1. Repair damage with patching material meeting manufacturer’s requirements. 2. Promptly patch sheared ends and other cuts or exposed areas before detrimental oxidation occurs. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CONCRETE REINFORCING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 20 00 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Mechanical Couplers: a. Lenton Form Saver by Erico Products. b. Dowel Bar Splicer System by Richmond Screw Anchor Company. c. Engineer-approved equal. 2.2 REINFORCEMENT STEEL A. Materials: 1. Reinforcing bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60. 2. Welded wire fabric: ASTM A1064 and the details indicated; provided, that welded wire fabric with longitudinal wire of W4 size wire and smaller shall be either provided in flat sheets or in rolls with a core diameter of not less than 10 inches; and provided further, that welded wire fabric with longitudinal wires larger than W4 size shall be provided in flat sheets only. B. Fabrication of Bars: 1. Fabricate with cold bends conforming to recommended dimensions shown in ACI 318. 2. Field fabrication will be allowed only if Contractor has equipment to properly fabricate steel to same tolerances as for shop fabrications. 3. Attach identification tags with identifying mark. 4. Contractor may at his option continue steel reinforcement through openings in walls and slabs, then field cut opening. 2.3 BOLSTERS, CHAIRS AND ACCESSORIES A. Conform to ACI 315 and CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. B. Provide spacers, bolsters, chairs, ties and other devices necessary to properly space, place, support, and fasten steel reinforcement in place during concrete placement. C. Metal accessories shall be stainless steel with plastic coated tips where legs will be exposed in finished concrete surfaces. Color of plastic shall be grey to match concrete color. D. Do not use rocks, broken bricks, wood blocks, or concrete fragments for support of steel reinforcement. E. Support between Reinforcing Steel and Formed Exposed Surfaces: Metal bar chairs. 2.4 PRECAST CONCRETE BLOCK BAR SUPPORTS (DOBIES) A. Supports between Reinforcing Steel for Roof Slabs: Concrete block prohibited. B. Minimum Compressive Strength of Blocks: 5,000 psi in seven days. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CONCRETE REINFORCING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 20 00 - 4 C. Minimum Bearing Area: 9 square inches. Place as required to maintain specified clearances. D. Wire ties shall be embedded in concrete block bar supports. 2.5 EPOXY GROUT A. Epoxy for grouting reinforcing bars shall be specifically formulated for such application, for the moisture condition, application temperature, and orientation of the hole to be filled. Epoxy grout shall meet the requirements found in Section 03 6 00 - Grouting. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Tolerances: 1. Sheared lengths: plus or minus 1 inch. 2. Overall dimensions of stirrups, ties, and spirals: plus or minus ½ inch. 3. All other bends: +0 inch, -½ inch. B. Minimum diameter of bends measured on the inside of the rebar to be as indicated in ACI 318. C. Ship all reinforcement to job site with attached plastic or metal tags. 1. Place on each tag the mark number of the reinforcement corresponding to the mark number indicated on the shop drawings. 2. Mark numbers on tags to be so placed that the numbers cannot be removed. 2.7 TESTING A. Perform at mill for each heat. B. If requested by Engineer, furnish samples of each type of welded splice used in the Work in a quantity and of dimensions adequate for testing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Tolerances: 1. Rebar Placement: a. Clear distance to formed surfaces: plus or minus ¼ inch. b. Minimum spacing between bars: ¼ inch. c. Top bars in slabs and beams: 1) Members 8 inches deep or less: plus or minus ¼ inch. 2) Members between 8 inches and 2 feet deep: plus or minus ¼ inch. 3) Members more than 2 feet deep: plus or minus ¾ inch. d. Crosswise of members: Spaced evenly within plus or minus 1 inch. e. Lengthwise of members: plus or minus 2 inches. 2. Minimum clear distance between rebars: a. Beams, walls, and slabs: Distance equal to rebar diameter or 1 inch, whichever is greater. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CONCRETE REINFORCING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 20 00 - 5 B. Minimum concrete protective covering for reinforcement, unless indicated otherwise on Contract Documents: 1. Concrete deposited against earth: 3 inches. 2. Formed surfaces exposed to weather or in contact with earth: a. 2 inches for reinforcing bars #6 or larger. b. 1½ inch for reinforcing bars less than #6. 3. Formed surfaces exposed to any liquid: 2 inches for all rebar sizes. 4. Interior surfaces: a. 1½ inch for beams, girders, and columns. b. ¾ inch for slabs, walls, and joists. C. Splice steel to conform to Chapter 12 of ACI 318 or ACI 350 as applicable. Unless indicated otherwise on Contract Documents, provide splices for reinforcing as follows: 1. Rebar: a. Lapped splices shall be not less than a Class B splice for reinforcement unless otherwise indicated. b. Mechanical splices shall be used whenever shown on the Contract Documents and may be used at other locations at Contractor’s option. Such locations shall be shown specifically on the rebar shop drawings. 2. Welded wire fabric: Splice lap length measured between outermost cross wires of each fabric sheet shall not be less than 1 spacing of cross wires plus 2 inches, or less than 1.5 times the development length, nor less than 6 inches. Development length shall be as required for the basic development length for the specified fabric yield strength in accordance with Section 12 of ACI 318 or ACI 350. 3. Provide splices of reinforcing not specifically indicated or specified subject to approval of Engineer. D. Placing Rebars 1. Assure that reinforcement at time concrete is placed is free of mud, oil, or other materials that may affect or reduce bond. 2. Reinforcement with rust, mill scale, or a combination of both will be accepted as being satisfactory without cleaning or brushing provided dimensions and weights including heights of deformations on a cleaned sample are not less than required by applicable ASTM specifications that govern the rebar supplied. 3. Rebar support: a. Support rebars and fasten together to prevent displacement by construction loads or placing of concrete. b. On ground, provide supporting concrete blocks. c. Over formwork, provide plastic-coated metal chairs, runners, boosters, spacers, hangers, and other rebar support. Only tips in contact with the forms need to be plastic coated. d. Bars additional to those shown on the Contract Documents, which may be found necessary or desirable by Contractor for the purpose of securing reinforcement in position, shall be provided by Contractor at his own expense. e. Tie securely at minimum of 33% of intersections with 16-gage or larger annealed iron wire. f. Accommodate placement of formed openings. g. Where parallel horizontal reinforcement in beams in indicated to be placed in two or more layers, rebars in the upper layers shall be placed directly above rebars in the bottom layer with clear distance between layers to be 1 inch. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CONCRETE REINFORCING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 20 00 - 6 Place spacer rebars at 3 feet maximum centers to maintain the required 1- inch clear distance between layers. h. Extend reinforcement to within 2 inches of concrete perimeter edges. If perimeter edge is earth formed, extend reinforcement to within 3 inches of the edge. i. To insure proper placement, furnish templates for all column vertical bars and dowels. j. Provide splices of reinforcement not specifically indicated or specified subject to Engineer’s approval. k. Do not bend reinforcement after embedding in hardened concrete unless approved by Engineer. Do not bend reinforcing by means of heat. l. Tie wires shall be bent away from form surfaces. m. Do not tack-weld reinforcement. E. Ensure that steel reinforcement and embedments do not exceed 160 Degrees F at time of concrete placement. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Reinforcement Congestion and Interfaces: 1. Notify Engineer whenever the specified clearances between rebars cannot be met. 2. Do not place any concrete until Engineer submits a solution to rebar congestion problem. 3. Rebars may be moved slightly to avoid interference with other reinforcement steel, conduits, or embedded items. 4. If rebars are moved more than 1 bar diameter, or enough to exceed above tolerances, obtain Engineer’s approval of resulting arrangement of rebars. 5. No cutting of rebars shall be done without written approval of Engineer. 3.3 COORDINATION A. Coordination with placement of formwork, formed openings, embedded items, and other Work. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 30 00 - 1 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide cast-in-place concrete work as shown on Contract Drawings and as specified herein. B. Section includes: 1. Concrete Materials. 2. Proportioning and Mixing. 3. Ready Mixed Concrete. 4. Curing Materials. 5. Expansion Joint Filler. 6. Liquid Floor Hardener. 7. Preparing for Concreting. 8. Placing of Concrete. 9. Finishing. 10. Curing. 11. Field Quality Control. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03 11 00 – Concrete Forming. B. Section 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcing. C. Section 03 60 00 – Grouting. D. Section 07 14 00 – Fluid-Applied Waterproofing. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) standards, most recent editions: ACI 117 Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials ACI 211 Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Concrete ACI 212 Chemical Admixtures ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings ACI 305 Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting ACI 306 Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 30 00 - 2 ACI 350 Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures B. ASTM International (ASTM) standards, most recent editions: ASTM C31 Standard Specification Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field ASTM C33 Standard Specifications for Concrete Aggregates ASTM C39 Test for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens ASTM C42 Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete ASTM C94 Standard Specifications for Ready-Mixed Concrete ASTM C138 Standard Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete ASTM C143 Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete ASTM C172 Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete ASTM C260 Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete ASTM C309 Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete ASTM C494 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete ASTM C586 Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Carbonate Rocks as Concrete Aggregates (Rock-Cylinder Method) ASTM C595 Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements ASTM C618 Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete ASTM C1077 Standard Practice for Agencies Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Testing Agency Evaluation ASTM C1260 Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates (Mortar-Bar Method) BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 30 00 - 3 ASTM C1293 Standard Test Method for Determination of Length Change of Concrete Due to Alkali-Silica Reaction ASTM C1567 Standard Test Method for Determining the Potential Alkali- Silica Reactivity of Combinations of Cementitious Materials and Aggregate (Accelerated Mortar-Bar Method) ASTM D1751 Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types) ASTM D1752 Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction ASTM D2419 Standard Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate C. International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI) standards, latest editions: Guideline No 310.1R Guide for Surface Preparation for the Repair of Deteriorated Concrete Resulting from Reinforcing Steel Corrosion Guideline No 320.2R Guide for selecting and specifying Materials for repair of Concrete Surfaces D. NSF International (NSF), most recent edition: NSF 61 Drinking Water System Components, Health Effects E. U. S. Army Corps of Engineers standards, most recent editions: CRD-C 572 PVC Waterstops 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Construction Joints: Fresh concrete placed against a hardened concrete surface; joint between two pours is called a construction joint. Unless otherwise indicated, provide construction joints with a waterstop and sealant groove of the shape indicated. B. Expansion Joints: To allow concrete to expand freely, space provided between two pours, formed as indicated. Space is made by placing filler joint material against the first pour; acts as a form for the second pour. C. Control Joints: Provide weakened plane in concrete, where shrinkage cracks will likely occur. A groove, shape and dimensions indicated in Drawings, formed or saw-cut in concrete. Groove is filled with joint sealant material. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 30 00 - 4 D. Laitance: In placement of concrete, accumulation of small inert particles of cement and aggregate on surface, caused by excess of water that, when it evaporates, leaves a thin layer, causing weakened plane for subsequent pour. E. Alkalis: Term "alkalis" referred to herein is defined as sum of percentage of sodium oxide and 0.658 times percentage of potassium oxide (Na20+0.658K20). These oxides shall be oxide content determined in accordance with ASTM C114. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures. B. Product data: 1. Concrete mix design(s) proposed for use. Proposed concrete mix design submittal to include the following information: a. Sieve analysis and source identification of fine and coarse aggregates. Include sand equivalency. b. Source test results for aggregate organic impurities. c. Source test results for deleterious aggregate per ASTM standards. d. Proportioning of all materials. e. Type of cement with mill certificate for cement. f. Slump. g. Air Content. h. Brand, type, ASTM designation, and quantity of each admixture proposed for use. i. 28-day cylinder compressive test results of trial mixes per ACI 350 and as indicated herein. j. Shrinkage test results. k. Standard deviation value for concrete production facility. 2. Manufacturer and type of joint filler, joint sealant, curing agent, finishing aid, and chemical floor hardener. 3. Manufacturer and type of bonding and patching mortar and bonding adhesive used at construction joints. 4. Pour plan for concrete pour sequence. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preconstruction Testing: Perform all preliminary and trial batch laboratory tests on cement, aggregates, and concrete. B. Testing Agencies: The testing laboratory shall meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM C1077. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Comply with Section 01 25 10 - Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions. B. Mixing, transporting, handling, placing, curing, and testing concrete in accordance with applicable ACI and ASTM specifications and as specified. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 30 00 - 5 C. Storage of material: 1. Cement: a. Protect cement from exposure to moisture until used. b. Do not use if caked or lumpy. c. Store sacked cement to permit access for inspection and sampling. 2. Aggregate: a. Store to prevent segregation and contamination with other sizes or foreign materials. b. Obtain samples for testing from aggregates at point of batching. c. Do not use frozen or partially frozen aggregates. d. Do not use the bottom 6 inches of stockpiles in contact with ground. e. Allow sand to drain until moisture content is uniform prior to use. 3. Admixtures: a. Protect from contamination, evaporation, freezing, or damage. b. Maintain within temperature range recommended by manufacturer. c. Completely mix solutions and suspensions prior to use. D. Delivery: 1. Prepare a delivery ticket for each load of ready-mix concrete delivered to the project. Truck operator shall hand ticket to Engineer at time of delivery, which shows the following information for each load: a. Mix identification mark. b. Quantity delivered (by volume). c. Amount of each material in batch. d. Outdoor temperature in the shade. e. Time at which cement was added. f. Amount of water added at jobsite by Contractor. g. Amount of superplastisizer added where applicable. 1.8 SITE ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. When temperature is below 40F or is likely to fall below 40F during 24-hour period after placing concrete, heat materials, (not in excess of 140F) including both water and aggregates and protect concrete so that temperature of the concrete is between 50F and 90F for 24-hour period after placing concrete. B. During hot weather, shade materials from sun and use cool water so temperature of concrete does not exceed 90F at time of placing concrete. C. Placing of concrete is not permitted where, in opinion of Engineer, wind, rain or inadequate facilities furnished by Contractor prevents proper finishing or curing of concrete. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordination with placement of reinforcing steel, embedded items, and other Work. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 30 00 - 6 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Expansion joint fillers: a. Ceramar, WR Meadows, Inc. b. Rubberite Cypress Sponge Corporation c. Williams Products, Inc. d. Engineer approved equal. 2. Membrane Curing Compound. a. 1100-Clear, WR Meadows, Inc. b. Dry-Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W), Dayton Superior. c. L&M Cure R, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc d. Engineer approved equal. 3. Evaporation Retardant: a. AquaFilm (J74), Dayton Superior. b. Eucobar, Euclid Chemical Company. c. MasterKure ER 50, Master Builders. d. Engineer approved equal. 4. Waterstops, Plastic Adhesive Type: a. Synko-Flex, Henry Company. b. Engineer approved equal. 5. Waterstops, Hydrophilic Type a. Ultraseal, Adeka, Inc. b. Adcor ES, WR Grace, c. Hydro-Flex, Henry Company. d. Hydrotite, Sika, Inc. e. Engineer approved equal. 6. Bonding agent: a. Armatek 110 EpoCem, Sika, Inc. b. Engineer approved equal. 7. Set Controlling Admixtures a. For air temperature at the time of placement over 80F; set-retarding and hydration control: 1) MasterSet Delvo, Master Builders. 2) Recover, GCP Applied Technologies. 3) SikaTard 440, Sika Corporation. 4) Engineer approved equal. b. For air temperature at the time of placement under 40F: Non-corrosive set accelerating: 1) Daraset 400, GCP Applied Technologies. 2) MasterSet FP 20, Master Builders. 3) Plastocrete 161FL by Sika Corporation. 4) Engineer approved equal. 8. Air-entraining Agent: a. Micro-Air, Master Builders. b. Daravair 1000, WR Grace. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 30 00 - 7 c. Sika AEA-15, Sika Corporation. d. Engineer approved equal. 9. Finishing Aids: a. Day1 Finishing Aid, Solomon Colors. b. Slab Assist, TK Products. c. Engineer approved equal. 10. Crystalline Waterproofing Repair Grout: a. Mortar IC, AquaFin, Inc. b. Penecrete Mortar, Penetron International, LTD. c. Concentrate Dry Pac, Xypex Chemical Corporation. d. Engineer approved equal. 11. Pigments for Underground Conduit Banks: a. Arizona Oxides, #1835. b. Bayer, Bayferrox #130. c. Davis, #117. d. As currently approved by Rocky Mountain Power Company. 12. Liquid Chemical Floor Hardener: a. Surfhard, Euclid Chemical Company, Cleveland, Ohio. b. Burke-O-Lith, EDOCO. c. Solidus Hardener, Lambert Corporation. d. Engineer-approved equal. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Blended Hydraulic Cement: Comply with ASTM C595, Type IL (10) (MS), grey color. 1. Cement shall not contain more than 0.60 percent equivalent alkalis. 2. Limestone content is limited to 10 percent. 3. Single brand of cement used throughout Work; brand approved by Engineer. B. Fly Ash: Not Permitted C. Coarse Aggregate: Conforming to ASTM C33 and as noted below. 1. Clean, hard, durable gravel, crushed gravel, crushed rock or combination thereof. 2. Reactivity: Non-reactive or below innocuous behavior level. 3. Prepare and handle coarse aggregates in two or more size groups for combined aggregates with maximum size greater than 3/4 inch. 4. When aggregates are proportioned for each batch of concrete, combine the size groups. 5. Obtain coarse aggregates from sources approved by Engineer. D. Combined Aggregates: Well graded from course to fine sizes; uniformly graded between screen sizes to produce a concrete that has optimum workability and consolidation characteristics. Where a trial batch is required for a mix design, the final combined aggregate gradation will be established during the trial batch process. E. Fine Aggregates: Natural or combination of natural and manufactured sand that is hard and durable. 1. Lightweight Sand for Fine Aggregate: Not permitted. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 30 00 - 8 2. Sand Equivalency: Tested in accordance with ASTM D2419; not less than 80 percent for an average of 3 samples; not less than 80 percent for an individual test. 3. Gradation: In accordance with ASTM C33; 15 to 30 percent passing number 50 screen; 5 to 10 percent passing number 100 screen. 4. Fineness Modulus: Not over 3.00. 5. Reactivity: Non-reactive or below innocuous behavior level. 6. Obtain fine aggregates from sources approved by Engineer. F. Water: Clean and free from objectionable quantities of organic matter, alkali, salts, and other impurities, as determined by Engineer. G. Admixtures: 1. Maximum total water-soluble chloride ion content contributed from all ingredients of concrete including water, aggregates, cementitious materials, and admixtures by weight percent of cement: a. 0.06 For prestressed concrete. b. 0.10 For all other concrete. 2. Do not use calcium chloride. 3. Provide admixtures of same type, manufacturer, and quantity as used in establishing required concrete proportions in the mix design. 4. Air entraining admixtures: ASTM C260. 5. Water reducing admixtures: a. Comply with ASTM C494, Type A. b. Conform to applicable provisions of ACI 212.3R. c. Follow manufacturer’s instructions. d. Use chloride free admixtures only. 6. Set controlling admixtures with or without water-reducing properties. a. ASTM C494, Types B through E. b. Conform to applicable provisions of ACI 212.3R. c. Do not use retarding or accelerating admixtures unless specifically approved in writing by Engineer and at no additional cost to Owner. d. Follow manufacturer’s instructions. e. Use chloride free admixtures only. 7. High Range Water Reducers: a. In accordance with ASTM C494, Type F. b. Conform to applicable provisions of ACI 212.3R. c. Locations for use of high range admixtures shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings. Do not use high range admixtures in other locations unless specifically approved by Engineer and at no additional cost to Owner. d. Add to concrete at the jobsite after all other ingredients have been mixed and initial slump has been verified. e. Added by a technician certified by manufacturer of the product. f. Added at the plant unless written permission is given by Engineer to add the product at the Site. g. Mixing: Minimum 70 revolutions or 5 minutes after addition of high-range water reducer. h. Slump before Addition: Maximum 2 inches. i. Slump after Addition: Minimum of 6 inches and maximum of 10 inches. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 30 00 - 9 8. Pigments for Underground Conduit Banks: Add pigment to concrete encasing electrical duct banks as required by governing agency. H. Curing Materials 1. Polyethylene sheet for use as concrete curing blanket shall be white and shall have a nominal thickness of 6 mils. The loss of moisture when determined in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C156 shall not exceed 0.055 grams per square centimeter of surface. 2. Polyethylene-coated waterproof paper sheeting for use as concrete curing blanket shall consist of white polyethylene sheeting free of visible defects, uniform in appearance, having a nominal thickness of 2 mils and permanently bonded to waterproof paper conforming to the requirements of Federal Specification UU B 790A (1) (2). The loss of moisture, when determined in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C156, shall not exceed 0.055 gram per square centimeter of surface. 3. Polyethylene-coated burlap for use as concrete curing blanket shall be 4 mils thick, white opaque polyethylene film impregnated or extruded into one side of the burlap. Burlap shall weigh not less than 9 ounces per square yard. The loss of moisture, when determined in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C156, shall not exceed 0.055 gram per square centimeter of surface. 4. Membrane Curing Compound (with fugitive dye added): ASTM C309, Type 1-D, Class B. Sodium silicate compounds will not be allowed. I. Expansion Joint Filler 1. Provide expansion joints in concrete construction where shown on Contract Drawings. 2. Expansion Joint Filler: Preformed, non-extruding, resilient type, constructed of cellular sponge rubber, extending full thickness of slab, in accordance with ASTM D1751 or ASTM D1752, Type I. J. Grout: As specified in Section 03 60 00 – Grouting. K. Liquid Chemical Floor Hardener: 1. Colorless, aqueous solution containing magnesium fluosilicate combined with a wetting agent. a. Premeasured, premixed, and packaged at the factory. b. Not less than 2 pounds fluosilicate per gallon. c. Provide material which does not react with, inhibit, or otherwise interfere with adhesives and bonding of future floor finishes. L. Finishing Aids: 1. Topically applied colloidal silica compound. 2. Do not use as a curing compound. 3. Only to be used to assist in finishing by working into the surface immediately after application. M. Waterproofing: Refer to Section 07 14 00 – Fluid-Applied Waterproofing. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 30 00 - 10 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. On-Site Batch Plants: 1. Direct weighing equipment approved by Engineer for measuring cement and aggregate. Scales certified by Bureau of Weights and Measures. Certification current within 6 months. 2. Equip mixer with suitable water meter or another measuring device approved by Engineer. a. Meter capable of measuring water in variable amounts within a tolerance of 1 percent. b. Water feed control mechanism capable of being locked in position to deliver constant supply of specified amount of water to each batch of concrete. c. Meter equipped with setback register with a readily visible vertical face and double hands indicating in cubic feet and decimals. d. Provide positive, quick-acting cut-off valve in the water line to the mixer. Operating mechanism must not leak when valves are closed. 3. Batch mixer of an approved type and size, designed to ensure uniform distribution of all component materials throughout the mass during the mixing operation. Install and use a batch timer and counter, including lock release and audible indicator on each concrete mixer. B. Concrete Pumps: 1. Provide pumping equipment with two cylinders, designed to operate with only one cylinder in case one is not functioning. In lieu of this requirement, provide a standby pump on the site during pumping. a. Minimum Diameter of Hose (conduit): 4 inches. b. Aluminum conduits for conveying the concrete will not be permitted. C. Vibrators: 1. Internally vibrated, high speed power vibrators of an approved immersion type. In sufficient numbers with standby units as required. D. Truck Mixers: 1. At the Contractor's option, ready-mixed concrete may be used meeting the requirements as to materials, batching, mixing, transporting, and placing as specified herein and in accordance with ASTM C94, including the following supplementary requirements. 2. Ready-mixed concrete shall be delivered to the site of the Work, and discharge shall be completed within 90 minutes after the addition of the cement to the aggregates or before the drum has been revolved 250 revolutions, whichever is first. 3. Truck mixers shall be equipped with electrically actuated counters by which the number of revolutions of the drum or blades may be readily verified. The counter shall be of the resettable, recording type, and shall be mounted in the driver's cab. The counters shall be actuated at the time of starting mixers at mixing speeds. 4. Mix each batch of concrete in a truck mixer for not less than 70 revolutions of the drum or blades at the rate of rotation designated by the manufacturer of equipment. Additional mixing, if any, shall be at the speed designated by the manufacturer of the equipment as agitating speed. All materials including mixing water shall be in the BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 30 00 - 11 mixer drum before actuating the revolution counter for determining the number of revolutions of mixing. 5. Truck mixers and their operation shall be such that the concrete throughout the mixed batch as discharged is within acceptable limits of uniformity with respect to consistency, mix, and grading. If slump tests taken at approximately the 1/4 and 3/4 points of the load during discharge give slumps differing by more than one inch when the specified slump is 3 inches or less, or if they differ by more than 2 inches when the specified slump is more than 3 inches, the mixer shall not be used on the Work unless the causing condition is corrected and satisfactory performance is verified by additional slump tests. All mechanical details of the mixer, such as water measuring and discharge apparatus, condition of the blades, speed of rotation, general mechanical condition of the unit, and clearance of the drum, shall be checked before a further attempt to use the unit will be permitted. 6. The use of non-agitating equipment for transporting ready-mixed concrete will not be permitted. Combination truck and trailer equipment for transporting ready-mixed concrete will not be permitted. The quality and quantity of materials used in ready- mixed concrete and in batch aggregates shall be subject to continuous inspection at the batching plant by the Engineer. 2.4 REINFORCEMENT STEEL A. Provide in accordance with Section 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcing. 2.5 CONCRETE MIXES A. General: Concrete shall be composed of cement, admixtures, aggregates, and water. These materials shall be of the qualities specified and in accordance with ACI 301 specifications. The exact proportions in which these materials are to be used for different parts of the Work will be determined during the trial batch. In general, the mix shall be designed to produce a concrete capable of being deposited so as to obtain maximum density and minimum shrinkage and, where deposited in forms, to have good consolidation properties and maximum smoothness of surface. The aggregate gradations shall be formulated to provide fresh concrete that will not promote rock pockets around reinforcing steel or embedded items. The proportions shall be changed whenever necessary or desirable to meet the required results at no additional cost to the Owner. All changes shall be subject to review by the Engineer. B. Fine Aggregate Composition: 1. In mix designs for structural concrete, the percentage of fine aggregate in total aggregate by weight shall be as indicated in the following table: Fineness Modulus Maximum Percent 2.7 or less 41 2.7 to 2.8 42 2.8 to 2.9 43 2.9 to 3.1 44 BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 30 00 - 12 2. In all other concrete, the maximum percentage of fine aggregate of total aggregate, by weight, shall not exceed 50. C. Concrete compressive strength, aggregate size, and slump in accordance with the following: Type of Construction Compressive Strength (psi) Aggregate Gradation (ASTM C33) Slump in Inches (Max.) Max W/C Ratio (by Weight) Structure walls and top slabs. 4,500 #67 (3/4”) 4 0.45 Structure footings; foundations and bottom slabs. 4,500 #467 (1-1/2”) 4 0.45 Reinforced concrete encasements; thrust blocks 4,000 #467 (1-1/2”) 4 0.50 Site Slabs; Curb and gutter 4,000 #67 (3/4”) 4 0.50 Lean Concrete 3,000 #467 (1-1/2”) 5 0.60 Site underground conduit banks: Min. 3 lbs red pigment/sack cement 3,000 #8 (3/8”) 5 0.60 1. Compressive Strength: minimum at 28 days of age. 2. Slump as shown above, plus or minus 1 inch. a. When plasticizing agents are added at the Site, measure slump before addition of any plasticizing agents. b. Measure at point of discharge of the concrete from delivery truck per ASTM C143. c. Concrete of lower than maximum slump may be used provided it can be properly placed and consolidated. 3. Minimum cement content: a. Reinforced Concrete: Six sacks (564 lbs) Portland Cement per cubic yard. b. Unreinforced Concrete: Five sacks (470 lbs) Portland Cement per cubic yard. 4. Air content: Provide air entrainment resulting in a total air content of 4 to 7 percent for all types of construction. a. Air content to be measured in accordance with ASTM C231, ASTM C173, or ASTM C138. b. Air may be omitted from interior slabs to be trowel finished. D. Selection of Proportions: 1. General: Proportion ingredients to produce proper workability, durability, strength, and other required properties. Prevent segregation and collection of excessive free water on the surface. 2. Submit mix design data for approval as required by this specification Section. 3. Proportion mixture to provide desired characteristics using one of the methods described below: a. Method 1 (Trial Mix): Per ACI 350, Chapter 5, except as modified herein. 1) Air content within range specified above. 2) Record and report the temperature of trial mixes. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 30 00 - 13 3) Proportion trial mixes per ACI 211.1. b. Method 2 (Field Experience): Per ACI 350, Chapter 5, except as modified herein. 1) Field test records must be acceptable to Engineer to use this method. 2) Test records shall represent materials, proportions, and conditions similar to those specified herein. c. Required average strength to exceed the specified 28-day compressive strength by the amount determined or calculated in accordance with the requirements of ACI 350, using the standard deviation of the proposed concrete production facility. 4. Shrinkage Limitation a. Shrinkage limitations apply only to structural concrete. b. The maximum concrete shrinkage for specimens cast in the laboratory from the trial batch, as measured at 21-day drying age or at 28-day drying age shall be 0.036 percent or 0.042 percent, respectively per ASTM C157, as modified herein. c. Use a mix design for construction that has first met the trial batch shrinkage requirements. 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Trial Batch: Based on submitted concrete mixes for each class of concrete. B. Aggregates: 1. Fine and coarse aggregates shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C1260 or ASTM C1293 to show compliance with ASTM C33 for alkali-silica reactivity and shall be non- reactive unless employing the following additional measures: a. When the above test results show the aggregates to be reactive, and fly ash or other supplementary cementing material (SCM) is approved for use in order to control alkali-aggregate reactivity, the proposed concrete mixture shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C1567 and produce expansion results of less than 0.10 percent at 14 days. b. When a lithium admixture is approved for use in order to control alkali- aggregate reactivity, the proposed concrete mixture shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C1293 and produce expansion results of less than 0.04 percent in one year. 2. The fine and coarse aggregates shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C586 to show compliance with ASTM C33 for alkali-carbonate reactivity and shall be non-reactive. 3. The fine aggregate shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C40 to show compliance ASTM C33 for organic impurities. 4. The fine and coarse aggregate shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C88 to show compliance with ASTM C33. 5. The fine and coarse aggregate shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C142 to show compliance with ASTM C33. 6. The fine and coarse aggregate shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C123 to show compliance with ASTM C33. 7. The fine and coarse aggregate shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C117 to show compliance with ASTM C33. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 30 00 - 14 8. The coarse aggregate shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C131 to show compliance with ASTM C33. 9. In addition to initial aggregate testing, each type of aggregate shall be tested at no increased cost to the Owner for conformance to ASTM C33 under any of the following conditions: a. Concrete placement extending longer than six months. b. There is a noticeable change in aggregate appearance, consistency, or ease of excavation. c. The aggregate supplier changes pits, or locations in the original pit. 10. If the test results fail to meet the requirements of ASTM C33 and this Section, the Engineer may stop the placement of concrete, and may require additional testing of aggregates or field and trail batch testing of concrete to verify conformance to ASTM C33 and the strength and shrinkage requirements of this Section. 11. The Engineer may conduct any additional testing of aggregates at any time during the concrete placement period. Depending on the test results, testing cost will be paid by Contractor or Owner, according to the General Conditions. If test data fails to conform to ASTM C33, the Engineer may stop the placement of concrete or take corrective actions as indicated above. C. Concrete Testing: 1. Concrete testing to be performed by certified laboratory under direction of professional engineer licensed to practice in the State of Utah. Submit test results to Engineer and obtain approval prior to placement of concrete. 2. When concrete mix design is done per ACI 350, Method 1, (Trial Mix) incorporate shrinkage testing as specified herein into the mix design for all structural concrete mixes. 3. When concrete mix design is done per ACI 350, Method 2, (Field Experience), provide three drying shrinkage with seven compressive strength test specimens for approval of structural concrete mixes, using the actual materials and proportions proposed for the mixes. Provide additional trial batch testing when required by Engineer because of unsatisfactory test results. 4. Test four compression test cylinders at 7 days and three at 28 days: a. Determination of compressive strength in units of psi will be made in accordance with ASTM C31. b. Test in accordance with ASTM C469. c. Modulus of elasticity determined by following formula: 1) 𝐸𝑐=33 ∗𝑊∗1.5√𝑓′𝑐 a) Ec = Modulus of Elasticity b) W = Weight of Concrete, lb/ft3. c) f’c = Required 28 day strength, psi. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARING FOR CONCRETING A. Earth surfaces shall be thoroughly wetted by sprinkling, prior to the placing of any concrete, and these surfaces shall be kept moist by frequent sprinkling up to the time of placing BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 30 00 - 15 concrete thereon. Surface shall be free from standing water, mud, and debris at the time of placing concrete. B. Construct forms to the shape, lines and dimensions of members shown on Drawings and sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar. Take special care when forming concrete containing high range water reducing agents. Brace and tie forms to maintain posi tion and shape. 1. Before placing concrete containing superplastisizing agents, Contractor shall submit a Pour Plan to Engineer for approval. Engineer may require additional manpower or equipment for these pours as required to limit defects in the concrete. The Pour Plan shall include the following: a. Number of crew members and assignment of each. b. Number of vibrators to be used. c. Number of vibrators in reserve. d. Time of day and anticipated duration of pour. e. Type and capacity of pumping equipment if used. C. Provide slabs and beams of minimum indicated depth when sloping foundation base slabs or elevated floor slabs to drains. 1. For slabs on grade, slope top of subgrade to provide floor slabs of minimum uniform indicated depth. 2. Do not place floor drains through beams. D. Unless otherwise indicated, provide exterior corners in concrete members with 3/4-inch chamfers. Re-entrant corners in concrete members shall not have fillets unless otherwise indicated. E. Complete all formwork, installation of parts to be embedded, reinforcement and surface preparation prior to placing concrete. 1. Use setting diagrams, templates, and instructions for locating and setting embedments and attachments. 2. Prior to placing concrete, position and support pipe, conduit, dowels, and other ferrous items required to be embedded, to ensure clearance between items and any part of concrete reinforcement as specified below. 3. Securing such items in position by welding to reinforcement is prohibited. 4. Embedded electrical conduits and piping: a. Install pipe, conduits and their sleeves passing through slabs or walls so as not to impair the strength of the concrete member. b. Pipes and conduits larger than 3 inches in diameter may be embedded in structural concrete only after submittal and review of location and reinforcement details. c. Pipes and conduits may be installed without the specific permission noted in paragraph b. above as follows: 1) They are 3 inches or less in diameter, are spaced not less than 3 diameters on center (horizontally and vertically) and conform to paragraph 2) and 3) below. 2) Pipes and conduits, including their fittings, which are embedded within a column, do not displace more than 4% of the cross-sectional area within the reinforcing steel cage. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 30 00 - 16 3) Pipes, conduits, and their sleeves embedded within a wall or slab are not larger (outside dimension) than 1/3 the overall thickness of the wall or slab in which they are embedded. 4) There is a minimum of 2 inches between the pipe or conduit and surface of the slab or wall. d. In walls and slabs with 2 layers of reinforcement, install pipes and conduits between layers of reinforcement as close to the middle of the concrete as practical without disturbing the reinforcement. Outside diameter of the pipe or conduit shall not exceed 1/3 the slab or wall thickness. Do not space parallel and crossing runs of pipe or conduit closer than 3 diameters on center, except at cabinet and outlet box locations. e. In slabs with a single layer of reinforcement, install under reinforcement steel with a minimum of 2 inches clear to the concrete surface. F. Provide openings in formwork to accommodate other trades. Accurately place and securely support all items built into forms. G. Construction, Expansion, and Contraction Joints: 1. Provide at locations indicated or as approved by Engineer. 2. Install construction joints in beams, slabs, and girders perpendicular to the planes of their surfaces. 3. At least 48 hours shall elapse between placing of adjoining concrete construction. 4. Before new concrete is placed against existing concrete, coat all construction joints with an approved bonding adhesive used and applied in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. H. Thoroughly clean surfaces of metalwork to be in contact with concrete immediately before concrete is placed. I. Remove ponded water from the excavation and moisten fill. J. Remove laitance, tighten forms, roughen, clean, wet and slush hardened concrete with cement grout prior to placing fresh concrete at construction joints. Coat form surfaces with form release agents prior to placing reinforcing bars in forms. K. Cylinder Storage Device 1. Provide and maintain a cylinder storage device at a protected location on the Site, acceptable to Engineer and as follows: a. Maintain concrete test cylinders at a temperature range of 60 degrees F to 80 degrees F for the initial 24-hour curing period. b. Once placed in the storage device, do not move the cylinders during this period. c. Equip the storage device with an automatic 24-hour temperature recorder that continuously records on a time/temperature chart with an accuracy of ±1 degree F. d. Have the storage device available at the point of use at least 24 hours before concrete placement. e. A 24-hour test run may be required before placement of concrete. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 30 00 - 17 2. Engineer may stop placement of concrete if the storage device is not functional or cannot accommodate the required number of test cylinders. 3. Use water containing hydrated lime if water is to be in contact with cylinders. 3.2 PLACING CONCRETE A. Notify Engineer not less than 24 hours in advance of the times and places at which Contractor intends to place concrete. B. Place concrete in compliance with ACI Specifications and requirements of this Section. C. Place concrete only in presence of duly authorized representative of Engineer. D. Ready Mix Equipment: 1. Do not exceed manufacturer’s rated capacity of the mixer. 2. Ensure sufficient mixing time for uniform distribution of materials. 3. Discharge all concrete from mixer prior to mixing new batch. 4. In accordance with ASTM C94. E. Transporting: 1. Transport concrete from mixer to place of deposit by methods, which prevent segregation or loss of material. 2. Provide runways when wheelbarrows are used to transport concrete. 3. Do not wheel conveying equipment over reinforcement or support runways on reinforcement. F. Placing: 1. Deposit concrete in a continuous manner and as rapidly as possible within planned joints or sections. 2. Do not use concrete that has attained initial set or contained mixing water for more than 1 hour. 3. Uniformly distribute concrete during process of depositing and in no case move deposited concrete in forms more than 6 feet in horizontal direction. 4. Do not drop freely more than 5 feet in unexposed work or more than 3 feet in exposed work; where greater drops are required, use duct or other approved method. 5. Do not place concrete against icy or frost covered earth surfaces. G. Compacting: 1. Compact by internal type vibrators supplemented by rodding and tamping as necessary, to maximum practicable density, free from pockets of coarse aggregate in such a manner that surfaces are smooth and free from voids. 2. Avoid excessive vibration of concrete; avoid segregation of aggregates. 3. Avoid disturbance of previous lifts where initial set has taken place. 4. Use of form vibrators or tapping of forms is prohibited. H. Finishing/Trowel Aid: 1. Use finishing/trowel aid on horizontal surfaces where identified on Drawings. The product may also be used on other horizontal surfaces at Contractor’s option. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 30 00 - 18 2. Apply finishing/trowel aid directly in front of float or trowel operations and immediately finish into the concrete surface. I. Temperature of Delivered Concrete: 1. Maximum 90 degrees F. 2. Minimum concrete temperature in accordance with following table: Outdoor Temperature at Placement (In shade) Concrete Temperature (At delivery to Site) Below 30 Degrees F 65 Degrees F Between 30 and 45 Degrees F 60 Degrees F Above 45 Degrees F 50 Degrees F 3. Heating concrete ingredients: Heat ingredients to temperature no higher than necessary to maintain specified placement temperature of concrete; maximum of 80 Degrees F. 4. Methods of heating concrete ingredients subject to approval of Engineer. 5. Pre-cooling of ingredients: Cool ingredients as required to maintain specified placement temperature of concrete. 6. No additional compensation due to the foregoing requirements. J. Concrete Protection: 1. Protect all concrete against physical injury until final acceptance by Owner. 2. Protect concrete from reduced strength due to weather extremes. 3. Protect concrete that is still plastic and whenever precipitation is imminent or occurring, as determined by Engineer. 4. When the temperature is below 40 Degrees F or is likely to fall below 40 Degrees F during the 24-hour period after placing the concrete, follow the recommendations of ACI 306R, except as modified herein. a. Do not place concrete on frozen ground or in contact with forms or reinforcing bars coated with frost, ice, or snow. b. After the mean daily temperature in the vicinity of the Project site falls below 40 degrees F for more than 1 day, maintain concrete at a temperature above 50 degrees F for at least 72 hours after it is placed, with additional requirements listed under Article 3.3 - Curing below. c. When removing protection, do not allow concrete to cool suddenly. d. Calcium chloride will not be permitted as a concrete accelerator or to thaw frozen subgrade prior to concrete placement. 5. When the temperature is 90 Degrees F or above, or is likely to rise above 90 Degrees F within the 24-hour period after concrete placement; or when there is any combination of high air temperature, low relative humidity, and wind velocity which would impair concrete strength or quality, follow the recommendations of ACI 305R and the following: a. Keep concrete as cool as possible during placement and curing. b. Do not allow concrete temperature to exceed 90 Degrees F at placement. c. Prevent plastic shrinkage cracking due to rapid evaporation of moisture. d. Dampen subgrade and forms with cool water immediately prior to placement of concrete. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 30 00 - 19 e. Apply an evaporation retardant per manufacturer’s instructions between placement and finishing operations. f. Protect the concrete with temporary wet covering during any appreciable delay between placement and finishing. g. Take appropriate precautions per ACI 305R when the actual or anticipated evaporation rate equals or exceeds 0.2 LBS/SF/HR as determined from ACI 305R. 3.3 CURING A. Cure concrete for not less than 14 days after placing. B. Leave forms in place at least 14 days, or until concrete has attained specified 28-day strength, unless otherwise approved by Engineer. If forms are allowed to be removed within 14 days of placing concrete, continue curing in accordance with other methods specified herein or as directed by Engineer. C. Strictly follow careful procedures for the removal of forms and perform with care so as to avoid injury to the concrete. No heavy loading on green concrete will be permitted. D. Keep encasement concrete, concrete cradles and anchor blocks moist until covered. Cover the surface with moist earth not less than 4 hours, or more than 24 hours, after the concrete is placed. Do not begin earthwork operations that may damage the concrete until at least 7 days after placement of concrete. E. Concrete slabs may be cured by either of the following two methods: 1. Method 1: a. After finishing slab, wet surface with a fine spray of water and cover with polyethylene-bonded waterproof sheeting. b. Lap sheets 4 inches at sides and ends and seal with adhesive tape to form a continuous watertight joint. c. Weigh sheeting down with wood planks to keep sheeting in contact with concrete. d. Repair or replace sheets immediately if damage occurs. 2. Method 2: a. Cover concrete with water-saturated polyethylene-coated burlap curing mats and keep continuously wet for specified curing period. b. Lap sheets 4 inches at sides and ends and seal with adhesive tape to form a continuous watertight joint. c. Weigh sheeting down with wood planks to keep sheeting in contact with concrete. d. Repair or replace sheets immediately if damage occurs. F. As an alternate to the above referenced curing methods for formed and slab concrete, spray surface with liquid curing compound that does not affect bond of any future coatings to concrete surface. 1. Apply curing compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions as soon as the concrete has hardened enough to prevent marring on unformed surfaces, and BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 30 00 - 20 within 2 hours after completion of finish or stripping of forms, if stripped in less than 14 days. a. Maximum coverage rate of 200 square feet per gallon, applied in such a manner as to cover surface with a uniform film to seal thoroughly. 2. Curing vertical surfaces with a curing compound: a. Cover vertical surfaces with a minimum of two coats of the curing compound. b. Apply the first coat of curing compound immediately after form removal. Vertical surface at the time of receiving the first coat shall be damp with no free water on the surface. c. Allow the preceding coat to completely dry prior to applying the next coat. d. Vertical surface is defined as any surface steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal. 3. Curing Compound: As specified herein. 4. Take care to avoid damage to seal during curing period. 5. Repair broken or damaged seals occurring before expiration of curing period by application of additional curing compound over damaged portion. 6. Do not use curing film method where construction joints are to be made. G. In hot weather, follow curing procedures outlined in ACI 305R and the following: 1. Begin curing unformed surfaces immediately after finishing and continue for 24 hours. Curing shall consist of application and maintenance of water saturated material to all exposed surfaces; horizontal, vertical, and otherwise. After 24-hour interval, continue curing, using one of the following methods: a. Moist cure for six more days. b. Application of curing compound as specified above. 2. Begin curing formed concrete immediately after placing. Curing shall consist of keeping forms continuously wet for 24 hours. Thereafter, continue curing, using one of the following methods: a. Loosen forms and position soaker hose so that water runs down along concrete surfaces. Continue for six more days. b. Strip forms and apply during compound as specified for vertical surfaces above. Do not allow concrete surfaces to dry prior to application of curing compound. H. In Cold Weather, following curing procedures outlined in ACI 306R and the following: 1. Water curing of concrete may be reduced to 6 days during periods when the mean daily temperature in the vicinity of the Project is less than 40 degrees F; provided that, during the prescribed period of water curing, when temperatures are such that concrete surfaces may freeze, water curing will be temporarily discontinued. 2. Concrete cured by an application of curing compound will require no additional protection from freezing if the protection at 50 Degrees F for 72 hours is obtained by means of approved insulation in contact with the forms or concrete surfaces. Otherwise, protect the concrete against freezing temperatures for 72 hours immediately following 72 hours protection at 50 Degrees F. 3. When concrete cure is by water curing, protect against freezing temperatures for 72 hours immediately following the 72 hours of protection at 50 Degrees F. 4. Discontinue protection against freezing temperatures such that the drop in temperature of any portion of the concrete is gradual and does not exceed 40 Degrees F in 24 hours. In the spring, when the mean daily temperature rises above BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 30 00 - 21 40 Degrees F for more than 3 successive days, the specified 72-hour protection at a temperature not lower than 50 degrees F may be discontinued for as long as the mean daily temperature remains above 40 Degrees F; provided, that the concrete is protected against freezing temperatures for not less than 48 hours after placement. 5. Where artificial heat is employed, take special care to prevent the concrete from drying. Use of unvented heaters will be permitted only when unformed surfaces of concrete adjacent to the heaters are protected for the first 24 hours from an excessive carbon dioxide atmosphere by application of curing compound; provided, that the use of curing compound for such surfaces is otherwise permitted by these Specifications. 3.4 TREATMENT OF SURFACE DEFECTS A. As soon as forms are removed, all exposed surfaces shall be carefully examined, and any irregularities shall be immediately rubbed or ground in a satisfactory manner in order to secure a smooth, uniform, and continuous surface. Plastering or coating of surfaces to be smoothed will not be permitted. No repairs shall be made until af ter inspection by the Engineer. In no case will extensively patching honeycombed concrete be permitted. Concrete containing minor voids, holes, honeycombing, or similar depression defects shall have them repaired as specified herein. Remove and replace concrete containing extensive voids, holes, honeycombing, or similar depression defects. Promptly execute all repairs and replacements herein specified at no additional expense to Owner. B. Perform all repairs in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and with ICRI Guideline No 310.1R and Guideline No 320.2R. Follow these guidelines for removal geometry, exposing and undercutting reinforcing steel, cleaning and repair of reinforcing steel, and edge and surface condition of concrete, regardless of the amount of corrosion present or not present in the reinforcing steel. 1. Remove unsound deteriorated concrete from Work by high pressure water blasting machines capable of scoring concrete surfaces to minimum amplitude roughness of 3/16-inch. Remove to provide for minimum thickness specified for mortar. If reinforcing is exposed in this process, remove additional concrete until the surface is a minimum of 1-inch or 1 bar diameter behind the exposed reinforcing. 2. Clean exposed reinforcing bars of rust and other deleterious materials which may prevent bonding of the repair product. 3. Keep surface at saturated surface dry (SSD) condition for a minimum of 24-hours prior to placement of repair material. 4. Place and cure repair grout as specified in Section 03 60 00 – Grouting and in accordance with manufacturer’s written recommendations. 5. For exposed walls, include a portion of white Portland cement as required to make the color of the patch match the color of the surrounding concrete. C. Ream holes left by tie-rod cones with suitable toothed reamers to leave the surfaces of the holes clean and rough. Repair these holes in an approved manner with dry-packed cement grout specified in Section 03 60 00 - Grouting. Do not ream holes left by form-tying devices having a rectangular cross-section, and other imperfections having a depth greater than their least surface dimension, but repair them in an approved manner with dry-packed cement grout specified in Section 03 60 00 - Grouting. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 30 00 - 22 D. Build up and shape repairs in such a manner that the completed Work will conform to the requirements of this Section, as applicable, using approved methods which will not disturb the bond, cause sagging, or cause horizontal fractures. Cure surfaces of said repairs as required for the concrete in the repaired section. E. Prior to filling any structure with water, repair all cracks that may have developed by grooving and filling as shown on the Contract Drawings. Perform this repair method on the water bearing face of members. Prior to backfilling, repair cracks on faces of members in contact with fill, which are not covered with a waterproofing membrane, as specified herein. 3.5 PATCHING HOLES IN CONCRETE A. Patching Small Holes 1. Fill holes which are less than 12 inches in their least dimension and extend completely through concrete members, as specified herein. 2. Fill small holes in members which are water-bearing or in contact with soil or other fill material, with nonshrink grout specified in Section 03 60 00 - Grouting. Where a face of the member is exposed to view, hold the nonshrink grout back 2 inches from the finished surface. Patch the remaining 2 inches according to the paragraph in Part 3 entitled "Treatment of Surface Defects." 3. Fill small holes through all other concrete members with nonshrink grout, with exposed faces treated as above. B. Patching Large Holes 1. For holes which are larger than 12 inches in their least dimension, provide a keyway chipped into the edge of the opening all around, unless a formed keyway exists. Fill holes with concrete as specified herein. 2. For holes which are larger than 24 inches in their least dimension and which do not have reinforcing steel extending from the existing concrete, set reinforcing steel in drilled holes and epoxy grout as specified in Section 03 60 00 – Grouting. Match the reinforcing added to the reinforcing in the existing wall unless otherwise shown. 3. For large holes in members which are water bearing or in contact with soil or other fill, place either a hydrophilic type or a plastic adhesive type waterstop material around the perimeter of the hole as specified herein, unless there is an existing waterstop in place. 3.6 CONCRETE FINISH A. General: Provide surfaces free from fins, bulges, ridges, offsets, honeycombing, or roughness of any kind, with finished, smooth, continuous hard surface. Allowable deviations from plumb or level and from the alignment, profiles, and dimensions shown are defined as tolerances and are specified herein. These tolerances are to be distinguished from irregularities in finish as described herein. B. Do not use aluminum finishing tools. C. Formed Surfaces: 1. Exterior buried surfaces require no treatment after form removal except for curing, repair of defective concrete, and treatment of surface defects. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 30 00 - 23 2. Finish surfaces exposed to view as specified under "Architectural Concrete Finish" below. D. Surface holes larger than 1/2 inch in diameter or deeper than 1/4-inch are defined as surface defects in basins and exposed walls. E. Unformed Surfaces: After proper and adequate vibration and tamping, bring all unformed top surfaces of slabs, floors, walls, and curbs to a uniform surface with suitable tools. Immediately after the concrete has been screeded, treated with a liquid evaporation retardant. Use the retardant again after each operation as necessary to prevent drying shrinkage cracks. The classes of finish specified for unformed concrete surfaces are designated and defined as follows: 1. Finish U1 – Sufficient leveling and screeding to produce an even, uniform surface with surface irregularities not to exceed 3/8 inch. No further special finish is required. 2. Finish U2 After sufficient stiffening of the screeded concrete, float finish surfaces with wood or metal floats or with a finishing machine using float blades. Excessive floating of surfaces while the concrete is plastic and dusting of dry cement and sand on the concrete surface to absorb excess moisture will not be permitted. Minimize floating as necessary to produce a surface that is free from screed marks and is uniform in texture. Surface irregularities are limited to 1/4-inch. Tool joints and edges where shown or as determined by the Engineer. 3. Finish U3 After the floated surface (as specified for Finish U2) has hardened sufficiently to prevent excess of fine material from being drawn to the surface, steel trowel with firm pressure such as will flatten the sandy texture of the floated surface and produce a dense, uniform surface free from blemishes, ripples, and trowel marks. Provide finish that is smooth and free of all irregularities. 4. Finish U4 Steel trowel finish (as specified for Finish U3) without local depressions or high points. In addition, lightly broom the surface with broom lines perpendicular to drainage unless otherwise shown. The resulting surface shall be rough enough to provide a nonskid finish. F. Floor Hardener: 1. Apply to all exposed concrete floor surfaces. 2. Apply after concrete has cured minimum 7 days. 3. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Keep floors covered and free of traffic and loads for a minimum of 10 days after completion. 3.7 ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE FINISH A. General: Architectural finish is required for permanently exposed concrete surfaces and in other locations where specifically called out on the Contract Drawings. 1. Immediately after the forms have been stripped, inspect the concrete surface and repair any poor joints, voids, rock pockets, or other defective areas Fill all form-tie holes as indicated herein. 2. Do not apply architectural finishes until the concrete surface has been repaired as required and the concrete has cured at least 14 days. 3. Conform all architecturally treated concrete surfaces to the accepted sample required herein in texture, color, and quality. Maintain and protect the concrete finish. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 30 00 - 24 B. Smooth Concrete Finish 1. Wet the concrete surface and apply grout with a brush. Use grout made by mixing one part Portland cement and one part fine sand that will pass a No. 16 sieve with sufficient water to give it the consistency of thick paint. Use 1/2 gray and 1/2 white Portland Cement as determined by Engineer. Vigorously rub the freshly applied grout into the concrete surface with a wood float filling all small air holes. After all the surface grout has been removed with a steel trowel, allow the surface to dry and, when dry, vigorously rub with burlap to remove completely all surface grout so that there is no visible paint-like film of grout on the concrete. Complete the entire cleaning operation for any area the day it is started, and leave no grout on the surface overnight. 2. Terminate cleaning operations for any given day at panel joints. It is essential that the various operations be carefully timed to secure the desired effect which is a light- colored concrete surface of uniform color and texture without any appearance of a paint or grout film. 3. In the event that improper manipulation results in an inferior finish, rub such inferior areas with carborundum bricks. 4. Before beginning any of the final treatment on exposed surfaces, treat in a satisfactory manner, a trial area of at least 200 square feet in some inconspicuous place selected by the Engineer and preserve said trial area undisturbed until the completion of the job. 3.8 WATERPROOFING A. Apply waterproofing to exterior surface of all walls of underground concrete structures. B. Refer to Section 07 14 00 – Fluid-Applied Waterproofing. 3.9 TOLERANCES: A. Construction Tolerances: Set and maintain concrete forms and perform finishing operations so as to ensure that the completed Work is within the tolerances specified herein. Surface defects and irregularities are defined as finishes and are to be distinguished from tolerances. Tolerance is the specified permissible variation from lines, grades, or dimensions shown. Where tolerances are not stated in the Specifications, permissible deviations will be in accordance with ACI 117. 1. The following non-cumulative construction tolerances are hereby established and apply to finished walls and slab unless otherwise shown: Item Tolerance Variation of the constructed linear outline from the established position in plan. In 10 feet: 1/4 inch In 20 feet or more: 1/2 inch Variation from the level or from the grades shown. In 10 feet: 1/4 inch In 20 feet or more: 1/2 inch Variation from plumb. In 10 feet: 1/4 inch In 20 feet or more: 1/2 inch Variation in the thickness of slabs and walls. Minus 1/4 inch Plus 1/2 inch BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 30 00 - 25 Item Tolerance Variation in the locations and sizes of slabs and wall openings. Plus or minus 1/4 inch 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General 1. Tests on component materials and for slump, temperature, air content, unit weight, compressive strength and shrinkage of concrete will be performed as specified herein. 2. The cost of all laboratory tests for qualification of mix designs on cement, aggregates, and concrete, including strength and shrinkage testing will be borne by Contractor. The cost of all field-testing during construction, including slump, temperature, air, strength, and shrinkage will also be borne by Owner. However, Contractor will be charged for the cost of any additional tests and investigation on work performed which does not meet the Specifications. 3. Provide access for Engineer to aggregate stockpiles for concurrent sampling during construction. 4. Provide access for Engineer to batch plant for monitoring batching procedures during construction. 5. Supply concrete for testing at no additional cost to Owner. Assist Engineer in obtaining samples, and disposal and cleanup of excess material. 6. Take composite samples of concrete placed in the Work in accordance with ASTM C172 from the first placement of each class of concrete and at the following minimum frequency for each class: a. Not less than one sample per day on which concrete is placed. b. Not less than one sample for each 50 cubic yards of concrete placed. c. Not less than one sample for each 5,000 square feet of surface area for slabs or walls. d. Not less than 5 samples from randomly selected batches for the Work. B. Slump Tests 1. Perform in accordance with requirements of ASTM C143 at frequency indicated for sampling above. C. Temperature Tests 1. Test concrete temperature per ASTM C1064 at frequency indicated for sampling above. D. Air Content Tests 1. Test air content per ASTM C231 at frequency indicated for sampling above. E. Unit Weight 1. Test unit weight per ASTM C138 at frequency indicated for sampling above. F. Field Compression Tests 1. Field compression test specimens will be made at the frequency indicated for sampling above. 2. Each set of test specimens will be a minimum of five cylinders. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 30 00 - 26 3. Make compression test specimens for concrete in accordance with ASTM C31. Specimen size: Cylinders, 6-inch diameter by 12-inch high. 4. Perform compression tests in accordance with ASTM C 39. Test one cylinder at 7 days and two at 28 days. The remaining cylinders will be held to verify test results, if needed. G. Evaluation and Acceptance of Concrete 1. Evaluation and acceptance of the compressive strength of concrete will be according to the requirements of ACI 350 and as specified herein. 2. A statistical analysis of compression test results will be performed according to the requirements of ACI 214. The standard deviation of the test results may not exceed 640 psi, when ordered at equivalent water content as estimated by slump. 3. If any concrete fails to meet these requirements, take immediate corrective action to increase the compressive strength for all subsequent batches of the type of concrete affected. 4. When the standard deviation of the test results exceeds 640 psi, the average strength for which the mix is designed shall be increased by an amount necessary to satisfy the statistical requirement that the probability of any test being more than 500 psi below or the average of any three consecutive tests being below the specified compressive strength is 1 in 100. Calculate the required average strength using Criterion No. 3 of ACI 214 with the actual standard of deviation. 5. All concrete which fails to meet the ACI requirements and these Specifications, is subject to removal and replacement at no increase in cost to the Owner. 3.11 APPLICATION OF LOADS A. Do not place backfill against cantilevered walls until the concrete has attained a minimum age of 7 days and 100% of the minimum specified 28-day concrete strength as proven by concrete strength tests. 3.12 SCHEDULES A. Grout: As specified in Section 03 60 00 – Grouting. B. Unformed Concrete Surfaces: Apply finish as follows. Area Finish Grade slabs and foundations to be covered with concrete or fill material U1 Floors to be covered with grouted tile or topping grout U2 Slabs not water bearing U4 Slabs to be covered with built-up roofing U2 Interior and exterior slabs where Drawings require only light broom finish U4 Interior slabs and finished floors with architectural finishes U3 Top surface of walls U3 END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GROUTING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 60 00 - 1 SECTION 03 60 00 GROUTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work includes various types of cementitious grout to be provided and installed per the Contract Documents B. Section includes the following types of grout: 1. Cement grout. 2. Nonshrink grout. 3. Epoxy grout. 4. Grout for repair of concrete. 5. Pump and motor grout. 6. Concrete topping gout and concrete fill. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) standards, most recent editions: ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete ACI 308 Standard Practice for Curing Concrete B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) standards, most recent editions: ASTM C78 Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam with Third-Point Loading) ASTM C94 Standard Specifications for Ready-Mixed Concrete ASTM C109 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or [50-mm] Cube Specimens) ASTM C307 Standard Test Method for Tensile Strength of Chemical- Resistant Mortar, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings ASTM C348 Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Hydraulic- Cement Mortars ASTM C469 Standard Test Method for Static Modulus of Elasticity and Poisson's Ratio of Concrete in Compression ASTM C531 Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GROUTING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 60 00 - 2 ASTM C579 Standard Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Chemical- Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes. ASTM C827 Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of Cylindrical Specimens of Cementitious Mixtures ASTM C882 Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin Systems Used With Concrete By Slant Shear ASTM C884 Standard Test Method for Thermal Compatibility Between Concrete and an Epoxy-Resin Overlay ASTM C939 Standard Test Method for Flow of Grout for Preplaced- Aggregate Concrete (Flow Cone Method) ASTM C1090 Standard Test Method for Measuring Changes in Height of Cylindrical Specimens of Hydraulic-Cement Grout ASTM C1107 Packaged Dry, Hydraulic Cement Grout (Nonshrink) ASTM C1181 Standard Test Methods for Compressive Creep of Chemical- Resistant Polymer Machinery Grouts ASTM C1202 Standard Test Method for Electrical Indication of Concrete's Ability to Resist Chloride Ion Penetration ASTM C1339 Standard Test Method for Flowability and Bearing Area of Chemical-Resistant Polymer Machinery Grouts ASTM D638 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics ASTM D696 Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics Between -30°C and 30°C With a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer ASTM E329 Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing C. International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI) standards, latest editions: Guideline No 310.1R Guide for Surface Preparation for the Repair of Deteriorated Concrete Resulting from Reinforcing Steel Corrosion Guideline No 320.2R Guide for selecting and specifying Materials for repair of Concrete Surfaces 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GROUTING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 60 00 - 3 B. Product Data: 1. Submit certified test results verifying the compressive strength, shrinkage, and expansion requirements indicated herein. 2. Submit manufacturer's literature containing instructions and recommendations on the mixing, handling, placement and appropriate uses for each type of nonshrink and epoxy grout used in the Work. C. Certification: 1. Provide manufacturer’s independent certification of compliance with ASTM C1107 without modification to the standard methods certifying that the Class B or C grout's post-hardening non-shrink properties are not based on gas expansion. 2. Provide Manufacturer's certification that grouts have strengths of 3500 psi at 1 day, 6500 psi at 3 days and 7500 psi at 28 days when cured at 72 degrees F as well as meeting the 3, 7, and 28-day strengths when tested and cured at the 45 degree F and 95 degree F limits and all other requirements of ASTM C1107. 3. The Contractor shall engage an independent testing laboratory to run a 24-hour grout evaluation in accordance with ASTM C1107 of each grout submitted for approval showing compliance with all aspects of the evaluation. Submit results to the Engineer for review. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with Section 01 25 10 - Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions. B. Maintain all materials clean, dry and protected against dampness, freezing and foreign matter. 1. Store non-shrink grout materials in temperature controlled environments above 40 degrees F and below 90 degrees F. 2. Store epoxy grout components in temperature controlled environments above 60 degrees F and below 90 degrees F. C. Deliver epoxy resin, hardener, and aggregate in sealed pre-measured containers, palletized and shrink-wrapped to prevent shipping damage. D. Immediately remove from the Project site any cement-based grout material which becomes damp or otherwise defective. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Nonshrink, nonmetallic grout: a. 5 Star Grout, Five Star Products, Inc. b. Masterflow 928, BASF Building Systems, Inc. c. NS Grout, Euclid Chemical Company. d. Sika Grout 212, Sika Corporation. e. Engineer approved equal. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GROUTING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 60 00 - 4 2. Epoxy grout: a. HP Epoxy Grout, Five Star Products, Inc. b. Masterflow 648 CP Plus, BASF Building Systems, Inc. c. E3-Flowable, Euclid Chemical Company. d. Sikadur 42 Grout-Pak, Sika Corporation. e. Engineer approved equal. 3. Grout for pumps and motors: a. Escoweld, ITW Polymer Technologies. b. Chockfast Red, ITW Polymer Technologies. c. DP Epoxy Grout, Five Star Products, Inc. d. Engineer approved equal. 2.2 CEMENT GROUT A. Cement grout shall be composed of one-part cement, three parts sand, and the minimum amount of water necessary to obtain the desired consistency. Where needed to match the color of adjacent concrete, white Portland cement shall be blended with regular cement as needed. The minimum compressive strength at 28 days shall be 4,500 psi. B. Cement grout materials shall be as specified in Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 2.3 NONSHRINK GROUT A. Non-shrink grout shall be a prepackaged, inorganic, non-gas-liberating, non-metallic, cement-based grout requiring only the addition of water. B. Cement from kilns burning metal-rich hazardous waste fuel shall not be used. C. Manufacturer's instructions shall be printed on each bag or other container in which the materials are packaged. The specific formulation for each class of non-shrink grout herein shall be that recommended by the manufacturer for the particular applicatio n. All grouts (Grade B or C) shall be tested for height change of the hardened grout at 1, 3, 14, and 28 days in accordance with ASTM C1090 and shall be tested for compression at 1, 3, 7, and 28 days in accordance with the modified ASTM C109 testing procedure. D. Class A non-shrink grouts: Not used. E. Class B or C high precision, fluid, extended working time, non-shrink grouts: 1. Minimum 28-day compressive strength of 7500 PSI. 2. No shrinkage (0.0 percent) and a maximum of 4.0 percent expansion in the plastic state when tested in accordance with ASTM C827. 3. No shrinkage (0.0 percent) and a maximum of 0.2 percent expansion in the hardened state 4. When mixed to a fluid consistency of 20 to 30 seconds per ASTM C939 at temperature extremes of 45 to 90 degrees F shall have an extended working time of 30 minutes when tested in accordance with ASTM C1107. F. Application: 1. Class B or C non-shrink grout shall be used for grouting under all base plates for structural steel members, grouting under all equipment base plates except for pumps BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GROUTING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 60 00 - 5 and motors, and at all locations where grout is required by the Contract Documents except where epoxy grout or grout for pumps and motors is specifically required. Class B or C non-shrink grout shall be used in place of Class A non-shrink grout for all applications. Class B or C non-shrink grout shall not be used for dry packing applications or repair of concrete. 2.4 EPOXY GROUT A. Epoxy grout shall be a pourable, nonshrink, 100 percent solids system. The epoxy grout system shall have three components: resin, hardener, and specially blended aggregate, all premeasured and prepackaged. The resin component shall not contain any nonrea ctive diluents. Resins containing butyl glycidyl ether (BGE) or other highly volatile and hazardous reactive diluents are not acceptable. Variation of component ratios is not permitted unless specifically recommended by the manufacturer. Manufacturer's instructions shall be printed on each container in which the materials are packaged. The chemical formulation of the epoxy grout shall be that recommended by the manufacturer for the particular application. B. The mixed epoxy grout system shall have a minimum working life of 45 minutes at 75 degrees F. C. The epoxy grout shall develop a compressive strength of 5,000 psi in 24 hours and 10,000 psi in 7 days when tested in accordance with ASTM C579, Method B. There shall be no shrinkage (0.0 percent) and a maximum 4.0 percent expansion when tested in accordance with ASTM C827. D. The epoxy grout shall exhibit a minimum effective bearing area of 95 percent. This shall be determined by testing in accordance with ASTM C1339, for bearing area and flow. E. The peak exotherm of a 2-inch diameter by 4-inch high cylinder shall not exceed 95 degrees F when tested with 75 degree F material at laboratory temperature. The epoxy grout shall exhibit a maximum thermal coefficient of 30 x 10-6 inches/inch/degree F when tested according to ASTM C531 or ASTM D696. F. Application: 1. Epoxy grout shall be used to embed all anchor bolts and reinforcing steel required to be set in grout and for all other applications in the Contract Documents where grout type is not specifically indicated. 2.5 GROUT FOR REPAIR OF CONCRETE A. Vertical, overhead, and shotcrete applications: 1. Shall not produce a vapor barrier. 2. One component, reoplastic, cement based, shrinkage compensated, non-expansive, gray concrete product. 3. Sprayable, extremely low permeability, sulfate resistant, easy to use and requiring only the addition of water. 4. Free of chlorides and other chemicals causing corrosion with the following properties: a. Minimum Slant Shear Bond Strength: 2500 PSI at 28 days when tested in accordance with ASTM C882. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GROUTING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 60 00 - 6 b. Minimum Compressive strength: 6,500 PSI at 28 days when tested in accordance with ASTM C109. c. Minimum Tensile Bond Strength: 200 PSI at 28 days per ASTM C307. d. Minimum Flexural Strength: 1,200 PSI when tested in accordance with ASTM C348. e. Modulus of Elasticity: 3.6E6 PSI when tested in accordance with ASTM C469. f. Maximum Rapid Chloride Permeability: 772 coulombs when tested in accordance with ASTM C1202. B. Horizontal and formed applications: 1. Shall not produce a vapor barrier. 2. One component, reoplastic, cement-based, shrinkage compensated, non-expansive, gray concrete product. 3. Flowable, extremely low permeability, sulfate resistant, easy to use and requiring only the addition of water. 4. Free of chlorides and other chemicals causing corrosion with the following properties: a. Minimum Shear Bond Strength: 2150 PSI at 7 days. b. Minimum Compressive Strength: 6000 PSI at 7 days when tested in accordance with ASTM C109. c. Minimum Flexural Strength: 770 PSI at 28 days when tested in accordance with ASTM C78. d. Maximum Chloride Permeability: 1,000 coulombs when tested in accordance with ASTM C1202. e. Modulus of Elasticity: 4.8E6 PSI when tested in accordance with ASTM C469. 2.6 GROUT FOR PUMPS AND MOTORS A. Grout for pumps and motors shall be epoxy grouts meeting the following minimum requirements: 1. Creep shall be less than 0.005 in/in when tested by ASTM C1181 method. The test shall be at 70 degrees F and 140 degrees F with a load of 400 PSI. 2. Linear shrinkage shall be less than 0.080 percent and thermal expansion less than 17E-6 in/in/degree F when tested by ASTM C531. 3. The compressive strength shall be a minimum of 12,000 PSI in 7 days when tested by ASTM C579 Method B, modified. 4. Bond strength of grout to Portland cement concrete shall be greater than 2,000 PSI when using ASTM C882 test method. 5. Grout shall pass the thermal compatibility test when overlaid on Portland cement concrete using test method ASTM C884. 6. Tensile strength and modulus of elasticity shall be determined by ASTM D638. The tensile strength shall not be less than 1,700 PSI and the modulus of elasticity shall not be less than 1.8E6 PSI. 7. Peak exothermic temperature shall not exceed 110 degrees F when a specimen 6 inches in diameter by 12 inches high is used. Gel time shall be at least 150 minutes. 8. The grout shall be suitable for supporting precision machinery subject to high impact and shock loading in industrial environments while exposed to elevated temperatures as high as 150 degrees F, with a load of 2,000 PSI. B. Primer, if required, shall conform to the written recommendations of the grout manufacturer. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GROUTING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 60 00 - 7 C. Surface preparations shall conform to the written recommendations of the grout manufacturer. D. Placement and Curing 1. Placement and curing procedures shall be in accordance with the written recommendations of the grout manufacturer. 2. A grouting performance demonstration/training session shall be conducted by the grout manufacturer’s representative prior to foundation and baseplate preparation and the first grouting on site. This training session shall demonstrate proper preparation and installation methods and that the grouting material meets the strength requirements. 2.7 CONCRETE TOPPING GROUT AND CONCRETE FILL A. Grout for topping of slabs and concrete fill for built up surfaces of tank, channel, and basin bottoms shall be composed of cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, water, and admixtures as necessary, with strength as specified above. B. Where concrete topping is deeper than 6 inches, it will be considered “Concrete Fill” and may be placed using either grout as specified herein or "lean concrete", as specified in Section 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete, when approved by Engineer. 2.8 CURING MATERIALS A. Curing materials shall be as specified in Section 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete for cement grout and as recommended by the grout manufacturer for prepackaged grouts. 2.9 CONSISTENCY A. Use grouts with the consistency necessary to completely fill space to be grouted for the particular application. Where "dry pack" is called for in the Contract Documents, use grout with a consistency such that the grout is plastic and moldable but will not flow. B. Regardless of consistency called for on the Contract Documents, the type of grout to be used shall be as indicated herein for the particular application. 2.10 MEASUREMENT OF INGREDIENTS A. Measurements for cement grout shall be made accurately by volume using containers. Shovel measurement will not be allowed. B. Prepackaged grouts shall have ingredients measured by means recommended by the grout manufacturer. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GROUTING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 60 00 - 8 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PERPARATION A. All surface preparation, curing, and protection of cement grout shall be as indicated in Section 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete. The finish of the grout surface shall match that of the adjacent concrete. B. Do not place grout on concrete or masonry substrates until those substrate materials have attained 28-day design strength unless authorized by Engineer. 3.2 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. The manufacturer of nonshrink grout and epoxy grout shall provide onsite technical assistance upon request. B. Coordinate with the manufacturer all demonstrations, training sessions, and applicable site visits. The grout manufacturer shall conduct onsite, demonstration and training sessions for bleed tests, mixing, flow cone measurements, cube testing, application, and curing for each category and type of grout. C. Training by the manufacturer is required for all types of grout installations. Grout manufacturer’s representative shall train Contractor to perform the grout Work including mixing of grouts to required consistency, testing, placing, and curing on actual project base plates, tie holes, rock pockets, and other applications. 3.3 GROUTING PROCEDURES A. Prepackage Grouts: All mixing, surface preparation, handling, placing, consolidation, curing, and other means of execution for prepackaged grouts shall be done according to the instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer. B. Base Plate Grouting: 1. For base plates, the original concrete shall be blocked out or finished off a sufficient distance below the plate to provide for a 1 inch thickness of grout or a thickness as indicated on the Contract Drawings. 2. After the base plate has been set in position at the proper elevation by steel wedges or double nuts on the anchor bolts, the space between the bottom of the plate and the original pour of concrete shall be filled with non-shrink-type grout. The mixture shall be of a trowelable consistency and tamped or rodded solidly into the space between the plate and the base concrete. A backing board or stop shall be provided at the back side of the space to be filled with grout. Where this method of placement is not practical or where required by Engineer, alternate grouting methods shall be submitted for acceptance by Engineer. C. Concrete Topping Grout: 1. All mechanical, electrical, and finish Work shall be completed prior to placement of concrete topping or concrete fill. The base slab shall be given a roughened textured surface by sandblasting or hydroblasting exposing the aggregates to ensure bonding to the base slab. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GROUTING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 60 00 - 9 2. The minimum thickness of grout topping and concrete fill shall be one inch. Where the finished surface of concrete fill is to form an intersecting angle of less than 45 degrees with the concrete surface it is to be placed against, a key shall be formed in the concrete surface at the intersection point. The key shall be a minimum of 6-inches wide by 1-1/2 inches deep. 3. The base slab shall be thoroughly cleaned and wetted prior to placing topping and fill. No topping concrete shall be placed until the slab is complete free from standing pools or ponds of water. A thin coat of neat Type II cement grout shall be broomed into the surface of the slab just before topping of fill placement. The topping and fill shall be compacted by rolling or tamping, brought to established grade, and floated. Grouted fill for tank and basin bottoms where scraping mechanisms are to be insta lled shall be screeded by blades attached to the revolving mechanism of the equipment in accordance with the procedures outlined by the equipment manufacturer after the grout is brought to the established grade. 4. Concrete topping grout placed on sloping slabs shall proceed uniformly from the bottom of the slab to the top, for the full width of the placement. 5. The surface shall be tested with a straight edge to detect high and low spots which shall be immediately eliminated. When the topping and fill has hardened sufficiently, it shall be steel troweled to a smooth surface free from pinholes and other imperfections. An approved type of mechanical trowel may be used as an assist in this operation, but the last pass over the surface shall be by hand-troweling. During finishing, no water, dry cement or mixture of dry cement and sand shall be applied to the surface. D. Grout for Repair of Concrete 1. All repairs shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and with ICRI Guideline No 310.1R and Guideline No 320.2R. These guidelines shall be followed for removal geometry, exposing and undercutting of reinforcing steel, cleaning and repair of reinforcing steel, and edge and surface condition of concrete and shall be followed regardless of the amount of corrosion present or not present in the reinforcing steel. 2. Remove unsound deteriorated concrete from Work by high pressure water blasting machines capable of scoring concrete surfaces to minimum amplitude roughness of 3/16-inch. Remove to provide for minimum thickness specified for mortar. If reinforcing is exposed in this process, then additional concrete shall be removed until the surface is a minimum of 1-inch or 1 bar diameter behind the exposed reinforcing. 3. Clean exposed reinforcing bars of rust and other deleterious materials which may prevent bonding of the repair product. 4. Keep surface at saturated surface dry (SSD) condition for a minimum of 24-hours prior to placement of repair material. 5. Place material in accordance with Manufacturer’s written recommendations. 6. Cure material continuously for 7-days with water fog nozzles or other applications which provide a continuous wet curing of the repaired area in accordance with ACI 308. E. CONSOLIDATION 1. Grout shall be placed in such a manner, for the consistency necessary for each application, so as to assure that the space to be grouted is completely filled. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GROUTING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 03 60 00 - 10 END OF SECTION DIVISION 04 MASONRY THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL IMPROVEMENT DISTRICT MASONRY CLEANING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 04 01 20 - 1 SECTION 04 01 20 MASONRY CLEANING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work includes cleaning exposed masonry surfaces. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04 22 19 – Insulated Concrete Unit Masonry 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures. B. Provide a letter stating that Contractor has a minimum of 5 years' experience in this type of masonry cleaning. C. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's instructions, including application rates. 2. Manufacturer's recommendations for neutralizing rinse after cleaning. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Prior to erecting mock-up, procure and clean two samples of each type of masonry used in Work. Cleaned samples shall be submitted to Engineer for review of aesthetics and effectiveness. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: Engaged in producing masonry cleaners that have been used for similar applications with successful results for a minimum or five years, and with factory-trained representatives who are available for consultation and site inspection and assistance at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Applicator: Trained, approved, and accepted by the cleaning compound manufacturer. Application personnel shall have at least two years of experience with the materials being applied. B. Mock-ups: 1. Clean an area approximately 10 to 20 square feet or larger as required to demonstrate effectiveness of cleaner on each type of masonry unit used. Upon approval of Engineer, cleaner may be applied to mock-up panels constructed in Section 04 22 19 – Insulated Concrete Unit Masonry. a. Prepare mock-ups on existing walls under same weather conditions to be expected during remainder of Work. b. Test cleaners and methods on samples of adjacent non-masonry materials for possible adverse reactions. Samples of tested materials shall be available for Engineer's review upon request. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL IMPROVEMENT DISTRICT MASONRY CLEANING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 04 01 20 - 2 c. Allow a waiting period of not less than seven days after completion of sample cleaning to permit a study of sample panels for negative reactions. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with Section 01 25 10 - Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions. B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened containers, labeled with manufacturer's name, batch number, and type of materials. C. Store materials in original, unopened containers in compliance with manufacturer's printed instructions. D. Do not store in areas where the temperature will fall below 20 degrees F or rise above 100 degrees F. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Schedule application of products such that temperature and humidity levels conform to manufacturer's requirements during and after application. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Cleaning solution: Detergent type. a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.; "202 New Masonry Detergent." b. Elgene; "Florok 700 Masonry Detergent." c. PROSOCO, Inc.; "Sure Klean #600 Detergent." d. Engineer approved equal. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Water for Cleaning: Potable B. Detergent Type Cleaning Solution: 1. Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar and grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use products expressly approved for intended use by cleaning solution manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 2. Cleaner shall be a solution of blended liquid acids, heavily inhibited and emulsified and in combination with special wetting systems. 3. Specific product selection shall be dependent upon substrate as recommended by the cleaning solution manufacturer. 4. Muratic acid will not be acceptable as a cleaning solution for new masonry. C. Neutralizing rinse: Rinse to be as required by the manufacturer of the cleaners used. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL IMPROVEMENT DISTRICT MASONRY CLEANING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 04 01 20 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Allow 7 to 28 days after completion of masonry work before start of cleaning. B. Protection: 1. Protect surrounding surfaces and installed Work from run-off, overspray, and splashing. Erect temporary protective covers and walkways at points of pedestrian and vehicular entrance and exit that must remain in service during course of cleaning. 2. Comply with cleaning solution manufacturer's written instructions for protecting building and other surfaces against damage from exposure to its products. Prevent cleaning solutions from coming into contact with pedestrians, motor vehicles, landscaping, buildings, and other surfaces that could be harmed by such contact. a. Cover adjacent surfaces with materials that are proven to resist the cleaning solutions used. Use materials that contain only waterproof, UV-resistant adhesives. Apply masking agents to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply liquid masking agent to painted or porous surfaces. Promptly remove masking after cleaner application to prevent adhesive staining. b. Keep wall wet below area being cleaned to prevent streaking from runoff. c. Do not clean masonry during winds of sufficient force to spread cleaning solutions to unprotected surfaces. d. Dispose of runoff from cleaning operations by legal means and in a manner that prevents soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping, and water penetration into building interiors. C. Surface Preparation: 1. Prepare surfaces in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 2. Remove excess mortar using wooden paddles and scrapers. Do not scratch or chip masonry surface. 3. Point up cracks, other than hairline cracks. 4. Defective mortar joints shall be routed out, pointed with mortar, and tooled. 5. Before beginning general cleaning, remove extraneous substances that are resistant to cleaning methods being used. Extraneous substances include paint, calking, asphalt, and tar. 6. Remove paint and calking with approved alkaline or solvent paint remover. a. Comply with requirements for paint removal. b. Repeat application up to two times if needed. 7. Remove asphalt and tar with approved asphalt and tar remover solution. a. Apply only to asphalt and tar by brush without prewetting. b. Allow asphalt and tar remover to remain on surface for 10 to 30 minutes. c. Rinse off with water using low pressure spray. d. Repeat application if needed. 3.2 CLEANER APPLICATION A. Apply cleaner in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 1. Do not use wire brushes or brushes that are not resistant to cleaning solution being used. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL IMPROVEMENT DISTRICT MASONRY CLEANING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 04 01 20 - 4 2. Use spray equipment that provides controlled application at volume and pressure recommended by manufacturer, measured at spray tip. Adjust pressure and volume to ensure that cleaning methods do not damage masonry. 3. Cleaning solution application: a. In accordance with manufacturer's instructions, apply cleaning solution to masonry surfaces using brush or spray application methods, at Contractor's option. b. Use low-pressure tank or chemical pump suitable for cleaner indicated, equipped with cone-shaped spray tip. c. Do not spray apply at pressures exceeding 50 psi. d. Do not allow solution to remain on surface for periods longer than those indicated or recommended by manufacturer. e. Reapply cleaner as recommended by manufacturer prior to removing excess mortar. 4. Water application: a. Water soak application: 1) Soak masonry surfaces by applying water continuously and uniformly to limited area for time indicated. Apply water at low pressures and low volumes in multiple fine sprays using perforated hoses or multiple spray nozzles. 2) Erect a protective enclosure constructed of polyethylene sheeting to cover area being sprayed. b. Spray Applications: 1) Use fan-shaped spray tip that disperses water at an angle of 25 to 50 degrees. 2) Unless otherwise indicated, hold spray nozzle at least six inches from surface of masonry and apply water in horizontal back and forth weeping motion, overlapping previous strokes to produce uniform coverage. 5. High-pressure water spray application: a. Use fan-shaped spray tip that disperses water at an angle of at least 40 degrees. B. Perform cleaning method indicated in a manner that results in uniform coverage for all surfaces, including corners, moldings, and interstices, and that produces an even effect without streaking or damaging masonry surfaces. C. Rinse off chemical residue and soil by working upward from bottom to top of each treated area at each stage or scaffold setting. During each rinse, test pH of rinse water running off of cleaned area to determine that cleaning solution is completely removed. Apply neutralizing agent and repeat rinse, if necessary, to produce tested pH of between 6.7 and 7.5. D. After cleaning is complete, remove protection no longer required. Remove tape and adhesive marks. 3.3 FINAL CLEANING A. Wash adjacent woodwork and other non-masonry surfaces. Use detergent and soft brushes or cloths. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL IMPROVEMENT DISTRICT MASONRY CLEANING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 04 01 20 - 5 B. Clean mortar and debris from roof. Remove debris from gutters and downspouts. Rinse off roof and flush gutters and downspouts. C. Sweep and rake adjacent pavement and grounds to remove mortar and debris. When necessary, pressure wash surfaces to remove mortar, dust, dirt, and stains. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL IMPROVEMENT DISTRICT MASONRY CLEANING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 04 01 20 - 6 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL IMPROVEMENT DISTRICT MORTAR AND GROUT WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 04 05 12 - 1 SECTION 04 05 12 MORTAR AND GROUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install mortar and grout for masonry construction in accordance with Contract Documents. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04 22 19 – Insulated Concrete Unit Masonry 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM) standards, most recent editions: ASTM C5 Standard Specification for Quicklime for Structural Purposes ASTM C109 Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars ASTM C144 Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar ASTM C207 Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes ASTM C270 Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry ASTM C404 Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout ASTM C476 Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry ASTM C595 Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements ASTM C1019 Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout ASTM E514 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage Through Masonry 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Coarse grout and fine grout are defined by the aggregate size used in accordance with ASTM C476. B. Coarse aggregate and fine aggregate are defined in ASTM C404, Table 1. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL IMPROVEMENT DISTRICT MORTAR AND GROUT WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 04 05 12 - 2 B. Submit proposed grout mix design including aggregate data to show conformance to these specifications, including cement data to show conformance to these specifications and ASTM C595. Submit the proposed method of placing grout. C. Submit proposed mortar mix design including aggregate data to show conformance to these specifications, including cement data to show conformance to these specifications and ASTM C595. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with Section 01 25 10 - Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions. B. Maintain all materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign matter. C. Store sand only on smooth, well-drained ground free from dust, mud, and debris. D. Do not use bottom 6 inches of pile in mortar. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Integral mortar water repellent: a. ACM Chemistries, Inc.: RainBloc. b. BASF/Master Builders; MasterPel 240MA. c. Grace Construction Products; Dry Block. d. Krete Industries, Inc.; Gard Mortar Mix. e. Engineer approved equal. 2. Admixtures for grout a. BASF/Master Builders; Pozzolith. b. Sika Corporation; SikaGrout Aid Type II. c. Engineer approved equal. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Blended Hydraulic Cement: Comply with ASTM C595, Type IL (10] (MS), grey color. 1. Limestone content is limited to 10 percent. 2. Single brand of cement used throughout Work; brand approved by Engineer. B. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, standard masonry type. C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. D. Quicklime: ASTM C5, non-hydraulic type. E. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404. F. Mixing Water: Potable. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL IMPROVEMENT DISTRICT MORTAR AND GROUT WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 04 05 12 - 3 G. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with concrete masonry units that also contain integral water repellent by same manufacturer. H. Admixtures for Mortar: 1. Admixtures may be used to obtain the desired or required workability and may be used instead of lime. 2. Do not use admixtures which are detrimental to bonding characteristics or increase the efflorescence. I. Admixtures for Grout: 1. Admixtures for grout may be used only when approved by Engineer. Use in accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations to be included in the proposed grout mix submittal. J. Color: When colored masonry is specified, include integral grout color as approved by Engineer. Color shall match block color. 2.3 MORTAR MIXES A. Use ASTM C270, Type M or S mortar mix. Use the Property Method. B. Whenever a fire-resistance classification or rating is shown for unit masonry construction, provide mortar of type which has been tested and listed by UL for construction indicated. C. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM C270. D. Mix materials for a minimum of 3 minutes. E. Do not use masonry cement. F. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar. G. Provide water repellant treated mortar per water repellant manufacturer's recommended rate. When tested as a wall assembly made with CMU containing integral water repellent manufacturer’s block additive according to ASTM E514, with test period extended to 24 hours, show no visible water or leaks on the back of the test specimen. 2.4 GROUT MIXES A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM C476. B. Grout strength: 1. All masonry units: 2000 psi strength at 28 days. 2. Tested in accordance with ASTM C1019, 8-10 inches slump. C. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout. D. Mix materials for a minimum of 5 minutes. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL IMPROVEMENT DISTRICT MORTAR AND GROUT WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 04 05 12 - 4 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform laboratory test on mortar and grout in accordance with ASTM C109 using the same mix design as proposed for the Work. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Plug cleanout holes with block masonry units to prevent leakage of grout materials. Brace masonry for wet grout pressure. B. Install mortar and grout per requirements of Section 04 22 19 – Insulated Concrete Unit Masonry. C. Use coarse grout in spaces with least dimension over 2 inches. D. Use fine grout for grouting door and window frames in masonry. E. Remove excess mortar from grout spaces. F. Work grout into masonry cores and cavities to eliminate voids. G. Do not displace reinforcement while placing grout. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field quality control for masonry mortar and grout will be performed in conjunction with masonry prism testing specified in Section 04 22 19 – Insulated Concrete Unit Masonry. Separate tests for grout and mortar will not be required. B. If Mortar begins to stiffen within 2-1/2 hours, it may be retempered by adding water and remixing. C. Do not use mortar after it has begun to set. Use no mortar beyond 2-1/2 hours after initial mixing. D. Use grout within 2 hours after initial mixing. Use no grout after it has begun to set. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL IMPROVEMENT DISTRICT INSULATED CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 04 22 19 - 1 SECTION 04 22 19 INSULATED CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install insulated concrete masonry in locations shown on the Contract Drawings and in accordance with this Section. B. Work includes installation of ties, spacers, supports and other appurtenances necessary to meet Specifications and produce finished masonry structures. C. Work includes pre-installed individually molded, two-piece, interlocking, expanded polystyrene insulation inserts for Hi-R concrete masonry units. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcing. B. Section 04 05 12 – Mortar and Grout. C. Section 04 01 20 – Masonry Cleaning. D. Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) standards, most recent editions. ACI SP-66 ACI Detailing Manual ACI 530 Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures B. ASTM International (ASTM) standards, most recent editions: ASTM A36 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel ASTM A123 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products ASTM A153 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware ASTM C55 Concrete Building Brick ASTM C90 Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units ASTM C140 Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL IMPROVEMENT DISTRICT INSULATED CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 04 22 19 - 2 ASTM C1314 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms ASTM D1056 Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials— Sponge or Expanded Rubber ASTM D1752 Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction ASTM D2000 Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications ASTM D2240 Standard Test Method for Rubber Property—Durometer Hardness ASTM E514 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage Through Masonry ASTM C578 Specification for Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation ASTM C272 Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Core Materials for Structural Sandwich Constructions ASTM E84 Flame Spread Characteristics ASTM C303 Test Method for Density of Preformed Block-type Thermal Insulation ASTM E119 Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials C. International Code Council (ICC) IBC International Building Code, 2021 edition ICC-ES Report ESR-3508 (For Hi-R Block and Insulation Inserts) D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): Building Materials Directory 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide masonry with a compressive strength (f’m) of 2000 psi minimum at 28 days of age. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL IMPROVEMENT DISTRICT INSULATED CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 04 22 19 - 3 1. Submit masonry accessory product data. 2. Submit Hi-R Masonry Data C. Shop Drawings: Include, but not limit to, the following: 1. Complete bar schedule, bar details and erection drawings to conform to ACI SP-66. 2. Each type of bar marked with identification corresponding to identification tag on bar. 3. Length, type, and location of all splices. 4. Erection drawings shall be clear, easily legible and to a minimum scale of: a. 1/4 inch = 1 foot. b. 1/8 inch = 1 foot if bars in each face are shown in separate views. 5. Size and location of openings. 6. Do not use Contract Documents as erection drawings. 7. Block layout details at corners and openings for the Hi-R Block showing how the reinforcement and insulation is continuous at these locations. D. Samples 1. Submit samples of concrete masonry unit colors with texture ranges for selection of color. Full size samples of the blocks selected shall be submitted for final approval by Engineer after color selection, if requested. If the material specified is a colored and textured unit, the samples submitted shall be colored and textured units. 2. Submit samples of mortar colors for color selection by Engineer. E. Test Reports 1. Submit test reports from testing proposed concrete block masonry units showing compliance with ASTM C90 and IBC Table 2105.2.2.1.2, including aggregate data to show conformance to these specifications and cement data to show conformance to ASTM C595. 2. Submit test reports from testing masonry prisms. 3. Submit UL test data, wall system thermal performance test data, and ICC-ES listing for the Hi-R insulation inserts. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements 1. Concrete masonry shall conform to the International Building Code and ACI 530 and other applicable codes and standards of the governing authorities. B. Mock-ups: 1. Erect an 4-foot minimum high by 8-foot minimum long mock-up panel separate from the Work for approval by Engineer before starting masonry Work. Upon its approval, it shall remain at the Site as a standard for reference until all masonry Work is completed. 2. In each sample panel, include proportionate quantities of required textures and colors of masonry materials as specified herein, and include one outside corner. Use the selected colored mortar when applicable. 3. If mock-up panel is not acceptable to Engineer, construct additional panels as required. 4. All masonry shall conform to the standard of quality established by Engineer's acceptance of the mock-up panel. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL IMPROVEMENT DISTRICT INSULATED CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 04 22 19 - 4 1.7 WARRANTY A. Warrant to Owner that Hi-R insulation inserts are free from defects and are manufactured to meet physical properties and material specifications contained herein. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with Section 01 25 10 - Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions. B. Maintain all materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing and foreign matter. C. Store masonry units on pallets and protect from contamination and staining. Keep masonry units always covered. 1.9 PROJECT ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. General: 1. Protect masonry from excessive loading during construction. Provide shoring, as necessary. 2. At the end of each day, or at shutdown, cover the tops of all walls not enclosed or otherwise sheltered to protect masonry from weather. B. Temporary Facilities: 1. Construct and maintain temporary protection required to permit continuous and orderly progress of the Work. 2. In cold weather, provide and maintain heat sufficient to assure temperature above 32 degrees F within the protected areas. 3. In hot weather, provide and maintain shade to protect materials and mixing equipment from direct sunlight. 4. Remove all temporary facilities after completion of the Work. C. Cold Weather Construction: 1. Procedures prior to and during installation: a. Air temperature: 30 to 40 degrees F. 1) Heat mixing water and aggregate to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 degrees F at the time of mixing. b. Air temperature: 25 to 30 degrees F. 1) Heat mixing water and aggregate to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 degrees F at time of mixing. 2) Maintain mortar temperatures above freezing until used. 3) Heat grout water and aggregate to produce grout temperatures between 70 and 120 degrees F at the time of mixing. 4) Maintain grout temperatures above 70 degrees F until placed. c. Air temperature: Below 25 degrees F. 1) Do not place masonry. 2. Procedures after installation: a. Air temperature: 32 to 40 degrees F. 1) Protect from rain or snow for not less than 24 hours by covering with weather-resistant membrane. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL IMPROVEMENT DISTRICT INSULATED CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 04 22 19 - 5 b. Air temperature: 25 to 32 degrees F. 1) Completely cover with weather-resistant covering for not less than 48 hours. c. Air temperature: 20 to 25 degrees F. 1) Completely cover with weather-resistant insulating blankets for not less than 48 hours or provide other protection approved by Engineer. d. Air temperature: Below 20 degrees F. 1) Provide enclosed shelters and heating to maintain air temperature on each side of wall above 32 degrees F. for 48 hours. 2) Do not allow rapid drop in temperature after removal of heat. D. Hot Weather Construction: 1. Procedures prior to and during installation: a. Air temperature: Above 100 degrees F or above 90 degrees F with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph. 1) Maintain aggregate piles in damp and loose condition. 2) Produce mortar having a temperature below 120 degrees F. 3) Flush mixer, mortar transport container, and mortar boards with cool water before they come into contact with mortar. 4) Retemper mortar with cool water to maintain proper consistency. 5) Use mortar within 2 hours of initial mixing. b. Air temperature: Above 115 degrees F or above 105 degrees F with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph. 1) Implement requirements above plus provide shade for materials and mixing equipment to protect from direct sunlight. c. Air temperature: Above 120 degrees F. 1) Do not place masonry. 2. Procedures after installation: a. Air temperature: Above 100 degrees F or above 90 degrees F with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph. 1) Fog spray newly constructed masonry until damp, at least three times each day until the masonry is three days old. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Integral masonry water repellent: a. ACM Chemistries, Inc.; RainBloc. b. BASF/Master Builders; MasterPel 240. c. Grace Construction Products; Dry Block. d. Krete Industries, Inc.; Krete HQ (S) Plus e. Engineer approved equal. 2. Masonry accessories: a. AA Wire Products Co. b. Heckman Building Products, Inc. c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL IMPROVEMENT DISTRICT INSULATED CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 04 22 19 - 6 d. Engineer approved equal. 3. Expanded Polystyrene insulation inserts: a. Concrete Block Insulating Systems, Inc.; Hi-R inserts b. No equal. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Hollow Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Unit (CMU): ASTM C90, medium weight, color and face as shown on Drawings. 1. Sizes and shapes as indicated on Drawings or as required for conditions. 2. Face shell and web thickness: ASTM C90, Table 1. 3. Water Absorption: ASTM C90, Table 2. 4. Fire resistive units: UL rated. 5. Special shapes and faces: a. Hi-R concrete masonry units where shown on Contract Drawings b. Closed cell bond beam units over openings. c. Deep knock-out blocks for bond beams in field of the wall. d. Sash units for control joints e. Architectural faces as shown on the Contract Drawings. B. Preinstalled concrete masonry unit insulation for Hi-R masonry units: 1. Preinstalled in masonry units prior to delivery to Site. 2. Comply with ASTM C578, Type X. 3. Physical Properties: a. Moisture Absorption: Less than or equal to 1.0 percent by volume per ASTM C272. b. Flame spread: Less than 5 per ASTM E84. Insert shall cause no reduction in hourly rating. 4. Thermal resistance (R): 5.00 per inch of insulation thickness at 75 degrees F. 5. Density: 1.3 lb/cu ft per ASTM C303 6. Components: No fluorocarbons or formaldehyde allowed. 7. Shape: Two-piece, interlocking insert, overlapping at both head and bed joints with edges of adjacent inserts of the same type. C. Concrete Brick Units: 1. ASTM C55, of same type and weight as Hollow Load Bearing CMU. D. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent, when tested as a wall assembly made with mortar containing integral water repellent manufacturer's mortar additive according to ASTM E514, with test period extended to 24 hours, show no visible water or leaks on the back of the test specimen. E. Mortar and Grout: Refer to Section 04 05 12 – Mortar and Grout. F. Steel Reinforcement: Refer to Section 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcing, and as indicated on Contract Drawings. G. Sealants: Refer to Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL IMPROVEMENT DISTRICT INSULATED CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 04 22 19 - 7 H. Bond Breaker Strips: 15-pound asphalt saturated felt. I. Compressible Joint Filler: 1. Oversized 50 percent to joint width. 2. Closed Cell foam confirming to ASTM D1752, Type I. J. Back-up Rod: 1. 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. 2. Conform to ASTM D1056, round, closed cell foam. K. Control Joints: 1. Solid rubber section 5/8 inch thick with 5/16 inch flange conforming to ASTM D2000. 2. Durometer hardness of 80 when tested in accordance with ASTM D2240. 3. Fit neatly, without forcing, in masonry jamb sash grooves. L. Embedded Flashing Materials: Reinforced plastic flashing of manufacturer's standard composite plastic flashing as described below. 1. Metal foil, 0.33 mil thick, encapsulated between polyester film and bonded to fiberglass scrim reinforcement, with a total thickness of 7 mil, Dur-O-Wal, “FiberWeb 300", or equal. 2. Joint tape: Reinforced plastic flashing manufacturer's standard polyester tape, 2 inches (50 mm) wide by 2.0 mils thick. 3. Application: Use where flashing is fully concealed in masonry. 4. Adhesive for flashings: Of type recommended by manufacturer of flashing material for use indicated. M. Steel Lintels, Shelf Angles, and Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: 1. Steel shapes used in masonry construction shall conform to ASTM A36. Lintels and shelf angles shall be provided when shown on the Drawings. These steel members shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions with installer present, for compliance with requirements, tolerances, and other specific conditions affecting performance of unit masonry. B. Verify that anchors and flashings are correct and in proper location for roughing into masonry work. C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location and ready for roughing into masonry work. D. Beginning of installation means that mason accepts existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Lay out walls in advance for uniform and accurate spacing of bond patterns and joints. Properly locate openings, embedded items, movement type joints, returns, and offsets. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL IMPROVEMENT DISTRICT INSULATED CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 04 22 19 - 8 B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work as required. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing for the walls. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. General: 1. Build walls to thickness indicated on Drawings. 2. Build single-wythe walls to actual thickness of masonry units. 3. Build in flashing, reinforcing, weeps, and related items. 4. Perform all cutting with masonry saws. 5. Drill holes with power drills when required for piping, conduit, etc. 6. Install all masonry units in running bond and protect from displacement. 7. Cut as required to maintain bond pattern. 8. Avoid use of less than half-size units, whenever possible. 9. Do not use chipped, cracked, spalled, stained, or otherwise imperfect units exposed in finish work. 10. Build chases and recesses as indicated and required for work of other trades. Provide not less than 8 inches of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings, and between adjacent chases and recesses. C. Hi-R concrete masonry insulation inserts: 1. Install inserts prior to delivery to Site by concrete masonry manufacturer. 2. Unless otherwise indicated on Contract Drawings, leave inserts in place when grouting. D. Concrete Masonry Lintels and Sills: 1. For openings which do not show precast concrete or steel lintels, use concrete masonry lintel units and reinforced concrete fill as shown on Contract Drawings. E. Laying and Tooling: 1. Lay masonry units with face shells in completely filled bed and head joints. a. Butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. b. Do not slush head joints. 2. Head joints in lintels shall be mortared solid for full thickness of the wall. 3. Maintain nominal 3/8 inch joint widths. a. Tool all joints concave. b. During tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes and completely fill with mortar. 4. Point-up all joints at corners, openings, and adjacent work to provide neat and uniform appearance. 5. Remove any masonry that is disturbed after laying. a. Clean and relay in fresh mortar. b. Do not pound units to fit. c. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean, and reset in fresh mortar. 6. Toothing of masonry units will not be permitted. 7. Where work is stopped and later resumed, rack back 1/2 masonry unit length in each course. a. Remove loose units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL IMPROVEMENT DISTRICT INSULATED CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 04 22 19 - 9 8. As work progresses, build in items indicated on Drawings and specified. a. Fill in solidly with mortar around built-in items. b. Grout-fill space between door frames and masonry. F. Reinforcing: 1. Install vertical and horizontal reinforcing bars where indicated on Drawings. a. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. 1) Retain vertical reinforcement in position at top and bottom of each bar and at intervals not exceeding 160 bar diameters. b. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the reinforcing bars shall be located as follows: 1) Single vertical bar; centered in cell. 2) Double vertical bars; 2-3/4 inches from face of masonry. 3) Horizontal bars; 4 inches above the bottom of the masonry unit. c. Reinforce horizontal bond beams with 2-#4 bars unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. d. Lap splices a minimum of 54 bar diameters unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 2. Bar clearances: a. The clear distance between the surface of a bar and any surface of a masonry unit shall not be less than ¼-inch for fine grout and ½-inch for coarse grout. Cross webs of hollow units may be used as support for horizontal reinforcement. All reinforcing bars, except joint reinforcing, shall be completely embedded in mortar or grout and have a minimum cover, including the masonry unit, of at least ¾-inch when not exposed to weather or soil, 1½-inches of cover when exposed to weather, and 2-inches of cover when exposed to soil. G. Grout Placement: 1. For masonry grout lifts 4 feet and higher, cure all masonry for a minimum or 24 hours after placement before beginning grouting operations. Grout lifts less than 4 feet may be placed immediately after setting masonry. 2. Grout spaces less than 2 inches in width with fine grout using low lift grouting techniques. 3. Grout spaces 2 inches or greater in width with coarse grout using high or low lift grouting techniques. 4. When grouting is stopped for more than one hour, terminate grout 1-1/2 inch below top of upper masonry unit to form a positive key for subsequent grout placement. 5. Low lift grouting: a. Place first lift of grout to a height of 16 inches and rod for grout consolidation. b. Place subsequent lifts in 8 inch increments and rod for grout consolidation. 6. High lift grouting: a. Clean out masonry cells and cavities. b. Pump grout into spaces. Maintain water content in grout to intended slump without aggregate segregation. c. Limit grout lift to 48 inches and vibrate or rod for grout consolidation. d. Wait 60 minutes before placing next lift. 7. Fill all cells and cavities for solid grout construction. H. Lintels, Control Joints, and Sealants. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL IMPROVEMENT DISTRICT INSULATED CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 04 22 19 - 10 1. Provide vertical expansion, control, and isolation joints where indicated on Contract Drawings. 2. Refer to Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants, for sealant installation requirements. a. Seal all control and expansion joints. b. Provide reinforced masonry lintels whenever openings more than 12 inches wide are indicated on the Drawings without other structural support or other supporting lintels. 1) Allow masonry lintels to attain specified strength before removing temporary supports. 3.4 SITE TOLERANCES A. Maximum variation from plumb in vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls, and arises: 1. 1/4 inch in 10 feet. 2. 3/8 inch in a story height not to exceed 20 feet. 3. 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. B. Maximum variation from plumb for external corners, expansion joints, and other conspicuous lines: 1. 1/4 inch in any story or 20 feet maximum. 2. 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. C. Maximum variation from level of grades for exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines: 1. 1/4 inch in any bay or 20 feet. 2. 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. D. Maximum variation from plan location of related portions of columns, walls, and partitions: 1. 1/2 inch in any bay or 20 feet. 2. 3/4 inch in 40 feet or more. E. Maximum variation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns and thicknesses of walls from dimensions shown on the Drawings: 1. Minus 1/4 inch. 2. Plus 1/2 inch. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: 1. Masonry construction will be inspected by a Special Inspector selected by Owner and approved by the local Building Official having jurisdiction. Items subject to Special Inspection will be inspected in accordance with Chapter 17 of the International Building Code (IBC) at the specific frequency listed on the Contract Drawings. The Special Inspector will work under the direct supervision of Engineer. All costs of such inspection will be borne by Owner. 2. The Special Inspector will observe the Work for conformance with the design drawings and specifications in accordance with Chapter 17 of the IBC. B. Site Tests: 1. Sample and test concrete masonry units in accordance with ASTM C140. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL IMPROVEMENT DISTRICT INSULATED CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 04 22 19 - 11 a. Provide test results minimum of 5 days prior to start of masonry construction. b. Remove CMU immediately from site if CMU fails test requirements. 2. Testing of masonry prisms: a. Testing of Masonry Prisms: Engineer will have masonry prisms tested to assure compliance with the Specifications and the governing codes by a recognized testing laboratory. 1) Tests will be made in accordance with IBC Section 2105 at the following times: a) At the time of the construction of the sample panel, take at least 5 masonry prisms for each type of block indicated herein; except, separate prisms are not required for block which only varies by texture. b) At any change in materials during construction, make at least 5 masonry prisms for each type of block affected. c) As a minimum, make one set of at least 5 masonry prisms for each masonry structure, besides the structure that the sample panel is part of, or for each week in which block is laid, for each type of block involved; whichever occurs first. d) Additional sets of at least 5 masonry prisms may be required whenever, in the judgment of Engineer, additional tests are necessary to determine the quality of the materials. 2) Construct prisms in the presence of Engineer or Engineer’s representative. Use the same personnel who are laying the block in the structure to construct the masonry text prisms. 3) Make and test the masonry prisms as specified in ASTM C1314. Grout prisms after the required 24 hour minimum cure period, using the same grout used in the walls. 4) Compression tests made on sets of specimens made during construction shall include 2 prisms tested at 7 days after grouting and 3 prisms tested at 28 days after grouting. 5) The average compressive strength of prisms tested at 28 days after grouting, shall not be less than the specified masonry compressive strength. 3. Corrective Actions: If the compressive strength of the prisms, made during construction of the sample panel and tested as indicated, fails to meet or exceed the strength required, make adjustments to the mix designs for the mortar, or grout, or both, as needed to produce the specified strength. Retest masonry units to verify compliance with the requirements of ASTM C 90. 4. If the compressive strength of the prism, made during construction and tested as indicated, fails to meet or exceed that required, cut prisms or cores from the walls constructed in sufficient numbers and in sufficient locations to adequately determine the strength of the walls in accordance with IBC Section 2105. Those portions of the walls represented by specimens failing to meet the required compressive strength are subject to being removed and replaced. Take corrective actions as indicated above shall. 5. The costs of tests and test reports except for additional tests requested by Engineer will be paid by Owner. The costs of the additional tests and reports, when reports verify compliance with the Contract Documents will also be paid by Owner. When tests or reports do not verify compliance, the cost of all additional tests and reports will be borne by Contractor at no increased cost to Owner. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL IMPROVEMENT DISTRICT INSULATED CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 04 22 19 - 12 6. Store test samples in a moist environment until tested, unless directed otherwise by Engineer or the testing laboratory. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect the exposed faces of the masonry from staining by mortar, grout, weather, or other conditions and materials. B. When moisture protection is required, use light fog spray nozzles to cure mortar. C. Always protect tops of walls. Cover tops of walls with waterproof paper when rain is imminent and when Work is discontinued. D. Adequately brace walls until walls and roof are completed. Do not backfill below-grade walls until top decks and roofs are in place E. Provide sufficient bracing to protect walls against damage from elements, including wind and rain. F. Protect masonry against freezing for a minimum of 72 hours after being laid. G. Protect masonry from damage until final acceptance of Work. Damaged units will not be accepted. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean masonry in accordance with section 04 01 20 Masonry Cleaning. END OF SECTION DIVISION 05 METALS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL FABRICATIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 05 50 00 - 1 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Furnish, fabricate, and install metal fabrications in accordance with Contract Documents. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating B. Section 09 97 01 – Pipeline Coatings and Linings 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM) standards, most recent editions: ASTM A6 Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling ASTM A36 Specification for Structural Steel ASTM A47 Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings ASTM A48 Gray Iron Castings ASTM A53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless ASTM A123 Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. ASTM A197 Standard Specification for Cupola Malleable Iron ASTM A276 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes ASTM A307 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength ASTM A325 Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength ASTM A536 Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings ASTM A563 Specification for Carbons and Alloy Steel Nuts BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL FABRICATIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 05 50 00 - 2 ASTM A653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process ASTM A536 Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings ASTM A666 Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar ASTMA668 Standard Specification for Steel Forgings, Carbon and Alloy, for General Industrial Use ASTM A780 Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings ASTM A992 Standard Specification for Steel for Structural Shapes for Use in Building Framing ASTM A1085 Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded Carbon Steel Hollow Structural Sections (HSS) ASTM B209 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate ASTM B211 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Bar, Rod, and Wire ASTM B221 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes ASTM B308 Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Profiles ASTM B429 Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube ASTM F593 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs ASTM F594 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts ASTM F1554 Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105- ksi Yield Strength B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) standards, most recent editions: ANSI A14.3 Standard for Ladders - Fixed - Safety Requirements C. American Welding Society (AWS) Standards, most recent editions: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL FABRICATIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 05 50 00 - 3 AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code – Steel AWS D1.2 Structural Welding Code – Aluminum AWS D1.6 Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel AWS QC1 Specification for AWS Certification of Welding Inspectors AWS Welding Handbook D. American Water Works Association (AWWA) standards, most recent editions: AWWA C105 American National Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems AWWA C217 Petrolatum and Petroleum Wax Tape Coatings for the Exterior of Connections and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines E. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF), most recent edition: NSF 61 Drinking Water System Components, Health Effects. F. Federal Specifications: MIL-A-907E Anti-seize Thread Compound, High Temperature G. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), most recent editions: OSHA 1910.27 Fixed Ladders H. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC): SSPC-PA 1 Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Metal Fabrications: Defined as items to be fabricated from metal shapes, plates, or bars and their products. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of all metal fabrications to the Engineer for review. 1. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. 2. Submit layout drawings for grating showing the direction of span, type and depth of grating, size and shape of grating panels, seat angle details, and details of grating hold BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL FABRICATIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 05 50 00 - 4 down fasteners. Submit load and deflection tables for each style and depth of grating used. C. Submit ICC-ES report listing the ultimate load capacity in tension and shear for each size and type of concrete anchor submitted. Submit manufacturer’s recommended installation instructions and procedures for adhesive anchors. Upon review, by Engineer, these instructions shall be followed specifically. D. No substitution for the indicated adhesive anchors will be considered unless accompanied by an ICC-ES report verifying strength and material equivalency, including temperature at which load capacity is reduced to 90 percent of that determined at 75 degrees F. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All weld procedures and welder qualifications shall be available in the Contractor’s field office for review. B. Qualification of Welders: Use welders with current certifications (previous 12 months) for the material, type, and position of welding used. Certify in accordance with AWS Specifications according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code – Steel. 2. AWS D1.2, Structural Welding Code – Aluminum. 3. AWS D1.6, Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel. C. All welding shall be inspected by a Contractor-furnished inspector qualified in accordance with AWS requirements and approved by the Engineer. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with Section 01 25 10 - Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions. B. Metal fabrications shall be loaded for transport in such a manner that they may be transported and unloaded without being excessively stressed, deformed, or otherwise damaged. C. Protect metal fabrications from corrosion and deterioration. D. Store material in a dry area and do not place in direct contact with the ground. 1. Do not place materials on the structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to the members or supporting structures. 2. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Check actual locations of walls and other construction to which metal fabrications must fit by accurate field measurements before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee dimensions and proceed with fabricating products without field measurements. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL FABRICATIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 05 50 00 - 5 Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Concrete and masonry anchors: a. Hilti, Inc. b. ITW Ramset/Redhead. c. Simpson Strong Tie Company, Inc. d. Engineer approved equal. 2. Castings, trench covers, and accessories: a. D&L Foundry and Supply b. Deeter Foundry company. c. Neenah Foundry Company. d. Engineer approved equal. 3. All purpose metal framing a. Allied Tube and conduit. b. B-Line Systems. c. Unistrut Building Systems. d. Engineer approved equal. 4. Steel Ladder Rungs: a. Perforated “Traction Tread”; McNichols, Co. b. Engineer approved equal. 5. Floor hatches: a. Babcock Davis Associates. b. Bilco Company. c. Dur-Red Products. d. Engineer approved equal. 6. Anti-seize lubricant: a. AS-470 by Dixon Ticonderoga b. PURE WHITE by Anti-Seize Technology c. Engineer approved equal. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel: 1. Structural steel pipe shall be ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B. 2. Structural tubing shall be ASTM A1085. Furnish members full length without splices unless otherwise noted or approved by Engineer. 3. Welded anchor studs shall be headed concrete anchor studs (HAS), or deformed bar anchors (DBA), or threaded studs (TAS), as indicated in the Contract Documents. B. Steel Forgings: ASTM A668. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL FABRICATIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 05 50 00 - 6 C. Stainless steel: ASTM A666 and ASTM A276, Type 316 or 316L D. Aluminum: Alloy 6061 – T6 conforming to the following specifications: 1. Sheet and plate: ASTM B209. 2. Rolled Bars and Rods: ASTM B211. 3. Extruded bars, rods, shapes, and tubes: ASTM B221. 4. Rolled or extruded structural shapes: ASTM B308. 5. Extruded structural pipe and tube: ASTM B429. E. Iron: 1. Ductile iron: ASTM A536. 2. Gray cast iron: ASTM A48. 3. Malleable iron: ASTM A47, A197. F. Bolts and Anchors: 1. Standard Service (non-corrosive applications): Unless otherwise indicated, bolts, anchor bolts, washers, and nuts shall be steel as indicated herein. Threads on galvanized bolts and nuts shall be formed with suitable taps and dies such that they retain their normal clearance after hot-dip galvanizing. Except as otherwise indicated, steel for bolt material, anchor bolts, and cap screws shall be in accordance with the following: a. Anchor bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated, with nuts conforming to ASTM A563 and flat washers where indicated. b. Install high-strength structural connections using ASTM A325 bolts and nuts per ASTM A563, coated to match material being connected. 2. Corrosive Service: All bolts, nuts, and washers in the locations listed below shall be stainless steel. a. All buried locations except as noted below for pipe flange, fitting and coupling connections. b. All submerged locations. c. Inside hydraulic structures, below the top of the structure. d. Inside buried vaults, manholes, and structures that do not have a forced-air ventilation system and either a gravity drain or a sump with a sump pump. e. All chemical handling areas. f. Other locations indicated by the Contract Documents or designated by the Engineer to be provided with stainless steel bolts. 3. Stainless steel bolts, anchor bolts, nuts, and washers shall be Type 316 stainless steel, conforming to ASTM F593 for bolts and to ASTM F594 for nuts. Protect all threads on stainless steel bolts with an anti-seize lubricant suitable for submerged stainless steel bolts, to meet government specification MIL-A-907E and classified as acceptable for potable water use by NSF. Buried bolts in poorly drained soil shall be coated the same as the buried pipe. 4. Pipe Flange, Fitting and Coupling Connection Applications: Unless otherwise noted, all pipe flange, fitting and coupling connection bolts shall be carbon steel per ASTM A307, Grade A hex bolts, with nuts per ASTM A563. All bolts, nuts and washers shall be zinc plated. Protect all threads on bolts and nuts with anti-seize lubricant. a. Exposed Connections: For exposed pipe connections in buried vaults, manholes, and structures with forced-air ventilation and which drain through a gravity sewer or to a sump with a pump, prepare and coat bolts and nuts BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL FABRICATIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 05 50 00 - 7 after installation with the same system as the adjacent flanged piping, in accordance with Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating. b. Buried Connections: Coat all buried connections in accordance with Section 09 97 01 – Pipeline Coatings and Linings. Provide wax tape coating per AWWA C217 for steel pipe connections, including sleeve couplings and restrained sleeve couplings. For other pipe materials, grease and wrap connections per AWWA C105. 5. Bolt Requirements: a. The bolt and nut material shall be free-cutting steel. b. The nuts shall be capable of developing the full strength of the bolts. c. Threads shall be Coarse Thread Series conforming to the requirements of the American Standard for Screw Threads. d. Provide bolts with hexagon heads. Provide nuts conforming to Heavy Hexagon Series. e. Install all bolts and nuts with washers fabricated of material matching the base material of bolts, except that hardened washers for high strength bolts shall conform to the requirements of the AISC Specification. f. Install lock washers with washers where indicated and fabricated of material matching the bolts. G. Provide bolts of length such that after joints are made up, each bolt shall extend through the entire nut, but in no case more than 1/2-inch beyond the nut. H. Epoxy Anchors: Unless otherwise indicated, all drilled concrete or masonry anchors shall be epoxy anchors. No substitutions will be considered unless accompanied with ICC-ES reports verifying strength and material equivalency. 1. Epoxy anchors are required for drilled anchors where exposed to weather, in submerged, wet, splash, overhead, and corrosive conditions, and for anchoring handrails, pumps, mechanical equipment, and reinforcing bars. Provide threaded stainless steel rod, Type 316. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, epoxy anchors will also be permitted in locations not indicated above. 3. Products for concrete anchorage: a. HIT-RE 500-V3, Hilti. b. Set XP, Simpson Strong-Tie. c. Red Head C6+, ITW Ramset/Redhead. d. Engineer approved equal. 4. Products for masonry anchorage: a. HIT-HY 270, Hilti. b. Set XP, Simpson Strong-Tie. c. Red Head C6+, ITW Ramset/Redhead. d. Engineer approved equal. I. Expansion Anchors: Expansion anchors will only be permitted when specifically approved by the Engineer. Expansion anchors that are to be fully encased in grout may be carbon steel. For non-encased buried or submerged anchors, provide stainless steel anchors. When expansion anchors are indicated or permitted, provide the following: 1. Kwik-Bolt TZ, Hilti. 2. Strong-Bolt 2, Simpson Strong-Tie. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL FABRICATIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 05 50 00 - 8 3. Trubolt, ITW Ramset/Redhead. 4. Engineer approved equal. J. Corrosion Protection: 1. Hot-dip galvanize all miscellaneous steel metalwork after fabrication. a. Galvanizing: ASTM A123 or A653 with minimum coating of 1.5 ounce per square foot. 2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Ladders: 1. Ladders shall be of stainless steel or galvanized steel as shown on the Contract Documents. When material is not specifically noted, material shall be stainless steel. 2. Design to support minimum 300-pound concentrated vertical load with 150-pound concentrated horizontal load. a. Maximum allowable stresses per AISC manual. b. Maximum lateral deflection: Side rail span/300. c. Design in accordance with OSHA standards. 3. Fabricate ladders for the locations shown, with dimensions, spacings, details, and anchorages as indicated. Comply with requirements of ANSI A14.3. 4. Side rails, minimum sizes: Continuous, 1 1/2-inch nominal diameter pipe. Fabricate with eased edges, spaced 18 inches apart. 5. Rungs: 1-1/8 inch by 1-5/8 inch by 14 gage perforated “traction tread” rungs. a. Top rung level with top platform. 6. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails, plug weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 7. Support each ladder at top and bottom and at intermediate points spaced not more than 4 feet on center with welded or bolted steel brackets. 8. Size brackets to support design dead and live loads indicated and to hold centerline of ladder rungs clear of the wall surface by not less than 9 inches. 9. When required by Drawings, every ladder that does not have an exterior handhold shall be equipped with a pop-up extension. Pop-up extension device shall be manufactured of the same material and finish as the ladder with telescoping tubular section that locks automatically when fully extended. Upward and downward improvement shall be controlled by stainless steel spring balancing mechanisms. Units shall be completely assembled with fasteners for securing to the ladder rungs in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. B. Floor Hatches: 1. Where floor access hatches are called for on the Contract Documents to be mounted on a floor slab (including top slabs which are not covered with a roofing membrane) or on a concrete curb, the hatch shall be a flush type as indicated herein. 2. Material: Aluminum alloy 6061-T6 unless otherwise indicated. Provide Type 316 stainless steel hardware. 3. Design Live Load: Minimum 150 psf. 4. Provide hatch opening sizes, number and directional swing of door leaves, and locations as indicated on the Drawings. Sizes given are for the clear opening. Where the number of leaves is not indicated, provide double-leaf doors for openings larger than 42 inches in either direction. Unless indicated otherwise, locate hinges on the longer dimension side. Unless indicated otherwise, ladder hatches shall be a BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL FABRICATIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 05 50 00 - 9 minimum of 36 inches wide by 36 inches long, with the door hinge opposite the ladder. 5. Hatch shall have oversized recessed padlock clip that can accommodate a lock with a 2.5” shackle length. 6. Hatch shall be equipped with recesses safety grating for fall protection. 7. Door leaves shall be a minimum of 1/4-inch checkered pattern plate. Channel frames shall be a minimum of 1/4-inch material with an anchor flange around the perimeter. Hatches shall be provided with an automatic hold-open arm with release handle. Hatches shall be designed for easy opening from both inside and outside. 8. Aluminum surfaces in contact with other metals or concrete shall be painted for aluminum metal isolation. Caulk the mounting flange of access hatches for water tightness when mounted to concrete curbs. 9. Products: a. Type “APS” or “APD,” Babcock Davis Associates. b. Type “J” or “JD”, Bilco. c. Type “SLG” or “DLG,” Dur-Red Products. d. Engineer approved equal. C. Roof Hatches: 1. Where indicated on Contract Drawings, hatches mounted on a roof surface of whatever material shall be the integral raised curb type as indicated in Section 07 72 00 – Roof Accessories. D. Iron Castings: 1. Iron castings shall be of uniform quality, free from blowholes, porosity, hard spots, shrinkage, distortion, or other defects. They shall be smooth and well cleaned by shot blasting. Castings shall be prefabricated, conforming to ASTM A48 or A536. 2. Covers and grates shall fit together evenly, so that the cover fits flush with the surrounding finished surface and so that the cover does not rock or rattle when loading is applied. Round covers and frames shall have machined bearing surfaces. 3. Covers and grates with matching frames shall be designed to support the following loadings: a. Where located within a structure, the design loading shall match that required for the adjacent floor area, or, if no floor loading is given, a minimum of 300 pounds per square foot. b. Exterior covers and grates shall be designed for AASHTO HS-20 loading unless indicated otherwise. E. All Purpose Metal Framing: 1. Material: Carbon Steel. 2. Channels and inserts: a. Minimum 12 gage. b. Channels to have one side with a continuous slot and inturned lips. 3. Fittings: Hot-rolled steel strip and plate. 4. Nuts: Steel, ASTM A563, with toothed grooves in top of nuts to engage the inturned lips of channels. 5. Finish: Epoxy coated. Galvanize items which cannot be epoxy coated. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL FABRICATIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 05 50 00 - 10 2.4 FABRICATION A. Verify field conditions and dimensions prior to fabrication. B. Form metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated but not less than that needed to comply with performance requirements indicated. Work to dimensions indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials indicated or specified for various components of each metal fabrication. C. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces straight and sharp edges. D. Drill and punch holes with smooth edges. E. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient temperature in the design, fabrication, and installation of installed metal assemblies to prevent buckling, opening up of joints, and overstressing of welds and fasteners. Base design calculations on actual surface temperatures of metals due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Range: 0 degrees F minimum to 110 degrees F maximum ambient temperature. F. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs. G. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. H. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces. I. Welding 1. Welding shall be by the metal-arc method or gas-shielded arc method as described in the American Welding Society’s “Welding Handbook” as supplemented by other pertinent standards of the AWS. Qualification of welders shall be in accordance with the AWS Standards governing same. 2. In assembly and during welding, the component parts shall be adequately clamped, supported and restrained to minimize distortion and for control of dimensions. Weld reinforcement shall be as indicated by the AWS Code. Upon completion of welding, all weld splatter, flux, slag, and burrs left by attachments shall be removed. Welds shall be repaired to produce a workmanlike appearance, with uniform weld contours and dimensions. All sharp corners of material that are to be painted or coated shall be ground to a minimum of 1/32-inch on the flat. 3. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: a. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. b. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. c. Remove welding flux immediately. d. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing, and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL FABRICATIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 05 50 00 - 11 J. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners whenever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat- head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous. K. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. L. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. M. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. N. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes where water may accumulate. 2.5 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction, made flat, free from warps or twists, and of the required thickness and bearing area. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting as required. Hot-dip galvanize after fabrication. 2.6 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel studs for embedding into concrete. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. Provide steel framing and supports for applications indicated that are not a part of structural steel framework as required to complete the Work. B. Fabricate units to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and required to receive other adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. C. Fabricate from structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars of welded construction using mitered joints for field connection. D. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL FABRICATIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 05 50 00 - 12 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installing anchorages, including concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site. B. Inspect and verify condition of substrate. Correct any surface defects or conditions which might interfere with or prevent a satisfactory installation. C. Set sleeves in concrete with tops flush with finish surface elevations. Protect sleeves from water and concrete entry. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Set metal work level, true to line, plumb. B. In fabrication and erection of structural steel, conform to the requirements of the American Institute of Steel Construction "Manual of Steel Construction." C. Shim and grout as necessary. D. To the maximum extent possible, use bolted field connections. Where practicable, conceal the fastenings. When field welding is warranted, comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish/grind exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing, and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent. E. Unless notes or specified otherwise: 1. Connect steel members to steel members with 3/4-inch diameter high strength bolts. 2. Connect aluminum to aluminum with 3/4-inch diameter aluminum bolts. 3. Connect aluminum to structural steel using 3/4-inch diameter stainless steel bolts. 4. Connect aluminum and steel members to concrete and masonry using 3/4-inch stainless steel epoxy anchors. Provide a minimum of 5 1/2 inches of embedment into concrete or masonry. F. Do not field splice fabricated items unless said items exceed standard shipping length or change of direction requires splicing. Provide fully welded splices where continuity is required. G. Provide each fabricated item complete with attachment devices as indicated or required to install. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL FABRICATIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 05 50 00 - 13 H. Anchor metal items so that items will not be distorted nor fasteners overstressed from expansion and contraction. I. Install bollards in concrete as detailed. Fill pipe with concrete and round off at top of pipe. J. Center abrasive stair nosings in stair. K. Attach grating to end and intermediate supports with grating saddle clips and bolts. 1. Maximum spacing: 2 feet on center with a minimum of two attachments per support. 2. Attach individual units of grating together with clips or attachments at 2 feet on center maximum with a minimum of two clips per side. L. Coat ferrous metals in accordance with Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating. M. Coat surfaces of aluminum that will come in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood or dissimilar metals with the following: 1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint. 2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer. 3.3 DRILLED ANCHORS A. Drilled-in anchors and reinforcing bars shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Holes shall be roughened with a brush on a power drill, cleaned and dried. Drilled anchors shall not be installed until the concrete has reached the specified 28-day compressive strength. Epoxy anchors shall not be loaded until the adhesive has reached its indicated strength in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 3.4 SETTING LOOSE PLATES A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of bearing plates. B. Set loose level and bearing plates on wedges or other adjustable devices. After the bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with the edge of the bearing plate before packing with grout. 1. Use non-shrink grout in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture. 2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 3.5 CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780 BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL FABRICATIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 05 50 00 - 14 END OF SECTION DIVISION 06 WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ROUGH CARPENTRY WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 06 10 00 - 1 SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide and install miscellaneous rough carpentry as shown on the Contract Drawings and as specified herein. B. Section Includes: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 3. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 4. Interior wood trim 5. Plywood backing panels. C. Related Sections 1. Section 06 16 00 – Sheathing. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute ANSI / AITC A 190.1-1992 Structural Glued Laminated Timber B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) standards, most recent editions: ASME B18.2.1 Square, Hex, Heavy Hex, and Askew Head Bolts and Hex, Heavy Hex, Hex Flange, Lobed Head, and Lag Screws (Inch Series) ASME B18.6.1 Wood Screws (Inch Series) C. ASTM International (ASTM) standards, most recent editions: ASTM A153 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware ASTM A307 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength ASTM A563 Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts ASTM A653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ROUGH CARPENTRY WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 06 10 00 - 2 ASTM A666 Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar ASTM C954 Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness ASTM D3498 Standard Specification for Adhesives for Field-Gluing Plywood to Lumber Framing for Floor Systems ASTM D5664 Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Effects of Fire- Retardant Treatments and Elevated Temperatures on Strength Properties of Fire-Retardant Treated Lumber ASTM F1667 Standard Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples D. American Wood Council (AWC) standards, most recent editions: Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction National Design Specification (NDS) for Wood Construction with Commentary E. American Wood Protection Association (AWPA) standards, most recent editions: AWPA U1 Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood AWPA M4 Standard for the Care of Preservative-Treated Wood Products F. International Code Council IBC International Building Code, current for the Project per Drawings, General Structural Notes. G. U.S. Department of Commerce, National Institute of Standards and Technology, (NIST) standards, latest editions: PS 1 Structural Plywood PS 20 American Softwood Lumber Standard (ASLS) 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension. B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. ALSC: American Lumber Standard Committee. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ROUGH CARPENTRY WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 06 10 00 - 3 2. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 3. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. C. ICC-ESR: International Code Council Evaluation Service Report. D. S4S: Surfaced four sides. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Contractor Submittals. B. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. 3. For fire-retardant treatments specified to be High-Temperature (HT) type, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D5664. 4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. C. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D. Research/Evaluation Reports: ICC-ESR reports for the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project: 1. Wood preservative treated wood. 2. Fire retardant treated wood. 3. Power driven fasteners. 4. Powder actuated fasteners. 5. Expansion anchors. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with Section 01 25 10 - Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions. B. Stack and store lumber products flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ROUGH CARPENTRY WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 06 10 00 - 4 C. Deliver interior wood materials that are to be exposed to view only after building is enclosed and weatherproofed, wet work other than painting is dry, and HVAC systems are operating and maintaining temperature and humidity at occupancy levels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Metal Framing Anchors: a. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. b. Engineer approved equal 2.2 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: Document PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules- writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. B. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. C. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by document PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. D. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS A. Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project. 1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.4 WOOD PRESERVATIVE TREATED LUMBER A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1, Use Category 2, except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA U1, Use Category 1 with inorganic boron (SBX). B. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ROUGH CARPENTRY WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 06 10 00 - 5 C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls. 2.5 FIRE RETARDANT TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA U1, Use Category UCFA (Interior) and UCFB (exterior). B. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. C. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where otherwise indicated. D. Use Interior Type A, High Temperature (HT) for enclosed roof framing, framing in attic spaces, and where otherwise indicated. E. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Concealed blocking. 2. Roof construction. 3. Plywood backing panels. 2.6 DIMENSIONAL LUMBER FRAMING A. Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent. B. Wall Plates: No. 2 or Construction grade, Douglas Fir – Larch, WCLIB or WWPA grading rules. C. Framing Other Than Noted Above: No. 2 grade or better, Douglas Fir – Larch, WCLIB or WWPA grading rules. D. Exposed Framing: Provide material hand-selected for uniformity of appearance and freedom from characteristics, on exposed surfaces and edges, that would impair finish appearance, including decay, honeycomb, knot-holes, shake, splits, torn grain, and wane. 1. Species: As indicated above for load-bearing construction of same type. 2. Grade: No. 1. 3. 2.7 SHEATHING A. Refer to Section 06 16 00 – Sheathing. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ROUGH CARPENTRY WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 06 10 00 - 6 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Cants. 4. Furring. 5. Grounds. 6. Utility shelving. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber, Douglas Fir – Larch, 19 percent maximum moisture content. C. For exposed and concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content, Spruce Pine Fir species, Construction or No. 2 Common grade, WCLIB or WWPA grading rules. D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content, Douglas Fir – Larch species, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade, WCLIB or WWPA grading rules. Select pieces and cut to eliminate defects that will interfere with attachment and purpose. E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. F. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling. 2.9 INTERIOR WOOD TRIM A. General: Provide kiln-dried finish (surfaced) material without finger jointing, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. B. Softwood Lumber Trim for Transparent (Stain or Clear) Finish: Provide Grade Superior or C & Better finish, Douglas Fir-larch, WCLIB or WWPA grading rules. C. Hardwood Lumber Trim for Transparent (Stain or Clear) Finish: Clear red oak species, selected for compatible grain and color. D. Lumber Trim for Opaque (Painted Finish: Solid lumber, Grade 1 Common, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine species, WWPA grading rules. E. Moldings: Made to patterns indicated in WMMPA WM7 and graded according to WMMPA WM4. 1. Moldings for Transparent (Stain or Clear) Finish: N-grade, red oak species, selected for compatible grain and color. 2. Moldings for Opaque (Painted) Finish P-grade Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine species. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ROUGH CARPENTRY WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 06 10 00 - 7 2.10 UTILITY SHELVING A. Shelving: Made from 3/4-inch melamine-faced particleboard with radiused and filled front edge. B. Shelf Cleats: 3/4 inch by 3-1/2 inch boards of same species and grade indicated above for lumber trim for opaque finish. C. Shelf Brackets: Prime painted formed steel with provision to support clothes rod where a rod is indicated. D. Clothes Rods: 1-1/4 inch diameter chrome plated steel tubing. E. Rod Flanges: Chrome plated steel. 2.11 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: Document PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2- inch nominal thickness. 2.12 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure- preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot- dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A153. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: ICC ESR 1539. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Screws for fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. F. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A307, Grade A; with ASTM A563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. H. Concrete and Masonry Anchors: Refer to Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications. 2.13 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on Drawings. Design is based on products of Simpson Strong -Tie Co., Inc. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ROUGH CARPENTRY WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 06 10 00 - 8 Substitutions from other manufacturers must include ICC-ESR evaluation reports with test capacities that equal or exceed those of the Simpson product indicated. B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A653, G60 coating designation. 1. Use for interior locations where stainless steel is not indicated. C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304. 1. Use for exterior locations and where specifically indicated. 2.14 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. B. Adhesives for Gluing Wood to Wood, Concrete, or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Framing Standard: Comply with AWC's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. D. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. E. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated. F. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Provide metal clips for fastening plywood, gypsum board, or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches on center. G. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ROUGH CARPENTRY WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 06 10 00 - 9 H. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. I. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. ICC-ESR 1539 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. J. Use sinker or common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated. K. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered. 3.2 ERECTION A. General - Use pressure treated wood for wood members in contact with concrete or masonry, including wall, sill, and ledger plates, door and window subframes and bucks, etc. B. Interface With Other Work - Coordinate with other Sections for location of blocking required for installation of equipment and building specialties. Do not allow installation of gypsum board until required blocking is in place. 1. Firestops - a. Horizontal or vertical concealed spaces in walls, light coves, soffits, drop ceilings, and other features over 10 feet 3 048 mm in length or height, and at stairs, ceiling levels, floor levels, and other junctures of horizontal to vertical concealed spaces. b. Within concealed spaces of exterior wall finishes and exterior architectural elements, such as trims, cornices or projections, at maximum intervals of 20 feet 3 096 mm, length or height. 2. Sill Plates - a. Masonry Wall Plates - 1) Anchor 2x6 and 2x8 wall plates to top of block walls with 5/8 inch diameter anchor bolts at 32 inches on center unless noted otherwise. 2) Set plates on masonry bearing walls true and level to provide full bearing. Use mortar as specified in Division 04 for leveling if leveling is required. 3. Nailing - a. Top Plates - Spiked together, 16d, 16 inches on center. b. Top Plates - Laps, lap members 48 inches minimum and nail with 16d nails 4 inches on center c. Top Plates - Intersections, three 16d. d. Backing And Blocking - Three 8d, each end. e. Built-Up Corner Studs And Angles - Face Nail 16d, 16 inches on center. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ROUGH CARPENTRY WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 06 10 00 - 10 C. Roof And Ceiling Framing 1. Place with crown side up at 16 inches on center unless noted otherwise. 2. Install structural blocking and bridging as necessary and as described in Contract Documents. 3. Special Requirements - a. Roof And Ceiling Joists - Lap joists 4 inches minimum and secure with code approved framing anchors. b. Roof Rafters And Outlookers - 1) Cut level at wall plate and provide at least 2 1/2 inches bearing where applicable. Toe-nail to plate with three 16d nails. 2) Attach to trusses or other end supports with framing anchors described in Contract Documents. 3) Provide for bracing at bearing partitions. 4. Installation of Wood Trusses - a. Handle, erect, and brace wood trusses in accordance with TPI HIB 91. b. Do not install damaged or broken wood trusses. Replace wood trusses that are broken, damaged, or have had members cut out during course of construction. c. Do not set trusses until masonry bearing walls and masonry shear walls are complete. d. Provide construction bracing for trusses in accordance with TPI DSB-89. e. Provide continuous 2x4 horizontal web bracing as shown on truss shop drawings. 1) Secure bracing to each truss with two 10d or 16d nails. 2) Lap splice bracing by placing bracing members side by side on common web member. Butt splices are not acceptable. f. Unless directed or shown otherwise, provide diagonal 2x4 bracing between trusses at each line of horizontal web bracing. 1) This diagonal bracing shall be continuous and extend from junction of web and top chord of one truss to junction of web and bottom chord of different truss. 2) Install bracing at approximately 45 degree angle. Bracing will extend over three trusses minimum or more as determined by height of trusses and 45 degree installation angle. 3) Install brace on side of web opposite horizontal web bracing and nail to each web with two 10d or 16d nails. 4) Install one brace every 20 feet as measured from top of brace to top of next brace. 3.3 WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated on Drawings and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ROUGH CARPENTRY WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 06 10 00 - 11 3.4 WOOD TRIM INSTALLATION A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches long except where absolutely necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at interior returns and miter at exterior corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full- surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. 1. Match color and grain pattern across joints for clear and stained finish. 2. Install trim after wall sheathing operations are completed. 3. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads and fill holes. 4. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch maximum offset for reveal installation. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ROUGH CARPENTRY WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 06 10 00 - 12 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SHEATHING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 06 16 00 - 1 SECTION 06 16 00 SHEATHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide and install wood sheathing panels as shown on the Contract Drawings and as specified herein. B. Section Includes: 1. Roof Sheathing. 2. Composite nail base insulated roof sheathing. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) standards, most recent editions: ASME B18.6.1 Wood Screws (Inch Series) B. ASTM International (ASTM) standards, most recent editions: ASTM A153 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware ASTM B117 Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus ASTM C79 Standard Specification for Gypsum Sheathing Board ASTM C1396 Standard Specification for Gypsum Board ASTM D226 Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing ASTM D3498 Standard Specification for Adhesives for Field-Gluing Plywood to Lumber Framing for Floor Systems ASTM D5664 Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Effects of Fire- Retardant Treatments and Elevated Temperatures on Strength Properties of Fire-Retardant Treated Lumber ASTM E1677 Standard Specification for Air Barrier (AB) Material or System for Low-Rise Framed Building Walls ASTM F1667 Standard Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples C. American Wood Protection Association (AWPA) standards, most recent editions: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SHEATHING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 06 16 00 - 2 AWPA U1 Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood D. International Code Council: IBC International Building Code, current for the Project per Drawings, General Structural Notes. E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) standards, most recent editions: Fire Resistance Directory F. U.S. Department of Commerce, National Institute of Standards and Technology, (NIST) standards, latest editions: PS 1 Structural Plywood PS 2 Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ICC-ESR: International Code Council Evaluation Service Report. B. S1S: Surfaced 1 side. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Contractor Submittals. B. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. 3. For fire-retardant treatments specified to be High-Temperature (HT) type, include physical properties of treated plywood both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D5516. 4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. 6. For building wrap, include data on air/moisture infiltration protection based on testing according to referenced standards. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SHEATHING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 06 16 00 - 3 C. Research/Evaluation Reports: ICC-ESR reports for the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project: 1. Preservative treated plywood. 2. Fire retardant treated plywood. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Test Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Engineer 1. Fire Resistance Ratings: Indicate by design designations from UL’s “Fire Resistance Directory. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with Section 01 25 10 - Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions. B. Stack and store plywood and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Paper Surfaced Gypsum Wall Sheathing: a. G-P Gypsum Corporation. b. National Gypsum Corporation. c. United States Gypsum Company. d. Engineer approved equal. e. . 2. Oriented Strand Board Surfaced, Polyisocyanurate-Foam Sheathing: a. Atlas Roofing Corporation. b. Dow Chemical Company. c. Johns Manville; Berkshire Hathaway, Inc. d. Rmax, Inc. e. Engineer approved equal. 2.2 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Plywood: Either document PS 1 or document PS 2, unless otherwise indicated. B. Oriented Strand Board: Document PS 2. C. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness indicated on the Drawings. D. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SHEATHING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 06 16 00 - 4 2.3 PRESERVATIVE TREATED PLYWOOOD A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1, Use Category UC2. B. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. C. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Select first option in paragraph below and delete others if total treatment is required; otherwise, select second option with or without third option. E. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings and plywood in contact with masonry or concrete. 2.4 FIRE RETARDANT TREATED PLYWOOD A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA U1, Use Category UCFB. 1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated. 3. Use Interior Type A, High Temperature (HT) for roof sheathing and where indicated. B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Identify fire retardant treated plywood with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Engineer. D. Application: Treat plywood indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Roof and wall sheathing within 48 inches of fire or party walls. 2. Subflooring and underlayment for raised platforms. 2.5 ROOF SHEATHING A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1, Structural I. 1. Span Rating: As required to suit joist or truss spacing indicated on Drawings. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 19/32 inch unless noted otherwise on Drawings. B. Oriented-Strand-Board Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1, Structural I . 1. Span Rating: As required to suit joist or truss spacing indicated on Drawings. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 19/32inch unless noted otherwise on Drawings. 2.6 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. For roof and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A153. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SHEATHING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 06 16 00 - 5 B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: ICC ESR 1539. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. 2.7 WEATHER RESISTANT SHEATHING PAPER A. Building Paper: ASTM D226, Type 1 (No. 15 asphalt-saturated organic felt), unperforated. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIAL A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with ASTM D3498 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by manufacturers of both adhesives and panels. B. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.030 inch. 1. Primer for Flexible Flashing: Product recommended by manufacturer of flexible flashing for substrate. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction, unless otherwise indicated. C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. ICC ESR 1539 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code." D. Use sinker or common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood. E. Coordinate roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly. F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SHEATHING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 06 16 00 - 6 G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast. 3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1. Roof Sheathing: a. Nail to wood framing. b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. c. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends. 3.3 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to wood framing with screws. 2. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws. 3. Install boards with a 3/8-inch gap where non load-bearing construction abuts structural elements. 4. Install boards with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking. B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing boards but do not cut into facing. C. Vertical Installation: Install board vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges of each board with those of adjacent boards. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each stud. D. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches on center and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards. 3.4 FIBERBOARD SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C846 and with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Cover sheathing as soon as practical after installation to prevent deterioration from wetting. 3.5 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturers written instructions. 1. Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches, except that at flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width. 3. Lap flashing over weather-resistant building paper at bottom and sides of openings. 4. Lap weather-resistant building paper over flashing at heads of openings. 5. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to ensure that flashing is completely adhered to substrates. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SHEATHING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 06 16 00 - 7 3.6 PROTECTION A. Paper-Surfaced Gypsum Sheathing: Protect sheathing by covering exposed exterior surface of sheathing with weather-resistant sheathing paper securely fastened to framing. Apply covering immediately after sheathing is installed. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SHEATHING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 06 16 00 - 8 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 06 17 53 - 1 SECTION 06 17 53 SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide and install wood trusses as shown on the Contract Drawings and as specified herein. B. Section Includes: 1. Wood roof trusses. 2. Wood truss bracing. 3. Metal truss accessories. C. Related Sections 1. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications 2. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) standards, most recent editions: ASME B18.2.1 Square, Hex, Heavy Hex, and Askew Head Bolts and Hex, Heavy Hex, Hex Flange, Lobed Head, and Lag Screws (Inch Series) ASME B18.6.1 Wood Screws (Inch Series) B. ASTM International (ASTM) standards, most recent editions: ASTM A153 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware ASTM A307 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength ASTM A563 Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts ASTM A653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process ASTM A780 Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings ASTM D5664 Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Effects of Fire- Retardant Treatments and Elevated Temperatures on Strength Properties of Fire-Retardant Treated Lumber BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 06 17 53 - 2 ASTM F1667 Standard Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples C. American Wood Council (AWC) standards, most recent editions: National Design Specification (NDS) for Wood Construction with Commentary D. American Wood Protection Association (AWPA) standards, most recent editions: AWPA U1 Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood E. Society For Protection of (SSPC) standards, latest editions: SSPC Paint 20 SSPC-Paint 20, Zinc-Rich Coating (Type I Inorganic and Type II Organic) F. Truss Plate Institute (TPI) standards, most recent editions TPI 1 National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction TPI DSB Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses TPI HIB Commentary and Recommendations for Handling, Installing and Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses G. U.S. Department of Commerce, National Institute of Standards and Technology, (NIST) standards, latest editions: PS 20 American Softwood Lumber Standard (ASLS) 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Fabricated wood Trusses: Planar structural units consisting of metal plate connected members fabricated from dimensional lumber and cut and assembled before delivery to Project site. B. TPI: Truss Plate Institute, Inc. C. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension. D. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. ALSC: American Lumber Standard Committee. 2. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 3. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. E. ICC-ESR: International Code Council Evaluation Service Report. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 06 17 53 - 3 F. S4S: Surfaced four sides. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Contractor Submittals. B. Product Data: For wood preservative treated lumber, fire-retardant treated lumber, metal- plate connectors, metal truss accessories, and fasteners. 1. Include data for wood preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. 3. For fire-retardant treatments specified to be High-Temperature (HT) type, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664. 4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to truss fabricator. 5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. C. Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details for trusses. 1. Prepare shop drawings at the minimum scale shown on the Contract Drawings. 2. Prepare shop drawings which are not reproductions of the Contract Drawings. 3. Include individual truss drawings, signed and sealed by a professional engineer licensed to practice in the state of Utah, verifying accordance with the building code and design requirements shown on the Contract Drawings. As a minimum, include the following information. a. Description of design criteria b. Engineering analysis depicting member forces/stresses and truss deflection. c. Truss member grades and sizes and connections at truss joints. d. Truss support reactions for each load case. e. Top chord, bottom chord, and web bracing requirements. f. Indicate type, size, material, finish, design values, orientation, and location of metal connector plates. g. Show splice details and bearing details. 4. Show location, pitch, span, camber, configuration, and spacing for each type of truss required. 5. Plan and details for the type and location of all permanent lateral and diagonal bracing and/or blocking required in the top chord, bottom chord, and web planes – diaphragms excluded. 6. Provide templates or location drawings for installation of any required anchor bolts. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 06 17 53 - 4 7. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer licensed to practice in Utah, and responsible for their preparation. D. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review. E. Qualification Data: For metal-plate manufacturer and truss fabricator. F. Research/Evaluation Reports: ICC-ESR reports for the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project: 1. Wood-preservative-treated lumber. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Metal-plate connectors. 4. Metal truss accessories. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with Section 01 25 10 - Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions. B. Metal Connector-Plate Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer that is a member of TPI and that complies with quality-control procedures in TPI 1 for manufacture of connector plates. 1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. 2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer. C. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that participates in a recognized quality-assurance program that complies with quality-control procedures in TPI 1 and that involves third-party inspection by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Engineer. D. Source Limitations for Connector Plates: Obtain metal connector plates from a single manufacturer. E. Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of TPI 1, TPI DSB, and TPI HIB. F. Wood Structural Design Standard: Comply with applicable requirements in AWC’s "National Design Specifications for Wood Construction" and its "Supplement." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with Section 01 25 10 - Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions. B. Handle and store trusses to comply with recommendations of TPI HIB, "Commentary and Recommendations for Handling, Installing & Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses." 1. Store trusses flat, off of ground, and adequately supported to prevent lateral bending. 2. Protect trusses from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 06 17 53 - 5 3. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. 4. Inspect trusses showing discoloration, corrosion, or other evidence of deterioration. Discard and replace trusses that are damaged or defective. 5. Time delivery and erection of trusses to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid delaying progress of other trades whose work must follow erection of trusses. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable. 1. Metal Connector Plates a. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc. b. CompuTrus, Inc. c. Eagle Metal Products. d. MiTek Industries, Inc.; a subsidiary of Berkshire Hathaway, Inc. e. Engineer approved equal. 2. Metal Truss Accessories a. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. b. Engineer approved equal. 2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Structural Performance: Provide metal-plate-connected wood trusses capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. Comply with requirements in TPI 1 unless more stringent requirements are specified below. B. Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. C. Connector Plate Design 1. Proportion for full member design loads without considering wood-to-wood bearing. 2. Stress increase for the value of a connector will not be allowed in any circumstance. 3. Increase net area of connector plates by 25 percent above that required by calculated stresses. Increase area of connector plate by increasing the plate dimension in each direction. 4. Design for a single connection per joint per side. 5. Minimum size of any plate connector is 15 square inches. 6. Minimum bite of any connector on a truss member is 2-1/2 inches. D. Maximum Deflection Under Design Loads 1. Roof Trusses: Live load vertical deflection of 1/360 of span. 2. Floor Trusses: Live load vertical deflection of 1/480 of span. 2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Lumber: Document PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules- BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 06 17 53 - 6 writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece. 3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by document PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing. B. Grade and Species: Provide dimension lumber of any species for truss chord and web members, graded as follows and of the following minimum design values for size of member required according to AWC’s “National Design Specifications for Wood Construction” and its “Supplement;” 1. Grading Method: Visual or mechanical. 2. Design Values: Modulus of elasticity of at least 1,400,000 psi and an extreme fiber stress in bending of at least 700 psi C. Minimum Chord Size for Roof Trusses: 2 by 6 inches nominal for both top and bottom chords. D. Minimum Web Size for Roof Trusses: 2 by 4 inches nominal. E. Permanent Bracing: Provide wood bracing that complies with requirements of truss manufacturer and as specified in Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry. 2.4 WOOD PRESERVATIVE TREATED LUMBER A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1, Use Category 2, except that trusses that are not in contact with the ground and are continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA U1, Use Category 1 with inorganic boron (SBX). B. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. C. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. D. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. E. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece. F. Application: Treat trusses where indicated on Drawings. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 06 17 53 - 7 2.5 FIRE RETARDANT TREATED WOOD A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA U1, Use Category UCFA (Interior) and UCFB (exterior). B. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. C. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where otherwise indicated. D. Use Interior Type A, High Temperature (HT) for enclosed roof trusses and where otherwise indicated. E. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. For exposed trusses and bracing indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece. 2. For exposed trusses and bracing indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. F. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings. 2.6 METAL CONNECTOR PLATES A. General: Fabricate connector plates to comply with TPI 1. B. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653; Structural Steel (SS), high-strength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G60 coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch thick. C. Use for all trusses unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 2.7 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. Where trusses are exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A153. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: ICC ESR 1539. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A307, Grade A; with ASTM A563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 06 17 53 - 8 G. Concrete and Masonry Anchors: Refer to Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications. 2.8 METAL TRUSS ACCESSORIES A. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on Drawings. Design is based on products of Simpson Strong -Tie Co., Inc. Substitutions from other manufacturers must include ICC-ESR evaluation reports with test capacities that equal or exceed those of the Simpson product indicated. B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A653, G60 coating designation. 1. Use for all trusses unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-aPaint 20, with dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight. 2.10 FABRICATION A. Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles, and sizes to produce close fitting joints. B. Fabricate metal connector plates to sizes, configurations, thicknesses, and anchorage details shown on the Contractor’s submittal drawings. C. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated; use jigs or other means to ensure uniformity and accuracy of assembly with joints closely fitted to comply with tolerances in TPI 1. Position members to produce design camber indicated. D. Fabricate wood trusses within manufacturing tolerances in TPI 1. E. Connect truss members by metal connector plates located and securely embedded simultaneously in both sides of wood members by air or hydraulic press. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install wood trusses only after supporting construction is in place and is braced and secured. B. If trusses are delivered to Project site in more than one piece, assemble trusses before installing. C. Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, exercising care not to damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane bending or other causes. D. Install and brace trusses according to TPI recommendations and as indicated. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 06 17 53 - 9 E. Install trusses plumb, square, and true to line and securely fasten to supporting construction. F. Space trusses as indicated on the Drawings; adjust and align trusses in location before permanently fastening. G. Anchor trusses securely at bearing points; use metal truss tie-downs or floor truss hangers as applicable. Install fasteners through each fastener hole in truss accessories according to manufacturer's fastening schedules and written instructions. H. Securely connect each truss ply as shown on Contractor’s submittal drawings when required for forming built-up girder trusses. I. Support trusses at girder trusses as indicated on the Drawings. J. Install and fasten temporary and permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of permanent bracing where terminating at walls or beams. K. When floor trusses are required, install and fasten strongback bracing vertically against vertical web of parallel-chord floor trusses at centers indicated. L. Install wood trusses within installation tolerances in TPI 1. M. Do not cut or remove truss members. N. Replace wood trusses that are damaged or do not meet requirements. O. Do not alter trusses in field. 3.2 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. B. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on exposed surfaces with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A780 and manufacturer’s written instructions. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 06 17 53 - 10 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 14 00 - 1 SECTION 07 14 00 FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide and apply single-component, fluid-applied liquid waterproofing system to below grade concrete slabs, walls, and footings, including surface preparation. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete B. Section 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry C. Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM) standards, most recent editions: ASTM C836 Standard Specification for High Solids Content, Cold Liquid- Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane for Use with Separate Wearing Course ASTM D41 Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing ASTM D412 Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers—Tension ASTM D1644 Standard Test Methods for Nonvolatile Content of Varnishes ASTM D4263 Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method ASTM E96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 14 00 - 2 C. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins to adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions which may be required. D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. E. Product Test Reports: For waterproofing, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. F. Field quality-control reports. G. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that is approved or licensed by manufacturer for installation of waterproofing required for this Project and is eligible to receive special warranties specified. B. Source Limitations: Obtain waterproofing materials from single source from single manufacturer. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review waterproofing requirements including surface preparation, substrate condition and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and protection and repairs. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with Section 01 25 10 - Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer. C. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life. D. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate, or when temperature is below 0 Degrees F. 1. Do not apply membrane when air, material, or surface temperatures are expected to fall below 30 Degrees F within four hours of completed application. 2. Do not apply membrane if rainfall is forecast or imminent within 12 hours. 3. Do not apply waterproofing membrane to any surfaces containing frost. 4. Consult manufacturer for applications to green concrete. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 14 00 - 3 B. Maintain adequate ventilation during application and curing of waterproofing materials. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents, and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Provide written warranty signed by waterproofing manufacturer and installer agreeing to repair or replace waterproofing that does not meet requirements or that does not remain watertight within the specified warranty period. C. Warranty Period: 3 years after date of Substantial Completion. D. Warranty does not include failure of waterproofing due to failure of substrate or formation of new joints and cracks in substrate that exceed 1/16 inch in width. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers and products are acceptable: 1. Fluid Applied Waterproofing: a. Epro Services, Inc., Ecobase Waterproofing Membrane. b. Tremco Barrier Solutions, Tuff-N-Dri H8 Waterproofing. c. Engineer approved equal. 2.2 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Waterproofing Membrane: 1. Single-component, polymer-enhanced liquid-applied membrane with the following minimum properties: a. Solids content, ASTM D1644, 60% minimum. b. Tensile Strength, ASTM D412: 15 psi, minimum. c. Elongation, ASTM D412: 1100%, minimum. d. Water Vapor Transmission, ASTM E96: 1 perms maximum (40 mil dry coat). e. Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance, 8 feet water head, minimum. f. Adhesion, ASTM C836, minimum 11 lb/inch to peel from concrete and masonry. B. Sealants and Accessories: Manufacturer's recommended sealants and accessories. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 14 00 - 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. 2. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D4263. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application. B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction. C. Close off penetrations to prevent spillage and migration of waterproofing fluids. D. Remove grease, oil, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete. E. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, and other voids. 3.3 JOINTS, CRACKS, AND TERMINATIONS A. Prepare and treat substrates to receive waterproofing membrane, including expansion joints, construction joints, cracks, deck drains, corners, and penetrations according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 MEMBRANE APPLICATION A. Apply using appropriate equipment and nozzles, per manufacturer’s recommendations. Start application with manufacturer's authorized representative present. B. Membrane: Spray apply asphalt emulsion membrane to substrates and adjoining surfaces indicated. Spread to a minimum wet thickness per manufacturer’s specification to achieve listed hydrostatic resistance, minimum of 60 mils. C. Apply waterproofing over prepared joints and up wall terminations and vertical surfaces to heights indicated or required by manufacturer. D. Allow product to cure prior to backfilling. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 14 00 - 5 E. When buried surfaces that have been waterproofed are not backfilled within 30 days of membrane applications, membrane shall be coated with whitewash. Any formula for mixing the whitewash may be used which is not detrimental to the membrane and produces a uniformly coated white surface which remains until backfill is placed. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Engage a full-time site representative qualified by waterproofing membrane manufacturer to inspect substrate conditions; surface preparation; and application of the membrane, flashings, protection, and drainage components; furnish daily reports to Engineer. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. B. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 14 00 - 6 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT THERMAL INSULATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 21 00 - 1 SECTION 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install building insulation as shown on the Contract Drawings in the following locations: 1. Concealed building insulation 2. Safing 1.2 REFERENCES ASTM International (ASTM) standards, most recent editions: ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ASTM E119 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials ASTM E136 Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 deg C. ASTM C578 Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation ASTM C612 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation ASTM C665 Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing ASTM C1029 Standard Specification for Spray-Applied Rigid Cellular Polyurethane Thermal Insulation 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures. B. Manufacturer’s Certificate: For each product, provide written letter, signed by manufacturer, certifying that products provided meet or exceed specified requirements. C. Test Reports: Provide test report, produced by an independent laboratory, showing test results that indicate physical properties of the products provided meet or exceed the requirements of this Section. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT THERMAL INSULATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 21 00 - 2 D. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Submit the following: 1. General installation/application instructions. 2. Environmental conditions required for installation and installation techniques. 3. Safety requirements for application of product. E. Product Data 1. Product test reports from and based on tests performed by a qualified independent testing agency evidencing compliance of insulation products with specified requirements including those for thermal resistance, fire test response characteristics, water vapor transmission, water absorption, and other properties, based on comprehensive testing of current products. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with Section 01 25 10 - Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions. B. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. C. Protect plastic insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type of building insulation from a single source with resources to provide products complying with requirements indicated without delaying the Work. B. Fire Test Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire test response characteristics indicated on Contract Drawings or specified elsewhere in this Section as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. Conform to the following standards: 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E84. 2. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E136. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT THERMAL INSULATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 21 00 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: a. Amoco Foam Products Company b. DiversiFoam Products c. Dow Chemical Company d. UC Industries, Inc.; Owens Corning Company e. Engineer approved equal 2. Closed-Cell Polyurethane Spray Foam Insulation: a. BASF Corporation b. Dow Chemical Company c. Gaco Western, Inc. d. Henry Company e. SWD Urethane Company f. Engineer approved equal 3. Glass Fiber Insulation: a. CertainTeed Corporation b. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH c. Owens Corning Fiberglas Corporation d. Johns Manville Corporation e. Engineer approved equal 4. Vapor Retarders: a. DURA SKRIM 6WW; Raven Industries, Inc. b. Griffolyn T 65; Reef Industries, Inc., Griffolyn Div. c. Engineer approved equal 5. Adhesively Attached, Spindle Type Anchors: a. TACTOO Insul Hangers; AGM Industries, Inc. b. Spindle Type Gemco Hangers; Gemco c. Engineer approved equal 6. Anchor Adhesives: a. TACTOO Adhesive; AGM Industries, Inc. b. Tuff Bond Hanger Adhesive; Gemco c. Engineer approved equal 2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS A. Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements specified herein and with referenced standards. 1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. B. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular polystyrene thermal insulation formed from polystyrene base resin by an extrusion process using hydrochlorofluorocarbons as blowing agent to comply with ASTM C578 for type and with other requirements indicated below: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT THERMAL INSULATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 21 00 - 4 1. Type IV, 1.60 lb/cu. ft. minimum density, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed indices of 75 and 450, respectively. 3. Recycled Content: Not less than 50 percent blend of postconsumer and recovered polystyrene resins. C. Unfaced Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation: Thermal insulation combining mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing). 1. Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass. 2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively. D. Faced Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C665, Type III (blankets with reflective membrane facing), Class A (membrane faced surface with a flame spread of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil scrim kraft, foil scrim, or foil scrim polyethylene vapor retarder membrane on one face; consisting of fibers manufactured from glass. E. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C665, Type I; semi rigid mineral fiber blanket without membrane, Class 25 flame spread. Furnish in 2-3/4", 4" and 6" thicknesses. Provide minimum thickness as required to achieve a minimum 50 STC in all walls. 2.3 SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION A. Closed-Cell Polyurethane foam Insulation: ASTM C1029, Type II, with maximum flame spread and smoke-developed indices of 75 and 450 respectively, per ASTM E84. 1. Minimum Density: 1.5 pcf 2. Thermal Resistivity: 6.2 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F. 2.4 SAFING INSULATION AND ACCESSORIES A. Slag Wool Fiber Board Safing Insulation: Semirigid boards designed for use as fire stop at openings between edge of slab and exterior wall panels, produced by combining slag wool fibers with thermosetting resin binders to comply with ASTM C612, Type IA and IB. 1. Nominal density: 4 pcf 2. Combustion Characteristics: Passing ASTM E136 3. Thermal Resistivity: 4 deg F x h x sq ft/Btu x in at 75 deg F. B. Calking Compound: Material approved by manufacturer of safing insulation for sealing joint between foil backing of safing insulation and edge of concrete floor slab against penetration of smoke. C. Safing Clips: Galvanized steel safing clips approved by manufacturer of safing insulation for holding safing insulation in place. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT THERMAL INSULATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 21 00 - 5 2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Reinforced Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: Two outer layers of polyethylene film laminated to an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nylon cord or polyester scrim and weighing not less than 25 lb/1000 sq ft, with maximum permeance rating of 0.0507 perm. B. Vapor Retarder Tape: Pressure sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. 2.6 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. 2.7 INSULATION FASTENERS A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated with self locking washer in place; and complying with the following requirements: 1. Plate: Perforated galvanized carbon steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. 2. Spindle: Copper coated low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.105 inches in diameter, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. B. Insulation Retaining Washers: Self locking washers formed from 0.016-inch thick galvanized steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation securely in place, but not less than 1 1/2 inches square or in diameter. 1. Where spindles will be exposed to human contact after installation, protect ends with capped self locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap. C. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and to determine if other conditions affecting performance of insulation are satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or that interfere with insulation attachment. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT THERMAL INSULATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 21 00 - 6 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, unsoiled, and has not been exposed at any time to ice and snow. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER INSULATION A. On vertical surfaces, set units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer. B. Protect below grade insulation on vertical surfaces from damage during backfilling by applying protection board. Set in adhesive according to written instructions of insulation manufacturer. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. Seal joints between closed cell insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer. C. Set vapor retarder faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping. 1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation. D. Install mineral fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill cavities formed by framing members. Where more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. E. Stuff glass fiber loose fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT THERMAL INSULATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 21 00 - 7 3.6 INSTALLATION OF SAFING INSULATION A. Install safing insulation to fill gap between edge of concrete floor slab and back of exterior spandrel panels on safing clips spaced as needed to support insulation, but no further apart than 24 inches. Cut safing insulation wider than gap to be filled to ensure compression fit and seal joint between insulation and edge of slab with calking approved by safing insulation manufacturer for this purpose. Leave no voids in completed installation. 3.7 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose fiber insulation. B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than 3 inches. Fasten vapor retarders to framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners at maximum of 16 inches. C. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with adhesives or vapor retarder tape according to vapor retarder manufacturer's instructions. Seal butt joints and fastener penetrations with vapor retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates. D. Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer. E. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder. F. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT THERMAL INSULATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 21 00 - 8 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL ROOF PANELS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 41 13 - 1 SECTION 07 41 13 METAL ROOF PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Factory formed and field assembled, standing seam metal roof panels. 2. Metal soffit and fascia panels. 3. Downspouts and gutters. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 81 11 – Wind Design Criteria B. Section 07 62 00 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim C. Section 07 72 00 – Roof Accessories D. Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Architectural Manufacturers’ Association (AAMA) standards, most recent editions: AAMA 2605 Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels B. ASTM International (ASTM) standards, most recent editions: ASTM A653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process ASTM A755 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip Process and Prepainted by the Coil-Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building Products ASTM C920 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants ASTM C1289 Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board ASTM D226 Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL ROOF PANELS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 41 13 - 2 ASTM D1970 Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection ASTM D2244 Standard Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates ASTM D4214 Standard Test Methods for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ASTM E283 Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen ASTM E330 Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference ASTM E331 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference ASTM E1514 Standard Specification for Structural Standing Seam Steel Roof Panel Systems C. Factory Mutual Global (FMG) standards, most recent editions: FMG 4471 Approval Standard for Class 1 Panel Roofs D. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM) standards, most recent editions: Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products E. Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association (SMACNA) standards, most recent editions: Architectural Sheet Metal Manual F. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) standards, most recent editions: SSPC Paint 12 Cold-Applied Asphalt Mastic (Extra Thick Film) BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL ROOF PANELS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 41 13 - 3 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Metal Roof Panel Assembly: Metal roof panels, attachment system components, miscellaneous metal framing, thermal insulation, and accessories necessary for a complete weathertight roofing system. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of metal roof panel and accessory. C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal roof panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish between factory and field assembled work. 1. Accessories: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not less than 1 1/2 inches per 12 inches: a. Flashing and trim. b. Gutters. c. Downspouts. d. Roof curbs. e. Snow guards. D. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and roof mounted items. Show the following: 1. Roof panels and attachments. 2. Roof mounted items including roof hatches, equipment supports, pipe supports and penetrations, lighting fixtures, snow guards, and items mounted on roof curbs. E. Samples for Selection: For each type of metal roof panel indicated with factory applied color finishes. 1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection. F. Qualification data for installer. G. Maintenance data for metal roof panels to include in operation and maintenance manuals. H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.6 DEFINITIONS A. Metal Roof Panel Assembly: Metal roof panels, attachment system components, miscellaneous metal framing, thermal insulation, and accessories necessary for a complete weathertight roofing system. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL ROOF PANELS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 41 13 - 4 1. Installer's responsibilities include fabricating and installing metal roof panel assemblies. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of metal roof panels through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of metal roof panels and are based on the specific system indicated. 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Engineer, except with Engineer’s approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Engineer for review. D. Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide insulation material with the following surface burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, unless otherwise indicated. E. Preliminary Roofing Conference: Before starting roof sheathing construction, conduct conference at Project site. Review methods and procedures related to roof sheathing construction and metal roof panels including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Meet with Owner, Engineer, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency representative, metal roof panel Installer, metal roof panel manufacturer's representative, sheathing Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects metal roof panels including installers of roof accessories and roof mounted equipment. 2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 3. Review methods and procedures related to metal roof panel installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. 4. Examine sheathing conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and attachment to structural members. 5. Review structural loading limitations of sheathing during and after roofing. 6. Review flashings, special roof details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect metal roof panels. 7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and testing and inspecting if applicable. 8. Review temporary protection requirements for metal roof panels during and after installation. 9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after metal roof panel installation. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with Section 01 25 10 - Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions. B. Deliver components, sheets, metal roof panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal roof panels for protection during transportation and handling. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL ROOF PANELS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 41 13 - 5 C. Unload, store, and erect metal roof panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. D. Stack metal roof panels on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal roof panels to ensure dryness. Do not store metal roof panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. E. Protect strippable protective covering on metal roof panels from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of metal roof panel installation. F. Protect foam-plastic insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam plastic insulation materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal roof panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. B. Field Measurements: Verify locations of roof framing and roof opening dimensions by field measurements before metal roof panel fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, either establish framing and opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal roof panels without field measurements, or allow for field trimming of panels. Coordinate roof construction to ensure that actual building dimensions, locations of structural members, and openings correspond to established dimensions. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations, which are specified in Section 07 72 00 – Roof Accessories. B. Coordinate metal panel roof assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal roof panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory applied finishes within specified warranty period. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL ROOF PANELS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 41 13 - 6 1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Weathertightness Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace metal roof panel assemblies that fail to remain weathertight, including leaks, within specified warranty period. 1. Weathertight Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Thermal insulation for field assembled metal roof panels: a. Cool-Vent, Hunter Panels b. Engineer approved equal 2. Self-Adhering, Polyethylene Faced Sheet: a. Dri Start “A;” Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing b. Grace Ice and Water Shield; W.R. Grace & Company c. Roof Defender; Johns Manville International, Inc d. WeatherLock; Owens Corning e. Rainproof TM; Protecto Wrap Company f. Engineer approved equal 3. Air and Vapor Barrier: a. CCW-705; Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing b. Engineer approved equal 4. Fiberglass Mat Faced Gypsum Roof Board: a. Densdeck; Georgia-Pacific Corporation b. Engineer approved equal 5. Standing Seam Metal Roof Panels: a. AEP Span b. Berridge Manufacturing Company c. BHP Steel Building Products USA Inc. d. CENTRIA Architectural Systems e. MBCI; Div. of NCI Building Systems f. Engineer approved equal 6. Flush Profile Metal Soffit Panels: a. AEP Span b. Berridge Manufacturing Company c. BHP Steel Building Products USA Inc. d. CENTRIA Architectural Systems e. MBCI; Div. of NCI Building Systems f. Engineer approved equal 7. Snow Guards: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL ROOF PANELS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 41 13 - 7 a. Alpine SnowGuards, Div. of Vermont Slate & Copper Services, Inc. b. Berger Brothers Company c. Polar Blox d. Rocky Mountain Snow Guards, Inc. e. Engineer approved equal 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with performance requirements specified as determined by testing manufacturers' standard assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project, by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. B. Air Infiltration: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq ft of roof area when tested according to ASTM E283. C. Water Penetration: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E331. D. Wind Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL580 for wind uplift resistance class indicated. E. FMG Listing: Provide metal roof panels and component materials that comply with requirements in FMG 4471 as part of a panel roofing system and that are listed in FMG's "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FMG markings. 1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A 90. 2. Hail Resistance: SH. F. Structural Performance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E330: 1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the wind design information included in Section 01 81 11 – Wind Design Criteria and as shown on the Contract Drawings. G. Thermal Movements: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2.3 PANEL MATERIALS A. Metallic Coated Steel Sheet Prepainted with Coil Coating: Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot dip process and prepainted by the coil coating process to comply with ASTM A755. 1. Recycled Content: Provide steel sheet with average recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. 2. Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A653, G90 coating designation; structural quality. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL ROOF PANELS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 41 13 - 8 3. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. 4. Exposed Finishes: Apply the following coil coating, as specified or indicated on Drawings. a. High Performance Organic Finish: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1) Fluoropolymer Three Coat System: Manufacturer's standard three coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer, fluoropolymer color coat, and clear fluoropolymer topcoat, with both color coat and clear topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight, with a minimum total dry film thickness of 1.5 mil; complying with physical properties and coating performance requirements of AAMA 2605, except as modified below: a) Humidity Resistance: 2000 hours. b) Water Resistance: 2000 hours. 5. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil. B. Panel Sealants: 1. Sealant Tape: Pressure sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. 2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C920; elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal roof panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal roof panel manufacturer. 2.4 THERMAL INSULATION FOR FIELD ASSEMBLED METAL ROOF PANELS A. Faced, Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: 1. ASTM C1289, Type V, oriented-strand-board facing, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, based on tests performed on unfaced core. 2. Cross vent 1.5” air space to provide cold-roof system. 3. Mechanically attached to deck. 2.5 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Felts: ASTM D226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt saturated organic felts. B. Self Adhering, Polyethylene Faced Sheet: ASTM D1970, 40 mils thick minimum, consisting of slip resisting polyethylene film reinforcing and top surface laminated to SBS modified asphalt adhesive, with release paper backing; cold applied. C. Slip Sheet: Building paper, minimum 5 lb/100 sq ft, resin sized. D. Air and Vapor Barrier: Carlisle CCW-705 or approved equal. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL ROOF PANELS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 41 13 - 9 E. Fiberglass Mat Faced Gypsum Roof Board: 1. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Self tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self locking rivets and bolts, end welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal roof panels by means of plastic ca ps or factory applied coating. 1. Fasteners for Roof Panels: Self drilling or self tapping, zinc plated, hex head carbon steel screws, with a stainless steel cap or zinc aluminum alloy head and EPDM or neoprene sealing washer. 2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self drilling screws with hex washer head. 3. Blind Fasteners: High strength aluminum or stainless steel rivets. B. Bituminous Coating: Cold applied asphalt mastic, SSPC Paint 12, compounded for 15 mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 2.7 STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS A. General: Provide factory formed metal roof panels designed to be field assembled by lapping and interconnecting raised side edges of adjacent panels with joint type indicated and mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips in side laps . Include clips, cleats, pressure plates, and accessories required for weathertight installation. 1. Steel Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with ASTM E1514. B. Vertical Rib, Seamed Joint, Standing Seam Metal Roof Panels: Formed with vertical ribs at panel edges and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between ribs; designed for sequential installation by mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels and engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels, and mechanically seaming panels together. 1. Basis of Design Product: Berridge Manufacturing Company, ZEE-Lock Panel or a comparable product of one of the approved manufacturer’s listed above. 2. Material: Zinc coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 0.0269-inch thick. a. Exterior Finish: Fluoropolymer. b. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range. 3. Batten: Same material, finish, and color as roof panels. 4. Clips: Floating to accommodate thermal movement. a. Material: 0.0528-inch thick, zinc coated (galvanized) steel sheet. 5. Joint Type: Single folded. 6. Weatherseal: Provide factory applied extruded vinyl weatherseal. 7. Panel Coverage: 16 inches. 8. Panel Height: 2.0 inches. 9. Uplift Rating: UL 90. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL ROOF PANELS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 41 13 - 10 2.8 METAL SOFFIT PANELS A. General: Provide factory formed metal soffit panels designed to be field assembled by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners and factory applied sealant in s ide laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation. B. Flush Profile Metal Soffit Panels: Solid panels formed with vertical panel edges and flat pan between panel edges; with flush joint between panels. 1. Basis of Design Product: Berridge Manufacturing Company, VEE Panel or a comparable product of one of the approved manufacturer’s listed above. 2. Material: Zinc coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 0.0269 inch thick. a. Exterior Finish: Fluoropolymer. b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 3. Panel Coverage: 3-7/8 inches. 4. Panel Height: 0.500 inch 5. Sealant: Factory applied within interlocking joint. 2.9 ACCESSORIES A. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, fascia, corner units, ridge closures, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal roof panels, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal roof panels. 2. Clips: Minimum 0.0625-inch thick, stainless steel panel clips designed to withstand negative load requirements. 3. Cleats: Mechanically seamed cleats formed from minimum 0.0250-inch thick, stainless steel or nylon coated aluminum sheet. 4. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. 5. Closure Strips: Closed cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin foam or closed cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1 inch thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.0179-inch thick, zinc coated (galvanized) steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fascia, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal roof panels. C. Gutters: Formed from 0.0179-inch thick, zinc coated (galvanized) steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Match profile of gable trim, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch long sections, sized according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Furnish gutter supports spaced 36 inches o.c., fabricated from same metal as gutters. Provide bronze, copper, or aluminum wire ball strainers at outlets. Finish gutters to match roof fascia and rake trim. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL ROOF PANELS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 41 13 - 11 D. Downspouts: Formed from 0.0179-inch thick, zinc coated (galvanized) steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; in 10-foot long sections, complete with formed elbows and offsets. Finish downspouts to match metal roof panels. E. Snow Guards: Prefabricated, noncorrosive units designed to be installed without penetrating metal roof panels, and complete with predrilled holes, clamps, or hooks for anchoring. 1. Seam-Mounted, Fence-Type Snow Guards: Cast-aluminum stops designed for attachment to vertical ribs of standing-seam metal roof panels with stainless-steel set screws. 2. Color to match roof panel. F. Pipe Flashing: Premolded, EPDM pipe collar with flexible aluminum ring bonded to base. 2.10 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate and finish metal roof panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel. C. Where indicated, fabricate metal roof panel joints with factory installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a tight seal and prevent metal to metal contact, in a manner that will minimize noise from movements within panel assembly. D. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. 1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 2. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. 3. Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. 4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view. 5. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or metal roof panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL ROOF PANELS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 41 13 - 12 2.11 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal roof panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer. B. Examine roughing in for components and systems penetrating metal roof panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal roof panels before metal roof panel installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of interfering with insulation attachment. B. Install flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." C. Miscellaneous Framing: Install subpurlins, eave angles, furring, and other miscellaneous roof panel support members and anchorage according to metal roof panel manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.3 THERMAL INSULATION INSTALLATION FOR FIELD ASSEMBLED METAL ROOF PANELS A. Board Insulation: Extend insulation in thickness indicated to cover entire roof. 1. Erect insulation horizontally and hold in place with Z shaped furring members spaced 24 inches o.c. Securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to roof deck with screws spaced 24 inches maximum. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL ROOF PANELS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 41 13 - 13 3.4 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment and building paper slip sheet on roof sheathing under metal roof panels, unless otherwise recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. Use adhesive for temporary anchorage, where possible, to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under metal roof panels. Apply at locations indicated below, in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches. 1. Apply on roof not covered by self adhering sheet underlayment. Lap edges of self adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3 inches, in shingle fashion to shed water. B. Self Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free, on roof sheathing under metal roof panels. Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply at locations indicated below, in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3 1/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. 1. Roof perimeter for a distance up from eaves of 24 inches beyond interior wall line. 2. Valleys, from lowest point to highest point, for a distance on each side of 18 inches. Overlap ends of sheets not less than 6 inches. 3. Rake edges for a distance of 18 inches. 4. Hips and ridges for a distance on each side of 12 inches. 5. Roof to wall intersections for a distance from wall of 18 inches. 6. Around dormers, chimneys, skylights, and other penetrating elements for a distance from element of 18 inches. C. Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements specified in Section 07 62 00 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. D. Apply slip sheet over underlayment before installing metal roof panels. 3.5 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge, unless otherwise indicated or restricted by shipping limitations. Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structura l movement. 1. Field cutting of metal roof panels by torch is not permitted. 2. Rigidly fasten eave end of metal roof panels and allow ridge end free movement due to thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels. 3. Provide metal closures at peaks, rake edges, each side of ridge and hip caps. 4. Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self tapping screws. 5. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 6. Install ridge and hip caps as metal roof panel work proceeds. 7. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices and end laps to avoid a four panel lap splice condition. 8. Lap metal flashing over metal roof panels to allow moisture to run over and off the material. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL ROOF PANELS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 41 13 - 14 B. Fasteners: 1. Steel Roof Panels: Use stainless steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior and galvanized steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior. C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. D. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of metal roof panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. 1. Seal metal roof panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Seal side joints where recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants. 3.6 FIELD ASSEMBLED METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION A. Standing Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each standing seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. 1. Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners. 2. Install pressure plates at locations indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer approved motorized seamer tool so clip, metal roof panel, and factory applied sealant are completely engaged. 3.7 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather resistant performance. 2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet type expansion provisions BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL ROOF PANELS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 41 13 - 15 cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). C. Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered or lapped and sealed joints. Attach gutters to eave with gutter hangers spaced not more than 4 feet o.c. using manufacturer's standard fasteners. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. D. Downspouts: Join sections with 1 1/2 inch telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1 inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. in between. 1. Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building. E. Snow Guards: Attach bar supports to vertical ribs of standing seam metal roof panels with clamps or set screws. Do not use fasteners that will penetrate metal roof panels. 1. Install snow guards above entrances, adjacent to walking surfaces, at other areas where falling snow may be hazardous and at locations as recommended by the manufacturer and where shown on the Contract Drawings. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions and recommendations. F. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and metal roof panels. Fasten and seal to metal roof panels as recommended by manufacturer. 3.8 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal roof panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8 inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal roof panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal roof panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. B. Replace metal roof panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL ROOF PANELS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 41 13 - 16 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 62 00 - 1 SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following sheet metal flashing and trim: 1. Manufactured reglets. 2. Formed roof drainage system. 3. Formed low-slope roof flashing and trim. 4. Formed wall flashing and trim. 5. Formed equipment support flashing. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Architectural Manufacturers’ Association (AAMA) standards, most recent editions: AAMA 2605 Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels B. ASTM International (ASTM) standards, most recent editions: ASTM A653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process ASTM A755 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip Process and Prepainted by the Coil-Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building Products ASTM B32 Standard Specification for Solder Metal ASTM C920 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants ASTM C1311 Standard Specification for Solvent Release Sealants C. Factory Mutual Global (FM) standards, most recent editions: DS 1-49 Perimeter Flashing 4435 Approval Standard for Edge Systems Used with Low Slope Roofing Systems BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 62 00 - 2 D. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM) standards, most recent editions: Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products E. Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association (SMACNA) standards, most recent editions: Architectural Sheet Metal Manual F. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) standards, most recent editions: SSPC Paint 12 Cold-Applied Asphalt Mastic (Extra Thick Film) 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. C. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans and elevations. Distinguish between shop and field assembled work. Include the following: 1. Identify material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project. 2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. 3. Details for fastening, joining, supporting, and anchoring sheet metal flashing and trim, including fasteners, clips, cleats, and attachments to adjoining work. 4. Details of expansion joint covers, including showing direction of expansion and contraction. D. Samples for Selection: For each type of sheet metal flashing and trim indicated with factory applied color finishes. 1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Mockups: Prior to installing sheet metal flashing and trim, construct mockups indicated to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with t he following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work. 1. Locate mockups on-site in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Engineer. 2. Notify Engineer one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be constructed. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 62 00 - 3 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Construct mockups for the following type of sheet metal flashing and trim: a. Exposed trim, gravel stops, and fasciae. b. Copings. 5. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before start of final unit of Work. 6. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. a. When directed, demolish and remove mockups from Project site. b. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial Completion may become part of the completed Work. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1. Meet with Owner, Engineer, Owner's insurer if applicable, Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects sheet metal flashing and trim including installers of roofing materials, roof accessories, unit skylights, and roof mounted equipment. 2. Review methods and procedures related to sheet metal flashing and trim. 3. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and attachment to structural members. 4. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish copy of record to each participant. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with Section 01 25 10 - Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions. B. Deliver sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications undamaged. Protect sheet metal flashing and trim materials and fabrications during transportation and handling by applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping. C. Unload, store, and install sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. D. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of sheet metal flashing and trim with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 62 00 - 4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement. B. Provide and install roof edge flashing and copings capable of resisting edge and perimeter wind forces according to FM Approval Standard 4435 for roof Class 1-60. C. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of sheet metal and trim thermal movements. Base calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. D. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that do not allow water infiltration to structure interior. 2.2 SHEET METALS A. Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A653, (G90) coating designation; structural quality, mill phosphatized for field painting. B. Prepainted, Metallic Coated Steel Sheet: Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot dip process and prepainted by the coil coating process to comply with ASTM A755. 1. Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A653, (G90) coating designation; structural quality. 2. Exposed Finishes: Apply the following coil coating: a. High Performance Organic Finish: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1) Fluoropolymer 3 Coat System: Manufacturer's standard 3 coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer, fluoropolymer color coat, and clear fluoropolymer topcoat, with both color coat and clear topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight, with a minimum total dry film thickness of 1.5 mil; complying with physical properties and coating performance requirements of AAMA 2605, except as modified below: a) Humidity Resistance: 2000 hours. b) Salt Spray Resistance: 2000 hours. 2) Color: Custom color as selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range, to match existing, including deep tone colors. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 62 00 - 5 C. Zinc Sheet: Electrolytic, 99 percent pure zinc alloyed with 1 percent titanium and copper. 1. Finish: Bright rolled. 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 45-mil thick, consisting of a slip resistant polyethylene or polypropylene film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl or SBS modified asphalt adhesive, with release paper backing; specifically designed to withstand high metal temperatures beneath metal roofing. Provide primer according to written recommendations of underlayment manufacturer. 1. Thermal stability per ASTM D1970 after testing at 240 degrees F or higher. 2. Low-temperature flexibility per ASTM D1970, passes after testing at minus 20 degrees F or lower. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self tapping screws, self locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. 1. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal by means of plastic caps or factory applied coating. 2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self drilling screws, gasketed, with hex washer head. 3. Blind Fasteners: High strength aluminum or stainless steel rivets. 4. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width. C. Solder for Zinc: ASTM B32, 60 percent lead and 40 percent tin with low antimony, as recommended by manufacturer. D. Sealing Tape: Pressure sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with release paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, non-staining tape. E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C1311, single component, solvent release butyl rubber sealant, polyisobutylene plasticized, heavy bodied for hooked type expansion joints with limited movement. G. Bituminous Coating: Cold applied asphalt mastic, SSPC Paint 12, compounded for 15 mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 62 00 - 6 H. Asphalt Roofing Cement: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion per ASTM D4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application. 2.5 MANUFACTURED SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM A. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated with factory mitered and welded corners and junctions. 1. Material: Galvanized steel, 0.0217 inch thick. 2. Surface Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top edge. 3. Masonry Type: Provide with offset top flange for embedment in masonry mortar joint. 4. Flexible Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal counterflashing or where Drawings show reglet without metal counterflashing. 5. Counterflashing Wind Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing lower edge. 2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. Shop fabricate items where practicable. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. C. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 1. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. D. Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations. E. Seams: Comply with SMACNA “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual” Figure no. 3-2 and 3-3 as applicable to specific installations. 1. Standing Seams: Provide double lock standing seams (detail no. 25, figure no. 3 -3), with finish not less than 1-1/4 inch high. F. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet type expansion provisions in the Work cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than (1 inch) deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 62 00 - 7 G. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed to view sheet metal flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated. H. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. 1. Thickness: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured. 2.7 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum (96 inch) long sections. Furnish flat stock gutter spacers and gutter brackets fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by SMACNA but not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion joint covers, gutter bead reinforcing bars, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters. 1. Gutter Style: D and as detailed. 2. Expansion Joints: Built in. 3. Accessories: Continuous removable leaf screen with sheet metal frame and hardware cloth screen. 4. Gutters with Girth up to (15 Inches): Fabricate from the following material: a. Prepainted, Metallic Coated Steel: 0.0299 inch thick. B. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors. 1. Fabricate downspouts from the following material: a. Prepainted, Metallic Coated Steel: minimum 0.0299 inch thick. 2.8 LOW SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 8-foot long, but not exceeding 10-foot long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg. Miter corners, seal, and solder or weld watertight. 1. Joint Style: Standing seams. 2. Fabricate copings from the following material: a. Prepainted, Metallic Coated Steel: minimum 0.0396 inch thick. B. Roof and Roof to Wall Transition Expansion Joint Cover: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Prepainted, Metallic Coated Steel: minimum 0.0336 inch thick. C. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Galvanized Steel: minimum 0.0276 inch thick. D. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Galvanized Steel: minimum 0.0217 inch thick. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 62 00 - 8 E. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Galvanized Steel: minimum 0.0217 inch thick. F. Roof Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Galvanized Steel: minimum 0.0276 inch thick. 2.9 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Through Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 8 feet long, but not exceeding 12 feet long, sections, under copings, at shelf angles, and where indicated. Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches beyond each side of wall openings. Form with 2-inch high end dams. Fabricate from the following material: 1. Galvanized steel: minimum 0.040 inch thick. B. Openings Flashing in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-inch high end dams. Fabricate from the following material: 1. Prepainted, Metallic Coated Steel: minimum 0.0217 inch thick. C. Wall Expansion Joint Cover: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Prepainted, Metallic Coated Steel: minimum 0.0276 inch thick. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Galvanized Steel: minimum 0.0276 inch thick. 2.11 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Verify compliance with installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 62 00 - 9 3. Verify that required air or vapor barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Prim substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation and use primer for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 4 inches. Roll laps and edges with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. B. Apply slip sheet, wrinkle free, directly on substrate before installing sheet metal flashing and trim. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform and neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. 4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling and tool marks. 5. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. 6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar metals. 1. Coat side of sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene underlayment. 3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement or sealant where required for waterproof performance. C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 62 00 - 10 or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints. D. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1 1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws. 1. Galvanized or Prepainted, Metallic Coated Steel: Use stainless steel fasteners. E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation. F. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required for watertight construction. 1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 degrees F, set joint members for 50 percent movement either way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant type joints at temperatures below 40 degrees F. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants. G. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1 1/2 inches except where pretinned surface would show in finished Work. 1. Do not solder prepainted, metallic coated steel sheet. 2. Do not pre-tin zinc-tin alloy-coated stainless steel. 3. Do not use open flame torches for soldering. 4. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joints. Fill joints completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. 5. Stainless steel soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets, using solder for stainless steel and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and soldering. Comply with solder manufacturer’s recommended methods for cleaning and neutralization. 6. Copper soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets, using solder for copper. 7. Copper-clad stainless steel soldering: tin edges of uncoated sheets, using solder for coper-clad stainless steel. 3.4 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system. B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered joints or with lapped joints sealed with elastomeric sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchored gutter brackets spaced not more than (36 inches) apart. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 62 00 - 11 1. Fasten gutter spacers to front and back of gutter. 2. Anchor gutter with gutter brackets and straps spaced not more than 24 inches apart to roof deck, unless otherwise indicated, and loosely lock to front gutter bead.. 3. Anchor and loosely lock back edge of gutter to continuous eave or apron flashing. 4. Anchor back of gutter that extends onto roof deck with cleats spaced not more than (24 inches) apart. 5. Anchor gutter with spikes and ferrules spaced not more than 24 inches apart. 6. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated but not exceeding (50 feet) apart. Install expansion joint caps. 7. Install continuous gutter screens on gutters with noncorrosive fasteners, hinged to swing open for cleaning gutters. C. Conductor Heads: Anchor securely to wall, with elevation of conductor head rim at minimum of 1 inch below gutter discharge. D. Expansion Joint Covers: Install expansion joint covers at locations and of configuration indicated on Drawings. Lap joints minimum of 4 inches in direction of water flow. E. Downspouts: Join sections with (1 1/2 inch) telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely (1 inch) away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately (60 inches) o.c. in between. 1. Provide elbows at base of downspout to direct water away from building or connect downspouts to underground drainage system indicated. 3.5 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight. B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FM Approval Standard 4435 and Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified roof Class as indicated above. 1. Where applicable, interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleats anchored to substrate at 16 inch centers. C. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FM Approval Standard 4435 and Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone and as indicated. 1. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleats anchored to substrate at maximum 16-inch centers. 2. Anchor interior leg of coping with screw fasteners and washers at maximum 18-inch centers. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 62 00 - 12 D. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of (4 inches) over base flashing. Install stainless steel draw band and tighten. E. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with elastomeric sealant. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of interlocking folded seam or blind rivets and sealant. Anchor and washer at maximum 36-inch centers. F. Roof Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows: 1. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof. 3.6 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers. B. Openings Flashing in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. 3.7 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to equipment support member. B. Overhead Piping Safety Pans: Suspend pans from structure above, independent of other overhead items such as equipment, piping, and conduit, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Pipe and install drain lines to plumbing waste or drainage system. 3.8 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of ±1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within ±1/8 inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants. C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 62 00 - 13 unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 62 00 - 14 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ROOF ACCESSORIES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 72 00 - 1 SECTION 07 72 00 ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes providing and installing roof accessories and appurtenant work, complete, and in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09 90 00 Painting and Coating 1.3 REFERENCES A. Trade standards, most recent editions: NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s specifications, literature, and published installation instructions for each accessory, product, or system to be installed in the Work. C. Shop Drawings: Submit fabrication drawings for all roof hatches, ventilators, and openable fire and smoke hatches with skylights, for approval prior to fabrication. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with Section 01 25 10 - Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions. B. Delivery of Materials: Manufactured materials shall be delivered in original, unbroken, packages, containers, or bundles bearing the name of the manufacturer. C. Storage: All materials shall be carefully stored on wood blocking in an area that is protected from the elements. Storage shall be in a manner that will prevent damage or marring of finish. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers and products are acceptable: 1. Roof Hatches: a. Babcock Davis BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ROOF ACCESSORIES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 72 00 - 2 b. Bilco Company c. EJ Company d. Engineer approved equal 2. Prefabricated Curbs a. Pate Company b. S & L Manufacturing Company c. Thybar Corporation d. Engineer approved equal 2.2 ROOF VENTS A. Provide roof relief vents with bird screens. Product shall be of the type recommended by the National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) and approved by the roofing manufacturer. 2.3 ROOF HATCHES A. Design: Roof hatches (scuttles, equipment hatches) shall be constructed of aluminum unless otherwise indicated, and shall be provided with stainless steel hardware, positive snap latch with padlocking hardware, compression spring operators enclosed in telescopic tubes, extruded EPDM rubber gaskets and seats, fully enclosed insulated curbs with double-wall construction. Roof hatches shall be of the type and size below: 1. Reservoir access hatch: Reservoir access hatches shall include concealed padlock hasps for drinking water structures. Provide Bilco Type F, SS or D or equal, as required. 2. Vault access hatches: Vault access hatches shall include exterior removal turn handles. Provide Bilco Type F, SS or D or equal, as required. 3. Roof cover plates shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings. 2.4 PREFABRICATED CURBS A. Design: Opening dimensions shall be coordinated with skylight penetrations, duct penetrations, and roof-mounted equipment sizes. Heights shall be as required to place top of curb not less than 8 inches above top of insulation. The top edge of the curb s hall be a level surface for installation, connection or mounting of equipment and skylights. Sides of curbs shall have heights adjusted per job and field conditions and roof stoops. Base flange shall be not less than 4 inches wide. Curbs shall be fabricated of 14 gauge or thicker galvanized steel with continuously welded corners and shall be provided with pressure preservative treated, kiln dried, and fire-treated wood nailer at top. 2.5 LADDER-UP DEVICE A. Roof hatch ladder-up device (extendable pole) shall be "Model 2, Ladder-Up Safety Post" of hot-dipped galvanized steel as manufactured by Bilco, Co. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ROOF ACCESSORIES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 72 00 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The installation shall conform to applicable codes and the manufacturers published or written recommendations, specifications, and published installation instructions for the type of work being performed. The construction shall be coordinated with the work of other trades. B. All roof openings, roof-mounted equipment, duct openings, and skylights shall be provided with a prefabricated curb unless the equipment above the roof opening is supplied with its own curb which extends to 8 inches or higher beyond the top of the roof insulation. C. Roof hatches with ladders shall be provided with a ladder-up device. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Roof Hatches, Openable Fire and Smoke Hatches and Roof Ventilators: Units shall be installed over prepared openings with their own curbs or prefabricated curbs, and shall be fastened to roof deck in accordance with the manufacturer's printed directions. Lifting mechanisms and accessories shall be adjusted to insure proper operation. Abraded prime and finish coat surfaces shall be touched-up after completion of installation with the same type finish and the same dry-film thickness. 1. Roof Hatches: Dissimilar metals shall be properly isolated. Thermal movement, up to 100 degrees F change, shall be accommodated without distress in assembly of fasteners. 2. Roof Vents: Roof vents shall be provided on lightweight concrete or lightweight insulating concrete and shall be placed in such a manner so that one vent will be used for venting 1,000 square feet of roof fill. No area shall have fewer than two vents. Vents shall not be installed in walk pads or other traffic areas. Vent pipes shall have a coat of plastic cement applied at the joint between the vent pipe and the roofing before aggregate is applied. Roof insulation shall be removed from below vent per NRCA instructions. Roof vents shall be painted to match roofing color. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protective Coating: All roof accessories shall be coated in accordance with Section 09 90 00 Painting and Coating, to match the roofing color unless directed otherwise by Engineer. Primer coats shall be compatible with finish coats. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ROOF ACCESSORIES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 72 00 - 4 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT JOINT SEALANTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 92 00 - 1 SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes sealant work associated with joints between similar and dissimilar materials in the Work. B. Work included consists of, but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Sealing all joints which would otherwise permit penetration of moisture, unless sealing work is specifically required under other sections. a. Flashing reglets and retainers. b. Exterior wall joints. c. Flooring joints. d. Isolation joints. e. Joints between paving and sidewalks and building. f. Concrete control and expansion joints, exterior and interior. g. Joints at penetrations of walls, floors, and decks by piping and other services and equipment. h. Exterior and interior perimeters of exterior and interior door and window frames, louvers, grilles, etc. i. Thresholds at exterior doors. j. Sealing of plumbing fixtures to floor or wall. k. Other joints where calking, sealant, or compressible sealant is indicated. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM) standards, most recent editions: ASTM C920 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants ASTM C1087 Standard Test Method for Determining Compatibility of Liquid-Applied Sealants with Accessories Used in Structural Glazing Systems ASTM C1193 Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants ASTM C1247 Standard Test Method for Durability of Sealants Exposed to Continuous Immersion in Liquids B. Federal Specification (FS), most recent editions: TT-S-001543A Sealing Compound: Silicone Rubber Base (for Caulking, Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures) BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT JOINT SEALANTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 92 00 - 2 TT-S-00230C Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Single Component (For Calking, Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures) TT-S-00227E Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Multi-Component (for Caulking, Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures) C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): Building Materials Directory D. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF), most recent edition: NSF 61 Drinking Water System Components, Health Effects 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Words "calk," "sealant," and "calking" mean sealant Work. B. "Interior wet areas" mean toilets, showers, sinks, and similar areas. C. "Applicator" means the individual actually on site performing the installation. D. "Vertical" means any surface with a slope greater than 1.5 horizontal to 1.0 vertical. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data 1. Letter of certification that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Manufacturer's recommendations for joint cleaner, primer, backer rod, tooling, and bond breaker. 4. Applicator qualifications. 5. Warranty. 6. Certification from sealant manufacturer stating that product being used is recommended for and is best suited for joint in which it is being applied. C. Field Samples 1. Cured sample of each color for Engineer's color selection. Color chart not acceptable. D. Preconstruction field test reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on preconstruction testing specified in below in QUALITY ASSURANCE. E. Product test reports: Based on comprehensive testing of product formulations performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT JOINT SEALANTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 92 00 - 3 F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Sealant applicator shall have a minimum of five years of experience on projects with similar scope. B. Mock-ups: 1. Before calking work is started, a sample of each type of joint shall be calked where directed by Engineer. The approved samples shall show the workmanship, bond, and color of calking materials as specified or selected for the Work and shall be the minimum standard of quality on the entire Project. C. Preconstruction compatibility and adhesion testing: 1. Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact of affect joint sealants. a. Use ASTM C1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. b. Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. c. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. d. For materials failing tests, obtain sealant manufacturer’s written instructions for corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers. e. Testing will not be required if sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data that are based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted. D. Preconstruction field-adhesion testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their adhesion to joint substrates found in the Work as follows: 1. Locate test joints where indicated in the Work or, if not indicated, as directed by the Engineer. 2. Conduct tests for each application indicated below: a. Each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated. 3. Notify Engineer a minimum of 7 days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be evaluated. 4. Test method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field -Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 of ASTM C1193. 5. Report whether sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained. 6. Evaluation of preconstruction field-adhesion test results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT JOINT SEALANTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 92 00 - 4 requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with Section 01 25 10 - Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions. B. Deliver material in manufacturer's original unopened containers with labels intact. Labels shall indicate contents and expiration date of material. C. Store all materials off the ground and protect from rain, freezing, or excessive heat until ready for use. D. Condition the specified products before use as recommended by the manufacturer. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Schedule Work to be performed when temperature and humidity are as recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation until products are fully cured. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Material and Labor Warranty: 1. Sealant work shall be free of defects for a period of 5 years from date of final acceptance. 2. Failure of watertightness constitutes defect. 3. Remove any defective work and/or materials and replace with new materials. 4. Warranty must be sighed jointly by applicator and sealant manufacturer. B. Special installer’s warranty: 1. Installer’s standard form in which installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified herein within specified warranty period. a. Warranty period: Five years from date of final acceptance. 2. Special warranties herein specified exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants from the following: a. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer’s written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design. b. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. c. Mechanical damage by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. d. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT JOINT SEALANTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 92 00 - 5 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Polyurethane sealants. a. Pecora. b. PSI Polymeric Systems, Inc. c. Sika Chemical Corporation. d. BASF Master Builders. e. Engineer approved equal. 2. Silicone sealants: a. Dow Corning Corporation. b. General Electric. c. Tremco d. Engineer approved equal. 3. Fire Resistant Sealant: a. 3M Corporation. b. Dow Corning. c. Engineer approved equal. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Sealants – General: 1. Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. Where compound is exposed to view in finished Work, provide colors matching materials being sealed. 3. Where compound is not exposed to view in finished Work, provide manufacturer's color with best performance. 4. Provide non sagging sealant for vertical and overhead joints. 5. Sealants for horizontal joints: a. Self-leveling pedestrian/traffic grade. 6. Suitability for immersion in liquids: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for submerged use, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C1247 and qualify for the length of exposure indicated by reference to ASTM C920 for Classes 1 or 2. Liquid used for testing sealants is chlorinated potable water, unless otherwise noted. B. Polyurethane Sealant: 1. One or two components. 2. Meet ASTM C920; F.S. TT-S-00230C, Type I or Type II, Class A, or TT-S-00227E, Type I or Type II, Class A. a. Pecora Dynatrol I, Dynatrol II, Urexpan NR-200 or NR-201. b. PSI PSI-270. c. Sika Sikaflex-1A, Sikaflex-2C. d. Master Builders MasterSeal NP-1, NP-II, SL-1. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT JOINT SEALANTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 92 00 - 6 C. Silicone Sealant: 1. One component. 2. Meet F.S. TT-S-001543A, Class A: a. Dow Corning 790, 795, 786. b. General Electric Silpruf, Silglaze, Sanitary SCS 1700 sealant. c. Tremco Spectrem. D. Bond breaker tape: Polyethylene tape of other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint surfaces of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 1. Unless specifically shown on the Drawings, bond breaker shall not be used in joints within the reservoir. E. Joint Cleaner, Primer, Bond Breaker: 1. As recommended by sealant manufacturer. F. Sealant Backer Rod: Closed cell polyethylene, polyethylene jacketed polyurethane foam, or other flexible, non-absorbent, non-bituminous material recommended by sealant manufacturer to: 1. Control joint depth 2. Break bond of sealant oat bottom of joint 3. Provide proper shape of sealant bead. G. Fire-Resistant Sealant: 1. One or two component. 2. Furnish sealant which has been tested for use as a fire and smoke penetration seal. a. 3M Corporation Fire Dam 150. b. Dow Corning Firestop. 3. UL approved for intended use. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before using any sealant, investigate its compatibility with adjacent joint surfaces, fillers, and other materials in the joint system. B. Use only compatible materials. C. Clean and prime joint surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Limit application to surfaces to receive sealant. 2. Mask off adjacent surfaces. D. Commencing sealant installation constitutes acceptance of joints and surfaces. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT JOINT SEALANTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 92 00 - 7 B. Where finish coating or covering is to be applied to surface, wait until such coating or covering has been applied before installing sealant; e.g., paint, wall covering, glazed coatings. C. Make all joints water and air tight. D. Make depth of sealing compounds not more than one-half width of joint, but in no case less than 1/4 inch nor more than 5/8 inch. E. Provide correctly sized backer rod in all joints to proper depth F. Apply bond breaker where required. G. Tool sealants using sufficient pressure to fill all voids. H. Upon completion, leave sealant with smooth even neat finish. 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces free of sealant. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect finished installation. B. Protect sealants until fully cured. 3.5 SCHEDULES A. Furnish sealant as indicated for the following areas: 1. Exterior areas: a. Joints in concrete and masonry: 1) Use 2-component polyurethane only. b. All other joints: 1) Single or 2-component Polyurethane or. 2) Silicone. 2. Interior wet areas: a. Joints in concrete and masonry: 1) Use 2-component polyurethane only. b. All other joints: 1) Single or 2-component Polyurethane or. 2) Silicone. 3. Interior non-wet, corrosive areas: a. Joints in concrete and masonry: 1) Use 2-component polyurethane only. b. All other joints: 1) Single or 2-component Polyurethane or. 2) Silicone. 4. Interior non-wet, drywall and plaster noncorrosive areas: a. All Joints: 1) Single or 2-component Polyurethane or. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT JOINT SEALANTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 07 92 00 - 8 2) Silicone. 5. Fire-rated construction: Fire-resistant sealant. END OF SECTION DIVISION 08 OPENINGS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 11 13 - 1 SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install hollow metal doors and frames for construction in accordance with Contract Documents. B. Section Includes: 1. Steel doors. 2. Fire and smoke doors. 3. Steel door frames. 4. Sidelight frames. 5. Borrowed light frames. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware B. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing C. Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coatings 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM) standards, most recent editions: ASTM A653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process ASTM A879 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, zinc Coated by the Electrolytic Process for Applications Requiring Designation of the Coating Mass on Each Surface ASTM A924 Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process ASTM C578 Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation ASTM C591 Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation ASTM C612 Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 11 13 - 2 ASTM D2863 Measuring the Minimum Oxygen Concentration to Support Candle-Like Combustion of Plastics (Oxygen Index) ASTM E283 Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen ASTM E1300 Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings ASTM F2248 Standard Practice for Specifying an Equivalent 3-Second Duration Design Loading for Blast Resistant Glazing Fabricated with Laminated Glass B. American Welding Society (AWS) standards, most recent editions: D1.1 Structural Welding Code – Steel C. Builder’s Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA) standards, most recent editions: ANSI/BHMA A156.115 Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames D. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC) publications, most recent editions: 16 CFR 1201 Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials E. National Association Of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM) standards, most recent editions: NAAMM HMM Hollow Metal Manual F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), standards most recent editions: NFPA 80 Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives NFPA 105 Standard for Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies and Other Opening Protectives NFPA 252 Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies NFPA 257 Standard on Fire Test for Window and Glass Block Assemblies G. Steel Door Institute (SDI) standards, most recent editions: SDI 111 Recommended Selection and Usage Guide for Standard Steel Doors, Frames and Accessories SDI 113 Standard Practice for Determining the Steady State Thermal Transmittance of Steel Door and Frame Assemblies BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 11 13 - 3 SDI A250.3 Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames SDI A250.4 Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors and Hardware Reinforcing SDI A250.6 Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel Doors and Frames SDI A250.8 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames SDI A250.11 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames H. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) standards, most recent editions: UL 10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: For each type of door and frame indicated, include door designation, type, level and model, material description, core description, construction details, label compliance, sound and fire resistance ratings, and finishes. Use same reference designations indicated on Contract Drawings in preparing schedule for doors and frames. C. Shop Drawings: Show the following for each door: 1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors including vertical and horizontal edge details. 3. Frame details for each frame type including dimensioned profiles. 4. Details and locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, accessories, joints, and connections. 7. Coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements. D. Samples 1. Factory Applied Enamel Finish: Where colors are not indicated, submit manufacturer's standard colors and patterns for selection. E. Certificates 1. Oversize Construction Certificates: For door assemblies required to be fire protection rated and exceeding size limitations of labeled assemblies. 2. Metallic Construction Certificates: For door assemblies (doors and frames) required to be of metallic coated steel for compliance with this specification section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with SDI A250.8, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 11 13 - 4 B. Fire Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. C. Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric pressure. D. Oversize Fire Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide certification by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire rated door assemblies except for size. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with Section 01 25 10 - Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions. B. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements 1. Deliver doors and frames cardboard wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory finished doors and frames. 2. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage, and notify shipper and supplier if damage is found. Minor damage may be repaired provided refinished items match new Work and are acceptable to the Engineer. Remove and replace damaged items that cannot be repaired as directed. C. Storage and Handling Requirements 1. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4 inch high wood blocking. Avoid using non vented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If door packaging becomes wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4 inch spaces between stacked doors to permit air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Steel Doors and Frames: a. Amweld Building Products, Inc. b. Ceco Door Products; a United Dominion Company c. Curries Company d. Kewanee Corporation e. Pioneer Industries Inc. f. Republic Builders Products g. Steelcraft; a division of Ingersoll Rand h. Engineer approved equal. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 11 13 - 5 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steels used to manufacture doors, frames, anchors, and accessories shall meet at least one or more of the following requirements: 1. Hot Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A1011, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. 2. Cold Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A1008, Commercial Steel (CS) or Drawing Steel (DS), Type B; stretcher leveled standard of flatness. 3. Metallic Coated Steel Sheets: ASTM A653, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with an A40 zinc iron alloy coating (Galvannealed); stretcher leveled standard of flatness. 2.3 DOORS A. General: Provide doors of sizes, thicknesses, and designs indicated. B. Interior Doors: Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI 250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical endurance level: 1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level A (Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless) (18 gauge face). C. Exterior Doors: Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical endurance level: 1. Level 4 and Physical Performance Level A (Maximum Duty), Model 2 (Seamless) (14 gauge face). D. Vision Lite Systems: Manufacturer's standard kits consisting of glass lite moldings to accommodate glass thickness and size of vision lite indicated. 2.4 FRAMES A. General: Provide steel frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings that comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic coated steel sheet. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and welded face corners and seamless face joints. 2. Frames for Level 4 Steel Doors: 0.067 inch (1.7 mm ) (16 gauge) thick steel sheet. C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold rolled steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated to comply with exterior frame requirements. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and welded face corners and seamless face joints. 2. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.067 inch (16 gauge) thick steel sheet. 3. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.067 inch (16 gauge) thick steel sheet. 4. Frames for Borrowed Lights: 0.067 inch (16 gauge) thick steel sheet. D. Door Silencers: Except on weather stripped frames, fabricate stops to receive three silencers on strike jambs of single door frames and two silencers on heads of double door frames. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 11 13 - 6 E. Plaster Guards: Provide 0.016 inch thick, steel sheet plaster guards or mortar boxes to close off interior of openings; place at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation. F. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.042 inch thick, electrolytic zinc coated or metallic coated steel sheet. 1. Wall Anchors in Masonry Construction: 0.177 inch diameter, steel wire complying with ASTM A 510 may be used in place of steel sheet. G. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where zinc coated items are to be built into exterior walls, comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or D as applicable. 2.5 WEATHERSTRIPPING A. Refer to Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware. B. Integral Gasket: Black synthetic rubber gasket with tabs for factory fitting into factory slotted frames, or extruded neoprene foam gasket made to fit into a continuous groove formed in the frame, may be provided in lieu of head and jamb seals. Insert gasket in groove after frame is finish painted. Air leakage of weatherstripped doors shall not exceed [Select air leakage limit] cubic feet per minute of air per square foot of door area when tested in accordance with ASTM E283. 2.6 HARDWARE PREPARATION A. Provide minimum hardware reinforcing gages as specified in SDI 250.6. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive finish hardware. Prepare doors and frames for hardware in accordance with the applicable requirements of SDI A250.8 and SDI A250.6. For additional requirements refer to ANSI/BHMA A156.115. Drill and tap for surface-applied hardware at the project site. Build additional reinforcing for surface-applied hardware into the door at the factory. Locate hardware in accordance with the requirements of SDI A250.8, as applicable. B. Except for frames that will have weatherstripping or soundproofing gaskets, punch door frames to receive a minimum of two rubber or vinyl door silencers on lock side of single doors and one silencer for each leaf at heads of double doors. Set lock strikes out to provide clearance for silencers. 2.7 FINISHES A. Factory-Primed Finish 1. All surfaces of doors and frames shall be thoroughly cleaned, chemically treated and factory primed with a rust inhibiting coating as specified in SDI A250.8. Where coating is removed by welding, apply touchup of factory primer. B. Hot-Dip Zinc-Coated and Factory-Primed Finish 1. Fabricate scheduled doors and frames from hot dipped zinc coated steel, alloyed type, complying with ASTM A924 and ASTM A653. 2. The coating weight shall meet or exceed the minimum requirements for coatings having 0.4 ounces per square foot, total both sides, i.e., A40ZF120. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 11 13 - 7 3. Repair damaged zinc-coated surfaces by the application of zinc dust paint. 4. Thoroughly clean and chemically treat to insure maximum paint adhesion. 5. Factory prime as specified in SDI A250.8. 6. Provide for door openings No. . C. Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Anchors and Accessories 1. Provide electrolytically deposited zinc-coated steel in accordance with ASTM A879, Commercial Quality, Coating Class A. 2. Phosphate treat and factory prime zinc-coated surfaces as specified in SDI A250.8. D. Factory-Applied Enamel Finish 1. Coatings shall meet test procedures and acceptance criteria in accordance with SDI A250.3. After factory priming, apply of enamel to exposed surfaces. Separately bake or oven dry each coat. Drying time and temperature requirements shall be in accordance with the coating manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Color(s) of finish coat shall be as selected from manufacturer’s standard color chart or sample(s). E. Topcoat Finish: Refer to Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coatings. 2.8 FABRICATION AND WORKMANSHIP A. Finished doors and frames shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects, waves, scratches, cuts, dents, ridges, holes, warp, and buckle. Molded members shall be clean cut, straight, and true, with joints coped or mitered, well formed, and in true alignment. Dress exposed welded and soldered joints smooth. Design door frame sections for use with the wall construction indicated. Corner joints shall be well formed and in true alignment. Conceal fastenings where practicable. 1. Frames for use in solid plaster partitions shall be welded construction. 2. On wraparound frames for masonry partitions, provide a throat opening 1/8 inch larger than the actual masonry thickness. 3. Design frames in exposed masonry walls or partitions to allow sufficient space between the inside back of trim and masonry to receive caulking compound. B. For frames to be installed in masonry walls and to be filled with mortar or grout, fill the stops with strips of rigid insulation to keep the grout out of the stops and to facilitate installation of stop-applied head and jamb seals. 2.9 PROVISIONS FOR GLAZING A. Refer to Section 08 81 00 - Glazing. A. Safety Glazing 1. Comply with testing requirements of 16 CFR 1201. 2. Maximum glass area: As shown on Contract Drawings, 9 sq ft maximum. 3. Thickness: 1/4 inch minimum. 4. Use units permanently marked with certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 11 13 - 8 B. Glazing for fire-Rated Door and Window Assemblies 1. Glazing for assemblies that conform to NFPA 80 and that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252 (Doors) and NFPA 257 (Windows). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Frames 1. Set frames in accordance with SDI A250.11. Plumb, align, and brace securely until permanent anchors are set. Anchor bottoms of frames with expansion bolts or powder-actuated fasteners. Build in or secure wall anchors to adjoining construction. 2. Where frames require ceiling struts or overhead bracing, anchor frames to the struts or bracing. 3. Backfill frames with mortar. Coat inside of frames with corrosion-inhibiting bituminous material. For frames in exterior walls, ensure that stops are filled with rigid insulation before grout is placed. B. Doors 1. Hang doors in accordance with clearances specified in SDI A250.8. 2. Install door hardware per Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware. 3. After erection and glazing, clean and adjust hardware. C. Fire and Smoke Doors and Frames 1. Install fire doors and frames, including hardware, in accordance with NFPA 80. 2. Install smoke doors and frames in accordance with NFPA 105. 3.2 PROTECTION A. Protect doors and frames from damage. Repair damaged doors and frames prior to completion and acceptance of the Project or replace with new, as directed by the Engineer. Wire brush rusted frames until rust is removed. Clean thoroughly. Apply an all-over coat of rust-inhibitive paint of the same type used for shop coat. 3.3 CLEANING A. Upon completion, clean exposed surfaces of doors and frames thoroughly. Remove mastic smears and other unsightly marks. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DOOR HARDWARE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 71 00 - 1 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Commercial door hardware for the following: a. Swinging doors. b. Other doors to the extent indicated. 2. Cylinders for doors specified in other Sections. 3. Electrified door hardware. B. Products Furnished or Supplied, But Not Installed, Under This Section 1. Cylinders for locks on aluminum and glass entrance doors. a. Coordinating, purchasing, delivering, and scheduling remain requirements of this Section. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants B. Section 08 11 13 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Architectural Manufacturers’ Association (AAMA) standards, most recent editions: AAMA 701/702 Voluntary Specification for Pile Weatherstripping and Replaceable Fenestration Weatherseals B. ASTM International (ASTM) standards, most recent editions: ASTM E283 Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen ASTM D2000 Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications C. Builder’s Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA) standards, most recent edition: Certified Products Directory BHMA 156.1 Butts and Hinges BHMA 156.2 Bored & Preassembled Locks and Latches BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DOOR HARDWARE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 71 00 - 2 BHMA 156.3 Exit Devices BHMA 156.4 Door Controls-Closers BHMA 156.5 Cylinders and Input Devices for Locks BHMA 156.13 Mortise Locks BHMA 156.16 Auxiliary Hardware BHMA 156.18 Materials and Finishes BHMA 156.21 Thresholds BHMA 156.22 Door Gasketing and Edge Seal Systems BHMA 156.25 Electrified Locking Devices BHMA 156.28 Recommended Practices for Mechanical Keying Systems BHMA A156.115 Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors or Steel Frames BHMA A156.115W Hardware Preparation in Wood Doors with Wood or Steel Frames D. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI) standards, latest editions: Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule DHI WDHS.2 Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors DHI WDHS.3 Recommended Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors E. International Code Council (ICC) standards, latest edition: IBC International Building Code A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) standards, most recent editions: NFPA 70 National Electrical Code NFPA 80 Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives NFPA 105 Standard for Smoke Door Assemblies and Other Opening Protectives NFPA 252 Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DOOR HARDWARE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 71 00 - 3 G. Steel Door Institute (SDI) standards, most recent editions: SDI 107 Hardware on Steel Doors (Reinforcement - Application) H. UL, LLC (UL) standards, latest editions: UL 10B Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies UL 305 Standard for Panic Hardware UL 1784 Standard for Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies and Other Opening Protectives 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Include installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. C. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware, indicating the following: 1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate between manufacturer installed and field installed wiring. Include the following: a. System schematic. b. Point to point wiring diagram. c. Riser diagram. d. Elevation of each door. 2. Detail interface between electrified door hardware and building control system. D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of door hardware indicated. E. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." 2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. a. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Schedule given at the end of Part 3 of this Section. 3. Content: Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DOOR HARDWARE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 71 00 - 4 d. Location of each door hardware set, cross referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Description of each electrified door hardware function, including location, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems. 1) Sequence of Operation: Include description of component functions that occur in the following situations: authorized person wants to enter; authorized person wants to exit; unauthorized person wants to enter; unauthorized person wants to exit. 4. Submittal Sequence: Submit initial draft of final schedule along with essential Product Data to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule after Samples, Product Data, coordination with Shop Drawings of other work, delivery schedules, and similar information has been completed and accepted. F. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations. G. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in operation and maintenance manuals. H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in service performance. B. Supplier Qualifications: Door hardware supplier with warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity and who is, or employs a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant, available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Engineer, and Owner about door hardware and keying. 1. Electrified Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: An experienced door hardware supplier who has completed projects with electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in service performance, and who is acceptable to manufacturer of primary materials. a. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for electrified door hardware, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. 2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DOOR HARDWARE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 71 00 - 5 C. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by the Door and Hardware Institute as an Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that a re comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following: 1. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ICC/ANSI A117.1, as follows: a. Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Shape that is easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or twisting of the wrist. b. Door Closers: Comply with the following maximum opening force requirements indicated: 1) Interior Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. 2) Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. c. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. 2. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. F. Fire Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 1. Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric pressure. G. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and plans for future expansion. 2. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. 3. Requirements for key control system. 4. Address for delivery of keys. H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review methods and procedures related to electrified door hardware including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing in and other preparatory work performed by other trades. 2. Review sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware. 3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DOOR HARDWARE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 71 00 - 6 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with Section 01 25 10 - Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions. B. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock up for door hardware delivered to Project site. C. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. D. Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. B. Electrical System Roughing in: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies and building control system. 1.8 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. C. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated. D. Warranty Period for Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DOOR HARDWARE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 71 00 - 7 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Hinges and Pivots: a. Bommer Industries, Inc. (BI) b. Hager Companies (HAG) c. Ives: H. B. Ives (IVS) d. McKinney Products Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (MCK) e. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH) f. Engineer approved equal 2. Mechanical Locks and Latches: a. Schlage Lock Company; an Ingersoll Rand Company (SCH) b. Engineer approved equal 3. Electromechanical Locks and Latches: a. Best Lock Corporation (BLC) b. Locknetics Security Engineering; a Harrow Company (LSE) c. Schlage Lock Company; an Ingersoll Rand Company (SCH) d. Engineer approved equal 4. Flush Bolts: a. Glynn Johnson; an Ingersoll Rand Company (GJ) b. Ives: H. B. Ives (IVS) c. NT Quality Hardware; an Ingersoll Rand Company (NTQ) d. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM) e. Engineer approved equal 5. Exit Devices: a. Sargent Manufacturing Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (SGT) b. Precision Hardware, Inc. (PH) c. Von Duprin; an Ingersoll Rand Company (VD) d. Engineer approved equal 6. Key Control Systems: a. Key Control Systems, Inc. (KCS) b. Major Metalfab Co. (MM) c. Sargent Manufacturing Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (SGT) d. Sunroc Corporation (SUN) e. Engineer approved equal 7. Operating Trim: a. Hager Companies (HAG) b. Ives: H. B. Ives (IVS) c. NT Quality Hardware; an Ingersoll Rand Company (NTQ) d. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM) e. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH) f. Engineer approved equal 8. Coordinators: a. Glynn Johnson; an Ingersoll Rand Company (GJ) b. Hager Companies (HAG) BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DOOR HARDWARE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 71 00 - 8 c. Ives: H. B. Ives (IVS) d. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM) e. Engineer approved equal 9. Removable Mullions: a. Sargent Manufacturing Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (SGT) b. Von Duprin; an Ingersoll Rand Company (VD) c. Engineer approved equal 10. Surface Mounted Closers: a. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll Rand Company (LCN). b. Engineer approved equal 11. Metal Protective Trim Units: a. Hager Companies (HAG) b. Ives: H. B. Ives (IVS) c. NT Quality Hardware; an Ingersoll Rand Company (NTQ) d. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM) e. Engineer approved equal 12. Stops and Holders: a. Hager Companies (HAG) b. Ives: H. B. Ives (IVS) c. NT Quality Hardware; an Ingersoll Rand Company (NTQ) d. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM) e. Engineer approved equal 13. Door Gasketing: a. Hager Companies (HAG) b. National Guard Products, Inc. (NGP) c. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. (PEM) d. Zero International, Inc. (ZRO) e. Engineer approved equal 14. Thresholds: a. Hager Companies (HAG) b. National Guard Products, Inc. (NGP) c. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. (PEM) d. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE) e. Engineer approved equal 2.2 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section, and the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3. 1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and products equivalent in function and comparable in quality to named products. 2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated. 3. Certified Products: Provide door hardware listed in BHMA’s “Certified Products Directory.” 4. Finish: Finish numbers and descriptions as indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule comply with ANSI/BHMA A156.18. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DOOR HARDWARE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 71 00 - 9 a. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. b. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 1. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names may be abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule. 2.3 HINGES AND PIVOTS A. Applicable Standard: ANSI/BHMA A156.1, Grade 1. B. Quantity: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. 2. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. 3. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches. 4. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches. C. Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template produced units. D. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide stainless steel hinges with stainless steel pins. E. Hinge Options: Comply with the following where indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule or on Contract Drawings: 1. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the following applications: a. Outswinging exterior doors. b. Outswinging corridor doors with locks. 2. Corners: Square. F. Fasteners: Comply with the following: 1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes. 2. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames. 3. Threaded to the Head Wood Screws: For fire rated wood doors. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DOOR HARDWARE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 71 00 - 10 4. Screws: Phillips flat head screws; machine screws (drilled and tapped holes) for metal doors, wood screws for wood doors and frames. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges. 2.4 LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Cylindrical Locks 1. Applicable Standard: ANSI/BHMA A156.2, Grade 1, Series 4000. 2. Backset: 2-3/4 inches standard unless noted otherwise. 3. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. 4. Handles: Lever 5. Latchbolts: 1/2 inch throw. 6. Lock Chassis: Heavy gauge steel, zinc plated for corrosion resistance. 7. Faceplate: 1-1/8 inch by 2-1/4 inch. 8. Trim: a. Lever: Cast. b. Escutcheon (Rose): Wrought. c. Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons. 9. Lock Function: ANSI F109. 10. Finish: ANSI 630 (US32D) 11. Lockset Designs: Provide design indicated in schedules. B. Mortise Locks 1. Applicable Standard: ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Grade 1, Series 1000. 2. Backset: 2-3/4 inches standard unless noted otherwise. 3. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. 4. Armor Front: 1-1/4 inch by 8 inch. 5. Handles: Lever 6. Latchbolts: a. Deadbolt: 1 inch throw. b. Latch: 3/4 inch throw with anti-friction toungue. 7. Lock Case: 4-7/16 inch by 6 inch by 1 inch. 8. Exposed Trim: a. Lever: Cast. b. Escutcheon (Rose): Forged. c. Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons. 9. Lock Function: ANSI F20. 10. Finish: ANSI 630 (US32D) 11. Lockset Designs: Provide design indicated in schedules. 2.5 ELECTRIFIED LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Applicable Standard ANSI/BHMA 156.25, Grade 1. B. Electromechanical Locks: Motor operated locks of types and grades indicated; with electromagnet attached to frame and strike plate attached to door. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DOOR HARDWARE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 71 00 - 11 2.6 DOOR BOLTS A. Flush Bolts: ANSI/BHMA 156.16, Grade 1, designed for mortising into door edge. B. Bolt Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts to comply with labeled fire door requirements, and as follows: 1. Half Round Surface Bolts: Minimum 7/8 inch throw. 2. Interlocking Surface Bolts: Minimum 15/16 inch throw. 3. Fire Rated Surface Bolts: Minimum 1 inch throw; listed and labeled for fire rated doors. 4. Mortise Flush Bolts: Minimum 3/4 inch throw. 2.7 EXIT DEVICES A. Applicable Standard: ANSI/BHMA 156.3, Grade 1, Type 3 (Mortise) B. Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305. C. Fire Exit Devices: Complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252. D. Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar. 1. Operation: Rigid. E. Outside Trim: Lever or Lever with cylinder; material and finish to match locksets, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Match design for locksets and latchsets, unless otherwise indicated. F. Through Bolts: For exit devices and trim on metal doors, non fire rated wood doors, and fire rated wood doors. 2.8 CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. Applicable Standard: ANSI/BHMA 156.5, Grade 1 B. Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following: 1. Number of Pins: Six minimum. 2. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and straight or clover type cam. 3. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring. C. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with the following: 1. Removable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key, and for use with only the core manufacturer's cylinder and door hardware. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DOOR HARDWARE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 71 00 - 12 D. Construction Keying: Comply with the following: 1. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. Provide 10 construction master keys. a. Replace construction cores with permanent cores, as directed by Owner. E. Keying System: Unless otherwise indicated, provide a factory registered keying system complying with the following requirements: 1. Grand Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key, a master key, and a grand master key. F. Keys: Provide nickel silver keys complying with the following: 1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation: a. Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE." 2. Quantity: In addition to one extra blank key for each lock, provide the following: a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three. b. Master Keys: Five. c. Grand Master Keys: Five. G. Key Control System: ANSI/BHMA 156.28 system, including key holding hooks, labels, two sets of key tags with self locking key holders, key gathering envelopes, and temporary and permanent markers. Contain system in metal cabinet with baked enamel finish. 1. Wall Mounted Cabinet: Cabinet with hinged panel door equipped with key holding panels and pin tumbler cylinder door lock. 2. Capacity: Able to hold keys for 150 percent of the number of locks. 3. Cross Index System: Set up by key control manufacturer, complying with the following: a. Card Index: Furnish four sets of index cards for recording key information. Include three receipt forms for each key holding hook. 2.9 STRIKES A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows: 1. Flat Lip Strikes: For locks with three piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Extra Long Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. B. Dustproof Strikes: ANSI/BHMA 156.16, Grade 1. 2.10 OPERATING TRIM A. Materials: Fabricate from stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. B. Push Pull Design: As illustrated on Drawings. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DOOR HARDWARE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 71 00 - 13 2.11 ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS A. Fire Exit Removable Mullions: Provide removable mullions for use with fire exit devices complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252. Mullions shall be used only with exit devices for which they have been tested. 2.12 CLOSERS A. Applicable Standard: ANSI/BHMA 156.4, grade 1. B. Hold Open Closers/Detectors: Coordinate and interface integral smoke detector and closer device with fire alarm system. C. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. 2.13 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS A. Materials: Fabricate protection plates from the following: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.050 inch thick; beveled top and 2 sides. B. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for door trim units consisting of either machine or self-tapping screws. C. Furnish protection plates sized 2 inches less than door width on push side and 1/2 inch less than door width on pull side, by height specified in Door Hardware Schedule. 2.14 STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Electromagnetic Door Holders for Labeled Fire Door Assemblies: Coordinate with fire detectors and interface with fire alarm system. B. Floor Stops: For doors, unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or indicated. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. 1. Where floor or wall stops are not appropriate, provide overhead holders. C. Silencers for Wood Door Frames: ANSI/BHMA Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum 5/8 by 3/4 inch; fabricated for drilled in application to frame. D. Silencers for Metal Door Frames: ANSI/BHMA Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum diameter 1/2 inch; fabricated for drilled in application to frame. 2.15 WEATHER STRIPPING A. Applicable Standard ANSI/BHMA 156.22. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DOOR HARDWARE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 71 00 - 14 B. Provide continuous weather strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. 2. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. 3. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. C. Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E283. D. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784. 1. Provide smoke labeled gasketing on 20 minute rated doors and on smoke labeled doors. E. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 10B or NFPA 252. F. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. G. Gasketing Materials: Comply with ASTM D2000 and AAMA 701/702. 2.16 THRESHOLDS A. Applicable Standard: ANSI/BHMA 156.21. B. Heavy Duty Saddle Threshold: 1. Type: J32100. 2. Material: Extruded tempered aluminum 6063-T6. 3. Finish Mill finish aluminum. 4. Width: Match door width. 2.17 FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide manufacturers' products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in conjunction with required fire rated labels and as otherwise approved by Engineer. 1. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DOOR HARDWARE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 71 00 - 15 ANSI/BHMA 156.18 for finishes. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different from specified standard. C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for application intended. Provide Phillips flat head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. 2. Steel Machine or Wood Screws: For the following fire rated applications: a. Mortise hinges to doors. b. Strike plates to frames. c. Closers to doors and frames. 3. Steel Through Bolts: For the following fire rated applications, unless door blocking is provided: a. Surface hinges to doors. b. Closers to doors and frames. c. Surface mounted exit devices. 4. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow metal doors. 5. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements of DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/BHMA A156.115. 1. Surface Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to SDI 107. B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI A115 W series. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DOOR HARDWARE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 71 00 - 16 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations: 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. C. Key Control System: Place keys on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule. D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt. 2. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. B. Six Month Adjustment: Approximately six months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer shall perform the following: 1. Examine and readjust each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware. 2. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel on recommended maintenance procedures. 3. Replace door hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or installation of door hardware units. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DOOR HARDWARE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 71 00 - 17 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes. 3.7 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Refer to Contract Drawings. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DOOR HARDWARE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 71 00 - 18 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GLAZING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 80 00 - 1 SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Windows. 2. Doors. 3. Glazed entrances. 4. Interior borrowed lites. 5. Storefront framing. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "LEED Requirements" for LEED certification targets, related LEED requirements, recycled content minima, other LEED criteria and constraints. 2. Information attached for reference, including LEED Checklist for Project building(s), indicating which LEED credits are targeted for attainment. 3. LEED reference documents, not attached but available for use, including the “LEED- New Construction v.2.2 Rating System,” explaining requirements for each prerequisite and credit, and the “LEED-New Construction v2.2 Reference Guide,” detailing requirements and documentation options for application for each prerequisite and credit. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Manufacturers of Glass Products: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036. C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified gas. D. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instru ctions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GLAZING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 80 00 - 2 E. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. F. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated glass standard. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in service conditions. Provide glass lites in the thickness designations indicated for various size op enings, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300, according to the following requirements: a. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour (meters per second) at 33 feet (10 m) above grade, according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 6.5, "Method 2 Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings. Design wind load shall be minimum 50 mph. b. Specified Design Snow Loads: As indicated, but not less than snow loads applicable to Project as required by ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 7.0, "Snow Loads." c. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action. 1) Load Duration: 60 seconds or less. d. Probability of Breakage for Sloped Glazing: 1 lite per 1000 for lites set more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind and snow action. 1) Load Duration: 30 days. e. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For the following types of glass supported on all 4 edges, provide thickness required that limits center deflection at design wind pressure to 1/50 times the short side length or 1 inch (25 mm), whichever is less. 1) For monolithic glass lites heat treated to resist wind loads. 2) For insulating glass. 3) For laminated glass lites. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GLAZING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 80 00 - 3 f. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm. g. Thickness of Tinted and Heat Absorbing Glass: Provide the same thickness for each tint color indicated throughout Project. C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick. 2. For laminated glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated. 3. For insulating glass units, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick and a nominal 1/2 inch (12.7 mm ) wide interspace. 4. Center of Glass Values: Based on using LBL 44789 WINDOW 5.0 computer program for the following methodologies: a. U Factors: NFRC 100 expressed as Btu/ sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K). b. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200. c. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For glazing sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, including printed statement of VOC content. C. Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12 inch (300 mm ) square Samples for glass. 1. Each color of tinted float glass. 2. Each type of patterned glass. 3. Coated vision glass. 4. Ceramic coated spandrel glass. 5. Each pattern and color of ceramic coated vision glass. 6. Fire resistive glazing products. 7. Each type of laminated glass with colored interlayer. 8. Insulating glass for each designation indicated. 9. For each color (except black) of exposed glazing sealant indicated. D. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GLAZING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 80 00 - 4 1. For solar control low e coated glass, provide documentation demonstrating that manufacturer of coated glass is certified by coating manufacturer. F. Qualification Data: For installers. G. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report: From glazing sealant manufacturer indicating glazing sealants were tested for adhesion to glass and glazing channel substrates and for compatibility with glass and other glazing materials. H. Product Test Reports: For each of the following types of glazing products: 1. Tinted float glass. 2. Coated float glass. 3. Insulating glass. 4. Glazing sealants. 5. Glazing gaskets. I. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of successful in service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain the following through one source from a single manufacturer for each glass type: clear float glass, coated float glass, laminated glass, and insulating glass. C. Source Limitations for Glass Sputter Coated with Solar Control Low E Coatings: Where solar control low e coatings of a primary glass manufacturer that has established a certified fabricator program is specified, obtain sputter coated solar control low e coated glass in fabricated units from a manufacturer that is certified by coated glass manufacturer. D. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories through one source from a single manufacturer for each product and installation method indicated. E. Glass Product Testing: Obtain glass test results for product test reports in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing glass products. 1. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. F. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Testing: Obtain sealant test results for product test reports in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36 month period. 1. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GLAZING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 80 00 - 5 2. Test elastomeric glazing sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods. G. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Submit to elastomeric glazing sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of each glazing material type, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass framing member that will contact or affect elastomeric glazing sealants: 1. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates. 2. Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. 3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 4. For materials failing tests, obtain sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures, including the use of specially formulated primers. 5. Testing will not be required if elastomeric glazing sealant manufacturers submit data based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, glazing materials matching those submitted. H. Glazing for Fire Rated Door Assemblies: Glazing for assemblies that comply with NFPA 80 and that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. I. Glazing for Fire Rated Window Assemblies: Glazing for assemblies that comply with NFPA 80 and that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257. J. Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, obtain safety glazing products permanently marked with certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Where glazing units, including Kind FT glass and laminated glass, are specified in Part 2 articles for glazing lites more than 9 sq. ft. (0.84 sq. m) in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with Category II materials, for lites 9 sq. ft. (0.84 sq. m) or less in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with Category I or II materials, except for hazardous locations where Category II materials are required by 16 CFR 1201 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. K. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or i n referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: GANA Laminated Division's "Laminated Glass Design Guide" and GANA's "Glazing Manual." 2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG 1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and AAMA TIR A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines." BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GLAZING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 80 00 - 6 3. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB 3001, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines." 4. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM 3000, "Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units." L. Insulating Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following testing and inspecting agency: 1. Insulating Glass Certification Council. M. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Build glass mockups by installing the following kinds of glass in mockups specified in Division 8 Section "Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts@ and AGlazed Aluminum Curtain Walls" to match glazing systems required for Project, including glazing methods: a. Heat strengthened coated glass. b. Fully tempered glass. c. Spandrel glass. d. Laminated glass. e. Coated insulating glass. 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. N. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. For insulating glass units that will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with insulating glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid hermetic seal ruptures. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GLAZING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 80 00 - 7 1.9 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by coated glass manufacturer agreeing to replace coated glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by laminated glass manufacturer agreeing to replace laminated glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by insulating glass manufacturer agreeing to replace insulating glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality Q3; of class indicated. B. Heat Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality Q3; of class, kind, and condition indicated. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller hearth) process with roll wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide Kind HS (heat strengthened) float glass in place of annealed float glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. 3. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 4. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other uncoated glass). BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GLAZING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 80 00 - 8 5. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed or Kind HS (heat strengthened) float glass where safety glass is indicated. C. Ceramic Coated Vision Glass: Float glass with ceramic enamel applied by silk screened process and complying with ASTM C 1048, Condition C (other coated glass), Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality Q3, Specification No. 95 1 31 in GANA Tempering Division's "Engineering Standards Manual," and other requirements specified. D. Sputter Coated Float Glass: ASTM C 1376, float glass with metallic oxide or nitride coating deposited by vacuum deposition process after manufacture and heat treatment (if any), and complying with other requirements specified. E. Coated Spandrel Float Glass: Float glass complying with other requirements specified and with the following: 1. Fallout Resistance: Provide spandrel units identical to those passing the fallout resistance test for spandrel glass specified in ASTM C 1048. 2. Factory apply manufacturer's standard opacifier of the following material to coated second surface of lites, with resulting products complying with Specification No. 89 1 6 in GANA Tempering Division's "Engineering Standards Manual." a. Manufacturer's standard opacifier material. F. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, and complying with other requirements specified and with the following: 1. Interlayer: Polyvinyl butyral of thickness indicated with a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after laminating glass lites and installation. a. For polyvinyl butyral interlayers, laminate lites in autoclave with heat plus pressure. 2. Laminating Process: Fabricate laminated glass to produce glass free of foreign substances and air or glass pockets. G. Insulating Glass Units, General: Factory assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and with requirements specified in this Article and in Part 2 "Insulating Glass Units" Article. 1. Provide Kind HS (heat strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. 2. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) glass lites where safety glass is indicated. 3. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated for insulating glass units are nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are measured perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit's edge. 4. Sealing System: Dual seal, with primary and secondary sealants as follows: a. Polyisobutylene and hot melt butyl. 5. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction complying with the following requirements: a. Spacer Material: Aluminum with mill or clear anodic finish. b. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both. c. Corner Construction: Manufacturer's standard corner construction. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GLAZING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 80 00 - 9 2.3 GLAZING GASKETS A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below, complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 1. EPDM, ASTM C 864. 2. Silicone, ASTM C 1115. 3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber, ASTM C 1115. 4. Any material indicated above. B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed cell, integral skinned gaskets of material indicated below; complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 1. EPDM. 2. Silicone. 3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber. 4. Any material indicated above. C. Lock Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames with molded corner units and zipper lock strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black. 2.4 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements: 1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. VOC Content: For sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D. 4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. 1. Single Component Neutral and Basic Curing Silicone Glazing Sealants: a. Available Products: 1) Dow Corning Corporation; 790. 2) GE Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700. 3) Tremco; Spectrem 1 (Basic). b. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). c. Class: 100/50. d. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). e. Uses Related to Glazing Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to glazing substrates indicated, O. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GLAZING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 80 00 - 10 1) Use O Glazing Substrates: Coated glass, color anodic aluminum, aluminum coated with a high performance coating, galvanized steel, and wood. 2. Neutral Curing Silicone Glazing Sealants: a. Available Products: 1) Dow Corning Corporation; 795. 2) GE Silicones; UltraPruf II SCS2900. 3) Pecora Corporation; 865. b. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). c. Class: 50. d. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). e. Uses Related to Glazing Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to glazing substrates indicated, O. 1) Use O Glazing Substrates: Coated glass, color anodic aluminum, aluminum coated with a high performance coating, galvanized steel, and wood. 3. Class 25 Neutral Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant: a. Available Products: 1) Dow Corning Corporation; 799. 2) GE Silicones; UltraGlaze SSG4000. 3) Tremco; Tremsil 600. b. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). c. Class: 25. d. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). e. Uses Related to Glazing Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to glazing substrates indicated, O. 1) Use O Glazing Substrates: Coated glass, color anodic aluminum, aluminum coated with a high performance coating, galvanized steel, and wood. 4. Acid Curing Silicone Glazing Sealants: a. Available Products: 1) Dow Corning Corporation; 999-A. 2) GE Silicones; Contractors SCS1000. 3) Pecora Corporation; 860. 4) Tremco; Tremsil 200. b. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). c. Class: 25. d. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). e. Uses Related to Glazing Substrates: G, A, and, as applicable to glazing substrates indicated, O. 1) Use O Glazing Substrates: Coated glass, color anodic aluminum, aluminum coated with a high performance coating, galvanized steel and wood. 2.5 GLAZING TAPES A. Back Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GLAZING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 80 00 - 11 application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). 2.7 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. B. Clean cut or flat grind vertical edges of butt glazed monolithic lites in a manner that produces square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with outdoor and indoor faces. C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners. 2.8 MONOLITHIC FLOAT GLASS UNITS A. Uncoated Clear Float Glass Units: Class 1 (clear) annealed or Kind HS (heat strengthened) float glass where heat strengthening is required to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with system performance requirements and Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass. 1. Thickness: Not less than 6.0 mm. 2. Uncoated Clear Fully Tempered Float Glass: Kind FT (fully tempered). BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GLAZING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 80 00 - 12 2.9 LAMINATED GLASS UNITS A. Heat Treated Laminated Glass Units: 1. Kind LHS, consisting of two lites of heat strengthened float glass. 2. Outer Lite: Class 1 clear float glass. a. Kind HS (heat strengthened). b. Thickness: 3.0 mm. 3. Inner Lite: Class 1 (clear) float glass. a. Kind HS (heat strengthened). b. Thickness: 3.0 mm. 4. Plastic Interlayer: a. Thickness: 0.060 inch (1.52 mm), but not less than that required to comply as a Type II safety glass material. b. Interlayer Color: Clear. 2.10 INSULATING GLASS UNITS A. Solar Control Low E Insulating Glass: Where glass of this designation is indicated, provide low emissivity insulating glass units complying with the following: 1. Products: Available products include the following: a. PPG SOLARBAN 60 (2) SOLARGRAY. 2. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 25 and 6 mm. 3. Interspace Content: Air. 4. Indoor Lite: Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear) float glass. a. Kind HS (heat strengthened), Condition C (other coated glass). 5. Outdoor Lite: Type I (transparent glass, flat) float glass. a. Class 2 (tinted) float glass. 1) Tint Color: SOLARGRAY b. Kind HS (heat strengthened), Condition A (uncoated surfaces) or Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated surfaces). 6. Low Emissivity Coating: Sputter on third surface. 7. Visible Light Transmittance: 60% 8. Winter Nighttime U Value: 0.29 9. Summer Daytime U Value: 0.30 10. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.36 11. Outdoor Visible Reflectance: 11% 12. Shading Coefficient: 0.41. B. Ceramic Coated Spandrel Insulating Glass: Where glass of this designation is indicated, provide insulating glass units complying with the following: 1. Products: Available products include the following: a. Match adjacent glazing panels. 2. Construction: Provide units that comply with requirements specified for insulating glass units except for indoor lite. 3. Indoor Lite: Ceramic coated spandrel glass. 1) Kind HS (heat strengthened) or Kind FT (fully tempered). 2) Ceramic Coating Location: Fourth surface. 3) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GLAZING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 80 00 - 13 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant substrate testing. E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm) as follows: 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GLAZING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 80 00 - 14 2. Provide 1/8 inch (3 mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. J. Where wedge shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. K. Square cut wedge shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 3.4 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed. F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant where indicated. G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GLAZING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 80 00 - 15 C. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.7 LOCK STRIP GASKET GLAZING A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions. Provide supplementary wet seal and weep system, unless otherwise indicated. 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GLAZING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 08 80 00 - 16 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK DIVISION 09 FINISHES THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 1 SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall provide gypsum wallboard, complete, and in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Federal Specifications QQ-W-461H Wire, Steel, Carbon (Round, Bare, and Coated) B. Commercial Standards ASTM C 11 Terminology Relating to Gypsum and Related Building Materials and Systems ASTM C 36 Specification for Gypsum Wallboard ASTM C 208 Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board ASTM C 475 Specifications for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board ASTM C 514 Specification for Nails for the Application of Gypsum Board ASTM C 630 Specification for Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board ASTM C 754 Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Board ASTM C 1002 Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases ASTM D 2626 Specification For Asphalt-Saturated and Coated Organic Felt Base Sheet Used in Roofing ASTM E 90 Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne-Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions ASTM E 119 Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials ASTM E 413 Classification for Rating Sound Insulation C. Trade Standards BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 2 GA-201 (Gypsum Association) Using Gypsum Board for Walls and Ceilings GA-214 (Gypsum Association) Recommended Specifications: Levels of Gypsum Board Finish GA-216 (Gypsum Association) Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board GA-290 (Gypsum Association) Area Separation Walls. GA-505 (Gypsum Association) Glossary of Terminology GA-530 (Gypsum Association) Design Data - Gypsum Products GA-600 (Gypsum Association) Fire Resistance Manual GA-801 (Gypsum Association) Handling Gypsum Board 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. General: Provide the following submittals in accordance with the requirements in Section 01 33 20] - Contractor Submittals. B. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's technical data, product specifications, standard details, certified product test results, installation instructions and general recommendations, as may be required to show compliance with these Specifications. C. [Samples: Submit samples, minimum 12 inches long, of actual trim and furring components.] 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers' Standards: The gypsum board products and their installation shall be in accordance with the Manufacturers published recommendations and specifications and recommendations and specifications of the Gypsum Association. In the event of conflicts, the more stringent requirement shall apply. B. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11, Gypsum Association publication GA-505 for definitions of terms related to gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Fire resistance ratings shall be as indicated by reference to file numbers in Gypsum Association, (GA), publication GA-600, or to design designations in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listing of another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 3 D. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies indicated to have STC ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies whose STC ratings were determined per ASTM E 90 and classified per ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency. E. Single-Source Responsibility for Steel Framing: Steel-framing members for gypsum board assemblies shall be obtained from a single manufacturer. F. Single-Source Responsibility for Panel Products: Each type of gypsum board and other panel products shall be obtained from a single manufacturer. G. Single-Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials: Finishing materials shall be obtained from either the same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a manufacturer acceptable to the gypsum board manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GYPSUM BOARD A. General: All gypsum wall board shall be fire-rated, conforming to ASTM C 36, unless otherwise indicated. B. Gypsum Wall Board: All gypsum wall board shall be 5/8 inch thick and provided with tapered edges unless otherwise indicated. 1. Water-resistant gypsum board shall conform to ASTM C 630 with tapered edges, type "x". C. Manufacturers, or Equal: 1. Georgia-Pacific Corporation. 2. Gold Bond Building Products. 3. United States Gypsum Co. 2.2 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Joint reinforcing tape and joint compound shall conform to ASTM C 475 and shall be of the type recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. B. Joint Tape: Tape shall be paper reinforcing tape of the type recommended by the Manufacturer for the application indicated. C. Joint Compound: On interior work, compound shall be a chemical-hardening type for bedding and filling, and a ready-mixed vinyl type for topping. D. Exterior Joint Compound: On exterior work, compound shall be a special chemical-hardening type formulated for exterior application. E. Water-Resistant Joint Compound: Compound for water-resistant application shall be a special water-resistant type for treatment of joints, fastener heads and cut edges of water BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 4 resistant backing board. Water-resistant joint compound shall be Sheetrock Brand W/R Compound, as manufactured by United States Gypsum Co., or approved equal. 2.3 FASTENERS A. Nails shall conform to ASTM C 514 and shall be of the length recommended by the Gypsum Association referenced standards and the Building Code for various gypsum board thicknesses. B. Screws shall conform to ASTM C 1002, and shall be self-drilling, self-tapping, bugle head, for use with power tools, length as recommended by Gypsum Association referenced standards and the Building Code. 1. Type "S" for wallboard to sheet metal application. 2. Type "W" for wallboard to wood application. 3. Type "G" for wallboard to wallboard application. 4. Type "S" or "S-12", 1-1/4-inch for tile backing board to metal studs application. C. Resilient channels shall be metal channels design for use with sound wall construction. They shall be as recommended and approved by the gypsum board Manufacturer and code. 2.4 ADHESIVES A. Adhesives for fastening gypsum board to gypsum board shall be in accordance with the printed recommendations of the gypsum board Manufacturer. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Metal trim, corner beads, edge, casing beads, and accessories shall be manufactured from galvanized sheet steel unless otherwise indicated and shall be Manufacturer's standard products. Special shapes shall be provided where indicated. 2.6 ACCESS PANELS A. Access panels shall be provided where shown and/or where required for access to valves and equipment. Access panels shall be MILCOR "Type DW"; BOICE "Type C"; or equal, for flush installation. Cylinder locks shall be provided where indicated. B. In fire-rated construction, both wall and ceiling access panels shall have a fire rating equivalent to that of the assemblies within which they are installed. 2.7 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE A. Waterproof membrane shall be asphaltic saturated 43-pound (vapor-retarder) membrane conforming to ASTM D 2626 Type 1, 25 pounds per 100 square foot minimum or 10-mil polyethylene film membrane. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials: Manufactured materials shall be delivered in original unbroken packages, containers, or bundles bearing the Manufacturer's label with manufacturer's name and product description and rating. B. Storage: All materials shall be carefully stored in an area which is protected from the elements, and in a manner recommended by the referenced standards. Storage shall be in a manner that will prevent damage to the material and its finish. C. Handling: Gypsum board shall be handled in conformance with Gypsum Association Publication 801 so as to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. Metal corner beads and trim shall not be bent or otherwise damaged. 3.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements, General: The Contractor shall comply with requirements of the referenced gypsum board application standards, and recommendations for the gypsum board manufacturer, for environmental conditions before, during and after application of gypsum board. B. Ventilation: The Contractor shall ventilate building spaces as required to remove moisture in excess of that required for drying of joint treatment materials, immediately after their application. Drafts shall be avoided during dry, hot weather to prevent too rapid drying. 3.3 PREPARATION FOR METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS A. [Ceiling Anchorages: The Contractor shall coordinate Work of this Section with structural ceiling work to ensure that inserts and other structural anchorage provisions have been installed to receive ceiling hangers. Inserts, hanger clips and similar devices shall be furnished to other trades for installation at times appropriate for proper coordination with other work.] 3.4 INSTALLATION OF METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS A. General 1. Installation of metal supports and framing shall conform to standards established in ASTM C 754. 2. Support system framing shall not bridge building expansion joints. Both sides of joints shall be framed with furring and other support as indicated. 3. Nail or screw furring members to subframing as indicated. B. Ceiling Support Suspension 1. Hangers shall be secured to structural support by connecting directly to structure where possible. Otherwise, hangers shall be connected to inserts, clips or other anchorage devices or fasteners as indicated. 2. Main runners shall be spaced 4 feet on center and hangers shall be spaced no more than 4 feet on center along runners, unless otherwise indicated. Main runners shall BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 6 be leveled to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 12 feet, measured both lengthwise on each runner and transversely between parallel runners. 3. Furring members shall be spaced 16 inches on center and wire tied or clipped to main runners and to other structural supports as indicated. 4. Where direct-hung support is indicated, perimeter wall track or angle shall be attached wherever the support system meets vertical surfaces. Support members shall be mechanically joined to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. 5. Auxiliary framing shall be installed at terminations of gypsum board ceilings and at openings for light fixtures and similar work, and as may be required for support of both the ceiling construction and other work which is indicated to be supported by the ceiling. 6. For exterior soffits, cross-bracing and additional framing shall be provided as indicated or as may be required to resist wind uplift. 7. Seismic Restraint Systems: The ceiling support system shall be provided with horizontal and vertical (uplift) seismic restraint systems conforming to applicable code requirements and approved by local authorities having jurisdiction. Locations and spacing shall conform to applicable code requirements. 8. Horizontal Restraint: Horizontal restraints shall be provided in the form of four, no. 12-gauge diagonal bracing wires, secured to the main ceiling support members, within 2 inches of intersections with secondary supports. Bracing wires shall be splayed at 90 degrees from each other at an angle not exceeding 45 degrees from the plane of the ceiling. These horizontal restraint points shall be placed not more than 12 feet on center in both directions with the first point no more than 4 feet from each bounding wall. Restraint wire attachment to the supporting structure shall be adequate for the loads imposed. Side wall ties shall be provided where necessary. 9. Vertical Restraint: Vertical restraints shall be provided to resist seismic uplift movements. Restraints shall be telescoping, compressive posts or vertical metal struts attached to the main ceiling support members and secured to the underside of the structure above, in conformance with code requirements. Vertical restraints shall be located at each horizontal restraint and at additional locations as may be required by code. 3.5 GENERAL GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Application and finishing of gypsum wallboard shall conform to ASTM C 840, Gypsum Association publication 216, and manufacturer's printed recommendations. B. Exposed end-butt joints of adjacent gypsum board panels shall be located as far from the center of walls and ceilings as possible, and staggered not less than one foot in alternate courses of board. C. Ceiling boards shall be installed before wall boards. Ceiling boards shall be installed in a direction and manner which will minimize the number of end-butt joints, and which will avoid end joints in the central area of the ceiling. End-butt joints shall be staggered at least one foot between adjacent panel rows. D. Exposed gypsum board shall be installed with face side out. Imperfect, damaged or damp boards shall not be installed. Boards shall be butted together for a light contact at edges and BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 7 ends, with not more than 1/16-inch open space between boards. Boards shall not be forced into place. E. Either edge or end joints shall be located over supports, except in horizontal applications or where intermediate support or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Boards shall be positioned so that like edges abut; tapered edges agains t tapered edges and mill-cut or field-cut ends against mill-cut or field-cut ends. Tapered edges shall not be placed against cut edges or ends. Vertical joints shall be staggered over different studs on opposite sides of partitions. F. Gypsum board shall be attached to all supplementary framing and blocking provided for additional support at openings and cutouts. G. Control joints and expansion joints shall be formed with adequate space between edges of boards to receive trim accessories. H. Both faces of stud partition framing shall be covered with gypsum board in concealed spaces above ceilings, except in chase walls which are braced internally. 3.6 CEILING SYSTEM FIRE RATING A. Where a fire rating is indicated, the complete ceiling system shall meet the requirements for the rating specified or shown. The system shall conform to governing codes and shall meet UL requirements for the approved system. Light fixtures, speakers, and other recessed items in rated ceilings shall be provided with gypsum board enclosures as required for rated ceiling system. 3.7 INSTALLATION OF METAL ACCESSORIES A. Metal edge trim shall be applied at all discontinued edges, where abutting with another material, and where indicated. Corner beads shall be applied at all exterior corners. B. All metal accessories shall be set plumb, level, and true and shall be shimmed where necessary. The accessories shall be mitered at corners; exposed joints shall be accurately and tightly fitted. Sections shall be installed in lengths as long as practica ble and splices shall be held to a minimum. C. All accessories, trim, and beads shall be securely fastened to framing members. 3.8 EDGE SEALING A. All cut, broken, or exposed edges of moisture-resistant gypsum board shall be sealed with a sealer recommended in the printed standards of the gypsum board manufacturer. 3.9 SURFACE FINISH A. All gypsum board joints shall be taped, and all joints, end trim, corner beads, fastener, and other depressions shall be treated with joint and finishing compounds applied per Manufacturer's printed recommendations for three-coat work. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 8 B. The gypsum board shall be sanded smooth, dusted, and provided with a textured roller finish coat. C. Gypsum board behind vinyl wall covering shall be left with a sanded, flush, and smooth finish surface ready for painting. D. Gypsum board at nonvisible locations, such as within attics, shall be finished as required for fire protection. 3.10 ATTIC SEPARATIONS A. Gypsum board attic separations, with framing if necessary, shall be provided where indicated and shall be installed and taped in accordance with applicable building code requirements. Access doors shall be selfclosing, and return air openings shall be equipped with fusible fire links and selfclosures. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PAINTING AND COATING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 90 00 - 1 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This section covers surface preparation, furnishing, and application of protective coatings, complete. B. It is the intent of this specification that all new or existing expose metal surfaces, shall be coated with a protective coating, unless specifically excluded. C. Shop or existing surface preparation methods, cleanliness, and existing paint, rust, and mill scale removal is not known nor documented. Contractor shall be solely responsible for determining work effort, abrasive blast requirements, and any other factors that may affect work productivity as required to provide the specified surface preparation cleanliness; regardless of prior system preparation or coating application. D. It is the CONTRACTOR’s responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR’s Work. 1.02 GENERAL: A. See section GENERAL CONDITIONS, which contain information and requirements that apply to the work specified and are mandatory for this project. 1.03 ABBREVIATIONS ANSI American National Standards Institute AWWA American Water Works Association MDFT Minimum Dry Film Thickness MDFTPC Minimum Dry Film Thickness Per Coat mil Thousandths of an Inch OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act PSDS Paint System Data Sheet SFPG Square Feet Per Gallon SFPGPC Square Feet Per Gallon Per Coat SP Surface Preparation SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. This specification recognizes AWWA, NACE, and SSPC standards as minimum industry standards and they are referenced for purpose of conformance, except where modified BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PAINTING AND COATING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 90 00 - 2 in this section. The requirements of this specification section have been written to a higher design standard with the intent of achieving a long-term coating performance of 100 years. NACE SP0188 Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of New Protective Coatings on Conductive Substrates. NACE RP-0274 High Voltage Electrical Inspection of Pipeline Coatings Prior to Installation. SSPC-SP-1 Solvent Cleaning Surface Preparation SSPC-SP-2 Hand Tool Cleaning Surface Preparation SSPC-SP-3 Power Tool Cleaning Surface Preparation SSPC-SP-5 White metal Abrasive Blast Surface Preparation SSPC-SP-6 Commercial Abrasive Blast Surface Preparation SSPC-SP-10 Near White Metal Abrasive Blast Surface Preparation SSPC-SP-11 Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal SSPC-SP-13 Surface Preparation of Concrete 1.05 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor submittals shall be made in accordance with this Section of these Specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Catalog cuts and other information for all products proposed. Provide copy of approved coating system submittals to the coating applicator. C. Quality Control Submittals: Furnish the following: 1. Applicator's Experience with list of references substantiating compliance. 2. Coating manufacturer's certification stating the individual coating applicators have met the qualification certification requirements as specified this section. 3. Coating manufacturer shall provide a copy of the manufacturer’s coating application quality assurance manual. 4. If the manufacturer of field-applied coating differs from that of the shop applied primer, provide written confirmation from both manufacturers’ that the two coating materials are compatible. D. Product Data: Furnish the following Data Sheets: 1. For each paint system used herein, furnish a Paint System Data Sheet (PSDS), Technical Data Sheets, and paint colors available (where applicable) for each product used in the paint system, except for products applied by equipment manufacturers. A sample PSDS form is appended at the end of this section. 2. The required information shall be submitted on a system-by-system basis. 3. The Contractor shall also provide copies of the paint system submittals to the coating applicator. 4. Indiscriminate submittal of manufacturer's literature only is not acceptable. E. Where ANSI/NSF Standard 60 and 61 approvals is required, submit ANSI/NSF certification letter for each coating in the system indicating product application limits on size of tank or piping, dry film thickness, number of coats, specific product tested, colors certified, and approved additives. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PAINTING AND COATING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 90 00 - 3 F. Provide TCLP test data for lead and other regulated heavy metals in non-recyclable, slag type abrasive blast media to be used on the project. Acceptable abrasive test data shall indicate the abrasive manufacturer, location of manufacture, and media gradation and type. Surface preparation will not be permitted to begin until acceptable test data has been submitted. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Coating Applicator's Experience and Certification: 1. Coating Application Company and coating application supervisor (Certified Applicator) shall have a minimum of 5 years’ experience applying the specified coating system. 2. Coating application personnel, whom have direct coating application responsibility, shall have a minimum of 2 years practical experience in application of the indicated coating system. 3. Coating applicator shall be certified by the coating manufacturer as an approved applicator. B. Continuity of Contractor: Contractor's site supervisor shall be coordinated with the Engineer. Any replacement of the supervisor on site will require notification of Engineer 72 hours in advance and will be subject to approval by the Owner. C. Coating and/or lining manufacturer shall provide a technical representative to visit the jobsite at intervals during surface preparation and painting as may be required for product application quality assurance, and to determine compliance with manufacturer's instructions and these Specifications, and as may be nece ssary to resolve field problems attributable to, or associated with, the manufacturer's products furnished under this Contract. Sale representatives are not acceptable as a technical representative unless written authorization from the coating manufacture is provided which states the sales representative has full authority to act on the behalf of the coating manufacturer. 1.07 WARRANTY A. The Contractor and coating manufacturer shall jointly and severally warrant to the Owner and guarantee the work under this section against defective workmanship and materials for a period of 2 year(s) commencing on the date of final acceptance of the work. 1.08 ENGINEER OBSERVATIONS A. The Contractor shall give the Owner Representative notice a minimum of 14 days prior to start of work for scheduling shop or field observation. B. Provide Owner Representative a minimum 3 days' notice for actual start of surface preparation and coating application work. C. Provisions shall be made to allow Owner’s representative full access to facilities and appropriate documentation regarding coating application. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PAINTING AND COATING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 90 00 - 4 D. Observation by the Owner’s representative or the waiver of observation of any portion of the work shall not be construed to relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to perform the work in accordance with these Specifications. E. Materials shall be subject to testing for conformance with this specification as the Owner’s representative may elect, prior to or during incorporation into the work. F. Perform work in the presence of ENGINEER or Owner Representative, unless prior approval to perform such work is granted. Approval to perform work is limited to the current day unless specifically noted to extend beyond the completion of the workday. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Coatings and linings will be stored and handled per manufacturer’s written directions. B. All metallic surfaces shall be prepared and coated in accordance with referenced standards, written instructions of the coating or lining manufacturer, and these specifications, whichever is more stringent, unless specified otherwise. C. Coatings shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Product substitutions during the project will not be permitted, without ENGINEER approval. 2.02 PAINT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivered paint to the project site in unopened containers that plainly show, at the time of use, the designated name, date of manufacture, color, and name of manufacturer. B. Stored paints in a suitable protected area that is heated or cooled as required to maintain temperatures within the range recommended by the paint manufacturer. C. Shipping: 1. Where shop finish coated or primed items are to be shipped to the jobsite, protect coating from damage. Batten coated items to prevent abrasion. 2. Use nonmetallic or padded slings and straps in handling. 3. Items will be rejected for excessive damage. 2.03 PAINT AND COATINGS MANUFACTURERS A. A manufacturer letter code as follows will be found following the generic descriptions of materials outlined in the Specifications. Address is that of the general offices. Contact these offices for information regarding the location of representative nearest the project site. B. MANUFACTURER CODE A - COATINGS MANUFACTURERS (Able to supply most heavy- duty industrial coatings and architectural paints): 1. Carboline Coatings Company, St. Louis, MO. 2. ICI Devoe Coatings Company, Louisville, KY. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PAINTING AND COATING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 90 00 - 5 3. International Coatings, 4. Pittsburgh Paints (PPG), Pittsburgh, PA. 5. Sherwin Williams, Cleveland, OH 6. Tnemec Coatings, Kansas City, MO 2.04 PAINT MATERIALS A. Products shall meet federal, state, and local requirements limiting the emission of volatile organic compounds. Specific information may be secured through the local office of the Air Pollution Control Officer. B. Materials Including Primer and Finish Coats: Produced by same paint manufacturer. C. Thinners, Cleaners, Driers, and Other Additives: As recommended by paint manufacturer of the coating system. Where coatings are required to meet ANSI/NSF Standard 60 and 61, addition of thinners, driers, and other paint additives not approved under the ANSI/NSF certification letter will not be permitted without written approval from the Engineer. D. Paint products are listed according to their approximate order of appearance in the paint systems. The letter designating the manufacturer code refers to Article PAINT AND COATING MANUFACTURERS. Products Description Epoxy, NSF Amine or polyamine epoxy coating, two parts, suitable for immersion service, 75% volume solids minimum, capable of 4 to 8 MDFT per coat, approved for potable water contact in conformance to ANSI/NSF Standard 60 and 61, and suitable for the application temperatures and conditions. MANUFACTURER CODE: A Epoxy Polyamine or polyamide epoxy, two parts, suitable for immersion service, 75% volume solids minimum, capable of 4 to 8 MDFT per coat, and suitable for the application temperatures and conditions. MANUFACTURER CODE: A Polysiloxane Acrylic polysiloxane hybrid coating, single component, suitable for shop or field application at 32 degrees F, minimum, recoat window of not less than 12 months with preference for products with unlimited overcoat capability, solids content of 85% minimum, high gloss, and tintable colors. Tinted colors shall be capable of storage for 30 days or longer prior to application. Coating shall be capable of spray, roller, or brush application on all metal substrates and specified prime and intermediate coats. MANUFACTURER CODE: A Inorganic Zinc Primer Solvent or water based, 14 lbs. metallic zinc content per gallon minimum; unlimited recoat window, conform to BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PAINTING AND COATING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 90 00 - 6 manufacturer’s recommended top coats as specified herein. MANUFACTURER CODE: A Wash Primer Vinyl butyral acid or equivalent coating for enhancing finish coat adhesion to galvanized steel surfaces. MANUFACTURER CODE: A Polyurethane Enamel Two-component, aliphatic or acrylic based polyurethane; high gloss finish, suitable for continuous dry service at 200 degrees F without discoloration or peeling. MANUFACTURER CODE: A 2.05 COLORS A. Provide as selected by the Owner. B. Formulated with colorants free of lead, lead compounds, or other materials which might be affected by the presence of hydrogen sulfide or other gas likely to be present at the project. C. Proprietary identification of colors is for identification only. Any authorized manufacturer may supply matches. D. Equipment Colors: 1. Equipment shall be meant to include the machinery or vessel itself plus the structural supports and fasteners and attached electrical conduits. 2. Paint non-submerged portions of equipment in the same color as the process piping it serves, except as itemized below: a. Dangerous parts of equipment and machinery: OSHA Orange b. Fire protection equipment and Apparatus: OSHA Red c. Radiation hazards: OSHA Purple d. Physical hazards in normal operating area: OSHA Yellow 3. Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) equipment with an integral colored gel coat does not require painting, provided the color is as specified. E. Pipe Identification Painting: 1. Color code non-submerged metal piping except electrical conduit. Paint fittings and valves the same color as the pipe. 2. Piping color coding: In accordance with the Piping Schedule as shown. 3. On exposed stainless steel piping, apply color 24 inches in length along pipe axis at all connections to equipment, valves, or branch fittings, at wall boundaries, and at intervals along the piping not greater than 9 feet on center, with identification labels applied to each exposed run of pipe as specified herein. 4. Pipe supports: Mild steel, painted No. 70 light gray as specified in ANSI Z35.1. 5. Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) pipe and polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe located outside of buildings and enclosed structures will not require painting, except as noted. F. Labels for Piping: 1. Identification labels shall bear the full piping system name as specified in the Piping Schedule shown. 2. Install separate flow directional arrows with each label. 3. Include black lettering on OSHA safety yellow self-adhesive vinyl or vinyl cloth. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PAINTING AND COATING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 90 00 - 7 4. Lettering height: Meet ANSI A13.1. 5. Label and Adhesive: Long lasting, resistant to moisture, oils, solvents, and weathering, meeting OSHA requirements. 6. Locate labels at all connections to equipment, valves, or branch fittings, at wall boundaries, and at intervals along the piping not greater than 18 feet on center, with at least one label applied to each exposed run of pipe. 7. Manufacturers: a. W. H. Brady Co., Milwaukee, WI b. Seton Nameplate Corp., New Haven, CT c. or Equal. 2.06 QA/QC TESTING AND INSPECTION A. General 1. Applicator shall inspect and test the coating system in accordance with referenced standards and these specifications, whichever is more stringent. 2. Quality control testing as specified in AWWA standards are minimum industry standards and it is the intent of this specification to provide a higher level of quality control for the objective of achieving maximum coating performance. 3. If any conflict between this specification and referenced standards occurs, the more stringent requirement shall apply and any interpretation of this requirement or results shall be with the objective of achieving maximum coating performance. 4. The frequency of the testing shall be determined by the applicator but shall not be less than the requirements of this specification. B. Surface Profile Testing 1. Surface profile of abrasive blasted surfaces to be tested with “Press-O-Film” tester tape or equivalent in accordance with NACE RP287. 2. Tester tape shall be suitable for the intended profile height. 3. Profile shall be measured to a minimum tolerance of 0.1 mils, maximum. 4. Electronic surface profilometer shall be used, where deemed necessary, to verify tester tape measurements. C. Adhesion testing: As specified in Section 09 90 10, where directed by the Engineer for assessing coating application problems. D. Holiday Testing 1. Holiday tests on polyurethane coatings or linings will be conducted on the completed coating or lining after cure or 24-hours, whichever is less, using a high voltage spark test in accordance with NACE SP-0188 and these specifications. 2. Coating thickness used for high voltage holiday testing setting shall be the average dry coating thickness. E. Dry Film Thickness Testing 1. Coatings shall be tested for dry film thickness using a properly calibrated magnetic pull off, eddy current, or ultrasonic equipment. 2. Coating thickness measurements shall be conducted as necessary and without limitation. Testing conformance to the requirements of SSPC PA-2 is specifically excluded from this specification. PART 3 EXECUTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PAINTING AND COATING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 90 00 - 8 3.01 GENERAL A. The intention of this specification is for all existing and new, interior and exterior surfaces are painted, whether specifically mentioned or not, except as modified herein. Concealed structural steel surfaces shall receive prime coat only unless modified herein. Exterior concrete surfaces will not be painted unless specifically indicated hereinafter. B. Surface preparation and coating application shall be in conformance with these specifications and the coating manufacturer’s written product data sheets and written recommendations of the manufacturer’s technical representative. Where conflicts occur between the manufacturer’s recommendations and these specifications, the more stringent of the two shall apply unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. C. For coatings subject to immersion, obtain full cure for completed system. Consult coatings manufacturer's written instructions for these requirements. Do not immerse coating for any purpose until completion of curing cycle. 3.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Meet federal, state, and local requirements limiting the emission of volatile organic compounds and worker exposures. B. Protect workers and comply with applicable federal, state, and local air pollution and environmental regulations for surface preparation, blast cleaning, disposition of spent aggregate and debris, coating application and dust prevention including, but not limited to the following Acts, Regulations, Standards, and Guidelines: 1. Clean Air Act 2. National Ambient Air Quality Standard 3. Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) C. Comply with applicable federal, state, and local regulations for confined space entry. D. Provide and operate equipment that meets explosion proof requirements. 3.03 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not perform abrasive blast cleaning whenever the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, whenever surface temperature is less than 5 degrees F above the dew point of the ambient air. B. Surface preparation power tools and blast equipment shall contain dust collection equipment that will prevent discharge of dust particles into the atmosphere. C. Do not apply paint when: 1. Surface temperatures exceeds the maximum or minimum temperature recommended by the paint manufacturer, 2. In dust, smoke-laden atmosphere, damp or humid weather, or under conditions which could cause icing on the metal surface. 3. When it is expected that surface temperatures will drop below 5 degrees above dew point within 8 hours after application of coating. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PAINTING AND COATING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 90 00 - 9 3.04 DEHUMIDIFICATION A. Where environmental conditions cannot be met or controlled, Contractor shall provide and operate desiccant dehumidification equipment to maintain environmental conditions for 24 hours a day during abrasive blasting and coating application and cure. Liquid, granular, or loose lithium chloride drying systems will not be acceptable. B. Contractor shall provide dehumidification equipment sized to maintain dew point temperature 17 degrees or more below surface temperature of metal surfaces to be cleaned and coated. System shall provide ventilation within the environmentally controlled areas as required for the following requirements: 1. One air exchange per hour, minimum, 2. Maintenance of personnel exposures limits (PEL) at 50 percent of OSHA PEL limits for all chemicals used in the performance of the work, and 3. Maintenance of lower explosive limits (LEL) to less than 50 percent of the most volatile solvent used in the performance of the work. C. Dehumidification equipment type, size, air flow, and power requirements shall be designed by a qualified company knowledgeable in dehumidification equipment, and its operation based on project requirements and anticipated seasonal weather conditions for the project schedule. Design to include evaluation of existing conditions, humidity, and temperature, proper air exchange requirements, ventilation requirements, ducting requirements for adequate air flow, and any other issues necessary to achieve the specified performance and environmental conditions throughout the duration of the project. D. Contractor to submit written recommendations from dehumidification subcontractor for bulkhead locations, bulkhead venting, duct work for each bulkhead section, any secondary ventilation requirements for coating cure, dust collection equipment CFM requirements, and drying requirements for blast hose compressed air necessary to maintain environmental control as specified herein. E. Dehumidification subcontractor shall either operate the equipment or provide training to Contractor on the proper operation and setup of dehumidification equipment. Dehumidification subcontractor shall provide a technical representative on site for a minimum of two 8-hour days to ensure proper operation of the equipment, achievement of desired environmental control, and to insure Contractor can properly setup, operate, monitor, and maintain the equipment. F. Dehumidification shall be operated in a manner that prevents all condensation or icing throughout surface preparation and coating application and cure. G. Reblasting of flash rusted metal surfaces or removal of damaged coatings, as a result of equipment malfunction, shutdown, or other events that result in the loss of environmental control, will be at the sole expense of the Contractor. Cleaned metal surfaces subject to flash rusting shall be cleaned to the same cleanliness as prior to the flash rust formation and shall be approved by the Engineer. H. Contractor shall monitor ambient temperature, humidity, dew point temperature, and pipe surface temperature both outdoors and within the work area at the start, midpoint, BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PAINTING AND COATING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 90 00 - 10 and end of each work shift, minimum, but not greater than 5 hours between measurements. I. Daily environmental condition monitoring and maintenance of the equipment shall be documented in writing and posted near the equipment for review by the Engineer. 3.05 VENTILATION AND ILLUMINATION A. Adequate illumination shall be provided while work is in progress. Whenever required by the inspector, the Contractor shall provide additional illumination and necessary supports to cover all areas to be inspected. The level of illumination for inspection purposes shall be determined by the inspector. B. Ventilation shall be used to control potential dust and hazardous conditions within the tank. Ventilation flow rates shall be in accordance with OSHA regulations and as required to reduce air contamination to nonhazardous conditions. 3.06 SURFACES NOT REQUIRING PAINTING A. Unless otherwise stated herein or shown, the following areas or items will not require painting: 1. Concrete and masonry surfaces 2. Nonferrous and corrosion-resistant ferrous alloys such as copper, bronze, monel, aluminum, chromium plate, atmospherically exposed weathering steel, and stainless steel, except where: a. Required for electrical insulation between dissimilar metals. b. Aluminum and stainless steel are embedded in concrete or masonry, or aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry. c. Color coding of equipment and piping is required. 3. Nonmetallic materials such as glass, PVC, wood, porcelain, and plastic (FRP) except as required for architectural painting or color coding. 4. Prefinished electrical and architectural items such as motor control centers, switchboards, switchgear, panel boards, transformers, disconnect switches, acoustical tile, cabinets, elevators, building louvers, wall panels, etc.; color coding of equipment is required. 5. Non-submerged electrical conduits attached to unpainted concrete surfaces. 6. Cathodic protection anodes. 7. Items specified to be galvanized after fabrication unless specifically required elsewhere or subject to immersion. 8. Insulated piping and/or insulated piping with jacket will not require exterior coating, except as required for architectural painting or color coding. 3.07 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. Surface Preparation Inspection: 1. Inspect and provide substrate surfaces prepared in accordance with these Specifications and the printed directions and recommendations of paint manufacturer whose product is to be applied. 2. Provide Engineer minimum 3 days' notice prior to start of surface preparation work or coating application work. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PAINTING AND COATING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 90 00 - 11 3. Perform such work only in the presence of Engineer, unless Engineer grants prior approval to perform such work in Engineer's absence. B. Metal Surface Preparation: 1. General: a. Do not perform a surface preparation blast prior to submission of samples. Workmanship for metal surface preparation as specified shall meet current Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) Specifications as follows: (1) Solvent Cleaning: SP 1 (2) Hand Tool Cleaning: SP 2 (3) Power Tool Cleaning: SP 3 (4) White Metal Blast Cleaning: SP 5 (5) Commercial Blast Cleaning: SP 6 (6) Brush-Off Blast Cleaning: SP 7 (7) Pickling: SP 8 (8) Near-White Blast Cleaning: SP 10 (9) Bare Metal Power Tool Cleaning: SP 11 b. All surface preparation shall be assumed to be on a SSPC Grade A steel surface condition, unless specifically noted otherwise. c. Wherever the words "solvent cleaning", "hand tool cleaning", "wire brushing", or "blast cleaning", or similar words of equal intent are used in these Specifications or in paint manufacturer's specifications, they shall be understood to refer to the applicable SSPC Specifications listed above. d. Where OSHA or EPA regulations preclude standard abrasive blast cleaning, wet or vacu-blast methods may be required. Coating manufacturers' recommendations for wet blast additives and first coat application shall apply. Wet blasting methods shall be approved by the Engineer. e. Hand tool clean areas that cannot be cleaned by power tool cleaning. 2. Welds and adjacent areas: a. Prepared such that there is: (1) No undercutting or reverse ridges on the weld bead. (2) No weld spatter on or adjacent to the weld or any other area to be painted. (3) No sharp peaks or ridges along the weld bead. b. Grind embedded pieces of electrode or wire flush with the adjacent surface of the weld bead. 3. Preblast Cleaning Requirements: a. Remove oil, grease, welding fluxes, and other surface contaminants prior to blast cleaning. b. Cleaning methods: Steam, open flame, hot water, or cold water with appropriate detergent additives followed with clean water rinsing. c. Clean small isolated areas as above or solvent cleaned with suitable solvents and clean cloths. d. Round or chamfered all sharp edges and grind smooth burrs, jagged edges, and surface defects. 4. Blast Cleaning Requirements: a. General: (1) Type of Equipment and Speed of Travel: Designed to obtain specified degree of cleanliness. (2) Select type and size of abrasive to produce a surface profile that meets the coating manufacturer's recommendations for the particular coating to be BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PAINTING AND COATING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 90 00 - 12 applied or not less than 20 percent of the specified coating thickness, whichever is more stringent. (3) Meet applicable federal, state, and local air pollution control regulations for blast cleaning and disposition of spent aggregate and debris. (4) Do not reuse abrasive, unless abrasive is recyclable steel grit or shot abrasive. b. Shop Blasting (1) Notify Engineer at least 7 days prior to start of shop blast cleaning to allow for inspection of the work during surface preparation and shop application of paints. Work shall be subject to the Engineer's approval before shipment to the jobsite. (2) Items such as structural steel, metal doors and frames, metal louvers, and similar items as reviewed by the Engineer may be shop prepared and primed. Centrifugal wheel blast cleaning is an acceptable alternate to shop blast cleaning. Blast clean and prime in accordance with these Specifications. c. Field Blasting (1) Perform sandblasting for items and equipment where specified and as required to restore damaged surfaces previously shop or field blasted and primed. Materials, equipment, procedures, shall meet requirements of Steel Structures Painting Council. (2) Field blasting in areas with electrical or mechanical equipment, within buildings, or on coated surfaces with lead paint greater than 2,000 mg/L total lead shall be performed with dustless abrasive systems such as “Sponge-Jet”, dry ice abrasive blasting. 5. Post-Blast Cleaning and Other Cleaning Requirements: a. Clean surfaces of dust and residual particles from cleaning operations by dry (no oil or water vapor) air blast cleaning or other method prior to painting. Vacuum clean enclosed areas and other areas where dust settling is a problem and wiped with a tack cloth. b. Paint surfaces the same day they are sandblasted. Reblast surfaces that have started to rust before they are painted. C. Concrete Surface Preparation: 1. Do not begin until 30 days after the concrete has been placed. 2. Remove grease, oil, dirt, salts or other chemicals, loose materials or other foreign matter by solvent, detergent, or other suitable cleaning methods. 3. Clean concrete using mechanical or chemical methods for the degree of cleaning specified for the coating system in accordance with SSPC SP-13, Surface preparation of Concrete. 4. Unless otherwise required for proper adhesion, ensure surfaces are dry prior to coating. 5. Bug holes, air pockets, and other voids in the concrete will be filled or patched in chemical exposure areas, secondary containment, and where specifically required. 6. Concrete Surface Preparation Inspection: a. Adhesion Testing: (1) Tensile testing of the surface preparation shall be performed by the Engineer as necessary using Type 4 or Type 5 pneumatic adhesion testing equipment in accordance with ASTM D4541 using 2-inch diameter dollies for concrete surface adhesion testing. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PAINTING AND COATING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 90 00 - 13 (2) Applied coating greater than 20 mils in thickness or with a tensile strength greater than 2,500 psi shall be scored for concrete adhesion testing. (3) Adhesive failure greater than 50 percent of the dolly surface area shall indicate inadequate surface preparation. (4) Cohesive failures which results in loss of sound concrete will be acceptable provided the loss is greater than 50 percent of the dolly surface area. (5) Low adhesion cohesive failures with a thin layer of concrete due to weak concrete or laitance over 50 percent of the dolly surface will be rejected. b. Concrete Soundness: (1) Concrete soundness shall be determined using the scratching or hammer impact methods as defined in SSPC SP-13. c. Moisture Content: (1) Moisture shall be tested as Specified in SSPC SP-13 and shall not exceed the moisture content recommended by the coating manufacturer. D. Brush-off Blast Cleaning: 1. Equipment, procedure, and degree of cleaning shall meet SSPC-SP 7, Brush-off Blast Cleaning and shall achieve a profile on the coating equivalent to 80 grit sandpaper with no exposed metal. Profile shall be uniform over the surface with no glossy areas visible. 2. Where metal substrate is exposed, Contractor shall apply full coating system as specified for new metal surfaces. 3. Repair or replace surfaces damaged by blast cleaning, where damage is defined as visible metal substrate. If less than 5 percent of prepared surface has the metal substrate visible, the coating shall be repaired by application of a brush applied intermediate coat. If greater than 5 percent the coating shall be fully removed to meet the specified surface cleanliness and recoated with the specified coating system. 4. Abrasive: Either conventional abrasive blasting with sand, grit, or nut shells or specialized abrasive blasting. Abrasives shall be 60 mesh grit, maximum. 5. Select various surface preparation parameters such as size and hardness of the abrasive, nozzle size, air pressure, and nozzle distance from the surface such that the surface is cleaned without pitting, chipping, or other damage. 6. Verify parameter selection by blast cleaning a trial area that will not be exposed to view. 7. The Engineer shall approve trial blast cleaned area and shall use area as a representative sample of surface preparation. E. Solvent Cleaning: 1. Consists of removal of foreign matter such as oil, grease, soil, drawing and cutting compounds, and any other surface contaminants using solvents, emulsions, cleaning compounds, steam cleaning, or similar materials and methods which involve a solvent or cleaning action. 2. Method meets SSPC-SP 1. 3.08 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS NOT TO BE PAINTED BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PAINTING AND COATING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 90 00 - 14 A. Remove, mask, or otherwise protect hardware, lighting fixtures, switch plates, aluminum surfaces, machined surfaces, couplings, shafts, bearings, nameplates on machinery, and other surfaces not intended to be painted. B. Provide drop cloths to prevent paint materials from falling on or marring adjacent surfaces. C. Protect working parts of mechanical and electrical equipment from damage during surface preparation and painting process. D. Mask openings in motors to prevent paint and other materials from entering the motors. 3.09 PAINT MIXING A. Multiple-component coatings: 1. Prepare using all the contents of the container for each component as packaged by the paint manufacturer. 2. No partial batches will be permitted. 3. Do not use multiple-component coatings that have been mixed shall not be used beyond their pot life. 4. Provide small quantity kits for touchup painting and for painting other small areas. 5. Mix only components specified and furnished by the paint manufacturer. 6. Do not intermix additional components for reasons of color or otherwise, even within the same generic type of coating. 7. Fast set or plural component products shall be applied using an appropriate multipart pump that properly mixes both components at the recommended ratio using equipment recommended by the coating manufacturer. Hot mixing of fast set or plural component products will not be permitted. B. Keep paint materials sealed when not in use and provide nitrogen blanket on fast set, plural, or moisture cured coatings on opened product containers when stored or not in use more than 8 hours. C. Where more than one coat of a material is applied within a given system, alternate color to provide a visual reference that the required number of coats have been applied. 3.10 APPLICATION OF PAINT A. General: 1. Inspection: Schedule with Engineer in advance for cleaned surfaces and all coats prior to the succeeding coat. 2. Apply coatings in accordance with the paint manufacturer's recommendations. Allow sufficient time between coats to assure thorough drying of previously applied paint. 3. Fusion Bonded Coatings Method Application: Electrostatic, fluidized bed, or flocking. 4. Paint units to be bolted together and to structures prior to assembly or installation. 5. Shop Primed or Factory Finished Surfaces: a. Inspection: Schedule with Engineer in advance for shop primed or factory- finished items delivered to jobsite for compliance with these Specifications. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PAINTING AND COATING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 90 00 - 15 b. Hand or power sand areas of chipped, peeled, or abraded coating, feathering the edges. Follow with a spot primer using specified primer. c. For two-package or converted coatings, consult the coatings manufacturer for specific procedures as relates to top coating of these products. d. Prior to application of finish coats, clean shop primed surfaces of dirt, oil, and grease, and apply a mist coat of specified primer, 1.0 mil dry film thickness. e. After welding, prepare and prime holdback areas as required for the specified paint system. Apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 6. Manufacturer Applied Paint Systems: a. Repair abraded areas on factory-finished items in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's directions. b. Carefully blend repaired areas into the original finish. B. Application Safety 1. Performed painting in accordance with recommendations of the following: a. Paint manufacturer's instructions. b. NACE contained in the publication, Manual for Painter Safety. c. Federal, state, and local agencies having jurisdiction. 2. Contractor will be solely and completely responsible for condition of the project site, including safety of all persons (including employees) and property during performance of the work. This requirement will apply continuously and not be limited to normal working hours. Safety provisions will conform to U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Act, any equivalent state law, and all other applicable federal, state, county, and local laws, ordinances, and codes. 3. Contractor will comply with all safety-training requirements promulgated or required for this project. C. Film Thickness: 1. Coverage is listed as either total minimum dry film thickness in mils (MDFT) or the spreading rate in square feet per gallon (SFPG). Per coat determinations are listed as MDFTPC or SFPGPC. 2. Applied coating system film thickness per coat shall be applied at the specified coating thickness or the manufacturer’s recommended minimum thickness, whichever is greater. Where the manufacturer has not specified a minimum coating thickness on the product data sheets, the minimum recommended coating application thickness shall apply. 3. Maximum film build per coat shall not exceed the coating manufacturer's recommendations. D. Stripe Coats: 1. Surfaces that are subject to immersion, condensing environments, or where specifically specified shall be stripe coated on all angles, edges, corners, threads, welds, and similar type surfaces. 2. Stripe coat shall be an extra coat of the intermediate coating material and shall be applied between the prime and intermediate coats. 3. The stripe coat shall be a separate coat from coats specified under the coating system. 4. Stripe coats shall be alternated in color like a full coat. E. Number of coats: 1. Apply specified number of coats, minimum, irrespective of the coating thickness. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PAINTING AND COATING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 90 00 - 16 2. Additional coats may be required to obtain the minimum required paint thickness, depending on method of application, differences in manufacturers' products, and atmospheric conditions. F. Porous Surfaces, Such as Concrete, Masonry: 1. Prime Coat: a. May be thinned to provide maximum penetration and adhesion. b. Type and Amount of Thinning: Determined by the paint manufacturer and is dependent on surface density and type of coating. c. Surfaces Specified to Receive Water Base Coating: Damp, but free of running water, just prior to application of the coating. G. Existing Coated Surfaces: 1. General: a. Equipment or components with shop primer or shop finish coated surfaces shall be reviewed with the Engineer to determine coating damage, repair methods, surface preparation requirements, and conformance with color uniformity, where required. b. All shop primed or finished coated surfaces shall be verified to be chemically compatible with field applied finish coats. c. If a cured epoxy, polyurethane, or plural-component material is to be top coated, contact the coating manufacturer for additional surface preparation requirements. Existing coated surfaces shall be prepared as follows” (1) Existing coated surfaces shall be brush-off blasted as specified herein to remove all gloss and provide a uniform profile on existing coating for adhesion of subsequent coats. (2) Power or hand sanding will not be allowed as a surface preparation procedure for existing coatings, unless reviewed and approved by the Engineer. (3) Where coating manufacturer surface preparation recommendations conflict with this section, the more stringent requirements shall apply. (4) Profile shall be as specified for by the manufacturer or equivalent of 80 grit sandpaper; whichever is more stringent. Profile shall be visible and uniform over existing coated surfaces. d. All existing coated surfaces, where demolition of equipment was specified or required, shall be surface prepared, touch-up coating repairs completed, and a cosmetic overcoat applied using the specified coating system on all existing coated surfaces associated with the demolition work, unless otherwise specified. e. Existing coatings on immersed equipment shall be removed to bare metal and recoated with the specified coating system where demolition work was specified. f. Apply sealer/primer where recommended by coating manufacturer for coating compatibility. 2. To be Recoated or Final Coated: a. Detergent wash and freshwater rinse. b. Perform touch-up repairs of existing coating. c. Asphaltic varnish coated ductile iron pipe will require an application of a seal coat prior to the application of a cosmetic finish coat. 3. Touch-up Repairs: a. Clean loose, abraded, or damaged coatings to substrate by Power Tool (SP 3). BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PAINTING AND COATING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 90 00 - 17 b. Feather surrounding intact coating. c. Apply one spot coat of the specified primer to bare areas overlapping the prepared existing coating. d. Apply one full finish coat of the specified primer or finish coat(s) overall. 4. Application of a Cosmetic Coat: a. The exact nature of shop-applied coatings is not known in all cases. b. Check compatibility by application to a small area prior to starting the coating. c. If lifting or other problems occur, request disposition from the Engineer. d. Cured epoxy, polyurethane, plural component materials or any other coating system that has exceeded its maximum recoat window shall be prepared as specified this section. H. Damaged Coatings, Pinholes, and Holidays: 1. Feather edges and repaired in accordance with the recommendations of the paint manufacturer. 2. Repair fusion bonded coatings to be as recommended by the original applicator. Applicator shall provide liquid repair kits for this purpose as recommended by the coating manufacturer. 3. Apply finish coats, including touchup and damage-repair coats in a manner that will present a uniform texture and color-matched appearance. I. Unsatisfactory Application: 1. If the item has an improper finish color, or insufficient film thickness, clean and topcoat surface with specified paint material to obtain the specified color and coverage. Obtain specific surface preparation information from the coating manufacturer. 2. Hand or power sand visible areas of chipped, peeled, or abraded paint and feather the edges. Follow with primer and finish coat in accordance with the Specifications. Depending on the extent of repair and its appearance, a finish sanding and topcoat may be required. 3. Evidence of runs, bridges, shiners, laps, or other imperfections shall be cause for rejection. 4. Repair defects in coating system per written recommendations of coating manufacturer. 5. Leave all staging up until the Engineer has inspected the surface or coating. Replace staging removed prior to approval by Engineer. 3.11 COATING INSPECTION A. General 1. Film thickness measurements and electrical inspection of the coated surfaces: 2. Perform with properly calibrated instruments. 3. Recoat and repair as necessary for compliance with the Specifications. 4. All coats will be subject to inspection by the Engineer and the coating manufacturer's representative. 5. Visually inspect concrete, nonferrous metal, plastic, and wood surfaces to ensure proper and complete coverage has been attained. 6. Give particular attention to edges, angles, flanges, and other areas where insufficient film thicknesses are likely to be present and ensure proper milage in these areas. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PAINTING AND COATING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 90 00 - 18 B. Coating Thickness Testing: 1. Engineer shall conduct coating thickness testing as necessary and without limitation. Testing conformance to the requirements of SSPC PA-2 is specifically excluded from this specification. 2. Measure coating thickness specified in mils with a magnetic type dry film thickness gauge as specified. 3. Check each coat for the correct milage. Do not make measurement before a minimum of 8 hours after application of the coating. 4. Tests for concrete coating thickness shall be with a Tooke Gauge, a destructive test. Contractor shall repair coating after thickness testing. C. Coating Continuity Testing 1. Holiday detect coatings with high voltage units in accordance with NACE SP-0188. High voltage detector shall have adjustable voltages in 100 volt increments and shall be operated in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and the specified standard. 2. Use of an electrical holiday detector, low voltage, wet sponge type holiday detector will be permitted for coating systems less than 20 mils total dry film thickness and are not for immersion or condensing environments. 3. Holiday detect coatings on pipe for buried application with high voltage spark tester in accordance with NACE RP0274. 3.12 CLEANUP A. Place cloths and waste that might constitute a fire hazard in closed metal containers or destroyed at the end of each day. B. Upon completion of the work, remove staging, scaffolding, and containers from the site or destroyed in a legal manner. C. Completely remove paint spots, oil, or stains upon adjacent surfaces and floors and leave entire job clean. D. Damages due to over spray on buildings, vehicles, trees, or other surfaces not specified to be painted would be the responsibility of the Contractor. 3.13 MANUFACTURER' SERVICES A. Furnish paint manufacturer's representative to visit jobsite at intervals during surface preparation and painting as may be required for product application quality assurance, and to determine compliance with manufacturer's instructions and these specifications, and as may be necessary to resolve field problems attributable to, or associated with, manufacturer's products furnished under this Contract. 3.14 PROTECTIVE COATING SYSTEMS AND APPLICATION SCHEDULE: A. Unless otherwise shown or specified in these Specifications painted or coated the work in accordance with the following application schedule. B. In the event of discrepancies or omissions in the following, request clarification from the Engineer before starting the work in question. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PAINTING AND COATING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 90 00 - 19 System No. Title 1 SUBMERGED METAL - IMMERSION 4 EXPOSED METAL – HIGHLY CORROSIVE 5 EXPOSED METAL – MILDLY CORROSIVE 6 EXPOSED METAL – ATMOSPHERIC 8 BURIED METAL - MISCELLANEOUS 10 GALVANIZED METAL 21 EPOXY FLOOR, CONCRETE 27 ALUMINUM AND DISSIMILAR METAL INSULATION 29 FUSION BONDED COATING C. System No. 1 - Submerge Metal, Immersion 1. Surface Preparation and Coating System Surface Prep. Coating Material Min. Coats, Cover Abrasive Blast, or Centrifugal Wheel Blast (SP 5) Cement Mortar Prep: see Interior Linings, this section Epoxy, NSF 3 coats, 16 MDFT 2. Application: a. All metal surfaces subject to immersion or contact with potable water. b. Use on the following areas: (1) None identified. 3. Material Requirements: a. Polyamide Epoxy: Amine or polyamine epoxy coating, two parts, suitable for immersion, application temperatures, and environmental exposures and conditions, 75% volume solids minimum, capable of 4 to 8 MDFT per coat. b. Epoxy coating shall be NSF certified for potable water contact in conformance to ANSI/NSF Standard 60 and 61. 4. Special Requirements: a. Epoxy coating applied to immersed surfaces that contact potable water shall be NSF certified for potable water contact. b. NSF certified fusion bonded epoxy linings will be permitted as alterative lining for small diameter pipes, valves, and couplings. FBE coating to be applied as specified for FBE coatings this section and in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. c. All welds, angles, edges, and bolted connections shall be stripe coated as specified this section. D. System No. 4 - Exposed Metal, Highly Corrosive BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PAINTING AND COATING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 90 00 - 20 1. Surface Preparation and Coating System Surface Prep. Coating Material Min. Coats, Cover Abrasive Blast, or Centrifugal Wheel Blast (SP 10) Inorganic Zinc Rich Primer 1 coat, 3.0 to 4.0 DFT Epoxy 1 coat, 4 MDFT Polyurethane Enamel Or Polysiloxane 2 coats, 6 to 8 DFT 2 coats, 4 to 6 DFT 2. Application: a. All exposed metal surfaces, new and existing, located inside of vaults or structures. b. Use on the following areas: 1) None identified. c. Contractor choice of top coat material shall not be changed. Only one top coat materials will be permitted on the project. 3. Special Requirements: a. Surface preparation and primer shall be shop applied to all surfaces prior to installation. b. DFT thicknesses greater than manufacturer’s recommendations shall be subject to rejection and removal. c. Intermediate and top coats shall be field applied after installation. d. All shop primed or finish coated surfaces shall be prepared as an existing coated surface as specified herein and shall be top coated with intermediate and/or finish coats as required to provide color uniformity throughout the vault or structure. e. Color uniformity requirements shall apply to all components installed within the vault and visibly part of completed installation regardless of shop applied coating system. E. System No. 5 Exposed Metal - Mildly Corrosive 1. Surface Preparation and Coating System Surface Prep. Coating Material Min. Coats, Cover Abrasive Blast, or Centrifugal Wheel Blast (SP 10) Inorganic Zinc Rich Primer 1 coat, 3.0 DFT Polyurethane Enamel Or Polysiloxane 2 coats, 6.0 DFT 2. Application: a. All exposed metal surfaces, new and existing, located inside of process buildings without water basins or gallerys, pipe gallerys, and outside of all BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PAINTING AND COATING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 90 00 - 21 buildings or structures and exposed to weather including metal doors and frames, vents, louvers, interior metal ductwork, flashings, sheet metalwork, and miscellaneous architectural metal trim, and the following specific surfaces otherwise specified. b. Use on the following areas: 1) Chlorine building. c. Contractor choice of top coat material shall not be changed. Only one top coat materials will be permitted on the project. 3. Special Requirements: a. Surface preparation and primer shall be shop applied to all surfaces prior to installation. b. DFT thicknesses greater than manufacturer’s recommendations shall be subject to rejection and removal. c. Intermediate and top coats shall be field applied after installation. d. All shop primed or finish coated surfaces shall be prepared as an existing coated surface as specified herein and shall be top coated with intermediate and/or finish coats as required to provide color uniformity throughout the vault or structure. e. Color uniformity requirements shall apply to all components installed within the vault and visibly part of completed installation regardless of shop applied coating system. f. Do not use on exposed stainless steel, aluminum or galvanized steel. F. System No. 6 - Exposed Metal, Atmospheric: 1. Surface Preparation and Coating System Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover Abrasive Blast, or Centrifugal Wheel Blast (SP 10) Inorganic Zinc Rich Primer 1 coat, 2.5 MDFT Polysiloxane 2 coats, 6 MDFT 2. Application: a. Exposed metal surfaces, new and existing, located outside of structures and exposed to weather and the following specific surfaces unless otherwise specified. b. Use on the following items or surfaces: (1) Inside flow meter vaults. (2) Exposed surfaces of blowoff piping, unless hot dipped galvanized (3) Exposed surfaces of air vent piping, unless hot dipped galvanized. (4) Hollow metal doors per architectural drawings. 3. Special Requirements: a. All shop primed or finish coated surfaces shall be prepared as an existing coated surface as specified herein and shall be top coated with intermediate and/or finish coats as required to provide color uniformity. b. Color uniformity requirements shall apply to all components visibly part of the completed installation regardless of shop applied coating system. c. Galvanized steel surfaces shall be coated per the coating manufacturer’s requirements. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PAINTING AND COATING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 90 00 - 22 d. Polysiloxane coating to overlap buried pipe coating a minimum of 4 inches below top of concrete. e. Aliphatic polyurethane will not be allowed as a substitute for polysiloxane due to restrictive overcoat requirements. f. Dry film coating thickness of polysiloxane, including touch up repairs, shall not exceed the manufacturer’s recommended maximum film thickness. G. System No. 8 - Buried Metal, General: 1. Surface Preparation and Coating System Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover Abrasive Blast or Centrifugal Wheel Blast (SP 10) Wax Tape Coating Wax tape as specified in Section 09 90 10, Pipeline Coating and Lining 2. Application: a. All buried miscellaneous pipe, joints, fittings, and other pipe appurtenances shall be coated as specified under Section 09 90 10, Pipeline Coatings and Linings. b. All buried, below grade portions of steel items, except buried stainless steel or ductile iron, unless otherwise specified. All buried ductile iron pipe shall have an exterior asphaltic coating approximately one mil thick. 3. Special Requirements: a. Metallic air vent pipe, buried, may be coated with System No. 1 at Contractor’s option. H. System No. 10 - Galvanized Metal Conditioning: 1. Surface Preparation and Coating System Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover Solvent Clean (SP 1) Followed by Hand Tool (SP 2) or Power Tool (SP 3) Wash Primer 1 Coat, 0.4 MDFT Finish Coats to Match Existing Paint As Required to Match Surrounding Area 2. Application: a. All galvanized surfaces requiring painting and the following specific surfaces unless otherwise specified. 3. Special Requirements: a. Sweep blast as specified this section, may be used in lieu of hand or power tool cleaning of galvanized surfaces provided Contractor can demonstrate that damage to the zinc coating will not result. Engineer approval of sweep blasting locations, methods, and surface cleanliness and profile results is required. b. See applicable coating systems for finish coating system and coating requirements based on area and/or surface to be coated. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PAINTING AND COATING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 90 00 - 23 I. System No. 21 Epoxy Floor, Concrete: 1. Surface Preparation and Coating System Surface Prep. Paint Materials Min. Coats, Cover Concrete Epoxy 1st coat (thinned) 2 coats (unthinned) Total system 80 SFPG 2. Application: a. Use on the following areas: (1) The floors of all cast-in-place concrete vaults. (2) All other areas as shown on the Drawings or specified to receive, epoxy floor coating, concrete. 3. Special Requirements: a. Epoxy coating to be applied a minimum of 6-inches onto walls, pipe supports, and any other metallic component attached to the floor or wall within the 6- inch limit. b. All areas above the 6-inch limit shall be masked, provide a straight-line demarking coated versus uncoated areas. c. Abrasively blast miscellaneous metal surfaces to an SSPC SP-10, near white blast, as specified this section. d. Prime coat of epoxy shall be a thinned coat of the epoxy coating to fill and seal the concrete before the final coats applied, per the coating manufacturer’s requirements. e. Apply non-skid aggregate between coats where specified or shown. A. System No. 27 Aluminum and Dissimilar Metal Insulation: 1. Surface Preparation and Coating System Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover Solvent Clean (SP 1) Wash Primer 1 coat, 0.4 MDFT Epoxy 1 coat, 8 MDFT 2. Application: a. Use on all non-submerged concrete embedded aluminum surfaces, and the following specific surfaces unless otherwise specified. b. Use on the following surfaces: (1) All concrete embedded components of vault hatches (2) All concrete embedded surfaces where electrical isolation from concrete reinforcement is required. B. System No. 29 Fusion Bonded Coating: 1. Surface Preparation and Coating System BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PAINTING AND COATING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 90 00 - 24 Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover Abrasive Blast, or Centrifugal Wheel Blast (SP 10) or Acid Pickling (SP 8) Fusion Bonded 100% solids Epoxy or Polyurethane 1 or 2 coats, 10 MDFT 2. Application: a. Use where specified. b. Use on the following items or surfaces: (1) Concrete embedded anchor bolts, except threads. (2) Removable handrail sleeves. 3. Special Requirements: a. System 1 may be used as alternative coating system at Contractor’s option (See PSDS form following this section) BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PAINT SYSTEM DATA SHEET WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 90 00 - 25 PAINT SYSTEM DATA SHEET Attached products' Technical Data Sheet (if applicable) to this sheet for each paint system submittal. Paint System Number (from spec.): Paint System Title (from spec.): Coatings Manufacturer: Representative: Surface Preparation: Paint Material (Generic) Product Name/Number Proprietary) Min. Coats, Coverage Additional Information Required (check applicable items): ANSI/NSF Certification letter for each paint material listed above requiring ANSI/NSF Standard 60 and 61 approvals. Manufacturer’s minimum and maximum recommended coating thickness per coat and for total coating system. Immersion coating cure requirements from minimum coating application temperature to 100 degrees in 15-degree temperature increments. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PAINT SYSTEM DATA SHEET WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 90 00 - 26 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 1 SECTION 09 97 01 PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK RESULTS A. This section covers the work necessary to apply external coating and internal lining on steel pipe, field coating of joints, and shop and field repair of coating damage, complete. B. Exposed steel pipe will be shop coated as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coatings. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS: A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. B. It is the Contractor’s responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of Contractor’s Work. C. The following Sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of Related Sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. 1. Section 01 33 20 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coatings 3. Section 26 42 14 - Corrosion Monitoring 4. Section 26 42 15 – Impressed Current Cathodic Protection 1.3 GENERAL: A. See section GENERAL CONDITIONS, which contain information and requirements that apply to the work specified and are mandatory for this project. 1.4 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 01 33 20 of these Specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Catalog cuts and other information for all products proposed. Provide copy of approved coating system submittals to the coating applicator. C. Quality Control Submittals: Furnish the following: 1. Applicator's Experience with list of references substantiating compliance. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 2 2. Coating manufacturer's certification stating the individual coating applicators have met the qualification certification requirements as specified this section. 3. Coating manufacturer shall provide a copy of the manufacturer’s coating application quality assurance manual. 4. If the manufacturer of field-applied coating differs from that of the shop applied primer, provide written confirmation from both manufacturers’ that the two coating materials are compatible. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Coating Applicator's Experience and Certification: 1. Coating Application Company and coating application supervisor (Certified Applicator) shall have a minimum of 5 years’ experience applying the specified coating system. 2. Coating application personnel, whom have direct coating application responsibility, shall have a minimum of 2 years practical experience in application of the indicated coating system. 3. Coating applicator shall be certified by the coating manufacturer as an approved applicator. B. Coating and/or lining manufacturer technical representative shall be present for a minimum of three days technical assistance and instruction at the start of coating and/or lining operations within the shop. During this visit, the technical representative shall observe surface preparation and coating application and conduct tests of the coating to insure conformance with application instructions, recommended methods, and conditions. C. Coating and/or lining manufacturers technical representative shall be onsite for three working days, minimum, at the start of each construction season to inspect coating application and procedures in the field. During this visit, the technical representative shall observe surface preparation and coating application and conduct tests of the coating to insure conformance with application instructions, recommended methods, and conditions. D. Coating and/or lining manufacturer shall include 8 hours per month of field or shop coating technical support when requested by the Engineer. E. Technical representative shall provide a written report to the Engineer for each visit. Report shall include copies of test data collected, description of observations, and all recommended corrective actions. Report shall be submitted within 5 working days after the visit. When deemed necessary by the Engineer, work will not be permitted to proceed until the recommended corrective actions have been implemented. After all corrective recommendations have been completed; the manufacturer representative shall return and certify that the application complies with the manufacturer’s coating application recommendations. F. Additional visits by the manufacturer’s representative shall be made at sufficient intervals during surface preparation and coating or lining as may be required for BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 3 product application quality assurance, and to determine compliance with manufacturer’s instructions, and as may be necessary to resolve problems attributable to, or associated with, manufacturer’s products furnished for this project. 1.6 ABBREVIATIONS MDFT Minimum Dry Film Thickness mil Thousandths of an Inch 1.7 DEFINITIONS A. MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE: Employee of coating manufacturer who is factory trained and knowledgeable in all technical aspects of their products and systems. Sales representatives are not acceptable as a technical representative unless written authorization from the coating manufacturer is provided which states the sales representative has full authority to act on the behalf of the coating manufacturer. B. SPECIALS FITTINGS AND CONNECTIONS: Defined as any joint of pipe with turnout, blowoff, fabricated tee, cross, wye, manhole, mitered angles or elbows, crotch plates, butt straps, or fabricated pipe that cannot be coated using through put or straight pipe coating application equipment and the following specific items: 1. All pipe joint sections entering a structure. 2. Pipe joints with weld lead pass through holes. C. SHOP: A shop is defined as a permanent, fully enclosed building with a concrete floor that can be power washed with a potable water supply and floor drains. 1.8 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. This specification recognizes AWWA, NACE, and SSPC standards as minimum industry standards and they are referenced for purpose of conformance, except where modified in this section. The requirements of this specification section have been written to a higher design standard with the intent of achieving a long-term coating performance of 100 years. AWWA C205 Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water Pipe-4- inch and Larger- Shop Applied. AWWA C210 Liquid-Epoxy Coating Systems for Steel Water Pipelines. AWWA C214 Tape Coating Systems for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipe. AWWA C215 Extruded Polyolefin Coatings for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines. AWWA C216 Heat-shrinkable Cross-linked Polyolefin Coatings for the Exterior of Connections and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines. AWWA C217 Petrolatum and Petroleum Wax Tape Coatings for the Exterior of Connections and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines. NACE SP0188 Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of New Protective Coatings on Conductive Substrates. NACE RP-0274 High Voltage Electrical Inspection of Pipeline Coatings Prior to Installation. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 4 NACE RP0303 Field-Applied Heat-Shrinkable Sleeves for Pipelines: Application, Performance, and Quality Control NACE SP0394 Application, Performance and Quality Control for Plant Applied Single Layer Fusion-Bonded Epoxy External Pipe Coating. SSPC-SP-1 Solvent Cleaning Surface Preparation SSPC-SP-2 Hand Tool Cleaning Surface Preparation SSPC-SP-3 Power Tool Cleaning Surface Preparation SSPC-SP-5 White metal Abrasive Blast Surface Preparation SSPC-SP-6 Commercial Abrasive Blast Surface Preparation SSPC-SP-10 Near White Metal Abrasive Blast Surface Preparation SSPC-SP-11 Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal 1.9 SPECIAL WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor and coating applicator shall warrant to the Owner and guarantee the work under this section against defective workmanship and materials for a period of two (2) years commencing on the date of final acceptance of the work. 1.10 OBSERVATION OF WORK A. The Contractor shall give the Owner Representative notice a minimum of 14 days prior to start of work for scheduling shop or field observation. B. Provide Owner Representative a minimum 3 days' notice for actual start of surface preparation and coating application work. C. Provisions shall be made to allow Owner’s representative full access to facilities and appropriate documentation regarding coating application. D. Observation by the Owner’s representative or the waiver of observation of any portion of the work shall not be construed to relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to perform the work in accordance with these Specifications. E. Materials shall be subject to testing for conformance with this specification as the Owner’s representative may elect, prior to or during incorporation into the work. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.1 GENERAL A. Coatings and linings will be stored and handled per manufacturer’s written directions. B. Exterior and interior pipe and fitting surfaces shall be prepared and coated in accordance with referenced standards, written instructions of the coating or lining manufacturer, and these specifications, whichever is more stringent. C. Pipeline coating or lining shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Product substitutions during the project will not be permitted, without Engineer approval. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 5 2.2 SHOP-APPLIED, BURIED PIPE COATINGS A. General 1. Buried steel pipe, consisting of straight lengths of pipe, shall be coated with one of the following coating systems at the Contractors option, except where noted otherwise. a. Polyethylene Tape Wrap and cement overcoat (AWWA C214 and C205) b. Plural Component Epoxy (AWWA C210) c. Cement Mortar (AWWA C205), only where indicated on Drawings 2. Buried Steel pipe specials, fittings, and other complex shapes, shall be coated with one of the following coating systems. a. Plural Component Epoxy (AWWA C210) b. Cement Mortar (AWWA C205), only where indicated on Drawings. 3. Vault or manhole piping and miscellaneous pipeline components, such as coupling plain ends, access manholes, blowoff piping, or piping less than 12-inches in diameter, shall be coated as specified under Shop Applied, Atmospheric and Immersion Coatings, this section. 4. Mortar over coat shall be provided over tape wrap coating system and where specified. Cement mortar overcoat shall be shop-applied and 1-inch thick, ±1/4- inch, as specified herein. 5. Buried dielectrically coated pipe and fittings passing through a concrete structure wall or floor shall be dielectrically coated for a minimum of four (4) inches beyond the interior wall or floor surface. 6. Exterior surfaces of all butt straps shall be prepared to SP-5, white metal, and coated with inorganic zinc suitable for temperatures over 750 degrees as specified for holdback corrosion protection. B. Polyethylene Tape Wrap: 1. General Coating Requirements: a. Tape wrap coating system shall be machine applied. Hand applied tape coatings will not be permitted. b. Tape width shall be 12-inches maximum. Wider tape will be conditionally allowed if the coating applicator can demonstrate that proper maintenance of tension and prevention of mechanical wrinkling throughout the coating application. If at any time during the pipe fabrication tape quality becomes inconsistent with wider tape, the Engineer can require the remainder of the pipe to be coated using the maximum specified tape width. c. Tape layers shall have adhesive for the full width of the tape. Adhesive shall have the ability to stick to itself and to the proceeding tape layer or pipe. d. Each layer shall be a different color or shade with the outer layer white. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 6 e. Outer wrap shall be white and have sufficient ultraviolet (UV) inhibitors to resist above grade exposure for a minimum of 12 months or the proposed storage and construction time, whichever is greater. 2. Steel Pipe: a. Surface Preparation: (1) Comply with salt contamination and surface cleanliness (dust) requirements as specified for Quality Control testing. (2) Steel Pipe: SSPC-SP5, White Metal blast, 2.5 mils blast profile, minimum. b. Coating System (1) Pipe shall be coated with an 80 mil (nominal), tape-coating systems applied in accordance with AWWA C214, except as modified herein. (2) Steel pipe with cement mortar overcoat shall be coated with 50 mil (nominal), tape-coating systems applied in accordance with AWWA C214, except as modified herein. (3) Primer: Polyken 1019, 1027, 1029, or as recommended by the coating manufacturer. (4) Weld Stripe Tape: Polyken 931 (no backing), 25 mils nominal, 4-inches wide minimum. (5) Inner Wrap: Polyken 989 YGIII, 20 mils nominal, corrosion protection layer. (6) Outer Wrap: Polyken 956 YGIII, 30 mils nominal, mechanical protection layer. (7) Mechanical Protection: Cement mortar overcoat in accordance with AWWA C205, except as modified herein. C. Plural Component Epoxy: 1. General: a. Plural component, epoxy coating system shall be applied in accordance with AWWA C210, and as modified herein. b. All steel pipe specials, fittings, complex shapes, and other surfaces that are not suitable for machine applied tape wrap coating application and are below finished grade or concrete encased shall be coated with this coating system. c. Plural component epoxy coating system is not suitable for interior of pipe or where contact with potable water may occur, see Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coatings, for applicable protective coating systems. 2. Shop Surface Preparation: a. Steel pipe: (1) Comply with salt contamination and surface cleanliness requirements as specified for Quality Control Testing. (2) SSPC-SP5, White Metal blast, 3.00 mil profile, minimum, or as required by the manufacturer, whichever is greater. 3. Shop Applied Coating Requirements: a. Thickness: One coat, 35 mils total dry film thickness, minimum, or as required to meet limits specified for holiday and coating defects, this section. b. Cement Mortar Overcoat: (1) Apply cement mortar overcoat on epoxy coated specials when used in conjunction with tape wrapped steel pipe as specified this section. (2) Ductile iron pipe does not require a cement mortar overcoat. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 7 4. Product Acceptance: a. Self-priming, plural component, 100 percent solids, non-extended epoxy, suitable for burial or immersion, and meeting the requirements of AWWA C210 and the following, whichever is more stringent: 1) Resistance to Water Immersion (ASTM D870) or Wet Adhesion a) Acceptance criteria: (1) Not greater than 10 percent loss of substrate adhesion when compared to substrate adhesion in an unexposed area of the same sample with adhesion tests completed within 12 to 24 hours after test termination. Average of three pulls per exposure area. (2) No blistering or underfilm corrosion when viewed at 10x magnification. b) Adhesion Testing: (1) Method: ASTM D4541, Method E (2) Equipment:Type V, Delfesko Automatic AT Positest (3) Dollies: 20 mm and 14 mm, scored to metal substrate (4) Test Speed:100 psi per second (both 14 and 20 mm) c) Test Duration:30 and 60 days 2) Cathodic Disbondment (ASTM G95) a) Acceptance criteria: 8 mm, maximum b) Potential: -3.00 volts c) Test Duration: 28 days d) Evaluation: Measured from original holiday radius to edge of staining on metal surface. 3) Water Absorption (ASTM D570) a) Acceptance Criteria: 1.80 percent, maximum b) Test Duration:30 day and 60 day b. Shall be one of the following products: (1) Tnemec Series 431, Kansas City, MO (2) Or Engineer approved equal D. Cement Mortar Coating or Cement Mortar Overcoat 1. Apply cement mortar coating system on steel pipe, where specifically shown on the Drawings, in accordance with AWWA C205, except as modified herein. 2. Cement mortar overcoat shall be applied over dielectric coating system on all steel pipe and fittings in accordance with AWWA C205, except as modified herein. 3. Holdback: a. Mortar overcoat shall be held back of dielectric coating a minimum of 3 inches for overlap of field applied joint coating onto dielectric coating system. 4. Shop Applied Coating System: a. Cement: Conform to ASTM C150, Type II. b. Aggregate shall be silica sand or other aggregate that is not subject to leaching. Conform to ASTM C33. c. Cement mortar mixture shall consist of 1-part cement to not more than 3 parts aggregate. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 8 d. Water for cement mortar: Clean and free from organic matter, strong alkalis, vegetable matter, and other impurities. Use no more than 4-1/2 gallons of water per sack of cement. e. Cement mortar coating: Nominal 1-inch thick coating with permitted tolerance of ±1/4-inch. 5. Joint Coating: a. Joints shall be cement mortar overcoated after application of heat shrink sleeve joint coating system. b. Joints of cement mortar overcoat dielectrically coated pipe do not require field application of cement mortar overcoat when properly coated with heat shrink sleeve joint coating system. 2.3 SHOP-APPLIED INTERIOR LININGS A. General 1. Clean and cement mortar line steel pipe and fittings 6-inches or greater in diameter in accordance with AWWA C205. 2. Cement mortar line ductile iron pipe and fittings in accordance with C104, provide double thickness lining. Do not seal coat the cement lining. 3. Apply liquid epoxy coating over cement mortar lining at insulating joints as specified this section. 4. Epoxy line pipe 12-inches diameter or smaller per System No. 1 or fusion bonded epoxy lining at contractor’s option. Fusion bonded epoxy lining shall be NSF certified. B. Cement Mortar Lining: 1. Cement: Conform to ASTM C150, Type II. 2. Shop applied cement mortar lining shall be uniform in thickness over the full length of the pipe joint. 3. Aggregate shall be silica sand or other aggregate that is not subject to leaching. Conform to ASTM C33. 4. Water for cement mortar: Clean and free from organic matter, strong alkalis, vegetable matter, and other impurities. C. Liquid Applied Epoxy Coating: 1. Epoxy Overcoat of Cement Mortar Lining: a. Provide liquid epoxy primer and lining in all cement mortar lined metallic pipe at insulating joints for a minimum of one pipe diameters on each side of the insulated joint. If other side of joint is an existing pipe, apply epoxy lining for two pipe diameters in fabricated pipe only. b. Epoxy lining shall be polyamine or polyamide cured, NSF approved for potable water contact in accordance with ANSI/NSF Standards 60 and 61, and capable of achieving full cure before placement in service or exposure to water. c. Application: (1) Apply in two coats at equivalent spread rate for 6 mils dry film thickness per coat. (2) Epoxy shall be applied over the cement mortar lining where specified for the pipeline lining material. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 9 (3) Cement mortar shall be allowed to cure for a minimum of 15 days prior to surface preparation and coating application or 7 days with steam curing. Mortar lining shall be dry when epoxy lining is applied. (4) Prepare the cement mortar lining by abrasive blasting to remove all laitance and provide a surface profile equivalent to 80 grit sandpaper. d. Acceptable manufacturers: (1) Carboline (2) ICI Devoe (3) Tnemec (4) Sherwin Williams (5) Or approved equal 2.4 SHOP APPLIED, ATMOSPHERIC OR IMMERSION COATINGS A. General 1. All atmospherically exposed or vault piping shall be shop primed and field coated with the applicable Exposed Metal coating system as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coatings. 2. Interior of pipe or surfaces in contact with potable water shall be coated with System No. 1. 3. Shop applied inorganic zinc primer shall not be applied at thickness greater than recommended by manufacturer. Excess primer to be removed using method recommended by coating manufacturer. 4. Intermediate and finish coats shall be applied in the field after installation, except where metal surfaces will be concealed after installation. 5. All concealed surfaces of bolted or mechanically secured surfaces shall be finished coated in the shop. 6. Manufacturer of shop-applied primer shall be coordinated with field application to provide a completed system by a single manufacturer. Engineer approval of a coating system with two or more coating manufacturers’ will require written approval from all coating manufacturers as to compatibility and acceptance under warranty. 2.5 FIELD APPLIED COATING SYSTEMS A. General 1. Miscellaneous Metals a. All buried miscellaneous metal components installed on the pipeline and that is supplied bare or with a shop coating system that is not equal to the specified pipeline coating shall be coated in the field with one of the following coating systems. (1) Petrolatum or Wax Tape Coating (2) Heat Shrink Sleeve b. Miscellaneous metal components shall include, but not be limited too, all exposed metals surfaces, including bolts, couplings, flanges, valves, adapters, pipe spools, and other miscellaneous metal components. c. Coating system applied shall conform to the manufacturer’s requirements and shall be applied in accordance with the application requirements of the coating system. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 10 d. Filler material shall be applied for all field applied coating systems to provide sufficient transition at welds and other dimensional changes to prevent all tenting or voids under the applied coating, regardless of manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. Pipe Joints General: a. Pipe joints shall be field coated after pipe assembly with one of the following coating systems as specified. (1) Petrolatum or wax tape coating system (2) Heat Shrink Sleeves. b. Steel pipe joints shall be coated with a heat shrink coating, unless specified otherwise. c. Ductile iron push-on bell and spigot joints may be heat shrink sleeve coated, provided filler mastic is used to prevent tenting or voids under the sleeve. d. Joints of cement mortar overcoated tape wrap steel pipe shall be cement mortar overcoated after application of the specified field applied joint coating, unless specified otherwise. e. Flanges, couplings, ductile iron pipe joints, and all bolted or threaded joints are classified as complex shapes and shall be wax tape coated with filler material to ensure completed encapsulation and filling of all bolts, crevices, gaps, and dimensional transitions as required to prevent tenting of the finished coating. B. Petroleum or Wax Tape Coating: 1. Application: a. Coating shall be applied in accordance with AWWA C217, except as modified herein. b. Wax tape coatings shall be field applied on all buried couplings, thrust restraint rods and brackets, valves, and on joints, fittings, or irregular shapes or complex configurations that could cause tenting of heat shrink coating system. c. Provide wax filler material for all complex shapes, bolts, flanges, gaps, and dimensional transitions to completely fill and encapsulate the metal surfaces and prevent tenting of the applied tape coating. d. Buried wax tape coated surfaces shall be overcoated with plastic shrink film as recommended by the manufacturer. e. Do not use wax tape coating systems on vault piping, atmospherically exposed piping and appurtenances, or where subject to UV exposures. f. Use sand backfill to protect wax coating from damage. 2. Surface Preparation: SP11 Power Tool to Bare Metal or SSPC-SP10, near white abrasive blast. 3. Coating System: a. Primer: petroleum or petrolatum wax, suitable for wet surfaces. b. Filler Material: (1) Filler materials shall be petroleum or petrolatum wax sealer/filler with closed cell plastic filler (2) Provide filler material to fill and smooth all irregular surfaces, such that no tenting or voids remain under the applied wax tape. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 11 c. Inner Tape: Petroleum or petrolatum wax impregnated fabric, 6-inch width maximum, 40 mils thick d. Outer Wrap: PVC or tape suitable for application to inner tape. 4. Manufacturers: Wax tape coating system shall be as manufactured by: a. Denso North American b. Trenton c. Or approved equal. C. Heat Shrink Sleeves: 1. Application: a. Heat shrink sleeves are restricted to pipeline joints and couplings under buried or concrete encased applications only. b. Application inside vaults or where exposed to the weather will not be allowed. c. Provide filler material for all welded joints, rolled or Carnegie joints, and at all dimensional changes that could result in tenting or voids under the applied heat shrink sleeve. d. Pipe joints that have been shop prepared as specified for heat shrink sleeves and shop coated with holdback primer as specified this section, shall be field prepared in accordance with SSPC-SP1, solvent cleaning, and SP3, Power tool cleaning, to remove all dirt, mud, oil, and grease prior to application of heat shrink sleeve. e. Filler material shall be applied in a manner and of sufficient thickness that no tenting or voids remain under the heat shrink sleeve. f. Contractor to consider sleeve shrinkage and joint profile in determining sleeve width required. Overlapping of two or more heat shrink sleeves to achieve the necessary width on pipe joints will not be permitted without Engineer approval. 2. Surface preparation: As specified for pipe joint surface preparation. 3. Coating System: a. Filler Material: (1) Filler material shall adhere to the pipe and heat shrink sleeve. Size and type shall be as recommended by the sleeve manufacturer for type of pipe and joint. (2) Filler materials shall be applied as necessary to prevent all tenting or voids under the applied heat shrink sleeve, regardless of manufacturer’s written recommendations. (3) Filler mastic for joints subject to weld after backfill shall have a melt temperature exceeding 500 degrees F. b. Heat Shrink Sleeve: (1) Heat shrink, cross-linked polyolefin sleeve with a mastic sealant, 85-mil nominal thickness or greater, suitable for pipeline operating temperature, as recommended by the manufacturer. (2) Provide standard recovery sleeve for welded or bell and spigot steel pipe joints. High recovery sleeves shall be provided for mechanical or bell and spigot ductile iron pipe, flange joints, and coupling style joints. (3) Width of heat shrink sleeves shall be sufficient to overlap existing coating 2-inches minimum, except extruded polyolefin coated pipe shall have a minimum overlap of 3-inches. Overlap on tape coated steel pipe shall be BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 12 based on a sequential 2-inch wide step from outer wrap to middle wrap to inner wrap. (4) Sleeve shall meet requirements for “Well After Backfill” when procedure is allowed and approved by Engineer. 4. Coating Manufacturer’s: a. Canusa, b. Raychem-Covalence, c. Or equal. D. Epoxy Coating: 1. Application: a. Epoxy coatings shall be NSF approved and suitable for water contact in accordance with ANSI/NSF Standards 60 and 61, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. b. Contractor shall ensure that epoxy coating selected is suitable for the application temperatures anticipated and that project schedule will allow adequate cure time before backfilling or immersion based on surface temperatures at the time of application. c. Epoxy coating shall be used to coat concrete embedded pipe penetrations for 6 inches outside of interior and exterior surfaces of concrete walls or floors. Epoxy coating at concrete penetrations shall be a minimum of 16 mils dry film thickness. d. Buried transitions from epoxy to tape wrap coating systems shall be coated with Heat Shrink Sleeve as specified below. Heat shrink sleeves shall be buried within 72-hours of application to prevent thermal creep of sleeve. Sleeves subject wrinkling due to thermal exposure shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor. 2. Surface Preparation: SP11 Power Tool to Bare Metal or SSPC-SP10, near white abrasive blast. 3. Coating System: a. Primer: As required by the coating manufacturer. b. High Build Epoxy Coating: (1) Two component, high build polyamide or polyamine cured epoxy coating, suitable for direct burial or immersion, dries to touch in 2 or more hours, suitable for immersion or burial after full cure of coating. (2) Acceptable manufacturers: (a) ICI Devoe (b) Sherwin Williams (c) Carboline (d) Or approved equal c. Fast Cure Epoxy Coating: (1) Two components, 100% solids by volume, fast cure epoxy coating suitable for direct burial or immersion, dry to touch in less than 1 hour at 72 degrees, capable of curing while immersed or buried. 4. Manufacturers: a. TC 7010, Tapecoat Inc b. Protal 7125 or Protal 7200, North American Denso c. Or approved equal. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 13 E. Cement Mortar Coating or Overcoat: 1. Joints of cement mortar coated or cement mortar overcoated steel pipe shall be mortar coated as specified herein after application of the specified joint coating materials, where applicable. 2. Polyethylene foam-lined fabric with steel strapping of sufficient strength to hold the fresh mortar, resist rodding of the mortar and allow excess water to escape. a. 100 percent closed-cell b. Chemically inert, insoluble in water, resistant to acids, alkalis, and solvents. c. Manufacturer and Product: Dow Chemical Company; Ethafoam 222. 3. Fabric Backing: a. Cut and sewn into strips wide enough to overlap shop-coated areas by 4 inches on either side. b. Strips shall have slots for steel strapping on outer edges. 4. Joint Coating: a. Joints of cement mortar overcoat dielectrically coated pipe do not require field application of cement mortar overcoat when properly coated with heat shrink sleeve or wax tape joint coating system. 2.6 FIELD APPLIED INTERIOR JOINT LINING A. Epoxy Lining: 1. Surface preparation and field lining of pipe joints shall be with the same coating system as the shop-applied lining. 2. Field application shall be performed by a qualified contractor with equipment that meets the application requirements of the coating system and personnel trained and certified by the coating system manufacturer on the proper application of the coating system. Qualified field applicator shall have completed at least three other projects of similar size and magnitude within the last three years using the same or similar coating system. 3. Coating applicator that does not meet the qualifications requirements can be rejected by the Engineer. 4. Field coating application requirements shall be the same as the shop-applied coating requirements. Provide heating and/or dehumidification equipment as required to meet the environmental conditions necessary for proper coating application. B. Mortar Lining: 1. After the backfill has been completed to final grade, the interior joint recess shall be filled with grout. The grout shall be tightly packed into the joint recess and trowelled flush with the interior surface. Excess shall be removed. 2. At no point shall there be an indentation or projection of the mortar exceeding 1/16-inch. 3. With pipe smaller than 24-inches in diameter, before the spigot is inserted into the bell, the bell shall be daubed with grout. The joint shall be completed and excess mortar on the inside of the joint shall be swabbed out. 2.7 REPAIR OF COATINGS AND LININGS A. General BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 14 1. Coating or lining repair materials shall be compatible with the shop-applied coating or lining system and shall be approved by the coating or lining manufacturer. 2. Coating repair materials shall be as required for the coating system and repair classification as defined this section. B. Coating Repair Materials 1. Heat Shrink Sleeves (major repair): a. Filler Mastic: Provide mastic filler to fill tape void as required. b. Shrink Sleeve: See Field Applied Coatings, Heat Shrink Sleeves, this section. 2. Heat-Applied Patches (minor repair) a. Heat applied adhesive, polyolefin backed, mastic coated tape, 12-inches maximum size. b. Patch shall provide a minimum of 2 inches overlap onto intact pipe coating; except for extruded polyolefin coated pipe shall have a minimum overlap of 3- inches in the circumferential direction. c. CRP patch as manufactured by Canusa, PERP patch as manufactured by Raychem (Polyken), or equal. 3. Plural Component Epoxy Coating or Lining a. Major Repairs: (1) Shop repairs shall be completed using the same material as the pipe coating. Coating shall be reapplied using plural component spray equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s written requirements. (2) Field repairs shall be completed using heat shrink sleeves as specified for field applied coatings, this section. (3) Shop or field major repairs to NSF linings shall be with single use kits matching the existing lining. b. Minor Repairs: (1) Shop minor repairs shall be single use kits matching the existing coating. Pinholes, holidays, or adhesion test repairs are classified as minor repairs. (2) Field minor repairs shall be with fast cure epoxy, such as Protal 7125 as manufactured by North American Denso, Inc. (3) Shop or field minor repairs to NSF linings shall be with single use kits matching the existing lining. 2.8 HOLDBACK CORROSION PROTECTION A. Primer for corrosion protection of cutbacks or holdbacks shall be compatible with the specified joint coating system and high heat resistant or weld after backfill requirements, where applicable. B. Approved holdback primers are: 1. Tnemec Omnithane – Suitable for all joints, except joints subject to high heat resistant or weld after backfill 2. Tnemec 90E-92 Ethyl Silicate Inorganic Zinc Primer – suitable for all joints, including high heat resistant or weld after backfill joints. 3. ICI Devoe Cathacoat 304V Ethyl Silicate Inorganic Zinc Primer – suitable for all joints including high heat resistant or weld after backfill joints. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 15 4. Polyken Tape Primers – Not allowed C. Primer shall not result in running or melting of the coating or cause toxic fumes when heated during welding of “weld after backfill” joints. D. Application and thickness of holding primer shall be in accordance with the coating manufacturer’s recommendations, but shall not impair the clearances required for proper joint installation. E. Holdback requirements shall be as specified this section. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL LIMITATIONS A. General 1. Products shall comply with federal, state, and local requirements limiting the emission of volatile organic compounds and worker exposure. 2. Comply with applicable federal, state, and local, air pollution and environmental control regulations for surface preparation, blast cleaning, disposition of spent aggregate and debris, and coating application. 3. Do not perform abrasive blast cleaning whenever the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, whenever surface temperature is less than 5 degrees above the dew point of the ambient air. 4. Do not apply coatings when: a. Surface and ambient temperatures exceed the maximum or minimum temperatures recommended by the coating manufacturer or these specifications, b. In dust or smoke-laden atmosphere, blowing dust or debris, damp or humid weather, or under conditions that could cause icing on the metal surface. c. When it expected that surface temperatures would drop below 5 degrees above dew point within 4 hours after application of coating. d. Whenever relative humidity exceeds 85 percent. 5. Where weather conditions or project requirements dictate, Contractor shall provide and operate heaters and/or dehumidification equipment to allow pipe surfaces to be abrasive blasted and coated as specified and in accordance with the manufacturers coating application recommendations. 6. Work activities can be restricted by the Engineer until adequate temperature and humidity controls are in place and functioning within the environmental limits specified. 7. Coating applicator shall provide a monitoring system approved by the coating manufacturer that constantly records pipe and coating conditions during coating application. Recorded monitoring parameters shall include pipe temperature, line speed, holiday test and other parameters applicable to the type of coating. B. Temperature Control 1. In cold weather or if moisture collects on the pipe, preheat pipe to a temperature between 45 and 90 degrees or 5 degrees above dew point, whichever is greater. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 16 2. When temperatures are above or below the coating manufacturers recommended application temperatures, the Contractor will provide temperature controls as necessary to permit work to precede within the manufacturer’s temperature limitations. 3. Provide tenting, insulating blankets, baffles, or bulkheads as required to zone and control heating or cooling effectiveness. 4. Heating shall be with indirect fired heaters that do not increase humidity levels within the work area. Heaters shall be sized for the area to be heated. C. Dehumidification 1. Contractor shall provide and operate desiccant dehumidification equipment to maintain environmental conditions during abrasive blasting and coating application and cure. Liquid, granular, or loose lithium chloride drying systems will not be acceptable. 2. Contractor shall provide dehumidification equipment sized to maintain dew point temperature 17 degrees or more below surface temperature of metal surfaces to be cleaned and coated. System shall provide ventilation within the environmentally controlled areas to meet the following requirements: a. Two air exchanges per hour, minimum, b. Maintenance of personnel exposure limits (PEL) at 50 percent of OSHA PEL limits for all chemicals used in the performance of the work, and c. Maintenance of lower explosive limits (LEL) to less than 50 percent of the most volatile solvent used in the performance of the work. 3. Dehumidification equipment type, size, air flow, and power requirements shall be designed by a qualified company knowledgeable in dehumidification equipment, and its operation based on project requirements and anticipated seasonal weather conditions for the project schedule. Design to include evaluation of existing conditions, humidity, and temperature, proper air exchange requirements, ventilation requirements, ducting requirements for adequate air flow, and any other issues necessary to achieve the specified performance and environmental conditions throughout the duration of the project. 4. Contractor to submit written recommendations from dehumidification subcontractor for enclosure work area size, bulkhead venting, duct work for each bulkhead section, any secondary ventilation requirements for coating cure, dust collection equipment CFM requirements, and drying requirements for blast hose compressed air necessary to maintain environmental control as specified herein. 5. Dehumidification subcontractor shall either operate the equipment or provide training to Contractor on the proper operation and setup of dehumidification equipment. Dehumidification subcontractor shall provide a technical representative on site for a minimum of two 8 hour days to insure proper operation of the equipment, achievement of desired environmental control, and to insure Contractor can properly setup, operate, monitor, and maintain the equipment. 6. Dehumidification shall be operated in a manner that prevents all condensation or icing throughout surface preparation, coating application, and coating cure. 7. Reblasting of flash rusted metal surfaces or removal of damaged coatings, because of equipment malfunction, shutdown, or other events that result in the loss of environmental control, will be at the sole expense of the Contractor. Cleaned BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 17 metal surfaces subject to flash rusting shall be cleaned to the same cleanliness as prior to the flash rust formation and shall be approved by the Engineer. 8. Contractor shall monitor ambient temperature, humidity, dew point temperature, and pipe surface temperature (work area only) both outdoors and within the work area at the start, midpoint, and end of each work shift, minimum, but not greater than 5 hours between measurements. 9. Daily environmental condition monitoring and maintenance of the equipment shall be documented in writing and posted near the equipment for review by the Engineer. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. General 1. Inspect and provide substrate surfaces prepared in accordance with these Specifications and the printed directions and recommendations of coating manufacturer whose product is to be applied. 2. Visible oil, grease, dirt, and contamination shall be removed in accordance with SSPC-SP1, solvent cleaning. 3. Surface imperfections such as metal slivers, burrs, weld splatter, gouges, or delaminations in the metal shall be removed by filing or grinding prior to abrasive surface preparation. 4. Protect prepared pipe from humidity, moisture, and rain. All flash rust, imperfections, or contamination on cleaned pipe surface shall be removed by blasting. 5. Priming and coating of pipe shall be completed the same day as surface preparation. B. Weld Surface Preparation 1. Requirements: a. Spray applied coating systems do not require weld grinding. b. Grind welds flush on extruded polyolefin coated pipe as specified herein. c. Welds on tape wrap coated pipe shall be either ground flush or a weld stripe tape applied over the weld, at the pipe fabricator’s option, unless otherwise specified. 2. Weld Grinding: a. Under the weld grinding option, welds higher than 1/32 inch above pipe surface shall be ground to a tolerance of +1/32 inch to 0-inch above the pipe surface as measured on the lowest side of the weld. 3. Weld Stripe Tape: a. Weld stripe tape will be applied to primed metal. b. Tape will either have no polyethylene backing or will be double sided adhesive tape to permit adhesion of the inner corrosion protection layer to the weld stripe tape. c. Apply tape with a pressure roller to fully conform the tape to the weld surface. d. Adhesion of the weld stripe tape shall be as specified for the coating system. C. Salt Contamination Removal BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 18 1. All bare or shop coated or primed surfaces that will be coated in the field shall be pressure washed with potable water not greater than 8 hours before coating application, including pipeline joints. 2. Residual soluble salt contamination (SSC) shall be tested as specified under Quality Control testing. 3. Surfaces to be Abrasive Blasted: a. Surfaces that fail the soluble salt contamination test prior to abrasive blasting shall be cleaned by pressure washing and/or abrasive blasting and retested. b. Surfaces that fail the SSC test after surface preparation shall be recleaned and/or abrasive blasting and retested. c. Surfaces which still exceed the specified SSC level after recleaning shall be subject to determination by the Engineer if addition work will be required. d. Contractor shall remove all surface rust caused by SSC testing in accordance with SP-11, Power Tool to Bare Metal or abrasive blasting to the specified cleanliness. 4. Existing or Shop Primed Surfaces: a. All previously coated surfaces shall be tested for SCC prior to application of additional coats. b. Surfaces exceeding the specified SSC level after pressure washing shall be subject to additional cleaning as determined by the Engineer. c. Any coating applied before SCC testing is completed and accepted by the Engineer will be rejected and removed. D. Steel Surface Preparation 1. Surface preparation of steel pipe shall be in accordance with SSPC surface preparation standards utilizing the degree of cleanliness specified for the coating system to be applied or as specified herein, whichever is more stringent. 2. Grit and/or shot abrasive mixture and gradation shall be as required to achieve the degree of cleanliness and coating adhesion specified. 3. Pipe cleaned by abrasive blasting with recyclable steel grit and/or shot or other abrasive shall be cleaned of debris and spent abrasive in an air wash separator. 4. Epoxy coated steel shall have a sharp angular surface profile of the minimum depth specified. 5. After abrasive blasting surfaces and before coating application, the metal surface shall be cleaned of residual dust to a minimum of Grade 2 per ISO Standard 8502 - 3, Test for the Assessment of Surface Cleanliness. 6. Work shall be performed in a manner that does not permit the cleaned metal surface to rust back or flash rust. 7. Rust back or flash rust shall be fully removed with the steel surface cleanliness equal to the metal surface cleanliness prior to rust back or flash rusting. Determination of the equivalent surface cleanliness shall be at the Engineer’s sole discretion. E. Concrete Surface Preparation: 1. Cement Mortar or Concrete Cure: a. Cement mortar linings shall be allowed to cure for a minimum of 15 days prior to surface preparation and coating application or 7 days with steam curing. b. Concrete surfaces shall be cured 30 days. 2. Preparation Requirements: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 19 a. Remove grease, oil, dirt, salts or other chemicals, loose materials or other foreign matter by solvent, detergent, or other suitable cleaning methods. b. Clean concrete using mechanical or chemical methods for the degree of cleaning specified for the coating system in accordance with SSPC SP-13, Surface preparation of Concrete. c. Abrasive blast to remove all laitance and provide a surface profile equivalent to 80 grit sandpaper. d. Unless otherwise required for proper adhesion, ensure surfaces are dry prior to coating. 3. Inspection: (1) Concrete Soundness: Determined using scratching or hammer impact methods as defined in SSPC SP-13. (2) Moisture Content: Moisture shall be tested as Specified in SSPC SP-13 and shall not exceed the moisture content recommended by the coating manufacturer. 3.3 SHOP -APPLIED COATING APPLICATION A. Tape Wrap Coating 1. Applicator shall provide a monitoring system approved by the tape manufacturer that constantly records pipe and tape conditions during coating application. Recorded monitoring parameters shall include, but not be limited too, pipe temperature; line speed, primer and tape roll body temperature, and tape tension. 2. Pipe surface temperature shall be between 45 and 120 degrees and 5 degrees above dew point, whichever is greater. 3. Tape roll temperature shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, but shall not be less than 55 degrees for the inner wrap and 65 degrees for the outer wraps. 4. Apply a uniform coat of primer as recommended by the manufacturer without skips, runs, or sags. Allow to properly dry prior to applying the tape as required by the tape manufacturer and as necessary to achieve maximum tape adhesion. Rug type application will not be allowed. 5. If welds are not ground flush, apply a weld stripe tape to longitudinal or spiral pipe welds prior to application of the inner wrap. 6. Tape layers shall be applied continuously with the use of hydro-tension tape stands. Tension shall be maintained between the manufacturer’s minimum and maximum tension recommendations or as required to achieve approximately 2.0 percent reduction in tape width. 7. Inner tape wrap shall adhere tightly to the pipe surface. Coating shall be 100 percent adhering to the metal surface and shall not have any visible damage, wrinkles, voids, disbondment, contamination, or holidays. 8. Tape coating adhesion testing shall be performed on the pipe as specified this section. 9. Holidays testing shall be conducted on the inner layer tape prior to proceeding with subsequent tape layers. All holidays detected shall be primed and patch using coating repair procedures specified herein. 10. Perform coating and lining repairs as specified in this section. B. Plural Component Epoxy Coating BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 20 1. Applicator Qualifications: a. Equipment will be certified by the coating manufacturer to meet the requirements for material mixing, temperature control, application rate, and ratio control for multi-part coatings. b. Equipment not meeting the written requirements of the coating manufacturer shall be rejected for coating application until repairs or replacement of the equipment is made to the satisfaction of the Engineer. c. Personnel responsible for the application of the coating system shall have certification of attendance at the coating manufacturer’s training class within the last three years. The certified applicator shall be present during all coating application work and shall have responsibility for controlling all aspects of the coating application. 2. Pipe surface temperature shall be between 50 and 100 degrees or 5 degrees above dew point, whichever is greater. 3. Coating application shall be performed in an environmentally controlled shop area that meets or exceeds the written environmental application requirements of the coating manufacturer. Application in outdoor conditions will not be acceptable without adequate environmental shelter, environmental controls, and/or dehumidification. 4. Coating adhesion and holidays testing shall be tested as specified this section except adhesion testing is not required on overcoated CCP. 5. Coating manufacturer shall provide to the Engineer a copy of the manufacturer’s coating application quality assurance manual prior to beginning coating application. Strict conformance to the requirements of the manual will be required. Deviation from the requirements of the manual will be grounds for the Engineer to reject the applied coating. 6. Unacceptable Coating Application a. Coating applied under improper environmental conditions will be rejected. b. Pipes that exceed the allowable quantity of coating defects, regardless of size or cause, shall be rejected. c. Coating which fails the adhesion or holiday testing as specified this section shall be rejected. d. Pipe coating that is subject to off ratio application, blistering, or is not applied in conformance with the coating manufacturer’s written instructions or recommendations shall be rejected. 7. Rejected coating shall be removed from the full length of the pipe to bare metal and reapplied using proper application methods in accordance with the coating manufacturer’s written instruction and the requirements of these specifications. 8. Perform coating and lining repairs as specified in this section. C. Cement Mortar Coatings 1. Steel pipe shall have a cement mortar coating applied in accordance with AWWA C205, except as modified herein. 2. Tape wrap coated steel pipe shall have a cement mortar overcoat applied over the tape wrap or epoxy coating in accordance with AWWA C205, except as modified herein. 3. Cement Mortar Coating: a. Reinforcement: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 21 (1) For pipe and specials smaller than 48 inches in diameter, reinforce coating with spirally-wound No. 12 gage steel wire spaced at 1-inch centers or with No. 14 gage steel wire at 1/2-inch centers positioned approximately in center of mortar coating. (2) For pipe and specials 48 inches in diameter and larger, reinforce coating with 2 layers of spirally-wound No. 12 gage wire spaced at 1-inch centers or with No. 14 gage steel wire spaced at 1/2-inch centers positioned at the third points of mortar coating. (3) Lap ends of reinforcement strips 4 inches and tie or loop free ends to assure continuity of reinforcement. (4) All steel wire reinforcement placed in the mortar coating shall be electrically isolated from the pipe. Electrical isolation will be tested using high voltage spark test by the manufacturer prior to shipment to the project site. Provide certification that electrical isolation of reinforcement wire from steel pipe. b. Special Fittings: (1) Coating for steel plate specials may be reinforced with 2-inch by 4-inch No. 13 gage welded wire mesh in lieu of reinforcing specified above. (2) One layer of mesh shall be positioned approximately in center of coating for specials smaller than 48 inches in diameter; 2 layers of mesh shall be positioned at the third points of coating for specials 48 inches in diameter and larger. c. Coating Defects: (1) Coating defects shall be repaired as specified in AWWA C205, except as specified this section. 4. Cement Mortar Overcoat: a. Cement mortar overcoat tape wrapped coated steel pipe as specified in AWWA C205, except mortar coating shall be applied over exterior pipe coating. b. Mortar coating shall be held back 3 inches, minimum, behind dielectric coating system cut back at joints. c. Cement mortar overcoat holdback shall be increased with extruded polyethylene coating as required to for coating shrinkage and as required to maintain the minimum overlap specified for joint coating application. d. Coating Defects: (1) Cracking in the mortar “armor” coat less than 1/8-inch in width will be acceptable. (2) Disbondment of the cement coating over a dielectric coating system should be anticipated and will not be grounds for repair or rejection of the pipe. (3) Losses of cement mortar coating due to impact, movement, or shipping damage shall be repaired in accordance with C205. e. Joint Coating: (1) Joints of cement mortar overcoat dielectrically coated pipe do not require field application of cement mortar overcoat when properly coated with heat shrink sleeve joint coating system. 3.4 SHOP-APPLIED LINING APPLICATION A. Shop-applied Cement Mortar Lining: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 22 1. Place mortar lining used in steel piping and steel plate specials in pipe to thickness below. Pipe Diameter, Inches Lining Thickness, Inches Tolerances, Inches 4 through 10 11 through 24 24 through 36 Greater than 36 3/8 5/16 3/8 1/2 -1/16, +1/8 -1/16, +1/8 -1/16, +1/8 -1/16, +3/16 2. Centrifugally line straight sections of pipe. Lining of special pieces or fittings shall be by mechanical, pneumatic, or hand placement. Provide cement mortar lining of uniform thickness. Finish to a smooth dense surface. a. Steel plate specials larger than 16 inches in diameter shall have lining reinforced with 2-inch by 4-inch No. 13-gage welded steel wire mesh. b. Brace and support pipe during lining application to minimize pipe distortion or vibration. Bracing and supports shall not damage the pipe, coating, or lining. c. Tightly close ends of pipe and fittings with plastic sheet caps. Plastic end caps shall be of sufficient thickness and strength to resist shipping, handling, and storage stresses. d. Damage to the cement mortar lining, including disbondment, cracking, or blistering, caused by improper curing, shipping, handling, or installation shall be repaired in accordance with AWWA specifications and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 3. Other requirements of mortar lining materials and processes: As specified in AWWA C205. B. Liquid Epoxy Lining: 1. Pipe Lining, Direct to Metal a. Where epoxy lining on steel pipe is specified or shown on drawings or where the pipe is not cement mortar lined, an epoxy lining shall be applied directly to the steel surface as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coatings. b. Immersion System specified in Section 09 90 00, shall be modified to three coats, minimum, at a total coating thickness of 20 mils dry film thickness. 2. Pipe Lining, Insulating Joints: a. Coating applied over cement mortar lining shall be applied in a manner that will minimize gassing and pinholes in the completed lining. b. Clean and coat the interior of cement mortar lined pipe at insulating joints with two coats of epoxy coating. c. Epoxy coating applied at insulating joints shall be applied to both sides of the insulating joint for a minimum of one pipe diameter. If only one side of the joint can be coated the coating shall be applied for a minimum of two pipe diameters. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 23 d. Mortar lining shall be allowed to cure 15 days or steam cured not less than 7 days prior to surface preparation of the mortar and epoxy coating application. Hand applied mortar lining shall be allowed to cure a minimum of 15 days or as required to meet the coating manufacturer’s requirements for application on cement or concrete, whichever is greater. e. Prepared mortar lining by abrasive blasting to remove all laitance and create a suitable anchor profile f. Mortar lining shall be dry during epoxy lining application. 3.5 COATING AND LINING HOLDBACK A. All coating and lining holdback areas shall be prepared as specified for the pipeline coating and protected from corrosion during storage and installation with a specified holdback coating system. B. Internal holdback for cement mortar lined pipe shall be left unprepared and unprimed. C. Internal holdbacks for dielectrically lined pipe shall be left bare and prepared and lined in the field as specified for field lining of joints after joint assembly. D. External holdbacks shall be as listed below with all dimensions based on end of bell or spigot. Pipe manufacturer may adjust holdback limits as required for special joint assemblies, and with consideration for the joint coating provided and joint welding requirements. All dimensions from end of pipe. Tape wrap coating Push-on joint, spigot 1-inch, minimum after centerline of gasket. Push-on, bell Flush with bell end Welded, spigot 1 inches, minimum Welded, Bell Stab Depth + 2-inches, minimum Epoxy coating Push-on joint, spigot 1-inch after centerline of gasket Push-on, bell Flush with bell end Welded, spigot 3 inches, minimum Welded, Bell Stab Depth + 2-inches, minimum Extruded polyolefin Welded joints, spigot 3-inch Minimum Welded joints, Bell Stab Depth + 2-inches, Minimum Push-on joints Not applied to bell or spigot BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 24 E. Coating holdbacks shall be straight and cut through the full thickness of the coating. F. Cutbacks shall be completed in a manner that permits field coating of joints in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and as specified herein. 3.6 FIELD COATING JOINTS A. General: 1. Joint bonds shall be installed before application of joint coating as specified in Section 26 42 14, CORROSON MONITORING. 2. Joint bonds shall be low profile bonds and all gaps and crevices around the bonds shall be filled with filler mastic. 3. Filler mastic shall be placed under copper strap bonds and extended ½ inch minimum beyond edges of bond to allow for sealing with heat shrink sleeve. 4. Contractor to electrically test completed joint coating for holidays with high voltage spark tester at Engineer’s direction or if damage to the joint coating occurs. B. Field Surface Preparation: 1. Pipe joints with hold back corrosion protection: a. Perform salt contamination removal as specified under Surface Preparation. b. Field prepare joint in accordance with SSPC-SP1, solvent cleaning, and SP3, Power tool cleaning, to remove all dirt, mud, oil, and grease prior to application of heat shrink sleeve. c. Any visible rusting areas shall be spot prepared in accordance with SP-11, power tool to bare metal. 2. Pipe joints without hold back corrosion protection: a. Perform salt contamination removal as specified under Surface Preparation. b. Abrasively blast joint in field in accordance with SSPC-SP5, white metal blast. c. Sweep blast epoxy coating for 2-inches for 80-grit sandpaper equivalent profile for coating adhesion. 3. All loose or damage coating shall be removed and repaired per specified coating repair procedures. C. Weld After Backfill’ Joint Requirements: 1. Post-welded or ‘Weld after Backfill’ joints are defined as welded pipe joints that have been coated and backfilled prior to completing interior welds. 2. Post welded joints shall be coated and protected as follows: a. Joint coating shall be heat shrink joint sleeves only with a minimum coating thickness over the weld heat affected zone of not less than 120 mils before welding. Tape wrapped joints or heat resistant tape will not be acceptable. b. Manufacturer’s recommendations for heat shrink sleeves selection and application and this specification shall govern WAB joints. If a conflict occurs, the more stringent requirement shall apply. c. Hold back primer shall be suitable for post weld conditions as specified this section and shall not exhibit any binder breakdown in the heat affected zone that causes loss of joint coating adhesion to the holdback primer. d. Filler mastic materials shall be high temperature material with 500 degree F melting point. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 25 e. Joints shall be fully buried prior to welding, with not less than 12-inch soil cover or flowable fill material on all sides. Sand or flowable fill backfill is preferred for weld after backfill joints. Crush rock or angular gravel backfill can be detrimental to the heat shrink sleeve when using WAB procedures. f. Heat shrink sleeves after WAB shall exhibit no holidays, burn through of coating, creasing, carbonization of the sleeve adhesive, or disbondment of the sleeve or holdback primer. 3. Welding of the joints shall be in conformance with Section 33 11 11, Steel Pipe, and as modified herein: a. All welding shall be with two or more weld passes as required to meet the specified AWS qualified welding procedures and maximum coating temperature limitations. ‘Weld after Backfill’ procedures on wall thicknesses of ¼ inch or less must be approved by the Engineer based on field testing demonstrating the welding procedures can comply with the requirements of this specification. b. Welding speed, amperage, and voltage shall be as required to maintain a maximum heat input of 23,000 joules or a maximum surface temperature at the coating/steel interface of 750 degrees F, whichever is least. c. Maximum weld temperature and duration shall not result in carbonization of the joint coating adhesive. Carbonization is defined as the loss of volatile organic compounds that result in loss of tackiness, adhesion to the steel, and corrosion protection properties. d. Finished joint coating shall not have any visual creases or folds in the joint coating backing material that extends through both the inner protective layer and outer joint sleeve. 4. If Contractor elects to post-weld any joints, Contractor shall demonstrate that the joint welding procedures will not significantly damage the coating by fully excavating the first two joints for evaluation of the joint coating condition. Engineer will randomly select up to three additional post-welded joints for excavation by Contractor for evaluation of joint coating condition. Joint coating will be destructively evaluated by the Engineer. Contractor will remove and replace joint heat shrink sleeve upon completion of the evaluation. 5. If any excavated post welded joint exhibits any heat related damage as defined herein, Contractor shall modify and test a new post welding procedure prior to completing any additional post-welded joints. Contractor shall demonstrate that the revised joint welding procedure will not significantly damage the coating by repeating the weld after backfill evaluation requirements defined this Section, including excavation of the three additional randomly selected joints for destructive evaluation. D. Heat Shrink Sleeve Joint Coating: 1. Store, handle, and apply field heat shrink sleeve coatings in accordance with AWWA C216 and these specifications. 2. Store sleeves in shipping box until use is required. Keep dry and sheltered from exposure to direct sunlight. Store off the ground or concrete floors and maintain at a temperature between 60 and 100 degrees as recommended by the sleeve manufacturer. 3. Joint shall be prepared as specified in Pipe Joint Surface Preparation. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 26 4. Preheat pipe uniformly as recommended by the sleeve manufacturer. Monitor pipe temperature using a surface temperature gauge, infrared thermometer, or color changing crayons. Protect preheated pipe from rain, snow, frost, or moisture with tenting or shields and do not permit the joint to cool. 5. Apply filler material as specified in Field Applied Coating Systems. 6. Apply heat shrink sleeve when sleeve has a minimum temperature of 60 degrees and while maintaining the pipe temperature above the preheat temperature specified. Apply sleeve in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and center the sleeve over the joint to provide a minimum 2-inch overlap onto the existing pipe coating. 7. Acceptable joint sleeve installations shall meet the following requirements: a. Shall be fully bonded to the pipe and existing coating surface without tenting or voids. b. Mastic beading shall be visible along the full circumference of the sleeve. c. There shall be no wrinkling or excessive burns on the sleeves. 8. Sleeves that do not meet these requirements shall be removed and the joint recoated as directed by the Engineer. Minor repairs may be repaired using heat applied patch material specified for minor coating repairs. 9. Allow the sleeve to cool before backfilling. Water quenching will be allowed if permitted by the sleeve manufacturer. 10. Heat shrink joint coatings which have become wrinkled or disbonded because of prolonged exposure to UV light or thermal cycling shall be removed and replaced. 11. Double coating of defective or damaged heat shrink coatings will not be permitted. Any double coated heat shrink sleeves shall be immediately rejected and Contractor shall remove the existing coating and recoat the joint. E. Cement Mortar Overcoat Coating: 1. Joints of cement mortar coated pipe shall be cement mortar coated in accordance with AWWA C205. 2. Polyethylene Foam Joint Diapers: a. Cut into strips wide enough to match uncoated field joint area. b. Slit to thickness of 1/4 inch that will expose a hollow or open cell surface on one side. c. Foam liner shall be attached to fabric backing with open or hollow cells facing towards pipe. d. Foam strip shall cover full interior circumference of grout band with sufficient length to permit 8-inch overlap of foam at or near top of joint. e. Splices to provide continuity of material will be permitted. f. Protect polyethylene foam material from direct sunlight. 3. Field repair cement mortar coating in accordance with AWWA C205. 3.7 FIELD APPLIED INTERIOR JOINT LINING A. Mortar Lining: 1. After backfilling pipe, interior joint recess shall be filled with grout. 2. The grout shall be tightly packed into the joint recess and troweled flush with the interior surface. Excess material shall be removed from pipe. 3. At no point shall there be an indentation or projection of the mortar exceeding 1/16-inch. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 27 4. On pipe smaller than 24-inches in diameter, bell shall be daubed with grout before the spigot is inserted into the bell. The joint shall be completed and excess mortar on the inside of the joint shall be swabbed. 3.8 REPAIR OF COATING AND LININGS A. General: 1. All areas where holidays are detected or coating is visually damaged, such as blisters, tears, rips, bubbles, wrinkles, cuts, or other defects , shall be repaired. Areas where no holidays are detected, but are visually damaged shall also be repaired. 2. Maximum defects allowable shall be as specified herein for the coating system. B. Tape Wrap Coating Repairs: 1. General: a. No more than five repairs per joint of pipe will be permitted with tape wrap coating, excluding adhesion test damage. The coating on any pipe with more than five coating repairs or with more than two areas of coating damage greater than five square feet will be rejected. b. Pipes exceeding the maximum number or size of coating defects shall be stripped, reblasted, and recoated. c. Pipe arriving in the field with defects or repairs exceeding the maximum number or size of coating defects will be returned to the shop for recoating at the Contractor’s expense. d. The number of layers and total thickness of the tape repair coating shall be the same as the shop-applied coating; unless heat applied coating materials is used. e. Wipe the area to be repaired with solvent for a minimum distance of 4 inches outside the damaged area. 2. Defect Size: a. Minor repairs - repairs that are less than 8 inches in the greatest dimension, measured after cutout of damaged tape layers. Damage to the inner tape layer will be considered minor only if repairs are made using heat applied patch materials. b. Major repairs - repairs that exceed 8-inches in the greatest dimension or where damage to the inner tape layer has occurred and hand applied tape repairs will be used. 3. Minor Repairs: a. Complete minor repairs using a heat applied coating patch material. b. Cut patch material to overlap onto the undamaged coating a minimum of 2 inches on all sides with 1-inch radius on each corner of the patch. c. Carefully remove damaged layers by cutting the coating with a sharp knife without cutting or damaging the inner wrap. d. Cut middle and outer layers in stepped fashion to expose 1-inch or more of the underlying tape layer for the circumference of the repair. 4. Major Repairs (Over 24-inches Diameter): a. Cigarette wrap coating repairs shall be with heat shrink sleeves as specified for joints. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 28 b. Carefully remove damaged layers by cutting the coating with a sharp knife without cutting or damaging the inner wrap. c. Holiday test the inner wrap and if a holiday is detected cut outer layers back to fully exposed the holiday(s) and retest for holidays. d. Cut middle and outer layers in stepped fashion to expose 1-inch or more of the underlying tape layer for the circumference of the repair. e. Width of sleeve shall be the width of the damaged area plus 4-inch overlap. Multiple sleeves may be used for larger repairs, but must be overlapped a minimum of 2 inches. 5. Major Repairs (24-inch Diameter or Less) a. Cigarette wrap repairs on pipe less than 24-inches with either hand applied tape wrap or heat shrink sleeves as specified at the Contractor’s option. b. Carefully remove damaged layers by cutting the coating with a sharp knife without cutting or damaging the inner wrap. c. Holiday test the inner wrap and if a holiday is detected apply one extra layer of repair tape. d. Clean surfaces by solvent wiping and applying primer over the inner tape layer for a minimum of 6-inches onto the outer wrap in all directions. e. Apply first layer of repair coating, over lapping 1-inch or more onto undamaged coating in all directions. On larger areas, lap the repair tape within a minimum of 1-inch overlap, offsetting the overlap from the previous layer overlap, until the area is properly covered. f. Repeat for each tape layer damaged with each succeeding layer applied at 90 degrees to the preceding layers and overlapping onto the undamaged coating a minimum of 2-inches. g. Apply the last tape layer, use the cigarette wrap method for the full pipeline circumference covering all previous repair layers and overlapping a minimum of 2-inches onto undamaged coating. The ends of the cigarette wrap shall be pointed downward. C. Epoxy Coating or Lining Repairs 1. General a. Complete coating or lining repairs in accordance with the coating manufacturers written instructions and these specifications, whichever is stricter. 2. Defect Size: a. Minor repairs - repairs that are less than 8-inches in the greatest dimension. b. Major repairs - repairs that exceed 8-inches in the greatest dimension. 3. Maximum Quantity of Defects Allowed: a. Coating or lining repairs on any joint of pipe shall not exceed 1.5 per 100 square feet of surface area. (1) Two or more minor repairs within a 8-inches diameter circle will be considered a single repair. (2) Repairs for adhesion testing will not be included in the total number of repairs. b. Major repairs shall not exceed three per pipe joint and the combined area shall not be greater than 30 percent of the pipe. c. Pipes exceeding the maximum number or size of coating defects shall be stripped of coating, reblasted, and recoated. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 29 d. Pipe arriving in the field with defects or repairs exceeding the maximum number or size of coating defects will be returned to the shop for recoating at the contractor’s expense. 4. Minor Repairs: a. Minor repairs (1) Surface Preparation: Clean and feather the defect by power tool sanding with 80 grit or coarser sandpaper to roughen the existing coat and feather the edges of the defect for a minimum of 2-inches around the defect. (2) Shop repair Materials: (a) Single use coating kits to match the pipe coating. (b) Two component, fast cure epoxy coating, in controlled mix ratio packaging. a) Protal 7125, North American Denso Inc, or equal b) Or equal. (c) Coating Manufacturer’s coating repair products are subject to Engineer approval. (3) Field Repair Materials: (a) Heat applied coating materials; CRP Patch, Canusa; PERP Patch, Tyco Adhesives, or approved equal. (b) Two component, fast cure epoxy coating, in controlled mix ratio packaging. a) Protal 7125, North American Denso, Inc, b) Or equal. (c) Single use coating kits to match pipe coating. (d) Coating Manufacturer’s coating repair products are subject to Engineer approval. (4) Clean and feather the defect by power tool sanding with 80 grit or coarser sandpaper to roughen the existing coating and feather defect edges minimum of 2-inches. (5) Apply a single coat of the specified patch coating material at the specified coating thickness. (6) Repair coating adhesion shall be 50 percent of the specified coating adhesion. 5. Major Repairs: a. Major repairs: (1) Surface Preparation: (a) The metal surface and surrounding coating shall be abrasively blasted in accordance with SSPC-SP10, near white metal, or to equal in cleanliness and profile as the original surface preparation. (b) Existing coating shall be feathered and roughened to the equivalent of 40 grit sandpaper. (2) Shop Repair Materials: (a) Same material as the pipeline coating or lining and shall be applied by using plural component spray equipment. (3) Field Repair Materials: (a) Same material as the pipeline coating or lining and shall be applied by using plural component spray equipment. (b) Heat shrink sleeves as specified for pipeline joints. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 30 b. One coat of the specified original coating material shall be applied over the repaired surface at the specified thickness. c. Repair adhesion shall be equal to the specified coating adhesion. D. Cement Mortar Coating 1. Cement mortar coating that is cracked or disbonded shall be repaired in accordance with AWWA C205, except for mortar overcoat on tape wrapped steel. 2. Disbonded mortar coating shall be removed and patched. 3. Mortar coating with disbondment greater than 25 percent of the pipe surface shall be rejected and recoated. 4. Cracks in mortar coating shall be repaired in accordance with AWWA C205. 3.9 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING AND INSPECTION A. General 1. Applicator shall inspect and test the coating system in accordance with referenced standards and these specifications, whichever is more stringent. 2. Quality control testing as specified in AWWA standards are minimum industry standards and it is the intent of this specification to provide a higher level of quality control for the objective of achieving maximum coating performance. If any conflict between this specification and referenced standards occurs, the more stringent requirement shall apply and any interpretation of this requirement or results shall be with the objective of achieving maximum coating performance. 3. The frequency of the testing shall be determined by the applicator, but shall not be less than the requirements of this specification. B. Soluble Salt Contamination (SSC) Testing 1. Residual soluble salt contamination (SSC) shall be verified using an Elcometer Model E130-TC Salt Contamination Meter before and after surface preparation. 2. Testing after blasting is not required if the preblast test passes the maximum soluble salt contamination criteria. 3. Maximum soluble salt contamination levels shall be: a. 2.0 µg/cm2 – Immersion or buried b. 5.0 µg/cm2 – non-immersion 4. Compliance with SSC limits shall be based on the average of three tests at three locations, which can be on multiple pipes or components at the Engineer’s discretion. C. Surface Profile Testing 1. Surface profile of abrasive blasted surfaces to be tested with “Press-O-Film” tester tape or equivalent in accordance with NACE RP287. 2. Tester tape shall be suitable for the intended profile height. 3. Profile shall be measured to a minimum tolerance of 0.1 mils, maximum. 4. Electronic surface profilometer shall be used, where deemed necessary, to verify tester tape measurements. D. Adhesion Testing 1. General BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 31 a. Adhesion testing shall be conducted at the shop prior to shipment. Pipe shipped without adhesion testing will be field-tested. Pipe rejected in the field will be returned to the shop for repair at the sole expense of the Contractor. b. Coating adhesion testing shall be conducted on each pipe lot coated. The quantity of coating adhesion tests shall be the greater of the following: (1) Two pipes will be tested for the first 3,000 square feet of coating application plus on additional pipe for each. increment of 2,000 square feet of coating application in excess of the first 3,000 square feet (2) Not less than 33 percent of each pipe produced within a lot. c. A pipe lot is defined as the quantity of pipe that is coated by a single crew within a 12 hour or less work shift. d. The pipe coating applicator shall repair all coating damage from shop adhesion testing. Contractor shall be responsible for coating repairs for all field adhesion testing. e. Adhesion tests will be performed not less than 24 hours after coating application. Tests conducted prior to 24-hours will be acceptable only if the test meets or exceeds the adhesion criteria specified and the test was requested by the pipe fabricator. f. Pipe will be randomly selected for adhesion testing. g. Owner or the Owner’s Representative has the right to conduct additional adhesion testing as deemed necessary to assure the pipe meets or exceeds the requirements of this specification at any time and location. h. Prior to beginning any QA/QC testing, the pipe fabricator, coating manufacturer, and Engineer shall review dolly attachment procedures, adhesion test procedures, and data recording requirements for the project and ensure that test personnel are qualified and capable of performing the testing in accordance with required test standards and these specifications. 2. Rejection of Pipeline Coating or Lining a. Each pipe that fails the adhesion criteria, as defined this section, shall be rejected. b. If any pipe within a lot that fails to meet the adhesion criteria specified for the coating type, the pipe coating will be rejected and all pipes within the lot will be classified as rejected. Each remaining pipe within the rejected pipe lot will then be individually tested and rejected on a pipe-by-pipe basis in conformance with the test procedures and criteria specific to the coating type. c. All rejected pipe shall have the coating fully removed from the pipe and the pipe abrasive blasted and recoated. 3. Tape Coating Adhesion Testing: a. Adhesion Acceptance Criteria: (1) Inner tape coating shall have an adhesion to substrate of 20 pounds per inch width, minimum, for steel pipe when tape is pulled in a continuous manner at an angle of 180 degrees to the pipe surface. (2) Inner tape coating shall have an adhesion to substrate of 15 pounds per inch width, minimum, for ductile iron pipe when tape is pulled in a continuous manner at an angle of 180 degrees to the pipe surface. (3) extruded polyolefin coating shall have an adhesion to substrate of 30 pounds per inch width, minimum, when coating is pulled in a continuous manner at an angle of 180 degrees to the pipe surface. Adhesion testing BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 32 for extruded polyolefin shall be performed as specified for tape wrap coating. b. Test Procedures (1) Adhesion testing shall be conducted prior to application of the cement mortar overcoat, where applicable. Pipe that has been mortar coated prior to adhesion testing shall have the mortar coating removed by the Contractor as directed by the Engineer and of sufficient dimensional area to permit the adhesion test to be conducted. (2) Adhesion tests shall be conducted at temperatures above 60 degrees and less than 75 degrees. (3) Pulling tension shall be continuous, without stopping, and monitored throughout the length of the pull, which shall be not less than 12-inches in length. (4) Adhesion test shall be prepared by making two parallel cuts through the coating, 1-inch apart, of sufficient length for the test pull. Peel the coating back at one end and attach the tension scale to the coating with a suitable clamp. Mark the coating at one (1) inch increments from 0 to 12-inches. (5) The pull tension shall be recorded for each inch of pull. The two highest and two lowest readings shall be discarded and the remaining values averaged. Pull speed shall be not less than 5 seconds per inch or greater than 10 seconds per inch. If significant elongation of the tape backing occurs, pull speeds may exceed 10 seconds per inch provided the minimum adhesion rating can still be achieved. c. Adhesion Pull Records and Evaluation (1) Failure shall be by cohesive failure of the adhesive only. Delamination failure, defined as separation of the adhesive from the backing material, will result in rejection of the tape lot. (2) Intermittent skip failures will be counted as zero pounds of adhesion and included in the calculations for average coating adhesion. (3) Adhesive failure, defined as separation of the adhesive from the metal substrate, will be rejected. (4) Pipe that fails the test by delamination will be retested on two other pipes within the same lot of coated pipe. Failure of any two pipes within the lot will result in rejection of all pipes coated with the rejected tape lot. 4. Plural Component Epoxy Adhesion Testing: a. Adhesion testing shall be performed in accordance with this specification section. Adhesion testing procedures and evaluations per AWWA C210 or C222 are specifically excluded under this specification. b. Test Procedures (1) Coating adhesion testing shall be with self-aligning pneumatic pull off equipment, such as the Delfesko Positest AT-A, and test procedures in accordance with ASTM D4541, except as modified in this section. (a) All adhesion tests shall be performed at an applied load rate of 100 psi per second, plus or minus 10 psi. Automatic adhesion test equipment shall be used. (b) Tests shall be performed to coating or glue failure or maximum test load, whichever is greater. (c) Adhesion tests shall be based on the ASTM D4541 using standard 20 mm dollies. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 33 (d) Adhesion testing shall be based on three tests. All three tests shall be conducted by the same person, test equipment, and test procedure, and must be completed within a 30 minute period. (e) All adhesion tests shall be conducted within an area not to exceed 6-inches by 6-inches. (f) All coatings with more than 10 percent elongation or 25 mils thick shall be scored around dolly to metal substrate using manual methods and tools, normal to the pipe surface, and in a manner that does not stress or over heat the coating. (g) (h) All adhesion tests shall be performed to coating or glue failure or test termination, whichever comes first. (2) Dollies for adhesion testing shall attached to the coating surface using an two part epoxy or cyanoacrylate glue and allowed to cure for a minimum of 12 hours before testing or until full cure, whichever is greater. Glue type used shall be determined by the pipe fabricator and coating manufacturer for the pipe diameter, temperatures, and environmental conditions. (3) Adhesion testing shall be performed at temperatures between 55 and 90 degrees F or at temperatures as recommended by the coating manufacturer. Testing up to 115 degrees F or below 55 degrees will be permitted if tests can demonstrate no statistically detectable effect on test results and with coating manufacturer and Engineer approval. c. Epoxy Coating and Lining Adhesion Criteria (1) Coating is acceptable if first dolly pull test exceeds 1,750 psi, minimum. (2) If first dolly pull is less than 1,750 psi, two additional tests shall be performed with acceptance based on “Best of Three” evaluation method as defined herein. d. Pipe Lot Performance Criteria: (1) Each lot of coated pipe shall be evaluated for general coating application based on a median value for all coating or lining adhesion tests performed on a lot of pipe, which shall be greater than 2,000 psi. (2) Any pipe lot failing the Pipe Lot Performance Criteria shall be classified as rejected until 100 percent of the pipe within the pipe lot has been tested for adhesion. Each pipe that fails the coating adhesion criteria shall be rejected. e. Adhesion Test Evaluation and Records (1) The “Best of three” evaluation method shall be defined as two of three test values less than the Acceptance Criteria, which shall result in rejection of the pipe coating. (2) All adhesion tests shall be considered as valid and suitable for acceptance or rejection of the coating, except where retesting is allowed. (3) Adhesion test failure shall be by adhesive or substrate and cohesive failure as defined below: (a) Adhesive or substrate failure is defined as a percentage of separation of the coating from the steel substrate or between distinct coating layers. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 34 (b) Cohesive failure is defined as a percentage of failure within the coating, resulting in coating remaining both on the steel substrate and test dolly. (4) Retesting of coating adhesion tests will be allowed when any test is glue failure at 25 percent or more of dolly surface area and the test value is less than the Acceptance Criteria or the Minimum Criteria. (5) All coating adhesion retesting shall be within the same 6-inch by 6-inch test area as the original adhesion testing. (6) Disputed adhesion tests shall be retested as defined for adhesion retesting. Dolly attachment and adhesion retesting shall be witnessed by the Owner’s representative. (7) Adhesion tests will be conducted on pipe coating and lining independently and will be accepted or rejected independently. (8) Records of all adhesion tests shall be maintained in an electronic spreadsheet that includes the following information: (a) Pipe identification, (b) Pipe coating date, (c) Adhesion test date, (d) Surface tested (interior or exterior), (e) Surface temperature at time of test, (f) Coating thickness, (g) tensile force applied, (h) Applied load rate per second, (i) Mode of failure, and (j) Percentage of failure types, previously defined, relative to dolly surface area, (k) Dolly size and attachment glue used. (l) If different coatings are tested, the records shall include coating manufacturer and product number. f. Adhesion Test Repairs (1) Fabricator or contractor to complete adhesion repairs as specified this section. (2) Repair patches on epoxy coating shall be randomly selected for adhesion testing in a manner as described herein and at the discretion of the coating inspector conducting the adhesion tests. Adhesion of repairs shall be as specified for the type of repair. E. Holiday Testing 1. Holiday test the inner layer of tape wrap coatings after application and prior to subsequent tape layer in accordance with AWWA C214 and NACE RP-0274. 2. Holiday test extruded polyolefin coating after application in accordance with AWWA C215 and NACE Standard RP-0274, whichever is more stringent. 3. Holiday tests on epoxy coatings or linings over 15 mils DFT shall be conducted on the completed coating or lining after cure or 24-hours, whichever is less, using a high voltage spark test in accordance with NACE SP0274 and these specifications. 4. Holiday testing on epoxy coatings or linings less than 15 mils DFT shall be high voltage spark tested in accordance with NACE SP0188, except as modified herein. 5. High voltage setting shall be the average measured coating thickness in mils times 125 volts, minimum. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 35 6. Wet sponge or low voltage holiday testing will not be permitted. F. Dry Film Thickness Testing 1. Coatings shall be tested for dry film thickness using a properly calibrated magnetic pull off, eddy current, or ultrasonic equipment. 2. Coating thickness measurements shall be conducted as necessary and without limitation. Testing conformance to the requirements of SSPC PA-2 is specifically excluded from this specification. G. Salt Contamination Testing 1. Engineer shall perform salt contamination testing with an Elcometer Model E130- TC Salt Contamination meter as defined under Surface Preparation. 2. Quantity of tests performed shall be determined the Engineer based on prevailing field conditions. 3. Objective is to assess and remove wind borne salts contamination on surfaces to be coated. Because wind and environmental conditions can change the frequency and location of testing may need to be varied. 4. At a minimum, tests should be performed daily before and after pressure washing of surfaces to be coated. 5. Surfaces identified to be excessively contaminated shall be cleaned by the Contractor to meet the acceptance criteria specified under Surface Preparation. 3.10 HANDLING, TRANSPORTATION, AND STORAGE A. Pipe shall be handled in such a manner as to protect the pipe and coating from damage. B. Coated pipe shall not be shipped or installed until coating has developed full adhesion and cure. C. During coating application, storage, loading, transportation, unloading, laying and installation, every precaution shall be taken to protect and prevent damage to pipe, lining, and coating. Forklift equipment shall have all bearing surfaces padded with suitable padding material. Lift pipe with web slings a minimum of 12-inch wide and of a type that will not damage the coating. Metal chains, cable, tongs, forklifts or other equipment likely to damage the coating will not be permitted. Dragging or skidding of pipe on grade or in the trench will not be permitted. D. Provide transportation vehicles with padded bolsters between each layer of pipe and heavy padding under load ties. Bolsters shall be curved to fit the outside of the pipe and 12 inches wide, minimum. All pipe contact locations shall be heavily padded with carpet and strips of the outer tape wrap material (adhesive side against the carpet) during shipment to the project site and from the storage yard to the point of installation. E. Pipe shall not be stored on rocks, gravel, or other hard materials that might damage the coating. Provide padded 12-inch wide skids and chucks, sand bags, select loamy or sand berms, or suspended from cutback ends, where possible, to minimize coating damage. Pipe shall not be laid on asphalt without suitable padding at all contact points. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GYPSUM BOARD WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 09 29 00 - 36 F. Pipe shall be inspected by the Contractor at the project site for damage. Any damage to the pipe, lining, or coating shall be repaired as directed if, in the opinion of the Engineer, a satisfactory repair can be made; otherwise, the damaged section shall be replaced at the sole expense to the Contractor. G. No metal tools or heavy objects shall be permitted to come into contact unnecessarily with the finished coating. Workmen shall not be permitted to walk on the coating except when necessary and approved by the Engineer. When permitted, shoes with rubber or composition soles and heels or other suitable footwear that will not damage coating shall be used. H. Long-term Exposure: 1. Pipe shall either be provided with UV inhibitor for lengthy of above grade exposure or covered to prevent UV degradation of outer wrap. 2. Amount of UV stabilizers required will depend on the project location, laying schedule, anticipated length of exposure, and type of coating. 3. Manufacturer shall be consulted for recommended UV inhibitors requirements. 4. Protective covering can be colored plastic sheeting, canvas, or other UV blocking material. Clear plastic sheets are not acceptable. 5. Areas of coating that display UV degradation shall be removed and repaired at sole cost of the Contractor. END OF SECTION DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SIGNAGE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 10 14 00 - 1 SECTION 10 14 00 SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY OF WORK A. This Section includes the following types of signs: 1. Panel signs. a. Interior room identification signs. b. Handicap accessibility signage. c. Parking signs (handicapped). d. Handicap entry signs. e. Site directional signs. f. Maximum occupancy load signs. 2. Dimensional letters and numbers. 3. Building address. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "LEED Requirements" for LEED certification targets, related LEED requirements, recycled content minima, other LEED criteria and constraints. 2. Information attached for reference, including LEED Checklist for Project building(s), indicating which LEED credits are targeted for attainment. 3. LEED reference documents, not attached but available for use, including the “LEED- New Construction v.2.2 Rating System,” explaining requirements for each prerequisite and credit, and the “LEED-New Construction v2.2 Reference Guide,” detailing requirements and documentation options for application for each prerequisite and credit. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of sign specified, including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes. C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, and large scale sections of typical members and other components. Show anchors, grounds, layout, reinforcement, accessories, and installation details. 1. Provide message list for each sign required, including large scale details of wording and lettering layout. 2. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchors to be installed as a unit of Work in other Sections. 3. Templates: Furnish full size spacing templates for individually mounted dimensional letters and numbers. 4. Furnish full size layouts for metal plaques. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SIGNAGE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 10 14 00 - 2 D. Samples: Provide the following samples of each sign component for initial selection of color, pattern and surface texture as required and for verification of compliance with requirements indicated. 1. Samples for selection of color, pattern, and texture: a. Cast Acrylic Sheet and Plastic Laminate: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual sections of material including the full range of colors available for each material required. b. Aluminum: Samples of each finish type and color, on 6 inch long sections of extrusions and not less than 4 inch squares of sheet or plate, showing the full range of colors available. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sign Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing signs similar to those indicated for this Project, with a record of successful in service performance, and sufficient production capacity to produce sign units required without causing delay in the Work. B. Single Source Responsibility: For each separate sign type required, obtain signs from one source of a single manufacturer. C. Handicapped Accessibility: Provide signs which are in conformance with the requirements of ANSI A117.1-2003 and the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA). D. Design Concept: The Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of signs and are based on the specific types and models indicated. Sign units by other manufacturers may be considered provided deviations in dimensions and profiles do not change the design concept as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer. 1.4 DELIVERY AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Provide protective covering or crating as recommended by the manufacturer to protect sign components and surfaces against damage during transportation and delivery. B. Handle signs carefully to prevent breakage, surface abrasion, denting, soiling, and other defects. Comply with the manufacturer's written handling instructions for unloading components subject to damage. 1. Inspect sign components for damage on delivery. 2. Do not install damaged sign components. 3. Repair minor damage to signs, provided the finished repair is equal in all respects to the original work and is approved by Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged sign components. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication to ensure proper fitting. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SIGNAGE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 10 14 00 - 3 1.6 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Fiberglass Panel Sign Warranty: Submit a written warranty, signed by manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace fiberglass panels that fail during the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Coating degradation. 2. Chalking. 3. Fading. 4. Fiberglass delamination or cracking. C. Warranty Period: 5 years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Manufacturers of Panel Signs: a. ABC Architectural Signing System. b. ASI Sign Systems, Inc. c. Best Manufacturing Company. d. Spanjer Brothers, Inc. e. Vomar Products, Inc. 2. Manufacturers of Dimensional Letters: a. ASI Sign Systems, Inc. b. Metal Arts. c. Metallic Arts, Inc. d. The Southwell Company. e. Spanjer Brothers, Inc. f. Vomar Products, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing conforming to ASTM A 500, Grade B, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication with a minimum of 2.0 oz. of zinc/sq. ft. (610 g of zinc/sq. m) of surface area conforming to ASTM A 123. B. Fiberglass: Molded, seamless, thermosetting, glass-fiber-reinforced polyester panels in sizes and thicknesses indicated, with a minimum tensile strength of 15,000 psi (103 MPa) when tested according to ASTM D 638 (ASTM D 638M) and with a minimum flexural strength of 30,000 psi (207 MPa) when tested according to ASTM D 790 (ASTM D 790M). BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SIGNAGE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 10 14 00 - 4 C. Cast Acrylic Sheet: Provide cast (not extruded or continuous cast) methyl methacrylate monomer plastic sheet, in sizes and thicknesses indicated, with a minimum flexural strength of 16,000 psi when tested according to ASTM D 790, with a minimum allowable continuous service temperature of 176 deg F (80 deg C), and of the following general types: 1. Opaque Sheet: Where sheet material is indicated as "opaque," provide colored opaque acrylic sheet in colors and finishes as selected from the manufacturer's standards. D. Aluminum Castings: Provide aluminum castings of alloy and temper recommended by the sign manufacturer for the casting process used and for the use and finish indicated. E. Fasteners: Use concealed fasteners fabricated from metals that are not corrosive to the sign material and mounting surface. F. Anchors and Inserts: Use nonferrous metal or hot dipped galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled in place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. G. Concrete for Post Holes: Mix portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, aggregates complying with ASTM C 33, and clean water to obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi (17 MPa). Use at least 4 sacks of cement/cu. yd. (225 kg of cement/cu. m), 1-inch (25-mm) maximum-size aggregate, maximum 3-inch (75-mm) slump, and 2 to 4 percent entrained air. 2.3 PANEL SIGNS A. General: Provide panel signs that comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes, and details of construction. 1. Produce smooth panel sign surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch1.5 mm measured diagonally. B. Basis of Design Product: ASI Sign Systems, Inc.; ASI Tactile Graphics Plaque Sign System or a comparable product of one of the following: 1. Available Manufacturers: a. APCO Graphics, Inc. b. Best Manufacturing Co. c. Mohawk Sign Systems. C. Sign Face: High impact aluminum tri-hydrate filled polyester acrylate resin, pressure molded into a single polymerized component, using manufacturers standard co-molding process. D. Unframed Panel Signs: Fabricate signs with edges mechanically and smoothly finished to comply with the following requirements: 1. Edge Condition: Square cut. 2. Corner Condition: Square. 3. Depth: 0.25 inch thickness. 4. Panel Appearance: As selected by Architect. 5. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer=s full range of colors. 6. Surface Texture: As selected by Architect. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SIGNAGE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 10 14 00 - 5 7. Letter Style: Arial. 8. Letter Height: As scheduled. E. Brackets: Fabricate brackets and fittings for bracket mounted signs from extruded aluminum to suit panel sign construction and mounting conditions indicated. Background chassis shall be concealed by modules and accessories. F. Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy that complies with requirements indicated in the Sign Schedule for size, style, spacing, content, mounting height and location, material, finishes, and colors of signage. 1. Provide signage indicating handicap entry at each set of entry doors into facility. 2. Provide one wall mounted sign per door or set of doors throughout building. a. Provide signs with cutouts and removable inserts (maximum of three (3) per sign) with permanent ADA text. 3. Provide maximum occupancy load signs in assembly rooms as required by code. G. Tactile and Braille Copy: Manufacturer's standard process for producing copy complying with ADA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. Text shall be accompanied by Grade 2 braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square cut edges free from burrs and cut marks. 1. Raised Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch0.8 mm. H. Changeable Message Inserts: Fabricate signs to allow insertion of changeable messages in the form of transparent covers with paper inserts printed by Owner. 1. Furnish paper and software for creating text and symbols for IBM compatible computers for Owner production of paper inserts. 2. Furnish paper cut to size for changeable message insert. I. Colored Coatings: For copy and background colors, provide Pantone Matching System (PMS) colored coatings, including inks and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and are nonfading for application intended. J. Applied Copy: Die cut characters from vinyl film of nominal thickness of 3 mils (0.076 mm) with pressure sensitive adhesive backing. Apply copy to exposed face of panel sign, glass, doors, or wall surfaces as indicated. K. Back-up Sign Panel: Provide back-up blank sign panels at all glass mounted sign locations. Back-up sign panel shall match finished sign face and shall be used to conceal sign attachment to glass. Back-up blank sign panels shall be used or located as directed by Architect. 2.4 EXTERIOR DIRECTIONAL AND PARKING SIGNS A. Panel Signs: Comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes, and details of construction. 1. Produce smooth, even, level sign panel surfaces, constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally. B. Steel Posts: 0.120-inch- (3.0-mm-), galvanized, seamless, square steel posts in length adequate for mounting method specified. Include post caps, fillers, spacers, junction boxes, BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SIGNAGE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 10 14 00 - 6 access panels, and related accessories required for a complete installation. Comply with the following requirements for post shape, finish, and mounting method indicated: 1. Post Size: 2 by 2 inches (50 by 50 mm) square. 2. Post Mounting Method: Provide sign posts of length required for permanent installation by direct-burial mounting method. C. Sign Panels: Provide smooth, even, level sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) measured diagonally from corner to corner. 1. Unframed Single-Sheet Panels: Provide unframed single-sheet sign panels with edges mechanically and smoothly finished to conform to the following: a. Panel Material: 0.125-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick fiberglass sheet. 1) Panel Finish: Manufacturer's standard semigloss finish with UV inhibitors. b. Edge Condition: Square cut. c. Corner Condition: Square corners. D. Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy that complies with the requirements indicated for size, style, spacing, content, position, material, finishes, and colors of letters, numbers, and other graphic devices. 1. Copy Embedded in Fiberglass Panels: Apply computer-generated adhesive graphics to panel as a masking material. Apply acrylic polyurethane background-color flood coats, 0.015-inch (0.4-mm) minimum thickness. Include UV inhibitors. Remove masking material. a. Provide signage indicating handicap parking at all handicap parking spaces. b. Provide directional signage on site for bus, automobile and pedestrian access. E. Fabrication: Provide manufacturer's standard single-post, single-panel-type post and panel signs. The completed sign assembly shall consist of a message panel supported on 1 post. Comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes, and details of construction. 1. Allow for thermal movement resulting from a maximum ambient temperature change (range) of 100 deg F (38 deg C). Design, fabricate, and install post and panel sign assemblies to prevent buckling, opening up of joints, and overstressing of welds and fasteners. 2. Base design on actual surface temperatures of metals due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. a. Welded Connections: Comply with AWS standards for recommended practices in shop welding. Provide welds behind finished surfaces without distortion or discoloration of exposed side. Clean exposed welded surfaces of welding flux and dress on exposed and contact surfaces. b. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form joints exposed to the weather to exclude water penetration. c. Preassemble signs in the shop to the greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. Disassemble signs only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation, in a location not exposed to view after final assembly. d. Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will be inconspicuous. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SIGNAGE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 10 14 00 - 7 3. Posts: Fabricate posts to lengths required for mounting method indicated. a. Direct Burial: For permanent sign installation, provide posts 36 inches (900 mm) longer than height of sign to permit direct embedment in concrete foundations. 4. Panels: Form panels to required size and shape. Comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, finish, color, and details of construction. a. Coordinate dimensions and attachment methods to produce message panels with closely fitting joints. Align edges and surfaces with one another in the relationship indicated. b. Increase metal thickness or reinforce with concealed stiffeners or backing materials as required to produce surfaces without distortion, buckles, warp, or other surface deformations. c. Continuously weld joints and seams, unless other methods are indicated; grind, fill, and dress welds to produce smooth, flush, exposed surfaces with welds invisible after final finishing. 2.5 DIMENSIONAL LETTERS AND NUMBERS A. Cast Letters and Numbers: Form individual letters and numbers by casting. Produce characters with smooth, flat faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles, free from pits, scale, sand holes, or other defects. Cast lugs into the back of characters and tap to receive threaded mounting studs. Comply with requirements indicated for finish, style, and size. 1. Metal: Aluminum. 2. Provide letters of size and style as indicated attached to exterior building and monument sign surface as directed by architect. 3. Building Address: Provide letters and/or numbers as required. Attach to exterior wall surface as directed by architect. 2.6 FINISHES A. Colors and Surface Textures: For exposed sign material that requires selection of materials with integral or applied colors, surface textures or other characteristics related to appearance, provide color matches indicated, or if not indicated, as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standards. B. Metal Finishes: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for finish designations and applications recommendations. C. Aluminum Finishes: Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. 1. Baked Enamel Finish: AA M4xC12C42R1x (Mechanical Finish: Manufacturer's standard, other nondirectional textured; Chemical Finish: Chemical conversion coating, acid chromate fluoride phosphate pretreatment; Organic Coating: as specified below). Apply baked enamel in compliance with paint manufacturer's specifications for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting. a. Organic Coating: Thermosetting modified acrylic enamel primer/topcoat system complying with AAMA 603.8 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils, medium gloss. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SIGNAGE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 10 14 00 - 8 1) Color: As selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standard colors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of the type described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance. B. Exterior Directional and Parking Signs: 1. Excavation: In firm, undisturbed or compacted soil, drill or (using a post-hole digger) hand-excavate holes for each post to the minimum diameter recommended by sign manufacturer, but at least 4 times the largest post cross-section. a. Excavate hole depths approximately 3 inches (75 mm) lower than required post bottom, with bottom of posts set at least 36 inches (900 mm) below finished grade. 2. Setting Posts: Center and align posts in holes 3 inches (75 mm) above bottom of excavation. a. Protect portion of posts aboveground from concrete splatter. Place concrete around posts and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Check posts for vertical and top alignment and hold in position until concrete has achieved its initial set. C. Wall Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using the methods indicated below: 1. Provide screws, bolts, and other exposed fastening devices of the same material as the items being fastened. Provide types, gages, and lengths to suit installation conditions. Use theft-proof fasteners where exposed to view. D. Bracket Mounted Units: Provide the manufacturer's standard brackets, fittings, and hardware as appropriate for mounting signs that project at right angles from walls and ceilings. Attach brackets and fittings securely to walls or ceilings with concealed fasteners and anchoring devices to comply with manufacturer's directions. E. Dimensional Letters and Numbers: Mount letters and numbers using standard fastening methods recommended by the manufacturer for letter form, type of mounting, wall construction, and condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to establish letter spacing and to locate holes for fasteners. 1. Flush Mounting: Mount letters with backs in contact with the wall surface. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to the manufacturer's instructions. Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Owner. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SIGNAGE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 10 14 00 - 9 END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SIGNAGE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 10 14 00 - 10 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 10 44 13 - 1 SECTION 10 44 13 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install fire protection cabinets for the following: 1. Portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 10 44 16 Fire Extinguishers 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM) standards, most recent editions: ASTM A666 Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar ASTM A1008 Specification s for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products ASTM D4802 Standard Specification for Poly(Methyl Methacrylate) Acrylic Plastic Sheet B. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturer’s (NAAMM) standards, most recent editions: AMP 500 Metal Finishes Manual C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) standards, most recent editions: NFPA 70 Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace and Handbook 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Furnish for each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for cabinets. 1. Include rough-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. C. Shop Drawings: Furnish drawings for fire protection cabinets indicating plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 10 44 13 - 2 D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit operation and maintenance data suitable for inclusion in facility operation and maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: When such are used, listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with Section 01 25 10 - Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions. B. Delivery Schedule: For fire protection cabinets, coordinate final fire extinguisher cabinet schedule with fire extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function. C. Acceptance at Site: Inspect all boxes and packages upon delivery to the Project Site. Notify Engineer, in writing, if any loss or damage exists to products or components. Replace loss and repair damage to new condition in accordance with manufacturer's original specifications and specific instructions. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire protection cabinets with fire extinguishers to ensure fit and function. B. When fire protection cabinets are to be recessed into walls, coordinate sizes and locations of cabinets with wall depths. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Fire Extinguishers: a. Amerex Corporation. b. J.L. Industries, Inc. c. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. d. Potter Roemer, LLC. e. Engineer approved equal. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304 C. Transparent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), 1/4 inch, with Finish 1 (smooth or polished). BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 10 44 13 - 3 2.3 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET A. Cabinet Type: Surface mounted, suitable for fire extinguisher. B. Cabinet Construction: Non-rated. C. Cabinet Material: Stainless Steel sheet. D. Trim Style: Rounded edges, stainless steel sheet. E. Identification: Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words “FIRE EXTINGUISHER.” 1. Location: Applied to cabinet door: 2. Application Process: Engraved or decal. 3. Lettering Color: Black or Red. 4. Orientation: Vertical. F. Door Style: Vertical duo panel with frame. G. Door Glazing: Clear transparent acrylic sheet. H. Door Hardware 1. Manufacturer’s standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. 2. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to open 180 degrees. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer’s standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. 1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. 3. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks. 4. Install door locks at factory. B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer’s standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 2.5 FINISH A. General 1. Comply with NAAMM’s AMP 500 for applying and designating finishes. 2. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping, 3. Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 10 44 13 - 4 4. Notable variations in finish of same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if approved by Engineer and they are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. B. Stainless Steel Finishes 1. Surface preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. 2. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches a. Directional satin finish, No. 4. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed cabinets will be installed. B. Proceed with installation only after any unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare recesses for recessed fire protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install fire protection cabinets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb, at locations indicated. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer’s written installation instructions. B. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. C. On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory finished appearance, subject to approval of Engineer. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire protection cabinet manufacturer. E. At direction of Engineer, replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 10 44 13 - 5 END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 10 44 13 - 6 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT FIRE EXTINGUISHERS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 10 44 16 - 1 SECTION 10 44 16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 10 44 13 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets 1.3 REFERENCES A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) standards, most recent editions: NFPA 10 Portable Fire Extinguishers 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Furnish for each type of product indicated. Include information on rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit operation and maintenance data suitable for inclusion in facility operation and maintenance manuals. D. Warranty Documentation: Submit sample of manufacturer's warranty. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10. B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. UL Listing: Provide fire extinguishers with UL Rating as noted for each type and size. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with Section 01 25 10 - Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions. B. Delivery Schedule: For fire extinguishers, coordinate final fire extinguisher schedule with fire extinguisher cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT FIRE EXTINGUISHERS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 10 44 16 - 2 C. Acceptance at Site: Inspect all boxes and packages upon delivery to the Project Site. Notify Engineer, in writing, if any loss or damage exists to products or components. Replace loss and repair damage to new condition in accordance with manufacturer's original specifications and specific instructions. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with Fire Protection Cabinets to ensure fit and function. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Provide manufacturer's stand form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within warranty period. B. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. 2. Faulty operation of valves or release levers. C. Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Fire Extinguishers: a. Amerex Corporation. b. J.L. Industries, Inc. c. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. d. Potter Roemer, LLC. e. Engineer approved equal. 2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Provide only new extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each fire extinguisher cabinet and mounting bracket indicated. B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical in Steel Container: UL-rated 4A:80-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container. C. Valves: Manufacturer's standard. D. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard. E. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT FIRE EXTINGUISHERS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 10 44 16 - 3 2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS A. Mounting Brackets: Provide manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish. B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. 1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface. a. Orientation: Vertical PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine surfaces, areas, and finishes for compliance with conditions affecting fire extinguisher mounting. B. Preinstalling Testing: Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers C. Proceed with installation only after any unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install fire extinguishers in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT FIRE EXTINGUISHERS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 10 44 16 - 4 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 11 00 00 - 1 SECTION 11 00 00 EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall provide all tools, supplies, materials, equipment, and all labor necessary for the furnishing, construction, installation, testing, and operation of all equipment and appurtenant Work, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all equipment specified and where referred to, except where otherwise indicated. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Commercial Standards: All equipment, products, and their installation shall be in accordance with the following standards, as applicable, and as indicated in each Section of these Specifications: American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA). American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). American Public Health Association (APHA). American National Standards Institute (ANSI). American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). American Water Works Association (AWWA). American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association, Inc. (AFBMA). Mechanical Power Transmission Association (MPTA). American Welding Society (AWS). National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). Federal Specifications (FS). National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). Manufacturer's published recommendations and specifications. General Industry Safety Orders (OSHA). BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 11 00 00 - 2 Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA). B. The following standards have been referred to in this Section of the Specifications: ANSI B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 25, 125, 250, and 800 ANSI B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Steel, Nickel Alloy, and Other Special Alloys ANSI B46.1 Surface Texture ANSI S12.6 Method for the Measurement of the Real-Ear Attenuation of Hearing Protectors ANSI/ASME B1.20.1 General Purpose Pipe Threads (Inch) ANSI/ASME B31.1 Power Piping ANSI/AWWA D100 Welded Steel Tanks for Water Storage AWWA C206 Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe ASTM A 48 Specification for Gray Iron Castings ASTM A 108 Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: The Contractor shall furnish complete shop drawings for all equipment specified in the various Sections, together with all piping, valves, and controls for review by the Engineer in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittals Procedures. B. Tools: The Contractor shall supply one complete set of special wrenches and other special tools necessary for the assembly, adjustment, and dismantling of the equipment. All tools shall be of best quality hardened steel forgings with bright, finish wrenc h heads shall have work faces dressed to fit nuts. All tools shall be suitable for professional work and manufactured by a recognized supplier of professional tools such as Snap On, Crescent, Stanley, or equal. The set of tools shall be neatly mounted in a labeled tool box of suitable design provided with a hinged cover. For each microprocessor-based equipment system requiring a handhold device for configuration, furnish one handhold device. C. Spare Parts: The Contractor shall obtain and submit from the manufacturer a list of suggested spare parts for each piece of equipment. After approval, Contractor shall furnish such spare parts suitably packaged, identified with the equipment number, and labeled. Contractor shall also furnish the name, address, and telephone number of the nearest distributor for each piece of equipment. All spare parts are intended for use by the OWNER only, after expiration of the guaranty period. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 11 00 00 - 3 D. Torsional Analysis: The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a torsional and lateral vibration analysis of the following equipment, in accordance with Section 01 33 20 - Contractor Submittals. The analysis has to be performed by a specialist experienced in this type of Work and approved by the Engineer. 1. All engine drives. 2. All blowers and compressors with drives of 100 horsepower and over. 3. All vertical pumps with universal joints and extended shafts. 4. All other equipment where indicated. 5. The torsional natural frequency of the drive train must be avoided by plus and minus 25 percent by any exciting frequency of the equipment, throughout the entire operating range. E. Vibration Analysis: In the bid price the Contractor shall include at least two site visits of the above mentioned specialist, during construction and testing of the equipment, to analyze and measure the amount of equipment vibration and make his written recommendation for keeping the vibration at a safe limit. F. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Contractor Submittals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Inspection, Startup, and Field Adjustment: The Contractor shall demonstrate that all equipment meets the specified performance requirements. Contractor shall provide the services of an experienced, competent, and authorized service representative of the manufacturer of each item of major equipment who shall visit the site to perform the following tasks: 1. Assist the Contractor in the installation of the equipment. 2. To inspect, check, adjust if necessary and approve the equipment installation. 3. To start-up and field-test the equipment for proper operation, efficiency, and capacity. 4. To perform necessary field adjustments during the test period until the equipment installation and operation are satisfactory to the Engineer. 5. To instruct the Owner’s personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment. Instruction shall include step-by-step trouble shooting procedures with all necessary test equipment. B. Costs: The costs of all inspection, startup, testing, adjustment, and instruction Work performed by said factory-trained representatives shall be borne by the Contractor. The Owner will pay for costs of power and water. When available, the Owner’s operating personnel will provide assistance in the field testing. C. Public Inspection: It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to inform the local authorities, such as building and plumbing inspectors, Fire Marshall, OSHA inspectors, and others, to witness all required tests for piping, plumbing, fire protection systems, pressure vessels, and safety systems to obtain all required permits and certificates, and pay all fees. D. Tolerances: Tolerances and clearances shall be as shown on the shop drawings and shall be closely adhered to. Machine Work shall in all cases be of high-grade workmanship and finish, BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 11 00 00 - 4 with due consideration to the special nature or function of the parts. Members without milled ends and which are to be framed to other steel parts of the structure may have a variation in the detailed length of not greater than 1/16-inch for members 30 feet or less in length, and not greater than 1/8-inch for members over 30 feet in length. E. Machine Finish: The type of finish shall be the most suitable for the application and shall be shown in micro-inches in accordance with ANSI B46.1. The following finishes shall be used: 1. Surface roughness not greater than 63 micro-inches shall be required for all surfaces in sliding contact. 2. Surface roughness not greater than 250 micro-inches shall be required for surfaces in contact where a tight joint is not required. 3. Rough finish not greater than 500 micro-inches shall be required for other machined surfaces. 4. Contact surfaces of shafts and stems which pass through stuffing boxes and contact surfaces of bearings shall be finished to not greater than 32 micro-inches. F. Manufacturer's Experience: Unless otherwise directed by the ENGINEER, all equipment furnished shall have a record of at least 5 years of successful, trouble free operation in similar applications, from the same manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. High Noise Level Location: The Contractor shall provide one personal hearing protection station, as indicated herein, at each high noise level location. Said locations are defined as follows: 1. Outdoor Location: Any single equipment item or any group of equipment items that produce noise exceeding OSHA noise level requirements for a 2-hour exposure. Where such equipment is separated by a distance of more than 20 feet, measured between edges of footings, each group of equipment shall be provided with a separate hearing protection station. 2. Indoor Location a. Any single equipment item, or any group of equipment items, located within a single room not normally occupied, that produces noise exceeding OSHA noise level requirements for a 2-hour exposure. b. Any single equipment item, or any group of equipment items, located within a single room normally occupied by workers, that produces noise exceeding OSHA noise level requirements for an 8-hour exposure. 3. Personal Hearing Protection: The Contractor shall supply, in their original unopened packaging, three pairs of high attenuation hearing protectors. The ear protectors shall be capable of meeting the requirements of ANSI S12.6 and shall produce a noise level reduction of 25 dBA at a frequency of 500 Hz. The hearing protectors shall have fluid filled ear cushions and an adjustable, padded headband. The protectors shall be stored in a weatherproof, labeled, steel cabinet, furnished by the Contractor and mounted in an approved location near the noise protection station. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 11 00 00 - 5 B. Service Factors: Service factors shall be applied in the selection or design of mechanical power transmission components. Unless otherwise indicated, the following load classifications shall apply in determining service factors: Type of Equipment Load Classification Blower: Centrifugal or vane Uniform Lobe Moderate Shock Reciprocating Air Compressor: Multi-Cylinder Moderate Shock Single-Cylinder Heavy Shock Pump: Centrifugal or Rotary Uniform Reciprocating Moderate Shock Mixer: Constant Density Uniform Variable Density Moderate Shock Crane or Hoist Moderate Shock C. For service factors of electric motors, see Section 26 19 00 – Medium-Voltage Induction Motors. Where load classifications are not indicated, best modern practice shall be used. D. Welding: Unless otherwise indicated, all welding shall conform to the following: 1. Latest revision of ANSI/AWWA D100. 2. Latest revision of AWWA C206. 3. All composite fabricated steel assemblies which are to be erected or installed inside a hydraulic structure, including any fixed or movable structural components of mechanical equipment, shall have continuous seal welds to prevent entrance of air or moisture. E. All welding shall be by the metal-arc method or gas-shielded arc method as described in the American Welding Society's "Welding Handbook" as supplemented by other pertinent standards of the AWS. Qualification of welders shall be in accordance with the AWS Standards governing same. F. In assembly and during welding, the component parts shall be adequately clamped, supported, and restrained to minimize distortion and for control of dimensions. Weld reinforcement shall be as specified by the AWS code. Upon completion of welding, all weld splatter, flux, slag, and burrs left by attachments shall be removed. Welds shall be repaired to produce a workmanlike appearance, with uniform weld contours and dimensions. All BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 11 00 00 - 6 sharp corners of material which is to be painted or coated shall be ground to a minimum of 1/32-inch on the flat. G. Protective Coating: All equipment shall be painted or coated in accordance with Section 09 90 00 – Painting, unless otherwise indicated. Nonferrous metal and corrosion-resisting steel surfaces shall be coated with grease or lubricating oil. Coated surfaces shall be protected from abrasion or other damage during handling, testing, storing, assembly, and shipping. H. Protection of Equipment: All equipment shall be boxed, crated, or otherwise protected from damage and moisture during shipment, handling, and storage by methods recommended by the manufacturer. All equipment shall be protected from exposure to corrosive fumes and shall be kept thoroughly dry at all times. Pumps, motors, drives, electrical equipment, and other equipment having anti-friction or sleeve bearings shall be stored in weathertight storage facilities prior to installation. For extended storage periods, plastic equipment wrappers should be avoided, to prevent accumulation of condensate in gears and bearings. I. Identification of Equipment Items: Each item of equipment shipped shall have a legible identifying mark corresponding to the equipment number indicated for the particular item. J. Vibration Level: All equipment subject to vibration shall be provided with restrained spring- type vibration isolators or pads per manufacturer's written recommendations. K. Shop Fabrication: Shop fabrication shall be performed in accordance with the Contract Documents and the Engineer-approved shop drawings. 2.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS AND FOUNDATIONS A. Equipment Supports: All equipment supports, anchors, and restrainers shall be adequately designed for static, dynamic, wind, and seismic loads. The design horizontal seismic force shall be the greater of: that noted in the general structural notes or as required by the governing building code, or 10 percent of gravity. Submitted design calculations for equipment supports must bear the signature and seal of an Engineer registered in Utah. B. Equipment Foundations: Equipment foundations shall be as per manufacturer's written recommendations. All mechanical equipment, tanks, and control cabinets shall be mounted on concrete bases as shown on standard structural details. C. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for review in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 20 – Contractor Submittals. Shop drawings will be considered incomplete unless clear, concise calculations are presented showing equipment anchorage forces and the capacities of the anchorage elements provided by the Contractor. 2.3 PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND GUIDES A. All pipe connections to equipment shall be supported, anchored, and guided to avoid stresses and loads on equipment flanges and equipment. Supports and hangers shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 40 00 01 - Pipe Supports. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 11 00 00 - 7 2.4 FLANGES AND PIPE THREADS A. All flanges on equipment and appurtenances provided under this Section shall conform to ANSI B16.1, Class 125; or B16.5, Class 150, unless otherwise indicated. All pipe threads shall be in accordance with ANSI/ASME B1.20.1, and with requirements of Section 40 05 00 - Piping, General. 2.5 COUPLINGS A. Flexible couplings shall be provided between the driver and the driven equipment to accommodate slight angular misalignment, parallel misalignment, end float, and to cushion shock loads. Where required for vertical shafts, 3-piece spacer couplings or universal type couplings for extended shafts shall be installed. B. The CONTRACTOR shall have the equipment manufacturer select or recommend the size and type of coupling required to suit each specific application. C. Taper-lock bushings may be used to provide for easy installation and removal on shafts of various diameters. D. Where universal type couplings are shown, they shall be of the needle bearing type construction, equipped with commercial type grease fittings. 2.6 SHAFTING A. General: All shafting shall be continuous between bearings and shall be sized to transmit the power required. Keyways shall be accurately cut in line. Shafting shall not be turned down at the ends to accommodate bearings or sprockets whose bore is less than the diameter of the shaft. All shafts shall rotate in the end bearings and shall be turned and polished, straight, and true. B. Materials: Shafting materials shall be appropriate for the type of service and torque transmitted. Environmental elements such as corrosive gases, moisture, and fluids shall be taken into consideration. Materials shall be as indicated unless furnished as part of an equipment assembly. 1. Low carbon cold-rolled steel shafting shall conform to ASTM A 108, Grade 1018. 2. Medium carbon cold-rolled shafting shall conform to ASTM A 108, Grade 1045. 3. Corrosion-resistant shafting shall be stainless steel or Monel, whichever is most suitable for the intended service. C. Differential Settlement: Where differential settlement between the driver and the driven equipment may be expected, a shaft of sufficient length with two sets of universal type couplings shall be provided. 2.7 2.7 BEARINGS A. General: Bearings shall conform to the standards of the AFBMA. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 11 00 00 - 8 B. To assure satisfactory bearing application, fitting practice, mounting, lubrication, sealing, static rating, housing strength, and other important factors shall be considered in bearing selection. C. All re-lubricatable type bearings shall be equipped with a hydraulic grease fitting in an accessible location and shall have sufficient grease capacity in the bearing chamber. D. All lubricated-for-life bearings shall be factory-lubricated with the manufacturer's recommended grease to insure maximum bearing life and best performance. E. Bearing Life: Except where otherwise indicated, all bearings shall have a minimum L-10 life expectancy of 5 years or 20,000 hours, whichever occurs first. Where indicated, bearings shall have a minimum rated L-10 life expectancy corresponding to the type of service, as follows: Type of Service Design Life (years)* L-10 Design Life (hours)* 8-hour shift 10 20,000 16-hour shift 10 40,000 Continuous 10 60,000 * = Design Life in years or L-10 Design Life in hours, whichever occurs first F. Bearing housings shall be of cast iron or steel and bearing mounting arrangement shall be as indicated, or as recommended in the published standards of the manufacturer if not indicated. Split-type housings may be used to facilitate installation, inspection, and disassembly. G. Sleeve-type bearings shall have a Babbitt or bronze liner. 2.8 GEARS AND GEAR DRIVES A. Unless otherwise indicated, gears shall be of the helical or spiral-bevel type, designed and manufactured in accordance with AGMA Standards, with a minimum service factor of 1.7, a minimum L-10 bearing life of 60,000 hours and a minimum efficiency of 94 percent. Worm gears shall not be used, unless specifically approved by the Engineer. B. All gear speed reducers or increases shall be of the enclosed type, oil- or grease-lubricated and fully sealed, with a breather to allow air to escape but keep dust and dirt out. The casing shall be of cast iron or heavy duty steel construction with lifting lugs and an inspection cover for each gear train. An oil level sight glass and an oil flow indicator shall be provided, arranged for easy reading. C. Gears and gear drives as part of an equipment assembly shall be shipped fully assembled for field installation. D. Material selections shall be left to the discretion of the manufacturer, provided the above AGMA values are met. Input and output shafts shall be adequately designed for the service and load requirements. Gears shall be computer-matched for minimum tolerance variation. The output shaft shall have two positive seals to prevent oil leakage. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 11 00 00 - 9 E. Oil level and drain location relative to the mounting arrangement shall be easily accessible. Oil coolers or heat exchangers with all required appurtenances shall be furnished when necessary. F. Where gear drive input or output shafts have to connect to couplings or sprockets supplied by others, the Contractor shall have the gear drive manufacturer supply matching key taped to the shaft for shipment. 2.9 DRIVE CHAINS A. Power drive chains shall be commercial type roller chains and meet ANSI Standards. B. A chain take-up or tightener shall be provided in every chain drive arrangement to provide easy adjustment. C. A minimum of one connecting or coupler link shall be provided with each length of roller chain. D. Chain and attachments shall be of the manufacturer's best standard material and suitable for the process fluid. 2.10 SPROCKETS A. General: Sprockets shall be used in conjunction with all chain drives and chain-type material handling equipment. B. Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, materials shall be as follows: 1. Sprockets with 25 teeth or less, normally used as a driver, shall be made of medium carbon steel in the 0.40 to 0.45 percent carbon range. 2. Type A and B sprockets with 26 teeth or more, normally used as driven sprockets, shall be made of minimum 0.20 percent carbon steel. 3. Large diameter sprockets with Type C hub shall be made of cast iron conforming to ASTM A 48, Class 30. C. All sprockets shall be accurately machined to ANSI Standards. Sprockets shall have deep hardness penetration in tooth sections. D. Finish bored sprockets shall be furnished complete with keyseat and set screws. E. To facilitate installation and disassembly, sprockets shall be of the split type or shall be furnished with taper-lock bushings as required. F. Idler sprockets shall be furnished with brass or Babbitt bushings, complete with oil hole and axial or circumferential grooving. Steel collars with set screws may be provided in both sides of the hub. 2.11 V-BELT DRIVES A. V-belts and sheaves shall be of the best commercial grade and shall conform to ANSI, MPTA, and RMA Standards. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 11 00 00 - 10 B. Unless otherwise indicated, sheaves shall be machined from the finest quality gray cast iron. C. All sheaves shall be statically balanced. In some applications where vibration is a problem, sheaves shall be dynamically balanced. Sheaves operating at belt speeds exceeding 6,500 fpm may be required to be of special materials and construction. D. To facilitate installation and disassembly, sheaves shall be furnished complete with taper - lock or QD bushings as required. E. Finish bored sheaves shall be furnished complete with keyseat and set screws. F. Sliding motor bases shall be provided to adjust the tension of V-belts. 2.12 DRIVE GUARDS A. All power transmission, prime movers, machines, shaft extensions, and moving machine parts shall be guarded to conform with the OSHA Safety and Health Standards (29CFR1910). The guards shall be constructed of minimum 10 gauge expanded, flattened steel with smooth edges and corners, galvanized after fabrication and securely fastened. Where required for lubrication or maintenance, guards shall have hinged and latched access doors. 2.13 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. General: Flexible connectors shall be installed in all piping connections to engines, blowers, compressors, and other vibrating equipment and in piping systems in accordance with Section 40 05 00 - Piping, General. 2.14 INSULATING CONNECTIONS A. General: Insulating bushings, unions, couplings, or flanges, as appropriate, shall be used in accordance with the requirements of the Section 40 05 00 - Piping, General. 2.15 GASKETS AND PACKINGS A. Gaskets shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 40 05 00 - Piping, General. B. Packing around valve stems and reciprocating shafts shall be of compressible material, compatible with the fluid being used. Chevron-type "V" packing shall be Garlock No. 432, John Crane "Everseal," or equal. C. Packing around rotating shafts (other than valve stems) shall be "O"-rings, stuffing boxes, or mechanical seals, as recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the ENGINEER, in accordance with Section 43 20 10 - Pumps, General. 2.16 NAMEPLATES A. Equipment nameplates of stainless steel shall be engraved or stamped and fastened to the equipment in an accessible location with No. 4 or larger oval head stainless steel screws or drive pins. Nameplates shall contain the manufacturer's name, model, serial number, size, characteristics, and appropriate data describing the machine performance ratings. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 11 00 00 - 11 2.17 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A. Where Work areas are located within a flammable or toxic gas environment, suitable gas detection, ventilating, and oxygen deficiency equipment shall be provided. Workers shall be equipped with approved breathing apparatus. 2.18 OVERLOAD PROTECTION A. General: Unless otherwise indicated in individual equipment Sections, all equipment drives incorporating overload protection shall be provided with an overload protection device. B. Mechanical Torque Monitoring System: The overload protection shall be a mechanical device to provide for reliable protection in the event of excessive overload. It shall be a ball detent type designed for long term repeatability and life. It shall be infinitely adjustable by a single adjusting nut. Once set it shall be tamperproof, and incorporate a torque monitoring and control system. It shall activate an alarm set for 85 percent, and a motor cutout switch set for 100 percent of maximum continuous running torque. A visual torque indication shall be provided and oriented so that it may be read from the walkway. The dial shall be calibrated from 0 to 100 percent of maximum continuous running torque. The design of the torque limiter should initiate the mechanical disengagement of the drive upon overload. Each unit shall be suitable for outdoor/corrosive environments with a protective finish, corrosion inhibiting lubricants and a stainless steel cover. C. Electronic Torque Monitoring System: 1. As an alternative to the mechanical system, the overload protection may be an Electronic Torque Monitoring Control System capable of displaying torque, rpm's, one level of overload, and two levels of overload of the drive system. It shall incorporate a time-delay for start-up and a voltage monitoring and compensation circuit for up to +15 percent variation. 2. The overload device shall be housed in an enclosure with NEMA rating in accordance with the area designations of Section 16050 - Electrical General Provisions. A visual torque dial shall be provided and oriented so that it can be easily read from the walkway. 3. The torque monitoring system shall be calibrated to: alarm and shut down the system in the event the torque drops to 50 percent of normal running; alarm at 85 percent of maximum continuous running torque and shut down the motor at maximum continuous running torque of the equipment. The system shall be calibrated at the factory of the equipment manufacturer and it shall be capable of monitoring twice the maximum continuous running torque of the equipment. D. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. American Autogard Corporation; 2. Ferguson Machine Company. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 11 00 00 - 12 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COUPLINGS A. The Contractor shall have the equipment manufacturer select or recommend the size and type of coupling required to suit each specific application; installation shall be per equipment manufacturer's printed recommendations. 3.2 INSULATING CONNECTIONS A. All insulating connections shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.3 PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND GUIDES A. Hangers, supports, seismic bracing and guides shall be spaced in accordance with ANSI/ASME B.31.1 standard, and with tables in Section 40 00 01 - Pipe Supports. 3.4 PACKAGED EQUIPMENT A. When any system is furnished as pre-packaged equipment, the Contractor shall coordinate with subcontractors all necessary space and structural requirements, clearances, utility connections, signals, and outputs. B. If the packaged system has any additional features (for example, safety interlocks), other than indicated, the Contractor shall coordinate such features with the Engineer and furnish all material and labor necessary for a complete installation as required by the manufacturer, at no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION DIVISION 22 PLUMBING THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 00 00 - 1 SECTION 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL SUMMARY The Contractor shall provide plumbing piping systems, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. All work shall be in strict accordance with the International Plumbing Code, and codes of the State of Utah, City of Riverton, and any other authorities having jurisdiction. The Contractor shall have required certifications and be thoroughly familiar with the local codes. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all necessary permits. This section covers the following plumbing piping systems and associated accessories: 1. Chemical Waste Piping and Accessories 2. Laboratory Air Piping 3. Natural Gas Piping 4. Sanitary Drains, Vent Piping and Specialties 5. Potable Water Piping 6. Processed Water Piping This section covers the following plumbing specific items: 1. Hangers and pipe supports 2. Pipe insulation for potable water 3. Oil and Sand Separator 4. Floor drains and cleanouts 5. Transition fittings 6. Access doors and covers Related sections include: Section 01 33 20 – Contractor Submittals and Section 40 00 03 – Mill Piping. REFERENCE STANDARDS General Standards ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX ASME B16 – Standards of Pipes and Fittings National Fire Protection Agency 70, Article 100 AWS B2.2 – Brazing Procedure and Performance Qualification ASME B31.3 - Process Piping Chemical Waste Piping and Accessories: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 00 00 - 2 ASTM F 1412 Standard Specification for Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings for Corrosive Waste Drainage Systems ASTM D 4101 Standard Specification for Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials ASTM D 2665 Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings ASTM D 3222 Standard Specification for Unmodified Poly (Vinylidene Fluoride) (PVDF) Molding Extrusion and Coating Materials ASTM D 3311 Standard Specification for Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV) Plastic Fittings Patterns ASTM A 861 Standard Specification for High-Silicon Iron Pipe and Fittings ASTM F 423 Standard Specification for Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) Plastic-Lined Ferrous Metal Pipe, Fittings, and Flanges ASTM F 491 Standard Specification for Poly(Vinylidene Fluoride) (PVDF) Plastic-Lined Ferrous Metal Pipe and Fittings Laboratory Air Piping: National Fire Protection Agency 99 – Standard for Health Care Facilities ASTM B 819 Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Medical Gas Systems ASME B16.21 Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges ASME B16.22 Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings ASME B16.24 Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 150, 300, 600, 900, 1500 and 2500 MSS SP-72 Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt-Welding Ends for General Service SS SP-73 Brazing Joints for Copper Alloy Solder Pressure Fittings MSS SP-110 Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends MSS SP-123 Non-Ferrous Threaded and Solder-Joint Unions for Use With Copper Water Tube Natural Gas Piping BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 00 00 - 3 ASTM A 53/ 53M Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless ANSI Z21.21 Connectors for Gas Appliances ANSI Z21.80 Line Pressure Regulators Sanitary Drain and Vent ASTM C 1277 Standard Specification for Shielded Couplings Joining Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings ASTM C 564 Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." Potable Water Piping ASTM B88 Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube ASTM A 106/A 106M Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service CONTACTOR SUBMITTALS Submit product data for components of each pipe system indicated in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Contractor Submittals. 1. Chemical Waste Piping. Provide product data for chemical-waste piping materials, components, and specialties including: a. Cleanouts 2. 3. Laboratory Air Piping. Submit coordination drawings for laboratory air systems. Provide piping material certification signed by installer certifying that laboratory air and vacuum piping materials comply with NFPA 99 requirements. Include relationship to other services that serve same work area. Provide product data for the following laboratory air and vacuum piping items: a. Laboratory air tubes and fittings. b. Memory-metal couplings. c. Flexible pipe connectors. d. Laboratory air and vacuum valves and valve boxes. e. Alarm system components 4. Fuel Gas Piping. Provide product data for the following fuel gas piping: a. Piping material. b. Specialty valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of selected models. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 00 00 - 4 c. Pressure regulators. Include pressure rating, capacity, and settings of selected models. 5. Sanitary Drain, Vent Piping and Specialties. Provide product data for the following sanitary drain, vent and accessories: a. Cast-Iron Pipe and Fittings b. Cleanouts c. Floor drains d. Sand Oil Interceptors including layout drawings with dimensions, list of materials of construction, and manufacturer installation instructions. 6. Potable Water Piping. Provide product data for the following potable water system: a. Hard and Soft Copper tubing product data. b. Piping insulation The Contractor shall submit information on the following items in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Contractor Submittals. 1. Pipe joining materials 2. Pipe transition fittings including dielectric fittings; 3. Wall sleeves and sleeve sealant systems. 4. Shock Absorbers 5. Pipe hangers. 6. Access doors and covers The Contractor shall submit information on all valves in accordance with Section 40 05 51 – Valves, General. LEED Submittals: Submit Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For solvent cements and adhesive primers, documentation including printed statement of VOC content and chemical components. Provide brazing certificates as required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, or AWS B2.2. QUALITY ASSURANCE Source Limitations: Obtain pipe, fittings, and joining materials for each piping system through one source from a single manufacturer. Comply with ASME B31.3, "Process Piping," for piping conveying fluid at a pressure of 15 psig or greater. 1. Exception: Piping from different manufacturers may be used in same system if indicated and suitable transition fittings matching both piping materials are used. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of chemical-waste specialties and are based on the specific system indicated. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing laboratory. Comply with ASME B31.3, "Process Piping." BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 00 00 - 5 Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. NFPA Standard: Comply with NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas Code." PRODUCTS GENERAL Plumbing piping, fixtures, specialties, and equipment shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the intended usage. CHEMICAL WASTE PIPING AND ACCESSORIES PP Drainage Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 1412, pipe extruded and drainage-pattern fittings molded, with Schedule 40 dimensions, from PP resin with fire-retardant additive complying with ASTM D 4101. Include fusion joint ends. 1. Exception: Pipe and fittings made from PP resin without fire-retardant additive may be used for underground installation. PVC Drainage Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 2665, pipe and drainage-pattern fittings. PVDF Drainage Pipe and Fittings: Pipe extruded and fittings molded, with Schedule 40 dimensions, from PVDF resin complying with ASTM D 3222. Include drainage-pattern fittings complying with ASTM D 3311, except with fusion joint ends. Iron Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 861; high-silicon iron, with drainage-pattern fittings. 1. Ends: Bell and spigot. Include piping manufacturer's acid-resistant packing and lead calking materials. 2. Ends: Mechanical joint. Include piping manufacturer's PTFE inner sleeves, CR outer sleeves, and stainless steel, bolted-clamp couplings. 3. Ends: Flanged. Include piping manufacturer's gaskets, and bolts and nuts. PTFE-Lined Steel Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 423, pipe and fittings with flanged ends. Include piping manufacturer's gaskets compatible with system liquid and piping lining, and bolts and nuts. PVDF-Lined Steel Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 491, pipe and fittings with flanged ends. Include piping manufacturer's gaskets compatible with system liquid and piping lining, and bolts and nuts. Accessories: Where indicated on the drawings, provide the following accessories for the chemical waste piping: 1. 1Corrosion-Resistant Traps: P-trap or drum trap; NPS 1-1/2 or NPS 2, as required to match connected piping. a. Iron: ASTM A 861, high-silicon iron, with horizontal outlet and bell-and- spigot or plain ends to match connecting piping. b. PP: ASTM D 4101, PP resin, with mechanical-joint pipe connections. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 00 00 - 6 c. PVDF: ASTM D 3222, PVDF resin, with mechanical-joint pipe connections. d. Iron Cleanouts: ASTM A 861, high-silicon-iron fitting, with PTFE gasket and high-silicon-iron closure plug, of design appropriate for piping application. 2. Iron Sink Outlets: ASTM A 861, high-silicon iron, NPS 1-1/2, with clamping device and 4, 6, or 8 inch high overflow fitting, as indicated. 3. PP Sink Outlets: NPS 1-1/2, with clamping device, stopper, and 7 inch high overflow fitting. LABORATORY AIR PIPING Copper Tube: ASTM B 819, Type K or L, seamless, drawn-temper, medical gas tube that has been factory cleaned, purged, and sealed for oxygen service. Include standard color marking "OXY," "MED," "OXY/MED," "OXY/ACR," or "ACR/MED" in green for Type K tube and blue for Type L tube. Fittings: Factory cleaned, purged, and bagged for oxygen service according to ASTM B 819 or field cleaned, purged, and bagged. 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper solder-joint pressure type or MSS SP-73, wrought copper with dimensions for brazed joints. 2. Cast-Copper-Alloy Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 300. 3. Copper Unions: ASME B16.22 or MSS SP-123. Valves: Factory cleaned for oxygen service and bagged. 1. Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: MSS SP-110, 3-piece-body, full-port ball valve rated for 300 psig minimum working pressure; with chrome-plated brass ball, PTFE or TFE seats, blowout-proof stem, threaded or solder-joint ends, and locking-type handle designed for quarter turn between opened and closed positions. 2. Stainless-Steel Ball Valves: MSS SP-72, split-body ball valve rated for 300 psig minimum working pressure; with stainless-steel ball, PTFE or TFE seats, blowout- proof stem, flanged ends, and locking-type handle. 3. Bronze Valves for Pump Control and Pump Service: Straight-through-pattern, spring- loaded ball check valve; designed for 300 psig minimum working pressure. 4. Cast-Iron Valves for Pump Control and Pump Service: MSS SP-71, Class 250, iron- body, bronze-trim, swing check valve, with flanged ends. a. Exception: Valves for vacuum service may be Class 125. 5. Safety Valves: Bronze body with settings to match system requirements. a. Pressure Relief Valves: ASME construction, poppet type. b. Vacuum Relief Valves: Specialty manufacturer's option. Pressure Regulators: Bronze body and trim; spring-loaded, diaphragm-operated, relieving type; manual pressure-setting adjustment; rated for 250 psig minimum inlet pressure; and capable of controlling delivered air pressure within 0.5-psig for each 10 psig inlet pressure. Automatic Drain Valves: Corrosion-resistant metal body and internal parts, 200 psig minimum working-pressure rating, and capable of automatic discharge of collected condensate. Memory-Metal Couplings: Nickel-titanium, shape-memory-alloy, cryogenic compression fitting for joining copper tube without heat. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 00 00 - 7 1. Cleaning: Factory cleaned, purged, and bagged for oxygen service according to ASTM B 819 or field cleaned, purged, and sealed or bagged. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Corrugated-bronze inner tubing with bronze wire-braid covering and ends brazed to inner tubing. 1. Cleaning: Factory cleaned, purged, and sealed or bagged for oxygen service according to ASTM B 819 or field cleaned, purged, and sealed or bagged. 2. Working-Pressure Rating: 200 psig minimum. 3. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded copper pipe or plain-end copper tube. 4. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged copper alloy. Joining materials: 1. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP series alloys. Flux is prohibited unless used with bronze fittings. 2. Threaded-Joint Tape: PTFE. 3. Gasket Material: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, and suitable for oxygen service. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Copper Tube: a. Tubetronics, Inc. b. Or Equal 2. Flexible Pipe Connectors a. ANAMET Inc. b. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. c. Flexicraft Industries d. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. e. Mercer Rubber Co. f. Metraflex, Inc. 3. Valves: a. EMSE Corporation. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. c. NIBCO INC. d. Squire-Cogswell/Aeros Instruments. 4. Stainless Steel Ball Valves: a. Cooper Cameron Corp.; Cooper Cameron Valves Div. b. KTM Products, Inc. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO INC. 5. Valves for Pump Control and Pump Service: a. Squire-Cogswell/Aeros Instruments. b. Tri-Tech Medical, Inc. 6. Laboratory Air and Vacuum Alarm Systems: a. Amico Corporation. b. Squire-Cogswell/Aeros Instruments. c. Tri-Tech Medical, Inc. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 00 00 - 8 NATURAL GAS PIPING Steel Pipe: Provide and install steel pipe for natural gas piping in accordance with requirements of Section 40 00 03 – Mill Piping. Protective coating: Furnish pipe and fittings with factory-applied, corrosion-resistant polyethylene coating for use in contact with materials that may corrode the pipe. Piping specialties: Flexible Connectors: ANSI Z21.24, copper alloy; Quick-Disconnect Devices: ANSI Z21.41, convenience outlets and matching plug connector. Specialty valves: Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller shall have threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1 for pipe threads. Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger shall have flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel flanges and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges. The following specialty valves shall be provided where indicated. 1. Appliance Connector Valves: ANSI Z21.15 and CSA International listed. a. Available Manufacturers: American Valve Inc.; B&K Industries, Inc.; Brass Craft Manufacturing Co.; Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.; Jomar International Ltd.; Mueller Co.; Mueller Gas Products Div.; Robert Manufacturing Co.; Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. 2. Gas Stops: Bronze body with AGA stamp, plug type with bronze plug and flat or square head, ball type with chrome-plated brass ball and lever handle, or butterfly valve with stainless-steel disc and fluorocarbon elastomer seal and lever handle; 2- psig minimum pressure rating. 3. Gas Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: ASME B16.33 and CSA International-listed bronze body and 125 psig pressure rating. a. Available Manufacturers: Crane Valves; Grinnell Corp.; Honeywell International Inc.; Milwaukee Valve Company.; Mueller Co.; Mueller Gas Products Div.; NIBCO INC.; Red-White Valve Corp.; Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. b. Tamperproof Feature: Include design for locking. 4. Plug Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: ASME B16.38 and MSS SP-78 cast-iron, lubricated plug valves, with 125 psig pressure rating. a. Available Manufacturers: Flow Control Equipment, Inc.; Milliken Valve Co., Inc.; Nordstrom Valves, Inc.; Olson Technologies, Inc.; Homestead Valve Div.; Walworth Co. b. Tamperproof Feature: Include design for locking. 5. General-Duty Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: ASME B16.38, cast-iron body, suitable for fuel gas service, with "WOG" indicated on valve body, and 125 psig pressure rating. a. Gate Valves: MSS SP-70, OS&Y type with solid wedge. b. Butterfly Valves: MSS SP-67, lug type with lever handle. Pressure regulators: Single stage and suitable for fuel gas service. Include steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components, elevation compensator, and atmospheric vent. 1. Available Manufacturers: – Service Pressure Regulators: American Meter Company.; Fisher Controls International, Inc.; Division of Emerson.; Invensys.; National Meter Industries, Inc.; Schlumberger Limited; Gas Div. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 00 00 - 9 2. Line Pressure Regulators: American Meter Company; Fisher Controls International, Inc.; Division of Emerson; Maxitrol Company; National Meter Industries, Inc.; Richards Industries, Inc.; Jordan Valve Div.; Schlumberger Limited; Gas Div. 3. Appliance Pressure Regulators: Eaton Corporation; Controls Div.; Harper Wyman Co.; Maxitrol Company; SCP, Inc. 4. NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1 for pipe threads. 5. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel flanges and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges. 6. Line Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.80 and see drawings for inlet to outlet pressure and coordinate with local natural gas utility company. 7. Pressure Regulator Vents: Factory- or field-installed, corrosion-resistant screen in opening if not connected to vent piping. PE Pipe: ASTM D 2513, SDR 11. 1. PE Fittings: ASTM D 2683, socket-fusion type or ASTM D 3261, butt-fusion type with dimensions matching PE pipe. 2. PE Transition Fittings: Factory-fabricated fittings with PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11; and steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B. 3. Anodeless Service-Line Risers: Factory fabricated and leak tested. a. Underground Portion: PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11 inlet. b. Casing: Steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, black steel, Type E or S, Grade B, with corrosion-protective coating covering. c. Aboveground Portion: PE transition fitting. d. Outlet shall be threaded or flanged or suitable for welded connection. e. Tracer wire connection. f. Ultraviolet shield. g. Stake supports with factory finish to match steel pipe casing or carrier pipe. 4. Transition Service-Line Risers: Factory fabricated and leak tested. a. Underground Portion: PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11 inlet connected to steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B, with corrosion-protective coating for aboveground outlet. b. Outlet shall be threaded or flanged or suitable for welded connection. c. Bridging sleeve over mechanical coupling. d. Factory-connected anode. e. Tracer wire connection. f. Ultraviolet shield. g. Stake supports with factory finish to match steel pipe casing or carrier pipe. 5. Plastic Mechanical Couplings, NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. 2) Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div. 3) Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. b. PE body with molded-in, stainless-steel support ring. c. Buna-nitrile seals. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 00 00 - 10 d. Acetal collets. e. Electro-zinc-plated steel stiffener. 6. Plastic Mechanical Couplings, NPS 2 and Larger: Capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe to PE pipe, or steel pipe to steel pipe. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. 2) Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div. 3) Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. b. Fiber-reinforced plastic body. c. PE body tube. d. Buna-nitrile seals. e. Acetal collets. f. Stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and washers. 7. Steel Mechanical Couplings: Capable of joining plain-end PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe to PE pipe, or steel pipe to steel pipe. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Dresser Piping Specialties; Division of Dresser, Inc. 2) Smith-Blair, Inc. b. Steel flanges and tube with epoxy finish. c. Buna-nitrile seals. d. Steel bolts, washers, and nuts. e. Factory-installed anode for steel-body couplings installed underground. SANITARY DRAIN, VENT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class. 1. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber. Hubless Cast-Iron Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301. 1. Sovent Stack Fittings: ASME B16.45 or ASSE 1043, hubless, cast-iron aerator and deaerator drainage fittings. 2. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion- resistant fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. a. Standard, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310, with stainless-steel corrugated shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve. b. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: With stainless-steel shield, stainless-steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve. Exposed Cast-Iron Cleanouts: Cleanouts shall conform to ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee. 1. Size: Same as connected drainage piping 2. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch, hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. 3. Closure: Countersunk, Countersunk or raised-head. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 00 00 - 11 4. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. 5. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. Cast-Iron Floor Cleanouts: Cleanouts shall conform to ASME A112.36.2M for adjustable housing, cast-iron soil pipe with cast-iron ferrule, heavy-duty, adjustable housing, threaded, adjustable housing cleanout. 1. Size: Same as connected branch. 2. Type: Adjustable housing Cast-iron soil pipe with cast-iron ferrule Heavy-duty, adjustable housing. 3. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron. 4. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket, Brass plug with tapered threads, Cast-iron plug. 5. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads, set-screws or other device. 6. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze, copper alloy. 7. Frame and Cover Shape: Round. 8. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty. 9. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts: Wall cleanouts shall conform to ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access. 1. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. 2. Body: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch, hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. 3. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head brass or cast-iron plug. 4. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. 5. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel cover plate with screw. 6. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 00 00 - 12 d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group. Floor Drains: Cast-Iron Floor Drains shall conform to the following, see schedules on drawings: 1. Top or Strainer Material: Bronze, Gray iron, nickel bronze. 2. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze, Polished bronze, Rough bronze 3. Top Shape: Round. 4. Top Loading Classification: 5. Trap Material: Cast iron. 6. Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap. 7. Trap Features: Cleanout, Trap-seal primer valve drain connection, Cleanout and trap- seal primer valve drain connection. 8. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group. Miscellaneous Sanitary Drainage Piping Specialties 1. Open Drains: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section; and where required, increaser fitting joined with ASTM C 564, rubber gaskets. The size shall be the same as connected waste piping with increaser fitting of size indicated. 2. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings: Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal primer valve connection. The size shall be the same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 side inlet. 3. Vent Caps: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Include vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe. The size shall be the same as connected stack vent or vent stack. 4. Air-Gap Fittings: Fittings shall conform to ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap between installed inlet and outlet piping. a. Body: Bronze or cast iron. b. Inlet: Opening in top of body. c. Outlet: Larger than inlet. d. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated indirect waste piping. Sand Oil interceptors: Construct sand oil interceptor per detail on drawings equipped with inlet, outlet and vent connections (type and sizes shown), with traffi c rated heavy duty gasketed non-skid covers. Prior to fabrication, Contractor shall obtain approval of the South Valley Sewer District regarding design and installation of interceptor. 1. Material: Concrete body. 2. Finish: Coat interior surfaces only. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 00 00 - 13 3. Type: Recessed, with grade leveling rings as needed. 4. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Oldcastle Precast b. Jensen Precast c. Monarch Products Co. POTABLE WATER PIPING AND ACCESSORIES Hard Copper Tube and Fittings: As specified in Section 40 00 03 – Mill Piping. Soft Copper Tube and Fittings: As specified in Section 40 00 03 – Mill Piping. Galvanized-Steel Pipe and Fittings: As specified in Section 40 00 03 – Mill Piping. Insulation: All hot and cold water piping, valves, fittings, and exposed horizontal sanitary, storm, and vent piping shall be provided with insulation in accordance with Section 40 05 05 – Exposed Piping Insulation. 1. Cover all valves, flanges, fittings and ends of insulation with a pre-molded high and low temperature PVC fitting cover or end cap, or similar preformed units. The pre- molded cover shall be sized to receive the same thickness of insulation as used in the adjacent piping and shall be in accordance with Section 40 05 05 – Exposed Piping Insulation. 2. Exposed supply and drain piping for lavatories shall be insulated under the wash basins to prevent burns and abrasions to handicapped persons. Removable insulated covers shall be Plumberex Specialty Products Handy-Shield type, or equal. MISCELLANEOUS PIPE FITTINGS Escutcheons: Manufactured ceiling, floor, and wall escutcheons and floor plates to be installed. Sleeves: Provide sleeves in situations where: 1. Where pipes pass through floors, sleeves shall extend 3 inches above the finished floor. Where pipes pass through walls, sleeves shall be flush with the wall surface. Sleeve Seals: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, used to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. Shock Absorbers: All cold and hot water piping in buildings connecting to self-closing faucets, quick-action valves, water closets, emergency showers, washers, and dishwashers shall be protected by shock absorbers located at each fixture or battery of fixtures. Shock absorbers shall be corrosion-resistant, permanently sealed, and shall be sized and installed to the manufacturer's printed recommendations. When absorbers are in concealed locations provide architectural access doors to facilitate inspection and maintenance. 1. Manufacturers, or Equal a. Josam "SHOKTROLS" b. Jay R. Smith "HYDROTROL" c. Zurn, Model Z-1022 BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 00 00 - 14 PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK Support plumbing pipe systems in accordance with Section 40 05 07 – Pipe Supports PLASTIC VALVES Install all plastic valves in accordance with Section 40 00 03 – Mill Piping, Exposed and Buried respective valve specifications: 1. Section 40 05 63 – Ball Valves 2. Section 40 05 65 - Valves for Pump Control and Pump Service 3. Section 40 05 62 - Plug Valves 4. Section 40 05 64 - Butterfly Valves METAL VALVES All water shut off valves shall be the gate type, except on fixture supply piping where globe valves shall be used. All interior hose valves shall be provided as indicated. The globe valve shown shall be as given herein before for valves. The hose nipple shown on the detail shall be a female iron pipe thread inlet with hose thread outlet. All hose bibbs shall be 3/4-inch in size, except as noted on the Construction Drawings. Gate, globe, check, plug, and angle valves shall be in accordance with the following: 1. Section 40 05 61 - Gate Valves 2. Section 40 05 63 – Ball Valves 3. Section 40 05 65 - Valves for Pump Control and Pump Service 4. Section 40 05 62 - Plug Valves 5. Section 40 05 51 – Valves, General 6. Section 40 05 64- Butterfly Valves The Contractor shall provide shutoff valves on cold water piping at entrances to pipe chases and other inaccessible areas and wherever indicated or required to obtain the maximum efficiency for shut-off control on the water system. Shut off valves shall be placed on all hot and cold water connections to equipment and fixtures. Lavatory and sink stops with wheel handle shall be brass with chrome plating. Extra long barrel stops shall be used where supply piping is concealed behind partitions. All valves shall open by turning counterclockwise and shall have suitable handwheels or nuts as required. Provide a temperature and pressure relief valve for each water heater. Provide pressure relief valves at other locations where indicated. Relief valves shall be equipped with manual test levers. The Contractor shall provide piping to convey relief valve discharge to the nearest floor drain, the building exterior, or as approved by the Engineer. ACCESS DOORS AND COVERS Access doors, where required in ceilings for access to valves, controls, and other equipment, shall be Karp Assoc., Maspeth, N.Y., Style DSC-210, Inryco-Milcor, Milwaukee, Wisconsin, Style BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 00 00 - 15 AT, or equal. Doors shall be of sufficient size to allow access but shall be not less than 12 inches by 12 inches. Ceilings with lay-in acoustical tile will not require access panels. Valves and equipment located above ceiling tile shall have a 3/4-inch diameter blue plastic button with a letter "V" set in tile. Floor access covers in unfinished concrete floors not exposed to chemicals shall be galvanized cast iron with a clear opening of not less than 8 inches by 8 inches, and shall be as manufactured by Alhambra Foundry Company, Model A-2015; Neenah Foundry Co., No.R- 6687, or equal. In traffic or chemical areas, access covers shall be as manufactured by Alhambra Foundry Company, Model A-1240; Neenah Foundry Co., Model R-1977, or equal, with clear opening of not less than 10 inches in diameter. PAINTING All ferrous metal, except finished, galvanized and stainless steel surfaces, shall have surfaces prepared and primed in the shop in accordance with the requirements of Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating. Prime colors shall be compatible with finish coats to be applied in the field. Self-contained units such as wall-mounted hose racks shall be supplied with factory applied finish coats of baked enamel. All field painting shall comply with Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating. PIPE Carbon Steel Pipe: Fully annealed, seamless C 1010 carbon steel hydraulic tubing with feroluk “Bite Type” compression fittings rated at 6,000 psi (minimum) working pressure manufactured by Parker Hannifan Corp. or Equal. Size (in) Working Pressure (psi) Wall Thickness 5/8 2550 0.058 3/4 2350 0.065 7/8 2200 0.072 1 2250 0.083 1-1/4 2350 0.109 1-1/2 2450 0.134 Steel Pipe - Hydraulic Fluid: Pipe shall be double pass welded, ASTM A-106 Grade B seamless (pickled, oiled and plugged) with socket weld forged steel fittings. Pipe shall be kept meticulously clean. Welding shall be done with low hydrogenrod 7018. System shall be installed with SAE 4 bolt flanges and SAE weld adaptors with absolute minimum of NPT connections.ADD 2 SPECIALTY VALVES: Ball Valves: For hydraulic system shall be threaded end ball valves, carbon steel body, carbon steel end cap or insert, carbon steel ball, carbon steel stem with special nylon seat, Teflon body and stem steel, nylon stem bearing 303 SST compression ring and stem pin, minimum BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 00 00 - 16 pressure rating 3,000 psi. Valves shall be Marpac Tripac C325 with socket weld or SAE O- ring ends. Approved alternate – Jamesbury Threaded HP2200GT. Drain Valves: Bronze ball vales, complying with MSS SP-110 and having outlet connection according to ASME B1.20.7 for garden-hose thread with cap. Add 2 EXECUTION WORKMANSHIP Care shall be taken at all times to protect floors, stairways, and walls during the make-up, erection of piping, and placing of equipment. The Contractor shall remove all stains and repair all damage before final acceptance of the work. If, during the construction of this project, the Engineer finds materials that have identifying marks removed or lack such marks completely, he may reject such items until the Contractor has furnished proof that said items conform to the Specifications. Adequacy and extent of such proof shall be determined by the Engineer. PREPARATION The Contractor shall coordinate roughing-in with provisions for wall-and floor sleeves, pipe inserts, cutting of roof and floor penetrations so that drain lines will have the required invert elevations and slopes. If factory-cleaned and -capped laboratory ai piping is not available or if precleaned piping must be recleaned because of exposure, perform the following procedures: 1. Clean laboratory air tubes and fittings, valves, gages, and other components of oil, grease, and other readily oxidizable materials as required for oxygen service according to CGA G-4.1, "Cleaning Equipment for Oxygen Service." 2. Wash laboratory air piping and components in hot, alkaline-cleaner-water solution of sodium carbonate or trisodium phosphate in proportion of 1 lb of chemical to 3 gal. of water. a. Scrub to ensure complete cleaning. b. Rinse with clean, hot water to remove cleaning solution. OPENINGS The Contractor shall provide all necessary openings in walls, floors, and roofs for the passage of piping and plumbing equipment within and into the buildings. All openings shall be as indicated on the Contract Drawings or as required to provide passage for the plumbing work. Sleeve Installation: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls. 1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes. 2. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves. 3. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 4. Install sleeves in new partitions, slabs, and walls as they are built. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 00 00 - 17 5. For interior wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 7. 6. For exterior wall penetrations above grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 7. 7. For exterior wall penetrations below grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using sleeve seals specified in this Section. 8. Seal space outside of sleeves in concrete slabs and walls with grout. 9. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation unless otherwise indicated. 10. Install sleeve materials according to the following applications: a. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs: Steel pipe Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs of Mechanical Equipment Areas or Other Wet Areas: Steel pipe or Stack sleeve fittings. 1) Extend sleeves 2 inches above finished floor level. 2) For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing, extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing. b. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Gypsum-Board Partitions: 1) Steel pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6. 2) Galvanized-steel sheet sleeves for pipes NPS 6 and larger. 3) Exception: Sleeves are not required for water supply tubes and waste pipes for individual plumbing fixtures if escutcheons will cover openings. c. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Roof Slabs: Steel pipe. d. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Exterior Concrete Walls: 1) Steel pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6. 2) Cast-iron wall pipe sleeves for pipes NPS 6 and larger. 3) Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation when sleeve seals are used. 11. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 7 for firestop materials and installations. Sleeve Seal Installation: Install sleeve seals in sleeves in exterior concrete walls at water - service piping entries into building. Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble sleeve seal components and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 00 00 - 18 Install piping indicated to be exposed and in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for removal of ceiling panel, and coordinate with other services occupying that space. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment. Install piping to permit valve servicing. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than system pressure ratings unless otherwise indicated. Install piping free of sags and bends. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. The Contractor shall provide all plumbing specialties in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. All pipe shall be arranged in a neat and orderly manner to occupy the minimum amount of space and so that the pipe will not obstruct passageways and movement of building occupants or interfere with normal operation and maintenance of any equipment. All pipe shall be carefully placed and properly sloped and shall be neatly and firmly supported by hangers or supports. All piping in buildings shall be as close to the ceilings or walls as possible unless indicated otherwise. Screwed joints shall be made with joint compound and be tight and leakproof. A sufficient number of brass to ferrous metal seat unions shall be placed in lines so that any pipe, valve or piece of equipment may be easily disconnected. All drainage and sanitary lines shall be properly run, trapped, and be vented to conform with Code requirements. All changes in direction shall be made with "Y" branch fittings and shall be of the same size as the pipe. Changes in pipe size shall be made with reducing fittings. Minimum depth of cover shall be 3 feet. Horizontal soil, vent, drain and waste pipes shall be given a slope of at least 1/4-inch per foot unless indicated otherwise. Floor drains and cleanouts shall be installed so the tops of the drains are flush with the finished floor. Vent piping passing through the roof shall be flashed. Flashing shall extend a minimum 12 inches from the outer surface of the pipe in all directions. Flashing shall be fabricated from 4- BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 00 00 - 19 pound lead sheet. If lead flashing is not allowed by local Plumbing codes, then EDPM rubber flashing shall be used. Floor drains or floor sinks shall be provided for all equipment drains. No equipment drains shall discharge to floor slabs. CHEMICAL WASTE PIPING SCHEDULE Above Floor Chemical-Waste Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each size range: 1. NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: PVC drainage piping and solvent-cemented joints. 2. NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: Use NPS 2 to NPS 4 fiberglass sewer piping and bonded joints. Under Slabs-on-Grade, Chemical-Waste Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each size range: 1. NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: PVC drainage piping and solvent-cemented joints. 2. NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: PVDF drainage piping and electrofusion joints. 3. NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: Use NPS 2 to NPS 4 iron piping with bell-and-spigot ends and calked joints. LABORATORY AIR PIPING SCHEDULE Use tube, fittings, and joining methods for laboratory air piping systems according to the following applications: 1. Specialty and Equipment Flanged Connections: Use cast-copper-alloy companion flange with gasket and brazed joint for connection to copper tube. 2. Laboratory Air Piping: Use copper tube, copper pressure fittings, and brazed joints. Joining of Dissimilar Metal Piping: Use dielectric fittings. 1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions. 2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges. 3. NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits. If specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply: 1. Shutoff Valves NPS 3 and Smaller: Copper-alloy ball valve. 2. Valves for Pump Control and Pump Service NPS 3 and Smaller: Bronze. 3. Zone Valves: With copper-tube extensions and gage. Install flexible pipe connector at each connection to laboratory air equipment. Purge laboratory air piping, using oil-free dry nitrogen, after installing piping but before connecting to gages. Equipment - Damage And Removal: The Contractor's operations shall be carried out in such a manner as to guard against damage to those portions of the structure and equipment which are to remain in the finished work. Any damage caused by the Contractor or Subcontractor through their operations, shall be repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and at no additional cost to the Owner. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 00 00 - 20 NATURAL GAS PIPING AND VALVE SCHEDULE AND INSTALLATION Natural Gas Service and Installation: The Contractor shall provide the natural gas system and valves as indicated. The Contractor shall pay any fees or charges levied by the Gas Company for installation or inspection. 1. All gas piping shall be installed in strict conformance with the requirements of the local or state regulations and the following. Joints for exposed piping shall be of the screwed type, with an adequate number of unions to facilitate removing of equipment and dismantling of piping for cleaning and inspection. Screw fittings shall be malleable cast iron and shall conform to ANSI. 2. Extend fuel gas piping and connect to fuel gas distribution for service entrance to building. Exterior fuel gas distribution system piping, service pressure regulator and service meter will be provided by gas utility. Joint Compounds: Joint compounds shall be resistant to the action of gas, be non-hardening, and be used sparingly on the male threads only. Locating Leaks: Test for leaks shall be made with approved leak detectors or by soap and water solution while the system is under pressure. Purging: After pressure testing, all new piping shall be fully purged with inert gas from the most distant point from the point of entry of the gas. Each major branch line shall be similarly purged from its far end. Purging shall be done only by personnel experienced in this particular operation. Pressure Regulating Valves: The pressure regulating valves shall be Fisher; Rockwell; or equal. Inlet pressure of 2.0 psig, outlet pressure setting of 7 to 11 inches WC and a capacity port diameter as required, and vented to the outside. Install dielectric fitting downstream from and adjacent to each service meter unless meter is supported from service-meter bar with integral dielectric fitting. Install shutoff valve downstream from and adjacent to dielectric fitting. Install strainer upstream from each earthquake valve. Flanges, unions, transition, and special fittings with pressure ratings same as or higher than system pressure rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. Natural Gas Piping, 2 psig or Less: 1. NPS 1/2 and Smaller: NPS 3/4 steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints. 2. NPS 3/4 and NPS 1: Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints. 3. NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2: Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded and steel welding fittings, and welded joints. 4. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints. Natural Gas Piping 2 to 5 psig: 1. NPS 4 and Smaller: Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded and steel welding fittings, and welded joints. 2. Larger Than NPS 4: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 00 00 - 21 Containment Conduits: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints. Valves: Valves shall be used in accordance with the service recommendation of the manufacturer. Valves shall conform to the requirements of ANSI B 31.8. Unless otherwise indicated, full opening non-lubricated plug valves shall be used in sizes larger than 2 inches, or for pressure greater than 0.5-psig. No unions or valves shall be installed on pipe lines that will be concealed in partitions, ceilings, etc. Every union or valve shall be readily accessible for inspection and repair. 1. Appliance Shutoff Valves for Pressure 0.5 psig or Less: Appliance connector valve or gas stop. 2. Appliance Shutoff Valves for Pressure 0.5 to 2 psig: Gas stop or gas valve. 3. Appliance Shutoff Valves for Pressure 2 to 5 psig: Gas valve. 4. Piping Line Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Gas valve. 5. Piping Line Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Plug valve or general-duty valve. 6. Valves at Service Meter, NPS 2 and Smaller: Gas valve. 7. Valves at Service Meter, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Plug valve. Concealed Locations: Except as specified below, install concealed gas piping in airtight conduit constructed of Schedule 40, seamless, black steel pipe with welded joints. Vent conduit to outside and terminate with screened vent cap. 1. Above-Ceiling Locations: Gas piping may be installed in accessible spaces, subject to approval of authorities having jurisdiction, whether or not such spaces are used as plenums. Do not locate valves above ceilings. 2. In Partitions: Do not install concealed piping in solid partitions. Protect tubing from physical damage when installed inside partitions or hollow walls. 3. Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls. 4. In Walls: Gas piping with welded joints and protective wrapping may be installed in masonry walls, subject to approval of authorities having jurisdiction. 5. Prohibited Locations: Do not install gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator shafts. a. Exception: Accessible above-ceiling space specified above. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect. Include outlets of service meters. Locate where readily accessible for cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate would be subject to freezing. 1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use minimum-length nipple of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long, and same size as connected pipe. Install with space between bottom of drip and floor for removal of plug or cap. 2. Install fuel gas piping at uniform grade of 0.1 percent slope upward toward risers. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 00 00 - 22 Install corrugated, stainless-steel tubing system according to manufacturer's written instructions. Include striker plates to protect tubing from puncture where tubing is restrained and cannot move. Install strainer on inlet of each line pressure regulator and automatic and electrically operated valve. Install flanges on valves, specialties, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger connections. Install vent piping for gas pressure regulators and gas trains, extend outside building, and vent to atmosphere. Terminate vents with turned-down, reducing-elbow fittings with corrosion-resistant insect screens in large end. Use materials suitable for natural gas. 1. Brazed Joints: Make with brazing alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F. Brazing alloys containing phosphorus are prohibited. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds and where damage to coating occurs during construction. PREPARATION Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural gas to premises or piping section. Inspect natural-gas piping according to the International Fuel Gas Code to determine that natural-gas utilization devices are turned off in piping section affected. Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code requirements for prevention of accidental ignition. OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping. Install underground, natural-gas piping buried at least 36 inches below finished grade. 1. If natural-gas piping is installed less than 36 inches below finished grade, install it in containment conduit. Install underground, PE, natural-gas piping according to ASTM D 2774. Steel Piping with Protective Coating: 1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints. 2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating manufacturer. 3. Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe. Copper Tubing with Protective Coating: 1. Apply joint cover kits over tubing to cover, seal, and protect joints. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 00 00 - 23 2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating manufacturer. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. Install pressure gage downstream from each service regulator. Pressure gages are specified in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping." OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE Underground natural-gas piping shall be the following: 1. PE pipe and fittings joined by heat fusion, or mechanical couplings; service-line risers with tracer wire terminated in an accessible location. 2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints, or mechanical couplings. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping. 3. Annealed-temper copper tube with wrought-copper fittings and brazed joints. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for copper tubing. Aboveground natural-gas piping shall be the following: 1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. 2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. 3. Annealed-temper copper tube with wrought-copper fittings and brazed joints. Branch Piping in Cast-in-Place Concrete to Single Appliance: Annealed-temper copper tube with wrought-copper fittings and brazed joints. Install piping embedded in concrete with no joints in concrete. Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping. SANITARY DRAIN AND VENT PIPING SCHEDULE AND INSTALLATION Special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure ratings may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated. Aboveground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be the following: 1. Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and compression joints. 2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings and sovent stack fittings; standard, heavy-duty shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and hubless-coupling joints. 3. Steel pipe, drainage fittings, and threaded joints. Aboveground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 5 and larger shall be the following: 1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and compression joints. 2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings and solvent stack fittings; standard, heavy- duty shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and hubless-coupling joints. 3. Steel pipe, drainage fittings, and threaded joints. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 00 00 - 24 Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be the following: 1. Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and compression joints. 2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, or heavy-duty shielded, stainless- steel couplings; and hubless-coupling joints. Underground, soil and waste Piping NPS 5 and larger shall be any of the following: 1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and compression joints. 2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, or heavy-duty shielded, stainless- steel couplings; and hubless-coupling joints. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long- turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger. 2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. 3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab is without membrane waterproofing. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 00 00 - 25 POTABLE WATER PIPING SCHEDULE AND INSTALLATION Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." Install ductile-iron piping under building slab with restrained joints according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and plumb. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's requirements. Install seismic restraints on piping. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance. Install piping to permit valve servicing. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. Install piping free of sags and bends. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 00 00 - 26 Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping from each plumbing pump and packaged booster pump. Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping. Joint Construction: 1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly. 3. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: a. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. b. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. 4. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" Chapter. 5. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." 6. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join copper tube and pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer. 7. Copper-Tubing, Push-on Joints: Clean end of tube. Measure insertion depth with manufacturer's depth gage. Join copper tube and push-on-joint fittings by inserting tube to measured depth. 8. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9. 9. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems. Valve Installation: 1. General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 15. 2. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping. Drain valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties." a. Hose-End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and branches. b. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: Instead of hose-end drain valves where indicated. 4. Install balancing valve in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side of each pump and circulator. Set balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow. Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller and butterfly valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for balancing valves. Transition Fitting Installation: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 00 00 - 27 1. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping. 2. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping: a. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling. b. NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling. 3. Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water Piping NPS 2 and Smaller: Plastic-to-metal transition fittings or unions. Dielectric Fitting Installation: 1. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing. 2. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings or nipples. Connections: 1. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. 2. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance. 3. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. 4. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following: a. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections. b. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Comply with requirements in Division 15 plumbing fixture Sections for connection sizes. c. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. Escutcheon Installation: Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Escutcheons for New Piping shall conform to the following: 1. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep pattern. 2. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast brass with polished chrome-plated finish or stamped steel with set screw or stamped steel with set screw or spring clips or stamped steel with spring clips. 3. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast brass with polished chrome-plated finish or One piece or split casting, cast brass with polished chrome-plated finish or Split casting, cast brass with polished chrome-plated finish or One piece, stamped steel with set screw or One piece or split plate, stamped steel with set screw. 4. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One piece, cast brass or stamped steel with set screw or stamped steel with spring clips. 5. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece floor plate. LABORATORY PROCESSED WATER PIPING Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping, and of same or compatible material, may be used in applications below. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 00 00 - 28 Deionized-Water Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each pipe size range: 1. NPS 3 and Smaller PP pipe and fittings and heat-fusion joints. 2. NPS 3 and Smaller: PP pipe and fittings and electro-fusion joints. 3. NPS 3 and Smaller: PVDF pipe and fittings and heat-fusion joints. Reverse-Osmosis-Water Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each pipe size range: 1. NPS 3 and Smaller: PP pipe and fittings and heat-fusion joints. 2. NPS 3 and Smaller: PP pipe and fittings and electro-fusion joints. 3. NPS 3 and Smaller: PVDF pipe and fittings and heat-fusion joints. Valve Schedule: 1. Shutoff Duty: Install ball valves in piping NPS 2 and smaller. Install butterfly or diaphragm valves for NPS 3 piping. 2. Throttling Duty: Install ball valves in piping NPS 2 and smaller. Install diaphragm valves for NPS 3 piping. FIELD TESTING Contractor shall make such tests as are required by the local ordinances and codes in the presence of a local governing authority inspector to show that all piping is tight, leak free and satisfactory, and shall also perform such tests as the Engineer may direct to ensure that all fixtures and equipment operate properly. The Contractor shall pay all costs in making such tests and the costs of making all changes or repairs until the Work is acceptable to the governing authorities. Chemical-Waste Piping Inspection: 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put drainage and vent piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction: a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping system before concealing after system roughing-in and before setting fixtures and equipment. b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. 3. Reinspections: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. 4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. Chemical-Waste Piping Testing: Test systems according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedure, according to the following: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of system tested. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 00 00 - 29 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 3. Rough Plumbing Test Procedure: Test piping at completion of piping roughing -in. Tightly close all openings in piping system, and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10 foot head of water. From 15 minutes before test starts through completion of test, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks. 4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures and equipment have been set and their traps filled with water, test connections and prove gastight and watertight. Plug stack openings on roof and building drain where it leaves building, and introduce air into system equal to pressure of 1 inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of fixture to measure pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect fixture connections for gas and water leaks. 5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. Sanitary Drain and Vent: During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. 2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. 3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. 4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. 5. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction. a. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. b. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. Potable Water Piping Tests: 1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water. 2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 00 00 - 30 5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required. 7. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 8. Prepare test and inspection reports. Natural Gas Piping: Before the gas piping is approved, a test for tightness shall be made and be witnessed by the Engineer. The system shall be subject to a test pressure of at least 1.5 times the proposed maximum operating pressure, but never less than 6 inches of mercury column or 30 psig for 24 hours with no leakage. The system shall hold pressure after disconnecting the pressure source for a period of at least 24 hrs without showing any drop in pressure after the test gas in the pipe has been given time to come to equilibrium at the ambient temperature. Longer runs of piping shall be tested for 48hrs. 1. Test Medium: For test purposes, air or an inert gas such as carbon dioxide or nitrogen shall be used as the pressurizing medium. Under no circumstances shall oxygen or natural gas be used to test for tightness or to locate leaks. Pressure Washer Piping Test: hydryostatic test pressure washer piping at 2,000 psi for two hours without loss of pressure. Add 2 DISINFECTION After potable water supply lines are tested, they shall be disinfected by introducing into the line HTH solution, liquid chlorine, or chlorine solution of sufficient strength. Then the line shall be filled with water and maintained under not less than 10 pounds per square inch pressure, for not less than 48 hours, during which period all valves on the lines shall be opened and closed several times, after which it shall be flushed clean, and then tested by the Owner. This procedure shall be repeated as often as necessary until the line is pronounced safe for use, by the Owner. No cross connection between the water mains and any pipe not yet disinfected will be permitted. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING AND HVAC INSULATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 07 00 - 1 SECTION 22 07 00 PLUMBING AND HVAC INSULATION PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Insulation Materials: a. Calcium silicate. b. Flexible elastomeric. c. Mineral fiber. 2. Insulating cements. 3. Adhesives. 4. Lagging adhesives. 5. Factory-applied jackets. 6. Field-applied jackets. 7. Tapes. 8. Securements. 9. Corner angles. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 22 and 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liners. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any). B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed. D. Field quality-control reports. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING AND HVAC INSULATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 07 00 - 2 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test- response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke- developed index of 150 or less. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Contract Documents. B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance. 1.7 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING AND HVAC INSULATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 07 00 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795. E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. F. Calcium Silicate: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Industrial Insulation Group (The); Thermo-12 Gold. b. Prior approved equal. 2. Preformed Pipe Sections: Flat-, curved-, and grooved-block sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a non-asbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533, Type I. 3. Flat-, curved-, and grooved-block sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a non-asbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533, Type I. 4. Prefabricated Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585 for dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges. G. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel. b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex. c. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180. d. Armaflex e. Prior approved equal. H. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type I. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING AND HVAC INSULATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 07 00 - 4 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap. b. Johns Manville; Microlite. c. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap. e. Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap. f. Prior approved equal. I. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200. b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok. c. Knauf Insulation; 1000 Pipe Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K. e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation. f. Prior approved equal. 2. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A. 2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; Triple I. b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; Super-Stik. c. Prior approved equal. 2.3 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated. B. Calcium Silicate Adhesive: Fibrous, sodium-silicate-based adhesive with a service temperature range of 50 to 800 deg F. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-97. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-27/81-93. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 290. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-30. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING AND HVAC INSULATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 07 00 - 5 e. Vimasco Corporation; 760. f. Prior approved equal. C. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal. b. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive. c. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75. d. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive. e. Prior approved equal. D. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25. f. Prior approved equal. E. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Chemical Company (The); 739, Dow Silicone. b. Johns-Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive. c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive. d. Red Devil, Inc.; Celulon Ultra Clear. e. Speedline Corporation; Speedline Vinyl Adhesive. f. Prior approved equal. 2.4 LAGGING ADHESIVES A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-52. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-42. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 130. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 11-30. e. Vimasco Corporation; 136. f. Prior approved equal. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING AND HVAC INSULATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 07 00 - 6 2. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over duct, equipment, and pipe insulation. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Color: White. 2.5 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 3. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4-mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.02 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film. 2) Prior approved equal. 4. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6-mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.01 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film. 2) Prior approved equal. 5. Vinyl Jacket: White vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96, Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. 2.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING AND HVAC INSULATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 07 00 - 7 B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Johns Manville; Zeston. b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series. c. Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke. d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe. e. Prior approved equal. 2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 3. Color: Color-code jackets based on system. Color as selected by Architect. 4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate. a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories. 5. Factory-fabricated tank heads and tank side panels. C. Metal Jacket: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Metal Jacketing Systems. b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Surefit. c. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate. d. Prior approved equal. 2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005, Temper H-14. a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing. b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. e. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers: 1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. 2) Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows. 3) Tee covers. 4) Flange and union covers. 5) End caps. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING AND HVAC INSULATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 07 00 - 8 6) Beveled collars. 7) Valve covers. 8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not available. 2.7 TAPES A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835. b. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ. d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ. e. Prior approved equal. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape. B. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive. Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0555. b. Compac Corp.; 130. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 370 White PVC tape. d. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS. e. Prior approved equal. 2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 6 mils. 4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 500 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width. C. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800. b. Compac Corp.; 120. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 488 AWF. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING AND HVAC INSULATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 07 00 - 9 d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW. e. Prior approved equal. 2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 3.7 mils. 4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 5 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width. 2.8 SECUREMENTS A. Bands: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Products; Bands. b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands. c. RPR Products, Inc.; Bands. d. Prior approved equal. 2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide. 3. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide. 4. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application. 2.9 CORNER ANGLES A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface. B. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005; Temper H-14. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING AND HVAC INSULATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 07 00 - 10 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties. B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING AND HVAC INSULATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 07 00 - 11 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c. a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings. M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts. 3.4 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING AND HVAC INSULATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 07 00 - 12 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches. 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches. 1. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers. F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not fire rated. For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches. 2. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 3. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems." 3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING AND HVAC INSULATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 07 00 - 13 B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: 1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. 3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. 4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. 5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. 6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. 7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour. 8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape. 9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels. C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING AND HVAC INSULATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 07 00 - 14 D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following: 1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation. 2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket. 3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body. 4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish. 5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket. 3.6 CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Boiler Breechings and Ducts: 1. Secure single-layer insulation with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch intervals and tighten bands without deforming insulation material. 2. Install 2-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches. Secure inner layer with wire spaced at 12-inch intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch intervals. 3. On exposed applications without metal jacket, finish insulation surface with a skim coat of mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement. When cement is dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of glass cloth. Overlap edges at least 1 inch. Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive over glass cloth. Thin finish coat to achieve smooth, uniform finish. B. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure single-layer insulation with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch intervals and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Install 2-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches. Secure inner layer with wire spaced at 12-inch intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch intervals. 3. Apply a skim coat of mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement to insulation surface. When cement is dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING AND HVAC INSULATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 07 00 - 15 glass cloth or tape. Overlap edges at least 1 inch. Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive over glass cloth or tape. Thin finish coat to achieve smooth, uniform finish. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of block insulation of same material and thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Finish flange insulation same as pipe insulation. D. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. When preformed insulation sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of calcium silicate insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. 3. Finish fittings insulation same as pipe insulation. E. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install mitered segments of calcium silicate insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 2. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3. Finish valve and specialty insulation same as pipe insulation. 3.7 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING AND HVAC INSULATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 07 00 - 16 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. 3.8 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING AND HVAC INSULATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 07 00 - 17 D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body. 3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. E. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18- foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z- shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING AND HVAC INSULATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 07 00 - 18 5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c. 6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c. 3.9 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION A. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule, General" Article. 2. Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field- applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each type of equipment define d in the "Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion adequate to determine compliance. 3. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article. B. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements. 3.11 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation: 1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING AND HVAC INSULATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 07 00 - 19 2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air. 3. Indoor, concealed return, Air. 4. Indoor, exposed return, Air. 5. Indoor, concealed, Type I, commercial, kitchen hood exhaust. 6. Indoor, concealed exhaust. 7. Indoor, exposed exhaust. B. Items Not Insulated: 1. Fibrous-glass ducts. 2. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. 3. Factory-insulated flexible ducts. 4. Factory-insulated plenums and casings. 5. Flexible connectors. 6. Vibration-control devices. 7. Factory-insulated access panels and doors. 3.12 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Concealed, round and flat-oval duct insulation shall be the following: 1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. B. Concealed, low pressure, round rectangular, and flat-oval exhaust-air duct insulation shall be the following: 1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. C. Rectangular, low pressure, supply-air duct insulation shall be lined per Section “Metal Ducts”. D. Rectangular, return-air duct insulation shall be lined per Section “Metal Ducts”. E. Concealed, Type I, Commercial, Kitchen Hood Exhaust Duct and Plenum Insulation: Fire- rated blanket or board; thickness as required to achieve 2-hour fire rating. F. Exposed or medium pressure, round and flat-oval, supply-air, and return air duct insulation shall be a perforated linear. See Section “Metal Ducts”. 3.13 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING AND HVAC INSULATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 07 00 - 20 1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Underground piping. 3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury. 4. Vertical roof drain piping. C. Piping System insulation: 1. Hydronic Piping - per chart. 2. Domestic Water Piping - per chart. 3. Horizontal Roof Drain Piping - 1/2”. 3.14 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Minimum Pipe Insulation Thickness from ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2010 Fluid Design Operating Temp. Range ( °F) Insulation Conductivity Nominal Conductivity Btuin./(hft2 °F) Mean Rating Temp. °F <1 1 to <1- 1/2 1-1/2 to <4 4 to <8 ≥8 Heating Systems (Steam, Steam Condensate, and Hot Water) >350 0.32-0.34 250 4.5 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 251-350 0.29-0.32 200 3.0 4.0 4.5 4.5 4.5 201-250 0.27-0.30 150 2.5 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 141-200 0.25-0.29 125 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 105-140 0.22-0.28 100 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 Domestic and Service Hot Water Systems 105+ 0.22-0.28 100 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 Cooling Systems (Chilled Water, Brine, and Refrigerant) 40-60 0.21-0.27 75 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 <40 0.20-0.26 50 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 3.15 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket. B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. C. Piping, Exposed: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING AND HVAC INSULATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 07 00 - 21 1. PVC: 20 mils thick. 3.16 OUTDOOR, FIELD APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket. B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. C. Exterior piping, Exposed: 1. Aluminum jacket. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUMBING AND HVAC INSULATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 07 00 - 22 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EYEWASH EQUIPMENT WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 45 16 - 1 SECTION 22 45 16 EYEWASH EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following emergency plumbing fixtures: 1. Eye/face wash equipment. 2. Combination units. 3. Water-tempering equipment 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Accessible Fixture: Emergency plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with disabilities. B. Cooled Water: Cooled potable water produced by water cooler. C. Plumbed Emergency Plumbing Fixture: Fixture with fixed, potable-water supply. D. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. E. Self-Contained Emergency Plumbing Fixture: Fixture with flushing-fluid-solution supply. F. Tepid: Approximately 85 deg F temperature. 1. Allowable Variation: Plus or minus 5 deg F. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ANSI Standard: Comply with ANSI Z358.1, "Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment.” B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities"; about plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities. 1.5 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Z358.1 Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment Z535.1 Safety Color Code B. NIOSH Schedule 13F. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EYEWASH EQUIPMENT WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 45 16 - 2 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Contractor Submittals. B. Product Data: C. Submit manufacturer’s product literature information for products specified. D. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions. E. Product Data: Include flow rates and capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories for each product indicated. F. Operation and Maintenance Data. G. Operating and Maintenance Information for Safety Detectors and Breathing Apparatus; 6 complete sets. H. Warranty. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Show evidence that the firm has been engaged in producing such materials and products for at least 5 years and that the product submitted has a satisfactory performance record of at least 5 years. B. Installer Qualifications; Installer shall have 3 years’ experience in installing these materials for similar projects and shall be approved by the manufacturer prior to bidding of the project. C. Regulatory Requirements: 1. As applicable, equipment of this Section shall comply with requirements of public agencies of the State of Utah including OSHA, Underwriters Laboratories, NFPA, and ASME. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver to the job site in manufacturer’s original containers. B. Delivery: After wet operations in building are completed. C. Storage and Protection: Store materials in original, unopened containers in compliance with manufacturer’s printed instructions. D. Keep materials dry until ready for use. Keep packages of material off the ground, under cover, and away from sweating walls and other damp surfaces. E. Protect finished surfaces from soiling and damage during handling and installation. Keep covered with a protective covering. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EYEWASH EQUIPMENT WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 45 16 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EYE/FACE WASH EQUIPMENT A. Eye/Face Wash Equipment: Plumbed, adjacent-to-sink, swivel, counter-mounting type. 1. Available Manufacturers. 2. Manufacturers. a. Bradley Corporation. b. Encon Safety Products. c. Guardian Equipment Co. d. Acorn Safety. e. Haws Corporation. f. Lab Safety Supply, Inc. g. Speakman Co. 3. Capacity: Deliver potable water at rate not less than 3.0 gpm for at least 15 minutes. 4. Supply Piping: NPS 1/2 chrome-plated brass or stainless steel with flow regulator and stay-open control valve. 5. Control-Valve Actuator: Paddle. 6. Omit receptor and drain. 2.2 COMBINATION UNITS A. Combination Units: Plumbed, accessible, freestanding type with emergency shower and eye/face wash equipment. 1. Available Manufacturers. a. Bradley Corporation. b. Encon Safety Products. c. Guardian Equipment Co. d. Acorn Safety. e. Haws Corporation. f. Lab Safety Supply, Inc. g. Speakman Co. 2. Piping: Stainless steel. a. Unit Supply: NPS 1-1/4 minimum from top. b. Unit Drain: Outlet at side near bottom. c. Shower Supply: NPS 1 with flow regulator and stay-open control valve. d. Eye/Face Wash Supply: NPS 1/2 with flow regulator and stay-open control valve. 3. Shower Capacity: Deliver potable water at rate not less than 20 gpm for at least 15 minutes. a. Control-Valve Actuator: Pull rod. b. Shower Head: 8 inch minimum diameter, stainless steel. 4. Eye/Face Wash Equipment: With capacity to deliver potable water at rate not less than 3.0 gpm for at least 15 minutes. a. Control-Valve Actuator: Paddle. b. Receptor: Stainless-steel bowl. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EYEWASH EQUIPMENT WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 22 45 16 - 4 2.3 WATER-TEMPERING EQUIPMENT A. Hot and Cold-Water-Tempering Equipment,: Factory-fabricated equipment including water thermostatic mixing valve designed to provide 85 deg F potable water at emergency plumbing fixtures, to maintain temperature at plus or minus 5 deg F throughout required 15- minute test period, and in case of unit failure to continue cold-water flow, with union connections, controls, corrosion-resistant metal piping, and enclosure. 1. Available Manufacturers. a. Bradley Corporation. b. Encon Safety Products. c. Guardian Equipment Co. d. Acorn Safety. e. Haws Corporation. f. Lab Safety Supply, Inc. g. Speakman Co. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations. B. Install fixed equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. C. Electrical connections and distribution shall be in accordance with Section 26 00 00 – Electrical General Provisions. 3.2 PROTECTION A. Repair or replace defective equipment with new. END OF SECTION DIVISION 23 HVAC THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 00 00 - 1 SECTION 23 00 00 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The subcontractor shall furnish and install all heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems and equipment complete with all supports, mounting frames, ventilators, ductwork, piping, louvers, panels, filters, grilles, electric drive units and controls, mechanical equipment, electrical Work, appurtenances, testing and balancing, ready for operation as shown and specified herein, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Titles of Sections and Paragraphs: Titles and subtitles accompanying specification sections and paragraphs are for convenience and reference only, and do not form a part of the Specifications. B. Applicable Publications: Whenever in these Specifications references are made to published specifications, codes, standards, or other requirements, it shall be understood that wherever no date is specified, only the latest specifications, standards, or requirements of the respective issuing agencies which have been published as of the date that the Contract is advertised for bids shall apply; except to the extent that said standards or requirements may be in conflict with applicable laws, ordinances, or governing codes. No requirements set forth in the Specifications or shown on the Drawings will be waived because of any provision of, or omission from, said standards or requirements. C. The subcontractor shall construct the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and the referenced portions of those referenced codes, standards, and specifications. D. References herein to "Building Code" or "Uniform Building Code" shall mean Uniform Building Code of the International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO). References to “Building Code” or “Standard Building Code” shall mean the Standard Building Code of the Southern Building Code Congress International. References to “Building Code” or “National Building Code” shall mean the National Building Code of Building Officials and Code Administrators International (BOCA) Similarly, references to "Mechanical Code" or "Uniform Mechanical Code," "Plumbing Code" or "Uniform Plumbing Code," "Fire Code" or "Uniform Fire Code," shall mean Uniform Mechanical Code, Uniform Plumbing Code and Uniform Fire Code of the International Conference of the Building Officials (ICBO). "Electric Code" or "National Electric Code (NEC)" shall mean the National Electric Code of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). The latest edition of the codes as approved by the Municipal Code and used by the local agency as of the date that the WORK is advertised for bids, as adopted by the agency having jurisdiction, shall apply to the WORK herein, including all addenda, modifications, amendments, or other lawful changes thereto. E. In case of conflict between codes, reference standards, drawings, and the other Contract Documents, the most stringent requirements shall govern. All conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the design/cm for clarification and directions prior to ordering or providing BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 00 00 - 2 any materials or furnishing labor. The subcontractor shall bid for the most stringent requirements. F. References herin to “OSHA Regulations for Construction: shall mean Title 29, Part 1926, Construction Safety and Health Regulations, Code of Federal Regulations (OSHA), including all changes and amendments thereto. G. References herein to "OSHA Standards" shall mean Title 29, Part 1910, Occupational Safety and Health Standards, Code of Federal Regulations (OSHA), including all changes and amendments thereto. H. Applicable Standard Specifications: References in the Contract Documents to "Standard Specifications" or SSPWC shall mean the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, 1997 Edition. I. The subcontractor shall be responsible that all Work included in the Contract Documents, regardless if shown or not, shall comply with all EPA, OSHA, RCRA, NFPA, and any other Federal, State, and Local Regulations governing the storage and conveyance of hazardous materials, including petroleum products. J. Where no specific regulations exist, chemical, hazardous, and petroleum product piping and storage in underground locations shall be installed with double containment piping and tanks, or in separate concrete trenches and vaults, or with an approved lining which cannot be penetrated by the chemicals, unless waived in writing by the design/cm. K. All Work and materials shall be in full accordance with the latest rules and regulations or publications of the State Energy Resources Conservation and Development Commission, the State Fire Marshall, the Industrial Safety Orders, the Health and Safety Rules (Air conditioning systems), the local Plumbing Code, the local Building Code, and all other local Standards. 1.3 SUBCONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall be submitted for all equipment, ductwork, controls, control panels, piping, and for all specified heat tracing in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures. B. Equipment Numbers: Equipment is identified by assigned numbers for reference and location purposes in the Contract Documents. The appropriate equipment numbers shall be indicated on the Shop Drawings and on other submittals by the subcontractor. C. Fan Curves: Certified fan curves for each fan are required. D. Acoustic Louver Certification: The manufactured shall submit certified data from a laboratory substantiating the specified performance of acoustic louvers. 1.4 WARRANTY A. The air conditioners, heaters, and all fans, ventilators, grilles, etc., furnished and installed by the subcontractor shall carry the manufacturer’s standard warranty, and all such warranties BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 00 00 - 3 shall be furnished to the design/cm upon final acceptance of the completed systems by the design/cm. All refrigerant compressors shall carry a 5-year warranty by the manufacturers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Quality: All mechanisms or parts shall be amply proportioned for the stresses which may occur during operation or for any other stresses which may occur during fabrication and erection. Individual parts furnished which are alike in all units shall be alike in workmanship, design, and materials and shall be of the manufacturer's top line, industrial-commercial grade. B. Supports: All equipment and appurtenances shall be firmly anchored or connected to supporting members. All supports required for the proper installation of the equipment, but not forming an integral part of the building structure, shall be provided by th e HVAC subcontractor, unless otherwise shown. Equipment shall be supported on restrained spring- type vibration isolators. C. Noise/Vibration Control: The system shall be free of any objectionable vibrations and noise. Flexible connections shall be provided in all ducts and piping connections to fans, compressors, and any other vibrating equipment. 2.2 MOTORS A. All motors supplied for equipment shall conform to the latest IEEE and NEMA requirements for mechanical and electrical characteristics including service factors. In addition, motors shall meet the requirements of Section 16460 – Electric Motors. Each motor shall bear the manufacturer’s nameplate with complete motor data. Each motor shall be of ample size and construction to carry continuously all loads which might be imposed by the piece of equipment it drives throughout the full range of operation of the equipment and the maximum motor loading shall in all cases be less than or equal to the nameplate horsepower rating, exclusive of the service factor. B. Performance Curves: In no case shall the required horsepower at any point on the HVAC equipment performance curve exceed the rated horsepower of the motor, or encroach on the service factor. Also verify that the motors provide sufficient torque to bring the equipment to operating speed in not more than 10 secs. 2.3 ELECTRICAL WORK A. The HVAC subcontractor shall furnish and install all controls, sensors and control panels relating to the HVAC systems including starters, thermostats, motorized dampers and louver operators and as indicated, and shall install all control wiring of 120 volts and less under this Section, but shall meet the requirements of Division 26 – Electrical. Local power disconnects, where required, shall be installed by the electrical subcontractor. B. The electrical subcontractor under Division 26 – Electrical, shall install all circuit breakers, all starters in Low-Voltage Controllers, all 120, 208 and 480 volt power feeders from starters BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 00 00 - 4 and circuit breakers to the HVAC equipment shown on the Contract Drawings. Equipment locations on the Electrical Drawings are shown for reference only and actual locations are shown on the HVAC Contract Drawings. C. All starters whether as an integral part of the equipment or as a separate part shall meet the specifications as given in Section 26 00 00 – Electrical General Provisions. Enclosures shall be of the same NEMA class as the electrical equipment in that area and all starters shall be of the same manufacturer as starters specified under Section 26 00 00 – Electrical General Provisions. D. All low voltage control wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electric Code. All control wiring for line voltage 120 volts and higher shall conform to Section 26 05 83 – Wiring Connections. E. Details of individual control panels shall be similar to those shown on Electrical Drawings. F. Subcontractor to note that all conduit in this Section shall conform to that specified in Sections 26 05 34 – Conduits. 2.4 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM A. The subcontractor shall design, furnish and install a complete, electrically supervised, non - coded, 24-volt DC, 2-wire automatic, fire alarm system as described herein. Operation shall be such that actuation of any automatic smoke detector shall cause building alarm devices to sound, and designated HVAC equipment to shut down. The smoke detector shall be of the type that is either automatic resetting or is reset from a remote control panel. The unit shall include one set (minimum) of dry contacts, rated at 120 Volts, 2 Amp. (minimum). B. Fire alarm and detection systems shall be manufactured by ADT, Pyrotronics, Simplex, or equal, and all devices and equipment shall be UL listed. 2.5 FLASHING A. All equipment that passes through roofs of buildings or structures will be provided with proper flashing in accordance with the specifications and as indicated on the Contract Drawings. The flashing shall comply with Section 07 62 00 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 2.6 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. All piping and fitting material used in the fulfillment of this Contract shall be new and the best of its respective class. B. The extent of all piping Work is shown on the Contract Drawings. All heating piping shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe with screwed fittings. All refrigerant piping shall be type L hard temper copper with cast brass fittings. Provide a drain at all low points in piping system. C. All copper and steel pipe and fittings shall meet the specifications. All joints in refrigerant piping shall be made with silver solder. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 00 00 - 5 2.7 VALVES A. Furnish and install valves at all locations shown on the Contract Drawings or specified and in at least the following locations: 1. A gate valve in each hot water heating coil supply and return connection. 2. A balancing valve may replace the gate valve on hot water piping as hereinafter specified. B. All gate valves shall be good for one hundred twenty-five pounds working pressure, and in every respect suitable for the purpose intended. All shall be brass with screwed ends and be wheel operated. Gate valves shall be Powell Co. No. 500; Jenkins 47U; or equal. C. All check valves shall be all brass or bronze with regrinding discs. Check valves shall be Crane No. 36; Jenkins 762A; or equal. D. Provide on water heating equipment a combination balancing and shut-off valve. The valve shall be a 100 percent shut-off unit with a maximum valve pressure of 125 psig at a temperature of 250 degrees F. Units shall be such that after closing for shut -off, they can be reopened to balance position with no further adjustment. Valves shall be Illinois, Series 61 up to one inch size and Series 81 on larger sizes; ITT Bell and Gossett, Circuit Setter Series CB; or equal. E. Solenoid valves shall have brass body, with stainless steel trim. Valves shall be provided with a mechanical operator for manually actuating the valve in case of power loss, and NEMA Type IV solenoid enclosure for 120 volt, 60 Hz current. Normally closed valves shall be provided with a manual lock-open feature and normally opened valves shall be provided with a manual lock-open feature and normally opened valves shall be provided with a manual lock-closed feature, and high temperature coils. Valves shall be Automatic Switch Company No. 8210- MO Series; Skinner Electric Valve Co. Model V5-1 or V5-2; or equal. F. Three way mixing valves shall be Honeywell No. V5013F; or equal. The operator for either proportional or 2-position control of the hot water shall be appropriate for the application and of proper size and power for smooth operation of the valve. The unit shall be complete with all necessary linkages, parts, etc. G. Installation: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following requirements. 1. All valves be set carefully regarding their location with respect to equipment controlled and accessibility. Consideration should be given to location of valves with respect to the proper drainage of the piping system. 2. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including valves in branch lines necessary to isolate sections of piping. Locate valves so as to be accessible and so that separate support can be provided when necessary. 3. Install valves with stems pointed up, in the vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward. 4. Where insulation is indicated, install extended-stem valves, arranged in the proper manner to receive insulation. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 00 00 - 6 2.8 INSULATION (PIPING/DUCTWORK) A. All heating piping, refrigerant piping, supply, and outside air ductwork shall be insulated under Section 40 05 05 in accordance with the specifications and as shown on Contract Drawings. B. The insulation shall comply with Section 40 05 05 Exposed Piping Installation of these Specifications. 2.9 WELDING A. All welding of black steel or alloy pipe shall be carried out in strict accordance with A.W.S. procedures and all local City, Municipality, and State codes and ordinance pertaining to welded steel pipe lines. Welding shall be accomplished by means of the shielded electric arc process and by workers who are certified for this Work. 2.10 EXPANSION JOINTS AND LOOPS A. Provide expansion loops or expansion joints at locations shown on the Contract Drawings and as necessary to provide for the expansion of piping. Maximum straight run of pipe without an expansion joint or loop installed shall not exceed 75 feet. Provide an expansion joint or loop at every building construction joint. B. The pipe expansion joints on metal piping three inches and smaller shall be two-ply stainless steel bellows type with 1½ inches compression stroke, ½ inch extension and total stroke of 2 inches suitable for maximum operating temperature of 750 degree F and maximum working pressure of 175 psi. The compensator shall have male pipe thread ends for steel pipe or female sweat ends for copper pipe. Pipe expansion joints shall be as manufactured by Flexonics, Model H for steel piping and Model HB for cooper piping; Keflex Series 7Q; Adsco Compensators; or equal. 2.11 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS (SEE ALSO SECTION 40 05 07) A. The subcontractor shall provide all necessary hangers, supports, concrete inserts, anchors and guides for material and equipment to be installed in this Contract. B. No perforated strap hangers and no wire supports will be permitted. C. Hangers supporting insulated pipe shall be sized to fit the pipe plus the insulation. The insulation at support points shall be provided with metal shield to prevent damage to insulation. D. Anchors and guides shall be built of steel, in accordance, with approved detail drawings and as indicated on the Contract Drawings. E. Pipe hangers used to support uninuslated copper piping shall be copper plated. F. Anchorage shall be obtained by welding lugs onto the pipe and providing abutting surfaces against the lugs to restrict longitudinal movement. All anchors shall be so designed that the BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 00 00 - 7 pipe may be removed by removing bolts and no welding of pipe to the anchor will be permitted. All bolting materials shall be cadmium plated. G. Guides shall be located not more than twenty feet away from each expansion loop or joint. H. Horizontal runs of pipe shall have supports spaced so that the sag of the unsupported length will not create any pockets in the piping (weight of fluid included). Steel Pipe up thru 1¼” not more than 8’0” Pipe 1½ “thru 2½” not more than 10’0” Pipe 3” thru 3½” not more than 12’0” Pipe 4” thru 6” not more than 14’0” Pipe 8” and larger not more than 16’0” Copper Pipe to 1¼” not more than 6’0” Pipe 1½ “thru 2½” not more than 8’0” Pipe 3” thru 3½” not more than 10’0” Pipe 4” and larger not more than 12’0” I. All vertical piping shall be supported at the base with fittings made for this purpose or supported from the nearest horizontal member or floor with a riser extension pipe clamp. Provide riser extension clamp at each floor. J. Hangers for ductwork and equipment shall be in accordance with the details shown on the Contract Drawings and also in accordance with the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA). K. All inserts shall be galvanized. L. Seismic Resistance: When earthquake loads are applicable in accordance with the building code, mechanical system supports shall be designed by the subcontractor and installed for the seismic forces in accordance with the building code. 2.12 PIPE SLEEVES A. The subcontractor shall examine the Contract Drawings carefully for all sleeves that are to be built into the construction and plan his Work accordingly, so that sleeves are placed well in advance of construction Work, and care taken with their location and support until encased. B. Sleeves shall be standard weight galvanized steel pipe for dry interior installation. Sleeves for exterior or wet installation shall be standard weight ductile black steel, stainless steel, or standard weight PVC for pipe temperatures below 120 degrees F. C. All sleeves shall be sized one pipe size larger than uninsulated piping and one pipe size larger than piping plus insulation on insulated pipe. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 00 00 - 8 D. Where pipes pass through floors, sleeves shall extend three inches above finished floor. Where pipes pass through walls, sleeves shall be flush with wall. 2.13 DUCTWORK A. The subcontractor shall furnish and install ductwork as shown on the HVAC Contract Drawings. B. Construction: Sheet metal ducts and plenums shall be constructed with airtight joints and seams in accordance with ASHRAE standards and SMACNA Duct Construction Manual. Joints on concealed ducts shall be taped with pressureless tape and adhesive, except for welded or soldered joints. Ductwork materials shall be galvanized steel or aluminum, unless otherwise indicated. Minimum duct gauges are as follows: Maximum Dimension of Duct (inches) Galvanized Steel U.S. Standard Gauge Aluminum B and S Gauge 12 and less 20 18 13 through 30 18 16 31 through 54 16 14 55 through 84 14 12 C. All low pressure ductwork shall be designed for 3 inches vacuum and pressure. Aluminum gauge designations refer to Brown and Sharpe Standards and ductwork sheets, unless otherwise specified, shall be of Aluminum Association Alloy 3003-H14. D. Ductwork shall be air tight and well braced. It shall be carefully supported in horizontal runs with rod and angle supports at no greater than 8 feet intervals. Ductwork shall be run as close as possible to the layouts as shown on the Drawings. Vertical aluminum ductwork shall be adequately guided and shall be firmly supported by standard framing angles of Aluminum Alloy 6061-T6. E. All seams shall be double locked. Rectangular ducts with longer than a 12 inch dimension shall have full perimeter standing seams not less than 1 inch high. Reinforcements shall be at intervals of not greater than 30 inches along the duct. No “S” seams will be permitted. F. Except where permitted by the MWHC, fan discharge connections and ductwork reductions shall have duct side slopes not to exceed 15 degrees, or 30 degrees concentric. G. Radius of bends in low velocity ducts shall be not less than 1½ duct diameters, to outside radius unless otherwise shown. All mitered elbows, tees, either square, rectangular, or round, and extractors on all air ductwork, shall have turning vanes as shown on the Contract Drawings. H. Care shall be taken to properly insulate aluminum duct and supports from concrete or dissimilar metals by an applied bituminous coating or by rubber gaskets at all contact points. I. Access Doors: Access doors shall be provided in the ductwork at all fire dampers, motorized and back draft dampers, filters and as shown on the drawings. They shall be continuously hinged, double skinned, of either 22 gage galvanized steel or 20 gage aluminum to match the BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 00 00 - 9 ductwork material, with one cam lock for sizes up to 16 inches square or two cam locks for sizes over 16 inches square, must match insulation thickness in door with ductwork insulation and have foam sealing gaskets on all four sides. Access doors shall be Ruskin SMACNA Standard Duct Access Doors; or equal. J. Flexible duct may be used to attach air outlets to duct banks when outlets are fitted in a finished ceiling. Flexible duct shall be insulated. Maximum length of flexible duct shall not exceed 10 feet. Materials joining and supporting of flexible duct shall be in accordance with the latest edition of SMACNA. K. Flexible Connections: Equipment shall be attached to ducts through approved flexible connections to facilitate removal of the units and for sound isolation. Flexible connections consisting of heavy duct canvas or woven glass fabric silicon coated shall be provided. Canvas connections shall be a heavy cotton impregnated for waterproofing and fire retardant. Glass fabric shall be used where temperatures exceed 200 degrees F. Weight of Canvas shall be 20 ounces Per sq. yd. Weight of glass fabric shall be approximately 12 ounces. per sq. yd. 2.14 FLUES A. Furnish and install breechings and stacks, supports, and other accessories as required for gas fired heaters and appliances as shown on the Contract Drawings. B. Flues shall be made from 12 gauge steel. Flues shall be painted with one coat of a high temperature rust inhibitive primer. Flues shalll not be supported by the unit. Comply with SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ ’National Association) recommendations for fabrication, construction, details and installation procedures, except as otherwise indicated. C. Manufactured, pre-fabricated flues and stacks shall be UL listed, used at temperatures not to exceed 1000 degrees F under continuous operating conditions, be designed to be gas tight to prevent leakage of combustion products into the building, and be designed to compensate for the flue gas induced thermal expansions. The double wall flue shall have an inner gas carrying pipe of Type 304 stainless steel, a nominal 1 inch air space between the walls, and an outer jacket of aluminum coated steel or Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel for additional corrosion protection in hostile environments. The flue duct shall be Selkirk Metalbestos Model PS; or equal. D. Assemble and install flues in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve air tight systems. Install with a minimum of joints. Align accurately at connections, and keep internal surfaces smooth. Support flues rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers, and anchors of the type which will hold work true-to-shape and prevent buckling. E. Locate runs as indicated by diagrams, details and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run in the shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing the building and its equipment. Pitch flues upward from equipment to stack. 2.15 MOTORIZED DAMPERS A. Subcontractor shall furnish and install the motorized opposed blade dampers as shown on the Contract Drawings. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 00 00 - 10 B. The damper and frames shall be of minimum aluminum B & S 12 gauge. Aluminum blades shall have interlocking edges with one center and two edge crimps, and brass bearings. The frame shall be welded channel construction with lugs and mounting brackets for damper operators. Dampers shall have felt or rubber seals at edges to minimize air infiltration, when closed. C. Damper motors shall be electric with necessary linkages for positioning the damper blades. Damper sizes and capacities shall be as called for on the Contract Drawings. The motors shall be powered open and spring closed except as noted. 2.16 BACKDRAFT OR GRAVITY DAMPERS A. Furnish and install gravity (Backdraft) dampers on the exhaust fans and ventilators where called for on the Contract Drawings. Dampers shall be multi-blade, with soft seating gaskets for minimizing noise and air leakage when closed. The blades shall be c onstructed of 16 gauge aluminum, and be of air foil design. Frames shall be 16 gauge extruded aluminum alloy. The frames shall be totally out of the air stream, and the frame type shall be determined by the MWHC or ARCHITECT. B. Dampers shall be Air Balance, Inc.; Air Dynamic; or Ruskin Model [BD2A1] [BD2A2], and shall be designed to operate at 0.05 inch w.g. S.P. or less. Blades shall be individually counter balanced and shall have non-ferrous pins turning in nylon bearings. Damper sizes and capacities shall be as called for on the Contract Drawings. 2.17 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS (MANUAL AND MOTORIZED) A. Furnish and install volume control dampers in accessible locations in branch supply ducts and at each exhaust air opening to properly regulate the volume of air delivered or withdrawn from each inlet and outlet and as indicated on the Drawings. B. The volume dampers shall be of the opposed blade type and be constructed of aluminum B & S fourteen gauge, suitably reinforced with sturdy control shafts. Ductwork shall be reinforced to double thickness at damper shaft openings. C. The volume control dampers of the air extractor type as indicated on the Drawings shall be constructed of stainless steel, 20 gauge for frames and 24 gauge for blades. D. No splitter dampers will be allowed. All manual control dampers shall have provisions for adjustment and locking in position after being set. E. Damper motors shall be electric with either modulating or two positioning control and necessary linkages. Damper sizes and capacities shall be as called for on the Contract Drawings. The motors shall be powered open and spring close except as noted. 2.18 FIRE DAMPERS A. Furnish and install fire dampers in ductwork at all floor penetrations and all fire rated wall penetrations where shown or not on the Contract Drawings. Fire dampers to be of the fusible link type and have Underwriter’s approval. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 00 00 - 11 B. Fire dampers shall be 1½ hour Ruskin FD35; or equal. The units shall be arranged for horizontal or vertical mounting, and be provided with a 165 degree F fusible link. C. Furnish and install an end switch on fire dampers to signal fire alarm and de-energize fan motors in the event of a fire. D. Fire dampers shall be in accord with the codes of the State of California and the provisions of the NFPA Bulletin 90A. 2.19 REGISTERS, GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS A. Furnish and install all supply and return registers and grilles and all supply diffusers as shown on the Contract Drawings. The sizes, capacities, and deflection of each unit shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings. B. General: The following schedule shall be followed for all units: 1. Supply Diffusers (SD): Titus Model TCD FR23 with optional dampers; Metalair; or equal. 2. Return Grilles (RG): Titus Model 50-F; Tuttle and Bailey; or equal; with ½” x ½” x ½” aluminum grid and no dampers. 3. Return Registers (RR): Titus Model 350FL; Tuttle and Bailey; or equal; 4. Supply Registers (SR): Titus Model 272FL; Tuttle and Bailey; or equal; with opposed blade dampers. 5. Supply High volume supply registers (DP): Kruger Drum Punkah; or equal. C. All registers, grilles and diffusers are to be constructed of aluminum. Finish to be a white baked-on enamel. Accessory equipment shall be aluminum, or if not available, steel with a white baked-on enamel. The proper border style shall be selected by the Contractor to suit the installation conditions. D. All registers, grilles and diffusers located in corrosive atmospheres as indicated on the Drawings shall be painted with a special protective coating. See Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating. 2.20 FLAT AIR FILTERS A. General: The flat air filters used in the air handling units, packaged air conditioning units, and supply air units shall be 2 inch thick throw-away type supplied as an integral part of each unit. B. Provide three complete spare filter changes for all flat filters in all units, plus provide one new filter set in each unit at time of turning units over to the MWHC. Filters used in the units during construction are not included in the above, these filters are additional ones that shall also be furnished by the subcontractor. C. The flat air filters shall be 2 inch thick pleated media throw-away type made of fiber media and rated at 300 fpm face velocity, 0.04 inch wg initial resistance and a 0.70 inch wg recommended final resistance. The filters shall be by Airguard Industries; Farr Co.; Snyder General Corp.; or equal. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 00 00 - 12 2.21 AIR FILTER GAUGES A. Furnish and install on each [filter section, each air handling unit and packaged air conditioning unit] an air filter gauge. The air filter gauge shall be inclined tube manometer type. The gauge shall be complete with enameled scale with screw type zero adjustment, rust-resistant steel frame, with 3/16 inch plate glass removable cover, oil, screened inlet and outlet nozzles, level glass, oil chamber, and all necessary connecting piping and accessories. Each gauge shall be 10 inches long with a total scale reading of 1.0 inch water and 0.1 inch scale graduations. Accuracy shall be within 0.02 lineal inch at any point on the scale. Gauges shall be mounted level and provided with all necessary pressure sensing tubing. Gauges shall not be mounted on fan housing or casings containing rotating or reciprocating machinery. B. Air filter gauges shall be by F.W. Dwyer Company; Honeywell, Inc.; or equal. 2.22 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Vibration control isolation shall be provided for all rotating equipment, except electric motors. Where rotating units are part of factory assembled package units, such as a package air handling unit, the isolator shall be provided under the unit casing. B. All suspended equipment shall be supported by combination spring and fiberglass isolation hangers, incorporating minimum two inch thick neoprene jacketed fiberglass inserts in series with springs, all encased in steel brackets. C. All floor mounted or platform mounted built-up or package air handling units shall be mounted on structural steel or concrete bases with isolator springs and brackets. D. All springs used in the vibration isolators shall have approximately one inch deflection under load and shall have a minimum additional travel of 50 percent between the design height and the solid height. All isolation equipment shall be provided and installed in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. E. For vibration isolation between HVAC equipment and supports and where indicated on the Contract Drawings, 3/4 inch thick rubber pads shall be used for full contact between equipment and support. The pads shall be as manufactured by Mason Industries, Super W Pads; or equal. 2.23 ROOF CURBS AND ROOF EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Roof curb for all roof openings, for roof mounted exhaust fans and air intakes and exhausts unless otherwise shown or indicated on the Contract Drawings, are to be of the "raised cant" type with minimum 14 inch height above the roof line. Curbs shall be pitched at the base for roof pitch in excess of 3/8 inch per foot. A raised cant shall be a minimum of 4 inches unless otherwise specified. Curbs shall be of box design, constructed from 20 gauge galvanized steel with continuous welded seams, full mitered angle seam corners, and factory installed wood nailers, and shall be insulated with a minimum of 1½ inch 3 lbs./cu.ft. density rigid board fiberglass. B. Roof curbs shall have a 18 gauge stainless steel liner set in mastic, extended the full height of curb, if the duct does not extend to the top of the curb. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 00 00 - 13 C. Roof equipment supports shall be provided for roof mounted equipment. The supports shall be constructed of 18 gauge galvanized steel with continuous welded seams, an integral base plate, wood nailer with 1 inch overhang to accommodate insulation, counter flashing with lag screws. D. The supports shall have a raised cant of not less than 4 inches and shall be a minimum of 15 inches high. The length and width of the units shall conform to the support requirements of the equipment being supported. E. The roof curbs shall be Pate Model PC-5; Thycurb; supplied by the manufacturer of the fan, air handler, air conditioner, etc.; or equal, and the roof equipment supports shall be Pate Model ES-5B; Thycurb; or equal. 2.24 TEMPERATURE AND EQUIPMENT CONTROL (SEE SECTION 23 05 93) 2.25 HEATING CABLE A. All electric heat trace cable called for shall be Chromalox Type SRL-3-1; or equal. Cable shall be self-regulating with 150 degrees F maintenance temperature, 120 volt, 3 watts per ft. output and twin 16 AWG copper buss wires within insulated jacket. B. After the pipe is heat traced, it shall be insulated and exterior jacketing applied in accordance with Section 40 05 05 – Exposed Piping Installation. 2.26 PAINTING A. Painting of the equipment and materials shall comply with Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating. B. The subcontractor shall include the painting of factory paint surfaces that are rusted and/or scratched. These finishes shall be cleaned to bright metal, primed with a corrosion inhibitor and finished with a paint and/or enamel to match original finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Openings - New Construction: The subcontractor shall provide all necessary openings in walls, floors and roofs for the passage of heating and ventilating equipment in the buildings. All openings shall be as indicated on the Contract Drawings, or as required to provide passage for heating and ventilating Work. 1. No extra compensation shall be given for defective or ill-timed Work. 2. The subcontractor shall provide all hanger and support inserts into masonry or structural steel as required for proper completion of the Work. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF PIPING A. Drain Piping: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 00 00 - 14 1. Install valve-drain piping where valves are equipped with drain connection, fabrication from type L copper tube and solder-joint drainage fittings. 2. Install piping system and equipment drains fabricated from copper tube with solder- joint fittings, or from black steel piping with fittings as indicated. 3. Install drain piping at the low points of supply and return piping, at abrupt changes in vertical offsets in horizontal runs, and in piping at mechanical equipment including pumps. 4. Extend drain piping to nearest drain. B. Bypass Piping: 1. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate and install bypass piping using the same materials and in the same plane as connected piping, but one pipe size smaller, or as noted. Include valve in bypass piping. 3.3 BALANCING AND TESTING (SEE SECTION 23 05 93) END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 05 93 - 1 SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for all air and water systems. 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 2 copies of evidence that TAB firm and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 2 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3. C. Sample Report Forms: Submit two sets of sample TAB report forms. D. LEED Submittal: 1. Air-Balance Report for LEED Prerequisite EQ 1: Documentation of work performed for ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 7.2.2, "Air Balancing." 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by either AABC or NEBB. B. The Test and Balance Contractor shall be an independent consultant. The firm shall be independent of all Contractors including the Mechanical and Temperature Controls Contractor. C. TAB Conference: Meet with Owner's and Engineer's representatives to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the participation of TAB team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized service representatives, HVAC controls installers, and other support personnel. Provide seven days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location. 1. Agenda Items: Include at least the following: a. Submittal distribution requirements. b. The Contract Documents examination report. c. TAB plan. d. Work schedule and Project-site access requirements. e. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors. f. Coordination of documentation and communication flow. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 05 93 - 2 D. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the following: 1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports. 2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification. E. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems." Or from SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing." F. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently if required by instrument manufacturer. 1. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the name of party performing instrument calibration. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support and assist TAB activities. B. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. 1. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow- control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation. B. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed. C. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 05 93 - 3 D. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing. E. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. F. Examine plenum ceilings used for supply air to verify that they are airtight. Verify that pipe penetrations and other holes are sealed. G. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations. H. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows. I. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins. J. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping. K. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls. L. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Complete system readiness checks and submit a system readiness report to the Project Engineer. Verify the following: 1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete. 2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. 3. Hydronic systems specified to contain antifreeze have the correct percentage. 4. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. 5. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 6. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 7. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. 8. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided. 9. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met. 3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" or SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and this Section. B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 05 93 - 4 balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project. C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan- speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings. 3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. B. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements. C. Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers. D. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. E. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. F. Check for airflow blockages. G. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. H. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components. I. Check for proper sealing of air duct system. 3.5 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent. B. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above: 1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow. 2. Check expansion tank liquid level and system pressurization. 3. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at indicated flow. 4. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal valves are kept open. 5. For hydronic systems containing antifreeze, note the product used and measure the actual concentration. Record final results on the TAB report. 6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 05 93 - 5 7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded. 8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated. 3.6 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent. 3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent. 4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 5 percent. 3.7 FINAL REPORT A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in three-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems. B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed by the testing and balancing engineer. 1. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in the final report, as applicable: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of TAB firm. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's/Engineer’s name and address. 6. Contractor's name and address. 7. Report date. 8. Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report. 9. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. 10. Summary of contents including the following: a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. 11. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from indicated values. 12. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following: a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 05 93 - 6 h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. 3.8 ADDITIONAL TESTS A. Duct Leakage Testing: Provide Duct leakage testing specified in Sections 23 31 13 – Metal Ducts and Section 23 31 16 - Non-Metal Ducts. B. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions. C. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional testing, inspecting, and adjusting during near-peak summer and winter conditions. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT FANS, BLOWERS AND VENTILATORS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 24 00 - 1 SECTION 23 24 00 FANS, BLOWERS AND VENTILATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The subcontractor shall provide the fans, blowers, ventilators, and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Single Manufacturer: Where two or more fans, blowers, ventilators or appurtenances of the same type or size are required, they shall be furnished by the same Manufacturer. 1.2 SUBCONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. General: Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Contractor Submittals. B. The submittals shall include operation, maintenance, and inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and service depot location and telephone number. C. Certified fan curves for each fan shall be submitted. 1.3 WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS A. All work shall be in strict accordance with the State Mechanical Code, the State of Utah, and any other authorities having jurisdiction. The subcontractor shall have the required certification and be thoroughly familiar with the local codes. The subcontractor shall obtain and pay for all necessary permits. B. Workmanship shall be first-class in every respect and all work shall be performed by workers who are thoroughly experienced in this line of work. The subcontractor's attention is called to the fact that neat and workmanlike appearance in the finished installation shall be required. Care shall be taken at all times to protect floors, stairways, and walls during the make-up, erection of piping and placing of equipment. The subcontractor shall remove all stains and repair all damage before final acceptance of the work. C. Performance Curves: In no case shall the required horsepower at any point on the fan performance curve exceed the rated horsepower of the motor, or encroach on the service factor. D. All materials used in connection with the fans blowers, and ventilators shall be new, free from flaws and defects all fully equal to the quality specified, and where not specifically indicated shall be the best of their respective kinds, and shall conform to the applicable specifications and standards. E. If during the construction of this project the design/cm finds materials that have identifying marks removed, or lacking such marks completely, he may reject such items until the subcontractor has shown proof that said items conform to the letter and intent of the BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT FANS, BLOWERS AND VENTILATORS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 24 00 - 2 Specifications and the Contract Drawings. The adequacy and extent of such proof shall be determined by the design/cm. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 UPBLAST ROOF EXHAUSTERS A. Furnish and install upblast centrifugal belt driven or direct driven, all aluminum roof exhausters as shown on the Contract Drawings. B. The roof mounted centrifugal exhaust fans shall be a aluminum construction which shall include hood, fan hub and blades, base and bird screen. Centrifugal ventilators shall be constructed of extruded aluminum heliarc welded and have a cast aluminum power assembly. The units shall have V-belt drives, vibration eliminators, and motor as called for in these Specifications. The fan motors shall be provided with externally mounted disconnect switches and be open drip proof. C. The fans shall be completely coated outside and on all surfaces that contact the exhausted air stream with a gray thermosetting polyester urethane, or Technicoat 10-1 except as noted. D. The fans shall be complete with gravity backdraft dampers, roof curb, and bird screen. E. Fan manufactured, or equal: 1. Greenheck, Model CUBE; 2. Cook. 2.2 PROPELLER WALL FANS A. Furnish and install panel mounted direct driven, or belt driven, propeller wall fans as shown on the Contract Drawings. B. The propeller fans shall be direct driven, or belt driven with an aluminum blade, a spun steel venturi mounting panel, a steel wire guard and motor mount with resilient anti-vibration pads at mounting points with panel. The propeller blade shall be statically and dynamically balanced. The fans shall be complete with gravity shutters, wall mount housing, bird screen, motor side guard, and externally mounted disconnect switch. C. The fan, panel mount, shutters, housing, blades, screen, and guard shall be coated with a gray thermosetting polyester urethane or Technicoat 10-1, except as noted. D. Fan manufacturers, or equal: 1. Greenheck, Model SDS; 2. Aerovent; 3. Penn. 2.3 EXHAUST CENTRIFUGAL FANS A. Furnish and install exhaust centrifugal fans as shown on the Contract Drawings. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT FANS, BLOWERS AND VENTILATORS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 24 00 - 3 B. Fans shall have acoustically insulated housings and shall not exceed sound level ratings shown. Integral backdraft damper shall be chatterproof. Fans shall have true centrifugal wheel. Face grille shall be of aerodynamic white egg-crate design and provide 85% free area. Manufacturers shall submit vibration amplitudes and magnetic motor hum in decibels. Entire fan, motor and wheel assembly shall be removable without disturbing the housing. Nominal motor speeds shall not exceed 1550 RPM. Fan motors shall be suitably grounded and mounted on vibration isolators. The housing shall be complete with mounting angles. C. Fan manufacturers, or equal: 1. Penn Ventilator, Model RA/TD; 2.4 VENTILATORS - PENTHOUSE TYPE A. Furnish and install the louvered intake or exhaust penthouse type ventilators as shown on the Contract Drawings. B. Ventilators shall be a low silhouette louvered penthouse type unit for intake or exhaust applications. It shall be an all aluminum construction with a fiberglass lined aluminum removable cover. Each unit is factory made into four side sections and one cover. Covers for larger units may require two or more pieces. A factory assembled side consists of the curb cap, vertical supports and the quantity of louvers required for the specified height. The sides are jointed at the four corners by sheet metal screws in each louver. These fasteners are countersunk so as not to disturb the attractive appearance of the mitered corner. The cover is securely fastened to the unit by stainless steel sheet metal screws. The ventilators shall be completely coated outside and on all surfaces that contact the supplied or exhausted air stream with a gray thermosetting polyester urethane, except as noted. C. All units shall be complete with aluminum birdscreen, backdraft or motorized dampers and 14 inch high roof curbs. D. Ventilator manufacturers, or equal: 1. Greenheck, Model WIH; WRH; 2.5 INLINE EXHAUST FANS A. Furnish and install duct mounted fans of the centrifugal belt driven in-line type as shown on the Contract Drawings. B. The fan housing shall be of the square design construction of heavy gauge aluminum steel and shall include square duct mounting collars and removable access panels. The fan wheel shall be centrifugal backway inclined, aluminum construction and include a w heel cone matched to the inlet cone. Motor shall be heavy duty ball bearing type mounted out of the airstream and be provide with belt guards. C. The fans shall be completely coated outside and on all surfaces that contact the air stream with a gray thermosetting polyester urethane Technicoat 10-1, except as noted. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT FANS, BLOWERS AND VENTILATORS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 24 00 - 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All fans, blowers, and ventilators shall be installed by a qualified subcontractor in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL DUCTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 31 13 - 1 SECTION 23 31 13 METAL DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Single-wall round ducts and fittings. 1.3 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide an installed duct system which will supply the air quantities indicated by the Drawings and have the lowest possible friction loss with the least possible leakage loss. Friction losses shall be minimized by reduction in the number of offsets and e lbows by pre- planning the duct system installation and coordination with other trades to prevent interferences. Maintain access to accessories requiring maintenance, service, and inspection. Radius elbows are preferred for turns to minimize friction, noise, and vibrations, and especially for sections having large volume or higher velocities and sections which may have turbulence. B. Provide and/or construct materials, ductwork, joints, transformations, splitters, dampers, and access doors as specified herein for the sheet metal ductwork as shown on Drawings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Ductwork fabrication shop standards. 2. Seam and joint construction. 3. Duct accessories, including access doors and panels. 4. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, vibration isolation, and seismic restraints. B. Welding certificates. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding. B. NFPA Compliance: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL DUCTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 31 13 - 2 1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." 2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturer's specified. 2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks , stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90 (Z275). 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized. C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. 1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials. D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900 mm) or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm). 2.3 SEALANT MATERIALS A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant is not limited to materials of adhesive or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and mastics. B. Joint and Seam Tape: Not acceptable. C. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with gypsum mineral compound and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal. D. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV light when cured, UL 723 listed, and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts. E. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl sealant formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL DUCTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 31 13 - 3 F. Flanged Joint Mastic: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, use O. G. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer. 2.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger Materials: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod. Use the following hangers and supports unless indicated otherwise on the drawings: 1. Hangers Installed in Influent Pump, Headworks buildings and other corrosive environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation. 2. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards-- Metal and Flexible" for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel rod diameters. 3. Galvanized-steel straps attached to aluminum ducts shall have contact surfaces painted with zinc-chromate primer or shall be aluminum. B. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. Hardware on stainless steel ducts or aluminum shall be of same material as duct. C. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. 1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel support materials. 3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum support materials unless materials are electrolytically separated from ducts. 2.5 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION A. Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" 2005 edition and complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod applications, and joint types and intervals. 1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class required for pressure class. 2. Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible." 2005 edition. B. Transverse Joints: Prefabricated slide-on joints and components constructed using manufacturer's guidelines for material thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, and joint reinforcement. 1. Manufacturers: a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Nexus Inc. c. Ward Industries, Inc. C. Formed-On Flanges: Construct according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards- -Metal and Flexible," – 2005 edition Figure 1-4, using corner, bolt, cleat, and gasket details. 1. Manufacturers: a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL DUCTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 31 13 - 4 b. Lockformer. 2. Duct Size: Maximum 30 inches (750 mm) wide and up to 2 inch wg (500 Pa) pressure class. 3. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant (only on all medium and high pressure ductwork). D. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 12 inches (480 mm) and larger and 20 gage or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. (0.93 sq. m) of nonbraced panel area. E. Transitions: 1. Do not exceed 1 inch in 4 inches of slope for decrease-in-area transitions, 1 inch in 7 inches is preferable. 2. Do not exceed 45 degrees on the entering or leaving side for angle of transitions at connections to equipment without the use of approved vanes. F. Elbows: 1. Fabricate elbows using one of the following Specifications: The fabrication methods are listed in order of preference. Use radius elbows wherever possible. Use square elbows only when available space prevents the use of radius elbows. a. Unvaned, long radius elbow with the throat radius equal to 3/4 of the width of the duct and with a full heel radius. b. Six inch throat radius with full radius, single thickness vanes and full heel radius. c. Square elbows with airfoil, single thickness turning vanes. d. Maximum unsupported length of vanes shall be 36 inches. Securely fasten vanes to runners. Secure vanes in stable position. Construct vane edges to project tangents parallel to duct sides. 2. Turning Vanes: Refer to "Duct Accessories." G. Branch Connections: Refer to SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards” 2005 Edition for figures listed in the following paragraphs. 1. Pressure Classification 2 Inches and Less: H. Rectangular branch from rectangular main: 45 degree entry with all corners closed as shown in Figure 4-6. I. Round branches: High-efficiency take-offs if shown on Drawings, otherwise use spin-in fitting without scoop. J. Parallel flow branches: See Figure 4-5. K. Space duct joints to avoid cutting them for branch take offs and outlet collars. 1. Pressure Classification Above 2 Inches: a. Round Branches: Conical round fittings only. b. Rectangular branch from rectangular main: 45 degree entry with all corners closed as shown in Figure 4-6. c. Parallel Flow Branches: See Figure 4-5. d. Space duct joints to avoid cutting them for branch take offs and outlet collars. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL DUCTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 31 13 - 5 2.6 ROUND DUCT AND FITTING FABRICATION A. Round and Flat-Oval, Spiral Lock Seam Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible." 1. Manufacturers: a. Accu-Duct. b. McGill AirFlow Corporation. c. Norlock. d. SEMCO Incorporated. e. Team Mechanical Inc. f. Ventline. g. West Cost Manufacturing. h. Sheet Metal Contractors, Inc. B. Duct Joints: 1. Ducts up to 20 Inches (500 mm) in Diameter: Interior, center-beaded slip coupling, sealed before and after fastening, attached with sheet metal screws. 2. Ducts 21 to 72 Inches (535 to 1830 mm) in Diameter: Three-piece, gasketed, flanged joint consisting of two internal flanges with sealant and one external closure band with gasket. a. Manufacturers: 1) Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2) Lindlab Inc. 3) McGill AirFlow Corporation. 4) SEMCO Incorporated. 5) Sheet Metal Contractors, Inc. C. 90 Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," with metal thicknesses specified for longitudinal-seam straight ducts. Tees shall be conical. Saddle taps or straight tees shall not be used. D. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with reduced entrance to branch taps and with no excess material projecting from fitting onto branch tap entrance. E. Two piece mitered elbows shall not be used. F. The leading edge of all vanes in ducts over 20 inch diameter is to be hemmed with 1/2 inch foldback. Turning vanes in ducts over 24 inch are to be reinforced by stays or sectional construction to limit unsupported length to 24 inches. Vanes shall be minimum of 20 gauge. G. Reduction of divided flow fittings to conical span section in the 36 common reductions in sizes 4 inch through 22 inch. H. Galvanized areas damaged by welding to be coated with corrosion resistant aluminum paint. I. Fabricate elbows using die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Bend radius of die-formed, gored, and pleated elbows shall be 1-1/2 times duct diameter. Unless elbow construction type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL DUCTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 31 13 - 6 1. Mitered-Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated. 2. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for pressure classes from minus 2 to plus 2 inch wg (minus 500 to plus 500 Pa): a. Ducts 3 to 36 Inches (75 to 915 mm) in Diameter: 22 gage (0.85-mm). b. Ducts 37 to 50 Inches (940 to 1270 mm) in Diameter: 20 gage (1.0 mm). c. Ducts 52 to 60 Inches (1320 to 1525 mm) in Diameter: 18 gage (1.3 mm). d. Ducts 62 to 84 Inches (1575 to 2130 mm) in Diameter: 16 gage (1.6 mm). 3. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for pressure classes from 2 to 10 inch wg (500 to 2500 Pa): a. Ducts 3 to 26 Inches (75 to 660 mm) in Diameter: 22 gage (0.85-mm). b. Ducts 27 to 50 Inches (685 to 1270 mm) in Diameter: 20 gage (1.0 mm). c. Ducts 52 to 60 Inches (1320 to 1525 mm) in Diameter: 18 gage (1.3 mm). d. Ducts 62 to 84 Inches (1575 to 2130 mm) in Diameter: 16 gage (1.6 mm). 4. Round Elbows 8 Inches (200 mm) and Less in Diameter: Fabricate die-formed elbows for 45 and 90 degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction. 5. Round Elbows 9 through 14 Inches (225 through 355 mm) in Diameter: Fabricate gored or pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees unless space restrictions require mitered elbows. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction. 6. Round Elbows Larger than 14 Inches (355 mm) in Diameter: Fabricate gored elbows unless space restrictions require mitered elbows. 7. Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes through 8 Inches (200 mm) in Diameter and All Pressures 20 gage thick with 2-piece welded construction. 8. Round Gored-Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non-elbow fittings specified above. 9. Flat-Oval Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as longitudinal-seam flat-oval duct specified above. 10. Pleated Elbows for Sizes through 14 Inches (355 mm) in Diameter and Pressures through 10 Inch wg (2500 Pa): 26 gage (0.55-mm). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT APPLICATIONS A. Static-Pressure Classes: Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, construct ducts according to the following: 1. Metal Ducts: Ducts shall be constructed to a SMACNA static pressure classification not less than the external static pressure indicated in the equipment schedules. For example if the fan serving a duct system is rated at 2” w.g. external static pressure; the ductwork connected to the suction of the fan shall have a SMACNA negative 2” pressure rating and any discharge ductwork shall have a SMACNA positive 2” w.g. static pressure rating. Duct applications shall have the following minimum ratings unless the equipment schedules require higher ratings. a. Supply Ducts: 1 w.g. positive (Minimum) b. Return Ducts: 1/2 inch w.g. negative (Minimum) BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL DUCTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 31 13 - 7 c. Exhaust Ducts: 1 inch negative (Minimum) d. Provide duct pressure class construction to match the greater of the above ratings or the connected equipment static pressure. B. All ducts shall be galvanized steel except when indicated to be aluminum, stainless steel or PVC coated on the drawings. Refer to “Non-Metal” ducts for fiberglass ductwork. 3.2 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings. B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"-2005 edition unless otherwise indicated. C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths. D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections. Secure fittings with screws. Install screws at intervals of 10 inches, with a minimum of (3) screws per fitting. Seal all joints and seams. F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines. G. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation thickness. H. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures. I. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). J. Protect duct interiors with sheet metal or plastic sheet covers from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials until system is energized. Comply with SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines," Intermediate Level. K. Intermediate duct reinforcement to be same as duct material. L. Do not exceed 45 degrees for easement transition angle. M. Insulation: Where Drawings and Specifications require ducts to be insulated, make provisions for neat insulation finish around damper operating quadrants, splitter adjusting clamps, access doors, and similar operating devices. Metal collar equivalent in depth to BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL DUCTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 31 13 - 8 insulation thickness and of suitable size to which insulation may be finished used for this purpose shall be attached to the duct. Linings in air ducts shall meet the Erosion Test Method described in UL Publication no. 181. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged. B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system. C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding. D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets. E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements. 3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Hangers and Supports." B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, anchors, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 4-1 (Table 4-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches (610 mm) of each elbow and within 48 inches (1200 mm) of each branch intersection. D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports. E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet (5 m). F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull -out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. G. Support round ducts from building structure with galvanized steel hangers as recommended in SMACNA manual. Secure hangers to masonry portion of building by means of inserts or other acceptable anchors. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL DUCTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 31 13 - 9 3.5 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT-DEVICE INSTALLATION A. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to support the duct and to restrain against seismic forces required by applicable building codes. Comply with ASCE/SEI 7. Refer to Section 23 05 48 for additional seismic requirements. B. Select seismic-restraint devices with capacities adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads. C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure. D. Install cable restraints on ducts that are suspended with vibration isolators. E. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing and restraints to structure, to flanges of beams, to upper truss chords of bar joists, or to concrete members. G. Drilling for and Setting Anchors: 1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcement or embedded items during drilling. Notify the Architect if reinforcing steel or other embedded items+ are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines. 2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength. 3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy- duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened. 4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior applications and stainless-steel anchors for applications exposed to weather. 3.6 CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 15 Section "Air Duct Accessories." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Duct System Cleanliness Tests: 1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT METAL DUCTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 31 13 - 10 C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.8 AIR TEST AND BALANCE A. Prepare the system for tests as specified in Section 23 05 93 and correct deficiencies found by the Test and Balance firm. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ELECTRIC HEATING SYSTEMS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 58 00 - 1 SECTION 23 58 00 ELECTRIC HEATING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The subcontractor shall provide the electric heaters, and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Single Manufacturer: Where two or more heaters or appurtenances of the same type or size are required, they shall be furnished by the same Manufacturer. 1.2 SUBCONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. General: Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Contractor Submittals. B. The submittals shall include operation, maintenance, and inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and service depot location and telephone number. 1.3 WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS A. All Work shall be in strict accordance with the State Mechanical Code, the State of Utah, and any other authorities having jurisdiction. The subcontractor shall have the required certification and be thoroughly familiar with the local codes. The subcontractor shall obtain and pay for all necessary permits. B. Workmanship shall be first-class in every respect and all Work shall be performed by workers who are thoroughly experienced in this line of Work. The subcontractor's attention is called to the fact that neat and workmanlike appearance in the finished installation shall be required. Care shall be taken at all times to protect floors, stairways, and walls during the make-up, erection of piping and placing of equipment. The subcontractor shall remove all stains and repair all damage before final acceptance of the Work. C. All materials used in connection with the electric heating system Work shall be new, free from flaws and defects all fully equal to the quality specified, and where not specifically indicated shall be the best of their respective kinds, and shall conform to the applicable specifications and standards. D. If during the construction of this project the design/cm finds materials that have identifying marks removed, or lacking such marks completely, he may reject such items until the subcontractor has shown proof that said items conform to the letter and intent of the Specifications and the Contract Drawings. The adequacy and extent of such proof shall be determined by the design/cm. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ELECTRIC HEATING SYSTEMS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 58 00 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 UNIT HEATERS A. Unit heaters shall be of the horizontal or vertical type as shown on the Contract Drawings, complete with motor, fan, wire guard, heating element, casing, vibration isolators and support brackets. B. Fan casings shall be steel reinforced to provide a suitable support for the heating element and for attachment of the support brackets. Casings shall be finished with factory finish. All units shall be provided with their own wall mounting brackets. C. Fans shall be multi-blade propeller type units direct connected to the motor shaft and/or centrifugal fan and motor units all statically and dynamically balanced. D. Motors shall be especially designed for unit operation. Fan shafts shall be equipped with self- aligning ball or roller bearings and shall extend a sufficient length to receive the fan hub. The fan shall be keyed and locked to the fan shaft. Fan and motor unit shall be mounted on vibration isolators to prevent noise. E. Electric heating bank shall consist of metal sheath aluminum-finned heating elements. Automatic reset thermal over-heat protection shall be of the linear capillary type wired for instantaneous de-energizing. Heating bank to have protective air inlet louvers. Units shall be U.L. listed and meet the requirements of the National Electric code. F. Low voltage control transformers shall be furnished. G. All heaters shall be provided with power disconnect switches (field installed kits) and electric unit heaters shall have built in thermostat unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings. H. Heaters shall include wall or ceiling mounting brackets. I. The heaters shall be manufactured by Reznor; Chromalox; or equal. 2.2 ELECTRICAL AND MOTORS A. The electrical and motors for electric heating systems shall be as specified in Section 23 00 00 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning of these Specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All electric heating equipment shall be installed by a qualified subcontractor in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 81 26 - 1 SECTION 23 81 26 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes split-system air-conditioning and heat pump units consisting of separate evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components. Units are designed for exposed or concealed mounting, and may be connected to ducts. 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Contractor Submittals, submit product data that includes rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for units. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Carrier Air Conditioning; Div. of Carrier Corporation. 2. Daikin AC. 3. Friedrich Air Conditioning Company. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 81 26 - 2 4. Koldwave, Inc. 5. Mitsubishi Electronics America, Inc.; HVAC Division. 2.2 WALL OR CEILING MOUNTED, EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS A. Cabinet: Enameled steel or molded plastic with removable panels on front and ends in white color and discharge drain pans with drain connection. B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve. C. Fan: Direct drive, centrifugal fan. D. Fan Motors: 1. Special Motor Features: Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication. E. Filters: Permanent, cleanable. 2.3 AIR-COOLED, COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER COMPONENTS A. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel with removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing. B. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor. 1. Compressor Type: DC rotary compressor with variable compressor speed inverter technology. The compressor shall be driven by inverter circuit to control compressor speed. C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler. D. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor. E. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection. F. Low Ambient: Permits operation down to 0 deg F. G. Mounting Base: Polyethylene. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Thermostat: Wall mounted, wireless controlled functioning to remotely control compressor and evaporator fan, with the following features: 1. Compressor time delay. 2. 24-hour time control of system stop and start. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 81 26 - 3 3. Liquid-crystal display indicating temperature, set-point temperature, time setting, operating mode, and fan speed. 4. Fan-speed selection, including auto setting. B. Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor. C. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried, pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install units level and plumb. B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely fastened to building structure. C. Install ground-mounting, compressor-condenser components on 4 inch thick, reinforced Retain paragraph above or first paragraph below. D. Install and connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing to allow access to unit. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance. C. Ground equipment. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections. Report results in writing. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 23 81 26 - 4 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 00 00 - 1 SECTION 26 00 00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall provide electrical and appurtenant Work necessary for a complete and operable electrical system, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Make all field connections and terminations to all motors, switchgear, panels, control equipment and devices, instruments, and to all vendor-furnished packaged equipment. The requirements of this Section shall apply to all electrical items indicated in the various Sections of Division 26 unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide all materials and incidentals required to complete the electrical Work. Typical materials which may be incidentals are terminal lugs not furnished with vendor -supplied equipment, compression connectors for cables, splices, junction and terminal bo xes, and all control wires required by vendor-furnished equipment to interconnect with other equipment all specifically indicated on the Contract Documents. D. All concrete Work required for encasement, installation, or construction of the Work specified in the various Sections of Division 26 shall be 4,000-psi concrete conforming to the applicable requirements of Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: 1. If encasement concrete around duct banks is required the following exceptions and supplementary requirements shall apply: a. Consolidation of encasement concrete around duct banks shall be by hand puddling, and no mechanical vibration shall be permitted. b. A Workability admixture shall be used in encasement concrete, which shall be a hydroxylated carboxylic acid type in liquid form. Admixtures containing calcium chloride shall not be used. c. Concrete for encasement of conduit or duct banks shall contain an integral red-oxide coloring pigment in the proportion of 8 pounds per cubic yard of concrete. 1.2 INTERFACE TO EQUIPMENT, INSTRUMENTS, AND OTHER COMPONENTS: A. The contract drawings, specifications, and overall design are based on non-certified information furnished by various equipment manufacturers. This “equipment” includes, but not limited to, instruments, control devices, electrical equipment, packaged mechanical systems, and control equipment provided with mechanical systems. B. The electrical specifications, ladder logic diagrams, and installation details are based on non- certified vendor information and indicate minimum scope of supply from Manufacturers. C. Include all labor, material, and others costs in the bid to add additional instrument, wiring, control system inputs/outputs, controls, conduit, interlocks, electrical hardware, etc., into the Work based on the Equipment Manufacturer’s final certified Drawings. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 00 00 - 2 D. Revise or produce new loop diagrams to meet the Equipment Manufacturer’s wiring requirements. E. Incorporate such changes to Instrumentation and Electrical Work at no additional cost to the Owner in light of the Contractor’s knowledge that non-certified vendor information has been used in the design, and due to the fact that the final selection of the vendor may have been by the Contractor. F. Submit all such changes and additions to the Engineer for acceptance before starting field installation Work. G. The Contractor is responsible for providing all material and labor needed to install the actual equipment furnished, as such the Contractor’s bid includes all costs to add any additional conduit, wiring, terminals, or other electrical hardware to the design, which may be necessary to make a complete, functional installation based on the actual equipment furnished: 1. Make all changes necessary to meet the Manufacturer’s wiring requirements. 2. Incorporate such changes to the electrical installation into the final “As-Built” Drawings. H. Review the complete set of Drawings and Specifications in order to ensure that all items related to the electrical power and control systems are completely accounted for. Include any such items that appears on Drawings or Specifications from another discipline in the scope of Work and any costs for these items. I. Loop drawings. Provide complete Loop Drawings for all systems, including packaged equipment furnished as part of a Vendor furnished package, and for all pre-purchased equipment. 1.3 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Codes and Standards NFPA 30 Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code. NFPA 37 Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code, latest edition. NFPA 99 General Overall Requirements. NFPA 110 Emergency and Standby Power Systems. B. Government Standards FS W-C-596E/GEN(1) Connector, Plug, Receptacle and Cable Outlet, Electrical Power FS W-S-896E/GEN(1) Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush Mounted (ac) FS WW-C-563 Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 00 00 - 3 FS WW-C-581D, E Conduit, Metal, Rigid, and Intermediate; and Coupling, Elbow, and Nipple, Electrical Conduit: Steel, Zinc Coated OSHA Safety and Health Standards, 29 CFR 1910 and 29 CFR 1926 as applicable C. Commercial Standards ANSI C80.1 Zinc Coated, Rigid Steel Conduit, Specification for ANSI C80.4 Fittings for Rigid Metal Conduit and Electrical Metallic Tubing, Specifications for ANSI/UL 467 Grounding and Bonding Equipment, Safety Standard for ASTM B 3 Soft or Annealed Copper Wire ASTM B 8 Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, and Soft ASTM B 33 Specification for Timed Soft or Annealed Cooper Wire for Electrical Purposes ICEA S-61-402 Thermoplastic - Insulated Wire and Cable ICEA S-66-524, NEMA WC7 Cross-Linked, Thermosetting, Polyethylene Wire and Cable ICEA S-68-516, NEMA WC8 Ethylene Propylene Rubber Insulated Wire and Cable NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 volts maximum) NEMA PB-1 Panelboards NEMA VE-1 Ventilated Cable Tray UL 6 Rigid Metal Electrical Conduit UL 44 Rubber - Insulated Wire and Cable. UL 514 Electrical Outlet Boxes and Fittings UL 886 Electrical Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous Locations D. All equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be listed by and shall bear the label of Underwriters' Laboratories, Incorporated, (UL) or an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the local Code-enforcement agency having jurisdiction. E. The construction and installation of all electrical equipment and materials shall comply with all applicable provisions of the OSHA Safety and Health Standards (29CFR1910 and BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 00 00 - 4 29CFR1926, as applicable), State Building Standards, and applicable local codes and regulations. 1.4 PUBLIC UTILITIES REQUIREMENTS A. Contact the serving agencies and verify compliance with their requirements before construction. B. Electrical service shall be as indicated by the Contract Documents. C. Verify, furnish, and install all service conduits, fittings, transformer pad, grounding devices, and all service wires not furnished by the serving utility. D. Verify with the utility the exact location of each service point and type of service, and pay all charges levied by the serving utilities without additional cost to the Owner. 1.5 PERMITS AND INSPECTION A. Permits shall be obtained and inspection fees shall be paid for as indicated in Section 00 70 00 – General Conditions. B. Pay for any service charges required by the utility company for connection and turn on. 1.6 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Catalog Data: Submit shop drawings and catalog data submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures. B. Submit complete material lists for the Work of this Section. Such lists shall state manufacturer and brand name of each item or class of material. Submit shop drawings for all grounding Work not specifically indicated. C. Shop drawings are required for materials and equipment listed in other sections. Shop drawings shall provide sufficient information to evaluate the suitability of the proposed material or equipment for the intended use, and for compliance with these Speci fications. The following shall be included: 1. Front, side, rear elevations and top views with dimensional data. 2. Location of conduit entrances and access plates. 3. Component data. 4. Connection diagrams, terminal numbers, wire numbers, internal wiring diagrams, conductor size, and cable numbers. 5. Method of anchoring, seismic requirement; weight. 6. Types of materials and finish. 7. Nameplates. 8. Temperature limitations, as applicable. 9. Voltage requirement, as applicable. 10. Front and rear access requirements. D. Catalog data shall be submitted to supplement all shop drawings. Catalog cuts, bulletins, brochures, or the like or photocopies of applicable pages thereof shall be submitted for mass BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 00 00 - 5 produced, noncustom manufactured material. These catalog data sheets shall be stamped to indicate the project name, applicable Specification section and paragraph, model number, and options. This information shall be marked in spaces designated for such data in the stamp. E. Materials and Equipment Schedules: Furnish within 30 days, a complete list of all materials, equipment, apparatus, and fixtures proposed for use. The list shall include type, sizes, names of manufacturers, catalog numbers, and such other information required to identify the items. F. Conduit Layout: Provide drawings for underground and concealed conduits, including but not limited to ductbanks, under floor slabs, concealed in floor slabs, and concealed in walls. Provide plan and section showing arrangement and location of conduit and duct bank required for: 1) low and medium voltage feeder and branch circuits, instrumentation and control systems, communication systems, empty conduit for future use. Layouts shall be of a reproducible scale not greater than 1 inch equals 20 feet. G. O&M Manuals: Furnish manuals as part of the shop drawing submittals under "Operation and Maintenance Manuals" in Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures. H. Record Drawings: In addition to the record drawings as a part of the record drawing requirements specified in Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures, show depths and routing of all duct bank concealed below grade electrical installations. Said set of record drawings shall be available to the Engineer during construction. After final inspection, transfer all record drawing information using a red pen to a set of drawings which shall then be delivered to the Engineer. In addition, the record drawings shall show all variations between the Work as actually constructed and as originally shown on the Drawings, based upon information supplied by the Contractor. I. Submittal organization: 1. First page: a. Specification Section Reference. b. Name and telephone number of individual who reviewed submittal before delivery to Engineer. c. Name and telephone number of individual who is primarily responsible for the development of the submittal. d. Place the Contractor‘s review stamp and comments. 2. Next pages: a. Provide confirmation of Specification compliance in tabular form that individually lists each Specification section, paragraph, and subparagraph and unequivocally states compliance with said requirement or takes exception to the requirement and lists the reason for said exception and offers alternative means for compliance. b. Include a response in writing with each submittal packages which is re- submitted to each of the Engineer’s comments or questions: 1) In the order that the comments and/or questions were presented throughout the submittal. 2) Referenced by index section and page number on which the comment appeared. 3) Acceptable responses to Engineer’s comments are either: (1) Engineer’s comments or change is accepted and appropriate changes BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 00 00 - 6 are made or (2) Explain why comment is not accepted or requested change is not made, (3) Explain how requirement will be satisfied in lieu of comment or change requested by Engineer. c. Any re-submittal, which does not contain responses to the Engineer’s previous comments shall be returned for Revision and Resubmittal. d. No further review by the Engineer will be performed until a response for previous comments has been received. 3. Remaining pages: a. Actual submittal data: 1) Organize submittals in exactly the same order as the items are referenced, listed, and/or organized in the Specification Section. 2) For Submittals that cover multiple devices used in different areas under the same Specification Section, the Submittal for the individual devices must list the area where the device is intended to be used. b. Advise all Equipment Suppliers of submittal requirements outlined in Section 01 33 20. c. Use equipment and instrument tags, as depicted on the P&IDs, for all submittals. J. Engineer’s review: 1. The Engineer has allowed for up to and including 2 reviews of each submittal. The time and expense for any reviews beyond the allotted 2 reviews will be borne by the Contractor. Reference 01 33 20. K. Material and Equipment Schedules: 1. Deliver to the Engineer a complete schedule and/or matrix of all materials, equipment, apparatus, and luminaries proposed for use, including sizes, names of Manufacturers, catalog numbers, and such other information required to identify the items. L. Schedule of Values: 1. In addition to completing all items referred to in the schedule of values, submit per unit material and labor costs used in developing the final bid for the electrical system, for the express purpose of pricing and cost justification for any proposed change orders. In addition to the items shown on the schedule of values, provide per unit material and labor costs for conduit and wire installation for specific types, sizes, and locations as indicated on the Drawings and Conduit Schedule. It is the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to prove to the Engineer’s satisfaction that these per unit costs were used in the development of the final bid amount. The Owner will withhold all progress payments until said schedule of values is provided and accepted by the Engineer. M. Roof Penetrations: 1. Submit details of all portions of the electrical installation that penetrate the roof. Include details showing support of the penetrating component, and the sealing means to be utilized. N. Installation Recommendations: 1. Submit the Manufacturer’s printed recommendations for installation of electrical equipment. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 00 00 - 7 O. Record Drawings: 1. Furnish in accordance with Section 01 78 39. 2. Electrical Drawings will be provided for the express purpose of being used for the Record Drawings. Maintain shop drawings for use as Record Drawings: a. Update Record Drawings weekly. b. Record Drawings must be fully updated as a condition of the monthly progress payments. c. Submit Record Drawings upon completions of the project for final review. 3. Clearly and neatly show all changes; a. Additions or changes marked in red. b. Deletions marked in green. c. Comments marked in blue. d. Installed systems in yellow. e. Invert elevations of conduit and depth below grade or floor line. f. Dimensions of equipment. g. Exact locations of equipment, underground and concealed conduit, and ductbanks. 4. Dimensioned with reference to the structures a. All existing pipe, conduit, wire, instruments or other structures encountered or uncovered during construction. 5. Upon completion of the Work, update all shop drawings to indicate the final As -Built configuration of the systems; a. Reference Section 01 33 20 for specific requirements. b. Provide As-Built shop drawings for all electrical equipment in accordance with Section 01 33 20. c. Provide electronic copies of these documents when required in Division 01 33 20. 6. Furnish manuals, or portions thereof, written specifically for this project. a. Provide electronic copies of these documents as required in division 01 33 20. P. O. Specific Submittal Requirements: 1. Furnish the submittals required by each Section in Division 26 in accordance with the following requirements. 2. Shop Drawings a. Required for materials and equipment listed in this and other Sections. b. Furnish sufficient information to evaluate the suitability of the proposed material or equipment for the intended use, and for compliance with these Specifications. c. Shop Drawings requirements: 1) Front, side, and rear elevations, and top and bottom views, showing all dimensions. 2) Locations of conduit entrances and access plates. 3) Component layout and identification. 4) Schematic and wiring diagrams with wire numbers and terminal identification. 5) Connection diagrams, terminal diagrams, internal wiring diagrams, conductor size, etc. 6) Anchoring method and leveling criteria, including Manufacturer’s recommendations of the seismic conditions specified in Section 01 81 10. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 00 00 - 8 7) Weight. Q. Calculations: 1. All required calculations to be stamped and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State where the project is being constructed and specializing in the specific area required by the calculation. 2. By virtue of the fact that these calculations are being provided by a Registered Professional Engineer, they will be reviewed for form, format, and content but will not be reviewed for accuracy and calculations means. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements. 1. Perform all Work to meet the requirements of all legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Perform all Electrical Work, whether needed for the power, control system, process, HVAC, telephone, security, etc. in accordance with all codes and standards required by Division 26. 3. Perform all Work so as to comply with the accepted editions, amendments, practices, and rulings of the applicable codes and standards, except where the Drawings and Specifications are more stringent. B. System Supplier Responsibilities: 1. In accordance with the requirements of Division 40. 2. System Supplier: Due to the critical and complex technical requirements of this project, furnish all the systems specified in Division 26 and Division 40, through a single System Supplier, who shall have single source responsibility for the entire instrumentation, control, and electrical power systems. 3. Contractual Relationship: a. Form a contractual relationship between the Electrical Contractor and the Instrumentation & Control System Contractor. b. Requirements for the first tier Contractor: 1) Contract directly with the CONTRACTOR 2) Be either the Electrical Contractor or the Instrumentation & Control System Contractor 3) Be defined as the System Supplier. c. Requirements for the second tier Contractor: 1) A Division of the first tier Contractor, or 2) A joint venture with the first tier Contractor, or 3) A sub-Contractor to the first tier Contractor. d. The System Supplier manages, directs, and supervises all of the Work of its second tier Contractor. The System Supplier is solely responsible for the entire electrical and instrumentation system, including, but not limited to, all electrical, instrumentation, and process Contract Drawings, Division 40 and Division 26: 1) Provide any additional conduit, wire, etc. e. Provide any additional I/O, programming, screens, interface devices needed by the System Supplier are to be installed by the Electrical Contractor or the Instrumentation and Control Systems Contractor, under the above outlined Working agreement. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 00 00 - 9 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Acceptance of material and equipment Furnished By Others (F.B.O.): 1. Where equipment or materials are to be F.B.O. to the Contractor for installation and connection, the Contractor must: a. Upon receiving such equipment or materials, make a complete check of all items and provide a transfer of materials document. b. Provide the transfer of materials document as a receipt detailing the products received and the condition of the products delivered to the Contractor. c. After Receiving and accepting the material, assume full responsibility for the safe keeping, handling, and the installation of the materials and equipment, until completed installation and final acceptance by the Engineer. 2. Failure to issue said receipt assumes that all equipment and materials were then delivered to the Contractor in the proper quantities and in perfect condition. B. Storage and Protection: 1. Provide for the safe storage and delivery of materials, whether furnished by the Contractor or by others. 2. Replace all equipment or material, damaged before final acceptance by the Engineer in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. 3. Meet all storage requirements of the Manufacturer and provide for the safe storage of all materials and equipment as recommended by the Manufacturer. 4. Protect electrical Work at all times from damage, defacement or deterioration from any cause whatever: a. Provide proper storage facilities and conduct operations to this effect. b. Perform electrical Work in a manner as to protect the Work of other trades. 1.9 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Site Conditions: 1. Provide an electrical, instrumentation and control system, including all equipment, raceways and any other components required for a complete installation that meets the Environmental conditions for the Site as specified in the General Requirements and below. 2. Seismic Classification: a. Provide all electrical equipment and construction techniques suitable for the seismic requirements for the Site, as specified in section 01 81 10. 3. Wind: a. Provide all electrical equipment and construction techniques suitable for the Site wind loading criteria, as specified in section 01 81 11. 4. Altitude: a. The site is located approximately 8,650 feet above mean sea level. Provide all electrical components and equipment fully rated for continuous operation at this altitude, with no additional derating factors applied. 5. Humidity: a. The facility is located in an area where the relative humidity is 100 percent non-condensing. Furnish all components and equipment fully rated for continuous operation at this relative humidity level. 6. Temperature: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 00 00 - 10 a. The facility is located in an area where the temperature will vary from a minimum of -20 degrees Fahrenheit to a maximum of 100 degrees Fahrenheit. b. Provide additional temperature conditioning equipment to maintain all equipment in non-conditioned spaces subject to these ambient temperatures 10 degrees Fahrenheit above the minimum operating temperature and 10 degrees Fahrenheit below maximum operating temperature as determined by the equipment Manufacturer’s guidelines. 7. Outdoor installations: a. Provide all electrical, instrumentation and control equipment installed outdoors that are suitable for operation in the ambient conditions where the equipment is located. b. Provide heating, cooling, and de-humidifying devices incorporated into and included with electrical equipment, instrumentation and control panels located outdoors in order to maintain the enclosures within the rated environmental operating ranges as specified in this Paragraph for the equipment: 1) Provide all wiring necessary to power these devices. 8. Site Security: a. Abide by all security and safety rules concerning the Work on the Site, as specified in Section 01 35 53. 1.10 AREA DESIGNATIONS A. General: For purposes of delineating electrical enclosure and electrical installation requirements of this project, certain areas have been classified in the Contract Documents as defined below. Electrical installations within these areas shall conform to the referenced code requirements for the area involved. B. Table showing plant area Electrical Work Requirements; Unless otherwise specifically indicated on the Drawings or in the Conduit Schedule enclosures, conduits and Electrical Work shall be in accordance with the following table and succeeding paragraphs: AREA NEMA ENCLOSURE TYPE CONDUIT TYPE NOTES 1 3R 4 4X 7 9 12 PVC EMT GRC PCS Reference Plan Views for Additional Information Outdoor X X PVC conduit where concealed Underground X Chlorination Buildings X X Valve Vaults X X PVC conduit where concealed Meter Vaults X X PVC conduit where concealed BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 00 00 - 11 C. General Purpose Indoor Locations: Electrical Work installed in areas which are not otherwise specifically classified shall be "General Purpose." Workmanship and enclosures shall comply with the general requirements of these Specifications. Electrical power enclosures shall be NEMA Type 1 and electrical control enclosures shall be NEMA Type 12. In these areas exposed conduit shall galvanized rigid steel conduit (GRC). D. Outdoor and Damp Locations: In outdoor locations, raceway shall be galvanized rigid steel (GRC) conduit; entrances shall be threaded; and fittings shall have gasketed covers. Provisions shall be made to drain the fitting or conduit system. Threaded fastening hardware shall be stainless steel. Raceway supports such as hanger rods, clamps, and brackets shall be galvanized. Attachments or welded assemblies shall be galvanized after fabrication. Instruments and control cabinets, and panel enclosures shall be NEMA Type 4X. Switchboard and motor control centers shall be weatherproof NEMA Type 3R. Enclosures shall be mounted ¾ to 1 inch from walls to provide an air space. Locations which are indoors and 2 feet below grade elevation or which are classified as damp locations on the Drawings shall have electrical installations which conform to the requirements for outdoor locations. "Damp locations" shall include pipe galleries, tunnels, vaults, and basements. All rooms housing liquid handling equipment are also classified as damp locations regardless of grade elevation. E. Vaults with forced air ventilation are not considered “damp locations”. NEMA Type 12 panels will be required in these areas. F. Splash Locations: Areas shown as splash proof shall have electrical installations as described for "outdoor locations." G. In waste water plants the ambient air contains airborne contaminants, including but not limited to, the corrosive gases: sodium hypochlorite, caustic soda, and hydrofluorosilicic acid (fluoride). The corrosion severity level will vary according to specific location, temperature, relative humidity, rate of change of relative humidity, wind speed and wind direction, and may, therefore, also be subject to seasonal variation. Provide equipment in those areas constructed from materials that are compatible with the particular corrosive environment. H. Hazardous Locations: 1. All conduit and enclosures installed in hazardous locations to comply with NEC Article 500. All conduit to be PCS. Enclosures to be NEMA rated and listed for the environment. 1.11 SEQUENCING: A. General: 1. Testing requirements for equipment are specified in each section of Division 26 specifications. 2. General scheduling requirements are specified in Section 01 32 16. 3. Work restrictions and other scheduling requirements are specified in Section 01 14 40 B. Pre-submittal Conferences: 1. Before producing any submittals, schedule a Pre-submittal Conference for the purposes of reviewing the entire project, equipment, control philosophy, schedules, and submittal requirements. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 00 00 - 12 2. The Contractor, Instrumentation and Control System Contractor, Electrical Contractor, all suppliers furnishing major pieces of equipment must attend including but not limited to: a. Vendor Control Panels. b. Chemical Feed Suppliers. c. Motor Control Centers. d. Switchgear. e. Variable Frequency Drive. f. Lighting. g. Engine Generators. C. Factory Acceptance Testing: 1. Where Factory Acceptance Testing is required for equipment covered by these Specifications, notify the Engineer in writing when the equipment is completed and ready for factory inspection and testing; a. Indicate the desired dates for inspection and testing. b. Furnish notice at least 10 Working days before the date of the test to allow the Engineer and Owner to arrange to attend. D. Final Review and Notice of Completion: 1. Notify the Engineer in writing that the Work is completed and ready for final review and test: a. State the desired dates for the review and testing. b. Furnish notice at least 10 Working days before the date of the test to allow the Engineer to arrange to attend. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Warrant the performance and the hardware of the complete electrical systems including all lamps, lighting, switchgear, circuit breakers, transformers, MCCs. VFD, etc. for a period of 1 year following the date of substantial completion of the Work: 1. To fulfill this obligation, provide technical service personnel designated by the Electrical Contractor and/ or Manufacturer. 2. Perform services to correct any defect within 3 calendar days after notification by the Owner of a defect. B. Warrant the satisfactory performance of the software, equipments, and materials under the specified operating conditions. 1. In the event that operations, tests, or inspections disclose latent defects or failure to meet the specified requirements, upon notification by the Owner, promptly correct or repair any such defects or non-conformance, or furnish such new equipment or parts as may be necessary for conformity to the specified requirements. C. Replace or modify equipment, software, and materials that do not achieve design requirements after installation in order to attain compliance with the design requirements. Following replacement or modifications retest the system and perform additional tes ting to place the complete system in satisfactory operation and obtain compliance acceptance from the Engineer. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 00 00 - 13 D. Provide all parts, material, labor, travel, subsistence, or other expenses incurred in providing services and service visits during the warranty period: 1. Furnish spare parts and tools on site at inventory levels sufficient to meet the response and repair times specified. a. All spare parts and tools stored on-site become the property of the Owner upon completion of the warranty period. 1.13 MAINTENANCE A. Provide similar items of same Manufacturer throughout the Electrical and Instrumentation portion of the project. B. Furnish all spare parts as required by other sections of the Specifications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide similar items of same Manufacturer throughout the Electrical and Instrumentation portion of the project. B. Allowable Manufacturers are specified in individual Specifications in other Sections. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Furnish all materials under this contract, new, free from defects, and standard products produced by Manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of these products and that bear all approvals and labels as required by the Specifications. B. Provide materials complying with the applicable industrial standard, except where these specifications are more stringent. C. Stainless Steel: 1. Where stainless steel is indicated or used for any portion of the electrical Work, provide a non-magnetic, corrosion-resistant alloy, ANSI Type 316, satin finish. 2. Provide exposed screws of the same alloys 3. Provide finished material free of any burrs or sharp edges. 4. Use only stainless steel hardware, when chemically compatible, in all areas that are or could be in contact with corrosive chemicals (sulfur dioxide, caustic, fluorides, or others). 5. Use stainless steel hardware, when chemically compatible, in all areas designated Corrosive and Wet Areas Requiring NEMA 4X Construction. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Provide all equipment that is new, free from defects, and standard products produced by Manufacturers regularly engaged in the productions of these products that bear all approvals and labels as required by the Specifications. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 00 00 - 14 B. Alternative Equipment and Methods: Equipment or methods requiring redesign of any project details are not acceptable without prior written approval of the Engineer through the “or equal” process as defined in the Specifications. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Arrange with all Manufacturers of the equipment and fabricators of panels and cabinets, to allow the Owner and Engineer to inspect and witness the testing of the equipment at the site of fabrication: 1. Testing includes the cabinets, special control systems, power equipment, and other pertinent systems and devices. 2. Make no shipments without the Engineer’s approval. B. Factory Testing is specified in Divisions 26 and 40. C. Furnish all equipment listed by and bearing the label of Underwriters’ Laboratories, Incorporated (UL) or of an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Study all Drawings and Specifications and to report to the ENGINEER before bidding: 1. Any errors. 2. Any omissions 3. Any Electrical Code problems 4. Any Local Building Code problems. 5. Or any points of conflict with other trades. B. It is the Electrical Contractor’s responsibility to be fully familiar with the existing conditions and local requirements and regulations. Difficulties that arise after the Contract has been awarded which could have been avoided by a more complete initial site visit are the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to correct. C. Review the existing site conditions and examine all shop drawings for the various items of equipment in order to determine exact routing and final terminations for al wiring and cables. D. The Contractor through the System Supplier is responsible for the complete electrical and instrumentation Work: 1. Install extra conduits, cables, and interfaces as may be necessary to provide a complete and operating electrical, power, and Process Control and Instrumentation System. 3.2 PREPARATION A. The construction and installation of all electrical equipment and materials must comply with all applicable provisions of the: 1. OSHA-Safety and Health Standards BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 00 00 - 15 2. State building standards 3. Applicable local codes and regulations B. Furnish, place, and maintain guards, night-lights, protective screens, warning signs, etc. as required to prevent accidents or injuries to all personnel. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Equipment locations shown on Electrical Drawings may change due to variations in equipment size or minor changes made by others during construction: 1. Verify all dimensions indicated on the Drawings: a. Actual field conditions govern all final installed locations, distances, and levels. 2. Review all information shown on the Contract Drawings, including architectural, structural, mechanical, instrumentation, and the accepted electrical and mechanical shop drawings, and coordinate Work as necessary to adjust to all conditions that arise due to such changes. B. Cutting and patching: 1. Perform all cutting, patching, channeling, core drilling, and fitting required for the Electrical Work, except as otherwise directed: a. Actual field conditions govern all final installed locations, distances, and levels. 1) Before cutting, channeling, or core drilling any surface, ensure that no penetration of any other systems will be made. a) Verify that area is clear and free of conduits, cables, piping, ductwork, post-tensioning cables etc. b) Use tone-locate system or X-ray to ensure that area is clear of obstructions. 2) Review the complete Drawing set to ensure that there are not conflicts or coordination problems before cutting, channeling, or core drilling any surface. 2. Perform all patching to the same quality and appearance as the original Work. Employ the proper tradesmen to secure the desired results. Seal around all conduits, wires, and cables penetrating walls, ceilings, and floors in all locations with a fire stop material, typically: a. 3M CP25 Caulk b. 3M 303 Putty c. T&B S-100 Caulk d. T&B FS-500 Putty e. T&B FST-60l Putty 3. Seal around conduit penetrations of below grade walls with a waterproof, non-shrink, nonmetallic grout: a. Use the Installation Details provided in the Contract Drawings as a guide for acceptable sealing methods. C. Install all conduit and equipment in such a manner as to avoid all obstructions and to preserve headroom and keep openings and passageways clear: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 00 00 - 16 1. Install all conduits and equipment in accordance with Working space requirements as outlined in Article 110, Requirements for Electrical Installation of the National Electrical Code. D. Earthwork and Concrete: 1. Install all trenching, shoring, concrete, backfilling, grading and resurfacing associated with the electrical work. 2. Notify the Engineer before encasing or backfilling any electrical work, and arrange for inspection. E. Roof Penetrations: 1. Make all roof penetrations, and seal around all conduits. Use pitch pockets and flashings. 2. Roofing Contractor to make actual seals around roof penetrations. F. Terminations: 1. Terminate all conductors required to interconnect power, controls, instruments, panels and other equipment otherwise specifically identified. G. Miscellaneous Installation Requirements: 1. In case of interference between electrical equipment shown on the Drawings and the other equipment, notify the Engineer in writing of the proposed change: a. Obtain Engineer’s acceptance of the proposed changes before they are made. 2. Location of manholes and pullboxes shown on Drawings are approximate. Coordinate exact location of manholes and pullboxes with mechanical and civil Work. 3. Provide additional manholes or pullboxes to those shown where they are required to make a Workable installation. 4. Circuits of different service voltage: a. Install in separate raceways, hand holes, pullboxes, and junction boxes. b. In manholes, install all cables operating at less than 50 VDC PVC coated flexible metallic conduit. c. The voltage and service levels are: 1) Medium voltage: 12.47 KV 2) Low voltage: 120V, 208V, 480V 3) Control: less than 50VDC H. Labeling: 1. Provide all nameplates and labels as required in specification Section 26 05 53. I. Equipment Tie-Downs: 1. Anchor all instruments, control panels, and equipment by methods that comply with seismic and wind bracing requirements, which apply to the site. Seismic certified per section 01 81 10. 2. All control panels, VCPs, LCPs, RTUs, PCMs, etc., must be permanently mounted and tied down to structures in accordance with requirements, which apply to the site. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 00 00 - 17 1. Conduct inspection of electrical, instrumentation and control system installation in accordance with provisions outlined in the General Requirements. 2. Allow Owner, Engineer, or Owner’s Representative access to site for inspection of materials, equipment, or installation at any time. 3. Provide any technical data or other assistance necessary to support inspection activities. 4. Electrical inspections include, but not limited to, the following: a. Inspect equipment and materials for physical damage. b. Inspect installation of compliance with plans and specifications c. Inspect installation for obstructions and adequate clearances around equipment. d. Inspect equipment installation for proper leveling, alignment, anchorage and assembly. e. Inspect equipment nameplate data to verify compliance with design requirements. f. Inspect raceway installation quality Workmanship and adequate support. g. Inspect cable terminations. h. Schedule Structural Engineer to inspect all mounting of electrical devices and all penetrations and connections to structures. 5. Inspection activities conducted during construction do not satisfy inspection requirements outlined in each section of the Division 26 specifications. B. Testing: 1. When the electrical Work is substantially completed, notify the Engineer that the project is ready for Field Acceptance Testing. 2. Perform the acceptance test in conformance with each section of the Division 26 specifications. 3. Record results of the required tests along with the date of test: a. Use conduit schedule identification numbers to indicate portion of circuit tested. C. Workmanship: 1. Use only competent and skilled personnel experiences in their trade, Working under continuous competent supervision, to perform all Work, including installation, connection, calibration, testing, and adjustment. a. Perform all Work, including aesthetic as well as electrical and mechanical aspects, to standards consistent with the best practices of the trade. 2. All Work is subject to review by the Engineer or Owner at any time. 3. Provide all Work to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer or Owner. 4. Repair or replace any Work, which, in the sole opinion of the Engineer, does not conform to these Specifications, or trade practices. 5. Make all changes of any installed items to meet the intent of the Drawings and Specifications. 6. Install all materials and equipment in accordance with the Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions. a. Where Contractor asks to deviate from the Manufacturer’s recommendations, such changes shall be reviewed by the Engineer and Manufacturer before installation. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 00 00 - 18 3.5 CLEANING A. General Requirements: 1. Maintain all surfaces to be painted in a clean and smooth condition. 2. Remove all foreign material and restore all damaged finishes to the satisfaction of the Engineer and Owner. 3. Remove all debris, rubbish, and scraps, etc. each night. 4. Leave all areas swept clean each night. 5. Wipe clean all exposed threads of conduit of the KOPR-SHIELD compound after installation. B. Vacuum clean all electrical enclosures of any debris before any wire or cable is installed. C. Clean and re-lamp all new and luminaries that were used in the area affected by the construction, and return all used lamps to Owner. D. As specified in other Sections of the Specifications. E. Leave wiring in panels, manholes, boxes, and other locations neat, clean, and organized: 1. Neatly coil and label spare wiring lengths. 2. Shorten re-terminate, and re-label excessive spare wire and cable lengths, as determined by the Engineer. END OF SECTION BC&A LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT AND CABLES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 19 - 1 SECTION 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. 600 Volt Class wire and cable. 2. Instrumentation Class wire and cable. 3. Network cable. 4. Fire alarm wire and cable. 5. Telephone wire and cable. 6. 600 Volt Class Tray cable. B. Related Sections: 1. Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all divisions and sections apply. It is the responsibility of the Contractor and its subcontractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. 1.2 REFERENCES: A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. B3 – Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire. 2. B8 – Specification for Concentric-Lay Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft. B. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA): 1. IPCEA X-61-402 for thermoplastic insulated wire and cable for the transmission and distribution of electrical energy. 2. IPCEA S-61-402 for rubber insulated wire and cable for the transmission and distribution of electrical energy. C. National Electrical Code (NEC): 1. Article 250 – Grounding. 2. Article 310 – Conductors for General Wiring. 3. Article 760 – Fire Alarm Systems. D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. Article 72 – National Fire Alarm Code. 2. Article 101 – Life Safety Code. 3. Article 262 – Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke or Wires and Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces. E. Federal Specification J-C 30A. F. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1. UL 1 277 Subject – Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with Optional Optical- fiber Members. BC&A LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT AND CABLES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 19 - 2 2. UL 1063 – Machine-Tool Wires and Cables. 3. UL 1581 – Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords. 4. UL-2196 – Tests for Fire Resistive Cables. 5. UL-1424 – Cables for Power-Limited Fire-Alarm Circuits. 6. UL-1569 Metal-Clad Cables. 7. UL-225 Metal-Clad Cables and Cable-Sealing Fittings for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations. G. Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronics Industry Association (TIA/EIA): 1. TAI/EIA/TSB95 – Additional Transmission Performance Guidelines for 4-pair 100 W Category 5 Cabling. 2. TIA/EIA-568-A Additional Transmission Performance Specifications for 4-pair 100 W Enhanced Category 5 Cabling. 3. TSB72 - Centralized Optical Fiber Cabling Guidelines, October 1995. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions of terms are specified in Section 26 00 00. B. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the: 1. NEC: National Electrical Code. 2. IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. 3. ICEA: Insulated Cable Engineering Association. 4. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association. 5. ASTM: American Society of Testing Materials. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Furnish and install the complete wire can cable system. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with Sections 01 33 20 and 26 00 00. B. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer of Wire and Cable. 2. Insulation: a. Type. b. Voltage class. 3. American Wire Gauge size. 4. Conductor material. 5. Pulling compounds. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Show splice locations. D. Calculations: 1. Submit cable pulling calculations for all conductor sizes for pulling lengths longer than 1,000 feet. BC&A LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT AND CABLES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 19 - 3 E. Test Reports: 1. Submit test reports for meg-ohm tests. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURNACE A. As specified in Section 26 00 00 and as noted below. B. Furnish and install all wire and cable in conformance with the applicable standards. C. All wires and cables shall be UL listed and labeled. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 26 00 00. B. Provide new wires and cables manufactured within 1 year of the date of delivery to the site. C. Delivery conductors to the site in their original unbroken packages or on their original cable reels. D. Store conductors out of the weather and where not subject to physical or chemical damage. 1.8 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 26 00 00 and noted below. B. Provide a complete material and installation warranty, for all wires and cables, for a period of 2 years from substantial completion. 1. During the warranty period, replace any wire or cable found to be defective along with all other wires and cables in the raceway containing the defective wire or cable. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or Engineer approved equal: 1. 600 Volt Class wire and cable: a. General Cable. b. Okonite Company.. c. Rome Cable Corporation. d. Southwire Company. 2. Instrumentation Class wire and cable: a. Alpha Wire Company. b. Belden. c. General Cable BICC Brand. d. Okonite Company. e. Rockbestos Surprenant Cable Corporation. f. Rome Cable Corporation. 3. Network Cables: BC&A LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT AND CABLES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 19 - 4 a. Belden. b. General Cables. c. Lucent. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Conductors: 1. Copper per ASTM B3. 2. Minimum 97% conductivity. 2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. General: 1. Permanently mark each wire and cable with the following at 24-inch intervals. a. American Wire Gauge (AWG) size. b. Voltage rating. c. Insulation type. d. UL symbol. e. Month and year of manufacture. f. Manufacturer’s name. 2. Identify and mark wire and cable as specified in Section 26 05 53: a. Use integral color insulation for Number 2 AWG and smaller wire. b. Wrap colored tape around cable larger than Number 2 AWG. B. 600 Volt Class wire and cable: 1. Provide American Wire Gauge (AWG) or kcmil sizes as indicated on the Drawings or in the Conduit Schedules: a. when not indicated on the Drawings, size wire as follows: 1) In accordance with the National Electrical Code: a) Use 75°C ampacity ratings. b) Ampacity rating after all derating factors, equal to or greater than rating of the overcurrent device. 2) Provide Number 12 AWG minimum for power conductors. 3) Provide Number 14 AWG minimum for control conductors. 2. Provide Class B standing per ASTM B8: a. Provide Class C stranding where extra flexibility is required. 3. Insulation: a. THWN/THWN-2. b. 75°C/90°C rating in wet or dry locations, respectively. 4. Multi-conductor Cables: a. Number and size of conductors as indicated on the Drawings or in the Conduit Schedules. b. Individual conductors with THWN/THWN-2 insulation. c. Overall PVC jacket. d. Tray Cable rated. e. Color coding for control wire per ICEA Method 1, E-2. f. Ground conductor: Insulated, green: 1) Sized per NEC 250-122. BC&A LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT AND CABLES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 19 - 5 C. Instrumentation class cable: 1. Type TC. 2. Suitable for use in wet locations. 3. Voltage Rating: 600 volts. 4. Temperature Rating: 90° C wet or dry location. 5. Conductors: a. Insulation: 1) Flame-retardant PVC, 15 mils nominal thickness, with nylon jacket 4 mils nominal thickness. b. Number 16 AWG stranded and tinned. c. Color Code: 1) Pair: Black and white. 2) Triad: Black, white and red. 3) Multiple pairs or triads: a) Color-coded and numbered. 6. Drain Wire: a. 18 AWG. b. Stranded, tinned. 7. Jacket: a. Flame retardant, moisture and sunlight resistant PVC. b. Rip-cord laid longitudinally under jacket to facilitate removal. 8. Shielding: a. Individual pair-triad: 1) Minimum 1.35-mil double-faced aluminum foil-polyester tape overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage. b. Multiple Pair or Triad Shielding: 1) Group Shield: Minimum 1.35-mil double-faced aluminum foil/polyester tape overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage. 2) Completely isolate group shields from each other. 3) Cable Shield: 2.35 miles double-faced aluminum and synthetic polymer backed tape overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage. c. All shielding to be in contact with the drain wire. D. Network cables: 1. Category 6: a. Conductors: 1) 23 AWG solid bare annealed copper. b. Insulation: 1) Polyolefin. 2) 4 twisted pairs. c. Color code: 1) Blue-Blue/White. 2) Orange-Orange/White. 3) Green-Green/White. 4) Brown-Brown/White. d. Outer jacket: 1) PVC with ripcord. e. Electrical characteristics: 1) Frequency range: 1-600 MHz. BC&A LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT AND CABLES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 19 - 6 2) Attenuation: 51.4 dB. 3) Power sum NEXT: 32.6 dB. 4) Attenuation to Crosstalk ratio: 0.0 dB. 5) Equal Level Far-End Crosstalk (ELFEXT): 15.2 dB. 6) Power-sum ELFEXT: 15.2 dB. 7) Return loss: 17.6 dB. 8) Propagation delay: 548 nanoseconds. 9) Delay skew; 50 nanoseconds. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Wire Ties: 1. One of the following or equal: a. T&B “Ty-Rap” cable ties. b. Panduit cable ties. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Assembly and testing of cable shall comply with the applicable requirements of ICEA publication No. S-68-516. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Color Coding: 1. Color coding shall be consistent throughout the facility. 2. The following color code shall be followed for all 240/120 Volt and 208/120 Volt systems: a. Phase A – Black. b. Phase B – Red. c. Phase C – Blue. d. Single Phase System – Black for one hot leg, red for the other. e. Neutral – White. f. Equipment Ground – Green. 3. The following color code shall be followed for all 480/277 Volt systems: a. Phase A – Brown. b. Phase B – Orange. c. Phase C – Yellow. d. Neutral – Gray or White. e. Equipment Ground – Green. 4. The following color code shall be followed for all 120 VAC control wiring: a. Power – Red. b. Neutral – White. 5. The following color code shall be followed for all general purpose DC control circuits: a. Negative – Tan. b. Positive – Pink. 6. Switch legs shall be violet. Three-way switch runners shall be pink. BC&A LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT AND CABLES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 19 - 7 7. Wires in intrinsically safe circuits shall be light blue. 8. Wire colors shall be implemented in the following methods: a. Wires manufactured of the designed color. B. Install conductors only after the conduit installation is complete, and all enclosures have been vacuumed clean, and the affected conduits have been swabbed clean and dry. 1. Install wires only in approved raceways. 2. Do not install wire: a. In incomplete conduit runs.. b. Until after the concrete work and plastering is completed. C. Properly coat wires and cables with pulling compound before pulling into conduits and prevent mechanical damage to conductors during installation: 1. For all Number 4 AWG and larger, use an approved wire-pulling lubricant while cable is being installed in conduit: a. Ideal products. b. Polywater products. c. 3M Products. d. Greenlee products. e. Or equal as recommended by cable Manufacturer. f. Do not use oil, grease, or similar substances. D. Cable pulling: 1. For cables Number 1 AWG and smaller, install cables by hand. 2. For cables larger than Number 1 AWG, power pulling winches may be used if they have cable tension monitoring equipment. 3. Provide documentation that maximum installed cable tension is no more than 75 percent of the maximum recommended level as published by the cable Manufacturer. If exceeded, the Engineer may, at his discretion, require replacement of the cable. 4. Where approved by Engineer, make splices where cable pulling tension or sidewall pressure exceeds Manufacturer recommendation for the specified cable size: a. Make splices in manholes or pull boxes only. b. Leave sufficient slack to make proper connections. E. Use smooth-rolling sheaves and rollers when pulling cable into cable tray to keep pulling tension and bending radius within Manufacturer’s recommendations. F. Install and terminate al wire n accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations. G. Neatly arrange and lace conductors in all switchboards, panelboards, pull boxes, and terminal cabinets by means of wire tires: 1. Do not lace wires in gutter or panel channel. 2. Install all wire ties with a flush cutting wire tie installation tool: a. Use a tool with an adjustable tension setting. 3. Do not leave sharp edges on wire ties. H. Terminate solid conductors at equipment terminal screws with conductor tightly wound around the screw so that it does not protrude beyond the screw head: 1. Wrap the conductor clockwise so that the wire loop is closed as the loop is tightened. BC&A LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT AND CABLES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 19 - 8 2. Do not use crimp lugs on solid wire. I. Terminate stranded conductors on equipment box lugs such that all conductor strands are confined within the lug: 1. Use ring type lugs if box lugs are not available on the equipment. J. Provide continuous circuits from origin to termination whenever possible: 1. Except for Number 10 AWG and smaller conductors in lighting and receptacle circuits. K. Splices: 1. Except for Number 10 AWG and smaller conductors in lighting and receptacle circuits. 2. Where splices are necessary because of extremely long wire or cable lengths that exceed standard manufactured lengths, make said splices in labeled junction boxes for power conductor or termination cabinets for control and instrument conductors. 3. Power and control conductors routed in common raceways may be spliced in common junction boxes. 4. Install NEMA 4X junction and terminal boxes in wet and outdoor locations. Clearly label junction and terminal boxes containing splices with the word “SPLICE”. 5. Leave sufficient slack at junction boxes and termination boxes to make proper splices and connections. Do not pull splices into conduits. 6. Install splices with compression type butt splices and insulate using a heat-shrink sleeve: a. In wet areas, provide heat-shrink sleeves that are listed for submersible applications. 7. Splices in below grade pull boxes, in any box subject to flooding, and in wet areas shall be made watertight using: a. In wet areas, provide heat-shrink sleeves that are listed for submersible. L. Terminations (600 Volt or Less): 1. Terminate control and instrument conductors on terminal boards with set-screw pressure connectors, with spade or ring lug connectors. M. Apply wire markers to all wires at each end after being installed in the conduit and before meg-ohm testing and termination. N. Do not use common neutrals for any lighting circuits or receptacle circuits: 1. Use a separate neutral for each phase circuit. O. Instrumentation Class Cable: 1. Install instrumentation class cables in separate raceway systems from power cables: a. Install instrument cable in metallic conduit within non-dedicated manholes or pull boxes. b. Install cable without splices between instruments or between field devices and instrument enclosures or panels. 2. Do not make intermediate terminations, except in designated terminal boxes as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Ground cable shields at only one location, not at field instruments. P. Multi-conductor Cable: BC&A LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT AND CABLES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 19 - 9 1. Where cable is not routed in conduit with a separate ground conductor, use one conductor in the cable as a ground conductor: a. Use an internal ground conductor, if it is no smaller than as indicated on the Drawings, and meets NEC requirements for equipment ground conductor size. b. Where two parallel cables are used, and the internal ground conductor in each cable does not meet NEC requirements for the combined circuit, use 4- conductor cable, with one of the full-sized conductors serving as ground. Q. LAN Cable Testing: 1. Testing scope: Test all installed LAN cables. 2. Test plan and witnessing: Obtain Engineer’s approval for the test procedures as part of the submittal process. Arrange for the Engineer to witness all testing. Submit a request for witness 15 days (minimum) before the proposed test date. 3. Pre-testing: a. Test individual cables before installation. 1) Before physical placement of the cable, the installer shall test each cable while on the spool with a LAN certification test device. 2) Before the cable is installed, the installer shall check that the cable conforms to the Manufacturer’s attenuation specification and that no damage has been done to the cable during shipping or handling. 3) The test shall be fully documents and the results submitted to the Engineer, including a hard copy of all the traces, before placement of the cable. 4) The Engineer shall be notified if a cable fails to meet specification and the cable shall not be installed unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. 4. Test Equipment: a. LAN certification equipment used for the testing shall be capable of testing Category 6 cable installation to TIA proposed Level III accuracy. Tests performed shall include: 1) Near End Cross Talk 2) Attenuation 3) Equal Level Far End Cross Talk 4) Return Loss 5) Ambient Noise 6) Effective Cable length 7) Propagation Delay 8) Continuity/Loop Resistance b. LAN certification test equipment shall be able to store and produce plots of the test results. c. Manufacturers – One of the following: 1) Agilent Technologies, WireScope 350. 2) Or approved equal. R. Signal cable: 1. Separate and isolate electrical signal cables from sources of electrical noise and power cables by minimum 12 inches. BC&A LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT AND CABLES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 19 - 10 S. Submersible cable in wet wells: 1. Provide Kellem’s grip or stainless steel wire mesh to support cable weight and avoid stress on insulation. T. Wiring Allowances: 1. Equipment locations may vary slightly from the drawings. Include an allowance for necessary conductor and terminations for motorized equipment, electrical outlets, fixtures, communication outlets, instruments, and devices within 10 linear feet of locations indicated on the Drawings. 2. Locations for pull boxes, manholes, and duct banks may vary slightly from the drawings. Include an allowance for necessary conductors and related materials to provide conductors to all pull boxes, manholes, and duct banks within 20 linear feet of locations indicated on the Drawings. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: As specified in Section 26 08 00. B. Grounding: 1. As per Section 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GROUNDING AND BONDING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 26 - 1 SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International. B. Code of Federal Regulations. C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. D. International Electrical Testing Association, NETA. E. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. F. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 1.3 SUMMARY A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 26 Section “Electrical General Provisions”. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with Sections 01 33 20 and 26 00 00. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. C. Other Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of the test wells. D. Qualification Data: 1. Submit a written resume for the individual who will perform the grounding tests detailing experience and qualifications. 2. Submit detailed information concerning test instrument, and tester’s qualifications to perform the specified tests. E. Field quality-control test reports. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GROUNDING AND BONDING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 26 - 2 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Perform work to meet the requirements of legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with the latest editions, amendments, practices, and rulings of the following documents and organizations, except where these specifications and the drawings are more stringent: 1. American National Standards Institute 2. National Electrical Code Article 250 3. Local and State Codes. 4. IEEE 81. C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Conductor shall be sized in accordance with the National Electrical Code article 250.66 except where these specifications or the drawings are more stringent. 4. Bonding Conductors and Bonding Jumpers: Shall be sized in accordance with the National Electrical Code article 250 except where these specifications or the drawings are more stringent. 2.2 CONNECTORS A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type, with at least two bolts. 1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe. C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. D. Compression Connectors: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GROUNDING AND BONDING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 26 - 3 1. Made of high copper alloy and manufactured specifically for the particular grounding application. 2. Suitable for direct burial in earth and concrete. 3. Identifying compression die number inscription to be impressed on compression fitting. 2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch in diameter by 8 feet in length. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum or as indicated on the drawings. 1. Bury at least 36 inches below grade. 2. Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches above duct bank when indicated as part of duct-bank installation. B. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. 3.2 GROUNDING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements. B. Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install two ground rods and ground ring around the pad. Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items associated with substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes. Install copper conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for ground ring and for taps to equipment grounding terminals. Bury ground ring not less than 6 inches from the foundation. 3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits. B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: 1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GROUNDING AND BONDING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 26 - 4 7. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar terminal on busway. 8. Computer and Rack-Mounted Electronic Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in branch-circuit runs from equipment-area power panels and power-distribution units. C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct- mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping. D. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components. E. Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location. 1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch grounding bus. 2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating, if any. 2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor. C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GROUNDING AND BONDING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 26 - 5 1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes, using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. 2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. 3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. E. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity. F. Ground Ring: Install as shown on Drawings. G. Ufer Ground (Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode): Install as shown on Drawings. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Qualified individual shall perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground - resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test wells, and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected. a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81. 3. Prepare dimensioned drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results. B. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: 1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms. C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Engineer promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GROUNDING AND BONDING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 26 - 6 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 33 - 1 SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute. B. ASTM International. C. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association. E. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. F. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 1.3 SUMMARY A. This Section Includes: 1. Outlet boxes and covers. 2. Conduit bodies. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 26 Section “Electrical General Provisions”. 2. Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the Contractor and its Sub-Contractors to review all sections to insure a complete and coordinated project. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the: 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. 2. National Fire Protection Association. a. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide outlet boxes for all devices such as switches, receptacles, telephones, computer terminals, security systems etc. Materials shall be suitable for environmental conditions at the location of the box. 1. Dry. 2. Wet. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 33 - 2 3. Water -tight. 4. Corrosive. B. Locate outlet boxes as indicated on the drawings. Adjust locations so as not to conflict with structural requirements or other trades. C. All spare and/or empty conduits must terminate in an outlet box. D. Provide conduit bodies as shown on the plans or as needed to complete the conduit installation. E. Provide conduit bodies as needed to facilitate wire pulling or whenever the total amount of bends in a conduit run exceeds 270 degrees as specified in Section 26 05 34 “Conduits”. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with Sections 01 33 20 and 26 00 00. B. Product Data: 1. Furnish complete manufacturer’s catalog sheets for each product to be used on this project. 2. Furnish complete manufacturer’s recommended special tools to be used for installation if required. C. As-built Drawings: 1. Structural members in the paths of conduit groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in the paths of conduit groups with common supports. 3. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 4. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. D. Source quality-control test reports. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Regulatory Requirements 1. Outlet boxes must comply with all applicable standards of the: a. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. b. National Electrical Manufacturers Association. c. Underwriters Laboratories. d. Joint Industry Conference. C. Codes and Standards 1. Cast metal boxes. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 33 - 3 a. UL Standard 498 and 514. b. Federal Specification No. W-C-586B. 2. Malleable iron boxes. a. ASTM A47-77 Grade 32510 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUIT BODIES, BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Metal Boxes: a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc. b. EGS/Appleton Electric. c. Hoffman. d. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 2. Plastic and/or fiberglass boxes: a. Hoffman. b. Carlon 3. Plastic coated steel boxes: a. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division. b. OCAL – Blue, Thomas & Betts Corporation. 4. Cast device boxes: a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc. b. EGS/Appleton Electric. B. Pressed Steel Boxes 1. 1-piece galvanized pressed steel. 2. Knockout type boxes. 3. Minimum size 4" square by 2-1/8" deep. 4. In dry heated areas requiring NEMA 1 enclosures unless otherwise indicated or required. 5. Solid type gang boxes: a. For more than 2 devices. b. For barriered outlets. C. Concrete Boxes 1. For outlets in concrete construction. 2. Pressed steel construction, concrete tight. 3. Knockout size range 1/2" to 1". 4. Depth as needed. 5. Types: a. 4" octagon b. 4" octagon ceiling boxes with hanging bars. c. Gangable masonry boxes: 1) 3-1/2" deep, 3-3/4" high, length as required. a) 2-1/2" deep boxes may be used where wall thickness precludes the use of the deeper boxes. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 33 - 4 2) With partitions as needed. D. Threaded-Hub Boxes 1. Use deep threaded-hub malleable iron or aluminum boxes: a. Where legally required. b. Where exposed to the weather. c. In unheated areas. d. Where subject to mechanical injury. 1) Here defined as exposed boxes less than 10 (ten) feet above the floor in areas accessible to anyone other than authorized operating or maintenance personnel. e. To act as a pull box for conductors in a conduit system. f. Accommodate wiring devices. 2. Cast conduit fittings may be used instead of boxes, except where boxes contain devices. 3. Construction: a. Each box shall contain an internal green ground screw. b. Each box shall be furnished with a suitable gasketed cover. c. With integral cast mounting lugs when surface mounted. d. Conduit size range from 1/2" to 1". e. Tapered threaded hubs with integral bushing. 4. Aluminum boxes shall be high strength copper free 4/10 of 1% max. alloy use with aluminum rigid conduit. E. Plastic Coated Threaded-Hub Boxes 1. Use deep threaded-hub plastic coated malleable iron boxes in corrosive and NEMA 4X area or when the conduit system is type PCS. a. Where legally required. b. Where exposed to the weather. c. In unheated areas. d. Where subject to mechanical injury. 1) Here defined as exposed boxes less than 10 (ten) feet above the floor in areas accessible to anyone other than authorized operating or maintenance personnel. e. To act as a pull box for conductors in a conduit system. f. Accommodate wiring devices. g. Tapered threaded hubs with integral bushing. 2. Cast conduit fittings may be used instead of boxes, except where boxes contain devices. 3. Construction: a. Each box shall contain an internal green ground screw. b. Each box shall be furnished with a suitable gasketed cover. c. With integral cast mounting lugs when surface mounted. d. Conduit size range from 1/2" to 1". e. Double coated with a nominal 0.002" (2 mil) urethane on both the interior and exterior prior to application of PVC coating. f. With a minimum 0.040" (40 mil) PVC coating bonded to exterior g. With pressure sealing sleeve to protect the connection with conduit. F. Conduit Bodies BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 33 - 5 1. Material consistent with conduit type: a. Cast iron bodies and covers with type GRC. b. Cast aluminum bodies and covers with type RAC. c. PVC bodies with PVC conduit. d. PVC coated cast iron bodies and covers with type PCS. e. Cast iron or aluminum bodies with pressed steel or aluminum covers with EMT conduit. 2. Mogul design conforming to NEC requirements for bending space for large conductors for trade sizes of 1" and larger with conductors #4 AWG and larger, or where required for wire bending space. 3. Gasketed covers attached to bodies with stainless steel screws secured to threaded holes in conduit body. 4. PVC coated cast iron conduit bodies and covers: a. Bodies prior to coating shall meet requirements for cast iron conduit bodies. b. 0.040 inch exterior PVC coating and 0.002 inch interior urethane coating as required for type PCS conduit and fittings. c. Utilize the PVC coating as an integral part of the gasket design. d. Stainless steel cover screws heads shall be encapsulated with plastic to assure corrosion protection. e. As manufactured by: 1) Robroy REDH2OT form 8 and mogul. 2) OCAL Blue form 8 and mogul. 5. PVC conduit bodies and covers as manufactured by Carlon. 6. Cast iron and cast aluminum bodies and covers as manufactured by: a. Appleton FM8 and mogul. b. Crouse-Hinds form 8 and mogul. G. PVC Molded Junction Boxes 1. Boxes such as: FSE, FSC, FSS, FSCC, etc. will be allowed and compression type splices only may be made in these enclosures. a. Integral mounting feet for surface mounting b. Molded plastic hubs for solvent welded conduit terminations. c. Conduit range 1/2" to 1". d. With gasketed covers and stainless steel attachment screws. e. As manufactured by: 1) Carlon. 2) P W Pipe 2. PVC molded conduit bodies such as: T, LL, LR, LB, C, E, X, etc. will be allowed; however, no splices may be made in these conduit bodies. a. Molded plastic hubs for solvent welded conduit terminations. b. Conduit range 1/2" to 2". 1) Type LB up to 4" 3. With gasketed covers and stainless steel attachment screws. 4. As manufactured by: a. Carlon. b. P W Pipe H. Fiberglass Boxes 1. NEMA 4X, watertight, dust tight, corrosion-resistant, use only with PVC conduit. 2. Constructed of molded fiberglass reinforced polyester. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 33 - 6 3. Integral neoprene gasket on cover attached with an oil- resistant adhesive. 4. Enclosures to have internal pads for mounting optional panels and terminal kits. 5. Covers: a. Screw cover enclosures 1) Covers held in place with captive, stainless steel or monel screws. 2) Covers attached to body with internal zinc-plated steel hinges. b. Quick release latches covers 1) Corrosion resistant fiberglass hinges 2) Spring loaded fiberglass latches with a monel or stainless steel bail attached with monel or stainless steel screws. 3) With a 316 stainless steel padlock hasp. 6. With external mounting feet. 7. Meeting the following minimum standards and tests: a. Physical Property Value ASTM Method b. Flexural Strength 12,000 PSI D-790 c. Heat Distortion 400°F D-648 d. Water Absorption (24hrs) 0.5% D-570 e. Tensile Strength 5000PSI D-651 f. Specific Gravity 1.8 D-792 g. Flammability 94V-0 UL-94 h. Dielectric Strength 400 V.P.M D-149 i. Arc Resistance 180 Sec D-495 8. All boxes to be supported with a minimum of 0.25” air space between the enclosure and supporting surface. 9. As manufactured by: a. Hoffman Engineering TYPE JFG. b. Stahlin TYPE CL. I. Formed Steel Enclosures Usage Designed to house electrical controls, terminals, and any other devices 1. Steel: a. NEMA 12. b. Fabricated from 14 gauge steel. c. All seams continuously welded ground smooth. d. Door shall have a rolled lip around three sides. 1) Attached to enclosure by means of a continuous stainless steel hinge and pin. e. Neoprene door gasket to provide a watertight seal: 1) Attached with an adhesive. 2) Retained by a retaining strip. f. All external removable hardware shall be fabricated from heavy gauge steel and zinc plated which shall clamp the door to the enclosure body. g. With a hasp and staple for padlocking. h. With a removable print pocket. i. Internal panels: 1) With plated steel shoulder studs for mounting an internal panel. 2) Mounting panels shall be steel. j. Large enclosures shall have door and body stiffeners for extra rigidity. k. With no holes or knockouts. l. Finish: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 33 - 7 1) ANSI-61 gray electrostatically applied polyester powder inside and out over phosphatized surfaces. 2) White electrostatically applied polyester powder mounting plate. m. Heavy gauge steel external mounting brackets when surface mounted. n. Floor stand kit when shown: 1) Fabricated from 12 gauge steel. 2) Bottom plate 11 gauge. 3) Heights: a) 6". b) 12". c) 18". d) 24". 4) When a floor stand kit is used the box shall not have any external mounting brackets. o. As manufactured by: 1) Hoffman. 2) Thomas & Betts. 3) Stahlin. 4) Rittal. 2. Stainless Steel: a. NEMA 4, NEMA 4X. b. Fabricated from 14 gauge type 304 stainless steel. c. All seams continuously welded. d. Door shall have a rolled lip around three sides: 1) Attached to enclosure by means of a continuous stainless steel hinge and pin. e. Neoprene door gasket to provide a watertight seal: 1) Attached with an adhesive. 2) Retained by a retaining strip. f. All external removable hardware shall be fabricated from heavy gauge stainless steel which shall clamp the door to the enclosure body. g. With a hasp and staple for padlocking. h. With a removable print pocket. i. Internal panels 1) With stainless steel shoulder studs for mounting an internal panel. 2) Mounting panels shall be stainless steel. j. Large enclosures shall have door and body stiffeners for extra rigidity. k. With no holes or knockouts. l. Finish: 1) Brushed. m. Stainless steel external mounting brackets when surface mounted n. Floor stand kit when shown: 1) Fabricated from 12 gauge stainless steel. 2) Bottom plate 11 gauge. 3) Heights: a) 6". b) 12". c) 18". d) 24". BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 33 - 8 4) When a floor stand kit is used the box shall not have any external mounting brackets. o. As manufactured by: 1) Hoffman. 2) Thomas & Betts. 3) Stahlin. 4) Rittal. J. Cast Iron Junction Boxes 1. NEMA 4. 2. Recessed cover boxes. 3. Suitable for use outdoors where subject to rain, dripping, or splashing water. 4. Designed for flush mounting in walls or floors. a. Can be surface mounded using mounting lugs. 5. Construction: a. Cast iron box b. Covers 1) Checkered plate covers suitable for foot traffic. 2) When used in areas subject to vehicular traffic H-20 loading. c. Hot dip galvanized. d. Neoprene gasket. e. Stainless steel screw covers. 6. As manufactured by: a. Floor boxes shall be OZ Gedney Type YR or approved equal. b. Surface boxes shall be OZ Gedney type YL or YF, or approved equal. K. Boxes Serving Fixtures or Devices 1. Use as pull boxes wherever possible. L. In Finished Areas 1. Provide specific pull or junction boxes only as indicated or directed. M. Floor type outlet boxes shall be watertight cast iron, semi adjustable. 1. Hubbell Type B25 with S2530 cover plate. 2. Telephone outlets shall be fitted with six (6) inch bushed nipples. 3. Floor outlets in open areas for service to desks shall be similar except that the Contractor shall provide pedestal housing. a. Hubbell SC-3098 with plate SS-309-D for power. b. Hubbell SC-3098 with plate SS-309-T for telephone. N. Outlet boxes shall be used as junction boxes wherever possible. O. Where separate pullboxes are required, they shall have screw covers. P. Outdoor boxes shall be galvanized and provided with gasketed covers and threaded hubs. Q. Indoor boxes shall be painted, in accordance with and as identified in the painting schedule. R. For Boxes Not Indicated BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 33 - 9 1. Provide types and mountings as required to suit the equipment and that will be consistent with the conduit system used or as directed. 2. Outlet, switch, and junction boxes for flush-mounting in general purpose locations shall be one-piece, galvanized, pressed steel. 3. Ceiling boxes for flush mounting in concrete shall be deep, galvanized, pressed steel. 4. Outlet, switch, and junction boxes where surface mounted in exposed locations shall be cast ferrous boxes with mounting lugs, zinc or cadmium plating, and enamel finish. 5. Surface mounted boxes in concealed locations may be pressed steel. 6. Outlet, control station, and junction boxes, including covers, for installation in corrosive locations shall be fiberglass reinforced polyester, stainless steel, or plastic coated steel to match the conduit system, and shall be furnished with mounting lugs. 7. All cast boxes and pressed steel boxes for flush-mounting in concrete shall be fitted with cast, malleable box covers and gaskets. 8. Boxes for installation in plastered areas shall be stainless steel over plaster rings. S. Recessed Boxes 1. Support recessed boxes in suspended ceilings or stud partitions with galvanized steel box hangers of types made specifically for the purpose or attach directly to wood members or blocking. 2. Secure hangers or boxes to wood with 1" long cadmium-plated Type A pan head screws. Fully or partially hammer-driven screws are not acceptable. 2.2 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING A. Description: Comply with SCTE 77. 1. Color of Frame and Cover: Gray. 2. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have [open] [closed] [integral closed] bottom, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure. 4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC" or "TELEPHONE" as required for each service. 6. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a combination of the two. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. c. CDR Systems Corporation. d. NewBasis. C. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Frame and Cover: Sheet-molded, fiberglass-reinforced, polyester-resin enclosure joined to polymer-concrete top ring or frame. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 33 - 10 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. c. Christy Concrete Products. d. Synertech Moulded Products, Inc.; a division of Oldcastle Precast. D. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes: Molded of fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, with covers of fiberglass. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Carson Industries LLC. b. Christy Concrete Products. c. Nordic Fiberglass, Inc. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES A. Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied. 1. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional Engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer. 2. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATON A. Apply conduit bodies and boxes as required by NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code. B. NEMA classification for boxes in specific areas are as specified in section 26 00 00 “Electrical General Provisions”. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Where Engineer's documents do not dictate location or control, consult with the trades concerned so that outlets may be symmetrically placed in the finished module. B. Center outlets horizontally in vertical wall panels and vertically in masonry courses. C. Use plastic boxes in corrosive areas where the conduit system specified is PVC. D. In general, boxes shall conform to same materials as conduit system specified. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 33 - 11 E. All boxes and or devices mounted on walls of areas classified as wet or corrosive shall be supported so as to maintain a minimum of 0.25" free air space between the back of the enclosure and the wall. 1. Use machined spacers to maintain air space, built-up washers are not acceptable. 2. Use stainless steel, steel that is completely electro-galvanized, or nylon materials for spacers. F. Use cast malleable iron boxes when box must support other devices. G. Use plastic coated malleable iron boxes when used with PVC jacketed rigid steel conduit. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth. C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade. D. Install handholes and boxes with bottom below the frost line, 30-inches below grade. E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve adequate Working clearances in the enclosure. F. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 33 - 12 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CONDUITS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 34 - 1 SECTION 26 05 34 CONDUITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI C80.1 – Rigid Steel Conduit – Zinc Coated. 2. ANSI C80.3 – Electrical Metallic Tubing – Zinc Coated. B. ASTM International. C. International Organization for Standardization. D. National Electrical Contractors Association. E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA RN-1 – Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Steel Conduit. 2. NEMA TC2 – Electrical Plastic Tubing and Conduit. 3. NEMA TC3 – PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing. 4. NEMA TC13 – Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing. F. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code: a. Table 300.5 – Minimum Cover Requirements (0 to 600 volts, Nominal) b. Table 300.50 – Minimum Cover Requirements (over 600 volts, Nominal) c. Article 344 – Rigid Metal Conduit (RMC). d. Article 348 – Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC). e. Article 350 – Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC) f. Article 352 – Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit (PVC). g. Article 356 - Liquidtight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit (LFNC). h. Article 358 – Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) i. Article 360 – Flexible Metallic Tubing (FMT). j. Article 362 – Flexible Non-metallic Tubing (ENT). k. Article 500 – Hazardous (Classified) Locations. G. Society of Cable Telecommunication Engineers. H. Underwriters Laboratories Inc: 1. UL 1 – Standard for Safety for Flexible Metal Conduit. 2. UL 6 – Standard for Safety for Rigid Metal Conduit. 3. UL 360 – Standard for Safety for Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CONDUITS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 34 - 2 4. UL 651 – Standard for Safety for Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit. 5. UL 1660 – Standard for Safety for Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit. 6. UL 1653 – Standard for Safety for Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing. 7. UL 94VO – Standard for Vertical Flame Test. 1.3 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Conduits: a. Metallic Conduits: 1) Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit (GRC). 2) Polyvinyl Chloride Coated Rigid Steel Conduit (PCS). 3) Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC). 4) Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC). b. Non-metallic Conduits. 1) Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit (PVC). 2) Electrical Non-metallic Tubing (ENT). 3) Liquidtight Flexible non-metallic (LFNC). 2. Conduit fittings and accessories. 3. Conduit installation. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 26 00 00 “Electrical General Provisions”. 2. Section 26 05 33 “Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems”. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions of terms are specified in Section 26 00 00 and noted herein. B. Abbreviations: 1. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. 2. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 3. FMC: Flexible metal conduit. 4. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit. 5. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 6. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber. 7. PCS: PVC coated rigid Steel Conduit. 8. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride rigid nonmetallic conduit. C. Conduit Bodies: 1. A separate portion of a conduit system that provides access through a removable cover to the interior of the system at a junction of two or more sections of the system. Includes, but not limited to: shapes – C, E, LB, T, X, etc. D. Conduit Fitting: 1. An accessory that serves primarily a mechanical purpose. Includes, but not limited to: bushings, locknuts, hubs, couplings, reducers, etc. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CONDUITS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 34 - 3 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Furnish and install conduits, conduit bodies, fittings, junction boxes and all necessary components, whether or not indicated on the Drawings, as required, to install a complete electrical raceway system. B. The Electrical Plans are Diagrammatic in Nature: 1. Changes in conduit locations that are consistent with the design intent but are dimensionally different, or routing to bypass obstructions which differ from what is indicated on the Drawings are not considered a deviation. 2. Relocation of electrical equipment that affects the conduit routing or changes in routing to bypass obstructions is not considered a change or deviation. 3. The Engineer shall be the sole source in determining whether the change is constituted as a deviation. 4. Any deviation requires Engineer’s approval. C. The Contractor shall bear the sole responsibility of any deviations in generation location, conduit size, routing, or changes to the conduit schedule without the express written approval or direction by the Engineer. 1. Any changes resulting in additional conduits, or extra work from such deviations performed by the Contractor. 2. Such deviations made by the Contractor shall be reflected on the Contractor supplied “As-built Drawings”. 3. Owner shall have the right to deduct the amount of applicable reimbursement, equivalent to the cost of the engineering effort required to show those unauthorized changes on Record Drawings. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with Sections 01 33 20 and 26 00 00. B. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets. 1. Furnish complete manufacturer’s catalog sheets for each product to be used on this project. 2. Furnish complete manufacturer’s recommended special tools to be used for installation if required. C. As-built Drawings: 1. Structural members in the paths of conduit groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in the paths of conduit groups with common supports. D. Source quality-control test reports. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CONDUITS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 34 - 4 B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING A. Do not expose type PVC, FRD, NFC and ENT to direct sunlight. B. Do not store conduit in direct contact with the ground. 1.9 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 26 00 00. 1.10 SEQUENCING A. Before installing any conduit or locating any device box. 1. Examine the complete set of Contract Drawings and Specifications, and all applicable shop Drawings. 2. Verify all dimensions and space requirements and make any minor adjustments to the conduit system as required to avoid conflicts with the building structure, other equipment, or the work of other trades. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Alflex Inc. 3. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 4. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 5. Electri-Flex Co. 6. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 7. Maverick Tube Corporation. 8. OCAL, Inc. 9. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal. 10. Perma Kote. 11. Robroy Industries. 12. Wheatland Tube Company. B. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Couplings (GRC): 1. Shall comply with the following standards: a. ANSI C80.1 Standard for Rigid Steel Conduit – Zinc Coated. b. UL-6 Safety Standard for Rigid Metal Conduit. 2. All threads: NPT standard conduit threads with a ¾-inch taper per foot: a. Running conduit threads are not acceptable. 3. Hot-dip galvanized inside and out, including threads, with chromate final coating.. a. Electro-galvanizing is not acceptable. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CONDUITS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 34 - 5 C. PVC-Coated Rigid Steel Conduit (PCS): 1. The steel conduit, before PVC coating, shall be new, unused, hot-dip galvanized material and shall conform to the requirements for type GRC. 2. Coated conduit conforms to NEMA Standard RN-1, the galvanized coating may not be disturbed or reduced in thickness during the cleaning and preparatory process. 3. Factory bonded PVC jacket of 0.040-inch minimum thickness. a. The conduit system to make use of pre-jacketed couplings, elbows etc. b. PVC coating on conduit and associated fittings shall have no sages, blisters, lumps, or other surface defects and shall be free of holes and holidays. 4. The PVC adhesive bond on conduit and fittings shall be greater than the tensile strength of the PVC plastic coating. Confirm bond by certified test results. 5. A urethane coating shall be uniformly and consistently applied to the interior of all conduit and fittings. This internal coating shall be a nominal thickness of 0.002 inch. Conduit having areas with thin or no coating shall be unacceptable. 6. The PVC exterior and urethane interior coatings applied to the conduit shall afford sufficient flexibility to permit field bending without cracking or flaking at temperature above 30 degrees Fahrenheit (-1 degrees Celsius). 7. The conduit threads shall be hot-dip galvanized or shall be galvanized after fabrication and coating of the conduit using a method that ensures complete coverage and heats the zinc and steel to a temperature that ensures the zinc alloys with the steel over the entire surface. All threads shall be coated with urethane. 8. The exterior galvanized surfaces shall be coated with primer before PVC coating to ensure a bond between the zinc substrate and the PVC coating. 9. Nominal thickness of the exterior PVC coating shall be 0.040 inches thick except where part configuration or application of the piece dictated otherwise. 10. PCS Couplings: a. The conduit coupling, before plastic coating, shall be new, unused material and shall conform to appropriate UL standards. b. The PVC Coating on the outside of conduit couplings shall be 0.040 inches thick and have a series of longitudinal ribs to protect the coating from tool damage during installation. c. A PVC sleeve extending 1 pipe diameter or 2 inches, whichever is less, shall be formed at each female conduit opening of the couplings. 11. The exterior PVC coating and the interior urethane coatings shall be factory supplied by the same manufacturer. D. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): ANSI C80.3. 1. Minimum size ¾-inch. E. Liquid Tight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC): 1. Conforms to the following standards: a. UL 360. 2. Available in the following configurations: a. General Purpose: 1) Temperature range -20 degrees Celsius to +80 degrees Celsius. b. Oil Resistant: 1) Temperature range -20 degrees Celsius to +60 degrees Celsius. c. Computer Room: 1) Temperature range -20 degrees Celsius to +80 degrees Celsius. d. Temperature rated. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CONDUITS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 34 - 6 3. Sunlight resistant, weatherproof, and watertight. 4. Manufactured from single strip steel, hot dip galvanized on all four sides before conduit fabrication. 5. Strip steel spiral wound resulting in an interior that is smooth and clean for easy wire pulling. 6. With an overall polyvinyl chloride jacket. 7. With integral copper ground wire, built in the core, in conduit trade sizes ½-inch through 1-1/4-inch. 8. Minimum size ½-inch. F. Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC) 1. Materials: a. Single strip steel hot-dip galvanized on all four sides before conduit fabrication. b. Full wall: 1) Reduced wall thickness not allowed. 2. Interlocking design formed from continuous metal strip for integrity and flexibility. 3. UL conduits through penetration fire wall rating: a. 3-hour rated for steel. b. 2-hour rated for aluminum. 4. UL rated for Cable Tray and Environmental Air-Handling Space requirements. 5. Minimum size ¾-inch. G. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed. 1. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit Expansion Fitting for Exposed Locations: a. Suitable for use with conduit system being used. 2. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit Expansion Fittings at Structural Exposed Joints: a. Suitable for use with conduit system being used. 3. Conduit Sleeve: a. Suitable for use with conduit system being used. 4. Conduit Seals: a. Installed at locations as indicated on the Drawings, in the specifications and as required by NEC. b. Suitable for use with conduit system being used. 5. Conduit Thru-wall Seals: a. Installed at locations as indicated on the Drawings, in the specifications and as required by NEC. b. Suitable for use with conduit system being used. 6. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886. 7. Fittings for EMT: Set-screw or compression type. 8. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness, 0.040 inch, with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints. 2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CONDUITS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 34 - 7 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 3. Arnco Corporation. 4. CANTEX Inc. 5. CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group. 6. Condux International, Inc. 7. ElecSYS, Inc. 8. Electri-Flex Co. 9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 10. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 11. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 12. Thomas & Betts Corporation. B. Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit (PVC): 1. Shall be NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Rated for 90 degrees Celsius conductors or cable C. Liquidtight Flexible Non-metallic Conduit (LFNC): 1. Provide liquid-tight and corrosion resistant flexible-non-metallic conduit and fittings. 2. Fabricated from a hard PVC spiral completely surrounded by flexible PVC: a. UL listed for sunlight resistance. b. Suitable for use at conduit temperatures of 80 degrees Celsius dry, 60 degrees Celsius wet and 60 degrees Celsius oil resistant. 3. Temperature Range -20 degrees Celsius to +80 degrees Celsius. D. Electrical Non-metallic Tubing (ENT): 1. Corrugated thermoplastic construction. 2. Trades sizes ½-inch through 2-inch. E. Fittings: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Connectors and Fittings: 1. Manufactured with compatible materials to the corresponding conduit. B. Insulated Throat Metallic Bushings: 1. Construction: a. Malleable iron or zinc plated steel when used with steel conduit, with a positive metallic conduit end stop. b. Integrally molded non-combustible phenolic insulated surfaces rated 150 degrees Celsius. c. Use fully insulated bushings on non-metallic conduit system made of high impact 150 degrees Celsius rated non-combustible thermosetting phenolic. C. Insulated Grounding Bushings: 1. Construction: a. Malleable iron or steel, zinc plated, with a positive metallic end stop. b. Integrally molded non-combustible phenolic insulated surfaces rated 150 degrees Celsius. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CONDUITS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 34 - 8 c. Tin plated copper grounding saddle for use with copper or aluminum conductions. D. Electrical Unions (Erickson Couplings): 1. Construction: a. Malleable iron hot dip galvanized for use with steel conduit. b. Aluminum for use with aluminum conduit. c. Concrete tight, 3-piece construction. d. Rated for Class 1 Division Group D I hazardous areas. E. PVC Coated Rigid Steel Conduit (PCS) Fittings: 1. All hollow conduit fittings, which serve as part of the PCS conduit system must be coated with an exterior PVC coating and interior urethane coating as described for the conduit. 2. The conduit fitting, before plastic coating, shall be new, unused material and shall conform to appropriate UL standards. 3. A PVC sleeve extending one pipe diameter or two inches, whichever is less, shall be formed at every female conduit opening on fittings except unions. The inside diameter of the sleeve shall be the same as the outside diameter of the conduit to be used. 4. Flexible overlapping sleeves on all hubs and couplings shall provide a vapor and moisture tight seal at every connection. F. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC) Fittings: 1. Construction: a. Malleable iron hot dip galvanized. b. Furnished with locknut and sealing ring. c. Liquidtight, rain-tight, oil-tight. d. Insulated throat. e. Furnish as straight, 45 degree elbows and 90 degree elbows. f. Designed to prevent sleeving: 1) Verify complete bonding of the raceway jacket to the plastic gasket seal. g. Equipped with grounding device to provide ground continuity irrespective of raceway core construction. Grounding device if inserted into raceway and directly in contact with conductors shall have rolled over edges for sizes under 5 inches. h. Where terminated into a threadless opening using a threaded hub fitting, a suitable moisture resistant/oil resistant synthetic rubber gasket shall be provided between the outside of the box or enclosure and the fitting shoulder. Gasket shall be adequately protected by and permanently bonded to a metallic retainer. G. Corrosion Resistant and Outdoor Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC) Fittings: 1. Construction: a. PVC coated liquid-tight fittings with a bonded 0.04 inch thick PVC coating on the metal connector to form a seal around the SLT conduits. b. Connectors shall have an insulated throat and an integral sealing ring. H. Hubs for Threaded Attachment of Steel Conduit to Sheet Metal Enclosures: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CONDUITS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 34 - 9 1. Construction: a. Shall have an insulated throat. b. When used in corrosive areas shall be PVC coated. c. Bonding locknut. d. Recessed neoprene o-ring to assure watertight and dust tight connector. e. 1/2-inch through 1-1/4-inch steel zinc electroplated. f. 1-1/2-inch through 6-inch malleable iron zinc plated. g. Aluminum with aluminum conduit. 2. Usage: a. All conduits in damp, wet, outdoor, and corrosive areas shall use threaded hubs for connections to sheet metal enclosures. I. Sealing Fittings: 1. Construction: a. When used in corrosive areas shall be PVC coated. b. Malleable ductile iron with steel conduit. c. Aluminum with aluminum conduit. d. Crouse-Hinds Type EYD where drains are required. e. Crouse-Hinds Type EYS where drains are not required. f. UL listed for use in Class 1, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D; Class 1, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, C; Class 2, Divisions 1 and 2; Groups E, F, and G. J. PVC Fittings: 1. Shall include the following: a. Couplings. b. Terminal Adapters. c. Female Adapters. d. Caps. e. Reducer Bushings. f. Duct Couplings. g. Eng Bells. h. Expansion Couplings. i. Duct Couplings 5 degree. j. C – Pull Fittings. k. E – Pull Fittings. l. LB – Pull Fittings. m. LL – Pull Fittings. n. LR – Pull Fittings. o. T – Pull Fittings. p. X – Pull Fittings. 2. Materials: a. All devices shall be made of PVC, using the same materials as used for Type PVC conduit. b. All metal hardware shall be stainless steel. K. Through Wall and Floor Seals: 1. Materials a. Body. b. Grommet – neoprene. c. Pressure rings – PVC coated steel. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CONDUITS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 34 - 10 d. Disc material – PVC coated steel. e. Aluminum when used with conduit type RAC. L. Expansion/Deflection Couplings: 1. Use to compensate for movement in any directions between two conduit ends that they connect. 2. Shall allow movement of ¾-inch from the normal in all directions. 3. Shall allow angular movement for a deflection of 30 degrees from normal in any direction. 4. Materials: a. End couplings – Bronze. b. Sleeve – Neoprene. c. Bands – Stainless Steel. d. Bonding Jumper – Tinned copper braid. M. Expansion Couplings: 1. Shall allow for expansion and contraction of conduit: a. Permitting 8-inch movement, 4 inches in either direction. 2. Materials: a. Head – Malleable or ductile iron. b. Sleeve – Steel. c. Insulating Bushing – Phenolic. d. Finish – Hot dip galvanized. 2.4 METAL WIREWAYS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman. 3. Square D; Schneider Electric. B. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type shall comply with area as specified in section 26 00 00 “Electrical General Provisions”, unless otherwise indicated. C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold- down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. D. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type or as indicated. E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CONDUITS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 34 - 11 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Apply raceway products as required by NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code and as specified in section 26 00 00 “Electrical General Provisions” B. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size. C. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with that material. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer. D. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve. E. Do not install aluminum conduits in contact with concrete. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter. B. Conduit Installation General: 1. Every installer of PVC coated Aluminum (PCA) or Rigid Steel (PCS) conduits shall be certified by the manufacturer for installation of the conduit. 2. Install conduit runs in accordance with schematic representation as indicated on the Drawings and as specified. Modify conduit runs to suit field conditions, as accepted by the Engineer. 3. Install complete conduit systems between outlets, boxes, and circuit source before conductors are installed. 4. Install conduit runs for lighting and receptacle circuits, whether or not indicated on the Drawings. 5. For conduit not specifically identified, i.e., lighting and receptacle conduits in process areas, the lighting and receptacle conduit materials shall match those selected for the power and process control systems. 6. Use conduit size and type as identified in the Drawings. 7. Route conduit to avoid drains or other gravity lines. Where conflicts occur, relocate conduit as required, at no additional cost to the Owner. 8. Adequate clearances from high-temperature surfaces shall be provided for all conduit runs. Provide clearances as follows: a. Clearances of 6 inches from surfaces 113 degrees Fahrenheit to 149 degrees Fahrenheit. b. Clearances of 12 inches from surfaces greater than 149 degrees Fahrenheit. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CONDUITS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 34 - 12 c. Keep conduit at least 6 inches from the coverings on hot water and steam pipes, 18 inches from the coverings on flues and breechings and 12 inches from fuel lines and gas lines. d. Where it is necessary to route conduit close to high-temperature surfaces, a high-reflectance thermal barrier should be installed between the conduit and the surface. 9. Support conduit runs on water-bearing walls a minimum of 1 inch away from wall on an accepted channel. Use hot-dip galvanized steel or stainless steel channel, consistent with type of conduit being installed. Do not run conduit within water- bearing walls unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 10. Run conduit exposed to view parallel with or at right angles to structural members, walls, or lines of the building. Install straight and true conduit runs with uniform and symmetrical elbows, offsets, and bends. Make changes in direction with long radius bends of with conduit bodies. Turn conduits with neat symmetrical bends. 11. Route all exposed conduit to preserve headroom, access space and work space and to prevent tripping hazards and clearance problems. Install conduit runs so that runs do not interfere with proper and safe operation of equipment and not block or interfere with ingress or egress, including equipment removal hatches. 12. Conduit may be run in concrete members or slabs with permission of the Engineer, provided the outside diameter does not exceed 1/3 of the thickness of the concrete. Locate such conduit in the center of the concrete or where the minimum concrete cover will be 1 conduit diameter. Space conduits at least 3 diameters apart on centers. As a general rule, conduit may not cross other conduit at pipe in concrete members or slabs. 13. When installing conduit through existing slabs or walls make provisions for locating any possible conflicting items where conduit is to penetrate. Use tone signal or X-ray methods to make certain that no penetrations will be made into existing conduit, piping, cables, post-tensioning cables etc. 14. Conduit runs between pull boxes or junction boxes: a. Total bends equaling not more than 270 degrees. b. Install NEC required pull boxes at locations acceptable for the Engineer. c. Plug conduits brought into pull boxes, manholes, handholes, and other openings until used to prevent entrance of moisture. d. Cap spare conduits and provide plastic pulling tape below threaded cap. e. Provide bonding bushing and bond wire. 15. Install conduit thruwall seals where indicated on the Drawings. 16. For existing and new 2 inch and larger conduit runs, snake conduits with conduit cleaner equipped with a cylindrical mandrel of a diameter not less than 85 percent of nominal diameter of conduit. Remove and replace conduits through which mandrel will not pass. Clean and make certain that new and existing conduit runs are not crushed or creased. 17. Conduit Sizes shall be in accordance with the NEC or specified as follows unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings: a. Concealed conduit in partitions or accessible ceilings: Minimum ¾ inch. b. Exposed Conduit: Minimum ¾ inch. c. Rigid Steel (RGC or PSC) encased in Concrete: Minimum 1 inch. d. Rigid PVC Encased in Concrete e. Liquidtite and Flex Conduit Minimum ½-inch. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CONDUITS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 34 - 13 18. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all sleeves and openings required for the passage of electrical raceways or cables even when these openings or sleeves are not specifically shown on the Drawings. C. Corrosive Areas: 1. Use conduit system as indicated on the Conduit Schedules. a. Install PCS in corrosive areas where conduit may need to be self-supporting or where subject to mechanical damage. b. Use liquid tight flexible conduits (SLT or NFC) and corrosion resistant connectors. c. GRC where area and conduit are to be painted using an epoxy based paint. D. Conduit Usage: 1. General Conditions: a. Except as otherwise indicated, provide the type of conduit legally permitted or required for each location or condition. b. Seal ends of all conduit with approved, manufactured conduit seals, caps or plugs immediately after installation. Keep ends sealed until immediately before pulling conductors. c. Conduit sizes not indicated in the schedule or on the Drawings shall be in accordance with NEC requirements and shall be sized based on quantities of sizes of wire installed therein, including the insulated grounding conductor. d. Conduit types not specified shall be consistent with other conduit systems in the area, the area classifications, and enclosure requirements. e. Use insulated metallic bushings for all metallic conduit. 2. Underground and Embedded Conduits: a. Install minimum 2-inch ductbank conduit, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. b. Use types and systems as indicated on the Drawings. 1) PVC Schedule 40 in embedded locations and underground in ductbanks. c. Use Type PCS or PVC wrapped GRC conduit and elbows for underground and embedded installations as follows: 1) Stub-up and risers to grade floor or equipment from non-metallic conduits. 2) Entering and exiting underground conduit runs a minimum 12 inches above and below grade or finished floor. 3) All 90 degree elbows with a bend radius of 12 inches or less. d. Install underground conduits in conformance with Section 26 00 00 “Electrical General Provisions”, and as shown or required on the Drawings. e. Make conduit size transitions at pullboxes and manholes for underground conduits. f. Install spare conduits in underground duct banks towards top center of runs to allow for ease of installation of future cables as conduits enter underground manholes and pullboxes. 3. PVC Coated Rigid Steel Conduit (PCS): a. Use specifically manufactured or machined threading dies to manufacturer’s specifications to accommodate the PVC jacket. b. Use only manufactured approved tools for clamping conduit. 4. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit (GRC): BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CONDUITS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 34 - 14 a. Use Type GRC in locations as identified in specification 26 00 00 “Electrical General Provisions” and as shown or required on the drawings. b. Conduit shall be cut square and reamed before threading. 5. Flexible Conduit: a. Use flexible conduit for short lengths for final connections between rigid conduit and motors, vibrating equipment, instruments, control equipment or where required for equipment servicing. b. Maximum length of flexible conduit 36 inches. c. Use Type LFMC in wet and damp locations, areas exposed to the weather, corrosive areas where NEMA 4X construction is required and conduit type is PCS, or as indicated on the Drawings or conduit schedule, provided the jacket temperature limitations will not be exceeded: 1) Use UL sunlight resistant outdoors and in the presence of ultraviolet lights. d. Use type LFNC in all corrosive atmospheres where conduit type is PVC and where indicated on the plans or conduit schedule. e. Use explosion proof flexible conduit in Class I Division hazardous areas. In Class 1, Division 1 areas, flexible fittings must be approved and marked suitable for Class 1, Division 1, and must also be listed for compatibility with the Group type atmosphere when used. f. In Class I, Division 2 areas, use liquidtight metal conduit with approved fittings. 1) Maximum length of liquidtight metal conduit is 18 inches. 6. Non-Metallic Conduit (PVC): a. Conduit terminations shall be vi threaded adapters into threaded hubs on the junction boxes or conduit bodes. b. Conduit terminations into boxes without threaded hubs shall utilize a threaded adapter and a flat neoprene washer on the outside of the box. Use a locknut on the inside of the box to tighten the adapter to the box: 1) Flat washers as manufactured by Carlon, Type E943, DW, EW, FW, GW, HW, and JW. c. Install PVC conduit for exposed runs only when indicated on the Drawings. Route conduit so as to afford it the maximum physical protection. If necessary, cover conduit to afford additional protection when it cannot be shielded by the structure or machinery frames: 1) Use schedule 80 where exposed runs may be subject to physical damage. d. Use UV resistant conduit where it can be exposed to ultraviolet light and in exposed outdoor areas. E. Conduit Joints and Bends: 1. General: a. Where conduits are underground, under slabs on grade, exposed to the weather or in wet locations, make joints liquid tight and gas-tight. b. Keep bends and offsets in conduit runs to an absolute minimum. For the serving utilities, make large radius ends to meet their requirements. c. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab. d. Bend conduit to radius as legally required. e. All bends shall be symmetrical. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CONDUITS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 34 - 15 f. All of the following conduit systems shall use large radius sweep elbows: 1) Underground conduits. 2) Conduits containing medium voltage cables. 3) Conduits containing shielded cables. 4) Conduits containing fiber optic cables. 2. Threaded Conduit: a. Cut threads on GRC, IMC, and RAC with a standard conduit cutting die that provides a ¾-inch per foot taper and to a length such that all bare metal exposed by the threading operation will be completely covered by the couplings or fittings used. In addition, cut the lengths of the thread such that all joints will become secure and wrench tight just preceding the point where the conduit ends would butt together in couplings or where conduit ends would butt into the ends or shoulders of other fittings. b. Thoroughly ream conduit after threads have been cut to remove burrs. Seal joints with accepted conductive sealant compound and make watertight. Set up joints tight. Use bushings or conduit fittings at conduit terminations. c. On exposed conduits, repair scratches and other defects with galvanizing repair stick, Enterprise Galvanizing “Galvabar” or CRC “Zinc It.” d. Threaded conduit joints shall be coated with an approved electrically conductive sealant and corrosion inhibitor that is not harmful to the conductor insulation. 1) Use KOPR-Shield as manufactured by T&B on threads of ferrous conduit. 2) Use AP* ALUMA-Shield as manufactured by T&B on threads of aluminum conduit. 3) Apply to the male threads and tighten joints securely. 4) Clean excess sealant from exposed threads after assembly. e. Securely tighten all threaded connections. f. Any exposed threaded surface must be cleaned and coated with a galvanizing solution so that all exposed surfaces have a galvanized protective coating before painting. g. Provide large radius factory-made bends for 1-1/4-inch trade size or larger or field-bend the conduit with power bending equipment specifically intended for the purpose and made so that the conduit is not damaged and the internal diameter is not effectively reduced. h. Bends should be made with a radius of not less than the requirements found in the NEC: 1) The radius must be greater than the minimum bending radius of the cable. 2) A field bend shall be made with power bending equipment or manual benders specifically intended for the purpose and made so that the conduit is not damaged and the internal diameter is not effectively reduced. 3. Non-Metallic (PVC): a. Use approved solvent-weld cement specifically manufactured for the purpose. Spray type cement is not allowed. 4. Apply heat for bends so that conduit does not distort or discolor. Use a spring mandrel as required to assure full inside diameter at all bends. F. Support raceways as specified below: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CONDUITS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 34 - 16 1. General: a. Provide appropriate hangers, supports, fasteners, and seismic restraints to suit applications. b. Support conduit at the intervals required by the NEC. c. Perforated strap and plumbers tape are not acceptable for conduit supports. d. Do not install one inch or larger conduits in or through structural members unless approved by the Engineer. e. Conduit fittings and supports are not shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall provide all fittings and supports required to suit the conditions. f. Securely fasten exposed conduits with clamps or straps. Run exposed conduit on walls and ceilings only, parallel to planes of walls or ceilings. Do not run conduit diagonally. 2. Above Suspended Ceilings: a. Support conduit on or from the structure, conduit shall not be supported from hanging wires or suspended ceiling grid. 3. Concealed Conduit on Wood: a. Use 2-hole galvanized steel straps screwed or nailed to the wood or hammer- driven supports of the stamped galvanized type having serrated or sawtooth edges on the driven portion and designed specifically for the size and type of conduit being supported. Drive these latter supports so that the conduit is tightly and rigidly supported. Replace any dented or damaged conduit. 4. In Steel Stud Construction: a. Tie conduit at a maximum 4-foot intervals with No. 16 gauge double annealed galvanized wire so that conduit cannot move from vibration or other causes. 5. Conduit on Concrete or Masonry: a. Use 1-hole malleable iron straps with metallic or plastic expansion anchors and screws or support from preset inserts. b. Use preset inserts in concrete when possible. c. Use pipe spacers (clamp backs) in wet locations. d. On plaster or stucco, use 1-hole malleable iron straps with toggle bolts. 6. Conduit on Metal Decking: a. Use 1-hole malleable iron straps with 1-inch long cadmium-plated Type A panhead sheet metal screws. Fully or partially hammer-driven screws are not acceptable. 7. Suspended Conduit: a. Use malleable iron factory-made split-hinged pipe rings with threaded suspension rods sized for the weight to be carried (minimum 3/8-inch diameter), Kindorf, or equal. b. For grouped conduits, construct racks with threaded rods and tiered angle- iron or Unistrut cross members. Clamp each conduit individually to a cross member. Where rods are more than 2 feet long, provide rigid sway bracing. 8. Supports at Structural Steel Members: a. Use beam clamps. b. Drilling or welding may be used only as indicated or with approval of the Engineer. 9. PVC Coated Rigid Steel Conduit (PCS) systems: a. Right angle beam clamps and U bolts shall be specially formed and sized to snugly fit the outside diameter of the coated conduit. All “U” bolts shall be supplied with PVC encapsulated nuts that cover the exposed portions of the threads. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CONDUITS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 34 - 17 b. Securely fasten exposed PCS conduits with Type 316 stainless steel clamps or straps or PVC coated clamps or straps manufactured and supplied by the PCS conduit supplier. G. EMT shall only be permitted when concealed within finished walls, and ceilings, of offices and control rooms unless otherwise indicated. H. Expansion or Expansion/Deflection Fittings: 1. General: a. Align expansion coupling with the conduit run to prevent binding. b. Follow manufacturer’s instructions to set the piston opening. c. Install expansion fittings across concrete expansion joints and at other locations where necessary to compensate for thermal or mechanical expansion and contraction as indicated on the Drawings. d. Shall be of the same material as the conduit system. 2. For metallic conduit (PCS, GRC and RAC) use expansion or expansion/deflection couplings, as appropriate, where: a. Conduit may be affected by dissimilar movements of the supporting structures or medium or conduit crosses building or structural expansion joints. b. These fittings shall be constructed in such a manner that will provide the continuity of the ground path in each conduit or raceway. c. Install expansion fittings a minimum of every 200 feet in straight conduit runs. 3. For PVC use expansion or expansion/deflection couplings, as appropriate, where length change due to temperature variation exceeds 2 inches: a. Rigidly fix the outer barrel of the expansion coupling so it cannot move. b. Mount the conduit connected to the piston loosely enough to allow the conduit to move as the temperature changes. I. Empty Conduits: 1. Provide a polyethylene rope rated 250 pounds tensile strength in each empty conduit more than 10 feet in length. 2. Provide conduit marker tags for each spare conduit. J. Miscellaneous: 1. Provide flashings and counter flashings or pitch pockets for waterproofing of raceways, outlets, fittings, and other items that penetrate the roof. 2. Electrical unions shall be used at all points of union between ends of rigid conduit systems that cannot otherwise by coupled. Running threads and threadless couplings shall not be used. 3. Transition fittings to mate steel conduit to PVC conduit, and PVC access fittings, shall be furnished by or as recommended by the manufacturer or the PVC conduit. 4. Where a transition between PVC conduit and rigid conduit systems is required, such transition shall be accomplished by means of a PCS elbow or a minimum 3 foot length of PCS conduit. 5. Any conduit installed that the Engineer determines does not meet the best practices of the trade shall be replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. K. Field Conditions and Related Requirements: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CONDUITS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 34 - 18 1. Underground water table may be near or above the location of new ductbanks. 2. Contractor shall include cost for necessary dewatering, and cleaning equipment to perform work in underground ductbanks, pull boxes and manholes, before installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT A. Direct-Buried Conduit: 1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom with 6” of select backfill below the conduits. Select backfill shall pass through a ¾” sieve frame and contain less than 30 percent rock solids by volume. 2. Install select backfill around conduits and 18 inches above conduits. 3. Duct shall be assembled using high impact nonmetallic spacers and saddles to provide conduits with vertical and horizontal separation. Plastic spacers shall be set every 5 feet. 4. The duct shall be laid on a grade line of at least 4 inches per 100 feet, sloping towards pullboxes or manholes. Duct shall be installed and pullbox and manhole depths adjusted so that the top of the duct is a minimum of 24 inches below grade or as shown on the drawings. 5. Couplings shall be staggered at least 6 inches vertically. 6. Each bore of the completed duct bank shall be cleaned by drawing through it a standard flexible mandrel one foot long and 1/4-inch smaller than the nominal size of the duct through which the mandrel will be drawn. After passing of the mandrel, draw a wire brush and swab through. 7. A raceway, in the duct envelope, which does not require conductors, shall have a 1/8-inch polypropylene pull cord installed throughout the entire length of the raceway. 8. Duct bank penetration through walls of manholes or pullboxes, and on building walls below grade shall be watertight. 9. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor. All underground rigid steel conduit shall be PVC-coated or taped. a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose. b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment. 10. Warning Tape: Bury warning tape approximately 18 inches above direct-buried conduits. Align tape along the centerline of conduit bank. B. Concrete-Encased Ducts: Support ducts on duct separators. 1. The type of concrete used is specified in section 26 00 00 “Electrical General Provisions. 2. Separator Installation: Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts, with not less than 4 spacers per 20 feet of duct. Secure separators to earth and to ducts to prevent floating during concreting. Stagger separators approximately 6 inches between tiers. Tie entire assembly together using fabric straps; do not use tie wires or reinforcing steel that may form conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CONDUITS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 34 - 19 3. Concreting Sequence: Pour each run of envelope between manholes or other terminations in one continuous operation. a. Start at one end and finish at the other, allowing for expansion and contraction of ducts as their temperature changes during and after the pour. Use expansion fittings installed according to manufacturer's written recommendations, or use other specific measures to prevent expansion- contraction damage. b. If more than one pour is necessary, terminate each pour in a vertical plane and install 3/4-inch reinforcing rod dowels extending 18 inches into concrete on both sides of joint near corners of envelope. 4. Pouring Concrete: Spade concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and between conduits and at exterior surface of envelope. Do not allow a heavy mass of concrete to fall directly onto ducts. Use a plank to direct concrete down sides of bank assembly to trench bottom. Allow concrete to flow to center of bank and rise up in middle, uniformly filling all open spaces. Do not use power-driven agitating equipment unless specifically designed for duct-bank application. 5. Reinforcement: Reinforce concrete-encased duct banks where they cross disturbed earth and where indicated. Arrange reinforcing rods and ties without forming conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups. 6. Forms: Use walls of trench to form side walls of duct bank where soil is self- supporting and concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions; otherwise, use forms. 7. Minimum Space between Ducts: 3 inches between ducts and exterior envelope wall, 2 inches between ducts for like services, and 4 inches between power and signal ducts. 8. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 24 inches below finished grade in areas not subject to deliberate traffic, and at least 30 inches below finished grade in deliberate traffic paths for vehicles, unless otherwise indicated. 9. Stub-Ups: Use manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor. All underground rigid steel conduit shall be PVC-coated or taped. a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete. C. Warning Tape: Bury warning tape approximately 12 inches above all concrete-encased ducts and duct banks. Align tape parallel to and within 3 inches of the centerline of duct bank. Provide an additional warning tape for each 12-inch increment of duct-bank width over a nominal 18 inches. Space additional tapes 12 inches apart, horizontally. 3.4 CONDUIT PENETRATIONS: A. Conduit Penetrations on walls, concrete structures, pull boxes, and equipment cabinets shall be performed in accordance with the following: 1. Seal all raceways entering structures at the first box or outlet with conduit sealant to prevent the entrance into the structure of gases, liquids, or rodents. 2. Dry pack with nonshrink grout around raceways that penetrate concrete walls, floors, or ceilings aboveground, or use one of the methods indicated for underground penetrations. 3. Where an underground conduit enters a structure through a concrete roof or a membrane waterproofed wall or floor, provide an acceptable, malleable iron, BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CONDUITS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 34 - 20 watertight, entrance sealing device. When there is no raceway concrete encasement, provide such device having a gland type sealing assembly at each end with pressure bushings which may be tightened at any time. When there is raceway concrete encasement indicated, provide such a device with a gland type sealing assembly on the accessible side. Securely anchor all such devices into the masonry construction with one or more integral flanges. Secure membrane waterproofing to such devices in a permanently watertight manner. 4. Where an underground raceway without concrete encasement enters a structure through a nonwaterproofed wall or floor, install a sleeve made of Schedule 40 galvanized pipe. Fill the space between the conduit and sleeve with a suitable plastic expandable compound, or an oakum and lead joint, on each side of the wall or floor in such a manner as to prevent entrance of moisture. A watertight entrance sealing device may be used in lieu of the sleeve. 3.5 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials are specified in section 26 00 00 "Electrical General Provisions". 3.6 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 53 - 1 SECTION 26 05 53 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for identifying electrical, instrumentation, and process equipment and components. 2. Material, manufacturing and installation requirements for identification devices. B. Related Sections: 1. Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the Contractor and its sub-contractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. 1.2 REFERENCE A. Refer to Section 26 00 00 for a list of references. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions of terms are specified in Section 26 00 00. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Nameplates: 1. Provide a nameplate for each piece of electrical equipment, process equipment, valve, pump, mixer, feeder, fan, air-handling unit, motor, switch, receptacle, controller, instrument transducer, instrument power supply, solenoid, motor control center, starter, panelboard, switchboard, individually mounted or plug-in type circuit protector or motor controller, disconnect switch, bus duct tap switch, time switch, relay and for any other control device or major item of electrical equipment, either located in the field or within panels. 2. All nameplates shall be of identical style, color, and material throughout the facility. 3. Device nameplates shall include: a. Designations as shown on the drawings and identified on the Process and Instrumentation Drawings. b. Device tag and loop number ID (i.e. EDV-60.0101.01). c. Circuit ID (i.e. LPA-111). d. Area served (i.e. Lighting Chemical Building). e. Black lettering on white background, laminated plastic. B. Wire Numbers: 1. Coordinate the wire numbering system with all vendors of equipment so that every field wire has a unique number associated with it for the entire system: a. Wire numbers shall correspond to the wire numbers on the control drawings or the panel and circuit numbers for receptacles and lighting. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 53 - 2 b. Wire numbers shall correspond to the terminal block number to which they are attached in the control panel. c. Internal panel wires on a common terminal shall have the same wire number. d. Multiconductor cables shall be assigned a cable number that shall be attached to the cable at intermediate pull boxes and stub-up locations beneath freestanding equipment. All multi-conductor and instrumentation cables shall be identified at pull points as described above: 1) Label armored multiconductor cable using the conduit number as indicated on the Drawings, following the requirements for conduit markers in Section 26 05 34 – Conduits. 2. Provide the following wiring numbering schemes throughout the project and used for field wires between Process Control Module, PCM’s, Vendor Control Panels, VCP’s, Motor Control Centers, MCC’s, field starters, field instruments. a. (ORIGIN LOC.)-(ORIGIN TERM.)/(DEST. LOC.)-(DEST. TERM.) OR b. (ORIGIN LOC.)-(ORIGIN TERM.) c. (DEST. LOC.)-(DEST. TERM.) 3. Where: a. ORIGIN LOC. = Designation for originating panel or device b. ORIGIN TERM. = Terminal designation at originating panel or device c. DEST. LOC. = Designation for destination panel or device d. DEST. TERM. = Terminal designation at destination panel or device or PLC I/O address at destination panel. e. Identify equipment and field instruments as the origin. f. PCM’s are always identified as the destination. g. Location is the panel designation for VCP, LCP, or PCM. For connections to MCC’s, location is the specific starter tag and loop number. Location is the tag and loop number for motor starts, field instruments and equipment. Any hyphen in the panel designation or tag and loop number shall be omitted. h. Terminal designation is the actual number on the terminal block where the conductor terminates at field devices and vendor control panels. For multiconductor cables, all terminal numbers shall be shown, separated by commas. i. Terminal designations at motor leads shall be the motor manufacturer’s standard terminal designation (i.e. T1, T2, T3, etc.). j. Terminal designations at PCM’s where the field conductor connects to a PLC input or output shall be the PLC Address (Note: the following PLC I/O numbering scheme is typical for Allen Bradley, the numbering scheme should be modified to match that of the actual PLC manufacturer used for the project). 1) Discrete point: W:X:Y/Z 2) Analog point: W:X:Y.Z 4. Where: a. W = I for input, O for output b. X = PLC number (1, 2, 3….) c. Y = Slot number (01, 02, 03….) d. Z = Terminal number (00, 01, 02…) for a discrete point or a word numbering for an analog point (1,2,3…) g. Terminal designations at PCM’s where the conductor does not connect to a PLC I/O point shall be the terminal number with a “C” prefix (i.e. C0010). For BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 53 - 3 common power after a fuse or neutrals after a switch, the subsequent points shall have and capital letter suffix starting with “A: (i.e. 0010A). 5. Case 1: Vendor Control Panel (VCP) to Process Control Module (PCM): a. Field wire number/label: A-B/C-D 1) Vendor Control Panel number without hyphen (VCP60.0101.01) 2) Terminal number within VCP (manufacturer’s or vendor’s standard terminal number) 3) Process Control Module number without hyphen (PCM60.0101) 4) Either the PLC address if the field terminal is connected directly to a PLC input or output point or the terminal number with a “C” prefix if not connected directly to a PLC I/O point (C0010) a) Examples: VCP60.0101.01-10/PCM60.0101-1:1:01/01 b) VCP60.0101.01-10/PCM60.0101-0:1:01/10/07 c) VCP60.0101.01-10/PCM60.0101-C0100 6. Case 2: Field Instrument to Process Control Module (PCM): a. Field wire number/label: E-F/C-D 1) Process Control Module number without hyphen (PCM60.0101) 2) Either the PLC address if the field terminal is connected directly to a PLC input or output point or the terminal number with a “C” prefix if not connected directly to a PLC I/O point (C0010) 3) Field mounted instrument tag and loop numbers without hyphen (EDV60.0101.01) 4) Manufacturer’s standard terminal number within instrument./ Use both terminal numbers for analog points separated by a comma. a) Examples: TIT60.0101.01-2,3/PCM60.0101-l:1:01.1 b) TSH60.0101-1/PCM60.01001-l:2:01/00 7. Case 3: Motor Control Center (MCC) to Process Control Module (PCM): a. Field wire number/label: G-B/C-D 1) Terminal number within Motor Control Center (manufacturer’s or vendor’s standard terminal number) 2) Process Control Module without hyphen (PCM60.0101) 3) Either the PLC address if the field terminal is connected directly to a PLC input or output point or the terminal number with a “C” prefix if not connected directly to a PLC I/O point (C0010) 4) Actual Starter designation in the Motor Control Center without hyphen (MMS60.0101) a) Examples: MMS60.0101-10/PCM60.0101-I:01/01 b) MMS60.0101-10/PCM60.0101-O:1:10/07 c) MMS60.0101-10/PCM60.0101-C0100 8. Case 4: Motor Control Center (MCC) to Vendor Control Panel (VCP): a. Field wire number/label: G-B/A-B 1) Vendor Control Panel number without hyphen (BCP60.0101.01) 2) Terminal number within motor control center or vendor control panel 3) (manufacturers or vendors standard terminal number) 4) Actual Starter designation in the Motor Control Center without hyphen (MMS60.0101) a) Examples: MMS60.0101-X2/VCP60.0101.01-10 9. Case 5: Motor leads to a Motor Control Center (MCC): a. Field wire number/label: H-I/G-B BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 53 - 4 1) Terminal number within motor control center (manufacturer’s standard terminal number) 2) Actual Starter designation in the Motor Control Center without hyphen (MMS60.0101) 3) Equipment tag and loop number without hyphen (PMP60.0101.01) 4) Motor manufacturer’s standard motor lead identification (T1, T2, T3, etc.) a) Examples: PMP-60.0101.01-T3/MMS60.0101.01-T3 10. Case 6: Remote or separately mounted starter or Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) to Process Control Module (PCM): a. Terminal number within starter or Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) (manufacturer’s standard terminal number) b. Process Control Module number without hyphen (VCP60.0101.01) c. Either the PLC address if the field terminal is connected directly to a PLC input or output point or the terminal number with a “C” prefix if not connected directly to a PLC/I/O point (C0010) d. Starter or Variable Frequency Drive tag and loop number without hyphen (MMS60.0101) a) Examples: MMS60.0101-10/PCM60.0101-I:01/01 b) MMS60.0101-10/PCM60.0101-O:2:10/07 c) MMS60.0101-10/PCM60.0101-C0010 11. Case 7: Field Bus Trunk Segment: a. Field cable number/label: C/K-L/M; C/K-L/H; C/K-L/J 1) Process Control Module number without hyphen (PCM60.0101) 2) Field Bus Cable Type 3) Field Bus Segment Number 4) Field Bus Field Network Component without hyphen (PTB1) or 5) Equipment tag and loop number without hyphen (EMV61.1100.01) or 6) J = Starter or Variable Frequency Drive tag and loop number without hyphen (VFD60.0101) Examples: PCM60.0101/PA-1A/PTB1 PTB1/PA-1B/PTB2 PCM60.0101/DN-1A/VFD60.0112 PCM60.0101/DP-2A/EMV61.1100.01 10. Case 8: Field Bus Spur (Drop): Field cable number/label: E/K-L/M E = Field mounted instrument tag and loop numbers without hyphen (FIT62.0110.02) K = Field Bus Cable Type L = Field Bus Segment Number M = Field Bus Field Network Component without hyphen (PTB1), identify ports Examples: FIT62.0110.02/PA-1C/PTB1-1 FIT62.0110.02/PA-1D/PTB1-2 11. All spare conductors shall be terminated on terminal blocks and shall be identified as required for other field wires with an “S” prefix: Examples: A MMS60.0101-10/PCM60.0101.01-C011 C. Conduit Numbers: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 53 - 5 1. Number the conduits as shown on the electrical standard detail drawing E-SD-6. See details E-5044 and E-5045. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Sections 01 33 20 and 26 00 00. B. Furnish complete product Data, Schedules, and Record Drawings submittals as specified below. C. Nameplates: 1. Product Data: a. Color. b. Size: 1) Outside dimensions. 2) Lettering. c. Material. d. Mounting means. 2. Nameplate Schedule: a. Show exact wording for each nameplate. b. Include nameplate and letter sizes. D. Wire Numbers; 1. Manufacturer’s catalog data for wire labels and label printer. E. Record Drawings: 1. Update the conduit schedule to reflect the exact quantity of wire numbers including spares and destination points for all wires. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Representatives of the Contractor, Owner, and Engineer shall convene before any major purchases of cable or conductors and before the installation or termination of any cables or conductors. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 NOT USED 2.2 MATERIALS A. Nameplates: 1. Fabricated from white-center and black or red face laminated plastic engraving stock: a. 3/32-inch thick material. b. 2-ply. c. With chamfered edges. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 53 - 6 d. Engraved characters shall be of a block style and of adequate size to be read easily from a distance of 6 feet with no characters smaller than 1/8-inch in height. B. Signs: 1. Automatic Equipment and High Voltage Signs. a. Shall be suitable for exterior use. b. Shall be in accordance with OSHA regulations. C. Conductor and Cable Markers: 1. Markers shall consist of machine printed, black characters on white tubing. 2. Characters shall be no smaller than size 10 font. 3. Characters shall be machine printed on tubing. D. Conduit and Raceway Markers: 1. UV resistant holder and letters. 2. Black letters on yellow background. 3. Minimum ½-inch high letters. E. Medium Voltage Circuit Raceway Labels: 1. Vinyl plastic. 2. Minimum 1-inch high letters. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Nameplates: 1. Provide all nameplates for control panel operator devices (i.e. pushbuttons, selector switches, pilot lights, etc.) using the same material and of the same color and appearance as the device nameplates, in order to achieve an aesthetically consistent and coordinated system. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Nameplates: 1. Attach nameplates to equipment with stainless steel sheet metal screws, approved waterproof epoxy-based cement or install in metal holders welded to the equipment. 2. In corrosive or wet areas use epoxy-based cement to attach nameplates. 3. Nameplates shall be aligned and level or plumb to within 1/64 inch over the entire length: a. Misaligned or crooked nameplates shall be remounted, or new enclosures shall be provided at the discretion of the Engineer. B. Signs: 1. Automatic Equipment and High Voltage Signs: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 53 - 7 a. Mount permanent warning signs at mechanical equipment that may be started automatically from remote locations. Fasten warning signs with round head stainless steel screws or bolts. Locate and mount warning signs in a suitable manner that is acceptable to the Engineer. b. Mount permanent and conspicuous warning signs on the front and back of equipment, doorways to equipment rooms, pull boxes, and manholes where the voltage exceeds 600 volts. c. Place warning signs on equipment that has more than one source of power: 1) Warning sign to identify every power source. d. Place warning signs on equipment that has a 120 VAC control voltage source used for interlocking. C. Conductor and Cable Markers: 1. Apply all conductor and cable markers to termination. 2. Heat-shrinkable Tubing: a. Tubing shall be shrunk using a heat fun that produces low temperature heated air. b. Tubing shall be tight on the wire after it has been heated. c. Characters shall face the open panel and shall read from left to right or top to bottom. d. Marker shall start within 1/32 inch of the end of the stripped insulation point. D. Conduit Markers: 1. Provide and install conduit markers for every conduit in the electrical system that is identified in the conduit schedule or part of the process system. 2. Conduits shall be marked at the following locations: a. Each end of conduits that are greater than 10 feet in length. b. Where the conduit penetrates a wall or structure. c. Where the conduit emerges from the ground, slab, etc. d. The middle of conduits that are ten feet or less in length. 3. Conduits shall be marked after the conduits have been fully painted. 4. Conduit markers shall be positioned so that they are easily read from the floor. 5. Secure all conduit markers with nylon cable ties: a. Conduit markers exposed to direct sunlight shall be secured with ultraviolet resistant cable ties. 6. Conduits shall be marked before construction review by Engineer for punch list purposes. 7. Intrinsically safe conduits shall be labeled in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code (NEC). E. Medium Voltage Raceway Labels: 1. Apply at 50 foot intervals stating the voltage level contained within the raceway. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Replace any nameplates, signs, conductor markers, cable markers or raceway labels that in the sole opinion of the Engineer do not meet the Engineer’s aesthetic requirements. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 53 - 8 END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT WIRING CONNECTIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 83 - 1 SECTION 26 05 83 WIRING CONNECTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International. B. Code of Federal Regulations. C. International Electrical Testing Association, NETA. D. National Electrical Manufactures Association. E. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. F. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 1.3 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wiring connecting devices. 2. Terminations. 3. Splices. B. Related Sections: 1. Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all divisions and sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its Sub-contractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions of terms are specified in Section 26 00 00. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide a complete system of wiring connectors, terminators, fittings, etc. for a complete wiring system suitable for the cables and conductors used. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with Sections 01 33 20 and 26 00 00. B. Product Data: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT WIRING CONNECTIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 83 - 2 1. Catalog cut sheets. C. Shop drawings: 1. Drawings showing the installation of junction modules, splices and terminators. D. Instruction and Operating Manuals: 1. Include drawings and data for medium voltage cable connectors, splices and junction modules in the operating manuals. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 26 00 00. B. All materials shall be UL listed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT A. Control Connections: 1. Use insulated ring type wire terminators for connections to all screw terminals: a. With chamfered/funneled terminal barrel entry. b. Deep internal serrations. c. Long barrel design to reduce electrical resistance and increased insulator- barrel surface area to ensure that the insulator remains in contact with the barrel. d. Electroplated-tin copper conductor. e. Manufactured by the following or equal: 1) Thomas and Betts, Stakon. 2. For process equipment connections work from manufacturer’s drawings. B. Joints, Splices, Taps, and Connections: 1. For 600-volt conductors use solderless connectors. 2. Use only plated copper alloy connectors or lugs: a. Aluminum connectors or lugs are not acceptable for copper conductors. 3. Under those specific conditions where aluminum conductors have been allowed or are specified then the connectors for aluminum conductors shall be specifically designed for that purpose. 4. For wire Number 10 AWG and smaller use compression splice caps, with insulating caps. a. Manufactured by the following or equal: 1) Buchanan 2006S or 2011S with 2007 or 2014 insulating caps. 5. For wire Number 8 AWG and larger, use heavy duty copper compression connectors: a. Manufactured by one of the following or equal: 1) Burndy. 2) Thomas and Betts. 6. Where waterproof splices are required: a. Suitable for indoor, outdoor, weather exposed, direct buried or submersed applications. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT WIRING CONNECTIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 83 - 3 b. Utilizing an epoxy, polyurethane, and re-enterable compounds. c. For use with shielded or unshielded plastic- and rubber-jacketed, signal, control, and power cables rated up to 1 kV. d. Two-part mold body with tongue and groove seams and built in spacer webbing. e. Manufactured by the following or equal: 1) 3M – Scotchcast 72-N 7. Optical Fiber terminations: a. All multimode optical fiber cable installed shall be terminated with a split- ferrule alignment sleeve and a precision ceramic tip. All multimode optical fiber connectors shall meet the following technical specifications: 1) Connector Type: ST 2) Fiber Outside Diameter: 125 microns Nominal 3) Loss Repeat: < 0.2 dB per 100 reconnects 4) Axial Load Minimum: 35 Pounds 5) Temperature Stability: +0.1 dB Maximum from -40°C to 75°C b. All single mode optical fiber cable installed shall be terminated utilizing a split-ferrule alignment sleeve and a precision ceramic tip. All single mode connectors shall meet the following technical specifications: 1) Connector Type: SC 2) Fiber Outside Diameter 125 Microns 3) Loss Repeat: < 0.2 dB per 1000 reconnects 4) Axial Load, min. 30 pounds 5) Temperature Stability: -40°C to 85°C c. Contractor shall provide multimode optical fiber patch cords. The multimode optical fiber patch cords shall be Lucent Technologies ML2SC-SC-XX, and shall meet the following technical specifications: 1) Number of fibers: 2 2) Approximate loss, mean, variance 0.1, 0.1 3) Minimum bandwidth: 160 MHz-km @ 850 nm d. Contractor shall provide single mode optical fiber patch cords. The single mode optical fiber patch cords shall be Lucent Technologies MS2SC-SC-XX, and shall meet the following technical specifications: 1) Number of fibers 2 2) Approximate Loss, mean, variance 0.1dB, 0.7dB C. Insulating Tape: 1. General purpose insulating tape: a. Minimum 7 mil vinyl tape. b. Suitable for application in an ambient of -18°C c. (0°F). d. Operating range up to 105°C (220°F). e. Flame retardant, hot- and cold- weather resistant, UV resistant. f. For use as a primary insulation for wire cable splices up to 600 VAC. g. Meeting and complying with: 1) ASTM D-3005 Type I 2) UL 510 3) CSA C22.2 h. Manufactured by the following or equal: 1) 3M – Scotch Number Super 33+. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT WIRING CONNECTIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 83 - 4 2. General-purpose color-coding tape: a. Minimum 7 mil vinyl tape. b. Suitable for application on PVC and polyethylene jacketed cables. c. For use indoors and outdoors in weather protected enclosures. d. Available with the following colors; 1) Red. 2) Yellow. 3) Blue. 4) Brown. 5) Gray. 6) White. 7) Green. 8) Orange. 9) Violet. e. For use as phase identification, marking, insulating, and harnessing. f. Meeting and complying with: 1) UL 510. 2) CSA C22.2 g. Manufactured by the following or equal: 1) 3M – Scotch Number 35. 3. Fire and Electric Arc Proofing tape: a. Minimum 30-mil, flexible, elastomer tape that expands in fire to form an insulating firewall between flame and cable. b. Bind in place with glass cloth electrical tape. c. Manufactured by the following or equal: 1) 3M – Scotch Number 77. 4. Glass cloth electrical tape: a. 7.4-mil thermosetting silicone adhesive that performs at Class H temperatures 180°C (356°F). b. Use for the following applications: 1) To secure no-PSA insulations such as glass in high-temperature areas. 2) Splice wire rated at 180°C (356°F). 3) For binding Fire and Electric Arc Proofing Tape. c. Meeting and complying with: 1) MIL-I-1966C. 2) UL Recognized Component listing for 200°C (392°F) (Guide OANZ2, File E17385). 3) CSA Accepted Component 180°C (356°F) File LR93411. d. Manufactured by the following or equal. 1) 3M – Scotch Number 69. 5. Self-fusing Silicone Rubber Tape: a. 12-mil, high-temperature, track resistant, insulating tape. b. Composed of fully cured inorganic silicone rubber. c. Use as a protective overwrap for terminating medium voltage cables. d. Manufactured by the following or equal: 1) 3M – Scotch Number 70. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT WIRING CONNECTIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 83 - 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Load connections: 1. Connect loads to the circuits as indicated. Color-code all branch circuits as per Section 26 05 53 “Electrical Identification.” B. Zero to 600-volt systems: 1. Make all connections with the proper tool and die as specified by the device manufacturer. 2. Use only tooling and dies manufactured by the device manufacturer. 3. Insulate all connections and splices with Scotch 33+ tape and Scotchfill, or pre- molded plastic covers, or heat shrink tubing and caps. 4. Number all power and control wires before termination. C. Motor connections (600 Volts and below): 1. Terminate wires with compression type ring lugs at motors. 2. Connection at both the motor leads and the machine wires are to have ring type compression lugs. 3. Cover bolted connectors with a heat shrinkable, cross-linked polyolefin material formed as a single opening boot: a. In damp and wet locations use a complete kit containing mastic that shall seal out moisture and contamination. b. Shrink cap with low heat as recommended by manufacturer. 4. Wire markers shall be readable after boot installation. 5. Manufactured by one of the following or equal: a. Raychem MCK. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT WIRING CONNECTIONS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 05 83 - 6 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT UTILITY COORDINATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 21 00 - 1 SECTION 26 21 00 UTILITY COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Requirements for coordination with the utility companies to provide service. 2. Contractor’s responsibilities for connecting to utilities and providing utility service to the facilities. 3. Descriptions of utility services required. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the: 1. National Electrical Code. 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. 3. National Fire Protection Association. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electrical Service 1. The facility will be served primary power at distribution voltage levels from an underground feeder and metering enclosure owned and furnished by the Electric Utility. 2. The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements with the electric utility to provide electric service. 3. The Contractor shall provide all work and materials and bear all costs for providing temporary construction power and the permanent electrical service, including but not limited to: a. All work and materials not provided by the Utility. b. All permits and fees required by the Utility. 4. The Contractor shall provide electrical ducts, raceways, conductors and connections shown on the plans, and all other work and materials required for a complete electrical service, including but not limited to the following: a. Electrical service conduits and conductors from the point of utility termination to the service entrance equipment. b. Metering conduits from the instrument transformers to the meter. B. Communication Service 1. The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements with the communication service utility to provide communication service. 2. The Contractor shall provide all work and materials and bear all costs for the communication service during construction and the final communication service for the facility, including but not limited to: a. All work and materials not provided by the utility. b. All permits and fees required by the utility. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT UTILITY COORDINATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 21 00 - 2 3. The Contractor shall provide and install the communication entrance conduit from the terminal pole or pedestal to the communication board in the facility, and all other work and materials required for a complete communication service. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with Section 26 00 00. B. Certification 1. Submit certification that the intended installation has been coordinated with the utility companies. Certification shall include a narrative description of the utility’s requirements and points of connection and names and communication numbers for contacts at the utilities. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements 1. NEC. 2. Local codes. 3. Local utility standards. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Prior to submitting any bid, the Electrical Contractor is responsible for contacting the utilities to determine the work and materials that will be required from the Contractor, and all fees and permits that will be required, so that all utility systems furnished by the Contractor will be included in the Contractor’s bid. 1. No additional charges will be allowed by the Contractor, due to failure to include such charges in its bid. B. Prior to start of site work, make arrangements for temporary communication and electrical service as required. C. Prior to commencing work, coordinate complete electric service entrance requirements with local electric utility to assure that the installation will be complete in accordance with these specifications. 1. Ensure power transformer size, electrical characteristics and location are consistent with the design and service voltage provided by the electrical utility coordinated with other trades. 2. Arrange for electric meter (by Utility) and provide meter bases in accordance with utility requirements. 3. Furnish and coordinate installation of metering C.T.'s and P.T.'s furnished by Utility. 4. Pay any charges required by the electric utility for connection and turn-on. D. Prior to commencing work, coordinate complete communication service. 1. Verify compliance with communication service utility requirements. 2. Verify exact location of each service point and type of service. 3. Pay any charges required by the communication service utility for connection and turn-on. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT UTILITY COORDINATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 21 00 - 3 E. Coordinate complete communication line connections at locations indicated on Drawings with the local communication company. F. Prior to commencing site work, coordinate underground conduit installations with other work to eliminate conflicts and avoid interferences with other underground piping systems. G. Coordinate necessary outages with local utility and Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Materials shall be furnished in accordance with the applicable requirements of the utilities and these specifications. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Equipment shall be furnished in accordance with the applicable requirements of the utilities and these specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT UTILITY COORDINATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 21 00 - 4 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PANELBOARDS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 24 16 - 1 SECTION 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 00 00 – Electrical General Provision. B. Section Includes: Panelboards serving facility feeder circuits or other utilization equipment at the following voltage levels: 1. 208Y/120 Volts, 3 phase, 4 wire. 2. 480Y/277 Volts, 3 phase, 4 wire. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers: 1. IEEE C62.41 – Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits. B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA AB 1 – Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches. 2. NEMA ICS 2 – Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contractors, and Overload Relays, Rated Not More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC. 3. NEMA KS 1 – Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum). 4. NEMA PB 1 – Panelboards. 5. NEMA PB 1.1 – General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. C. International Electrical Testing Association: 1. NETA ATS – Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems. D. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code. E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 67 – Safety for Panelboards. 2. UL 1449 – Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 20 – Contractor submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PANELBOARDS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 24 16 - 2 C. Product Data: Submit catalog data showing specified features of standard products. 1.4 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Section 01 78 39 – Project Record Documents. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of panelboards and record actual circuiting arrangements. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts listing; source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years’ experience. 1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Furnish and install circuit breaker panelboards as indicated in the panelboard schedules, one-lines, and where indicated on the Drawings: 1. Service voltage and configuration per the panel schedules. B. Short circuit rating: 1. Provide panelboards rated as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Testing method per UL 67. 3. Mark panelboards with their maximum short circuit rating at the supply voltage. 4. Panelboards shall be fully rated. C. Provide panelboards with: 1. Dead front construction. 2. Equipped with thermal magnetic molded-case circuit breakers and/or solid-state trip circuit breakers, with trip ratings as shown on the panel schedules. 3. Flush, surface, or motor control center mounted as indicated on the Drawings. D. Provide spares and spaces for future circuit breakers in panels as indicated on the Drawings. 1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. As identified in Section 26 00 00. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer’s complete two-year parts and labor warranty that begins at final acceptance of the project. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PANELBOARDS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 24 16 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: 1. Cutler-Hammer 2. Square D. 3. GE 4. Siemens B. Product Description: NEMA PB1, circuit breaker type, lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboard. C. Bus: 1. General: a. Silver-plated copper 2. Phase Bus: a. Phase busing shall be full size and height without reduction. b. Sized in accordance with UL standards to limit temperature rise on any current carrying part to a maximum of 50 degrees Celsius: 1) Limit current density to less than 1,000 Amps per square inch. c. Insulate all current carrying parts from ground and phase-to-phase with a high dielectric strength insulator. 3. Ground Bus: a. Solidly bonded copper. 4. Neutral Bus: a. Solidly bonded copper. b. Provide as indicated on the Drawings. 5. Provide insulation barriers over the vertical bus behind the dead front shield to provide increased safety during field service. D. Lugs: 1. UL listed for copper and aluminum wire: a. Provide lugs rated for 75 degree Celsius terminations b. Provide bolted main lug terminations. E. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, bolt-on type thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers, with common trip handle for all poles, listed as Type HACR for air conditioning equipment circuits, Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers as indicated on Drawings. Do not use plug-in and tandem circuit breakers. F. Cabinet Front: All cabinet front cover shall be door-in-door with piano type hinges and quarter turn latches. Flush cabinet front with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge, metal directory frame, and flush lock keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Enclosure: 1. NEMA Enclosure Type in accordance with section 26 00 00 paragraph 1.9.C. 2. Minimum width: 20 inches. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PANELBOARDS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 24 16 - 4 3. Gutter space in accordance with the National Electric Code. a. Minimum of 4 inches of gutter space. 4. Dead-front, no live parts when the panelboard is in service. 5. Enclosure entire panelboard bus assembly in a corrosion resistant galvanized steel cabinet. 6. Four-piece front to provide ease of wiring access. 7. Lockable, hinged door over the protective devices with a flush, cylinder tumbler-type lock with catch and door pull. a. Minimum 2 keys per each panelboard. b. Key all panelboard locks alike. 8. Circuit directory frame and card on the inside of the door. 9. Interior design such that replacement of circuit breakers does not require disturbing adjacent units or removal of the main bus connectors. 10. Provide NEMA 4X enclosures with a NEMA 4X stainless steel outer enclosure, with a hinged door, and a NEMA 1 interior panelboard. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors: As specified in Section 26 43 00 and shown on the Drawings. B. Provide each panelboard with a nameplate on the outside of the door with panel designation, voltage, and number of phases. Nameplate shall be attached with panhead screws. Adhesive attachment not allowed. 1. Panel Designations in ¼-inch high letters above voltage and phase in 1/8-inch high letters; for example. PPA-1 480/277V-3PH-4W C. Circuit Identification Labels: 1. Provide index cards behind heavy clear plastic in cardholders on the inside of the doors. 2. Type all information on the cards using designations in the panel schedules. 3. Laminated on both sides. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1. B. Install filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards. C. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes to balance phase loads. D. Install engraved plastic nameplates in accordance with Section 26 00 00 and 26 05 53. E. Install spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to accessible location above ceiling. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PANELBOARDS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 24 16 - 5 F. Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 26 00 00 and 26 05 26. Connect equipment ground bars of panels in accordance with NFPA 70. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS. B. Perform circuit breaker inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in panelboard to balance phase loads to within 20 percent of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits. 3.4 SCHEDULES A. Circuiting with the panelboard shall match the panel schedules as indicated on the Drawings. B. Provide type-written schedule in each panelboard. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PANELBOARDS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 24 16 - 6 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT TOGGLE SWITCHES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 27 25 - 1 SECTION 26 27 25 TOGGLE SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. B. National Electrical Contractors Association. C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association. D. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 1.3 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. General purpose toggle switches. 2. Special Purpose Switch (press actuated switch) for Corrosive and Wet Areas. 3. Rocker type switches. 4. Single-pole, double throw, three-position switches. 5. Dimmer switches. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 26 Section 26 27 26 “Receptacles”. 2. Division 26 Section 26 27 27 “Plates”. 3. Division 26 Section “Electrical General Provisions”. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. B. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor. C. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the: 1. National Electrical Code. 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. 3. National Fire Protection Association. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT TOGGLE SWITCHES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 27 25 - 2 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Toggle switches shall be specification grade, back and/or side wired, quiet action, totally enclosed, rated 20 amperes at 120-277 VAC or as indicated on the plans, and meeting the latest applicable Federal Specifications. B. Toggle switches used for programmable panelboards shall be as recommended by the panelboard manufacturer. C. Provide switches with the operator style and contact arrangement as shown on the plans and as required for proper operation. D. General purpose toggle switches shall be black everywhere. Special purpose switches shall have a color as shown. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with Sections 01 33 20 and 26 00 00. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. C. Field quality-control test reports. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements. 1. Shall meet all applicable UL and CSA standards. B. Standards. 1. Federal Specification W-S-896E. C. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Eaton (Cooper) Wiring Devices. 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour). 5. General Electric Co. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT TOGGLE SWITCHES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 27 25 - 3 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20. B. Heavy Duty Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A, back wired, Catalog Numbers are for Black Switches: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Eaton (Cooper); AH1221BK (single pole), AH1222BK (two pole), AH1223BK (three way), AH1224BK (four way). b. Hubbell; 1221BK (single pole), 1222BK (two pole), 1223BK (three way), 1224BK (four way). c. Leviton; 1221-2E (single pole), 1222-2E (two pole), 1223-2E (three way), 1224-2E (four way). d. Pass & Seymour; 20AC1-BK (single pole), 20AC2-BK (two pole), 20AC3-BK (three way), 20AC4-BK (four way). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Verify compliance of wiring device with dry area, wet area, corrosive area, or other area conditions which may be listed in other sections of the specifications or on the drawings. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Mount all toggle switches four (4) feet above finished floor unless otherwise noted. B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Take steps to ensure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. C. Conductors: 1. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 2. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. 3. Existing Conductors: a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT TOGGLE SWITCHES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 27 25 - 4 D. Device Installation: 1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 5. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer. 6. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 7. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 8. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT RECEPTACLES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 27 26 - 1 SECTION 26 27 26 RECEPTACLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASME International B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Inc. C. InterNational Electrical Testing Association. D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association. E. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. F. NFPA 110, Emergency and Standby Power Systems. G. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 1.3 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Receptacles and receptacles with integral GFCI. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 26 Section 26 27 25 “Toggle Switches”. 2. Division 26 Section 26 27 27 “Plates”. 3. Division 26 Section “Electrical General Provisions”. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor. D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. E. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the: 1. National Electrical Code. 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. 3. National Fire Protection Association. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT RECEPTACLES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 27 26 - 2 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General purpose duplex receptacle shall be black. B. Special purpose receptacle shall have a body color as shown. C. General purpose receptacles shall be rated 20 A at 125 VAC, NEMA configuration 5-20R, except as otherwise required by the plans or specifications. D. Receptacles in the following areas shall be of the ground fault interrupter type: 1. Outdoors. 2. Vaults. 3. Below grade rooms and areas. 4. Other areas as required by the National Electrical Code. E. In the office areas of the plant, all receptacles shall be of the rectangular designer type. F. On 20 A circuits with a single duplex receptacle, outside, in corrosive areas, or as indicated on the plans, provide receptacles rated 20 A at 125 VAC, NEMA configuration 5-20R. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with Sections 01 33 20 and 26 00 00. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. C. Field quality-control test reports. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements. 1. Shall meet all applicable UL and CSA standards. B. Standards. 1. Federal Specification W-C-596. C. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configuration. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT RECEPTACLES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 27 26 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Eaton (Cooper) Wiring Devices. 2. Crouse-Hinds. 3. General Electric. 4. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 5. Interlink. 6. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 7. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour). 8. Russellstol. 9. Woodhead. 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. GFCI RECEPTACLES 1. General Description: Straight blade, feed-through type: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A. a. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A, back and side wired (catalog numbers are for black receptacles) Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1) Eaton (Cooper); VGF20BK. 2) Hubbell; GF20BKLA. 3) Pass & Seymour; 2095BK. b. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles for use in offices and other finished areas, 125 V, 20 A, back and side wired (catalog numbers are for white receptacles) Products Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1) EatonCooper; VGF20W. 2) Hubbell; GF20WLA 3) Pass & Seymour; 2095W. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Mount all weatherproof outlets horizontally. B. Mount vertical receptacles with equipment ground opening down. C. Mount horizontal receptacles with neutral opening up. D. Mount all receptacles at the following heights unless otherwise noted: 1. Process and production areas four (4) feet above finished floor. E. Coordination with Other Trades: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT RECEPTACLES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 27 26 - 4 1. Take steps to ensure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. F. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. 4. Existing Conductors: a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough. G. Device Installation: 1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 5. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer. 6. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 7. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 8. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact. H. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. I. Adjust locations of floor service outlets to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Receptacle Identification shall comply with Division 26 Section "Plates”, and conductor Identification shall comply with Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification." BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT RECEPTACLES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 27 26 - 5 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement. B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: 1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2Ω are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT RECEPTACLES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 27 26 - 6 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLATES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 27 27 - 1 SECTION 26 27 27 PLATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association. B. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 1.3 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Indoor and outdoor plates for toggle switches. 2. Indoor and outdoor plates for receptacles. 3. NEMA 4 or NEMA 4X plates. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 26 Section 26 27 25 “Toggle Switches”. 2. Division 26 Section 26 27 26 “Receptacles”. 3. Division 26 Section “Electrical General Provisions”. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the: 1. National Electrical Code. 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. 3. National Fire Protection Association. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with Sections 01 33 20 and 26 00 00. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. C. Engraving Schedule: 1. Description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates. 2. Furnish complete engraving schedule for engraved nameplates. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLATES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 27 27 - 2 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Use square or rectangular metal plates for all applications unless otherwise indicated. Metal plates shall be steel hot-dip galvanized, cast aluminum, sherardized, or stainless steel. B. Use stainless steel type 302 plates, 0.040" thick, in all plant and process areas. C. Use cast iron or cast aluminum plates for cast device boxes, material to match that of the box. D. Plates for receptacles installed outdoors or in wet or damp areas shall have gasketed stainless steel or cast aluminum flip covers. Plates shall be U.L. approved for weatherproof locations with plug inserted. 1. For GFCI (ground fault) receptacles: a. Pass & Seymour WPH26. E. Plates for switches installed outdoors or in wet or damp areas shall have gasketed stainless steel or cast aluminum flip covers. 1. At outdoor locations shall be rain tight, gasketed: a. Crouse-Hinds DS185 cast aluminum. b. Pass & Seymour WP2 stainless steel. F. Decorator Receptacle Arraignments, for use with GFCI Receptacle: 1. Pass & Seymour Type SS26. G. Plates for switches installed indoors in dry areas shall be: 1. Stainless steel. a. Standard Toggle Switch Arraignments: 1) Pass & Seymour Type SS1. 2) Pass & Seymour Type SS2. 3) Pass & Seymour Type SS3. 4) Pass & Seymour Type SS4. 5) Pass & Seymour Type SS5. 6) Pass & Seymour Type SS6. b. Decorator Switch Arraignments: 1) Pass & Seymour Type SS26. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLATES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 27 27 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Ensure all plates make a firm seal with wall for recessed mounted devices. 1. Outside edges of plates must conform with building lines. B. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. C. Provide plates for all outlet boxes and fittings of all systems except at outlets where fixture canopies are used. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification." 1. Plates for switches and receptacles shall be engraved where possible. a. Engraved plates shall be in lieu of separate nameplates. b. Plates shall be engraved with the following information: 1) Area served. 2) Circuit fed from. c. Engraving shall be treated to improve visibility and, except for stainless steel plates, to prevent corrosion. d. Characters shall be block letter pantograph engraved with a minimum character height of 1/8". END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLATES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 27 27 - 4 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SAFETY SWITCHES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 28 15 - 1 SECTION 26 28 15 SAFETY SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Enclosed safety switches; fusible and nonfusible. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 26 Section “Electrical General Provisions”. 2. Division 26 Section “Electrical Identification”. 3. Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the Contractor and its Sub-Contractors to review all sections to insure a complete and coordinated project. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the: 1. National Electrical Code. 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. 3. National Fire Protection Association. B. System Description 1. Furnish and install heavy-duty type safety switches as indicated on the plans and in the specifications. 2. Provide safety switches with the number of poles, voltage, current, and horsepower ratings as required by the load. 3. Furnish and install a local horsepower rated safety switch for each and every motor as identified on the drawings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with Sections 01 33 20 and 26 00 00. B. Product Data: 1. Catalog Cut Sheets 2. Complete data sheets indicating: a. Manufacturer. b. Type of enclosure. c. Voltage rating. d. Current rating. e. Horsepower rating. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SAFETY SWITCHES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 28 15 - 2 f. Fused or Non-fused. g. Cross-referenced to device table in drawings. h. Complete dimensional and weight information. C. Operating Manuals 1. Furnish complete operating and maintenance instructions presenting full details for care and maintenance of equipment of every nature furnished and/or installed under this section. a. Complete electrical ratings. b. Complete renewal parts list. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements. 1. All safety switches shall be heavy-duty type and shall comply with the following standards. a. NEMA KS1-1990 for Type HD. b. UL 98. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Eaton. 2. Square D. 3. G.E. 4. Siemens 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Switch Interiors 1. With the switch door open, the switchblades shall be fully visible in the "OFF" position. 2. All current carrying parts shall be completely plated on all surfaces. 3. Arc shields shall be removable to allow access to the movable and stationary contacts. 4. Line and load connections lugs: a. Front accessible. b. Front removable. c. UL listed for 60 or 75 C copper conductors. B. Switch Mechanism 1. Shall be of the quick make, quick break designs, so that the parting contacts cannot be prohibited or restrained from moving by the operating handle once the contacts have started to move in either the "open" or "closed" direction. 2. Operating handle must be an integral part of the enclosure frame and in no way part of the door or cover. 3. Provisions shall be made for padlocking the switch in either the "ON" or "OFF" position. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SAFETY SWITCHES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 28 15 - 3 a. "OFF" position as a standard feature with a minimum of three locks. b. "ON" position by drilling out a center punched marking in the handle guide for one lock. 4. Dual cover interlock to prevent opening of the switch door in the "ON" position and to prevent closing the switch mechanism with the door open. 5. Handle position shall clearly indicate whether the switch is "ON" or "OFF." C. Ratings 1. All switches shall be UL horsepower rated for AC and/or DC with the rating not less than the load served. 2. Fused switches. a. Shall have a UL approved method of field conversion from standard Class H fuse spacing to Class J fuse spacing. 1) Ratings 100 A thru 600 A at 240 Volts. 2) Ratings 30 A thru 600 A at 600 Volts. b. Shall accept Class R fuses and shall have a UL listed rejection feature present to reject all fuses except Class R when Class R fuses are shown on the plans. c. Minimum UL listed short circuit ratings: 1) 200,000 Amps RMS symmetrical when used with Class R or Class J fuses. 2) 10,000 Amps RMS symmetrical when used with Class H fuses. 3) 200,000 Amps RMS symmetrical when used with Class L fuses in the 800 and 1200 ampere size. d. Fuse clips shall be spring reinforced and plated. D. Enclosures 1. Enclosures must as a minimum meet the requirements for the area designation as defined and listed: a. In Section 26 00 00 – Electrical General Provisions. b. On the contract drawings. c. In case of a conflict, the more stringent enclosure standard shall be used. 2. NEMA 1 enclosures: a. General purpose enclosures with hinged doors. b. Sheet steel. c. Manufacture’s standard gray baked enamel finish electrostatically deposited. 3. NEMA 3R enclosures: a. Doors shall be securable in the open position. b. Provisions for bolt on hubs or Meyer hubs. c. Constructed of galvanized steel. d. Manufacture’s standard gray baked enamel finish UV resistant electrostatically deposited. 4. NEMA 12 enclosure. a. Furnish without knockouts. b. Hinged covers fully gasketed to assure a dust-tight enclosure. c. Constructed of galvanized steel. d. Manufacture’s standard gray baked enamel finish electrostatically deposited. 5. NEMA 4, 4X and 5 enclosures. a. Furnished without knockouts. b. Stainless steel enclosures and hardware. c. Door full gasketed and held closed under pressure by latches. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SAFETY SWITCHES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 28 15 - 4 6. NEMA 7 and 9 enclosures. a. Shall be used in Hazardous Areas as indicated on drawings. b. Shall be rated for the Hazardous Classification indicated. E. Neutral and Grounding Provisions 1. Provisions shall be made for a field installed insulated groundable neutral kit. a. The neutral kit shall be furnished where indicated on the contract drawings. 2. Equipment ground kits shall be furnished for each and every switch. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive safety switches for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Provide all mounting brackets, stands, hardware as necessary to completely support the switches at the locations indicated on the drawings. 1. Finish and provide materials for all brackets, stands and hardware shall match the switch installed thereon. B. When possible, mount switches rigidly to exposed building structure or equipment structural members. C. When mounting NEMA 4, 4X, 5 enclosures maintain a minimum of 0.25 inch air space between the enclosure and the supporting surface. D. Use Meyers hubs or bolt-on hubs for all conduit penetrations on NEMA 3R, 4, 4X, and 5 enclosures. E. Connect equipment grounding conductors only to the approved equipment ground kit. F. Furnish and install a nameplate for each and every safety switch. 1. In conformance with Division 26 Section “Electrical Identification”. 2. Shall identify voltage, circuit, fuse size, and equipment served on the nameplate. G. When mounting switches on Unistrut type channel lagged to walls, channel must be run vertically behind the switch. H. Switches must be mounted plumb and level to within ±1/32" over their longest dimension. 3.3 CLEANING A. All switches must be vacuumed clean after installation and prior to installation of any wire. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SAFETY SWITCHES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 28 15 - 5 END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SAFETY SWITCHES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 28 15 - 6 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 28 16 - 1 SECTION 26 28 16 LOW-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for Circuit Breakers. a. Molded case circuit breakers. b. Molded case switches. c. Motor circuit protectors. d. Low voltage metal enclosed (large air iron frame) circuit breakers. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 26 Section “Electrical General Provisions”. 2. Division 26 Section “Electrical Identification”. 3. Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the Contractor and its Sub-Contractors to review all sections to insure a complete and coordinated project. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Molded Case Circuit Breakers 1. U.L.: a. U.L. 489 - Branch Circuit and Service Circuit Breakers. b. U.L. 1087 - Molded Case Switches. 2. NEMA: a. AB-1 - Standards Publication Molded Case Circuit Breakers. 3. Federal Specifications: a. WC -375A - Circuit Breaker, Molded Case, Branch Circuit and Service. B. ANSI Large Air Iron Frame Circuit Breakers 1. NEMA: a. SG3 - Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers. 2. ANSI: a. C37.13 - American National Standards for Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers used in Enclosures (IEEE Std 20). b. C37.16 - Preferred Ratings, Related Requirements and Application Recommendations for Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breakers and AC Power Circuit Protectors. c. ANSI C37-50 - Test Procedures for Low-Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers used in Enclosures BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 28 16 - 2 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the: 1. NEC: National Electrical Code. 2. IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. 3. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Furnish molded case, insulated case, power type, or motor circuit protector circuit breakers as indicated on the drawings and connect to form a completed system. B. Circuit breakers must be of the current and voltage ratings indicated and be capable of interrupting the available fault current. C. Where circuit breakers are used as disconnects for miscellaneous over-current protection, provide automatic type enclosed units with the indicated ratings and complying with applicable requirements (including manufacturer) for circuit breakers as specified. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with Sections 01 33 20 and 26 00 00. B. Product Data: 1. Catalog Cut Sheets 2. Complete data sheets indicating: a. Manufacturer. b. Type of enclosure. c. Voltage rating. d. Current rating. e. Amperage rating. f. Complete dimensional and weight information. C. Operating Manuals 1. Furnish complete operating and maintenance instructions presenting full details for care and maintenance of equipment of every nature furnished and/or installed under this section. a. Complete electrical ratings. b. Complete renewal parts list. 1.7 WARRANTY A. All circuit breakers shall be 100% warranted for a period of not less than two years from the date of final acceptance by the ENGINEER. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 28 16 - 3 1. Eaton. 2. Square D. 3. GE. 4. Siemens. 5. ABB. 6. Cutler-Hammer. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Breakers General 1. All breakers shall have temperature insensitive trips. B. Molded Case Circuit Breakers 1. Molded case circuit breakers for distribution panelboards and motor control centers. a. Basic circuit breaker must be trip free with a quick-make, quick-break mechanism. b. Trip indicating handle position. c. Frame sizes: 1) 150 Amp. 2) 400 Amp. 3) 600 Amp. 4) 800 Amp. 5) 1,200 Amp. d. Trip mechanism as indicated on drawings: 1) Thermal magnetic. 2) Thermal high magnetic. 3) Solid State. a) Adjustable long time pickup-, ampere setting to determine the value of current that the breaker will carry indefinitely. b) Adjustable long time delay- varies the time it will take the breakers to trip under sustained overload. c) Adjustable short time pickup- controls the level of high current the breaker will carry for short periods of time. d) Adjustable short time delay- controls the length of time the breaker will carry a high current without tripping. e) Adjustable instantaneous pickup- controls level at which immediate tripping of breaker occurs. i. Instantaneous trip function may be eliminated on main breakers, refer to drawings. f) Adjustable ground fault pickup- controls the level at which the breaker will trip under a ground fault condition (where shown on the drawings). g) Adjustable ground fault delay- controls the time that a ground fault can exist without tripping the breaker (where ground fault feature is shown on the drawings). h) Long time pickup indicator- provides a visual indication that the breaker is experiencing an overload condition. i) Fault indicators shall be either mechanical or powered from a separate battery and charger that shall be an integral component of the switchboard. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 28 16 - 4 i. Indicator for overload fault trip. ii. Indicator for short circuit fault trip. iii. Indicator for ground fault trip. 2. Provide non-automatic trip breakers (molded case switches) only where specifically indicated on the contract drawings or in the specifications. C. ANSI Metal Enclosed (Large Air Iron Frame) Circuit Breakers 1. Shall be used exclusively in: a. 600 V switchgear. 2. The individually mounted low-voltage power circuit breakers shall consist of an electrically and mechanically trip-free circuit breaker element. 3. The circuit breaker shall be of the draw out type capable of being racked to the disconnect position with the door closed. a. Interlocks shall be provided to prevent connecting or disconnecting the circuit breaker unless the breaker is in the open position. b. The breaker shall be prevented from being closed during any racking operation. c. A test position shall be provided to permit operating the breaker while it is disconnected from the power circuit. 4. Circuit breakers shall be manually or electrically operated as indicated on the drawings. a. Control voltage for electrically operated circuit breakers shall be as indicated on the drawings. 5. Overcurrent trip device shall be solid-state type with the following functions: a. Adjustable long time pickup-, ampere setting to determine the value of current that the breaker will carry indefinitely. b. Adjustable long time delay- varies the time it will take the breakers to trip under sustained overload. c. Adjustable short time pickup- controls the level of high current the breaker will carry for short periods of time. d. Adjustable short time delay- controls the length of time the breaker will carry a high current without tripping. e. Adjustable instantaneous pickup- controls level at which immediate tripping of breaker occurs. 1) Instantaneous trip function may be eliminated on main breakers, refer to drawings. f. Adjustable ground fault pickup- controls the level at which the breaker will trip under a ground fault condition (where shown on the drawings). g. Adjustable ground fault delay- controls the time that a ground fault can exist without tripping the breaker (where ground fault feature is shown on the drawings). h. Long time pickup indicator- provides a visual indication that the breaker is experiencing an overload condition. i. Fault indicators shall be either mechanical or powered from a separate battery and charger that shall be an integral component of the switchboard. 1) Indicator for overload fault trip. 2) Indicator for short circuit fault trip. 3) Indicator for ground fault trip. 6. Each circuit breaker shall be equipped with the following accessories as required for proper operation of the control system. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 28 16 - 5 a. Shunt trip. b. Overload bell alarm. c. Lockout Device. d. Auxiliary Switch: 1) Number of contacts as required plus a minimum of one spare. 2) Type “a” normally open. 3) Type “b” normally closed. 7. Minimum insulation, dielectric withstand ratings: a. Breaker - 2.2 KV. b. Control wiring - 1.5 KV. c. Closing motor - 0.9 KV. 8. Available in the following frame sizes: a. 800 Amps. b. 1,600 Amps. c. 2,000 Amps. d. 3,200 Amps. e. 4,000 Amps. f. 5,000 Amps. 9. Operating Times: a. Electrically closing time from energizing closing circuit until contacts touch, 5 cycles max. b. Maximum clearing time with instantaneous overcurrent trip 3 cycles. c. Maximum clearing time with shunt trip 3.5 cycles. 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Enclosures 1. Furnish enclosures consistent with the area classification and NEMA designation as indicated on the plans and specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive safety switches for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Arrange all breakers to correspond exactly with the schedules. B. In damp or wet areas, mount the enclosures on Unistrut type mounting channels that run vertically so that water and moisture may flow freely behind enclosure. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Low Voltage Molded Case and Insulated Case Circuit Breakers: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 28 16 - 6 1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: a. Compare equipment nameplate data with Drawings and Specifications. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. c. Inspect anchorage and alignment. d. Circuit breaker shall be checked for proper mounting, conductor size and feeder designation. e. Operate circuit breaker to ensure smooth operation. f. Check tightness of connection with torque wrench in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. g. Inspect operating mechanism, contacts, and arc chutes in unsealed units. 2. Electrical tests for breakers in excess of 200 Amp trip ratings: a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low resistance ohmmeter. b. Time-current characteristic tests shall be performed by passing 300% rated current through each pole separately. Trip time shall be determined: 1) Determine long-time pickup. 2) Determine short-time pickup. c. Instantaneous pickup current shall be determined by run-or pulse method: 1) Clearing times should be within 4 cycles or less. d. Insulation resistance shall be determined pole to pole, across pole and pole to ground. 1) Circuit breaker shall be closed. 2) Test voltage shall be 1000 volts dc applied for one minute. e. Perform adjustments for final setting in accordance with the Short Circuit and Coordination Study. 3. Test values: a. Contact resistance shall be compared to adjacent poles and similar breakers: 1) Deviations of more than 50% shall be investigated. b. Insulation resistance shall not be less than 100 MΩ. c. All trip times shall fall within manufacturer’s published time current curves: 1) Circuit breakers exceeding maximum time shall be replaced. d. Instantaneous pickup current levels should be within 20% of manufacturer’s published values. B. Low Voltage Air Circuit Breaker ANSI Class Breakers: 1. Visual and mechanical inspection: a. Compare equipment nameplate data with Drawings and Specifications. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. c. Inspect anchorage and alignment and grounding. d. Verity that all maintenance devices are available for servicing and operating the breaker. e. Verify the unit is clean. f. Verify the arc chutes are intact. g. Perform all mechanical operator and contact alignment tests in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction manual. h. Check cell fit and element alignment. i. Check tightness of connections using a calibrated torque wrench. j. Verify racking mechanism operation. k. Lubrications requirements. 1) Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 28 16 - 7 2) Verify appropriate lubrication on moving and sliding surfaces. 2. Electrical tests: a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low resistance ohmmeter. b. An insulation resistance test shall be performed on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase to ground with the circuit breaker closed, and across each open pole: 1) Test voltage shall be 1000 volts dc applied for one minute. c. Perform a contact/pole-resistance test. d. Make adjustments to the trip settings in accordance with the Short Circuit and coordination study. e. Minimum pickup current shall be determined by primary current injection. f. Long time delay shall be determined by primary injection at 300% pickup current. g. Short time pickup and time delay shall be determined by primary injection of current. h. Instantaneous pickup current shall be determined by primary injection. i. Trip unit reset characteristics shall be verified. j. Verify correct operation of any auxiliary features such as trip and pickup indicators, zone interlocking, electrical close and trip operation, trip-free, antipump function, trip unit battery condition, and reset all trip logs and indicators. k. Verify operation of charging mechanism. 3. Test Values: a. Contact resistance shall be determined in micro-ohms: 1) Any values exceeding 200 µΩ or any values which deviate from adjacent poles or similar breakers by more than 50% should be investigated. b. Insulation resistance shall not be less than 50 MΩ. c. Pickup currents and trip times should fall within manufacturer’s published time-current characteristic tolerance ban. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 28 16 - 8 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT LIGHTING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 50 00 - 1 SECTION 26 50 00 LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. The general requirements for luminaries and light poles. B. Related Sections 1. Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the Contractor and its Sub-Contractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the: 1. National Electrical Code. 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. 3. National Fire Protection Association. 4. Illuminating Engineering Society. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall furnish and install luminaries, and accessories for all lighting systems, complete and operable, all in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Individual luminaire types etc. are identified in the plans and on the luminaire schedule. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with Section 26 00 00. B. Product Data 1. Catalog literature for each luminaire specified cross referenced to the luminaire type found on the Luminaire Schedule in the plans. a. Each such submittal shall clearly describe: 1) Materials. 2) Type of diffuser. 3) Hardware. 4) Gasketing. 5) Reflector. 6) Chassis. 7) Finish. 8) LEDs. 9) LED Driver. 2. Complete literature for each luminaire substitutions. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT LIGHTING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 50 00 - 2 a. Submittals for luminaries shall be sufficient for competent comparison of the proposed luminaire to the originally specified luminaire. 1) Photometric data shall include coefficients of utilization, average brightness, candle power distribution curves, and lumen output chart. b. Substitutions for specified luminaires shall be based upon quality of construction, light distribution, appearance, and maintenance. 3. Support method shall be submitted for interior fixtures weighing more than 50 pounds. 4. Ballast catalog data indicating lamp wattage, input watts, sound rating, power factor, and type of ballast. a. Data for outdoor ballast shall be include low temperature starting characteristics. 5. Photocell data submittal shall indicate switching capacity, the means of adjusting the lighting pickup level, and enclosure. 6. Pole-mounted luminaries, including complete data on the pole material, finish, handholes, anchoring, and fixture attachment. 7. Pole height, dimensions, bolt hole circle layout, light supporting rating, and wind withstand rating based on effective area of luminaries, and hardware. C. Calculations 1. Provide mounting details for indoor lights with calculations showing that the installation meets the seismic requirements of the site. 2. Calculations and design must be made by and stamped by a registered professional engineer registered in the state where the project is being constructed. In light of the fact that this design is being provided by a professional engineer the submittal will be reviewed for form and content but not reviewed for technical completeness, methods, or calculations. D. Record Drawings 1. The luminaire schedule in the plans must be updated to reflect the acceptable substitutions, after the substitution has been reviewed and accepted by the Engineer. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Without limiting the generality of other requirements of these specifications, all work hereunder shall conform to the applicable requirements of the referenced portions of the following documents, to the extent that the requirements therein are not in conflict with the provisions of this Section. 1. National Electric Code. 2. Underwriters Laboratories. 3. ANSI C82.1 Specifications for Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts. 4. ANSI C84.4 Specifications for High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts (Multiple Supply Type). 5. Standards of the Certified Ballast Manufacturer's Association. 6. Illuminating Engineering Society (IES). 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Luminaries shall be stored in their original cartons from the manufacturers until the time of installation. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT LIGHTING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 50 00 - 3 B. Luminaire poles shall be stored on blocks above grade until the time of installation. 1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Seismic and wind withstand ratings in accordance with Section 26 00 00. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Exterior lighting system operation shall be demonstrated during the hours of darkness. B. Lighting demonstration shall occur within 2 weeks prior to project acceptance. 1.9 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warrant all luminaries, ballasts, and lamps for a minimum period of one (1) year from Substantial Completion unless otherwise specified by the General Conditions. 1. Furnish, and replace any defective equipment during that period at no charge to the Owner. 2. Said warranty shall be independent of any manufacturer infant mortality or normal failure statistics. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Pre-approved manufacturers are indicated on the Luminaire Schedule, and in notes on the drawings. 1. This selection of manufacturer's is not intended to be overly restrictive and the Contractor may make substitutions from the manufacturers listed in the Luminaire Schedule in order to offer a more advantageous luminaire package. 2. The lighting design and luminaire selection has been based upon the photometrics of the identified luminaries. It is the Contractor's responsibility to insure and prove to the Engineer at time of submittal that any substitutions meet the quality and photometric requirements of the original design. 3. The Engineer shall make final determination if proposed substitutes are acceptable. a. The Contractor shall furnish the identified luminaries at no additional cost to the Owner for any luminaire substitutions that in the sole opinion of the Engineer, are not acceptable. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Luminaries – General 1. All luminaries shall be pre-wired with leads of 18-AWG, minimum, for connection to building circuits. 2. In general the luminaries furnished shall be as per the Luminaire Schedule. The specifications apply to those luminaries not described or as an addition or supplement to the luminaire schedule. B. Exterior Luminaries BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT LIGHTING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 50 00 - 4 1. Exterior luminaries in combination with their mounting pole and bracket shall be capable of withstanding winds of levels consistent with the levels identified in Section 26 00 00 without damage. 2. Exterior luminaries shall have corrosion-resistant hardware and hinged doors or lens retainer. 3. Luminaries specified to be furnished with integral photo-electrical control shall be of the luminaire manufacturer's standard design. C. Interior Luminaries 1. Interior fluorescent luminaries without diffusers shall be furnished with end plates. 2. Where diffusers are required, they shall be of high molecular strength acrylic. a. Minimum thickness of the acrylic shall be 0.125 inches for all diffusers, except that those on 4-foot square fixtures shall be 0.187 inches thick. D. Lamps 1. Lamps shall be first-line: a. General Electric. b. Westinghouse. c. Sylvania. d. Phillips. 2. Fluorescent lamps shall be: a. As indicated on the luminaire schedule. 3. Incandescent lamps shall be frosted unless a specified lighting control system requires clear globe lamps. 4. High-pressure sodium lamps shall be of the dual filament design, suitable for use in standby duty. a. General Electric - LU400/SBY. 5. Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, lamps shall be suitable for operation in any burning position. E. Photo-Electric Cells 1. Photoelectric cells for control of multiple fixtures shall be self-contained, weatherproof type and shall be provided with time-delay features. F. Ballasts 1. Ballasts for fluorescent luminaries in office areas shall have a Class "A" sound rating: a. Such ballasts shall be of the low loss type. b. All ballasts shall be high power factor, Class P. c. Primary ballast voltage shall be suitable for use in the branch circuits indicated in the Contract Documents. d. Ballast shall be of the electronic design with plug and receptacle type connectors. 2. In general all ballasts must be: a. High efficiency. b. High power factor. c. High output. d. Suitable for operation at -20 Deg F for all luminaries not located in office areas. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT LIGHTING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 50 00 - 5 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Poles in general: 1. As indicated in the Luminaire Schedule 2. Anchor bolts: a. Hot dip galvanized, and formed from hot rolled carbon steel bar stock, with an "L" bend on one end. b. Complete with leveling shims. 3. Anchor base: a. Fabricated from structural quality hot rolled carbon steel plate, with a minimum yield strength of 36,000 psi. b. Base plate to telescope the pole shaft. c. Welded top and bottom along the entire perimeter. d. With slotted bolt holes on the bolt circles as submitted. 4. Handhole: a. Reinforced handhole located approximately eighteen (18) inches above the base. b. Complete with steel cover and attachment screws. c. With an integral ground connection nut, ½" x 13 UNC welded to the pole for connection to the grounding system. 5. Pole mounted convenience outlet: a. Furnish a 120 volt, GFCI protected receptacle integrally mounted in the pole shaft at twenty four (24) inches above the base. Complete with corrosion resistant and weather proof cover. b. In accordance with Section 26 27 26. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Special Techniques 1. Luminaries shall be installed plumb and square with building and wall intersections. a. Pendant-mounted luminaries which are mounted from sloping ceilings shall be suspended by ball hangers, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. b. Luminaries installed in machinery rooms shall be located after machines have been installed. 2. In all cases, luminaire locations shall be coordinated with work of other trades to prevent obstruction of light from the fixtures. 3. Luminaries shall be installed in accordance with the Drawings. 4. Unless otherwise indicated, luminaries shall be centered on ceiling tiles. 5. Luminaries weighing more than 25 pounds shall be supported independently of the outlet box. 6. Recessed luminaries shall be installed light-tight to the ceiling and shall be provided with auxiliary safety supports attached directly to the building structure. a. Said safety supports shall consist of #12 AWG soft drawn galvanized wire. 7. Luminaries installed in suspended grid ceilings shall be supported independently of the grid. 8. All luminaries installed in suspended grid ceilings shall be held in place with seismic restraint clips. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT LIGHTING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 26 50 00 - 6 B. Lighting Poles 1. Poles shall be set on anchor bolts and secured with double nuts on each bolt. 2. After luminaire has been leveled and plumbed, the pole base shall be dry-packed. 3. Poles that are specified as hinged shall have one pole lowering winch furnished for all of the poles. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. All outdoor luminaries shall be aimed after installation during dark evening hours as directed by the Engineer. 3.3 CLEANING A. Lenses, diffusers, and reflectors shall be cleaned just prior to the time specified for the system demonstrations. B. Luminaire trim, poles and support brackets, where finish has been damaged, shall be refinished. C. All luminaries used during construction for construction lighting shall be cleaned, the lamps shall be replaced, and the used lamps returned to the Owner. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Exterior lighting system operation shall be observed to indicate that fixtures are properly focused, photo-cell operation is correct, and that switching functions as intended in accordance with the drawings. B. Similar requirements shall apply to interior lighting. C. Through demonstration, the Contractor shall also verify that panel schedules properly indicate the lighting outlets connected to each circuit. D. Lighting demonstration shall occur in accordance with paragraph 1.8 of this Section. 3.5 SCHEDULES A. Refer to the Luminaire Schedules as found in the plans. END OF SECTION DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SITE PREPARATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 10 00 - 1 SECTION 31 10 00 SITE PREPARATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The Work of this Section includes all those measures required during the Contractor's initial move onto the site to protect existing fences, structures and associated improvements, streets, and utilities downslope of construction areas from damage due to boulders, trees or other objects dislodged during the construction process: clearing, grubbing and stripping; and regrading of areas to receive embankment fill. B. The Contractor is required to protect and preserve all things designated to remain. Where Contractor's operation causes damage or injury to trees and plants designated to remain, an arborist or other qualified professional shall be employed by the Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner, to repair the damage or provide adequate replacement to the Owner's satisfaction where damage is beyond repair. 1.2 SITE INSPECTION A. Prior to moving onto the Project site, the Contractor shall inspect the site conditions and review maps of the existing plant site and off-site pipeline routes and facilities delineating the Owner's property and right-of-way lines. B. Contractor shall submit photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site preparation. C. The Contractor shall identify and accurately locate utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions. Existing conditions shall be incorporated into the record drawings for the project. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. The following definitions apply to the Work of this Section: Clearing is defined as cutting trees, removing fences and posts, removing curbs and other improvements to prepare the site for grubbing and stripping. Grubbing is defined as the below grade part of clearing to remove roots, small piping, irrigation systems, etc., to prepare the site for stripping. Stripping is defined as removing a surface layer of soil and organic material, sod, topsoil, and other unsuitable material as defined in Section 31 23 00 – Earthwork, to a depth that earthwork can proceed. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SITE PREPARATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 10 00 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction. B. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. C. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated. D. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner. 3.2 TREE PROTECTION A. Erect and maintain a temporary fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip line of groups of trees to remain. Remove fence when construction is complete. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within drip line of remaining trees. Do not permit vehicles, equipment, or foot traffic within drip line of remaining trees. B. Do not excavate within drip line of trees, unless otherwise indicated. C. Where excavation for new construction is required within drip line of trees, hand clear and excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently relocated and covered with soil. Coat cut faces of roots more than 1-1/2 inches in diameter with an emulsified asphalt or other approved coating formulated for use on damaged plant tissues. Cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying out. Backfill with soil as soon as possible. D. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Engineer. Employ a qualified arborist, licensed in jurisdiction where project is located, to submit details of proposed repairs and to repair damage to trees and shrubs. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined by the qualified arborist. 3.3 UTILITIES A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SITE PREPARATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 10 00 - 3 Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: Notify Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Engineer’s written permission. C. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed. 3.4 PRIMARY PLANT SITE ACCESS A. Develop any necessary access to the site, including barrier facilities to be installed at the beginning of construction in order to prohibit entry of unauthorized persons. B. Utility Interference: Where existing utilities interfere with the Work of this Section, notify the Engineer and work around the interferences until a directive is issued. 3.5 CLEARING, GRUBBING, AND STRIPPING A. All construction areas shall be cleared of grass and weeds to at least a depth of six inches and cleared of structures, concrete or masonry debris, trees, logs, upturned stumps, loose boulders, and any other objectionable material of any kind which would i nterfere with the performance or completion of the Work, create a hazard to safety, or impair the Work's subsequent usefulness or obstruct its operation. Loose boulders within 10 feet of the top of cut lines shall be incorporated in landscaping or removed from the site. Trees and other natural vegetation outside the actual lines of construction shall be protected from damage during construction, as directed by the Engineer. B. Within the limits of clearing, the areas below the natural ground surface shall be grubbed to a depth necessary to remove all stumps, roots, buried logs, and all other objectionable material. Debris or waste shall be totally removed if they are found on the site. All objectionable material from the clearing and grubbing process shall be removed from the site and wasted in approved safe locations in compliance with state and federal regulations. C. The area to be affected by construction that have not been pre-excavated to the subgrade elevation shall be removed and placed in the designated stockpile areas, and/or incorporated into landscaped areas or other nonstructural embankments. D. For all areas that have not been previously disturbed, including staging areas and temporary construction easements, topsoil-salvaging operation shall immediately follow clearing operations. The area shall be stripped of topsoil to a depth of 8 inches. Unsuitable materials, specified in Section 31 23 00, shall not be considered topsoil. The Contractor shall strip to the depth indicated regardless of the material encountered. All stripped topsoil shall be stockpiled within stripped areas in stockpiles not to exceed 15 feet in height. Vegetation shall be ground or chipped to a mulching consistency and mixed with the stripped soil. Stockpiles shall be placed away from high construction traffic areas and shall be fenced and signed to prevent accidental use as fill prior to topsoil replacement. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT SITE PREPARATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 10 00 - 4 E. Upon completion of Work within the construction areas stripped of topsoil, the stored topsoil shall be respread over the disturbed areas. Topsoil shall be spread in about a 6 -inch layer. Respread topsoil shall match the existing terrain as much as possible. Interfaces between restored disturbed areas and undisturbed areas shall be chain dragged to eliminate obvious edges. All tracks and equipment marks shall be chain dragged or hand raked away. Replaced topsoil shall be thoroughly watered for dust control upon completion of the respreading operations. Once topsoil replacement has been completed, no vehicles or other motorized equipment shall be allowed to travel on the finished surface. F. Unless otherwise indicated, native trees larger than three inches in diameter at the base shall not be removed without the Engineer's approval. The removal of any trees, shrubs, fences, or other improvements outside of rights-of-way, if not necessary for the Contractor’s choice of means and methods, shall be arranged with the property owner and be removed and replaced at no increased cost to the Owner. G. Except in areas to be excavated, holes and other holes resulting from Work of this section shall be backfilled with suitable material in accordance with Section 31 23 00 – Earthwork. 3.6 SITE IMPROVEMENTS A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction. B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated. Unless existing full-depth joints coincides with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut length of existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw -cut faces vertically. 3.7 DISPOSAL A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials, including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner’s property. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EARTHWORK WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 23 00 - 1 SECTION 31 23 00 EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall perform all earthwork indicated and required for construction of the Work, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Commercial Standards 29 CFR 1926 OSHA Safety and Health Regulations for Construction ASTM C595 Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements ASTM D 422 Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils ASTM D 1556 Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method ASTM D 1557 Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3) (2,700 kN-m/m3) ASTM D 1633 Test Method for Compressive Strength of Molded Soil-Cement Cylinders ASTM D 2419 Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate ASTM D 2487 Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes ASTM D 2901 Test Method for Cement Content of Freshly Mixed Soil Cement ASTM D 2922 Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods ASTM D 4253 Test Methods for Maximum Index Density of Soils using a Vibratory Table ASTM D4254 Test Method for Minimum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils and Calculation of Relative Density ASTM D 4318 Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EARTHWORK WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 23 00 - 2 ASTM D4832 Test Method for Preparation and Testing of Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM) Test Cylinders ASTM D 5971 Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM) ASTM D 6023 Test Method for Unit Weight, Yield, Cement Content, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM) ASTM D 6024 Test Method for Ball Drop on Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM) to Determine Suitability for Load Application ASTM D 6103 Test Method for Flow Consistency of Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM) 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor's attention is directed to the provisions of Subpart P, 29 CFR 1926 of the OSHA Safety and Health Standards for Construction, which relate to protection of employees in excavations. The Contractor shall submit, for information to the Engineer, the project excavation plan and the name of the Contractor's competent person, prior to commencing any excavation. B. Submit samples of all materials proposed to be used in the work in accordance with the requirements in Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures. Sample sizes shall be as determined by the testing laboratory. C. Submit dewatering and water removal plan prior to performing any dewatering or water removal. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUITABLE FILL AND BACKFILL MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. General: Fill, backfill, and embankment materials shall be suitable material. B. Suitable Materials: Suitable material is defined as selected or processed clean, well graded earth material, sands and gravels free of excessive fines, less than 20 percent rock and boulders larger than 4 inches, grass, roots, brush, vegetation, or other deleterious materials. C. Fill and backfill materials within 6 inches of any structure or pipe shall be smaller than 1 inch in any dimension. 1. Suitable materials may be obtained from onsite excavations, may be processed onsite materials, or may be imported. If imported materials are required by this Section or to meet the quantity requirements of the Project, provide the imported materials at no additional expense to the Owner, unless a unit price item is included for imported materials in the bidding schedule. Onsite materials shall be stockpiled and segregated prior to use. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EARTHWORK WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 23 00 - 3 2. The following types of suitable materials are defined: Type A (Granular Backfill): Crushed rock or gravel, and sand well graded and readily compacted, non-plastic, meeting the following gradation requirements: Sieve Size Percentage Passing 1-inch 100 No. 40 15 - 60 No. 200 0 - 15 Type B (Crushed Rock): Manufactured angular, crushed rock, non-plastic, meeting the following gradation requirements: Sieve Size Percentage Passing 3/8-inch 100 No. 4 30 - 50 No. 200 0 - 5 Type C (Sand Backfill): Sand non-plastic, meeting the following gradation requirements: Sieve Size Percentage Passing 3/4-inch 100 No. 4 80 - 100 No. 10 30-50 No. 40 10-30 No. 200 7 - 15 Squeegee is not acceptable as sand backfill. Type D (Select Backfill): Suitable material that can be readily compacted and meets the requirements of AASHTO M 145 classification A-1-a, non-plastic, well graded with a maximum particle size of 2 inches. Sieve Size Percentage Passing 2-inch 100 No. 10 30-50 No. 40 15-30 No. 200 0 - 15 Type E (Pea Gravel Backfill): Crushed rock or gravel with 100 percent passing a 1/2-inch sieve and not more than 10 percent passing a No. 4 sieve. Type F (Drainrock): Crushed rock or gravel conforming to one of the following gradation requirements, as shown on the Drawings or approved by the Engineer: Percentage Passing Sieve Size 3-inch Max. 2-inch Max. 3/4-inch Max. 3-inch 100 - - 2-inch 90 - 100 100 - 1-1/2 inch 70 - 100 90 – 100 - 3/4 inch 0 - 50 0 – 15 100 1/2-inch - - 95 - 100 BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EARTHWORK WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 23 00 - 4 3/8-inch 0 - 10 0 - 5 70 - 100 No. 4 0 - 25 - - No. 8 0 - 5 - - No. 200 0 - 3 - 0 - 3 Type G (Type II Aggregate Base): Well-graded, clean, hard, tough, durable, and sound mineral aggregates consisting of crushed stone, or crushed gravel, free of organic matter and contamination from chemical or petroleum products meeting State specification requirements and conforming to the following Table and gradations: Aggregate Properties Aggregate Class A B Dry Rodded Unit Weight Not less than 75 lb/ft3 AASHTO T 19 Liquid Limit/Plastic Index Non-plastic PI 6 AASHTO T 89 AASHTO 90 Aggregate Wear Not to exceed 50 percent AASHTO T 96 Gradation Table 2 AASHTO T 11 AASHTO T 27 CBR with a 10 lb surcharge measured at 0.20 inch penetration 70% Minimum N/A AASHTO T 193 Two Fractured Faces 50% Min N/A AASHTO T 335 Sieve Size Percentage Passing 1 ½ -inch 100 1-inch 90 - 100 3/4-inch 70 - 85 1/2-inch 65 - 80 3/8-inch 55 - 75 No. 4 40 - 60 No. 16 25 - 40 No. 200 8 - 13 Type H (Graded Drainrock): Graded drainrock shall be crushed rock or gravel, durable and free from slaking or decomposition under the action of alternate wetting and drying. The material shall be uniformly graded and shall meet the following gradation requirements: Sieve Size Percentage Passing 1-inch 100 3/4 inch 90 - 100 3/8-inch 40 - 100 No. 4 25 - 40 No. 8 18 - 33 No. 30 5 - 15 No. 50 0 - 7 No. 200 0 - 3 BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EARTHWORK WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 23 00 - 5 Type I: (Levee Material): Clayey sand to sandy clay obtained from off-site borrow sources or from onsite excavations, processed to the extent required to produce a material with a maximum size of 4 inches, well-graded from coarse to fine, and free from roots, sticks, organic matter, concrete, asphalt and other deleterious material. Levee material shall meet the following gradation requirements: Sieve Size Percentage Passing 4-inch 100 No. 4 50 - 70 No. 200 30 - 50 Type J (Cement-Treated Backfill): Material which consists of Type F material, or any mixture of Types B, C, G, and H materials which has been cement-treated so that the cement content of the material is not less than 5 percent by weight when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2901. The ultimate compressive strength at 28 days shall be not less than 400 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1633. Type K (Topsoil): Stockpiled topsoil material which has been obtained at the site by removing soil to a depth as defined in Section 31 10 00 - Site Preparation. Removal of the topsoil shall be done after the area has been stripped of vegetation and debris. Type M (Aggregate Subbase): Crushed rock aggregate subbase material non-plastic that can be compacted readily by watering and rolling to form a stable base. The sand equivalent value shall not be less than 18 and shall meet one of the following gradation requirements, as shown on the Drawings or approved by the Engineer: Percentage Passing Sieve Size 3-inch Max. 2-inch Max. 3-inch 100 - 2-inch 90 - 100 100 1-1/2 inch - 95 - 100 1-inch 70 - 90 - No. 4 30 - 65 30 - 65 No. 16 15 - 40 15 - 40 No. 200 2 - 12 2 - 12 Type N (trench plug): Low permeable fill material, a nondispersable clay material having a minimum plasticity index of 10. Type O (Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM)): CLSM shall consist of a mixture of portland cement, aggregate, fly ash, water, and approved admixtures conforming to the following requirements: 3. Portland Cement: Comply with ASTM C150, Type V. 4. Aggregate: Clean imported sand and gravel or selected material from the excavation, imported material, or a combination thereof as approved by the Engineer. Maximum aggregate size shall be 1 to 3 inches. The soluble sulfate content of aggregate in the mixture shall not exceed 0.3 percent by dry weight. 5. Water: Potable quality. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EARTHWORK WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 23 00 - 6 6. Fly Ash: Class C, ASTM C 618 or approved alternate. 7. The minus 200 sieve fraction shall be nonplastic, as defined by ASTM D 4318. By this standard, a soil is considered nonplastic if either the liquid or plastic limit cannot be determined, or if the plastic limit is equal to or greater than the liquid limit. 8. Proportion the CLSM to be a flowable, nonsegregating, self-consolidating low shrink slurry. The Contractor shall determine the materials and proportions used to meet the requirements of these Specifications. 9. The unconfined compressive strength at 7 days shall be a minimum of 100 psi and a maximum of 300 psi. Contractor shall form a minimum of six test cylinders with proposed materials to confirm design strength and mix design. Four of the cylinders shall be broken at 7 days in conformance with applicable concrete cylinder specifications and results provided to Engineer. The remaining two cylinders shall be broken by Contractor at discretion of Engineer. Initial mix design and cylinder breaks shall be completed at least 21 days prior to use of the material on the jobsite. Final mix approval and use of the material shall not occur prior to confirmation of strength by the cylinder breaks. 10. The temperature of the CLSM discharged into the trench shall be below 90 degrees F. 11. CLSM backfill under concrete structures shall be protected during curing as specified Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 12. CLSM shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D 4832, ASTM D 5971, ASTM D 6023, and ASTM D6103 Type P: (Suitable Trench Backfill): Suitable material that can be readily compacted, with less than 35 percent passing the No. 200 sieve and a plasticity index of 10 or less. 2.2 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL A. Unsuitable materials include but are not limited to the materials listed below. 1. Soils which, when classified under ASTM D 2487 - Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes, fall in the classifications of Pt, OH, CH, MH, or OL. 2. Soils which cannot be compacted sufficiently to achieve the density indicated for the intended use. 3. Materials that contain hazardous or designated waste materials including petroleum hydrocarbons, pesticides, heavy metals, slag, and any material which may be classified as hazardous or toxic according to applicable regulations. 4. Soils that contain greater concentrations of chloride or sulfate ions, or have a soil resistivity or pH less than the existing onsite soils. 5. Topsoil, except as allowed below. B. [All unsuitable excavated material shall be disposed off site.] 2.3 USE OF FILL, BACKFILL, AND EMBANKMENT MATERIAL TYPES A. Use the types of materials as designated herein for all required fill, backfill, and embankment construction hereunder. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EARTHWORK WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 23 00 - 7 B. Where these Specifications conflict with the requirements of any local agency having jurisdiction or with the requirements of a pipe material manufacturer, notify the Engineer immediately. In case of conflict between types of pipe embedment backfills, use the agency- specified backfill material if that material provides a greater degree of support to the pipe, as determined by the Engineer. In case of conflict between types of trench or final backfill types, use the agency-specified backfill material if that material provides the greater in-place density after compaction. C. Fill and backfill types shall be used in accordance with the following provisions: 1. Embankment fills shall be constructed of Type P material, as defined herein, or any mixture of Type P and Type A through Type F materials. 2. Pipe zone backfill, as defined under "Pipe and Utility Trench Backfill" below, shall consist of the following materials for each pipe material listed below. a. Mortar coated pipe, concrete pipe, and uncoated ductile iron pipe shall be provided with Type A or C material in the pipe zone. b. Coal tar enamel coated pipe, polyethylene encased pipe, tape wrapped pipe, and other nonmortar coated pipe shall be backfilled with Type C material in the pipe zone. c. Plastic pipe and vitrified clay pipe shall be backfilled with Type C material in the pipe zone. d. Where pipelines are installed on grades exceeding 4 percent, and where backfill materials are graded such that there is less than 10 percent passing a No. 4 sieve, trench plugs of Type J or N material shall be provided at maximum intervals of 200 feet unless indicated otherwise. e. Type O material shall be used in the pipe zone where shown on plans, specified, or required by the Engineer for special crossings or other locations, or where otherwise approved. f. Type E material will not be allowed for backfill within the pipe zone. 3. Trench zone backfill for pipelines as defined under "Pipe and Utility Trench Backfill" shall be Type D backfill material. 4. Final backfill material for pipelines under paved areas, as defined under "Pipe and Utility Trench Backfill" shall be Type G backfill material. Final backfill under areas not paved shall be the same material as that used for trench backfill. 5. Trench backfill and final backfill for pipelines under structures shall be Type A or B, except where concrete encasement is required by the Contract Documents. 6. Aggregate base materials under pavements shall be Type G material constructed to the thicknesses indicated. Aggregate subbase shall be Type M material. 7. Backfill around structures shall be Type P material, or Types A through Type F materials, or any mixture thereof, except as shown. 8. Backfill materials beneath structures shall be as follows: a. Drainrock materials under hydraulic structures or other water retaining structures with underdrain systems shall be Type H material. b. Under concrete hydraulic structures or other water retaining structures without underdrain systems, Types F, G or H materials shall be used. c. Under structures where groundwater must be removed to allow placement of concrete, Type F material shall be used. Before the Type F material is placed, filter type geotextile fabric shall be placed over the exposed foundation. d. Under all other structures, Type F, G or H material shall be used. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EARTHWORK WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 23 00 - 8 9. Backfill used to replace pipeline trench overexcavation shall be a layer of Type F material with a 6-inch top filter layer of Type E material or filter fabric to prevent migration of fines for wet trench conditions or the same material as used for the pipe zone backfill if the trench conditions are not wet. 2.4 PIPELINE MARKING TAPE A. Metallic Tape: Tape shall be minimum 5.5 mils thick aluminum foil imprinted on one side, encased in high visibility inert polyethylene jacket. Tape shall be a minimum of 6 inches wide. Imprinted lettering shall be 1 inch tall, permanent black, as indicated. Joining clips shall be manufacturer's standard tin or nickel coated. Tape shall be as manufactured by Reef Industries (Terra "D"), Allen (Detectatape), or equal. B. Plastic Tape: Tape shall be minimum 4-mil thick polyethylene which is impervious to alkalais acids, and chemicals and solvents which are likely in the soil. Tape shall be a minimum of 6 inches wide and lettering shall be 1-inch tall permanent black on a colored background. Tape shall be manufactured by Reef Industries (Terra Tape), Allen (Markline), or equal. C. Warning Tape: Warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities continuously inscribed with a description of utility, colored as follows: 1. Red; Electric. 2. Yellow; Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water Systems. 5. Green: Sewer Systems. 2.5 MATERIALS TESTING A. All soils testing of samples submitted by the Contractor will be done by a testing laboratory of the Owner's choice and at the Owner's expense. At its discretion, the Engineer may request that the Contractor supply samples for testing of any material used in the work. B. Particle size analysis of soils and aggregates will be performed using ASTM D 422 - Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils. C. Determination of sand equivalent value will be performed using ASTM D 2419 - Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate. D. Unified Soil Classification System: References in this Section to soil classification types and standards shall have the meanings and definitions indicated in ASTM D 2487. The Contractor shall be bound by all applicable provisions of said ASTM D 2487 in the interpretation of soil classifications. E. The testing for chloride, sulfate, resistivity, and pH will be done by a testing laboratory of the Owner's choice and at the Owner's expense. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EARTHWORK WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 23 00 - 9 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION – GENERAL A. General: Except when specifically provided to the contrary, excavation shall include the removal of all materials of whatever nature encountered, including rock and all obstructions of any nature that would interfere with the proper execution and completi on of the Work. The removal of said materials shall conform to the lines and grades indicated or ordered. Unless otherwise indicated, the entire construction site shall be stripped of all vegetation and debris, and such material shall be removed from the site prior to performing any excavation or placing any fill. Furnish, place, and maintain all supports and shoring that may be required for the sides of the excavations. Excavations shall be sloped or otherwise supported in a safe manner in accordance with safety requirements of the requirements of OSHA Safety and Health Standards for Construction (29CFR1926). B. Maximum Length of Open Trench: The maximum length of open trench in urban and rural areas shall not exceed 500-feet at each pipe installation heading beyond the end of the installed pipeline, or the requirements of the agency with jurisdiction, whichever is lesser. C. Construction Delays: In the case of any construction delay in excess of five calendar days, whether Contractor or Owner caused, the Contractor shall backfill the excavation, install temporary paving including temporary traffic markings, and restore traffic to pre- construction condition to minimize disruption to traffic and the community at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Removal and Exclusion of Water: Remove and exclude water, including storm water, groundwater, irrigation water, and wastewater, from all excavations. Dewatering wells, well points, sump pumps, or other means shall be used to remove water and continuously maintain groundwater at a level at least 2 feet below the bottom of excavations before the excavation work begins at each location. Water shall be removed and excluded until backfilling is complete and all field soils testing has been completed. 3.2 STRUCTURE, ROADWAY, AND EMBANKMENT EXCAVATION A. Excavation Beneath Structures and Embankments: Except where otherwise indicated for a particular structure or ordered by the Engineer, excavation shall be carried to the grade of the bottom of the footing or slab. Where indicated or ordered, areas beneath structures or fills shall be overexcavated. The subgrade areas beneath embankments shall be excavated to remove not less than the top 6 inches of native material and where such subgrade is sloped, the native material shall be benched. When such overexcavation is indicated, both overexcavation and subsequent backfill to the required grade shall be performed. When such overexcavation is not indicated but is ordered by the Engineer, such overexcavation and any resulting backfill will be paid for under a separate unit price bid item if such bid item has been established; otherwise payment will be made in accordance with a negotiated price. After the required excavation or overexcavation has been completed, the exposed surface shall be scarified to a depth of 6 inches, brought to optimum moisture content, and rolled with heavy compaction equipment to obtain 95 percent of maximum density. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EARTHWORK WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 23 00 - 10 B. Excavation Beneath Concrete Reservoirs: Excavation under reservoirs shall extend to the bottom of the drainrock layer. After such excavation has been completed, the exposed surface shall be rolled with heavy compaction equipment to 95 percent of maximum density and then graded to provide a reasonably smooth surface for placement of the drainrock. Areas under the reservoir upon which fill is to be placed shall be scarified to a depth of 6 inches, brought to optimum moisture content, and compacted to obtain 95 percent of maximum density with moisture content within plus and minus 2 percent of the optimum moisture content. C. Excavation Beneath Paved Areas: Excavation under areas to be paved shall extend to the bottom of the aggregate base or subbase, if such base is called for; otherwise it shall extend to the bottom of the paving thickness. After the required excavation has been completed, the top 12 inches of exposed surface shall be scarified, brought to optimum moisture content, and rolled with heavy compaction equipment to obtain 95 percent of maximum density. The finished subgrade shall be even, self-draining, and in conformance with the slope of the finished pavement. Areas that could accumulate standing water shall be regraded to provide a self-draining subgrade. D. Notification of Engineer: Notify the Engineer at least 3 days in advance of completion of any structure excavation and allow the Engineer a review period of at least 1 day before the exposed foundation is scarified and compacted or is covered with backfill or with any construction materials. 3.3 PIPELINE AND UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION A. General: Unless otherwise indicated or ordered, excavation for pipelines and utilities shall be open-cut trenches with widths as indicated. B. Trench Bottom: Except when pipe bedding is required, the bottom of the trench shall be excavated uniformly to the grade of the bottom of the pipe zone. Excavations for pipe bells and welding shall be made as required. C. Open Trench: The maximum amount of open trench permitted in any one location shall be [500 feet, or the length necessary to accommodate the amount of pipe installed in a single day, whichever is greater]. All trenches shall be fully backfilled at the end of each day or, in lieu thereof, shall be protected in accordance with Section 01 71 50 – Protection of Existing Facilities. The Contractor shall provide temporary 6-foot chain link fencing panels for protection of all open excavations and trenches within public streets, residential areas, and all other locations with the exception of unimproved open areas where excavations and/or pipeline trenches that can be safely sloped in accordance with current OSHA standards to provide safe access without the use of shoring devices. Temporary fencing panels shall fully enclose open excavations and trenches, and shall remain in place during all non-working hours. D. Trench Overexcavation: Where trenches are indicated to be overexcavated, excavation shall be to the depth indicated, and backfill shall be installed to the grade of the bottom of the pipe bedding. E. Overexcavation: When ordered by the Engineer, whether indicated on the Drawings or not, trenches shall be overexcavated beyond the depth and/or width shown. Such overexcavation BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EARTHWORK WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 23 00 - 11 shall be to the dimensions ordered. The trench shall then be backfilled to the grade of the bottom of the pipe bedding. Overexcavation less than 6 inches below the limits on the Drawings shall be done at no increase in cost to the Owner. When the overexcavation ordered by the Engineer is 6 inches or greater below the limits shown, or wider, additional payment will be made. Said additional payment will be made under separate unit price bid items for overexcavation if such bid items have been established; otherwise payment will be made in accordance with a negotiated price. F. Where pipelines are to be installed in embankments, fills, or structure backfills, the fill shall be constructed to a level at least one foot above the top of the pipe before the trench is excavated. G. If a moveable trench shield is used during excavation operations, the trench width shall be wider than the shield so that the shield is free to be lifted and then moved horizontally without binding against the trench sidewalls. If the trench walls cave in or slough, the trench shall be excavated as an open excavation with sloped sidewalls or with trench shoring, as indicated and as required by the pipe structural design. 3.4 OVEREXCAVATION NOT ORDERED OR INDICATED A. Any overexcavation carried below the grade ordered or indicated, shall be backfilled to the required grade with the indicated material and compaction. Such work shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.5 EXCAVATION IN LAWN AREAS A. Where excavation occurs in lawn areas, the sod shall be carefully removed, dampened, and stockpiled to preserve it for replacement. Excavated material may be placed on the lawn; provided, that a drop cloth or other suitable method is employed to protect the lawn from damage. The lawn shall not remain covered for more than 72 hours. Immediately after completion of backfilling and testing of the pipeline, the sod shall be replaced and lightly rolled in a manner so as to restore the lawn as near as possible to its original condition. Provide new sod if stockpiled sod has not been replaced within 72 hours. 3.6 EXCAVATION IN VICINITY OF TREES A. Except where trees are indicated to be removed, trees shall be protected from injury during construction operations. No tree roots over 2 inches in diameter shall be cut without express permission of the Engineer. Trees shall be supported during excavation by any means previously reviewed by the Engineer. 3.7 BACKFILL – GENERAL A. Backfill shall not be dropped directly upon any structure or pipe. Backfill shall not be placed around or upon any structure until the concrete has attained sufficient strength to withstand the loads imposed. Backfill around water retaining structures sha ll not be placed until the structures have been tested, and the structures shall be full of water while backfill is being placed. Structures shall not be constructed on CLSM backfill until the CLSM has obtained a 7-day minimum cure. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EARTHWORK WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 23 00 - 12 B. Except for drainrock materials being placed in overexcavated areas or trenches, backfill shall be placed after all water is removed from the excavation, and the trench sidewalls and bottom have been dried to a moisture content suitable for compaction. C. If a moveable trench shield is used during excavation, pipe installation, and backfill operations, the shield shall be moved by lifting the shield free of the trench bottom or backfill and then moving the shield horizontally. Do not drag trench shields along the trench causing damage or displacement to the trench sidewalls, the pipe, or the bedding and backfill. D. Immediately prior to placement of backfill materials, the bottoms and sidewalls of trenches and structure excavations shall have all loose sloughing, or caving soil and rock materials removed. All materials disturbed from their intact condition that are 4 inches or larger in least dimension or aggregates of soil material thicker than 4 inches shall be removed from the excavation walls and base prior to placing pipe or any backfill material. Trench sidewalls shall consist of excavated surfaces that are in a relatively undisturbed condition before placement of backfill materials. 3.8 PLACING AND SPREADING OF BACKFILL MATERIALS A. Backfill materials shall be placed and spread evenly in layers. When compaction is achieved using mechanical equipment, the layers shall be evenly spread so that the depth of each uncompacted layer shall not exceed 8 inches of compacted thickness. B. During spreading, each layer shall be thoroughly mixed as necessary to promote uniformity of material in each layer. Pipe zone backfill materials shall be manually spread around the pipe so that when compacted the pipe zone backfill will provide uniform bearing and side support. C. Where the backfill material moisture content is below the optimum moisture content, water shall be added before or during spreading until the proper moisture content is achieved. D. Where the backfill material moisture content is too high to permit the indicated degree of compaction the material shall be dried or mixed with drier material until the moisture content is satisfactory. 3.9 COMPACTION OF EARTH FILL, BACKFILL, AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS A. Each layer of Types A, B, C, G, H, I, and K backfill materials as defined herein, where the material is graded such that at least 10 percent passes a No. 4 sieve, shall be mechanically compacted to the indicated percentage of density. Equipment that is consistently capable of achieving the required degree of compaction shall be used and each layer shall be compacted over its entire area while the material is at the required moisture content. B. Each layer of Type E and J backfill materials shall be compacted by means of at least 2 passes from a flat plate vibratory compactor. When such materials are used for pipe zone backfill, vibratory compaction shall be used at the top of the pipe zone or at vertical intervals of 24 inches, whichever is the least distance from the subgrade. C. Fill on reservoir and structure roofs shall be deposited at least 30 days after the concrete roof slab has been placed. Equipment weighing more than 10,000 pounds when loaded shall not BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EARTHWORK WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 23 00 - 13 be used on a roof. A roller weighing not more than 8,000 pounds shall be used to compact fill on a roof. D. Pipe zone backfill materials that are granular, shall be compacted by using vibratory compactors. E. Equipment weighing more than 10,000 pounds shall not be used closer to structure walls than a horizontal distance equal to the depth of the fill at that time. Hand operated power compaction equipment shall be used where use of heavier equipment is impractical or restricted due to weight limitations. F. Backfill around and over pipelines that is mechanically compacted shall be compacted using light, hand operated, vibratory compactors and rollers. After completion of at least 2 feet of compacted backfill over the top of pipeline, compaction equipment weighing no more than 8,000 pounds may be used to complete the trench backfill. G. Compaction Requirements: The following compaction test requirements shall be in accordance with ASTM D 1557, method C. Compaction shall be obtained with the moisture content within plus or minus 2 percent of the optimum moisture content. Where agency or utility company requirements govern, the highest compaction standards shall apply. Location or Use of Fill Percentage of Maximum Density Pipe embedment backfill for flexible pipe 90 Pipe bedding and overexcavated zones under bedding for flexible pipe, including trench plugs 90 Pipe embedment backfill for steel yard piping --- Pipe embedment backfill for rigid pipe 90 Pipe zone backfill portion above embedment for rigid pipe 90 Pipe bedding and overexcavated zones under bedding for rigid pipe 90 Final backfill, beneath paved areas or BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EARTHWORK WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 23 00 - 14 structures 95 Final backfill, not beneath paved areas or structures 85 Trench zone backfill, beneath paved areas and structures, including trench plugs 95 Trench zone backfill, not beneath paved areas or structures, including trench plugs 90 Embankments and fills 90 Embankments and fills beneath paved areas or structures 95 Backfill beneath structures and hydraulic structures 95 Backfill and fill around structures on reservoir or structure roof 90 Topsoil (Type K material) 80 Aggregate base or subbase (Type G or M material) 95 H. 3.10 PLACEMENT OF CLSM A. Following placement and anchoring of the pipe, remove all loose soil from trench walls and floor. Remove any unstable soil at the top of the trench, which might fall into the trench during placement of the CLSM. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EARTHWORK WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 23 00 - 15 B. Prior to placement of CLSM, the pipeline steel temperature shall be controlled as specified in Section 02570 - Steel Pipe. C. Deliver the CLSM to the trench in ready mix trucks and utilize pump or chutes to place the CLSM in the trench. Direct CLSM to one side of the pipe, taking care not to displace the pipe at any time. Continue placing CLSM on one side of the pipe until CLSM has gone under the pipe and up the other side to a depth of 1.5 feet above the pipe bottom. Use at least two hand- held vibrators to continuously liquefy and move CLSM into all voids. Adjust water in mixture to maintain fluid consistency but maintain strength requirements. Continue placing CLSM on both sides of the pipe continuously using two vibrators for every 30 feet of pipe run. D. Maintain stability of pipe throughout CLSM placement. CLSM will likely require placement in lifts to prevent pipe flotation. No movement of the pipe caused by flotation will be allowed. If any movement occurs, the CLSM material shall be removed and the pipe placed back on line and grade. Any damage to the pipeline system caused by movement of the pipe shall be removed and/or repaired in full conformance with these Contract Documents at no additional cost to the Owner. Remove all sloughed material or other debris from top of previously placed CLSM. 3.11 PIPE AND UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL A. Pipe Zone 1. The pipe zone is defined as that portion of the vertical trench cross-section lying between a plane 6 inches below the bottom surface of the pipe and a plane at a point 12 inches above the top surface of the pipe. The bedding is defined as that portion of pipe zone backfill material between the bottom of the trench and the bottom of the pipe. The embedment is defined as that portion of the pipe zone material between the bedding and a plane at a point 6 inches above the top surface of the pipe. 2. After compacting the bedding, perform a final trim using a string line for establishing grade, such that each pipe section when first laid will be continually in contact with the bedding along the extreme bottom of the pipe. Excavation for pipe bells and welding shall be made as required. 3. The pipe zone shall be backfilled with the indicated backfill material. Exercise care to prevent damage to the pipeline coating, cathodic bonds, and the pipe itself during the installation and backfill operations. 4. If a moveable trench shield is used during backfill operations the shield shall be lifted to a location above each layer of backfill material prior to compaction of the layer. Do not displace the pipe or backfill while the shield is being moved. B. Trench Zone: After the pipe zone backfills have been placed, backfilling of the trench zone may proceed. The trench zone is defined as that portion of the vertical trench cross-section lying between a plane 12 inches above the top surface of the pipe and a plane at a point 18 inches below the finished surface grade, or if the trench is under pavement, 18 inches below the roadway subgrade. C. Marking Tape Installation 1. Continuously install metallic marking tape along the pipe at a depth of 3 feet below finish grade. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EARTHWORK WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 23 00 - 16 2. Continuously install plastic marking tape along the pipe at the elevation indicated on the Drawings. D. Final Backfill: Final backfill is all backfill in the trench cross-sectional area within 18 inches of finished grade, or if the trench is under pavement, all backfill within 18 inches of the roadway subgrade. 3.12 FILL AND EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION A. The area where a fill or embankment is to be constructed shall be cleared of all vegetation, roots and foreign material. Following this, the surface shall be scarified to a depth of 6 inches, moisture conditioned, and rolled or otherwise mechanically compacted. Embankment and fill material shall be placed and spread evenly in approximately horizontal layers. Each layer shall be moistened or aerated, as necessary. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, the depth of each uncompacted layer shall not exceed 8 inches of compacted thickness. The embankment, fill, and the scarified layer of underlying ground shall be compacted to 95 percent of maximum density under structures and paved areas, and 90 percent of maximum density elsewhere. B. When an embankment or fill is to be made and compacted against hillsides or fill slopes steeper than 5H:1V, the slopes of hillsides or fills shall be horizontally benched to key the embankment or fill to the underlying ground. A minimum of 12 inches normal to the slope of the hillside or fill shall be removed and recompacted as the embankment or fill is brought up in layers. Material thus cut shall be recompacted along with the new material at no additional cost to the Owner. Hillside or fill slopes 5H:1V or flatter shall be prepared in accordance with Paragraph A, above. C. Where embankment or structure fills are constructed over pipelines, the first 4 feet of fill over the pipe shall be constructed using light placement and compaction equipment that does not damage the pipe. D. The finish graded surface of the drainrock immediately beneath hydraulic structures shall be stabilized to provide a firm, smooth surface upon which to construct reinforced concrete floor slabs. Where needed to protect slopes and prevent movement of the drainrock, spray asphalt on the finished drainrock surface in accordance with Section 02460 - A. C. Pavement and Base. 3.13 FIELD TESTING A. General: All field soils testing will be done by a testing laboratory of the Owner's choice at the Owner's expense except as indicated below. B. Where soil material is required to be compacted to a percentage of maximum density, the maximum density at optimum moisture content will be determined in accordance with Method C of ASTM D 1557. Field density in-place tests will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 1556 or by such other means acceptable to the Engineer. C. In case the test of the fill or backfill show noncompliance with the required density, perform remedies as may be required to ensure compliance. Subsequent testing to show compliance BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EARTHWORK WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 23 00 - 17 shall be by a testing laboratory selected by the Owner, paid by the Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Provide test trenches and excavations including excavation, trench support, and groundwater removal for the Owner's field soils testing operations. The trenches and excavations shall be provided at the locations and to the depths required by the Owner. All Work for test trenches and excavations shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. E. Frequency of Testing 1. Backfill around structures and in embankments shall be tested every 300 square ft of each lift of placement. 2. CLSM shall be tested each batch being placed or every 300 cubic yards that is placed. 3. Pipe backfill shall have one test every 80 feet (2 joints) of backfill placed. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EARTHWORK WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 23 00 - 18 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DEWATERING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 23 19 - 1 SECTION 31 23 19 DEWATERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes construction dewatering. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to dewater site excavations, in accordance with the requirement of the Contract Documents. B. Dewatering Performance: Design, furnish, install, test, operate, monitor, and maintain dewatering system of sufficient scope, size, and capacity to control ground-water flow into excavations and permit construction to proceed on dry, stable subgrades. 1. Maintain dewatering operations to ensure erosion control, stability of excavations and constructed slopes, that excavation does not flood, and that damage to subgrades and permanent structures is prevented. 2. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means. 3. Accomplish dewatering without damaging existing buildings adjacent to excavation. 4. Remove dewatering system if no longer needed. C. To complete this Work, the Contractor shall secure a Utah Pollution Elimination Discharge System (UPDES) General Permit for Construction Dewatering and Hydrostatic Testing prior to commencing any dewatering work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with water disposal requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Engineer and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated. B. Project-Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is available for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by geotechnical engineer. Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this data. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DEWATERING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 23 19 - 2 1. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary for dewatering. 2. The geotechnical report is included elsewhere in the Project Manual. C. Survey adjacent structures and improvements, employing a qualified professional engineer or land surveyor, establishing exact elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations. 1. During dewatering, regularly resurvey benchmarks, maintaining an accurate log of surveyed elevations for comparison with original elevations. Promptly notify Engineer if changes in elevations occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS – (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by dewatering operations. 1. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding site and surrounding area. 2. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or water accumulation. B. Install dewatering system to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install dewatering system utilizing wells, well points, or similar methods complete with pump equipment, standby power and pumps, filter material gradation, valves, appurtenances, water disposal, and surface-water controls. B. Before excavating below ground-water level, place system into operation to lower water to specified levels. Operate system continuously until drains, sewers, and structures have been constructed and fill materials have been placed, or until dewatering is no longer required. C. Provide an adequate system to lower and control ground water to permit excavation, construction of structures, and placement of fill materials on dry subgrades. Install sufficient dewatering equipment to drain water-bearing strata above and below bottom of foundations, drains, sewers, and other excavations. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DEWATERING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 23 19 - 3 1. Do not permit open-sump pumping that leads to loss of fines, soil piping, subgrade softening, and slope instability. D. Reduce hydrostatic head in water-bearing strata below subgrade elevations of foundations, drains, sewers, and other excavations. 1. Maintain free water level below bottom of excavation during construction. E. Dispose of water removed by dewatering in a manner that avoids endangering public health, property, and portions of work under construction or completed. Dispose of water in a manner that avoids inconvenience to others. Provide sumps, sedimentation tanks, and other flow-control devices as required by authorities having jurisdiction. F. Provide standby equipment on-site, installed and available for immediate operation, to maintain dewatering on continuous basis if any part of system becomes inadequate or fails. If dewatering requirements are not satisfied due to inadequacy or failure of dewatering system, restore damaged structures and foundation soils at no additional expense to Owner. 1. Remove dewatering system from Project site on completion of dewatering. Plug or fill well holes with sand or cut off and cap wells a minimum of 36 inches below overlying construction. G. Damages: Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by dewatering operations. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DEWATERING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 23 19 - 4 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GEOTEXTILES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 32 19 - 1 SECTION 31 32 19 GEOTEXTILES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install geotextiles, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM) standards, most recent editions: ASTM D 4355 Standard Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles by Exposure to Light, Moisture, and Heat in a Xenon-Arc Type Apparatus. ASTM D 4491 Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity. ASTM D 4533 Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles. ASTM D 4595 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Geotextiles by the Wide-Width Strip Method. ASTM D 4751 Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile. ASTM D 4833 Standard Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance of Geotextiles, Geomembranes, and Related Products. ASTM D 4884 Standard Test Method for Strength of Sewn or Thermally Bonded Seams of Sewn Geotextiles. ASTM D 4886 Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Geotextiles (Sand Paper/Sliding Block Method). 1.3 DEFINITIONS. A. Fabric: Geotextile, a permeable geosynthetic comprised solely of textiles. B. Minimum Average Roll Value (MinARV): Minimum of series of average roll values representative of geotextile provided. C. Maximum Average Roll Value (MaxARV): Maximum of series of average roll values representative of geotextile provided. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GEOTEXTILES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 32 19 - 2 D. Nondestructive Sample: Sample representative of finished geotextile, prepared for testing without destruction of geotextile. E. Overlap: Distance measured perpendicular from overlapping edge of one sheet to underlying edge of adjacent sheet. F. Seam Efficiency: Ratio of tensile strength across seam to strength of intact geotextile, when tested according to ASTM D 4884. G. Woven geotextile: A geotextile fabric composed of polymeric yarn interlaced to form a planar structure with uniform weave pattern. H. Nonwoven geotextile: A geotextile fabric composed of a pervious sheet of polymeric fibers interlaced to form a planar structure with uniform random fiber pattern. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data. 1. Manufacturer’s material specifications and product literature. 2. Installation drawings showing geotextile sheet layout, location of seams, direction of overlap, and sewn seams. 3. Description of proposed method of geotextile deployment, sewing equipment, sewing methods, and provisions for holding geotextile temporarily in place until permanently secured. C. Samples. 1. Geotextile: One-piece, minimum 18-inches long, taken across full width of roll of each type and weight of geotextile. Label each with brand name and furnish documentation of lot and roll number from which each sample was obtained. 2. Field Sewn Seam: 5-foot length of seam, 12-inches wide with seam along center, for each type and weight of geotextile. 3. Securing Pin and Washer: 1 each. D. Certificates. 1. Certification from geotextile manufacturer that products satisfy the indicated requirements. 2. Field seam efficiency test results. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Comply with Section 01 25 10 - Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions. B. Deliver each roll with sufficient information attached to identify manufacturer and product name or number. C. Handle products in manner that maintains undamaged condition. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GEOTEXTILES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 32 19 - 3 D. Do not store products directly on ground. Ship and store geotextile with suitable wrapping for protection against moisture and ultraviolet exposure. Store geotextile in a way that protects it from elements. If stored outdoors, elevate and protect geotextile with waterproof cover. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOVEN GEOTEXTILE A. Woven geotextile shall be composed of polymeric yarn interlaced to form a planar structure with uniform weave pattern. Products shall be calendared or finished so that yarns will retain their relative position with respect to each other. B. Polymeric yarn shall be long-chain synthetic polymers (polyester or polypropylene) with stabilizers or inhibitors added to make filaments resistant to deterioration due to heat and ultraviolet light exposure. C. Sheet Edges: Selvaged and finished to prevent outer material from separating from sheet. D. Unseamed Sheet Width: Minimum 12 feet. E. Nominal Weight per Square Yard: 6 ounces. F. Physical Properties: Conform to physical property requirements below: Property Requirement Test Method Apparent Opening Size (AOS) No. 10 to No. 100 U.S. Standard Sieve Size ASTM D4751 Water Permittivity 0.02 to 3.34 Sec.-1, MinARV ASTM D4491 (Falling Head) Vertical Water Flow Rate 10 to 150 gpm/sq ft, MinARV Wide Width Strip Tensile Strength 60 to 1,500 MinARV ASTM D4595 Wide Width Strip Elongation 14 to 60 percent, MaxARV ASTM D4595 Trapezoidal Tear Strength 30 to 200 lb, MinARV ASTM D4533 Puncture Strength 50 to 250 lb, MinARV ASTM D4833 Abrasion Resistance 5 to 25 percent loss, 250 cycles, MaxARV ASTM D4886 Ultraviolet Radiation Resistance 70 to 90 percent strength retention, MinARV after 500 hours ASTM D4355 BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GEOTEXTILES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 32 19 - 4 2.2 NONWOVEN GEOTEXTILE A. Nonwoven geotextile shall be composed of a pervious sheet of polymeric fibers interlaced to form a planar structure with uniform random fiber pattern. Products shall be calendared or finished so that yarns will retain their relative position with respect to each other. B. Polymeric yarn shall be long-chain synthetic polymers (polyester, polypropylene, or polyethylene) with stabilizers or inhibitors added to make filaments resistant to deterioration due to heat and ultraviolet light exposure. C. Geotextile Edges: Selvaged or finished to prevent outer material from separating from sheet. D. Unseamed Sheet Width: Minimum 6 feet. E. Nominal Weight Per Square Yard: 8 ounces. F. Physical Properties: Conform to physical property requirements below: Property Requirement Test Method Apparent Opening Size (AOS) Max No. 80 U.S. Standard Sieve Size ASTM D4751 Water Permittivity 1.4 sec.-1, MinARV ASTM D4491 (Falling Head) Vertical Water Flow Rate 95 gpm/sq ft, MinARV Grab Tensile Strength 205 MinARV ASTM D4632 Grab Tensile Elongation 50 percent, MaxARV ASTM D4632 Trapezoidal Tear Strength 80 lb, MinARV ASTM D4533 CBR Puncture Strength 500 lb, MinARV ASTM D6241 Ultraviolet Radiation Resistance 70 percent strength retention, MinARV after 500 hours ASTM D4355 Property Requirement Test Method Apparent Opening Size (AOS) Max No. 40 U.S. Standard Sieve Size ASTM D4751 Water Permittivity 0.70 sec.-1, MinARV ASTM D4491 Tensile Strength 180 lbs, MinARV ASTM D4632 Elongation at failure (%)1 >50 ASTM D4632 Puncture Strength 80 lb ASTM D4833 BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GEOTEXTILES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 32 19 - 5 Property Requirement Test Method Ultraviolet Radiation Resistance 70 percent strength retention, MinARV after 500 hours ASTM D4355 1. Minimum average roll value (weakest principal direction) 2.3 SEWING THREAD A. Sewing thread shall be polypropylene, polyester, or Kevlar thread with durability equal to or greater than durability of geotextile sewn. 2.4 SECURING PINS A. Securing pins shall be steel rods or bars conforming to the following: 1. 3/16-inch diameter. 2. Pointed at one end; head on other end, sufficiently large to retain washer. 3. Minimum Length: 12-inches. B. Steel Washers for Securing Pins: 1. Outside Diameter: Not less than 1-1/2 inches. 2. Inside Diameter: 1/4-inch. 3. Thickness: 1/8-inch. C. Steel Wire Staples: 1. U-shaped. 2. 10-gauge. 3. Minimum 6-inches long. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Laying Geotextile 1. Notify the Engineer whenever geotextiles are to be placed. Do not place geotextile prior to obtaining Engineer’s approval of underlying materials. 2. Lay and maintain geotextile smooth and free of tension, folds, wrinkles, or creases. B. Orientation on Slopes 1. Orient geotextile with long dimension of each sheet parallel to direction of slope. 2. Geotextile may be oriented with long dimension of sheet transverse to direction of slope only if sheet width, without unsewn seams, is sufficient to cover entire slope and anchor trench and extend at least 18-inches beyond toe of slope. C. Joints. 1. Unseamed Joints. a. Overlap unseamed joints to the following dimensions unless otherwise indicated: b. Foundation/Subgrade Stabilization: Minimum 18-inches. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GEOTEXTILES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 32 19 - 6 c. Riprap: Minimum 18-inches. d. Drain Trenches: Minimum 18-inches, except overlap shall equal trench width if trench width is less than 18-inches. e. Other Applications: Minimum 12-inches. 2. Sewn Seams. a. Use sewn seams wherever stress transfer from one geotextile sheet to another is necessary. Sewn seams, as approved by Engineer, also may be used instead of overlap at joints for applications that do not require stress transfer. b. Seam efficiency shall be minimum 70 percent. c. Type: "J" type seams are preferred, but flat or butterfly seams are acceptable. d. Stitch Count: Minimum 3 to maximum 7 stitches per inch. e. Stitch Type: Double-thread chain stitch, Type 401, Federal Standard No. 751a. f. Stitch Location: 2-inches from geotextile sheet edges, or more if necessary to develop required seam strength. g. Sewing Machines: Capable of penetrating 4 layers of geotextile. D. Securing Geotextile. 1. Secure geotextile during installation as necessary with sand bags or other means approved by Engineer. 2. Securing Pins a. Insert securing pins with washers through geotextile, midway between edges of overlaps and 6-inches from free edges. b. Spacing: Slope Maximum Pin Spacing (Feet) Steeper than 3:1 2 3:1 to 4:1 3 Flatter than 4:1 5 c. Install additional pins across each geotextile sheet as necessary to prevent slippage of geotextile or to prevent wind from blowing geotextile out of position. d. Push each securing pin through geotextile until washer bears against geotextile and secures it firmly to subgrade. 3. For underdrain applications (geotextile cushion over PVC or rubber waterproof membrane liner) do not use pins, staples or other securing methods that would damage waterproof membrane liner. E. Placing Products over Geotextile. 1. Notify Engineer before placing material over geotextile. Do not cover installed geotextile prior to receiving authorization from the Engineer to proceed. 2. If tears, punctures, or other geotextile damage occurs during placement of overlying products, remove overlying products as necessary to expose damaged geotextile. Repair damage as indicated below. F. Installing Geotextile in Trenches. 1. Place geotextile in a way that will completely envelope granular drain material to be placed in trench and with indicated overlap at joints. Overlap geotextile in direction BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GEOTEXTILES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 32 19 - 7 of flow. Place geotextile in a way and with sufficient slack for geotextile to contact trench bottom and sides fully when trench is backfilled. 2. After granular drain material is placed to grade, fold geotextile over top of granular drain material, unless otherwise indicated. Maintain overlap until overlying fill or backfill is placed. G. Riprap Applications. 1. Overlap geotextile at each joint with upstream sheet of geotextile overlapping downstream sheet. Sew joints where wave run-up may occur. H. Geotextile-Reinforced Earth Wall Applications. 1. Sew exposed joints; extend sewn seams minimum 3-feet behind face of wall. 2. Protect exposed geotextile from damage and deterioration until permanent facing is applied. I. Silt Fence Applications. 1. Install geotextile in one piece or continuously sewn to make one piece, for full length and height of fence, including portion of geotextile buried in toe trench. 2. Install bottom edge of sheet in toe trench and backfill in a way that securely anchors geotextile in trench. 3. Securely fasten geotextile to a wire mesh backing and each support post in a way that will not result in tearing of geotextile when fence is subjected to service loads. 4. Promptly repair or replace silt fence that becomes damaged. 3.2 REPAIRING GEOTEXTILE A. Repair or replace torn, punctured, flawed, deteriorated, or otherwise damaged geotextile. Repair damaged geotextile by placing patch of undamaged geotextile over damaged area plus at least 18-inches in all directions beyond damaged area. Remove interfering material as necessary to expose damaged geotextile for repair. Sew patches or secure them with pins and washers, as indicated above for securing geotextile, or by other means approved by Engineer. 3.3 REPLACING CONTAMINATED GEOTEXTILE A. Protect geotextile from contamination that would interfere, in Engineer's opinion, with its intended function. Remove and replace contaminated geotextile with clean geotextile. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Test seam efficiency by preparing and testing minimum of one set of nondestructive samples per acre of each type and weight of geotextile provided for the Work. Test according to ASTM D4884 and submit written results to Engineer. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GEOTEXTILES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 32 19 - 8 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT RIPRAP WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 37 00 - 1 SECTION 31 37 00 RIPRAP PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. This section covers furnishing and placing compacted rock (riprap) materials in accordance with these specifications and in conformity with the lines, grades, and dimension shown on the drawings or as directed by the ENGINEER. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Commercial Standards: ASTM C 88 Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate ASTM C 535 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Large Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine. ASTM D 5519 Standard Test Method for Particle Size Analysis of Natural and Man-Made Riprap Materials. ASTM D 6473 Standard Test Method for Specific Gravity and Absorption of Rock for Erosion Control AASHTO T 85 Standard Method of Test for Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate AASHTO T 210 Method of Test for Aggregate Durability Index. 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTAL A. At least 30 days before rock is delivered from any source, the contractor shall designate in writing the source from which rock material will be obtained and provide information satisfactory to the ENGINEER that the material meets contract requirements. CONTRACTOR shall provide ENGINEER free access to the source for the purpose of obtaining samples for testing. B. Rock riprap source locations, processing, haul routes, storage and placement plan. C. Certification from a certified independent laboratory that the riprap meets the material properties of this specification, if riprap is provided from a source other than noted on the drawings. D. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT RIPRAP WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 37 00 - 2 1.4 STORAGE OF MATERIALS A. Materials shall be arranged and used in a manner to avoid excessive segregation and to prevent contamination with other materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC 1. Materials shall meet the following requirements. a. Geotextile fabric shall meet all requirement specified in Section 31 32 19. 2.2 GRANULAR FILTER MATERIAL A. Granular filter sources shall be approved by the ENGINEER prior to use. Filter material shall be clean and free from organic matter and free of concrete masonry or concrete pavement. It shall be crushed rock or gravel, durable and free from slaking or decomposition under the action of alternate wetting or drying. The material shall be uniformity graded and shall conform to the following gradation: 1. Type 1 a. Size Percentage Passing b. 3-inch 85 – 100 c. 1 1/2-inch 45 – 75 d. 3/4-inch 10 – 25 e. No. 200 0 - 5 2.3 RIPRAP 1. R ock materials shall meet the following requirements: a. Individual rock fragments shall be fresh, dense, sound, sub-angular to angular and resistant to abrasion, and durable against disintegration under conditions to be met in handing and placing. b. Individual rock fragments shall be free from cracks, seams, and other defects that would tend to increase their susceptibility to destruction by water, frost actions, and accelerated weathering. c. Riprap sources shall be approved by the ENGINEER prior to use. Concrete masonry or concrete debris may not be used for riprap. Rock shall meet the following gradation limits after it has been placed within the matrix of the compacted rock riprap (dimensi ons apply to minimum section), in accordance with ASTM D 5519: COMPACTED ROCK RIPRAP GRADATIONS Riprap Designation %Smaller Than Given Size By Weight (Inches) D50** (Inches) Class I 70-100 50-70 35-50 2-10 12 9 6 3 6 BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT RIPRAP WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 37 00 - 3 Class II 70-100 50-70 35-50 2-10 15 12 9 3 9 Class III 70-100 50-70 35-50 2-10 20 16 12 4 12 Class IV 70-100 50-70 35-50 2-10 25 20 15 5 15 Class V 70-100 50-70 35-50 2-10 30 24 18 6 18 Class VI 70-100 50-70 35-50 2-10 35 28 21 7 21 Class VII 70-100 50-70 35-50 2-10 40 32 24 8 24 Class VIII 85-100 50-80 30-50 15-30 2-15 42 30 24 18 6 30 s** D50 = Nominal particle size d. Maximum rock size shall not exceed 2.0 time the D50. Minimum rock size shall be no less than 6-inches. e. Sand and rock dust shall be less than 3 percent, by weight, of total riprap materials. f. Neither the breadth nor thickness of any piece of rock shall be less than one- third its length. g. Rock shall be sub-angular to angular. Rounded boulders and cobbles shall not be used. The greatest dimension of each rock shall not be greater than three times its least dimension. h. Specific Gravity: not less than 2.5 when tested in accordance with ASTM D6473. i. Abrasion Resistance: 1) 10 percent maximum loss of weight at 100 revolutions when tested in accordance with ASTM C131. 2) 40 percent maximum loss of weight at 500 revolutions when tested in accordance with ASTM C131. 3) 40 percent maximum loss of weight at 1000 revolutions when tested in accordance with ASTM C535. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT RIPRAP WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 37 00 - 4 j. Soundness: 15 percent maximum weighted average loss by weight after five cycles when tested in accordance with ASTM C88. k. Absorption: Not more than 2 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D6473 on samples prepared as described for soundness testing. l. Weight: Minimum weight of stone shall be 156 lb/ft3 as tested by AASHTO Test T 85. m. CONTRACTOR shall submit documented laboratory test results to verify that proposed riprap materials meet all specifications. n. CONTRACTOR must receive, in writing, approval of proposed off-site riprap source from ENGINEER, prior to placing any materials. o. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to process material that will meet these specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COMPACTED ROCK (RIPRAP) A. CONTRACTOR shall haul a test pile of riprap to the site for inspection and comparison to the gradation required for the project. Test pile results that do not meet the specifications shall be cause for the rock to be rejected. The test pile that meets specification requirements shall be left on the job site as a sample for visual comparison. The test pile rock shall be utilized as part of the last rock riprap to be placed. B. Prior to placement of filter material, remove brush, trees, round rocks, and other objectionable materials in area where riprap is to be placed. All objectionable material shall be disposed of at a location to be determined by the OWNER. All soft or spongy material shall be removed to the depth as directed by the engineer and replaced with native material. Care shall be taken to preserve and protect utilities which are to remain in service in the location where riprap is to be placed. C. The subgrade surface on which the geotextile filter fabric will be placed shall be cut or filled and graded to the lines and grades shown on the drawings. When fill to subgrade lines is required, it shall consist of approved material and shall conform to the requirements of the specified class of earthfill. Geotextile filter fabric shall not be placed until the foundation preparation is complete and the subgrade surface has been approved by the ENGINEER. D. Riprap shall generally be placed starting at the lowest elevations and working upward, taking care not to damage the geotextile filter fabric. Rock shall not be dropped more than 2 feet onto the installed geotextile filter fabric. Riprap shall be placed to the minimum thickness designated on the drawings and shall be positioned in such a manner that will provide uniform distribution of the various sizes of stone and produce a well-keyed, compacted mass of rock with the least practical amount of void space. Riprap shall be placed and compacted with the bucket of a backhoe to the lines and grades shown on the drawings. Placing of riprap in layers, or by dumping into chutes, or by similar methods likely to cause segregation, will not be permitted. The surface shall be worked as necessary, to produce a reasonably uniform appearance and the required thickness. Some hand placing may be required to provide a neat and uniform surface. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT RIPRAP WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 37 00 - 5 E. Rock riprap shall be placed in a manner that will prevent damage to structures. F. Unless otherwise authorized by the engineer, the riprap protection shall be placed in conjunction with the construction of the embankment with only sufficient lag in construction of the riprap protection as may be necessary to prevent mixture of embankment and riprap. The contractor shall maintain the riprap protection until accepted, and any material displaced by any cause shall be replaced to the lines and grades shown on the drawings at no additional cost to the OWNER. G. Hand placed riprap. Rock riprap shall be placed in a manner to prevent damage to structures, pipe or other improvements. Hand placing may be required to prevent damage to facilities. H. CONTRACTOR shall leave riprap storage/borrow sites in a neat and clean condition, free from rock chips, spalls, and debris from riprap sizing process. I. CONTRACTOR shall implement good housekeeping measures and best management practices to prevent mud and other material from being tracked or deposited on City and County streets. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT RIPRAP WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 31 37 00 - 6 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT LANDSCAPE RESTORATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 32 90 00 - 1 SECTION 32 90 00 LANDSCAPE RESTORATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall provide site restoration, landscaping and appurtenant work, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Landscaping as referred to herein shall include supplying and placing topsoil, soil preparation, installation of headers, weed control, finish grading, furnishing and installing plant materials, seeding, erosion control, cleanup, and maintenance guarantee. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. The terms "plant material" or "plants" refer to all vegetation, including but not limited to seed and seeded areas, etc. B. "Quality" refers to general development without consideration of size or condition. "Standard quality" indicates the least acceptable quality. "Standard quality" seeded and germinated plants shall be typical of the species and variety of good average uniform growth, shall be well formed. C. "Condition" is the factor controlled by vitality and ability to survive and thrive and be comparable with normal plants of the same species and variety in the vicinity at the same season of the year. Plants shall be free from physical damage or adverse conditions that would prevent thriving. "Condition" also sometimes refers to state of growth, i.e., whether "dormant condition" or "growing condition" and this state shall be comparable to plants of similar species in the vicinity for leaves, formation of buds, and the like. 1.3 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Commercial Standards: ASTM D 422 Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils ANSI Z60.1 Nursery Stock American Association of Rules and Grading Provisions Nurserymen, Inc. 1.4 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. General: Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Division 1 - Contractor Submittals. B. Product Information 1. Manufacturer's product information on slow release fertilizer, fertilizer tablets, seed, and erosion control materials. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT LANDSCAPE RESTORATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 32 90 00 - 2 2. Topsoil Analysis Report: A report certified by an analytical laboratory which shows results of analyzing representative samples of topsoil proposed for use. Approval of the report does not constitute final acceptance of the topsoil. Topsoil report will only be required if imported topsoil is used for the site. 3. Supplier’s information and testing information on compost for soil amendment. C. Certificate 1. Certificates shall accompany each product delivery stating source, quantity, and type of material. All certificates shall be submitted to the Landscape Architect at the time of delivery. 2. Certificates of inspection of plant material, as may be required by Federal, State, or other authorities having jurisdiction, which accompany the shipment, shall be submitted to the Landscape Architect at the time of delivery. 3. Landscaping Subcontractor guarantee to perform seed maintenance and weeding services during the one-year correction of defects period. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: All plants shall be true to type or name as indicated in the Contract Documents and shall be tagged in accordance with the standard practice recommended by the Agricultural Code of the State of Utah however, determination of plant species or variety will be made by the Landscape Architect. B. All plants shall comply with Federal and Utah State laws requiring inspection for plant diseases and infestations. C. The Contractor shall obtain clearance from the County Agricultural Commissioner, as required by law, before planting plants delivered from outside the County in which they are to be planted. Evidence that such clearance has been obtained shall be filed with the Engineer or Landscape Architect. D. Inspections will be made by the Engineer or Landscape Architect. The Contractor shall request inspection at least 24 hours in advance of the time inspection is required. Inspection is required on the following stages of the Work: 1. During preliminary grading, soil preparation, and initial weeding. 2. When approved, amended topsoil is placed. 3. When finish grading has been completed. 4. When seed is to be applied. 5. Once seed application has been complete and erosion control is in place. 6. When all Work except the maintenance period has been completed. 7. Final inspection before acceptance of the project. 1.6 CLEANUP A. Upon completion of all planting operations, the portion of the Site used for a work or storage area by the Contractor shall be cleaned of all debris, superfluous materials, and equipment. All such materials and equipment shall be entirely removed from the Site in accordance with Section 01 70 10 – Project Closeout. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT LANDSCAPE RESTORATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 32 90 00 - 3 B. All walks or pavement shall be swept or washed clean upon completion of the Work of this Section. C. During the entire Contract period, plant containers that have been cut or removed from plant materials shall be removed from the site daily. D. All fertilizer packaging shall be cleared from the site at the end of every day. 1.7 MAINTENANCE OF LANDSCAPING PLANTING PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE OF PROJECT A. General: The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting and maintaining all seeded areas until final acceptance of all Work under the Contract. B. Protection: The Contractor shall provide adequate protection to all newly seeded areas including the installation of approved temporary fences to prevent trespassing and damage, as well as erosion control, until the end of the correction of defects period. C. The Contractor shall replace any materials or equipment that its employees or Subcontractors have damaged. D. Partial utilization of the project shall not relieve the Contractor of any of the requirements contained in the Contract Documents. E. Seeded areas shall be maintained by weeding, fertilizing, spraying, and other operations necessary. F. Maintenance shall include, in addition to the foregoing, cleaning, the repair of erosion, reseed bare areas, and all other necessary maintenance work. Sidewalks, retaining walls and paved areas shall be kept clean while seeding and maintenance are in progress. 1.8 FINAL INSPECTION AND GUARANTEE A. Inspection of all seeded areas will be part of final inspection under the Contract. B. Written notice requesting inspection shall be submitted to the Landscape Architect at least 10 days prior to the anticipated inspection date. C. Final acceptance prior to start of the guarantee period of the Contract will be on written approval by the Engineer or Landscape Architect, on the satisfactory completion of all Work, including maintenance, but exclusive of the replacement of plant material or reseed areas that have less than 60% coverage. D. Any delay in the completion of any item of work in the planting operation which extends the seeding into more than one season shall extend the correction period in accordance with the date of completion given above. E. The Contractor shall reseed, as soon as weather conditions permit, all bare areas or areas that show less than 60% seed germination which are noted at the end of the one-year correction period. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT LANDSCAPE RESTORATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 32 90 00 - 4 F. All Work under this Section shall be left in good order to the satisfaction of the Owner and the Landscape Architect, and the Contractor shall, without additional expense to the Owner. 1.9 MAINTENANCE AND GUARANTEE FOLLOWING ACCEPTANCE OF PROJECT A. General: The Contractor shall be responsible for a period of one year after date of acceptance of the Work of this Section, for maintaining all seeded areas, including fertilizing, controlling insects and diseases and weeding. The Contractor shall obtain a written guarantee from the landscaping Subcontractor embodying the provisions of this paragraph. B. The Work covered by the maintenance and guarantee portions of this paragraph includes providing all reseeding of seeding areas for the one year maintenance period or for 2 full growing seasons if the maintenance periods starts in the fall or winter, labor, materials, chemicals, equipment, and supplies and in performing all operations in connection with maintenance and guarantees. C. The Contractor shall clean-up and remove unused or waste materials from the Site and leave the area in a neat condition satisfactory to the Owner whenever it performs work during the maintenance period. D. Final Inspection: The Owner and Contractor shall make a final inspection at the end of the one-year maintenance and correction period. Any bare seed areas or less than 60% coverage at time of final inspection shall be reseeded within a time agreed upon by both parties. If it is outside of the seeding window for seeding, seeding shall take place within the next seeding window even though reseeding may run beyond the maintenance and correction period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All landscaping materials including but not limited to, soil amendments, fertilizer, herbicides, pesticides, seed mixtures and erosion control materials shall be first-grade, commercial quality and shall have certificates indicating the source of material, analysis, quantity, or weight attached to each sack or container or furnished with each delivery. Delivery certificates shall be given to the Landscape Architect as each shipment of material is delivered. A list of the materials used, together with typical certificates of each material, shall be submitted to the Landscape Architect prior to final acceptance. 2.2 TOPSOIL A. Imported topsoil shall be obtained from naturally drained areas and shall be fertile, friable loam suitable for plant growth. Topsoil shall be subject to inspection and approval by the Landscape Architect at the source of supply and upon delivery to the site. All laboratory soil testing shall be ordered and paid by the Contractor. B. Where possible, areas with ground disturbances will strip and stockpile topsoil in an upland area to be used for restoration seeding. When placed for revegetation, topsoil shall be contain no noxious weeds and shall have less than 5 percent course fragments (rocks>2mm). When BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT LANDSCAPE RESTORATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 32 90 00 - 5 placed, onsite topsoil shall be scarified and roughened before seeding. If topsoil does not meet this requirement additional imported topsoil should be amended into the native topsoil. C. Onsite or imported topsoil shall be of uniform quality, free from toxic substances, subsoil, stiff or lumpy clay, hard clods, hardpan, rocks, disintegrated debris, plants, roots, seeds, and any other materials that would be toxic or harmful to plant growth. Topsoil shall contain no noxious weeds or noxious weed seeds. D. Imported topsoil used for this Work shall meet the following requirements. 1. Soluable salts (EJe) Less than 4 dS/m or mmho/cm 2. ph Between 5.0 and 7.5 3. Sand, silt, clay content Less than 30% clay a. Less than 70% sand and b. Less than 70% silt. 4. Soil texture Sand clay loam (SLC) a. sandy loam (SL) b. clay loam (CL) 5. Organic matter content (by weight) Minimum 0.5 Percent 6. SAR (sodium absorption ratio) Less than 7 7. Percent coarse fragments (rocks>2mm) Less than 5 percent 8. Nitrate Nitrogen (ppm) Greater than 20 9. Phosphorus (ppm) Greater than 15 10. Potassium (ppm) Greater than 150 11. Iron (ppm) Greater than 10 2.3 FERTILIZER AND AMENDMENTS A. Fertilizer shall be furnished in bags or other standard containers with name, weight, and guaranteed analysis of contents clearly marked thereon. B. Chemical fertilizers shall be a mixed commercial fertilizer with percentages of nitrogen, phosphoric acid, and potash at 16-16-8 slow release formula. Fertilizers shall be uniform in composition, dry, and free flowing. C. Fertilizer tablets shall be 12 grams each 20-10-5 "Agriform," "Lesslie", or equal. D. Compost: Onsite topsoil shall be amended with one part compost to 5 parts topsoil. Compost shall consist of composed leaves and yard grass. Compost shall meet the following requirements: 1. Compost shall be dark brown to black in color, 2. Compost shall have no objectionable odor, 3. Compost shall have a particle size of ½ inch or less, 4. Compost shall have a pH of 5.0 to 7.8, 5. Compost shall have a soluble salt concentration (mmhos/cm or dS/m) of less than 5 and 6. Compost shall have a carbon-to-nitrogen ration of less than 25:1. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT LANDSCAPE RESTORATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 32 90 00 - 6 2.4 NATIVE SEED A. Seed shall conform with applicable City, County, State, Federal regulations and meet Utah Seed Law. Seed shall be mixed by dealer. The Contractor shall furnish dealer's guaranteed germination figure for each variety. Grass seed shall not be delivered until samples have been approved in writing by the Engineer, Landscape Architect or its authorized landscape representative. Approval of samples, however, shall not affect the right of the Engineer, Landscape Architect or the authorized landscape representative to reject seed upon or after delivery. Seed that has become wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged prior to use will not be accepted. B. All seed shall be fresh, clean, new-crop seed, composed of the following varieties mixed in the proportions by weight. Purity and germination percentage shall be the results of testing. C. Weather Conditions: Fertilizing, seeding, or mulching operations will not be permitted when wind velocities exceed 5 miles per hour or when the ground is frozen, unduly wet, or otherwise not in a tillable conditions. Seeding shall not be conducted when temperatures exceed 80F. D. Topsoil: Four inches of approved, onsite or imported, amended topsoil shall be placed in all areas delineated to be seeded. Imported, amended topsoil shall be placed and raked smooth prior to seeding. E. Soil Preparation: The ground to be seeded shall be graded in conformance with the Drawings and shall be loose and reasonably free of large rocks, roots, and other material which will interfere with the work. The site shall be rough and scraped with the teeth of a track hoe bucket or similar. F. Supply seed on a pure live seed (PLS) basis. G. Obtain seed from lots that have been tested by a state certified seed testing laboratory. (Association of Seed Analyst (AOSA) or Society of Commercial Seed Technologists (SCST). Seed germination tests older than 18 months for grass seed, and 9 months for shrub or tree seed are not acceptable. H. Do not use wet, moldy or otherwise damaged seed. I. See the next page of this specification for the site specific upland seed mix. J. In disturbed areas, complete all weed removal, final grading, trench settling, surface preparation and irrigation work (if applicable) before seeding begins. K. Roughen soil receiving seed. L. Do not install when seed or soil is saturated or frozen. M. MAINTENANCE 1. During the maintenance period the contractor shall be responsible for removing weeds and maintaining the site to provide as good of conditions as possible for seed to grow. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT LANDSCAPE RESTORATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 32 90 00 - 7 2. Contractor shall plan on one re-seeding if the upland seed has not established to a minimum of 60% coverage at the end of the warranty period. 2.5 SEED MIXES A. Upland Seeding: 1. The site specific upland seed mix below shall be applied to all disturbed areas at a seeding rate of 25 pounds of pure live seed (PLS) per acre. Application shall be drill seeding or hydroseeding. 2.6 BROADSCAST SEEDING A. Broadcast seed is not allowed. Only drill or hydroseeding is allowed. 2.7 DRILL SEEDING A. Drill seeding of the native seed may occur between October 30 and February 28. The actual seeding period must be approved by the Engineer or Landscape Architect because weather conditions vary from year to year. No seed shall be conducted until approved. B. All areas that are designated for seeding with the native seed mixture in the Contract Documents shall be seeded by drilling unless otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer or Landscape Architect. Only those areas that are too steep to drill may be hydroseeded. C. Seeding: Seed shall be uniformly drilled to an average depth of 1/4 to 1/2 inch at the rate specified using equipment having drills not more than 6-1/2 inches apart. Row markers shall be used with the drill seeder. Drill seeding shall take place 3 days after application of herbicide. BOTANICAL NAME COMMON NAME 1 Artemisia Tridentata Wyomingensis Wyoming Big Sagebrush 2,500,000 3% 2 Achillea Millefolium White Yarrow 2,770,000 2% 3 Bromus anomalus Nodding Brome 142,800 15% 4 Bromus marginatus Mountain brome 64,000 12% 5 Chrysothamnus viscidiflorus Rubber Rabbitbrush 782,000 4% 6 Elymus glaucus Blue wildrye 134,500 6% 7 Elymus trachycaulum Slender wheatgrass 159,000 15% 8 Festuca ovina 'Covar'Covar sheep fescue 530,320 12% 9 Linum lewisii Blue Flax 170,000 10% 10 Pascopyrum smithii Western wheatgrass 110,000 15% 11 Poa secunda ssp. ampla Big bluegrass 882,000 6% TOTAL 100% Timber Lakes Seed Mix (Seeding Rate: 25 lbs per acre) SEED NO. SPECIES NAME Number of seeds per pound HYDRO SEED Pounds (Lbs) or Pure Live Seed (PLS) Per Acre Seed Mix BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT LANDSCAPE RESTORATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 32 90 00 - 8 D. Rolling: Immediately after seeding, the entire area shall be firmed with a roller not exceeding 90 pounds for each foot of roller width. Areas seeded with drills equipped with rollers shall not be rolled. E. Hydromulch: Apply hydromulch over the entire seeded area at a rate of 2000 pounds per acre. Hydromulching operation shall be conducted as described in Section 3.13 Hydroseeding. 2.8 HYDROSEEDING A. Hydroseeding shall only be used in areas that are too steep or small for drill seeding. B. Hydroseeding of the native seed mix may occur between October 30 and February 28. The actual seeding period must be approved by the Engineer or Landscape Architect because weather conditions vary from year to year. No seed shall be conducted until approved. C. Hydromulch or slurry shall conform to the following: 1. Echofiber or Conwed or approved equal wood fiber mulch, applied at a rate of 2000 pounds per acre. 2. M-binder or Plantego tackifier, applied at a rate of 100 pounds per acre. 3. 16-16-8 slow release fertilizer, applied at a rate of 150 pounds per acre 4. Water at a rate of 4000 gallons per acre. 5. Specified Native Seed mixture seeding rate of pound of PLS per acre. D. Hydromulch shall be applied using a hydro-seeding equipment manufactured by Finn or Bowie or approved equal. Machines shall be equipped with heavy duty cast iron pumps and agitators capable of thoroughly mixing the slurry. E. Spray of hydromulch shall begin immediately after the tank is full and the slurry components are mixed. F. Apply hydromulch in a downward drilling motion using a fam stream nozzle. It is important to ensure that all of the components enter and mix with the topsoil. G. Only qualified and trained personnel shall perform hydroseeding to insure the uniformity of the hyroseeding application. 2.9 EROSION CONTROL A. Erosion Control Blanket shall be AEC Premier Coconut or approved equivalent and placed on slopes 3:1 or greater. B. Erosion control blanket shall be keyed in at the top of the slope as per manufacturer specifications. C. Anchorage devices shall be 9-inch, two-legged staples furnished by the manufacturer, or staples of the proper length as recommended by the manufacturer for specific soil conditions. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT LANDSCAPE RESTORATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 32 90 00 - 9 D. Waterbars made of coconut fiber wattles shall be installed on all restored slopes 3:1 or greater. Waterbars will be spaced ever 30 horizontal feet at 30 degree angle down slope and secured with 24 inch wooden stakes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The landscape work shall not be performed at any time when it may be subject to damage by climatic conditions. B. The Contractor shall carefully scale or otherwise verify all dimensions in the Contract Documents. Dimensions and plant locations shall be coordinated with Engineer or Landscape Architect and final location shall be Site-oriented by the planter and Engineer or Landscape Architect. Any discrepancies or inconsistencies shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer. C. In case of conflict between the Plant List totals and total plant count of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide the higher number of plants. D. Delivery of materials may begin only after samples and tests have been approved by the Engineer or Landscape Architect. Materials provided shall be not less quality than the approved sample. E. Substitutions for the indicated plant materials may be considered pursuant to the Contract Documents. F. The Contractor shall provide temporary fencing, barricades, covering, or other protections to preserve existing landscaping items indicated to remain and to protect the adjacent properties and other structures when they may be damaged by the landscape work. G. Waste materials shall be removed and disposed of off the Site, unless otherwise indicated. H. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain information regarding utilities in the area of work and to prevent damage to the same. The Contractor shall protect the utilities as necessary. I. Burning of combustible materials on the Site shall not be permitted. J. The Contractor shall protect structures, sidewalks, pavements, existing irrigation system, and other facilities that are subject to damage during landscape work. Open excavations shall be provided with barricades and warning lights which conform to the requirements of governing authorities and the State's OSHA safety requirements from dusk to dawn each day and when needed for safety. K. Planting areas include all areas to be landscaped unless indicated otherwise. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT LANDSCAPE RESTORATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 32 90 00 - 10 3.2 SOIL PREPARATION A. The landscape work shall not begin until all other trades have repaired all areas of settlement, erosion, rutting, etc., and the soils have been re-established, recompacted, and refinished to finish grades. The Engineer or Landscape Architect shall be notified of all areas that prevent the landscape work from being executed. B. Areas requiring grading by the landscaper including adjacent transition areas shall be uniformly level or sloping between finish elevations to within 0.10-ft above or below required finish elevations. C. The landscape work shall not proceed until after walks, roads, vaults, trenching, and reservoir construction is in place. Work under the Contract shall be completed to a point where the landscape areas will not be disturbed. The subgrade shall be free of waste materials of all kinds. D. During grading, waste materials in the planting areas such as weeds, rocks 3 -inches and larger, building materials, concrete rubble, wires, cans, glass, lumber, masonry, sticks, etc., shall be removed from the Site. All weeds shall be dug out by the roots. E. Fertilizers, soil additives, seed, etc. subject to moisture damage shall be kept dry in a weatherproof storage place. F. After removal of waste materials, the planting and sod area subgrade shall be scarified and pulverized to a depth of not less than 6 inches, and all surface irregularities below the cover of topsoil shall be removed. G. Finish grading shall consist of: 1. Final contouring of the planting areas. 2. Removal of 6 inches of hardpan material and placement of four inches of imported, amended topsoil over all areas to be planted, deeded or sodded unless indicated otherwise. 3. Placing all soil additives and fertilizers. 4. Tilling of planting areas. 5. After tilling, bringing areas to uniform grades by floating and/or hand raking. 6. Making minor adjustment of finish grades as directed by the Engineer or Landscape Architect. 7. Removing waste materials such as stones, roots, weeds or other undesirable foreign material and raking, disking, dragging, and smoothing soil ready for planting. 8. Finished grades shall be one inch below the top of curbs, sills and walkways in all areas for seed, one and a half inches for sod and three inches for areas with mulch or groundcover. 9. Finished grades shall be smoothed to eliminate large puddling or standing water but rough to keep seed in place. H. Any unusual subsoil condition that will require special treatment shall be reported to the Engineer or Landscape Architect. I. Unless otherwise specified, upland seeding areas shall receive a minimum of 4 inches of topsoil. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT LANDSCAPE RESTORATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 32 90 00 - 11 J. Surface drainage shall be provided as indicated by shaping the surfaces to facilitate the natural run-off of water. Low spots and pockets shall be filled with topsoil and graded to drain properly. K. Finish grade of all planting areas shall be 1-1/2 inches below finish grade of adjacent pavement of any kind. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT LANDSCAPE RESTORATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 32 90 00 - 12 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK DIVISION 33 UTILITIES THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PIPE AND FITTINGS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 05 01 - 1 SECTION 33 05 01 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE AND FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. The Contractor shall provide high density polyethylene pipe and appurtenances, complete in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 RELATED SECTION A. Section 31 23 00 – Earthwork 1.3 REFERENCES A. The Materials and Work furnished shall be, as a minimum, in accordance with the latest editions of the following standards except as such Standard are modified and supplemented in this section. AWWA C906 Standard for Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe & Fittings, 4 inch (100 mm) through 63 inch (1,575 mm) for Water Distribution and Transmission ASTM D1238 Standard Test Method for Melt Flow Rates of Thermoplastics by Extrusion Plastometer ASTM D1248 Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable ASTM D1505 Standard Test Method for Density of Plastics by the Density- Gradient Technique ASTM D2837 Standard Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials or Pressure Design Basis for Thermoplastic Pipe Products ASTM F714 Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) Based on Outside Diameter ASTM D3035 Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR- PR) Based on Controlled Outside Diameter ASTM D3261 Standard Specification for Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Tubing ASTM D3350 Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings Materials BC&A HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PIPE AND FITTINGS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 05 01 - 2 ASTM D256 Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of Plastics ASTM D2683 Standard Specification for Socket-Type Polyethylene Fittings for Outside Diameter-Controlled Polyethylene Pipe and Tubing ASTM F1055 Standard Specification for Electrofusion Type Polyethylene Fittings for Outside Diameter Controlled Polyethylene Pipe and Tubing ASTM D2657 Standard Practice for Heat Fusion Joining of Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings ASTM F2164 Standard Practice for Field Leak Testing of Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Piping Systems Using Hydrostatic Pressure ASTM F1417 Standard Test Method for Installation Acceptance of Plastic Gravity Sewer Lines Using Low-Pressure Air PPI TR-33 Generic Butt Fusion Joining Procedure for Field Joining of PE Pipe 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit the following information and data. See Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures. 1. Product Data: Provide data indicating pipe, pipe accessories and fittings. 2. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures required to install products specified. 3. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 4. Certified Resin Test Reports covering the physical, stress, regression, thermal and impact tests of resin material to be used for the pipe. Submit this information prior to manufacturing or fabricating any pipe. 5. Proposed butt fusion procedures including training and qualification requirements and joint repair procedures shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval. 6. Qualifications of Butt Fusion Welders and Welding Operators a. All butt fusion welders and welding operators shall be qualified and certified for all portions of the work specified in this section. Welder qualification requires that during the past 12 months all welders and welding operators have successfully completed certified butt-fusion joints using the pipe and welding machine proposed for this project. b. Current welder and welding operator performance qualification test records shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval prior to commencing field operations. c. Personnel that will be operating the butt fusion welder shall be certified by either 1 and 3, or 2 and 3 of the following criteria: BC&A HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PIPE AND FITTINGS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 05 01 - 3 1) Previous demonstrated experience during the past 12 months, in the use of the procedure on similar projects using the same welding machines and type of pipe proposed. 2) Appropriate training and apprenticeship 3) All operators shall make a specimen joint from the pipe to be used on the project. This joint shall then be subjected to the test requirements specified herein. 7. Fusion parameters including the recommended limits of all criteria recorded by the data logger. 8. Fusion report for each joint, which shall include the following information. a. Pipe size and dimensions b. Machine size c. Operator identification d. Job identification number e. Weld number f. Fusion, heating and drag resistance settings g. Heater plate temperature h. Time Stamp i. Heating and curing time of weld j. Curing temperature readings and time stamps of readings k. Ambient air temperature and humidity l. Error message and warnings for out of range temperature or pressure settings. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable codes for materials and installation of the Work in this Section. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the Work on sewer lines and connections to existing sewer lines with the Owner. 1.7 QUALITY CONTROL A. Any pipe manufactured prior to review and approval of all required prefabrication submittals will be at the Contractor’s own risk. B. Review of the Contractor’s shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility for accuracy of dimensions and details, nor shall mutual Agreement of dimensions or details relieve the Contractor of responsibility for Agreement and conformity of its Shop Drawings with the Contract. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabrication, processing, testing and inspection operations affecting the pipe and associated accessories shall, at any time, be subject to quality assurance surveillance by Owner, or Engineer. Such surveillance shall be at the discretion of the Owner. Such surveillance does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for the Work. BC&A HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PIPE AND FITTINGS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 05 01 - 4 B. All deviations from this specification section must be documented and referred to Engineer for resolution. C. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer an affidavit from the manufacturer that the pipe, specials, fittings, and other products of material furnished under this Contract comply with all applicable provisions of AWWA C906 standards and this specification. D. DOCUMENTATION: The following items shall be documented and stored as part of the manufacturer’s permanent records. Copies of all documentation shall be provided to the Engineer. 1. Documentation from the resin’s manufacturer showing results of the following tests for resin identification: a. Standard Test Method for Melt Flow Rates of Thermoplastics by Extrusion Plastometer, ASTM D1238 b. Standard Test Method for Density of Plastics by the Density - Gradient Technique, ASTM D1505 2. The polyethylene pipe manufacturer shall provide certification that stress regression testing has been performed on the specific polyethylene resin being utilized in the manufacture of this product. This stress regression testing shall have been done in accordance with ASTM D2837 and the manufacturer shall provide a product supplying a minimum Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB) of 1,600 psi as determined in accordance with ASTM D2837. 3. Production staff shall check each length of pipe produced for the items listed below. The results of all measurements shall be recorded on production sheets, which becomes part of the manufacturer’s permanent records. a. Pipe in process shall be checked visually, inside and out for cosmetic defects (grooves, pits, hollows, etc.) b. Pipe outside diameter shall be measured using a suitable periphery tape to ensure conformance with ASTM D3035. c. Pipe wall thickness shall be measured at 12 equally spaced locations around the circumference at both ends of the pipe to ensure conformance with ASTM D3035. d. Pipe length shall be measured. e. Pipe marking shall be examined and checked for accuracy. f. Pipe ends shall be checked to ensure they are cut square and clean. g. Subject inside surface to a “reverse bend test” to ensure the pipe is free of oxidation (brittleness). h. Copies of all manufacturer documentation shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval upon completion of manufacturing. E. In addition to those tests specifically required, the Engineer may request additional samples of any material for testing by the Owner. The additional samples shall be furnished as a part of the Work. BC&A HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PIPE AND FITTINGS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 05 01 - 5 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor shall comply with the following minimum requirements: 1. Referenced standards for all materials, processes, methods, tests, etc to be used in completion of the Work. 2. Delivery of all pipe and materials, all aspects of which shall be conducted in such a manner as to minimize handling, provide proper weather protection and storage, and to meet schedule requirements. 3. Furnish and use load rated nylon-type slings for securing, lifting, and unloading pipe sections; or, the use of acceptable protective wraps to minimize damage from the alternate rigging equipment. 4. Internal timber bracing shall be provided to maintain pipe shape and integrity throughout plant storage, transportation, and site storage operations through installation and backfill placement. Internal bracing shall not be removed until a minimum of 2 feet of compacted trench zone material is placed above the top of the pipe. 2.2 MANUFACTURER A. All HDPE pipe and HDPE fittings shall be from a single manufacturer, who is fully experienced, reputable and qualified in the manufacture of the HDPE pipe to be furnished. The pipe shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and shall comply with these Specifications. Qualified manufacturers shall be: PLEXCO Division of Chevron Phillips Chemical Company, DRISCOPIPE as manufactured by Chevron Phillips Co., Inc., WL Plastics or equal as approved by the Engineer. 2.3 PIPE IDENTIFICATION A. The following shall be continuously indent printed on the pipe or spaced at intervals not exceeding 5-feet: 1. Name and/or trademark of the pipe manufacturer. 2. Nominal pipe size. 3. Dimension ratio. 4. The letters PE followed by the polyethylene grade in accordance with ASTM 5. D1248 followed by the hydrostatic design basis of 1600 psi, e.g., PE 4710. 6. Manufacturing standard reference, e.g., ASTM D-3035, as required. 7. A production code from which the date and place of manufacture can be determined. 8. Color Identification, either striped by co-extruding longitudinal identifiable color markings or shall be solid in color and as follows: a. BLUE – Potable Water b. GREEN – Sanitary Sewer c. LAVENDER – IQ cover all B. Marking Tape: Marking tape shall be provided and installed as shown in Drawings and per Engineer approval. BC&A HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PIPE AND FITTINGS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 05 01 - 6 2.4 COMPATIBILITY A. Contractor is responsible for compatibility between pipe materials, fittings and appurtenances. 2.5 WARRANTY A. The pipe Manufacturer shall provide a warranty against manufacturing defects of material and workmanship for a period of ten years after the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. The Manufacturer shall replace at no expense to the Owner any defective pipe/fitting material including labor within the warranty period. 2.6 MATERIALS A. Materials used for the manufacture of polyethylene pipe and fittings shall be made from a PE 4710 high density polyethylene resin compound meeting a minimum cell classification 445574C per ASTM D3350 and ASTM F714. B. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA C901-96 for sizes ½-inch through 3-inch diameters and to the requirements of ASTM D 3035. Pipe 4-inches and above shall be manufactured to the requirements of ASTM F714 and AWWA C906-99. C. Unless otherwise noted, diameters shown in the Contract Documents shall refer to Iron Pipe Size (IPS) system conforming to the requirements of AWWA C906. D. If rework compounds are required, only those generated in the Manufacturer’s own plant from resin compounds of the same class and type from the same raw material supplier shall be used. Clean rework material of the same type grade, and cell classification generated from the manufacturers own pipe and fitting production may be used by the same manufacturer as long as the pipe, tubing and fittings produced meet all requirements of AWWA C906. E. Dimensions and workmanship shall be as specified by ASTM F714. HDPE fittings and transitions shall meet ASTM D3261. HDPE pipe shall have a range of density 0.956 -0.964 grams per cubic centimeter. All HDPE pipe and fittings shall have a Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB) of 1,600 psi at 73.0°F in accordance with ASTM D2837. F. The extruded pipe shall have impact strengths greater than 42 in-lb/in in accordance with ASTM D256 Method A, with a material thickness representative of the cross-section in which the material is to be used. G. The pipe Manufacturer shall certify compliance with the above requirements. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Pipe shall be homogenous throughout and uniform in color, opacity, density and other properties as prescribed in the Resin Manufacturers Specifications. The inside and outside surfaces shall be semi-matte to glossy in appearance and free from sticky or tacky material. The pipe walls shall be free from cuts, cracks, holes, blisters, voids, foreign inclusions, or other defects that are visible to the naked eye that may affect wall integrity. BC&A HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PIPE AND FITTINGS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 05 01 - 7 B. Pipe dimensions and wall thickness variations shall be in conformance with requirements of AWWA C906. C. Pipe shall be finished smooth throughout all inside surfaces and true to all specified tolerances circumference and diameter such that: The difference between maximum and minimum diameters, at any cross-section along the length of the pipe does not exceed 1% of the nominal diameter. D. Special pipe sections, fittings, and special pieces shall be completely fabricated in the shop. All pipe fittings shall be fabricated or molded to correct dimensions throughout the entire length. Ends cuts shall be clean, squarely-made, and suitable for field welding, without drawn, ragged, gouged, or split ends. E. All HDPE fittings, unless noted otherwise on the drawings shall be fabricated in conformance with the requirements of AWWA C906. Molded fittings shall meet the requirements of ASTM D3261 for butt-type fittings and this specification. 2.8 FITTINGS A. All molded fittings and fabricated fittings shall be fully pressure rated to match the pipe SDR pressure rating to which they are made. All fittings shall be molded or fabricated by the manufacturer. No Contractor fabricated fittings shall be used unless approved by the Engineer. B. Polyethylene fittings furnished under this specification shall be manufactured using compounds complying with the requirements of HDPE pipe above and all appropriate requirements of AWWA C906. Socket fittings shall comply with ASTM D2683, Butt Fusion fittings shall comply with ASTM D3261. Electrofusion fittings shall comply with ASTM F1055. Mechanical fittings (e.g. back-up rings, etc.) shall be of stainless steel, including stainless steel hardware, as indicated in the drawings and shall be approved only after submission of appropriate test data and service histories indicating their acceptability for intended service. In all cases, the specification and requirements for the fittings supplied shall comply with the appropriate sections of AWWA C906 and must be approved by the Engineer. NO size on size wet taps shall be permitted. C. The manufacturer of the HDPE pipe shall supply all HDPE fittings and accessories as well as any adapters and/or specials required to perform the work as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. 2.9 SHIPPING, STORAGE & HANDLING A. All materials shall be properly loaded so that they will not bear on each other, and shall be braced to prevent damage to material during shipping. Pipe shall be stacked on level ground and per the manufacturer’s recommendations to prevent pipe from becoming out of round. B. All loose parts shall be crated or boxed for shipping, appropriately identified and shipped with the associated pipe sections. C. Contractor shall protect pipeline sections stored at the site from damage, including weather and vandalism. BC&A HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PIPE AND FITTINGS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 05 01 - 8 D. Pipes shall be stored on level ground, preferably turf or sand, free of sharp objects, which could damage the pipe OR on wooden sleepers, spaced suitably and of such width as not to allow deformation of the pipe at the point of contact with the sleeper or between supports. Stacking of the polyethylene pipe shall be limited to a height that will not cause excessive deformation of the bottom layers of pipes under anticipated temperature conditions. The Contractor shall abide by the required handling techniques specified by the Supplier. E. The handling of the pipe shall be in such a manner that the pipe is not damaged by dragging it over sharp and cutting objects F. All piping products shall be kept free from dirt, grease, all petroleum based products, and other foreign matter. G. The Contractor shall provide suitable lifting equipment, slings, spreader bars, rigging etc needed to handle the pipe. In no case shall any equipment be used that is not rated to handle the intended loading or conditions of use to which it is subjected. The use of cables and chains is prohibited. H. The Contractor shall be responsible for the pipe until such time as it is installed and accepted by the Engineer. I. The Contractor shall remove any temporary attachments to special components for installation by the Supplier for transportation purposes. 2.10 BEDDING AND COVER MATERIALS A. Pipe bedding Material: As specified in Section 31 23 00 – Earthwork and in Drawings PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION – HDPE PIPING A. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe shall be installed in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer, as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. A factory qualified joining technician as designated by the pipe manufacturer shall perform all heat fusion joints. B. Under no circumstances shall the pipe or accessories be dropped into the trench or forced through a directional bore upon “pull-back”. C. The maximum allowable depth of cuts, scratches or gouges on the exterior of the pipe is 5 percent of wall thickness. The interior pipe surface shall be free of cuts, gouges or scratches. Sections of pipe with cuts, scratches or gouges exceeding 5 percent of the pipe wall thickness shall be removed completely and the ends of the pipeline rejoined. Repair of damaged pipe during or after installation shall conform to the fabricator’s repair procedures or by an Engineer approved repair method. D. When laying pipe is not in progress, the open ends of the pipe shall be closed by fabricated plugs, or by other approved means. BC&A HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PIPE AND FITTINGS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 05 01 - 9 E. The interior of the pipe shall be cleaned of any foreign matter before being lowered in the trench and kept clean during placement, joint welding, bedding and backfilling operations by plugging or other approved method. Groundwater shall not be permitted to enter the pipe. The full length of each pipe section and each bend shall rest solidly on the compacted bedding material. F. All HDPE pipe must be at the temperature of the surrounding soil at the time of backfilling and compaction. G. If a defective pipe is discovered after it has been installed, it shall be removed and replaced with a sound pipe in a satisfactory manner at no additional cost to the Owner. All pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned before installation, shall be kept clean until they are used in the work and when laid, shall conform to the lines and grades required. H. Contractor shall install HDPE pipe when the ambient air temperature conforms to manufacturer’s specifications. The Contractor will be responsible for verifying the temperature by maintaining a log listing dates, times, length of pipe installed and ambient temperature during installation. I. Trench bottoms shall be graded such that each section of pipe shall be placed to the specified depth or elevation with uniform support. When the bottom of the trench has been excavated below the specified depth or elevation it shall be brought to the specified depth or elevation by backfilling with approved pipe zone material. When material at the bottom of the trench is determined to be unsuitable by the Engineer, it shall be removed and the trench backfilled with approved subgrade material or bedding material to the specified depth of excavation. J. During pipe installation, the trench bottom shall be kept free of frost, frozen earth, or standing water. The Contractor shall maintain the trench in good, stable condition at all times to prevent caving. K. Precautions shall be taken to prevent flotation of the pipe in the trench. L. The pipeline may be buried as it is installed, provided all inspection, testing and backfill requirements are met. M. All areas disturbed by installation of the pipeline shall be restored in accordance with the specification and drawings. 3.2 JOINING METHOD A. HDPE pipe shall be joined with butt, heat fusion joints as outlined in ASTM D3261 and conform to the Generic Butt Fusion Joining Procedure for Field Joining of Polyethylene Pipe, Technical Report TR-33, published by the Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI). All joints shall be made in strict compliance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. A factory qualified joining technician as designated by pipe manufacturer or experienced, trained technician shall perform all heat fusion joints in the presence of the Inspector. The Contractor shall install the HDPE pipeline complete, including bends, couplings, valves, and other associated fittings and appurtenances as shown on the drawings or specified herein and make all necessary connections to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings and in accordance with these specifications. BC&A HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PIPE AND FITTINGS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 05 01 - 10 B. The Contractor shall furnish all welding equipment and all construction materials and equipment required for lugs, railings, templates, spiders or other supports and internal bracing as may be required to hold the components firmly within the specified tolerances during welding, concrete placement or backfill placement. The contractor shall also furnish and install all necessary positioning devices, ties, pedestals and supports required for installation. Details of such equipment shall be included in the proposed installation procedure to be submitted to the engineer prior to the start of work. C. Lengths of pipe shall be assembled into suitable installation lengths by the butt-fusion process. All pipes so joined shall be made from the same class and type of raw material made by the same raw material supplier. Pipe shall be furnished in standard laying lengths not to exceed 50 feet and no shorter than 20 feet. Installation shall be in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C906 unless otherwise noted, and the Manufacturer’s instructions. Contractor shall be responsible for correct fitting of all pipeline members and components. D. The polyethylene flange adapters shall be used at pipe material transitions and other locations as indicated in the drawings. The adapters shall be connected together or to other flanges by using a stainless steel “back-up” ring conforming to ANSI B16.1 and shaped as necessary to suit the outside dimensions of the pipe. Ensure that back up rings are in place prior to joining flange adapter to piping or other components. The flange adapter assemblies shall be connected with corrosion resistant bolts and nuts of Type 316 Stainless Steel as specified in ASTM A726 and ASTM A307. All bolts shall be tightened to the manufacturer’s specified torques. Bolts shall be tightened alternatively and evenly. After installation apply a non-oxide grease coating to bolts and nuts. E. Where indicated, sleeve couplings shall be used to make HDPE joints. When sleeve couplings are used, stainless steel (Type 316), pipe stiffeners shall be inserted inside of each HDPE pipe end as recommended by the manufacture to prevent the pipe from going out of round and to ensure a leak free joint. Sleeve couplings shall be specifically rated for service with HDPE pipe and shall be as specified in the Contract Documents. Sleeve coupling shall only be used where indicated in the plans and in conjunction with an HDPE Pipe Anchor Block. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Butt-fusion welded joints: Refer to Manufacturers recommended procedures. All joints formed by butt fusion processes shall be completed in strict accordance with the Manufacturers specified procedures, except where specifically called out in the specifications or drawings. Minimum requirements for butt-fusion welded joints are as follows: 1. Pipe ends shall be made clean and square prior to fitting and alignment 2. Care shall be taken to assure a clean work area, free from airborne dust, moisture, or other foreign matter which may contaminate the finished weld. 3. All internal surfaces of the pipe shall be maintained clean following completion of a weld and prior to starting the next joint. 4. All butt-fusion joints shall be water tight under the maximum internal pressure. 3.4 BACKFILL PLACEMENT A. Pipe zone material shall be placed in accordance with Section 31 23 00 - Earthwork. Care shall be taken to ensure that the material is carefully worked and compacted into the area BC&A HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PIPE AND FITTINGS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 05 01 - 11 beneath and around the pipe to provide continuous support to the pipe. Material shall be properly haunched to provide support. Care shall be taken to avoid movement of the pipe during placement and compaction of the bedding material. Pipe bedding shall be placed to the limits shown on the drawings. B. Trench backfill shall be placed in accordance with Section 31 23 00 - Earthwork. C. No construction vehicles or ride-on mechanical compaction equipment shall be permitted to travel over the pipe until a minimum of 2 feet of trench backfill is placed above the top of the pipe. 3.5 CONNECTION TO EXISTING A. Mechanical connections of the polyethylene pipe to auxiliary equipment such as valves, pumps and tanks shall be through flanged connections which shall consists of the following: 1. A polyethylene flange adapter shall be thermally butt-fused to the stub end of the pipe. 2. A Type 316 stainless steel back up ring shall mate with the polyethylene flange adapter. 3. Type 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts shall be used to complete the connection. 4. Flange connections shall be provided with a full-face neoprene gasket. B. All transitions from HDPE pipe to ductile iron or PVC shall be made per the approval of Engineer and per the HDPE pipe manufacturer’s recommendations and specifications. A molded flange connector adapter with a back-up ring assembly shall be used for pipe type transitions. Ductile iron back-up rings shall mate with cast iron flanges per ANSI B16.1. A type 316 stainless steel back-up ring shall mate with a type 316 stainless steel flange per ANSI B16.1 and shall be used in all buried applications. 1. Transition from HDPE to ductile iron fittings and valves shall be approved by Engineer before installation. 2. No solid sleeves couplings shall be allowed between such material transitions. 3. The pipe supplier must certify compliance with the above requirements C. Prior to making connections to any existing structure or pipe, ensure that new pipe has had the time required to acclimate to the buried conditions. Make the appropriate adjustments required by the thermal expansion and contraction properties of HDPE materials before connecting to any dissimilar material or structure. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. On days butt fusions are to be made, the first fusion shall be a trial fusion in the presence of the Inspector. The following shall apply: 1. Heating plates shall be inspected for cuts and scrapes. The plate temperature shall be measured at various locations to ensure proper heating/melting per manufacturer’s recommendations and as approved by the Inspector. 2. The fusion or test section shall be cut out after cooling completely for inspection. 3. The test section shall be 12” or 30 times (minimum) the wall thickness in length and 1” or 1.5 times the wall thickness in width (minimum). BC&A HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PIPE AND FITTINGS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 05 01 - 12 4. The joint shall be visually inspected as to continuity of “beads” from the melted material, and for assurance of “cold joint” prevention (i.e. – joint shall have visible molded material between walls of (pipe). Joint spacing between the walls of the two ends shall be a minimum of 1/16” to a maximum 3/16”. 3.7 TOLERANCES A. The centerline of the pipe shall not deviate from a straight line drawn between the centers of the openings at the ends of the pipe by more than 1/16-in per foot of length. If a piece of pipe fails to meet this requirement check for straightness, it shall be rejected and removed from the site. Laying instructions of the manufacturer shall be explicitly followed. Good alignment shall be preserved during installation. Deflection of the pipe shall occur only at those places on design drawings and as approved by the Engineer. Fittings, in addition to those shown on the Drawings, shall be used only if necessary or required by the Engineer. 3.8 CLEANING A. Do not allow dirt, grease, mud, groundwater, tools, equipment and all other foreign matter to enter the pipe at any point during construction. B. All pipes shall be completely flushed at a rate with water velocities no less than 4.0 feet per second for pipes up to 12 inches in diameter and 3.0 feet per second for all other pipes. For large diameter pipes, alternate methods, including pigging, of cleaning the pipe may be proposed by the Contractor, subject to the approval of the Engineer, provided proposed method will provide a clean pipe equivalent to flushing as determined by the Engineer. C. No debris, rubbish, dirt, rocks, or other foreign material shall be permitted to enter downstream sections of the pipeline or system. D. Furnish, install and permanently remove all cross-connections, piping, valving, ports, etc required to complete the cleaning process. Obtain approval of the Engineer prior to adding any components to the pipeline. 3.9 HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE TESTING A. Hydrostatic pressure testing shall be conducted per the requirements of ASTM F 2164 and these specifications. B. All HDPE mains shall be field-tested. Contractor shall supply all labor, equipment, material, gages, pumps, plugs, meters and incidentals required for testing. Each main shall be pressure tested upon completion of the pipe laying and backfilling operations, including placement of any required temporary roadway surfacing. C. Submit a plan for testing, including schedule, method for water conveyance, control, and disposal, to the Engineer for review at least 10 days before starting the test and notify the Engineer a minimum of 48 hours prior to test D. The maximum test pressure shall be as indicated in the Drawings but shall not exceed 150 percent of the maximum working pressure of the pipe or the design pressure of any component on the pipe, whichever is less.. BC&A HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PIPE AND FITTINGS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 05 01 - 13 E. The test temperature of the piping and the test liquid (water) shall not exceed 73 degrees F. or the temperature related to the pressure rating of the pipe as reported by the manufacturer. F. Test equipment, preparations and procedures shall implicitly follow the requirements of ASTM F 2164 and the Manufacturer’s recommendations. G. In preparing for test, fill line slowly with water. Maintain flow velocity less than 2 feet per second or less than the capacity of any air release devices use to expel trapped air, whichever is less. H. Expel air completely from the line during filling and again before applying test pressure. Air shall be expelled by means of taps at points of highest elevation. Any taps installed solely for the purpose of releasing trapped air shall be permanently capped at the conclusion of the test. I. Once all air is expelled and all testing equipment and pipeline components are adequately braced, gradually increase the pressure in the pipeline to the required maximum test pressure. Hold test pressure for four hours adding make-up water as required to maintain the noted maximum test pressure. J. After the four hour equalization period, reduce pressure in the pipeline by 10 psi to the test pressure and monitor the pressure for 1 hour. Do not increase the pressure or add make-up water during this time. K. During and after the one-hour test period, observe all components, joints, fittings, and appurtenances of the pipeline for visible signs of leakage. Any visible signs of leakage indicate a failed test, all such leaks shall be repaired and pipeline retested before pipeline will be accepted. If any visible signs of leakage in any butt-fusion joints in the pipe are noted, immediately stop the test and carefully release the test pressure. Repair the noted leaks and restart test procedure from beginning. L. A successful hydrostatic pressure test will be indicated by no visible signs of leakage and a steady pipeline pressure within 5 psi of the test pressure throughout the one hour test period without increasing the pressure or the addition of make-up water. M. Upon completion of the test, the pressure shall be bled off from a location other than the point where the pressure is monitored. The pressure drop shall be witnessed by the Engineer at the point where the pressure is being monitored and shall show on the recorded pressure read-out submitted to the Engineer. N. Repair and/or replace any failed pipeline sections, components, fittings, valves or other appurtenances to the satisfaction of the Engineer and at no additional expense to the Owner. 3.10 LOW PRESSURE AIR TESTING A. HDPE pipelines intended for use as air ducts shall be tested for leakage prior to placing the pipe in service. Air test shall not be used for acceptance of any HDPE pipeline except those indicated herein or in the Drawings. Furnish, install and completely remove all fittings, branches, plugs, valves and other appurtenances required to complete the testing process. BC&A HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PIPE AND FITTINGS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 05 01 - 14 B. Prior to beginning air test, HDPE pipeline shall be isolated from pipeline components not rated for the air pressures called for in the test. C. Low pressure air testing shall be completed per the requirements of ASTM F1417 as given in Section 33 08 00 – Gravity Piping Testing and Inspection. D. Pipeline shall be inspected for all visible infiltration leaks as evidenced by infiltrating groundwater. Leaks shall be located and repaired at no additional cost to the Owner and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 3.11 MANDREL TESTING A. After successful completion of hydrostatic test, mandrel test all buried HDPE piping. B. Mandrel configuration: Rigid with circular cross-section with a diameter of not less than 95% of the average inside diameter of the pipeline with a length of circular proportion equal to the nominal diameter of the pipeline. C. Mandrel pulling method shall be by hand, rope or as directed by the Engineer. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES AND VAULTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 05 16 - 1 SECTION 33 05 16 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES AND VAULTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall provide precast concrete manholes, catch basins, drop inlets, potable water vaults; meter vaults, and other pre-cast concrete structures complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03 30 53 – Cast-in-place Concrete B. Section 31 23 00 – Earthwork 1.3 SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS A. Commercial Standards ASTM A 48 Gray Iron Castings ASTM C 150 Portland Cement ASTM C 443 Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets ASTM C 478 Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections ASTM C 877 Standard Specification for External Sealing Bands for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections ASTM C 923 Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes, and Laterals ASTM C 990 Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants 1.4 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. General: Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Show dimensions, locations, lifting inserts, reinforcement, and joints. 2. Structural design calculations for vaults and boxes shall be stamped and signed by a structural engineer registered in the state of in which the works are being constructed. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES AND VAULTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 05 16 - 2 C. Manufacturer’s Certification for Manholes and Vaults: Written certification that the structure complies with the requirements of this Section. D. Manufacturer’s Test Results: Pull out force for manhole steps. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Inspection: After installation, the Contractor shall demonstrate that manholes and vaults have been properly installed, level, with water-tight joints, at the correct elevations and orientations, and that the backfilling has been carried out in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Any precast concrete which arrives on site with voids, cracked, or damaged, or is cracked or damaged during installation shall be cause for rejection. Contractor shall remove precast section(s) from the project site and replace with new undamaged sections at no additional cost to OWNER. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handle precast units in positions consistent with their shape and design. Lift and support only from the support points indicated on the shop drawings. B. Embedded Lifting or Handling Devices: Capable of supporting units in positions anticipated during manufacturing, storage, transportation and installation. C. Block and brace units during storage. Provide lateral bracing which is sufficient to prevent bowing and/or warping and will not inhibit curing of the exposed surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANHOLES A. The Contractor shall provide precast manhole sections and conical sections conforming to ASTM C 478 and the requirements of this Section. Cement used in manufacturing the manholes shall be Type II modified portland cement in accordance with ASTM C 150 1. Manholes, adjusting rings, grout channels and other concrete components of manholes and vaults used in raw sewage, plant drain, drain, or other potentially corrosive environments shall be constructed of polymer concrete that is resistant to hydrogen sulfide corrosion. Shop drawings for these manholes shall clearly indicate that the polymer concrete is used and each component shall be clearly marked for ready identification in the field of structure containing polymer. B. Adjusting rings shall be standard items from the manufacturer of the manhole sections. Minimum wall thickness of rings shall be 4-inches if steel reinforced and 6-inches if not reinforced. C. Axial length of sections shall be selected to provide the correct total height with the fewest joints. Joints shall be minimized and shall be located as close as possible to the top of the structure to help minimize opportunity for groundwater infiltration. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES AND VAULTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 05 16 - 3 D. Conical sections shall have an eccentric shape and shall be designed to support cast iron frames and covers under an H-20 loading, unless indicated otherwise. E. Design Criteria: Manhole walls, transitions, conical sections, and base shall be designed per ASTM C 478 for the depths indicated and the following: 1. AASHTO H-20 loading applied to the cover. 2. Unit weight of soil of 120 pcf located above all portions of the manhole. 3. Lateral soil pressure based on saturated soil producing 100 pcf acting on an empty manhole. 4. Internal fluid pressure based on unit weight of 63 pcf with manhole filled from invert to cover with no balancing external soil pressure. 5. External pressures and uplift forces due to groundwater elevations 2 feet below finish grade. 6. Dead load of manhole sections fully supported by the base and transition. 7. Additional reinforcing steel in walls to transfer stresses at openings. 8. The minimum clear distance between the edges of any 2 wall penetrations shall be 12-inches or one-half of the diameter of the smaller penetration, whichever is greater. F. Joints shall have lipped male/female ends which shall provide uniform and continuous interior wall surfaces and shall be watertight. All joints (including joints between adjusting rings and manhole structure, other adjusting rings and frame and cover) shall be sealed with a preformed flexible sealant conforming to ASTM C 990. G. Raw Sewage, Plant Drain, drain manholes, plant effluent and all vaults shall also have each joint wrapped with an external joint sealant meeting ASTM C 877. Concrete for base and channel formation shall be 4000 psi concrete conforming to Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete. H. Barrel section to sewer pipe (Raw sewage, plant drain, drain, and plant effluent) connections shall be sealed with flexible, resilient connectors complying with ASTM C 923 and appropriate for the pipe material being used. Mechanical devices shall be stainless steel. I. Manhole steps shall be comprised of 1/2-inch grade 60 steel reinforcement rod encased in polypropylene copolymer plastic. Steps shall have tread width of 14-inches. Furnish test results demonstrating step capability to resist a pull out force of 2200 pounds. J. Manhole riser sections shall be greater than 12 inches in height. K. Manhole Manufacturers, or Equal 1. AMCOR Precast, Ogden, Ut 2. Geneva Pipe, Orem, Ut 2.2 FRAMES AND COVERS A. Castings: Castings for manhole frames, covers, and grates shall be non-rocking with machined flat bearing surfaces, and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 48, Class 30. Unless otherwise indicated, cast iron covers and frames shall be heavy traffic type, 30 inches in diameter. Covers shall have cleated surfaces with pick holes and shall be ventilated in improved areas and have a solid lid design in landscape or native areas. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES AND VAULTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 05 16 - 4 B. Manhole covers shall be with embossed with lettering saying "Sewer", "Storm Sewer", or “Water”. C. All frames and covers shall be designed for H-20 traffic loading. Grates and curb inlets in traffic areas shall be designed for H-20 traffic loading. D. Castings Manufacturers, or Equal 1. D & L Supply 2. Neenah Foundry Co. 3. Olympic Foundry 2.3 VAULTS A. The Contractor shall provide precast vaults designed for the indicated applications and of the sizes indicated. B. The minimum structural member thickness for vaults shall be 5-inches. Cement shall be Type V or Type II modified portland cement as specified in ASTM C 150. The minimum 28-day concrete compressive strength shall be 4,000 psi. All reinforcing steel shall be embedded in the concrete with a minimum clear cover as recommended by ACI 318. C. Design Loading: Vaults in areas subject to vehicular traffic shall be designed for H-20 traffic loading. Vaults in other areas shall be designed for a vertical live load of 300 psf. Lateral loads on vaults in all areas shall be calculated from: 1. L = 90 h, plus surcharge of 240 psf in areas of vehicular traffic 2. Where L = loading in psf 3. h = depth of fill in feet. D. Design loading shall also take into account the lateral and uplift pressure resulting from a groundwater elevation 2 feet below existing grade. E. Where joints are designed in pre-cast concrete vaults, such joints shall be interlocking to secure proper alignment between members and prevent migration of soil through the joint. Structural sections at joints shall be sized sufficiently to reinforce the section against localized distress during transportation and handling and against excess contact bearing pressures through the joint. All openings through the precast structure shall be reinforced to transfer loads. 1. Joints shall be sealed watertight. All joints (including joints between adjusting rings and manhole structure, other adjusting rings and frame and cover) shall be sealed with a preformed flexible sealant conforming to ASTM C 990. In addition, all joints shall be wrapped with an external joint sealant meeting ASTM C 877. F. Where openings for access to the vault are required, the full clear space opening indicated shall be provided, without obstructions from brackets or supports. For large openings where brackets or supports are designed to protrude into the opening for support of required covers, such brackets or supports shall be designed to be easily removed and replaced with a minimum of effort and without cutting or welding. G. Covers for access openings shall be provided. Frames for covers shall be fabricated from aluminum, and shall be integrally cast into the vault concrete sections. All covers shall be tight BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES AND VAULTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 05 16 - 5 fitting to prevent the entrance of dirt and debris. Where edge seams are permitted, no gaps greater than 1/16-inch between edges will be accepted. All covers, except round, heavy- weight, cast iron manhole covers, shall have securing mechanisms to hold the covers firmly in place against the effects of repetitious live loads such as pedestrian or vehicle traffic. H. Where penetrations of the pre-cast concrete vaults are required for piping, conduit, or ducts, such penetrations shall be accommodated through pre-cast openings or wall sleeves, as indicated. Storm drain structures may also use thin-wall knock-out sections. All openings for penetrations shall be smooth and free of surface irregularities and without exposed steel reinforcing. With the exception of vaults on pressurized water system, vaults need not be designed to resist thrust from piping passing through the vault. I. Lifting holes shall be plugged with a precast concrete plug sealed with a non-shrink grout. J. Vault Manufacturers, or Equal 1. AMCOR Precast, Ogden, Ut 2. Geneva Pipe, Orem, Ut 2.4 FABRICATION A. Maintain plant records and quality control program during fabrication of structural precast concrete sections. Make all quality control records available to ENGINEER upon request. B. Use molds that are rigid, and constructed of material that will result in uniform finished surfaces. C. If self consolidating concrete is not used, thoroughly vibrate concrete to ensure proper consolidation, elimination of cold joints, and to minimize trapped air on at the concrete surface. D. Fabricate and provide the required lifting devices which are compatible with embedded components. E. Ensure reinforcing steel, anchors, inserts, plates, angle and other cast-in items are sufficiently embedded, properly secured, and correctly located. Ensure the reinforcing steel is properly supported to prevent movement or shifting during fabrication. Inadequate concrete cover over reinforcing shall be cause for rejection. F. Cure precast concrete sections under identical conditions to develop specified concrete quality. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Prior to accepting manholes on site, ensure that manhole meet the requirements of these specifications, are constructed of the correct materials, and are not cracked or damaged in any other way. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES AND VAULTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 05 16 - 6 B. Pre-cast concrete sections shall be transported and handled with care in accordance with the manufacturer’s written recommendations. Where lifting devices are provided in pre-cast sections, such lifting devices shall be used as intended. Where no lifting devices are provided, the Contractor shall follow the manufacturer’s recommendations for lifting procedures to provide proper support during lifting. C. Buried pre-cast concrete vaults and manholes shall be assembled and placed in excavations on properly compacted soil foundations as indicated. Pre-cast concrete vaults and manholes shall be set to grade, plumb and level, and oriented to provide the require d dimensions and clearances from pipes and other structures. D. Prior to backfilling vaults, pipe and conduit penetrations and other, openings shall be sealed with polyurethane sealant or as indicated in the drawings. With the authorization of the Engineer, grout or a closed-cell flexible insulation may be used as filler material prior to placing a final bed of polyurethane sealant. 3.2 MANHOLES A. Connect pipe to manhole with flexible connection, as recommended by connection manufacturer. Provide a pipe joint or additional flexible connection 18 inches from the outside of the manhole. Grout around pipe after installation is complete, unless otherwise indicated. All connections shall be watertight. B. Place top section, cone section or flat slab on top riser section, with the opening positioned over the steps. Top of cone section or flat slab shall be from 10 to 18 inches below finished grade. C. Install grade rings as required to adjust top of lid and frame to match finish grade elevation. Maximum height of grade rings shall be 12 inches. Maximum number of grade rings shall be two. D. In paved areas and as indicated in the plans, concrete collars shall be constructed around manhole covers as indicated. Collars shall be of 4000 psi concrete. Collars shall be constructed after pavement has been placed. E. Steps shall be cast-in-place or vibrated into green concrete. F. Steps shall be installed 12-inches on centers vertically, not more than 1/2 inch out of plumb. The top step shall be no more then 12-inches below the manhole cover. G. After manhole base has been completed, furnish and install temporary pipe plugs to seal all interior pipe opening. Plugs shall remain in place until final review and acceptance of completed pipeline. Plugs shall then be removed and shall be property of Contractor. 3.3 QUALITY CONTROL A. Manholes shall be tested and accepted per the requirements of Section 33 08 00 – Gravity Piping Testing and Inspection. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES AND VAULTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 05 16 - 7 B. Do not install precast concrete units until concrete has attained its design compressive strength. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES AND VAULTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 05 16 - 8 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GRAVITY PIPING TESTING AND INSPECTION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 08 00 - 1 SECTION 33 08 00 GRAVITY PIPING TESTING AND INSPECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall perform all pipeline flushing and testing, complete, for gravity piping systems or other yard piping systems as required in the Contract Drawings, and as specified herein; in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing and conveying flushing water to the point of usage and also for disposal, as required, of water used in the flushing operations. C. For the purpose of this specification, gravity piping, sewer or gravity sewer piping refers to all pipes with flows that are driven by gravity in an open channel flow condition and convey liquids associated with the treatment plant processes and byproducts (e.g. plant drain, raw sewage, etc). 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Commercial Standards: ASTM F1417 Standard Test Method for Installation Acceptance of Plastic Gravity Sewer Lines Using Low-Pressure Air ASTM C924 Standard Practice for Testing Concrete Pipe Sewer Line by Low-Pressure Air Test Method ASTM C1244 Standard Test Method for Concrete Sewer Manholes by Negative Air Pressure (Vacuum) Test Prior to Backfill UNI-B-6 Recommended Practice for Low-Pressure Air Testing of Installed Sewer Pipe 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor's proposed plans for testing, and for water conveyance, control, and disposal, shall be submitted in writing. The Contractor shall also submit minimum 48-hour advance written notice of its proposed testing schedule for review and concurrence of the Engineer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS REQUIREMENTS A. Temporary valves, plugs, bulkheads, and other air pressure testing and water control equipment and materials shall be provided by the Contractor subject to the Engineer's review. No materials shall be used which would be injurious to pipeline structure and future BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GRAVITY PIPING TESTING AND INSPECTION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 08 00 - 2 function. Air test gages shall be laboratory-calibrated test gages and shall be recalibrated by a certified laboratory at the Contractor's expense prior to the leakage test, if required by the Engineer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. All testing operations shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer. B. All water required for cleaning and testing of the sewer pipes shall be furnished by the Contractor. 3.2 CLEANING A. Do not allow dirt, grease, mud, groundwater, tools, equipment and all other foreign matter to enter the pipe at any point during construction. B. All pipes shall be completely flushed at a rate with water velocities no less than 4.0 feet per second for pipes up to 12 inches in diameter and 3.0 feet per second for all other pipes. For large diameter pipes, alternate methods, including pigging, or cleaning the pipe may be proposed by the Contractor, subject to the approval of the Engineer, provided proposed method will provide a clean pipe equivalent to flushing as determined by the Engineer. C. No debris, rubbish, dirt, rocks, or other foreign material shall be permitted to enter downstream sections of the pipeline or system. D. Furnish, install and permanently remove all cross-connections, piping, valving, ports, etc required to complete the cleaning process. Obtain approval of the Engineer prior to adding any components to the pipeline. 3.3 TESTING OF PIPING A. General: All gravity sewer pipes and service laterals shall be air tested and mainlines shall be checked for deflection, as specified. All manholes, vaults and boxes directly conveying flows shall be tested for leakage, as specified. Manholes and piping shall be tested following backfill placement. All leakage tests shall be completed and approved prior to the placement of permanent surfacing. When leakage exceeds the amount allowed by the Specifications, the Contractor shall locate the leaks and make the necessary repairs or replacements required to eliminate the leakage. Any individually detectable leaks shall be repaired, regardless of the results of the tests. B. Leakage Tests: Gravity sewer systems shall be tested for leakage as follows: 1. Air Pressure Test - Gravity sewers shall be air pressure tested in accordance with UNI- B 6 and/or ASTM F1417 as outlined below. a. The Contractor shall furnish all materials, equipment and labor for making an air test. Air test equipment shall be approved by the Engineer. b. The Contractor may conduct an initial air test of the sewer main line after densification of the backfill but prior to installation of lateral connection BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GRAVITY PIPING TESTING AND INSPECTION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 08 00 - 3 sewers. Such tests will be considered to be for the Contractor's convenience and need not be performed in the presence of the Engineer. c. Each section of sewer shall be tested between successive manholes by plugging and bracing all openings in the main sewer line and the upper ends of all lateral connection sewers. Prior to any air pressure testing, all pipe plugs shall be checked with a soap solution to detect any air leakage. If any leaks are found, the air pressure shall be released, the leaks eliminated, and the test procedure started over again. d. Test pressure shall be 4.0 psig, unless groundwater elevation exceeds the invert elevation of the pipe. Where the normal groundwater elevation exceeds the invert elevation of the new pipe, the test pressure shall be adjusted for back pressure created by the groundwater. The new test pressure shall be determined by: Pt = 4.0 + H ≤ 9.0 psig 2.35 e. Where Pt is the new test pressure and H is the difference in feet between the groundwater elevation and the lowest invert elevation of the pipe being tested. In no case shall the test pressure exceed 9.0 psig or the maximum pressure allowed by the pipe manufacturer. f. After a manhole to manhole reach of pipe has been backfilled and cleaned, and the pneumatic plugs are checked, the plugs shall be placed in the line at each manhole and inflated to manufacturer’s recommended inflation pressure. Low pressure air shall be introduced into this sealed line until the internal air pressure reaches test pressure. At least two minutes shall be allowed for the air pressure to stabilize. After the stabilization period minimum pressure (at the beginning of test time shall be test pressure minus 0.5 psig), the air hose from the control panel to the air supply shall be disconnected. g. For pipe diameters 4”-36”, the portion of line being tested shall be termed “Acceptable” if the allocated line pressure decreases less than 1.0 psi in the time shown for the given diameters and lengths in Table 1. h. For pipe diameters greater than 36”, the portion of line being tested shall be termed “Acceptable”, if the allocation line pressure decreases less than 0.5 psi in the time shown for the given diameters and lengths in Table 2. i. Required test times for lines consisting of multiple pipe diameters shall be determined in accordance with UNI-B-6 and or ASTM F1417. j. If the installation fails to meet these requirements, the Contractor shall determine the source of leakage. He shall perform a leak location test and then repair or replace all defective materials and/or workmanship. This work shall be completed at no additional cost to the Owner. Table 1 Low Pressure Air Test Times for 1.0 PSig Pressure Drop Pipe Diameter (in.) Minimum Time for 1.0 PSIg Pressure Drop (min:sec) Pipe Length for Minimum Time (ft.) Test Time for Pipe Length in Excess of Minimum (sec.) 4 03:47 597 .380 L BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GRAVITY PIPING TESTING AND INSPECTION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 08 00 - 4 6 05:40 398 .854 L 8 07:33 298 1.520 L 10 09:27 239 2.374 L 12 11:20 199 3.418 L 15 14:10 159 5.342 L 18 17:00 133 7.692 L 21 19:50 114 10.470 L 24 22:40 99 13.674 L 27 25:30 88 17.306 L 30 28:20 80 21.366 L 33 31:10 72 25.852 L 36 34:00 66 30.768 L Table 2 Low Pressure Air Test Times for 0.5 PSIg Pressure Drop Pipe Diameter (in.) Minimum Time for 0.5 PSIg Pressure Drop (min:sec) Pipe Length for Minimum Time (ft.) Test Time for Pipe Length in Excess of Minimum (sec.) 42 19:50 57 20.939 L 48 22:40 50 27.349 L 54 25:30 44 34.614 L 60 28:30 40 42.733 L 66 31:10 36 51.707 L 72 34:00 33 61.535 L 78 36:50 31 72.219 L 84 39:40 28 83.756 L 90 42:30 27 96.149 L 96 45:20 25 C. Deflection Test: All flexible and semi-rigid main line pipe shall be tested for deflection, joint displacement, or other obstruction by passing a rigid mandrel through the pipe by hand, not less than 30 days after completion of the trench backfill, but prior to permanent surfacing. The mandrel shall be a full circle, solid cylinder, or a rigid, non-adjustable, odd-numbered leg (9 leg minimum) steel cylinder, approved by the Engineer as to design and manufacture. The circular cross section of the mandrel shall have a diameter of at least 95 percent of the specified average inside pipe diameter of the pipe and the minimum length of the circular portion of the mandrel shall be equal to the nominal diameter of the pipe. Obstructions encountered by the mandrel shall be corrected by the Contractor. D. Video Inspection: After the sewer pipe has been installed and cleaned; and the trench has been backfilled, the sewer pipe shall be visually inspected by video camera to locate defects in the sewer pipe. Video Inspection shall be performed by an independent testing agency acceptable to the Owner. All sewer pipes shall be video inspected. 1. Notify the Engineer, 48 hours prior to any televised inspections. 2. The inspection shall be in digital video format, saved to an electronic media and shall be given to the Engineer for review and final records BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GRAVITY PIPING TESTING AND INSPECTION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 08 00 - 5 3. The Contractor shall ensure safe access to each manhole as required by the testing agency. 4. Video equipment shall include a pipe inspection video camera with the following capabilities: panorama tilt, radial viewing, pans plus and minus 75 degrees, rotates 360 degrees, and has optical zoom from 6 or less inches to infinity. Equipment shall produce a high quality, full color video image. 5. Video equipment shall be equipped with a device that can accurately measure the depth of any ponding encountered in the pipe. Measuring device shall be clearly visible in the video image. 6. The video equipment shall have an accurate footage counter accurate to within 1 foot per 500 foot of pipe. Footage shall be continuously displayed on the video at all times. 7. Pipelines shall be cleaned and flushed immediately prior to video inspection. Pipelines that were cleaned and flushed more than 24 hours prior to video inspection shall be cleaned and flushed again. All dirt/debris, including pipe grease, in the line which could cover a defect shall be removed. 8. Jetting of the lines in conjunction with the video inspection is prohibited. 9. If during the video inspection, foreign material which prohibits an acceptable video inspection is discovered the line shall be cleaned and video inspected again. 10. The video camera shall travel through the pipe at a maximum rate of travel of 30 feet per minute. Video shall be continuous for each pipe segment between manholes or other access points. 11. The video camera shall pause at each tee, lateral or other connection and the camera shall be rotated and tilted to provide an image of the branch for inspection. The image shall remain clear and in focus at all times while zooming to the full extent of the camera. The camera operator shall stop at each fitting and change in pipe type and complete a 360 degree view of the fitting at a rate slow enough to identify any defects. 12. Glare shall be avoided and shall not interfere with viewing the pipe segment. 13. Provide DVDs or CDs with labels indicating project number, segment number, date televised, date submitted, starting manhole number, ending manhole number, pipe diameter, pipe length and street name. 14. Lines to be video inspected shall be flushed within 24 hours prior to beginning of inspection. 15. The video inspection shall be used to identify defective construction such as sags, debris, separated joints, etc. Any Work not conforming to the Specifications or Drawings shall be promptly removed, replaced and retested at no cost to the Owner. The Engineer shall make all final determinations if the severity of the defect constitutes failure and requires subsequent removal or repair of the segment in question. a. Conditions identified by the video inspection that require removal and replacement or, but are not limited to: 1) Alignment (Vertical or Horizontal) is outside the specified limits. 2) Water ponds in any section with depths equal to or greater than 2 times the grade tolerance specified in the Contract Documents. 3) Pipe section with visible defects, such as: open joints, pinched gaskets, cracked barrels or bells, leaks, or other defects as determined by the Engineer. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GRAVITY PIPING TESTING AND INSPECTION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 08 00 - 6 3.4 TESTING OF MANHOLES AND OTHER APPURTENANT STRUCTURES A. Manholes and other structures 1. Vacuum tests shall be conducted on the newly constructed manholes. Preliminary manhole testing may take place following construction after all connections are made, and before backfilling. Test results derived from this test will allow time for necessary repairs to be completed before further construction proceeds and hinders such repairs. Final tests must be performed after the manhole has been backfilled. B. Procedures 1. Plug all manhole entrances and exits other than the manhole top access using suitably sized pneumatic or mechanical pipeline plugs and follow all manufacturer’s recommendations and warnings for proper and safe installation of such plugs. Plugs should be inserted a minimum of 6 inches beyond manhole wall. Make sure such plugs are properly rated for the pressures required for the test. The standard test of 10 inches Hg. (mercury) is equivalent to approximately 5 PSIG (.3 bar) backpressure. Unless such plugs are mechanically restrained, it is recommended that the plugs are used with a minimum two times (2x) safety factor or a minimum of 10 PSIG (0.7 bar) backpressure usage rating. 2. Close vacuum inlet/outlet ball valve and monitor vacuum for specified test period (see table). If vacuum does not drop in excess of 1” Hg., manhole is considered acceptable and the manhole passes the test. If manhole fails the test, complete necessary repairs and repeat test procedures until satisfactory results are obtained. Minimum Test Times for Various Manhole Diameters Depth, Feet Diameter, Inches 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 10 2 10 8 11 4 12 0 Time, Seconds 8 20 23 26 29 33 35 38 41 45 48 51 54 57 10 25 29 33 36 41 44 48 52 56 60 63 67 71 12 30 35 39 43 49 53 57 62 67 71 76 81 85 14 35 41 46 51 57 62 67 72 78 83 89 94 10 0 16 40 46 52 58 67 70 76 83 89 95 10 1 10 8 11 4 18 45 52 59 65 73 79 86 93 10 0 10 7 11 4 12 1 12 8 20 50 53 65 72 81 88 95 10 3 11 1 11 9 12 6 13 5 14 2 22 55 64 72 79 89 97 10 5 11 4 12 2 13 1 13 9 14 8 15 6 24 59 64 78 87 97 10 6 11 4 12 4 13 3 14 3 15 2 16 1 17 0 26 64 75 84 94 10 5 11 4 12 4 13 4 14 4 15 5 16 4 17 5 18 5 BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GRAVITY PIPING TESTING AND INSPECTION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 08 00 - 7 28 69 81 91 10 1 11 3 12 3 13 3 14 5 15 5 16 7 17 7 18 8 19 9 30 74 87 98 10 8 12 1 13 2 14 3 15 5 16 6 17 8 18 9 20 2 21 3 3. (The values listed above are taken from ASTM Specification C1244-93 “Standard Test Method for Concrete Manholes by the Negative Air Pressure (Vacuum) Test.”) 4. Repeat the above test procedure after backfilling manhole for final acceptance test. 5. Manholes shall be watertight. All joints, penetrations, etc., shall be sealed watertight prior to acceptance of manhole.Section Includes END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GRAVITY PIPING TESTING AND INSPECTION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 08 00 - 8 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT WATER PIPELINE TESTING AND DISINFECTION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 13 00 - 1 SECTION 33 13 00 WATER PIPELINE TESTING AND DISINFECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall perform flushing and testing of all pressure pipelines and appurtenant piping and disinfection of all pipelines and appurtenant piping for potable and fire water, complete. B. This specification applies to all pipelines requiring hydrostatic tests (water medium) regardless of the pipeline service medium. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Commercial Standards ANSI/AWWA B300 Hypochlorites ANSI/AWWA B301 Liquid Chlorine ANSI/AWWA C206 Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe ANSI/AWWA C651 Disinfecting Water Mains 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. A testing schedule, including proposed plans for water conveyance, control, disposal, and disinfection shall be submitted in writing for approval a minimum of 7 days before testing is to start. B. A copy of the Utah Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (UPDES) permit application shall be submitted a minimum of 30 days prior to the proposed date to start testing. A copy of the approved UPDES permit shall be submitted prior to the start of testing. C. Chlorine residual test data and bacteriological test data shall be submitted to document the results of the pipeline disinfection. Tests shall be conducted 24 hours after the start of disinfection. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS REQUIREMENTS A. All test equipment, chemicals for chlorination, temporary valves, bulkheads, or other water control equipment and materials shall be determined and furnished by the Contractor subject to the Engineer's review. No materials shall be used which would be injurious to the construction or its future function. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT WATER PIPELINE TESTING AND DISINFECTION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 13 00 - 2 B. Used pressure gauges shall be recertified prior to testing. C. Chlorine for disinfection shall be in the form of liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution, or calcium hypochlorite granules or tablets. D. Liquid chlorine shall be in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/AWWA B301. Liquid chlorine shall be used only: 1. In combination with appropriate gas flow chlorinators and ejectors; 2. Under the direct supervision of an experienced technician; 3. When appropriate safety practices are observed. E. Sodium hypochlorite and calcium hypochlorite shall be in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/AWWA B300 - Hypochlorite. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Water for testing and disinfecting water pipelines shall be furnished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall make all necessary provisions for conveying the water from the source to the points of use, and disposal of the water (and dechlorinating - where applicable). B. All pressure pipelines shall be tested. Disinfection shall be accomplished by chlorination for all pipelines providing potable water or connected to a potable water system. All chlorinating and testing operations shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer. C. Disinfection operations shall be scheduled as late as possible during the contract time period so as to assure the maximum degree of sterility of the facilities at the time the Work is accepted by the Owner. Samples for bacteriological testing shall be collected by the Contractor, and testing shall be performed by the Owner laboratory and at the expense of the Contractor. Results of the bacteriological testing shall be satisfactory with the State Department of Health or other appropriate regulatory agency. D. Pipeline pressure tests will include the following tests: 1. Air test of double welded lap joints. 2. Hydrostatic pressure test of the complete pipeline, in segments as required to match pipe pressure class. 3. Contractor shall conduct the discharge in accordance with the Utah Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (UPDES) permit from the Utah Division of Environmental Quality (UDEQ). The Contractor shall apply a reducing agent to the discharged water to neutralize the chlorine residual and meet the chlorine residual limit required under the permit. The Owner shall conduct the water quality sampling of the discharge as required by the permit. The Contractor shall notify local agencies, secure appropriate other permits and approvals, and provide erosion control measures for any releases as appropriate. Release of water after pipeline testing and disinfection have been completed shall be only if acceptable to the Engineer. E. Notification: Notify the Engineer at each of the following stages: 1. Three working days prior to the start of filling the pipeline with water. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT WATER PIPELINE TESTING AND DISINFECTION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 13 00 - 3 2. Three working days prior to the start of chlorination. 3. Twenty-four hours before withdrawing samples for bacteriological testing. 4. Three working days prior to the start of flushing. 3.2 VISUAL INSPECTION A. All welds shall be 100% visually inspected in accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.1, Table 6.1; Visual Inspection Acceptance Criteria for Statically Loaded Non-Tubular Connections. 3.3 AIR TEST A. All double welded lap joint or double gasket Carnegie joint shall be pressure tested to a minimum of 40-psi air pressure for a period of 10 minutes per AWWA C206. No air leakage will be allowed. B. If the test pressure drops below 40 psi, paint the welds with a soap solution. Mark any leaks indicated by the escaping gas bubbles. C. Any joints which leak shall be repaired and retested. 3.4 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF PIPELINES A. Prior to hydrostatic testing, all pipelines shall be flushed or blown out as appropriate. Test all pipelines either in sections or as a unit. No section of the pipeline shall be tested until all field- placed concrete or mortar has attained an age of 14 days. The test shall be made by closing valves when available, or by placing temporary bulkheads in the pipe and filling the line slowly with water. The Contractor shall be responsible for ascertaining that all test bulkheads are suitably restrained to resist the thrust of the test pressure without damage to or movement of the adjacent pipe. Any unharnessed sleeve-type couplings, expansion joints, or other sliding joints shall be restrained or suitably anchored prior to the test, to avoid movement and damage to piping and equipment. Provide sufficient temporary air tappings in the pipelines to allow for evacuation of all entrapped air in each pipe segment to be tested. After completion of the tests, such taps shall be permanently plugged. Care shall be taken to see that all air vents are open prior to and during filling. B. The pipeline shall be filled at a rate not to exceed 2-feet per second as calculated by using the cross-sectional area based on the inside diameter of the pipe and which will not cause any surges or exceed the rate at which the air can be released through the air valves at a reasonable velocity and all the air within the pipeline shall be properly purged. After the pipeline or section thereof has been filled, it shall be allowed to stand under a slight pressure for at least 24 hours to allow the concrete or mortar lining, as applicable, to absorb what water it will and to allow the escape of air from any air pocket. No personnel shall be within or enter any vault or confined space subject to flooding during the initial filling and for a 24 hour period. After the 24 hour period bulkheads, valves, and connections shall be examined for leaks. If leaks are found, corrective measures satisfactory to the Engineer shall be taken. C. The hydrostatic test shall consist of holding the test pressure on the pipeline for a period of 4 hours. The test pressure for distribution and transmission pipelines shall be 150 percent of the working pressure in the pipeline measured at the lowest point of the pipeline section being tested. The test pressure for yard piping shall be as indicated on the Piping Schedule BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT WATER PIPELINE TESTING AND DISINFECTION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 13 00 - 4 measured at the lowest point of the pipeline section being tested. No pressure test will be required for a reservoir overflow line. All visible leaks shall be repaired in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. D. The maximum allowable leakage for distribution and transmission pipelines shall be 10 U.S. gallons per inch of diameter per mile of pipe per 24 hours for pipe with 40-foot or greater lengths between joints and with rubber-gasketed joints and 20 U.S. gallons per inch of diameter per mile of pipe per 24 hours for pipe with 20-foot or less lengths between joints and with rubber-gasketed joints. The maximum leakage for yard piping shall be as shown on the Piping Schedule. Pipe with welded joints shall have no leakage. E. In the case of pipelines that fail to pass the prescribed leakage test, determine the cause of the leakage, take corrective measures necessary to repair the leaks, and again test the pipelines at no additional cost to the Owner. F. The pipeline shall be drained after successful completion of the hydrostatic test. 3.5 DISINFECTING PIPELINES A. General: All potable water pipelines shall be disinfected in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains as modified herein. B. Prior to disinfecting the pipeline for potable water services and before placing into service for other water pipelines, flush the pipeline to remove any debris, rocks, or other foreign material that may have entered the pipe. Flushing shall be carried out such that the velocities in the pipe exceed 2.5 feet per second. Provide all required material, labor and equipment to complete flushing. Contractor shall provide the water for flushing. Make appropriate provision and preparations for disposal of flushing water, satisfying all local, state and federal rules, laws, regulations and ordinances. C. Continuous Feed Method: Disinfect in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C651 except that: 1. The water in the pipe shall contain 50 mg/l free chlorine. 2. After 24 hours of disinfection, the residual free chlorine shall be at least 25 mg/l at the pipeline extremities. D. Slug Feed Method: Disinfect in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C651. E. Chlorinating Valves: During the process of chlorinating the pipelines, all valves and other appurtenances shall be operated while the pipeline is filled with the heavily chlorinated water. F. Final Flushing: After the applicable retention period, the heavily chlorinated water shall be flushed from the pipeline until chlorine measurements show that the concentration in the water leaving the pipeline is no higher than that generally prevailing in the system or is acceptable for domestic use. If there is any question that the chlorinated discharge will cause damage to the environment, a reducing agent shall be applied to the water to neutralize thoroughly the chlorine residual remaining in the water. See the appendix of AWWA C651 for acceptable neutralization methods for heavily chlorinated water. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT WATER PIPELINE TESTING AND DISINFECTION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 13 00 - 5 G. Sampling Ports: The Contractor shall provide sampling ports along the pipeline as defined in AWWA C651. Taps may be made at manways and air valves to help facilitate the spacing requirement. H. Bacteriological Testing: After final flushing and before the pipeline is placed in service, two consecutive sets of samples shall be collected at least 24 hours apart by the Contractor from the end of the line and at other locations as designated by the Engineer, and shall be tested by the Owner for bacteriological quality in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C651. For this purpose, the pipe shall be refilled with fresh potable water and left for a period of 24 hours before any samples are collected. If the initial disinfection fails to produce satisfactory bacteriological results or if other water quality is affected, the new main may be reflushed and shall be resampled. If check samples also fail to produce acceptable results, the main shall be rechlorinated by the continuous-feed or slug method until satisfactory results are obtained – that being two consecutive sets of acceptable samples taken 24 hours apart. 3.6 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SYSTEM A. Where connections are to be made to an existing potable water system, the interior surfaces of all pipe and fittings used in making the connections shall be swabbed or sprayed with a one percent hypochlorite solution before they are installed. Thorough flushing shall be started as soon as the connection is completed and shall be continued until discolored water is eliminated. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT WATER PIPELINE TESTING AND DISINFECTION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 13 00 - 6 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT TESTING AND DISINFECTION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 13 01 - 1 SECTION 33 13 01 HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES TESTING AND DISINFECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall perform cleaning, flushing, disinfection and testing of all hydraulic structures and appurtenant piping, including conveyance of test water from Owner- designated source to point of use, and including all disposal of testing and disinfection water, complete and acceptable, all in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Commercial Standards: ANSI/AWWA B300 Hypochlorites ANSI/AWWA B301 Liquid Chlorine ANSI/AWWA C651 Disinfecting Water Mains ANSI/AWWA C652 Disinfection of Water-Storage Facilities ANSI/AWWA C653 Disinfection of Water Treatment Plants APHA/AWWA/WPCF Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater (16th edition) 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures. B. A testing schedule, including proposed plans for water conveyance, control, disposal, and disinfection, shall be submitted in writing for approval a minimum of 2 days before testing is to start. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. All temporary valves, bulkheads, or any other control equipment shall be as determined by the Contractor subject to the Engineer's review. B. Chlorine for disinfection shall be in the form of liquid chlorine or sodium hypochlorite solution. Liquid chlorine shall be in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/AWWA B301; sodium hypochlorite shall be in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/AWW A B300. Liquid chlorine shall be used only (1) in combination with appropriate gas flow chlorinators BC&A HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT TESTING AND DISINFECTION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 13 01 - 2 and ejectors; (2) under the direct supervision of an experienced technician; and (3) when appropriate safety practices are observed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Water for testing and disinfecting will be furnished by the Owner; however, the Contractor shall make all necessary provisions for conveying the water from the Owner-designated source to the points of use. The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with retesting. Water supplied by the Owner for retesting will cost the Contractor $150 per acre foot for water used. B. All hydraulic structures and appurtenant pressure piping shall be tested; those for potable water shall also be disinfected. Disinfection shall be accomplished by chlorination. All chlorinating and testing operations shall be done in the presence of the Engineer. In the case of a reservoir, testing and disinfecting operations shall be combined. C. Disinfection operations shall be scheduled by the Contractor as late as possible during the contract time period so as to assure the maximum degree of sterility of the facilities at the time the Work is accepted by the Owner. Release of water from structures, after testing and disinfecting have been completed, shall be acceptable to the Engineer. 3.2 PRELIMINARY CLEANING AND FLUSHING A. Prior to both testing and disinfecting, all hydraulic structures shall be cleaned by thoroughly hosing down all surfaces with a high-pressure hose and nozzle. All water, dirt, and foreign material accumulated in this cleaning operation shall be removed fr om the structure. The water supply for the washdown system is supplied by Owner. The Owner will pay for water for the initial cleaning and flushing. Any additional cleaning and flushing shall be at the Contractor's expense. 3.3 TESTING OF HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES AND PIPELINES A. General: Testing shall be performed prior to backfilling. Testing shall be performed no sooner than 14 days after all portions of structure walls and associated roof systems have been completed. The structure shall be filled with water to the maximum operating water surface. The rate of filling shall not exceed 48 inches of depth per day. All leakage shall be repaired. B. Leakage Test Requirements: After the structure has been filled, the water loss leakage test shall be performed as follows: an initial water level reading shall be made. Seven days following the initial reading, a second reading shall be made. The struc ture shall be considered to have passed the test if water loss during the 7-day period, as computed from the two water level readings, does not exceed 0.2 percent of the total volume of water in the structure, after allowance is made for evaporation loss. If intermediate readings or observed leakage indicate that the allowable leakage will be exceeded, the test may be terminated before the end of the 7-day period and appropriate action taken to correct the problem before commencing a new 7-day test period. Should the structure fail to pass the test, the test shall BC&A HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT TESTING AND DISINFECTION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 13 01 - 3 be repeated for up to 3 additional 7-day test period. If, at the end of 28 days, the structure still fails to pass the leakage test, the Contractor shall empty the structure as acceptable to the Engineer and shall examine the interior for evidence of any cracking or other conditions that might be responsible for the leakage. C. Piping shall be tested as specified in Section 33 13 00 - Water Pipeline Testing and Disinfection. D. Structural Repairs and Visible Leakage: The Contractor shall repair any cracks. Cracks shall be grooved and sealed with Xypex in accordance manufacturer’s instructions and Contract Drawings. Any evidence of leakage shall be repaired. Following these operations, the Contractor shall again test the hydraulic structure. The structure will not be accepted as completed until the water loss leakage test is passed and all visible leakage repaired. In the case of a reservoir, the retesting shall again be combined with disinfection. 3.4 DISINFECTION OF HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES AND PIPELINES A. General: Hydraulic structures which store or convey culinary potable water shall be disinfected by chlorination. Chlorination of hydraulic structures shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C652 using a combination of chlorination Methods 2 and 3 as modified within this Section. All piping shall be disinfected as specified in Section 33 13 00 - Water Pipeline Cleaning, Testing and Disinfection. B. Chlorination: A chlorine solution (about 200 mg/l) shall be sprayed on all interior surfaces of the structure. The structure shall then be partially filled with water to a depth of approximately one-foot. During the partial filling operation, a chlorine-water mixture shall be injected by means of a chlorinating device in such a way as to give a uniform chlorine concentration during the entire filling operation. The point of application shall be such that the chlorine solution will mix readily with the inflowing water. The dosage applied to the water shall be sufficient to provide a chlorine residual of at least 50 mg/l upon completion of the partial filling operation. The Contractor's attention is directed that all precautions shall be taken to prevent the chlorine solution from flowing back into the inlet water supply lines. After the partial filling has been completed, sufficient water shall be drained from the lower ends of appurtenant piping to ensure filling the lines with the chlorinated water. C. Retention: Chlorinated water shall be retained in the partially filled structure and appurtenant piping long enough to destroy all non-spore-forming bacteria, and in any event, for at least 24 hours. After the chlorinated water has been retained for the required time, the free chlorine residual in the structure and appurtenant piping shall be at least 25 mg/l. All valves shall be operated while the lines are filled with the heavily chlorinated water. D. Final Filling: After the chlorine residual has been checked, and has been found satisfactory, the water level in the structure shall be raised to its working water level elevation by adding potable water. Before final filling is commenced, the quantity of chlorinated water remaining in the structure after filling the piping shall, unless otherwise acceptable to the Engineer, be sufficient, when the water level is raised to its final elevation to produce a free chlorine residual of between 1 and 2 mg/l. After the structure has been filled, the chlorine residual of the water shall be determined. If the chlorine residual is less than 1 mg/l, an additional chlorine dosage shall be added to the water in the structure. If the chlorine residual is greater BC&A HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT TESTING AND DISINFECTION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 13 01 - 4 than 2 mg/l, the structure shall be partially emptied and additional potable water added. In no case shall water be released prior to the expiration of the required retention period. 3.5 BACTERIOLOGIAL SAMPLING AND TESTING A. Disinfected water storage facilities shall be sampled and tested in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C652. Bacteriological testing shall be performed by a certified testing laboratory acceptable to the Owner and paid for by the Contractor. Results of the testing shall be satisfactory to the State Department of Health or other appropriate regulatory agency. 3.6 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING WATER SYSTEM A. Where connections are to be made to an existing potable water system, the interior surfaces of all pipe and fittings used in making the connections shall be swabbed or sprayed with a one percent hypochlorite solution before they are installed. Thorough fl ushing shall be started as soon as the connection is completed and shall be continued until all discolored water is eliminated. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DRAINAGE PIPELINE SYSTEM TESTING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 41 01 - 1 SECTION 33 41 01 DRAINAGE PIPELINE SYSTEM TESTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall perform all pipeline flushing and testing, complete, for drainage system piping as specified herein and in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for conveying flushing water from the source to the point of usage and also for disposal, as required, of water used in the flushing operations. C. For the purposes of this specification, drainage or drain pipelines are storm drains. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit minimum 48-hour advance written notice of its proposed testing schedule for review and concurrence of the Engineer. The Contractor’s proposed plans for water conveyance, control, and disposal shall also be submitted in writing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS – (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. All testing operations shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer. B. All drainage pipes shall be tested for alignment, joint displacement and deflection as specified herein. All pipes shall be backfilled prior to testing. Any pipe found to be defective shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer. C. Pipe sizes from 12-inch through 30-inch in diameter shall require a displacement test. Pipe sizes from 36-inch diameter and larger shall require a displacement test and visual walk- through inspection. All flexible and semi-rigid pipe shall require a deflection test. 3.2 TESTING OF PIPING A. Deflection Test: All flexible and semi-rigid main line pipe shall be tested for deflection, joint displacement, or other obstruction by passing a rigid mandrel through the pipe by hand, not less than 30 days after completion of the trench backfill, but prior to permanent resurfacing. The mandrel shall be a full circle, solid cylinder, or a rigid, non-adjustable, odd-numbered leg (9 leg minimum) steel cylinder, approved by the Engineer as to design and manufacture. The circular cross section of the mandrel shall have a diameter of at least 95 percent of the specified average inside pipe diameter of the pipe and the minimum length of the circular BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DRAINAGE PIPELINE SYSTEM TESTING WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 41 01 - 2 portion of the mandrel shall be equal to the nominal diameter of the pipe. Obstructions encountered by the mandrel shall be corrected by the Contractor. B. Displacement Test: The displacement test shall be performed by flashing a light between manholes or, if the manholes have not as yet been constructed, between the locations of the manholes, by means of a flashlight or by reflecting sunlight with a mirror. If the illuminated interior of the pipe shows broken, misaligned, or displaced pipe or other defects, the defects designated by the Engineer shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer. C. Visual Test: A visual test shall be conducted on pipes 36-inch in diameter and larger. The test shall be conducted after the pipes have been flushed or otherwise cleaned. The test shall be performed by the Engineer or his representative and a representative of the Contractor. The interior of the pipe shall be visual inspected for alignment, cracking, displaced or improper joints or other defects. Defects shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer. D. Televised Inspection: After the drain pipe has been installed and cleaned; and the trench has been filled, the Contractor shall televise the drain pipe to locate defects in the drain pipe. 1. The Contractor shall arrange for the televised inspections. 2. The Contractor shall ensure safe access to each manhole for the television trucks. 3. Lines to be video inspected shall be flushed within 24 hours prior to beginning of inspection. 4. Any Work not conforming to these Design Standards and Construction Specifications shall be promptly removed, replaced and retested at no cost to the Owner. a. In addition to other requirements identified in the Design Standards and Construction Specifications, the following conditions identified during video inspection shall be promptly corrected by removal, replacement and retesting of the unsatisfactory pipe by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner: 1) Alignment (Vertical or Horizontal) is outside the specified limits. 2) Water ponds in any section with depths equal to or greater than 2 times the grade tolerance specified in the Contract Documents. 3) Pipe section with visible defects, such as: open joints, pinched gaskets, cracked barrels or bells, leaks, or other defects as determined by the Engineer. 5. A copy of televised inspection shall be provided to the Owner in a format selected by the Owner (DVD, VCR, etc.). 6. Video equipment shall be equipped with a device that can accurately measure the depth of any ponding encountered in the pipe. Measuring device shall be clearly visible in the video image. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PVC NON-PRESSURE PIPE, RUBBER JOINTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 41 03 - 1 SECTION 33 41 03 PVC NON-PRESSURE PIPE, RUBBER JOINTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall provide PVC non-pressure pipe and appurtenant work, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. This Section covers pipe from 4 to 48 inches diameter nominal size. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Commercial Standards: ASTM D 1784 Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds ASTM F 1803 Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Closed Profile Gravity Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter ASTM D 2444 Test Method for Impact Resistance of Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings by Means of a Tup (Falling Weight) ASTM D 2321 Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications ASTM D 3034 Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and FittingsCement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water ASTM D 3212 Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipe Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals ASTM F 477 Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe ASTM F 679 Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large- Diameter Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings ASTM F 794 Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Profile Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter ASTM F 913 Thermoplastic Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PVC NON-PRESSURE PIPE, RUBBER JOINTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 41 03 - 2 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Contractor Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: The Contractor shall submit shop drawings and laying diagrams of pipe, joints, bends, special fittings, and piping appurtenances. C. Certificates: The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's certificate that pipe conforms to these specifications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Pipe shall be continuously and permanently marked with the manufacturer's name, pipe size, and minimum pipe stiffness in psi. B. The Contractor shall also require the manufacturer to mark the date of extrusion on the pipe. This dating shall be done in conjunction with records to be held by the manufacturer for 2 years, covering quality control tests, raw material batch number, and other information deemed necessary by the manufacturer. 2.2 PIPE A. Pipe shall conform to one of the following requirements 1. Solid Wall Pipe (4” through 15”) - ASTM D 3034, SDR 35. 2. Solid Wall Pipe (18” through 48”) -- ASTM F 679 – 46 psi. 3. Ribbed Pipe (21” through 48”) - ASTM F 794 4. Closed Profile Wall Pipe (21” through 54”) - ASTM F 1803 (Vylon or approved equal only) B. Material for PVC pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D 1784 - Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds, for cell classification 12454-C or 12364-A as defined therein. The manufacturer shall test a sample from each batch according to ASTM D 2444 - Test Method for Impact Resistance of Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings by Means of a Tup (Falling Weight). C. Joints shall conform to ASTM D 3212. Elastomeric seals for compression type joints shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F 477, ASTM F 913 - Thermoplastic Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe. 2.3 FITTINGS A. All fittings shall be of the same material as the pipe, molded or formed to suit the pipe size and end design, in required configurations. B. The stiffness of the fittings shall be not less than the stiffness of adjoining pipe. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PVC NON-PRESSURE PIPE, RUBBER JOINTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 41 03 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Laying, jointing, and testing for defects and for leakage shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer, and shall be subject to approval before acceptance. Material found to have defects will be rejected and the Contractor shall promptly remove such defective materials from the Site. B. Installation shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D 2321, instructions furnished by the pipe manufacturer, and to the supplementary requirements herein. Wherever the provisions of this Section and the aforementioned requirements are in conflict, the m ore stringent provision shall apply. 3.2 HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Handling 1. Handling of the PVC pipe shall be done with implements, tools, and facilities as recommended by the pipe manufacturer to insure that the pipe is not damaged in any manner during storage, transit, loading, unloading, and installation. 2. Pipe shall be inspected both prior to and after installation in the trench and all defective lengths shall be rejected and immediately removed from the working area. 3. Fittings shall be lowered into trench by means of rope, cable, chain, or other means without damage. Cable, rope, or other devices used for lowering fitting into trench, shall be attached around exterior of fitting for handling. Under no circumstances shall the cable, rope, or other device be attached through the fitting interior for handling or shall pipe or fittings be dropped or dumped into the trench. B. Storage: Pipe should be stored, if possible, at the Site in unit packages provided by the manufacturer. Caution should be exercised to avoid compression damage or deformation to bell ends of the pipe. Pipe should be stored in such a way as to prevent sagging or bending and be protected from exposure to direct sunlight by covering with an opaque material while permitting adequate air circulation above and around the pipe. Gaskets should be stored in a cool, dark place out of the direct rays of the sun, preferably in original cartons. 3.3 TRENCHING AND BACKFILL A. Trench excavation and backfill shall conform to the requirements of Section 31 23 00 – Earthwork and the Drawings. 3.4 LAYING PIPE A. Pipe sections shall be closely jointed to form a smooth flow line. Immediately before placing each section of pipe in final position for jointings, the bedding for the pipe shall be checked for firmness and uniformity of slope. B. Cutting and machining of the pipe shall be accomplished in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's standard procedures. Pipe shall not be cut with a cold chisel, standard iron pipe cutter, or any other method that may fracture the pipe or will produce ragged, uneven edges. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PVC NON-PRESSURE PIPE, RUBBER JOINTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 41 03 - 4 C. All foreign matter or dirt shall be removed from the interior of the pipe before lowering into position in the trench. Pipe shall be kept clean during and after laying. All openings in the pipe line shall be closed with water tight expandable type sewer plugs or PVC test plugs at the end of each day's operation or whenever the pipe openings are left unattended. The use of burlap, wood, or other similar temporary plugs will not be permitted. D. Adequate protection and maintenance of all underground and surface utility structures, drains, sewers, and other obstructions encountered in the progress of the Work shall be the Contractor’s responsibility. E. Where the grade or alignment of the pipe is obstructed by existing utility structures such as conduits, ducts, pipes, branch connections to main sewers, or main drains, the obstruction shall be permanently supported, relocated, removed, or reconstructed by the Contractor in cooperation with owners of such utility structures. Unless otherwise indicated, protection of existing utility structures shall be the Contractor’s responsibility. 3.5 FIELD JOINTING A. Each pipe compression type joint shall be joined with a lock-in rubber ring and a ring groove that is designed to resist displacement during pipe insertion. B. The ring and the ring seat inside the bell shall be wiped clean before the gasket is inserted. A thin film of lubricant shall be applied to the exposed surface of the ring and to the outside of the clean pipe end. Lubricant other than that furnished with the pipe shall not be used. The end of the pipe shall be then forced into the ring to complete the joint. C. Fittings shall be carefully connected to pipe, and joint shall be checked to insure a sound and proper joint. D. When pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of the pipe shall be closed to prevent trench water from entering pipe. Adequate backfill shall be deposited on pipe to prevent floating of pipe. Any pipe which has floated shall be removed from the trench, cleaned, and relaid in an acceptable manner. No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the Engineer, the trench conditions or weather are unsuitable. 3.6 SMALL DIAMETER LATERALS (SEWER LATERAL CONNECTIONS) A. Laterals shall extend from the manhole, wye branch or similar fitting, as indicated in the Drawings. Wye fitting or other connection shall be positioned in the mainline such that it enters the mainline at an angle of at least 45 degrees from horizontal. Connections requiring a connection angle of less than 45 degrees shall be approved by the Engineer. B. Install a 22.5 degree or 45 degree bend, or combination of bends, as required on the mainline wye to obtain the proper alignment and grade. C. Lateral connections to manhole shall be made as directed in Section 33 05 16 – Precast Concrete Manholes and Vaults. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PVC NON-PRESSURE PIPE, RUBBER JOINTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 41 03 - 5 D. Laterals shall be installed along the indicated horizontal alignment with a uniform slope, free of low spots or adverse grades. Minimum slopes shall be 1/4 inch per foot for 4” diameter laterals and 1/8 inch per foot for 6” diameter laterals. E. Cleanouts shall be installed on laterals at a horizontal spacing not to exceed 100 feet and at the locations indicated in the Drawings. F. Any one bend (horizontal or vertical) shall not exceed 45 degrees and no more the two bends (horizontal or vertical) shall be installed without a cleanout. G. Laterals shall be installed in accordance with all applicable requirements of the local plumbing codes. 3.7 INSTALLATION OF METALLIC LOCATING TAPE A. Polyvinyl chloride pipelines shall be provided with a metallic locating tape laid along the centerline of the pipe trench at a depth of 18 inches below finished grade OR above top of pipe. The Contractor shall furnish manufacturer's literature, completely describing the tape proposed to be furnished. No tape shall be used prior to receipt of written approval of the Engineer. 3.8 TESTING A. Field testing of gravity sewer pipe shall conform to the requirements of Section 33 08 00 – Gravity Piping Testing and Inspection. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PVC NON-PRESSURE PIPE, RUBBER JOINTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 41 03 - 6 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 41 05 - 1 SECTION 33 41 05 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall furnish and install ductile iron pipe and all appurtenant Work, complete in place, all in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Commercial Standards: ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4 Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5 Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Piping and Fittings for Water ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings, 3-in. through 48-in. for Water and Other Liquids ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings ANSI/AWWA C115/A21.15 Flanged Ductile Iron and Gray-Iron Pipe with Threaded Flanges ANSI/AWWA C150/A21.50 Thickness Design of Ductile Iron Pipe ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 Ductile Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand- Lined Molds, for Water or Other Liquids ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53 Ductile Iron Compact Fittings, 3-in. through 12-in. for Water and Other Liquids AWWA C209 Cold-Applied Tape Coatings for the Exterior of Special Sections, Connections, and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines AWWA C214 Tape Coating Systems for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines ANSI/AWWA C600 Installation of Ductile Iron Water Mains and their Appurtenances ASTM C150 Specification for Portland Cement BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 41 05 - 2 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: The Contractor shall submit shop drawings of pipe and fittings in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 20 – Contractor Submittals, the requirements of the referenced standards and the following supplemental requirements as applicable and specified herein. 1. Marking plan and details of standard pipe section showing dimensions, pipe joints, fitting and special fitting pressure rating and thickness, size, coating and lining data. 2. Pipeline layout drawings showing the location of each pipe section, each special length, closure sections, location and angle of bends, outlets, location of valves, and other special fittings. B. Certifications: The Contractor shall furnish a certified affidavit of compliance for all pipe and other products or materials furnished under this Section, as specified in the referenced standards and the following supplemental requirements: 1. Physical and chemical properties. a. Hydrostatic Test Reports C. Sample Costs: All expenses incurred in making samples for certification of tests shall be borne by the Contractor. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Inspection: All pipe shall be subject to inspection at the place of manufacture, in accordance with the provisions of the referenced standards, as supplemented by the requirements herein. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of the manufacturing starting date not less than 14 calendar days prior to the start of any phase of the pipe manufacture. B. During the manufacture of the pipe, the Engineer shall be given access to all areas where manufacturing is in process and shall be permitted to make all inspections necessary to confirm compliance with the Specifications. C. Test: Except as modified herein, all materials used in the manufacture of the pipe shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of the referenced standards as applicable. D. The Contractor shall perform said material tests at no additional cost to the Owner. The Engineer shall have the right to witness all testing conducted by the Contractor; provided, that the Contractor’s schedule is not delayed for the convenience of the Engineer. E. In addition to those tests specifically required, the Engineer may request additional samples of any material including lining and coating samples for testing by the Owner. The additional samples shall be furnished at no additional cost to the Owner PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Standards: Mortar-lined and polyethylene-wrapped ductile iron pipe shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C151, C104, and C105, subject to the following supplemental requirements. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 41 05 - 3 The pipe shall be of the diameter and class shown, shall be furnished complete with rubber gaskets as indicated in the Contract Documents, and all flanges, specials and fittings shall be provided as required under the Contract Documents. B. Handling and Storage: The pipe shall be handled by devices acceptable to the Engineer, designed and constructed to prevent damage to the pipe coating/exterior. The use of equipment which might injure the pipe coating/exterior will not be permitted. Stockpiled pipe shall be suitably supported and shall be secured to prevent accidental rolling. All other pipe handling equipment and methods shall be acceptable to the Engineer. C. Laying Lengths: Maximum pipe laying lengths shall be 20 feet with shorter lengths provided as required by the Drawings. D. Finish: The pipe shall have smooth and dense interior surfaces, and shall be free from fractures, excessive interior surface crazing, and roughness. E. Closures and Correction Pieces: Closures and correction pieces shall be provided as required so that closures may be made due to different headings in the pipe laying operation and so that correction may be made to adjust the pipe laying to conform to pipe stationing shown on the Drawings. The locations of correction pieces and closure assemblies are shown on the Drawings. Any change in location or number of said items shall be acceptable to the Engineer. F. Pipe shall be new and recently manufactured. Refurbished pipe shall not be provided. 2.2 PIPE DESIGN CRITERIA A. General: Ductile iron pipe shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C150 as applicable and as modified in this Section. B. Pipe Wall Thickness for Internal Pressure: The pipe shall be designed with a net thickness to withstand the design pressure in accordance with the hoop stress formula. C. Pipe Wall Thickness for External Load: The pipe shall also be designed with a net thickness to withstand internal loads using ANSI/AWWA C150 Design Equation (2) with the appropriate bending moment and deflection coefficients for Laying Condition Types 4 and 5 as applicable. D. The pipe deflection shall be checked using ANSI/AWWA C150 Design Equation (3) and the coefficients stated above. The allowable deflection shall not exceed 0.0225 times the nominal diameter. E. In lieu of ANSI/AWWA C150 Design Equation (4), the earth loads will be computed using the following two equations for trench or embankment loading as applicable: 1. Trench Condition: a. Wd = CdwBd2, b. Where: c. Wd = Earth load in pounds per linear foot d. Cd = Calculation Coefficient e. Ku1 = 0.13 f. w = 120 lb/ft3 BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 41 05 - 4 g. Bd = Trench width at top of pipe, feet 2. Positive Projecting Embankment Condition: a. Wc = CcwBc2 b. Where: c. Wc = Earth load in pounds per linear foot d. Cc = Calculation Coefficient (based on rsdP of 0.25) e. Ku1 = 0.13 f. w = 120 lb/ft3 g. Bc = Trench width at top of pipe, feet F. The above two formulas are based on a depth of cover of 10 feet or greater. For depths of cover of less than 10 feet, HS-20 live load shall be included. For depths of cover of three feet or less, HS-20 live load plus impact shall be included. The determination of live load and impact factors shall be as recommend by AASHTO in “Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges.” G. If the calculated deflection, Deflx, exceeds 0.0225 times the nominal diameter, the pipe class shall be increased. H. Minimum Pipe Wall Thickness: In addition to the requirements of this Section, the minimum wall thickness shall be in accordance with Table 50.5 of ANSI/AWWA C150. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Ductile Iron Pipe: Pipe materials shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C151. B. Cement: Cement for mortar lining shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C104, provided that cement for mortar lining shall be Type V. A fly ash or pozzolan shall not be used as a cement replacement. C. Polyethylene Sleeve: Material for the polyethylene sleeve shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C105. 2.4 SPECIALS AND FITTINGS A. Fittings for ductile iron pipe shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53 or ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 for diameters 3-inch through 48-inch and shall have a minimum pressure rating of 250 psi. Ductile iron fittings larger than 48-inch shall conform to the above-referenced standard with the necessary modifications for the larger size. 2.5 DESIGN OF PIPE A. General: The pipe furnished shall be ductile iron pipe, mortar-lined and polyethylene- wrapped with rubber-gasketed joints as shown. B. Manufacturing Requirements: The pipe shall be designed, manufactured, tested, inspected, and marked according to applicable requirements previously stated and, except as hereinafter modified, shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C151. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 41 05 - 5 C. Pipe Dimensions: The pipe shall be of the diameter and class shown. The minimum wall thickness for each pipe size shall be as specified or shown. D. Fitting Dimensions: The fittings shall be of the diameter and class shown. E. Joint Design: Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be furnished with mechanical joints, push- on joints, flanged joints, and restrained joints as required. 1. Mechanical and push-on joints shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. 2. Restrained Joint: a. Manufactured proprietary joint that mechanically restrains pipe to adjoining pipe without setscrews or devices with shoes or wedges activated by setscrews. b. The use of devices utilizing setscrews shall not be allowed. Primary permanent restraint for all buried pipe fittings shall be accomplished using concrete thrust blocks. Temporary fitting restraint for testing of pipelines can be accomplished using mechanical thrust restraint utilizing multiple gripping wedges incorporated into a follower gland meeting the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 or ANSI/AWWA C153/A21/53. Temporary (or secondary) fitting restraint shall be in addition to primary permanent restraint. Permanent restraint for straight-run pipe joints can be accomplished using manufacturer’s proprietary joint (e.g. Tyton Lock with Sure Stop gasket, or equal) or with mechanical joint restraints (e.g. EBAA Iron Megalug, or equal) utilizing multiple gripping wedges incorporated into a follower gland meeting the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11 or ANSI/AWWA C153/A21/53. c. Rated at minimum working pressure equal to or greater than that of the pipe class. d. The use of field-lock, gripper ring type restraining devices shall be limited to only locations where unforeseen field conditions or closure places require the pipe to be field fit, cut, and joined, and as approved by the Engineer. Where field locking, gripper ring type restraining devices are used, the gripper ring shall be installed a minimum of one full pipe length away from the fitting or closure. The installation of gripper ring type restraining devices where used shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions. e. Field welding of ductile iron pipe and fitting shall not be allowed. 3. Flanged joints shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C115/A21.15. F. Joint Clearances: For bell-and-spigot ends with rubber gaskets, the clearance between the bells and spigots shall be such that when combined with the gasket groove configuration and the gasket itself, will provide watertight joints under all operating conditions when properly installed. The Contractor shall require the pipe manufacturer to submit details complete with significant dimensions and tolerances and also to submit performance data indicating that the proposed joint has performed satisfactorily under similar conditions. In the absence of a history of field performance, the results of a test program shall be submitted. G. Coating and Linings Held Back: Shop-applied interior linings and exterior coatings shall be held back from the ends of the pipe as shown, or as otherwise acceptable to the Engineer. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 41 05 - 6 2.6 CEMENT-MORTAR LINING A. Cement-Mortar Lining for Shop Application: Except as otherwise provided herein, interior surfaces of all ductile iron pipe, fittings and specials shall be cleaned and lined in the shop with cement-mortar lining applied centrifugally in conformity with ANSI/AWWA C104. During the lining operation and thereafter, the pipe shall be maintained in a round condition by suitable bracing or strutting. The lining machines shall be of a type that has been used successfully for similar work. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent damage to the lining. If lining is damaged or found faulty at the delivery site, the damaged or unsatisfactory portions shall be replaced with lining conforming to these Specifications. B. Lining Thickness: The minimum lining thickness shall be as follows: Nominal Pipe Diameter (in) Minimum Lining Thickness (in) 3-12 1/8 14-24 3/16 30-54 1/4 C. Protection of Pipe Lining/Interior: All shop-applied cement mortar lining shall be given a water based (no-VOC) seal coat fully compliant with NSF61 standards and in conformance with ANSI/AWWA C104. 2.7 GLASS LINING A. Pipe and fittings shall be glass lined where shown. B. The glass lining shall be formulated for handling primarily sludge and scum. The formulation shall consist of special glasses and inorganic materials factory applied to chemically clean, gray iron. After application of the coating, the parts shall be placed in a specially designed furnace and brought up to temperature at which the glass melts and fuses to the base metal. Firing of the piece shall continue until fusion has completely taken place and the coating has an integral molecular bond with the metal. C. The finished lining shall be from .008 to .012 inch thick. It shall have a hardness of from 5 to 6 mohs scale, and a density of from 2.5 to 3.0 grams per cubic centimeter as measured in accordance with ASTM D792. The glass shall be capable of withstanding thermal shock of 3560 degrees F without crazing, blistering, or spalling. There shall be no visible loss of surface gloss in the lining after immersion of a normal production run sample in an 8 percent sulfuric acid solution at 148 degrees F for a period of 10 minutes. In addition, when testing in accordance with ASTM C283, it shall show a weight loss of not more than 3 milligrams per square inch. D. Factory assembled flanges on spool pieces shall be screwed on, unless otherwise specified. Bolt holes and flange faces shall be aligned before glassing. The pieces shall be sealed and tested prior to shipment. E. The glass lining shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s standard tolerances for coverage, continuity, and gloss. Pinholes, crazing, or fishscales which substantially expose BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 41 05 - 7 the metal substrate shall be cause for rejection of the piece. Sizes, details, handling, stacking, etc. shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. F. Glass lining shall be Ferrock lining as manufactured by Ferro Enameling, Permutit SG-14 as manufactured by the Permutit Company, Bulwark Corporation, or approved equal. 2.8 EXTERIOR COATING OF PIPE A. Exterior Coating of Exposed Piping: The exterior surfaces of pipe which will be exposed to the atmosphere inside structures or above ground shall be thoroughly cleaned and then given a shop coat of rust-inhibitive primer conforming to the requirements of Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating. B. Exterior Coating of Buried Piping: The exterior coating shall be an asphaltic coating approximately one mil thick. 2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Tests: In accordance with AWWA C104, C105, C110, C111, C115, C150, C151, C153, and C606. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Laying, jointing, testing for defects and for leakage shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer, and shall be subject to approval before acceptance. Material found to have defects will be rejected and the Contractor shall promptly remove such defective materials from the Site. B. Installation shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C600, instructions furnished by the pipe manufacturer, and to the supplementary requirements herein. Wherever the provisions of this Section and the aforementioned requirements are in conflict, the more stringent provision shall apply. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF PIPE A. Handling and Storage: All pipe, fittings, etc., shall be carefully handled and protected against damage, impact shocks, and free fall. All pipe handling equipment shall be acceptable to the Engineer. Pipe shall not be placed directly on rough ground but shall be supported in a manner that will protect the pipe coating against injury whenever stored at the trench site or elsewhere. No pipe shall be installed where the lining or coating show defects that may be harmful as determined by the Engineer. Such damaged lining or coating shall be repaired, or a new undamaged pipe shall be furnished and installed. B. Damaged Pipe: All pipe damaged prior to Substantial Completion shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 41 05 - 8 C. Contractor to Inspect Pipe: The Contractor shall inspect each pipe and fitting prior to installation to insure that there are no damaged portions of the pipe. D. Trench excavation and backfill shall conform to the requirements of Section 31 23 00 – Earthwork. Care shall be taken to ensure that pipe zone material is compacted and in full contact with the haunches of the pipe and that the pipe is fully supported. E. Clean Pipe: Before placement of pipe in the trench, each pipe or fitting shall be thoroughly cleaned of any foreign substance, which may have collected thereon, and shall be kept clean at all times thereafter. For this purpose, the openings of all pipes and fittings in the trench shall be closed during any interruption to the Work. 1. Remove lumps, blisters, and excess asphaltic type coating from bell and spigot ends of each pipe. Wire brush outside of spigot and inside of bell and wipe clean, dry, and free from oil and grease before pipe is laid. 2. Wipe ends of mechanical joint pipe and fittings and of rubber gasket joint pipe and fittings clean of dirt, grease, and foreign matter. F. Pipe Laying: The pipe shall be installed in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C600. 1. Direction of Laying: Lay pipe with bell end facing in direction of laying. For lines on an appreciable slope, face bells upgrade at discretion of Engineer. 2. Mechanical Joint, Push-On Joint, and Restrained Joint Pipe: After first length of pipe is installed in trench, secure pipe in place with approved backfill material tamped under and along sides to prevent movement. Keep ends clear of backfill. After each section is jointed, place backfill as specified to prevent movement. For restrained joint pipe and fittings, after each section is jointed and restraining devices are completely installed, fully extend the completed joint and place backfill as specified to p revent movement before installation of the next section of pipe or fitting. 3. Take precautions necessary to prevent floating of pipe prior to completion of backfill operation. 4. When using movable trench shield, take necessary precautions to prevent pipe joints from pulling apart when moving shield ahead. 5. Do not allow foreign material to enter pipe while it is being placed in trench. 6. Close and block open end of last laid section of pipe to prevent entry of foreign material or creep of gasketed joints when laying operations are not in progress, at close of day’s work, or whenever workers are absent from job. G. Joining Push-On Joint Pipe and Mechanical Joint Fittings: 1. Join pipe with push-on joints and mechanical joint fittings in strict accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. Provide special tools and devices, such as, special jacks, chokers, and similar items required for installation. 3. Lubricate pipe gaskets using lubricant furnished by pipe manufacturer. No substitutes will be permitted. 4. Clean ends of fittings of dirt, mud, and foreign matter by washing with water and scrubbing with a wire brush, after which, slip gland and gasket on plain end of pipe. If necessary, lubricate end of pipe to facilitate sliding gasket in place, then guide fitting onto spigot of pipe previously laid. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 41 05 - 9 H. Founding Pipe: Pipe shall be laid directly on the Pipe Zone material. No blocking will be permitted, and the bedding shall be such that it forms a continuous, solid bearing for the full length of the pipe. Excavations shall be made as needed to facilita te removal of handling devices after the pipe is laid. Bell holes shall be formed at the ends of the pipe to prevent point loading at the bells or couplings. Excavation shall be made as needed outside the normal trench section at field joints to permit adequate access to the joints for field connection operations and for application of coating on field joints. I. Unforeseen Obstructions: Where necessary to raise or lower the pipe due to unforeseen obstructions or other causes, the Engineer may change the alignment and/or the grades. Such change shall be made by the deflection of joints, or by the use of additional fittings. However, in no case shall the deflection in the joint exceed the maximum designed deflection recommended by the pipe manufacturer. No joint shall be misfit any amount that will be detrimental to the strength and water tightness of the finished joint. J. Except for short runs which may be permitted by the Engineer, pipes shall be laid uphill on grades exceeding 10 percent. Pipe which is laid on a downhill grade shall be blocked and held in place until sufficient support is furnished by the following pipe to prevent movement. All bends shall be properly installed as shown. K. Cold Weather Protection: No pipe shall be installed upon a foundation into which frost has penetrated or at any time that there is a danger of the formation of ice or penetration of frost at the bottom of the excavation. No pipe shall be laid unless it can be established that the trench will be backfilled before the formation of ice and frost occurs. L. Pipe and Specials Protection: The openings of all pipe and specials shall be protected with suitable bulkheads to prevent unauthorized access by persons, animals, water or any undesirable substance. At all times, means shall be provided to prevent the pipe from floating. M. Pipe Cleanup: As pipe laying progresses, the Contractor shall keep the pipe interior free of all debris. The Contractor shall completely clean the interior of the pipe of all sand, dirt, mortar splatter and any other debris following completion of pipe laying, pointing of joints and any necessary interior repairs prior to testing and disinfecting the completed pipeline. N. Cutting Pipe: General: Cut pipe for inserting closure pieces in a neat and workmanlike manner without damaging pipe or lining and so as to leave a smooth end, at right angles to axis of pipe. 1. Pipe: Cut pipe with milling type cutter or saw. Do not flame cut. 2. Dressing Cut Ends: Dress cut ends of push-on joint pipe by beveling, as recommended by manufacturer. O. Field Welding: 1. Field welding of ductile iron pipe shall not be allowed. 2. Field welding of bars for restrained joint systems will not be allowed. All welding shall be performed in pipe manufacturer’s shop. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 41 05 - 10 P. Field Installed Outlets: Field outlets may be installed with a saddle; however, the maximum nominal diameter of outlet for saddle shall be 2-inch. Opening in pipe shall be machine cut. Flame cut openings shall not be allowed. 3.3 RUBBER GASKETED JOINTS A. Rubber Gasketed Joints: Immediately before jointing pipe, the bell end of the pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned, and a clean rubber gasket, lubricated with an approved vegetable-based lubricant, shall be placed in the bell groove. The spigot end of the pipe shall be carefully cleaned and lubricated with a vegetable-based lubricant. The spigot end of the pipe section shall then be inserted into the bell of the previously laid joint and telescoped into its proper position. Tilting of the pipe to insert the spigot into the bell will not be permitted. 3.4 CORROSION PROTECTION A. Polyethylene Encasement: Buried ductile iron pipe shall be polyethylene encased in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5. 1. Encase pipe, fittings, and valves in accordance with AWWA C105, Method A. 2. Cut polyethylene tube approximately 2 feet longer than pipe length. 3. Slip tube around pipe, centering to provide 1-foot overlap on each adjacent section. 4. Pull encasement to take out slack and wrap snug around pipe. 5. Secure overlap in place and fold at quarter points of pipe length. 6. Wrap and tape encasement snug around fittings and valves. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF PIPE APPURTENANCES A. Protection of Appurtenances: Where the joining pipe is tape-coated, buried appurtenances shall be coated with cold-applied tape in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C209, Type II. Where pipe is encased in polyethylene sleeves, buried appurtenances shall also be encased in polyethylene. B. Installation of Valves: All valves shall be handled in a manner to prevent any injury or damage to any part of the valve. All joints shall be thoroughly cleaned and prepared prior to installation. The Contractor shall adjust all stem packing and operate each valve prior to installation to insure proper operation. C. Valve Installation: All valves shall be installed so that the valve stems are plumb and in the location shown on the Drawings. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF METALLIC LOCATING TAPE A. Buried pipelines shall be provided with a metallic locating tape laid along the centerline of the pipe trench at a depth of 18 inches below finished grade OR above top of pipe. The Contractor shall furnish manufacturer's literature, completely describing the tape proposed to be furnished. No tape shall be used prior to receipt of written approval of the Engineer. 3.7 FIELD TESTING AND DISINFECTION A. Field testing shall conform to the requirements of Section 33 13 00 – Water Pipeline Testing and Disinfection as applicable. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 41 05 - 11 END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 33 41 05 - 12 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK DIVISION 40 PROCESS INTEGRATION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PIPING, GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 00 - 1 SECTION 40 05 00 PIPING, GENERAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all piping systems shown and specified, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Each system shall be complete with all necessary fittings, hangers, supports, anchors, seismic restraints, expansion joints, flexible connectors, valves, accessories, heat tracing, insulation, lining and coating, testing, disinfection, excavation, backfill and encasement, to provide a functional installation. B. The piping shown is intended to define the general layout, configuration, routing, method of support, pipe size, and pipe type. The mechanical drawings are not pipe construction or fabrication drawings. It is the Contractor's responsibility to develop the details necessary to construct all mechanical piping systems, to accommodate the specific equipment provided, and to provide and install all spools, spacers, adapters, connectors, etc., for a complete and functional system. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Commercial Standards ANSI/ASME B1.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose (inch) ANSI B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Steel Nickel Alloy and other Special Alloys ANSI/AWWA C207 Steel Pipe Flanges for Water Works Service, Sizes 4 in through 144 in. ANSI/AWWA C606 Grooved and Shouldered Joints ANSI/AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code ASTM A 307 Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 6,000 psi Tensile ASTM A 325 Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints ASTM D 792 Test Methods for Specific Gravity and Density of Plastics by Displacement ASTM D 2000 Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PIPING, GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 00 - 2 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete shop drawings and certificates, test reports, affidavits of compliance, of all piping systems, in accordance with the requirements in Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures, and as indicated in the individual piping sections. The shop drawings shall include all necessary dimensions and details on pipe joints, fittings, fitting specials, valves, appurtenances, design calculations, and material lists. The submittals shall include detailed layout, spool, or fabrication drawings which show all pipe spools, spacers, adapters, connectors, fittings, and pipe supports and seismic restraints necessary to accommodate the equipment and valves provided in a complete and functional system. B. All expenses incurred in making samples for certification of tests shall be borne by the Contractor at no increased cost to the Owner. C. Submit as part of the shop drawings a statement from the pipe fabricator certifying that all pipes will be fabricated subject to a recognized Quality Control Program. An outline of the program shall be submitted to the Engineer for review prior to the fabrication of any pipe. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Inspection: All pipe shall be subject to inspection at the place of manufacture. During the manufacture of the pipe, the Engineer shall be given access to all areas where manufacturing is in progress and shall be permitted to make all inspections necessary to confirm compliance with the Specifications. B. Tests: Except where otherwise indicated, all materials used in the manufacture of the pipe shall be tested in accordance with the applicable specifications and standards. Welds shall be tested as indicated. Perform all tests at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Welding Requirements: All welding procedures used to fabricate pipe shall be prequalified under the provisions of ANSI/AWS D1.1. Welding procedures shall be required for, but not necessarily limited to, longitudinal and girth or spiral welds for pipe cylinders, spigot and bell ring attachments, reinforcing plates and ring flange welds, and plates for lug connections. D. Welder Qualifications: All welding shall be done by skilled welders, welding operators, and tackers who have had adequate experience in the methods and materials to be used. Welders shall be qualified under the provisions of ANSI/AWS D1.1 by an independent local, approved testing agency not more than 6 months prior to commencing Work on the pipeline. Machines and electrodes similar to those used in the Work shall be used in qualification tests. Furnish all material and bear the expense of qualifying welders at no increased cost to the Owner. E. NSF/ANSI 61 for Drinking Water System Components: All materials that will contact potable water shall comply with the requirements of the NSF/ANSI 61 Standard. 1.5 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE A. Where the assistance of a manufacturer's service representative is advisable, in order to obtain perfect pipe joints, supports, or special connections, furnish such assistance at no additional cost to the Owner. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PIPING, GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 00 - 3 1.6 MATERIAL DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. All piping materials, fittings, valves, and accessories shall be delivered in a clean and undamaged condition and stored off the ground, to provide protection against oxidation caused by ground contact. All defective or damaged materials shall be replaced with new materials. 1.7 CLEANUP A. After completion of the Work, all remaining pipe cuttings, joining and wrapping materials, and other scattered debris, shall be removed from the site. The entire piping system shall be handed over in a clean and functional condition. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All pipes, fittings, and appurtenances shall be furnished in accordance with the requirements of the applicable Sections of Division 33 and this Section. B. Miscellaneous Small Pipes: Miscellaneous small pipes and fittings shall be provided by the Contractor in accordance with the requirements of Section 40 00 03 - Mill Piping - Exposed and Buried and this Section. C. Pipe Supports: All pipes shall be adequately supported in accordance with the requirements of Section 40 00 01 - Pipe Supports, and as indicated. D. Lining: All requirements pertaining to thickness, applications, and curing of pipe lining, are in accordance with the requirements of the applicable Sections of Division 33, unless otherwise indicated. E. Coating: All requirements pertaining to thickness, application, and curing of pipe coating, are in accordance with the requirements of the applicable Sections of Division 33, unless otherwise indicated. Pipes above ground or in structures shall be field-painted in accordance with Section 09 97 01 - Pipeline Coating or 09 99 90 – Coatings and Painting. F. Pressure Rating: All piping systems shall be designed for the maximum expected pressure as defined in Section 33 13 00 - Water Pipeline Testing and Disinfection, or as indicated on the piping schedule. G. Grooved Piping Systems: Piping systems with grooved joints and fittings may be provided, if approved by the Engineer, in lieu of screwed, flanged, welded, or mechanical joint systems for steel and ductile iron yard piping above and below ground within the property limits of pump stations, and similar installations. All grooved couplings on buried piping must be bonded. To assure uniform and compatible piping components, all grooved fittings, couplings, and valves shall be from the same manufacturer. The Contractor shall make the coupling manufacturer responsible for the selection of the correct style of coupling and gasket for each individual location. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PIPING, GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 00 - 4 2.2 PIPE FLANGES A. Flanges: Where the design pressure is 150 psi or less, flanges shall conform to either ANSI/AWWA C207 Class D or ANSI B16.5 150-pound class. Where the design pressure is greater than 150 psi, up to a maximum of 275 psi, flanges shall conform to either ANSI/AWWA C207 Class E, Class F, or ANSI B16.5 150-pound class. However, AWWA flanges shall not be exposed to test pressures greater than 125 percent of rated capacity. For higher test pressures, the next higher rated AWWA flange or an ANSI-rated flange shall be selected. Where the design pressure is greater than 275 psi up to a maximum of 700 psi, flanges shall conform to ANSI B16.5 300-pound class. Flanges shall have flat faces and shall be attached with bolt holes straddling the vertical axis of the pipe unless otherwise shown. Attachment of the flanges to the pipe shall conform to the applicable requirements of ANSI/AWWA C207. Flanges for miscellaneous small pipes shall be in accordance with the standards specified for these pipes. B. Blind Flanges: Blind flanges shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C207, or with the standards for miscellaneous small pipes. All blind flanges for pipe sizes 12 inches and over shall be provided with lifting eyes in form of welded or screwed eye bolts. C. Flange Coating: All machined faces of metal blind flanges and pipe flanges shall be coated with a temporary rust-inhibitive coating to protect the metal until the installation is completed. D. Flange Bolts: Contractor shall supply all bolts and nuts in conformance with Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications. Studs and bolts shall extend through the nuts a minimum of 1/4 inch. All-thread studs shall be used on all valve flange connections, where space restrictions preclude the use of regular bolts. E. Insulating Flanges: Insulated flanges shall have bolt holes 1/4 inch diameter greater than the bolt diameter. F. Insulating Flange Sets: Insulating flange sets shall be provided by the Contractor where shown. Each insulating flange set shall consist of an insulating gasket, insulating sleeves and washers and a steel washer. Insulating sleeves and washers shall be o ne piece when flange bolt diameter is 1-1/2 inches or smaller and shall be made of acetal resin. For bolt diameters larger than 1-1/2 inches, insulating sleeves and washers shall be two-piece and shall be made of polyethylene or phenolic. Steel washers shall be in accordance with ASTM A 325. Insulating gaskets shall be full-face. G. Insulating Flange Manufacturers, or Equal 1. JM Red Devil, Type E 2. Maloney Pipeline Products Co., Houston 3. PSI Products, Inc., Burbank, California. H. Flange Gaskets: Contractor shall provide flange gaskets for all pipe flanges. Gaskets for flanged joints shall be full-faced, 1/16-inch thick compressed sheets of asbestos-free aramid fiber base, with nitrile binder and nonstick coating, suitable for temperatures to 700 degrees F, a pH of 1 to 11, and pressures to 1,000 psig. Blind flanges shall have gaskets covering the BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PIPING, GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 00 - 5 entire inside face of the blind flange and shall be cemented to the blind flange. Ring gaskets shall not be permitted. I. Flange Gasket Manufacturers, or Equal 1. John Crane, Style 2160. 2. Garlock, Style 3000 [JCL 01-18-21 Update: NTS - Change to Garlock Style 3760 for drinking water projects. Garlock 3760 is now NSF/ANSI 61 approved for potable water applications. Specifying engineer should check all equivalent products to confirm that they are NSF approved where needed] 2.3 THREADED INSULATING CONNECTIONS A. General: Threaded insulating bushings, unions, or couplings, as appropriate, shall be used for joining threaded pipes of dissimilar metals and for piping systems where corrosion control and cathodic protection are involved. B. Materials: Threaded insulating connections shall be of nylon, Teflon, polycarbonate, polyethylene, or other nonconductive materials, and shall have ratings and properties to suit the service and loading conditions. 2.4 MECHANICAL-TYPE COUPLINGS (GROOVED OR BANDED PIPE) A. Construction: Cast mechanical-type couplings shall be provided where shown. The couplings shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C606. Bolts and nuts shall conform to the requirements of Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications. All gaskets for mechanical-type couplings shall be compatible with the piping service and fluid utilized, in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's recommendations. The wall thickness of all grooved piping shall conform with the coupling manufacturer's recommendations to suit the highest expected pressure. To avoid stress on equipment, all equipment connections shall have rigid-grooved couplings, or harness sets in sizes where rigid couplings are not available, unless thrust restraint is provided by other means. The Contractor shall have the coupling Manufacturer's service representative verify the correct choice and application of all couplings and gaskets, and the workmanship, to assure a correct installation. B. Couplings for Steel Pipe, Manufacturers, or Equal 1. Victaulic Style 44 with Type D Heavy Duty Grooved Adaptor Ends. C. Ductile Iron Pipe Couplings, Manufacturers, or Equal 1. Gustin-Bacon. 2. Victaulic Style 31 (flexible or rigid grooving). 3. Note: Ductile iron pipe couplings shall be furnished with flush seal gaskets. D. Couplings for PVC Pipe, Manufacturers, or Equal 1. Gustin-Bacon. 2. Victaulic Style 775. 3. Note: Couplings for PVC pipe shall be furnished with radius cut or standard roll grooved pipe ends. Grooved end couplings shall be used on PVC pipe only for Schedule 80 vent piping at the vaults. Grooved end couplings shall not be used for PVC C905 water pipe. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PIPING, GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 00 - 6 2.5 SLEEVE-TYPE COUPLINGS A. Construction: Sleeve-type couplings shall be provided where indicated, in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C219 unless otherwise indicated, and shall be of steel with steel bolts, without pipe stop, and shall be of sizes to fit the pipe and fittings. The middle ring shall be not less than 1/4 inch in thickness and shall be either 5 or 7 inches long for sizes up to and including 30 inches and 10 inches long for sizes greater than 30 inches, for standard steel couplings, and 16 inches long for long-sleeve couplings. The followers shall be single-piece contoured mill section welded and cold-expanded as required for the middle rings. They shall be of sufficient strength to accommodate the number of bolts necessary to obtain adequate gasket pressures without excessive rolling. The shape of the follower shall be of such design as to provide positive confinement of the gasket. Bolts and nuts shall conform to the requirements of Section 05 50 00 - Miscellaneous Metalwork. Buried sleeve-type couplings shall be epoxy- coated at the factory. B. Pipe Preparation: The ends of the pipe, where indicated, shall be prepared for flexible steel couplings. Plain ends for use with couplings shall be smooth and round for a distance of 12 inches from the ends of the pipe, with outside diameter not more than 1/64 inch smaller than the nominal outside diameter of the pipe. The middle ring shall be tested by cold-expanding a minimum of one percent beyond the yield point, to proof-test the weld to the strength of the parent metal. The weld of the middle ring shall be subjected to air test for porosity. C. Gaskets: Gaskets for sleeve-type couplings shall be rubber-compound material that will not deteriorate from age or exposure to air under normal storage or use conditions. Gaskets for wastewater and sewerage applications shall be Buna "N," grade 60, or equivalent suitable elastomer. 1. The rubber in the gasket shall meet the following specifications: a. Color - Jet Black. b. Surface - Nonblooming. c. Durometer Hardness - 74 " 5. d. Tensile Strength - 1,000 psi Minimum. e. Elongation - 175 percent Minimum. 2. The gaskets shall be immune to attack by impurities normally found in water or wastewater. All gaskets shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 2000, AA709Z, meeting Suffix B13 Grade 3, except as noted above. All gaskets shall be compatible with the piping service and fluid utilized. D. Insulating Couplings: Where insulating couplings are required, both ends of the coupling shall have a wedge-shaped gasket which assembles over a rubber sleeve of an insulating compound in order to obtain insulation of all coupling metal parts from the pipe. E. Restrained Joints: All sleeve-type couplings on pressure lines shall be harnessed unless thrust restraint is provided by other means. Harnesses shall be in accordance with the requirements of the appropriate reference standard, or as shown. F. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. Dresser, Style 38. 2. Ford Meter Box Co., Inc., Style FC1 or FC3. 3. Smith-Blair, Style 411. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PIPING, GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 00 - 7 4. Baker, Series 200 2.6 FLANGED END CONNECTORS A. Flanged coupling adapters, shall be in accordance with AWWA C219. B. Dismantling joints for connecting flanged pipe shall be AWWA C219 compliant. Provide studs and nuts to seal gasket separate and independent from tie-bar restraint system. C. All dismantling joints shall be the restrained type per AWWA M-11. Tie-bar restraint system shall conform to ASTM A193-B7 per AWWA M-11 and be designed to withstand the test pressure shown on the Drawings. D. All dismantling joints shall use standard flanges in accordance with AWWA C207. The thickness of the dismantling joint flanges shall be equal to or greater than the class of flange that is connected to as required by the test pressure as shown on the drawings. Buried flanges shall be wrapped with petroleum was tape per AWWA C217. E. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. Smith-Blair, Style 972 or 975 2. Baker, Series DJ 2.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Flexible connectors shall be installed in all piping connections to engines, blowers, compressors, and other vibrating equipment, and where shown. Flexible connectors for service temperatures up to 180 degrees F shall be flanged, reinforced Neoprene or Butyl spools, rated for a working pressure of 40 to 150 psi, or reinforced, flanged duck and rubber, as best suited for the application. Flexible connectors for service temperatures above 180 degrees F shall be flanged, braided stainless steel spools with inner, annular, corrugated stainless steel hose, rated for minimum 150 psi working pressure, unless otherwise shown. The connectors shall be 9 inches long, face-to-face flanges, unless otherwise shown. The final material selection shall be approved by the manufacturer. Submit manufacturer's shop drawings and calculations. 2.8 EXPANSION JOINTS A. All piping subject to expansion and contraction shall be provided with sufficient means to compensate for such movement, without exertion of undue forces to equipment or structures. This may be accomplished with expansion loops, bellow-type expansion joints, or sliding- type expansion joints. Expansion joints shall be of stainless steel, monel, rubber, or other materials, best suited for each individual service. Submit detailed calculations and manufacturer's shop drawings, guaranteeing satisfactory performance of all proposed expansion joints, piping layouts showing all anchors and guides, and information on materials, temperature and pressure ratings. 2.9 PIPE THREADS A. All pipe threads shall be in accordance with ANSI/ASME B1.20.1. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PIPING, GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 00 - 8 2.10 AIR AND GAS TRAPS A. Air and gas pipes shall be sloping to low points, provided with drip legs, shutoff valves, strainers and traps. The traps shall be piped to the nearest drain. Air and gas traps shall be not less than 150-pound iron body float type with copper or stainless steel float. Bracket, lever, and pins shall be of stainless steel. Drain traps shall have threaded connections. B. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. Armstrong Machine Works. 2. Spirax Sarco, Inc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. All pipes, fittings, and appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the applicable Sections of Division 33. The lining manufacturer shall take full responsibility for the complete, final product and its application. All pipe ends and joints at screwed flanges shall be epoxy-coated, to assure continuous protection. B. Where core drilling is required for pipes passing through existing concrete, core drilling locations shall be determined by radiograph of concrete construction to avoid damage to embedded raceways and rebars. C. Flanges shall be installed at least 6-inches from a wall. Fittings shall be installed with sufficient clearance for maintenance and removal and reinstallation. 3.2 FIELD TESTING A. All piping shall be tested in accordance with applicable standards and the contract documents. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EXPOSED PIPING INSTALLATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 05 - 1 SECTION 40 05 05 EXPOSED PIPING INSTALLATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all pipe and equipment insulation, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. In addition to the insulation indicated, insulate any cold or hot piping and exhausts that could be hazardous to personnel upon contact. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS A. Federal Specifications HH-1-558B Insulation Blocks, Boards, Blankets, Felts, Sleeving (Pipe and Tube Covering), and Pipe Fitting Covering, Thermal (Mineral Fiber, Industrial Type) B. Commercial Standards ASTM C 547 Specification for Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation ASTM E 84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete shop drawings of all thermal insulation, with manufacturer's data on materials, covering, jackets, and finish, in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Contractor Submittals. 1.4 CLEANUP A. After completion of all insulation, remove all debris from the site, clean all parts of the work to hand over the system in perfect condition. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All components of the insulation, including covering, mastics and adhesives shall have a flame-spread rating of not over 25, and a smoke development rating of not over 50. Ratings shall be as established by tests in accordance with ASTM E 84 and Federal Specification standards. The integrated insulation assemblies shall also conform to the above specifications. Insulation shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EXPOSED PIPING INSTALLATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 05 - 2 2.2 BASIC MATERIALS A. Standard Insulation: This type of insulation shall be employed for process, cold-and hot water, steam, and condensate piping and equipment with surface temperatures up to 850 degrees F. Pipe insulation and jacketing shall be applied to piping where indicated, and shall include fittings, flanges and valves. Pipe insulation shall be molded-type pipe covering, made of fibrous glass with a minimum k-factor of 0.23 at 75 degrees F mean temperature. Unless otherwise indicated, the insulation thickness shall be as follows: Minimum Thickness of Insulation (Inches) Pipe Insulation: Hot and cold water (domestic)- 6 inches and smaller 1 Heat traced piping- 3 inches and smaller 3 4 inches and larger 1 - 1/2 Equipment and Tanks: Heaters and manufactured equipment - as recommended by manufacturer Heat exchangers, tanks, and vessels- 3 B. Insulation for Heat Tracing: The insulation shall be oversized for installation over electric heating cable. Insulation shall have a factory-applied white fire-retardant vapor-barrier jacket of kraft paper and aluminum foil laminated together and reinforced with fiber glass yarn. Fittings and valves shall be covered with the same material as the pipe, cut in segments to fit snugly without open spaces, held in place with copper wire or cement, and then covered with the same jacketing material as the pipe. Insulated fittings adjacent to vapor-barrier insulation shall be sealed with an acceptable vapor-barrier cement before installation of the finish jacket. Pipe insulation and vapor-barrier shall be continuous through hangers and supports. Insulation shall be coordinated with the pipe hangers and supports and where insulation protection shields are provided the top half section of pipe insulation at support locations shall be of the same specified density, and the bottom half insulation segments provided between the pipe and the insulation protection shields shall have a density of not less than 6 lb/cu ft. All insulation shall be covered with smooth aluminum weatherproof metal or plastic preformed jacketing with a factory-attached moisture barrier. The jacket for the fittings shall consist of precision-formed smooth-sided sections and shall be sized to cover and protect the insulated fitting. Each section shall be manufactured from aluminum or PVC, and all joints shall be sealed with silicon mastic or solvent welding, to provide a continuous, air and weathertight joint. Strapping shall be 1/2-inch wide, Type 3003 aluminum or stainless steel. C. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. Armstrong Contracting and Supply Corp. 2. Certain-Teed Corporation. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EXPOSED PIPING INSTALLATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 05 - 3 3. Manville. 4. Owens-Corning Fiber Glass Corp. 5. P.P.G. Industries, Inc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All insulation shall be installed by a qualified insulation contractor in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT EXPOSED PIPING INSTALLATION WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 05 - 4 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PIPE SUPPORTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 07-1 SECTION 40 05 07 PIPE SUPPORTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall provide pipe supports, seismic restraints, hangers, guides, and anchors, complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. General: Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedure. B. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall include the following information: 1. Drawings of pipe supports, restraints, hangers, anchors, and guides 2. Calculations for special supports and anchors. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Code Compliance: Piping systems and pipe connections to equipment shall be properly anchored and supported to prevent undue deflection, vibration, dislocation due to seismic events and line pressures, and stresses on piping, equipment, and structures. Supports and parts thereof shall conform to the requirements of ASME B31.1 – Power Piping, except as supplemented or modified below. Supports for plumbing piping shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the applicable plumbing code or local administration requirements. B. Structural Members: Wherever possible, pipes shall be supported from structural members. Where it is necessary to frame structural members between existing members, such supplementary members shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. All supplementary members shall be in accordance with the requirements of the building code and the American Institute of Steel Construction and shall be acceptable to the Engineer. C. Pipe Hangers: Pipe hangers shall be capable of supporting the pipe in all conditions of operation, allowing free expansion and contraction of the piping, and preventing excessive stress on equipment. Hangers shall have a means of vertical adjustment after erection. Hangers shall be designed to prevent becoming disengaged by any movement of the supported pipe. Hangers subject to shock, seismic disturbances, or thrust imposed by the actuation of safety valves, shall include hydraulic shock suppressors. Hanger rods shall be subject to tensile loading only. D. Hangers Subject to Horizontal Movements: At hanger locations where lateral or axial movement is anticipated, suitable linkage shall be provided to permit such movement. Where horizontal pipe movement is greater than 1/2-inch, or where the hanger rod deflection from the vertical is greater than 4 degrees from the cold to the hot position of the pipe, the hanger BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PIPE SUPPORTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 07-2 rod and structural attachment shall be offset in such a manner that the rod is vertical in the hot position. E. Spring-Type Hangers: Spring-type pipe hangers shall be provided for piping subject to vibration or vertical expansion and contraction, such as engine exhausts and similar piping. Spring-type hangers shall be sized to the manufacturer's printed recommendations and the loading conditions encountered. Variable spring supports shall be provided with means to limit misalignment, buckling, eccentric loading, or to prevent overstressing of the spring, and with means to indicate at all times the compression of the spring. Supports shall be capable of accommodating at least four times the maximum travel due to thermal expansion. F. Thermal Expansion: Wherever expansion and contraction of piping is expected, a sufficient number of expansion loops or joints shall be provided, together with the necessary rolling or sliding supports, anchors, guides, pivots, and restraints permitting the piping to expand and contract freely in directions away from the anchored points. Components shall be structurally suitable to withstand loads imposed. G. Heat Transmission: Supports, hangers, anchors, and guides shall be so designed and insulated, that excessive heat will not be transmitted to the structure or to other equipment. H. Riser Supports: Where practical, risers shall be supported on each floor with riser clamps and lugs, independent of the connected horizontal piping. I. Freestanding Piping: Free-standing pipe connections to equipment such as chemical feeders and pumps shall be firmly attached to steel frames fabricated from angles, channels, or I- beams anchored to the structure. Exterior, free-standing overhead piping shall be supported on fabricated pipe stands consisting of pipe columns anchored to concrete footings, with horizontal, welded steel angles and U-bolts or clamps securing the pipes. J. Materials of Construction: 1. General: Pipe support assemblies, including framing, hardware, and anchors, shall be steel construction, galvanized after fabrication, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Submerged Supports: Submerged piping, as well as piping, conduits, and equipment in hydraulic structures within 24 inches of the water level, shall be supported with support, assemblies, including framing, hardware, and anchors, constructed of Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Corrosive: Piping in chemical and corrosive areas shall be supported with support assemblies, including framing, hardware, and anchors, constructed of Type 316 stainless steel or FRP, unless otherwise indicated. K. Point Loads: Any meters, valves, heavy equipment, and other point loads on PVC, FRP, and other plastic pipes, shall be supported on both sides, according to manufacturer's recommendations to avoid undue pipe stresses and failures. To avoid point loads, a ll supports on PVC, FRP, and other plastic piping shall be equipped with extra wide pipe saddles or galvanized steel shields. L. Noise Reduction: To reduce transmission of noise in piping systems, copper tubes in buildings and structures shall be wrapped with a 2-inch wide strip of rubber fabric or similar, suitable material at each pipe support, bracket, clip, or hanger. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PIPE SUPPORTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 07-3 2.2 SUPPORT SPACING A. Supports for piping with the longitudinal axis in approximately a horizontal position shall be spaced to prevent excessive sag, bending, and shear stresses in the piping, with special consideration given where components such as flanges and valves impose c oncentrated loads. Pipe support spacing shall not exceed the maximum spans in the tables below. For temperatures other than ambient temperatures, or those listed, and for other piping materials or wall thicknesses, the pipe support spacings shall be modified in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. Vertical supports shall be provided to prevent the pipe from being overstressed from the combination of all loading effects. 1. Support Spacing for Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 Steel Pipe Nominal Pipe Diameter (inches) Maximum Span (feet) 1/2 6 3/4 and 1 8 1 - 1/4 to 2 10 3 12 4 14 6 17 8 and 10 19 12 and 14 23 16 and 18 25 20 and Greater 30 2. Support Spacing for Welded Fabricated Steel Pipe Maximum Spans for Pipe Supported in Minimum 120 degree contact saddles (feet) Nominal Pipe Diameter (inches) 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 24 33 37 41 43 45 47 26 34 38 41 44 46 48 28 34 38 41 44 47 49 30 34 38 42 45 48 49 32 34 39 42 45 48 50 34 35 39 42 46 48 50 36 35 39 43 46 49 51 55 38 35 39 43 46 49 51 55 40 35 40 43 47 49 52 56 42 -- 40 43 47 50 52 56 45 -- 40 44 47 50 53 57 48 -- 40 44 47 50 53 58 61 51 -- 41 44 48 51 53 58 62 54 -- 41 44 48 51 54 58 62 57 -- 41 44 48 51 54 59 63 60 -- 41 45 48 52 54 59 63 67 70 63 -- 41 45 49 52 55 60 64 67 71 66 -- 41 45 49 52 55 60 64 68 71 72 -- 41 45 49 52 55 61 65 69 72 BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PIPE SUPPORTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 07 - 2 78 -- 41 45 49 53 56 61 66 69 73 84 -- 41 46 50 53 56 62 66 70 74 90 -- 41 46 50 53 56 62 67 71 74 96 -- 42 46 50 54 57 62 67 71 75 3. For steel pipe sizes not presented in this table, the support spacing shall be designed so that the stress on the pipe does not exceed 5,000 psi. Maximum deflection of pipe shall be limited to 1/360th of the span and shall be calculated by using the formula: D+32t 7500tD=L Where: t = Thickness (inches) D = Diameter (inches) L = Maximum span (feet) 4. Support Spacing for Ductile-Iron Pipe: Normal Pipe Diameter (inches) Maximum Span (feet) All diameters Two supports per pipe length or 10 feet (one of the 2 supports located at joint) 5. Support Spacing for Copper Tubing: Normal Pipe Diameter (inches) Maximum Span (feet) 1/2 to 1 - 1/2 6 2 to 4 10 6 and greater 12 6. Support Spacing for Schedule 80 PVC Pipe: Normal Pipe Diameter (inches) Maximum Span at 100 degrees F (feet) 1/2 4 3/4 4.5 1 5 1 - 1/4 5.5 1 - 1/2 5.75 2 6.25 3 7.5 4 8.25 6 10 8 11 10 12.25 12 13.25 7. Support Spacing for Schedule 80 Polypropylene Pipe: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PIPE SUPPORTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 07 - 3 Normal Pipe Diameter (inches) Maximum Span at 100 degrees F (feet) 1/2 3 3/4 3.5 1 3.75 1 - 1/4 4 1 - 1/2 4.25 2 4.5 3 5.5 4 6 6 7.25 8 8 10 8.75 12 9.5 8. Support Spacing for Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Pipe: Normal Pipe Diameter (inches) Maximum Span at 100 degrees F (feet) 2 8.8 3 10 4 11 6 12.7 8 13.4 10 14 12 15.4 14 16.2 16 17.3 16 and Greater 18 2.3 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTS A. Stock Parts: Where not specifically indicated, designs which are generally accepted as exemplifying good engineering practice and use stock or production parts, shall be utilized wherever possible. Such parts shall be locally available, new, of best commercial quality, designed and rated for the intended purpose. B. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. Basic Engineers Inc., Pittsburgh, PA. 2. Bergen-Paterson Pipesupport Corp., Woburn, MA. 3. Grinnell Corp. (Supply Sales Company), Cranston, RI 4. NPS Products, Inc., Westborough, MA. 5. Power Piping Company, Pittsburgh, PA. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PIPE SUPPORTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 07 - 4 2.4 COATING A. Galvanizing: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricated pipe supports other than stainless steel or non-ferrous supports shall be blast-cleaned after fabrication and hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123 - Specifications for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. B. Other Coatings: Other than stainless steel or non-ferrous supports, all supports shall receive protective coatings in accordance with the requirements of Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Pipe supports, seismic restraints, hangers, brackets, anchors, guides, and inserts shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and ASME B31.1 - Power Piping. Concrete inserts for pipe hangers and supports shall be coordinated with the form work. B. Appearance: Pipe supports and hangers shall be positioned to produce an orderly, neat piping system. Hanger rods shall be vertical, without offsets. Hangers shall be adjusted to line up groups of pipes at the proper grade for drainage and venting, as close to ceilings or roofs as possible, without interference with other work. 3.2 FABRICATION A. Quality Control: Pipe hangers, supports, and seismic restraints shall be fabricated and installed by experienced welders and fitters, using the best welding procedures available. Fabricated supports shall be neat in appearance without sharp corners, burrs, and edges. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT MILL PIPING – EXPOSED AND BURIED WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 10 - 1 SECTION 40 05 10 MILL PIPING – EXPOSED AND BURIED PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all exposed and buried mill piping (pipe diameter 6 inches and less) as shown and in accordance with Contract Documents. This section applies to all mechanical Work and associated piping systems. Work related specifically to plumbing piping systems shall be performed in accordance with Section 22 00 00 – Plumbing. B. All work shall be in strict accordance with the International Plumbing Code, and codes of the State of Utah, City of Riverton, and any other authorities having jurisdiction. The Contractor shall have required certifications and be thoroughly familiar with the local codes. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all necessary permits. C. This section outlines requirements the following small (pipe diameter 6 inches and less) mechanical piping and associated accessories: 1. Small steel pipe 2. Solvent welded PVC pipe and Valves 3. CPVC pipe and Valves 4. PVDF pipe D. The Contractor shall furnish hoses, hose racks and signage where indicated on the Drawings and as indicated herein. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Commercial Standards ANSI/ASME B16.3 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings ANSI/ASME B16.4 Gray Iron Threaded Fittings, ASMEB16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, ANSI B16.11 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded ANSI B16.12 Cast-Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings ANSI/ASME B16.15 Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings, Classes 125 and 250 ANSI B16.21 Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges ANSI B16.22 Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT MILL PIPING – EXPOSED AND BURIED WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 10 - 2 ASTM A 53 Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc- Coated Welded and Seamless ASTM A 74 Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings ASTM A 105 Specification for Carbon Steel, Forgings for Piping Applications ASTM A 106 Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High Temperature Service ASTM A 312 Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe ASTM A 518 Specification for Corrosion-Resistant High-Silicon Iron Castings ASTM B 43 Specification for Seamless Red Brass Pipe, Standard Sizes ASTM B 62 Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings ASTM B 88 Specifications for Seamless Copper Water Tube ASTM C 599 Specification for Conical Process Glass Pipe and Fittings. ASTM D 1785 Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120 ASTM D 2996 Specification for Filament-Wound Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Pipe ASTM D 3222 Specification for Unmodified Poly (Vinylidene Fluoride) (PVDF) Molding, Extrusion, and Coating Materials ASTM D 4101 Specification for Propylene Plastic Injection and Extrusion Materials ASTM F 441 Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80 B. Chlorine Institute Pamphlet 6 Piping Systems for Dry Chlorine 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. For the materials and equipment items supplied under the provisions of this Section, submit copies of the manufacturer's product specifications and performance details according to the requirements of Section 01 33 20 - Submittal Procedures. B. Product information for all valves shall be submitted in accordance with Section 40 05 51 – Valves, General. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT MILL PIPING – EXPOSED AND BURIED WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 10 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SMALL STEEL PIPE (SYSTEMS 1, 2, 3 AND 6) A. Unless otherwise indicated, galvanized steel pipe and black steel pipe in sizes 6 inches in diameter and smaller shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 53 or ASTM A 106, as called out in the piping schedule and shall be Schedule 40 or 80 as indicated. Galvanized steel pipe shall not be cement mortar lined unless otherwise indicated. Fittings for galvanized steel pipe shall be of galvanized malleable iron, with NPT or grooved ends. Black pipe may have welded joints, with standard or extra strong welding fittings, or fittings indicated. Wall thickness of wrought-steel pipe shall comply with ASME B36.10M. 1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, with threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1. 2. Steel Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.11, forged steel with threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1. 3. Steel Welding Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel or ASME B16.11, forged steel. 4. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1. Unions shall be as manufactured by Henry Valve Company; Vogt Valve Co.; or equal. 5. Cast-Iron Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Class 125. 6. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas. 7. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5. 8. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for natural gas. 2.2 COPPER TUBING (SYSTEM 24) A. Hard Copper Tube and Fittings: ASTM B 88, Type L and ASTM B 88, Type M water tube, drawn temper. 1. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings. 2. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, 95-5 tin antimony. 3. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. 4. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and- socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends. 5. Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Elkhart Products Corporation; Industrial Division; NIBCO INC.; Viega; Plumbing and Heating Systems. b. NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end. c. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Cast-bronze or wrought-copper fitting with EPDM- rubber O-ring seal in each end. 6. Copper Push-on-Joint Fittings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) NVent LLC. b. Description: Cast-copper fitting complying with ASME B16.18 or wrought- copper fitting complying with ASME B 16.22; with stainless-steel teeth and EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end instead of solder-joint ends. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT MILL PIPING – EXPOSED AND BURIED WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 10 - 4 B. Soft Copper Tube and Fittings: ASTM B 88, Type K and ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, annealed temper. 1. Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings. 2. Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Elkhart Products Corporation; Industrial Division; NIBCO INC.; Viega; Plumbing and Heating Systems. b. NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end. c. NPS 3 and NPS 4: Cast-bronze or wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end. 2.3 CPVC (CHLORINATED POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) PRESSURE PIPE, SOLVENT-WELDED (SYSTEM 17) A. CPVC system and components shall conform to the requirements of Section 33 05 19 – Pressure Piping Tied Joint Restraint System. B. Solvent Cements for Joining CPVC Piping and Tubing shall conform to ASTM F 493 and the requirements of Section 33 05 19 – Pressure Piping Tied Joint Restraint System. C. CPVC Ball Valves shall conform to Section 40 05 63 – Ball Valves. D. CPVC Ball-Check and Swing-Check Valves shall comply with Section 40 05 65 – Valves for Pump Control and Check Service. 2.4 HOSE BIBBS AND HYDRANTS A. All hose bibbs and hydrants in exposed locations subject to freezing shall be the non-freeze type. Hose bibbs connected to a non-potable water supply shall be provided with plastic or stainless-steel warning signs "DO NOT DRINK," in clearly legible letters, and permanently attached at the hose bibb. Hose bibbs shall be provided with vacuum breakers as furnished by Crane Co., American Standard, or equal. B. Manufacturers, or Equal: Dwg. Callout Fixture Type Description HB-1 Non-freeze Post-type Exposed bronze hydrant, post-type, depth of bury to suit local conditions; minimum 4 feet. 1. Woodward Mfg. Co., Model Iowa Y1 HB-2 Non-freeze wall-type Heavy duty bronze hydrant with nickel-bronze face, hinged cover, recessed box, and key. Length to suit wall. 1. Josam Mfg. Co., Series 71000 2. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co., Fig. 5510/5511 3. Zurn Industries, Inc., Fig. Z-1300 BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT MILL PIPING – EXPOSED AND BURIED WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 10 - 5 HB-3 Hose valves Heavy duty bronze hydrant, with composition disc, handwheel, cap and chain. Sizes 1 1/2-inch and 2 1/2 inch: 1. Fire-End and Croker Corp, Model 180 2. James Jones (Watts Regulator Co., Nos. J-383 and J-344, respectively Size 1-inch, without cap and chain: 1. Apollo (Conbraco Industries, Inc.), Model 70-805 2. Fire-End and Croker Corp, Model 180 Size 3/4-inch, without cap and chain: 1. Apollo (Conbraco Industries, Inc.) Model 70-804, or 78-104 2. Chicago Faucet No.7T 3. Ford Meter Box Co., Model B8H-233HB2 4. Woodford Manufacturing Co., Model Y24 or 24P HB-4 Wall box type Recessed, with nickel-bronze box, hinged cover, and key. 1. Josam Mfg. Co., Series 71020 2. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co., Series 5710 3. Zurn Industries, Inc., Fig. Z-1345 2.5 SHOCK ABSORBERS A. Install shock absorbers in accordance with Section 22 00 00 – Plumbing. 2.6 ACCESS DOORS AND COVERS A. Install access doors and covers in accordance with Section 22 00 00 – Plumbing. 2.7 WALL-MOUNTED HOSE RACKS A. The Contractor shall provide wall-mounted hose racks at locations indicated. Racks shall be all welded steel construction, of minimum 8-gage sheet steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, and shall have a capacity to hold 100 feet of 3/4-inch or 1-1/2-inch hose. Where racks are located in the open, they shall be supported from two 2- by 2- by 1/4-inch galvanized steel angle posts set in a concrete base or as indicated. 2.8 HOSES AND NOZZLES A. The Contractor shall furnish the following lengths of hose: 1. 1 - 50 ft lengths of 3/4-inch diameter hose 2. 1 - 75 ft lengths of 1-inch diameter hose BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT MILL PIPING – EXPOSED AND BURIED WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 10 - 6 B. Each length of hose shall be provided with male and female connectors and nozzle. Hoses shall be seamless extruded rubber with dacron cotton exterior designed for a working pressure of at least 200 psi. C. Nozzles shall be capable of complete shut-off and shall produce a solid straight stream and up to a 90-degree conical fog. Nozzle material shall be polished brass. Nozzles shall have rubber bumpers. D. Nozzle Manufacturers, or Equal: 1. W.D. Allen Mfg. Co., Illinois 2. Fire-End and Crocker Corp., New York 3. Halprin Supply Co., Illinois 4. Western Fire Equipment Co., California 2.9 GASKETS AND BOLTS A. Except as otherwise indicated, gaskets for flanged joints shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 40 05 00 - Piping, General. B. Except as otherwise indicated, bolts shall conform to the requirements of Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications. 2.10 INSULATING CONNECTIONS A. Insulating bushings, unions, couplings or flanges, as appropriate, shall be used for joining pipes of dissimilar metals, and for piping systems where corrosion control and cathodic protection are involved, in accordance with the requirements of Section 22 00 00 –Plumbing Piping and Fittings. 2.11 PIPE INSULATION A. Hot and cold liquid piping shall be installed in accordance with Section 22 00 00 – Plumbing. 2.12 PIPE SUPPORTS A. Pipe Supports, hangers, anchors, seismic restraints, and guides shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 40 05 07 - Pipe Supports. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Small Steel Pipe: Buried galvanized or black steel pipe shall be coated as specified in Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating or provided with an extruded high density polyethylene coating with minimum thickness of 35 mils. B. Plastic Pipe: PVC, CPVC, and FRP pipe joints shall be solvent-welded in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Expansion joints or pipe bends shall be provided to absorb pipe expansion over a temperature range of 100 degrees F, unless otherwise indicated. Care shall BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT MILL PIPING – EXPOSED AND BURIED WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 10 - 7 be taken to provide sufficient supports, anchors, and guides, to avoid stress on the piping. Obtain the services of the pipe manufacturer, to instruct the pipe fitters in the correct way of making solvent welded and threaded joints. Only clean, fresh primer and solvent shall be used at all times at the recommended temperatures. C. Drain Traps: Drain traps shall be installed at low points in air and gas lines or elsewhere where indicated. Liquid outlets shall be piped to the nearest floor drain or open sump. D. Couplings: Pipe couplings shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed recommendations, using the correct style coupling and gasket for any given application. E. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: Gaskets shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 40 05 00 - Piping, General. F. Insulating Connections: All insulating connections shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Care shall be exercised to prevent damage to insulating fittings, while making up the joints. 3.2 CONTINUITY BONDS A. Where required by the Contract Documents, all metallic pipe joints, except field-welded joints and insulating joints, shall be continuity bonded in accordance with the requirements of Section 40 05 00 - Piping, General. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT MILL PIPING – EXPOSED AND BURIED WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 10 - 8 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT MISCELLANEOUS VALVES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 50 - 1 SECTION 40 05 50 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall provide miscellaneous valves and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of Section 40 05 51 - Valves, General, apply to this Section. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 40 05 51. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AIR-VACUUM AND AIR-RELEASE VALVES A. Air and Vacuum Valves: Air and vacuum valves shall be capable of venting large quantities of air while pipelines are being filled and allowing air to re-enter while pipelines are being drained. They shall be of the size indicated, with flanged or screwed ends to match piping. Bodies shall be of high-strength cast iron. The float, seat, and moving parts shall be constructed of Type 316 stainless steel. Seat washers and gaskets shall be of a material insuring water tightness with a minimum of maintenance. Valves shall be designed for minimum 150 psi water-working pressure, unless otherwise indicated. B. Air-Release Valves: Air-release valves shall vent accumulating air while system is in service under pressure and be of the size indicated. Valves shall meet the same general requirements as indicated for air and vacuum valves except that the vacuum feature will not be required. Valves shall be designed for a minimum water-working pressure of 150 psi, unless otherwise indicated. C. Combination Air Valves: Combination air valves shall combine the characteristics of air and vacuum valves and air release valves by exhausting accumulated air in systems under pressure and releasing or re-admitting large quantities of air while a system is being filled or drained, respectively. Valves shall have the same general requirements as indicated for air and vacuum valves. D. Manufacturers 1. APCO (Valve and Primer Corporation) 2. Crispin - Multiplex Manufacturing Company 3. GA Industries 4. Val-Matic (Valve and Manufacturing Corporation) 5. Engineer approved equal. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT MISCELLANEOUS VALVES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 50 - 2 2.2 AIR AND VACUUM VALVES FOR VERTICAL TURBINE AND SUBMERSIBLE TURBINE PUMPS A. An air and vacuum valve for the vertical turbine pump shall be installed on the pump discharge pipe indicated. The valve shall vent large quantities of air out through the orifice when pump starts, close tight when liquid enters, and permit large quantities of air to re- enter through orifice when pump stops, to prevent vacuum forming in the pump column. They shall be of the size indicated, with flanged or screwed ends to match piping. Bodies shall be of high-strength cast iron. The float, seat, and moving parts shall be constructed of Type 316 stainless steel. Seat washers and gaskets shall be of a material insuring water tightness with a minimum of maintenance. The discharge orifice shall be fitted with a double-acting throttling device to regulate and restrict air venting, which shall establish a pressure loading on the rising column of water and eliminate damaging shock to the pump, controls, and valves during pump start. On pump stop, a double-acting throttling device shall automatically open, allowing full line unrestricted air re-entry to prevent any vacuum from forming in the pump column. The valve shall be designed for minimum 150 psig water-working pressure. B. Manufacturer 1. APCO (Valve and Primer Corporation) 2. Val-Matic (Valve and Manufacturing Corporation) 3. Engineer approved equal. 2.3 VACUUM RELIEF/AIR INLET VALVE FOR SURGE TANK A. A vacuum relief/air inlet valve shall be installed on the surge tank. The vacuum relief/air inlet valve shall be normally closed, capable of admitting large quantities of air into the system immediately should the system pressure become negative and preventing a vacuum from forming during draining, pipeline rupture, or water column separation. The valve shall be of the size indicated, with flanged ends to match piping connections. Bodies shall be of high-strength cast iron with a steel hood. The float, seat, spring, and moving parts shall be constructed of Type 316 stainless steel. The internal valve-plug and seat shall be heavy cast brass. The plug shall be normally closed by means of a stainless steel spring and shall open when a vacuum/pressure differential exceeds 0.25 psig or less. Seat seal shall be of Buna-N providing a drip-tight seal. Valves shall be designed for minimum 150 psig water-working pressure, unless otherwise indicated. B. Manufacturers 1. APCO (Valve and Primer Corporation) 2. Val-Matic (Valve and Manufacturing Corporation) 3. Engineer approved equal. 2.4 BACKFLOW PREVENTER VALVES A. General: Backflow preventers shall work on the reduced pressure principle. They shall consist of 2 spring-loaded check valves, automatic differential pressure relief valve, drain valves, and shut-off valves. The body material shall be bronze or cast iro n for a working pressure of not less than 150 psi, with bronze or stainless steel trim. Drain lines with air gaps shall be provided. The backflow preventer valves shall be in accordance with AWWA C511 standard. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT MISCELLANEOUS VALVES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 50 - 3 B. The number and sizes of backflow preventors required are given on the Contract Drawing P&IDs. C. Manufacturers 1. Cla-Val Company 2. Febco (CMB Industries) 3. Hersey Products 4. Watts, ACV 5. Wilkins Regulator Division (Zurn Industries) 6. Engineer approved equal. 2.5 CORPORATION STOPS A. Unless otherwise indicated, corporation stops shall be made of solid brass for key operation, with screwed ends with corporation thread or iron pipe thread, as required. Note that corporation stops on special chemical diffuser ports shall be 316 stainless steel – unless indicated otherwise. B. Manufacturer 1. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. 2. James Jones Company (Watts, ACV) 3. Mueller Company 4. Engineer approved equal. 2.6 MUD VALVES A. Mud valves shall be flanged, non-rising stem type, with threaded stem, seat ring, and gate ring of bronze. Valves shall be provided with coupling nut, extension stem, stem guides, and operating stand, and wheel or wrench nut as indicated. Mud valve shall be installed with valve seats level. B. Manufacturers 1. Clow 2. Mueller 3. Engineer approved equal. 2.7 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES FOR TANKS A. Materials: 1. Cover: Ductile iron, bronze, or Stainless Steel. 2. Body and strainer: Ductile iron or Stainless Steel. 3. Seal ring: Neoprene rubber B. Size 1. Valve Body: Minimum 4-inch diameter, length sufficient to penetrate the granular material under the slab by at least 2 inches. C. Manufacturers 1. Neenah Foundry; R-5000, Type C 2. Penn-Troy Manufacturing, Inc.; Troy Valve BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT MISCELLANEOUS VALVES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 50 - 4 3. Trumbull Industries, Inc. 4. Engineer approved equal. 2.8 SOLENOID VALVES A. Solenoid valves shall be of the size, type, and class indicated and shall be designed for not less than 150 psi water-working pressure. Valves for water, air, or gas service shall have brass or bronze body with screwed ends, stainless steel trim and spring, Teflon or other resilient seals with material best suited for the temperature and fluid handled. Unless otherwise indicated, for chemicals and corrosive fluids, solenoid valves with PVC, polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF), or Teflon (PTFE) materials of construction, suitable for the specific application shall be provided. Enclosures shall be NEMA rated in accordance with the area designations of Section 26 00 00 – Electrical General Provisions. Coil ratings shall be for continuous duty. For electrical characteristics see the electrical Drawings or Specifications. B. Manufacturers 1. For general duty a. Automatic Switch Co. (ASCO), Model RED HAT b. Skinner Valve (Parker Hannifin Corporation) c. Magnatrol Valve Corporation d. J. D. Gould Co. e. Engineer approved equal. 2. Metallic valves for corrosive fluids a. Valcor Engineering Corporation b. Engineer approved equal. 3. Plastic valves for corrosive fluids a. +GF+ Plastic Systems, Inc. b. Spears Mfg. Co. c. Engineer approved equal. 2.9 FLANGED PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES, SIZES 1-1/2 INCHES THROUGH 42 INCHES A. Valve Characteristics: The pressure relief valve shall open when the inlet pressure exceeds a set maximum level. It shall maintain that level and gradually close as the inlet pressure drops below the maximum pressure. The valve shall be a hydraulically operated, adjustable, pilot controlled, diaphragm type globe or angle valve as indicated. All necessary repairs shall be possible without removing the valve from the pipeline. B. Valve Body: The valve body shall be of cast iron, ASTM A 48 – Gray Iron Castings, or ASTM A 126 – Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings, with 125 lb or 250 lb flanged ends to ANSI/ASME B 16.1 – Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250, and 800, or the body shall be of ductile iron to ASTM A 536 – Ductile Iron Castings, with 150 lb or 300 lb flanged ends to ANSI/ASME B 16.42 - Ductile Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. The valve cover shall be flanged and be of the same material as the body. Contractor is to select the appropriate valve pressure class as listed in the valve schedule and as recommended by the valve manufacturer to provide suitable operating service. C. Valve Trim: The valve stems, springs, body seat rings, and all bolts, nuts, and washers shall be of Type 302, 303, or 316 stainless steel. The valve stems shall have top and bottom guides. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT MISCELLANEOUS VALVES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 50 - 5 All rubber parts shall be of Buna-N. The diaphragms shall be of Nylon-reinforced Buna-N, supported firmly between body and valve cover. The valve pistons and piston liners shall be bronze to ASTM B 62- Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings. D. Valve Controls: The valve shall be furnished with a complete, externally mounted control system, including adjustable speed control needle valves, strainer, and all necessary [copper or stainless steel] connecting tubing and fittings. The controls shall be capable of achieving all the flow and speed adjustment indicated. E. Features: Where indicated in the Drawings, the relief valves shall be equipped with a limit switch to remotely detect valve position. F. Factory Tests and Warranty: Valves shall be factory tested with a hydrostatic test and a functional test and a test certificate shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to delivery of valves. Valves shall be warranted for a period of 3 years from the date of shipment to be free of defects in materials and workmanship. G. Spare Parts: The following spare parts shall be furnished in accordance with Section 40 05 51 (for each valve size): 1. 1 set of all resilient seals, and discs 2. 1 diaphragm (for diaphragm valves, only) H. Manufacturers 1. Singer Valve, Inc. 2. Cla-Val Company 3. Watts, ACV. 4. Engineer approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Backflow preventers shall be installed in utility water lines where required by applicable codes or regulations, and where indicated on Contract Drawings. B. Valves shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed recommendations, and with Section 40 05 51. C. Backflow preventers, as well as air and vacuum release valves, shall have piped outlets to the nearest acceptable drain, firmly-supported, and installed in such a way as to avoid splashing and wetting of floors and obstruction of traffic. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT MISCELLANEOUS VALVES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 50 - 6 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT VALVES, GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 51 - 1 SECTION 40 05 51 VALVES, GENERAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall provide valves, actuators, and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of Section 11 00 00 - Equipment General Provisions, apply to the Work of this Section. C. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all valves and valve actuators except where otherwise indicated. Valves and actuators in particular locations may require a combination of units, sensors, limit switches, and controls indicated in other Sections of the Specifications. D. Where a valve is to be supported by means other than the piping to which it is attached, the Contractor shall obtain from the valve manufacturer a design for support and foundation that satisfies the criteria in Section 11 00 00. The design, including drawings and calculations sealed by an engineer, shall be submitted with the Shop Drawings. When the design is approved, the support shall be provided. E. Unit Responsibility: A single manufacturer shall be made responsible for coordination of design, assembly, testing, and furnishing of each valve; however, the Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for compliance with the requirements of each valve section. Unless indicated otherwise, the responsible manufacturer shall be the manufacturer of the valve. F. Single Manufacturer: Where two or more valves of the same type and size are required, the valves shall be furnished by the same manufacturer. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures B. Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings shall contain the following information: 1. Valve name, size, Cv factor, pressure rating, identification number (if any), and specification section number. 2. Complete information on valve actuator, including size, manufacturer, model number, limit switches, and mounting. 3. Cavitation limits for control valves. 4. Assembly drawings showing part nomenclature, materials, dimensions, weights, and relationships of valve handles, handwheels, position indicators, limit switches, integral control systems, needle valves, and control systems. 5. Complete wiring diagrams and control system schematics. 6. Valve Labeling: A schedule of valves to be furnished with stainless steel tags, indicating in each case the valve location and the proposed wording for the label. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT VALVES, GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 51 - 2 C. Technical Manual: The Technical Manual shall contain the required information for each valve. D. Spare Parts List: A Spare Parts List shall contain the required information for each valve assembly, where indicated. E. Factory Test Data: Where indicated, signed, dated, and certified factory test data for each valve requiring certification shall be submitted before shipment of the valve. The data shall also include certification of quality and test results for factory-applied coatings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS A. General: Valves and gates shall be new and of current manufacture. Shut-off valves 6-inches and larger shall have actuators with position indicators. Gate valves 18-inches and larger or where chain wheel is required, shall be furnished with spur gear and hand wheel. Buried valves shall be provided with valve boxes and covers containing position indicators and valve extensions. Manual shut-off valves mounted higher than 7-feet above working level shall be provided with chain actuators. B. Protective Coating: The exterior surfaces of all valves and the wet interior surfaces of ferrous valves of sizes 4-inches and larger shall be coated in accordance with Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating. The valve manufacturer shall certify in writing that the required coating has been applied and tested in the manufacturing plant prior to shipment, in accordance with these Specifications. Flange faces of valves shall not be epoxy coated. C. Valve Labeling: Except when such requirement is waived by the construction manager in writing, a label shall be provided on shut-off valves and control valves except for hose bibbs and chlorine cylinder valves. The label shall be of 1/16-inch plastic or stainless steel, minimum 2-inches by 4-inches in size, as indicated in Section 41 05 02 - Piping Identification Systems, and shall be permanently attached to the valve or on the wall adjacent to the valve as directed by the construction manager. D. Valve Testing: As a minimum, unless otherwise indicated or recommended by the reference Standards, valves 3-inches in diameter and smaller shall be tested in accordance with manufacturer's standard and 4-inches in diameter and larger shall be factory tested as follows: 1. Hydrostatic Testing: Valve bodies shall be subjected to internal hydrostatic pressure equivalent to twice the water rated pressure of the valve. Metallic valves rating pressures shall be at 100 degrees F and plastic valves shall be 73 degrees, or at higher temperature according to type of material. During the hydrostatic test, there shall be no leakage through the valve body, end joints, or shaft seals, nor shall any part of the valve be permanently deformed. The duration shall be sufficient time to allow visual examination for leakage. Test duration shall be at least 10 minutes. 2. Seat Testing: Valves shall be tested for leaks in the closed position with the pressure differential across the seat equal to the water rated pressure of the valve. The duration of test shall be sufficient time to allow visual examination for leakage. Test duration shall be at least 10 minutes. Leakage past the closed valve shall not exceed BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT VALVES, GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 51 - 3 1 fluid ounce per hour per inch diameter for metal seated valves and drop-tight for resilient seated valves. 3. Performance Testing: Valves shall be shop operated from fully closed to fully open position and reverse under no-flow conditions in order to demonstrate the valve assembly operates properly. E. Certification: Prior to shipment, the Contractor shall submit for valves over 12-inches in size, certified, notarized copies of the hydrostatic factory tests, showing compliance with the applicable standards of AWWA, ANSI, or ASTM. F. Valve Marking: Valve bodies shall be permanently marked in accordance with MSS SP25 - Standard Marking Systems for Valves, Fittings, Flanges, and Unions. 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: Materials shall be suitable for the intended application. Materials in contact with potable water shall be listed as compliant with NSF Standard 61. Materials not indicated shall be high-grade standard commercial quality, free from defects and imperfections that might affect the serviceability of the product for the purpose for which it is intended. Unless otherwise indicated, valve and actuator bodies shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Cast Iron: Close-grained gray cast iron, conforming to ASTM A 48 - Gray Iron Castings, Class 30, or to ASTM A 126 - Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. 2. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536 - Ductile Iron Castings, or to ASTM A 395 - Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures. 3. Steel: ASTM A 216 - Steel Castings, Carbon Suitable for Fusion Welding for High- Temperature Service, or to ASTM A 515 - Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Intermediate- and Higher-Temperature Service. 4. Bronze: ASTM B 62 - Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings, and valve stems not subject to dezincification shall conform to ASTM B 584 - Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications. 5. Stainless Steel: Stainless steel valve and operator bodies and trim shall conform to ASTM A 351 - Steel Castings, Austenitic, for High-Temperature Service, Grade CF8M, or shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 6. PVC: Poly Vinyl Chloride materials for valve body, flanges, and cover shall conform to Cell Classification 12454. 7. CPVC: Chlorinated Poly Vinyl Chloride materials for valve body, flanges, and cover shall conform to Cell Classification 23447. 8. NSF Standard 61: Materials shall be listed for use in contact with potable water. 2.3 VALVE CONSTRUCTION A. Bodies: Valve bodies shall be cast, molded (in the case of plastic valves), forged, or welded of the materials indicated, with smooth interior passages. Wall thicknesses shall be uniform in agreement with the applicable standards for each type of valve, without casting defects, pinholes, or other defects that could weaken the body. Welds on welded bodies shall be done by certified welders and shall be ground smooth. Valve ends shall be as indicated, and be rated for the maximum temperature and pressure to which the valve will be subjected. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT VALVES, GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 51 - 4 B. Valve End Connections: Unless otherwise indicated, valves 2-1/2 inches diameter and smaller may be provided with threaded end connections. Valves 3-inches and larger shall have flanged end connections. C. Bonnets: Valve bonnets shall be clamped, screwed, or flanged to the body and shall be of the same material, temperature, and pressure rating as the body. The bonnets shall have provision for the stem seal with the necessary glands, packing nuts, or yokes. D. Stems: Valve stems shall be of the materials indicated, or, if not indicated, of the best commercial material for the specific service, with adjustable stem packing, O-rings, Chevron V-type packing, or other suitable seal. Bronze valve stems shall conform to ASTM B 584, except that zinc content shall not exceed 16 percent. E. Stem Guides: Stem guides shall be provided, spaced 10-feet on centers unless the manufacturer can demonstrate by calculation that a different spacing is acceptable. Submerged stem guides shall be 304 stainless steel. F. Internal Parts: Internal parts and valve trim shall be as indicated for each individual valve. Where not indicated, valve trim shall be of Type 316 stainless steel or other best suited material. G. Nuts and Bolts: Nuts and bolts on valve flanges and supports shall be in accordance with Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications. 2.4 VALVE ACCESSORIES A. Valves shall be furnished complete with the accessories required to provide a functional system. 2.5 SPARE PARTS A. The Contractor shall furnish the required spare parts suitably packaged and labeled with the valve name, location, and identification number. The Contractor shall also furnish the name, address, and telephone number of the nearest distributor for the spare parts of each valve. Spare parts are intended for use by the Owner, after expiration of the correction of defects period. 2.6 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Valve manufacturers shall have a successful record of not less than 5 years in the manufacture of the valves indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 VALVE INSTALLATION A. General: Valves, actuating units, stem extensions, valve boxes, and accessories shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated. Gates BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT VALVES, GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 51 - 5 shall be adequately braced to prevent warpage and bending under the intended use. Valves shall be firmly supported to avoid undue stresses on the pipe. B. Access: Valves shall be installed with easy access for actuation, removal, and maintenance and to avoid interference between valve actuators and structural members, handrails, or other equipment. C. Valve Accessories: Where combinations of valves, sensors, switches, and controls are indicated, the Contractor shall properly assemble and install such items so that systems are compatible and operating properly. The relationship between interrelated items shall be clearly noted on Shop Drawing submittals. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT VALVES, GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 51 - 6 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GATE VALVES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 61 - 1 SECTION 40 05 61 GATE VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall provide gate valves and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of Section 40 05 51 - Valves, General apply to this Section. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedure and Section 40 05 51 – Valves, General. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Buried valves shall be of the inside screw, non-rising stem type. B. Gate valves 18-inches and larger shall be provided with a bypass line and isolation valve. 2.2 METAL-SEATED GATE VALVES (3-INCHES AND LARGER) A. Construction: Metal-seated gate valves for water and sewage service shall conform to AWWA C 500 - Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. The valve bodies shall be of cast iron conforming to ASTM A 126 - Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings, or ductile iron conforming either to ASTM A 395 - Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures, or to ASTM A 536 - Ductile Iron Castings, with flanged, bell and spigot, or mechanical joint-ends as indicated. Body and bonnet wall thickness shall be equal to or greater than the minimum wall thickness as listed in Table 2 of AWWA C500. The design working water pressure shall be 200 psig for valves 12-inches and smaller and 150 psig for larger valves. The valves may be of the double-disc type for tighter shut-off, or of the solid-wedge type, with rising or non-rising stem. For sewage or fluids containing solids, an outside thread shall be used. Valves 14-inches and larger installed in vertical pipes shall be fitted with bronze slides, tracks, rollers, and scrapers to assist the travel of the gate assembly. Gate valves 14-inches and larger shall be furnished with bypass assemblies. B. Actuators: Unless otherwise indicated, gate valves shall have manual actuators in accordance with Section 40 05 52 – Valve and Gate Actuators. C. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. Clow Valve Co. 2. Kennedy Valve BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GATE VALVES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 61 - 2 3. M & H Valve Company 4. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc. 2.3 KNIFE-GATE VALVES (2- TO 96-INCH) A. Construction: Knife-gate valves shall be of the flanged or wafer design, with raised face and resilient seats for positive seating. Wetted parts shall be constructed of Type 316 stainless steel, and the gates shall be finish-ground on both sides to prevent packing or seat damage. Valves 2- to 12-inches in size shall be furnished with cast stainless steel bodies; valves 14- inches and larger shall have semi-steel bodies with stainless steel linings. The valve stem shall be of stainless steel with a long life packing. The valves shall be rated for tight shut-off at the following pressures: 1. Valve sizes 4- to 12-inches 150 psi (bi-directional) 2. Valve sizes larger than 12-inches 50 psi B. Actuators: Knife-gates shall have outside-screw and yoke-rising stems with manual handwheel actuators, unless otherwise indicated, in accordance with Section 40 05 52 – Valve and Gate Actuators. C. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. DeZURIK Water Controls Corporation 2. Fabri-Valves 3. Rovang, Inc. 2.4 RESILIENT-SEATED GATE VALVES A. General: Resilient-seated gate valves may be provided in lieu of metal-seated double-disc or solid-disc gate valves, at the discretion of the Engineer. B. Construction: Resilient-seated gate valves shall conform to AWWA C509 - Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water and Sewerage Systems AWWA C515 - Reduced-Wall, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. The valves shall be suitable for a minimum design working water pressure of 150 psig see NTS, above, with flanged, bell and spigot, or mechanical joint ends. The valve body, bonnet, and disc shall be of cast iron or ductile iron and the disc or body shall be rubber-coated. Body and bonnet wall thickness shall be equal to or greater than the minimum wall thickness as listed in Table 1 of AWWA C509 AWWA C515. The stem, stem nuts, glands, and bushings shall be bronze, with the stem seal per AWWA C509 AWWA C515. C. Pressure Ratings: 1. AWWA C509 valves that are 3, 4, 6, 8, and 12 inches in size shall be rated for 200 psig minimum design working water pressure, and 16-, 20-, 24-, and 30-inch valves shall be rated for 150 psig minimum design working water pressure. 2. AWWA C515 valves 3- through 36-inch with outside screw-and-yoke (OS&Y) rising stem and 3- through 16-inch for non-rising-stem (NRS), shall be rated for 200 psig minimum design working water pressure. D. Protective Coating: Valves shall be factory coated in accordance with Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating. The Contractor shall submit a test report from a coating inspector that BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GATE VALVES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 61 - 3 the coating is holiday-free. The Contractor shall be aware that it may retain the services of a third party coating applicator to achieve the holiday-free requirement. E. Actuators: Unless otherwise indicated, resilient-seated gate valves shall have manual actuators in accordance with Section 40 05 52 – Valve and Gate Actuators. F. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. Mueller Company 2. M & H 3. Clow 2.5 GATE VALVES (SMALLER THAN 3-INCHES) A. Construction: Gate valves smaller than 3-inches, for general purpose use, shall be non-rising stem, heavy-duty type for industrial service, with screwed or soldered ends to match the piping. The bodies shall have union bonnets of bronze conforming to ASTM B 62 - Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings. The stems shall be of bronze conforming to ASTM B 62, or ASTM B 371 - Copper-Zinc-Silicon Alloy Rod. The solid wedges shall be of bronze conforming to ASTM B 62. The valves shall have malleable iron h andwheels unless otherwise indicated, and stem seals shall be of Teflon-impregnated or other acceptable non- asbestos packing. Valves shall have a pressure rating of minimum 125 psi steam and 200 psi coldwater, unless otherwise indicated. B. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. Crane Company 2. Milwaukee Valve Company 3. Wm. Powell Company 4. Stockham Valves and Fittings 5. Walworth Company 2.6 HIGH-PRESSURE GATE VALVES (2- TO 12-INCHES) A. Construction: High-pressure gate valves, except for buried valves, shall have cast iron bodies and flanged bonnets with outside screw & yoke rising stems conforming to ASTM A 126 - Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings, with 250 psi flanged ends. The valves shall be rated for 250 psig steam and 500 psig cold water working pressure. The solid wedges shall be of bronze or cast iron, bronze-fitted, and the stem shall be of bronze with non-asbestos fiber packing. B. Actuators: Unless otherwise indicated, high-pressure gate valves shall have cast iron or ductile iron handwheels with 2-inch square operating nuts, in accordance with Section 40 05 52 – Valve and Gate Actuators. C. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. Crane Company 2. Milwaukee Valve Company 3. Wm. Powell Company 4. Stockham Valves and Fittings 5. Walworth Company BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT GATE VALVES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 61 - 4 2.7 PLASTIC GATE VALVES (1-1/2 TO 14-INCHES) A. Construction: Plastic gate valves shall have PVC bodies with ANSI 150 lb. flanged ends, and polypropylene or CPVC-SBR-lined wedges for tight shut-off. The non-rising stem shall be of PVC or Type 304 stainless steel construction, with O-ring seal. The valves shall have a coldwater pressure rating of 150 psig for sizes 1-1/2 through 8-inches, 110 psig for size 10- inches, and 70 psig for sizes 12- and 14-inches. B. Actuators: Unless otherwise indicated, PVC gate valves shall have manual handwheel actuators with position indicators, in accordance with Section 40 05 52 – Valve and Gate Actuators. C. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. ASAHI/America 2. Spears Mfg. Co. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Gate valves shall be installed in accordance with the provisions of Section 40 05 51 – Valves, General. Care shall be taken that valves in plastic lines are well supported at each end of the valve. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUG VALVES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 62 - 1 SECTION 40 05 62 PLUG VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall provide plug valves and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of Section 40 05 51 - Valves, General apply to this Section. C. Plug valves shall have undergone a proof-of-design test to demonstrate that the valve components operate at the service flow, pressure, temperature, and fluid conditions, free from binding, excessive noise, and premature failures. Proof-of-design test results shall be available to the Engineer on request. The proof-of-design test shall be conducted in accordance with the applicable provisions of AWWA C517. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 40 05 51 – Valves, General. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES (1/2-INCH TO 72-INCHES) A. Construction: Eccentric plug valves shall be of the non-lubricated, eccentric plug design with cast iron bodies conforming to ASTM A 126 - Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings, with ANSI 125 lb. flanged ends for valves 3-inches and larger, and screwed or flanged ends for smaller sizes. The plugs and shafts shall be of cast iron or ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536 - Ductile Iron Castings, and the plugs shall be lined with a resilient coating, best suited for the specific service. The body shall be lined with a suitable elastomer, where required for a special service, or it shall be epoxy-lined in accordance with Section 09 90 00 –Painting and Coating. The seats shall be of nickel or stainless steel welded to the body. Top and bottom shaft bearings shall be of permanently lubricated stainless steel or Teflon coated stainless steel. Grit seals of Teflon, Nylatron, or similar suitable material shall be at the top and bottom plug journals. Valves up to and including 20-inches in size shall have an unobstructed port area of not less than 80 percent of full pipe area, and not less than 70 percent for larger valves. Eccentric plug valves shall have a pressure rating of not less than 150 psi WOG, for bubble-tight shut-off in the standard flow direction, and 25 psi WOG in the reverse flow direction. When equipped with worm gear actuator, the pressure rating shall be 150 psi WOG in both directions. The stem seal shall consist of field adjustable packing, replaceable without removal of the actuator, or of self-adjusting U-cup packing. B. Actuators: Unless otherwise indicated, eccentric plug valves 3-inches and smaller shall have operating levers; larger valves shall have worm-gear actuators. C. Manufacturers, or Equal BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLUG VALVES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 62 - 2 1. DeZurik Corporation 2. Clow Valve Company 3. Pratt Valve 4. Victaulic PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Plug valves shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations and the applicable provisions of Section 40 05 51 – Valves, General. B. Eccentric Plug Valves: Unless otherwise directed, the following rules shall be observed for the installation of eccentric plug valves on sewage, sludge, or other liquid systems containing solids, silt, or fine sand: 1. The valves shall be positioned with the stem in the horizontal direction. 2. In horizontal pipelines, the plug shall swing upwards when opening, to permit flushing out of solids. 3. The orientation of the valve shall prevent the valve body from filling up with solids when closed; however, where the pressure differential through the valve exceeds 25 psi, the higher pressure for valves without worm gear, electric, or air operators shall be through the valve to force the plug against the seat. 4. Valves which may be closed for extended periods (stand-by, bypass, or drain lines) and valves with reversed flow (higher pressure on downstream side, forcing the plug away from its seat), shall be equipped with worm gear operators for the full range of sizes. 5. For special applications or when in doubt, consult with the manufacturer prior to installation. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT BALL VALVES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 63 - 1 SECTION 40 05 63 BALL VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall provide ball valves and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of Section 40 05 51 - Valves, General apply to this Section. C. The requirements of Section 46 33 00 - Chemical Feeding Equipment, General apply to this Section. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures and 40 05 51 - Valves, General. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL BALL VALVES (3-INCHES AND SMALLER) A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, general purpose metal ball valves in sizes up to 4-inches shall have actuators in accordance with Section 40 05 52 - Valve and Gate Actuators. B. Body: Ball valves up to and including 1.5-inches in size shall have bronze or carbon steel 2 or 3 piece bodies with screwed ends for a pressure rating of not less than 600 psi WOG. Valves 2-inches to 3-inches in size shall have bronze or carbon steel 2 or 3 piece bodies with flanged ends for a pressure rating of ANSI 125 psi or 150 psi unless otherwise indicated. C. Balls: The balls shall be solid chrome-plated brass or bronze, or stainless steel, with standard port (single reduction) or full port openings. D. Stems: The valve stems shall be of the blow-out proof design, of bronze, stainless steel, or other acceptable construction, with reinforced teflon seal. E. Seats: The valve seats shall be of teflon or Buna-N, for bi-directional service and easy replacement. F. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. Conbraco Industries, Inc. (Apollo) 2. ITT Engineered Valves 3. Neles-Jamesbury, Inc. 4. Watts Regulator 5. Worcester Controls BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT BALL VALVES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 63 - 2 2.2 PLASTIC BALL VALVES (1.5-INCHES AND SMALLER) A. General: Plastic ball valves for corrosive fluids shall be made of polyvinyl chloride (PVC), chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC), or polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF), as recommended by the manufacturer for the specific fluid application. Valves shall have manual actuators in accordance with Section 40 05 52 - Valve and Gate Actuators, unless otherwise indicated. B. Construction: Plastic ball valves shall have true-union ends or flanged ends to mate with ANSI B 16.5, class 150 flanges for easy removal. The balls shall have full size ports and teflon seats. Body seals, union O-ring seals, and stem seals shall be in accordance with the corrosion resistance requirements of [Section 46 33 00]. External (without entering into the wetted area) seat packing adjustment is preferred. Metal reinforced stems to prevent accidental breakage are preferred. Ball valves for sodium hypochlorite solution service shall be drilled through the ball or body per valve manufacturer recommendation to relieve offgas and equalize pressure across the valve. The valves shall be suitable for a maximum working non- shock pressure of 150 psi at 73 degrees F for PVC and CPVC, with decreasing ratings for higher temperatures and other plastics. C. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. ASAHI-America 2. George Fischer, Inc. 3. NIBCO Inc., (Chemtrol) 4. Plast-O-Matic Valves, Inc. 5. Spears Mfg. Co. 6. Watts Regulator PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Valves shall be installed in accordance with Section 40 05 51 – Valves, General. Care shall be taken that valves in plastic lines are well supported at each end of the valve. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT BUTTERFLY VALVES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 64 - 1 SECTION 40 05 64 BUTTERFLY VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall provide butterfly valves and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of Section 11 00 00 – Equipment General Provisions apply to this Section. C. The requirements of Section 40 05 51 - Valves, General apply to this Section. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 40 05 51 – Valves, General. B. Shop Drawings 1. Complete Shop Drawings of butterfly valves and actuators. 2. Drawings showing valve port diameter complete with dimensions, part numbers, and materials of construction. 3. Certification of proof-of-design test from the valve manufacturer. 4. Certification: The Contractor shall obtain written certification from the butterfly valve manufacturer, addressed to the Owner, stating that the butterfly valves and the valve operators will efficiently and thoroughly perform the required functions in accordance with these Specifications and as shown, and that the manufacturer accepts joint responsibility with the Contractor for coordination of all butterfly valves and valve operators, including motors, drives, controls, and services required for proper installation and operation of the completely assembled and installed units. The Contractor shall submit all such certificates to the construction manager. 5. Technical Manuals: The Contractor shall furnish technical manuals for the butterfly valves, manual operators, and electric motor valve operators under one cover and in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures. 6. Valve Labeling: The Contractor shall submit a schedule of butterfly valves to be labeled indicating in each case the valve location and the proposed wording for the label. 7. Field Procedures: Written instructions for field procedures for erection, adjustments, inspection, and testing shall be provided prior to delivery of the butterfly valves and valve operators. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Valves shall be subjected to performance, leakage, and hydrostatic tests in accordance with procedures and acceptance criteria established by AWWA C504. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT BUTTERFLY VALVES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 64 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RUBBER SEATED BUTTERFLY VALVES (AWWA) A. General: Butterfly valves for water working pressures up to 250 psi shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C504 - Rubber Seated Butterfly Valves, subject to the following requirements. Valves shall be of the size and class indicated. Flanged valves shall have Class 150 or Class 250 flanges conforming to ANSI B16-1. B. Manual Actuators: Actuators shall conform to Section 40 05 52 - Valve and Gate Actuators and to ANSI/AWWA C540 - Power Actuating Devices for Valves and Sluice Gates, subject to the following requirements. Unless otherwise indicated, all manually-actuated butterfly valves shall be equipped with a handwheel and 2-inch square actuating nut and position indicator. Screw-type (traveling nut) actuators will not be permitted for valves 30 inches in diameter and larger. C. Worm Gear Actuators: Valves, 30 inches and larger, as well as all submerged and buried valves, shall be equipped with worm-gear actuators, lubricated and sealed to prevent entry of dirt or water into the housing. D. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. De Zurik Corporation. 2. Kennedy Valve. 3. Mueller 2.2 HIGH PERFORMANCE BUTTERFLY VALVES A. General: High-performance butterfly valves shall be of the ANSI class 300, lugged design, suitable for working pressures up to 740 psi at temperatures ranging from -20 degrees F to 100 degrees F. B. Body: The valve body shall be of carbon steel to mate with ANSI class 300 flanges; conforming to ASTM A 216 - Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon Suitable for Fusion Welding for High- Temperature Service, Type WCB, or ASTM A 515 - Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Intermediate-and Higher-Temperature Service, Grade 70. C. Disc: The disc shall be offset, of Type 316 or 317L Stainless Steel, conforming to ASTM A 351 - Specification for Steel Castings, Austenitic, for High-Temperature Service, or ASTM A 743 - Specification for Castings, Iron-Chromium, Iron-Chromium-Nickel, and Nickel- Base Corrosion - Resistant for General Application, respectively. D. Seat: The valve shall have a soft seat, retained in the body by an Inconel or Type 316 stainless steel ring. The seat material shall be PTFE, TFE, or filled TFE. E. Shaft: The shaft shall be one-piece construction, Type 316 or 17-4 PH stainless steel. F. Bearings: The shaft bearings shall be corrosion-resistant and self-lubricating, made of Type 316 stainless steel backed with TFE, or Type 317 stainless steel. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT BUTTERFLY VALVES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 64 - 3 G. Packing: The shaft packing shall be adjustable and field-replaceable of TFE chevron type design or PTFE V-flex style. H. Actuator: Gear assisted actuators shall be provided for all high performance butterfly valves. The valve actuators for high performance butterfly valves shall be of the traveling nut type or worm-gear type designed for buried service. Actuators shall be designed for the full rating of the valve, and an input torque of 300 foot pounds against the fully adjustable open and closed position stops, as required by AWWA C504. Manual actuators shall allow for positive throttling and locking in any position from open to close. I. Testing: The valves shall be factory-tested in accordance with Section 40 05 51 - Valves, General. J. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. De Zurik Corporation. 2.3 BUTTERFLY VALVES FOR AIR SERVICE A. General: Butterfly valves for air systems shall be specifically designed for this service and meet or exceed the design, strength, performance, and testing standards of AWWA C504. Valves shall be suitable for pressures from vacuum to 125 psi and temperatures from minus 40 degrees F to 250 degrees F. B. Body: The valve body shall be of cast iron conforming to ASTM A 126 - Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings, Class B, with either wafer, lug, or flanged design as indicated, drilled to ANSI B 16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250, and 800, Class 125. C. Disc: The disc shall be of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536 - Ductile Iron Castings, or cast iron conforming to ASTM A 48 - Gray Iron Castings, or ASTM A 126 with an edge of monel, Type 316 stainless steel, or nickel. The disc shall be designed with the air-profile or other suitable shape. Sprayed or plated disc edges are not acceptable. D. Seat: The elastomer seat shall be in the body. It shall be field-replaceable without special tools. Except for use with petroleum-base fluids, the seat material shall be Ethylene- Propylene-Diene Monomer (EPDM), or other suitable material, to provide a tight shut-off at the temperatures above. E. Shaft: The valve shaft shall be of Type 316 or 304 stainless steel with sufficient strength to allow for the increased torque for air service. F. Bearings: Shaft bearings shall be of the self-lubricating corrosion-resistant sleeve type. G. Packing: The packing shall be of the adjustable or self-adjustable (O-ring) type, suitable for the temperature and service conditions. H. Manual Actuators: Unless otherwise indicated, manually-actuated butterfly valves shall be equipped with a handwheel and 2-inch square actuating nut and position indicator. Screw- type (traveling nut) actuators will not be permitted for valves 30-inches and larger. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT BUTTERFLY VALVES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 64 - 4 I. Worm Gear Actuators: Valves 30-inches and larger shall be equipped with worm-gear actuators, lubricated and sealed to prevent entry of dirt or water into the housing. J. Electric Actuators: Electric actuators shall meet the requirements of AWWA C540 and be in accordance with Section 40 05 52 – Valve and Gate Actuators. Electric actuators in open/close service shall be rated to produce output torque of at least 1.5 times the required valve maximum seating or maximum dynamic torque whichever is greater. For valves in modulating service with dynamic torque exceeding the seating torque, the rated output torque of the actuator shall be twice the dynamic torque required by the valve. Actuator rated torque is defined as pullout torque rated at 10 percent below the rated voltage of the motor. The torque switch shall be field set at no greater than 60 percent and 50 percent of the maximum actuator rated torque for open/close service and modulating service, respectively. After plant startup, the manufacturer shall prepare a certification including a torque curve to demonstrate that the torque requirements have been met. K. Testing: Valves shall be factory leak tested in accordance with AWWA C504. L. Manufacturers, No “Or-Equals”: 1. DeZURIK Water Controls Corporation 2. Henry Pratt Company 3. Rodney Hunt Company 2.4 PVC BUTTERFLY VALVES (6-INCH DIAMETER AND SMALLER) A. General: Valves shall be suitable for steady-state water working pressures and steady-state differential pressures up to 150 psi and for water having a pH range from 6 to 10 and temperature range from 33 to 90 degrees F. The Contractor shall be responsible to insure that the selected butterfly valve will fully open and close without any physical interference at all with schedule 80 PVC Van Stone flanges. B. Body: Butterfly valves shall be all solid thermoplastic Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) butterfly valves of the lined body design and shall be suitable for bubble tight shut-off service as well as throttling service. The liner and disc shall be the only wetted parts. All non-plastic exterior valve components, including stem and miscellaneous hardware, shall be Type 316 stainless steel. C. Disc: The disc shall be made of Ethylene-Propylene-Dene Monomer (EPDM) or Polypropylene (PP) material. The chord length of the valve disc shall be less than the internal diameter of the pipe or flange to which it is to be installed. D. Seat: Seat shall be of EPDM material to provide bubble-tight seating. The seat shall totally encapsulate the body with no need for flange gaskets for installation. The seat shall be field - replaceable without special tools. E. Stem: Stems shall be made of Type 316 stainless steel. If connecting pins or screws are required for a particular manufacturer’s design, then the disc as well as the connecting hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel. F. Stem Bushing: The stem busing shall be a non-corrosive, heavy-duty acetal bushing. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT BUTTERFLY VALVES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 64 - 5 G. Stem Seal: The stem seal shall be a double “U” cup seal or O-ring design which is self adjusting and provides positive sealing in both directions, and is suitable for the service conditions. H. Flange Style: All PVC butterfly valves 8-inch and smaller on suction side of pumps shall be lug-style valves. All other PVC butterfly valves shall be wafer type, unless otherwise specified. I. Actuators: Actuators shall conform to Section 40 05 52 – Valve and Gate Actuators and to ANSI/AWWA C540 – Power Actuating Devices for Valves and Sluice Gates. Unless otherwise specified, all PVC butterfly valves 6-inch and smaller shall have manual lever operators. Manual lever type actuators shall allow for positive throttling and have at minimum 10 stop positions from open to closed position for positive locking of the valve. J. Manufacturers, or Equal; 1. Asahi America 2. Hayward 2.5 24-INCH & LARGER BUTTERFLY VALVES FOR DISSOLVED OZONE SERVICE. (V-261, V-510,AND V-520) A. General: A total of three (3) 24-inch nominal diameter and larger special construction butterfly valves for high concentration dissolved ozone service (up to maximum of 2 ppm dissolved ozone and up to 1% (10,000 ppm) by weight of undissolved ozone gas) with working pressure ratings of 25 psig for fresh water service having a pH range from 7 to 9 and temperature range from 38 to 70 degrees F shall conform to AWWA C504 and be as indicated. Valves shall be of the body type, pressure class, end joint, and act uator indicated. These valves shall be Pressure Class 25B, unless noted otherwise in the Contract Drawing valve schedules, with manual handwheel actuators. Maximum velocity through these butterfly valves shall be less than 4 fps. Valves shall be used for isolation service only. B. Orientation: Valve shafts shall be installed by Contractor in the horizontal position for all three valves. C. Construction: Materials of construction shall be as noted below and in accordance with AWWA C504, suitable for the service. Seats shall be 360 degree full-circle seats, positively clamped or bonded into the disc or body of the valve. Cartridge-type seats that rely on a high coefficient of friction for retention shall not be acceptable. Valve end flanges shall conform to AWWA C207 requirements for Class B flange connection. Description Material Standards Valve Bodies Stainless steel ASTM A 276, Type 316, Class A End flanges Same material as valve bodies, Valve shafts Stainless steel ASTM A 276, Type 316 Valve discs Same material as valve bodies. Valve seats Viton-A by Dupont or equal; Teflon, or Goretex Seat mating surfaces Stainless steel, ASTM A 276, Type 316 Clamps and retaining rings Type 316 retaining rings and cap screws. Taper Pins Type 316 with 316 stainless steel jam nuts and washers. (oversize taper pins to meet strength requirements of design) BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT BUTTERFLY VALVES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 64 - 6 Valve shaft bearing / bushing assembly Self lubricating woven teflon with fiberglass backing (fiberglass resin shall be Dow Derakane Vinylester resin resistant to ozone gas, or approved equal) per AWWA C504 Shaft Bearing O-ring Viton-A or approved equal Shaft seals Bronze / 316 SS packing gland with square TFE impregnated Teflon packing or other resilient non-metallic materials, fully resistant to dissolved ozone and ozone gas; (Viton-A by Dupont or equal, Goretex, or Kalrez) Welded components Any welded stainless steel components shall be Type 316L (low carbon) material and not Type 316 stainless steel. Painting and coating None required on stainless steel components. D. Shaft Bearing / Bushing O-Ring Seal: Manufacturer shall provide an O-ring seal (or other approved seal mechanism) on the wetted side of the shaft bearing / bushing to protect the shaft bearing and bushing from constant flushing and attack by the fluid. E. Worm Gear Actuators: Each valve shall be equipped with worm-gear actuators, lubricated and sealed to prevent entry of dirt or water into the housing. Actuators shall conform to the standards given in Section 40 05 52 Valve and Gate Actuators. F. Electric Actuators: Each valve shall be equipped with an electric actuator which shall meet the requirements of AWWA C540. Electric actuators shall be rated to produce output torque of at least 1.5 times the required valve maximum seating or maximum dyna mic torque, whichever is greater. Electric actuators shall have remote push button actuation stations located approximately 30 to 40 feet away from each valve, as shown on the Contract Drawings. Actuators shall have open and close limit switches and shall conform to the standards given in Section 40 05 52 Valve and Gate Actuators. G. Manufacturers, 1. Rodney Hunt Company; (Streamseal, single off-set series butterfly valves) 2. De Zurik Corporation 3. Henry Pratt Company 4. No “Or-Equal” PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Exposed butterfly valves shall be installed with a means of removing the complete valve assembly without dismantling the valve or operator. Installation shall be in accordance with Section 40 05 51 – Valves, General. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT VALVES FOR PUMP CONTROL AND CHECK SERVICE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 65 - 1 SECTION 40 05 65 VALVES FOR PUMP CONTROL AND CHECK SERVICE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall provide check valves and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of Section 40 05 51 - Valves, General apply to this Section. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 40 05 51 – Valves, General. For valves 16-inch or greater, submit the flow versus head loss curve for the full range of flow from 0 to maximum operating flow. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SWING CHECK VALVES (3-INCHES AND LARGER) A. General: Swing check valves for water and general service shall be of the outside lever and spring or weight type, in accordance with AWWA C 508 - Swing-Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2-in. through 24-in. NPS, unless otherwise indicated, with full-opening passages, designed for a water-working pressure of 150 psi. Units shall have a flanged cover piece to provide access to the disc. Where indicated, swing check valves shall be provided with position indicators. B. Body: The valve body and cover shall be of cast iron conforming to ASTM A 126 - Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings, with flanged ends conforming to ASME B 16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250, and 800, or be mechanical joint ends, as indicated. C. Disc: The valve disc shall be of cast iron, ductile iron, or bronze conforming to ASTM B 584 - Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications. D. Seat and Rings: The valve seat and rings shall be of bronze conforming to ASTM B 584 or B 148 - Aluminum-Bronze Castings or of Buna-N. E. Hinge Pin: The hinge pin shall be of bronze or stainless steel. F. Dashpot: A bottom-mounted or side-mounted hydraulic dashpot shall be provided to prevent reverse flow and to alleviate water hammer during the closing cycle of the valve. The dashpot shall have 2 stage closing rates: For the 2 stage closing rate, the first stage shall be adjustable from 100 to 10 percent. The second stage shall be adjustable from 10 to zero percent. Each rate shall be infinitely and independently field adjustable depending on the system requirement. The dashpot shall be a self-contained oil system separate and BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT VALVES FOR PUMP CONTROL AND CHECK SERVICE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 65 - 2 independent from the pipeline fluid. The oil reservoir for the closing cycle shall be stainless steel, open to the atmosphere with an air breather cap to allow oil level changes in the reservoir and also to prevent contamination of the oil from any outside source. The oil reservoir for the opening cycle shall be stainless steel, be hermetically sealed to contain pressure (air over oil), and shall be equipped with a 3-inch diameter pressure gauge and pneumatic fill valve. There shall be a provision for disconnecting the each dashpot from the valve for servicing, without removal of the valve. G. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. APCO (Valve and Primer Corp.) 2. Kennedy Valve 3. Mueller Company 4. Stockham Valves and Fittings 5. Golden Anderson 2.2 RUBBER FLAPPER SWING CHECK VALVES (2-INCH TO 48-INCH) A. General: Rubber flapper swing check valves for water, sewage, gas, oil features a flapper that does not swing from a hinge pin, but flexes open with one moving part. Valve is suitable for a working pressure of 150 psi up to 250 psi (depending on body type). Units shall have a flanged cover piece to access the rubber flapper from the top. The valves shall be designed, manufactured, tested and certified to American Water Works Association Standard ANSI/AWWA C508. B. Body: The valve body and cover shall be of Ductile Iron ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12 for sizes 2-24” (50-600mm) and Cast Iron ASTM A126 Grade B for sizes 30” (750mm) and larger for 150 psi. The valve body shall be full flow equal to nominal pipe diameter at all points through the valve. The 4 in. (100mm) valve shall be capable of passing a 3 in. (75mm) solid. The valves shall have flanges with drilling to ANSI B16.1, Class 125. C. Rubber flapper: The rubber flapper to have a steel disc encapsulated with Acrylonitrile- Butadiene (NBR), Chloroprene (CR), Terpolymer of Ethylene Propylene and A Diene (EPDM), or Fluoro Rubber (FKM). The flapper is captured between the body and valve cover to permit the disc to flex open and closed. An integral “o-ring” shall be molded onto the face of the rubber flapper for positive sealing. The flex portion of the shall be warranted for twenty-five years. Non-Slam closing characteristics shall be provided through a short 35 degree disc stroke and provide a cracking pressure of 0.25 psig. D. No Flow Actuator Option: A screw-type backflow actuator shall be provided (when specified) to allow opening of the valve during no-flow conditions. Buna-N seals shall be used to seal the stainless steel stem in a Lead-Free bronze bushing. The backflow device shall be of the rising-stem type to indicate position. A stainless steel T-handle shall be provided for ease of operation. 6.2 E. Mechanical Indicator Option: A mechanical indicator shall be provided (when specified) to provide disc position indication on valves 3” (80 mm) and larger. The indicator shall have continuous contact with the disc under all operating conditions to assure a ccurate disc position indication. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT VALVES FOR PUMP CONTROL AND CHECK SERVICE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 65 - 3 F. Limit Switch Option: A pre-wired limit switch will be provided (when specified) to indicate open/closed position to a remote location. The mechanical type limit switch shall be activated by the mechanical indicator. The switch shall be rated for NEMA 4, 6, or 6P and shall have U.L. rated 5 amp, 125 or 250 VAC contacts. G. Oil Cushion Option: An oil cushion device shall be provided when specified to provide hydraulic control of the final 10% of valve closure and reduce valve slam and water hammer normally associated with rapid flow reversal conditions on pump shut down. The oil cushion device shall consist of a high pressure hydraulic cylinder, adjustable external flow control valve, oil reservoir, pressure gauge, stainless steel air inlet valve, and piping designed to control the closing speed of the last 10% of travel in 1-5 seconds. A threaded lead-free bronze dashpot bushing unit with a grease fitting for lubrication shall connect the cylinder to the valve and shall have an air gap to prevent hydraulic fluid from entering the valve and contaminating the water system. A snubber rod fitted with O-ring seals and rod wiper scrapers shall make contact with the lower portion of the disc’s stainless steel strike plate. H. Non-Slam Option: Externally Adjustable Spring Return shall be used (when specified) to accelerate flapper closure before flow reversal can occur. The 302 stainless steel helical compression spring shall be adjustable externally without removing the cover from the valve and without removing the valve from service. The adjustment shall be made by means of an external sealed screw which provides infinite adjustment to the internal spring compression. I. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. APCO 2. Valmatic 2.3 SWING CHECK VALVES (2-1/2 INCHES AND SMALLER) A. General: Swing check valves for steam, water, oil, or gas in sizes 2-1/2 inches and smaller shall be suitable for a steam pressure of 150 psi and a cold water pressure of 300 psi. Units shall have screwed ends unless otherwise indicated, and screwed caps. B. Body: The valve body and cap shall be of bronze conforming to ASTM B 763 - Copper Alloy Sand Castings for Valve Application, or ASTM B 584 with threaded ends conforming to ASME B1.20.1 - Pipe Threads, General Purpose (inch). C. Disc: Valves for steam service shall have bronze or brass discs conforming to ASTM B 16 - Free-Cutting Brass Rod, Bar, and Shapes for Use in Screw Machines, and for cold water, oil, and gas service replaceable composition discs. D. Hinge Pin: The hinge pins shall be of bronze or stainless steel. E. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. Crane Company 2. Milwaukee Valve Company 3. Stockham Valves and Fittings 4. Wm. Powell Company BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT VALVES FOR PUMP CONTROL AND CHECK SERVICE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 65 - 4 2.4 INTERNAL SPRING-LOADED CHECK VALVES (GLOBE STYLE – SILENT CHECKS) A. General: Internal spring-loaded check valves for water pumps, compressors, gas, air, and steam shall be of the full-flow internal spring-loaded poppet type. The valves shall be designed for a water-working pressure of not less than 150 psi unless otherwise indicated. B. Body: The bodies of valves 3-inches and larger shall be of cast iron conforming to ASTM A 126 with 125 lb flanged ends conforming to ASME B 16.1 unless otherwise indicated. Where necessary, there shall be a positive, watertight seal between the removable seat and the valve body. The stem guide shall be integrally cast with the body or screwed into the body. C. Valves smaller than 3-inches shall have bronze bodies with screwed ends conforming to ASME B 1.201, suitable for a minimum working pressure of 200 psi, and a temperature of 250 degrees F, unless otherwise indicated. The type of bronze shall be suitable for the intended service. D. Disc and Stem: The disc and stem of all valves in sizes 3-inches and larger shall be of bronze conforming to ASTM B 584 - Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications, or stainless steel. The stem shall have 2 point bearings. The downstream bearing shall have a bronze or other suitable bushing, to provide a smooth operation. E. Valves smaller than 3-inches shall have discs and retaining rings of Teflon, nylon, or other suitable material, and stems of bronze, brass, or stainless steel, suitable for the intended service. F. Stem Guide: The stem guide shall be either firmly fixed in the valve body to prevent it from sliding into the adjacent pipe and damaging the pipe lining, or the valve manufacturer shall provide each valve with one matching flange compatible with the adjacent pipe and its lining to prevent damage to the lining. The compatible flange shall be part of the Shop Drawing submittal. G. Seat: Valves for general service at temperatures up to 250 degrees F shall have bubble-tight shut-off with resilient seats of Buna-N, Teflon, or other suitable material. Valves for steam service and temperatures over 250 degrees F shall have metal-to-metal seating of bronze or stainless steel, as recommended by the manufacturer for the specific service condition. Resilient seats shall be firmly attached to the seating ring by compression molding or other acceptable method. H. Spring: Valves in sizes 3-inches and larger shall have Type 316 stainless steel springs, and valves smaller than 3-inches shall have stainless steel or beryllium copper springs, as suitable for the service. The spring tension of the valves shall be designed for the individual pressure condition of each valve. I. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. APCO (Valve and Primer Corp.) 2. CPV (Combination Pump Valve Company) 3. Miller Valve Co., Inc. 4. VAL-MATIC (Valve and Manufacturing Corporation) BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT VALVES FOR PUMP CONTROL AND CHECK SERVICE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 65 - 5 2.5 PLASTIC BALL CHECK VALVES A. General: Plastic ball check valves for corrosive fluids, in sizes up to 4-inches, shall be used for vertical up-flow conditions only, unless the valves are provided with spring actions. B. Construction: The valve bodies and balls shall be of polyvinyl chloride (PVC), chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC), polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF), or polypropylene (PP) construction, as best suited for each individual service condition. They shall have unions with socket connections or flanged ends conforming to ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, class 150. Seals shall have Viton O-rings, and valve design shall minimize possibility of the balls sticking or chattering. The valves shall be suitable for a maximum working non- shock pressure of 150 psi at 73 degrees F. C. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. ASAHI-AMERICA 2. George Fischer, Inc. 3. NIBCO Inc. (Chemtrol Division) 4. Spears Mfg. Co. (PVC, CPVC, AND PP only) 2.6 METAL BALL AND LIFT CHECK VALVES A. General: Metal ball check valves for saturated steam, oil, water, and gas in sizes 1/2- up to 1- inch shall be used for horizontal installation only. Lift check valves for LP gas in sizes 1/4 up to 2-inches shall be used for horizontal installation only. B. Construction: The ball check valve body and cap shall be bronze ASTM B 584. Ball disc shall be stainless steel construction, as best suited for each individual service condition. The union cap shall provide a tight joint and be easily dismantled when necessary. They shall have screwed connections. The valves shall be suitable for a maximum working non-shock pressure of 150 psi saturated steam or non-shock cold water, oil, and gas rating of 300 psi. C. The lift check valve body, and cap shall be leaded bronze ASTM B 763. Disc shall be special composition, as best suited for petroleum service condition. The disc shall be secured to the disc by means of a disc retaining nut. To protect against leakage on light oils and gases, the disc shall be sealed into the holder. The union cap shall provide a tight joint, easily dismantled when necessary. They shall have screwed connections. The valves shall be suitable for a maximum working non-shock pressure of 400 psi cold water, oil, gas, LP gases, and volatile fluids. D. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. Crane 2.7 PLASTIC SWING OR WYE-CHECK VALVES A. General: Plastic swing or wye-check valves for corrosive fluids, in sizes up to 8-inches or as available, may be used for horizontal or vertical up-flow conditions. B. Construction: The valve bodies and discs or piston shall be of PVC, PP, or PVDF construction as best suited for each individual service condition. They shall have flanged ends conforming to ASME B16.5 Class 150, and flanged top access covers and shall shut positively at no-flow BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT VALVES FOR PUMP CONTROL AND CHECK SERVICE WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 05 65 - 6 conditions. The seats and seals shall be of EPDM, Teflon, or Viton. The PVC valves shall be rated for a maximum non-shock working pressure of 150 psi at 73 degrees F for sizes 3- inches and smaller. For larger sizes and other materials and temperatures the pressure rating may be lower. C. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. ASAHI-AMERICA 2. George Fischer, Inc. 3. Spears Mfg. Co. (Plastic Swing Check only) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Valves shall be installed in accordance with provisions of Section 40 05 51 - Valves, General. END OF SECTION BC&A PROCESS CONTROL AND TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 61 00 - 1 SECTION 40 61 00 INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS GENERAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. General requirements applicable to all process control and instrumentation systems (PCIS) work. 2. The requirements of this section apply to all components of the PCIS unless indicated otherwise. 3. General requirements for process control and instrumentation (PCI) submittals. B. Related sections: 1. The contract documents are a single integrated document, and as such all divisions and sections apply. It is the responsibility of the contractor and its subcontractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project: a. Items involving electrical, control, and instrumentation construction may be shown on drawings or referred to in specifications that do not apply specifically to electrical, control and instrumentation systems. C. PCIS work and responsibility shall be as follows: 1. Contractor – The Contractor is responsible for the overall plant PCIS, including but not limited to all instrumentation. The Contractor shall coordinate the procurement and installation of all PCIS equipment per the Contract Documents. 2. Integrator – The Owner has pre-selected SKM Engineering as the Integrator. The Integrator is responsible for providing RTU hardware, software, and RTU programming. The Integrator shall be responsible for providing all PLC hardware, I/O, HMI, networking hardware, and software as indicated in the Drawings and Specifications. The Integrator will also be responsible for all SCADA integration, including all hardware and software. The Contractor is responsible for the installation of all control panels provided by the Integrator. D. Interfaces to Equipment, Instruments, and Other Components: 1. The drawings, specifications and overall design are based on preliminary information furnished by various equipment manufacturers which identify a minimum scope of supply from the manufacturers. This information pertains to, but is not limited to, instruments, control devices, electrical equipment, packaged mechanical systems, and control equipment provided with mechanical systems. 2. Provide all material and labor needed to install the actual equipment furnished, include all costs to add any additional instruments, wiring, control system inputs/outputs, controls, interlocks, electrical hardware etc., which may be necessary to make a complete, functional installation based on the actual equipment furnished. Make all changes necessary to meet the manufacturer’s wiring requirements. 3. Submit all such changes and additions to the Engineer for acceptance in accordance with the General Conditions. BC&A PROCESS CONTROL AND TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 61 00 - 2 4. Review the complete set of drawings and specifications to ensure that all items related to the instrumentation and control systems are completely accounted for. Include any items that appear on drawings or in specifications from another discipline in the scope of work. If a conflict between drawings and specifications is discovered, refer conflict to the Engineer as soon as possible for resolution. 5. Provide complete loop drawings for all systems, including packaged equipment furnished as part of a vendor furnished package, and for all pre-purchased equipment. E. All instrumentation, control equipment and systems for the entire project is to comply with the requirements of Division 40, whether referenced in the individual equipment specifications or not: 1. The requirements of Division 40 apply to all instrumentation and control work specified in other Specifications, including HVAC controls, packaged mechanical systems, LCPs, VCPs, etc. 2. Inform all vendors supplying instrumentation, control systems, panels, and/or equipment of the requirements of Division 40. 3. The Owner is not responsible for any additional costs due to the failure of the contractor to notify all subcontractors and suppliers of the Division 40 requirements. F. Contract Documents: 1. General: Contract documents consist of drawings, specifications, and other documents issued by the Engineer. The drawings and specifications are complementary and are to be used together to fully describe the work and requirements shown written or reasonably inferred on one form is considered as written, shown or implied in all. In the event work is called for in more than one place and there are conflicting requirements, the right shall be reserved to require the installation of the larger or the more expensive. 2. Specifications: a. The General and Supplementary Conditions of the contract documents govern the work. b. These requirements are in addition to all General Requirements. 3. Contract Drawings: a. The instrumentation and control drawings show in a diagrammatic manner the desired locations, and arrangements of the components of the instrumentation work. Follow the drawings as closely as possible, use professional judgment and coordinate with the other trades to secure the best possible installation, use the entire drawing set for construction purposes. The contractor is to verify all dimensions given on the drawings, and to report any discrepancy or inconsistency to the Engineer before commencing with the work. b. Locations of equipment, control devices, instruments, boxes, panels, etc. are approximations only. Exercise professional judgment in executing the work to ensure the best possible installation: 1) The equipment locations and dimensions shown on the plans and elevations are approximations. Use the shop drawings to determine the proper layout, foundation, and pad requirements, etc. for final installation. Coordinate with all subcontractors and all disciplines to ensure that all instrumentation and control equipment is compatible with other equipment and space requirements. Make and workout BC&A PROCESS CONTROL AND TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 61 00 - 3 changes required to accommodate differences in equipment dimensions. 2) The contractor has the freedom to select from among the named manufacturers of equipment as identified in the individual specification sections. However, the Engineer has typically designed the spatial equipment layout based upon one manufacturer and has not confirmed that every named manufacturer’s equipment fits in the allotted space. It is the contractor’s responsibility to ensure that the equipment being furnished fits within the defined space and works with the provided infrastructure. c. Installation Details: 1) The contract drawings include installation details indicating means and methods the contractor is to use to install instrumentation and control equipment. For cases where a typical detail does not apply, develop installation details that are necessary for completing the work, and submit these details for discussion with, review and approval by the Engineer. d. Schematic Diagrams: 1) All controls are shown in the de-energized state unless otherwise noted. a) Schematic diagrams show control function only. Incorporate other necessary functions for proper operation and protection of the system. b) Add slave relays, where required, to provide all necessary contacts for the control system or where needed to function as interposing relays for control voltage coordination, equipment coordination or control system voltage drop considerations. c) Mount all devices shown on motor controller schematic diagrams in the controller compartment enclosure unless otherwise noted or indicated. d) Control schematics are to be used as a guide in conjunction with the descriptive operating sequences found in the drawings and/or specifications. Combine all information and furnish a coordinated and fully functional control system. 4. Alternates/Alternatives: Refer to the General Conditions for substitute item provisions. 5. Changes and Change Orders: Refer to the General Conditions. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Code Compliance: 1. As specified a. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. The latest edition accepted by the authority having jurisdiction of referenced publications in effect at the time of bid governs. 2. The following codes and standards are hereby incorporated into these specifications: a. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1) NFPA 70 - National Electric Code (NEC). BC&A PROCESS CONTROL AND TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 61 00 - 4 2) NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 3) NFPA 496 - Purged and Pressurized Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, where applicable. 4) NFPA 820 - Standard for Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection Facilities. b. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1) UL 508A - Industrial Control Equipment. 2) UL 698A – Industrial Control Equipment in hazardous locations. c. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1) ANSI B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. d. American Petroleum Institute (API): 1) API RP551 - Process Measurement Instrumentation. 2) API RP552 - Transmission Systems. 3) API RP553 - Refinery Control Valves. 4) API RP554 - Process Instrumentation and Control. 5) API RP555 - Process Analyzers. 6) API RP556 - Fired Heaters & Steam Generators. 7) API RP557 - Guide to Advanced Control Systems. e. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1) ASTM A269 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. f. Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (ISA): 1) ISA-5.1 - Instrumentation Symbols and Identification. 2) ISA-5.2 - Binary Logic Diagrams for Process Operations. 3) ISA-5.3 - Graphic Symbols for Distributed Control/Shared Display Instrumentation, Logic, and Computer Systems. 4) ISA-5.4 - Instrument Loop Diagrams. 5) ISA-5.5 - Graphic Symbols for Process Displays. 6) ANSI/ISA-7.00.01 - Quality Standard for Instrument Air. 7) ISA-RP - 12.4 - Pressurized Enclosures. 8) ANSI/ISA-18.1 - Annunciator Sequences and Specifications. 9) ISA-20 - Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instruments, Primary Elements, and Control Valves. 10) ISA-TR20.00.01 - Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instruments Part 1: General Considerations Updated with 27 New Specification Forms in 2004-2005. 11) ANSI/ISA-50.00.01 - Compatibility of Analog Signals for Electric Industrial Process Instruments. 12) ISA-51.1 - Process Instrumentation Terminology. 13) ISA-RP60.3 - Human Engineering for Control Centers. 14) ISA-71.01 - Environmental Conditions for Process Measurement and Control Systems: Temperature and Humidity. 15) ISA-71.02 - Environmental Conditions for Process Measurement and Control Systems: Power. 16) ISA-71.03 - Environmental Conditions for Process Measurement and Control Systems: Mechanical Influences. 17) ISA-71.04 - Environmental Conditions for Process Measurement and Control Systems: Airborne Contaminants. BC&A PROCESS CONTROL AND TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 61 00 - 5 B. Compliance with Laws and Regulations: 1. Refer to the General Conditions. C. Project or Site Conditions: 1. Refer to site conditions Section 26 00 00 to ensure all equipment and instrumentation provided meets site conditions. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions of terms and other electrical and instrumentation considerations as set forth in the: 1. NEC: National Electrical Code. 2. IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. 3. ISA: Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society. 4. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association. 5. NETA: National Electrical Testing Association. B. Specific Definitions: 1. Control Circuit: Any circuit operating at 120VAC/VDC or less, whose principal purpose is the conveyance of information (including performing logic) and not the conveyance of energy for the operation of an electrically powered device. 2. Panel: An instrument support system that may be either a flat surface, a partial enclosure or a complete enclosure for instruments and other devices used in process control systems. Unless otherwise specified or clearly indicated by the context, the term “panel” in these contract documents is interpreted as a general term, which includes flat surfaces, enclosures, cabinets and consoles. 3. Power Circuit: Any circuit operating at 90 Volts (AC or DC) or more, whose principal purpose is the conveyance of energy for the operation of an electrically powered device. 4. Signal Circuit: Any circuit operating at less than 50 Volts (AC or DC) which conveys analog information or digital communications information. 5. Digital Bus: A communication network, such as Ethernet, Ethernet/IP, Modbus, Profibus, Foundation Fieldbus, ControlNet or DeviceNet, allowing instruments and devices to transmit data, control functions and diagnostic information. 6. 2-Wire Transmitter (loop-powered): A transmitter that derives its operating power supply from the signal transmission circuit and requires no separate power supply connections. As used in this specification, two-wire transmitter refers to a transmitter that provides 4-20mA current regulation of a signal in a series circuit with an external 24VDC driving potential. a. Can be Field-bus communications signal, 4-20mA signal or both. 7. Powered Transmitters: A transmitter that requires a separate power source (120VAC, 240VAC, 24VDC etc.) in order for the transmitter to develop its signal. As used in this Specification, the produced signal may either be a 4-20mA current signal, a digital bus communications signal or both. 8. Modifications: Changing, extending, interfacing to, removing or altering an existing circuit. C. Acronym Definitions: BC&A PROCESS CONTROL AND TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 61 00 - 6 1. ES: Enterprise System; PC-based communications or data sharing system utilized for non-process control functions such as E-mail, sharing files, creating documents, etc. 2. FAT: Factory Acceptance Test. 3. HOA: Hand-Off-Auto; control function that is totally PLC-based. In the Hand mode of control equipment is manually started or stopped, valves are opened or closed through operator direction under the control of the PLC software. In the Auto mode of control equipment is started or stopped, valves are opened or closed through a control program or algorithm within the PLC software. In the Off mode the equipment is prohibited from responding from the PLC control. 4. HMI: Human Machine Interface; operator interface device consisting of an alphanumeric display and operator input devices. The HMI is typically a flat panel type of display with either a touch screen or tactile button interface. 5. HVAC: Heating, Ventilation, & Air Conditioning. 6. ICSC: Instrumentation and Control System Contractor; subcontractor who specializes in the design, construction, fabrication, software development, installation, testing, and commissioning of industrial instrumentation and control systems. 7. IJB: Instrument Junction boxes; a panel designed with cord sets to easily remove, replace, or relocate instrument signals. 8. I/O: Input/Output. 9. LCP: Local Control Panel; operator interface panel that may contain an HMI, pilot type control devices, operator interface devices, control relays, etc. and may or may not contain a PLC or RIO. 10. LAN: Local Area Network; a control or communications network that is limited to the physical boundaries of the facility. 11. LOR: Local-Off-Remote; control function that usually allows for locally/manually control of the attached equipment. In the Remote mode equipment is started or stopped, valves are opened or closed through the PLC-based upon the selection of the HOA. In Local control, equipment is started or stopped, valves are opened or closed based upon hardwired control circuits completely independent of the PLC with minimum interlocks and permissive conditions. In the Off mode, the equipment is prohibited from responding to any control commands. 12. OIT: Operator Interface Terminal; PC-based interface device used for operator interface with the controls network and/or SCADA system. 13. P&ID: Process and Instrumentation Diagram. 14. PC: Personal Computer. 15. PCIS: Process Control and Instrumentation System; includes the entire instrumentation system, the entire control system and all the work specified in Division 40 and depicted on the P&IDs. 16. PCM: Process Control Module; an enclosure containing any of the following devices: PLC, RIO, or network devices. 17. PJB: Power Junction Box; an enclosure with terminal blocks that distribute power to multiple instruments or controls devices. 18. PLC: Programmable Logic Controller. 19. RIO: Remote I/O; devices for connection to the PLC consisting of remote I/O racks or remote I/O blocks. BC&A PROCESS CONTROL AND TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 61 00 - 7 20. RTU: Remote Telemetry Unit; a controller typically consisting of a self-contained controller (CPU) and has means for remote communications. The remote communications devices typically are radios, modems, communication networks etc. 21. SCADA: Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition; a system or network that consists of the computer-based software package that includes the operator interface, data storage, data retrieval, archiving, alarming, historian, reporting, trending, and other higher level control system software. 22. UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply. 23. VCP: Vendor Control Panel; a control panel that is/are furnished with particular equipment by a vendor other than the ICSC. These panels may contain PLCs, RIO, OIT, HMI, etc. 24. WAN: Wide Area Network; a control or communications network that extends beyond the physical boundaries of the facility usually by means of radios, modems, and other communication equipment. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General Requirements: 1. The work includes everything necessary for executing and completing the general requirements for the instrumentation and control system work described in the contract drawings and specifications and reasonably inferable there from including but not limited to: a. Preparing hardware submittals for field instrumentation. b. Design, develop, control panel designs, and all other drawing submittals specified in Division 40. c. Prepare the test plan, the training plan, and the spare parts submittals. d. Procure all hardware. e. Provide PCIS system hardware and software. f. Fabricate panels. g. Perform bench calibration and verify calibration after installation. h. Oversee and certify installation of the PCIS system. i. Oversee, document, and certify loop testing. j. Oversee, document, and certify system pre-commissioning. k. Conduct the required performance tests. l. Prepare Operation and Maintenance Manuals (O&MMs). m. Conduct training classes. n. Prepare record drawing packages. o. Integrate the PCIS with instrumentation and control devices provided under other sections as specified. p. Develop all requisite loop drawings and record drawings associated with equipment provided under other divisions of these specifications and (as specified) owner furnished and existing equipment. q. Resolve signal, power, or functional incompatibilities between the PCIS and interfacing devices. r. Perform all required corrective and preventative maintenance. 2. It is the intent of these specifications that the entire electrical power, instrumentation, and control system be complete and operable. Provide all necessary material and labor for the complete system from source of power to final utilization equipment, including all connections, testing, calibration of all equipment furnished by others as BC&A PROCESS CONTROL AND TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 61 00 - 8 well as equipment furnished by the contractor, as specifically mentioned and which are necessary for complete and successful operation. 3. Provide the complete operating PCIS to perform the specified monitoring, communications, alarm, control, display, and reporting functions in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. 4. Coordinate all aspects of the work with the ICSC before bidding to ensure that all costs associated with a complete installation are included. The owner is not responsible for any change orders due to lack of coordination of the work between the contractor, the ICSC, and the other subcontractors and/or suppliers. 5. Furnish detailed, complete, and thorough operations and maintenance documentation; including, but not limited to operations manuals, maintenance manuals, as-built wiring drawings, training manuals, as-built software documentation, vendor-supplied software documentation, final as-installed software configurations and all other documentation required to operate, modify and maintain all parts of the PCIS. 6. Where demolition is shown on any drawing, the electrical subcontractor is responsible for disconnecting equipment electrical connections and rendering the equipment safe. The ICSC is responsible for physically removing all instrumentation to be demolished and return it either to the Owner or dispose of it as directed by the owner’s representative. The ICSC shall be responsible for any program modifications required based on the demolition of the equipment; both for the loops directly and indirectly affected. 7. Portions of this project may involve installation in existing facilities and interfaces to existing circuits, power systems, controls, and equipment: a. Perform and document comprehensive and detailed field investigations of existing conditions (circuits, power systems, controls, equipment, etc.) before performing any work. b. Provide and document any interface with, modifications to, upgrade to or replacement of existing circuits, power systems, controls, and equipment. 8. Revise in a manner as directed by the Engineer all I/O and addressing that the Engineer determines to be unacceptable as a result of a lack of contractor coordination between contract documents and all subcontractors and/or suppliers. 9. Defective Work: a. Refer to the General Conditions. B. System Overview: The new PCIS shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Control Panels to be furnished for the PCIS shall include, but may not be limited to: Facility Panel tag Description Supplied by Installed by Reference Specification PLC/HMI Programming By UPPER LONE PINE CHLORINATION BUILDING RTU PLC BASED CONTROL PANEL AND SCADA INTERFACE INTEGRATOR CONTRACTOR 40 63 43, 40 78 00 INTEGRATOR LOOKOUT MOUNTAIN CHLORINATION BUILDING RTU PLC BASED CONTROL PANEL AND SCADA INTERFACE INTEGRATOR CONTRACTOR 40 63 43, 40 78 00 INTEGRATOR 2. All required SCADA hardware, software, and programming by Integrator. BC&A PROCESS CONTROL AND TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 61 00 - 9 C. General: 1. Furnish submittals that are fully developed for a given section of the work and fully indexed with a tabbed divider for every element and component. 2. Sequentially number the pages within the tabbed sections. Submittals and Operation and Maintenance Manuals (O&MMs) that are not fully indexed and tabbed with sequentially numbered pages, or are otherwise unacceptable, will be returned without review. 3. Edit all submittals and O&MMs so that the submittal specifically applies to only the equipment furnished. Neatly cross out all extraneous text, options, models, etc. that do not apply to the equipment being furnished so that the information remaining is only applicable to the equipment being furnished. 4. Instruct all equipment suppliers of submittal and O&MMs in the requirements of Section 40 61 00 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems, General. 5. Submittal Requirements: a. Submit copies of shop drawings, and product data, in accordance with Division 1 requirements in addition to the requirements of this section. Show dimensions, construction details, wiring diagrams, controls, manufacturers, catalog numbers, and all other pertinent details. b. Where submittals are required, provide a separate submittal for each specification section. To expedite construction, the contractor may make more than one submittal per specification section, but a single submittal may not cover more than one specification section. The only exception to this requirement is when one specification section covers the requirements for a component of equipment specified in another section. 6. Exceptions to specifications and drawings: a. Include a list of proposed exceptions to the specifications and drawings along with a detailed explanation of each. b. Any exceptions to the specification and drawings must be noted and the reason for the exception explained. c. If there is insufficient explanation for the deviation, the submittal will be returned requiring revision and re-submittal. d. Acceptance of any exception is at the sole discretion of the Engineer. Furnish all items (materials, features, functions, performance, etc.) that are not listed as exceptions strictly in accordance with the specifications and drawings. e. Replace all items that do not strictly meet the requirements of the specifications, which were not previously accepted as exceptions, even if the submittals contained information indicating the failure to meet the requirements. 7. Submittal Organization: a. First page: 1) Specification Section reference. 2) Name and telephone number of individual who reviewed submittal before delivery to Engineer. 3) Name and telephone number of individual who is primarily responsible for the development of the submittal. 4) Place for contractor’s review stamp and comments. b. Next pages: 1) Provide confirmation of specification compliance in a tabular form that individually lists each specification section, paragraph, and sub- BC&A PROCESS CONTROL AND TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 61 00 - 10 paragraphs and unequivocally states compliance with said requirement or takes exception to the requirement and lists the reason for said exception and offers alternative means for compliance. 2) Include a response in writing to each of the Engineer’s comments or questions for submittal packages which are re-submitted: a) In the order that the comments or questions were presented throughout the submittal. b) Referenced by index section and page number on which the comment appeared. c) Acceptable responses to Engineer’s comments are either: d) Engineer’s comment or change is accepted and appropriate changes are made. e) Explain why comment is not accepted or requested change is not made. f) Explain how requirement will be satisfied in lieu of comment or change requested by Engineer. g) Any re-submittal, which does not contain responses to the Engineer’s previous comments, shall be returned for revision and re-submittal. h) No further review by the Engineer will be performed until a response for previous comments has been received. c. Remaining pages: 1) Actual submittal data: a) Organize submittals in exactly the same order as the items are referenced, listed, and/or organized in the specification section. b) For submittals that cover multiple devices used in different areas under the same specification section, the submittal for the individual devices must list the area where the device is intended to be used. d. Specific submittal requirements: 1) Furnish the submittals required by each section or Division 27: a) Product Data. b) Shop Drawings. 2) Use equipment and instrument tags as depicted on the P&IDs for all submittals. 3) Adhere to wiring numbering scheme outlined in Division 26 throughout the project: a) Uniquely number each wire per the specifications. 4) Wire numbers must appear on all equipment drawings. e. In these contract documents, some items of work are represented schematically, and are designated for the most part by numbers, as derived from criteria in ANSI/ISA S5.1: 1) Employ the nomenclature and numbers designated herein and on the drawings exclusively throughout shop drawings, data sheets, and similar submittals. 2) Replace any other symbols, designations, and nomenclature unique to a manufacturer’s, suppliers, or subcontractor’s standard methods with those identified herein and on the drawings. BC&A PROCESS CONTROL AND TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 61 00 - 11 f. Furnish submittals in the following general order, each in a separate bound set: 1) Product Data. 2) After approval of the Product Data, submit the Project Shop Drawing submittals 3) Testing, Calibration and Start-up procedures. 4) Operation and Maintenance Data. 5) Training Submittals. 6) Record Documents. D. Product Data: 1. General: a. Submitted for non-custom manufactured material listed in this and other sections and shown on shop drawings. b. Furnish sufficient information to evaluate the suitability of the proposed material or equipment for the intended use, and for compliance with these specifications. c. Include: 1) Catalog cuts. 2) Bulletins. 3) Brochures. 4) Quality photocopies of applicable pages from these documents. 5) Identify on the data sheets the project name, applicable specification section, and paragraph. 6) Identify model number and options for the actual equipment being furnished. d. Neatly cross out options that do not apply or equipment not intended to be supplied. 2. Material and Equipment Schedules: a. Furnish a complete schedule and/or matrix of all materials, equipment, apparatus, and instruments that are proposed: b. Include sizes, names of manufacturers, catalog numbers, and such other information required to identify the items. 3. Instrument Data Sheets and Cut Sheets: a. Provide fully completed data sheets, both electronically in Microsoft Word or Excel and in hardcopy, for each instrument and component according to ISA S20 Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instruments, Primary Elements and Control Valves. Include the following information on the data sheet: 1) Component functional description used herein and on the drawings. 2) Manufacturers model number or other product designation. 3) Tag number used herein and on the drawings. 4) System or loop of which the component is a part. 5) Location or assembly at which the component is to be installed. 6) Input and output characteristics. 7) Scale range and units and multiplier. 8) Requirements for electric supply. 9) Requirements for air supply. BC&A PROCESS CONTROL AND TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 61 00 - 12 10) Materials of construction and of component parts that are in contact with, or otherwise exposed to, process media, and or corrosive ambient air. 11) Special requirements or features, such as specifications for ambient operating conditions. 12) Features and options that are furnished. b. Provide a technical brochure or bulletin (“cut sheet”) for each instrument on the project. Submit with the corresponding data sheets: 1) Where the same make and model of instrument is used in two or more applications on the project, and the process applications are nearly identical, and the materials, features and options are identical submit one brochure or bulletin for the set of identical instruments. 2) Include a list of tag numbers for which it applies with each brochure or bulletin. 3) Furnish technical product brochures that are complete enough to verify conformance with all contract document requirements, and to reflect only those features supplied with the device. 4) Cross out models, features, options, or accessories that are not being provided. 5) Clearly mark and identify special options and features. c. Organization: Index the data sheets and brochures in the submittal by systems or loops. 4. Control Panel Hardware Submittal: a. Submit the following in one submittal package. b. Complete and detailed bills of materials: 1) Including quantity, description, manufacturer and part number for each assembly or component for each control panel. 2) Include all items within an enclosure. c. Complete grounding requirements for each system component including any requirements for PLCs, process LANs and SCADA equipment. d. Requirements for physical separation between control system components and 120VAC, 480VAC and medium voltage power cables. e. UPS and battery load calculations to show that the backup capacity and time meet the specified requirements. f. Heat Dissipation in Enclosures calculations with proposed equipment to dissipate and resolve heat rise issues within each panel. g. Provide a data sheet for each control system component together with a technical product brochure or bulletin, which include: 1) The manufacturer’s model number or other identifying product designation. 2) Tag and loop number. 3) System of which it is a part of. 4) Site to which it applies. 5) Input and output characteristics. 6) Requirements for electric power. 7) Device ambient operating requirements. 8) Materials of construction. E. Shop Drawings: BC&A PROCESS CONTROL AND TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 61 00 - 13 1. General: a. Coordinate all aspects of the work so that a complete, instrumentation, computer, and control system for the facility is supported by accurate shop and record drawings: 1) Clearly show every wire, circuit, and terminal provided under this contract on one or more submitted wiring diagrams. b. Show all interfaces between any of the following: instruments, vendor control panels, motor control centers, motor starters, variable speed drives, control valves, flow meters, chemical feeders and other equipment related to the PCIS. c. Organize the shop drawing submittals for inclusion in the O&MMs: 1) Furnish the initial shop drawing submittal bound in one or more standard size, 3-ring, D-ring, loose leaf, vinyl plastic, hard cover binders suitable for bookshelf storage. 2) Binder ring size: 2 inches. d. Include the letterhead and/or title block of the firm responsible for the preparation of all shop drawings. Include the following information in the title block, as a minimum: 1) The firm’s registered business name. 2) Firm’s physical address, email address, and phone number. 3) Owner’s name. 4) Project name and location. 5) Drawing name. 6) Revision level. 7) Personnel responsible for the content of the drawing. 8) Date. e. The work includes modifications to existing circuits: 1) Clearly show all modifications to existing circuits. 2) In addition, show all existing unmodified wiring to clearly depict the functionality and electrical characteristics of the complete modified circuits. f. All drawings that show a modification of an existing circuit must include the name and signature of the individual who performed the field verification work, along with a statement that the individual personally performed the field verification and that the information shown is correct. 2. Shop drawing requirements: a. Front, side, and, rear elevations, and top and bottom views, showing all dimensions. b. Locations of conduit entrances and access plates. c. Component layout and identification. d. Schematic and wiring diagrams with wire numbers and terminal identification. e. Connection diagrams, terminal diagrams, internal wiring diagrams, conductor size, etc. f. Anchoring method and leveling criteria, including manufacturer’s recommendations for the seismic and wind conditions. g. Weight. h. Finish. i. Nameplates. BC&A PROCESS CONTROL AND TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 61 00 - 14 j. Temperature limitations, as applicable. 3. Control Panel Drawings: a. Layout Drawings: 1) Submit panel, enclosure, console, furniture and cabinet layout drawings for all items provided. 2) As a minimum, include the following information: a) To scale front, side and plan views. b) All dimensions. c) Heat dissipation in electrical enclosure calculations to include surface area, heat input, enclosure temperature rise, safety margins, outdoor applications and resolutions and equipment to be used to help dissipate heat rise for each enclosure. d) Interior and exterior arrangements. e) Mounting information, including conduit entrance location. f) Finish data. g) Tag number and functional name of items mounted in/on each panel, console and cabinet. h) Nameplate legend including text, letter size and colors. b. Wiring and Piping Diagrams: 1) Submit panel wiring and piping diagrams for every panel that contains wiring and/or piping. 2) Include the following information: a) Name of panel. b) Wiring and piping sizes and types. c) Terminal strip numbers. d) Wire tags and labels. e) Functional name and manufacturer’s designation for items to which wiring and piping are connected. f) Electrical control schematics in accordance with ANSI standards. c. Installation drawings: 1) Provide site-specific installation drawings for all control equipment panels; including dimensions. 2) Provide scaled drawings and show the position of the equipment at its intended installation location. 3) Show the placement of all equipment being provided under this contract and its spatial relationship to all other equipment located in the abutting and adjoining areas. 4) Show all required access and clearances associated with the equipment with a statement of compliance to manufacturer’s recommendations, NEC requirements and other applicable codes. 4. Schematic Diagrams: a. Submit schematic diagrams for all electrical equipment in ladder diagram format. b. Include device and field connection terminal numbers on all schematic diagrams. c. Incorporate equipment manufacturer’s shop drawing information into the schematic diagrams in order to document the entire control system. BC&A PROCESS CONTROL AND TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 61 00 - 15 F. Testing, Calibration, and Start-up Submittal: 1. General testing submittal requirements are specified in this section. 2. Test Procedure Submittals: a. Submit the proposed procedures to be followed during tests of the PCIS and its components in two parts: 1) Preliminary Submittal: Outline of the specific proposed tests and examples of proposed forms and checklists. 2) Detailed Submittal: After successful review of the preliminary submittal, submit the proposed detailed test procedures, forms and checklists. Include a statement of test objectives with the test procedures. 3. Provide certified and witnessed test and calibration checklists for each of the following tests: a. Calibration, adjustment and test details for all components and systems. b. Factory Acceptance Tests. c. Loop Validation Tests. 1) Loop Validation Certifications: a) After the field device loop tests have been successfully completed for all individual instruments, all separate analog control networks, all valves, all VCPs, all motors, all local operator interface panels, all motor control centers, etc., submit a certified copy of all test forms signed by the contractor, Integrator and the owner’s representative, with test data entered, together with a clear and unequivocal statement that all instrumentation has been successfully calibrated, inspected and tested. d. Pre-commissioning Test. e. Performance Test. 4. Factory Acceptance Test: a. Include complete test procedures and forms to be used during the test. G. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Furnish the Engineer with a complete preliminary set of written O&MMs eight (8) weeks before calibration, start-up and/or testing. 2. Furnish in accordance with the following additional requirements. 3. Submit preliminary sets of these manuals to the Engineer for review of format and content: a. Engineer will return one (1) set with comments. b. Revise and/or amend as required and submit the requisite number of copies to the Engineer fifteen (15) days before pre-commissioning of the systems. 4. Incorporate changes that occur during startup and submit as part of the final manuals. 5. Provide comprehensive information on all systems and components to enable operation, service, maintenance, and repair. 6. Include record documents and the approved shop drawing submittals modified for conditions encountered in the field during the work. 7. Include signed results from Calibration, Loop Validation Tests, Pre-commissioning, and Performance Testing. BC&A PROCESS CONTROL AND TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 61 00 - 16 8. Provide installation, connection, operating, calibration, setpoints (e.g., pressure, pump control, time delays, etc.), adjustment, test, troubleshooting, maintenance, and overhaul instructions in complete detail. 9. Provide exploded or other detailed views of all instruments, assemblies and accessory components together with complete parts lists and ordering instructions. 10. Spare Parts List: a. Include a priced list of recommended spare parts for all the equipment furnished under this contract. Include recommended quantities sufficient to maintain the furnished system for a period of five (5) years. b. Annotate the list to indicate which items, if any, and quantities are furnished as part of this contract. c. Provide the name, address, and phone number of manufacturer and manufacturer’s local service representative of these parts. 11. Organize the O&MMs for each process in the following manner: a. Section A - Process and Instrumentation Diagrams. b. Section B- Loop Drawings. c. Section C- Instrument Data Sheets and Brochures. d. Section D- Sizing Calculations. e. Section E- Instrumentation Installation Details. f. Section F- Test Results. g. Section G- Operational Manual. h. Section H- Spare Parts List. 12. Training Submittals: a. Develop and submit for review a General Training Plan. Include complete descriptions of all planned training classes, a preliminary training schedule, a list of all proposed instructors along with resumes, examples of proposed training manuals and a description of any special training tools to be used (simulators, self-paced modules, personal computer-based training, etc.). b. The Engineer will review the General Training Plan. Special emphasis will be placed on review of the qualifications of the proposed instructors and the timing of the individual courses to maximize their effectiveness. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the proposed instructor(s) are not sufficiently qualified to conduct the specified training courses or lack experience on the specific configuration of the system, additional training must be provided by more qualified instructors. c. Training Course Plan submittals: 1) For each training course or other training activity, submit a detailed, complete outline and agenda for each lesson. 2) Describe any student pre-requisites for the course or training activity. 3) Provide an updated schedule for all sessions of the course; including dates, times, durations and locations. 4) Submit training materials. d. Incorporate all submittal review comments into the course. e. Do not conduct training courses before review and acceptance of the Course Plan submittal for the course. H. Record Documents: 1. Provide record documents of all instrumentation drawings. 2. Record Drawing requirements: BC&A PROCESS CONTROL AND TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 61 00 - 17 a. Update record drawings regularly throughout the project (monthly as a minimum). b. Record drawings must be fully updated as a condition of the monthly progress payments. c. Submit final fully updated record drawings upon completion of the work for final review. d. Clearly and neatly show all changes in accordance with all existing pipe, conduit, wire, instruments or other structures encountered or uncovered during construction. 3. Shop Drawings: a. Upon completion of the work, update all shop drawings to indicate the final as-built configuration of the systems: 1) Should an error be found in a shop drawing during installation or startup of equipment, note the correction, including any field changes found necessary on the drawing and submit the corrections in the record documents. 2) Update, check, and revise all wiring drawings and other submitted drawings and documents to show final installed conditions. b. Provide “As-Built” shop drawings for all instrumentation equipment on 11x17 inch using bond paper. c. Provide electronic copies of these documents on CD-ROM disks in AutoCad Version 2014, or later, by Autodesk. Size all drawings to be readable and legible on 11x17 inch media. 4. Submittal Documents: a. Provide an interim submittal of record documents after the PCIS system pre- commissioning but before performance testing. b. Submit final record documents before substantial completion or earlier if so specified. 5. Review and Corrections: a. Correct any record documents or other documents found to be incomplete, not accurate, of poor quality or containing errors. b. Promptly correct and re-submit record documents returned for correction. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Perform all instrumentation and control work, whether needed for the power, control system, process, HVAC, telephone, security, etc. in accordance with all codes and standards. B. Unless otherwise specified, each individual instrument shall have a minimum accuracy of ±0.5 percent of full scale and a maximum repeatability of ±0.25 percent of full scale. C. Conduct Factory Acceptance Tests in accordance with paragraph 2.09 of this section. D. Installation supervision in accordance with paragraph 3.04 of this section. 1. Calibration: The Contractor shall furnish the services of trained technicians to perform a complete calibration of each instrument and device, as specified in this specification. BC&A PROCESS CONTROL AND TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 61 00 - 18 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Store all equipment and materials delivered to the job site in a location that will not interfere with the construction or the owner’s operations. B. Shipping Precautions: 1. After completion of shop assembly, successful factory acceptance test, pack all equipment, cabinets, panels, and consoles in protective crates and enclose in heavy duty polyethylene envelopes or secured sheeting to provide complete protection from damage, dust and moisture. 2. Place dehumidifiers, when required, inside the polyethylene coverings. 3. Skid-mount the equipment for final transport. 4. Provide lifting rings for moving without removing protective covering. 5. Display boxed weight on shipping tags together with instructions for unloading, transporting, storing and handling at the job site. C. Special Instructions: 1. Securely attach special instructions for proper field handling, storage and installation to each piece of equipment before packaging and shipment. D. Tagging: 1. Tag each component and/or instrument to identify its location, instrument tag number and function in the system. 2. Firmly attach a permanent tag, indelibly machine marked with the instrument tag number as given in the tabulation, on each piece of equipment constituting the PCIS. 3. Tag instruments immediately upon receipt in the field. 4. Prominently display identification on the outside of the package. 5. Utilize the tag and loop number identifications shown of the P&IDs. E. Delivery and Inspection: 1. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer’s original container or packaging with identifying labels intact and legible. Include date of manufacture on label. 2. Unload products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions for unloading or as specified. Record the receipt of products at the site. Inspect for completeness and evidence of damage during shipment. 3. Remove damaged products from the site and expedite delivery of identical new undamaged products, augment incomplete shipments or replace lost products in order not to delay the progress of the work. F. Storage and Protection: 1. Provide for the safe storage and delivery of materials; whether furnished by the contractor or by others. 2. Meet all storage requirements of the manufacturer and provide for the safe storage of all materials and equipment as recommended by the manufacturer. 3. Store all equipment in dry permanent shelters: a. Provide adequate protection for stored equipment against mechanical injury. b. Provide space conditioning to meet the manufacturer’s recommendations. BC&A PROCESS CONTROL AND TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 61 00 - 19 4. Protect instrumentation and control work at all times from damage, defacement or deterioration from any cause whatever. 1.7 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Site Conditions: 1. Provide a PCIS, including all equipment, raceways and any other components required for a complete installation that meets the environmental conditions for the site as specified in the general requirements and below. 2. Area Classifications: a. Furnish enclosures that match the area classifications. 3. Site Security: a. Abide by all security and safety rules concerning the work on the site. 1.8 SEQUENCING A. General: 1. General scheduling requirements as specified. 2. Testing requirements. 3. Work restrictions and other scheduling requirements. B. Loop Validation Test: 1. Notify the Engineer of scheduled tests a minimum of thirty (30) days before the estimated completion date of installation and wiring of the PCIS. 2. Complete testing a minimum of five (5) days before the pre-commissioning phase of the project. C. Training: 1. Complete all training before the pre-commissioning phase of the project may start. 2. Schedule the training sessions a minimum of fifteen (15) days prior to the start date of the courses. 3. Submit training manuals to the Engineer a minimum of ten (10) days before starting the training session. 4. Within ten (10) days after the completion of each session, submit the following: a. A list of all owner personnel that attended the session. b. A copy of the training materials utilized during the lesson with all notes, diagrams and comments. D. Pre-Commissioning Test: 1. Commence after acceptance of all training, wire test, calibration tests, and loop validation tests and all inspections have demonstrated that the PCIS complies with all Contract requirements. 2. Acceptance of the PCIS pre-commissioning testing must be provided in writing by the Engineer before the performance testing may begin. E. Provide all special tools and spare parts, refer to Paragraph 1.15 of this Section, before performance testing commences, suitably wrapped and identified. F. Performance Testing: BC&A PROCESS CONTROL AND TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 61 00 - 20 1. Complete Pre-commissioning test a minimum of five (5) days before the Performance Test. 2. Conduct a 14-day Performance Test. G. Substantial Completion: The following conditions shall be fulfilled before the PCIS is considered complete: 1. All submittals have been completed and approved. 2. The PCIS has been calibrated, loop tested and pre-commissioned. 3. The owner training has been performed. 4. All required spare parts, expendable supplies and test equipment have been delivered to the owner. 5. The performance test has been successfully completed. 6. All debris associated with installation of instrumentation has been removed. 7. All probes, elements, sample lines, transmitters, tubing and enclosures have been cleaned and are in like-new condition. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Warrant the PCIS in accordance with the General Conditions: 1. Provide additional warranty as specified in the individual specifications. 1.10 SYSTEM STARTUP A. Replace or modify equipment, software, and materials that do not achieve design requirements after installation in order to attain compliance with the design requirements . Following replacement or modification, retest the system and perform additional testing to place the complete system in satisfactory operation and obtain compliance acceptance from the Engineer. 1.11 MAINTENANCE A. Before substantial completion, perform all maintenance activities required by any sections of the specifications including any calibrations, final adjustments, component replacements or other routine service required before placing equipment or systems in service. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. As called out on Drawings and specified in individual instrument and equipment specifications in other sections of Division 40. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Furnish all materials under this contract that are new, free from defects and standard products produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of these devices and that bear all approvals and labels as required by the specifications. BC&A PROCESS CONTROL AND TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 61 00 - 21 B. Provide materials complying with the applicable industrial standards in accordance with the General Conditions. 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Furnish all meters, instruments, and other components that are the most recent field proven models marketed by their manufacturers at the time of submittal of the shop drawings; unless otherwise specified to match existing equipment. B. Unless otherwise specified, furnish individual instruments that have a minimum accuracy of ±0.5 percent of full scale and a minimum repeatability of ±0.25 percent of full scale. C. Signal Transmission: 1. Analog Signals: a. Furnish analog measurements and control signals that vary in direct linear proportion to the measured variable; unless otherwise indicated. b. Furnish electrical analog signals outside control panels that are 4-20mA /24VDC; except as indicated. c. Analog signals within enclosures may be 1-5VDC. d. Electrically or optically isolate all analog signals from other signals. e. All pneumatic signals shall be controlled by a 3-15psig span. f. Discrete input signal: as indicated in the controller hardware specification. g. Discrete output signals: 1) Dry contacts or TRIAC outputs (with express written approval by the Engineer) as needed to coordinate with the field device. 2) Interposing Relays: a) Provide interposing relays for all discrete outputs connected to the PLC; unless relay output PLC cards are provided as part of the PLC system. h. Furnish regulated analog signals that are not affected by changes in supply voltage or load resistance within the unit’s rating. i. Maintain the total loop impedance of 10% below the published total loop impedance for 4-20mA signals at the rated value for the regulating device at the loop operating voltage. j. Where necessary, reduce loop impedance by providing current-to-current (I/I) isolation amplifiers for signal re-transmission. D. Discrete Circuit Configuration: 1. Configure discrete control circuits to fail safe, on loss of continuity or loss of power. 2. Alarm contacts: Fail to the alarm condition. 3. Control contacts fail to the inoperative condition unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. E. Grounding: 1. Provide control panels with a signal ground bus isolated from the power ground bus: a. Provide multiple panels in one location with a common point for signal ground bus connection to ground. 2. Single-point ground shields and measurement loops at the source panel external terminals, unless otherwise noted, by bonding to the control panel signal ground bus. BC&A PROCESS CONTROL AND TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 61 00 - 22 3. Provide isolating amplifiers within control panels for field equipment possessing a grounded input or output; except when the panel circuit is galvanically isolated. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Provide flow conditioning devices or other required accessories if necessary to meet the accuracy requirements in the contract documents. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide all equipment that is new, free from defects, and standard products produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of these products that bear all approvals and labels as required by the specifications. B. Arrange with all manufacturers of the equipment and fabricators of panels and cabinets, to allow the owner and Engineer to inspect and witness the testing of the equipment at the site of fabrication: 1. Equipment includes the cabinets, special control systems, flow measuring devices and other pertinent systems and devices. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Review the existing site conditions and examine all shop drawings for the various items of equipment in order to determine exact routing and final terminations for all wiring and cables. B. Provide a complete instrumentation and control system: 1. Install all extra conduits, cables and interfaces as may be necessary to provide a complete and operating electrical and process control and instrumentation system. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. The construction and installation of all instrumentation, control equipment and materials must comply with all applicable provisions of: 1. National Electrical Code. 2. Applicable local codes and regulations. B. Equipment locations shown on the drawings may change due to variations in equipment size or minor changes made by others during construction: 1. Verify all dimensions as indicated on the drawings. Actual field conditions govern all final installed locations, distances and levels. 2. Review all information shown on the drawings, including architectural, structural, mechanical, instrumentation and electrical to coordinate work as necessary to adjust to all conditions that arise due to such changes. 3. Make minor changes in location of equipment before rough-in; upon approval and as directed by the owner and/or Engineer. BC&A PROCESS CONTROL AND TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 61 00 - 23 C. Perform all related electrical work in accordance with the applicable Sections of Division 26. D. The PCIS configurations are diagrammatic: 1. The locations of equipment are approximate unless dimensioned. 2. Where project conditions require, make reasonable changes in locations and arrangements; upon approval by owner and/or Engineer. E. Field Instruments Installation: 1. Install field instruments in accordance with the contract documents, ANSI/API 550 and 551 and the manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Mount field instruments so that they can be easily read, readily approached, and easily serviced, and so they do not restrict access to mechanical equipment: a. Mount field instruments on a pipe stand or local panel, if they are not directly mounted, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. b. Provide sun shields for all field electronic instruments exposed to direct sunlight. 3. Make connections from rigid conduit systems to field instruments with PVC coated flexible conduit: a. Type of flexible conduit required for the area classification. Refer to Section 26 00 00 for area classification. b. Maximum length of 24 inches or to meet local code. 4. Connect field instruments with cable as specified in Division 26, except when the manufacturer requires the use of special cable, or otherwise specified herein. Special cable applications shall be in accordance with the NEC. 5. Verify the correctness of each installation: a. Polarity of electric power and signal connections. b. Ensure all process connections are free of leaks. F. Process Sensing Lines and Air Tubing: 1. Install individual tubes parallel and/or perpendicular to and near the surfaces from which they are supported. 2. Provide supports for rigid tubing at intervals of not more than 3 feet. 3. Slope horizontal runs of instrument tubing at a minimum of 1/16th-inch per foot to allow for draining of any condensate. 4. Bends: a. Use proper tool. b. Make bends for parallel lines symmetrical. c. Make bends without deforming or thinning the walls of the tubing. 5. Square-cut and clean all ends of tubing before being inserted in the fittings. 6. Provide bulkhead fittings at all panels requiring pipe and/or tubing entries. 7. Use stainless steel tubing for all piping that is hard piped from the air header, unless otherwise noted on the drawings or not compatible with the fluids or atmosphere in the area. 8. Use flexible connections only on moving equipment and under the constraint that the length shall be less than 1.5 times to maximum travel of the equipment. G. Conduit, Cables, and Field Wiring: 1. Provide all PCIS equipment cables and process LAN communication networks under Division 40. BC&A PROCESS CONTROL AND TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 61 00 - 24 2. Provide terminations and wire identification as specified in Division 26. 3. Protect all wiring from sharp edges and corners. 4. Provide all conduits, fittings, boxes, etc. in accordance with all the requirements of Division 26. H. Equipment Tie-Downs: 1. Anchor all instruments, control panels and equipment by methods that comply with seismic and wind bracing requirements which apply to the site. 2. All control panels, VCPs, LCPs, RTUs, PCM’s, etc., shall be permanently mounted and tied down to structures. I. Existing Instrumentation: 1. Clean, recondition and re-calibrate each existing instrument to be reused, removed or reinstalled using an authorized service facility of the instrument manufacturer. 2. Provide certification of this work before reinstallation of each instrument. J. Instrument Tagging: 1. See Drawings. 2. Provide all field-mounted instruments with nameplates: a. Nameplates engraved with the instrument’s full tag number as indicated on the drawings. Affix tags with stainless steel wire fasteners. 3. Provide all back of panel instruments with nameplates engraved with the instrument’s full tag number as indicated on the drawings. 4. Provide all front of panel instruments with a nameplate: a. Engravings to include the instrument’s full tag number and service description. b. Secure nameplates to the panel with stainless steel screws. c. Use an approved adhesive if screws would violate the NEMA or other ratings of the enclosure. K. Cable and Conductor Termination: 1. Terminate all cables and conductors on terminal blocks. 2. Provide terminal block enclosures, where required, suitable for the area classification as specified in Division 26. L. Surge Protection: 1. Provide outdoor field instrument loops with voltage surge protection units at instruments. 2. Individually fuse each 4-20mA DC loops with a 1/16 ampere slow blow fuse between power supplies and receiver surge protectors. 3. Provide voltage surge protection for 4-wire transmitters and analyzers, protecting both power source and signal loop. M. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL N. Inspection: 1. Allow for inspection of PCIS installation. 2. Provide any assistance necessary to support inspection activities. 3. Engineer inspections may include, but are not limited to, the following: BC&A PROCESS CONTROL AND TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 61 00 - 25 a. Inspect equipment and materials for physical damage. b. Inspect installation for compliance with drawings and specifications. c. Inspect installation for obstructions and adequate clearances around equipment. d. Inspect equipment installation for proper leveling, alignment, anchorage and assembly. e. Inspect equipment nameplate data to verify compliance with design requirements. f. Inspect cable terminations. 4. Inspection activities conducted during construction do not satisfy inspection requirements. O. Field Testing as specified. P. Installation Supervision: 1. Ensure that the entire PCIS is installed in a proper and satisfactory manner. At a minimum provide the following services: a. Installation Resources: 1) Coordinate with the contractor regarding installation requirements of the contract documents. 2) Provide technical assistance to installation personnel by telephone or face-to-face. 3) Furnish installation personnel with at least one copy of the approved submittals. 4) Provide the instrument installation details specified in Article 1.05 - Submittals. 5) Provide periodic inspections during the construction period. 6) Provide a complete check of the completed installation to ensure that it is in conformance with the requirements of the equipment manufacturer and the contract documents. 7) Field verify accuracy and calibration of all instruments. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Control Valves: 1. Stroke all control valves, cylinders, drives and connecting linkages from the OIT and/or HMI, as well as local control devices. Adjust to verify proper control action, hand switch action, limit switch settings, torque settings, remote control actions and remote feedback of valve status and position indication. 2. Check control valve actions and positioner settings with the valves in place to ensure that no changes have occurred since the bench calibration. B. Make all revisions necessary to the control system software, as directed by the Engineer. It is understood that the contractor knows and agrees that changes will be required in the control system software during the Factory Acceptance Tests, the Pre-Commissioning, Performance Testing, Start-up and during the warranty period. BC&A PROCESS CONTROL AND TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 61 00 - 26 3.4 CLEANING A. Vacuum clean all control panels and enclosures before start-up and again after final completion of the project. B. Clean all panel surfaces. C. Return to new condition any scratches and/or defects received during installation. D. Wipe all instrument faces and enclosures clean. E. Leave wiring in panels, manholes, boxes and other locations in a neat, clean and organized manner: 1. Neatly coil and label all spare wiring lengths with to-from indications for each set. 2. Shorten, re-terminate and re-label excessive spare wire and cable lengths, as determined by the Engineer. F. As specified in other sections of the contract documents. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLC-BASED CONTROL SYSTEMS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 63 43 - 1 SECTION 40 63 43 PLC-BASED CONTROL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. PLC-based control systems shall be supplied by the Integrator as specified in 40 61 00 and the Contract Documents. Installation shall be by the Contractor. All requirements for supply shall be in accordance with this Section and all suppliers are referred to as the Contractor for the purpose of supply. B. The Contractor shall supervise installation, assemble, configure, and place into service the PLC-based control system. C. Provide a complete and operational system, fully programmed to meet all the requirements of the Proposal Documents. The following work, equipment and services shall be included in this Contract but not be limited to: 1. Prepare and submit for approval complete control system hardware and software shop drawings. 2. Furnish complete and operational control systems, including all peripherals and other equipment specified herein. 3. Perform all control system tests, adjustments, and calibrations. 4. Furnish qualified labor to perform start-up services. 5. Furnish qualified instructors to provide complete control system instruction and training. 6. Furnish all required control system tools, test equipment, spare parts, supplies, technical manuals, reproducible “As-Built” drawings, and program listings as specified herein. D. All PLCs provided for the control system shall exhibit 100 percent interchangeability of parts. E. The Proposal Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the Contractor and its sub-contractors to review all sections to insure a complete and coordinated project. In particular, the following sections should be used in conjunction with this section: 1. Section 40 61 00 – Process Control and Instrumentation Systems General 2. Section 40 78 00 – Control Panel Instruments 1.2 REFERENCES A. All PLC-based control systems provided under this contract shall comply with all the commercial standards and codes in accordance with Section 40 61 00 – Process Control and instrumentation Systems General. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions used in this section are in accordance with Section 40 61 00 – Process Control and Instrumentation Systems General. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLC-BASED CONTROL SYSTEMS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 63 43 - 2 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawing submittals shall be provided in accordance with Section 40 61 00 – Process Control and Instrumentation Systems General and Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures (Web Submittal) requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All work shall be performed in accordance with quality assurance and warranty requirements specified in Section 40 61 00 – Process Control and Instrumentation Systems General. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. All equipment and materials delivered to the job site shall be stored in a location which will not interfere with the operations of the Owner’s personnel or interfere with construction. B. Storage and handling will be performed in manners which will afford maximum protection to the equipment and materials. C. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to assure proper handling and on-site storage. D. Unless otherwise specified, all PLC-based control systems hardware shall be delivered to the project site and stored in accordance with Section 40 61 00 – Process Control and Instrumentation Systems General. 1.7 PROJECT / SITE CONDITIONS A. The project site conditions are defined in Section 40 61 00 – Process Control and Instrumentation Systems General. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Unless otherwise specified, work outlined in this section shall be scheduled and sequenced as specified in Section 40 61 00 – Process Control and Instrumentation Systems General. B. Training shall be conducted in accordance with Section 40 61 00 – Process Control and Instrumentation Systems General. 1. The training as required by paragraph 3.4 of this Section shall be scheduled concurrent with the calibration, equipment testing, and process system testing phases of the project. 1.9 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance shall be provided in accordance with Section 40 61 00 – Process Control and Instrumentation Systems General. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLC-BASED CONTROL SYSTEMS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 63 43 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All materials and all PLC equipment furnished under this Contract shall be new, free from defects, of first quality, off-the-shelf and produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of these products. No proprietary hardware or software may be used. B. Hardware Commonality: Where there is more than one item of similar equipment being furnished all such similar equipment shall be the product of a singular manufacturer. C. All CPEs, I/O modules, power supplies and other accessories required to form a complete system shall be as shown in the drawings but are the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish to provide a complete, operable system. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Provide major equipment as follows: 1. As shown on attached table following this Section, listed as 40 63 43a PLC -Based Control System List. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The contractor shall utilize personnel to accomplish or supervise the physical installation of all elements, components, accessories, or assemblies which it furnishes. B. After installation of the entire control is completed, the installation shall be inspected jointly by the supplier, contractor, owner and/or Engineer. 1. Any problems shall be corrected immediately. When all parties are satisfied with the installation, a written certification of the installation shall be delivered to the Engineer. 2. The certification shall state that all PLC communications and I/O modules, modems, system grounds, LAN, communication network, workstations, printers, and all other components of the control system have been inspected and are installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s guidelines. C. Unless otherwise specified, the ICSC shall provide field inspection services in accordance with Section 40 61 00 – Process Control and Instrumentation Systems General. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of all analog inputs and outputs of the control system shall have their calibration checked at a minimum of five points (0%, 25%, 50%, 75% and 100%) to verify consistency with the balance of the analog loop. 1. This calibration check shall be done in conjunction with the analog loop tests specified in Section 40 61 00. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLC-BASED CONTROL SYSTEMS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 63 43 - 4 2. Workstations displays and PLC tag name registers shall both be verified for correctness. B. After the control system installation has been certified and the analog points have been calibrated, the entire Process Control System shall be tested to verify that all discrete inputs and outputs of all PLCs and any workstations are correct. 1. As much as possible, points shall be checked “end-to-end”. For example, valve status inputs shall be checked by stroking the valve and a pump start output shall be checked by using it to start the pump. 2. Simulated testing shall be allowed only when no practical alternative exists. 3. Workstation displays shall be verified for correctness at the same time. 4. An I/O checklist developed by the ICSC shall be used to record test results and a copy provided to the Engineer upon completion. 5. The ICSC shall submit to the Engineer a system testing completion report demonstrating Process Control System conforms to requirements of this section. C. SCADA System Testing: After all system and subsystem installations have been certified and analog loop calibration and discrete I/O testing have been completed, the SCADA system testing shall be performed by the installation contractor. 1. SCADA system testing shall operate the various process systems of the facility to verify compliance with all functional requirements specified, including the automatic control modes and control system interlocks. 2. Tests which fail to demonstrate the required operation shall be repeated in their entirety or continued after corrective action has been completed at the discretion of the owner and/or Engineer. 3. During SCADA system tests, the ICSC shall have a representative on-site continuously who is capable of troubleshooting and modifying the Process Control System configuration programming. D. Plant Pre-commissioning Start-up Test: The ICSC shall provide start-up support to include the installation contractor’s personnel, electrical personnel, chemical feed system personnel and the PLC and SCADA software system manufacturer’s representative as required during the testing period to produce a fully operational facility. 1. This support shall be provided at no additional cost to the owner. 2. Pre-commissioning and start-up test shall be conducted in accordance with the requirements of Section 40 61 00. E. Final Acceptance Test: During this test, the entire SCADA control system shall be continuously operated and maintained, 7 days per week, 24 hours per day, during the test period, with zero downtime resulting from system failures. If a system failure occurs, the test shall be considered a failure and not acceptable and the installation contractor shall be required to repeat the test from the beginning. The entire control system shall be acceptable only after all equipment and software has satisfied the performance test requirements. At no additional cost to the owner, the ICSC shall be responsible for any downtime or project delays resulting from system failures related to the Process Control System. Downtime resulting from the following shall be considered system failures: 1. If a component failure cannot be repaired/replaced within 4 hours. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLC-BASED CONTROL SYSTEMS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 63 43 - 5 2. Downtime of any component, exclusive of I/O, whose failure results in the inability of the operator to monitor and manipulate control loops from the associated workstations using standard workstation interface procedures. 3. Downtime resulting from concurrent failure of any CRT, keyboard, or mouse which is associated with the workstation. 4. Downtime in excess of 2 hours resulting from any I/O component failure. 5. Downtime resulting from concurrent failure of 2 or more I/O components in a single PLC. 6. Downtime of any component/peripheral associated with the controls network if the failed component results in a disabling of the historical functions or the failed component is not repaired or replaces within 8 hours. 3.3 DOCUMENTATION SCHEDULE A. When the installation of the Process Control System is complete, a written certification of the installation shall be delivered to the Engineer. The certification shall state that all PLC communication and I/O modules, modems, system grounds, LAN, communication network, workstations, printers, and all other components of the control system have been inspected and are installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s and PCIS guidelines contained in all sections of Section 40 in these specifications. 1. The contractor, through its ICSC, shall submit to the Engineer a system testing completion report when each process system and all aspects of the configuration software have been successfully tested as described herein. a. The report shall note any problems encountered and what action was required to correct them. b. It shall include a clear and unequivocal statement that the process systems have been thoroughly tested and are complete and functional in accordance with all specification requirements. 2. The ICSC through the installation contractor shall submit a final acceptance test completion report which shall state that all contract requirements have been met and which shall include: a. A listing of all PLC system equipment maintenance/repair and modification activities conducted during testing. b. A listing of all components which were unable to operate successfully and how they were replaced/repaired. 3. Operator & Maintenance Training: Furnish a completion report which shall include a list of all owner personnel that attended the class, an evaluation of owner personnel that attended the class via written testing or equivalent evaluation and a copy of the hard copy text utilized during the class with all notes, diagrams, and comments. 3.4 TRAINING A. In addition to the training identified in Section 40 61 00 – Process Instruments and Controls General, the ICSC shall provide training for the purpose of familiarizing the owner’s maintenance and operating personnel with the use, maintenance, calibration, and repair of all components of the control system. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PLC-BASED CONTROL SYSTEMS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 63 43 - 6 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT FLOW-MAGNETIC WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 71 13 - 1 SECTION 40 71 13 FLOW-MAGNETIC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Instruments for instrumentation and control systems that are to be permanently installed. B. Related Sections 1. Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the Contractor and its Sub-Contractors to review all sections to insure a complete and coordinated project. 1.2 REFERENCES A. All instruments shall comply with the latest edition and standards of the Instrumentation Systems and Automation Society. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the: 1. NEC: National Electrical Code. 2. IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. 3. ISA: Instrumentation Systems and Automation Society. 4. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Furnish all instruments as identified on the drawings. B. Install and connect all instruments as per the manufacturer’s recommendations for the particular installation. C. Calibration of instruments shall be performed by the Instrumentation and Control Systems Contractor (ICSC). 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 20. B. Product Data: 1. Complete manufacturer’s brochures identify instrument construction, accuracy, ranges, materials, and options. 2. Completed instrument data sheets including catalog number and source for determining catalog number. 3. Manufacturer’s installation instructions. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT FLOW-MAGNETIC WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 71 13 - 2 C. Shop Drawings: 1. Mechanical connection diagrams. 2. Sensor transducer mounting requirements with dimensions and elevations. 3. Electrical connection diagrams. D. Test Reports: 1. Certified factory and field calibration data sheets for instruments and devices that require set-up and calibration. a. Including factory calibration for each instrument with stated accuracy. E. Operating Manuals: 1. Certified factory and field calibration data sheets for instruments and devices that require set-up and calibration. a. Including factory calibration for each instrument with stated accuracy. 2. Complete installation, calibration, and testing manuals. F. Record Drawings: 1. Complete field calibration sheets, including range, span, PLC/PAC I/O address, register, and scaling coefficients. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer’s representative shall be responsible for proving flow meter operation and 4- 20 ma loop accuracy. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store all instruments in a dedicated van or structure with space conditioning to meet the recommended storage requirements provided by the manufacturer. 1. Any instruments that are not stored in strict conformance with the manufacturer’s recommendation shall be replaced at no additional costs to the Owner. 1.8 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. All instruments must be compatible for the installed site conditions including but not limited to material compatibility, site altitude, installed temperature and humidity conditions. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Furnish manufacturer’s standard warranty, modified to agree with the Contract Documents. 1.10 MAINTENANCE A. Provide a spare pipe spool for each meter size to be used in the event the meter tube must be removed. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT FLOW-MAGNETIC WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 71 13 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Hardware Commonality: 1. All instruments, which utilize a common measurement principle, for example, d/p cells, pressure transmitters, level transmitters that monitor hydrostatic head, shall be furnished by a single Manufacturer. 2. All panel-mounted instruments shall have matching style and general appearance. 3. Instruments performing similar functions shall be of the same type, model, or class, and shall be from a single Manufacturer. 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Flow Meters: 1. Magnetic Flow Meters. a. General: 1) Magnetic flowmeter systems shall be of the low frequency electromagnetic induction type and produce a DC-pulsed linear signal which is directly proportional to the liquid flow rate. 2) Complete zero stability shall be an inherent characteristic of the flowmeter system. 3) Each magnetic flow metering system shall include: a) A metering tube. b) Signal cable. c) Transmitter. d) Flow meter grounding rings. b. Source quality control. 1) Shall be manufactured at facilities certified to the quality standards of ISO Standard 9001 - Quality Systems - Model for Quality Assurance in Design/Development, Production, Installation, and Servicing. c. Metering tube: 1) Constructed of 316 stainless steel 2) Utilize a minimum of 2 bullet-nosed, self-cleaning electrodes. 3) Liner in conformance with: a) As identified on the instrument data sheet. b) Manufacturer’s recommendations for the intended service. c) Whichever is the more stringent. 4) Electrodes in conformance with: a) As identified on the instrument data sheet. b) Manufacturer’s recommendations for the intended service. c) Whichever is the more stringent. 5) Meter housing NEMA 4X corrosive conditions. 6) Meter coating consisting of epoxy painted finish. 7) Two grounding rings: a) Which are in conformance with the Manufacturer’s bore and material recommendation for the meter’s intended service. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT FLOW-MAGNETIC WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 71 13 - 4 b) Designed to protect and shield from abrasion the liner’s edge interface at the meter’s end. d. Transmitter. 1) Microprocessor-based signal converter/transmitter. 2) Utilize DC-pulse technique to drive flux-producing coils. 3) Contain a 6-digit display for flow rate, percent of span, and totalizer. 4) Operator interface consisting of keypads which respond to English text entry. 5) Integral zero return to provide a consistent zero output signal in response to an external dry contact closure. 6) Integral low flow cut-off zero return. 7) Automatic range change. 8) Programmable parameters including: a) Meter size. b) Full scale flow rate. c) Magnetic field frequency. d) Time constant. 9) Data retention for a minimum of 5 years without auxiliary main or battery power. 10) Self-diagnostics and automatic data checking. 11) Protected terminals and fuses in a separate compartment which isolates field connection from electronics. 12) Ambient operating temperature limits of -29 to 60 °C (-20 to 140 °F). e. Performance requirements: 1) Time constant: a) 0.5 to 1,000 seconds. 2) Accuracy: a) 0.25 percent of flow rate from 10 to 100 percent of full scale for velocities over 3 ft per second. 3) Repeatability: a) 0.25 percent of full scale. 4) Isolation: a) Galvanic or. b) Optical. 5) Power supply: a) 120VAC or 24VDC. Refer to drawings. 6) Output/Input signal: a) Output signal: Measured range – Current 0/4 to 20 mA; f. Factory testing: 1) Each flow metering system shall be hydraulically calibrated at a facility which is traceable to the National Institute of Testing Standards. 2) The calibration procedure shall conform to the requirements of MIL- STD-45662A. 3) A real-time computer generated printout of the actual calibration data indicating apparent and actual flows at 20%, 40%, 60%, 80% and 100% of the calibrated range shall be submitted to the Engineer at least thirty (30) days prior to shipment of the meters to the project site. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT FLOW-MAGNETIC WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 71 13 - 5 g. Manufacturers: 1) Siemens MAG 5100W for Water, Siemens MAG 6000 Transmitter (remote-mounted), and Siemens MAG 6000 Modbus TRU-RS485 Module. 2) Or, Engineer/Owner Pre-approved Equals. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. All instruments and/or representative instruments shall be calibrated in facilities and with instruments traceable to the National Bureau of Standards. 1. Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of all calibration instruments. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine the complete set of plans, the process fluids, pressures, flowrates, and temperatures and furnish instruments that are compatible with installed process condition. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate the installation with all trades to ensure that the mechanical system has all necessary appurtenances. Weld-o-lets, valves, upstream diameters, downstream diameters, etc. for proper installation of the instruments. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. All instruments shall be installed in strict conformance with the manufacture’s recommendations. 1. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to install all instruments in conformance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to notify the Engineer of any installation conditions that may be shown at variance with the manufacturer’s recommendations 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The ICSC shall calibrate all instruments in the field during the Calibration and Loop Validation Tests as identified in Section 40 61 00. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. All instruments shall be field calibrated to match the installed conditions. 3.6 CLEANING A. All instrument enclosures shall be vacuumed clean after calibration and before commissioning. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT FLOW-MAGNETIC WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 71 13 - 6 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Performance of all instruments shall be demonstrated to the Engineer prior to commissioning. B. All instrument calibration shall be witnessed by the Owner’s Representative. C. Each and every instrument shall be tested during the Loop Validation Tests and the Owner’s Representative shall witness the response in the PLC/PAC control system and associated registers. 3.8 PROTECTION A. All instruments shall be fully protected after installation and before commissioning. The Contractor shall replace any instruments damaged prior to commissioning. B. The Engineer shall be the sole party responsible for determining the corrective measures. 3.9 SCHEDULES A. The Contractor shall supply complete instrument data sheets for each and every instrument and submit this information in accordance with paragraph 1.5 of this section. 1. Instrument data sheets shall be furnished in both hard copy and electronic format. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT LEVEL-SWITCHES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 72 76 - 1 SECTION 40 72 76 LEVEL-SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Instruments for instrumentation and control systems that are to be permanently installed. 2. Level switches and floats used for level measurement. a. Reed. B. Related Sections: 1. Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the Contractor and its Sub-Contractors to review all sections to Ensure a complete and coordinated project. 1.2 REFERENCES A. All instruments shall comply with the latest edition and standards of the Instrumentation Systems and Automation Society. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the: 1. NEC: National Electrical Code. 2. IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. 3. ISA: Instrumentation Systems and Automation Society. 4. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Furnish all instruments as identified on the Drawings. B. Install and connect all instruments as per the manufacturer’s recommendations for the particular installation. 1.5 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with Sections 01 33 20. B. Product Data: 1. Complete manufacturer’s brochures identify instrument construction, accuracy, ranges, materials, and options. 2. Completed instrument data sheets including catalog number and source for determining catalog number. 3. Manufacturer’s installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT LEVEL-SWITCHES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 72 76 - 2 1. Mechanical connection diagrams. 2. Sensor transducer mounting requirements with dimensions and elevations. 3. Electrical connection diagrams. D. Record Drawings: 1. Complete field calibration sheets, including range, span, PLC/PAC I/O address, register, and scaling coefficients. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store all instruments in a dedicated storage structure with space conditioning to meet the recommended storage requirements provided by the manufacturer. 1. Any instruments that are not stored in strict conformance with the manufacturer’s recommendation shall be replaced at no additional costs to the Owner. 1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. All instruments must be compatible for the installed site conditions including but not limited to material compatibility, site altitude, installed temperature and humidity conditions. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Furnish manufacturer’s standard warranty, modified to agree with the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. As identified on Drawings. B. Hardware Commonality: 1. All instruments which utilize a common measurement principle, for example, d/p cells, pressure transmitters, level transmitters which monitor hydrostatic head, shall be furnished by a single Manufacturer. 2. All panel mounted instruments shall have matching style and general appearance. 3. Instruments performing similar functions shall be of the same type, model, or class, and shall be from a single Manufacturer. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Flood Switch 1. SPST dry reed switch potted into the float stem. 2. The float, which contains a small magnet, is lifted by the liquid. As the magnet passes the reed switch, the switch opens. 3. Housing: Epoxy coated die cast aluminum, NEMA 4 integrity. 4. Housing Gaskets: Neoprene. 5. Thread Size: 2" - 11 ½ NPT. 6. Pressure: 125 psig. 7. Temperature: a. Buna- N float +180°F. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT LEVEL-SWITCHES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 72 76 - 3 b. Stainless Steel Float +240°F. 8. Contact Rating: 50 watts (1/2 amp max switching current). 9. Specific gravity: a. Buna- N float liquid over 0.6. b. Stainless Steel Float liquid over 0.8. 10. Fitting material: 316 Stainless Steel. 11. Rod material: 304 Stainless Steel. 12. Float Stem Material: 316 Stainless Steel. 13. Float material: Buna-N. 14. As manufactured by: a. Gems LS-1700 Series. b. Gems LS-270 Series. c. Dwyer F7 Series. d. Or, Engineer Approved Equal. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. All instruments and/or representative instruments shall be calibrated to in facilities and with instruments traceable to the National Bureau of Standards. 1. Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of all calibration instruments. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine the complete set of plans, the process fluids, pressures, and temperatures and furnish instruments that are compatible with installed process condition. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate the installation with all trades to insure that the mechanical system has all necessary appurtenances, including weld-o-lets, valves, upstream diameters, downstream diameters, etc. for proper installation of the instruments. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. All instruments shall be installed in strict conformance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 1. It is the ICSC’s responsibility to install all instruments in conformance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. It is the ICSC’s responsibility to notify the Engineer of any installation conditions that may be shown at variance with the manufacturer’s recommendations 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The ICSC shall calibrate all instruments in the field during the Calibration and Loop Validation Tests as identified in Section 40 61 00. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT LEVEL-SWITCHES WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 72 76 - 4 3.5 ADJUSTING A. All instruments shall be field calibrated to match the installed conditions. 3.6 CLEANING A. All instrument enclosures shall be vacuumed clean after calibration and before commissioning. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Performance of all instruments shall be demonstrated to the Engineer prior to commissioning. B. All instrument calibration shall be witnessed by the Owner’s Representative. C. Each and every instrument shall be tested during the Loop Validation Tests and the Owner’s Representative shall witness the response in the PLC/PAC control system and associated registers. 3.8 PROTECTION A. All instruments shall be fully protected after installation and before commissioning. The Contractor shall replace any instruments damaged prior to commissioning. 1. The Engineer shall be the sole party responsible for determining the corrective measures. 3.9 SCHEDULES A. The ICSC shall supply complete instrument data sheets for each and every instrument and submit this information in accordance with Paragraph 1.5 of this section. 1. Instrument data sheets shall be furnished in both hard copy and electronic format. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICES DISTRICT CONTROL PANEL INSTRUMENTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 78 00 - 1 SECTION 40 78 00 CONTROL PANEL INSTRUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. General: This section sets forth the general specification and requirements for the devices that shall be located within and on control panels to form a complete and operable system. B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the Contractor and its Sub-Contractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. In accordance with Section 40 61 00 -- Process Control and Instrumentation Systems General. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. In accordance with Section 40 61 00. B. Analog measurements and control signals shall: 1. Be electrical as indicated herein, and shall vary in direct linear proportion to the measured variable, except as noted. 2. Electrical signals outside control panels shall be 4-20 mA DC, except as noted. 3. Signals within enclosures may be 4-20 mA DC, except as noted. 4. Dropping resistors shall be installed at all field side terminations in the control panels to ensure loop integrity, as required. C. All control panels shall each be provided with power supplies which are configured to match the voltage and current requirements of the load. D. Each 120 VAC control loop and instrument shall have an individual fuse or circuit breaker within its respective control panel and clearly identified for function. E. Each 120 VAC and 24 VDC PLC output shall have its own individual fuse external of the I/O card, with blown fused indication. 1. Size external fuse to open before any I/O card mounted fuses. F. Signal Isolators, Signal Converters, and Power Supplies: 1. Signal isolators shall be furnished and installed in each measurement and control loop, wherever required: a. To ensure adjacent component impedance match. b. Where feedback paths may be generated. c. To maintain loop integrity when the removal of a component of a loop is required. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICES DISTRICT CONTROL PANEL INSTRUMENTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 78 00 - 2 2. Signal converters shall be included where required to resolve any signal level incompatibilities. G. Separate signal power supplies shall be included, as required by the manufacturer's instrument load characteristics, to ensure sufficient power to each loop component. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with: 1. Section 40 61 00, "Process Control and Instrumentation Systems General." 2. Refer to individual instrument and device specifications for additional submittal requirements. B. Additional submittal requirements. 1. Circuit Breakers. a. Provide a complete schedule showing load and rating of circuit breakers. 2. Control Fuses. a. Provide a complete schedule and fuse coordination study. 3. Control Power Transformers. a. Provide complete sizing calculations in accordance with the requirements of Control Power Section of this Specification Section. 1.5 ASSURANCE A. In accordance with Section 40 61 00, "Process Control and Instrumentation Systems General." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. In accordance with Section 40 61 00, "Process Control and Instrumentation Systems General." 1.7 PROJECT / SITE CONDITIONS A. In accordance with Section 40 61 00, "Process Control and Instrumentation Systems General." 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. In accordance with Section 40 61 00, "Process Control and Instrumentation Systems General." B. All control panel testing shall be performed prior to shipping. 1.9 WARRANTY A. In accordance with Section 40 61 00, "Process Control and Instrumentation Systems General." 1.10 MAINTENANCE A. In accordance with Section 40 61 00, "Process Control and Instrumentation Systems General." B. Spares BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICES DISTRICT CONTROL PANEL INSTRUMENTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 78 00 - 3 1. All unused inputs and outputs from the PLC/PAC shall be wired to field terminal blocks and identified. 2. Furnish one spare normally open and one spare normally closed dry contact for each push-button, selector switch, relay, etc. 3. Furnish five spare fuses for each and every fuse type in the panel. 4. Furnish 15 spare terminal blocks or 25%, whichever is greater. 5. All spare contacts of relays, switches, etc., shall be internally wired to terminal blocks. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. All panel-mounted instruments shall have matching style and general appearance. B. Instruments performing similar functions shall be of the same type, model, or class, and shall be of one manufacturer. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Signal Isolators, Converters, and Power Supplies 1. Signal isolators shall be furnished and installed in each measurement and control loop, wherever required, to ensure adjacent component impedance match, or where feedback paths may be generated. 2. Signal converters shall be included where required to resolve any signal level incompatibilities. 3. Signal power supplies shall be included, as required by the manufacturer's instrument load characteristics, to ensure sufficient power to each loop component. 4. Signal isolators shall have complete isolation of input, output and power input. a. Signal input shall be 4-20 mA into 50 Ω, maximum. b. Signal output shall be 4-20 mA into 1000 Ω, minimum. c. Power input shall be 120 VAC, 60 Hz. d. Span and zero shall be adjustable. e. Accuracy shall be ±1 percent of span. f. Units shall be surface, DIN-rail, or rack mounted. 5. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Acromag. b. AGM Electronics Model TA-4000. c. Turck d. Or, Engineer Approved Equal. B. Relays 1. General Purpose Relays: a. General purpose relays shall be plug-in type b. Contacts rated 10 Amps at 120 VAC c. With LED indication for energization d. With push-to-test button e. Quantity and type of contacts shall be as shown on the Drawings or as needed for system compatibility. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICES DISTRICT CONTROL PANEL INSTRUMENTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 78 00 - 4 f. Each relay shall be enclosed in a clear plastic heat and shock resistant dust cover. g. Sockets for relays shall have screw-type terminals. h. Provide transient surge protection across the coil of each relay. i. Relays shall be: 1) Potter and Brumfield Type KRP or KUP. 2) IDEC. 3) Square D Type K. 4) Allen Bradley. 5) Or, Engineer Approved Equal. 2. Slave Interposing Relays: a. Additional slave relays shall be provided when the number or type of contacts shown exceed the contact capacity of the specified relays and timers. b. Additional relays shall be provided when higher contact rating is required to interface with starter circuits or other equipment. c. Shall be provided to compensate for voltage drop due to long wire runs. d. The slave and interposing relays shall be as the general-purpose relays. e. Provide transient surge protection across the coil of each relay. 3. Control Relays a. Including all electrically held relays, pneumatic time delay relays, mechanically latch relays, solid state time relays where the number of contacts exceed those available with the general-purpose relays. b. Convertible contact cartridges to convert any contact from a normally open to a normally closed configuration. c. Contact material shall be fine grade silver. d. Contact cartridges to be enclosed having a clear cover to allow for inspection of the contacts. e. Contact rating NEMA A600. f. Control Voltage 120 VAC. g. Provide transient surge protectors across the coil of each control relay. h. As manufactured by: 1) Allen Bradley 700P. 2) Square D850 Type X. 3) Cutler Hammer AR. 4) IDEC. 5) SquareD. 6) Or, Engineer Approved Equal. 4. Time Delay Relays a. Time delay relays shall be pneumatic on-delay or off-delay type. b. Contacts shall be rated 10 Amps at 120 VAC. c. Units shall include adjustable dial with graduated scale covering the time range in each case. d. Provide transient surge protection across the coil of each relay. e. As manufactured by: 1) Agastat Series 7000. 2) Allen-Bradley. 3) IDEC. 4) SquareD. 5) Or, Engineer Approved Equal. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICES DISTRICT CONTROL PANEL INSTRUMENTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 78 00 - 5 C. Digital Process Indicator 1. Digital process indicators shall be self-contained instruments that display process signals directly in engineering units. 2. The unit shall be suitable for panel mounting and shall utilize a seven segment LED display of not less than 0.56-inch height. 3. Features. a. Multi-range capabilities. b. Integral provisions for scaling. c. Switch programmable decimal points. 4. NEMA 4 / IP65 sealed front metal bezel. 5. Current and Voltage loop indicators. a. Current-loop indicators as shown on the drawings or as required by the instrumentation. b. Voltage-loop indicators as shown on the drawings or as required by the instrumentation. c. 3 ½ - digit. d. Accuracy shall meet or exceed the following requirements. 1) DC Volts : ±0.1% of reading + 1 digit. 2) AC Volts : ±0.1% of reading + 2 digits (45-500 Hz). 3) DC Current : a) 199.9μA : ±0.1% of reading + 1 digit. b) 1.999mA : ±0.1% of reading + 1 digit. c) 19.99mA : ±0.1% of reading + 1 digit. d) 199.9mA : ±0.15% of reading + 1 digit. e) 1.999A : ±0.5% of reading + 1 digit. 4) AC Current (45-500 Hz) : a) 199.9μA : ±0.1% of reading + 2 digits. b) 1.999mA : ±0.1% of reading + 2 digits. c) 19.99mA : ±0.1% of reading + 2 digits. d) 199.9mA : ±0.15% of reading + 2 digits. e) 1.999A : ±0.5% of reading + 2 digits. e. Ratings, protection, and indication: 1) Maximum voltage on terminal blocks 300 VAC or VDC. 2) Maximum voltage on basic range inputs 75 VAC ro VDC. 3) Maximum shunt current a) For 199.9μA : 2 Ma. b) For 1.999mA : 20 mA. c) For 19.99mA : 200 mA. d) For 199.9mA : 1 A. e) For 1.999A : 3 A. f. Power supply as indicated on the drawings or required by the system: 1) 120 VAC. 2) 230 VAC. g. Operating Temperature 1) 32°F – 140°F (0° C to 60°C). D. Manual Operator Interface Devices. 1. Control Components - Oil Tight BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICES DISTRICT CONTROL PANEL INSTRUMENTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 78 00 - 6 a. All operators, pushbutton, selector switches, and pilot lights are to be of the same manufacturer. b. NEMA Type 13 oil-tight. c. With synthetic rubber gasket. d. Heavy duty. e. Industrial grade full size 1-3/16" (30 mm) diameter. f. Pushbutton units: 1) Contacts rated a) NEMA A600 b) 600 VAC maximum c) Make = 7,200 VA d) Break = 720 VA 2) Color Code a) Red: Stop b) Green: Start c) Orange: Open d) Blue: Closed 3) As manufactured by a) Allen Bradley 800T Series. b) SquareD Harmony 9001SK Series. c) IDEC TWTD Series. d) Cutler Hammer 10250T Series. e) Or, Engineer Approved Equal. 4) Furnish one spare normally open and normally closed contact with each switch. g. Selector switches 1) Contacts rated a) NEMA A600 b) 600 VAC maximum c) Make = 7,200 VA d) Break = 720 VA 2) As manufactured by a) Allen Bradley 800T Series. b) SquareD Harmony 9001SK Series. c) IDEC CS Series. d) Cutler Hammer 10250T Series. e) Or, Engineer Approved Equal. 3) Furnish one spare normally open contact and normally closed contact with each switch. h. Pilot lights 1) Transformer type pilot lights 2) 120 VAC 3) Push-to-Test 4) Provide indicating light colors as follows: a) White: Power On b) Green: On / Running c) Red: Off d) Amber: Abnormal / Alarm Condition / Failure e) Blue: Closed BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICES DISTRICT CONTROL PANEL INSTRUMENTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 78 00 - 7 5) As manufactured by a) Allen Bradley 800T Series. b) SquareD Harmony 9001SK Series. c) IDEC TWTD Series. d) Cutler Hammer 10250T Series. e) Or, Engineer Approved Equal. 2. Control Components Corrosive Areas a. All operators, pushbuttons, selector switches, pilot lights are to be of the same manufacturer. b. NEMA 4X corrosion resistant. c. Exterior parts to be made of high impact strength fiberglass reinforced polyester. d. Incorporating an internal neoprene boot which completely encloses all internal parts. e. Industrial grade full size 1-3/16" (30mm) diameter. f. Pushbutton: 1) Having an integral wiping gasket around the pushbutton that cleans the wall of the pushbutton guard of any foreign material accumulation as the button is operated. 2) Contacts rated: a) NEMA A600. b) 600 VAC maximum. c) Make = 7,200 VA. d) Break = 720 VA. 3) Color code: a) Red: Stop / Off b) Green: Start / On c) Orange: Alarm / Failure d) Blue: Open 4) As manufactured by: a) Cutler Hammer 10250T Series. b) SquareD Harmony 9001SK Series. c) Allen Bradley 800H Series. d) Or, Engineer Approved Equal. g. Selector switches: 1) Contacts rated: a) NEMA A600. b) 600 VAC minimum. c) Make = 7,200 VA. d) Break = 720 VA. 2) As manufactured by: a) Cutler Hammer 10250T Series. b) SquareD Harmony 9001SK Series. c) Allen Bradley 800H Series. d) Or, Engineer Approved Equal. h. Pilot lights: 1) Transformer type pilot lights. 2) 120 VAC. 3) Corrosion resistant. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICES DISTRICT CONTROL PANEL INSTRUMENTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 78 00 - 8 4) Push-to-Test. 5) With LED type lamps 6) Provide indicating light colors as follows: a) White: Power On / Normal Condition b) Green: On / Running c) Red: Off / Stopped d) Amber: Abnormal / Alarm Condition / Failure e) Blue: Closed 7) As manufactured by: a) Cutler Hammer 10250T Series. b) SquareD Harmony 9001SK Series. c) Allen Bradley 800H Series. d) Or, Engineer Approved Equal. E. Terminal Blocks 1. Field terminal or inter-cabinet wiring blocks. a. DIN-Rail Mounted. b. Terminal to be screw type. c. Recessed terminal hardware to minimize the possibility of contact with current carrying parts. d. Molded of high dielectric material. e. Minimum rating 600 VAC. f. All external connections to and from all control panels must be via terminal blocks including control circuits and solenoid circuits. g. All individual terminals and terminal blocks shall be marked in a permanent manner with printed identification. h. Grounding Terminals blocks shall be Green/Yellow i. As manufactured by: 1) Allen Bradley 2) Phoenix Contact. 3) Wago. 4) ABB/Entrelec. 5) Or, Engineer Approved Equal. F. Conductors Within Control Panel 1. Wire markers: a. All conductors within the control panel are to be permanently marked with wire numbers at each end. b. Wire numbers are to correspond to the wire numbers on the control drawings and as detailed in Section 26 05 53. c. Wire numbers are to correspond to the terminal block number to which they are attached in the control panel. d. Markers shall comply with the requirements of Section 26 05 53. G. Nameplates 1. In conformance and full compliance with Section 26 05 53. a. All control components within the control panel shall have engraved laminated plastic nameplates secured with stainless steel screws or epoxy BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICES DISTRICT CONTROL PANEL INSTRUMENTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 78 00 - 9 cemented in place. Nameplates cannot be attached to the covers of the panel channel. 2. All components on the front cover shall be identified by nameplates. a. Use standard manufacturer engraved nameplates for all pushbuttons, and selector switches only if color matches that specified for engraved nameplates. 1) If not then furnish nameplates to match colors as specified in Section 26 05 53. b. Use engraved plastic laminated nameplates for all other devices, keyboards, and annunciator LED's. c. All control panels shall have an engraved, plastic, laminated nameplate identifying the control panel, voltage, and feeder breaker and panel. d. On NEMA 4X enclosures use an epoxy based adhesive to affix nameplates to panel. 3. Shall be provided for instruments, function titles for each group of instruments, and other components mounted on the front of panel. 4. A nameplate shall be provided for each signal transducer, signal converter, signal isolator, each electronic trip, and the like, mounted inside the panel. These shall be descriptive, to define the function and system of such element. 5. Lettering, styles, abbreviations and sizes shall be in conformance with ISA-RP-60.6 (1984) with an intended viewing distance of 3 to 6-feet as shown or as selected by the Engineer. H. Control Circuit Breakers. 1. Each 120 VAC control circuit, instrument, or loop shall be powered from an individual control circuit breaker or fused terminal block. 2. DIN-Rail mounted using the same DIN-Rail as used for the terminal blocks. 3. Manual ON-OFF Switch 4. Rated 240 VAC. 5. Rated 2000 AIC. 6. Current Ratings as required. 7. Provide complete nameplate identifying each circuit. a. In conformance with Section 26 05 53. 8. As manufactured by: a. ABB S200 Series. b. Siemens 5S Series. c. Allen-Bradley 1489/1492 Series. d. Schneider Electric Multi 9 Series. e. SquareD QYU Series. f. Or, Engineer Approved Equal. I. Fuses 1. Isolate Group of PLC/PAC with fuses as detailed in the Contract Drawings. 2. Isolate Group of PLC/PAC Digital Inputs with fuses as detailed in the Contract Drawings. 3. Isolate all PLC/PAC Analog inputs with fuses as detailed in the Contract Drawings. 4. Coordinate fuse size below internal output protection of the PLC/PAC output cards. 5. Fuses to be terminal block mounted. a. With Lighted Fuse Puller. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICES DISTRICT CONTROL PANEL INSTRUMENTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 78 00 - 10 6. Furnish Nameplate identifying each fuse. a. Section 26 05 53. 7. Spare Fuses in conformance with paragraph 1.11 of this Section. 8. As manufactured by: a. Allen-Bradley. b. ABB/Entrelec. c. Phoenix Contact. d. Wago. e. Or, Engineer Approved Equal. J. Field/Remote Connections 1. All field/remote connections shall be made via terminal blocks. 2. Furnish an individual terminal block space for each wire. a. Two wires on one terminal block shall be not be allowed. 3. Furnish an empty wire channel on the panel adjacent to the field/remote terminal block strip to be used to route the field/remote wires prior to connection to the terminal blocks. 4. Spare terminal blocks in conformance with paragraph 1.11 of this Section. K. Control Voltage. 1. Control voltage shall be supplied via control circuit breakers in the control panel. 2. Control power shall be sourced from the 120 VAC power within the control panel, unless otherwise noted in the plans. 3. Control voltage shall be supplied via a control circuit in the control panel. L. Transient / Surge Protection 1. Control Panel Power System Level Protection; if not powered by an internally installed uninterruptable power supply (UPS). a. The control system manufacturer shall provide protection against voltage surges for all instrumentation furnished under this contract. 1) Protection shall protect all instrumentation assemblies, components and board mounted electronic devices from damages in the event of direct hit by lightning onto any power line. 2) Instrumentation line or disturbances device within the facility. 3) Voltage surges from other sources. b. Provide protection against the full spectrum of voltage transients including the relatively rare high energy transients as well as the much more frequent low energy and high frequency noise. c. Provide fill in for short term notches up to 50 microseconds. and ANSI C62.41 Category A attenuation. d. Provide normal mode noise protection (noise between current carrying conductors). e. Shall consist of a system that includes transient voltage surge suppression and an active tracking filter. f. Meeting the following requirements: 1) Response time: a) Normal Mode - Less than 1 nanosecond. b) Common Mode - Less than 5 nanoseconds. 2) Safety approvals: BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICES DISTRICT CONTROL PANEL INSTRUMENTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 78 00 - 11 a) UL 1233 (EMI/RFI Filter). b) UL 1449. 3) Mean-time between failures: a) Greater than 100,000 hours. 4) Frequency response EMI/RFI small signal RFI or large signal transients. 5) Surge energy capacity: a) 120 VAC: Line-Neutral, Line-Ground, Neutral-Ground = 160 Joules, Total 480 Joules. b) 240 VAC: Line 1 - Line 2, Line 1 - Ground, Line 2 - Ground = 280 Joules. Total 340 Joules. 6) Peak surge current capacity (8 x 20 μsec): a) 6,500 Amperes. b) 39,900 Amperes total. g. As manufactured by: 1) Accuvar by Control Concepts a subsidiary of Liebert Corporation. 2) ASCO Model 252 (formerly Liebert Emerson/Edco HSP121BT01RU). 3) Schneider Electric Surgelogic LC/XR/XW Series. 4) Thomas&Betts Joslyn TransEnd Series. 5) Or, Engineer Approved Equal. 2. Data and Signal Line Protectors to be used on each and every signal line: a. Provide electronic circuits and components from damaging surge voltages and currents. b. Provide protection of signal and data lines associated with computer, data communications, instrumentation, broadcasting, and industrial control interfaces. c. Shall be used directly with EIA standard interfaces: 1) RS-485. 2) Modbus/ModbusTCP 3) 4-20 mA instrumentation loops. 4) ProfiNet d. Repeatedly provide protection against surge currents in excess of 10,000 Amps. e. DIN-Rail mounted. f. Cable shields shall be passed through and may be either grounded or not grounded at the protector. g. System: 1) Heavy duty multi-staged protectors. 2) Solid state stage intercepts the leading edge of the surge with sub- nanosecond response time. 3) Within micro-seconds, a 3-pole common chambered gas tube capable of handling 20,000 ampere lightning current operates and crowbars the surge to ground. 4) The protector remains in the crowbar state until the surge has passed and line voltages return to safe levels. h. Location: 1) Place at each end of a signal line, data line, or current loop. 2) In the case of daisy chain configuration, such as RS-485, protectors shall be placed at each node. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICES DISTRICT CONTROL PANEL INSTRUMENTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 78 00 - 12 i. Electrical Characteristics: 1) Surge Life: a) Greater than 1000 operations with 200 Amps, 10 x 1000 μsec. b) Greater than 10 operations with 10,000 Amps, 8 x 20 μsec. 2) Leakage current at rate line to ground voltage < 10 μAmps. 3) Signal/Data attenuation at maximum data rate 3 db with 600 Ω terminations 4) Operating temperature -40°F – +140°F (-40°C – +60°C). j. As manufactured by: 1) Joslyn: a) For differential signals, such as RS-422 or RS-485, and current loops - Model 1820. b) For high frequency differential signals and current loops - Model 1821. c) For line to ground protection, two separate circuits, and ground referenced signals (RS-232) and 4-20 mA loops where the return wire is grounded at the protector - Model 1810. 2) Interlink BT a) For Profibus 3) Pepperl+Fuchs a) For Profibus 3. Protection from inductive spikes within the control panel. a. Provide surge protection across all inductive coils for control relays, starters, solenoids, etc., as noted. M. Maintenance Bypass Switch: 1. An external maintenance bypass switch shall be installed in the control panel to provide isolation of the UPS from the power line and loads for maintenance purposes 2. Shall be of the make before break design or have a sufficiently short transfer time so that the UPS can be isolated from the critical loads by placing these loads on commercial power without interruption of operation. 3. This applies to both forward and back transfer of the switch. 4. Shall be rated to carry the full input current of the UPS. 5. Manufacturers: a. Liebert Micro POD. b. Or, Engineer Approved Equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. In accordance with Section 40 61 00, "Process Control and Instrumentation Systems General." 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Control panel installation shall be provided in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 40 61 00, "Process Control and Instrumentation Systems General.", and the requirements of Division 26. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICES DISTRICT CONTROL PANEL INSTRUMENTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 78 00 - 13 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. In accordance with Section 40 61 00, "Process Control and Instrumentation Systems General." 3.4 CLEANING A. In accordance with Section 40 61 00, "Process Control and Instrumentation Systems General." 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. In accordance with Section 40 61 00, "Process Control and Instrumentation Systems General." 3.6 SCHEDULES A. All control panel testing shall be performed prior to shipping. B. In accordance with Section 40 61 00, "Process Control and Instrumentation Systems." 3.7 TRAINING A. In accordance with Section 40 61 00, "Process Control and Instrumentation Systems." END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICES DISTRICT CONTROL PANEL INSTRUMENTS WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 40 78 00 - 14 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK DIVISION 43 GAS, LIQUID, AND STORAGE THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PUMPS, GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 43 20 10 - 1 SECTION 43 20 10 PUMPS, GENERAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall provide all pumps and pumping appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all pumps and pumping equipment except where otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents. C. Unit Responsibility: A single manufacturer shall be made responsible for furnishing the Work and for coordination of design, assembly, testing, and installation of the Work of each pump Section; however, the Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for compliance with the requirements of each pump Section. Unless otherwise indicated, the single Manufacturer shall be the Manufacturer of the pump. D. Single Manufacturer: Where two or more pump systems of the same type or size are required, the pumps shall all be produced by the same Manufacturer. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. General: Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01 33 20 - Contractor Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall contain the following information: 1. Pump name, identification number, and specification Section number. 2. Performance data curves showing head, capacity, horsepower demand, NPSH required, and pump efficiency over the entire operating range of the pump. The equipment Manufacturer shall indicate separately the head, capacity, horsepower demand, overall efficiency, and minimum submergence required at the design flow conditions and the maximum and minimum flow conditions. A family of performance curves at intervals of 100 rpm from minimum speed to maximum speed shall be provided for each centrifugal pump equipped with a variable frequency drive. 3. The Contractor shall require the Manufacturer to indicate on the performance curves the limits recommended for stable operation without surge, without cavitation, and without vibration (except vibration within specified allowable limits). The stable operating range shall be as wide as possible based on actual hydraulic and mechanical measurements taken during the factory performance tests of the pumps. 4. Assembly and installation drawings including shaft size, seal, coupling, bearings, anchor bolt plan, part nomenclature, material list, outline dimensions, and shipping weights. 5. Data, in accordance with Section 26 20 00 Low Voltage AC Induction Motors OR, for the electric motor proposed for each pump. 6. Elevation of proposed Local Control Panel showing panel-mounted devices, details of enclosure type, single line diagram of power distribution, and current draw of panel, BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PUMPS, GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 43 20 10 - 2 and list of all terminals required to receive inputs or to transmit outputs from the Local Control Panel. 7. Wiring diagram of field connections with identification of terminations between Local Control Panels, junction terminal boxes, and equipment items. 8. Complete electrical schematic diagram. C. Operation and Maintenance Manual: The Manual shall contain the required information for each pump Section. D. Spare Parts List: A Spare Parts List shall contain the required information for each pump Section. E. Factory Test Data: Signed, dated, and certified factory test data for each pump system which requires factory testing, submitted before shipment of equipment. F. Certifications 1. Manufacturer's certification of proper installation. 2. Contractor's certification of satisfactory field testing. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Factory Testing: The following tests shall be conducted on each indicated pump system: 1. Motors: All motors of sizes 100 hp and larger shall be assembled, tested, and certified at the motor factory and the working clearances checked to insure that all parts are properly fitted. The tests shall be in accordance with ANSI/IEEE 112 - Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators, and ANSI/IEEE 115 - Test Procedure for Synchronous Machines, including heat run and efficiency tests. All computations shall be recorded and certified and dated copies of the test results shall be furnished. 2. Pump Systems: All centrifugal pump systems 100 hp and larger shall be tested at the pump factory in accordance with the Test Code for Centrifugal Pumps of the Standards of the Hydraulic Institute, Inc., Performance Acceptance Test Grade 1B. Tests shall be performed using the complete pump system to be furnished, including the motor. 3. For motors smaller than 100 hp, the Manufacturer's certified test motor shall be acceptable. Testing of prototype models will not be acceptable. The following minimum test data shall be submitted: a. Hydrostatic test data b. A minimum of five hydraulic test readings between shutoff head and 25 percent beyond the maximum indicated capacity, recorded on data sheets as defined by the Hydraulic Institute. c. Pump curves showing head, flow, bhp, efficiency, and NPSH requirements. d. Certification that the pump horsepower demand did not exceed the rated motor hp beyond the 1.0 service rating at any point on the curve. not change unless the style definition is changed. 4. Factory Witnessed Tests: Witness Tests are not required. B. Warranty: Unless otherwise specified, each pump shall be supplied with manufacturer’s standard warranty of one (1) year from substantial completion. a. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PUMPS, GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 43 20 10 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Compliance with the requirements of the individual pump Sections may necessitate modifications to the Manufacturer's standard equipment. B. Performance Curves: All centrifugal pumps shall have a continuously rising curve. In no case shall the required horsepower at any point on the performance curve exceed the rated horsepower of the motor or engine, or encroach on the service factor. C. No cavitation shall be allowed in pumps operating within the stable operating range for the specified operating conditions. For the purposes of this provision, cavitation shall be recognized and accepted as being present in a pumping unit if cavitation noi se can be perceived either by the human ear or by acoustic instruments or devices. The presence or absence of cavitation noise shall be verified by the Owner during both the factory performance tests of the pumps and during operation of the pumps up to the end of the warranty period. To assist in revealing potential cavitation during the factory performance tests, in addition to all other required tests, the Manufacturer shall force the pumps to operate at the specified minimum net positive suction head available for each of the following conditions: minimum flow rate, design flow rate and head, and maximum flow rate. D. All components of each pump system provided under the pump Sections shall be entirely compatible. Each unit of pumping equipment shall incorporate all basic mechanisms, couplings, electric motors, variable frequency controls if required, necessary mountings, and appurtenances. 2.2 MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION A. All materials shall be suitable for the intended application; materials not specified shall be high-grade, standard commercial quality, free from all defects and imperfection that might affect the serviceability of the product for the purpose for which it is intended, and shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Cast iron pump casings and bowls shall be of austenitic ductile iron, conforming to ASTM A 439 - Specification for Austenitic Ductile Iron Castings, or equal. 2. Bronze pump impellers shall conform to ASTM B 62 - Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings, or B 584 - Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications, where dezincification does not exist. 3. Stainless steel pump shafts shall be Type 416 or 316. Miscellaneous stainless steel parts shall be of Type 316. 4. All anchor bolts, nuts, and washers that are not buried or submerged shall be hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise specified in individual pump Sections. Buried or submerged bolts, nuts, and washers shall be stainless steel in accordance with Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PUMPS, GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 43 20 10 - 4 2.3 PUMP COMPONENTS A. Flanges: Suction and discharge flanges shall conform to ANSI/ASME B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250, and 800 or B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Dimensions. B. Lubrication: Vertical pump shafts of clean water pumps shall be product water-lubricated, unless otherwise specified. Deep-well pumps and pumps with dry barrels shall have water- or oil-lubricated bearings and seals and enclosed lineshafts. Pumps for other process fluids shall be lubricated as indicated. C. Handholes: Handholes on pump casings shall be shaped to follow the contours of the casing to avoid any obstructions in the water passage. D. Vortex Suppressors: Vertical pumps with marginal submergence shall be provided with vortex suppressors. E. Drains: All gland seals, air valves, cooling water drains, and drains from variable frequency drive equipment shall be piped to the nearest floor sink, or drain, with galvanized steel pipe or copper tube, properly supported with brackets. F. Grease Lubrication: For all vertical propeller, mixed-flow, and turbine pumps, other than deep well pumps, of bowl sizes 10-inches and larger, the Contractor shall provide a stainless steel tube attached to the column for grease lubrication of the bottom bearing. G. Stuffing Boxes: Where stuffing boxes are indicated for the pump seal, they shall be of the best quality, using the Manufacturer's suggested materials best suited for the specific application. For drainage and liquids containing sediments, the seals shall be fresh-water flushed, using lantern rings. 1. Unless otherwise specified, the packing material shall be interlaced Teflon braiding, containing 50 percent ultrafine graphite impregnation to satisfy the following: a. Shaft speeds - up to 2500 rpm b. Temperature - up to 500 degrees F c. pH range - 0 to 14. 2. If fresh water is not available, the seal shall be flushed with product water cleaned by a solids separator as manufactured by John Crane Co., Lakos (Claude Laval Corp.), or equal. H. Mechanical Seals: Mechanical seals shall be fresh water-flushed unless indicated otherwise; in which case product water cleaned by a solids separator as above shall be used. Mechanical seals shall be as manufactured by the following, or equal: Type Manufacturer Wastewater Pumps Double seals: John Crane Type L Double; Borg-Warner Type L Double; Chesterton Abrasives, Grit, or Lime Slurry Pumps Double seals: John Crane Type I (hard faces); Borg-Warner Type L (hard faces); BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PUMPS, GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 43 20 10 - 5 Chesterton Chemicals or Corrosive Liquid Pumps Single seals: John Crane Type 8-1, 9; Borg-Warner Type Q, QB; Chesterton Water Pumps Hot and Cold Single seals: John Crane, Type I, 21; Borg-Warner Type L; Chesterton I. Where indicated, a buffer fluid must be circulated a minimum 20 psi above discharge pressure, or as required by the Manufacturer, in order to maintain reliable seal performance. J. Mechanical seals for all services other than chemicals and corrosives shall be equipped with nonclogging, single coil springs and nonsliding, internal, secondary elastomers. Metal parts shall be Type 316 stainless steel, Alloy 20, or Hastelloy B or C. 2.4 PUMP APPURTENANCES A. Nameplates: Each pump shall be equipped with a stainless steel nameplate indicating serial numbers, rated head and flow, impeller size, pump speed, and Manufacturer's name and model number. Dimension and flow information shall be in metric units, followed by English units in parentheses. B. Solenoid Valves: The pump Manufacturer shall provide solenoid valves on the water or oil lubrication lines and on all cooling water lines. Solenoid valve electrical ratings shall be compatible with the motor control voltage. C. Gauges: all pumps (except sample pumps, sump pumps, and hot water circulating pumps) shall be equipped with pressure gauges installed at pump discharge lines. Pump suction lines shall be provided with compound gauges. Gauges shall be located in a represe ntative location, where not subject to shock or vibrations, in order to achieve true and accurate readings. 1. Where subject to shock or vibrations, the gauges shall be wall-mounted or attached to galvanized channel floor stands and connected by means of flexible connectors. 2. Pressure and compound gauges shall be provided in accordance with Section 17205 – Pressure Gauges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER A. Inspection, Startup, and Field Adjustment: Where required by the individual pump Sections, an authorized service representative of the Manufacturer shall visit the site for the number of days indicated in those Sections to witness the following and to certify in writing that the equipment and controls have been properly installed, aligned, lubricated, adjusted, and readied for operation. 1. Installation of the equipment. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PUMPS, GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 43 20 10 - 6 2. Inspection, checking, and adjusting the equipment. 3. Startup and field testing for proper operation. 4. Performing field adjustments to ensure that the equipment installation and operation comply with the specified requirements. B. Instruction of the Owner’s Personnel 1. Where required by the individual pump Sections, an authorized training representative of the Manufacturer shall visit the site for the number of days indicated in those Sections to instruct the Owner’s personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment, including step-by-step troubleshooting with necessary test equipment. Instruction shall be specific to the models of equipment provided. 2. The representative shall have at least two years’ experience in training. A resume for the representative shall be submitted. 3. Training shall be scheduled a minimum of three weeks in advance of the first session. 4. Proposed training material and a detailed outline of each lesson shall be submitted for review. Comments shall be incorporated into the material. 5. The training materials shall remain with the trainees. 6. The Owner may videotape the training for later use with the Owner personnel. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Pumping equipment shall be installed in accordance with the Manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Alignment: All equipment shall be field tested to verify proper alignment, operation as specified, and freedom from binding, scraping, vibration, shaft runout, or other defects. Pump drive shafts shall be measured just prior to assembly to ensure correct alignment without forcing. Equipment shall be secure in position and neat in appearance. C. Lubricants: The Contractor shall provide the necessary oil and grease for initial operation. 3.3 PROTECTIVE COATING A. Materials and equipment shall be coated as required in Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating. 3.4 FIELD TESTS A. Where required by the individual pump Sections, each pump system shall be field tested after installation to demonstrate satisfactory operation without excessive noise, vibration, cavitation, or overheating of bearings. B. The following field testing shall be conducted: 1. Startup, check, and operate the pump system over its entire speed range. Vibration shall be within the amplitude limits recommended by the Hydraulic Institute Standards at a minimum of four pumping conditions defined by the Engineer. 2. Obtain concurrent readings of motor voltage, amperage, pump suction head, and pump discharge head for at least four pumping conditions at each pump rotational speed. Check each power lead to the motor for proper current balance. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PUMPS, GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 43 20 10 - 7 3. Determine bearing temperatures by contact type thermometer. A run time of at least 20 minutes shall precede this test, unless insufficient liquid volume is available. 4. Electrical and instrumentation tests shall conform to the requirements of the Sections under which that equipment is indicated. C. Field testing will be witnessed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall furnish 5 days advance notice of field testing. D. In the event any pumping system fails to meet the test requirements, it shall be modified and retested as above until it satisfies the requirements. E. After each pumping system has satisfied the requirements, the Contractor shall certify in writing that it has been satisfactorily tested and that all final adjustments have been made. Certification shall include the date of the field tests, a listing of all persons present during the tests, and the test data. F. The Contractor shall bear all costs of field tests, including related services of the Manufacturer's representative, except for power and water which the Owner will bear. If available, the Owner’s operating personnel will provide assistance in field testing. END OF SECTION BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT PUMPS, GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 43 20 10 - 8 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK DIVISION 46 WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CHEMICAL FEEDING EQUIPMENT, GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 46 33 00 - 1 SECTION 46 33 00 CHEMICAL FEEDING EQUIPMENT, GENERAL PART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall provide chemical feeding equipment, including tote scales, calibration columns, sight glass, and other appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Equipment shall be from manufacturers with several years of experience in the manufacture and assembly of similar products, with a record of successful installations. Such manufacturers shall maintain a well-established, authorized, local service agency with sufficient spare parts and personnel to respond within forty-eight (48) hours to any service calls. C. The requirements of Section 11 00 00 - Equipment General Provisions apply to the Work of this Section. D. Unless indicated otherwise, the requirements of this Section apply to all chemical feeding equipment in the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 20 - Contractor Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Complete fabrication, assembly, foundation, and installation drawings, together with detailed specifications and data covering materials used, power drive assemblies, parts, devices, pumps, tanks, mixers, supports, panels, and other accessories forming a part of the equipment, plus schematics, diagrams, and panel layouts. C. Certification: The Contractor shall obtain written certification from each manufacturer, addressed to the Owner, stating that the equipment will efficiently and thoroughly perform the required functions in accordance with these Specifications and the Drawings, and that the materials are best suited for the chemicals handled. D. Technical Manuals: Furnish complete operations and maintenance manuals prior to start-up. E. Spare Parts List: The Contractor shall obtain from the manufacturer a list of suggested spare parts for each piece of equipment subject to wear, such as seals, packing, gaskets, nuts, bolts, washers, wear rings, etc. F. Maintenance: Printed instructions relating to proper maintenance, including lubrication, and parts lists indicating the various parts by name, number, and diagram where necessary, shall be furnished in duplicate with each unit or set of identical units. G. Field Procedures: Instructions for field procedures for erection, adjustments, inspection, and testing shall be furnished prior to installation of the equipment. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CHEMICAL FEEDING EQUIPMENT, GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 46 33 00 - 2 H. Calibration Graphs: The manufacturer's representative shall prepare a calibration graph from field tests for each chemical feed unit which does not have a rate set device. Graphs shall read in pounds per hour for dry feeders or in gallons per hour for liquid feeders. The graph shall show the rate setter graduation conversion to pounds per hour or gallons per hour throughout the range of the feed unit. Each graph shall be furnished on hard paper and be sealed in clear plastic. MANUFACTURER'S SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE A. Erection and Startup Assistance: Service and instruction assistance by the manufacturer's engineering representative for each equipment unit shall be furnished by the CONTRACTOR during the following period: B. One day during erection, unless indicated otherwise in the feed equipment section. C. One day during startup, unless indicated otherwise in the feed equipment section. D. Instruction of Owner's Personnel: The Contractor shall furnish the services of a factory service representative to instruct the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment. This service shall consist of a minimum one day's visit to the plant for each type of similar equipment. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Warranty: After completion, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner the manufacturer's written guarantees that the equipment will operate with the published efficiencies, heads, criteria, and flow ranges and meet these specifications. The Contractor shall also furnish the manufacturer's warranties as published in its literature. PART 2 - PRODUCTS GENERAL A. Wherever it is required that a single manufacturer shall be responsible for the compatible and successful operation of the various components of any equipment unit, it shall be understood to mean that the Contractor shall provide only such equipment as the designated manufacturer will certify is suitable for use with its equipment and with the further understanding that this in no way constitutes a waiver of any indicated requirements. B. Manufactured items provided under this Section shall be new, of current manufacture, and shall be the products of reputable manufacturers specializing in the manufacture of such products. C. Where two (2) or more units of the same type or size of equipment are required, such units shall be produced by the same manufacturer. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CHEMICAL FEEDING EQUIPMENT, GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 46 33 00 - 3 MATERIALS A. Materials employed in the equipment shall be suitable for the intended application; materials not specifically called for shall be high-grade, standard commercial quality, free from defects and imperfections that might affect the serviceability of the product for the purpose for which it is intended. B. The following table lists the most commonly used chemicals for water and wastewater treatment and some of the suitable materials for the construction of chemical feeding equipment. Unless the manufacturer proposes more suitable materials, the table shall be adhered to: Chemical Suitable Handling Material Polymers (Ionic) (Cationic ) (Nonionic ) (100% solution) Type 316 stainless steel PVC FRP (suitable grade, verify compatibility with manufacturer) Teflon Polypropylene Citric Acid (50% Solution) Hastelloy C PVDF FRP (suitable grade, verify compatibility with manufacturer) Viton Teflon Vinyl Saran Polypropylene Sodium Hypochlorite (NaOCl) (0.8 to 15 % solution) Hastelloy C Titanium PVC FRP (suitable grade, verify compatibility with manufacturer) Viton Penton Hypalon Vinyl Saran Polyethylene Tyril Glass APPURTENANCES A. Nameplate: Each piece of equipment shall be provided with a nameplate (of material compatible with chemical), indicating equipment characteristics, capacity, motor horsepower, speed, electrical characteristics, manufacturer, model number, serial number, etc. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CHEMICAL FEEDING EQUIPMENT, GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 46 33 00 - 4 B. Solenoid Valves: The equipment manufacturer shall provide solenoid valves, which are part of the chemical feeding unit. The solenoid valve electrical rating shall be compatible with the equipment voltage and valves shall be complete with the necessary conduit and wiring from the control panel to the solenoids. The valve material shall be suitable for the intended service in accordance with the Section 40 05 50 – Miscellaneous Valves. C. Pressure Gauges: Where indicated on Contract Drawings, chemical transfer and metering pumps and other equipment shall be equipped with pressure gauges with diaphragm seals in accordance with Section 40 73 13 – Pressure Gauges, except that the size of gauges on small metering pumps may be smaller than indicated in that section. D. Calibration Columns: Provide Calibration Columns as indicated on the Contract Drawings. Each Calibration Column shall be an acrylic tube with PVC heads. The columns shall be calibrated for 30 second sampling periods and shall have the capacity as indicated in the table below, and shall have a maximum height of 30 inches. Each column shall be securely supported at both top and bottom. E. Sight Flow Sight Glass: Provide sight flow sight glass as indicated on the Contract Drawings. Each sight flow indicator shall be constructed of a PVC body with 150 # rated flanges. The indicator shall be a flutter type. The flow sight glass shall be manufactured by Jacoby Tarbox style 910-FA-FLTR or Engineer approved equal. F. Reverse Float Type Sight Gauge: Where indicated on Contract Drawings, chemical storage tanks shall be equipped with a 2-inch PVC float type reverse level sight gauge. The sight gauge shall be manufactured by Poly Processing Co. or equal (stock # 4089 for vertical tanks under 7-feet and stock # 3356 for vertical tanks over 7-feet). An internal Promo type tank pipe support as provided by Poly Processing Co. or equal shall be provided to support the interior tank pipe for all float type sight gauge applications. Calibration tape (stock # 6770) shall also be provided with each unit. The Contractor is responsible to calibrate the tanks and apply the Calibration tape in increments of gallons and over and in increments of 500 gallons for tanks less than 10,000 gallons. Calibration of tanks must be approved by the Engineer. G. Chemical Tank Discharge Connection Expansion Joints: Provide a custom flexible connection for each chemical tank discharge connection as shown on the contract drawings. The flexible connection shall be manufactured by Harrington Plastics or equal. The flex ible connection shall consist of all nonmetallic materials: polypropylene braided overwrap, convoluted PTFE liner, and PVDF flanges. The flexible connection shall be a minimum length of 6 -inches and shall allow for minimum horizontal and vertical deflection of 1-inch. H. Equipment Supports: Chemical feeding equipment and piping shall be firmly supported on concrete equipment pads and anchored down. Supports shall be as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with Sections 40 00 01. I. Variable Speed Drives: Variable speed drives, drive motors, speed control equipment, and accessories shall be furnished in accordance with Section 26 29 23 - Variable Frequency Drives. J. Controls: Controls shall be housed in enclosures with NEMA ratings, which comply with the area designations of Section 26 00 00 – Electrical Work, General. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CHEMICAL FEEDING EQUIPMENT, GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 46 33 00 - 5 K. Safety Equipment: Where required by Code, chemical unloading, storage, and feeding equipment shall be provided with the necessary safety devices and warning signs, clearly visible. Signage shall be as specified in Section 10 14 00 – Signage. TOTE SCALES (WE-01-08-62-01 AND WE-01-08-62-02)ADD 1 A. Provide and install two units, complete with one single channel indicator. Each scale shall be of the single load cell design. Weight shall be transferred via a pivoted platform to a single load cell of the shear beam strain gauge type. Flexible cable shall connect load cell to indicator to allow easy remote installation of the readout. Cable length shall be 20 inches. B. The tote scales shall meet the following minimum requirements: Parameter Units Value Maximum Weight Capacity LBS 10,000 Tote Size Platform Size 42-inch x 48-inch 50-inch x 50-inch Minimum Accuracy % 0.25 Platform Height inch 3 C. Each tote scale shall have an electrical connection for 120 VAC supply power and shall transmit a 4-20 mA output signal. D. The indicator shall be housed in a NEMA 4X, UL approved enclosure. Each indicator shall display net remaining, daily usage, total amount used, rate of feed, days until empty, tare weight and gross weight. A data log function shall store the daily usage for each of the previous thirty-one (31) days. Operator shall be able to monitor chemical inventory by weight or in gallons by entering the specific gravity of the chemical. 1. Digital display shall have a 2-line, 16-character per line, alpha-numeric LCD display with back lighting. Indicator shall be equipped with a 10-key numeric pad with tactile and audible feedback. All functions shall be menu prompted for ease of operation. 2. All zero and tare functions shall be set locally through the indicator. E. Coatings: Chemical platform scales shall use a 2-component, 100% solids thermoplastic Polyurea hybrid coating system. Coating shall have a minimum dry thickness (DFT) of 80 mils. Coating shall have superior resistance to splash from acid and alkaline chemicals, resistance to chemical fumes and severe weathering or moisture. Coating shall exhibit maximum resistance to impact, abrasion and physical damage from loading chemical vessels. Material shall be a minimum density of 70 PCF as measured using ASTM test method D-1622, Taber abrasion resistance shall be a minimum of 0.10% per 1000 cycles per ASTM D-4060 and Shore hardness 45D per ASTM D-2240. F. Scales shall carry a full five (5) Year Factory Warranty. “Limited” warranties shall be considered unacceptable. G. Manufacturers: 1. Force Flow, Model 50-DR100TB with Wizard 4000 electronic indicator. BC&A TIMBER LAKES WATER SPECIAL SERVICE DISTRICT CHEMICAL FEEDING EQUIPMENT, GENERAL WATER SYSTEM CAPITAL PROJECT PAGE 46 33 00 - 6 2. Or, Engineer Approved Equal. TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS A. Tools: Special tools necessary for maintenance and repair of the equipment and one pressure grease gun for each type of grease required for the equipment shall be furnished as a part of the WORK; such tools shall be suitably stored in metal tool boxes, and identified with the equipment number by means of stainless steel or solid plastic name tags attached to the box. B. Spare Parts: Furnish spare seals, packing, gaskets, wear rings, and bearings as required by the feed equipment sections. PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION A. General: Chemical feeding equipment shall be installed in accordance with governing safety standards, the Shop Drawings, and as indicated. B. Alignment: Equipment shall be field tested to verify proper alignment, operation as indicated, and freedom from binding, scraping, vibration, shaft runout, leaks, or other defects. Drive shafts shall be measured just prior to assembly to ensure correct alignment without forcing. Equipment shall be secure in position and neat in appearance. C. Lubricants: The Work shall include furnishing the necessary oil and grease for initial lubrication and testing of all equipment. END OF SECTION APPENDIX A GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION PROPOSED WATER SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS, TIMBER LAKES, PREPARED BY AGEC APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL DECEMBER 22, 2023 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION PROPOSED WATER SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS TIMBER LAKES WASATCH COUNTY, UTAH PREPARED FOR: BOWEN COLLINS AND ASSOCIATES 154 EAST 14000 SOUTH DRAPER, UTAH 84020 ATTENTION: WYATT ANDERSEN PROJECT NO. 1230292 DECEMBER 22, 2023 AGC.,C Applied GeoTech 600 West Sandy Parkway • Sandy, Utah 84070 • (801) 566-6399 • www.agecinc.com TABLE OF CONTENTS EXECUTIVE SUMMARY.........................................Page 1 SCOPE....................................................Page 3 SITE CONDITIONS............................................Page 3 FIELD STUDY................................................Page 5 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS......................................Page 5 SUBSURFACE WATER.........................................Page 8 PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION.....................................Page 8 LANDSLIDE HAZARD..........................................Page 9 RECOMMENDATIONS..........................................Page 9 A.Site Grading.......................................Page 9 B.Foundations......................................Page 14 C.Concrete Slab-on-Grade..............................Page 15 D.Pipe Support......................................Page 16 E.Lateral Earth Pressures...............................Page 16 F.Seismicity, Faulting and Liquefaction.....................Page 18 G.Water Soluble Sulfates...............................Page 19 H.Corrosion........................................Page 19 I.Thrust Blocks.....................................Page 20 J.Subsurface Drains..................................Page 20 K.Preconstruction Meeting..............................Page 21 LIMITATIONS...............................................Page 22 REFERENCES...............................................Page 23 FIGURES SITE LOCATIONS FIGURE 1 TEST PIT TP-1 LOCATION FIGURE 2 TEST PIT TP-2 LOCATION FIGURE 3 TEST PITS TP-3 and TP-4 LOCATIONS FIGURE 4 TEST PIT LOGS FIGURES 5–7 TEST PIT LEGEND AND NOTES FIGURE 8 CONSOLIDATION TEST RESULTS FIGURE 9 GRADATION TEST RESULTS FIGURE 10 SUMMARY OF LABORATORY TEST RESULTS TABLE I Page 1 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY 1.Subsurface soils encountered in Test Pit TP-1 consist of approximately 1½ feet of topsoil overlying gravel that extends to the full depth of the test pit, approximately 12 feet. Subsurface conditions encountered in Test Pit TP-2 consist of approximately 7 feet of fill overlying 1 foot of topsoil over clayey sand with gravel and lean clay to the full depth of the test pit, approximately 11 feet. Subsurface soils encountered in Test Pits TP-3 and TP-4 consist of approximately 1½ to 2 feet of topsoil overlying clay in Test Pit TP-3 and gravel in Test Pit TP-4. The clay extends the full depth of Test Pit TP-3, approximately 15 feet but had a layer of cobbles at about 8½ feet. The gravel extends to the full depth of Test Pit TP-4, approximately 15 feet, except for a layer of clay between depths of about 4 and 8 feet. 2.Subsurface water was measured at depths of approximately 1.3 and 4.3 feet below the ground surface in Test Pits TP-3 and TP-4, respectively, based on measurements taken on December 12, 2023. No water was encountered in Test Pits TP-1 and TP-2 at the time of excavating. 3.The proposed chlorination buildings may be supported on spread footings bearing on the undisturbed natural soil or on compacted structural fill extending down to the undisturbed natural soil. Spread footings bearing on the undisturbed natural soil or on compacted structural fill may be designed using an allowable net bearing pressure of 1,500 pounds per square foot (psf). Spread footings bearing on at least 2 feet of the undisturbed natural gravel or at least 2 feet of compacted structural fill may be designed using an allowable net bearing pressure of 2,500 psf. 4.Some of the existing fill and natural soil consist of clay and will be easily disturbed by construction equipment when the upper soil is very moist to wet. Placement of approximately 1 to 2 feet of granular borrow consisting predominantly of gravel with less than 15 percent passing the No. 200 sieve may be needed to provide limited access for rubber-tired construction equipment where the subgrade is very moist to wet soil with high clay content. 5.We understand that trenchless construction methods are planned for installing the water line through the area of TP-3 and TP-4. Cobbles up to approximately 10 inches in size were encountered in the test pits. The potential for clay, gravel and cobbles should be considered in selecting the installation method. APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1230292 Page 2 Executive Summary ( continued ) 6.The need for dewatering and shoring of launch and receiving pits should be anticipated as well as additional dewatering needed for trenchless installation depending on the methods used. 7.There is a recognized landslide hazard for many areas within Timber Lakes. Test Pit TP-2 is within an area mapped as a landslide. The proposed construction includes improvements to the water systems in areas of existing facilities. An evaluation of the landslide hazard for the existing facilities and proposed improvements is beyond the scope of this report. 8.Geotechnical information related to foundations, subgrade preparation and materials is included in the report. APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1230292 Page 3 SCOPE This report presents the results of a geotechnical investigation for the proposed water system improvements at Timber Lakes in Wasatch County, Utah. The approximate locations included in the study are shown on Figure 1. The report presents the subsurface conditions encountered, laboratory test results and recommendations for foundations and the water line. The study was conducted in general accordance with our proposal dated October 13, 2023. Field exploration was conducted to obtain information on the subsurface conditions. Samples obtained from the field investigation were tested in the laboratory to determine physical and engineering characteristics of the on-site soil. Information obtained from the field and laboratory was used to define conditions at the site for our engineering analysis and to develop recommendations for the proposed foundations and pipeline. This report has been prepared to summarize the data obtained during the study and to present our conclusions and recommendations based on the proposed construction and the subsurface conditions encountered. Design parameters and a discussion of geotechnical engineering considerations related to construction are included in the report. SITE CONDITIONS This study includes three general areas as shown on Figure 1. The areas of Test Pits TP-1 and TP-2 are sites of existing water tanks where new chlorination buildings are planned. The area of Test Pits TP-3 and TP-4 is planned for a new water line to replace an existing one. A brief description of these areas follows. Area of Test Pit TP-1 - The site of the proposed chlorination building is south of a steel water tank. The area generally slopes down to the northeast but has been APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1230292 Page 4 graded for the water tank and related structures. It appears that the southwestern portion of the site was cut and the northeastern portion filled. There is a below grade vault structure to the south of the water tank with an entrance door through a retaining wall with wing walls. Test Pit TP-1 was excavated into a cut slope to the west of the retaining wall, which we understand is approximately the site of the proposed chlorination building. The cut slope at this location slopes moderately down to the north. Vegetation consists of grass and weeds. The surrounding areas include a continuation of the slope up to the south and a relatively flat area and water tank to the north. Areas to the east and west are similar to the proposed building site. Area of Test Pit TP-2 - This area is situated within a drainage sloping down to the northwest. The sides of the drainage slope up to the northeast and southwest. There is a water tank at the site that appears to have been cut into the east side of the drainage. The tank has soil mounded around and over it. There is an entrance to a below-grade vault to the west of the tank with a doorway through a retaining wall with wing walls. Test Pit TP-2 was excavated near the location of the proposed chlorination building and extends into the fill slope southwest of the tank where the fill slope extends up to the northeast toward the tank. The site is vegetated with grass and weeds. The surrounding area includes a fill slope that slopes up to the northeast. The areas to the northwest and southeast are similar to the site. There is an unpaved access road to the southwest. APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1230292 Page 5 Area of Test Pits TP-3 and TP-4 - The test pits were excavated in areas west of an existing water line. The area is relatively flat and has water at or near the ground surface. Vegetation consists of brush and grass with areas of trees. There are houses to the north and east, undeveloped areas to the south and an access road and water tank to the west. FIELD STUDY The field study was conducted on November 1 and 6, 2023. Four test pits were excavated at the approximate locations indicated on Figures 2, 3 and 4. Test Pit TP-1 was excavated using a trackhoe. The other test pits were excavated using a rubber-tired backhoe. The test pits were logged and soil samples obtained by representatives of AGEC. Logs of the subsurface conditions encountered in the test pits are presented on Figures 5, 6 and 7 with legend and notes on Figure 8. The test pits were backfilled without significant compaction. The test pit backfill should be removed and replaced with properly compacted fill where it will support proposed improvements. SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS Subsurface soils encountered in Test Pit TP-1 consist of approximately 1½ feet of topsoil overlying gravel that extends to the full depth of the test pit, approximately 12 feet. Subsurface conditions encountered in Test Pit TP-2 consist of approximately 7 feet of fill APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1230292 Page 6 overlying 1 foot of topsoil over clayey sand with gravel and lean clay to the full depth of the test pit, approximately 11 feet. Subsurface soils encountered in Test Pits TP-3 and TP-4 consist of approximately 1½ to 2 feet of topsoil overlying clay in Test Pit TP-3 and gravel in Test Pit TP-4. The clay extends to the full depth of Test Pit TP-3, approximately 15 feet but had a layer of cobbles at about 8½ feet. The gravel extends to the full depth of Test Pit TP-4, approximately 15 feet, except for a layer of clay between depths of about 4 and 8 feet. A description of the soils encountered in the test pits follows: Fill - The fill consists of lean clay with sand. It contains clayey gravel zones. The fill is moist, dark brown and contains roots and occasional cobbles up to about ½ foot in size. Topsoil - The topsoil consists of lean clay with sand. Cobbles were encountered in Test Pit TP-1. The topsoil is moist to wet, dark brown and contains roots and organics. Fat Clay with Sand - The clay is medium stiff, wet, brown to light brown and mottled. Laboratory tests conducted on a sample of the clay indicate it has a natural moisture content of 39 percent. Lean Clay - The clay contains clayey sand layers. Small to moderate amounts of gravel were encountered in Test Pit TP-3. Cobbles up to approximately 8 inches in size were encountered in Test Pit TP-3 at a depth of about 8½ feet. The clay is medium stiff, moist to wet and grayish brown. APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1230292 Page 7 Laboratory tests conducted on samples of the clay indicate it has natural moisture contents of 23 to 35 percent and natural dry densities of 85 to 102 pcf. Samples of the clay tested in the laboratory were found to have unconfined compressive strengths of 815 to 835 pounds per square foot (psf). A consolidation test conducted on a sample of clayey sand within the clay deposit indicates that the soil will compress a small to moderate amount with the addition of light to moderate loads. Results of the consolidation test are presented on Figure 9. Clayey Sand with Gravel - The sand contains small to moderate amounts of clay. It is medium dense, moist and gray. The results of a gradation test conducted on a sample of the sand are presented on Figure 10. Clayey Gravel with Sand - The gravel contains cobbles up to approximately 10 inches in size. It is medium dense, moist to wet and brown. The results of a gradation test on a sand layer within the gravel are presented on Figure 10 Poorly Graded Gravel with Clay and Sand - The gravel is medium dense, moist and brown. Results of the laboratory tests are summarized on Table I and are included on the test pit logs. APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1230292 Page 8 SUBSURFACE WATER Subsurface water was measured at a depth of approximately 1.3 and 4.3 feet below the ground surface in Test Pits TP-3 and TP-4, respectively, based on measurements taken on December 12, 2023. No water was encountered in Test Pits TP-1 and TP-2 at the time of excavating. Slotted PVC pipe was installed in Test Pits TP-3 and TP-4 to facilitate future measurement of the water level. Fluctuations in the water level can be expected over time. An evaluation of the fluctuations in the water level is beyond the scope of this report. PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION We understand that a new 12-inch-diameter HDPE water pipe will be constructed in the area of Test Pits TP-3 and TP-4 (see Figure 4). It is anticipated that the pipe will be installed in this area using trenchless methods and will be on the order of 5 feet below the ground surface. Chlorination buildings are planned for the areas of Test Pits TP-1 and TP-2 (see Figures 2 and 3). We have assumed that the buildings will consist of single-story, masonry structures with a slab-on-grade floors. We have assumed building loads consisting of wall loads up to 3 kips per lineal foot. If the proposed construction or building loads are significantly different from those described above, we should be notified so that we can reevaluate the recommendations given. APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1230292 Page 9 LANDSLIDE HAZARD There is a recognized landslide hazard for many areas within Timber Lakes. Test Pit TP-2 is within an area mapped as a landslide. The proposed construction includes improvements to the water systems in areas of existing facilities. An evaluation of the landslide hazard for the existing facilities and proposed improvements is beyond the scope of this report. RECOMMENDATIONS Based on the subsoil conditions encountered, laboratory test results and the proposed construction, the following recommendations are given: A.Site Grading We anticipate that there will be small to moderate amounts of cut for site grading at the chlorination building sites as the building sites are assumed to extend into cut or fill slope areas and there may be the need to excavate and replace unsuitable fill below the building site at Test Pit TP-2. Elevations of the test pits shown on the logs represent the uphill end of the test pits, which were cut into the existing slopes. We have assumed that the buildings may have floors that are on the order of 5 to 10 feet below the ground surface (upper end of the test pit) at Test Pits TP-1 and TP-2. 1.Subgrade Preparation Approximately 7 feet of fill over 1 foot of topsoil was encountered in Test Pit TP-2. Unsuitable fill, topsoil and other deleterious materials should be removed from below the proposed building areas and areas of other improvements sensitive to differential settlement. APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1230292 Page 10 Some of the existing fill and natural soil consist of clay and will be easily disturbed by construction equipment when the upper soil is very moist to wet. Placement of approximately 1 to 2 feet of granular borrow consisting predominantly of gravel with less than 15 percent passing the No. 200 sieve may be needed to provide limited access for rubber-tired construction equipment where the subgrade is very moist to wet soil with high clay content. Consideration may be given to placing a support fabric over the subgrade prior to placing granular borrow. 2.Excavation Excavation at the site can be accomplished with typical excavation equipment. Excavations that extend below the water table should be dewatered during fill and concrete placement. Fill placed below the original water level should consist of free-draining gravel with less than 5 percent passing the No. 200 sieve. Based on the water levels encountered in Test Pits TP-3 and TP-4 and the anticipated depth of the proposed pipe, we anticipate that open-cut excavations in this area will extend below the groundwater level. Excavations extending below the water level should be dewatered. The water level should be maintained below the excavation during backfill placement. 3.Trenchless Construction We understand that trenchless construction methods are planned for installing the water line through the area of TP-3 and TP-4. Cobbles up to approximately 10 inches in size were encountered in the test pits. The potential for clay, gravel and cobbles should be considered in selecting the installation method. APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1230292 Page 11 The need for dewatering and shoring of launch and receiving pits should be anticipated as well as additional dewatering needed for trenchless installation depending on the methods used. 4.Unretained Excavation Slopes Temporary unretained excavation slopes in the existing fill and granular soil may be constructed at 1½ horizontal to 1 vertical or flatter. Temporary unretained excavation slopes in the natural clay may be constructed at 1 horizontal to 1 vertical or flatter. The excavation slopes indicated above assume that the excavations will be properly dewatered. If water is allowed to flow into the excavations, slopes will need to be significantly flatter. It is the responsibility of the contractor to provide appropriate slopes for safe working conditions and stability of adjacent areas. Additional evaluation of excavation slopes by a qualified engineer may be required during the construction process. 5.Shoring Care should be taken to maintain the stability of excavations during construction. Proper side slopes or shoring should be provided for safety of workers and to support adjacent facilities. Shoring and trench boxes should be designed to restrain the soil mass along with the surcharge from construction equipment and other loads. Active lateral loads may be calculated using an equivalent fluid weight of 50 and 40 pcf above the water table and 25 and 20 pcf plus the hydrostatic pressure below the water table for cohesive and granular soils, respectively. The lateral load calculation should include the effect of seepage forces, sloping backfill, surcharge and other loading conditions which are not included in the values given above. An appropriate factor of safety should be used in design for the shoring system and trench boxes. APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1230292 Page 12 6.Compaction Compaction of materials placed at the site should equal or exceed the minimum densities as indicated below when compared to the maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D 1557. Fill To Support Compaction Foundations $ 95% Concrete Flatwork $ 90% Pavement Base Course Fill Placed Below Base Course $ 95% $ 90% Landscaping $ 85% Retaining Wall Backfill 85 - 90% To facilitate the compaction process, the fill should be compacted at a moisture content within 2 percent of the optimum moisture content. Fill and pavement materials placed for the project should be frequently tested for compaction. 7.Materials Material placed as fill to support foundations and floor slabs should be non- expansive granular soil. The existing fill that has a high clay content and the natural clay are not recommended for use as fill below the proposed buildings. The natural gravel may be considered for use as structural fill if it meets the recommendations given below for imported structural fill and if organics, debris, over-sized particles and other deleterious materials are removed. APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1230292 Page 13 The on-site soil may be considered for use as wall backfill, pipe trench backfill or site grading fill outside the proposed building areas if the debris, organics, over-sized particles and other deleterious materials are removed. The moisture content of the soil placed as fill or backfill should be adjusted to within approximately 2 percent of the optimum moisture content to facilitate compaction. Drying of the soil may not be practical during cold or wet times of the year. Listed below are materials recommended for imported structural fill. Fill to Support Recommendations Footings Non-expansive granular soil Passing No. 200 Sieve < 35% Liquid Limit < 30% Maximum size 4 inches Floor Slab (Upper 4 inches) Sand and/or Gravel Passing No. 200 Sieve < 5% Maximum size 2 inches Slab Support Non-expansive granular soil Passing No. 200 Sieve < 50% Liquid Limit < 30% Maximum size 6 inches Fill placed below the original water level should consist of free-draining gravel with less than 5 percent passing the No. 200 sieve. A filter fabric should be provided between the free-draining gravel and natural soil. 8.Drainage The ground surface surrounding the proposed buildings should be sloped away from the buildings in all directions. Roof downspouts and drains should discharge beyond the limits of backfill. APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1230292 Page 14 B.Foundations 1.Bearing Material With the proposed construction and the subsurface conditions encountered, the proposed chlorination buildings may be supported on spread footings bearing on the undisturbed natural soil or on compacted structural fill extending down to the undisturbed natural soil. If structural fill is placed below footings, the structural fill should extend down to the undisturbed natural soil and out away from the edge of the footings a distance at least equal to the depth of fill beneath footings. Topsoil, unsuitable fill, debris and other deleterious materials should be removed from below proposed foundations. 2.Bearing Pressure Spread footings bearing on the undisturbed natural soil or on compacted structural fill may be designed using an allowable net bearing pressure of 1,500 psf. Spread footings bearing on at least 2 feet of the undisturbed natural gravel or at least 2 feet of compacted structural fill may be designed for an allowable net bearing pressure of 2,500 psf. 3.Temporary Loading Conditions The allowable bearing pressure may be increased by one-half for temporary loading conditions such as wind or seismic loads. 4.Settlement Based on the subsurface soil conditions encountered and the assumed building loads, we estimate that total and differential settlement will be less than 1 inch and ¾ inch, respectively, for foundations designed as indicated above. APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1230292 Page 15 Care will be required to not disturb the natural soil at the base of foundation excavations to maintain settlement within tolerable limits. 5.Frost Depth Exterior footings and footings beneath unheated areas should be placed at least 40 inches below grade for frost protection. 6.Foundation Base The base of footing excavations should be cleared of loose or deleterious material prior to structural fill or concrete placement. 7.Construction Observation A representative of the geotechnical engineer should observe footing excavations prior to structural fill or concrete placement. C.Concrete Slab-on-Grade 1.Slab Support Concrete slabs may be supported on the undisturbed natural soil or on compacted structural fill extending down to the undisturbed natural soil. Unsuitable fill, topsoil, organics and other deleterious materials should be removed from below proposed floor slab areas. 2.Underslab Sand and/or Gravel A 4-inch layer of free draining sand and/or gravel (less than 5 percent passing the No. 200 sieve) should be placed below the concrete slabs for ease of construction and to promote even curing of the slab concrete. APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1230292 Page 16 D.Pipe Support The undisturbed natural soil or properly compacted bedding material is suitable to support the proposed pipe. 1.Settlement Settlement of the proposed pipe will be a function of the disturbance of the soil beneath the pipe. Disturbance may result from excavation, dewatering and construction activities. Care should be taken to minimize disturbance of the soils below the proposed pipe so that settlement can be maintained within tolerable limits. For open-cut areas of construction, disturbed material should be removed and replaced with properly compacted bedding material. 2.Pipe Bedding Pipe bedding requirements will depend on the design criteria for the pipe based on the manufacturer’s recommendations. Bedding materials should be placed on undisturbed natural soil. If the bearing soil is disturbed, it should be removed and replaced with compacted bedding material. Pipe bedding should meet the criteria given by the pipe manufacturer. A filter fabric or properly sized fill should be provided between the natural soil and free- draining gravel to prevent particle migration into the gravel. E.Lateral Earth Pressures 1.Lateral Resistance for Footings Lateral resistance for footings is controlled by sliding resistance between the footing and the foundation soils. A friction value of 0.35 may be used in design for ultimate lateral resistance where footing bear on the natural clay or 0.45 where footings bearing on at least 2 feet of the natural gravel or compacted structural fill. APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1230292 Page 17 2.Subgrade Walls and Retaining Structures The following equivalent fluid weights are given for design of subgrade walls and retaining structures. The active condition is where the wall moves away from the soil. The passive condition is where the wall moves into the soil and the at-rest condition is where the wall does not move. Backfill Slope Soil Type Active At-Rest Passive Horizontal Clay and Silt 50 pcf 65 pcf 250 pcf 2H:1V Clay and Silt 100 pcf 145 pcf — Horizontal Sand and Gravel 40 pcf 55 pcf 300 pcf 2H:1V Sand and Gravel 65 pcf 115 pcf — The values given above assume that the soil behind the retaining walls is well- drained. 3.Seismic Conditions Under seismic conditions, the equivalent fluid weight should be increased by 19 pcf and 4 pcf for active and at-rest conditions, respectively, and decreased by 19 pcf for the passive condition. This assumes a peak horizontal ground acceleration of 0.31g. 4.Safety Factors The values recommended above assume mobilization of the soil to achieve the assumed soil strength. Conventional safety factors used for structural analysis for such items as overturning and sliding resistance should be used in design. APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1230292 Page 18 F.Seismicity, Faulting and Liquefaction 1.Seismicity Listed below is a summary of the site parameters that may be used with the 2021 International Building Code. Description Value1 Site Class D s RS - MCE ground motion (period=0.2s)0.49g 1 RS - MCE ground motion (period=1.0s)0.17g aF - Site amplification factor at 0.2s 1.41 vF - Site amplification factor at 1.0s 2.26 GPGA - MCE peak ground acceleration 0.22g MPGA - Site modified peak ground acceleration 0.31g Values obtained from information provided by the Applied Technology Council at1 https://hazards.atcouncil.org Site Class D was selected based on the subsurface conditions encountered at the site to the2 depth investigated and our understanding of geologic conditions. 2.Faulting There are no mapped active faults extending through the site. The closest mapped active fault is the Strawberry fault located approximately 12 miles to the south of the site (Utah Geological Survey, 2023). 3.Liquefaction Based on our understanding of geologic conditions in the area and the subsurface conditions encountered, liquefaction is not considered a significant hazard at the site. APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1230292 Page 19 G.Water Soluble Sulfates Two samples of the natural soil were tested in the laboratory for water soluble sulfate content. The test results indicate there is less than 0.1 percent water soluble sulfate in the samples tested. Based on the results of the test and published literature, the natural soil possesses negligible sulfate attack potential on concrete. The concentration of water soluble sulfates present in the soil at the site indicates that sulfate resistant cement is not needed for concrete placed in contact with the natural soil. Other conditions may dictate the type of cement to be used in concrete for the project. H.Corrosion One sample of sand was tested for the following parameters: Parameter Value Resistivity 6,600 ohm-cm pH 8.5 Redox 398 mV Sulfides negative Samples of the clay and soil with a high clay content were not tested. Clay and clayey soil may be considerably more aggressive toward buried metals than the sand tested. We could conduct additional testing on soil with higher clay content, if requested. APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1230292 Page 20 I.Thrust Blocks Thrust block resistance may be calculated using the passive earth pressure condition with equivalent fluid weights of 300 and 250 pcf for granular and cohesive soils, respectively. This assumes a ratio of horizontal displacement to height of thrust block of 0.01. A lower equivalent fluid weight should be used if less displacement is needed. Equivalent fluid weights of 200 and 150 pcf for granular and cohesive soils, respectively, may be used if negligible horizontal displacement is desired. Thrust blocks should bear on the undisturbed natural soil or on compacted granular fill. A coefficient of friction of 0.35 may be used between the concrete and the soil. The values given above are ultimate values and a suitable factor of safety should be applied. J.Subsurface Drains If the floor level of the buildings extends below the original ground surface, the subgrade floor portion of the buildings should be protected with a perimeter drain system. The perimeter drain system should consist of at least the following items: 1.The underdrain system should consist of a perforated pipe installed in a free- draining gravel filled trench around the perimeter of the below grade floor portion of the building. 2.The flow line of the pipe should be placed at least 18 inches below the finished floor level and should slope to a sump or outlet where water can be removed by pumping or by gravity flow. 3.If placing the gravel and drain pipe requires excavation below the bearing level of the footing, the excavation for the drain pipe and gravel should have a APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1230292 Page 21 slope no steeper than 1 horizontal to 1 vertical away from the edge of the footing to avoid disturbing the soil below the footing. 4.A filter fabric should be placed between the natural soil and the drain gravel. This will help reduce the potential for fine-grained material filling in the void spaces of the gravel. 5.The subgrade floor slab should have at least 6 inches of free-draining gravel placed below it and the underslab gravel should connect to the perimeter drain. 6.Consideration should be given to installing clean-outs to allow access into the perimeter drain, should cleaning of the pipe be required in the future. K.Preconstruction Meeting A preconstruction meeting should be held with representatives of the owner, project civil engineer, geotechnical engineer, general contractor, earthwork contractor and other design team members to view construction plans, specifications, methods and schedule. APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1230292 Page 22 LIMITATIONS This report has been prepared in accordance with generally accepted soil and foundation engineering practices in the area for the use of the client for design purposes. The conclusions and recommendations included within the report are based on the information obtained from the test pits excavated at the approximate locations indicated on Figures 2, 3 and 4 and the data obtained from laboratory testing. Variations in the subsurface conditions may not become evident until additional exploration or excavation is conducted. If the subsurface conditions or groundwater level is found to be significantly different from what is described above, we should be notified to reevaluate the recommendations given. APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC. Jay R. McQuivey, P.E. Reviewed by Douglas R. Hawkes, P.E., P.G. JRM/bw APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1230292 12/22/2023 Page 23 REFERENCES American Society of Civil Engineers, 2017; Minimum design loads and associated criteria for buildings and other structures: ASCE/SEI 7-16, Reston, Virginia. International Code Council, 2020; 2021 International Building Code, Falls Church, Virginia. City, Utah. Utah Geological Survey, 2023; Utah Quaternary Fault and Fold Database, http://geology.utah.gov/apps/hazards/ accessed December 20, 2023. APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.1230292 Site TP-2 Site TP-3 & TP-4Site TP-1 1230292 Site Locations Figure 1 5,0000 10,000 feet Approximate Scale TIMBER LAKES WATER SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS WASATCH COUNTY, UTAH BLUE SP R U C E D R I V E TP-1 BM - Door Level Elev. 100' assumed 1230292 Test Pit TP-1 Location Figure 2 1000 200 feet Approximate Scale TIMBER LAKES WATER SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS WASATCH COUNTY, UTAH TP-2 BM - Door Level Elev. 100' assumed 1230292 Test Pit TP-2 Location Figure 3 1000 200 feet Approximate Scale TIMBER LAKES WATER SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS WASATCH COUNTY, UTAH TP-3 TP-4 1230292 Test Pits TP-3 and TP-4 Locations Figure 4 1000 200 feet Approximate Scale TIMBER LAKES WATER SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS WASATCH COUNTY, UTAH TP-1 Elev. 110' El e v a t i o n / F e e t 100 95 El e v a t i o n / F e e t 100 95 105 110 105 110 +4 = 39 -200 = 20 WSS = 0.005 Assumed Range of Proposed Floor Elevation Approximate Vertical Scale 1" = 8'See Figure 8 for Legend and Notes Test Pit Log Figure 51230292 TP-2 Elev. 109' El e v a t i o n / F e e t 100 95 El e v a t i o n / F e e t 100 95 105 110 105 110 +4 = 19 -200 = 11 WSS = 0.005 R = 6,600 pH = 8.5 Redox = 398 Sulfides = negative WC = 35 DD = 85 -200 = 44 Assumed Range of Proposed Floor Elevation Approximate Vertical Scale 1" = 8'See Figure 8 for Legend and Notes Test Pit Log Figure 61230292 TP-3 TP-4 El e v a t i o n / F e e t 0 5 10 15 El e v a t i o n / F e e t 20 0 5 10 15 20 WC = 23 DD = 102 -200 = 39 UC = 835 WC = 31 DD = 91 -200 = 79 UC = 815 WC = 39 -200 = 76 LL = 50 PI = 29 41 36 Assumed Pipe Depth Approximate Vertical Scale 1" = 8'See Figure 8 for Legend and Notes Test Pit Logs Figure 71230292 Indicates relatively undisturbed hand drive sample taken. LEGEND: Indicates disturbed sample taken. NOTES: 1.The test pits were excavated on November 1 and 6, 2023 with a trackhoe for TP-1 and rubber-tired for the other test pits. 2.Locations of the test pits were measured approximately by pacing from features shown on Figures 2, 3 and 4. 3.Elevations of Test Pits TP-1 and TP-2 were measured by hand level and refer to the benchmarks shown on Figures 2 and 3. 4.The test pit locations and elevations should be considered accurate only to the degree implied by the method used. 5.The lines between materials shown on the logs represent the approximate boundaries between material types and the transitions may be gradual. 6.The water level readings shown on the logs were made at the time and under the conditions indicated. Fluctuations in the water level will occur with time. 7.WC = Water Content (%); DD = Dry Density (pcf); +4 = Percent Retained on the No. 4 Sieve; -200 = Percent Passing the No. 200 Sieve; LL = Liquid Limit (%); PI = Plasticity Index (%); UC = Unconfined Compressive Strength (psf); WSS = Water Soluble Sulfates (%); R = Resistivity (ohm-cm); pH = pH; Redox = Redox Potential (mV); Sulfides = Sulfide Content (negative, trace, positive). Fill; lean clay with sand, clayey gravel zones, moist, dark brown, roots, occasional cobbles up to approximately ½ foot in size. Lean Clay (CL); clayey sand layers, small to moderate amount of gravel in TP-3, cobbles up to approximately 8 inches in size in TP-3 at 8½ feet, medium stiff, moist to wet, grayish brown. Topsoil; lean clay with sand, cobbles in TP-1, moist to wet, dark brown, roots and organics. Clayey Sand with Gravel (SC); small to moderate amount of clay, medium dense, moist, gray. Poorly Graded Gravel with Clay and Sand (GP-GC); medium dense, moist, brown. Clayey Gravel with Sand (GC); cobbles up to approximately 10 inches in size, medium dense, moist to wet, brown. Fat Clay with Sand (CH); medium stiff, wet, brown and light brown, mottled. Indicates slotted 1½-inch PVC pipe installed in the test pit to the depth shown. 41 Indicates the depth to free water and the number of days after excavation the measurement was taken. Figure 8Test Pit Legend and Notes1230292 Applied Geotechnical Engineering Consultants, Inc. APPLIED PRESSURE - ksf 0.1 1.0 10 100 Co m p r e s s i o n - % Moisture Content 35 % Dry Unit Weight 85 pcf Sample of: Clayey Sand From: TP-2 @ 11 feet 0 1 2 3 4 5 Project No. 1230292 No movement upon wetting CONSOLIDATION TEST RESULTS Figure 9 Gravel 39%Liquid Limit - Sand 41%Plasticity Index - Silt and Clay 20%Sample Location Sample Description Gravel 19%Liquid Limit - Sand 70%Plasticity Index - Silt and Clay 11%Sample Location Sample Description GRADATION TEST RESULTS Figure 10 APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC. Project No. 1230292 TP-1 @ 3' TP-2 @ 8.5' Clayey Sand with Gravel Poorly Graded Sand with Clay and Gravel 12"8" 6" 5" 4" 3" 2" 1 1/2" 1" 3/4" 1/2" 3/8" 1/4" No. 4 No. 8 No. 10No. 16 No. 30 No. 40 No. 50 No. 60 No. 80 No. 100No. 2001 Min.4 Min.19 Min.60 Min. 7Hrs. 15 Min.24 Hrs. 304.8203.2 152.4 127.0 100.0 75.0 50.0 38.1 25.0 19.0 12.5 9.5 6.3 4.750 2.360 2.0001.180 0.600 0.425 0.300 0.250 0.180 0.1500.0750.0370.0190.0090.0050.0020.001 0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100% Pe r c e n t P a s s i n g Diameter of Particle in Millimeters Hydrometer Analysis Sieve Analysis Time Readings U.S. Standard Series Clear Square Openings Clay to Silt Sand Fine Medium Coarse Gravel Fine Coarse Cobbles Boulders 12"8" 6" 5" 4" 3" 2" 1 1/2" 1" 3/4" 1/2" 3/8" 1/4" No. 4 No. 8 No. 10No. 16 No. 30 No. 40 No. 50 No. 60 No. 80 No. 100No. 2001 Min.4 Min.19 Min.60 Min. 7Hrs. 15 Min.24 Hrs. 304.8203.2 152.4 127.0 100.0 75.0 50.0 38.1 25.0 19.0 12.5 9.5 6.3 4.750 2.360 2.0001.180 0.600 0.425 0.300 0.250 0.180 0.1500.0750.0370.0190.0090.0050.0020.001 0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100% Pe r c e n t P a s s i n g Diameter of Particle in Millimeters Hydrometer Analysis Time Readings Sieve Analysis U.S. Standard Series Clear Square Openings Clay to Silt Sand Gravel Cobbles BouldersFineCoarseFineMediumCoarse APPLIED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC. TABLE I SUMMARY OF LABORATORY TEST RESULTS PROJECT NUMBER: 1230292 SAMPLE LOCATION NATURAL MOISTURE CONTENT (%) NATURAL DRY DENSITY (PCF) GRADATION ATTERBERG LIMITS UNCONFINED COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH (PSF) RESISTIVITY (OHM-CM) pH REDOX (MV) SULFIDE WATER SOLUBLE SULFATE (%) SAMPLE CLASSIFICATION TEST PIT DEPTH (FEET) GRAVEL (%) SAND (%) SILT/ CLAY (%) LIQUID LIMIT (%) PLASTICITY INDEX TP-1 3 39 41 20 0.005 Clayey Sand with Gravel TP-2 8½ 19 70 11 6,600 8.5 398 negative 0.005 Poorly Graded Sand with Clay and Gravel 11 35 85 44 Clayey Sand TP-3 3 23 102 39 835 Clayey Sand 7 31 91 79 815 Lean Clay with Sand TP-4 6 39 79 50 29 Fat Clay with Sand